diff options
794 files changed, 12578 insertions, 12577 deletions
diff --git a/doc/collect.doc b/doc/collect.doc index 7e73432e8..4021a607e 100644 --- a/doc/collect.doc +++ b/doc/collect.doc @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ them out in reverse order: int main() { TQPtrList<Employee> list; // list of pointers to Employee - list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); // delete items when they are removed + list.setAutoDelete( true ); // delete items when they are removed list.append( new Employee("Bill", 50000) ); list.append( new Employee("Steve",80000) ); diff --git a/doc/debug.doc b/doc/debug.doc index 56eb2150b..cfad047bc 100644 --- a/doc/debug.doc +++ b/doc/debug.doc @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Two important macros are: \list \i \link ::Q_ASSERT() Q_ASSERT(b)\endlink where b is a boolean expression, writes the warning: "ASSERT: 'b' in file file.cpp (234)" -if b is FALSE. +if b is false. \i \link ::TQ_CHECK_PTR() TQ_CHECK_PTR(p)\endlink where p is a pointer. Writes the warning "In file file.cpp, line 234: Out of memory" if p is 0. diff --git a/doc/dnd.doc b/doc/dnd.doc index 8ae297cd3..8c8408028 100644 --- a/doc/dnd.doc +++ b/doc/dnd.doc @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ references. \section1 Dropping To be able to receive media dropped on a widget, call -\link TQWidget::setAcceptDrops() setAcceptDrops(TRUE)\endlink +\link TQWidget::setAcceptDrops() setAcceptDrops(true)\endlink for the widget (e.g. in its constructor), and override the event handler methods \link TQWidget::dragEnterEvent() dragEnterEvent()\endlink and @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ MyWidget::MyWidget(...) : TQWidget(...) { ... - setAcceptDrops(TRUE); + setAcceptDrops(true); } void MyWidget::dragEnterEvent(TQDragEnterEvent* event) diff --git a/doc/html/aclock-example.html b/doc/html/aclock-example.html index 31574d780..8e22acb31 100644 --- a/doc/html/aclock-example.html +++ b/doc/html/aclock-example.html @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> a( argc, argv ); AnalogClock *clock = new AnalogClock; if ( argc == 2 && strcmp( argv[1], "-transparent" ) == 0 ) -<a name="x1213"></a> clock-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1213"></a> clock-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( true ); <a name="x1212"></a> clock-><a href="tqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>( 100, 100 ); a.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( clock ); <a name="x1214"></a> clock-><a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>("TQt Example - Analog Clock"); diff --git a/doc/html/addressbook-example.html b/doc/html/addressbook-example.html index ce4807a53..c2bce2d7c 100644 --- a/doc/html/addressbook-example.html +++ b/doc/html/addressbook-example.html @@ -445,11 +445,11 @@ void <a name="f277"></a>ABCentralWidget::setupTabWidget() grid2-><a href="tqgridlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( find, 1, 4 ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( find, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( findEntries() ) ); -<a name="x574"></a> cFirstName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); -<a name="x605"></a> sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); - sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x574"></a> cFirstName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); +<a name="x605"></a> sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); + sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); tabWidget-><a href="tqtabwidget.html#addTab">addTab</a>( search, "&Search" ); @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ void <a name="f278"></a>ABCentralWidget::setupListView() <a name="x588"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( listView, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqlistview.html#clicked">clicked</a>( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a>* ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( itemSelected( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a>* ) ) ); mainGrid-><a href="tqgridlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( listView, 1, 0 ); -<a name="x591"></a> listView-><a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x591"></a> listView-><a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( true ); } void <a name="f279"></a>ABCentralWidget::addEntry() @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ void <a name="f282"></a>ABCentralWidget::itemSelected( <a href="tqlistviewitem.h { if ( !item ) return; -<a name="x594"></a> item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x594"></a> item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( true ); <a name="x593"></a> item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); <a name="x596"></a> iFirstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>( item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#text">text</a>( 0 ) ); @@ -529,11 +529,11 @@ void <a name="f283"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleFirstName() sFirstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>( "" ); <a name="x573"></a> if ( cFirstName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { - sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); <a name="x606"></a> sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else - sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + sFirstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } void <a name="f284"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleLastName() @@ -541,11 +541,11 @@ void <a name="f284"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleLastName() sLastName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>( "" ); if ( cLastName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { - sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else - sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + sLastName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } void <a name="f285"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleAddress() @@ -553,11 +553,11 @@ void <a name="f285"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleAddress() sAddress-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>( "" ); if ( cAddress-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { - sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else - sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + sAddress-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } void <a name="f286"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleEMail() @@ -565,11 +565,11 @@ void <a name="f286"></a>ABCentralWidget::toggleEMail() sEMail-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>( "" ); if ( cEMail-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { - sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else - sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + sEMail-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } void <a name="f287"></a>ABCentralWidget::findEntries() @@ -585,37 +585,37 @@ void <a name="f287"></a>ABCentralWidget::findEntries() <a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html">TQListViewItemIterator</a> it( listView ); for ( ; it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>(); ++it ) { - bool select = TRUE; + bool select = true; if ( cFirstName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { if ( select && it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->text( 0 ).contains( sFirstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ) - select = TRUE; + select = true; else - select = FALSE; + select = false; } if ( cLastName-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { if ( select && it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->text( 1 ).contains( sLastName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ) - select = TRUE; + select = true; else - select = FALSE; + select = false; } if ( cAddress-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { if ( select && it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->text( 2 ).contains( sAddress-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ) - select = TRUE; + select = true; else - select = FALSE; + select = false; } if ( cEMail-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>() ) { if ( select && it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->text( 3 ).contains( sEMail-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ) - select = TRUE; + select = true; else - select = FALSE; + select = false; } if ( select ) - it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setSelected( TRUE ); + it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setSelected( true ); else - it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setSelected( FALSE ); + it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setSelected( false ); it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->repaint(); } } diff --git a/doc/html/archivesearch-example.html b/doc/html/archivesearch-example.html index e4f792811..04d3a9a97 100644 --- a/doc/html/archivesearch-example.html +++ b/doc/html/archivesearch-example.html @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ void ArchiveDialog::searchDone( bool error ) <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> result(articleSearcher.readAll()); <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> rx("<a href=\"(http://lists\\.trolltech\\.com/qt-interest/.*)\">(.*)</a>"); -<a name="x482"></a> rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x482"></a> rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>(true); int pos = 0; while (pos >= 0) { <a name="x481"></a> pos = rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#search">search</a>(result, pos); diff --git a/doc/html/biff-example.html b/doc/html/biff-example.html index 8ff0a2884..980744eca 100644 --- a/doc/html/biff-example.html +++ b/doc/html/biff-example.html @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ how two images (<em>hasmail_bmp_data</em> and <em>nomail_bmp_data</em>, both fro hasNewMail.loadFromData( hasmail_bmp_data, hasmail_bmp_len ); noNewMail.loadFromData( nomail_bmp_data, nomail_bmp_len ); - gotMail = FALSE; + gotMail = false; <a name="x1956"></a> lastModified = fi.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#lastModified">lastModified</a>(); } @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ how two images (<em>hasmail_bmp_data</em> and <em>nomail_bmp_data</em>, both fro if ( gotMail ) lastModified = fi.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#lastModified">lastModified</a>(); gotMail = newState; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); } } diff --git a/doc/html/bigtable-example.html b/doc/html/bigtable-example.html index bdf714f78..27ffb3a6d 100644 --- a/doc/html/bigtable-example.html +++ b/doc/html/bigtable-example.html @@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ class MyTable : public <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a> { public: MyTable( int r, int c ) : <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>( r, c ) { -<a name="x1291"></a> items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); - widgets.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1291"></a> items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); + widgets.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); setCaption( tr( "A 1 Million x 1 Million Cell Table" ) ); setLeftMargin( fontMetrics().width( "W999999W" ) ); } @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ public: <a name="x1287"></a> void clearCell( int r, int c ) { items.<a href="tqintdict.html#remove">remove</a>( indexOf( r, c ) ); } void takeItem( <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> *item ) { - items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( FALSE ); + items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( false ); <a name="x1294"></a><a name="x1293"></a> items.<a href="tqintdict.html#remove">remove</a>( indexOf( item-><a href="tqtableitem.html#row">row</a>(), item-><a href="tqtableitem.html#col">col</a>() ) ); - items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); + items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); } void insertWidget( int r, int c, TQWidget *w ) { widgets.<a href="tqintdict.html#replace">replace</a>( indexOf( r, c ), w ); } <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *cellWidget( int r, int c ) const { return widgets.<a href="tqintdict.html#find">find</a>( indexOf( r, c ) ); } diff --git a/doc/html/buttongroups-example.html b/doc/html/buttongroups-example.html index 2cda99aba..1f3a2a78e 100644 --- a/doc/html/buttongroups-example.html +++ b/doc/html/buttongroups-example.html @@ -114,11 +114,11 @@ protected slots: // Create an exclusive button group <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a> *bgrp1 = new <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>( 1, TQGroupBox::Horizontal, "Button Group 1 (exclusive)", this); box1-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( bgrp1 ); -<a name="x549"></a> bgrp1-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x549"></a> bgrp1-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( true ); // insert 3 radiobuttons <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a> *rb11 = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "&Radiobutton 1", bgrp1 ); -<a name="x559"></a> rb11-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x559"></a> rb11-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); (void)new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "R&adiobutton 2", bgrp1 ); (void)new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "Ra&diobutton 3", bgrp1 ); @@ -127,32 +127,32 @@ protected slots: // Create a non-exclusive buttongroup <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a> *bgrp2 = new <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>( 1, TQGroupBox::Horizontal, "Button Group 2 (non-exclusive)", this ); box1-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( bgrp2 ); - bgrp2-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( FALSE ); + bgrp2-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( false ); // insert 3 checkboxes (void)new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "&Checkbox 1", bgrp2 ); <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> *cb12 = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "C&heckbox 2", bgrp2 ); -<a name="x552"></a> cb12-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x552"></a> cb12-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> *cb13 = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "Triple &State Button", bgrp2 ); -<a name="x553"></a> cb13-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setTristate">setTristate</a>( TRUE ); - cb13-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x553"></a> cb13-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setTristate">setTristate</a>( true ); + cb13-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); // ------------ third group // create a buttongroup which is exclusive for radiobuttons and non-exclusive for all other buttons <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a> *bgrp3 = new <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>( 1, TQGroupBox::Horizontal, "Button Group 3 (Radiobutton-exclusive)", this ); box2-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( bgrp3 ); -<a name="x550"></a> bgrp3-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x550"></a> bgrp3-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>( true ); // insert three radiobuttons rb21 = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "Rad&iobutton 1", bgrp3 ); rb22 = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "Radi&obutton 2", bgrp3 ); rb23 = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "Radio&button 3", bgrp3 ); - rb23-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); + rb23-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); // insert a checkbox... state = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "E&nable Radiobuttons", bgrp3 ); - state-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); + state-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); // ...and connect its TQ_SIGNAL clicked() with the TQ_SLOT slotChangeGrp3State() <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( state, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( slotChangeGrp3State() ) ); @@ -167,12 +167,12 @@ protected slots: // now make the second one a toggle button <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a> *tb2 = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "&Toggle Button", bgrp4, "toggle" ); -<a name="x558"></a> tb2-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setToggleButton">setToggleButton</a>( TRUE ); -<a name="x556"></a> tb2-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x558"></a> tb2-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setToggleButton">setToggleButton</a>( true ); +<a name="x556"></a> tb2-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); // ... and make the third one a flat button <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a> *tb3 = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "&Flat Button", bgrp4, "flat" ); -<a name="x555"></a> tb3-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x555"></a> tb3-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>(true); // .. and the fourth a button with a menu <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a> *tb4 = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "Popup Button", bgrp4, "popup" ); diff --git a/doc/html/canvas-chart-example.html b/doc/html/canvas-chart-example.html index fb251c48f..85780a420 100644 --- a/doc/html/canvas-chart-example.html +++ b/doc/html/canvas-chart-example.html @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ public: ~ChartForm(); int chartType() { return m_chartType; } - void setChanged( bool changed = TRUE ) { m_changed = changed; } + void setChanged( bool changed = true ) { m_changed = changed; } void drawElements(); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> *optionsMenu; // Why public? See canvasview.cpp @@ -340,23 +340,23 @@ const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> APP_KEY = "/Chart/"; <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> *chartGroup = new <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>( this ); // Connected later -<a name="x2874"></a> chartGroup-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2874"></a> chartGroup-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( true ); optionsPieChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Pie Chart", TQPixmap( options_piechart ), "&Pie Chart", CTRL+Key_I, chartGroup, "pie chart" ); -<a name="x2872"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2872"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsHorizontalBarChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Horizontal Bar Chart", TQPixmap( options_horizontalbarchart ), "&Horizontal Bar Chart", CTRL+Key_H, chartGroup, "horizontal bar chart" ); - optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); + optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsVerticalBarChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Vertical Bar Chart", TQPixmap( options_verticalbarchart ), "&Vertical Bar Chart", CTRL+Key_V, chartGroup, "Vertical bar chart" ); - optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); + optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsSetFontAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ void <a name="f597"></a>ChartForm::init() { <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( "Chart" ); m_filename = TQString::null; - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; m_elements[0] = Element( Element::INVALID, red ); m_elements[1] = Element( Element::INVALID, cyan ); @@ -637,13 +637,13 @@ bool <a name="f605"></a>ChartForm::okToClear() break; case 1: // Cancel default: - return FALSE; + return false; case 2: // Abandon break; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ void <a name="f607"></a>ChartForm::optionsSetData() { SetDataForm *setDataForm = new SetDataForm( &m_elements, m_decimalPlaces, this ); <a name="x2877"></a> if ( setDataForm-><a href="tqdialog.html#exec">exec</a>() ) { - m_changed = TRUE; + m_changed = true; drawElements(); } delete setDataForm; @@ -681,13 +681,13 @@ void <a name="f608"></a>ChartForm::setChartType( ChartType chartType ) m_chartType = chartType; switch ( m_chartType ) { case PIE: -<a name="x2871"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2871"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; case VERTICAL_BAR: - optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); + optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; case HORIZONTAL_BAR: - optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); + optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; } } @@ -727,13 +727,13 @@ void <a name="f611"></a>ChartForm::optionsSetOptions() optionsForm-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( m_font ); switch ( m_addValues ) { case NO: - optionsForm->noRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->noRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case YES: - optionsForm->yesRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->yesRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case AS_PERCENTAGE: - optionsForm->asPercentageRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->asPercentageRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; } optionsForm->decimalPlacesSpinBox->setValue( m_decimalPlaces ); diff --git a/doc/html/canvas-example.html b/doc/html/canvas-example.html index d0d4a990d..28e78ae1f 100644 --- a/doc/html/canvas-example.html +++ b/doc/html/canvas-example.html @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ bool <a name="f624"></a>ImageItem::hit( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> <a name="x2944"></a> int ix = p.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>()-int(<a href="tqcanvasitem.html#x">x</a>()); <a name="x2945"></a> int iy = p.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>()-int(<a href="tqcanvasitem.html#y">y</a>()); <a name="x2934"></a> if ( !image.<a href="tqimage.html#valid">valid</a>( ix , iy ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; <a name="x2933"></a> TQRgb pixel = image.<a href="tqimage.html#pixel">pixel</a>( ix, iy ); return tqAlpha( pixel ) != 0; } @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ void <a name="f622"></a>FigureEditor::clear() { static TQCanvasPixmapArray logo("qt-trans.xpm"); <a href="tqcanvassprite.html#setSequence">setSequence</a>(&logo); - <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#setAnimated">setAnimated</a>(TRUE); + <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#setAnimated">setAnimated</a>(true); initPos(); } @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ void <a name="f617"></a>BouncyLogo::initSpeed() vy = -vy; for (int bounce=0; bounce<4; bounce++) { - <a href="tqcanvasitemlist.html">TQCanvasItemList</a> l=collisions(FALSE); + <a href="tqcanvasitemlist.html">TQCanvasItemList</a> l=collisions(false); for (TQCanvasItemList::Iterator it=l.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(); it!=l.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>(); ++it) { <a href="tqcanvasitem.html">TQCanvasItem</a> *hit = *it; <a name="x2917"></a><a name="x2914"></a> if ( hit-><a href="tqcanvasitem.html#rtti">rtti</a>()==logo_rtti && hit-><a href="tqcanvasitem.html#collidesWith">collidesWith</a>(this) ) { @@ -478,14 +478,14 @@ static TQImage *logoimg; options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menu ); dbf_id = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("Double buffer", this, TQ_SLOT(toggleDoubleBuffer())); -<a name="x2939"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(dbf_id, TRUE); +<a name="x2939"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(dbf_id, true); menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("&Options",options); menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>* help = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menu ); help-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("&About", this, TQ_SLOT(help()), Key_F1); - help-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(dbf_id, TRUE); + help-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(dbf_id, true); menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("&Help",help); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>(); @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ void <a name="f629"></a>Main::help() "<li> Press ALT-L for some lines." "<li> Drag the objects around." "<li> Read the code!" - "</ul>", TQMessageBox::Information, 1, 0, 0, this, 0, FALSE ); + "</ul>", TQMessageBox::Information, 1, 0, 0, this, 0, false ); about->setButtonText( 1, "Dismiss" ); about->show(); } @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ void <a name="f643"></a>Main::print() if ( !printer ) printer = new <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a>; if ( printer->setup(this) ) { <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> pp(printer); -<a name="x2908"></a> canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#drawArea">drawArea</a>(TQRect(0,0,canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#width">width</a>(),canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#height">height</a>()),&pp,FALSE); +<a name="x2908"></a> canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#drawArea">drawArea</a>(TQRect(0,0,canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#width">width</a>(),canvas.<a href="tqcanvas.html#height">height</a>()),&pp,false); } } @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ void <a name="f653"></a>Main::addMesh() #ifndef TQT_NO_PROGRESSDIALOG <a href="tqprogressdialog.html">TQProgressDialog</a> progress( "Creating mesh...", "Abort", rows, - this, "progress", TRUE ); + this, "progress", true ); #endif <a href="tqmemarray.html">TQMemArray</a><NodeItem*> lastRow(cols); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-canvasview-cpp.html b/doc/html/chart-canvasview-cpp.html index 8a9189c4b..d2e211c3d 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-canvasview-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-canvasview-cpp.html @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ void CanvasView::<a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent">contentsMous m_movingItem->moveBy( offset.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>(), offset.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>() ); m_pos = e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#pos">pos</a>(); ChartForm *form = (ChartForm*)<a href="tqobject.html#parent">parent</a>(); - form->setChanged( TRUE ); + form->setChanged( true ); int chartType = form->chartType(); CanvasText *item = (CanvasText*)m_movingItem; int i = item->index(); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-chartform-cpp.html b/doc/html/chart-chartform-cpp.html index 66618d380..a0cf35d01 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-chartform-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-chartform-cpp.html @@ -128,23 +128,23 @@ const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> APP_KEY = "/Chart/"; <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> *chartGroup = new <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>( this ); // Connected later -<a name="x2874"></a> chartGroup-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2874"></a> chartGroup-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( true ); optionsPieChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Pie Chart", TQPixmap( options_piechart ), "&Pie Chart", CTRL+Key_I, chartGroup, "pie chart" ); -<a name="x2872"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2872"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsHorizontalBarChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Horizontal Bar Chart", TQPixmap( options_horizontalbarchart ), "&Horizontal Bar Chart", CTRL+Key_H, chartGroup, "horizontal bar chart" ); - optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); + optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsVerticalBarChartAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( "Vertical Bar Chart", TQPixmap( options_verticalbarchart ), "&Vertical Bar Chart", CTRL+Key_V, chartGroup, "Vertical bar chart" ); - optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); + optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); optionsSetFontAction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ void <a name="f149"></a>ChartForm::init() { <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( "Chart" ); m_filename = TQString::null; - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; m_elements[0] = Element( Element::INVALID, red ); m_elements[1] = Element( Element::INVALID, cyan ); @@ -425,13 +425,13 @@ bool <a name="f157"></a>ChartForm::okToClear() break; case 1: // Cancel default: - return FALSE; + return false; case 2: // Abandon break; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ void <a name="f159"></a>ChartForm::optionsSetData() { SetDataForm *setDataForm = new SetDataForm( &m_elements, m_decimalPlaces, this ); <a name="x2877"></a> if ( setDataForm-><a href="tqdialog.html#exec">exec</a>() ) { - m_changed = TRUE; + m_changed = true; drawElements(); } delete setDataForm; @@ -469,13 +469,13 @@ void <a name="f160"></a>ChartForm::setChartType( ChartType chartType ) m_chartType = chartType; switch ( m_chartType ) { case PIE: -<a name="x2871"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2871"></a> optionsPieChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; case VERTICAL_BAR: - optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); + optionsVerticalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; case HORIZONTAL_BAR: - optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( TRUE ); + optionsHorizontalBarChartAction-><a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>( true ); break; } } @@ -515,13 +515,13 @@ void <a name="f163"></a>ChartForm::optionsSetOptions() optionsForm-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( m_font ); switch ( m_addValues ) { case NO: - optionsForm->noRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->noRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case YES: - optionsForm->yesRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->yesRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case AS_PERCENTAGE: - optionsForm->asPercentageRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + optionsForm->asPercentageRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; } optionsForm->decimalPlacesSpinBox->setValue( m_decimalPlaces ); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-chartform-h.html b/doc/html/chart-chartform-h.html index 9043d2e59..302da0903 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-chartform-h.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-chartform-h.html @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ public: ~ChartForm(); int chartType() { return m_chartType; } - void setChanged( bool changed = TRUE ) { m_changed = changed; } + void setChanged( bool changed = true ) { m_changed = changed; } void drawElements(); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> *optionsMenu; // Why public? See canvasview.cpp diff --git a/doc/html/chart-chartform_files-cpp.html b/doc/html/chart-chartform_files-cpp.html index 60e9a8bf4..38ed95a54 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-chartform_files-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-chartform_files-cpp.html @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ void <a name="f172"></a>ChartForm::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString< updateRecentFiles( filename ); drawElements(); - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; } @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ void <a name="f173"></a>ChartForm::fileSave() <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( TQString( "Chart -- %1" ).arg( m_filename ) ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( TQString( "Saved \'%1\'" ).arg( m_filename ), 2000 ); - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; } @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ void <a name="f175"></a>ChartForm::filePrint() if ( m_printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>() ) { <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> painter( m_printer ); m_canvas->drawArea( TQRect( 0, 0, m_canvas->width(), m_canvas->height() ), - &painter, FALSE ); + &painter, false ); if ( !m_printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#outputFileName">outputFileName</a>().isEmpty() ) <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( TQString( "Printed \'%1\'" ). arg( m_printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#outputFileName">outputFileName</a>() ), 2000 ); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-optionsform-cpp.html b/doc/html/chart-optionsform-cpp.html index d9ff27c75..51e43e34c 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-optionsform-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-optionsform-cpp.html @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } chartTypeTextLabel = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "&Chart Type", this ); chartTypeLayout-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( chartTypeTextLabel ); - chartTypeComboBox = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + chartTypeComboBox = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); chartTypeComboBox-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( TQPixmap( options_piechart ), "Pie Chart" ); chartTypeComboBox-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( TQPixmap( options_verticalbarchart ), "Vertical Bar Chart" ); @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } addValuesButtonGroupLayout-><a href="tqlayoutitem.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>( TQt::AlignTop ); noRadioButton = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "&No", addValuesButtonGroup ); - noRadioButton-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); + noRadioButton-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); addValuesButtonGroupLayout-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( noRadioButton ); yesRadioButton = new <a href="tqradiobutton.html">TQRadioButton</a>( "&Yes", addValuesButtonGroup ); @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } buttonsLayout-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addItem">addItem</a>( spacer ); okPushButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "OK", this ); - okPushButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>( TRUE ); + okPushButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>( true ); buttonsLayout-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( okPushButton ); cancelPushButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "Cancel", this ); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-optionsform-h.html b/doc/html/chart-optionsform-h.html index 408c507ba..eeabe1779 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-optionsform-h.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-optionsform-h.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ class OptionsForm : public <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> TQ_OBJECT public: OptionsForm( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>* parent = 0, const char* name = "options form", - bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ); + bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ); ~OptionsForm() {} <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> font() const { return m_font; } diff --git a/doc/html/chart-setdataform-cpp.html b/doc/html/chart-setdataform-cpp.html index b59ca86b3..72d3920af 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-setdataform-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-setdataform-cpp.html @@ -76,9 +76,9 @@ const int MAX_PATTERNS = 14; table = new <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>( this, "data table" ); table-><a href="tqtable.html#setNumCols">setNumCols</a>( 5 ); table-><a href="tqtable.html#setNumRows">setNumRows</a>( ChartForm::MAX_ELEMENTS ); - table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 1, TRUE ); - table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 2, TRUE ); - table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 4, TRUE ); + table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 1, true ); + table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 2, true ); + table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>( 4, true ); table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnWidth">setColumnWidth</a>( 0, 80 ); table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnWidth">setColumnWidth</a>( 1, 60 ); // Columns 1 and 4 must be equal table-><a href="tqtable.html#setColumnWidth">setColumnWidth</a>( 2, 60 ); @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ const int MAX_PATTERNS = 14; colorPushButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( this, "color button" ); colorPushButton-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( "&Color..." ); - colorPushButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + colorPushButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); buttonBox-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( colorPushButton ); <a href="tqspaceritem.html">TQSpacerItem</a> *spacer = new <a href="tqspaceritem.html">TQSpacerItem</a>( 0, 0, TQSizePolicy::Expanding, @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ const int MAX_PATTERNS = 14; okPushButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( this, "ok button" ); okPushButton-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( "OK" ); - okPushButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>( TRUE ); + okPushButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>( true ); buttonBox-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( okPushButton ); cancelPushButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( this, "cancel button" ); diff --git a/doc/html/chart-setdataform-h.html b/doc/html/chart-setdataform-h.html index dd4b204c5..87431344a 100644 --- a/doc/html/chart-setdataform-h.html +++ b/doc/html/chart-setdataform-h.html @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ class SetDataForm: public <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> public: SetDataForm( ElementVector *elements, int decimalPlaces, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent = 0, const char *name = "set data form", - bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = 0 ); + bool modal = true, WFlags f = 0 ); ~SetDataForm() {} public slots: diff --git a/doc/html/checklists-example.html b/doc/html/checklists-example.html index cb59c7268..e536b5a6c 100644 --- a/doc/html/checklists-example.html +++ b/doc/html/checklists-example.html @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ protected slots: lv1 = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( this ); vbox1-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( lv1 ); <a name="x427"></a> lv1-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Items" ); -<a name="x429"></a> lv1-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x429"></a> lv1-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( true ); // create a list with 4 ListViewItems which will be parent items of other ListViewItems <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><TQListViewItem *> parentList; @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ protected slots: unsigned int num = 1; // go through the list of parent items... <a name="x436"></a><a name="x435"></a> for ( TQValueList<TQListViewItem*>::Iterator it = parentList.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(); it != parentList.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>(); - ( *it )->setOpen( TRUE ), ++it, num++ ) { + ( *it )->setOpen( true ), ++it, num++ ) { item = *it; // ...and create 5 checkable child ListViewItems for each parent item for ( unsigned int i = 1; i <= 5; i++ ) @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ protected slots: lv2 = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( this ); vbox2-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( lv2 ); lv2-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Items" ); - lv2-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( TRUE ); + lv2-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( true ); // another widget needed for layouting only tmp = new <a href="tqvboxlayout.html">TQVBoxLayout</a>( lay ); @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ void <a name="f249"></a>CheckLists::copy1to2() // Insert first a controller Item into the second ListView. Always if Radio-ListViewItems // are inserted into a Listview, the parent item of these MUST be a controller Item! <a href="tqchecklistitem.html">TQCheckListItem</a> *item = new <a href="tqchecklistitem.html">TQCheckListItem</a>( lv2, "Controller", TQCheckListItem::Controller ); -<a name="x431"></a> item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x431"></a> item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); // iterate through the first ListView... <a name="x432"></a> for ( ; it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>(); ++it ) @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ void <a name="f249"></a>CheckLists::copy1to2() (void)new <a href="tqchecklistitem.html">TQCheckListItem</a>( item, it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->text( 0 ), TQCheckListItem::RadioButton ); <a name="x430"></a> if ( item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>() ) - ( ( <a href="tqchecklistitem.html">TQCheckListItem</a>* )item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>() )->setOn( TRUE ); + ( ( <a href="tqchecklistitem.html">TQCheckListItem</a>* )item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>() )->setOn( true ); } /* diff --git a/doc/html/collection.html b/doc/html/collection.html index c6bb65369..a91f3f033 100644 --- a/doc/html/collection.html +++ b/doc/html/collection.html @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ them out in reverse order: int main() { <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><Employee> list; // list of pointers to Employee - list.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); // delete items when they are removed + list.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); // delete items when they are removed list.<a href="tqptrlist.html#append">append</a>( new Employee("Bill", 50000) ); list.<a href="tqptrlist.html#append">append</a>( new Employee("Steve",80000) ); diff --git a/doc/html/cursor-example.html b/doc/html/cursor-example.html index 17044d4eb..97778cbe6 100644 --- a/doc/html/cursor-example.html +++ b/doc/html/cursor-example.html @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ CursorView::CursorView() // construct view - <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> cb( cb_width, cb_height, cb_bits, TRUE ); - <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> cm( cm_width, cm_height, cm_bits, TRUE ); + <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> cb( cb_width, cb_height, cb_bits, true ); + <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> cm( cm_width, cm_height, cm_bits, true ); <a href="tqcursor.html">TQCursor</a> custom( cb, cm ); // create bitmap cursor label = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( this ); // create the big label diff --git a/doc/html/customlayout-example.html b/doc/html/customlayout-example.html index a900f2af2..4249cc65b 100644 --- a/doc/html/customlayout-example.html +++ b/doc/html/customlayout-example.html @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ protected: void setGeometry( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a>& ); private: - int doLayout( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a>&, bool testonly = FALSE ); + int doLayout( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a>&, bool testonly = false ); <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><TQLayoutItem> list; int cached_width; int cached_hfw; @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ SimpleFlow::~SimpleFlow() if ( cached_width != w ) { //Not all C++ compilers support "mutable" yet: SimpleFlow * mthis = (SimpleFlow*)this; - int h = mthis->doLayout( TQRect(0,0,w,0), TRUE ); + int h = mthis->doLayout( TQRect(0,0,w,0), true ); mthis->cached_hfw = h; mthis->cached_width = w; return h; @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ SimpleFlow::~SimpleFlow() <a name="x1472"></a>bool SimpleFlow::<a href="tqlayoutitem.html#hasHeightForWidth">hasHeightForWidth</a>() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } <a name="x1476"></a>TQSize SimpleFlow::<a href="tqlayoutitem.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() const @@ -297,17 +297,17 @@ public: BorderLayout( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, int border = 0, int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : <a href="tqlayout.html">TQLayout</a>( parent, border, autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ), - sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE ) + sizeDirty( true ), msizeDirty( true ) {} BorderLayout( <a href="tqlayout.html">TQLayout</a>* parent, int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : <a href="tqlayout.html">TQLayout</a>( parent, autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ), - sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE ) + sizeDirty( true ), msizeDirty( true ) {} BorderLayout( int autoBorder = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : <a href="tqlayout.html">TQLayout</a>( autoBorder, name ), cached( 0, 0 ), mcached( 0, 0 ), - sizeDirty( TRUE ), msizeDirty( TRUE ) + sizeDirty( true ), msizeDirty( true ) {} ~BorderLayout(); @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ protected: void setGeometry( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> &rect ); private: - void doLayout( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> &rect, bool testonly = FALSE ); + void doLayout( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> &rect, bool testonly = false ); void calcSize( SizeType st ); <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><BorderLayoutStruct> list; @@ -439,13 +439,13 @@ void <a name="f453"></a>BorderLayout::addWidget( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidge <a name="x1489"></a>void BorderLayout::<a href="tqlayout.html#add">add</a>( <a href="tqlayoutitem.html">TQLayoutItem</a> *item, Position pos ) { <a name="x1500"></a> list.<a href="tqptrlist.html#append">append</a>( new BorderLayoutStruct( item, pos ) ); - sizeDirty = TRUE; msizeDirty = TRUE; + sizeDirty = true; msizeDirty = true; calcSize( SizeHint ); calcSize( Minimum ); } <a name="x1496"></a>bool BorderLayout::<a href="tqlayoutitem.html#hasHeightForWidth">hasHeightForWidth</a>() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } <a name="x1499"></a>TQSize BorderLayout::<a href="tqlayoutitem.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() const @@ -562,10 +562,10 @@ void <a name="f455"></a>BorderLayout::calcSize( SizeType st ) } if ( st == Minimum ) { - msizeDirty = FALSE; + msizeDirty = false; mcached = TQSize( w, h ); } else { - sizeDirty = FALSE; + sizeDirty = false; cached = TQSize( w, h ); } diff --git a/doc/html/dclock-example.html b/doc/html/dclock-example.html index 0cdfcda25..e81d9a492 100644 --- a/doc/html/dclock-example.html +++ b/doc/html/dclock-example.html @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ private: // internal data <a name="f371"></a>DigitalClock::DigitalClock( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name ) : <a href="tqlcdnumber.html">TQLCDNumber</a>( parent, name ) { - showingColon = FALSE; + showingColon = false; <a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised ); <a href="tqframe.html#setLineWidth">setLineWidth</a>( 2 ); // set frame line width showTime(); // display the current time diff --git a/doc/html/debug.html b/doc/html/debug.html index d8e43ae20..f215b4d69 100644 --- a/doc/html/debug.html +++ b/doc/html/debug.html @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ often useful even without names. <ul> <li> <a href="tqapplication.html#Q_ASSERT">Q_ASSERT(b)</a> where b is a boolean expression, writes the warning: "ASSERT: 'b' in file file.cpp (234)" -if b is FALSE. +if b is false. <li> <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR(p)</a> where p is a pointer. Writes the warning "In file file.cpp, line 234: Out of memory" if p is 0. diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html index 46dc87d3e..7acffbca9 100644 --- a/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html +++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-3.html @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <a name="actions-and-action-groups-sidebar"></a><p>An <em>action</em> is an operation that the user initiates through the user interface, for example, saving a file or changing some text's font weight to bold.</p> <p>We often want the user to be able to perform an action using a variety of means. For example, to save a file we might want the user to be able to press <b>Ctrl+S</b>, or to click the <b>Save</b> toolbar button or to click the <b>File|Save</b> menu option. Although the means of invoking the action are all different, the underlying operation is the same and we don't want to duplicate the code that performs the operation. In TQt we can create an action (a <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a> object) which will call the appropriate function when the action is invoked. We can assign an accelerator, (e.g. <b>Ctrl+S</b>), to an action. We can also add an action to a menu and to a toolbar.</p> <p>If the action has an on/off state, e.g. bold is on or off, when the user changes the state, for example by clicking a toolbar button, the state of everything associated with the action, e.g. menu items and toolbar buttons, is updated.</p> -<p>Some actions should operate together like radio buttons. For example, if we have left align, center align and right align actions, only one should be 'on' at any one time. An <em>action group</em> (a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> object) is used to group a set of actions together. If the action group's <tt>exclusive</tt> property is TRUE then only one of the actions in the group can be on at any one time. If the user changes the state of an action in an action group where <tt>exclusive</tt> is TRUE, everything associated with the actions in the action group, e.g. menu items and toolbar buttons, is updated.</p> +<p>Some actions should operate together like radio buttons. For example, if we have left align, center align and right align actions, only one should be 'on' at any one time. An <em>action group</em> (a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> object) is used to group a set of actions together. If the action group's <tt>exclusive</tt> property is true then only one of the actions in the group can be on at any one time. If the user changes the state of an action in an action group where <tt>exclusive</tt> is true, everything associated with the actions in the action group, e.g. menu items and toolbar buttons, is updated.</p> <!-- index Actions and Action Groups --><p><em>TQt Designer</em> can create actions and action groups visually, assign accelerators to them, and associate them with menu items and toolbar buttons.</p> </blockquote> <h3><a name="4"></a>Creating the Main Window</h3> @@ -324,18 +324,18 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } { clipboard = TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#clipboard">clipboard</a>(); if ( clipboard->supportsSelection() ) - clipboard->setSelectionMode( TRUE ); + clipboard->setSelectionMode( true ); findForm = 0; loadSettings(); m_filename = ""; - m_changed = FALSE; - m_table_dirty = TRUE; - m_icons_dirty = TRUE; - clearData( TRUE ); + m_changed = false; + m_table_dirty = true; + m_icons_dirty = true; + clearData( true ); } </pre> - <p>The first thing we do is take a pointer to the global clipboard object. The <tt>setSelectionMode()</tt> call ensures that the clipboard works as expected on all platforms. The "findForm" and "loadSettings()" lines will be covered later; if you're entering the code, comment them out for now. We set the filename to be empty because the user hasn't opened a file. We set changed to false since no changes have taken place yet. But we mark both the table and the icon view as dirty since we want these to be drawn straight away. We call the <tt>clearData()</tt> function that we'll write next; this function clears all the color data, and if called with "TRUE", it creates new colors with default values.</p> + <p>The first thing we do is take a pointer to the global clipboard object. The <tt>setSelectionMode()</tt> call ensures that the clipboard works as expected on all platforms. The "findForm" and "loadSettings()" lines will be covered later; if you're entering the code, comment them out for now. We set the filename to be empty because the user hasn't opened a file. We set changed to false since no changes have taken place yet. But we mark both the table and the icon view as dirty since we want these to be drawn straight away. We call the <tt>clearData()</tt> function that we'll write next; this function clears all the color data, and if called with "true", it creates new colors with default values.</p> <h4><a name="6-8"></a>clearData()</h4> <pre> void MainForm::clearData( bool fillWithDefaults ) { @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } } else colorTable->hideColumn( COL_WEB ); - m_table_dirty = FALSE; + m_table_dirty = false; } if ( m_icons_dirty ) { @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } for ( it = m_colors.constBegin(); it != m_colors.constEnd(); ++it ) (void) new <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>( colorIconView, it.key(), colorSwatch( it.data() ) ); - m_icons_dirty = FALSE; + m_icons_dirty = false; } } </pre> @@ -424,8 +424,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p>We now create an iterator for our colors map, and iterate over every color. The colors map has the user's color names as its keys, and <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> instances as values. We retrieve the color and fill our pixmap with that color. We then set the "Name" column (column <tt>COL_NAME</tt>), to have the color's name (<tt>it.key()</tt>) and the pixmap we've just filled with that color. <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a>'s <tt>name()</tt> function returns a string that is the hex representation of a color, e.g. "#12AB2F"; we retrieve this and set the second ("Hex") column to this value.</p> <p>If the user wants to see if which colors are web colors we create a <a href="tqchecktableitem.html">TQCheckTableItem</a>, and check it if it is a web color. (We'll cover <tt>isWebColor()</tt> shortly.) We then insert this <a href="tqchecktableitem.html">TQCheckTableItem</a> into the "Web" column.</p> <p>Having populated the table we call <tt>adjustColumn()</tt> to ensure that each column is just wide enough to show its widest entry, and show or hide the "Web" column depending on the user's preference.</p> -<p>Finally we set <tt>m_table_dirty</tt> to FALSE, since it is now up-to-date.</p> -<p>If the icon view is "dirty" we <tt>clear()</tt> it of any existing data. We then iterate over each color in our colors map. For each color we create a new <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>; we label the item with the user's color name and provide a pixmap (generated by <tt>colorSwatch()</tt>, covered shortly) in the relevant color. Finally we set <tt>m_icons_dirty</tt> to "FALSE", since it is now up-to-date.</p> +<p>Finally we set <tt>m_table_dirty</tt> to false, since it is now up-to-date.</p> +<p>If the icon view is "dirty" we <tt>clear()</tt> it of any existing data. We then iterate over each color in our colors map. For each color we create a new <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>; we label the item with the user's color name and provide a pixmap (generated by <tt>colorSwatch()</tt>, covered shortly) in the relevant color. Finally we set <tt>m_icons_dirty</tt> to "false", since it is now up-to-date.</p> <h4><a name="6-10"></a>isWebColor()</h4> <pre> bool MainForm::isWebColor( <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> color ) { @@ -565,10 +565,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } { if ( okToClear() ) { m_filename = ""; - m_changed = FALSE; - m_table_dirty = TRUE; - m_icons_dirty = TRUE; - clearData( FALSE ); + m_changed = false; + m_table_dirty = true; + m_icons_dirty = true; + clearData( false ); } } </pre> @@ -592,13 +592,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } if ( ans == 0 ) fileSave(); else if ( ans == 1 ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> - <p>If the data has changed (<tt>m_changed</tt> is TRUE), we present the user with a message box offering the option of saving their data, or cancelling the current operation (e.g. not loading a new file, or not creating a new set of colors), or abandoning their changes and continuing. We make the <b>Save</b> button the default button (pressed by <b>Enter</b>) and the <b>Cancel</b> button the escape button (pressed by <b>Esc</b>).</p> + <p>If the data has changed (<tt>m_changed</tt> is true), we present the user with a message box offering the option of saving their data, or cancelling the current operation (e.g. not loading a new file, or not creating a new set of colors), or abandoning their changes and continuing. We make the <b>Save</b> button the default button (pressed by <b>Enter</b>) and the <b>Cancel</b> button the escape button (pressed by <b>Esc</b>).</p> <p>Since we're using a <a href="tqmessagebox.html">TQMessageBox</a> we need to include the relevant header. (Right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click <b>New</b>. Type "tqmessagebox.h" and press <b>Enter</b>.)</p> <p>You should now have added the following declaration to your includes (in implementation):</p> <ul><li><p>"tqmessagebox.h"</p> @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } </ul><h4><a name="6-24"></a>load()</h4> <pre> void MainForm::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& filename ) { - clearData( FALSE ); + clearData( false ); m_filename = filename; <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> regex( "^\\s*(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\d+)\\s+(\\S+.*)$" ); <a href="tqfile.html">TQFile</a> file( filename ); @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } m_icons_dirty = ! ( m_table_dirty = ( <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a> == tablePage ) ); populate(); m_icons_dirty = ! ( m_table_dirty = ( visible != tablePage ) ); - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; } else statusBar()->message( TQString( "Failed to load '%1'" ). @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Captures: cap(1) cap(2) cap(3) cap(4) statusBar()->message( TQString( "Saved %1 colors to '%2'" ). arg( m_colors.count() ). arg( m_filename ), 3000 ); - m_changed = FALSE; + m_changed = false; } else statusBar()->message( TQString( "Failed to save '%1'" ). @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ Captures: cap(1) cap(2) cap(3) cap(4) colorTable->setCurrentCell( row, 0 ); else if ( colorTable->numRows() ) colorTable->setCurrentCell( colorTable->numRows() - 1, 0 ); - m_icons_dirty = TRUE; + m_icons_dirty = true; } else if ( <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a> == iconsPage && colorIconView->currentItem() ) { <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> *item = colorIconView->currentItem(); @@ -793,12 +793,12 @@ Captures: cap(1) cap(2) cap(3) cap(4) colorIconView->setCurrentItem( current ); colorIconView->arrangeItemsInGrid(); } - m_table_dirty = TRUE; + m_table_dirty = true; } if ( ! name.<a href="tqstring.html#isNull">isNull</a>() ) { m_colors.remove( <a href="tqobject.html#name-prop">name</a> ); - m_changed = TRUE; + m_changed = true; statusBar()->message( TQString( "Deleted '%1'" ).arg( <a href="tqobject.html#name-prop">name</a> ), 5000 ); } else diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html index a13478de7..0e8e5600f 100644 --- a/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html +++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-4.html @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } if ( color.<a href="tqcolor.html#isValid">isValid</a>() ) { <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> pixmap( 80, 10 ); pixmap.<a href="tqpixmap.html#fill">fill</a>( color ); - ColorNameForm *colorForm = new ColorNameForm( this, "color", TRUE ); + ColorNameForm *colorForm = new ColorNameForm( this, "color", true ); colorForm->setColors( m_colors ); colorForm->colorLabel->setPixmap( pixmap ); if ( colorForm->exec() ) { @@ -195,13 +195,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } (void) new <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>( colorIconView, name, colorSwatch( color ) ); - m_changed = TRUE; + m_changed = true; } } } </pre> <p>The code for this function is quite long, but it isn't difficult. We start by setting a default color to white. If there are any colors in the <tt>m_colors</tt> map we set the default color to be the current color showing in the current view. We then invoke TQt's static <a href="tqcolordialog.html#getColor">getColor()</a> dialog, passing it the default color. (If the user cancels an invalid color is returned.)</p> -<p>If the user chose a color we want to show their chosen color in our custom dialog, so we create a pixmap and fill it with their chosen color. We create an instance of our ColorNameForm as a modal dialog (third argument is TRUE). We then call its <tt>setColors()</tt> function to set the colors in the <tt>m_colors</tt> map (so that the <tt>validate()</tt> function will work correctly). We set its colorLabel's pixmap to the pixmap we've just created, i.e. to a rectangle in the user's chosen color.</p> +<p>If the user chose a color we want to show their chosen color in our custom dialog, so we create a pixmap and fill it with their chosen color. We create an instance of our ColorNameForm as a modal dialog (third argument is true). We then call its <tt>setColors()</tt> function to set the colors in the <tt>m_colors</tt> map (so that the <tt>validate()</tt> function will work correctly). We set its colorLabel's pixmap to the pixmap we've just created, i.e. to a rectangle in the user's chosen color.</p> <p>We execute (<tt>exec()</tt>) the dialog. If the user clicks OK (and the color name they've entered is valid), the call will return a true value. In this case we retrieve the name they've entered from the line edit and create a new entry in the <tt>m_colors</tt> map using the name the user has given and the color they chose.</p> <p>At this point we could simply mark the views "dirty" and call repopulate. Instead we'll add the new color to each view directly and save the overhead of a full update (which might be considerable if we have thousands of colors).</p> <p>We create a pixmap and fill it with the new color. We then insert a new row in the table and set the columns to the new color's values, in the same way as we've already seen in the <tt>populate()</tt> function. Similarly we create a new icon for the icon view. Finally we mark the data as changed so that the user will be prompted to save if they attempt to exit or load another color file before they've saved this one.</p> @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } return; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> ltext = text.<a href="tqstring.html#lower">lower</a>(); <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *visible = colorWidgetStack->visibleWidget(); - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; if ( <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a> == tablePage && colorTable->numRows() ) { int row = colorTable->currentRow(); @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } colorTable->setCurrentCell( i, 0 ); colorTable->clearSelection(); colorTable->selectRow( i ); - found = TRUE; + found = true; break; } if ( ! found ) @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } if ( item-><a href="tqtableitem.html#text">text</a>().lower().contains( ltext ) ) { colorIconView->setCurrentItem( item ); colorIconView->ensureItemVisible( item ); - found = TRUE; + found = true; break; } if ( ! found && start ) @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } </pre> <p>This slot is invoked when the user clicks the "Find" button in the FindForm. The text the user entered in the FindForm's line edit is passed in as the <tt>text</tt> parameter. If there is no text we simply return.</p> <p>We take a lower case copy of the text because we want to do a case-insensitive search. We find out which view the user is using (so that we can look in the right one), and set a flag <tt>found</tt>, that we'll use further on.</p> -<p>If the user is using the table view we start looking from the row following the row they're on. If we get a match we select the row containing the match, set <tt>found</tt> to TRUE and stop looking. If we didn't find a match we set the current cell back to the cell we started from.</p> +<p>If the user is using the table view we start looking from the row following the row they're on. If we get a match we select the row containing the match, set <tt>found</tt> to true and stop looking. If we didn't find a match we set the current cell back to the cell we started from.</p> <p>If the user is using the icon view, we start looking from the item following the current item. If we find a match we select the corresponding item and ensure that it is visible. Again, if we didn't find a match we set the current item to be the item we started looking from.</p> <p>If we found the text, the relevant item is highlighted (because we have selected it) in the user's view. If we didn't find the text we issue a message on the status bar and call the FindForm's <tt>notfound()</tt> function (which simply selects the search text).</p> <p>Functions that are typed directly into the code editor become public functions (unless their return value is <tt>void</tt> in which case they become public slots). These can be changed later by editing the function's properties. We need <tt>lookfor()</tt> to be a slot because we connect to it. Click Object Explorer's Members tab, then right click <tt>lookfor()</tt>, then click <b>Properties</b>. This invokes the <em>Edit Functions</em> dialog. Change the Type to "slot", then click <b>OK</b>.</p> @@ -366,16 +366,16 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <h5><a name="3-2-1"></a>editOptions()</h5> <pre> void MainForm::editOptions() { - OptionsForm *options = new OptionsForm( this, "options", TRUE ); + OptionsForm *options = new OptionsForm( this, "options", true ); switch ( m_clip_as ) { case CLIP_AS_HEX: - options->hexRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + options->hexRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case CLIP_AS_NAME: - options->nameRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + options->nameRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; case CLIP_AS_RGB: - options->rgbRadioButton->setChecked( TRUE ); + options->rgbRadioButton->setChecked( true ); break; } options->webCheckBox->setChecked( m_show_web ); @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } } } </pre> - <p>We create a new options form, passing it TRUE to make it modal. We set the radio buttons depending on the current setting of the <tt>m_clip_as</tt> variable. We set the check box to correspond with the <tt>m_show_web</tt> variable. We execute the form, and if the user clicks <b>OK</b>, we reflect their choices back into the relevant main form variables. If the user changed the <tt>m_show_web</tt> variable (by clicking the webCheckBox), we mark the table as "dirty" since it will need updating. We then call <tt>populate()</tt> which will update the table view if required.</p> + <p>We create a new options form, passing it true to make it modal. We set the radio buttons depending on the current setting of the <tt>m_clip_as</tt> variable. We set the check box to correspond with the <tt>m_show_web</tt> variable. We execute the form, and if the user clicks <b>OK</b>, we reflect their choices back into the relevant main form variables. If the user changed the <tt>m_show_web</tt> variable (by clicking the webCheckBox), we mark the table as "dirty" since it will need updating. We then call <tt>populate()</tt> which will update the table view if required.</p> <p>Because we use our OptionsForm and access its radio buttons and checkbox we must add "optionsform.h", "tqradiobutton.h" and "tqcheckbox.h" to our includes in implementation. (Click Object Explorer's Members tab, right click "Includes (in Implementation)", then click <b>Edit</b>. Click <b>Add</b> and enter "optionsform.h"; click <b>Add</b> again and enter "tqradiobutton.h"; click <b>Add</b> again and enter "tqcheckbox.h". Press <b>Enter</b>, then click <b>Close</b>.)</p> <p>You should now have added the following declarations to your includes (in implementation):</p> <ul><li><p>"optionsform.h"</p> @@ -443,10 +443,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int windowX = settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "WindowX", 0 ); int windowY = settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "WindowY", 0 ); m_clip_as = settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "ClipAs", CLIP_AS_HEX ); - m_show_web = settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", TRUE ); - if ( ! settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "View", TRUE ) ) { + m_show_web = settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "ShowWeb", true ); + if ( ! settings.<a href="tqsettings.html#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>( APP_KEY + "View", true ) ) { colorWidgetStack->raiseWidget( iconsPage ); - viewIconsAction->setOn( TRUE ); + viewIconsAction->setOn( true ); } </pre> <p>We read in the settings using default values if there are not settings (i.e. if the settings were deleted or if this is the first time the user has run the application). Again, the <tt>insertSearchPath()</tt> call should be made on all platforms.</p> diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html index 503dcd9dd..b3b23d1b6 100644 --- a/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html +++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-6.html @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) TQ_OBJECT public: CreditForm( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>* parent = 0, const char* name = 0, - bool modal = FALSE, WFlags fl = 0 ); + bool modal = false, WFlags fl = 0 ); ~CreditForm(); public slots: void setAmount(); diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html index 587cff348..38f9195e9 100644 --- a/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html +++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-7.html @@ -344,10 +344,10 @@ DEFINES += FILECHOOSER_IS_WIDGET <!-- index isContainer() --><p>The <tt>isContainer()</tt> function.</p> <pre> bool CustomWidgetPlugin::<a href="tqwidgetplugin.html#isContainer">isContainer</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) const { - return FALSE; + return false; } </pre> - <p>Copy this function changing the class name to suit your widget plugin implementation. It should return <tt>TRUE</tt> if your custom widget can contain other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a>, or <tt>FALSE</tt> if it must not contain other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>.</p> + <p>Copy this function changing the class name to suit your widget plugin implementation. It should return <tt>true</tt> if your custom widget can contain other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a>, or <tt>false</tt> if it must not contain other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>.</p> <!-- index Macros!TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN --><!-- index TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN --><p>The <tt>TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN</tt> macro.</p> <pre> TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN( CustomWidgetPlugin ) </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html b/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html index 010d85daa..666b65e8e 100644 --- a/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html +++ b/doc/html/designer-manual-8.html @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ bool createConnections() TQSqlDatabase *defaultDB = TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( "TQPSQL7" ); if ( ! defaultDB ) { tqWarning( "Failed to connect to driver" ); - return FALSE; + return false; } defaultDB->setDatabaseName( "book" ); defaultDB->setUserName( "bookuser" ); @@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ bool createConnections() tqWarning( "Failed to open books database: " + defaultDB->lastError().driverText() ); tqWarning( defaultDB->lastError().databaseText() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> <!-- index addDatabase() --><p>We call <tt>addDatabase()</tt> passing it the name of the driver we wish to use. We then set the connection information by calling the <tt>set</tt>... functions. Finally we attempt to open the connection. If we succeed we return true, otherwise we output some error information and return false. From <tt>qt/tools/designer/examples/book/book1/main.cpp</tt></p> @@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ bool createConnections() <p align="center"><b> <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> User Interface Interaction</b></p> <!-- index Databases!User Interface Interaction --><!-- index User Interface Interaction, Databases --><p>The default user-interface behavior for <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>s is as follows:</p> <ul><li><p>Users can move to records by clicking the scrollbar and clicking records with the mouse. They can also use the keyboard's navigation keys, e.g. <b>Left Arrow</b>, <b>Right Arrow</b>, <b>Up Arrow</b>, <b>Down Arrow</b>, <b>Page Up</b>, <b>Page Down</b>, <b>Home</b> and <b>End</b>.</p> -<li><p><tt>INSERT</tt> is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Insert or by pressing the <b>Ins</b> (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using <b>Tab</b> and <b>Shift+Tab</b>. The <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place if the user presses <b>Enter</b> or <b>Tab</b>s off the last field. If autoEdit is TRUE the insert will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>INSERT</tt> is cancelled by pressing <b>Esc</b> (Escape). If autoEdit is FALSE navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>INSERT</tt>. Setting confirmInsert to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>INSERT</tt>.</p> -<li><p><tt>UPDATE</tt> is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Update or by pressing <b>F2</b>. The update will take place if the user presses Enter or Tabs off the last field. If autoEdit is TRUE the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>UPDATE</tt> is cancelled by pressing <b>Esc</b>. If autoEdit is FALSE navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>UPDATE</tt>. Setting confirmUpdate to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>UPDATE</tt>.</p> -<li><p><tt>DELETE</tt> is achieved by right-clicking the record and clicking Delete or by pressing the <b>Del</b> (Delete) key. Setting confirmDelete to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>DELETE</tt>.</p> +<li><p><tt>INSERT</tt> is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Insert or by pressing the <b>Ins</b> (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using <b>Tab</b> and <b>Shift+Tab</b>. The <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place if the user presses <b>Enter</b> or <b>Tab</b>s off the last field. If autoEdit is true the insert will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>INSERT</tt> is cancelled by pressing <b>Esc</b> (Escape). If autoEdit is false navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>INSERT</tt>. Setting confirmInsert to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>INSERT</tt>.</p> +<li><p><tt>UPDATE</tt> is initiated by right-clicking the record and clicking Update or by pressing <b>F2</b>. The update will take place if the user presses Enter or Tabs off the last field. If autoEdit is true the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>UPDATE</tt> is cancelled by pressing <b>Esc</b>. If autoEdit is false navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>UPDATE</tt>. Setting confirmUpdate to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>UPDATE</tt>.</p> +<li><p><tt>DELETE</tt> is achieved by right-clicking the record and clicking Delete or by pressing the <b>Del</b> (Delete) key. Setting confirmDelete to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>DELETE</tt>.</p> </ul><p>You can change this default behavior programmatically if required.</p> </blockquote> <h4><a name="2-3"></a>Relating Two Tables Together (Master-Detail)</h4> @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ bool createConnections() <li><p>The <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a> will now appear on the form. Resize the form to make it smaller. Click the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a> then click the <b>Break Layout</b> toolbar button. Click the buttons then click the <b>Break Layout</b> toolbar button. Add another button called 'PushButtonClose' with the text '&Close' and place it to the right of the Delete button.</p> <li><p><b>Shift+Click</b> the Insert, Update, Delete and Close buttons, then click the <b>Lay Out Horizontally</b> toolbar button. Click the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a>, then click the <b>Lay Out in a Grid</b> toolbar button. Finally click the form and click the <b>Lay Out Vertically</b> toolbar button. Now click the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a> and rename it 'BookDataBrowser'.</p> <li><p><em>TQt Designer</em> will generate the necessary code to make the browser operational (including generating the appropriate cursor, sort and filter code).</p> -<p>For finer control over the form, we will be creating our own database cursor. Therefore, set the BookDataBrowser's frameworkCode property to FALSE in the Properties window to prevent <em>TQt Designer</em> from generating redundant code for the cursor.</p> +<p>For finer control over the form, we will be creating our own database cursor. Therefore, set the BookDataBrowser's frameworkCode property to false in the Properties window to prevent <em>TQt Designer</em> from generating redundant code for the cursor.</p> </ol><blockquote> <p align="center"><b> <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a> User Interface Interaction</b></p> <p>The user-interface behavior for <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a>s is created by connecting slots and signals. The slots provided are:</p> @@ -249,9 +249,9 @@ bool createConnections() <li><!-- index readFields() --><p><tt>readFields()</tt> to read data from the cursor's edit buffer and<!-- index writeFields() --> <tt>writeFields()</tt> to write the form's data to the cursor's edit buffer;</p> <li><!-- index clearValues() --><p><tt>clearValues()</tt> to clear the form's values.</p> </ul><p>If you use <em>TQt Designer</em>'s <a href="tqdatabrowser.html">TQDataBrowser</a> wizard you will be given the option of creating a default set of buttons for navigation and editing. The behavior of these buttons is set up using the slots described above to provide the following functionality:</p> -<ul><li><p><tt>INSERT</tt> is initiated by pressing the <b>Ins</b> (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using <b>Tab</b> and <b>Shift+Tab</b>. If the user presses the Update button the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place and the user will be taken to the record they have just inserted. If the user presses the Insert button (i.e. a second time) the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place and a new insertion will be initiated. If autoEdit is TRUE the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>INSERT</tt> is cancelled by pressing the <b>Esc</b> key or by pressing the <b>Del</b> (Delete) key. If autoEdit is FALSE then navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>INSERT</tt>. Setting confirmInsert to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>INSERT</tt>.</p> -<li><p><tt>UPDATE</tt> is automatically initiated whenever the user navigates to a record. An update will take place if the user presses the Update button. If autoEdit is TRUE the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>UPDATE</tt> is cancelled by pressing the <b>Esc</b> key or by pressing the <b>Del</b> button. If autoEdit is FALSE then navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>UPDATE</tt>. Setting confirmUpdate to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>UPDATE</tt>.</p> -<li><p><tt>DELETE</tt> is achieved by pressing the <b>Del</b> key. Setting confirmDelete to TRUE will require the user to confirm each <tt>DELETE</tt>.</p> +<ul><li><p><tt>INSERT</tt> is initiated by pressing the <b>Ins</b> (Insert) key. The user moves between fields using <b>Tab</b> and <b>Shift+Tab</b>. If the user presses the Update button the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place and the user will be taken to the record they have just inserted. If the user presses the Insert button (i.e. a second time) the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place and a new insertion will be initiated. If autoEdit is true the <tt>INSERT</tt> will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>INSERT</tt> is cancelled by pressing the <b>Esc</b> key or by pressing the <b>Del</b> (Delete) key. If autoEdit is false then navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>INSERT</tt>. Setting confirmInsert to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>INSERT</tt>.</p> +<li><p><tt>UPDATE</tt> is automatically initiated whenever the user navigates to a record. An update will take place if the user presses the Update button. If autoEdit is true the update will take place if the user navigates to another record. <tt>UPDATE</tt> is cancelled by pressing the <b>Esc</b> key or by pressing the <b>Del</b> button. If autoEdit is false then navigating to another record also cancels the <tt>UPDATE</tt>. Setting confirmUpdate to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>UPDATE</tt>.</p> +<li><p><tt>DELETE</tt> is achieved by pressing the <b>Del</b> key. Setting confirmDelete to true will require the user to confirm each <tt>DELETE</tt>.</p> </ul></blockquote> <h5><a name="3-1-2"></a>Performing the Drilldown</h5> <!-- index Databases!Drilldown --><!-- index Drilldown --><p>We now have a working form for editing book records. We need to start the form when the user clicks our 'Edit Books' button, and to navigate to the record they have selected in the BookDataTable. We also need to provide a means of editing the foreign keys, e.g. authorid.</p> @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ bool createConnections() <!-- index Object Hierarchy --><li><p>In the Object Explorer window click Members and then click the <tt>editClicked</tt> function. We need to change it to the following:</p> <pre> void BookForm::editClicked() { - EditBookForm *dialog = new EditBookForm( this, "Edit Book Form", TRUE ); + EditBookForm *dialog = new EditBookForm( this, "Edit Book Form", true ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "book" ); dialog->BookDataBrowser->setSqlCursor( &cur ); dialog->BookDataBrowser->setFilter( BookDataTable->filter() ); @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ bool createConnections() while ( query.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#next">next</a>() ) { ComboBoxAuthor->insertItem( query.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">value</a>( 0 ).toString() ); int id = query.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">value</a>( 1 ).toInt(); - mapAuthor( query.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">value</a>( 0 ).toString(), id, TRUE ); + mapAuthor( query.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">value</a>( 0 ).toString(), id, true ); } } </pre> @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ bool createConnections() <pre> void EditBookForm::beforeUpdateBook( <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * buffer ) { int id; - mapAuthor( ComboBoxAuthor->currentText(), id, FALSE ); + mapAuthor( ComboBoxAuthor->currentText(), id, false ); buffer-><a href="tqsqlrecord.html#setValue">setValue</a>( "authorid", id ); } </pre> @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ bool createConnections() id = authorMap[ name ]; } </pre> - <p>If the populate flag is TRUE, we store the author's name and id in the <a href="tqmap.html">TQMap</a>, otherwise we look up the given author name and set id appropriately.</p> + <p>If the populate flag is true, we store the author's name and id in the <a href="tqmap.html">TQMap</a>, otherwise we look up the given author name and set id appropriately.</p> <li><p>Before we perform an update we must ensure that the author combobox shows the right author.</p> <pre> void EditBookForm::primeUpdateBook( <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * buffer ) { diff --git a/doc/html/desktop-example.html b/doc/html/desktop-example.html index 491aaee96..32beabee8 100644 --- a/doc/html/desktop-example.html +++ b/doc/html/desktop-example.html @@ -351,10 +351,10 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) <a name="x1724"></a> app.<a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f ); } - bool validOptions = FALSE; + bool validOptions = false; if ( argc == 2 ) { - validOptions = TRUE; + validOptions = true; if ( strcmp(argv[1],"-poly") == 0 ) poly(); else if ( strcmp(argv[1],"-rotate") == 0 ) @@ -364,16 +364,16 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) else if ( strcmp(argv[1],"-trollwidget") == 0 ) desktopWidget(); else - validOptions = FALSE; + validOptions = false; } if ( argc == 3 ) { - validOptions = TRUE; + validOptions = true; if ( strcmp(argv[1],"-shadetext") == 0 ) desktopText( argv[2] ); else if ( strcmp(argv[1],"-shadewidget") == 0 ) desktopWidget( argv[2] ); else - validOptions = FALSE; + validOptions = false; } if ( !validOptions ) { fprintf( stderr, "Usage:\n\tdesktop -poly" diff --git a/doc/html/dirview-example.html b/doc/html/dirview-example.html index 7f50fb26d..22cf0d354 100644 --- a/doc/html/dirview-example.html +++ b/doc/html/dirview-example.html @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ class DirectoryView : public <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> <a href="metaobjects.html#TQ_OBJECT">TQ_OBJECT</a> public: - DirectoryView( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, bool sdo = FALSE ); + DirectoryView( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, bool sdo = false ); bool showDirsOnly() { return dirsOnly; } public slots: @@ -359,12 +359,12 @@ Directory::Directory( <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * parent, const < <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> s( fullName() ); <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> thisDir( s ); <a name="x1667"></a> if ( !thisDir.<a href="tqdir.html#isReadable">isReadable</a>() ) { - readable = FALSE; - <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>( FALSE ); + readable = false; + <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>( false ); return; } - <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#listView">listView</a>()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#listView">listView</a>()->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); <a name="x1666"></a> const TQFileInfoList * files = thisDir.<a href="tqdir.html#entryInfoList">entryInfoList</a>(); if ( files ) { TQFileInfoListIterator it( *files ); @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Directory::Directory( <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * parent, const < } } } - listView()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + listView()->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); } TQListViewItem::<a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( o ); } @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Directory::Directory( <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * parent, const < <a name="x1692"></a>void Directory::<a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setup">setup</a>() { - setExpandable( TRUE ); + setExpandable( true ); TQListViewItem::<a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setup">setup</a>(); } @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ TQString <a name="f477"></a>Directory::fullName() <a name="f478"></a>DirectoryView::DirectoryView( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name, bool sdo ) : <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( parent, name ), dirsOnly( sdo ), oldCurrent( 0 ), - dropItem( 0 ), mousePressed( FALSE ) + dropItem( 0 ), mousePressed( false ) { autoopen_timer = new <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a>( this ); if ( !folderLocked ) { @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ TQString <a name="f477"></a>Directory::fullName() <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( this, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqlistview.html#returnPressed">returnPressed</a>( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( slotFolderSelected( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * ) ) ); - <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( TRUE ); - <a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( true ); + <a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>()->setAcceptDrops( true ); <a name="x1706"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( autoopen_timer, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtimer.html#timeout">timeout</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( openFolder() ) ); @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ void <a name="f480"></a>DirectoryView::openFolder() { <a name="x1705"></a> autoopen_timer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); if ( dropItem && !dropItem->isOpen() ) { - dropItem->setOpen( TRUE ); + dropItem->setOpen( true ); dropItem->repaint(); } } @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ static const int autoopenTime = 750; <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> vp = <a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsToViewport">contentsToViewport</a>( ( (TQDragMoveEvent*)e )->pos() ); <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> *i = <a href="tqlistview.html#itemAt">itemAt</a>( vp ); if ( i ) { - <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( i, TRUE ); + <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( i, true ); <a name="x1668"></a> e-><a href="tqdragmoveevent.html#accept">accept</a>(); if ( i != dropItem ) { autoopen_timer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ static const int autoopenTime = 750; dropItem = 0; <a href="tqlistview.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( oldCurrent ); - <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( oldCurrent, TRUE ); + <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( oldCurrent, true ); } <a name="x1682"></a>void DirectoryView::<a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsDropEvent">contentsDropEvent</a>( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDropEvent</a> *e ) @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ TQString <a name="f481"></a>DirectoryView::fullPath(TQListViewItem* item) <a name="x1686"></a> treeStepSize() * ( i-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#depth">depth</a>() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + itemMargin() || p.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>() < header()->cellPos( header()->mapToActual( 0 ) ) ) { presspos = e-><a href="tqdropevent.html#pos">pos</a>(); - mousePressed = TRUE; + mousePressed = true; } } } @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ TQString <a name="f481"></a>DirectoryView::fullPath(TQListViewItem* item) <a name="x1683"></a>void DirectoryView::<a href="tqlistview.html#contentsMouseMoveEvent">contentsMouseMoveEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a>* e ) { if ( mousePressed && ( presspos - e-><a href="tqdropevent.html#pos">pos</a>() ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#startDragDistance">startDragDistance</a>() ) { - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> *item = itemAt( contentsToViewport(presspos) ); if ( item ) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> source = fullPath(item); @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ TQString <a name="f481"></a>DirectoryView::fullPath(TQListViewItem* item) <a name="x1685"></a>void DirectoryView::<a href="tqlistview.html#contentsMouseReleaseEvent">contentsMouseReleaseEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * ) { - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } void <a name="f482"></a>DirectoryView::setDir( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> &s ) @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ void <a name="f482"></a>DirectoryView::setDir( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQS <a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html">TQListViewItemIterator</a> it( this ); ++it; for ( ; it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>(); ++it ) { - it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setOpen( FALSE ); + it.<a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html#current">current</a>()->setOpen( false ); } <a name="x1703"></a> <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> lst( TQStringList::<a href="tqstringlist.html#split">split</a>( "/", s ) ); @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ void <a name="f482"></a>DirectoryView::setDir( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQS <a name="x1700"></a> for ( ; it2 != lst.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>(); ++it2 ) { while ( item ) { if ( item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#text">text</a>( 0 ) == *it2 ) { - item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); break; } <a name="x1687"></a> item = item-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#itemBelow">itemBelow</a>(); @@ -725,12 +725,12 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) ++i; <a name="x1713"></a> Directory * root = new Directory( &mw, fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#filePath">filePath</a>() ); if ( roots->count() <= 1 ) -<a name="x1718"></a> root-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); // be interesting +<a name="x1718"></a> root-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); // be interesting } <a name="x1719"></a> mw.<a href="tqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>( 400, 400 ); mw.<a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( "TQt Example - Directory Browser" ); -<a name="x1715"></a> mw.<a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1715"></a> mw.<a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( true ); a.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( &mw ); <a name="x1717"></a> mw.<a href="tqwidget.html#show">show</a>(); diff --git a/doc/html/distributor-example.html b/doc/html/distributor-example.html index 09b89cd1e..82d0ac511 100644 --- a/doc/html/distributor-example.html +++ b/doc/html/distributor-example.html @@ -78,29 +78,29 @@ void Distributor::init() timer = new <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a>( this ); <a name="x2672"></a> connect( timer, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqtimer.html#timeout">timeout</a>()), TQ_SLOT(checkLibData()) ); - cancelButton()->setAutoDefault( FALSE ); - backButton()->setAutoDefault( FALSE ); + cancelButton()->setAutoDefault( false ); + backButton()->setAutoDefault( false ); - setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, FALSE ); + setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, false ); - setHelpEnabled( selectLibrary, FALSE ); - setHelpEnabled( modifyPaths, FALSE ); - setHelpEnabled( verifyMods, FALSE ); + setHelpEnabled( selectLibrary, false ); + setHelpEnabled( modifyPaths, false ); + setHelpEnabled( verifyMods, false ); - setFinishEnabled( verifyMods, TRUE ); + setFinishEnabled( verifyMods, true ); } void Distributor::showPage( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *page ) { if ( page == selectLibrary ) { - nextButton()->setDefault( TRUE ); + nextButton()->setDefault( true ); libFilename->setFocus(); } else if ( page == modifyPaths ) { - nextButton()->setDefault( TRUE ); + nextButton()->setDefault( true ); prefixPath->selectAll(); prefixPath->setFocus(); } else if ( page == verifyMods ) { - finishButton()->setDefault( TRUE ); + finishButton()->setDefault( true ); finishButton()->setFocus(); <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> labeltext = @@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ void Distributor::showPage( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *page ) void Distributor::checkLibFilename( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> &filename ) { - setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, FALSE ); + setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, false ); <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a> fileinfo( filename ); <a name="x2661"></a> if ( ! filename.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() && fileinfo.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#exists">exists</a>() && <a name="x2665"></a><a name="x2663"></a> fileinfo.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#isReadable">isReadable</a>() && fileinfo.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#isWritable">isWritable</a>() && <a name="x2664"></a><a name="x2662"></a> fileinfo.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#isFile">isFile</a>() && !fileinfo.<a href="tqfileinfo.html#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>() ) -<a name="x2671"></a> timer-><a href="tqtimer.html#start">start</a>( 500, TRUE ); +<a name="x2671"></a> timer-><a href="tqtimer.html#start">start</a>( 500, true ); } void Distributor::browseLibFilename() @@ -188,25 +188,25 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData() } steps[7]; steps[0].key = "qt_nstpath="; - steps[0].done = FALSE; + steps[0].done = false; steps[1].key = "qt_binpath="; - steps[1].done = FALSE; + steps[1].done = false; steps[2].key = "qt_docpath="; - steps[2].done = FALSE; + steps[2].done = false; steps[3].key = "qt_hdrpath="; - steps[3].done = FALSE; + steps[3].done = false; steps[4].key = "qt_libpath="; - steps[4].done = FALSE; + steps[4].done = false; steps[5].key = "qt_plgpath="; - steps[5].done = FALSE; + steps[5].done = false; steps[6].key = "qt_datpath="; - steps[6].done = FALSE; + steps[6].done = false; uint completed = 0; uint total_steps = sizeof(steps) / sizeof(step); @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData() } steps[x].value = s; - steps[x].done = TRUE; + steps[x].done = true; ++completed; } @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ void Distributor::checkLibData() } if ( completed == total_steps ) { - setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, TRUE ); + setNextEnabled( selectLibrary, true ); <a name="x2657"></a> <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> prefix = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#decodeName">decodeName</a>( steps[0].value ); prefixPath->setText( prefix ); @@ -335,31 +335,31 @@ void Distributor::accept() steps[0].key = "qt_nstpath="; <a name="x2658"></a> steps[0].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( prefixPath->text() ); - steps[0].done = FALSE; + steps[0].done = false; steps[1].key = "qt_binpath="; steps[1].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( binPath->text() ); - steps[1].done = FALSE; + steps[1].done = false; steps[2].key = "qt_docpath="; steps[2].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( docPath->text() ); - steps[2].done = FALSE; + steps[2].done = false; steps[3].key = "qt_hdrpath="; steps[3].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( hdrPath->text() ); - steps[3].done = FALSE; + steps[3].done = false; steps[4].key = "qt_libpath="; steps[4].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( libPath->text() ); - steps[4].done = FALSE; + steps[4].done = false; steps[5].key = "qt_plgpath="; steps[5].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( plgPath->text() ); - steps[5].done = FALSE; + steps[5].done = false; steps[6].key = "qt_datpath="; steps[6].value = TQFile::<a href="tqfile.html#encodeName">encodeName</a>( datPath->text() ); - steps[6].done = FALSE; + steps[6].done = false; uint completed = 0; uint total_steps = sizeof(steps) / sizeof(step); @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ void Distributor::accept() } <a href="tqcstring.html#qstrcpy">qstrcpy</a>( s, steps[x].value ); - steps[x].done = TRUE; + steps[x].done = true; ++completed; } diff --git a/doc/html/dnd.html b/doc/html/dnd.html index b5bc53181..2ac147a8c 100644 --- a/doc/html/dnd.html +++ b/doc/html/dnd.html @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ references. <p> <h2> Dropping </h2> <a name="2"></a><p> To be able to receive media dropped on a widget, call -<a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops(TRUE)</a> +<a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops(true)</a> for the widget (e.g. in its constructor), and override the event handler methods <a href="tqwidget.html#dragEnterEvent">dragEnterEvent()</a> and @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ MyWidget::MyWidget(...) : <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>(...) { ... - setAcceptDrops(TRUE); + setAcceptDrops(true); } void MyWidget::dragEnterEvent(TQDragEnterEvent* event) diff --git a/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html b/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html index fb779cead..5a54cbd9d 100644 --- a/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html +++ b/doc/html/drawdemo-example.html @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ private: maxheight += 30; if ( i == 0 ) -<a name="x1082"></a> rb-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1082"></a> rb-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); } maxheight += 10; // maxheight is now 10 pixels upper margin diff --git a/doc/html/drawlines-example.html b/doc/html/drawlines-example.html index 93bf8acbb..277e6fe03 100644 --- a/doc/html/drawlines-example.html +++ b/doc/html/drawlines-example.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ private: <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> *points; // point array <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> *colors; // color array int count; // count = number of points - bool down; // TRUE if mouse down + bool down; // true if mouse down }; @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ private: { <a href="tqwidget.html#setBackgroundColor">setBackgroundColor</a>( white ); // white background count = 0; - down = FALSE; + down = false; points = new <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a>[MAXPOINTS]; colors = new <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a>[MAXCOLORS]; for ( int i=0; i<MAXCOLORS; i++ ) // init color array @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget() <a name="x1659"></a>void ConnectWidget::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * ) { - down = TRUE; + down = true; count = 0; // start recording points <a href="tqwidget.html#erase">erase</a>(); // erase widget contents } @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ ConnectWidget::~ConnectWidget() <a name="x1660"></a>void ConnectWidget::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent">mouseReleaseEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * ) { - down = FALSE; // done recording points + down = false; // done recording points <a href="tqwidget.html#update">update</a>(); // draw the lines } diff --git a/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html b/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html index 44ff1c3b1..846d1a0c1 100644 --- a/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html +++ b/doc/html/eventsandfilters.html @@ -90,12 +90,12 @@ contain: if ( ke-><a href="tqkeyevent.html#key">key</a>() == Key_Tab ) { // special tab handling here ke-><a href="tqkeyevent.html#accept">accept</a>(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } else if ( evt-><a href="tqevent.html#type">type</a>() >= TQEvent::User ) { <a href="tqcustomevent.html">TQCustomEvent</a> *ce = (TQCustomEvent*) evt; // custom event handling here - return TRUE; + return true; } return TQWidget::event( evt ); } diff --git a/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html b/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html index 4a7526a55..b318495b5 100644 --- a/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html +++ b/doc/html/extension-dialog-example.html @@ -72,16 +72,16 @@ DBFILE = extension.db void MainForm::init() { - sessions = FALSE; - logging = FALSE; + sessions = false; + logging = false; log_filename = <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>; - log_errors = TRUE; - log_actions = TRUE; + log_errors = true; + log_actions = true; } void MainForm::optionsDlg() { - DialogForm *dlg = new DialogForm( this, "dialog", TRUE ); + DialogForm *dlg = new DialogForm( this, "dialog", true ); Extension *ext = (Extension*)dlg->extension()->qt_cast( "Extension" ); if ( !ext ) return; @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ void MainForm::quit() void DialogForm::init() { - extensionShown = FALSE; + extensionShown = false; setExtension( new Extension( this ) ); setOrientation( Vertical ); } diff --git a/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html b/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html index 3333452bb..da10f1b3d 100644 --- a/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html +++ b/doc/html/fileiconview-example.html @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ protected slots: void sortAscending(); void sortDescending(); void arrangeItemsInGrid() { -<a name="x807"></a> TQIconView::<a href="tqiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x807"></a> TQIconView::<a href="tqiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>( true ); } void slotRightPressed( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> *item ); @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ static void cleanup() <a name="f322"></a>TQtFileIconViewItem::TQtFileIconViewItem( TQtFileIconView *parent, TQFileInfo *fi ) <a name="x824"></a><a name="x823"></a> : <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>( parent, fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>() ), itemFileName( fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#filePath">filePath</a>() ), - itemFileInfo( fi ), checkSetText( FALSE ) + itemFileInfo( fi ), checkSetText( false ) { vm = TQtFileIconView::Large; @@ -539,9 +539,9 @@ static void cleanup() if ( itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>() == "." || itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>() == ".." ) - <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( false ); - checkSetText = TRUE; + checkSetText = true; TQObject::<a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( &timer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#iconView">iconView</a>(), TQ_SLOT( openFolder() ) ); @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ static void cleanup() { if ( itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>() ) { <a name="x861"></a> <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> f( p-><a href="tqpainter.html#font">font</a>() ); -<a name="x828"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x828"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( true ); p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f ); } @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem() return; <a name="x821"></a> <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> dir( itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#dir">dir</a>() ); <a name="x814"></a> if ( dir.<a href="tqdir.html#rename">rename</a>( itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>(), text ) ) { -<a name="x822"></a> itemFileName = itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>( TRUE ) + "/" + text; +<a name="x822"></a> itemFileName = itemFileInfo-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>( true ) + "/" + text; delete itemFileInfo; itemFileInfo = new <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a>( itemFileName ); TQIconViewItem::<a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setText">setText</a>( text ); @@ -625,9 +625,9 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem() { if ( type() == Dir && e-><a href="tqdropevent.html#provides">provides</a>( "text/uri-list" ) && dropEnabled() ) - return TRUE; + return true; - return FALSE; + return false; } <a name="x839"></a>void TQtFileIconViewItem::<a href="tqiconviewitem.html#dropped">dropped</a>( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDropEvent</a> *e, const <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><TQIconDragItem> & ) @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem() <a href="tqiconview.html#setGridX">setGridX</a>( 75 ); <a href="tqiconview.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>( Adjust ); - <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( false ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( this, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqiconview.html#doubleClicked">doubleClicked</a>( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( itemDoubleClicked( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * ) ) ); @@ -727,8 +727,8 @@ TQtFileIconViewItem::~TQtFileIconViewItem() <a href="tqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>( AlwaysOff ); <a href="tqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>( Auto ); - <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( TRUE ); - <a href="tqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( true ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( true ); openItem = 0; } @@ -759,22 +759,22 @@ void TQtFileIconView::setDirectory( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> &di void <a name="f305"></a>TQtFileIconView::newDirectory() { - <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( FALSE ); - <a href="tqiconview.html#selectAll">selectAll</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( false ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#selectAll">selectAll</a>( false ); if ( viewDir.mkdir( TQString( "New Folder %1" ).arg( ++newFolderNum ) ) ) { <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a> *fi = new <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a>( viewDir, TQString( "New Folder %1" ).arg( newFolderNum ) ); TQtFileIconViewItem *item = new TQtFileIconViewItem( this, new <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a>( *fi ) ); <a name="x847"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setKey">setKey</a>( TQString( "000000%1" ).arg( fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>() ) ); delete fi; - <a href="tqscrollview.html#repaintContents">repaintContents</a>( <a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsX">contentsX</a>(), contentsY(), contentsWidth(), contentsHeight(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqscrollview.html#repaintContents">repaintContents</a>( <a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsX">contentsX</a>(), contentsY(), contentsWidth(), contentsHeight(), false ); <a href="tqiconview.html#ensureItemVisible">ensureItemVisible</a>( item ); -<a name="x849"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( TRUE, TRUE ); +<a name="x849"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( true, true ); <a href="tqiconview.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( item ); <a href="tqiconview.html#repaintItem">repaintItem</a>( item ); <a name="x808"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#processEvents">processEvents</a>(); <a name="x845"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#rename">rename</a>(); } - <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setAutoArrange">setAutoArrange</a>( true ); } TQDir <a name="f306"></a>TQtFileIconView::currentDir() @@ -786,22 +786,22 @@ static bool isRoot( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> &s ) { #if defined(Q_OS_UNIX) if ( s == "/" ) - return TRUE; + return true; #elif defined(Q_OS_WIN32) <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> p = s; if ( p.<a href="tqstring.html#length">length</a>() == 3 && <a name="x871"></a> p.<a href="tqstring.html#right">right</a>( 2 ) == ":/" ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( p[ 0 ] == '/' && p[ 1 ] == '/' ) { <a name="x867"></a> int slashes = p.<a href="tqstring.html#contains">contains</a>( '/' ); if ( slashes <= 3 ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( slashes == 4 && p[ (int)p.<a href="tqstring.html#length">length</a>() - 1 ] == '/' ) - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } void <a name="f307"></a>TQtFileIconView::readDir( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> &dir ) @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ void <a name="f307"></a>TQtFileIconView::readDir( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQD TQFileInfoListIterator it( *filist ); <a href="tqfileinfo.html">TQFileInfo</a> *fi; - bool allowRename = FALSE, allowRenameSet = FALSE; + bool allowRename = false, allowRenameSet = false; while ( ( fi = it.current() ) != 0 ) { ++it; if ( fi && fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#fileName">fileName</a>() == ".." && ( fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>() == "/" || fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#dirPath">dirPath</a>().isEmpty() ) ) @@ -838,13 +838,13 @@ void <a name="f307"></a>TQtFileIconView::readDir( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQD if ( !allowRenameSet ) { <a name="x820"></a> if ( !TQFileInfo( fi-><a href="tqfileinfo.html#absFilePath">absFilePath</a>() ).isWritable() || <a name="x851"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#text">text</a>() == "." || item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#text">text</a>() == ".." ) - allowRename = FALSE; + allowRename = false; else - allowRename = TRUE; + allowRename = true; if ( item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#text">text</a>() == "." || item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#text">text</a>() == ".." ) - allowRenameSet = FALSE; + allowRenameSet = false; else - allowRenameSet = TRUE; + allowRenameSet = true; } <a name="x848"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( allowRename ); } @@ -886,11 +886,11 @@ void <a name="f308"></a>TQtFileIconView::itemDoubleClicked( <a href="tqiconviewi <a href="tqicondragitem.html">TQIconDragItem</a> id; <a name="x833"></a> id.<a href="tqicondragitem.html#setData">setData</a>( TQCString( item->filename() ) ); drag-><a href="tqicondrag.html#append">append</a>( id, -<a name="x864"></a><a name="x844"></a> TQRect( item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>( FALSE ).x() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>(), -<a name="x865"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>( FALSE ).y() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>(), +<a name="x864"></a><a name="x844"></a> TQRect( item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>( false ).x() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>(), +<a name="x865"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>( false ).y() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>(), item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>().width(), item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#pixmapRect">pixmapRect</a>().height() ), -<a name="x852"></a> TQRect( item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>( FALSE ).x() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>(), - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>( FALSE ).y() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>(), +<a name="x852"></a> TQRect( item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>( false ).x() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#x">x</a>(), + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>( false ).y() - orig.<a href="tqpoint.html#y">y</a>(), item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>().width(), item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#textRect">textRect</a>().height() ), TQString( item->filename() ) ); } @@ -974,22 +974,22 @@ void <a name="f315"></a>TQtFileIconView::flowSouth() void <a name="f316"></a>TQtFileIconView::sortAscending() { - <a href="tqiconview.html#sort">sort</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#sort">sort</a>( true ); } void <a name="f317"></a>TQtFileIconView::sortDescending() { - <a href="tqiconview.html#sort">sort</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#sort">sort</a>( false ); } void <a name="f318"></a>TQtFileIconView::itemTextTruncate() { - <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( false ); } void <a name="f319"></a>TQtFileIconView::itemTextWordWrap() { - <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>( true ); } void <a name="f320"></a>TQtFileIconView::slotRightPressed( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> *item ) @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ void <a name="f320"></a>TQtFileIconView::slotRightPressed( <a href="tqiconviewit menu.<a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Sort &ascending", this, TQ_SLOT( sortAscending() ) ); menu.<a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Sort &descending", this, TQ_SLOT( sortDescending() ) ); -<a name="x875"></a> menu.<a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x875"></a> menu.<a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); <a name="x866"></a> menu.<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#exec">exec</a>( TQCursor::<a href="tqcursor.html#pos">pos</a>() ); } else { // on item <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> menu( this ); @@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ void <a name="f320"></a>TQtFileIconView::slotRightPressed( <a href="tqiconviewit int RENAME_ITEM = menu.<a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Rename Item" ); int REMOVE_ITEM = menu.<a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Remove Item" ); - menu.<a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); + menu.<a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); int id = menu.<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#exec">exec</a>( TQCursor::<a href="tqcursor.html#pos">pos</a>() ); if ( id == -1 ) @@ -1199,11 +1199,11 @@ void <a name="f325"></a>FileMainWindow::setup() { <a href="tqsplitter.html">TQSplitter</a> *splitter = new <a href="tqsplitter.html">TQSplitter</a>( this ); - dirlist = new DirectoryView( splitter, "dirlist", TRUE ); + dirlist = new DirectoryView( splitter, "dirlist", true ); <a name="x886"></a> dirlist-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Name" ); dirlist-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Type" ); Directory *root = new Directory( dirlist, "/" ); -<a name="x887"></a> root-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x887"></a> root-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); <a name="x894"></a> splitter-><a href="tqsplitter.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>( dirlist, TQSplitter::KeepSize ); fileview = new TQtFileIconView( "/", splitter ); @@ -1212,12 +1212,12 @@ void <a name="f325"></a>FileMainWindow::setup() <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setCentralWidget">setCentralWidget</a>( splitter ); <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a> *toolbar = new <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a>( this, "toolbar" ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>( true ); (void)new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( <a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>( " Path: " ), toolbar ); - pathCombo = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( TRUE, toolbar ); -<a name="x880"></a> pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>( TRUE ); + pathCombo = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( true, toolbar ); +<a name="x880"></a> pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>( true ); <a name="x896"></a> toolbar-><a href="tqtoolbar.html#setStretchableWidget">setStretchableWidget</a>( pathCombo ); <a name="x877"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( pathCombo, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ), this, TQ_SLOT ( changePath( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ) ); @@ -1245,13 +1245,13 @@ void <a name="f325"></a>FileMainWindow::setup() <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( fileview, TQ_SIGNAL( readDirDone() ), this, TQ_SLOT( slotReadDirDone() ) ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockLeft, FALSE ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockRight, FALSE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockLeft, false ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockRight, false ); label = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>() ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->addWidget( label, 2, TRUE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->addWidget( label, 2, true ); progress = new <a href="tqprogressbar.html">TQProgressBar</a>( <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>() ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->addWidget( progress, 1, TRUE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->addWidget( progress, 1, true ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( fileview, TQ_SIGNAL( enableUp() ), this, TQ_SLOT( enableUp() ) ); @@ -1267,10 +1267,10 @@ void <a name="f326"></a>FileMainWindow::setPathCombo() { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> dir = <a href="tqwidget.html#caption">caption</a>(); int i = 0; - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; <a name="x878"></a> for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#count">count</a>(); ++i ) { <a name="x882"></a> if ( pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#text">text</a>( i ) == dir) { - found = TRUE; + found = true; break; } } @@ -1331,22 +1331,22 @@ void <a name="f333"></a>FileMainWindow::changePath( const <a href="tqstring.html void <a name="f334"></a>FileMainWindow::enableUp() { -<a name="x897"></a> upButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x897"></a> upButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); } void <a name="f335"></a>FileMainWindow::disableUp() { - upButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + upButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } void <a name="f336"></a>FileMainWindow::enableMkdir() { - mkdirButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + mkdirButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); } void <a name="f337"></a>FileMainWindow::disableMkdir() { - mkdirButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + mkdirButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/forever-example.html b/doc/html/forever-example.html index 3e8a3420c..77b69829a 100644 --- a/doc/html/forever-example.html +++ b/doc/html/forever-example.html @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ void <a name="f366"></a>Forever::updateCaption() <a name="x1048"></a>void Forever::<a href="tqobject.html#timerEvent">timerEvent</a>( <a href="tqtimerevent.html">TQTimerEvent</a> * ) { for ( int i=0; i<100; i++ ) { - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); // repaint, don't erase + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); // repaint, don't erase rectangles++; } } diff --git a/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html b/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html index 0296997c1..82e2fe7da 100644 --- a/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html +++ b/doc/html/ftpclient-example.html @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ commands. The GUI parts are done in the Designer. void FtpMainWindow::init() { stateFtp = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( tr("Unconnected"), statusBar() ); - statusBar()->addWidget( stateFtp, 0, TRUE ); + statusBar()->addWidget( stateFtp, 0, true ); ftp = new <a href="tqftp.html">TQFtp</a>( this ); <a name="x748"></a> connect( ftp, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqftp.html#commandStarted">commandStarted</a>(int)), @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ void FtpMainWindow::uploadFile() 0, this, "upload progress dialog", - TRUE ); + true ); <a name="x752"></a> connect( ftp, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqftp.html#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>(int,int)), <a name="x770"></a> &progress, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>(int,int)) ); connect( ftp, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqftp.html#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>(int,bool)), @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ void FtpMainWindow::downloadFile() 0, this, "download progress dialog", - TRUE ); + true ); connect( ftp, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqftp.html#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>(int,int)), &progress, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>(int,int)) ); connect( ftp, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqftp.html#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>(int,bool)), diff --git a/doc/html/hello-example.html b/doc/html/hello-example.html index d3479116b..1899e304e 100644 --- a/doc/html/hello-example.html +++ b/doc/html/hello-example.html @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ private: void <a name="f474"></a>Hello::animate() { b = (b + 1) & 15; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); } diff --git a/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html b/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html index 3b7df0469..ce7f21e26 100644 --- a/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html +++ b/doc/html/helpsystem-example.html @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ later on. if ( !link.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() ) emit linkClicked( link ); - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html b/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html index 895524ec5..407678f5b 100644 --- a/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html +++ b/doc/html/helpviewer-example.html @@ -217,8 +217,8 @@ private: <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->insertSeparator(); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->insertItem( <a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>("&Help"), help ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, FALSE); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, FALSE); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->setItemEnabled( forwardId, false); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->setItemEnabled( backwardId, false); <a name="x1020"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( browser, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtextbrowser.html#backwardAvailable">backwardAvailable</a>( bool ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( setBackwardAvailable( bool ) ) ); <a name="x1022"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( browser, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtextbrowser.html#forwardAvailable">forwardAvailable</a>( bool ) ), @@ -231,21 +231,21 @@ private: button = new <a href="tqtoolbutton.html">TQToolButton</a>( icon_back, tr("Backward"), "", browser, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqtextbrowser.html#backward">backward</a>()), toolbar ); <a name="x1035"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( browser, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtextbrowser.html#backwardAvailable">backwardAvailable</a>(bool) ), button, TQ_SLOT( <a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(bool) ) ); - button-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + button-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); button = new <a href="tqtoolbutton.html">TQToolButton</a>( icon_forward, tr("Forward"), "", browser, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqtextbrowser.html#forward">forward</a>()), toolbar ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( browser, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtextbrowser.html#forwardAvailable">forwardAvailable</a>(bool) ), button, TQ_SLOT( <a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(bool) ) ); - button-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + button-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); button = new <a href="tqtoolbutton.html">TQToolButton</a>( icon_home, tr("Home"), "", browser, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqtextbrowser.html#home">home</a>()), toolbar ); <a name="x1033"></a> toolbar-><a href="tqtoolbar.html#addSeparator">addSeparator</a>(); - pathCombo = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( TRUE, toolbar ); + pathCombo = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( true, toolbar ); <a name="x981"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( pathCombo, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( pathSelected( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ) ); <a name="x1034"></a> toolbar-><a href="tqtoolbar.html#setStretchableWidget">setStretchableWidget</a>( pathCombo ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>( TRUE ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockLeft, FALSE ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockRight, FALSE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>( true ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockLeft, false ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( DockRight, false ); <a name="x983"></a> pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( home_ ); browser-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); @@ -272,11 +272,11 @@ void <a name="f353"></a>HelpWindow::sourceChanged( const <a href="tqstring.html" <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( "TQt Example - Helpviewer - " + browser-><a href="tqtextedit.html#documentTitle">documentTitle</a>() ) ; if ( !url.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() && pathCombo ) { - bool exists = FALSE; + bool exists = false; int i; <a name="x982"></a> for ( i = 0; i < pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#count">count</a>(); ++i ) { <a name="x985"></a> if ( pathCombo-><a href="tqcombobox.html#text">text</a>( i ) == url ) { - exists = TRUE; + exists = true; break; } } @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ void <a name="f358"></a>HelpWindow::print() { #ifndef TQT_NO_PRINTER <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a> printer( TQPrinter::HighResolution ); -<a name="x1006"></a> printer.<a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x1006"></a> printer.<a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(true); <a name="x1007"></a> if ( printer.<a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>( this ) ) { <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p( &printer ); <a name="x1002"></a> if( !p.<a href="tqpainter.html#isActive">isActive</a>() ) // starting printing failed @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ void <a name="f358"></a>HelpWindow::print() break; <a name="x1005"></a> printer.<a href="tqprinter.html#newPage">newPage</a>(); page++; - } while (TRUE); + } while (true); } #endif } diff --git a/doc/html/i18n-example.html b/doc/html/i18n-example.html index 8d17ef04f..74a055f48 100644 --- a/doc/html/i18n-example.html +++ b/doc/html/i18n-example.html @@ -187,11 +187,11 @@ void <a name="f526"></a>MyWidget::initChoices(TQWidget* parent) class TQVDialog : public <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> { public: - TQVDialog(TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQVDialog(TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0) : <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a>(parent,name,modal,f) { <a href="tqvboxlayout.html">TQVBoxLayout</a>* vb = new <a href="tqvboxlayout.html">TQVBoxLayout</a>(this,8); -<a name="x1938"></a> vb-><a href="tqlayout.html#setAutoAdd">setAutoAdd</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x1938"></a> vb-><a href="tqlayout.html#setAutoAdd">setAutoAdd</a>(true); hb = 0; sm = new <a href="tqsignalmapper.html">TQSignalMapper</a>(this); <a name="x1946"></a> connect(sm,TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqsignalmapper.html#mapped">mapped</a>(int)),this,TQ_SLOT(done(int))); @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv ) lang = argv[1]; if ( argc != 2 || lang == "all" ) { - TQVDialog dlg(0,0,TRUE); + TQVDialog dlg(0,0,true); TQCheckBox* qmb[sizeof(qm)/sizeof(qm[0])]; int r; if ( lang == "all" ) { @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ int main( int argc, char** argv ) } #ifdef USE_I18N_FONT - memorymanager->savePrerenderedFont(font.handle(),FALSE); + memorymanager->savePrerenderedFont(font.handle(),false); #endif // While we run "all", kill them all diff --git a/doc/html/iconview-example.html b/doc/html/iconview-example.html index 2208c85b4..9e83215d8 100644 --- a/doc/html/iconview-example.html +++ b/doc/html/iconview-example.html @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < 3000; i++ ) { <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> *item = new <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a>( &tqiconview, TQString( "Item %1" ).arg( i + 1 ) ); -<a name="x1459"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1459"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); } tqiconview.<a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( "TQt Example - Iconview" ); diff --git a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html index e7160804d..0855451e3 100644 --- a/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/iconview-simple_dd-main-cpp.html @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="f2"></a>DDListBox::DDListBox( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, const char * name, WFlags f ) : <a href="tqlistbox.html">TQListBox</a>( parent, name, f ) { - <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( TRUE ); - dragging = FALSE; + <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( true ); + dragging = false; } @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="x2832"></a>void DDListBox::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *evt ) { TQListBox::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( evt ); - dragging = TRUE; + dragging = true; } @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ if ( dragging ) { <a href="tqdragobject.html">TQDragObject</a> *d = new <a href="tqtextdrag.html">TQTextDrag</a>( currentText(), this ); <a name="x2818"></a> d-><a href="tqdragobject.html#dragCopy">dragCopy</a>(); // do NOT delete d. - dragging = FALSE; + dragging = false; } } @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="x2822"></a>bool DDIconViewItem::<a href="tqiconviewitem.html#acceptDrop">acceptDrop</a>( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> *mime ) const { <a name="x2825"></a> if ( mime-><a href="tqmimesource.html#provides">provides</a>( "text/plain" ) ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ void <a name="f1"></a>DDIconView::slotNewItem( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDrop if ( TQTextDrag::<a href="tqtextdrag.html#decode">decode</a>( evt, label ) ) { DDIconViewItem *item = new DDIconViewItem( this, label ); -<a name="x2824"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2824"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); } } @@ -209,11 +209,11 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) // Populate the TQIconView with icons DDIconViewItem *item; item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Red", TQPixmap( red_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Green", TQPixmap( green_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Blue", TQPixmap( blue_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); return app.<a href="tqapplication.html#exec">exec</a>(); } diff --git a/doc/html/life-example.html b/doc/html/life-example.html index 007905bcd..9cfa6a196 100644 --- a/doc/html/life-example.html +++ b/doc/html/life-example.html @@ -141,14 +141,14 @@ void <a name="f518"></a>LifeWidget::clear() for ( int t = 0; t < 2; t++ ) for ( int i = 0; i < MAXSIZE + 2; i++ ) for ( int j = 0; j < MAXSIZE + 2; j++ ) - cells[t][i][j] = FALSE; + cells[t][i][j] = false; <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); } // We assume that the size will never be beyond the maximum size set -// this is not in general TRUE, but in practice it's good enough for +// this is not in general true, but in practice it's good enough for // this program <a name="x1889"></a>void LifeWidget::<a href="tqframe.html#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>( <a href="tqresizeevent.html">TQResizeEvent</a> * e ) @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ void <a name="f519"></a>LifeWidget::setPoint( int i, int j ) { if ( i < 1 || i > maxi || j < 1 || j > maxi ) return; - cells[current][i][j] = TRUE; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( index2pos(i), index2pos(j), SCALE, SCALE, FALSE ); + cells[current][i][j] = true; + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( index2pos(i), index2pos(j), SCALE, SCALE, false ); } @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ void <a name="f521"></a>LifeWidget::nextGeneration() } } current = !current; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); // repaint without erase + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); // repaint without erase } diff --git a/doc/html/lineedits-example.html b/doc/html/lineedits-example.html index 17f13c7b5..1b6b9f5a4 100644 --- a/doc/html/lineedits-example.html +++ b/doc/html/lineedits-example.html @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ protected slots: <a name="x169"></a> row1-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( label ); // Create a Combobox with three items... - combo1 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + combo1 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); row1-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( combo1 ); <a name="x171"></a> combo1-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Normal" ); combo1-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Password" ); @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ protected slots: row2-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( label ); // A second Combobox with again three items... - combo2 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + combo2 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); row2-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( combo2 ); combo2-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "No Validator" ); combo2-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Integer Validator" ); @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ protected slots: row3-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( label ); // A combo box for setting alignment - combo3 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + combo3 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); row3-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( combo3 ); combo3-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Left" ); combo3-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Centered" ); @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ protected slots: row4-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( label ); // A combo box for choosing an input mask - combo4 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + combo4 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); row4-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( combo4 ); combo4-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "No mask" ); combo4-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Phone number" ); @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ protected slots: (void)new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Read-Only: ", row5 ); // A combo box for setting alignment - combo5 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, row5 ); + combo5 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, row5 ); combo5-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "False" ); combo5-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "True" ); // ...and again the activated() TQ_SIGNAL gets connected with a TQ_SLOT @@ -341,10 +341,10 @@ void <a name="f224"></a>LineEdits::slotReadOnlyChanged( int i ) { switch ( i ) { case 0: -<a name="x178"></a> lined5-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x178"></a> lined5-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( false ); break; case 1: - lined5-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( TRUE ); + lined5-><a href="tqlineedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( true ); break; } diff --git a/doc/html/listbox-example.html b/doc/html/listbox-example.html index 2f806e96b..a976f8ac3 100644 --- a/doc/html/listbox-example.html +++ b/doc/html/listbox-example.html @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ private: this ); <a name="x1428"></a> bg-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#insert">insert</a>( b ); <a name="x1425"></a> v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( b ); -<a name="x1440"></a> b-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1440"></a> b-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a name="x1426"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( b, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>()), this, TQ_SLOT(setNumCols()) ); <a href="tqhboxlayout.html">TQHBoxLayout</a> * h = new <a href="tqhboxlayout.html">TQHBoxLayout</a>; <a name="x1422"></a> v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addLayout">addLayout</a>( h ); @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ private: h-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addSpacing">addSpacing</a>( 100 ); h-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Rows:", this ) ); rows = new <a href="tqspinbox.html">TQSpinBox</a>( this ); -<a name="x1442"></a> rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x1442"></a> rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); h-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( rows ); v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addSpacing">addSpacing</a>( 12 ); @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ private: v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addSpacing">addSpacing</a>( 12 ); <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> * cb = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "Variable-height rows", this ); -<a name="x1429"></a> cb-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1429"></a> cb-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a name="x1427"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( cb, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqbutton.html#toggled">toggled</a>(bool)), this, TQ_SLOT(setVariableHeight(bool)) ); v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( cb ); v-><a href="tqboxlayout.html#addSpacing">addSpacing</a>( 6 ); @@ -226,32 +226,32 @@ ListBoxDemo::~ListBoxDemo() void <a name="f442"></a>ListBoxDemo::setNumRows() { - columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); <a name="x1444"></a><a name="x1435"></a> l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>( rows-><a href="tqspinbox.html#value">value</a>() ); } void <a name="f443"></a>ListBoxDemo::setNumCols() { - columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); - rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); + rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); <a name="x1434"></a> l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#setColumnMode">setColumnMode</a>( columns-><a href="tqspinbox.html#value">value</a>() ); } void <a name="f444"></a>ListBoxDemo::setRowsByHeight() { - columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#setRowMode">setRowMode</a>( TQListBox::FitToHeight ); } void <a name="f445"></a>ListBoxDemo::setColsByWidth() { - columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + columns-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + rows-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#setColumnMode">setColumnMode</a>( TQListBox::FitToWidth ); } @@ -275,12 +275,12 @@ void <a name="f448"></a>ListBoxDemo::setMultiSelection( bool b ) void <a name="f449"></a>ListBoxDemo::sortAscending() { -<a name="x1439"></a> l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#sort">sort</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1439"></a> l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#sort">sort</a>( true ); } void <a name="f450"></a>ListBoxDemo::sortDescending() { - l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#sort">sort</a>( FALSE ); + l-><a href="tqlistbox.html#sort">sort</a>( false ); } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html b/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html index f13c05176..d6e0a0a88 100644 --- a/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html +++ b/doc/html/listboxcombo-example.html @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public: MyListBoxItem() : <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a>() { - setCustomHighlighting( TRUE ); + setCustomHighlighting( true ); } protected: @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ protected: box1-><a href="tqhbox.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>( 5 ); // Create a non-editable Combobox and a label below... - <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a> *cb1 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, box1 ); + <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a> *cb1 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, box1 ); label1 = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box1 ); <a name="x1416"></a><a name="x1404"></a> label1-><a href="tqwidget.html#setMaximumHeight">setMaximumHeight</a>( label1-><a href="tqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>().height() * 2 ); <a name="x1401"></a> label1-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken ); @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ protected: box2-><a href="tqhbox.html#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>( 5 ); // Create an editable Combobox and a label below... - <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a> *cb2 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( TRUE, box2 ); + <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a> *cb2 = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( true, box2 ); label2 = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Current Item: Combobox Item 0", box2 ); label2-><a href="tqwidget.html#setMaximumHeight">setMaximumHeight</a>( label2-><a href="tqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>().height() * 2 ); label2-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken ); diff --git a/doc/html/listviews-example.html b/doc/html/listviews-example.html index 9ce039ad1..8d66ee521 100644 --- a/doc/html/listviews-example.html +++ b/doc/html/listviews-example.html @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ MessageHeader &MessageHeader::operator=( const MessageHeader &mh ) <a name="f208"></a>Folder::Folder( Folder *parent, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> &name ) : <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a>( parent, name ), fName( name ) { - lstMessages.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + lstMessages.setAutoDelete( true ); } // ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -314,16 +314,16 @@ void <a name="f210"></a>FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const <a href="tqobjec <a name="f211"></a>ListViews::ListViews( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name ) : <a href="tqsplitter.html">TQSplitter</a>( TQt::Horizontal, parent, name ) { - lstFolders.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + lstFolders.setAutoDelete( true ); folders = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( this ); -<a name="x147"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#header">header</a>()->setClickEnabled( FALSE ); +<a name="x147"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#header">header</a>()->setClickEnabled( false ); <a name="x141"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Folder" ); initFolders(); setupFolders(); -<a name="x152"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x152"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( true ); <a href="tqsplitter.html#setResizeMode">setResizeMode</a>( folders, TQSplitter::KeepSize ); <a href="tqsplitter.html">TQSplitter</a> *vsplitter = new <a href="tqsplitter.html">TQSplitter</a>( TQt::Vertical, this ); @@ -333,8 +333,8 @@ void <a name="f210"></a>FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const <a href="tqobjec messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Subject" ); messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Date" ); <a name="x150"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setColumnAlignment">setColumnAlignment</a>( 1, TQt::AlignRight ); -<a name="x149"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( TRUE ); -<a name="x155"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x149"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>( true ); +<a name="x155"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>( true ); menu = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( messages ); for( int i = 1; i <= 10; i++ ) menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( TQString( "Context Item %1" ).arg( i ) ); @@ -355,12 +355,12 @@ void <a name="f210"></a>FolderListItem::insertSubFolders( const <a href="tqobjec <a name="x154"></a> messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>( TQListView::Extended ); // some preparations -<a name="x146"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->setOpen( TRUE ); - folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->firstChild()->setOpen( TRUE ); +<a name="x146"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->setOpen( true ); + folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->firstChild()->setOpen( true ); <a name="x151"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->firstChild()->firstChild() ); -<a name="x153"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->firstChild()->firstChild(), TRUE ); +<a name="x153"></a> folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( folders-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>()->firstChild()->firstChild(), true ); - messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>(), TRUE ); + messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">setSelected</a>( messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>(), true ); messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( messages-><a href="tqlistview.html#firstChild">firstChild</a>() ); message-><a href="tqframe.html#setMargin">setMargin</a>( 5 ); diff --git a/doc/html/mdi-example.html b/doc/html/mdi-example.html index 3a94262e9..2d90ad079 100644 --- a/doc/html/mdi-example.html +++ b/doc/html/mdi-example.html @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ const char * filePrintText = "Click this button to print the file you " <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> openIcon, saveIcon; fileTools = new <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a>( this, "file operations" ); - <a href="tqmainwindow.html#addToolBar">addToolBar</a>( fileTools, tr( "File Operations" ), DockTop, TRUE ); + <a href="tqmainwindow.html#addToolBar">addToolBar</a>( fileTools, tr( "File Operations" ), DockTop, true ); openIcon = TQPixmap( fileopen ); TQToolButton * fileOpen @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ const char * filePrintText = "Click this button to print the file you " <a name="x2020"></a> file-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "&Quit", tqApp, TQ_SLOT( <a href="tqapplication.html#closeAllWindows">closeAllWindows</a>() ), CTRL+Key_Q ); windowsMenu = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( this ); -<a name="x2049"></a> windowsMenu-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2049"></a> windowsMenu-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); <a name="x2048"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( windowsMenu, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqpopupmenu.html#aboutToShow">aboutToShow</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( windowsMenuAboutToShow() ) ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->insertItem( "&Windows", windowsMenu ); @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ const char * filePrintText = "Click this button to print the file you " <a href="tqvbox.html">TQVBox</a>* vb = new <a href="tqvbox.html">TQVBox</a>( this ); vb-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Sunken ); ws = new <a href="tqworkspace.html">TQWorkspace</a>( vb ); -<a name="x2092"></a> ws-><a href="tqworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2092"></a> ws-><a href="tqworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>( true ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setCentralWidget">setCentralWidget</a>( vb ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Ready", 2000 ); @@ -347,9 +347,9 @@ void <a name="f544"></a>ApplicationWindow::windowsMenuAboutToShow() <a name="x2093"></a> int tileId = windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("&Tile", ws, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqworkspace.html#tile">tile</a>() ) ); int horTileId = windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>("Tile &Horizontally", this, TQ_SLOT(tileHorizontal() ) ); if ( ws-><a href="tqworkspace.html#windowList">windowList</a>().isEmpty() ) { -<a name="x2033"></a> windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( cascadeId, FALSE ); - windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( tileId, FALSE ); - windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( horTileId, FALSE ); +<a name="x2033"></a> windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( cascadeId, false ); + windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( tileId, false ); + windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( horTileId, false ); } windowsMenu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); TQWidgetList windows = ws-><a href="tqworkspace.html#windowList">windowList</a>(); @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ void <a name="f551"></a>MDIWindow::print( <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a> int pageNo = 1; <a name="x2052"></a> if ( printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>(this) ) { // printer dialog -<a name="x2051"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2051"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ); emit message( "Printing...", 0 ); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p; if ( !p.<a href="tqpainter.html#begin">begin</a>( printer ) ) @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ void <a name="f551"></a>MDIWindow::print( <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a> emit message( msg, 0 ); <a name="x2050"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#newPage">newPage</a>(); page++; - } while (TRUE); + } while (true); } #endif } diff --git a/doc/html/menu-example.html b/doc/html/menu-example.html index e91c9ee22..6084ebc72 100644 --- a/doc/html/menu-example.html +++ b/doc/html/menu-example.html @@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ private: <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( edit ); int undoID = edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "&Undo", this, TQ_SLOT(undo()) ); int redoID = edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "&Redo", this, TQ_SLOT(redo()) ); -<a name="x1873"></a> edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( undoID, FALSE ); - edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( redoID, FALSE ); +<a name="x1873"></a> edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( undoID, false ); + edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( redoID, false ); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>* options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( this ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( options ); @@ -259,19 +259,19 @@ private: <a name="x1883"></a> options-><a href="tqwidget.html#polish">polish</a>(); // adjust system settings <a name="x1882"></a> <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> f = options-><a href="tqwidget.html#font">font</a>(); -<a name="x1860"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setBold">setBold</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1860"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setBold">setBold</a>( true ); boldID = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( new MyMenuItem( "Bold", f ) ); <a name="x1871"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>( CTRL+Key_B, boldID ); <a name="x1868"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#connectItem">connectItem</a>( boldID, this, TQ_SLOT(bold()) ); f = <a href="tqwidget.html#font">font</a>(); -<a name="x1861"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1861"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>( true ); underlineID = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( new MyMenuItem( "Underline", f ) ); options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>( CTRL+Key_U, underlineID ); options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#connectItem">connectItem</a>( underlineID, this, TQ_SLOT(underline()) ); - isBold = FALSE; - isUnderline = FALSE; -<a name="x1880"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + isBold = false; + isUnderline = false; +<a name="x1880"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> *help = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( this ); @@ -372,8 +372,8 @@ void <a name="f507"></a>MenuExample::redo() void <a name="f508"></a>MenuExample::normal() { - isBold = FALSE; - isUnderline = FALSE; + isBold = false; + isUnderline = false; <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> font; <a name="x1865"></a> label-><a href="tqlabel.html#setFont">setFont</a>( font ); <a name="x1872"></a> menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( boldID, isBold ); diff --git a/doc/html/movies-example.html b/doc/html/movies-example.html index e5c0317e0..a210f5229 100644 --- a/doc/html/movies-example.html +++ b/doc/html/movies-example.html @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) if (argc > 1) { // Commandline mode - show movies given on the command line // - bool gui=TRUE; + bool gui=true; for (int arg=1; arg<argc; arg++) { if ( TQString(argv[arg]) == "-i" ) gui = !gui; diff --git a/doc/html/network.html b/doc/html/network.html index ab49f5528..5fda6c5f8 100644 --- a/doc/html/network.html +++ b/doc/html/network.html @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ and operate on URLs. For example, downloading a file from an FTP server to the local filesystem can be done with following code: <p> <pre> <a href="tqurloperator.html">TQUrlOperator</a> op; - op.<a href="tqurloperator.html#copy">copy</a>( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", FALSE ); + op.<a href="tqurloperator.html#copy">copy</a>( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", false ); </pre> <p> And that's all! Of course an implementation of the FTP protocol has to @@ -345,9 +345,9 @@ them, your implementation of <tt>supportedOperations()</tt> should do this: bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> *op ); </pre> -<p> Here you must return TRUE, if the connection is up and okay (this means +<p> Here you must return true, if the connection is up and okay (this means operations on the protocol can be done). If the connection is not okay, -return FALSE and start to try opening it. If you cannot open the +return false and start to try opening it. If you cannot open the connection at all (e.g. because the host is not found), emit a <tt>finished()</tt> signal and set an error code and the <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#State-enum">TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed</a> state to the <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> pointer you get here. diff --git a/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html b/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html index a3f22e7fb..133efa036 100644 --- a/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html +++ b/doc/html/networkprotocol-example.html @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ protected slots: #include <<a href="tqregexp-h.html">tqregexp.h</a>> <a name="f288"></a>Nntp::Nntp() - : <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html">TQNetworkProtocol</a>(), connectionReady( FALSE ), - readGroups( FALSE ), readArticle( FALSE ) + : <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html">TQNetworkProtocol</a>(), connectionReady( false ), + readGroups( false ), readArticle( false ) { // create the command socket and connect to its signals commandSocket = new <a href="tqsocket.html">TQSocket</a>( this ); @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Nntp::~Nntp() // write the command to the socket <a name="x693"></a><a name="x692"></a><a name="x689"></a> commandSocket-><a href="tqsocket.html#writeBlock">writeBlock</a>( cmd.<a href="tqstring.html#latin1">latin1</a>(), cmd.<a href="tqstring.html#length">length</a>() ); - readGroups = TRUE; + readGroups = true; } <a name="x674"></a>void Nntp::<a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#operationGet">operationGet</a>( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> *op ) @@ -170,28 +170,28 @@ Nntp::~Nntp() // read the head of the article cmd = "article " + file + "\r\n"; commandSocket-><a href="tqsocket.html#writeBlock">writeBlock</a>( cmd.<a href="tqstring.html#latin1">latin1</a>(), cmd.<a href="tqstring.html#length">length</a>() ); - readArticle = TRUE; + readArticle = true; } <a name="x673"></a>bool Nntp::<a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#checkConnection">checkConnection</a>( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> * ) { - // we are connected, return TRUE + // we are connected, return true <a name="x670"></a> if ( commandSocket-><a href="tqiodevice.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>() && connectionReady ) - return TRUE; + return true; // seems that there is no chance to connect if ( commandSocket-><a href="tqiodevice.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>() ) - return FALSE; + return false; // don't call connectToHost() if we are already trying to connect <a name="x688"></a> if ( commandSocket-><a href="tqsocket.html#state">state</a>() == TQSocket::Connecting ) - return FALSE; + return false; // start connecting - connectionReady = FALSE; + connectionReady = false; <a name="x680"></a> commandSocket-><a href="tqsocket.html#connectToHost">connectToHost</a>( <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#url">url</a>()->host(), <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#url">url</a>()->port() != -1 ? url()->port() : 119 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } void <a name="f289"></a>Nntp::close() @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ void <a name="f293"></a>Nntp::readyRead() // of the code of the server response was 200, we know that the // server is ready to get commands from us now <a name="x664"></a> if ( s.<a href="tqcstring.html#left">left</a>( 3 ) == "200" ) - connectionReady = TRUE; + connectionReady = true; } void <a name="f294"></a>Nntp::parseGroups() @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ void <a name="f294"></a>Nntp::parseGroups() // if the line starts with a dot, all groups or articles have been listed, // so we finished processing the listChildren() command if ( s[ 0 ] == '.' ) { - readGroups = FALSE; + readGroups = false; <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress">operationInProgress</a>()->setState( StDone ); emit finished( <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress">operationInProgress</a>() ); return; @@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ void <a name="f294"></a>Nntp::parseGroups() <a name="x700"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setName">setName</a>( group ); <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> path = <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#url">url</a>()->path(); <a name="x698"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setDir">setDir</a>( path.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() || path == "/" ); -<a name="x702"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setSymLink">setSymLink</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x702"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setSymLink">setSymLink</a>( false ); <a name="x699"></a><a name="x697"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setFile">setFile</a>( !inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#isDir">isDir</a>() ); -<a name="x703"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setWritable">setWritable</a>( FALSE ); -<a name="x701"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setReadable">setReadable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x703"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setWritable">setWritable</a>( false ); +<a name="x701"></a> inf.<a href="tqurlinfo.html#setReadable">setReadable</a>( true ); // let others know about our new child emit newChild( inf, operationInProgress() ); @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ void <a name="f295"></a>Nntp::parseArticle() // if the line starts with a dot, we finished reading something if ( s[ 0 ] == '.' ) { - readArticle = FALSE; + readArticle = false; <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress">operationInProgress</a>()->setState( StDone ); emit finished( <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#operationInProgress">operationInProgress</a>() ); return; diff --git a/doc/html/outliner-example.html b/doc/html/outliner-example.html index f8c3c4689..7cceda366 100644 --- a/doc/html/outliner-example.html +++ b/doc/html/outliner-example.html @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ private: // div. configuration of the list view <a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "Outlines" ); <a href="tqlistview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( -1 ); - <a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>( true ); // read the XML file and create DOM tree <a href="tqfile.html">TQFile</a> opmlFile( fileName ); diff --git a/doc/html/popup-example.html b/doc/html/popup-example.html index 53f86132b..444fa1b72 100644 --- a/doc/html/popup-example.html +++ b/doc/html/popup-example.html @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ private: <a href="tqlabel.html#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>( AlignCenter ); <a href="tqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>(150,100); moves = 0; - <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); } <a name="x1620"></a>void FancyPopup::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * e){ diff --git a/doc/html/porting.html b/doc/html/porting.html index a9b0bbb56..332628e26 100644 --- a/doc/html/porting.html +++ b/doc/html/porting.html @@ -348,9 +348,9 @@ new code. <li> <a href="tqlistboxitem.html#selected">TQListBoxItem::selected</a>() const <li> <a href="tqlistview.html#removeItem">TQListView::removeItem</a>( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> *item ) <li> <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#removeItem">TQListViewItem::removeItem</a>( TQListViewItem *item ) -<li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#addToolBar">TQMainWindow::addToolBar</a>( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) -<li> TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) -<li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#lineUpToolBars">TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars</a>( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ) +<li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#addToolBar">TQMainWindow::addToolBar</a>( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) +<li> TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) +<li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#lineUpToolBars">TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars</a>( bool keepNewLines = false ) <li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#moveToolBar">TQMainWindow::moveToolBar</a>( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop ) <li> TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ) <li> <a href="tqmainwindow.html#removeToolBar">TQMainWindow::removeToolBar</a>( TQDockWindow *) @@ -360,9 +360,9 @@ new code. <li> <a href="tqmessagebox.html#message">TQMessageBox::message</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & buttonText = <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent = 0, const char *= 0 ) <li> <a href="tqmessagebox.html#query">TQMessageBox::query</a>( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, const TQString & yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString & noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *= 0 ) <li> <a href="tqmessagebox.html#standardIcon">TQMessageBox::standardIcon</a>( Icon icon, GUIStyle style ) -<li> <a href="tqregexp.html#match">TQRegExp::match</a>( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int *len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const +<li> <a href="tqregexp.html#match">TQRegExp::match</a>( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int *len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const <li> <a href="tqscrollview.html#childIsVisible">TQScrollView::childIsVisible</a>( TQWidget *child ) -<li> <a href="tqscrollview.html#showChild">TQScrollView::showChild</a>( TQWidget *child, bool show = TRUE ) +<li> <a href="tqscrollview.html#showChild">TQScrollView::showChild</a>( TQWidget *child, bool show = true ) <li> <a href="tqsimplerichtext.html#draw">TQSimpleRichText::draw</a>( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int x, int y, const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & clipRegion, const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & cg, const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> *paper = 0 ) const <li> <a href="tqstring.html#ascii">TQString::ascii</a>() const <li> <a href="tqstring.html#data">TQString::data</a>() const @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ new code. <li> TQTabDialog::selected( const TQString & tabLabel ) <li> <a href="tqtabdialog.html#setTabEnabled">TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled</a>( const char *name, bool enable ) <li> <a href="tqtextstream.html#TQTextStream">TQTextStream::TQTextStream</a>( TQString & str, int filemode ) -<li> <a href="tqtoolbar.html#TQToolBar">TQToolBar::TQToolBar</a>( const TQString & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char *name = 0 ) +<li> <a href="tqtoolbar.html#TQToolBar">TQToolBar::TQToolBar</a>( const TQString & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char *name = 0 ) <li> <a href="tqtooltip.html#enabled">TQToolTip::enabled</a>() <li> <a href="tqtooltip.html#setEnabled">TQToolTip::setEnabled</a>( bool enable ) <li> <a href="tqtranslator.html#find">TQTranslator::find</a>( const char *context, const char *sourceText, const char *comment = 0 ) const @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ added that forces the old behaviour, to ease porting from TQt 2.x to TQt 3.x. This compatibilty mode can be enabled by passing the TQPrinter::Compatible flag to the TQPrinter constructor. <p> On X11, TQPrinter used to generate encapsulated postscript when -fullPage() was TRUE and only one page was printed. This does not +fullPage() was true and only one page was printed. This does not happen by default anymore, providing a more consistent printing output. <p> <h2> <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> </h2> @@ -557,12 +557,12 @@ characters, e.g. <tt>|</tt>, but it doesn't hurt.) <p> Wildcard patterns need no conversion. Here are two examples: <pre> <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> wild( "(*.*)" ); - wild.<a href="tqregexp.html#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( TRUE ); + wild.<a href="tqregexp.html#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( true ); </pre> <pre> - // TRUE as third argument means wildcard - <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> wild( "(*.*)", FALSE, TRUE ); + // true as third argument means wildcard + <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> wild( "(*.*)", false, true ); </pre> However, when they are used, make sure to use <a href="tqregexp.html#exactMatch">TQRegExp::exactMatch</a>() @@ -576,8 +576,8 @@ string. Old code such as <pre> <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> rx( "alpha" ); - rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>( FALSE ); - rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( TRUE ); + rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>( false ); + rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( true ); rx = "beta"; </pre> @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ which is what one expects. parameter list and was poorly named: <ul> <li> bool <a href="tqregexp.html#match">TQRegExp::match</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = 0, -int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const +int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const </ul> It will be removed in a future version of TQt. Its <a href="tqregexp.html#match">documentation</a> explains how to replace it. <p> <h3> TQRegExp::find() diff --git a/doc/html/progress-example.html b/doc/html/progress-example.html index 0f4c11248..bceb007e2 100644 --- a/doc/html/progress-example.html +++ b/doc/html/progress-example.html @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ public: cl_id = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Custom label", this, TQ_SLOT(customLabel()) ); options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); md_id = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "No minimum duration", this, TQ_SLOT(toggleMinimumDuration()) ); -<a name="x81"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x81"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); loopDriven(); defaultLabel(); @@ -219,34 +219,34 @@ public slots: draw(drawItemRects(id)); } - void stopDrawing() { got_stop = TRUE; } + void stopDrawing() { got_stop = true; } void timerDriven() { - timer_driven = TRUE; -<a name="x71"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( td_id, TRUE ); - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( ld_id, FALSE ); + timer_driven = true; +<a name="x71"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( td_id, true ); + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( ld_id, false ); } void loopDriven() { - timer_driven = FALSE; - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( ld_id, TRUE ); - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( td_id, FALSE ); + timer_driven = false; + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( ld_id, true ); + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( td_id, false ); } void defaultLabel() { - default_label = TRUE; - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( dl_id, TRUE ); - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( cl_id, FALSE ); + default_label = true; + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( dl_id, true ); + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( cl_id, false ); } void customLabel() { - default_label = FALSE; - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( dl_id, FALSE ); - options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( cl_id, TRUE ); + default_label = false; + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( dl_id, false ); + options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>( cl_id, true ); } void toggleMinimumDuration() @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ private: pb-><a href="tqprogressdialog.html#setProgress">setProgress</a>( pb-><a href="tqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>() ); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p(this); p.<a href="tqpainter.html#fillRect">fillRect</a>(0, 0, width(), height(), backgroundColor()); - enableDrawingItems(TRUE); + enableDrawingItems(true); killTimers(); delete pb; pb = 0; @@ -317,15 +317,15 @@ private: } rects = n; pb = newProgressDialog("Drawing rectangles.\n" - "Using timer event.", n, FALSE); + "Using timer event.", n, false); pb-><a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>("Please Wait"); <a name="x82"></a> connect(pb, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqprogressdialog.html#cancelled">cancelled</a>()), this, TQ_SLOT(stopDrawing())); - enableDrawingItems(FALSE); + enableDrawingItems(false); startTimer(0); - got_stop = FALSE; + got_stop = false; } else { <a href="tqprogressdialog.html">TQProgressDialog</a>* lpb = newProgressDialog( - "Drawing rectangles.\nUsing loop.", n, TRUE); + "Drawing rectangles.\nUsing loop.", n, true); lpb-><a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>("Please Wait"); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p(this); diff --git a/doc/html/progressbar-example.html b/doc/html/progressbar-example.html index d5ef1c61c..5497aeaa1 100644 --- a/doc/html/progressbar-example.html +++ b/doc/html/progressbar-example.html @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ protected slots: <a href="tqgridlayout.html">TQGridLayout</a>* toplayout = new <a href="tqgridlayout.html">TQGridLayout</a>( <a href="tqwidget.html#layout">layout</a>(), 2, 2, 5); - <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>( true ); // insert three radiobuttons which the user can use // to set the speed of the progress and two pushbuttons @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ protected slots: <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( &timer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQ_SLOT( slotTimeout() ) ); // Let's start with normal speed... -<a name="x972"></a> normal-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x972"></a> normal-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); // some contraints @@ -176,9 +176,9 @@ void <a name="f347"></a>ProgressBar::slotStart() progress-><a href="tqprogressbar.html#setTotalSteps">setTotalSteps</a>( 50 ); // disable the speed-radiobuttons -<a name="x973"></a> slow-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - normal-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); - fast-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x973"></a> slow-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + normal-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); + fast-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); } // If the progress is not running... @@ -209,12 +209,12 @@ void <a name="f348"></a>ProgressBar::slotReset() // rename the start/pause/continue button to Start... start-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( "&Start" ); // ...and enable this button - start-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + start-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); // enable the speed-radiobuttons - slow-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); - normal-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); - fast-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + slow-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); + normal-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); + fast-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); // reset the progressbar <a name="x967"></a> progress-><a href="tqprogressbar.html#reset">reset</a>(); @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ void <a name="f349"></a>ProgressBar::slotTimeout() // ...rename the start/pause/continue button to Start... start-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( "&Start" ); // ...and disable it... - start-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + start-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); // ...and return return; } diff --git a/doc/html/properties.html b/doc/html/properties.html index 51ab9e86f..41ebe0210 100644 --- a/doc/html/properties.html +++ b/doc/html/properties.html @@ -68,8 +68,8 @@ from the class in which the property is defined. function calls are equivalent: <p> <pre> // TQButton *b and TQObject *o point to the same button - b->setDown( TRUE ); - o->setProperty( "down", TRUE ); + b->setDown( true ); + o->setProperty( "down", true ); </pre> <p> Equivalent, that is, except that the first is faster, and provides @@ -154,16 +154,16 @@ enum is best handled with <tt>TQ_SETS</tt>, rather than <tt>TQ_ENUMS</tt>. state (which may have changed since initialization). The function must return void and take no arguments. <p> <tt>DESIGNABLE</tt> declares whether this property is suitable for -modification by a GUI design tool. The default is <tt>TRUE</tt> for -writable properties; otherwise <tt>FALSE</tt>. Instead of <tt>TRUE</tt> or <tt>FALSE</tt>, you can specify a boolean member function. +modification by a GUI design tool. The default is <tt>true</tt> for +writable properties; otherwise <tt>false</tt>. Instead of <tt>true</tt> or <tt>false</tt>, you can specify a boolean member function. <p> <tt>SCRIPTABLE</tt> declares whether this property is suited for access by a -scripting engine. The default is <tt>TRUE</tt>. Instead of <tt>TRUE</tt> or <tt>FALSE</tt>, +scripting engine. The default is <tt>true</tt>. Instead of <tt>true</tt> or <tt>false</tt>, you can specify a boolean member function. <p> <tt>STORED</tt> declares whether the property's value must be remembered when storing an object's state. Stored makes only sense for writable -properties. The default value is <tt>TRUE</tt>. Technically superfluous +properties. The default value is <tt>true</tt>. Technically superfluous properties (like <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> pos if <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> geometry is already a property) -define this to be <tt>FALSE</tt>. +define this to be <tt>false</tt>. <p> Connected to the property system is an additional macro, "TQ_CLASSINFO", that can be used to attach additional name/value-pairs to a class' meta object, for example: diff --git a/doc/html/propertydocs b/doc/html/propertydocs index 81478984e..044fee66c 100644 --- a/doc/html/propertydocs +++ b/doc/html/propertydocs @@ -54,10 +54,10 @@ text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text. <name>TQAction::on</name> <doc href="tqaction.html#on-prop"> <p>This property holds whether a toggle action is on. -<p>This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and +<p>This property is always on (true) for command actions and <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>s; <a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() has no effect on them. For action's -where <a href="tqaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is TRUE, this property's default value is -off (FALSE). +where <a href="tqaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is true, this property's default value is +off (false). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqaction.html#setOn">setOn</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqaction.html#isOn">isOn</a>(). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ toplevel parent widget provides. <name>TQAction::text</name> <doc href="tqaction.html#text-prop"> <p>This property holds the action's descriptive text. -<p>If <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is TRUE, the text appears as a +<p>If <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is true, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text. @@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ defined. There is no default text. <p>A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply -executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE. +executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is false. <p> In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and "Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> with the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop">TQActionGroup::exclusive</a> property set to -TRUE. +true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqaction.html#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>(). </doc> @@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ text. <name>TQAction::visible</name> <doc href="tqaction.html#visible-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars). -<p>If <em>visible</em> is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and -toolbars) and chosen by the user; if <em>visible</em> is FALSE the +<p>If <em>visible</em> is true the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and +toolbars) and chosen by the user; if <em>visible</em> is false the action cannot be seen or chosen by the user. <p> Actions which are not visible are <em>not</em> grayed out; they do not appear at all. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see <name>TQActionGroup::exclusive</name> <doc href="tqactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the action group does exclusive toggling. -<p>If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the action group +<p>If exclusive is true only one toggle action in the action group can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ property. calls to their <a href="tqaction.html#setVisible">TQAction::setVisible</a>(), <a href="tqaction.html#setEnabled">TQAction::setEnabled</a>(), and <a href="tqaction.html#setDisabled">TQAction::setDisabled</a>() functions to have no effect. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqactiongroup.html#setUsesDropDown">setUsesDropDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqactiongroup.html#usesDropDown">usesDropDown</a>(). </doc> @@ -214,9 +214,9 @@ effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default. <name>TQButton::down</name> <doc href="tqbutton.html#down-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the button is pressed. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals +<p>If this property is true, the button is pressed down. The signals <a href="tqbutton.html#pressed">pressed</a>() and <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() are not emitted if you set this property -to TRUE. The default is FALSE. +to true. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqbutton.html#setDown">setDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqbutton.html#isDown">isDown</a>(). </doc> @@ -225,9 +225,9 @@ to TRUE. The default is FALSE. <name>TQButton::exclusiveToggle</name> <doc href="tqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle. -<p>If this property is TRUE and the button is in a <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>, the +<p>If this property is true and the button is in a <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>, the button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqbutton.html#isExclusiveToggle">isExclusiveToggle</a>(). </doc> @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ defined by the text. <name>TQButton::toggleButton</name> <doc href="tqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the button is a toggle button. -<p>The default value is FALSE. +<p>The default value is false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqbutton.html#isToggleButton">isToggleButton</a>(). </doc> @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ to be repainted. <name>TQButtonGroup::exclusive</name> <doc href="tqbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the button group is exclusive. -<p>If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are +<p>If this property is true, then the buttons in the group are toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button -in the group. The default value is FALSE. +in the group. The default value is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>(). </doc> @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ in the group. The default value is FALSE. <name>TQButtonGroup::radioButtonExclusive</name> <doc href="tqbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive. -<p>If this property is TRUE (the default), the <a href="tqradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively. +<p>If this property is true (the default), the <a href="tqradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#isRadioButtonExclusive">isRadioButtonExclusive</a>(). </doc> @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ off. <name>TQCheckBox::checked</name> <doc href="tqcheckbox.html#checked-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is checked. -<p>The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE. +<p>The default is unchecked, i.e. false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqcheckbox.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>(). </doc> @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ off. <name>TQCheckBox::tristate</name> <doc href="tqcheckbox.html#tristate-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox. -<p>The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE. +<p>The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqcheckbox.html#setTristate">setTristate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqcheckbox.html#isTristate">isTristate</a>(). </doc> @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ off. <doc href="tqcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop"> <p>This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled. <p>This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for -non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default. +non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is false by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqcombobox.html#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqcombobox.html#autoCompletion">autoCompletion</a>(). </doc> @@ -364,8 +364,8 @@ non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default. <name>TQComboBox::autoResize</name> <doc href="tqcombobox.html#autoResize-prop"> <p>This property holds whether auto resize is enabled. <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself -whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE. +<p> If this property is set to true then the combobox will resize itself +whenever its contents change. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqcombobox.html#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqcombobox.html#autoResize">autoResize</a>(). </doc> @@ -406,9 +406,9 @@ combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the <a href="tqcombobox.html#inser is not <a href="tqcombobox.html#Policy-enum">NoInsertion</a>), then what happens is this: <ul> <li> If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted. -<li> If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the +<li> If the text is in the list and this property is true (the default), the text is inserted. -<li> If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text +<li> If the text is in the list and this property is false, the text is <em>not</em> inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes the current item. </ul> @@ -423,8 +423,8 @@ setting. <name>TQComboBox::editable</name> <doc href="tqcombobox.html#editable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the combobox is editable. -<p>This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be -cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style +<p>This property's default is false. Note that the combobox will be +cleared if this property is set to true for a 1.x Motif style combobox. To avoid this, use <a href="tqcombobox.html#setEditable">setEditable</a>() before inserting any items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance @@ -466,12 +466,12 @@ than lines, a scrollbar is added. <name>TQDataBrowser::autoEdit</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits. -<p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins +<p>The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: <p> <ul> -<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE -<li> the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE +<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true +<li> the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is false </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>(). @@ -492,10 +492,10 @@ emitted indicating the current position of the default cursor. <name>TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations. -<p>If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the +<p>If this property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all cancels -occur immediately. The default is FALSE. +occur immediately. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>(). @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ occur immediately. The default is FALSE. <name>TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions, +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms deletions, otherwise deletions happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ otherwise deletions happen immediately. <name>TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms edits. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms all edit operations (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ reimplementing the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit< <name>TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions, +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms insertions, otherwise insertions happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ otherwise insertions happen immediately. <name>TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms updates. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms updates, otherwise updates happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ a SQL WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword, e.g. "id>1000", <name>TQDataBrowser::readOnly</name> <doc href="tqdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the browser is read-only. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser +<p>The default is false, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser is read-only, no database edits will be allowed. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>(). @@ -600,12 +600,12 @@ over a copy, e.g. <name>TQDataTable::autoEdit</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits. -<p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins +<p>The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: <p> <ol type=1> -<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE -<li> the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE +<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true +<li> the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is false </ol> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdatatable.html#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdatatable.html#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>(). @@ -615,10 +615,10 @@ when they navigate to another record: <name>TQDataTable::confirmCancels</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations. -<p>If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be +<p>If the confirmCancel property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all -cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE. +cancels occur immediately. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdatatable.html#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>(). @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE. <name>TQDataTable::confirmDelete</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations. -<p>If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be +<p>If the confirmDelete property is true, all deletions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all delete operations occur immediately. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ delete operations occur immediately. <name>TQDataTable::confirmEdits</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations. -<p>If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all +<p>If the confirmEdits property is true, the data table confirms all edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a> and <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCanc <name>TQDataTable::confirmInsert</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations. -<p>If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be +<p>If the confirmInsert property is true, all insertions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all insert operations occur immediately. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ insert operations occur immediately. <name>TQDataTable::confirmUpdate</name> <doc href="tqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations. -<p>If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be +<p>If the confirmUpdate property is true, all updates must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all update operations occur immediately. @@ -775,9 +775,9 @@ table. The default value is "True". <name>TQDateEdit::autoAdvance</name> <doc href="tqdateedit.html#autoAdvance-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section. -<p>If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance +<p>If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date section if a user has completed a section. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdateedit.html#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdateedit.html#autoAdvance">autoAdvance</a>(). </doc> @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ between each notch. <name>TQDial::notchesVisible</name> <doc href="tqdial.html#notchesVisible-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the notches are shown. -<p>If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are +<p>If true, the notches are shown. If false (the default) notches are not shown. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdial.html#setNotchesVisible">setNotchesVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdial.html#notchesVisible">notchesVisible</a>(). @@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ page step is different from the previous setting. <name>TQDial::tracking</name> <doc href="tqdial.html#tracking-prop"> <p>This property holds whether tracking is enabled. -<p>If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the +<p>If true (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be moved with the mouse. @@ -943,10 +943,10 @@ moved with the mouse. <name>TQDial::wrapping</name> <doc href="tqdial.html#wrapping-prop"> <p>This property holds whether wrapping is enabled. -<p>If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be +<p>If true, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be turned around 360. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of the dial which is skipped by the arrow. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdial.html#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdial.html#wrapping">wrapping</a>(). </doc> @@ -1024,12 +1024,12 @@ choices are <a href="tqdockwindow.html#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>, &l <doc href="tqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable. <p>A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call -<a href="tqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). +<a href="tqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(true) or <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>. <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isHorizontallyStretchable">isHorizontallyStretchable</a>(). @@ -1039,7 +1039,7 @@ proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. <name>TQDockWindow::movingEnabled</name> <doc href="tqdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window. -<p>This property is TRUE by default. +<p>This property is true by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>(). </doc> @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. <name>TQDockWindow::newLine</name> <doc href="tqdockwindow.html#newLine-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new +<p>The default is false, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new line in the dock area. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setNewLine">setNewLine</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#newLine">newLine</a>(). @@ -1067,7 +1067,7 @@ line in the dock area. <name>TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving</name> <doc href="tqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved. -<p>If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be +<p>If this property is false, (the default), the dock window will be represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems @@ -1084,8 +1084,8 @@ in a future release. handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window when floating. <p> A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if -you call <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). -<p> This property is FALSE by default. +you call <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). +<p> This property is false by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop">verticallyStretchable</a> and <a href="tqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop">horizontallyStretchable</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isResizeEnabled">isResizeEnabled</a>(). @@ -1101,7 +1101,7 @@ you call <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled< <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isStretchable">isStretchable</a>(). @@ -1112,12 +1112,12 @@ proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. <doc href="tqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable. <p>A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call -<a href="tqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). +<a href="tqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(true) or <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>. <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isVerticallyStretchable">isVerticallyStretchable</a>(). @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. <name>TQFileDialog::contentsPreview</name> <doc href="tqfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() and <a href="tqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#isContentsPreviewEnabled">isContentsPreviewEnabled</a>(). @@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. <name>TQFileDialog::infoPreview</name> <doc href="tqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#isInfoPreviewEnabled">isInfoPreviewEnabled</a>(). </doc> @@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ iterate over a copy, e.g. <name>TQFileDialog::showHiddenFiles</name> <doc href="tqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop"> <p>This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files. +<p>The default is false, i.e. don't show hidden files. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setShowHiddenFiles">setShowHiddenFiles</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles">showHiddenFiles</a>(). </doc> @@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ usually to the left. <name>TQGroupBox::checkable</name> <doc href="tqgroupbox.html#checkable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the +<p>If this property is true, the group box has a checkbox. If the checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's children are enabled. <p> <a href="tqgroupbox.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() controls whether or not the group box has a @@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ This produces "<u>U</u>ser information"; Alt+U moves the <a href= <name>TQHeader::moving</name> <doc href="tqheader.html#moving-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the header sections can be moved. -<p>If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections. +<p>If this property is true (the default) the user can move sections. If the user moves a section the <a href="tqheader.html#indexChange">indexChange</a>() signal is emitted. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqheader.html#setClickEnabled">setClickEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqheader.html#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(). @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect. while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized), otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at the end of resizing. -<p> Tracking defaults to FALSE. +<p> Tracking defaults to false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqheader.html#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqheader.html#tracking">tracking</a>(). </doc> @@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ the end of resizing. <name>TQIconView::autoArrange</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#autoArrange-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of insertion, TQIconView defers all position-related work until it is shown and then calls <a href="tqiconview.html#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>(). @@ -1633,7 +1633,7 @@ normal icon view background is used. <name>TQIconView::itemsMovable</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#setItemsMovable">setItemsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#itemsMovable">itemsMovable</a>(). </doc> @@ -1681,8 +1681,8 @@ See <a href="tqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a>. <name>TQIconView::showToolTips</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#showToolTips-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text. -<p>The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if -<a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is TRUE, as it is by default. +<p>The default is true. Note that this has no effect if +<a href="tqiconview.html#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is true, as it is by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>(). </doc> @@ -1691,8 +1691,8 @@ See <a href="tqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a>. <name>TQIconView::sortDirection</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#sortDirection-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;. -<p>The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only -meaningful if both <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="tqiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are TRUE. +<p>The default is true (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only +meaningful if both <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="tqiconview.html#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are true. <p> To set the sort direction, use <a href="tqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>() <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#sortDirection">sortDirection</a>(). @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ meaningful if both <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() a <name>TQIconView::sorting</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#sorting-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion. +<p>The default is false, i.e. no sorting on insertion. <p> To set the sorting, use <a href="tqiconview.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>(). <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>(). @@ -1722,8 +1722,8 @@ meaningful if both <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting">sorting</a>() a <name>TQIconView::wordWrapIconText</name> <doc href="tqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long. -<p>The default is TRUE. -<p> If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is +<p>The default is true. +<p> If this property is false, icon text that is too long is truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ equivalent. <name>TQLCDNumber::numDigits</name> <doc href="tqlcdnumber.html#numDigits-prop"> <p>This property holds the current number of digits displayed. -<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="tqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is FALSE, the decimal point occupies +<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="tqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is false, the decimal point occupies one digit position. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>. @@ -1811,9 +1811,9 @@ one digit position. <name>TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</name> <doc href="tqlcdnumber.html#smallDecimalPoint-prop"> <p>This property holds the style of the decimal point. -<p>If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. +<p>If true the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn -in a digit position. The default is FALSE. +in a digit position. The default is false. <p> The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal point is drawn between the digits. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlcdnumber.html#mode-prop">mode</a>. @@ -1842,7 +1842,7 @@ otherwise they are ignored. The <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">DontClip ignored. <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> applies to both rich text and plain text labels. The <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">BreakAnywhere</a> flag is not supported in TQLabel. <p> If the label has a buddy, the <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flag is forced to -TRUE. +true. <p> The default alignment is <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs</tt> if the label doesn't have a buddy and <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix</tt> if the label has a buddy. If the label contains rich text, additionally <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> is turned on. @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ of the widget's current <a href="tqwidget.html#font">font</a>(). <p>This property holds the label's pixmap. <p>If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap. <p> Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the -label if <a href="tqlabel.html#autoResize">TQLabel::autoResize</a>() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator, +label if <a href="tqlabel.html#autoResize">TQLabel::autoResize</a>() is true. The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlabel.html#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlabel.html#pixmap">pixmap</a>(). @@ -1887,7 +1887,7 @@ if any, is disabled. <p>This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space. <p>When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the pixmap to fill the available space. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlabel.html#scaledContents-prop">scaledContents</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlabel.html#setScaledContents">setScaledContents</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlabel.html#hasScaledContents">hasScaledContents</a>(). @@ -2049,8 +2049,8 @@ frame. <name>TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText</name> <doc href="tqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop"> <p>This property holds whether there is any text selected. -<p>hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been -selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p>hasSelectedText() returns true if some or all of the text has been +selected by the user; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlineedit.html#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>(). @@ -2127,16 +2127,16 @@ string length. <doc href="tqlineedit.html#modified-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user. <p>The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value -of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line +of false and is changed to true whenever the user changes the line edit's contents. <p> This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() -returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the +returns false (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value. <p> Calling <a href="tqlineedit.html#clearModified">clearModified</a>() or <a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>() resets the modified flag to -FALSE. +false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqlineedit.html#isModified">isModified</a>(). </doc> @@ -2179,7 +2179,7 @@ but cannot edit it. <p>This property holds the line edit's text. <p>Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and -resets the <a href="tqlineedit.html#modified-prop">modified</a> property to FALSE. The text is not +resets the <a href="tqlineedit.html#modified-prop">modified</a> property to false. The text is not validated when inserted with <a href="tqlineedit.html#setText">setText</a>(). <p> The text is truncated to <a href="tqlineedit.html#maxLength">maxLength</a>() length. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlineedit.html#insert">insert</a>(). @@ -2241,10 +2241,10 @@ and the list box scrolled as necessary. <p> <p>This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode. <p>Consider using the <a href="tqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">TQListBox::selectionMode</a> property instead of this property. -<p> When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and -to Single selection mode if set to FALSE. -<p> When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in -Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is +<p> When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to true and +to Single selection mode if set to false. +<p> When getting this property, true is returned if the list box is in +Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and false if it is in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>. @@ -2346,10 +2346,10 @@ in the list box. <name>TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus</name> <doc href="tqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop"> <p>This property holds whether items should show <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> using all columns. -<p>If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection +<p>If this property is true all columns will show focus and selection states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus. -<p> The default is FALSE. -<p> Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable +<p> The default is false. +<p> Setting this to true if it's not necessary may cause noticeable flicker. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus">allColumnsShowFocus</a>(). @@ -2435,7 +2435,7 @@ undefined. <doc href="tqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items. <p>Open/close signs are small <b>+</b> or <b>-</b> symbols in windows -style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE. +style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated">rootIsDecorated</a>(). </doc> @@ -2455,11 +2455,11 @@ style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE. <name>TQListView::showSortIndicator</name> <doc href="tqlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator. -<p>If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the +<p>If this property is true, an arrow is drawn in the header of the list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents. The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is -FALSE (don't show an indicator). +false (don't show an indicator). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqheader.html#setSortIndicator">TQHeader::setSortIndicator</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#showSortIndicator">showSortIndicator</a>(). @@ -2469,7 +2469,7 @@ FALSE (don't show an indicator). <name>TQListView::showToolTips</name> <doc href="tqlistview.html#showToolTips-prop"> <p>This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqlistview.html#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>(). </doc> @@ -2489,14 +2489,14 @@ views. <name>TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable</name> <doc href="tqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dock windows are movable. -<p>If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock +<p>If true (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the <tt>TearOff</tt> area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a> area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area. -<p> If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows. +<p> If false the user will not be able to move any dock windows. <p> By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can be changed with <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>(). @@ -2509,9 +2509,9 @@ be changed with <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMovin <name>TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving</name> <doc href="tqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop"> <p>This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely. -<p>If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely +<p>If true the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is -being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently, +being moved. If false (the default) they are shown transparently, (i.e. as an outline rectangle). <p> <b>Warning:</b> Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this @@ -2541,7 +2541,7 @@ right-justify its dock windows. <name>TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps</name> <doc href="tqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop"> <p>This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled. -<p>If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; +<p>If false (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; otherwise big pixmaps will be used. <p> Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup, @@ -2571,7 +2571,7 @@ and for connecting to the main window's widget's <doc href="tqmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop"> <p>This property holds the popup orientation. <p>The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the -screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up". +screen. By setting the property to true, the menu will pop "up". You might call this for menus that are <em>below</em> the document to which they refer. <p> If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is @@ -2719,7 +2719,7 @@ for unnamed objects, you can call name( 0 ). <name>TQPopupMenu::checkable</name> <doc href="tqpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. -<p>When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. +<p>When true, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">TQMenuData::setItemChecked</a>(). @@ -2731,7 +2731,7 @@ Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style. <doc href="tqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered. <p>Changing this property sets <a href="tqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle</a> -to FALSE. The default is TRUE. +to false. The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#setCenterIndicator">setCenterIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator">centerIndicator</a>(). </doc> @@ -2740,7 +2740,7 @@ to FALSE. The default is TRUE. <name>TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle</name> <doc href="tqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#setIndicatorFollowsStyle">setIndicatorFollowsStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>(). @@ -2750,7 +2750,7 @@ to FALSE. The default is TRUE. <name>TQProgressBar::percentageVisible</name> <doc href="tqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a> and <a href="tqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#setPercentageVisible">setPercentageVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible">percentageVisible</a>(). @@ -2788,7 +2788,7 @@ indicator. <name>TQProgressDialog::autoClose</name> <doc href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>(). -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop">autoReset</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#setAutoClose">setAutoClose</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoClose">autoClose</a>(). @@ -2798,7 +2798,7 @@ indicator. <name>TQProgressDialog::autoReset</name> <doc href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the progress dialog calls <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>(). -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop">autoClose</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#setAutoReset">setAutoReset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoReset">autoReset</a>(). @@ -2879,14 +2879,14 @@ don't use a TQProgressDialog inside a <a href="tqwidget.html#paintEvent">p <name>TQPushButton::autoDefault</name> <doc href="tqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto +<p>If this property is set to true then the push button is the auto default button in a dialog. <p> In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons may have a slightly larger size hint. -<p> This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> -parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. +<p> This property's default is true for buttons that have a <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> +parent; otherwise it defaults to false. <p> See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> property for details of how <a href="tqpushbutton.html#default-prop">default</a> and auto-default interact. @@ -2897,7 +2897,7 @@ auto-default interact. <name>TQPushButton::default</name> <doc href="tqpushbutton.html#default-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the push button is the default button. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be +<p>If this property is set to true then the push button will be pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog. <p> Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if @@ -2912,7 +2912,7 @@ button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame <p> The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">setDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqpushbutton.html#isDefault">isDefault</a>(). </doc> @@ -2921,7 +2921,7 @@ Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus. <name>TQPushButton::flat</name> <doc href="tqpushbutton.html#flat-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the border is disabled. -<p>This property's default is FALSE. +<p>This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqpushbutton.html#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqpushbutton.html#isFlat">isFlat</a>(). </doc> @@ -2939,7 +2939,7 @@ Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus. <name>TQPushButton::menuButton</name> <doc href="tqpushbutton.html#menuButton-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it. <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push +<p> If this property is set to true, then a down arrow is drawn on the push button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the arrow. @@ -2952,7 +2952,7 @@ arrow. <p>This property holds whether the radio button is checked. <p>This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they have been placed in the same <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>. The default value is -FALSE (unchecked). +false (unchecked). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqradiobutton.html#isChecked">isChecked</a>(). </doc> @@ -3078,10 +3078,10 @@ the slider. <name>TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll</name> <doc href="tqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop"> <p>This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView +<p>If this property is set to true (the default), the TQScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this -works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE +works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying false disables this autoscroll feature. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Enabling this property might not be enough to effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in @@ -3698,7 +3698,7 @@ frame and the outermost pixel of the pages. <name>TQTable::columnMovingEnabled</name> <doc href="tqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user. -<p>The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding +<p>The default is false. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by @@ -3763,7 +3763,7 @@ see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a> <name>TQTable::rowMovingEnabled</name> <doc href="tqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user. -<p>The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding +<p>The default is false. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by @@ -3869,8 +3869,8 @@ if present, otherwise an empty string. <name>TQTextEdit::linkUnderline</name> <doc href="tqtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop"> <p>This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined. -<p>If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed -underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined. +<p>If true (the default) hypertext links will be displayed +underlined. If false links will not be displayed underlined. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#setLinkUnderline">setLinkUnderline</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#linkUnderline">linkUnderline</a>(). </doc> @@ -3887,9 +3887,9 @@ underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined. <name>TQTextEdit::overwriteMode</name> <doc href="tqtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop"> <p>This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode. -<p>If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted +<p>If false (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If -TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by +true, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor position. @@ -3912,7 +3912,7 @@ text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush. <p>This property holds whether the text edit is read-only. <p>In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the text and select text; modifying the text is not possible. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>(). </doc> @@ -3933,7 +3933,7 @@ text and select text; modifying the text is not possible. <doc href="tqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop"> <p>This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input. <p>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks -the focus chain. The default is FALSE. +the focus chain. The default is false. <p> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#setTabChangesFocus">setTabChangesFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus">tabChangesFocus</a>(). </doc> @@ -4003,7 +4003,7 @@ is 100. <doc href="tqtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled. <p>When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared. -<p> The default is TRUE. +<p> The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#setUndoRedoEnabled">setUndoRedoEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtextedit.html#isUndoRedoEnabled">isUndoRedoEnabled</a>(). </doc> @@ -4051,9 +4051,9 @@ text edit at which text should be wrapped. <name>TQTimeEdit::autoAdvance</name> <doc href="tqtimeedit.html#autoAdvance-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section. -<p>If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance +<p>If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next time section if a user has completed a section. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtimeedit.html#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtimeedit.html#autoAdvance">autoAdvance</a>(). </doc> @@ -4133,7 +4133,7 @@ caption. There is no default label text. <name>TQToolButton::autoRaise</name> <doc href="tqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop"> <p>This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled. -<p>The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE). +<p>The default is disabled (i.e. false). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#setAutoRaise">setAutoRaise</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise">autoRaise</a>(). </doc> @@ -4186,7 +4186,7 @@ too. There is no default text. <p>TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant signal in the <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> in which it resides. We strongly recommend that you use <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() instead. -<p> This property's default is TRUE. +<p> This property's default is true. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get the geometry right. @@ -4198,7 +4198,7 @@ the geometry right. <name>TQToolButton::usesTextLabel</name> <doc href="tqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p> TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> in which is resides. @@ -4209,7 +4209,7 @@ signal in the <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> in which <name>TQToolTipGroup::delay</name> <doc href="tqtooltipgroup.html#delay-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the display of the group text is delayed. -<p>If set to TRUE (the default), the group text is displayed at the +<p>If set to true (the default), the group text is displayed at the same time as the tool tip. Otherwise, the group text is displayed immediately when the cursor enters the widget. @@ -4220,7 +4220,7 @@ immediately when the cursor enters the widget. <name>TQToolTipGroup::enabled</name> <doc href="tqtooltipgroup.html#enabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether tool tips in the group are enabled. -<p>This property's default is TRUE. +<p>This property's default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqtooltipgroup.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqtooltipgroup.html#enabled">enabled</a>(). </doc> @@ -4229,7 +4229,7 @@ immediately when the cursor enters the widget. <name>TQWidget::acceptDrops</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop"> <p>This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget. -<p>Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this +<p>Setting this property to true announces to the system that this widget <em>may</em> be able to accept drop events. <p> If the widget is the desktop (<a href="tqwidget.html#isDesktop">TQWidget::isDesktop</a>()), this may fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call @@ -4246,7 +4246,7 @@ Do not modify this property in a Drag&Drop event handler. <p>This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget. <p>Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of -recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, +recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to true, <a href="tqwidget.html#updateMask">updateMask</a>() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to <a href="tqwidget.html#setMask">setMask</a>()) or nothing @@ -4410,7 +4410,7 @@ on top-level widgets. <name>TQWidget::customWhatsThis</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually. -<p>The default implementation of <a href="tqwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns FALSE, +<p>The default implementation of <a href="tqwidget.html#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns false, which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This mode. <p> The widget may leave What's This mode by calling @@ -4573,7 +4573,7 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry. <name>TQWidget::hidden</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#hidden-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden. -<p>If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its +<p>If false, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="tqwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="tqwidget.html#shown-prop">shown</a>. @@ -4608,7 +4608,7 @@ text has been set, this functions returns <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-nul <p>This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget. <p>Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default. -<p> If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE. +<p> If a widget handles text input it should set this property to true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqwidget.html#setInputMethodEnabled">setInputMethodEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqwidget.html#isInputMethodEnabled">isInputMethodEnabled</a>(). </doc> @@ -4619,7 +4619,7 @@ the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default. <p>This property holds whether this widget is the active window. <p>The active window is the window that contains the widget that has <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>. -<p> When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the +<p> When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the active window <em>and</em> for the popup. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#setActiveWindow">setActiveWindow</a>() and <a href="tqapplication.html#activeWindow">TQApplication::activeWindow</a>(). @@ -4824,7 +4824,7 @@ events even if no buttons are pressed. <name>TQWidget::ownCursor</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#ownCursor-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">cursor</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqwidget.html#ownCursor">ownCursor</a>(). @@ -4834,7 +4834,7 @@ events even if no buttons are pressed. <name>TQWidget::ownFont</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#ownFont-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own font. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's font. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#font-prop">font</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqwidget.html#ownFont">ownFont</a>(). @@ -4844,7 +4844,7 @@ events even if no buttons are pressed. <name>TQWidget::ownPalette</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#ownPalette-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#palette-prop">palette</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="tqwidget.html#ownPalette">ownPalette</a>(). @@ -4958,7 +4958,7 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry. <name>TQWidget::shown</name> <doc href="tqwidget.html#shown-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the widget is shown. -<p>If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its +<p>If true, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#show">show</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="tqwidget.html#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="tqwidget.html#hidden-prop">hidden</a>. @@ -5073,9 +5073,9 @@ short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during large changes. <p> Example: <pre> - <a href="tqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( false ); bigVisualChanges(); - <a href="tqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( true ); <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); </pre> @@ -5186,11 +5186,11 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry. <name>TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled</name> <doc href="tqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop"> <p>This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child +<p>If this property is set to true, it is possible to resize child windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is -set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible +set to false (the default), resizing windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="tqworkspace.html#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="tqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled">scrollBarsEnabled</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/qmag-example.html b/doc/html/qmag-example.html index 632655a37..fab66e0ca 100644 --- a/doc/html/qmag-example.html +++ b/doc/html/qmag-example.html @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ private: int yoffset; // pixels in addition to the actual picture int z; // magnification factor int r; // autorefresh rate (index into refreshrates) - bool grabbing; // TRUE if qmag is currently grabbing + bool grabbing; // true if qmag is currently grabbing int grabx, graby; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> multifn; // filename for multisave }; @@ -131,12 +131,12 @@ static const int timer[] = { #ifdef COMPLEX_GUI int w=0, x=0, n; - zoom = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + zoom = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>(zoom); <a name="x1773"></a> zoom-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertStrList">insertStrList</a>( zoomfactors, 9 ); <a name="x1772"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( zoom, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>(int)), TQ_SLOT(setZoom(int)) ); - refresh = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( FALSE, this ); + refresh = new <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>( false, this ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>(refresh); refresh-><a href="tqcombobox.html#insertStrList">insertStrList</a>( refreshrates, 9 ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( refresh, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqcombobox.html#activated">activated</a>(int)), TQ_SLOT(setRefresh(int)) ); @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ static const int timer[] = { 10+saveButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#fontMetrics">fontMetrics</a>().width("Save"), 20 ); multiSaveButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( this ); -<a name="x1790"></a> multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setToggleButton">setToggleButton</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x1790"></a> multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setToggleButton">setToggleButton</a>(true); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>(multiSaveButton); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( multiSaveButton, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>()), this, TQ_SLOT(multiSave()) ); multiSaveButton-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( "MultiSave" ); @@ -202,9 +202,9 @@ static const int timer[] = { #endif grabx = graby = -1; - grabbing = FALSE; + grabbing = false; - <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); // and do let me know what pixel I'm at, eh? + <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); // and do let me know what pixel I'm at, eh? <a name="x1765"></a> grabAround( TQPoint(grabx=tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#desktop">desktop</a>()->width()/2, graby=tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#desktop">desktop</a>()->height()/2) ); } @@ -247,11 +247,11 @@ void <a name="f488"></a>MagWidget::multiSave() multifn = ""; // stops saving multifn = TQFileDialog::<a href="tqfiledialog.html#getSaveFileName">getSaveFileName</a>(); if ( multifn.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() ) -<a name="x1789"></a> multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>(FALSE); +<a name="x1789"></a> multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>(false); if ( !r ) p.<a href="tqpixmap.html#save">save</a>( multifn, "BMP" ); } else { - multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>(FALSE); + multiSaveButton-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>(false); } } @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ void <a name="f489"></a>MagWidget::grab() <a name="x1787"></a> pm = p.<a href="tqpixmap.html#xForm">xForm</a>( m ); <a name="x1770"></a> if ( !multiSaveButton || !multiSaveButton-><a href="tqbutton.html#isOn">isOn</a>() ) - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); // and finally repaint, flicker-free + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); // and finally repaint, flicker-free } @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ void <a name="f489"></a>MagWidget::grab() <a name="x1801"></a>void MagWidget::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *e ) { if ( !grabbing ) { // prepare to grab... - grabbing = TRUE; + grabbing = true; <a href="tqobject.html#killTimers">killTimers</a>(); <a href="tqwidget.html#grabMouse">grabMouse</a>( crossCursor ); grabx = -1; @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ void <a name="f489"></a>MagWidget::grab() <a name="x1802"></a>void MagWidget::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent">mouseReleaseEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * e ) { if ( grabbing && grabx >= 0 && graby >= 0 ) { - grabbing = FALSE; + grabbing = false; grabAround(e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#pos">pos</a>()); <a href="tqwidget.html#releaseMouse">releaseMouse</a>(); } diff --git a/doc/html/qmake-manual-8.html b/doc/html/qmake-manual-8.html index 8081044c4..28ca4a039 100644 --- a/doc/html/qmake-manual-8.html +++ b/doc/html/qmake-manual-8.html @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ count( MYVAR, 3 ) { <p>This function will execute <tt>command</tt> in a secondary shell and will succeed if the command exits with an exit status of 1. You can check the return value of this function using a scope.</p> <p>For example:</p> <pre> - system(ls /bin):HAS_BIN=FALSE + system(ls /bin):HAS_BIN=false </pre> <h4><a name="5-8"></a>message( string )</h4> <p>This function will always succeed, and will display the given <em>string</em> to the user.</p> diff --git a/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html b/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html index d5bf06a5b..00d64f7c8 100644 --- a/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html +++ b/doc/html/qt-template-lib.html @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ must be valid). For example: v2[5] = 5; bool b = tqEqual( v1.<a href="tqvaluevector.html#begin">begin</a>(), v2.<a href="tqvaluevector.html#end">end</a>(), v2.<a href="tqvaluevector.html#begin">begin</a>() ); - // b == TRUE + // b == true </pre> <p> <a name="qCopy"></a> diff --git a/doc/html/qwerty-example.html b/doc/html/qwerty-example.html index 44b208c0a..a4c2c2b58 100644 --- a/doc/html/qwerty-example.html +++ b/doc/html/qwerty-example.html @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ private: #include <<a href="tqtextcodec-h.html">tqtextcodec.h</a>> -const bool no_writing = FALSE; +const bool no_writing = false; static TQPtrList<TQTextCodec> *codecList = 0; @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ enum { Uni = 0, MBug = 1, Lat1 = 2, Local = 3, Guess = 4, Codec = 5 }; edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); edit-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "&Select Font" , this, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqwidget.html#font">font</a>()), ALT+Key_T ); #endif - changed = FALSE; + changed = false; e = new <a href="tqmultilineedit.html">TQMultiLineEdit</a>( this, "editor" ); <a name="x400"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( e, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqtextedit.html#textChanged">textChanged</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( textChanged() ) ); @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ void Editor::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& fileName, int <a name="x363"></a> if ( !f.<a href="tqfile.html#open">open</a>( <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadOnly</a> ) ) return; -<a name="x376"></a> e-><a href="tqmultilineedit.html#setAutoUpdate">setAutoUpdate</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x376"></a> e-><a href="tqmultilineedit.html#setAutoUpdate">setAutoUpdate</a>( false ); <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> t(&f); if ( code >= Codec ) @@ -281,11 +281,11 @@ void Editor::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& fileName, int <a name="x401"></a><a name="x398"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( t.<a href="tqtextstream.html#read">read</a>() ); <a name="x362"></a> f.<a href="tqfile.html#close">close</a>(); - e-><a href="tqmultilineedit.html#setAutoUpdate">setAutoUpdate</a>( TRUE ); + e-><a href="tqmultilineedit.html#setAutoUpdate">setAutoUpdate</a>( true ); <a name="x407"></a> e-><a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( fileName ); - changed = FALSE; + changed = false; } void <a name="f239"></a>Editor::openAsEncoding( int code ) @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ bool <a name="f240"></a>Editor::save() <a name="x366"></a> <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> fn = TQFileDialog::<a href="tqfiledialog.html#getSaveFileName">getSaveFileName</a>( TQString::null, TQString::null, this ); if ( !fn.<a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() ) return saveAs( fn ); - return FALSE; + return false; #endif } @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ bool <a name="f243"></a>Editor::saveAs( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</ TQMessageBox::<a href="tqmessagebox.html#warning">warning</a>(this,"I/O Error", TQString("The file could not be opened.\n\n") +fileName); - return FALSE; + return false; } <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> t(&f); if ( code >= Codec ) @@ -369,15 +369,15 @@ bool <a name="f243"></a>Editor::saveAs( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</ <a name="x399"></a> t << e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#text">text</a>(); f.<a href="tqfile.html#close">close</a>(); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( fileName ); - changed = FALSE; - return TRUE; + changed = false; + return true; } void <a name="f244"></a>Editor::print() { #ifndef TQT_NO_PRINTER if ( printer.setup(this) ) { // opens printer dialog - printer.setFullPage(TRUE); // we'll set our own margins + printer.setFullPage(true); // we'll set our own margins <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p; p.<a href="tqpainter.html#begin">begin</a>( &printer ); // paint on printer <a name="x385"></a> p.<a href="tqpainter.html#setFont">setFont</a>( e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#font">font</a>() ); @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ void <a name="f246"></a>Editor::toLower() void <a name="f247"></a>Editor::textChanged() { - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/richtext-example.html b/doc/html/richtext-example.html index 311f415bb..3fad61d62 100644 --- a/doc/html/richtext-example.html +++ b/doc/html/richtext-example.html @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ static const char* sayings[] = { bPrev = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "<< &Prev", buttons ); bNext = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "&Next >>", buttons ); -<a name="x466"></a> bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x466"></a> bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); <a name="x462"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( bClose, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() ), tqApp, TQ_SLOT( <a href="tqapplication.html#quit">quit</a>() ) ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( bPrev, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( prev() ) ); @@ -198,9 +198,9 @@ void <a name="f256"></a>MyRichText::prev() view-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( sayings[num] ); if ( num == 0 ) - bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); - bNext-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + bNext-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); } void <a name="f257"></a>MyRichText::next() @@ -211,9 +211,9 @@ void <a name="f257"></a>MyRichText::next() view-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( sayings[num] ); if ( !sayings[num + 1] ) - bNext-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + bNext-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); - bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + bPrev-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( true ); } diff --git a/doc/html/rot-example.html b/doc/html/rot-example.html index 77227cde3..a629b19e7 100644 --- a/doc/html/rot-example.html +++ b/doc/html/rot-example.html @@ -117,17 +117,17 @@ private: void <a name="f433"></a>Rot13::changeLeft() { -<a name="x1371"></a> left-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1371"></a> left-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( true ); <a name="x1374"></a><a name="x1373"></a> left-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( rot13( right-><a href="tqtextedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ); - left-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( FALSE ); + left-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( false ); } void <a name="f434"></a>Rot13::changeRight() { - right-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( TRUE ); + right-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( true ); right-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( rot13( left-><a href="tqtextedit.html#text">text</a>() ) ); - right-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( FALSE ); + right-><a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( false ); } diff --git a/doc/html/scribble-example.html b/doc/html/scribble-example.html index a82937778..b11b09d23 100644 --- a/doc/html/scribble-example.html +++ b/doc/html/scribble-example.html @@ -157,11 +157,11 @@ protected slots: #include <<a href="tqpopupmenu-h.html">tqpopupmenu.h</a>> #include <<a href="tqintdict-h.html">tqintdict.h</a>> -const bool no_writing = FALSE; +const bool no_writing = false; <a name="f338"></a>Canvas::Canvas( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name ) : <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>( parent, name, WStaticContents ), pen( TQt::red, 3 ), polyline(3), - mousePressed( FALSE ), buffer( <a href="tqwidget.html#width">width</a>(), height() ) + mousePressed( false ), buffer( <a href="tqwidget.html#width">width</a>(), height() ) { <a name="x907"></a><a name="x906"></a> if ((tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#argc">argc</a>() > 0) && !buffer.load(tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#argv">argv</a>()[1])) @@ -181,18 +181,18 @@ void <a name="f339"></a>Canvas::save( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> void <a name="f340"></a>Canvas::clearScreen() { buffer.fill( <a href="tqwidget.html#colorGroup">colorGroup</a>().base() ); - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( false ); } <a name="x949"></a>void Canvas::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *e ) { - mousePressed = TRUE; + mousePressed = true; polyline[2] = polyline[1] = polyline[0] = e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#pos">pos</a>(); } <a name="x950"></a>void Canvas::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent">mouseReleaseEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> * ) { - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } <a name="x948"></a>void Canvas::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *e ) @@ -279,14 +279,14 @@ void <a name="f342"></a>Scribble::slotSave() { <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> *menu = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( 0 ); <a href="tqintdict.html">TQIntDict</a><TQString> formats; -<a name="x924"></a> formats.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x924"></a> formats.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); for ( unsigned int i = 0; i < TQImageIO::<a href="tqimageio.html#outputFormats">outputFormats</a>().count(); i++ ) { <a name="x911"></a> <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> str = TQString( TQImageIO::<a href="tqimageio.html#outputFormats">outputFormats</a>().at( i ) ); <a name="x912"></a> formats.<a href="tqintdict.html#insert">insert</a>( menu-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( TQString( "%1..." ).arg( str ) ), new <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>( str ) ); } -<a name="x953"></a> menu-><a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x953"></a> menu-><a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); <a name="x947"></a><a name="x946"></a><a name="x923"></a> int id = menu-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#exec">exec</a>( bSave-><a href="tqwidget.html#mapToGlobal">mapToGlobal</a>( TQPoint( 0, bSave-><a href="tqwidget.html#height">height</a>() + 1 ) ) ); if ( id != -1 ) { diff --git a/doc/html/scrollview-example.html b/doc/html/scrollview-example.html index a9d8d4a43..60802ccc2 100644 --- a/doc/html/scrollview-example.html +++ b/doc/html/scrollview-example.html @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ public: vp_options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menubar ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( vp_options ); -<a name="x644"></a> vp_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x644"></a> vp_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); menubar-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "&ScrollView", vp_options ); <a name="x642"></a> connect( vp_options, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#activated">activated</a>(int)), this, TQ_SLOT(doVPMenuItem(int)) ); @@ -269,13 +269,13 @@ public: vp = new <a href="tqscrollview.html">TQScrollView</a>(this); <a name="x655"></a> BigShrinker *bs = new BigShrinker(0);//(vp-><a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>()); <a name="x645"></a> vp-><a href="tqscrollview.html#addChild">addChild</a>(bs); -<a name="x659"></a> bs-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x659"></a> bs-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>(true); TQObject::<a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>(bs, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked(int,int)), <a name="x646"></a> vp, TQ_SLOT(<a href="tqscrollview.html#center">center</a>(int,int))); } else { vp = new BigMatrix(this); if ( technique == 3 ) -<a name="x648"></a> vp-><a href="tqscrollview.html#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x648"></a> vp-><a href="tqscrollview.html#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(true); srand(1); for (int i=0; i<30; i++) { <a href="tqmultilineedit.html">TQMultiLineEdit</a> *l = new <a href="tqmultilineedit.html">TQMultiLineEdit</a>(vp-><a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>(),"First"); @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ public: f_options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menubar ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( f_options ); - f_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + f_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); menubar-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "F&rame", f_options ); connect( f_options, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#activated">activated</a>(int)), this, TQ_SLOT(doFMenuItem(int)) ); @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ public: f_options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); lw_options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menubar ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( lw_options ); - lw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + lw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); for (int lw = 1; lw <= max_lw; lw++) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> str; str.<a href="tqstring.html#sprintf">sprintf</a>("%d Pixels", lw); @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ public: this, TQ_SLOT(doFMenuItem(int)) ); mlw_options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menubar ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( mlw_options ); - mlw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + mlw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); for (int mlw = 0; mlw <= max_mlw; mlw++) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> str; str.<a href="tqstring.html#sprintf">sprintf</a>("%d Pixels", mlw); @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ public: this, TQ_SLOT(doFMenuItem(int)) ); mw_options = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( menubar ); <a href="tqapplication.html#TQ_CHECK_PTR">TQ_CHECK_PTR</a>( mw_options ); - mw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + mw_options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); for (int mw = 0; mw <= max_mw; mw++) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> str; str.<a href="tqstring.html#sprintf">sprintf</a>("%d Pixels", mw); diff --git a/doc/html/session.html b/doc/html/session.html index 85e6d1315..6fd4e72cd 100644 --- a/doc/html/session.html +++ b/doc/html/session.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ globally unique, so no clashes will occur. (See <a href="tqsessionmanager.html"> information on saving/restoring the state of a particular TQt application.) <p> Restoration is usually done in the application's main() -function. Check if <a href="tqapplication.html#isSessionRestored">TQApplication::isSessionRestored</a>() is <tt>TRUE</tt>. If +function. Check if <a href="tqapplication.html#isSessionRestored">TQApplication::isSessionRestored</a>() is <tt>true</tt>. If that's the case, use the session identifier <a href="tqapplication.html#sessionId">TQApplication::sessionId</a>() again to access your state data and restore the state of the application. <p> <strong>Important:</strong> In order to allow the window manager to diff --git a/doc/html/showimg-example.html b/doc/html/showimg-example.html index c44642cf7..93f34acd1 100644 --- a/doc/html/showimg-example.html +++ b/doc/html/showimg-example.html @@ -231,8 +231,8 @@ private slots: ss = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Smooth scaling" ); cc = options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">insertItem</a>( "Use color context" ); <a name="x1309"></a> if ( TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#colorSpec">colorSpec</a>() == TQApplication::ManyColor ) -<a name="x1331"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( cc, FALSE ); -<a name="x1342"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1331"></a> options-><a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>( cc, false ); +<a name="x1342"></a> options-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); setMenuItemFlags(); menubar-><a href="tqmenudata.html#insertSeparator">insertSeparator</a>(); @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ private slots: status-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::WinPanel | TQFrame::Sunken ); <a name="x1354"></a> status-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFixedHeight">setFixedHeight</a>( <a href="tqwidget.html#fontMetrics">fontMetrics</a>().height() + 4 ); - <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ); } ImageViewer::~ImageViewer() @@ -399,12 +399,12 @@ void <a name="f408"></a>ImageViewer::updateStatus() int nalpha=0; for (i=0; i<256; i++) - alpha[i] = FALSE; + alpha[i] = false; for (i=0; i<image.numColors(); i++) { int alevel = image.color(i) >> 24; if (!alpha[alevel]) { - alpha[alevel] = TRUE; + alpha[alevel] = true; nalpha++; } } @@ -473,13 +473,13 @@ void <a name="f412"></a>ImageViewer::openFile() format was unknown it will resize the widget to fit the errorText message (see above) displayed in the current font. - Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded. + Returns true if the image was successfully loaded. */ bool <a name="f413"></a>ImageViewer::loadImage( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& fileName ) { filename = fileName; - bool ok = FALSE; + bool ok = false; if ( !filename.isEmpty() ) { <a name="x1312"></a> TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#setOverrideCursor">setOverrideCursor</a>( waitCursor ); // this might take time ok = image.load(filename, 0); @@ -515,9 +515,9 @@ bool <a name="f413"></a>ImageViewer::loadImage( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQ bool <a name="f414"></a>ImageViewer::reconvertImage() { - bool success = FALSE; + bool success = false; - if ( image.isNull() ) return FALSE; + if ( image.isNull() ) return false; if ( alloc_context ) { TQColor::<a href="tqcolor.html#destroyAllocContext">destroyAllocContext</a>( alloc_context ); @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ bool <a name="f414"></a>ImageViewer::reconvertImage() pmScaled = TQPixmap(); scale(); <a href="tqwidget.html#resize">resize</a>( <a href="tqwidget.html#width">width</a>(), height() ); - success = TRUE; // load successful + success = true; // load successful } else { pm.resize(0,0); // couldn't load image } @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ bool <a name="f414"></a>ImageViewer::reconvertImage() if ( useColorContext() ) <a name="x1315"></a> TQColor::<a href="tqcolor.html#leaveAllocContext">leaveAllocContext</a>(); - return success; // TRUE if loaded OK + return success; // true if loaded OK } bool <a name="f415"></a>ImageViewer::smooth() const @@ -622,10 +622,10 @@ bool <a name="f418"></a>ImageViewer::convertEvent( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">T x = nx; y = ny; updateStatus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } void ImageViewer::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *e ) @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ void ImageViewer::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>( <a if (convertEvent(e,pickx,picky)) { updateStatus(); <a name="x1334"></a> if ((e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#state">state</a>()&LeftButton)) { - may_be_other = FALSE; + may_be_other = false; if ( clickx >= 0 && other) { copyFrom(other); } @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ void <a name="f419"></a>ImageViewer::giveHelp() helptext += "</blockquote>"; helpmsg = new <a href="tqmessagebox.html">TQMessageBox</a>( "Help", helptext, - TQMessageBox::Information, TQMessageBox::Ok, 0, 0, 0, 0, FALSE ); + TQMessageBox::Information, TQMessageBox::Ok, 0, 0, 0, 0, false ); } <a name="x1317"></a> helpmsg-><a href="tqdialog.html#show">show</a>(); <a name="x1352"></a> helpmsg-><a href="tqwidget.html#raise">raise</a>(); @@ -719,17 +719,17 @@ ImageViewer* ImageViewer::other = 0; void <a name="f421"></a>ImageViewer::hFlip() { - setImage(image.mirror(TRUE,FALSE)); + setImage(image.mirror(true,false)); } void <a name="f422"></a>ImageViewer::vFlip() { - setImage(image.mirror(FALSE,TRUE)); + setImage(image.mirror(false,true)); } void <a name="f423"></a>ImageViewer::rot180() { - setImage(image.mirror(TRUE,TRUE)); + setImage(image.mirror(true,true)); } void <a name="f424"></a>ImageViewer::copy() diff --git a/doc/html/simple-application-example.html b/doc/html/simple-application-example.html index d8e2a0ae7..712672f9b 100644 --- a/doc/html/simple-application-example.html +++ b/doc/html/simple-application-example.html @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ void <a name="f462"></a>ApplicationWindow::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">T <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> ts( &f ); <a name="x1589"></a><a name="x1586"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( ts.<a href="tqtextstream.html#read">read</a>() ); -<a name="x1585"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x1585"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( fileName ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Loaded document " + fileName, 2000 ); } @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ void <a name="f463"></a>ApplicationWindow::save() t << text; f.<a href="tqfile.html#close">close</a>(); - e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); + e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( filename ); @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ void <a name="f464"></a>ApplicationWindow::saveAs() void <a name="f465"></a>ApplicationWindow::print() { -<a name="x1568"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1568"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ); <a name="x1569"></a> if ( printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>(this) ) { // printer dialog <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing..." ); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p; @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ void <a name="f465"></a>ApplicationWindow::print() break; <a name="x1567"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#newPage">newPage</a>(); page++; - } while (TRUE); + } while (true); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing completed", 2000 ); } else { diff --git a/doc/html/simple-application.html b/doc/html/simple-application.html index 91df8c6f2..d64717d40 100644 --- a/doc/html/simple-application.html +++ b/doc/html/simple-application.html @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ error message in the statusbar. <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> ts( &f ); e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( ts.<a href="tqtextstream.html#read">read</a>() ); - e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); + e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( fileName ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Loaded document " + fileName, 2000 ); } @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ filename has been specified so far, the <a href="#saveAs()">saveAs()</a> functio Note that there is more than one way to do this: compare the above <tt>statusBar()->message()</tt> line with the equivalent code in the <tt>load()</tt> function. -<p> <pre> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); +<p> <pre> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); </pre> <p> Tell the editor that the contents haven't been edited since the last save. When the user does some further editing and wishes to close the @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ and implicitly changes the window system caption to the new name. <p> <a name="printer"></a> <p> <pre> void ApplicationWindow::print() { - printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ); + printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ); if ( printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>(this) ) { // printer dialog <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing..." ); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p; @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ and implicitly changes the window system caption to the new name. break; printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#newPage">newPage</a>(); page++; - } while (TRUE); + } while (true); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing completed", 2000 ); } else { diff --git a/doc/html/simple-font-demo-example.html b/doc/html/simple-font-demo-example.html index 194dd96bb..59ba5677e 100644 --- a/doc/html/simple-font-demo-example.html +++ b/doc/html/simple-font-demo-example.html @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ private: italicsButton = new <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>( "Italics", this, "pushbutton3" ); - italicsButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( TQFont( "lucida", 12, TQFont::Bold, TRUE ) ); + italicsButton-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( TQFont( "lucida", 12, TQFont::Bold, true ) ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( italicsButton, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>() ), this, TQ_SLOT( setItalics() ) ); @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ void <a name="f591"></a>Viewer::setDefault() <a name="x2843"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setPointSize">setPointSize</a>( 24 ); <a name="x2846"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setWeight">setWeight</a>( TQFont::Bold ); -<a name="x2845"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2845"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>( true ); greetings-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( font ); @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ void <a name="f593"></a>Viewer::setItalics() <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> font( "Tokyo" ); font.<a href="tqfont.html#setPointSize">setPointSize</a>( 32 ); font.<a href="tqfont.html#setWeight">setWeight</a>( TQFont::Bold ); -<a name="x2842"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2842"></a> font.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( true ); greetings-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFont">setFont</a>( font ); diff --git a/doc/html/simple_dd-example.html b/doc/html/simple_dd-example.html index 5234a03fa..fb831b198 100644 --- a/doc/html/simple_dd-example.html +++ b/doc/html/simple_dd-example.html @@ -183,8 +183,8 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="f589"></a>DDListBox::DDListBox( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, const char * name, WFlags f ) : <a href="tqlistbox.html">TQListBox</a>( parent, name, f ) { - <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( TRUE ); - dragging = FALSE; + <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>( true ); + dragging = false; } @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="x2832"></a>void DDListBox::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *evt ) { TQListBox::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( evt ); - dragging = TRUE; + dragging = true; } @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ if ( dragging ) { <a href="tqdragobject.html">TQDragObject</a> *d = new <a href="tqtextdrag.html">TQTextDrag</a>( currentText(), this ); <a name="x2818"></a> d-><a href="tqdragobject.html#dragCopy">dragCopy</a>(); // do NOT delete d. - dragging = FALSE; + dragging = false; } } @@ -227,8 +227,8 @@ const char* green_icon[]={ <a name="x2822"></a>bool DDIconViewItem::<a href="tqiconviewitem.html#acceptDrop">acceptDrop</a>( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> *mime ) const { <a name="x2825"></a> if ( mime-><a href="tqmimesource.html#provides">provides</a>( "text/plain" ) ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ void <a name="f588"></a>DDIconView::slotNewItem( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDr if ( TQTextDrag::<a href="tqtextdrag.html#decode">decode</a>( evt, label ) ) { DDIconViewItem *item = new DDIconViewItem( this, label ); -<a name="x2824"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2824"></a> item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); } } @@ -280,11 +280,11 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) // Populate the TQIconView with icons DDIconViewItem *item; item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Red", TQPixmap( red_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Green", TQPixmap( green_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); item = new DDIconViewItem( iv, "Blue", TQPixmap( blue_icon ) ); - item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>( true ); return app.<a href="tqapplication.html#exec">exec</a>(); } diff --git a/doc/html/small-table-example-example.html b/doc/html/small-table-example-example.html index 9515ea06f..1559eba9c 100644 --- a/doc/html/small-table-example-example.html +++ b/doc/html/small-table-example-example.html @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) <a name="x2798"></a> header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 0, TQObject::tr( "Tiny" ), 40 ); header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 1, TQObject::tr( "Checkboxes" ) ); header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 5, TQObject::tr( "Combos" ) ); -<a name="x2802"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x2802"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>(true); <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> img( qtlogo_xpm ); <a name="x2801"></a><a name="x2799"></a> <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> pix = img.<a href="tqimage.html#scaleHeight">scaleHeight</a>( table.<a href="tqtable.html#rowHeight">rowHeight</a>(3) ); @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) comboEntries << "one" << "two" << "three" << "four"; for ( int i = 0; i < numRows; ++i ){ - <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a> * item = new <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a>( &table, comboEntries, FALSE ); + <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a> * item = new <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a>( &table, comboEntries, false ); <a name="x2797"></a> item-><a href="tqcombotableitem.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( i % 4 ); <a name="x2803"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setItem">setItem</a>( i, 5, item ); } diff --git a/doc/html/splitter-example.html b/doc/html/splitter-example.html index a6045f34a..6f2c616fc 100644 --- a/doc/html/splitter-example.html +++ b/doc/html/splitter-example.html @@ -122,8 +122,8 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) t5-><a href="tqwidget.html#setMinimumSize">setMinimumSize</a>( 80, 50 ); t5-><a href="tqwidget.html#setBackgroundColor">setBackgroundColor</a>( TQt::yellow ); - s2-><a href="tqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>( TRUE ); - s3-><a href="tqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>( TRUE ); + s2-><a href="tqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>( true ); + s3-><a href="tqsplitter.html#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>( true ); a.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( s1 ); s1-><a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>("TQt Example - Splitters"); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-driver.html b/doc/html/sql-driver.html index 41bb1c06a..f44b24f9e 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-driver.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-driver.html @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ modified servers. <p> If you have a recent client library and connect to a transaction-enabled MySQL server, a call to the <a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) function returns -TRUE and SQL transactions can be used. +true and SQL transactions can be used. <p> If the plugin is compiled against MySQL 4.x client libraries, transactions are enabled by default. <p> You can find information about MySQL on <a href="http://www.mysql.com">http://www.mysql.com</a> @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ query to do this internally (see $TQTDIR/examples/sql/blob). <p> <h4> Know problems </h4> <a name="3-2-4"></a><p> When a query is in forward only mode a call to <a href="tqsqlquery.html#last">TQSqlQuery::last</a>() will -position the query on the last record and return TRUE, but subsequent +position the query on the last record and return true, but subsequent calls to <a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">TQSqlQuery::value</a>() will only return NULLs. <p> <h4> How to build the plugin on Unix/Linux </h4> @@ -597,11 +597,11 @@ public: ~TQNullResult() {} protected: <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> data( int ) { return TQVariant(); } - bool reset ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) { return FALSE; } - bool fetch( int ) { return FALSE; } - bool fetchFirst() { return FALSE; } - bool fetchLast() { return FALSE; } - bool isNull( int ) { return FALSE; } + bool reset ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) { return false; } + bool fetch( int ) { return false; } + bool fetchFirst() { return false; } + bool fetchLast() { return false; } + bool isNull( int ) { return false; } <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> record() { return TQSqlRecord(); } int size() { return 0; } int numRowsAffected() { return 0; } @@ -612,12 +612,12 @@ class TQNullDriver : public <a href="tqsqldriver.html">TQSqlDriver</a> public: TQNullDriver(): <a href="tqsqldriver.html">TQSqlDriver</a>() {} ~TQNullDriver() {} - bool hasFeature( DriverFeature ) const { return FALSE; } + bool hasFeature( DriverFeature ) const { return false; } bool open( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, - int ) { return FALSE; } + int ) { return false; } void close() {} <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> createQuery() const { return TQSqlQuery( new TQNullResult( this ) ); } }; diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing-main-cpp.html index eb7531558..9feb38014 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *oracledb = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#database">database</a>( "ORACLE" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html index a6553bb70..d9f63b6de 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *oracledb = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#database">database</a>( "ORACLE" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicdatamanip-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicdatamanip-main-cpp.html index 93e846e10..d90f375ed 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-basicdatamanip-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-basicdatamanip-main-cpp.html @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ bool createConnections(); int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); int rows = 0; diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-connect1-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-connect1-main-cpp.html index a294c4ff3..81c2b3c9e 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-connect1-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-connect1-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *defaultDB = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>( DB_SALES_DRIVER ); defaultDB-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName">setDatabaseName</a>( DB_SALES_DBNAME ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-create_connections-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-create_connections-main-cpp.html index b1dadfaa5..840244a14 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-create_connections-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-create_connections-main-cpp.html @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { // Databases successfully opened; get pointers to them: diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-cpp.html index b575aaeaf..df33291a6 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-custom1-main-cpp.html @@ -94,8 +94,8 @@ TQString <a name="f19"></a>CustomEdit::upperLine() const grid-><a href="tqlayout.html#activate">activate</a>(); staffCursor = new <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>( "staff" ); - staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed">setTrimmed</a>( "forename", TRUE ); - staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed">setTrimmed</a>( "surname", TRUE ); + staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed">setTrimmed</a>( "forename", true ); + staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setTrimmed">setTrimmed</a>( "surname", true ); idIndex = staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#index">index</a>( "id" ); staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlcursor.html#select">select</a>( idIndex ); staffCursor-><a href="tqsqlquery.html#first">first</a>(); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-delete-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-delete-main-cpp.html index 78c5bd9a3..e7b0b1810 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-delete-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-delete-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "prices" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-extract-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-extract-main-cpp.html index 279cedd0d..f3144e274 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-extract-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-extract-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "creditors" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-insert-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-insert-main-cpp.html index 6c87d1012..0fe3a8dcb 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-insert-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-insert-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { int count = 0; diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-navigating-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-navigating-main-cpp.html index 61549533f..ae47e8796 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-navigating-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-navigating-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> query( "SELECT id, name FROM people ORDER BY name" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-order1-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-order1-main-cpp.html index 3d3c5498b..2e3cabbec 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-order1-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-order1-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "staff" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-order2-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-order2-main-cpp.html index 1922d2b32..8a20192a9 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-order2-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-order2-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "staff" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve1-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve1-main-cpp.html index ae2bfab2d..787e1b0ef 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve1-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-retrieve1-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> query( "SELECT id, surname FROM staff" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-cpp.html index dc93b28ee..bdb8d46cb 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass3-main-cpp.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } { <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productName( "productname", TQVariant::String ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productName ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); } diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html index 779a2887a..6b16a19eb 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html @@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } { <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productName( "productname", TQVariant::String ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productName ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productPrice( "price", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productPrice ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productCost( "cost", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productCost ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); } diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-cpp.html index cce7d978c..04f8ae5d8 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-subclass5-main-cpp.html @@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } { <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productName( "productname", TQVariant::String ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productName ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productPrice( "price", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productPrice ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productCost( "cost", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productCost ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); } diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-table1-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-table1-main-cpp.html index ffc506d7f..6a684b163 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-table1-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-table1-main-cpp.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> staffCursor( "staff" ); - <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> *staffTable = new <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( &staffCursor, TRUE ); + <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> *staffTable = new <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( &staffCursor, true ); app.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( staffTable ); staffTable-><a href="tqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(); staffTable-><a href="tqwidget.html#show">show</a>(); diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-h.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-h.html index a31072d58..bece5e5fa 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-h.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-table4-main-h.html @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ class CustomTable : public <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> TQ_OBJECT public: CustomTable( - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> *cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> *cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) : <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( cursor, autoPopulate, parent, name ) {} void paintField( diff --git a/doc/html/sql-overview-update-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/sql-overview-update-main-cpp.html index 46832c3b8..8c3917b75 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql-overview-update-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/sql-overview-update-main-cpp.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> cur( "prices" ); diff --git a/doc/html/sql.html b/doc/html/sql.html index 9a9aa90d1..4949a7be9 100644 --- a/doc/html/sql.html +++ b/doc/html/sql.html @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ connection. int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); <a name="x2141"></a> <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *defaultDB = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>( DB_SALES_DRIVER ); <a name="x2143"></a> defaultDB-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#setDatabaseName">setDatabaseName</a>( DB_SALES_DBNAME ); @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ the TQOCI8 (Oracle 8 and 9) driver the TNS Service Name must be passed to setDatbaseName(). When connecting to ODBC data sources the Data Source Name (DSN) should be used in the setDatabaseName() call. <p> Third we call open() to open the database and give us access to the -data. If this call fails it will return FALSE; error information can +data. If this call fails it will return false; error information can be obtained from <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#lastError">TQSqlDatabase::lastError</a>(). <p> <a name="Connecting_to_Multiple_Databases"></a> <h3> Connecting to Multiple Databases @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ function in <tt>connection.h</tt>. <a name="x2151"></a> defaultDB-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#setHostName">setHostName</a>( DB_SALES_HOST ); <a name="x2149"></a> if ( ! defaultDB-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>() ) { <a name="x2148"></a> <a href="tqapplication.html#qWarning">tqWarning</a>( "Failed to open sales database: " + defaultDB-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#lastError">lastError</a>().text() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *oracle = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>( DB_ORDERS_DRIVER, "ORACLE" ); @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ function in <tt>connection.h</tt>. oracle-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#setHostName">setHostName</a>( DB_ORDERS_HOST ); if ( ! oracle-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#open">open</a>() ) { <a href="tqapplication.html#qWarning">tqWarning</a>( "Failed to open orders database: " + oracle-><a href="tqsqldatabase.html#lastError">lastError</a>().text() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> q(TQString::null, defaultDB); @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ function in <tt>connection.h</tt>. <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> q2(TQString::null, oracle); q2.<a href="tqsqlquery.html#exec">exec</a>("create table people (id integer primary key, name char(40))"); - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre><blockquote><p align="center"><em> From <a href="sql.html">sql/overview/connection.cpp</a> </em></p> @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ function in <tt>connection.h</tt>. int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { // Databases successfully opened; get pointers to them: @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ section and use the <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> class covered in <h3> Transactions </h3> <a name="6-1"></a><p> If the underlying database engine supports transactions -<a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) will return TRUE. +<a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) will return true. You can use <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#transaction">TQSqlDatabase::transaction</a>() to initiate a transaction, followed by the SQL commands you want to execute within the context of the transaction, and then either <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#commit">TQSqlDatabase::commit</a>() or @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ the transaction, and then either <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#commit">TQSqlDataba int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); if ( createConnections() ) { <a name="x2156"></a> <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> *oracledb = TQSqlDatabase::<a href="tqsqldatabase.html#database">database</a>( "ORACLE" ); @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ section. </pre><blockquote><p align="center"><em> From <a href="sql-overview-basicbrowsing2-main-cpp.html">sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp</a> </em></p> </blockquote><p> The above code introduces a count of how many records are successfully -inserted. Note that isActive() returns FALSE if the query, e.g. the +inserted. Note that isActive() returns false if the query, e.g. the insertion, fails. numRowsAffected() returns -1 if the number of rows cannot be determined, e.g. if the query fails. <p> <a name="Basic_Data_Manipulation"></a> @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ cannot be determined, e.g. if the query fails. int main( int argc, char *argv[] ) { - <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, FALSE ); + <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> app( argc, argv, false ); int rows = 0; @@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ examples provides additional information. if ( createConnections() ) { <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> staffCursor( "staff" ); - <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> *staffTable = new <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( &staffCursor, TRUE ); + <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> *staffTable = new <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( &staffCursor, true ); app.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( staffTable ); <a name="x2211"></a> staffTable-><a href="tqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(); staffTable-><a href="tqwidget.html#show">show</a>(); @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ examples provides additional information. </blockquote><p> Data-Aware tables require the <a href="tqdatatable-h.html">tqdatatable.h</a> and <a href="tqsqlcursor-h.html">tqsqlcursor.h</a> header files. We create our application object, call createConnections() and create the cursor. We create the <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> passing it a pointer to -the cursor, and set the autoPopulate flag to TRUE. Next we make our <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> the main widget and call refresh() to populate it with data +the cursor, and set the autoPopulate flag to true. Next we make our <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> the main widget and call refresh() to populate it with data and call show() to make it visible. <p> The autoPopulate flag tells the <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> whether or nor it should create columns based on the cursor. autoPopulate does not affect the @@ -1134,8 +1134,8 @@ confirm their update. We also hold pointers to the <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQ <a href="tqsqlform.html">TQSqlForm</a> since they will need to be accessed outside the constructor. <p> -<pre> staffCursor.setTrimmed( "forename", TRUE ); - staffCursor.setTrimmed( "surname", TRUE ); +<pre> staffCursor.setTrimmed( "forename", true ); + staffCursor.setTrimmed( "surname", true ); </pre> <p> We call setTrimmed() on the text fields so that any spaces used to right pad the fields are removed when the fields are retrieved. @@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@ to subclass TQDataTable and reimplement the paintField() function. TQ_OBJECT public: CustomTable( - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> *cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> *cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) : <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( cursor, autoPopulate, parent, name ) {} void paintField( @@ -1504,7 +1504,7 @@ of the calculateField() function since we will be reimplementing it. { <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productName( "productname", TQVariant::String ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productName ); - <a name="x2260"></a> <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a name="x2260"></a> <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); } <a name="x2259"></a>TQVariant InvoiceItemCursor::<a href="tqsqlcursor.html#calculateField">calculateField</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) @@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@ of the calculateField() function since we will be reimplementing it. <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> called productname and append this to the InvoiceItemCursor's set of fields. We call setCalculated() on productname to identify it as a calculated field. The first argument -to setCalculated() is the field name, the second a bool which if TRUE +to setCalculated() is the field name, the second a bool which if true signifies that calculateField() must be called to get the field's value. <p> <pre> <a name="x2258"></a> invoiceItemTable-><a href="tqdatatable.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "productname", "Product" ); @@ -1548,15 +1548,15 @@ function require some simple expansion. We'll look at each in turn. { <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productName( "productname", TQVariant::String ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productName ); - <a name="x2264"></a> <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a name="x2264"></a> <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productName.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productPrice( "price", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productPrice ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productPrice.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> productCost( "cost", TQVariant::Double ); <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#append">append</a>( productCost ); - <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), TRUE ); + <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>( productCost.<a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html#name">name</a>(), true ); } </pre><blockquote><p align="center"><em> From <a href="sql-overview-subclass4-main-cpp.html">sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp</a> </em></p> diff --git a/doc/html/sqltable-example.html b/doc/html/sqltable-example.html index aed386f19..047af798b 100644 --- a/doc/html/sqltable-example.html +++ b/doc/html/sqltable-example.html @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a> table( &cursor ); /* data table uses our cursor */ <a name="x2451"></a> table.<a href="tqdatatable.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "name", "Name" ); table.<a href="tqdatatable.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "address", "Address" ); -<a name="x2465"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2465"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( true ); a.<a href="tqapplication.html#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>( &table ); <a name="x2452"></a> table.<a href="tqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(); /* load data */ diff --git a/doc/html/statistics-example.html b/doc/html/statistics-example.html index 56275aa95..56c21beba 100644 --- a/doc/html/statistics-example.html +++ b/doc/html/statistics-example.html @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ const char* dirs[] = { <a name="f578"></a>Table::Table() : <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>( 10, 100, 0, "table" ) { - <a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( true ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 0, tr( "File" ) ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 1, tr( "Size (bytes)" ) ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 2, tr( "Use in Sum" ) ); @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ void <a name="f580"></a>Table::recalcSum( int, int col ) clearCell( numRows() - 1, 0 ); clearCell( numRows() - 1, 1 ); // do sort - TQTable::<a href="tqtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>( col, ascending, TRUE ); + TQTable::<a href="tqtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>( col, ascending, true ); // re-insert sum row recalcSum( 0, 1 ); } @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ void <a name="f580"></a>Table::recalcSum( int, int col ) : <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a>( t, et, "Yes" ), cb( 0 ) { // we do not want this item to be replaced - <a href="tqtableitem.html#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqtableitem.html#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>( false ); } <a name="x2785"></a>TQWidget *ComboItem::<a href="tqtableitem.html#createEditor">createEditor</a>() const diff --git a/doc/html/t10-cannon-cpp.html b/doc/html/t10-cannon-cpp.html index c66dd989b..1782d162b 100644 --- a/doc/html/t10-cannon-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/t10-cannon-cpp.html @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ void <a name="f49"></a>CannonField::setAngle( int degrees ) if ( ang == degrees ) return; ang = degrees; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), false ); emit angleChanged( ang ); } diff --git a/doc/html/t11-cannon-cpp.html b/doc/html/t11-cannon-cpp.html index 2bb78a146..6c1dde325 100644 --- a/doc/html/t11-cannon-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/t11-cannon-cpp.html @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ void <a name="f58"></a>CannonField::setAngle( int degrees ) if ( ang == degrees ) return; ang = degrees; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), false ); emit angleChanged( ang ); } diff --git a/doc/html/t12-cannon-cpp.html b/doc/html/t12-cannon-cpp.html index 9f8bbf498..8e0019f72 100644 --- a/doc/html/t12-cannon-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/t12-cannon-cpp.html @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ void <a name="f75"></a>CannonField::setAngle( int degrees ) if ( ang == degrees ) return; ang = degrees; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), false ); emit angleChanged( ang ); } @@ -102,9 +102,9 @@ void <a name="f77"></a>CannonField::shoot() void <a name="f78"></a>CannonField::newTarget() { - static bool first_time = TRUE; + static bool first_time = true; if ( first_time ) { - first_time = FALSE; + first_time = false; <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> midnight( 0, 0, 0 ); srand( midnight.<a href="tqtime.html#secsTo">secsTo</a>(TQTime::<a href="tqtime.html#currentTime">currentTime</a>()) ); } diff --git a/doc/html/t13-cannon-cpp.html b/doc/html/t13-cannon-cpp.html index b44fa4245..96b09ca09 100644 --- a/doc/html/t13-cannon-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/t13-cannon-cpp.html @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } shoot_ang = 0; shoot_f = 0; target = TQPoint( 0, 0 ); - gameEnded = FALSE; + gameEnded = false; <a href="tqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( TQPalette( TQColor( 250, 250, 200) ) ); newTarget(); } @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ void <a name="f95"></a>CannonField::setAngle( int degrees ) if ( ang == degrees ) return; ang = degrees; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), false ); emit angleChanged( ang ); } @@ -98,15 +98,15 @@ void <a name="f97"></a>CannonField::shoot() shoot_ang = ang; shoot_f = f; autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#start">start</a>( 50 ); - emit canShoot( FALSE ); + emit canShoot( false ); } void <a name="f98"></a>CannonField::newTarget() { - static bool first_time = TRUE; + static bool first_time = true; if ( first_time ) { - first_time = FALSE; + first_time = false; <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> midnight( 0, 0, 0 ); srand( midnight.<a href="tqtime.html#secsTo">secsTo</a>(TQTime::<a href="tqtime.html#currentTime">currentTime</a>()) ); } @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ void <a name="f99"></a>CannonField::setGameOver() return; if ( isShooting() ) autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); - gameEnded = TRUE; + gameEnded = true; <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); } @@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ void <a name="f100"></a>CannonField::restartGame() { if ( isShooting() ) autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); - gameEnded = FALSE; + gameEnded = false; <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } void <a name="f101"></a>CannonField::moveShot() @@ -145,11 +145,11 @@ void <a name="f101"></a>CannonField::moveShot() if ( shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#intersects">intersects</a>( targetRect() ) ) { autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); emit hit(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } else if ( shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>() > width() || shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>() > height() ) { autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); emit missed(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } else { r = r.<a href="tqrect.html#unite">unite</a>( TQRegion( shotR ) ); } diff --git a/doc/html/t14-cannon-cpp.html b/doc/html/t14-cannon-cpp.html index 2561f23e9..519fcef41 100644 --- a/doc/html/t14-cannon-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/t14-cannon-cpp.html @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } shoot_ang = 0; shoot_f = 0; target = TQPoint( 0, 0 ); - gameEnded = FALSE; - barrelPressed = FALSE; + gameEnded = false; + barrelPressed = false; <a href="tqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( TQPalette( TQColor( 250, 250, 200) ) ); newTarget(); } @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ void <a name="f122"></a>CannonField::setAngle( int degrees ) if ( ang == degrees ) return; ang = degrees; - <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), FALSE ); + <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>( cannonRect(), false ); emit angleChanged( ang ); } @@ -99,15 +99,15 @@ void <a name="f124"></a>CannonField::shoot() shoot_ang = ang; shoot_f = f; autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#start">start</a>( 50 ); - emit canShoot( FALSE ); + emit canShoot( false ); } void <a name="f125"></a>CannonField::newTarget() { - static bool first_time = TRUE; + static bool first_time = true; if ( first_time ) { - first_time = FALSE; + first_time = false; <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> midnight( 0, 0, 0 ); srand( midnight.<a href="tqtime.html#secsTo">secsTo</a>(TQTime::<a href="tqtime.html#currentTime">currentTime</a>()) ); } @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ void <a name="f126"></a>CannonField::setGameOver() return; if ( isShooting() ) autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); - gameEnded = TRUE; + gameEnded = true; <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); } @@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ void <a name="f127"></a>CannonField::restartGame() { if ( isShooting() ) autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); - gameEnded = FALSE; + gameEnded = false; <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } void <a name="f128"></a>CannonField::moveShot() @@ -146,12 +146,12 @@ void <a name="f128"></a>CannonField::moveShot() if ( shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#intersects">intersects</a>( targetRect() ) ) { autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); emit hit(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } else if ( shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>() > width() || shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>() > height() || shotR.<a href="tqrect.html#intersects">intersects</a>(barrierRect()) ) { autoShootTimer-><a href="tqtimer.html#stop">stop</a>(); emit missed(); - emit canShoot( TRUE ); + emit canShoot( true ); } else { r = r.<a href="tqrect.html#unite">unite</a>( TQRegion( shotR ) ); } @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ void CannonField::<a href="tqwidget.html#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>( < if ( e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#button">button</a>() != LeftButton ) return; if ( barrelHit( e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#pos">pos</a>() ) ) - barrelPressed = TRUE; + barrelPressed = true; } @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ void CannonField::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>( <a void CannonField::<a href="tqwidget.html#mouseReleaseEvent">mouseReleaseEvent</a>( <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a> *e ) { if ( e-><a href="tqmouseevent.html#button">button</a>() == LeftButton ) - barrelPressed = FALSE; + barrelPressed = false; } diff --git a/doc/html/tabdialog-example.html b/doc/html/tabdialog-example.html index d5e407bb6..98db3911b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tabdialog-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tabdialog-example.html @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ void <a name="f201"></a>TabDialog::setupTab1() fname-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); (void)new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Path:", tab1 ); - <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a> *path = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( fileinfo.dirPath( TRUE ), tab1 ); + <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a> *path = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( fileinfo.dirPath( true ), tab1 ); <a name="x52"></a> path-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken ); (void)new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Size:", tab1 ); @@ -146,15 +146,15 @@ void <a name="f202"></a>TabDialog::setupTab2() <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> *readable = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "Readable", bg ); if ( fileinfo.isReadable() ) -<a name="x51"></a> readable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x51"></a> readable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> *writable = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "Writeable", bg ); if ( fileinfo.isWritable() ) - writable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); + writable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a> *executable = new <a href="tqcheckbox.html">TQCheckBox</a>( "Executable", bg ); if ( fileinfo.isExecutable() ) - executable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( TRUE ); + executable-><a href="tqcheckbox.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>( true ); <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a> *bg2 = new <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>( 2, TQGroupBox::Horizontal, "Owner", tab2 ); diff --git a/doc/html/table-bigtable-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/table-bigtable-main-cpp.html index 3a04306c3..1ec7eb623 100644 --- a/doc/html/table-bigtable-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/table-bigtable-main-cpp.html @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ class MyTable : public <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a> { public: MyTable( int r, int c ) : <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>( r, c ) { -<a name="x1291"></a> items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); - widgets.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1291"></a> items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); + widgets.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); setCaption( tr( "A 1 Million x 1 Million Cell Table" ) ); setLeftMargin( fontMetrics().width( "W999999W" ) ); } @@ -65,9 +65,9 @@ public: <a name="x1287"></a> void clearCell( int r, int c ) { items.<a href="tqintdict.html#remove">remove</a>( indexOf( r, c ) ); } void takeItem( <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> *item ) { - items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( FALSE ); + items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( false ); <a name="x1294"></a><a name="x1293"></a> items.<a href="tqintdict.html#remove">remove</a>( indexOf( item-><a href="tqtableitem.html#row">row</a>(), item-><a href="tqtableitem.html#col">col</a>() ) ); - items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); + items.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); } void insertWidget( int r, int c, TQWidget *w ) { widgets.<a href="tqintdict.html#replace">replace</a>( indexOf( r, c ), w ); } <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *cellWidget( int r, int c ) const { return widgets.<a href="tqintdict.html#find">find</a>( indexOf( r, c ) ); } diff --git a/doc/html/table-small-table-demo-main-cpp.html b/doc/html/table-small-table-demo-main-cpp.html index a7015224d..1cb5d72b5 100644 --- a/doc/html/table-small-table-demo-main-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/table-small-table-demo-main-cpp.html @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) <a name="x2798"></a> header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 0, TQObject::tr( "Tiny" ), 40 ); header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 1, TQObject::tr( "Checkboxes" ) ); header-><a href="tqheader.html#setLabel">setLabel</a>( 5, TQObject::tr( "Combos" ) ); -<a name="x2802"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x2802"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setColumnMovingEnabled">setColumnMovingEnabled</a>(true); <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> img( qtlogo_xpm ); <a name="x2801"></a><a name="x2799"></a> <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> pix = img.<a href="tqimage.html#scaleHeight">scaleHeight</a>( table.<a href="tqtable.html#rowHeight">rowHeight</a>(3) ); @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) comboEntries << "one" << "two" << "three" << "four"; for ( int i = 0; i < numRows; ++i ){ - <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a> * item = new <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a>( &table, comboEntries, FALSE ); + <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a> * item = new <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a>( &table, comboEntries, false ); <a name="x2797"></a> item-><a href="tqcombotableitem.html#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>( i % 4 ); <a name="x2803"></a> table.<a href="tqtable.html#setItem">setItem</a>( i, 5, item ); } diff --git a/doc/html/table-statistics-statistics-cpp.html b/doc/html/table-statistics-statistics-cpp.html index 4316904e9..190a2f456 100644 --- a/doc/html/table-statistics-statistics-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/table-statistics-statistics-cpp.html @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ const char* dirs[] = { <a name="f145"></a>Table::Table() : <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>( 10, 100, 0, "table" ) { - <a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqtable.html#setSorting">setSorting</a>( true ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 0, tr( "File" ) ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 1, tr( "Size (bytes)" ) ); <a href="tqtable.html#horizontalHeader">horizontalHeader</a>()->setLabel( 2, tr( "Use in Sum" ) ); @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ void <a name="f147"></a>Table::recalcSum( int, int col ) clearCell( numRows() - 1, 0 ); clearCell( numRows() - 1, 1 ); // do sort - TQTable::<a href="tqtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>( col, ascending, TRUE ); + TQTable::<a href="tqtable.html#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>( col, ascending, true ); // re-insert sum row recalcSum( 0, 1 ); } @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ void <a name="f147"></a>Table::recalcSum( int, int col ) : <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a>( t, et, "Yes" ), cb( 0 ) { // we do not want this item to be replaced - <a href="tqtableitem.html#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqtableitem.html#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>( false ); } <a name="x2785"></a>TQWidget *ComboItem::<a href="tqtableitem.html#createEditor">createEditor</a>() const diff --git a/doc/html/tagreader-example.html b/doc/html/tagreader-example.html index 853b15926..fa3787e9d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tagreader-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tagreader-example.html @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ private: <a name="x1903"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#startDocument">startDocument</a>() { indent = ""; - return TRUE; + return true; } <a name="x1904"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#startElement">startElement</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, @@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ private: { printf( "%s%s\n", (const char*)indent, (const char*)qName ); indent += " "; - return TRUE; + return true; } <a name="x1902"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#endElement">endElement</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) { indent.remove( (uint)0, 4 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/tagreader-with-features-example.html b/doc/html/tagreader-with-features-example.html index 0e70aee56..2390d6c56 100644 --- a/doc/html/tagreader-with-features-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tagreader-with-features-example.html @@ -119,21 +119,21 @@ void <a name="f529"></a>StructureParser::setListView( <a href="tqlistview.html"> element = new <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a>( table, qName, namespaceURI ); } stack.push( element ); -<a name="x1966"></a> element-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1966"></a> element-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); <a name="x1967"></a> if ( attributes.<a href="tqxmlattributes.html#length">length</a>() > 0 ) { for ( int i = 0 ; i < attributes.<a href="tqxmlattributes.html#length">length</a>(); i++ ) { <a name="x1969"></a><a name="x1968"></a> new <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a>( element, attributes.<a href="tqxmlattributes.html#qName">qName</a>(i), attributes.<a href="tqxmlattributes.html#uri">uri</a>(i) ); } } - return TRUE; + return true; } <a name="x1970"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#endElement">endElement</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) { stack.pop(); - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> @@ -178,35 +178,35 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) "table_namespace_prefix" ); handler->setListView( namespacePrefix ); <a name="x1978"></a> reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", - TRUE ); + true ); <a name="x1975"></a> source.<a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#reset">reset</a>(); reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#parse">parse</a>( source ); <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * prefix = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( container, "table_prefix"); handler->setListView( prefix ); - reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", FALSE ); + reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", false ); source.<a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#reset">reset</a>(); reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#parse">parse</a>( source ); // namespace label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Default:\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: TRUE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: FALSE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: true\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: false\n", container ); // namespace prefix label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: TRUE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: TRUE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: true\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: true\n", container ); // prefix label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: FALSE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: TRUE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: false\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: true\n", container ); diff --git a/doc/html/themes-example.html b/doc/html/themes-example.html index c78ce1e67..c49cee9a4 100644 --- a/doc/html/themes-example.html +++ b/doc/html/themes-example.html @@ -1005,13 +1005,13 @@ enum { PointUp, PointDown, PointLeft, PointRight }; TQBrush(op.<a href="tqpalette.html#disabled">disabled</a>().background(), background) ); -<a name="x187"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(TQPalette(active, disabled, active), TRUE ); +<a name="x187"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(TQPalette(active, disabled, active), true ); } <a name="x263"></a>void NorwegianWoodStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> *app) { - app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(oldPalette, TRUE); + app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(oldPalette, true); } /*! @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ void NorwegianWoodStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#polish">polish</a>( <a href="tqwi <a name="x211"></a> if ( w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQPushButton") || w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQToolButton") || w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQComboBox") ) { -<a name="x255"></a> w-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x255"></a> w-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( true ); return; } <a name="x250"></a> if ( w-><a href="tqwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>() ) @@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ void NorwegianWoodStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href=" if ( w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQPushButton") || w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQToolButton") || w-><a href="tqobject.html#inherits">inherits</a>("TQComboBox") ) { - w-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( FALSE ); + w-><a href="tqwidget.html#setAutoMask">setAutoMask</a>( false ); return; } if ( w-><a href="tqwidget.html#backgroundPixmap">backgroundPixmap</a>() ) @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ void NorwegianWoodStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href=" <a name="x200"></a> p-><a href="tqpainter.html#fillRect">fillRect</a>( r, (flags & Style_Sunken ? TQBrush( cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#light">light</a>(), *sunkenLight) : cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#brush">brush</a>( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ) ); } p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setClipRegion">setClipRegion</a>( internR ); -<a name="x221"></a> p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setClipping">setClipping</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x221"></a> p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setClipping">setClipping</a>( false ); <a name="x222"></a><a name="x199"></a> p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setPen">setPen</a>( cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#foreground">foreground</a>() ); drawroundrect( p, x, y, w, h, d ); p-><a href="tqpainter.html#setPen">setPen</a>( oldPen ); @@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ void NorwegianWoodStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href=" if ( cmb-><a href="tqcombobox.html#editable">editable</a>() ) { <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> r( <a href="tqstyle.html#querySubControlMetrics">querySubControlMetrics</a>(CC_ComboBox, widget, SC_ComboBoxEditField, opt) ); - <a href="tqpainter.html#qDrawShadePanel">qDrawShadePanel</a>( p, r, cg, TRUE, 1, + <a href="tqpainter.html#qDrawShadePanel">qDrawShadePanel</a>( p, r, cg, true, 1, &cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#brush">brush</a>(TQColorGroup::Button) ); } @@ -1616,9 +1616,9 @@ public: private: void drawMetalFrame( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int x, int y, int w, int h ) const; void drawMetalGradient( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - bool sunken, bool horz, bool flat=FALSE ) const; + bool sunken, bool horz, bool flat=false ) const; void drawMetalButton( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - bool sunken, bool horz, bool flat=FALSE ) const; + bool sunken, bool horz, bool flat=false ) const; <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> oldPalette; }; @@ -1681,10 +1681,10 @@ private: // pixmaps here and apply to it all widgets <a name="x264"></a> <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> f("times", app-><a href="tqapplication.html#font">font</a>().pointSize() ); -<a name="x280"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setBold">setBold</a>( TRUE ); -<a name="x281"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( TRUE ); -<a name="x266"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f, TRUE, "TQMenuBar"); - app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f, TRUE, "TQPopupMenu"); +<a name="x280"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setBold">setBold</a>( true ); +<a name="x281"></a> f.<a href="tqfont.html#setItalic">setItalic</a>( true ); +<a name="x266"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f, true, "TQMenuBar"); + app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( f, true, "TQPopupMenu"); @@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ private: ); <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> newPalette( active, disabled, active ); -<a name="x267"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( newPalette, TRUE ); +<a name="x267"></a> app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( newPalette, true ); } /*! @@ -1735,8 +1735,8 @@ private: */ <a name="x315"></a>void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> *app) { - app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(oldPalette, TRUE); - app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( app-><a href="tqapplication.html#font">font</a>(), TRUE ); + app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>(oldPalette, true); + app-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( app-><a href="tqapplication.html#font">font</a>(), true ); } /*! @@ -1793,7 +1793,7 @@ void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqwidget case PE_ButtonCommand: <a name="x303"></a><a name="x302"></a><a name="x301"></a><a name="x298"></a> drawMetalButton( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), (flags & (Style_Sunken|Style_On|Style_Down)), - TRUE, !(flags & Style_Raised) ); + true, !(flags & Style_Raised) ); break; case PE_PanelMenuBar: drawMetalFrame( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>() ); @@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqwidget case PE_ScrollBarSlider: - drawMetalButton( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), FALSE, + drawMetalButton( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), false, flags & Style_Horizontal ); break; default: @@ -1946,7 +1946,7 @@ void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqwidget SC_SliderGroove, subActive, opt ); <a name="x299"></a> if ( (sub & SC_SliderHandle) && handle.<a href="tqrect.html#isValid">isValid</a>() ) drawMetalButton( p, handle.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), handle.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), handle.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), - handle.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), FALSE, + handle.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), false, <a name="x304"></a> slider-><a href="tqslider.html#orientation">orientation</a>() == TQSlider::Horizontal); break; } @@ -1955,11 +1955,11 @@ void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqwidget // not exactly correct... const <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a> *cmb = ( const <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>* ) widget; - <a href="tqpainter.html#qDrawWinPanel">qDrawWinPanel</a>( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), cg, TRUE, + <a href="tqpainter.html#qDrawWinPanel">qDrawWinPanel</a>( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>(), r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>(), cg, true, cmb-><a href="tqwidget.html#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>() ? &cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#brush">brush</a>( TQColorGroup::Base ) : &cg.<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#brush">brush</a>( TQColorGroup::Background ) ); drawMetalButton( p, r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>() + r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>() - 2 - 16, r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>() + 2, 16, r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>() - 4, - how & Style_Sunken, TRUE ); + how & Style_Sunken, true ); <a href="tqstyle.html#drawPrimitive">drawPrimitive</a>( PE_ArrowDown, p, TQRect( r.<a href="tqrect.html#x">x</a>() + r.<a href="tqrect.html#width">width</a>() - 2 - 16 + 2, r.<a href="tqrect.html#y">y</a>() + 2 + 2, 16 - 4, r.<a href="tqrect.html#height">height</a>() - 4 -4 ), @@ -1977,8 +1977,8 @@ void MetalStyle::<a href="tqstyle.html#unPolish">unPolish</a>( <a href="tqwidget /*! - Draw a metallic button, sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, horizontal if - /a horz is TRUE. + Draw a metallic button, sunken if \a sunken is true, horizontal if + /a horz is true. */ void <a name="f228"></a>MetalStyle::drawMetalButton( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, @@ -2216,12 +2216,12 @@ private: <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setCentralWidget">setCentralWidget</a>( tabwidget ); <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> *style = new <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a>( this ); -<a name="x333"></a> style-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x333"></a> style-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#menuBar">menuBar</a>()->insertItem( "&Style" , style ); - style-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( TRUE ); + style-><a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>( true ); <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> *ag = new <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>( this, 0 ); -<a name="x320"></a> ag-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x320"></a> ag-><a href="tqactiongroup.html#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>( true ); <a href="tqsignalmapper.html">TQSignalMapper</a> *styleMapper = new <a href="tqsignalmapper.html">TQSignalMapper</a>( this ); <a name="x335"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( styleMapper, TQ_SIGNAL( <a href="tqsignalmapper.html#mapped">mapped</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( makeStyle( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) ) ); <a name="x342"></a> <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> list = TQStyleFactory::<a href="tqstylefactory.html#keys">keys</a>(); @@ -2230,7 +2230,7 @@ private: <a name="x346"></a><a name="x344"></a> list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#insert">insert</a>(list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(), "Norwegian Wood"); list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#insert">insert</a>(list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(), "Metal"); #endif - <a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a><int> stylesDict( 17, FALSE ); + <a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a><int> stylesDict( 17, false ); <a name="x345"></a> for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(); it != list.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>(); ++it ) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> styleStr = *it; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> styleAccel = styleStr; @@ -2279,10 +2279,10 @@ void <a name="f232"></a>Themes::makeStyle(const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setStyle">setStyle</a>(style); if(style == "Platinum") { <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> p( TQColor( 239, 239, 239 ) ); -<a name="x324"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, TRUE ); -<a name="x323"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, TRUE ); +<a name="x324"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, true ); +<a name="x323"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, true ); } else if(style == "Windows") { - tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, TRUE ); + tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, true ); } else if(style == "CDE") { <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> p( TQColor( 75, 123, 130 ) ); <a name="x332"></a> p.<a href="tqpalette.html#setColor">setColor</a>( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Base, TQColor( 55, 77, 78 ) ); @@ -2303,12 +2303,12 @@ void <a name="f232"></a>Themes::makeStyle(const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString p.<a href="tqpalette.html#setColor">setColor</a>( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::Foreground, TQt::lightGray ); p.<a href="tqpalette.html#setColor">setColor</a>( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::Text, TQt::lightGray ); p.<a href="tqpalette.html#setColor">setColor</a>( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::ButtonText, TQt::lightGray ); - tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, TRUE ); - tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( TQFont( "times", appFont.pointSize() ), TRUE ); + tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, true ); + tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( TQFont( "times", appFont.pointSize() ), true ); } else if(style == "Motif" || style == "MotifPlus") { <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> p( TQColor( 192, 192, 192 ) ); - tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, TRUE ); - tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, TRUE ); + tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p, true ); + tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">setFont</a>( appFont, true ); } } } diff --git a/doc/html/tictac-example.html b/doc/html/tictac-example.html index a9945bffd..6851eb1fd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tictac-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tictac-example.html @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ private: st = Init; // initial state nBoard = n; n *= n; // make square - comp_starts = FALSE; // human starts + comp_starts = false; // human starts buttons = new TicTacButtons(n); // create real buttons btArray = new TicTacArray(n); // create button model <a href="tqgridlayout.html">TQGridLayout</a> * grid = new <a href="tqgridlayout.html">TQGridLayout</a>( this, nBoard, nBoard, 4 ); @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ private: for ( int i=0; i<n; i++ ) { // create and connect buttons TicTacButton *ttb = new TicTacButton( this ); <a name="x45"></a> ttb-><a href="tqwidget.html#setPalette">setPalette</a>( p ); - ttb-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + ttb-><a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>( false ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( ttb, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>()), TQ_SLOT(buttonClicked()) ); grid-><a href="tqgridlayout.html#addWidget">addWidget</a>( ttb, i%nBoard, i/nBoard ); buttons->insert( i, ttb ); @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ TicTacGameBoard::~TicTacGameBoard() // -------------------------------------------------------------------------- // TicTacGameBoard::computerStarts( bool v ) // -// Computer starts if v=TRUE. The human starts by default. +// Computer starts if v=true. The human starts by default. // void <a name="f190"></a>TicTacGameBoard::computerStarts( bool v ) @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ int <a name="f194"></a>TicTacGameBoard::checkBoard( TicTacArray *a ) { int t = 0; int row, col; - bool won = FALSE; + bool won = false; for ( row=0; row<nBoard && !won; row++ ) { // check horizontal t = a->at(row*nBoard); if ( t == TicTacButton::Blank ) @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ int <a name="f194"></a>TicTacGameBoard::checkBoard( TicTacArray *a ) while ( col<nBoard && a->at(row*nBoard+col) == t ) col++; if ( col == nBoard ) - won = TRUE; + won = true; } for ( col=0; col<nBoard && !won; col++ ) { // check vertical t = a->at(col); @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ int <a name="f194"></a>TicTacGameBoard::checkBoard( TicTacArray *a ) while ( row<nBoard && a->at(row*nBoard+col) == t ) row++; if ( row == nBoard ) - won = TRUE; + won = true; } if ( !won ) { // check diagonal top left t = a->at(0); // to bottom right @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ int <a name="f194"></a>TicTacGameBoard::checkBoard( TicTacArray *a ) while ( i<nBoard && a->at(i*nBoard+i) == t ) i++; if ( i == nBoard ) - won = TRUE; + won = true; } } if ( !won ) { // check diagonal bottom left @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ int <a name="f194"></a>TicTacGameBoard::checkBoard( TicTacArray *a ) i++; j--; } if ( i == nBoard ) - won = TRUE; + won = true; } } if ( !won ) // no winner diff --git a/doc/html/toggleaction-example.html b/doc/html/toggleaction-example.html index 38c0e93a1..09af73fcd 100644 --- a/doc/html/toggleaction-example.html +++ b/doc/html/toggleaction-example.html @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ int main( int argc, char **argv ) <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a> * toolbar = new <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a>( window ); <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a> * labelonoffaction = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( window, "labelonoff" ); -<a name="x2975"></a> labelonoffaction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x2975"></a> labelonoffaction-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); <a name="x2974"></a> labelonoffaction-><a href="tqaction.html#setText">setText</a>( "labels on/off" ); <a name="x2972"></a> labelonoffaction-><a href="tqaction.html#setAccel">setAccel</a>( TQt::ALT+TQt::Key_L ); diff --git a/doc/html/toplevel-example.html b/doc/html/toplevel-example.html index ab5d266c6..610c59d5c 100644 --- a/doc/html/toplevel-example.html +++ b/doc/html/toplevel-example.html @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ closed (since we use the <tt>WDestructiveClose</tt> flag). Note that the window is not visible yet. <a href="#footnote2"><sup>(2)</sup></a><a name="footnote-call2"></a> <p> <pre> } else { - <a name="x2538"></a><a name="x2536"></a> widget-><a href="tqwidget.html#reparent">reparent</a>( parent, f, widget-><a href="tqwidget.html#geometry">geometry</a>().topLeft(), FALSE); + <a name="x2538"></a><a name="x2536"></a> widget-><a href="tqwidget.html#reparent">reparent</a>( parent, f, widget-><a href="tqwidget.html#geometry">geometry</a>().topLeft(), false); } </pre>If the widget has already been created the reparent() function is used to modify the widget's flags. The widget's geometry is not diff --git a/doc/html/tqaccel.html b/doc/html/tqaccel.html index 5588de239..f176c6ec7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaccel.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaccel.html @@ -230,14 +230,14 @@ negative identifier less than -1. <p>Example: <a href="tutorial1-14.html#x2438">t14/gamebrd.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQAccel::isEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and <a href="#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemEnabled"></a>TQAccel::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the accelerator item with the identifier <em>id</em> is -enabled. Returns FALSE if the item is disabled or cannot be found. +Returns true if the accelerator item with the identifier <em>id</em> is +enabled. Returns false if the item is disabled or cannot be found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>() and <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> <a name="key"></a>TQAccel::key ( int id ) @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Removes the accelerator item with the identifier <em>id</em>. serves no purpose anymore <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQAccel::setEnabled ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables the accelerator if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables it if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables the accelerator if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables it if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> Individual keys can also be enabled or disabled using <a href="#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>(). To work, a key must be an enabled item in an enabled TQAccel. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ enabled TQAccel. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemEnabled"></a>TQAccel::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable ) </h3> -Enables the accelerator item with the identifier <em>id</em> if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, and disables item <em>id</em> if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables the accelerator item with the identifier <em>id</em> if <em>enable</em> is true, and disables item <em>id</em> if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> To work, an item must be enabled and be in an enabled TQAccel. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>() and <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqaccessible.html b/doc/html/tqaccessible.html index a5f87c473..748a8eabb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaccessible.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaccessible.html @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ default action <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQAccessible::isActive ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if an accessibility implementation has been requested, -during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if an accessibility implementation has been requested, +during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns false. <p> Use this function to prevent potentially expensive notifications via <a href="#updateAccessibility">updateAccessibility</a>(). <p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqaccessibleinterface.html b/doc/html/tqaccessibleinterface.html index 67436ed42..9d2cf079c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaccessibleinterface.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaccessibleinterface.html @@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ object itself if <em>control</em> is 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQAccessibleInterface::isValid () const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if all the data necessary to use this interface +<p> Returns true if all the data necessary to use this interface implementation is valid (e.g. all pointers are non-null), -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="navigate"></a>TQAccessibleInterface::navigate ( <a href="tqaccessible.html#NavDirection-enum">NavDirection</a> direction, int startControl ) const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -159,15 +159,15 @@ is usually static. All accessible objects have a role. <p> Gives the focus to the child object specified by <em>control</em>, or to the object itself if <em>control</em> is 0. -<p> Returns TRUE if the focus could be set; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the focus could be set; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setSelected"></a>TQAccessibleInterface::setSelected ( int control, bool on, bool extend )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Sets the selection of the child object with ID <em>control</em> to <em>on</em>. If <em>extend</em> is TRUE, all child elements between the focused +<p> Sets the selection of the child object with ID <em>control</em> to <em>on</em>. If <em>extend</em> is true, all child elements between the focused item and the specified child object have their selection set to <em>on</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if the selection could be set; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the selection could be set; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFocus">setFocus</a>() and <a href="#clearSelection">clearSelection</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setText"></a>TQAccessibleInterface::setText ( <a href="tqaccessible.html#Text-enum">Text</a> t, int control, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqaction-application-example.html b/doc/html/tqaction-application-example.html index 42968e34f..95b436b87 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaction-application-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaction-application-example.html @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ void <a name="f378"></a>ApplicationWindow::load( const <a href="tqstring.html">T <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> ts( &f ); <a name="x1171"></a><a name="x1168"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setText">setText</a>( ts.<a href="tqtextstream.html#read">read</a>() ); -<a name="x1167"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); +<a name="x1167"></a> e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( fileName ); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Loaded document " + fileName, 2000 ); } @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ void <a name="f379"></a>ApplicationWindow::save() t << text; f.<a href="tqfile.html#close">close</a>(); - e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( FALSE ); + e-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setModified">setModified</a>( false ); <a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( filename ); @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ void <a name="f380"></a>ApplicationWindow::saveAs() void <a name="f381"></a>ApplicationWindow::print() { -<a name="x1150"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1150"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ); <a name="x1151"></a> if ( printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#setup">setup</a>(this) ) { // printer dialog <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing..." ); <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> p; @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ void <a name="f381"></a>ApplicationWindow::print() break; <a name="x1149"></a> printer-><a href="tqprinter.html#newPage">newPage</a>(); page++; - } while (TRUE); + } while (true); <a href="tqmainwindow.html#statusBar">statusBar</a>()->message( "Printing completed", 2000 ); } else { diff --git a/doc/html/tqaction-h.html b/doc/html/tqaction-h.html index 3f02b9a9b..b509e1939 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaction-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaction-h.html @@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ public: TQObject* parent, const char* name = 0 ); TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQObject* parent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete + TQObject* parent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = false ); // obsolete TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject* parent, - const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete + const char* name = 0, bool toggle = false ); // obsolete #endif TQAction( TQObject* parent, const char* name , bool toggle ); // obsolete ~TQAction(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqaction.html b/doc/html/tqaction.html index 21e6e825c..104e25fe5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqaction.html +++ b/doc/html/tqaction.html @@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ action that can appear both in menus and tool bars. <li class=fn><a href="#TQAction"><b>TQAction</b></a> ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQAction-2"><b>TQAction</b></a> ( const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQAction-3"><b>TQAction</b></a> ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn>TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn>TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQAction"><b>~TQAction</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setIconSet"><b>setIconSet</b></a> ( const TQIconSet & )</li> @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Both command and toggle actions emit the <a href="#activated">activated</a>() si they are invoked. Use <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>() to set an action's toggled status. To see if an action is a toggle action use <a href="#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>(). A toggle action may be "on", <a href="#isOn">isOn</a>() returns -TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE. +true, or "off", isOn() returns false. <p> Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using <a href="#addTo">addTo</a>(), and removed using <a href="#removeFrom">removeFrom</a>(). <p> Once a TQAction has been created it should be added to the relevant @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with <a href="#setText">setText</a>(). The same text and <em>accel</em> will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for these using <a href="#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and <a href="#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>(). -<p> Call <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action. +<p> Call <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>(true) to make the action a toggle action. <p> <b>Warning:</b> To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to. @@ -208,16 +208,16 @@ toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with <a href="#setText">setText</a>(). The same text and <em>accel</em> will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for these using <a href="#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and <a href="#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>(). -<p> Call <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action. +<p> Call <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>(true) to make the action a toggle action. <p> <b>Warning:</b> To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAction-4"></a>TQAction::TQAction ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & icon, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & menuText, <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> accel, <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAction-4"></a>TQAction::TQAction ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & icon, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & menuText, <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> accel, <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the description <em>text</em>, the icon or iconset <em>icon</em>, the menu text <em>menuText</em> and keyboard accelerator <em>accel</em>. It is a child -of <em>parent</em> and called <em>name</em>. If <em>toggle</em> is TRUE the action +of <em>parent</em> and called <em>name</em>. If <em>toggle</em> is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. <p> If <em>parent</em> is a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>, the action automatically becomes a member of it. @@ -227,11 +227,11 @@ a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. tips unless you provide specific text for these using <a href="#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and <a href="#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAction-5"></a>TQAction::TQAction ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & menuText, <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> accel, <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAction-5"></a>TQAction::TQAction ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & menuText, <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> accel, <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> This constructor results in an icon-less action with the description <em>text</em>, the menu text <em>menuText</em> and the keyboard -accelerator <em>accel</em>. Its parent is <em>parent</em> and it is called <em>name</em>. If <em>toggle</em> is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, +accelerator <em>accel</em>. Its parent is <em>parent</em> and it is called <em>name</em>. If <em>toggle</em> is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. <p> The action automatically becomes a member of <em>parent</em> if <em>parent</em> is a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>. <p> For accelerators and status tips to work, <em>parent</em> must either be @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ and <a href="#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="TQAction-6"></a>TQAction::TQAction ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name, bool toggle ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Constructs an action called <em>name</em> with parent <em>parent</em>. -<p> If <em>toggle</em> is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise +<p> If <em>toggle</em> is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. <p> If <em>parent</em> is a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>, the new action inserts itself into <em>parent</em>. @@ -279,9 +279,9 @@ Adds this action to widget <em>w</em>. <p> Currently actions may be added to <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a> and <a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> widgets. <p> An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option. -<p> <a href="#addTo">addTo</a>() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and -FALSE otherwise. (If <em>w</em> is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the -action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.) +<p> <a href="#addTo">addTo</a>() returns true if the action was added successfully and +false otherwise. (If <em>w</em> is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the +action will not be added and false will be returned.) <p> <p>See also <a href="#removeFrom">removeFrom</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1124">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="toggleaction-example.html#x2971">action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp</a>, and <a href="canvas-chart-example.html#x2870">chart/chartform.cpp</a>. @@ -302,16 +302,16 @@ menu <em>menu</em>. </h3><p>Returns the action's icon. See the <a href="tqaction.html#iconSet-prop">"iconSet"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQAction::isEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the action is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the action is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqaction.html#enabled-prop">"enabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQAction::isOn () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqaction.html#on-prop">"on"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isToggleAction"></a>TQAction::isToggleAction () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">"toggleAction"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVisible"></a>TQAction::isVisible () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqaction.html#visible-prop">"visible"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="menuText"></a>TQAction::menuText () const </h3><p>Returns the action's menu text. @@ -319,8 +319,8 @@ See the <a href="tqaction.html#menuText-prop">"menuText"</a> property for detail <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="removeFrom"></a>TQAction::removeFrom ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Removes the action from widget <em>w</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the action was removed successfully; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#addTo">addTo</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAccel"></a>TQAction::setAccel ( const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & key )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ returns FALSE. See the <a href="tqaction.html#accel-prop">"accel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDisabled"></a>TQAction::setDisabled ( bool disable )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Disables the action if <em>disable</em> is TRUE; otherwise +Disables the action if <em>disable</em> is true; otherwise enables the action. <p> See the <a href="#enabled-prop">enabled</a> documentation for more information. @@ -378,8 +378,8 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle action. <p> This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command actions and <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>s don't emit <a href="#toggled">toggled</a>(). -<p> The <em>on</em> argument denotes the new state: If <em>on</em> is TRUE the -toggle action is switched on, and if <em>on</em> is FALSE the toggle +<p> The <em>on</em> argument denotes the new state: If <em>on</em> is true the +toggle action is switched on, and if <em>on</em> is false the toggle action is switched off. <p> To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has been switched on or off connect it to a slot that takes a bool to @@ -438,10 +438,10 @@ text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setMenuText">setMenuText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#menuText">menuText</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="on-prop"></a>on</h3> <p>This property holds whether a toggle action is on. -<p>This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and +<p>This property is always on (true) for command actions and <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a>s; <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>() has no effect on them. For action's -where <a href="#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is TRUE, this property's default value is -off (FALSE). +where <a href="#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>() is true, this property's default value is +off (false). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isOn">isOn</a>(). @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ toplevel parent widget provides. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setStatusTip">setStatusTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#statusTip">statusTip</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="text-prop"></a>text</h3> <p>This property holds the action's descriptive text. -<p>If <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is TRUE, the text appears as a +<p>If <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel</a> is true, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text. @@ -468,13 +468,13 @@ defined. There is no default text. <p>A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply -executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE. +executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is false. <p> In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and "Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a <a href="tqactiongroup.html">TQActionGroup</a> with the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop">TQActionGroup::exclusive</a> property set to -TRUE. +true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isToggleAction">isToggleAction</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toolTip-prop"></a>toolTip</h3> @@ -490,8 +490,8 @@ text. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setToolTip">setToolTip</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#toolTip">toolTip</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="visible-prop"></a>visible</h3> <p>This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars). -<p>If <em>visible</em> is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and -toolbars) and chosen by the user; if <em>visible</em> is FALSE the +<p>If <em>visible</em> is true the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and +toolbars) and chosen by the user; if <em>visible</em> is false the action cannot be seen or chosen by the user. <p> Actions which are not visible are <em>not</em> grayed out; they do not appear at all. diff --git a/doc/html/tqactiongroup.html b/doc/html/tqactiongroup.html index 98a835d42..b02b649db 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqactiongroup.html +++ b/doc/html/tqactiongroup.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ by default, only one of the actions in the group is ever active at any one time. We then connect the group's <a href="#selected">selected</a>() signal to our textAlign() slot. <p> <pre> <a name="x2113"></a> actionAlignLeft = new <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a>( TQPixmap::<a href="tqpixmap.html#fromMimeSource">fromMimeSource</a>( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" ); - <a name="x2111"></a> actionAlignLeft-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( TRUE ); + <a name="x2111"></a> actionAlignLeft-><a href="tqaction.html#setToggleAction">setToggleAction</a>( true ); </pre> <p> We create a left align action, add it to the toolbar and the menu and make it a toggle action. We create center and right align @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The actions in an action group emit their <a href="tqaction.html#activated">acti toggle actions, <a href="tqaction.html#toggled">toggled</a>()) signals as usual. <p> The <a href="#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() function is used to ensure that only one action is active at any one time: it should be used with actions which -have their <a href="tqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a> set to TRUE. +have their <a href="tqaction.html#toggleAction-prop">toggleAction</a> set to true. <p> Action group actions appear as individual menu options and toolbar buttons. For exclusive action groups use <a href="#setUsesDropDown">setUsesDropDown</a>() to display the actions in a subwidget of any widget the action group @@ -109,13 +109,13 @@ parent. Actions can have separators dividing them using <h3 class=fn><a name="TQActionGroup"></a>TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name = 0 ) </h3> Constructs an action group called <em>name</em>, with parent <em>parent</em>. -<p> The action group is exclusive by default. Call <a href="#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>(FALSE) to make +<p> The action group is exclusive by default. Call <a href="#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>(false) to make the action group non-exclusive. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQActionGroup-2"></a>TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive ) </h3> Constructs an action group called <em>name</em>, with parent <em>parent</em>. -<p> If <em>exclusive</em> is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will +<p> If <em>exclusive</em> is true only one toggle action in the group will ever be active. <p> <p>See also <a href="#exclusive-prop">exclusive</a>. @@ -137,11 +137,11 @@ Adds a separator to the group. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="addTo"></a>TQActionGroup::addTo ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Adds this action group to the widget <em>w</em>. -<p> If <a href="#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>() is FALSE or <a href="#usesDropDown">usesDropDown</a>() is FALSE, the actions within +<p> If <a href="#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>() is false or <a href="#usesDropDown">usesDropDown</a>() is false, the actions within the group are added to the widget individually. For example, if the widget is a menu, the actions will appear as individual menu options, and if the widget is a toolbar, the actions will appear as toolbar buttons. -<p> If both isExclusive() and usesDropDown() are TRUE, the actions +<p> If both isExclusive() and usesDropDown() are true, the actions are presented either in a combobox (if <em>w</em> is a toolbar) or in a submenu (if <em>w</em> is a menu). <p> All actions should be added to the action group <em>before</em> the @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ widget these later actions will <em>not</em> appear. group as its parent. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusive"></a>TQActionGroup::isExclusive () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop">"exclusive"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="selected"></a>TQActionGroup::selected ( <a href="tqaction.html">TQAction</a> * )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -177,12 +177,12 @@ See the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#exclusive-prop">"exclusive"</a> property for </h3><p>Sets whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to to <em>enable</em>. See the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#usesDropDown-prop">"usesDropDown"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesDropDown"></a>TQActionGroup::usesDropDown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqactiongroup.html#usesDropDown-prop">"usesDropDown"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exclusive-prop"></a>exclusive</h3> <p>This property holds whether the action group does exclusive toggling. -<p>If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the action group +<p>If exclusive is true only one toggle action in the action group can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ property. calls to their <a href="tqaction.html#setVisible">TQAction::setVisible</a>(), <a href="tqaction.html#setEnabled">TQAction::setEnabled</a>(), and <a href="tqaction.html#setDisabled">TQAction::setDisabled</a>() functions to have no effect. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setUsesDropDown">setUsesDropDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#usesDropDown">usesDropDown</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqapplication-h.html b/doc/html/tqapplication-h.html index f54ca7820..a9400217c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqapplication-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqapplication-h.html @@ -135,18 +135,18 @@ public: static void setColorSpec( int ); #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR static TQCursor *overrideCursor(); - static void setOverrideCursor( const TQCursor &, bool replace=FALSE ); + static void setOverrideCursor( const TQCursor &, bool replace=false ); static void restoreOverrideCursor(); #endif static bool hasGlobalMouseTracking(); static void setGlobalMouseTracking( bool enable ); #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE static TQPalette palette( const TQWidget* = 0 ); - static void setPalette( const TQPalette &, bool informWidgets=FALSE, + static void setPalette( const TQPalette &, bool informWidgets=false, const char* className = 0 ); #endif static TQFont font( const TQWidget* = 0 ); - static void setFont( const TQFont &, bool informWidgets=FALSE, + static void setFont( const TQFont &, bool informWidgets=false, const char* className = 0 ); static TQFontMetrics fontMetrics(); @@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ public: TQWidget *focusWidget() const; TQWidget *activeWindow() const; - static TQWidget *widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child=FALSE ); - static TQWidget *widgetAt( const TQPoint &, bool child=FALSE ); + static TQWidget *widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child=false ); + static TQWidget *widgetAt( const TQPoint &, bool child=false ); static TQEventLoop *eventLoop(); @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ public: static void setWinStyleHighlightColor( const TQColor &c ) { TQPalette p( palette() ); p.setColor( TQColorGroup::Highlight, c ); - setPalette( p, TRUE); + setPalette( p, true); } static const TQColor &winStyleHighlightColor() { return palette().active().highlight(); @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ public: static int horizontalAlignment( int align ); static bool isEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect ); - static void setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect, bool enable = TRUE ); + static void setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect, bool enable = true ); #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) virtual bool macEventFilter( EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef ); @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ public: void wakeUpCoreThread(); #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) void lock(); - void unlock(bool wakeUpCore = TRUE); + void unlock(bool wakeUpCore = true); bool locked(); bool tryLock(); #endif @@ -498,10 +498,10 @@ inline TQSize TQApplication::globalStrut() } inline bool TQApplication::sendEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) -{ if ( event ) event->spont = FALSE; return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : FALSE; } +{ if ( event ) event->spont = false; return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : false; } inline bool TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) -{ if ( event ) event->spont = TRUE; return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : FALSE; } +{ if ( event ) event->spont = true; return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : false; } #ifdef TQT_NO_TRANSLATION // Simple versions diff --git a/doc/html/tqapplication.html b/doc/html/tqapplication.html index 30de0a415..12d312087 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqapplication.html +++ b/doc/html/tqapplication.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ flow and main settings. <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#saveState"><b>saveState</b></a> ( TQSessionManager & sm )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#wakeUpCoreThread"><b>wakeUpCoreThread</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#lock"><b>lock</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#unlock"><b>unlock</b></a> ( bool wakeUpCore = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#unlock"><b>unlock</b></a> ( bool wakeUpCore = true )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#locked"><b>locked</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#tryLock"><b>tryLock</b></a> ()</li> </ul> @@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ flow and main settings. <li class=fn>int <a href="#colorSpec"><b>colorSpec</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setColorSpec"><b>setColorSpec</b></a> ( int spec )</li> <li class=fn>TQCursor * <a href="#overrideCursor"><b>overrideCursor</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setOverrideCursor"><b>setOverrideCursor</b></a> ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setOverrideCursor"><b>setOverrideCursor</b></a> ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = false )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#restoreOverrideCursor"><b>restoreOverrideCursor</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasGlobalMouseTracking"><b>hasGlobalMouseTracking</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking"><b>setGlobalMouseTracking</b></a> ( bool enable )</li> <li class=fn>TQPalette <a href="#palette"><b>palette</b></a> ( const TQWidget * w = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setPalette"><b>setPalette</b></a> ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setPalette"><b>setPalette</b></a> ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>TQFont <a href="#font"><b>font</b></a> ( const TQWidget * w = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setFont"><b>setFont</b></a> ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setFont"><b>setFont</b></a> ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>TQFontMetrics <a href="#fontMetrics"><b>fontMetrics</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQWidgetList * <a href="#allWidgets"><b>allWidgets</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQWidgetList * <a href="#topLevelWidgets"><b>topLevelWidgets</b></a> ()</li> @@ -122,8 +122,8 @@ flow and main settings. <li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#activePopupWidget"><b>activePopupWidget</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#activeModalWidget"><b>activeModalWidget</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQClipboard * <a href="#clipboard"><b>clipboard</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#widgetAt"><b>widgetAt</b></a> ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#widgetAt-2"><b>widgetAt</b></a> ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#widgetAt"><b>widgetAt</b></a> ( int x, int y, bool child = false )</li> +<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#widgetAt-2"><b>widgetAt</b></a> ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = false )</li> <li class=fn>TQEventLoop * <a href="#eventLoop"><b>eventLoop</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#exit"><b>exit</b></a> ( int retcode = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#sendEvent"><b>sendEvent</b></a> ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * event )</li> @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ flow and main settings. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#reverseLayout"><b>reverseLayout</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#horizontalAlignment"><b>horizontalAlignment</b></a> ( int align )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isEffectEnabled"><b>isEffectEnabled</b></a> ( TQt::UIEffect effect )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setEffectEnabled"><b>setEffectEnabled</b></a> ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setEffectEnabled"><b>setEffectEnabled</b></a> ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = true )</li> </ul> <h2>Related Functions</h2> <ul> @@ -448,12 +448,12 @@ on an 8-bit display. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQApplication-2"></a>TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, bool GUIenabled ) </h3> Constructs an application object with <em>argc</em> command line arguments -in <em>argv</em>. If <em>GUIenabled</em> is TRUE, a GUI application is +in <em>argv</em>. If <em>GUIenabled</em> is true, a GUI application is constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created. -<p> Set <em>GUIenabled</em> to FALSE for programs without a graphical user +<p> Set <em>GUIenabled</em> to false for programs without a graphical user interface that should be able to run without a window system. -<p> On X11, the window system is initialized if <em>GUIenabled</em> is TRUE. -If <em>GUIenabled</em> is FALSE, the application does not connect to the +<p> On X11, the window system is initialized if <em>GUIenabled</em> is true. +If <em>GUIenabled</em> is false, the application does not connect to the X-server. On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ uses a graphical interface when available. #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 bool useGUI = getenv( "DISPLAY" ) != 0; #else - bool useGUI = TRUE; + bool useGUI = true; #endif TQApplication app(argc, argv, useGUI); @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ this state. Returns the active modal widget. <p> A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as -TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue +true. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program. <p> Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active modal widget at the top of the stack. @@ -700,8 +700,8 @@ accept the close event. <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1127">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-application-example.html#x1544">application/application.cpp</a>, <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x980">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>, <a href="mdi-example.html#x2020">mdi/application.cpp</a>, and <a href="qwerty-example.html#x358">qwerty/qwerty.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="closingDown"></a>TQApplication::closingDown ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the application objects are being destroyed; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the application objects are being destroyed; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#startingUp">startingUp</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="colorSpec"></a>TQApplication::colorSpec ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ not work on all operating systems. <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2958">canvas/main.cpp</a>, <a href="desktop-example.html#x1721">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>, <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1037">helpviewer/main.cpp</a>, <a href="i18n-example.html#x1928">i18n/main.cpp</a>, <a href="qmag-example.html#x1765">qmag/qmag.cpp</a>, <a href="qwerty-example.html#x414">qwerty/main.cpp</a>, and <a href="scribble-example.html#x954">scribble/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="desktopSettingsAware"></a>TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns the value set by <a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(); by default TRUE. +Returns the value set by <a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(); by default true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="doubleClickInterval"></a>TQApplication::doubleClickInterval ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -884,14 +884,14 @@ that could block. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasGlobalMouseTracking"></a>TQApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPendingEvents"></a>TQApplication::hasPendingEvents () </h3> -This function returns TRUE if there are pending events; otherwise -returns FALSE. Pending events can be either from the window system +This function returns true if there are pending events; otherwise +returns false. Pending events can be either from the window system or posted events using <a href="#postEvent">TQApplication::postEvent</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="horizontalAlignment"></a>TQApplication::horizontalAlignment ( int align )<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -915,9 +915,9 @@ soon as a matching translation is found. <p>Example: <a href="i18n-example.html#x1930">i18n/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEffectEnabled"></a>TQApplication::isEffectEnabled ( <a href="tqt.html#UIEffect-enum">TQt::UIEffect</a> effect )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>effect</em> is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>effect</em> is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call -<a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(FALSE) to prevent this. +<a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(false) to prevent this. <p> Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEffectEnabled">setEffectEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqt.html#UIEffect-enum">TQt::UIEffect</a>. @@ -925,8 +925,8 @@ Returns TRUE if <em>effect</em> is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSessionRestored"></a>TQApplication::isSessionRestored () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the application has been restored from an earlier -<a href="session.html">session</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the application has been restored from an earlier +<a href="session.html">session</a>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#sessionId">sessionId</a>(), <a href="#commitData">commitData</a>(), and <a href="#saveState">saveState</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="lastWindowClosed"></a>TQApplication::lastWindowClosed ()<tt> [signal]</tt> @@ -975,8 +975,8 @@ unlocked the mutex. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="locked"></a>TQApplication::locked () </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; +otherwise returns false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Due to different implementations of recursive mutexes on the supported platforms, calling this function from the same thread that previously locked the mutex will give undefined results. @@ -994,8 +994,8 @@ This virtual function is only implemented under Macintosh. <p> If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and reimplement this function, you get direct access to all Carbon Events that are received from the MacOS. -<p> Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed. -Return FALSE for normal event dispatching. +<p> Return true if you want to stop the event from being processed. +Return false for normal event dispatching. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="mainWidget"></a>TQApplication::mainWidget () const </h3> @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ Returns the value that is returned from the receiver's event handler. <p> For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events), the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event -(i.e., it returns FALSE). +(i.e., it returns false). <p> There are five different ways that events can be processed; reimplementing this virtual function is just one of them. All five approaches are listed below: @@ -1158,8 +1158,8 @@ cursors. <p>Examples: <a href="distributor-example.html#x2652">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, <a href="archivesearch-example.html#x473">network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h</a>, <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x737">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1311">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="reverseLayout"></a>TQApplication::reverseLayout ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a -mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and +Returns true if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a +mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns false if dialogs and widgets will be laid out left to right. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setReverseLayout">setReverseLayout</a>(). @@ -1318,12 +1318,12 @@ cursor flash time for all windows. By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings, and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off -by calling this function with <em>on</em> set to FALSE. +by calling this function with <em>on</em> set to false. <p> This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication object, like this: <p> <pre> int main( int argc, char** argv ) { - TQApplication::<a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>( FALSE ); // I know better than the user + TQApplication::<a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>( false ); // I know better than the user TQApplication myApp( argc, argv ); // Use default fonts & colors ... } @@ -1339,18 +1339,18 @@ consecutive mouse clicks to <em>ms</em> milliseconds. double click interval for all windows. <p> <p>See also <a href="#doubleClickInterval">doubleClickInterval</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEffectEnabled"></a>TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( <a href="tqt.html#UIEffect-enum">TQt::UIEffect</a> effect, bool enable = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEffectEnabled"></a>TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( <a href="tqt.html#UIEffect-enum">TQt::UIEffect</a> effect, bool enable = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Enables the UI effect <em>effect</em> if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, otherwise +Enables the UI effect <em>effect</em> if <em>enable</em> is true, otherwise the effect will not be used. <p> Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEffectEnabled">isEffectEnabled</a>(), <a href="tqt.html#UIEffect-enum">TQt::UIEffect</a>, and <a href="#setDesktopSettingsAware">setDesktopSettingsAware</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFont"></a>TQApplication::setFont ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> -</h3> Changes the default application font to <em>font</em>. If <em>informWidgets</em> is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFont"></a>TQApplication::setFont ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & font, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> +</h3> Changes the default application font to <em>font</em>. If <em>informWidgets</em> is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application -setting. If <em>informWidgets</em> is FALSE, the change only affects newly +setting. If <em>informWidgets</em> is false, the change only affects newly created widgets. If <em>className</em> is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit <em>className</em> (as reported by <a href="tqobject.html#inherits">TQObject::inherits</a>()). @@ -1364,25 +1364,25 @@ extra-large fonts to support their special characters. <p>Examples: <a href="desktop-example.html#x1724">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>, <a href="themes-example.html#x266">themes/metal.cpp</a>, and <a href="themes-example.html#x323">themes/themes.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setGlobalMouseTracking"></a>TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking ( bool enable )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Enables global mouse tracking if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables it -if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables global mouse tracking if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables it +if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> Enabling global mouse tracking makes it possible for widget event filters or application event filters to get all mouse move events, even when no button is depressed. This is useful for special GUI elements, e.g. tooltips. <p> Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no -button is depressed, it must do <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">TQWidget::setMouseTracking</a>(TRUE). +button is depressed, it must do <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">TQWidget::setMouseTracking</a>(true). <p> This function uses an internal counter. Each -<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>(TRUE) must have a corresponding -setGlobalMouseTracking(FALSE): +<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>(true) must have a corresponding +setGlobalMouseTracking(false): <pre> // at this point global mouse tracking is off - TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); - TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ); - TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( FALSE ); + TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( true ); + TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( true ); + TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( false ); // at this point it's still on - TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( FALSE ); + TQApplication::<a href="#setGlobalMouseTracking">setGlobalMouseTracking</a>( false ); // but now it's off </pre> @@ -1430,7 +1430,7 @@ calling <a href="#setMainWidget">setMainWidget</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#mainWidget">mainWidget</a>(), <a href="#exec">exec</a>(), and <a href="#quit">quit</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial2-04.html#x2560">chart/main.cpp</a>, <a href="helpsystem-example.html#x2701">helpsystem/main.cpp</a>, <a href="tqdialog.html#x2133">life/main.cpp</a>, <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x779">network/ftpclient/main.cpp</a>, <a href="tutorial1-01.html#x2284">t1/main.cpp</a>, and <a href="tutorial1-04.html#x2305">t4/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOverrideCursor"></a>TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const <a href="tqcursor.html">TQCursor</a> & cursor, bool replace = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOverrideCursor"></a>TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const <a href="tqcursor.html">TQCursor</a> & cursor, bool replace = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Sets the application override cursor to <em>cursor</em>. <p> Application override cursors are intended for showing the user @@ -1445,9 +1445,9 @@ restoreOverrideCursor() pops the active cursor off the stack. Every setOverrideCursor() must eventually be followed by a corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will never be emptied. -<p> If <em>replace</em> is TRUE, the new cursor will replace the last +<p> If <em>replace</em> is true, the new cursor will replace the last override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If <em>replace</em> is -FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack. +false, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack. <p> Example: <pre> TQApplication::<a href="#setOverrideCursor">setOverrideCursor</a>( TQCursor(TQt::<a href="tqt.html#CursorShape-enum">WaitCursor</a>) ); @@ -1458,11 +1458,11 @@ FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack. <p> <p>See also <a href="#overrideCursor">overrideCursor</a>(), <a href="#restoreOverrideCursor">restoreOverrideCursor</a>(), and <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">TQWidget::cursor</a>. <p>Examples: <a href="distributor-example.html#x2653">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, <a href="archivesearch-example.html#x474">network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h</a>, <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x738">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1312">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPalette"></a>TQApplication::setPalette ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPalette"></a>TQApplication::setPalette ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & palette, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Changes the default application palette to <em>palette</em>. If <em>informWidgets</em> is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the +Changes the default application palette to <em>palette</em>. If <em>informWidgets</em> is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application -setting. If <em>informWidgets</em> is FALSE, the change only affects newly +setting. If <em>informWidgets</em> is false, the change only affects newly created widgets. <p> If <em>className</em> is passed, the change applies only to widgets that inherit <em>className</em> (as reported by <a href="tqobject.html#inherits">TQObject::inherits</a>()). If @@ -1475,9 +1475,9 @@ any previously set class specific palettes. <p>Examples: <a href="i18n-example.html#x1934">i18n/main.cpp</a>, <a href="themes-example.html#x267">themes/metal.cpp</a>, <a href="themes-example.html#x324">themes/themes.cpp</a>, and <a href="themes-example.html#x187">themes/wood.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setReverseLayout"></a>TQApplication::setReverseLayout ( bool b )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a +If <em>b</em> is true, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as -Arabic and Hebrew. If <em>b</em> is FALSE, dialogs and widgets are laid +Arabic and Hebrew. If <em>b</em> is false, dialogs and widgets are laid out left to right. <p> Changing this flag in runtime does not cause a relayout of already instantiated widgets. @@ -1573,8 +1573,8 @@ for starting a drag. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="startingUp"></a>TQApplication::startingUp ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if an application object has not been created yet; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if an application object has not been created yet; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#closingDown">closingDown</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstyle.html">TQStyle</a> & <a name="style"></a>TQApplication::style ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -1645,8 +1645,8 @@ so will most likely result in crashes or other undesirable behavior. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tryLock"></a>TQApplication::tryLock () </h3> <p> Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If -the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread -has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of +the lock was obtained, this function returns true. If another thread +has locked the mutex, this function returns false, instead of waiting for the lock to become available. <p> The mutex must be unlocked with <a href="#unlock">unlock</a>() before another thread can successfully lock it. @@ -1656,9 +1656,9 @@ successfully lock it. </h3> Returns the type of application, Tty, GuiClient or GuiServer. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="unlock"></a>TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpCore = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="unlock"></a>TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpCore = true ) </h3> -<p> Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If <em>wakeUpCore</em> is TRUE (the default), +<p> Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If <em>wakeUpCore</em> is true (the default), then the core application thread will be woken with <a href="#wakeUpCoreThread">TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#lock">lock</a>(), <a href="#locked">locked</a>(), and <a href="threads.html">Thread Support in TQt</a>. @@ -1673,21 +1673,21 @@ Returns the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWheelScrollLines">setWheelScrollLines</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="widgetAt"></a>TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="widgetAt"></a>TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position <em>(x, y)</em>, or 0 if there is no TQt widget there. -<p> If <em>child</em> is FALSE and there is a child widget at position <em>(x, y)</em>, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If <em>child</em> -is TRUE the child widget at position <em>(x, y)</em> is returned. +<p> If <em>child</em> is false and there is a child widget at position <em>(x, y)</em>, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If <em>child</em> +is true the child widget at position <em>(x, y)</em> is returned. <p> This function is normally rather slow. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqcursor.html#pos">TQCursor::pos</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#grabMouse">TQWidget::grabMouse</a>(), and <a href="tqwidget.html#grabKeyboard">TQWidget::grabKeyboard</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="widgetAt-2"></a>TQApplication::widgetAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos, bool child = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="widgetAt-2"></a>TQApplication::widgetAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos, bool child = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position <em>pos</em>, or 0 if there is no TQt widget there. -<p> If <em>child</em> is FALSE and there is a child widget at position <em>pos</em>, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If <em>child</em> -is TRUE the child widget at position <em>pos</em> is returned. +<p> If <em>child</em> is false and there is a child widget at position <em>pos</em>, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If <em>child</em> +is true the child widget at position <em>pos</em> is returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="winEventFilter"></a>TQApplication::winEventFilter ( MSG * )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -1695,13 +1695,13 @@ This virtual function is only implemented under Windows. <p> The message procedure calls this function for every message received. Reimplement this function if you want to process window messages that are not processed by TQt. If you don't want -the event to be processed by TQt, then return TRUE; otherwise -return FALSE. +the event to be processed by TQt, then return true; otherwise +return false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="winFocus"></a>TQApplication::winFocus ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * widget, bool gotFocus ) </h3> This function is available only on Windows. -<p> If <em>gotFocus</em> is TRUE, <em>widget</em> will become the active window. +<p> If <em>gotFocus</em> is true, <em>widget</em> will become the active window. Otherwise the active window is reset to NULL. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & <a name="winStyleHighlightColor"></a>TQApplication::winStyleHighlightColor ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -1717,8 +1717,8 @@ This virtual function is only implemented under X11. <p> If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and reimplement this function, you get direct access to all X events that the are received from the X server. -<p> Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed. -Return FALSE for normal event dispatching. +<p> Return true if you want to stop the event from being processed. +Return false for normal event dispatching. <p> <p>See also <a href="#x11ProcessEvent">x11ProcessEvent</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="x11ProcessEvent"></a>TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent ( XEvent * event ) @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ the <em>event</em> was consumed by normal handling, and -1 if the <em>event</em> <p> <p> Prints a warning message containing the source code file name and -line number if <em>test</em> is FALSE. +line number if <em>test</em> is false. <p> This is really a macro defined in <a href="tqglobal-h.html">tqglobal.h</a>. <p> Q_ASSERT is useful for testing pre- and post-conditions. <p> Example: @@ -1937,11 +1937,11 @@ done on an application-wide basis to control debug output. </h3> <p> Obtains information about the system. -<p> The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in <em>*wordSize</em>. The <em>*bigEndian</em> is set to TRUE if this is a big-endian -machine, or to FALSE if this is a little-endian machine. +<p> The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in <em>*wordSize</em>. The <em>*bigEndian</em> is set to true if this is a big-endian +machine, or to false if this is a little-endian machine. <p> In debug mode, this function calls <a href="#qFatal">tqFatal</a>() with a message if the computer is truly weird (i.e. different endianness for 16 bit and -32 bit integers); in release mode it returns FALSE. +32 bit integers); in release mode it returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="qSystemWarning"></a>tqSystemWarning ( const char * msg, int code ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciicache-h.html b/doc/html/tqasciicache-h.html index 840073c96..62706a620 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciicache-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciicache-h.html @@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ class TQAsciiCache { public: TQAsciiCache( const TQAsciiCache<type> &c ) : TQGCache(c) {} - TQAsciiCache( int maxCost=100, int size=17, bool caseSensitive=TRUE, - bool copyKeys=TRUE ) + TQAsciiCache( int maxCost=100, int size=17, bool caseSensitive=true, + bool copyKeys=true ) : TQGCache( maxCost, size, AsciiKey, caseSensitive, copyKeys ) {} ~TQAsciiCache() { clear(); } TQAsciiCache<type> &operator=( const TQAsciiCache<type> &c ) @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public: { return TQGCache::remove_other(k); } type *take( const char *k ) { return (type *)TQGCache::take_other(k); } - type *find( const char *k, bool ref=TRUE ) const + type *find( const char *k, bool ref=true ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_other(k,ref);} type *operator[]( const char *k ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_other(k);} diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciicache.html b/doc/html/tqasciicache.html index 0f4a5216b..179f3f21d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciicache.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciicache.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqasciicache-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQAsciiCache-2"><b>TQAsciiCache</b></a> ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQAsciiCache-2"><b>TQAsciiCache</b></a> ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQAsciiCache"><b>~TQAsciiCache</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#maxCost"><b>maxCost</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#totalCost"><b>totalCost</b></a> () const</li> @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#insert"><b>insert</b></a> ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( const char * k )</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#take"><b>take</b></a> ( const char * k )</li> -<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const char * k, bool ref = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#operator[]"><b>operator[]</b></a> ( const char * k ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#statistics"><b>statistics</b></a> () const</li> </ul> @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ the least recently used items in the cache are removed. item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item. <p> There are also methods to <a href="#remove">remove</a>() or <a href="#take">take</a>() an object from the -cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete(TRUE)</a> tells the cache to delete items that +cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete(true)</a> tells the cache to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). <p> When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ items in the cache in arbitrary order. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqasciicacheiterator.html">TQAsciiCacheIterator</a>, <a href="tqcache.html">TQCache</a>, <a href="tqintcache.html">TQIntCache</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAsciiCache-2"></a>TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAsciiCache-2"></a>TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost @@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ largest expected number of items in the cache. item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed <em>maxCost</em>, the cache will start throwing out the older (least recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted. -<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case -sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. +<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is true (the default), the cache keys are case +sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in -US-ASCII. If <em>copyKeys</em> is TRUE (the default), TQAsciiCache makes +US-ASCII. If <em>copyKeys</em> is true (the default), TQAsciiCache makes a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char * pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys will never change, but very risky. @@ -134,11 +134,11 @@ enabled. <p> <p>See also <a href="#totalCost">totalCost</a>() and <a href="#size">size</a>(). <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqptrcollection.html#count">TQPtrCollection</a>. -<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = true ) const </h3> <p> Returns the item with key <em>k</em>, or 0 if the key does not exist -in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is TRUE (the default), the item is moved +in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ inserted last is returned. </h3> <p> Inserts the item <em>d</em> into the cache using key <em>k</em>, and with an -associated cost of <em>c</em>. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully -inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example, +associated cost of <em>c</em>. Returns true if the item is successfully +inserted. Returns false if the item is not inserted, for example, if the cost of the item exceeds <a href="#maxCost">maxCost</a>(). <p> The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQAsciiCache will remove old, least recently used items until there @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ is room for this new item. <p> Items with duplicate keys can be inserted. <p> The parameter <em>p</em> is internal and should be left at the default value (0). -<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns FALSE, you must delete <em>d</em> +<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns false, you must delete <em>d</em> yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using <em>d</em> after calling this function, because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ become invalid. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQAsciiCache::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="maxCost"></a>TQAsciiCache::maxCost () const </h3> @@ -182,16 +182,16 @@ the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. -<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, TRUE ). +<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, true ). <p> <p>See also <a href="#find">find</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQAsciiCache::remove ( const char * k ) </h3> -<p> Removes the item with key <em>k</em> and returns TRUE if the item was -present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Removes the item with key <em>k</em> and returns true if the item was +present in the cache; otherwise returns false. <p> The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if -you have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete(TRUE)</a>. +you have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete(true)</a>. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed. <p> All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciicacheiterator.html b/doc/html/tqasciicacheiterator.html index 1adbd9fbf..d38c263e6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciicacheiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciicacheiterator.html @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ that refer an item when that item is removed. <p> TQAsciiCacheIterator provides an <a href="#operator++">operator++</a>() and an <a href="#operator+-eq">operator+=</a>() to traverse the cache; <a href="#current">current</a>() and <a href="#currentKey">currentKey</a>() to access the current cache item and its key. It also provides <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>() and -<a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(), which return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or +<a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(), which return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() function -returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and <a href="#count">count</a>() returns the number +returns true if the cache is empty; and <a href="#count">count</a>() returns the number of items in the cache. <p> Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ independently from there on. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atFirst"></a>TQAsciiCacheIterator::atFirst () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the -cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the +cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toFirst">toFirst</a>() and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(). @@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ recently used list. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atLast"></a>TQAsciiCacheIterator::atLast () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; -otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; +otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toLast">toLast</a>() and <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>(). @@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ operates. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQAsciiCacheIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQAsciiCacheIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciidict-h.html b/doc/html/tqasciidict-h.html index 71b3b7db5..0d25e2bc8 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciidict-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciidict-h.html @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ class TQAsciiDict #endif { public: - TQAsciiDict(int size=17, bool caseSensitive=TRUE, bool copyKeys=TRUE ) + TQAsciiDict(int size=17, bool caseSensitive=true, bool copyKeys=true ) : TQGDict(size,AsciiKey,caseSensitive,copyKeys) {} TQAsciiDict( const TQAsciiDict<type> &d ) : TQGDict(d) {} ~TQAsciiDict() { clear(); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciidict.html b/doc/html/tqasciidict.html index a7bcc7b5b..f017afb7b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciidict.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciidict.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqasciidict-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQAsciiDict"><b>TQAsciiDict</b></a> ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQAsciiDict"><b>TQAsciiDict</b></a> ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQAsciiDict-2"><b>TQAsciiDict</b></a> ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQAsciiDict"><b>~TQAsciiDict</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQAsciiDict<type> & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )</li> @@ -112,19 +112,19 @@ size, and how deletions are handled. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqasciidictiterator.html">TQAsciiDictIterator</a>, <a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a>, <a href="tqintdict.html">TQIntDict</a>, <a href="tqptrdict.html">TQPtrDict</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAsciiDict"></a>TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQAsciiDict"></a>TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than <em>size</em> entries. <p> We recommend setting <em>size</em> to a suitably large <a href="primes.html#prime">prime</a> number (a bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance. -<p> When <em>caseSensitive</em> is TRUE (the default) TQAsciiDict treats -"abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and +<p> When <em>caseSensitive</em> is true (the default) TQAsciiDict treats +"abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is false "abc" and "Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the 26 letters in US-ASCII. -<p> If <em>copyKeys</em> is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys -using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the +<p> If <em>copyKeys</em> is true (the default), the dictionary copies keys +using strcpy(); if it is false, the dictionary just copies the pointers. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQAsciiDict-2"></a>TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( const <a href="tqasciidict.html">TQAsciiDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ pointers are copied (shallow copy). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQAsciiDict::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -188,8 +188,8 @@ item will be accessible using <a href="#operator[]">operator[]</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQAsciiDict::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; -otherwise it returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; +otherwise it returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqasciidict.html">TQAsciiDict</a><type> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQAsciiDict::operator= ( const <a href="tqasciidict.html">TQAsciiDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -225,8 +225,8 @@ reference to the stream. </h3> <p> Removes the item associated with <em>key</em> from the dictionary. -Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the -dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the +dictionary; otherwise returns false. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. @@ -264,11 +264,11 @@ become invalid. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqasciidictiterator.html b/doc/html/tqasciidictiterator.html index 6891ac3b7..7e826c994 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqasciidictiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqasciidictiterator.html @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ operates over. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQAsciiDictIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0, -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0, +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQAsciiDictIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqassistantclient.html b/doc/html/tqassistantclient.html index bff736423..39c360ec3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqassistantclient.html +++ b/doc/html/tqassistantclient.html @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ pages. When you call showPage(), TQt Assistant will be launched if it isn't already running. <p> The TQAssistantClient instance can open (<a href="#openAssistant">openAssistant</a>()) or close (<a href="#closeAssistant">closeAssistant</a>()) TQt Assistant whenever required. If TQt Assistant -is open, <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns TRUE. +is open, <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns true. <p> One TQAssistantClient instance interacts with one TQt Assistant instance, so every time you call openAssistant(), showPage() or closeAssistant() they are applied to the particular TQt Assistant @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ TQt Assistant and the calling application. The <em>msg</em> provides an explanation of the error. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQAssistantClient::isOpen () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqassistantclient.html#open-prop">"open"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="openAssistant"></a>TQAssistantClient::openAssistant ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqbitarray.html b/doc/html/tqbitarray.html index 03492f232..5e250cf84 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbitarray.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbitarray.html @@ -154,12 +154,12 @@ if there is only a single reference. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqmemarray.html#detach">TQMemArray</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fill"></a>TQBitArray::fill ( bool v, int size = -1 ) </h3> -Fills the bit array with <em>v</em> (1's if <em>v</em> is TRUE, or 0's if <em>v</em> -is FALSE). +Fills the bit array with <em>v</em> (1's if <em>v</em> is true, or 0's if <em>v</em> +is false). <p> <a href="#fill">fill</a>() resizes the bit array to <em>size</em> bits if <em>size</em> is nonnegative. -<p> Returns FALSE if a nonnegative <em>size</em> was specified and the bit -array could not be resized; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if a nonnegative <em>size</em> was specified and the bit +array could not be resized; otherwise returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#resize">resize</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqbitarray.html">TQBitArray</a> & <a name="operator-and-eq"></a>TQBitArray::operator&= ( const <a href="tqbitarray.html">TQBitArray</a> & a ) @@ -251,8 +251,8 @@ Returns a bit array that contains the inverted bits of this bit array. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="resize"></a>TQBitArray::resize ( uint size ) </h3> -Resizes the bit array to <em>size</em> bits and returns TRUE if the bit -array could be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. The array becomes +Resizes the bit array to <em>size</em> bits and returns true if the bit +array could be resized; otherwise returns false. The array becomes a null array if <em>size</em> == 0. <p> If the array is expanded, the new bits are set to 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). @@ -285,8 +285,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="testBit"></a>TQBitArray::testBit ( uint index ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the bit at position <em>index</em> is set, i.e. is 1; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the bit at position <em>index</em> is set, i.e. is 1; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setBit">setBit</a>() and <a href="#clearBit">clearBit</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="toggleBit"></a>TQBitArray::toggleBit ( uint index ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqbitmap-h.html b/doc/html/tqbitmap-h.html index 18523e8f1..bff1566a0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbitmap-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbitmap-h.html @@ -85,12 +85,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQBitmap : public TQPixmap { public: TQBitmap(); - TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, + TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ); - TQBitmap( const TQSize &, bool clear = FALSE, + TQBitmap( const TQSize &, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ); - TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=FALSE ); - TQBitmap( const TQSize &, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=FALSE ); + TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=false ); + TQBitmap( const TQSize &, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=false ); TQBitmap( const TQBitmap & ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGEIO TQBitmap( const TQString &fileName, const char *format=0 ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqbitmap.html b/doc/html/tqbitmap.html index ae66f818f..f1d8946c9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbitmap.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbitmap.html @@ -38,10 +38,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-2"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-3"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-4"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-5"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-2"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( int w, int h, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-3"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-4"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-5"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-6"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQBitmap-7"><b>TQBitmap</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>TQBitmap & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )</li> @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ efficient to pass TQBitmap objects as arguments. Constructs a null bitmap. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqpixmap.html#isNull">TQPixmap::isNull</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-2"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a> optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-2"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = false, <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a> optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ) </h3> Constructs a bitmap with width <em>w</em> and height <em>h</em>. -<p> The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if <em>clear</em> is FALSE; +<p> The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if <em>clear</em> is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> <tt>TQt::color0</tt>). <p> The optional <em>optimization</em> argument specifies the optimization setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in @@ -96,37 +96,37 @@ most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may benefit from setting this argument; see <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqpixmap.html#setOptimization">TQPixmap::setOptimization</a>() and <a href="tqpixmap.html#setDefaultOptimization">TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-3"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & size, bool clear = FALSE, <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a> optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-3"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & size, bool clear = false, <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a> optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Constructs a bitmap with the size <em>size</em>. -<p> The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if <em>clear</em> is FALSE; +<p> The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if <em>clear</em> is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> <tt>TQt::color0</tt>). <p> The optional <em>optimization</em> argument specifies the optimization setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may benefit from setting this argument; see <a href="tqpixmap.html#Optimization-enum">TQPixmap::Optimization</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-4"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-4"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false ) </h3> Constructs a bitmap with width <em>w</em> and height <em>h</em> and sets the contents to <em>bits</em>. -<p> The <em>isXbitmap</em> flag should be TRUE if <em>bits</em> was generated by +<p> The <em>isXbitmap</em> flag should be true if <em>bits</em> was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images. <p> Example (creates an arrow bitmap): <pre> uchar arrow_bits[] = { 0x3f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x1f, 0x3b, 0x71, 0xe0, 0xc0 }; - TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE ); + TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, true ); </pre> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-5"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQBitmap-5"></a>TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Constructs a bitmap with the size <em>size</em> and sets the contents to <em>bits</em>. -<p> The <em>isXbitmap</em> flag should be TRUE if <em>bits</em> was generated by +<p> The <em>isXbitmap</em> flag should be true if <em>bits</em> was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images. diff --git a/doc/html/tqboxlayout.html b/doc/html/tqboxlayout.html index a44cf2a61..05d7f1752 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqboxlayout.html +++ b/doc/html/tqboxlayout.html @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@ layouts). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHeightForWidth"></a>TQBoxLayout::hasHeightForWidth () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; +otherwise returns false. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#hasHeightForWidth">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="heightForWidth"></a>TQBoxLayout::heightForWidth ( int w ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -338,15 +338,15 @@ Resizes managed widgets within the rectangle <em>r</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setStretchFactor"></a>TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, int stretch ) </h3> Sets the <a href="layout.html#stretch-factor">stretch factor</a> for widget <em>w</em> to <em>stretch</em> and returns -TRUE if <em>w</em> is found in this layout (not including child -layouts); otherwise returns FALSE. +true if <em>w</em> is found in this layout (not including child +layouts); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setStretchFactor-2"></a>TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( <a href="tqlayout.html">TQLayout</a> * l, int stretch ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets the <a href="layout.html#stretch-factor">stretch factor</a> for the layout <em>l</em> to <em>stretch</em> and -returns TRUE if <em>l</em> is found in this layout (not including child -layouts); otherwise returns FALSE. +returns true if <em>l</em> is found in this layout (not including child +layouts); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> <a name="sizeHint"></a>TQBoxLayout::sizeHint () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqbrush.html b/doc/html/tqbrush.html index a8493f0e5..331abb140 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbrush.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbrush.html @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ Destroys the brush. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQBrush::operator!= ( const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> & b ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the brush is different from <em>b</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the brush is different from <em>b</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or pixmaps. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ Assigns <em>b</em> to this brush and returns a reference to this brush. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQBrush::operator== ( const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> & b ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the brush is equal to <em>b</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the brush is equal to <em>b</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and pixmaps. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqbuffer.html b/doc/html/tqbuffer.html index 2e6b6e1c9..72c12cf7f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbuffer.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbuffer.html @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ Destroys the buffer. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setBuffer"></a>TQBuffer::setBuffer ( <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> buf ) </h3> -Replaces the buffer's contents with <em>buf</em> and returns TRUE. -<p> Does nothing (and returns FALSE) if <a href="tqiodevice.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>() is TRUE. +Replaces the buffer's contents with <em>buf</em> and returns true. +<p> Does nothing (and returns false) if <a href="tqiodevice.html#isOpen">isOpen</a>() is true. <p> Note that if you open the buffer in write mode (<a href="tqfile.html#open"><a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_WriteOnly</a></a> or <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a>) and write something into the buffer, <em>buf</em> is also modified because <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> is an <a href="shclass.html#explicitly-shared">explicitly shared</a> class. diff --git a/doc/html/tqbutton.html b/doc/html/tqbutton.html index 20ccc3a05..e9a3f5665 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbutton.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbutton.html @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first <em>pressed</em> and then released into the <em>on</em> state. When the user clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the <em>pressed</em> state, then to the <em>off</em> state (isOn() and isDown() -are both FALSE). +are both false). <p> Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by <a href="tqpushbutton.html#setDefault">TQPushButton::setDefault</a>() and <a href="tqpushbutton.html#setAutoDefault">TQPushButton::setAutoDefault</a>(). <p> TQButton provides five signals: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ short while later. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accel-prop">accel</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRepeat"></a>TQButton::autoRepeat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop">"autoRepeat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQButton::clicked ()<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -265,22 +265,22 @@ returns 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hitButton"></a>TQButton::hitButton ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos ) const<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>pos</em> is inside the clickable button rectangle; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>pos</em> is inside the clickable button rectangle; +otherwise returns false. <p> By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses may reimplement it, though. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDown"></a>TQButton::isDown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#down-prop">"down"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusiveToggle"></a>TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop">"exclusiveToggle"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQButton::isOn () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#on-prop">"on"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isToggleButton"></a>TQButton::isToggleButton () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">"toggleButton"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paintEvent"></a>TQButton::paintEvent ( <a href="tqpaintevent.html">TQPaintEvent</a> * )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ See the <a href="tqbutton.html#down-prop">"down"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOn"></a>TQButton::setOn ( bool on )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Sets the state of this button to On if <em>on</em> is TRUE; otherwise to +<p> Sets the state of this button to On if <em>on</em> is true; otherwise to Off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toggleState-prop">toggleState</a>. @@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ See the <a href="tqbutton.html#text-prop">"text"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setToggleButton"></a>TQButton::setToggleButton ( bool b )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> If <em>b</em> is TRUE, this button becomes a toggle button; if <em>b</em> is -FALSE, this button becomes a command button. +<p> If <em>b</em> is true, this button becomes a toggle button; if <em>b</em> is +false, this button becomes a command button. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toggleButton-prop">toggleButton</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setToggleType"></a>TQButton::setToggleType ( <a href="tqbutton.html#ToggleType-enum">ToggleType</a> type )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ See the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggleType-prop">"toggleType"</a> property for de <h3 class=fn>void <a name="toggled"></a>TQButton::toggled ( bool on )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> -<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off. +<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off. <p> This may be the result of a user action, <a href="#toggle">toggle</a>() slot activation, or because <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>() was called. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clicked">clicked</a>(). @@ -394,16 +394,16 @@ effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoRepeat">setAutoRepeat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoRepeat">autoRepeat</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="down-prop"></a>down</h3> <p>This property holds whether the button is pressed. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals +<p>If this property is true, the button is pressed down. The signals <a href="#pressed">pressed</a>() and <a href="#clicked">clicked</a>() are not emitted if you set this property -to TRUE. The default is FALSE. +to true. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setDown">setDown</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isDown">isDown</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exclusiveToggle-prop"></a>exclusiveToggle</h3> <p>This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle. -<p>If this property is TRUE and the button is in a <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>, the +<p>If this property is true and the button is in a <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>, the button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#isExclusiveToggle">isExclusiveToggle</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="on-prop"></a>on</h3> @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ defined by the text. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#text">text</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="toggleButton-prop"></a>toggleButton</h3> <p>This property holds whether the button is a toggle button. -<p>The default value is FALSE. +<p>The default value is false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#isToggleButton">isToggleButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqbutton.html#ToggleState-enum">ToggleState</a> <a name="toggleState-prop"></a>toggleState</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqbuttongroup.html b/doc/html/tqbuttongroup.html index f0800a223..91b066fac 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqbuttongroup.html +++ b/doc/html/tqbuttongroup.html @@ -178,10 +178,10 @@ other negative integer, for instance -2, a unique identifier <p>Examples: <a href="listbox-example.html#x1428">listbox/listbox.cpp</a> and <a href="xform-example.html#x1222">xform/xform.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusive"></a>TQButtonGroup::isExclusive () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#exclusive-prop">"exclusive"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRadioButtonExclusive"></a>TQButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop">"radioButtonExclusive"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="moveFocus"></a>TQButtonGroup::moveFocus ( int key )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -230,14 +230,14 @@ See the <a href="tqbuttongroup.html#radioButtonExclusive-prop">"radioButtonExclu <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exclusive-prop"></a>exclusive</h3> <p>This property holds whether the button group is exclusive. -<p>If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are +<p>If this property is true, then the buttons in the group are toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button -in the group. The default value is FALSE. +in the group. The default value is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setExclusive">setExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isExclusive">isExclusive</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="radioButtonExclusive-prop"></a>radioButtonExclusive</h3> <p>This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive. -<p>If this property is TRUE (the default), the <a href="tqradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively. +<p>If this property is true (the default), the <a href="tqradiobutton.html">radiobuttons</a> in the group are treated exclusively. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setRadioButtonExclusive">setRadioButtonExclusive</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isRadioButtonExclusive">isRadioButtonExclusive</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="selectedId-prop"></a>selectedId</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcache-h.html b/doc/html/tqcache-h.html index 7d81eea89..8bf7ebe29 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcache-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcache-h.html @@ -90,8 +90,8 @@ class TQCache { public: TQCache( const TQCache<type> &c ) : TQGCache(c) {} - TQCache( int maxCost=100, int size=17, bool caseSensitive=TRUE ) - : TQGCache( maxCost, size, StringKey, caseSensitive, FALSE ) {} + TQCache( int maxCost=100, int size=17, bool caseSensitive=true ) + : TQGCache( maxCost, size, StringKey, caseSensitive, false ) {} ~TQCache() { clear(); } TQCache<type> &operator=( const TQCache<type> &c ) { return (TQCache<type>&)TQGCache::operator=(c); } @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ public: { return TQGCache::remove_string(k); } type *take( const TQString &k ) { return (type *)TQGCache::take_string(k); } - type *find( const TQString &k, bool ref=TRUE ) const + type *find( const TQString &k, bool ref=true ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_string(k,ref);} type *operator[]( const TQString &k ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_string(k);} diff --git a/doc/html/tqcache.html b/doc/html/tqcache.html index c7f046f0d..fd4baf5be 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcache.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcache.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqcache-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQCache-2"><b>TQCache</b></a> ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQCache-2"><b>TQCache</b></a> ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQCache"><b>~TQCache</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#maxCost"><b>maxCost</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#totalCost"><b>totalCost</b></a> () const</li> @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#insert"><b>insert</b></a> ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( const TQString & k )</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#take"><b>take</b></a> ( const TQString & k )</li> -<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & k, bool ref = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#operator[]"><b>operator[]</b></a> ( const TQString & k ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#statistics"><b>statistics</b></a> () const</li> </ul> @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ operates on pointers to X, or X*. item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item. <p> There are also methods to <a href="#remove">remove</a>() or <a href="#take">take</a>() an object from the -cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete +cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). <p> When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ same performance as a TQAsciiCache. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqcacheiterator.html">TQCacheIterator</a>, <a href="tqasciicache.html">TQAsciiCache</a>, <a href="tqintcache.html">TQIntCache</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQCache-2"></a>TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQCache-2"></a>TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ than the largest expected number of items in the cache. item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed <em>maxCost</em>, the cache will start throwing out the older (least recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted. -<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case -sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. +<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is true (the default), the cache keys are case +sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQCache"></a>TQCache::~TQCache () @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ that access this cache will be reset. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQCache::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -144,11 +144,11 @@ has been enabled. <p> <p>See also <a href="#totalCost">totalCost</a>(). <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqptrcollection.html#count">TQPtrCollection</a>. -<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQCache::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQCache::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & k, bool ref = true ) const </h3> <p> Returns the item associated with key <em>k</em>, or 0 if the key does -not exist in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is TRUE (the default), the item +not exist in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. @@ -157,14 +157,14 @@ inserted last is returned. </h3> <p> Inserts the item <em>d</em> into the cache with key <em>k</em> and associated -cost, <em>c</em>. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise -returns FALSE. +cost, <em>c</em>. Returns true if it is successfully inserted; otherwise +returns false. <p> The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is room for this new item. <p> The parameter <em>p</em> is internal and should be left at the default value (0). -<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g. +<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns false (which could happen, e.g. if the cost of this item alone exceeds <a href="#maxCost">maxCost</a>()) you must delete <em>d</em> yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using <em>d</em> after calling this function because any other insertions into the @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ become invalid. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQCache::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="maxCost"></a>TQCache::maxCost () const </h3> @@ -191,16 +191,16 @@ exist in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. -<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, TRUE ). +<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, true ). <p> <p>See also <a href="#find">find</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQCache::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & k ) </h3> -<p> Removes the item associated with <em>k</em>, and returns TRUE if the -item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Removes the item associated with <em>k</em>, and returns true if the +item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false. <p> The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if -you have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE). +you have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true). <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed. <p> All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to @@ -211,11 +211,11 @@ the next item in the cache's traversal order. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqcacheiterator.html b/doc/html/tqcacheiterator.html index 2dce30288..cdeea8d27 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcacheiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcacheiterator.html @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ refer an item when that item is removed. <p> TQCacheIterator provides an <a href="#operator++">operator++</a>(), and an <a href="#operator+-eq">operator+=</a>() to traverse the cache. The <a href="#current">current</a>() and <a href="#currentKey">currentKey</a>() functions are used to access the current cache item and its key. The <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>() -and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>() return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or +and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>() return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() function -returns TRUE if the cache is empty, and <a href="#count">count</a>() returns the number +returns true if the cache is empty, and <a href="#count">count</a>() returns the number of items in the cache. <p> Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ independently from there on. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atFirst"></a>TQCacheIterator::atFirst () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the -cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the +cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toFirst">toFirst</a>() and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(). @@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ recently used list. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atLast"></a>TQCacheIterator::atLast () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; -otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; +otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toLast">toLast</a>() and <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>(). @@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ operates. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQCacheIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; otherwise -it returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; otherwise +it returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQCacheIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvas-h.html b/doc/html/tqcanvas-h.html index 62093fe1a..3dcf91eac 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvas-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvas-h.html @@ -325,12 +325,12 @@ public: TQCanvasItemList collisions( const TQPointArray& pa, const TQCanvasItem* item, bool exact) const; - void drawArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p, bool double_buffer=FALSE); + void drawArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p, bool double_buffer=false); // These are for TQCanvasView to call virtual void addView(TQCanvasView*); virtual void removeView(TQCanvasView*); - void drawCanvasArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p=0, bool double_buffer=TRUE); + void drawCanvasArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p=0, bool double_buffer=true); void drawViewArea( TQCanvasView* view, TQPainter* p, const TQRect& r, bool dbuf ); // These are for TQCanvasItem to call @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ public: TQCanvasSpline(TQCanvas* canvas); ~TQCanvasSpline(); - void setControlPoints(TQPointArray, bool closed=TRUE); + void setControlPoints(TQPointArray, bool closed=true); TQPointArray controlPoints() const; bool closed() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvas.html b/doc/html/tqcanvas.html index aa7e6f0b3..f43d0774d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvas.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvas.html @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQCanvasItemList <a href="#collisions"><b>collisions</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCanvasItemList <a href="#collisions-2"><b>collisions</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCanvasItemList <a href="#collisions-3"><b>collisions</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & chunklist, const TQCanvasItem * item, bool exact ) const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#drawArea"><b>drawArea</b></a> ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#drawArea"><b>drawArea</b></a> ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setAdvancePeriod"><b>setAdvancePeriod</b></a> ( int ms )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setUpdatePeriod"><b>setUpdatePeriod</b></a> ( int ms )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setDoubleBuffering"><b>setDoubleBuffering</b></a> ( bool y )</li> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ set of canvas item classes, e.g. <a href="tqcanvasellipse.html">TQCanvasEllipse< <a href="tqcanvassprite.html">TQCanvasSprite</a> and <a href="tqcanvastext.html">TQCanvasText</a>. You can subclass to create your own canvas items; TQCanvasPolygonalItem is the most common base class used for this purpose. -<p> Items appear on the canvas after their <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#show">show()</a> function has been called (or <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#setVisible">setVisible(TRUE)</a>), and <em>after</em> +<p> Items appear on the canvas after their <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#show">show()</a> function has been called (or <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#setVisible">setVisible(true)</a>), and <em>after</em> <a href="#update">update</a>() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#setVisible">visible</a>, and then only if <a href="#update">update</a>() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ canvas (x, y coordinates) and a height (z coordinate), all of which are held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas (for example <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#x">TQCanvasItem::x</a>() is greater than width()). When a canvas -item is off the canvas, <a href="#onCanvas">onCanvas</a>() returns FALSE and the canvas +item is off the canvas, <a href="#onCanvas">onCanvas</a>() returns false and the canvas disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any of the common operations on the canvas.) <p> Canvas items can be moved with <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#move">TQCanvasItem::move</a>(). The <a href="#advance">advance</a>() @@ -318,15 +318,15 @@ list is ordered by z coordinates, from highest z coordinate </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks -listed in <em>chunklist</em>, excluding <em>item</em>. If <em>exact</em> is TRUE, +listed in <em>chunklist</em>, excluding <em>item</em>. If <em>exact</em> is true, only those which actually <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#collidesWith">collide with</a> <em>item</em> are returned; otherwise canvas items are included just for being in the chunks. <p> This is a utility function mainly used to implement the simpler <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#collisions">TQCanvasItem::collisions</a>() function. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawArea"></a>TQCanvas::drawArea ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & clip, <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawArea"></a>TQCanvas::drawArea ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & clip, <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * painter, bool dbuf = false ) </h3> -Paints all canvas items that are in the area <em>clip</em> to <em>painter</em>, using double-buffering if <em>dbuf</em> is TRUE. +Paints all canvas items that are in the area <em>clip</em> to <em>painter</em>, using double-buffering if <em>dbuf</em> is true. <p> e.g. to print the canvas to a printer: <pre> <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a> pr; @@ -369,16 +369,16 @@ the area <em>clip</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="onCanvas"></a>TQCanvas::onCanvas ( int x, int y ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the pixel position (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>) is on the canvas; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the pixel position (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>) is on the canvas; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#validChunk">validChunk</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="onCanvas-2"></a>TQCanvas::onCanvas ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the pixel position <em>p</em> is on the canvas; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the pixel position <em>p</em> is on the canvas; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#validChunk">validChunk</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="rect"></a>TQCanvas::rect () const @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ views that are showing it when <a href="#update">update</a>() is called next. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDoubleBuffering"></a>TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering ( bool y )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>y</em> is TRUE (the default) double-buffering is switched on; +If <em>y</em> is true (the default) double-buffering is switched on; otherwise double-buffering is switched off. <p> Turning off double-buffering causes the redrawn areas to flicker a little and also gives a (usually small) performance improvement. @@ -556,16 +556,16 @@ Repaints changed areas in all views of the canvas. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="validChunk"></a>TQCanvas::validChunk ( int x, int y ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the chunk position (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>) is on the canvas; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the chunk position (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>) is on the canvas; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#onCanvas">onCanvas</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="validChunk-2"></a>TQCanvas::validChunk ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the chunk position <em>p</em> is on the canvas; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the chunk position <em>p</em> is on the canvas; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#onCanvas">onCanvas</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="width"></a>TQCanvas::width () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvasitem.html b/doc/html/tqcanvasitem.html index d937a8ed8..45db52ec2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvasitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvasitem.html @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ or <a href="tqcanvastext.html">TQCanvasText</a>. canvas to the canvas item's constructor. An item can be moved to a different canvas using <a href="#setCanvas">setCanvas</a>(). <p> Items appear on the canvas after their <a href="#show">show()</a> -function has been called (or <a href="#setVisible">setVisible(TRUE)</a>), and <em>after</em> <a href="#update">update</a>() has been called. The +function has been called (or <a href="#setVisible">setVisible(true)</a>), and <em>after</em> <a href="#update">update</a>() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are <a href="#setVisible">visible</a>, and then only if <a href="#update">update</a>() is called. If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to the constructor you'll also need @@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ or remove items. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqcanvassprite.html#advance">TQCanvasSprite</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="animated"></a>TQCanvasItem::animated () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setVelocity">setVelocity</a>() and <a href="#setAnimated">setAnimated</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="boundingRect"></a>TQCanvasItem::boundingRect () const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -206,9 +206,9 @@ Returns the bounding rectangle of pixels that the canvas item <em>will</em> cove <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="collidesWith"></a>TQCanvasItem::collidesWith ( const <a href="tqcanvasitem.html">TQCanvasItem</a> * other ) const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the canvas item will collide with the <em>other</em> +<p> Returns true if the canvas item will collide with the <em>other</em> item <em>after</em> they have moved by their current velocities; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#collisions">collisions</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2914">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>. @@ -221,9 +221,9 @@ one item draw on the pixels of another item, but not all subclasses are so precise. Also, since pixel-wise collision detection can be slow, this function works in either exact or inexact mode, according to the <em>exact</em> parameter. -<p> If <em>exact</em> is TRUE, the canvas items returned have been +<p> If <em>exact</em> is true, the canvas items returned have been accurately tested for collision with the canvas item. -<p> If <em>exact</em> is FALSE, the canvas items returned are <em>near</em> the +<p> If <em>exact</em> is false, the canvas items returned are <em>near</em> the canvas item. You can test the canvas items returned using <a href="#collidesWith">collidesWith</a>() if any are interesting collision candidates. By using this approach, you can ignore some canvas items for which @@ -264,28 +264,28 @@ don't call <a href="tqpainter.html#resetXForm">TQPainter::resetXForm</a>() when Use <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>() instead. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="hide"></a>TQCanvasItem::hide () -</h3> Shorthand for <a href="#setVisible">setVisible</a>(FALSE). +</h3> Shorthand for <a href="#setVisible">setVisible</a>(false). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQCanvasItem::isActive () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQCanvasItem::isEnabled () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQCanvasItem::isSelected () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVisible"></a>TQCanvasItem::isVisible () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> Note that in this context TRUE does <em>not</em> mean that the canvas +<p> Returns true if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns +false. +<p> Note that in this context true does <em>not</em> mean that the canvas item is currently in a view, merely that if a view is showing the area where the canvas item is positioned, and the item is not obscured by items with higher z values, and the view is not @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ how you use the <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() value. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAnimated"></a>TQCanvasItem::setAnimated ( bool y )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets the canvas item to be in motion if <em>y</em> is TRUE, or not if <em>y</em> is FALSE. The speed and direction of the motion is set with +Sets the canvas item to be in motion if <em>y</em> is true, or not if <em>y</em> is false. The speed and direction of the motion is set with <a href="#setVelocity">setVelocity</a>(), or with <a href="#setXVelocity">setXVelocity</a>() and <a href="#setYVelocity">setYVelocity</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#advance">advance</a>() and <a href="tqcanvas.html#advance">TQCanvas::advance</a>(). @@ -386,8 +386,8 @@ pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions respectively. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setVisible"></a>TQCanvasItem::setVisible ( bool yes )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Makes the canvas item visible if <em>yes</em> is TRUE, or invisible if -<em>yes</em> is FALSE. The change takes effect when <a href="tqcanvas.html#update">TQCanvas::update</a>() is +Makes the canvas item visible if <em>yes</em> is true, or invisible if +<em>yes</em> is false. The change takes effect when <a href="tqcanvas.html#update">TQCanvas::update</a>() is next called. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setX"></a>TQCanvasItem::setX ( double x ) @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ obscure (are in front of) lower-z items. <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2918">canvas/canvas.cpp</a> and <a href="tutorial2-06.html#x2570">chart/chartform_canvas.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="show"></a>TQCanvasItem::show () -</h3> Shorthand for <a href="#setVisible">setVisible</a>(TRUE). +</h3> Shorthand for <a href="#setVisible">setVisible</a>(true). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2919">canvas/canvas.cpp</a> and <a href="tutorial2-06.html#x2571">chart/chartform_canvas.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="update"></a>TQCanvasItem::update ()<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvaspixmaparray.html b/doc/html/tqcanvaspixmaparray.html index eaa17c8af..64a8f4c66 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvaspixmaparray.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvaspixmaparray.html @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ can change this by reading in a separate set of image masks using <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn><a name="TQCanvasPixmapArray"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray () </h3> -Constructs an invalid array (i.e. <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return FALSE). +Constructs an invalid array (i.e. <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return false). You must call <a href="#readPixmaps">readPixmaps</a>() before being able to use this TQCanvasPixmapArray. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ filename, and the image contained in this file will be loaded as the first (and only) frame. <p> If <em>datafilenamepattern</em> does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, the array ends up empty and -<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() returns FALSE. +<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() returns false. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQCanvasPixmapArray-3"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><TQPixmap> list, <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><TQPoint> hotspots ) </h3> @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ instead. Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from the list of TQPixmaps in the <em>list</em>. Each pixmap will get a hotspot according to the <em>hotspots</em> array. If no hotspots are specified, each one is set to be at position (0, 0). -<p> If an error occurs, <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return FALSE. +<p> If an error occurs, <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return false. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQCanvasPixmapArray"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::~TQCanvasPixmapArray () </h3> @@ -126,14 +126,14 @@ than than <a href="#count">count</a>(), and returns an unspecified value otherwi <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::operator! () </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Use <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() instead. -<p> This returns FALSE if the array is valid, and TRUE if it is not. +<p> This returns false if the array is valid, and true if it is not. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readCollisionMasks"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::readCollisionMasks ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filename ) </h3> @@ -148,9 +148,9 @@ be loaded, just like <a href="#readPixmaps">TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps</a> <p> All collision masks must be 1-bit images or this function call will fail. <p> If the file isn't readable, contains the wrong number of images, -or there is some other error, this function will return FALSE, and +or there is some other error, this function will return false, and the array will be flagged as invalid; otherwise this function -returns TRUE. +returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readPixmaps"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filenamepattern, int fc = 0 ) @@ -165,8 +165,8 @@ and the image contained in this file will be loaded as the first (and only) frame. <p> If <em>filenamepattern</em> does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, this function will return -FALSE, and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return FALSE; otherwise this function -will return TRUE. +false, and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() will return false; otherwise this function +will return true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setImage"></a>TQCanvasPixmapArray::setImage ( int i, <a href="tqcanvaspixmap.html">TQCanvasPixmap</a> * p ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.html b/doc/html/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.html index c85391ace..58d37dd15 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.html @@ -175,8 +175,8 @@ returned by <a href="#areaPoints">areaPoints</a>()) while the item is visible. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQCanvasPolygonalItem::isValid () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the polygonal item's area information has not been -invalidated; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the polygonal item's area information has not been +invalidated; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#invalidate">invalidate</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpen.html">TQPen</a> <a name="pen"></a>TQCanvasPolygonalItem::pen () const @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Note that many TQCanvasPolygonalItems do not use the pen value. <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2924">canvas/canvas.cpp</a> and <a href="tutorial2-06.html#x2573">chart/chartform_canvas.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWinding"></a>TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setWinding ( bool enable )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, the polygonal item will use the winding +If <em>enable</em> is true, the polygonal item will use the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon; otherwise the odd-even algorithm will be used. <p> The default is to use the odd-even algorithm. @@ -215,8 +215,8 @@ odd-even algorithm will be used. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="winding"></a>TQCanvasPolygonalItem::winding () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to -determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns FALSE if it uses +Returns true if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to +determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns false if it uses the odd-even algorithm. <p> The default is to use the odd-even algorithm. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWinding">setWinding</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvasspline.html b/doc/html/tqcanvasspline.html index 96366314c..57395ea01 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvasspline.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvasspline.html @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <ul> <li class=fn><a href="#TQCanvasSpline"><b>TQCanvasSpline</b></a> ( TQCanvas * canvas )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQCanvasSpline"><b>~TQCanvasSpline</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setControlPoints"><b>setControlPoints</b></a> ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setControlPoints"><b>setControlPoints</b></a> ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQPointArray <a href="#controlPoints"><b>controlPoints</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#closed"><b>closed</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#rtti"><b>rtti</b></a> () const</li> @@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ Destroy the spline. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="closed"></a>TQCanvasSpline::closed () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the control points are a closed set; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the control points are a closed set; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> <a name="controlPoints"></a>TQCanvasSpline::controlPoints () const </h3> @@ -94,12 +94,12 @@ Returns 8 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Spline). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqcanvasitem.html#rtti">TQCanvasItem::rtti</a>(). <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqcanvaspolygon.html#rtti">TQCanvasPolygon</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setControlPoints"></a>TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> ctrl, bool close = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setControlPoints"></a>TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> ctrl, bool close = true ) </h3> Set the spline control points to <em>ctrl</em>. -<p> If <em>close</em> is TRUE, then the first point in <em>ctrl</em> will be +<p> If <em>close</em> is true, then the first point in <em>ctrl</em> will be re-used as the last point, and the number of control points must -be a multiple of 3. If <em>close</em> is FALSE, one additional control +be a multiple of 3. If <em>close</em> is false, one additional control point is required, and the number of control points must be one of (4, 7, 10, 13, ...). <p> If the number of control points doesn't meet the above conditions, diff --git a/doc/html/tqcanvasview.html b/doc/html/tqcanvasview.html index 48fe627c5..77bafa1bf 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcanvasview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcanvasview.html @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ zooms out by 2 times, then the inverse of this matrix is one that will zoom in by 2 times). <p> When you use this, you should note that the performance of the TQCanvasView will decrease considerably. -<p> Returns FALSE if <em>wm</em> is not invertable; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if <em>wm</em> is not invertable; otherwise returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#worldMatrix">worldMatrix</a>(), <a href="#inverseWorldMatrix">inverseWorldMatrix</a>(), and <a href="tqwmatrix.html#isInvertible">TQWMatrix::isInvertible</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2930">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqcdestyle-h.html b/doc/html/tqcdestyle-h.html index 2ab53a700..36b6fbf3f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcdestyle-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcdestyle-h.html @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_CDE TQCDEStyle : public TQMotifStyle TQ_OBJECT public: - TQCDEStyle( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ); + TQCDEStyle( bool useHighlightCols = false ); virtual ~TQCDEStyle(); int pixelMetric( PixelMetric metric, const TQWidget *widget = 0 ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqcdestyle.html b/doc/html/tqcdestyle.html index 478d43f39..4b870b2f5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcdestyle.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcdestyle.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqcdestyle-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQCDEStyle"><b>TQCDEStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQCDEStyle"><b>TQCDEStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQCDEStyle"><b>~TQCDEStyle</b></a> ()</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ documentation. <p>See also <a href="appearance.html">Widget Appearance and Style</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQCDEStyle"></a>TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQCDEStyle"></a>TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false ) </h3> Constructs a TQCDEStyle. -<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is FALSE (the default), then the style will +<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is false (the default), then the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. diff --git a/doc/html/tqchar-h.html b/doc/html/tqchar-h.html index 1a18e5ced..88d47e73c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqchar-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqchar-h.html @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public: static bool networkOrdered() { int wordSize; - bool bigEndian = FALSE; + bool bigEndian = false; tqSysInfo( &wordSize, &bigEndian ); return bigEndian; } diff --git a/doc/html/tqchar.html b/doc/html/tqchar.html index 3b990d622..6c22c7fb1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqchar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqchar.html @@ -122,10 +122,10 @@ composed to decomposed Unicode, and trying to compare and case-convert if you ask it to. <p> The classification functions include functions like those in ctype.h, but operating on the full range of Unicode characters. -They all return TRUE if the character is a certain type of -character; otherwise they return FALSE. These classification -functions are <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() (returns TRUE if the character is U+0000), -<a href="#isPrint">isPrint</a>() (TRUE if the character is any sort of printable +They all return true if the character is a certain type of +character; otherwise they return false. These classification +functions are <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() (returns true if the character is U+0000), +<a href="#isPrint">isPrint</a>() (true if the character is any sort of printable character, including whitespace), <a href="#isPunct">isPunct</a>() (any sort of punctation), <a href="#isMark">isMark</a>() (Unicode Mark), isLetter (a letter), <a href="#isNumber">isNumber</a>() (any sort of numeric character), <a href="#isLetterOrNumber">isLetterOrNumber</a>(), @@ -318,57 +318,57 @@ Returns the character's direction. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDigit"></a>TQChar::isDigit () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a decimal digit -(Number_DecimalDigit); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a decimal digit +(Number_DecimalDigit); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isLetter"></a>TQChar::isLetter () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a letter (Letter_* categories); -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a letter (Letter_* categories); +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isLetterOrNumber"></a>TQChar::isLetterOrNumber () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a letter or number (Letter_* or -Number_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a letter or number (Letter_* or +Number_* categories); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMark"></a>TQChar::isMark () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a mark (Mark_* categories); -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a mark (Mark_* categories); +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQChar::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the character is the Unicode character 0x0000 -(ASCII NUL); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the character is the Unicode character 0x0000 +(ASCII NUL); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNumber"></a>TQChar::isNumber () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a number (of any sort - Number_* -categories); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a number (of any sort - Number_* +categories); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isDigit">isDigit</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isPrint"></a>TQChar::isPrint () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a printable character; otherwise -returns FALSE. This is any character not of category Cc or Cn. +Returns true if the character is a printable character; otherwise +returns false. This is any character not of category Cc or Cn. <p> Note that this gives no indication of whether the character is available in a particular <a href="tqfont.html">font</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isPunct"></a>TQChar::isPunct () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a punctuation mark (Punctuation_* -categories); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a punctuation mark (Punctuation_* +categories); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSpace"></a>TQChar::isSpace () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a separator character -(Separator_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a separator character +(Separator_* categories); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSymbol"></a>TQChar::isSymbol () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a symbol (Symbol_* categories); -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the character is a symbol (Symbol_* categories); +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqchar.html#Joining-enum">Joining</a> <a name="joining"></a>TQChar::joining () const </h3> @@ -390,9 +390,9 @@ otherwise returns the character itself. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mirrored"></a>TQChar::mirrored () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the character is a mirrored character (one that +Returns true if the character is a mirrored character (one that should be reversed if the text direction is reversed); otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> <a name="mirroredChar"></a>TQChar::mirroredChar () const </h3> @@ -403,8 +403,8 @@ character, otherwise returns the character itself. </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if this character is in network byte order (MSB -first); otherwise returns FALSE. This is platform dependent. +<p> Returns true if this character is in network byte order (MSB +first); otherwise returns false. This is platform dependent. <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-char"></a>TQChar::operator char () const </h3> @@ -443,147 +443,147 @@ otherwise returns the character itself. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c1</em> and <em>c2</em> are not the same Unicode -character; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c1</em> and <em>c2</em> are not the same Unicode +character; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator!-eq-2"></a>operator!= ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c</em> is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c</em> is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator!-eq-3"></a>operator!= ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c</em> is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c</em> is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt"></a>operator< ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c1, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is less than -that of <em>c2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is less than +that of <em>c2</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt-2"></a>operator< ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is less than that -of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is less than that +of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt-3"></a>operator< ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em> is less than that of <em>c</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt-eq"></a>operator<= ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c1, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is less than +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is less than that of <em>c2</em>, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt-eq-2"></a>operator<= ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is less than or +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is less than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-lt-eq-3"></a>operator<= ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em> is less than or equal to that of <em>c</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>operator== ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c1, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c1</em> and <em>c2</em> are the same Unicode character; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c1</em> and <em>c2</em> are the same Unicode character; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-2"></a>operator== ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c</em> is the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c</em> is the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-3"></a>operator== ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>c</em> is the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>c</em> is the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt"></a>operator> ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c1, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is greater than -that of <em>c2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is greater than +that of <em>c2</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt-2"></a>operator> ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is greater than -that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is greater than +that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt-3"></a>operator> ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em> is greater than that of <em>c</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt-eq"></a>operator>= ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c1, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is greater than +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c1</em> is greater than that of <em>c2</em>, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt-eq-2"></a>operator>= ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, char ch ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is greater than +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of <em>c</em> is greater than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator-gt-eq-3"></a>operator>= ( char ch, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 +<p> Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character <em>ch</em> is greater than or equal to that of <em>c</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcheckbox-h.html b/doc/html/tqcheckbox-h.html index e651251fa..9188ee817 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcheckbox-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcheckbox-h.html @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ public: void setNoChange(); - void setTristate(bool y=TRUE); + void setTristate(bool y=true); bool isTristate() const; TQSize sizeHint() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqcheckbox.html b/doc/html/tqcheckbox.html index 4da4c0aa3..4aec77f25 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcheckbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcheckbox.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQCheckBox-2"><b>TQCheckBox</b></a> ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isChecked"><b>isChecked</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setNoChange"><b>setNoChange</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setTristate"><b>setTristate</b></a> ( bool y = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setTristate"><b>setTristate</b></a> ( bool y = true )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isTristate"><b>isTristate</b></a> () const</li> </ul> <h2>Public Slots</h2> @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ constructor. </h3><p>Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#accel-prop">"accel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRepeat"></a>TQButton::autoRepeat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop">"autoRepeat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQButton::clicked ()<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -151,22 +151,22 @@ returns 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isChecked"></a>TQCheckBox::isChecked () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcheckbox.html#checked-prop">"checked"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDown"></a>TQButton::isDown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#down-prop">"down"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusiveToggle"></a>TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop">"exclusiveToggle"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQButton::isOn () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#on-prop">"on"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isToggleButton"></a>TQButton::isToggleButton () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">"toggleButton"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTristate"></a>TQCheckBox::isTristate () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcheckbox.html#tristate-prop">"tristate"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> * <a name="pixmap"></a>TQButton::pixmap () const </h3><p>Returns the pixmap shown on the button. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ See the <a href="tqbutton.html#pixmap-prop">"pixmap"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setText"></a>TQButton::setText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets the text shown on the button. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#text-prop">"text"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTristate"></a>TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTristate"></a>TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = true ) </h3><p>Sets whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox to <em>y</em>. See the <a href="tqcheckbox.html#tristate-prop">"tristate"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqbutton.html#ToggleState-enum">ToggleState</a> <a name="state"></a>TQButton::state () const @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="toggled"></a>TQButton::toggled ( bool on )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> -<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off. +<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off. <p> This may be the result of a user action, <a href="tqbutton.html#toggle">toggle</a>() slot activation, or because <a href="tqbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>() was called. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>(). @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoRepeat">setAutoRepeat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoRepeat">autoRepeat</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checked-prop"></a>checked</h3> <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is checked. -<p>The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE. +<p>The default is unchecked, i.e. false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isChecked">isChecked</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> <a name="pixmap-prop"></a>pixmap</h3> @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ defined by the text. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setText">setText</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#text">text</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tristate-prop"></a>tristate</h3> <p>This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox. -<p>The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE. +<p>The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setTristate">setTristate</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isTristate">isTristate</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqchecklistitem.html b/doc/html/tqchecklistitem.html index 8bfe230b4..a52354016 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqchecklistitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqchecklistitem.html @@ -162,11 +162,11 @@ Toggle check box or set radio button to on. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQCheckListItem::isOn () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTristate"></a>TQCheckListItem::isTristate () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item is tristate; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item is tristate; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTristate">setTristate</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paintCell"></a>TQCheckListItem::paintCell ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & cg, int column, int width, int align )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ greater than 1000, to allow for extensions to this class. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#rtti">TQListViewItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOn"></a>TQCheckListItem::setOn ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets the button on if <em>b</em> is TRUE, otherwise sets it off. +Sets the button on if <em>b</em> is true, otherwise sets it off. Maintains radio button exclusivity. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setState"></a>TQCheckListItem::setState ( <a href="tqchecklistitem.html#ToggleState-enum">ToggleState</a> s ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqchecktableitem.html b/doc/html/tqchecktableitem.html index da2ccad4a..dde441c4a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqchecktableitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqchecktableitem.html @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ its label is set to the string <em>txt</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isChecked"></a>TQCheckTableItem::isChecked () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setChecked">setChecked</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="rtti"></a>TQCheckTableItem::rtti () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ allow for extensions to this class. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqtableitem.html#rtti">TQTableItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setChecked"></a>TQCheckTableItem::setChecked ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE the checkbox is checked; if <em>b</em> is FALSE the +If <em>b</em> is true the checkbox is checked; if <em>b</em> is false the checkbox is unchecked. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isChecked">isChecked</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqchildevent.html b/doc/html/tqchildevent.html index 19ac970ee..b64bc24be 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqchildevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqchildevent.html @@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ is to be removed or inserted. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inserted"></a>TQChildEvent::inserted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="removed"></a>TQChildEvent::removed () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the object lost a child; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the object lost a child; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqclipboard.html b/doc/html/tqclipboard.html index bde04f0e0..bf83f1e68 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqclipboard.html +++ b/doc/html/tqclipboard.html @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#clear">TQClipboard::clear</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * <a name="data"></a>TQClipboard::data ( <a href="tqclipboard.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> mode ) const @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#data">TQClipboard::data</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -220,19 +220,19 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#image">TQClipboard::image</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownsClipboard"></a>TQClipboard::ownsClipboard () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownsSelection"></a>TQClipboard::ownsSelection () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection -data; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection +data; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> <a name="pixmap"></a>TQClipboard::pixmap ( <a href="tqclipboard.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> mode ) const </h3> @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#pixmap">TQClipboard::pixmap</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#setData">TQClipboard::setData</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#setImage">TQClipboard::setImage</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#setPixmap">TQClipboard::setPixmap</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ TQClipboard::Clipboard. </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Use the <a href="#data">TQClipboard::data</a>(), <a href="#setData">TQClipboard::setData</a>() and related functions which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument. -<p> Sets the clipboard selection mode. If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, then +<p> Sets the clipboard selection mode. If <em>enable</em> is true, then subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard. @@ -376,14 +376,14 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#setText">TQClipboard::setText</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="supportsSelection"></a>TQClipboard::supportsSelection () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise +returns false. <p>Example: <a href="regexptester-example.html#x2477">regexptester/regexptester.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="text"></a>TQClipboard::text ( <a href="tqclipboard.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> mode ) const @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> This function uses the <a href="#text">TQClipboard::text</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). -If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is +If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ if the clipboard does not contain any text. This function uses the <a href="#text">TQClipboard::text</a>() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of <a href="#selectionModeEnabled">selectionModeEnabled</a>(). If selectionModeEnabled() -returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, +returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcloseevent.html b/doc/html/tqcloseevent.html index bfe2fe879..d743bb3e2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcloseevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcloseevent.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ independent top-level windows in a multi-window application. <p> <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a>s emits the <a href="tqobject.html#destroyed">destroyed()</a> signal when they are deleted. <p> If the last top-level window is closed, the <a href="tqapplication.html#lastWindowClosed">TQApplication::lastWindowClosed</a>() signal is emitted. -<p> The <a href="#isAccepted">isAccepted</a>() function returns TRUE if the event's receiver has +<p> The <a href="#isAccepted">isAccepted</a>() function returns true if the event's receiver has agreed to close the widget; call <a href="#accept">accept</a>() to agree to close the widget and call <a href="#ignore">ignore</a>() if the receiver of this event does not want the widget to be closed. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ want the widget to be closed. </h3> <p> Constructs a close event object with the accept parameter flag set -to FALSE. +to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="accept"></a>TQCloseEvent::accept () @@ -116,8 +116,8 @@ does not want the widget to be closed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQCloseEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the -widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the +widget; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>() and <a href="#ignore">ignore</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcolor.html b/doc/html/tqcolor.html index d44963cdb..21d1f85d0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcolor.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcolor.html @@ -396,8 +396,8 @@ This function is called from the <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQColor::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns FALSE if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the -default constructor; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the +default constructor; otherwise returns true. <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial2-03.html#x2550">chart/element.cpp</a>, <a href="tutorial2-08.html#x2599">chart/setdataform.cpp</a>, and <a href="scribble-example.html#x908">scribble/scribble.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="leaveAllocContext"></a>TQColor::leaveAllocContext ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -445,8 +445,8 @@ system. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQColor::operator!= ( const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & c ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this color has a different RGB value from <em>c</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this color has a different RGB value from <em>c</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQColor::operator= ( const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & c ) </h3> @@ -456,8 +456,8 @@ color. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQColor::operator== ( const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & c ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this color has the same RGB value as <em>c</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this color has the same RGB value as <em>c</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="pixel"></a>TQColor::pixel () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcolordialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqcolordialog-h.html index f643ef00a..af1682091 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcolordialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcolordialog-h.html @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ public: private: ~TQColorDialog(); - TQColorDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE ); + TQColorDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false ); void setColor( const TQColor& ); TQColor color() const; @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ private: void setSelectedAlpha( int ); int selectedAlpha() const; - void showCustom( bool=TRUE ); + void showCustom( bool=true ); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= TQColorDialogPrivate *d; diff --git a/doc/html/tqcolordialog.html b/doc/html/tqcolordialog.html index 473b175bd..32f4e44d5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcolordialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcolordialog.html @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is initially set to <em>initial</em>. The dialog is a child of <em>parent</em> and called <em>name</em>. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to TRUE if the user clicked -OK, and to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to true if the user clicked +OK, and to false if the user clicked Cancel. <p> If the user clicks Cancel, the <em>initial</em> value is returned. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setCustomColor"></a>TQColorDialog::setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c )<tt> [static]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcolordrag.html b/doc/html/tqcolordrag.html index ead839f08..2e6636095 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcolordrag.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcolordrag.html @@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ Constructs a color drag object with a white color. Passes <em>dragsource</em> an <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDecode"></a>TQColorDrag::canDecode ( <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the color drag object can decode the mime source -<em>e</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the color drag object can decode the mime source +<em>e</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decode"></a>TQColorDrag::decode ( <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & col )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcolorgroup.html b/doc/html/tqcolorgroup.html index f904cc8fe..be76388ca 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcolorgroup.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcolorgroup.html @@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ Returns the color that has been set for color role <em>r</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQColorGroup::operator!= ( const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & g ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this color group is different from <em>g</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this color group is different from <em>g</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <h3 class=fn><a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQColorGroup::operator= ( const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & other ) </h3> @@ -297,8 +297,8 @@ Copies the colors of <em>other</em> to this color group. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQColorGroup::operator== ( const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & g ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this color group is equal to <em>g</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this color group is equal to <em>g</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBrush"></a>TQColorGroup::setBrush ( <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#ColorRole-enum">ColorRole</a> r, const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> & b ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqcombobox.html b/doc/html/tqcombobox.html index efc2e444e..8a7aaeb68 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcombobox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcombobox.html @@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ style: <p> The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style, and can create both read-only and editable comboboxes: <pre> - TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" ); - TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" ); + TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( false, this, "read-only combobox" ); + TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( true, this, "editable combobox" ); </pre> <p> New-style comboboxes use a list box in both Motif and Windows @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ use the other constructor. </h3> Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or Windows look and feel. -<p> The input field can be edited if <em>rw</em> is TRUE, otherwise the user +<p> The input field can be edited if <em>rw</em> is true, otherwise the user may only choose one of the items in the combobox. <p> The <em>parent</em> and <em>name</em> arguments are passed on to the <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> constructor. @@ -261,10 +261,10 @@ argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user entered strings. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoCompletion"></a>TQComboBox::autoCompletion () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#autoCompletion-prop">"autoCompletion"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoResize"></a>TQComboBox::autoResize () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#autoResize-prop">"autoResize"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="changeItem"></a>TQComboBox::changeItem ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & t, int index ) </h3> @@ -312,10 +312,10 @@ See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#currentItem-prop">"currentItem"</a> property fo </h3><p>Returns the text of the combobox's current item. See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#currentText-prop">"currentText"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="duplicatesEnabled"></a>TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#duplicatesEnabled-prop">"duplicatesEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="editable"></a>TQComboBox::editable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqcombobox.html#editable-prop">"editable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="highlighted"></a>TQComboBox::highlighted ( int index )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ if there is one; otherwise returns 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoCompletion-prop"></a>autoCompletion</h3> <p>This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled. <p>This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for -non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default. +non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is false by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoCompletion">setAutoCompletion</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoCompletion">autoCompletion</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoMask-prop"></a>autoMask</h3> @@ -524,8 +524,8 @@ non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoResize-prop"></a>autoResize</h3> <p>This property holds whether auto resize is enabled. <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself -whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE. +<p> If this property is set to true then the combobox will resize itself +whenever its contents change. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoResize">autoResize</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="count-prop"></a>count</h3> @@ -550,9 +550,9 @@ combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the <a href="#insertionPolicy">insert is not <a href="#Policy-enum">NoInsertion</a>), then what happens is this: <ul> <li> If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted. -<li> If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the +<li> If the text is in the list and this property is true (the default), the text is inserted. -<li> If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text +<li> If the text is in the list and this property is false, the text is <em>not</em> inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes the current item. </ul> @@ -563,8 +563,8 @@ setting. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setDuplicatesEnabled">setDuplicatesEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#duplicatesEnabled">duplicatesEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="editable-prop"></a>editable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the combobox is editable. -<p>This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be -cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style +<p>This property's default is false. Note that the combobox will be +cleared if this property is set to true for a 1.x Motif style combobox. To avoid this, use <a href="#setEditable">setEditable</a>() before inserting any items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance diff --git a/doc/html/tqcombotableitem.html b/doc/html/tqcombotableitem.html index e90829e77..01efafc66 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcombotableitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcombotableitem.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ comboboxes in TQTables. <p><a href="tqcombotableitem-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQComboTableItem"><b>TQComboTableItem</b></a> ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQComboTableItem"><b>TQComboTableItem</b></a> ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQComboTableItem"><b>~TQComboTableItem</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCurrentItem"><b>setCurrentItem</b></a> ( int i )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCurrentItem-2"><b>setCurrentItem</b></a> ( const TQString & s )</li> @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ current item can be set with <a href="#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>() and <a href="#currentItem">currentItem</a>(). The text of the current item can be obtained with <a href="#currentText">currentText</a>(), and the text of a particular item can be retrieved with <a href="#text">text</a>(). -<p> If <a href="#isEditable">isEditable</a>() is TRUE the TQComboTableItem will permit the user +<p> If <a href="#isEditable">isEditable</a>() is true the TQComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items. @@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ number (see <a href="#rtti">rtti</a>()). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqchecktableitem.html">TQCheckTableItem</a>, <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a>, <a href="tqcombobox.html">TQComboBox</a>, and <a href="advanced.html">Advanced Widgets</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQComboTableItem"></a>TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a> * table, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & list, bool editable = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQComboTableItem"></a>TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a> * table, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & list, bool editable = false ) </h3> Creates a combo table item for the table <em>table</em>. The combobox's list of items is passed in the <em>list</em> argument. If <em>editable</em> is -TRUE the user may type in new list items; if <em>editable</em> is FALSE +true the user may type in new list items; if <em>editable</em> is false the user may only select from the list of items provided. <p> By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table -items since <a href="tqtableitem.html#isReplaceable">isReplaceable</a>() returns FALSE by default. +items since <a href="tqtableitem.html#isReplaceable">isReplaceable</a>() returns false by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqtable.html#clearCell">TQTable::clearCell</a>() and <a href="tqtableitem.html#EditType-enum">EditType</a>. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQComboTableItem"></a>TQComboTableItem::~TQComboTableItem () @@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Returns the text of the combo table item's current list item. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEditable"></a>TQComboTableItem::isEditable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the user can add their own list items to the -combobox's list of items; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the user can add their own list items to the +combobox's list of items; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEditable">setEditable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="rtti"></a>TQComboTableItem::rtti () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ current list item. Does nothing if no list item has the text <em>s</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEditable"></a>TQComboTableItem::setEditable ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user -may enter a new text item themselves. If <em>b</em> is FALSE the user may +If <em>b</em> is true the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user +may enter a new text item themselves. If <em>b</em> is false the user may may only choose one of the existing items. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEditable">isEditable</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqcontextmenuevent.html b/doc/html/tqcontextmenuevent.html index 24b6cd20d..beb6e655b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcontextmenuevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcontextmenuevent.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ the mouse or keyboard). </h3> <p> Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter -flag set to FALSE. +flag set to false. <p> The <em>reason</em> parameter must be <a href="#Reason-enum">TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse</a> or <a href="#Reason-enum">TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard</a>. <p> The <em>pos</em> parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. <em>globalPos</em> is the mouse position in absolute @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ coordinates. <em>state</em> is the ButtonState at the time of the event. </h3> <p> Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter -flag set to FALSE. +flag set to false. <p> The <em>reason</em> parameter must be <a href="#Reason-enum">TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse</a> or <a href="#Reason-enum">TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard</a>. <p> The <em>pos</em> parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. <em>state</em> is the ButtonState at the time of the @@ -163,15 +163,15 @@ the consumed flag as well. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQContextMenuEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>(), <a href="#ignore">ignore</a>(), and <a href="#consume">consume</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isConsumed"></a>TQContextMenuEvent::isConsumed () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE (which stops propagation of the event) if the -receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true (which stops propagation of the event) if the +receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>(), <a href="#ignore">ignore</a>(), and <a href="#consume">consume</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & <a name="pos"></a>TQContextMenuEvent::pos () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqcstring-h.html b/doc/html/tqcstring-h.html index 3c3b6f3ef..e405f64d6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcstring-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcstring-h.html @@ -187,18 +187,18 @@ public: TQCString &sprintf( const char *format, ... ); - int find( char c, int index=0, bool cs=TRUE ) const; - int find( const char *str, int index=0, bool cs=TRUE ) const; + int find( char c, int index=0, bool cs=true ) const; + int find( const char *str, int index=0, bool cs=true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP int find( const TQRegExp &, int index=0 ) const; #endif - int findRev( char c, int index=-1, bool cs=TRUE) const; - int findRev( const char *str, int index=-1, bool cs=TRUE) const; + int findRev( char c, int index=-1, bool cs=true) const; + int findRev( const char *str, int index=-1, bool cs=true) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP_CAPTURE int findRev( const TQRegExp &, int index=-1 ) const; #endif - int contains( char c, bool cs=TRUE ) const; - int contains( const char *str, bool cs=TRUE ) const; + int contains( char c, bool cs=true ) const; + int contains( const char *str, bool cs=true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP int contains( const TQRegExp & ) const; #endif @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ public: TQCString right( uint len ) const; TQCString mid( uint index, uint len=0xffffffff) const; - TQCString leftJustify( uint width, char fill=' ', bool trunc=FALSE)const; - TQCString rightJustify( uint width, char fill=' ',bool trunc=FALSE)const; + TQCString leftJustify( uint width, char fill=' ', bool trunc=false)const; + TQCString rightJustify( uint width, char fill=' ',bool trunc=false)const; TQCString lower() const; TQCString upper() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqcstring.html b/doc/html/tqcstring.html index 05e830590..1f164c561 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcstring.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcstring.html @@ -54,20 +54,20 @@ zero-terminated char array (char *). <li class=fn>bool <a href="#fill"><b>fill</b></a> ( char c, int len = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#copy"><b>copy</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString & <a href="#sprintf"><b>sprintf</b></a> ( const char * format, ... )</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-2"><b>find</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-2"><b>find</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#find-3"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev"><b>findRev</b></a> ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-2"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev"><b>findRev</b></a> ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-2"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-3"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-2"><b>contains</b></a> ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( char c, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-2"><b>contains</b></a> ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-3"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#left"><b>left</b></a> ( uint len ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#right"><b>right</b></a> ( uint len ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#mid"><b>mid</b></a> ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#leftJustify"><b>leftJustify</b></a> ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#rightJustify"><b>rightJustify</b></a> ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#leftJustify"><b>leftJustify</b></a> ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#rightJustify"><b>rightJustify</b></a> ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#lower"><b>lower</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#upper"><b>upper</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQCString <a href="#stripWhiteSpace"><b>stripWhiteSpace</b></a> () const</li> @@ -258,20 +258,20 @@ null string is created. <p> Appends string <em>str</em> to the string and returns a reference to the string. Equivalent to <a href="#operator+-eq">operator+=</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains"></a>TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains"></a>TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = true ) const </h3> Returns the number of times the character <em>c</em> occurs in the string. -<p> The match is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> if FALSE. +<p> The match is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> if false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-2"></a>TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-2"></a>TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns the number of times <em>str</em> occurs in the string. -<p> The match is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> if FALSE. +<p> The match is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> if false. <p> This function counts overlapping substrings, for example, "banana" contains two occurrences of "ana". <p> <p>See also <a href="#findRev">findRev</a>() and <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Example: <pre> <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> s = "banana and panama"; - <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE ); + <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", true, false ); s.<a href="tqstring.html#contains">contains</a>( r ); // 4 matches </pre> @@ -304,26 +304,26 @@ apply the function to that. Fills the string with <em>len</em> bytes of character <em>c</em>, followed by a '\0'-terminator. <p> If <em>len</em> is negative, then the current string length is used. -<p> Returns FALSE is <em>len</em> is nonnegative and there is not enough -memory to resize the string; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false is <em>len</em> is nonnegative and there is not enough +memory to resize the string; otherwise returns true. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find"></a>TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find"></a>TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const </h3> Finds the first occurrence of the character <em>c</em>, starting at position <em>index</em>. -<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> is FALSE. +<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> is false. <p> Returns the position of <em>c</em>, or -1 if <em>c</em> could not be found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x663">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-2"></a>TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-2"></a>TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the string <em>str</em>, starting at position <em>index</em>. -<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> is FALSE. +<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> is false. <p> Returns the position of <em>str</em>, or -1 if <em>str</em> could not be found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -339,22 +339,22 @@ found. string it is more efficient to convert the string to a <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> and apply the function to that. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev"></a>TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev"></a>TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const </h3> Finds the first occurrence of the character <em>c</em>, starting at position <em>index</em> and searching backwards. -<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> is FALSE. +<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> is false. <p> Returns the position of <em>c</em>, or -1 if <em>c</em> could not be found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-2"></a>TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-2"></a>TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the string <em>str</em>, starting at position <em>index</em> and searching backwards. -<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is TRUE, or case insensitive -if <em>cs</em> is FALSE. +<p> The search is case sensitive if <em>cs</em> is true, or case insensitive +if <em>cs</em> is false. <p> Returns the position of <em>str</em>, or -1 if <em>str</em> could not be found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -404,8 +404,8 @@ is appended. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQCString::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if <a href="#length">length</a>() == 0; -otherwise returns FALSE. An empty string is not always a null +<p> Returns true if the string is empty, i.e. if <a href="#length">length</a>() == 0; +otherwise returns false. An empty string is not always a null string. <p> See example in <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(), <a href="#length">length</a>(), and <a href="tqmemarray.html#size">size</a>(). @@ -413,16 +413,16 @@ string. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQCString::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the string is null, i.e. if <a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == 0; otherwise -returns FALSE. A null string is also an empty string. +<p> Returns true if the string is null, i.e. if <a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == 0; otherwise +returns false. A null string is also an empty string. <p> Example: <pre> TQCString a; // a.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == 0, a.<a href="tqmemarray.html#size">size</a>() == 0, a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 TQCString b == ""; // b.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == "", b.<a href="tqmemarray.html#size">size</a>() == 1, b.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 - a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // TRUE because a.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == 0 - a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE because a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 - b.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // FALSE because b.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == "" - b.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE because b.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 + a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // true because a.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == 0 + a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true because a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 + b.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // false because b.<a href="tqmemarray.html#data">data</a>() == "" + b.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true because b.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(), <a href="#length">length</a>(), and <a href="tqmemarray.html#size">size</a>(). @@ -442,13 +442,13 @@ string. <p> <p>See also <a href="#right">right</a>() and <a href="#mid">mid</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x664">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="leftJustify"></a>TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="leftJustify"></a>TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const </h3> Returns a string of length <em>width</em> (plus one for the terminating '\0') that contains this string padded with the <em>fill</em> character. <p> If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is -FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the -string. If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is TRUE, then the returned string is a <a href="#left">left</a>(<em>width</em>). +false (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the +string. If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is true, then the returned string is a <a href="#left">left</a>(<em>width</em>). <p> Example: <pre> TQCString s("apple"); @@ -636,14 +636,14 @@ string. <p> <p>See also <a href="#left">left</a>() and <a href="#mid">mid</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x669">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="rightJustify"></a>TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="rightJustify"></a>TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const </h3> Returns a string of length <em>width</em> (plus one for the terminating '\0') that contains zero or more of the <em>fill</em> character followed by this string. <p> If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is -FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the -string. If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is TRUE, then the returned string is a <a href="#left">left</a>(<em>width</em>). +false (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the +string. If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> is true, then the returned string is a <a href="#left">left</a>(<em>width</em>). <p> Example: <pre> TQCString s("pie"); @@ -656,8 +656,8 @@ string. If the length of the string exceeds <em>width</em> and <em>truncate</em> </h3> Sets the character at position <em>index</em> to <em>c</em> and expands the string if necessary, padding with spaces. -<p> Returns FALSE if <em>index</em> was out of range and the string could -not be expanded; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if <em>index</em> was out of range and the string could +not be expanded; otherwise returns true. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & <a name="setNum"></a>TQCString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 ) </h3> @@ -768,58 +768,58 @@ and the end. <h3 class=fn>double <a name="toDouble"></a>TQCString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>double</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>float <a name="toFloat"></a>TQCString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>float</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="toInt"></a>TQCString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>int</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>long <a name="toLong"></a>TQCString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>long</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>short <a name="toShort"></a>TQCString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>short</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise -<em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +<em>*ok</em> is set to true. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="toUInt"></a>TQCString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to an <tt>unsigned int</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>ulong <a name="toULong"></a>TQCString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to an <tt>unsigned long</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>ushort <a name="toUShort"></a>TQCString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the string converted to an <tt>unsigned short</tt> value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE if the string is not a +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to false if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise -<em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +<em>*ok</em> is set to true. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="truncate"></a>TQCString::truncate ( uint pos ) </h3> @@ -850,21 +850,21 @@ Returns a new string that is a copy of this string converted to upper case. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq-2"></a>operator!= ( const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s1, const char * s2 ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq-3"></a>operator!= ( const char * s1, const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s2 ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="operator+"></a>operator+ ( const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s1, const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s2 ) @@ -902,7 +902,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) < 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) < 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -924,8 +924,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) <= 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -933,8 +933,8 @@ returns FALSE. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) <= 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -942,28 +942,28 @@ returns FALSE. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-2"></a>operator== ( const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s1, const char * s2 ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-3"></a>operator== ( const char * s1, const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s2 ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>operator> ( const <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & s1, const char * s2 ) </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) > 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -971,7 +971,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) > 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -979,8 +979,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) >= 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. @@ -988,8 +988,8 @@ returns FALSE. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#qstrcmp">qstrcmp</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) >= 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asciinotion">Note on character comparisons</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqcustommenuitem.html b/doc/html/tqcustommenuitem.html index 0879c8891..bb716ff31 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqcustommenuitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqcustommenuitem.html @@ -61,11 +61,11 @@ selection of drawing utilities in a vector drawing program. <p> A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with <a href="tqmenudata.html#insertItem">TQPopupMenu::insertItem</a>(). <p> By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard -accelerator. You can reimplement <a href="#fullSpan">fullSpan</a>() to return TRUE if you +accelerator. You can reimplement <a href="#fullSpan">fullSpan</a>() to return true if you want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is particularly useful for labels. <p> If you want the custom item to be treated just as a separator, -reimplement <a href="#isSeparator">isSeparator</a>() to return TRUE. +reimplement <a href="#isSeparator">isSeparator</a>() to return true. <p> Note that you can insert pixmaps or bitmaps as items into a popup menu without needing to create a TQCustomMenuItem. However, custom menu items offer more flexibility, and -- especially important @@ -90,23 +90,23 @@ Destroys a TQCustomMenuItem <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fullSpan"></a>TQCustomMenuItem::fullSpan () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item wants to span the entire popup menu -width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is FALSE, meaning that +Returns true if this item wants to span the entire popup menu +width; otherwise returns false. The default is false, meaning that the menu may show an icon and an accelerator key for this item as well. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSeparator"></a>TQCustomMenuItem::isSeparator () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paint"></a>TQCustomMenuItem::paint ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, const <a href="tqcolorgroup.html">TQColorGroup</a> & cg, bool act, bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> <p> Paints this item. When this function is invoked, the painter <em>p</em> is set to a font and foreground color suitable for a menu item -text using color group <em>cg</em>. The item is active if <em>act</em> is TRUE -and enabled if <em>enabled</em> is TRUE. The geometry values <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, +text using color group <em>cg</em>. The item is active if <em>act</em> is true +and enabled if <em>enabled</em> is true. The geometry values <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em> and <em>h</em> specify where to draw the item. <p> Do not draw any background, this has already been done by the popup menu according to the current GUI style. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatabrowser-h.html b/doc/html/tqdatabrowser-h.html index aee84835a..55ea49115 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatabrowser-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatabrowser-h.html @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ public: TQStringList sort() const; void setFilter( const TQString& filter ); TQString filter() const; - virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE ); + virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = false ); TQSqlCursor* sqlCursor() const; virtual void setForm( TQSqlForm* form ); TQSqlForm* form(); @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ public: virtual void setAutoEdit( bool autoEdit ); bool autoEdit() const; - virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = FALSE ); + virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = false ); signals: void firstRecordAvailable( bool available ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatabrowser.html b/doc/html/tqdatabrowser.html index fbef3df52..da1cb4784 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatabrowser.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatabrowser.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ navigation for data entry forms. <li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setFilter"><b>setFilter</b></a> ( const TQString & filter )</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#filter"><b>filter</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSqlCursor"><b>setSqlCursor</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSqlCursor"><b>setSqlCursor</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = false )</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlCursor * <a href="#sqlCursor"><b>sqlCursor</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setForm"><b>setForm</b></a> ( TQSqlForm * form )</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlForm * <a href="#form"><b>form</b></a> ()</li> @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ navigation for data entry forms. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isReadOnly"><b>isReadOnly</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setAutoEdit"><b>setAutoEdit</b></a> ( bool autoEdit )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#autoEdit"><b>autoEdit</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#seek"><b>seek</b></a> ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#seek"><b>seek</b></a> ( int i, bool relative = false )</li> </ul> <h2>Public Slots</h2> <ul> @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ name <em>name</em> and widget flags set to <em>fl</em>. Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoEdit"></a>TQDataBrowser::autoEdit () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#autoEdit-prop">"autoEdit"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="beforeDelete"></a>TQDataBrowser::beforeDelete ( <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * buf )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ to its former position. See <a href="#Boundary-enum">TQDataBrowser::Boundary</a> <p> <p>See also <a href="#Boundary-enum">Boundary</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="boundaryChecking"></a>TQDataBrowser::boundaryChecking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#boundaryChecking-prop">"boundaryChecking"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValues"></a>TQDataBrowser::clearValues ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -272,10 +272,10 @@ implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmCancels"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmCancels-prop">"confirmCancels"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmDelete"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmDelete-prop">"confirmDelete"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsql.html#Confirm-enum">TQSql::Confirm</a> <a name="confirmEdit"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmEdit ( <a href="tqsql.html#Op-enum">TQSql::Op</a> m )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -286,13 +286,13 @@ implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmEdits"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmEdits-prop">"confirmEdits"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmInsert"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmInsert-prop">"confirmInsert"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmUpdate"></a>TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#confirmUpdate-prop">"confirmUpdate"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="currentChanged"></a>TQDataBrowser::currentChanged ( const <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * record )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -303,8 +303,8 @@ current cursor's record. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="currentEdited"></a>TQDataBrowser::currentEdited ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the form's edit buffer differs from the current -cursor buffer; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the form's edit buffer differs from the current +cursor buffer; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorChanged"></a>TQDataBrowser::cursorChanged ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#Mode-enum">TQSqlCursor::Mode</a> mode )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -330,10 +330,10 @@ Performs a delete on the default cursor using the values from the default form and updates the default form. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and -TRUE is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there +true is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error occurred during the deletion from the database, <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>() is -called and FALSE is returned. +called and false is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">cursor</a>, <a href="#form">form</a>(), and <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="filter"></a>TQDataBrowser::filter () const @@ -396,13 +396,13 @@ Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the insert into the database, <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>() is called and -FALSE is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is +false is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the -<a href="#cursorChanged">cursorChanged</a>() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned. +<a href="#cursorChanged">cursorChanged</a>() signal is emitted, and true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorChanged">cursorChanged</a>(), <a href="#sqlCursor">sqlCursor</a>(), <a href="#form">form</a>(), and <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQDataBrowser::isReadOnly () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatabrowser.html#readOnly-prop">"readOnly"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="last"></a>TQDataBrowser::last ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -501,11 +501,11 @@ browser's current filter and sort are applied if they have been set. <p> <p>See also <a href="#filter-prop">filter</a> and <a href="#sort-prop">sort</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="seek"></a>TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="seek"></a>TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index <em>i</em> and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is -no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If <em>relative</em> is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the cursor is moved +no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If <em>relative</em> is true (the default is false), the cursor is moved relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for update and the <a href="#primeUpdate">primeUpdate</a>() signal is emitted. @@ -554,10 +554,10 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Sets the data browser's sort to the <a href="tqsqlindex.html">TQSqlIndex</a> <em>sort</em>. To apply the new sort, use <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). <p> -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSqlCursor"></a>TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSqlCursor"></a>TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor, bool autoDelete = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to <em>cursor</em>. If -<em>autoDelete</em> is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the data browser +<em>autoDelete</em> is true (the default is false), the data browser takes ownership of the <em>cursor</em> pointer, which will be deleted when the browser is destroyed, or when <a href="#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>() is called again. To activate the <em>cursor</em> use <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). The cursor's edit @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ action, <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>() is called. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="updateBoundary"></a>TQDataBrowser::updateBoundary ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -If <a href="#boundaryChecking">boundaryChecking</a>() is TRUE, checks the boundary of the current +If <a href="#boundaryChecking">boundaryChecking</a>() is true, checks the boundary of the current default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of the cursor. @@ -596,9 +596,9 @@ Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the update on the database, <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>() is called and -FALSE is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is +false is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the <a href="#cursorChanged">cursorChanged</a>() -signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned. +signal is emitted, and true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">cursor</a>, <a href="#form">form</a>(), and <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="writeFields"></a>TQDataBrowser::writeFields ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -609,12 +609,12 @@ there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoEdit-prop"></a>autoEdit</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits. -<p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins +<p>The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: <p> <ul> -<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE -<li> the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE +<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true +<li> the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is false </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>(). @@ -627,23 +627,23 @@ emitted indicating the current position of the default cursor. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setBoundaryChecking">setBoundaryChecking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#boundaryChecking">boundaryChecking</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmCancels-prop"></a>confirmCancels</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations. -<p>If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the +<p>If this property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the <a href="#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all cancels -occur immediately. The default is FALSE. +occur immediately. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmDelete-prop"></a>confirmDelete</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions, +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms deletions, otherwise deletions happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, and <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmEdits-prop"></a>confirmEdits</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms edits. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms all edit operations (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by @@ -653,14 +653,14 @@ reimplementing the <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function, <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmInsert-prop"></a>confirmInsert</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions, +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms insertions, otherwise insertions happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, <a href="#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmUpdate-prop"></a>confirmUpdate</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser confirms updates. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise +<p>If this property is true, the browser confirms updates, otherwise updates happen immediately. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a>, <a href="#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>, and <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>(). @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ a SQL WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword, e.g. "id>1000", <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#filter">filter</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readOnly-prop"></a>readOnly</h3> <p>This property holds whether the browser is read-only. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser +<p>The default is false, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser is read-only, no database edits will be allowed. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatasource.html b/doc/html/tqdatasource.html index f31e7832f..a94e7ac51 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatasource.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatasource.html @@ -60,14 +60,14 @@ it is currently able to provide. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>void <a name="enableRewind"></a>TQDataSource::enableRewind ( bool on )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If this function is called with <em>on</em> set to TRUE, and <a href="#rewindable">rewindable</a>() -is TRUE, then the data source must take measures to allow the <a href="#rewind">rewind</a>() -function to subsequently operate as described. If rewindable() is FALSE, +If this function is called with <em>on</em> set to true, and <a href="#rewindable">rewindable</a>() +is true, then the data source must take measures to allow the <a href="#rewind">rewind</a>() +function to subsequently operate as described. If rewindable() is false, the function should call <a href="#enableRewind">TQDataSource::enableRewind</a>(), which aborts with a <a href="tqapplication.html#qFatal">tqFatal</a>() error. <p> For example, a network connection may choose to use a disk cache of input only if rewinding is enabled before the first buffer-full of -data is discarded, returning FALSE in rewindable() if that first buffer +data is discarded, returning false in rewindable() if that first buffer is discarded. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqiodevicesource.html#enableRewind">TQIODeviceSource</a>. @@ -87,13 +87,13 @@ able to provide any more data (until after a <a href="#rewind">rewind</a>()), it <h3 class=fn>void <a name="rewind"></a>TQDataSource::rewind ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This function rewinds the data source. This may only be called if -<a href="#enableRewind">enableRewind</a>(TRUE) has been previously called. +<a href="#enableRewind">enableRewind</a>(true) has been previously called. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqiodevicesource.html#rewind">TQIODeviceSource</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rewindable"></a>TQDataSource::rewindable () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -This function should return TRUE if the data source can be rewound. -<p> The default returns FALSE. +This function should return true if the data source can be rewound. +<p> The default returns false. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqiodevicesource.html#rewindable">TQIODeviceSource</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="sendTo"></a>TQDataSource::sendTo ( <a href="tqdatasink.html">TQDataSink</a> *, int count )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatastream-h.html b/doc/html/tqdatastream-h.html index 8f0c9f637..0169e628c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatastream-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatastream-h.html @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ inline TQIODevice *TQDataStream::device() const { return dev; } inline bool TQDataStream::atEnd() const -{ return dev ? dev->atEnd() : TRUE; } +{ return dev ? dev->atEnd() : true; } inline bool TQDataStream::eof() const { return atEnd(); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatastream.html b/doc/html/tqdatastream.html index 8645f78fd..83dc0d459 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatastream.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatastream.html @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ create the 32-bit length value, then that many characters for the <tt>char*</tt> string including the NUL are read. <p> The initial IODevice is usually set in the constructor, but can be changed with <a href="#setDevice">setDevice</a>(). If you've reached the end of the data -(or if there is no IODevice set) <a href="#atEnd">atEnd</a>() will return TRUE. +(or if there is no IODevice set) <a href="#atEnd">atEnd</a>() will return true. <p> If you want the data to be compatible with an earlier version of TQt use <a href="#setVersion">setVersion</a>(). <p> If you want the data to be human-readable, e.g. for debugging, you @@ -268,9 +268,9 @@ an internal IO device processing a <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> pa <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQDataStream::atEnd () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of +<p> Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise -returns FALSE, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is +returns false, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is before the end position. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqiodevice.html#atEnd">TQIODevice::atEnd</a>(). @@ -290,17 +290,17 @@ before the end position. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="eof"></a>TQDataStream::eof () const </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of +<p> Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of stream or file) or if there is no IO device set. -<p> Returns FALSE if the current position of the read/write head of the IO +<p> Returns false if the current position of the read/write head of the IO device is somewhere before the end position. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqiodevice.html#atEnd">TQIODevice::atEnd</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isPrintableData"></a>TQDataStream::isPrintableData () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPrintableData">setPrintableData</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="operator-lt-lt"></a>TQDataStream::operator<< ( TQ_INT8 i ) @@ -497,10 +497,10 @@ void <a href="#setDevice">TQDataStream::setDevice</a>(<a href="tqiodevice.html"> <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPrintableData"></a>TQDataStream::setPrintableData ( bool enable ) </h3> -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, data will be output in a human readable -format. If <em>enable</em> is FALSE, data will be output in a binary +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true, data will be output in a human readable +format. If <em>enable</em> is false, data will be output in a binary format. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, the write functions will generate output +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true, the write functions will generate output that consists of printable characters (7 bit ASCII). This output will typically be a lot larger than the default binary output, and consequently slower to write. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatatable-h.html b/doc/html/tqdatatable-h.html index b5ee67ff5..1615ca1af 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatatable-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatatable-h.html @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQDataTable : public TQTable public: TQDataTable ( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDataTable(); virtual void addColumn( const TQString& fieldName, @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public: TQStringList sort() const; virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor = 0, - bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE ); + bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false ); TQSqlCursor* sqlCursor() const; virtual void setNullText( const TQString& nullText ); @@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ public: RefreshAll = 3 }; void refresh( Refresh mode ); - void sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, - bool wholeRows = FALSE ); + void sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, + bool wholeRows = false ); TQString text ( int row, int col ) const; TQVariant value ( int row, int col ) const; TQSqlRecord* currentRecord() const; @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ public slots: void setColumnWidth( int col, int w ); void adjustColumn( int col ); void setColumnStretchable( int col, bool stretch ); - void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeaders = FALSE ); + void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeaders = false ); protected: virtual bool insertCurrent(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatatable.html b/doc/html/tqdatatable.html index df11bc709..4e5e7b4cc 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatatable.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatatable.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn><a href="#TQDataTable"><b>TQDataTable</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQDataTable-2"><b>TQDataTable</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQDataTable-2"><b>TQDataTable</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQDataTable"><b>~TQDataTable</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addColumn"><b>addColumn</b></a> ( const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeColumn"><b>removeColumn</b></a> ( uint col )</li> @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#autoEdit"><b>autoEdit</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#filter"><b>filter</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSqlCursor"><b>setSqlCursor</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSqlCursor"><b>setSqlCursor</b></a> ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false )</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlCursor * <a href="#sqlCursor"><b>sqlCursor</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setNullText"><b>setNullText</b></a> ( const TQString & nullText )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setTrueText"><b>setTrueText</b></a> ( const TQString & trueText )</li> @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSort-2"><b>setSort</b></a> ( const TQSqlIndex & sort )</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Refresh-enum"><b>Refresh</b></a> { RefreshData = 1, RefreshColumns = 2, RefreshAll = 3 }</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#refresh-2"><b>refresh</b></a> ( Refresh mode )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sortColumn"><b>sortColumn</b></a> ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sortColumn"><b>sortColumn</b></a> ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#text"><b>text</b></a> ( int row, int col ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQVariant <a href="#value"><b>value</b></a> ( int row, int col ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlRecord * <a href="#currentRecord"><b>currentRecord</b></a> () const</li> @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ initiated by pressing F2 (or right clicking and then clicking the appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled automatically (see <a href="#handleError">handleError</a>() to change this behavior). Note -that if <a href="#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>() is FALSE navigating to another record will +that if <a href="#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>() is false navigating to another record will cancel the insert or update. <p> The user can be asked to confirm all edits with <a href="#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>(). For more precise control use <a href="#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>(), @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ options see <a href="#setSort">setSort</a>(), <a href="#sortColumn">sortColumn</ <a href="#sortDescending">sortDescending</a>(). Note that sorting operations will not behave as expected if you are using a <a href="tqsqlselectcursor.html">TQSqlSelectCursor</a> because it uses user-defined SQL queries to obtain data. -<p> The text used to represent NULL, TRUE and FALSE values can be +<p> The text used to represent NULL, true and false values can be changed with <a href="#setNullText">setNullText</a>(), <a href="#setTrueText">setTrueText</a>() and <a href="#setFalseText">setFalseText</a>() respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by reimplementing <a href="#paintField">paintField</a>(). @@ -239,11 +239,11 @@ Just before the database is updated a signal is emitted; Constructs a data table which is a child of <em>parent</em>, called name <em>name</em>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQDataTable-2"></a>TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQDataTable-2"></a>TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a data table which is a child of <em>parent</em>, called name <em>name</em> using the cursor <em>cursor</em>. -<p> If <em>autoPopulate</em> is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are +<p> If <em>autoPopulate</em> is true (the default is false), columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the <em>cursor</em> record. Note that <em>autoPopulate</em> only governs the creation of columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). @@ -278,11 +278,11 @@ result sets. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqtable.html#adjustColumn">TQTable</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQDataTable::autoDelete () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the table will automatically delete the cursor -specified by <a href="#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>(); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the table will automatically delete the cursor +specified by <a href="#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>(); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoEdit"></a>TQDataTable::autoEdit () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#autoEdit-prop">"autoEdit"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="beforeDelete"></a>TQDataTable::beforeDelete ( <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * buf )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -339,10 +339,10 @@ implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the cancel. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmCancels"></a>TQDataTable::confirmCancels () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmCancels-prop">"confirmCancels"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmDelete"></a>TQDataTable::confirmDelete () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmDelete-prop">"confirmDelete"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsql.html#Confirm-enum">TQSql::Confirm</a> <a name="confirmEdit"></a>TQDataTable::confirmEdit ( <a href="tqsql.html#Op-enum">TQSql::Op</a> m )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -353,13 +353,13 @@ implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmEdits"></a>TQDataTable::confirmEdits () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmEdits-prop">"confirmEdits"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmInsert"></a>TQDataTable::confirmInsert () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmInsert-prop">"confirmInsert"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmUpdate"></a>TQDataTable::confirmUpdate () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#confirmUpdate-prop">"confirmUpdate"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="currentChanged"></a>TQDataTable::currentChanged ( <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * record )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -389,9 +389,9 @@ See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#dateFormat-prop">"dateFormat"</a> property for For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, -nothing happens. If <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>() or <a href="#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>() is TRUE, -<a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the delete. Returns TRUE if the -delete succeeded; otherwise FALSE. +nothing happens. If <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>() or <a href="#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>() is true, +<a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the delete. Returns true if the +delete succeeded; otherwise false. <p> The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is deleted within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state. @@ -409,9 +409,9 @@ See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#filter-prop">"filter"</a> property for details <h3 class=fn>void <a name="find"></a>TQDataTable::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string <em>str</em> starting at the current cell and working forwards (or -backwards if <em>backwards</em> is TRUE). If the string is found, the -cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If <em>caseSensitive</em> is FALSE the case of <em>str</em> will be ignored. -<p> The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is TRUE, +backwards if <em>backwards</em> is true). If the string is found, the +cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If <em>caseSensitive</em> is false the case of <em>str</em> will be ignored. +<p> The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is true, last) cell is reached without finding <em>str</em> the search will continue until it reaches the starting cell. If <em>str</em> is not found the search will fail and the current cell will remain @@ -434,9 +434,9 @@ is displayed in column <em>i</em>. For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing -happens. If <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>() or <a href="#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>() is TRUE, -<a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the insert. Returns TRUE if the -insert succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. +happens. If <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>() or <a href="#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>() is true, +<a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the insert. Returns true if the +insert succeeded; otherwise returns false. <p> The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is inserted within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state. @@ -536,8 +536,8 @@ Resets the table so that it displays no data. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoDelete"></a>TQDataTable::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to <em>enable</em>. If <em>enable</em> is -TRUE, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by -<a href="#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>(). If <em>enable</em> is FALSE (the default), the cursor +true, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by +<a href="#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>(). If <em>enable</em> is false (the default), the cursor will not be deleted. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoEdit"></a>TQDataTable::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -609,12 +609,12 @@ field names and their ordering (ASC or DESC); these are used to compose the ORDER BY clause. <p> <p>See also <a href="#sort-prop">sort</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSqlCursor"></a>TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSqlCursor"></a>TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets <em>cursor</em> as the data source for the table. To force the -display of the data from <em>cursor</em>, use <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). If <em>autoPopulate</em> is TRUE, columns are automatically created based upon -the fields in the <em>cursor</em> record. If <em>autoDelete</em> is TRUE (the -default is FALSE), the table will take ownership of the <em>cursor</em> +display of the data from <em>cursor</em>, use <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). If <em>autoPopulate</em> is true, columns are automatically created based upon +the fields in the <em>cursor</em> record. If <em>autoDelete</em> is true (the +default is false), the table will take ownership of the <em>cursor</em> and delete it when appropriate. If the <em>cursor</em> is read-only, the table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for representing NULL values as strings. @@ -631,9 +631,9 @@ See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#sort-prop">"sort"</a> property for details. Sorts column <em>col</em> in ascending order. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqtable.html#sorting-prop">sorting</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sortColumn"></a>TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sortColumn"></a>TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sorts column <em>col</em> in ascending order if <em>ascending</em> is TRUE +Sorts column <em>col</em> in ascending order if <em>ascending</em> is true (the default); otherwise sorts in descending order. <p> The <em>wholeRows</em> parameter is ignored; TQDataTable always sorts whole rows by the specified column. @@ -664,8 +664,8 @@ See the <a href="tqdatatable.html#trueText-prop">"trueText"</a> property for det For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>() or <a href="#confirmUpdate">confirmUpdate</a>() -is TRUE, <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the update. Returns -TRUE if the update succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. +is true, <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() is called to confirm the update. Returns +true if the update succeeded; otherwise returns false. <p> The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is updated within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state. @@ -678,27 +678,27 @@ the cell does not exist or has no value. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoEdit-prop"></a>autoEdit</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits. -<p>The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins +<p>The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: <p> <ol type=1> -<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE -<li> the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE +<li> the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true +<li> the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is false </ol> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoEdit">setAutoEdit</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoEdit">autoEdit</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmCancels-prop"></a>confirmCancels</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations. -<p>If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be +<p>If the confirmCancel property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the <a href="#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>() function), otherwise all -cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE. +cancels occur immediately. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmEdits-prop">confirmEdits</a> and <a href="#confirmCancel">confirmCancel</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmCancels">setConfirmCancels</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmCancels">confirmCancels</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmDelete-prop"></a>confirmDelete</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations. -<p>If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be +<p>If the confirmDelete property is true, all deletions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all delete operations occur immediately. @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ delete operations occur immediately. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmDelete">setConfirmDelete</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmDelete">confirmDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmEdits-prop"></a>confirmEdits</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations. -<p>If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all +<p>If the confirmEdits property is true, the data table confirms all edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a> and <a href="#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCancels</a>, <a href="#confirmInsert-prop">confirmInsert</a>, <a href="#confirmUpdate-prop">confirmUpdate</a>, and <a href="#confirmDelete-prop">confirmDelete</a>. @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ edit confirmation can be achieved using <a href="#confirmCancels-prop">confirmCa <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmEdits">setConfirmEdits</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmEdits">confirmEdits</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmInsert-prop"></a>confirmInsert</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations. -<p>If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be +<p>If the confirmInsert property is true, all insertions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all insert operations occur immediately. @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ insert operations occur immediately. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setConfirmInsert">setConfirmInsert</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#confirmInsert">confirmInsert</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="confirmUpdate-prop"></a>confirmUpdate</h3> <p>This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations. -<p>If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be +<p>If the confirmUpdate property is true, all updates must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the <a href="#confirmEdit">confirmEdit</a>() function), otherwise all update operations occur immediately. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdate.html b/doc/html/tqdate.html index 8da5b9981..c7945c0f7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdate.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdate.html @@ -228,26 +228,26 @@ names can also be used, they depend on the user's locale settings. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQDate::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the date is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A null +<p> Returns true if the date is null; otherwise returns false. A null date is invalid. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQDate::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this date is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this date is valid; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid-2"></a>TQDate::isValid ( int y, int m, int d )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the specified date (year <em>y</em>, month <em>m</em> and day -<em>d</em>) is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the specified date (year <em>y</em>, month <em>m</em> and day +<em>d</em>) is valid; otherwise returns false. <p> Example: <pre> - TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2002, 5, 17 ); // TRUE May 17th 2002 is valid - TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2002, 2, 30 ); // FALSE Feb 30th does not exist - TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2004, 2, 29 ); // TRUE 2004 is a leap year - TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 1202, 6, 6 ); // FALSE 1202 is pre-Gregorian + TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2002, 5, 17 ); // true May 17th 2002 is valid + TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2002, 2, 30 ); // false Feb 30th does not exist + TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 2004, 2, 29 ); // true 2004 is a leap year + TQDate::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>( 1202, 6, 6 ); // false 1202 is pre-Gregorian </pre> <p> <b>Warning:</b> A <em>y</em> value in the range 00..99 is interpreted as @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="leapYear"></a>TQDate::leapYear ( int y )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the specified year <em>y</em> is a leap year; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the specified year <em>y</em> is a leap year; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="longDayName"></a>TQDate::longDayName ( int weekday )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> @@ -290,34 +290,34 @@ Returns the month (January=1..December=12) of this date. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDate::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is different from <em>d</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is different from <em>d</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt"></a>TQDate::operator< ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is earlier than <em>d</em>, otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is earlier than <em>d</em>, otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt-eq"></a>TQDate::operator<= ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is earlier than or equal to <em>d</em>, -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is earlier than or equal to <em>d</em>, +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDate::operator== ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is equal to <em>d</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is equal to <em>d</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>TQDate::operator> ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is later than <em>d</em>, otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is later than <em>d</em>, otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt-eq"></a>TQDate::operator>= ( const <a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> & d ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this date is later than or equal to <em>d</em>, -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this date is later than or equal to <em>d</em>, +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setYMD"></a>TQDate::setYMD ( int y, int m, int d ) </h3> @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ Sets the date's year <em>y</em>, month <em>m</em> and day <em>d</em>. 1..12, and <em>d</em> must be in the range 1..31. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If <em>y</em> is in the range 0..99, it is interpreted as 1900..1999. -<p> Returns TRUE if the date is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the date is valid; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="shortDayName"></a>TQDate::shortDayName ( int weekday )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdateedit.html b/doc/html/tqdateedit.html index 1cdcf4577..8e9d7e0f0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdateedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdateedit.html @@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ with a date, e.g. dateEdit-><a href="#setRange">setRange</a>( TQDate::<a href="tqdate.html#currentDate">currentDate</a>().addDays( -365 ), TQDate::<a href="tqdate.html#currentDate">currentDate</a>().addDays( 365 ) ); dateEdit-><a href="#setOrder">setOrder</a>( TQDateEdit::<a href="#Order-enum">MDY</a> ); - dateEdit-><a href="#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>( TRUE ); + dateEdit-><a href="#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>( true ); </pre> <p> Here we've created a new TQDateEdit object initialised with today's date and restricted the valid date range to today plus or minus 365 days. We've set the order to month, day, year. If the auto -advance property is TRUE (as we've set it here) when the user +advance property is true (as we've set it here) when the user completes a section of the date, e.g. enters two digits for the month, they are automatically taken to the next section. <p> The maximum and minimum values for a date value in the date editor @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdvance"></a>TQDateEdit::autoAdvance () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdateedit.html#autoAdvance-prop">"autoAdvance"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> <a name="date"></a>TQDateEdit::date () const </h3><p>Returns the editor's date value. @@ -244,9 +244,9 @@ for this widget. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdvance-prop"></a>autoAdvance</h3> <p>This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section. -<p>If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance +<p>If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date section if a user has completed a section. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoAdvance">autoAdvance</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdate.html">TQDate</a> <a name="date-prop"></a>date</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatetime.html b/doc/html/tqdatetime.html index 707b3f51d..14dd7aa1e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatetime.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatetime.html @@ -194,47 +194,47 @@ names can also be used, they depend on the user's locale settings. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQDateTime::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are null; otherwise -returns FALSE. A null datetime is invalid. +<p> Returns true if both the date and the time are null; otherwise +returns false. A null datetime is invalid. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdate.html#isNull">TQDate::isNull</a>() and <a href="tqtime.html#isNull">TQTime::isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQDateTime::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdate.html#isValid">TQDate::isValid</a>() and <a href="tqtime.html#isValid">TQTime::isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDateTime::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is different from <em>dt</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is different from <em>dt</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt"></a>TQDateTime::operator< ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than <em>dt</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is earlier than <em>dt</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt-eq"></a>TQDateTime::operator<= ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than or equal to <em>dt</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is earlier than or equal to <em>dt</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDateTime::operator== ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is equal to <em>dt</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is equal to <em>dt</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>TQDateTime::operator> ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than <em>dt</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is later than <em>dt</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt-eq"></a>TQDateTime::operator>= ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than or equal to <em>dt</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this datetime is later than or equal to <em>dt</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="secsTo"></a>TQDateTime::secsTo ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt ) const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdatetimeedit.html b/doc/html/tqdatetimeedit.html index efb944a0a..5010ea935 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdatetimeedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdatetimeedit.html @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdvance"></a>TQDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdateedit.html">TQDateEdit</a> * <a name="dateEdit"></a>TQDateTimeEdit::dateEdit () @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ See the <a href="tqdatetimeedit.html#dateTime-prop">"dateTime"</a> property for <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoAdvance"></a>TQDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance ( bool advance )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the auto advance property of the editor to <em>advance</em>. If set -to TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next +to true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date or time section if the user has completed a section. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDateTime"></a>TQDateTimeEdit::setDateTime ( const <a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> & dt )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdesktopwidget.html b/doc/html/tqdesktopwidget.html index a32e86fa2..f9bf3d4b4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdesktopwidget.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdesktopwidget.html @@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVirtualDesktop"></a>TQDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the system manages the available screens in a -virtual desktop; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the system manages the available screens in a +virtual desktop; otherwise returns false. <p> For virtual desktops, <a href="#screen">screen</a>() will always return the same widget. The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop widget. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Returns a widget that represents the screen with index <em>screen</em>. This widget can be used to draw directly on the desktop, using an unclipped painter like this: <p> <pre> - <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> paint( TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#desktop">desktop</a>()->screen( 0 ), TRUE ); + <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> paint( TQApplication::<a href="tqapplication.html#desktop">desktop</a>()->screen( 0 ), true ); paint.draw... ... paint.<a href="tqpainter.html#end">end</a>(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdial.html b/doc/html/tqdial.html index 52da2a064..ca899dc0c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdial.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdial.html @@ -103,15 +103,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } program-definable range, and the range either wraps around (typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square widget. -<p> Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a <a href="tqslider.html">slider.</a> Indeed, when <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is FALSE (the default) +<p> Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a <a href="tqslider.html">slider.</a> Indeed, when <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is false (the default) there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste and on the application. <p> The dial initially emits <a href="#valueChanged">valueChanged</a>() signals continuously while the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less -often by calling <a href="#setTracking">setTracking</a>(FALSE). <a href="#dialMoved">dialMoved</a>() is emitted -continuously even when <a href="#tracking">tracking</a>() is FALSE. +often by calling <a href="#setTracking">setTracking</a>(false). <a href="#dialMoved">dialMoved</a>() is emitted +continuously even when <a href="#tracking">tracking</a>() is false. <p> The slider also emits <a href="#dialPressed">dialPressed</a>() and <a href="#dialReleased">dialReleased</a>() signals when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the dial's value can change without these signals being emitted; the @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ See the <a href="tqdial.html#notchSize-prop">"notchSize"</a> property for detail </h3><p>Returns the target number of pixels between notches. See the <a href="tqdial.html#notchTarget-prop">"notchTarget"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="notchesVisible"></a>TQDial::notchesVisible () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the notches are shown; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the notches are shown; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdial.html#notchesVisible-prop">"notchesVisible"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="pageStep"></a>TQDial::pageStep () const </h3><p>Returns the current page step. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Decrements the dial's <a href="#value">value</a>() by one <a href="#lineStep">li Decrements the dial's <a href="#value">value</a>() by one <a href="#pageStep">pageStep</a>() of steps. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tracking"></a>TQDial::tracking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdial.html#tracking-prop">"tracking"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="value"></a>TQDial::value () const </h3><p>Returns the current dial value. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Reimplemented to ensure the display is correct and to emit the frequency of this signal is influenced by <a href="#setTracking">setTracking</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wrapping"></a>TQDial::wrapping () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdial.html#wrapping-prop">"wrapping"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>int <a name="lineStep-prop"></a>lineStep</h3> @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ between each notch. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setNotchTarget">setNotchTarget</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#notchTarget">notchTarget</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="notchesVisible-prop"></a>notchesVisible</h3> <p>This property holds whether the notches are shown. -<p>If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are +<p>If true, the notches are shown. If false (the default) notches are not shown. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setNotchesVisible">setNotchesVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#notchesVisible">notchesVisible</a>(). @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ page step is different from the previous setting. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setPageStep">setPageStep</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#pageStep">pageStep</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tracking-prop"></a>tracking</h3> <p>This property holds whether tracking is enabled. -<p>If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the +<p>If true (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be moved with the mouse. @@ -332,10 +332,10 @@ moved with the mouse. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setValue">setValue</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#value">value</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wrapping-prop"></a>wrapping</h3> <p>This property holds whether wrapping is enabled. -<p>If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be +<p>If true, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be turned around 360. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of the dial which is skipped by the arrow. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setWrapping">setWrapping</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqdialog-h.html index b219d8a0e..d137f6639 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdialog-h.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ friend class TQPushButton; TQ_PROPERTY( bool modal READ isModal WRITE setModal ) public: - Q_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + Q_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQDialog(); @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ private: uint has_relpos : 1; uint did_resize : 1; uint in_loop: 1; - void adjustPositionInternal( TQWidget*, bool useRelPos = FALSE ); + void adjustPositionInternal( TQWidget*, bool useRelPos = false ); TQDialogPrivate* d; private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= diff --git a/doc/html/tqdialog.html b/doc/html/tqdialog.html index 0c8fbad3f..35e0f5f0c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdialog.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqdialog-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn>explicit <a href="#TQDialog"><b>TQDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>explicit <a href="#TQDialog"><b>TQDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQDialog"><b>~TQDialog</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#DialogCode-enum"><b>DialogCode</b></a> { Rejected, Accepted }</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#result"><b>result</b></a> () const</li> @@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ connect a default button, e.g. "OK", to the <a href="#accept">accept</a>() slot "Cancel" button to the <a href="#reject">reject</a>() slot, to get the dialog to close and return the appropriate value. Alternatively you can connect to the <a href="#done">done</a>() slot, passing it <a href="#DialogCode-enum">Accepted</a> or <a href="#DialogCode-enum">Rejected</a>. -<p> An alternative is to call <a href="#setModal">setModal</a>(TRUE), then <a href="#show">show</a>(). Unlike +<p> An alternative is to call <a href="#setModal">setModal</a>(true), then <a href="#show">show</a>(). Unlike exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling -setModal(TRUE) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where +setModal(true) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g. to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and -setModal(TRUE) together you must call +setModal(true) together you must call <a href="tqapplication.html#processEvents">TQApplication::processEvents</a>() periodically during processing to enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See <a href="tqprogressdialog.html">TQProgressDialog</a>.) <p> <a name="modeless"></a> @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ dialog is deleted after exec() returns. <p> <pre> <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a> *dlg = new <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a>( workingDirectory, - <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>, 0, 0, TRUE ); + <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>, 0, 0, true ); <a name="x2130"></a> dlg-><a href="tqwidget.html#setCaption">setCaption</a>( TQFileDialog::<a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>( "Open" ) ); <a name="x2128"></a> dlg-><a href="tqfiledialog.html#setMode">setMode</a>( TQFileDialog::ExistingFile ); <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> result; @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ event loop. <li><tt>TQDialog::Rejected</tt> </ul><p> <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn>explicit <a name="TQDialog"></a>TQDialog::TQDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn>explicit <a name="TQDialog"></a>TQDialog::TQDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a dialog called <em>name</em>, with parent <em>parent</em>. <p> A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its @@ -259,10 +259,10 @@ defined. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setExtension">setExtension</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isModal"></a>TQDialog::isModal () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if <a href="#show">show</a>() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if <a href="#show">show</a>() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdialog.html#modal-prop">"modal"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSizeGripEnabled"></a>TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdialog.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop">"sizeGripEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQDialog::orientation () const </h3> @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ of the <a href="#modal-prop">modal</a> property. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqwidget.html#show">TQWidget</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="showExtension"></a>TQDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt )<tt> [protected slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>showIt</em> is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the +If <em>showIt</em> is true, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden. <p> This slot is usually connected to the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggled">TQButton::toggled</a>() signal of a <a href="tqpushbutton.html">TQPushButton</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdict-h.html b/doc/html/tqdict-h.html index ecee7de7b..4a7f2da67 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdict-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdict-h.html @@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ class TQDict #endif { public: - TQDict( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE ) - : TQGDict( size, StringKey, caseSensitive, FALSE ) { } + TQDict( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true ) + : TQGDict( size, StringKey, caseSensitive, false ) { } TQDict( const TQDict<type> &d ) : TQGDict( d ) { } ~TQDict() { clear(); } TQDict<type> &operator=(const TQDict<type> &d) diff --git a/doc/html/tqdict.html b/doc/html/tqdict.html index f3d034688..ab7e79d8b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdict.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdict.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ dictionary based on TQString keys. <p><a href="tqdict-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQDict"><b>TQDict</b></a> ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQDict"><b>TQDict</b></a> ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQDict-2"><b>TQDict</b></a> ( const TQDict<type> & dict )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQDict"><b>~TQDict</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQDict<type> & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQDict<type> & dict )</li> @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ changed with <a href="#resize">resize</a>(). Items are removed with <a href="#remove">remove</a>(). All the items in a dictionary can be removed with <a href="#clear">clear</a>(). The number of items in the dictionary is returned by <a href="#count">count</a>(). If the dictionary contains no items <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() -returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with <a href="#replace">replace</a>(). Items +returns true. You can change an item's value with <a href="#replace">replace</a>(). Items are looked up with <a href="#operator[]">operator[]</a>(), or with <a href="#find">find</a>() which return a pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can take an item out of the dictionary with <a href="#take">take</a>(). -<p> Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete +<p> Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true) for a dictionary tells it to delete items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete items when they are removed. <p> When an item is inserted, the key is converted (hashed) to an @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ dictionary. <pre> <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> styleList = TQStyleFactory::styles(); styleList.<a href="tqstringlist.html#sort">sort</a>(); - TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, FALSE ); + TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, false ); for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = styleList.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#begin">begin</a>(); it != styleList.<a href="tqvaluelist.html#end">end</a>(); ++it ) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> styleName = *it; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> styleAccel = styleName; @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdictiterator.html">TQDictIterator</a>, <a href="tqasciidict.html">TQAsciiDict</a>, <a href="tqintdict.html">TQIntDict</a>, <a href="tqptrdict.html">TQPtrDict</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQDict"></a>TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQDict"></a>TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than <em>size</em> entries. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ the accelerator and add it to the dictionary. Finally we create a (e.g. a prime that's slightly larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead to faster lookup. -<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only +<p> If <em>caseSensitive</em> is true (the default), keys which differ only by case are considered different. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQDict-2"></a>TQDict::TQDict ( const <a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -215,14 +215,14 @@ pointers are copied (shallow copy). </h3> <p> Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If -<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that +<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>() is true, each value is deleted. All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQDict::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -264,8 +264,8 @@ item will be accessible using <a href="#operator[]">operator[]</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQDict::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a><type> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQDict::operator= ( const <a href="tqdict.html">TQDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -298,9 +298,9 @@ reference to the stream. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQDict::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key ) </h3> -<p> Removes the item with <em>key</em> from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if +<p> Removes the item with <em>key</em> from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item that was inserted will be removed. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. @@ -338,11 +338,11 @@ become invalid. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqdictiterator.html b/doc/html/tqdictiterator.html index 1529011b4..bd56fbf6a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdictiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdictiterator.html @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ iterator is operating. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQDictIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. <a href="#count">count</a>() == 0; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQDictIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqdir-example.html b/doc/html/tqdir-example.html index 6144bb26d..6e5e8e097 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdir-example.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdir-example.html @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ void <a name="f496"></a>PixmapView::setPixmap( const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQP { pixmap = pix; <a name="x1855"></a> <a href="tqscrollview.html#resizeContents">resizeContents</a>( pixmap.<a href="tqwidget.html#size">size</a>().width(), pixmap.<a href="tqwidget.html#size">size</a>().height() ); - <a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>()->repaint( FALSE ); + <a href="tqscrollview.html#viewport">viewport</a>()->repaint( false ); } <a name="x1837"></a>void PixmapView::<a href="tqscrollview.html#drawContents">drawContents</a>( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ void <a name="f496"></a>PixmapView::setPixmap( const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQP : <a href="tqwidgetstack.html">TQWidgetStack</a>( parent ) { normalText = new <a href="tqmultilineedit.html">TQMultiLineEdit</a>( this ); -<a name="x1845"></a> normalText-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1845"></a> normalText-><a href="tqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>( true ); html = new <a href="tqtextview.html">TQTextView</a>( this ); pixmap = new PixmapView( this ); <a href="tqwidgetstack.html#raiseWidget">raiseWidget</a>( normalText ); @@ -220,15 +220,15 @@ void <a name="f500"></a>PreviewWidget::previewUrl( const <a href="tqurl.html">TQ // **************************************************************************************************** <a name="f491"></a>CustomFileDialog::CustomFileDialog() - : <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a>( 0, 0, TRUE ) + : <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a>( 0, 0, true ) { <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setDir">setDir</a>( "/" ); - dirView = new DirectoryView( this, 0, TRUE ); + dirView = new DirectoryView( this, 0, true ); <a name="x1827"></a> dirView-><a href="tqlistview.html#addColumn">addColumn</a>( "" ); <a name="x1828"></a> dirView-><a href="tqlistview.html#header">header</a>()->hide(); ::Directory *root = new ::Directory( dirView, "/" ); - root->setOpen( TRUE ); + root->setOpen( true ); <a name="x1853"></a> dirView-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFixedWidth">setFixedWidth</a>( 150 ); <a href="tqfiledialog.html#addLeftWidget">addLeftWidget</a>( dirView ); @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ void <a name="f500"></a>PreviewWidget::previewUrl( const <a href="tqurl.html">TQ <a name="x1836"></a> p-><a href="tqpushbutton.html#setPopup">setPopup</a>( bookmarkMenu ); - <a href="tqfiledialog.html#addToolButton">addToolButton</a>( p, TRUE ); + <a href="tqfiledialog.html#addToolButton">addToolButton</a>( p, true ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( dirView, TQ_SIGNAL( folderSelected( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ), this, TQ_SLOT( setDir2( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) ) ); @@ -289,9 +289,9 @@ CustomFileDialog::~CustomFileDialog() void <a name="f492"></a>CustomFileDialog::setDir2( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> &s ) { - <a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( true ); <a href="tqfiledialog.html#setDir">setDir</a>( s ); - <a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="tqobject.html#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>( false ); } <a name="x1854"></a>void CustomFileDialog::<a href="tqwidget.html#showEvent">showEvent</a>( <a href="tqshowevent.html">TQShowEvent</a> *e ) @@ -326,8 +326,8 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> start; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> filter; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> caption; - bool preview = FALSE; - bool custom = FALSE; + bool preview = false; + bool custom = false; <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> a( argc, argv ); for (int i=1; i<argc; i++) { <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> arg = argv[i]; @@ -340,9 +340,9 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) else if ( arg == "-filter" ) filter = argv[++i]; else if ( arg == "-preview" ) - preview = TRUE; + preview = true; else if ( arg == "-custom" ) - custom = TRUE; + custom = true; else if ( arg[0] == '-' ) { <a href="tqapplication.html#qDebug">tqDebug</a>("Usage: tqdir [-any | -dir | -custom] [-preview] [-default f] {-filter f} [caption ...]\n" " -any Get any filename, need not exist.\n" @@ -370,10 +370,10 @@ int main( int argc, char ** argv ) ? "Choose directory..." : "Choose file..."; if ( !custom ) { - <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a> fd( TQString::null, filter, 0, 0, TRUE ); + <a href="tqfiledialog.html">TQFileDialog</a> fd( TQString::null, filter, 0, 0, true ); <a name="x1819"></a> fd.<a href="tqfiledialog.html#setMode">setMode</a>( mode ); if ( preview ) { -<a name="x1818"></a> fd.<a href="tqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( TRUE ); +<a name="x1818"></a> fd.<a href="tqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( true ); PreviewWidget *pw = new PreviewWidget( &fd ); <a name="x1817"></a> fd.<a href="tqfiledialog.html#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>( pw, pw ); <a name="x1822"></a> fd.<a href="tqfiledialog.html#setViewMode">setViewMode</a>( TQFileDialog::List ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdir-h.html b/doc/html/tqdir-h.html index e909962ca..d62898111 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdir-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdir-h.html @@ -141,13 +141,13 @@ public: virtual TQString dirName() const; virtual TQString filePath( const TQString &fileName, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const; + bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const; virtual TQString absFilePath( const TQString &fileName, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const; + bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const; static TQString convertSeparators( const TQString &pathName ); - virtual bool cd( const TQString &dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ); + virtual bool cd( const TQString &dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ); virtual bool cdUp(); TQString nameFilter() const; @@ -183,9 +183,9 @@ public: static const TQFileInfoList *drives(); virtual bool mkdir( const TQString &dirName, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const; + bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const; virtual bool rmdir( const TQString &dirName, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const; + bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const; virtual bool isReadable() const; virtual bool exists() const; @@ -198,11 +198,11 @@ public: virtual bool operator!=( const TQDir & ) const; virtual bool remove( const TQString &fileName, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ); + bool acceptAbsPath = true ); virtual bool rename( const TQString &name, const TQString &newName, - bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE ); + bool acceptAbsPaths = true ); virtual bool exists( const TQString &name, - bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ); + bool acceptAbsPath = true ); static char separator(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdir.html b/doc/html/tqdir.html index 604502d3c..0ad39734c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdir.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdir.html @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#absPath"><b>absPath</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#canonicalPath"><b>canonicalPath</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#dirName"><b>dirName</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#filePath"><b>filePath</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#absFilePath"><b>absFilePath</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#cd"><b>cd</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#filePath"><b>filePath</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#absFilePath"><b>absFilePath</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#cd"><b>cd</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#cdUp"><b>cdUp</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#nameFilter"><b>nameFilter</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setNameFilter"><b>setNameFilter</b></a> ( const TQString & nameFilter )</li> @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual TQStringList <a href="#entryList"><b>entryList</b></a> ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQFileInfoList * <a href="#entryInfoList-2"><b>entryInfoList</b></a> ( int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQFileInfoList * <a href="#entryInfoList"><b>entryInfoList</b></a> ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#mkdir"><b>mkdir</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#rmdir"><b>rmdir</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#mkdir"><b>mkdir</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#rmdir"><b>rmdir</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#isReadable"><b>isReadable</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#exists-2"><b>exists</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#isRoot"><b>isRoot</b></a> () const</li> @@ -79,9 +79,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#convertToAbs"><b>convertToAbs</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#operator-eq-eq"><b>operator==</b></a> ( const TQDir & d ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#operator!-eq"><b>operator!=</b></a> ( const TQDir & d ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#rename"><b>rename</b></a> ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#exists"><b>exists</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#rename"><b>rename</b></a> ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#exists"><b>exists</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#refresh"><b>refresh</b></a> () const</li> </ul> <h2>Static Public Members</h2> @@ -302,14 +302,14 @@ Constructs a TQDir that is a copy of the directory <em>d</em>. </h3> Destroys the TQDir frees up its resources. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="absFilePath"></a>TQDir::absFilePath ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="absFilePath"></a>TQDir::absFilePath ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns the absolute path name of a file in the directory. Does <em>not</em> check if the file actually exists in the directory. Redundant multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in <em>fileName</em> will not be removed (see <a href="#cleanDirPath">cleanDirPath</a>()). -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a <em>fileName</em> starting with a +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a <em>fileName</em> starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> -is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and +is false an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#filePath">filePath</a>(). @@ -331,15 +331,15 @@ canonical path does not exist (normally due to dangling symbolic links) <a href="#canonicalPath">canonicalPath</a>() returns <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#path">path</a>(), <a href="#absPath">absPath</a>(), <a href="#exists">exists</a>(), <a href="#cleanDirPath">cleanDirPath</a>(), <a href="#dirName">dirName</a>(), <a href="#absFilePath">absFilePath</a>(), and <a href="tqstring.html#isNull">TQString::isNull</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="cd"></a>TQDir::cd ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="cd"></a>TQDir::cd ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Changes the TQDir's directory to <em>dirName</em>. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" -will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a path starting with separator "/" +will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is false any number of separators at the beginning of <em>dirName</em> will be removed and the function will descend into <em>dirName</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable; -otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical <a href="#cd">cd</a>() operation is +<p> Returns true if the new directory exists and is readable; +otherwise returns false. Note that the logical <a href="#cd">cd</a>() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist. <p> Calling cd( ".." ) is equivalent to calling <a href="#cdUp">cdUp</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#cdUp">cdUp</a>(), <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>(), <a href="#exists">exists</a>(), and <a href="#path">path</a>(). @@ -349,8 +349,8 @@ not performed if the new directory does not exist. </h3> Changes directory by moving one directory up from the TQDir's current directory. -<p> Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable; -otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical <a href="#cdUp">cdUp</a>() operation is +<p> Returns true if the new directory exists and is readable; +otherwise returns false. Note that the logical <a href="#cdUp">cdUp</a>() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cd">cd</a>(), <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>(), <a href="#exists">exists</a>(), and <a href="#path">path</a>(). @@ -496,34 +496,34 @@ filtered in accordance with <a href="#setFilter">setFilter</a>() and <a href="#s exist. <p> <p>See also <a href="#entryInfoList">entryInfoList</a>(), <a href="#setNameFilter">setNameFilter</a>(), <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>(), and <a href="#setFilter">setFilter</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists"></a>TQDir::exists ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists"></a>TQDir::exists ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, bool acceptAbsPath = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Checks for the existence of the file <em>name</em>. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a path starting with separator "/" will check the file with the absolute path. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is -FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of <em>name</em> will be +false any number of separators at the beginning of <em>name</em> will be removed and the resultant file name will be checked. -<p> Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the file exists; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfileinfo.html#exists">TQFileInfo::exists</a>() and <a href="tqfile.html#exists">TQFile::exists</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists-2"></a>TQDir::exists () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the <em>directory</em> exists; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the <em>directory</em> exists; otherwise returns false. (If a file with the same name is found this function will return -FALSE). +false). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfileinfo.html#exists">TQFileInfo::exists</a>() and <a href="tqfile.html#exists">TQFile::exists</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="filePath"></a>TQDir::filePath ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="filePath"></a>TQDir::filePath ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns the path name of a file in the directory. Does <em>not</em> check if the file actually exists in the directory. If the TQDir is relative the returned path name will also be relative. Redundant multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in <em>fileName</em> will not be removed (see <a href="#cleanDirPath">cleanDirPath</a>()). -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a <em>fileName</em> starting with a +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a <em>fileName</em> starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> -is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and +is false an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#absFilePath">absFilePath</a>(), <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>(), and <a href="#canonicalPath">canonicalPath</a>(). @@ -552,32 +552,32 @@ variable is used if it exists, otherwise rootDirPath() is used. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadable"></a>TQDir::isReadable () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the directory is readable <em>and</em> we can open files -by name; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> <b>Warning:</b> A FALSE value from this function is not a guarantee that +Returns true if the directory is readable <em>and</em> we can open files +by name; otherwise returns false. +<p> <b>Warning:</b> A false value from this function is not a guarantee that files in the directory are not accessible. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfileinfo.html#isReadable">TQFileInfo::isReadable</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1667">dirview/dirview.cpp</a> and <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x813">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRelative"></a>TQDir::isRelative () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the directory path is relative to the current -directory and returns FALSE if the path is absolute (e.g. under +Returns true if the directory path is relative to the current +directory and returns false if the path is absolute (e.g. under UNIX a path is relative if it does not start with a "/"). <p> <p>See also <a href="#convertToAbs">convertToAbs</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRelativePath"></a>TQDir::isRelativePath ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & path )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>path</em> is relative; returns FALSE if it is +Returns true if <em>path</em> is relative; returns false if it is absolute. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRoot"></a>TQDir::isRoot () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the directory is the root directory; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the directory is the root directory; otherwise +returns false. <p> Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory -this function returns FALSE. If you want to test for this use +this function returns false. If you want to test for this use <a href="#canonicalPath">canonicalPath</a>(), e.g. <pre> TQDir d( "/tmp/root_link" ); @@ -590,8 +590,8 @@ this function returns FALSE. If you want to test for this use <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="match"></a>TQDir::match ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the <em>fileName</em> matches the wildcard (glob) -pattern <em>filter</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. The <em>filter</em> may +Returns true if the <em>fileName</em> matches the wildcard (glob) +pattern <em>filter</em>; otherwise returns false. The <em>filter</em> may contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons. <p> (See <a href="tqregexp.html#wildcard-matching">TQRegExp wildcard matching.</a>) @@ -600,8 +600,8 @@ contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="match-2"></a>TQDir::match ( const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & filters, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the <em>fileName</em> matches any of the wildcard (glob) -patterns in the list of <em>filters</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the <em>fileName</em> matches any of the wildcard (glob) +patterns in the list of <em>filters</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> (See <a href="tqregexp.html#wildcard-matching">TQRegExp wildcard matching.</a>) <p>See also <a href="tqregexp.html#match">TQRegExp::match</a>(). @@ -612,14 +612,14 @@ patterns in the list of <em>filters</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. <p> Returns the value set by <a href="#setMatchAllDirs">setMatchAllDirs</a>() <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMatchAllDirs">setMatchAllDirs</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mkdir"></a>TQDir::mkdir ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mkdir"></a>TQDir::mkdir ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Creates a directory. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/') -will create the absolute directory; if <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is FALSE +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a path starting with a separator ('/') +will create the absolute directory; if <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is false any number of separators at the beginning of <em>dirName</em> will be removed. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#rmdir">rmdir</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="nameFilter"></a>TQDir::nameFilter () const @@ -630,9 +630,9 @@ removed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDir::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> & d ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if directory <em>d</em> and this directory have different +<p> Returns true if directory <em>d</em> and this directory have different paths or different sort or filter settings; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> Example: <pre> // The current directory is "/usr/local" @@ -654,9 +654,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDir::operator== ( const <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> & d ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if directory <em>d</em> and this directory have the same +Returns true if directory <em>d</em> and this directory have the same path and their sort and filter settings are the same; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> Example: <pre> // The current directory is "/usr/local" @@ -689,23 +689,23 @@ contains redundant ".", ".." or multiple separators. </h3> Refreshes the directory information. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQDir::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQDir::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Removes the file, <em>fileName</em>. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a path starting with separator "/" will remove the file with the absolute path. If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> -is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of <em>fileName</em> +is false any number of separators at the beginning of <em>fileName</em> will be removed and the resultant file name will be removed. -<p> Returns TRUE if the file is removed successfully; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the file is removed successfully; otherwise +returns false. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rename"></a>TQDir::rename ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & oldName, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rename"></a>TQDir::rename ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & oldName, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Renames a file or directory. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPaths</em> is TRUE a path starting with a separator -('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if <em>acceptAbsPaths</em> is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPaths</em> is true a path starting with a separator +('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if <em>acceptAbsPaths</em> is false any number of separators at the beginning of the names will be removed. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> On most file systems, <a href="#rename">rename</a>() fails only if <em>oldName</em> does not exist or if <em>newName</em> and <em>oldName</em> are not on the same partition. On Windows, rename() will fail if <em>newName</em> already @@ -714,15 +714,15 @@ fail. For example, on at least one file system rename() fails if <em>newName</em> points to an open file. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x814">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rmdir"></a>TQDir::rmdir ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rmdir"></a>TQDir::rmdir ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Removes a directory. -<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/') -will remove the absolute directory; if <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is FALSE +<p> If <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is true a path starting with a separator ('/') +will remove the absolute directory; if <em>acceptAbsPath</em> is false any number of separators at the beginning of <em>dirName</em> will be removed. <p> The directory must be empty for <a href="#rmdir">rmdir</a>() to succeed. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mkdir">mkdir</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> <a name="root"></a>TQDir::root ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -748,8 +748,8 @@ underlying operating system. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setCurrent"></a>TQDir::setCurrent ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & path )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Sets the application's current working directory to <em>path</em>. -Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFilter"></a>TQDir::setFilter ( int filterSpec )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -760,9 +760,9 @@ should be returned by entryList() and entryInfoList(). See <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMatchAllDirs"></a>TQDir::setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE then all directories are included (e.g. in +If <em>enable</em> is true then all directories are included (e.g. in <a href="#entryList">entryList</a>()), and the <a href="#nameFilter">nameFilter</a>() is only applied to the files. -If <em>enable</em> is FALSE then the nameFilter() is applied to both +If <em>enable</em> is false then the nameFilter() is applied to both directories and files. <p> <p>See also <a href="#matchAllDirs">matchAllDirs</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqdns.html b/doc/html/tqdns.html index c4fccf951..5575b1f31 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdns.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdns.html @@ -196,10 +196,10 @@ over a copy, e.g. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isWorking"></a>TQDns::isWorking () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it +Returns true if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it does not already have the necessary information); otherwise -returns FALSE. -<p> TQDns emits the <a href="#resultsReady">resultsReady</a>() signal when the status changes to FALSE. +returns false. +<p> TQDns emits the <a href="#resultsReady">resultsReady</a>() signal when the status changes to false. <p>Example: <a href="mail-example.html#x705">network/mail/smtp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="label"></a>TQDns::label () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqdockarea-h.html b/doc/html/tqdockarea-h.html index e00f23b75..2315d1e1a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdockarea-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdockarea-h.html @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ protected: private: void init(); - int layoutItems( const TQRect&, bool testonly = FALSE ); + int layoutItems( const TQRect&, bool testonly = false ); TQt::Orientation orient; bool dirty; int cached_width, cached_height; @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ public: ~TQDockArea(); void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, const TQPoint &globalPos, const TQRect &rect, bool swap ); - void removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE ); + void removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = true ); void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int index = -1 ); bool hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int *index = 0 ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdockarea.html b/doc/html/tqdockarea.html index a799a4f34..a86de6315 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdockarea.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdockarea.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQDockArea"><b>TQDockArea</b></a> ( Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQDockArea"><b>~TQDockArea</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#moveDockWindow-2"><b>moveDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * w, const TQPoint & p, const TQRect & r, bool swap )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#removeDockWindow"><b>removeDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#removeDockWindow"><b>removeDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#moveDockWindow"><b>moveDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * w, int index = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasDockWindow"><b>hasDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * w, int * index = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>Orientation <a href="#orientation"><b>orientation</b></a> () const</li> @@ -172,25 +172,25 @@ Returns a list of the dock windows in the dock area. See the <a href="tqdockarea.html#handlePosition-prop">"handlePosition"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasDockWindow"></a>TQDockArea::hasDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * w, int * index = 0 ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if the dock area contains the dock window <em>w</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. If <em>index</em> is not 0 it will be set as +Returns true if the dock area contains the dock window <em>w</em>; +otherwise returns false. If <em>index</em> is not 0 it will be set as follows: if the dock area contains the dock window <em>*index</em> is set to <em>w</em>'s index position; otherwise <em>*index</em> is set to -1. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockWindowAccepted"></a>TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if dock window <em>dw</em> could be docked into the dock -area; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if dock window <em>dw</em> could be docked into the dock +area; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAcceptDockWindow">setAcceptDockWindow</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQDockArea::isEmpty () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockarea.html#empty-prop">"empty"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="lineUp"></a>TQDockArea::lineUp ( bool keepNewLines )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted -space. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is TRUE, only space within lines is -cleaned up. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is FALSE the number of lines might +space. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is true, only space within lines is +cleaned up. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is false the number of lines might be changed. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="moveDockWindow"></a>TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * w, int index = -1 ) @@ -213,18 +213,18 @@ need to call it yourself. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQDockArea::orientation () const </h3><p>Returns the dock area's orientation. See the <a href="tqdockarea.html#orientation-prop">"orientation"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="removeDockWindow"></a>TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="removeDockWindow"></a>TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = true ) </h3> -Removes the dock window <em>w</em> from the dock area. If <em>makeFloating</em> is TRUE, <em>w</em> gets floated, and if <em>swap</em> is TRUE, -the orientation of <em>w</em> gets swapped. If <em>fixNewLines</em> is TRUE +Removes the dock window <em>w</em> from the dock area. If <em>makeFloating</em> is true, <em>w</em> gets floated, and if <em>swap</em> is true, +the orientation of <em>w</em> gets swapped. If <em>fixNewLines</em> is true (the default) newlines in the area will be fixed. <p> You should never need to call this function yourself. Use <a href="tqdockwindow.html#dock">TQDockWindow::dock</a>() and <a href="tqdockwindow.html#undock">TQDockWindow::undock</a>() instead. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAcceptDockWindow"></a>TQDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw, bool accept ) </h3> -If <em>accept</em> is TRUE, dock window <em>dw</em> can be docked in the dock -area. If <em>accept</em> is FALSE, dock window <em>dw</em> cannot be docked in +If <em>accept</em> is true, dock window <em>dw</em> can be docked in the dock +area. If <em>accept</em> is false, dock window <em>dw</em> cannot be docked in the dock area. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isDockWindowAccepted">isDockWindowAccepted</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqdockwindow-h.html b/doc/html/tqdockwindow-h.html index b1fb82a0f..68980dc40 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdockwindow-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdockwindow-h.html @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ private: void endRectDraw( bool drawRect ); void updatePosition( const TQPoint &globalPos ); TQWidget *areaAt( const TQPoint &gp ); - void removeFromDock( bool fixNewLines = TRUE ); + void removeFromDock( bool fixNewLines = true ); void swapRect( TQRect &r, TQt::Orientation o, const TQPoint &offset, TQDockArea *area ); void init(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdockwindow.html b/doc/html/tqdockwindow.html index 1334513c0..c3b0d5816 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdockwindow.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdockwindow.html @@ -270,8 +270,8 @@ Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCloseEnabled"></a>TQDockWindow::isCloseEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the dock window has a close button; otherwise -returns FALSE. The result depends on the dock window's <a href="#Place-enum">Place</a> +Returns true if the dock window has a close button; otherwise +returns false. The result depends on the dock window's <a href="#Place-enum">Place</a> and its <a href="#CloseMode-enum">CloseMode</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#closeMode-prop">closeMode</a>. @@ -281,16 +281,16 @@ and its <a href="#CloseMode-enum">CloseMode</a>. <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isHorizontallyStretchable"></a>TQDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#horizontallyStretchable-prop">"horizontallyStretchable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMovingEnabled"></a>TQDockWindow::isMovingEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#movingEnabled-prop">"movingEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isResizeEnabled"></a>TQDockWindow::isResizeEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#resizeEnabled-prop">"resizeEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isStretchable"></a>TQDockWindow::isStretchable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window is stretchable in the current <a href="#orientation">orientation</a>(); otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window is stretchable in the current <a href="#orientation">orientation</a>(); otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop">"stretchable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVerticalStretchable"></a>TQDockWindow::isVerticalStretchable () const </h3> @@ -298,16 +298,16 @@ See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#stretchable-prop">"stretchable"</a> property <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVerticallyStretchable"></a>TQDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#verticallyStretchable-prop">"verticallyStretchable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="newLine"></a>TQDockWindow::newLine () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#newLine-prop">"newLine"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="offset"></a>TQDockWindow::offset () const </h3><p>Returns the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas). See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#offset-prop">"offset"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="opaqueMoving"></a>TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqdockwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop">"opaqueMoving"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">TQt::Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQDockWindow::orientation () const </h3> @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ docked; otherwise does nothing. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window -relatively to its dock area is changed. If <em>visible</em> is TRUE, the +relatively to its dock area is changed. If <em>visible</em> is true, the TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been hidden. <p> A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the @@ -426,23 +426,23 @@ choices are <a href="#CloseMode-enum">Never</a>, <a href="#CloseMode-enum">Docke <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="horizontallyStretchable-prop"></a>horizontallyStretchable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable. <p>A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call -<a href="#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). +<a href="#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>(true) or <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). <p> <p>See also <a href="#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>. <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setHorizontallyStretchable">setHorizontallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isHorizontallyStretchable">isHorizontallyStretchable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="movingEnabled-prop"></a>movingEnabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window. -<p>This property is TRUE by default. +<p>This property is true by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isMovingEnabled">isMovingEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="newLine-prop"></a>newLine</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new +<p>The default is false, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new line in the dock area. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setNewLine">setNewLine</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#newLine">newLine</a>(). @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ line in the dock area. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setOffset">setOffset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#offset">offset</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="opaqueMoving-prop"></a>opaqueMoving</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved. -<p>If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be +<p>If this property is false, (the default), the dock window will be represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems @@ -466,8 +466,8 @@ in a future release. handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window when floating. <p> A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if -you call <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). -<p> This property is FALSE by default. +you call <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). +<p> This property is false by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#verticallyStretchable-prop">verticallyStretchable</a> and <a href="#horizontallyStretchable-prop">horizontallyStretchable</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isResizeEnabled">isResizeEnabled</a>(). @@ -479,19 +479,19 @@ you call <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#isStretchable">isStretchable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="verticallyStretchable-prop"></a>verticallyStretchable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable. <p>A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call -<a href="#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(TRUE) or <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(TRUE). +<a href="#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>(true) or <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(true). <p> <p>See also <a href="#resizeEnabled-prop">resizeEnabled</a>. <p>Bugs and limitations: <ul> -<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get +<li> Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty. </ul> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setVerticallyStretchable">setVerticallyStretchable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isVerticallyStretchable">isVerticallyStretchable</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqdom-h.html b/doc/html/tqdom-h.html index 7e50b2a65..1c93e2f5e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdom-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdom-h.html @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ public: virtual TQDomNode removeChild( const TQDomNode& oldChild ); virtual TQDomNode appendChild( const TQDomNode& newChild ); virtual bool hasChildNodes() const; - virtual TQDomNode cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQDomNode cloneNode( bool deep = true ) const; virtual void normalize(); virtual bool isSupported( const TQString& feature, const TQString& version ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomattr.html b/doc/html/tqdomattr.html index f21316acd..c610efa20 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomattr.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomattr.html @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ want to change the value of the element's attribute you must use <a href="tqdomnode.html#cloneNode">cloneNode</a>() to get an independent copy of the attribute. <p> TQDomAttr can return the <a href="#name">name</a>() and <a href="#value">value</a>() of an attribute. An attribute's value is set with <a href="#setValue">setValue</a>(). If <a href="#specified">specified</a>() returns -TRUE the value was either set in the document or set with +true the value was either set in the document or set with setValue(); otherwise the value hasn't been set. The node this attribute is attached to (if any) is returned by <a href="#ownerElement">ownerElement</a>(). <p> For further information about the Document Object Model see @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAttr"></a>TQDomAttr::isAttr () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isAttr">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="name"></a>TQDomAttr::name () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -140,9 +140,9 @@ Sets the attribute's value to <em>v</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="specified"></a>TQDomAttr::specified () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the attribute has either been expicitly specified +Returns true if the attribute has either been expicitly specified in the XML document or was set by the user with <a href="#setValue">setValue</a>(). -Returns FALSE if the value hasn't been specified or set. +Returns false if the value hasn't been specified or set. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setValue">setValue</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="value"></a>TQDomAttr::value () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomcdatasection.html b/doc/html/tqdomcdatasection.html index be651dc39..6ad890c6a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomcdatasection.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomcdatasection.html @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCDATASection"></a>TQDomCDATASection::isCDATASection () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isCDATASection">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomCDATASection::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomcharacterdata.html b/doc/html/tqdomcharacterdata.html index 742f4c653..cb7c158fd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomcharacterdata.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomcharacterdata.html @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Inserts the string <em>arg</em> into the stored string at position <em>offset</e <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCharacterData"></a>TQDomCharacterData::isCharacterData () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isCharacterData">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="length"></a>TQDomCharacterData::length () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomcomment.html b/doc/html/tqdomcomment.html index cbb77fb3e..31388bafb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomcomment.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomcomment.html @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isComment"></a>TQDomComment::isComment () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isComment">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomComment::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomdocument.html b/doc/html/tqdomdocument.html index 694cdff9b..4913fd1e4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomdocument.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomdocument.html @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ function creates a copy that can be used within this document. document. The returned node has no parent. It is not possible to import TQDomDocument and <a href="tqdomdocumenttype.html">TQDomDocumentType</a> nodes. In those cases this function returns a <a href="tqdomnode.html#isNull">null node</a>. -<p> If <em>deep</em> is TRUE, this function imports not only the node <em>importedNode</em> but its whole subtree; if it is FALSE, only the <em>importedNode</em> is imported. The argument <em>deep</em> has no effect on +<p> If <em>deep</em> is true, this function imports not only the node <em>importedNode</em> but its whole subtree; if it is false, only the <em>importedNode</em> is imported. The argument <em>deep</em> has no effect on <a href="tqdomattr.html">TQDomAttr</a> and <a href="tqdomentityreference.html">TQDomEntityReference</a> nodes, since the descendents of TQDomAttr nodes are always imported and those of TQDomEntityReference nodes are never imported. @@ -333,20 +333,20 @@ the node types: <tr bgcolor="#a2c511"> <th valign="top">Node Type <th valign="top">Behaviour <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">TQDomAttr <td valign="top">The owner element is set to 0 and the specified flag is -set to TRUE in the generated attribute. The whole subtree +set to true in the generated attribute. The whole subtree of <em>importedNode</em> is always imported for attribute nodes: <em>deep</em> has no effect. <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">TQDomDocument <td valign="top">Document nodes cannot be imported. <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">TQDomDocumentFragment -<td valign="top">If <em>deep</em> is TRUE, this function imports the whole +<td valign="top">If <em>deep</em> is true, this function imports the whole document fragment; otherwise it only generates an empty document fragment. <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">TQDomDocumentType <td valign="top">Document type nodes cannot be imported. <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">TQDomElement -<td valign="top">Attributes for which <a href="tqdomattr.html#specified">TQDomAttr::specified</a>() is TRUE are -also imported, other attributes are not imported. If <em>deep</em> is TRUE, this function also imports the subtree of <em>importedNode</em>; otherwise it imports only the element node +<td valign="top">Attributes for which <a href="tqdomattr.html#specified">TQDomAttr::specified</a>() is true are +also imported, other attributes are not imported. If <em>deep</em> is true, this function also imports the subtree of <em>importedNode</em>; otherwise it imports only the element node (and some attributes, see above). <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">TQDomEntity <td valign="top">Entity nodes can be imported, but at the moment there is @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ copied to the new node. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDocument"></a>TQDomDocument::isDocument () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isDocument">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomDocument::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -393,19 +393,19 @@ will also change the other. If you want to make a <a href="shclass.html#deep-cop This function parses the XML document from the byte array <em>buffer</em> and sets it as the content of the document. It tries to detect the encoding of the document as required by the XML specification. -<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is TRUE, the parser recognizes +<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is true, the parser recognizes namespaces in the XML file and sets the prefix name, local name and namespace URI to appropriate values. If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> -is FALSE, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads +is false, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads the XML file. -<p> If a parse error occurs, the function returns FALSE; otherwise it -returns TRUE. If a parse error occurs and <em>errorMsg</em>, <em>errorLine</em> and <em>errorColumn</em> are not 0, the error message is +<p> If a parse error occurs, the function returns false; otherwise it +returns true. If a parse error occurs and <em>errorMsg</em>, <em>errorLine</em> and <em>errorColumn</em> are not 0, the error message is placed in <em>*errorMsg</em>, the line number <em>*errorLine</em> and the column number in <em>*errorColumn</em>. -<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is TRUE, the function <a href="tqdomnode.html#prefix">TQDomNode::prefix</a>() +<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is true, the function <a href="tqdomnode.html#prefix">TQDomNode::prefix</a>() returns a string for all elements and attributes. It returns an empty string if the element or attribute has no prefix. -<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is FALSE, the functions +<p> If <em>namespaceProcessing</em> is false, the functions TQDomNode::prefix(), <a href="tqdomnode.html#localName">TQDomNode::localName</a>() and <a href="tqdomnode.html#namespaceURI">TQDomNode::namespaceURI</a>() return <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdomnode.html#namespaceURI">TQDomNode::namespaceURI</a>(), <a href="tqdomnode.html#localName">TQDomNode::localName</a>(), <a href="tqdomnode.html#prefix">TQDomNode::prefix</a>(), <a href="tqstring.html#isNull">TQString::isNull</a>(), and <a href="tqstring.html#isEmpty">TQString::isEmpty</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomelement.html b/doc/html/tqdomelement.html index 9b36750d6..1fa2f0469 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomelement.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomelement.html @@ -194,18 +194,18 @@ they are encountered in a preorder traversal of the element tree. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAttribute"></a>TQDomElement::hasAttribute ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute called <em>name</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this element has an attribute called <em>name</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAttributeNS"></a>TQDomElement::hasAttributeNS ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & nsURI, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & localName ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute with the local name +Returns true if this element has an attribute with the local name <em>localName</em> and the namespace URI <em>nsURI</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isElement"></a>TQDomElement::isElement () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isElement">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomElement::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomentity.html b/doc/html/tqdomentity.html index 8cb02b36a..986fd9562 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomentity.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomentity.html @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEntity"></a>TQDomEntity::isEntity () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isEntity">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomEntity::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomentityreference.html b/doc/html/tqdomentityreference.html index ba9fec236..8ba91c679 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomentityreference.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomentityreference.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEntityReference"></a>TQDomEntityReference::isEntityReference () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isEntityReference">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomEntityReference::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomimplementation.html b/doc/html/tqdomimplementation.html index 20ce626b0..d902d1aa6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomimplementation.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomimplementation.html @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ create a <a href="tqdomdocument.html">TQDomDocument</a> with this document type. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasFeature"></a>TQDomImplementation::hasFeature ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & feature, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & version )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -The function returns TRUE if TQDom implements the requested <em>version</em> of a <em>feature</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +The function returns true if TQDom implements the requested <em>version</em> of a <em>feature</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> The currently supported features and their versions: <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> <tr bgcolor="#a2c511"> <th valign="top">Feature <th valign="top">Version @@ -118,13 +118,13 @@ The function returns TRUE if TQDom implements the requested <em>version</em> of <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQDomImplementation::isNull () </h3> -Returns FALSE if the object was created by -<a href="tqdomdocument.html#implementation">TQDomDocument::implementation</a>(); otherwise returns TRUE. +Returns false if the object was created by +<a href="tqdomdocument.html#implementation">TQDomDocument::implementation</a>(); otherwise returns true. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDomImplementation::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdomimplementation.html">TQDomImplementation</a> & x ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>x</em> and this DOM implementation object were -created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>x</em> and this DOM implementation object were +created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomimplementation.html">TQDomImplementation</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQDomImplementation::operator= ( const <a href="tqdomimplementation.html">TQDomImplementation</a> & x ) </h3> @@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ Assigns <em>x</em> to this DOM implementation. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDomImplementation::operator== ( const <a href="tqdomimplementation.html">TQDomImplementation</a> & x ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>x</em> and this DOM implementation object were -created from the same <a href="tqdomdocument.html">TQDomDocument</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>x</em> and this DOM implementation object were +created from the same <a href="tqdomdocument.html">TQDomDocument</a>; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomnamednodemap.html b/doc/html/tqdomnamednodemap.html index 79f47aba5..f7b18dd04 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomnamednodemap.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomnamednodemap.html @@ -105,8 +105,8 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::contains ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the map contains a node called <em>name</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the map contains a node called <em>name</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::count () const </h3> @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ the namespace URI <em>nsURI</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdomnamednodemap.html">TQDomNamedNodeMap</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>n</em> and this named node map are not equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>n</em> and this named node map are not equal; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnamednodemap.html">TQDomNamedNodeMap</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator= ( const <a href="tqdomnamednodemap.html">TQDomNamedNodeMap</a> & n ) </h3> @@ -151,8 +151,8 @@ Assigns <em>n</em> to this named node map. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator== ( const <a href="tqdomnamednodemap.html">TQDomNamedNodeMap</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>n</em> and this named node map are equal; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>n</em> and this named node map are equal; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="removeNamedItem"></a>TQDomNamedNodeMap::removeNamedItem ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomnode.html b/doc/html/tqdomnode.html index 83e7c8449..88bfa62df 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomnode.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomnode.html @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual TQDomNode <a href="#removeChild"><b>removeChild</b></a> ( const TQDomNode & oldChild )</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQDomNode <a href="#appendChild"><b>appendChild</b></a> ( const TQDomNode & newChild )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#hasChildNodes"><b>hasChildNodes</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQDomNode <a href="#cloneNode"><b>cloneNode</b></a> ( bool deep = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQDomNode <a href="#cloneNode"><b>cloneNode</b></a> ( bool deep = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#normalize"><b>normalize</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#isSupported"><b>isSupported</b></a> ( const TQString & feature, const TQString & version ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#nodeName"><b>nodeName</b></a> () const</li> @@ -256,12 +256,12 @@ Converts the node into a null node; if it was not a null node before, its type and contents are deleted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="cloneNode"></a>TQDomNode::cloneNode ( bool deep = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="cloneNode"></a>TQDomNode::cloneNode ( bool deep = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Creates a deep (not shallow) copy of the TQDomNode. -<p> If <em>deep</em> is TRUE, then the cloning is done recursively which +<p> If <em>deep</em> is true, then the cloning is done recursively which means that all the node's children are deep copied too. If <em>deep</em> -is FALSE only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no +is false only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no child nodes. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="firstChild"></a>TQDomNode::firstChild () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -274,13 +274,13 @@ returned node will also change the node in the document tree. <p>Example: <a href="outliner-example.html#x1907">xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAttributes"></a>TQDomNode::hasAttributes () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node has attributes; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the node has attributes; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#attributes">attributes</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasChildNodes"></a>TQDomNode::hasChildNodes () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node has one or more children; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the node has one or more children; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="insertAfter"></a>TQDomNode::insertAfter ( const <a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & newChild, const <a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & refChild )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -311,8 +311,8 @@ fragment are removed from the fragment and inserted before <em>refChild</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAttr"></a>TQDomNode::isAttr () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomAttribute; you can get the TQDomAttribute with toAttribute(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toAttr">toAttr</a>(). @@ -320,9 +320,9 @@ toAttribute(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomattr.html#isAttr">TQDomAttr</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCDATASection"></a>TQDomNode::isCDATASection () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomcdatasection.html">TQDomCDATASection</a>; you can get the TQDomCDATASection with <a href="#toCDATASection">toCDATASection</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toCDATASection">toCDATASection</a>(). @@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ is a <a href="tqdomcdatasection.html">TQDomCDATASection</a>; you can get the TQD <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomcdatasection.html#isCDATASection">TQDomCDATASection</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCharacterData"></a>TQDomNode::isCharacterData () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a character data node; otherwise -returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a character data node; otherwise +returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomcharacterdata.html">TQDomCharacterData</a>; you can get the TQDomCharacterData with <a href="#toCharacterData">toCharacterData</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toCharacterData">toCharacterData</a>(). @@ -340,25 +340,25 @@ is a <a href="tqdomcharacterdata.html">TQDomCharacterData</a>; you can get the T <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomcharacterdata.html#isCharacterData">TQDomCharacterData</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isComment"></a>TQDomNode::isComment () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a comment; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a comment; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomcomment.html">TQDomComment</a>; you can get the TQDomComment with <a href="#toComment">toComment</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toComment">toComment</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomcomment.html#isComment">TQDomComment</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDocument"></a>TQDomNode::isDocument () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a document; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a document; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomdocument.html">TQDomDocument</a>; you can get the TQDomDocument with <a href="#toDocument">toDocument</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toDocument">toDocument</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomdocument.html#isDocument">TQDomDocument</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDocumentFragment"></a>TQDomNode::isDocumentFragment () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomdocumentfragment.html">TQDomDocumentFragment</a>; you can get the TQDomDocumentFragment with <a href="#toDocumentFragment">toDocumentFragment</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toDocumentFragment">toDocumentFragment</a>(). @@ -366,9 +366,9 @@ with <a href="#toDocumentFragment">toDocumentFragment</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomdocumentfragment.html#isDocumentFragment">TQDomDocumentFragment</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDocumentType"></a>TQDomNode::isDocumentType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a document type; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a document type; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomdocumenttype.html">TQDomDocumentType</a>; you can get the TQDomDocumentType with <a href="#toDocumentType">toDocumentType</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toDocumentType">toDocumentType</a>(). @@ -376,8 +376,8 @@ is a <a href="tqdomdocumenttype.html">TQDomDocumentType</a>; you can get the TQD <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomdocumenttype.html#isDocumentType">TQDomDocumentType</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isElement"></a>TQDomNode::isElement () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is an element; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is an element; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomelement.html">TQDomElement</a>; you can get the TQDomElement with <a href="#toElement">toElement</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toElement">toElement</a>(). @@ -385,17 +385,17 @@ is a <a href="tqdomelement.html">TQDomElement</a>; you can get the TQDomElement <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomelement.html#isElement">TQDomElement</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEntity"></a>TQDomNode::isEntity () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is an entity; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is an entity; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomentity.html">TQDomEntity</a>; you can get the TQDomEntity with <a href="#toEntity">toEntity</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toEntity">toEntity</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomentity.html#isEntity">TQDomEntity</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEntityReference"></a>TQDomNode::isEntityReference () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomentityreference.html">TQDomEntityReference</a>; you can get the TQDomEntityReference with <a href="#toEntityReference">toEntityReference</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toEntityReference">toEntityReference</a>(). @@ -403,23 +403,23 @@ is a <a href="tqdomentityreference.html">TQDomEntityReference</a>; you can get t <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomentityreference.html#isEntityReference">TQDomEntityReference</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNotation"></a>TQDomNode::isNotation () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a notation; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a notation; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomnotation.html">TQDomNotation</a>; you can get the TQDomNotation with <a href="#toNotation">toNotation</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toNotation">toNotation</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomnotation.html#isNotation">TQDomNotation</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQDomNode::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or -contents); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or +contents); otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="outliner-example.html#x1909">xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isProcessingInstruction"></a>TQDomNode::isProcessingInstruction () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise -returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise +returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomprocessinginstruction.html">TQDomProcessingInstruction</a>; you can get the TQProcessingInstruction with <a href="#toProcessingInstruction">toProcessingInstruction</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toProcessingInstruction">toProcessingInstruction</a>(). @@ -427,14 +427,14 @@ TQProcessingInstruction with <a href="#toProcessingInstruction">toProcessingInst <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdomprocessinginstruction.html#isProcessingInstruction">TQDomProcessingInstruction</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSupported"></a>TQDomNode::isSupported ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & feature, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & version ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the DOM implementation implements the feature <em>feature</em> and this feature is supported by this node in the version -<em>version</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the DOM implementation implements the feature <em>feature</em> and this feature is supported by this node in the version +<em>version</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdomimplementation.html#hasFeature">TQDomImplementation::hasFeature</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isText"></a>TQDomNode::isText () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node is a text node; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object +Returns true if the node is a text node; otherwise returns false. +<p> If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a <a href="tqdomtext.html">TQDomText</a>; you can get the TQDomText with <a href="#toText">toText</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toText">toText</a>(). @@ -543,8 +543,8 @@ merged). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDomNode::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>n</em> and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>n</em> and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQDomNode::operator= ( const <a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & n ) </h3> @@ -555,8 +555,8 @@ will also change the other. If you want to make a <a href="shclass.html#deep-cop <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDomNode::operator== ( const <a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>n</em> and this DOM node are equal; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>n</em> and this DOM node are equal; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomdocument.html">TQDomDocument</a> <a name="ownerDocument"></a>TQDomNode::ownerDocument () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Returns the document to which this node belongs. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html">TQDomNode</a> <a name="parentNode"></a>TQDomNode::parentNode () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns the parent node. If this node has no parent, a null node -is returned (i.e. a node for which <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() returns TRUE). +is returned (i.e. a node for which <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() returns true). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="prefix"></a>TQDomNode::prefix () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomnodelist.html b/doc/html/tqdomnodelist.html index 838f4d23e..8ce92088f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomnodelist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomnodelist.html @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. Returns the node at position <em>index</em>. <p> If <em>index</em> is negative or if <em>index</em> >= <a href="#length">length</a>() then a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which <a href="tqdomnode.html#isNull">TQDomNode::isNull</a>() returns -TRUE). +true). <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="length"></a>TQDomNodeList::length () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -101,8 +101,8 @@ Returns the number of nodes in the list. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQDomNodeList::operator!= ( const <a href="tqdomnodelist.html">TQDomNodeList</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE the node list <em>n</em> and this node list are not equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true the node list <em>n</em> and this node list are not equal; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnodelist.html">TQDomNodeList</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQDomNodeList::operator= ( const <a href="tqdomnodelist.html">TQDomNodeList</a> & n ) </h3> @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ Assigns <em>n</em> to this node list. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQDomNodeList::operator== ( const <a href="tqdomnodelist.html">TQDomNodeList</a> & n ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the node list <em>n</em> and this node list are equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the node list <em>n</em> and this node list are equal; +otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomnotation.html b/doc/html/tqdomnotation.html index 2bf743ac2..b435cc263 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomnotation.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomnotation.html @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNotation"></a>TQDomNotation::isNotation () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isNotation">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomNotation::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomprocessinginstruction.html b/doc/html/tqdomprocessinginstruction.html index e36626d0a..1b6a60932 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomprocessinginstruction.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomprocessinginstruction.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Returns the content of this processing instruction. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isProcessingInstruction"></a>TQDomProcessingInstruction::isProcessingInstruction () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isProcessingInstruction">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomProcessingInstruction::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdomtext.html b/doc/html/tqdomtext.html index e1751d90c..4bcad4d01 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdomtext.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdomtext.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees its resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isText"></a>TQDomText::isText () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE. +Returns true. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdomnode.html#isText">TQDomNode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdomnode.html#NodeType-enum">TQDomNode::NodeType</a> <a name="nodeType"></a>TQDomText::nodeType () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqdragobject-h.html b/doc/html/tqdragobject-h.html index 3bde1917b..763933428 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdragobject-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdragobject-h.html @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ private: bool drag( TQDragObject *, TQDragObject::DragMode ); - void cancel( bool deleteSource = TRUE ); + void cancel( bool deleteSource = true ); void move( const TQPoint & ); void drop(); void updatePixmap(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqdragobject.html b/doc/html/tqdragobject.html index f234e07bd..5d0a6140b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdragobject.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdragobject.html @@ -110,9 +110,9 @@ which it is involved, and frees up the storage used. </h3> Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using DragDefault mode. -<p> The function returns TRUE if the caller should delete the original +<p> The function returns true if the caller should delete the original copy of the dragged data (but see <a href="#target">target</a>()); otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> If the drag contains <em>references</em> to information (e.g. file names in a <a href="tquridrag.html">TQUriDrag</a> are references) then the return value should always be ignored, as the target is expected to manipulate the @@ -133,10 +133,10 @@ application. You should not delete the drag object or anything it references. The actual transfer of data to the target application will be done during future event processing - after that time the drag object will be deleted. -<p> Returns TRUE if the dragged data was dragged as a <em>move</em>, +<p> Returns true if the dragged data was dragged as a <em>move</em>, indicating that the caller should remove the original source of the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> The <em>mode</em> specifies the drag mode (see <a href="#DragMode-enum">TQDragObject::DragMode</a>.) Normally one of the simpler <a href="#drag">drag</a>(), <a href="#dragMove">dragMove</a>(), or <a href="#dragCopy">dragCopy</a>() functions would be used instead. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdrawutil-h.html b/doc/html/tqdrawutil-h.html index 404b5739d..053a4b231 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdrawutil-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdrawutil-h.html @@ -94,45 +94,45 @@ class TQPixmap; // TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeLine( TQPainter *p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = TRUE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = true, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeLine( TQPainter *p, const TQPoint &p1, const TQPoint &p2, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = TRUE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = true, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeRect( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeRect( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadePanel( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadePanel( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinButton( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinPanel( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinPanel( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawPlainRect( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor &, diff --git a/doc/html/tqdropevent.html b/doc/html/tqdropevent.html index 681430080..943e9f9c3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdropevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdropevent.html @@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQDropEvent"><b>TQDropEvent</b></a> ( const TQPoint & pos, Type typ = Drop )</li> <li class=fn>const TQPoint & <a href="#pos"><b>pos</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isAccepted"><b>isAccepted</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#accept"><b>accept</b></a> ( bool y = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#accept"><b>accept</b></a> ( bool y = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#ignore"><b>ignore</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isActionAccepted"><b>isActionAccepted</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#acceptAction"><b>acceptAction</b></a> ( bool y = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#acceptAction"><b>acceptAction</b></a> ( bool y = true )</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Action-enum"><b>Action</b></a> { Copy, Link, Move, Private, UserAction = 100 }</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setAction"><b>setAction</b></a> ( Action a )</li> <li class=fn>Action <a href="#action"><b>action</b></a> () const</li> @@ -96,25 +96,25 @@ reference, for example, text/uri-list file lists (see <a href="tquridrag.html">T <p> Constructs a drop event that drops a drop of type <em>typ</em> on point <em>pos</em>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="accept"></a>TQDropEvent::accept ( bool y = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="accept"></a>TQDropEvent::accept ( bool y = true ) </h3> <p> Call this function to indicate whether the event provided data -which your widget processed. Set <em>y</em> to TRUE (the default) if -your widget could process the data, otherwise set <em>y</em> to FALSE. +which your widget processed. Set <em>y</em> to true (the default) if +your widget could process the data, otherwise set <em>y</em> to false. To get the data, use <a href="#encodedData">encodedData</a>(), or preferably, the decode() methods of existing <a href="tqdragobject.html">TQDragObject</a> subclasses, such as <a href="tqtextdrag.html#decode">TQTextDrag::decode</a>(), or your own subclasses. <p> <p>See also <a href="#acceptAction">acceptAction</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="simple_dd-example.html#x2819">iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="acceptAction"></a>TQDropEvent::acceptAction ( bool y = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="acceptAction"></a>TQDropEvent::acceptAction ( bool y = true ) </h3> <p> Call this to indicate that the action described by <a href="#action">action</a>() is -accepted (i.e. if <em>y</em> is TRUE, which is the default), not merely -the default copy action. If you call <a href="#acceptAction">acceptAction</a>(TRUE), there is -no need to also call <a href="#accept">accept</a>(TRUE). +accepted (i.e. if <em>y</em> is true, which is the default), not merely +the default copy action. If you call <a href="#acceptAction">acceptAction</a>(true), there is +no need to also call <a href="#accept">accept</a>(true). <p>Examples: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1671">dirview/dirview.cpp</a> and <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x816">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdropevent.html#Action-enum">Action</a> <a name="action"></a>TQDropEvent::action () const @@ -164,14 +164,14 @@ will use <a href="#provides">provides</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQDropEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActionAccepted"></a>TQDropEvent::isActionAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & <a name="pos"></a>TQDropEvent::pos () const </h3> @@ -181,8 +181,8 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <p>Example: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1673">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="provides"></a>TQDropEvent::provides ( const char * mimeType ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this event provides format <em>mimeType</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this event provides format <em>mimeType</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#data">data</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x819">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqdropsite.html b/doc/html/tqdropsite.html index 59c04ec56..fa424f2a3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqdropsite.html +++ b/doc/html/tqdropsite.html @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ folded into <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>. </h3> Constructs a TQDropSite to handle events for the widget <em>self</em>. <p> Pass <tt>this</tt> as the <em>self</em> parameter. -This enables dropping by calling <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">TQWidget::setAcceptDrops</a>(TRUE). +This enables dropping by calling <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">TQWidget::setAcceptDrops</a>(true). <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQDropSite"></a>TQDropSite::~TQDropSite ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqevent-h.html b/doc/html/tqevent-h.html index a480c3ae8..51c5866d4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqevent-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqevent-h.html @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ public: }; - TQEvent( Type type ) : t(type), posted(FALSE), spont(FALSE) {} + TQEvent( Type type ) : t(type), posted(false), spont(false) {} virtual ~TQEvent(); Type type() const { return t; } bool spontaneous() const { return spont; } @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ public: TQMouseEvent( Type type, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint&globalPos, int button, int state ) - : TQEvent(type), p(pos), g(globalPos), b((ushort)button),s((ushort)state),accpt(TRUE) {}; + : TQEvent(type), p(pos), g(globalPos), b((ushort)button),s((ushort)state),accpt(true) {}; const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } const TQPoint &globalPos() const { return g; } @@ -225,8 +225,8 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return (ButtonState) s; } ButtonState stateAfter() const; bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQPoint p; TQPoint g; @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public: TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical ); TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint& globalPos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical ) : TQEvent(Wheel), p(pos), g(globalPos), d(delta), s((ushort)state), - accpt(TRUE), o(orient) {} + accpt(true), o(orient) {} int delta() const { return d; } const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } const TQPoint &globalPos() const { return g; } @@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return ButtonState(s); } Orientation orientation() const { return o; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQPoint p; TQPoint g; @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ public: int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int,int> &uId ) : TQEvent( TabletMove ), mPos( pos ), mGPos( globalPos ), mDev( device ), mPress( pressure ), mXT( xTilt ), mYT( yTilt ), mType( uId.first ), - mPhy( uId.second ), mbAcc(TRUE) + mPhy( uId.second ), mbAcc(true) {} int pressure() const { return mPress; } int xTilt() const { return mXT; } @@ -289,8 +289,8 @@ public: int globalY() const { return mGPos.y(); } TabletDevice device() const { return TabletDevice(mDev); } int isAccepted() const { return mbAcc; } - void accept() { mbAcc = TRUE; } - void ignore() { mbAcc = FALSE; } + void accept() { mbAcc = true; } + void ignore() { mbAcc = false; } TQPair<int,int> uniqueId() { return TQPair<int,int>( mType, mPhy); } protected: TQPoint mPos; @@ -309,12 +309,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQKeyEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQKeyEvent( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, - const TQString& text=TQString::null, bool autorep=FALSE, ushort count=1 ) + const TQString& text=TQString::null, bool autorep=false, ushort count=1 ) : TQEvent(type), txt(text), k((ushort)key), s((ushort)state), - a((uchar)ascii), accpt(TRUE), autor(autorep), c(count) + a((uchar)ascii), accpt(true), autor(autorep), c(count) { if ( key >= Key_Back && key <= Key_MediaLast ) - accpt = FALSE; + accpt = false; } int key() const { return k; } int ascii() const { return a; } @@ -324,8 +324,8 @@ public: TQString text() const { return txt; } bool isAutoRepeat() const { return autor; } int count() const { return int(c); } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQString txt; @@ -361,17 +361,17 @@ private: class TQ_EXPORT TQPaintEvent : public TQEvent { public: - TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion& paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion& paintRegion, bool erased = true) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRegion.boundingRect()), reg(paintRegion), erase(erased){} - TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = true ) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRect), reg(paintRect), erase(erased){} - TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = true ) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRect), reg(paintRegion), @@ -421,10 +421,10 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQCloseEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQCloseEvent() - : TQEvent(Close), accpt(FALSE) {} + : TQEvent(Close), accpt(false) {} bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: bool accpt; }; @@ -434,11 +434,11 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQIconDragEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQIconDragEvent() - : TQEvent(IconDrag), accpt(FALSE) {} + : TQEvent(IconDrag), accpt(false) {} bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: bool accpt; }; @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQContextMenuEvent : public TQEvent public: enum Reason { Mouse, Keyboard, Other }; TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalPos, int state ) - : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), gp( globalPos ), accpt( TRUE ), consum( TRUE ), + : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), gp( globalPos ), accpt( true ), consum( true ), reas( reason ), s((ushort)state) {} TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int state ); @@ -478,9 +478,9 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return (ButtonState) s; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } bool isConsumed() const { return consum; } - void consume() { accpt = FALSE; consum = TRUE; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; consum = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; consum = FALSE; } + void consume() { accpt = false; consum = true; } + void accept() { accpt = true; consum = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; consum = false; } Reason reason() const { return Reason( reas ); } @@ -498,12 +498,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQIMEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQIMEvent( Type type, const TQString &text, int cursorPosition ) - : TQEvent(type), txt(text), cpos(cursorPosition), a(TRUE) {} + : TQEvent(type), txt(text), cpos(cursorPosition), a(true) {} const TQString &text() const { return txt; } int cursorPos() const { return cpos; } bool isAccepted() const { return a; } - void accept() { a = TRUE; } - void ignore() { a = FALSE; } + void accept() { a = true; } + void ignore() { a = false; } int selectionLength() const; private: @@ -549,11 +549,11 @@ public: {} const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt || accptact; } - void accept(bool y=TRUE) { accpt = y; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept(bool y=true) { accpt = y; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } bool isActionAccepted() const { return accptact; } - void acceptAction(bool y=TRUE) { accptact = y; } + void acceptAction(bool y=true) { accptact = y; } enum Action { Copy, Link, Move, Private, UserAction=100 }; void setAction( Action a ) { act = (uint)a; } Action action() const { return Action(act); } @@ -585,9 +585,9 @@ public: : TQDropEvent(pos,typ), rect( pos, TQSize( 1, 1 ) ) {} TQRect answerRect() const { return rect; } - void accept( bool y=TRUE ) { TQDropEvent::accept(y); } - void accept( const TQRect & r) { accpt = TRUE; rect = r; } - void ignore( const TQRect & r) { accpt =FALSE; rect = r; } + void accept( bool y=true ) { TQDropEvent::accept(y); } + void accept( const TQRect & r) { accpt = true; rect = r; } + void ignore( const TQRect & r) { accpt =false; rect = r; } void ignore() { TQDropEvent::ignore(); } protected: diff --git a/doc/html/tqevent.html b/doc/html/tqevent.html index 0c9b46753..2e0b64efd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqevent.html @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ event classes. Event objects contain event parameters. system events from the event queue, translates them into TQEvents and sends the translated events to TQObjects. <p> In general, events come from the underlying window system -(<a href="#spontaneous">spontaneous</a>() returns TRUE) but it is also possible to manually +(<a href="#spontaneous">spontaneous</a>() returns true) but it is also possible to manually send events using <a href="tqapplication.html#sendEvent">TQApplication::sendEvent</a>() and -<a href="tqapplication.html#postEvent">TQApplication::postEvent</a>() (spontaneous() returns FALSE). +<a href="tqapplication.html#postEvent">TQApplication::postEvent</a>() (spontaneous() returns false). <p> TQObjects receive events by having their <a href="tqobject.html#event">TQObject::event</a>() function called. The function can be reimplemented in subclasses to customize event handling and add additional event types; @@ -171,8 +171,8 @@ it will be removed from the list of events to be posted. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="spontaneous"></a>TQEvent::spontaneous () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the event originated outside the application, i.e. -it is a system event; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the event originated outside the application, i.e. +it is a system event; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqevent.html#Type-enum">Type</a> <a name="type"></a>TQEvent::type () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqeventloop.html b/doc/html/tqeventloop.html index 8605cf653..6b556f4af 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqeventloop.html +++ b/doc/html/tqeventloop.html @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Do not call it unless you really know what you are doing. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPendingEvents"></a>TQEventLoop::hasPendingEvents () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="loopLevel"></a>TQEventLoop::loopLevel () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -222,8 +222,8 @@ are available and return after processing newly available events. events are available, this function will return immediately. <p> NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it returns after all available events are processed. -<p> This function returns TRUE if an event was processed; otherwise it -returns FALSE. +<p> This function returns true if an event was processed; otherwise it +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#ProcessEvents-enum">ProcessEvents</a> and <a href="#hasPendingEvents">hasPendingEvents</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="registerSocketNotifier"></a>TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier ( <a href="tqsocketnotifier.html">TQSocketNotifier</a> * notifier )<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqfile.html b/doc/html/tqfile.html index ff845a39c..b4e97f799 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfile.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfile.html @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ and write with <a href="tqiodevice.html#writeBlock">writeBlock</a>(). TQFile als <p> The size of the file is returned by <a href="#size">size</a>(). You can get the current file position or move to a new file position using the <a href="tqiodevice.html#at">at</a>() functions. If you've reached the end of the file, <a href="#atEnd">atEnd</a>() -returns TRUE. The file handle is returned by <a href="#handle">handle</a>(). +returns true. The file handle is returned by <a href="#handle">handle</a>(). <p> Here is a code fragment that uses <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> to read a text file line by line. It prints each line with a line number. <pre> @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Destroys a TQFile. Calls <a href="#close">close</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQFile::atEnd () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns false. If TQFile has not been <a href="#open">open</a>()'d, then the behavior is undefined. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). @@ -238,14 +238,14 @@ should translate it first, for example: <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists"></a>TQFile::exists ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file given by <em>fileName</em> exists; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file given by <em>fileName</em> exists; otherwise +returns false. <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial2-05.html#x2563">chart/chartform.cpp</a>, <a href="dirview-example.html#x1674">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>, and <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x988">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists-2"></a>TQFile::exists () const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if this file exists; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this file exists; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#name">name</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="flush"></a>TQFile::flush ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ can be used with <a href="tqsocketnotifier.html">TQSocketNotifier</a> as well. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="open"></a>TQFile::open ( int m )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Opens the file specified by the file name currently set, using the -mode <em>m</em>. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE. +mode <em>m</em>. Returns true if successful, otherwise false. <p> <!-- index IO_Raw --><!-- index IO_ReadOnly --><!-- index IO_WriteOnly --><!-- index IO_ReadWrite --><!-- index IO_Append --><!-- index IO_Truncate --><!-- index IO_Translate --> <p> The mode parameter <em>m</em> must be a combination of the following flags: <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ is specified, it is created. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Opens a file in the mode <em>m</em> using an existing file handle <em>f</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE. +Returns true if successful, otherwise false. <p> Example: <pre> #include <stdio.h> @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ information. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Opens a file in the mode <em>m</em> using an existing file descriptor <em>f</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE. +Returns true if successful, otherwise false. <p> When a TQFile is opened using this function, <a href="#close">close</a>() does not actually close the file. <p> The TQFile that is opened using this function, is automatically set to be in @@ -420,14 +420,14 @@ flag. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQFile::remove () </h3> Removes the file specified by the file name currently set. Returns -TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> The file is closed before it is removed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove-2"></a>TQFile::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Removes the file <em>fileName</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE. +Returns true if successful, otherwise false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDecodingFunction"></a>TQFile::setDecodingFunction ( <a href="tqfile.html#DecoderFn">DecoderFn</a> f )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3><p><b>Warning:</b> This function is <i>not</i> <a href="threads.html#reentrant">reentrant</a>.</p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqfiledialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqfiledialog-h.html index 949b013b4..6948d38f9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfiledialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfiledialog-h.html @@ -143,8 +143,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFileDialog : public TQDialog public: TQFileDialog( const TQString& dirName, const TQString& filter = TQString::null, - TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); - TQFileDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = false ); + TQFileDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = false ); ~TQFileDialog(); // recommended static functions @@ -154,26 +154,26 @@ public: TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQString getSaveFileName( const TQString &initially = TQString::null, const TQString &filter = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQString getExistingDirectory( const TQString &dir = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, - bool dirOnly = TRUE, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool dirOnly = true, + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQStringList getOpenFileNames( const TQString &filter= TQString::null, const TQString &dir = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); // other static functions @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ protected: void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ); void addWidgets( TQLabel *, TQWidget *, TQPushButton * ); - void addToolButton( TQButton *b, bool separator = FALSE ); + void addToolButton( TQButton *b, bool separator = false ); void addLeftWidget( TQWidget *w ); void addRightWidget( TQWidget *w ); @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ private: static TQStringList macGetOpenFileNames( const TQString &, TQString*, TQWidget *, const char *, const TQString&, TQString *, - bool = TRUE, bool = FALSE ); + bool = true, bool = false ); #endif diff --git a/doc/html/tqfiledialog.html b/doc/html/tqfiledialog.html index aa6af785b..54ae4badb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfiledialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfiledialog.html @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqfiledialog-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQFileDialog"><b>TQFileDialog</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQFileDialog-2"><b>TQFileDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQFileDialog"><b>TQFileDialog</b></a> ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQFileDialog-2"><b>TQFileDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQFileDialog"><b>~TQFileDialog</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#selectedFile"><b>selectedFile</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#selectedFilter"><b>selectedFilter</b></a> () const</li> @@ -91,10 +91,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } </ul> <h2>Static Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getOpenFileName"><b>getOpenFileName</b></a> ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getSaveFileName"><b>getSaveFileName</b></a> ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getExistingDirectory"><b>getExistingDirectory</b></a> ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#getOpenFileNames"><b>getOpenFileNames</b></a> ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getOpenFileName"><b>getOpenFileName</b></a> ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getSaveFileName"><b>getSaveFileName</b></a> ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getExistingDirectory"><b>getExistingDirectory</b></a> ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = true, bool resolveSymlinks = true )</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#getOpenFileNames"><b>getOpenFileNames</b></a> ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setIconProvider"><b>setIconProvider</b></a> ( TQFileIconProvider * provider )</li> <li class=fn>TQFileIconProvider * <a href="#iconProvider"><b>iconProvider</b></a> ()</li> </ul> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <h2>Protected Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn>void <a href="#addWidgets"><b>addWidgets</b></a> ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#addToolButton"><b>addToolButton</b></a> ( TQButton * b, bool separator = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#addToolButton"><b>addToolButton</b></a> ( TQButton * b, bool separator = false )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#addLeftWidget"><b>addLeftWidget</b></a> ( TQWidget * w )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#addRightWidget"><b>addRightWidget</b></a> ( TQWidget * w )</li> </ul> @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ file". If you want to use multiple filters, separate each one with functions. By calling <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(), you can set what can be returned by the TQFileDialog. <p> <pre> - TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", true ); fd-><a href="#setMode">setMode</a>( TQFileDialog::<a href="#Mode-enum">AnyFile</a> ); </pre> @@ -239,14 +239,14 @@ pixmap. Here's how to make a file dialog use a preview widget: Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd-><a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + fd-><a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( true ); fd-><a href="#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>( p, p ); fd-><a href="#setPreviewMode">setPreviewMode</a>( TQFileDialog::<a href="#PreviewMode-enum">Contents</a> ); fd-><a href="tqdialog.html#show">show</a>(); </pre> <p> The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then -create our file dialog and call <a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( TRUE ), +create our file dialog and call <a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( true ), this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently selected file. We then call <a href="#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() -- note that we pass the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file @@ -297,20 +297,20 @@ additional information, such as file size and modification date. </ul><p> See <a href="#setViewMode">setViewMode</a>(). <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFileDialog"></a>TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFileDialog"></a>TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dirName, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false ) </h3> Constructs a file dialog called <em>name</em> with the parent, <em>parent</em>. -If <em>modal</em> is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is +If <em>modal</em> is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. <p> If <em>dirName</em> is specified then it will be used as the dialog's working directory, i.e. it will be the directory that is shown when the dialog appears. If <em>filter</em> is specified it will be used as the dialog's file filter. <p> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFileDialog-2"></a>TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFileDialog-2"></a>TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false ) </h3> Constructs a file dialog called <em>name</em>, with the parent, <em>parent</em>. -If <em>modal</em> is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is +If <em>modal</em> is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQFileDialog"></a>TQFileDialog::~TQFileDialog () @@ -342,11 +342,11 @@ Adds the widget <em>w</em> to the left-hand side of the file dialog. Adds the widget <em>w</em> to the right-hand side of the file dialog. <p> <p>See also <a href="#addLeftWidget">addLeftWidget</a>(), <a href="#addWidgets">addWidgets</a>(), and <a href="#addToolButton">addToolButton</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolButton"></a>TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( <a href="tqbutton.html">TQButton</a> * b, bool separator = FALSE )<tt> [protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolButton"></a>TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( <a href="tqbutton.html">TQButton</a> * b, bool separator = false )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> Adds the tool button <em>b</em> to the row of tool buttons at the top of the file dialog. The button is appended to the right of -this row. If <em>separator</em> is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the +this row. If <em>separator</em> is true, a small space is inserted between the last button of the row and the new button <em>b</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#addWidgets">addWidgets</a>(), <a href="#addLeftWidget">addLeftWidget</a>(), and <a href="#addRightWidget">addRightWidget</a>(). @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ it the current file. <p> This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter. <p> <p>See also <a href="#selectedFilter-prop">selectedFilter</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getExistingDirectory"></a>TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dir = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getExistingDirectory"></a>TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dir = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = true, bool resolveSymlinks = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ selected by the user. this, "get existing directory", "Choose a directory", - TRUE ); + true ); </pre> <p> This function creates a modal file dialog called <em>name</em>, with @@ -436,12 +436,12 @@ set to <em>caption</em>. Either of these may be <a href="tqstring.html#TQString- the current directory and a default caption will be used respectively. <p> Note on Windows that if <em>dir</em> is TQString::null then the dialog's working directory will be set to the user's My Documents directory. -<p> If <em>dirOnly</em> is TRUE, then only directories will be shown in +<p> If <em>dirOnly</em> is true, then only directories will be shown in the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown. <p> Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. -If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is FALSE, the file dialog will treat +If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. <p> Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under the parent's titlebar). <p> <p>See also <a href="#getOpenFileName">getOpenFileName</a>(), <a href="#getOpenFileNames">getOpenFileNames</a>(), and <a href="#getSaveFileName">getSaveFileName</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getOpenFileName"></a>TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & startWith = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getOpenFileName"></a>TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & startWith = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user pressed Cancel, it returns a null @@ -483,12 +483,12 @@ the parent's titlebar). <p> Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. -If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is FALSE, the file dialog will treat +If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. <p> <p>See also <a href="#getOpenFileNames">getOpenFileNames</a>(), <a href="#getSaveFileName">getSaveFileName</a>(), and <a href="#getExistingDirectory">getExistingDirectory</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1132">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="addressbook-example.html#x567">addressbook/mainwindow.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-application-example.html#x1549">application/application.cpp</a>, <a href="distributor-example.html#x2660">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x741">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>, <a href="qwerty-example.html#x365">qwerty/qwerty.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1318">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="getOpenFileNames"></a>TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dir = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="getOpenFileNames"></a>TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dir = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user. @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ the parent's titlebar). <p> Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. -If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is FALSE, the file dialog will treat +If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. <p> Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should iterate over a copy, e.g. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ iterate over a copy, e.g. <p> <p>See also <a href="#getOpenFileName">getOpenFileName</a>(), <a href="#getSaveFileName">getSaveFileName</a>(), and <a href="#getExistingDirectory">getExistingDirectory</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getSaveFileName"></a>TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & startWith = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getSaveFileName"></a>TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & startWith = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter = TQString::null, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption = TQString::null, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ the parent's titlebar. <p> Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. -If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is FALSE, the file dialog will treat +If <em>resolveSymlinks</em> is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. <p> <p>See also <a href="#getOpenFileName">getOpenFileName</a>(), <a href="#getOpenFileNames">getOpenFileNames</a>(), and <a href="#getExistingDirectory">getExistingDirectory</a>(). @@ -577,10 +577,10 @@ By default there is no icon provider, and this function returns 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setIconProvider">setIconProvider</a>() and <a href="tqfileiconprovider.html">TQFileIconProvider</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isContentsPreviewEnabled"></a>TQFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#contentsPreview-prop">"contentsPreview"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isInfoPreviewEnabled"></a>TQFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#infoPreview-prop">"infoPreview"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> <a name="mode"></a>TQFileDialog::mode () const </h3><p>Returns the file dialog's mode. @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Re-sorts the displayed directory. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQFileDialog::selectAll ( bool b ) </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE then all the files in the current directory are selected; +If <em>b</em> is true then all the files in the current directory are selected; otherwise, they are deselected. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="selectedFile"></a>TQFileDialog::selectedFile () const @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ avoid memory leaks. Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd-><a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + fd-><a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>( true ); fd-><a href="#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>( p, p ); fd-><a href="#setPreviewMode">setPreviewMode</a>( TQFileDialog::<a href="#PreviewMode-enum">Contents</a> ); fd-><a href="tqdialog.html#show">show</a>(); @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ avoid memory leaks. Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd-><a href="#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + fd-><a href="#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>( true ); fd-><a href="#setInfoPreview">setInfoPreview</a>( p, p ); fd-><a href="#setPreviewMode">setPreviewMode</a>( TQFileDialog::<a href="#PreviewMode-enum">Info</a> ); fd-><a href="tqdialog.html#show">show</a>(); @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Sets the file dialog's working directory to the directory specified at <em>url</ </h3><p>Sets the file dialog's view mode to <em>m</em>. See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop">"viewMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showHiddenFiles"></a>TQFileDialog::showHiddenFiles () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#showHiddenFiles-prop">"showHiddenFiles"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqurl.html">TQUrl</a> <a name="url"></a>TQFileDialog::url () const </h3> @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop">"viewMode"</a> property for de <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contentsPreview-prop"></a>contentsPreview</h3> <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setContentsPreview">setContentsPreview</a>() and <a href="#infoPreview-prop">infoPreview</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setContentsPreviewEnabled">setContentsPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isContentsPreviewEnabled">isContentsPreviewEnabled</a>(). @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ See the <a href="tqfiledialog.html#viewMode-prop">"viewMode"</a> property for de <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="infoPreview-prop"></a>infoPreview</h3> <p>This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setInfoPreviewEnabled">setInfoPreviewEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isInfoPreviewEnabled">isInfoPreviewEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfiledialog.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> <a name="mode-prop"></a>mode</h3> @@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ iterate over a copy, e.g. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showHiddenFiles-prop"></a>showHiddenFiles</h3> <p>This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files. +<p>The default is false, i.e. don't show hidden files. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setShowHiddenFiles">setShowHiddenFiles</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#showHiddenFiles">showHiddenFiles</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfiledialog.html#ViewMode-enum">ViewMode</a> <a name="viewMode-prop"></a>viewMode</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqfileinfo-h.html b/doc/html/tqfileinfo-h.html index 76c07afd2..ac77812a4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfileinfo-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfileinfo-h.html @@ -122,14 +122,14 @@ public: #ifndef TQT_NO_DIR //### TQString absFilePath() const; #endif - TQString baseName( bool complete = FALSE ) const; - TQString extension( bool complete = TRUE ) const; + TQString baseName( bool complete = false ) const; + TQString extension( bool complete = true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_DIR //### - TQString dirPath( bool absPath = FALSE ) const; + TQString dirPath( bool absPath = false ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_DIR - TQDir dir( bool absPath = FALSE ) const; + TQDir dir( bool absPath = false ) const; #endif bool isReadable() const; bool isWritable() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqfileinfo.html b/doc/html/tqfileinfo.html index 52cd5286f..a4c1ed05d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfileinfo.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfileinfo.html @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#filePath"><b>filePath</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#fileName"><b>fileName</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#absFilePath"><b>absFilePath</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#baseName"><b>baseName</b></a> ( bool complete = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#extension"><b>extension</b></a> ( bool complete = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#dirPath"><b>dirPath</b></a> ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQDir <a href="#dir"><b>dir</b></a> ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#baseName"><b>baseName</b></a> ( bool complete = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#extension"><b>extension</b></a> ( bool complete = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#dirPath"><b>dirPath</b></a> ( bool absPath = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQDir <a href="#dir"><b>dir</b></a> ( bool absPath = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isReadable"><b>isReadable</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isWritable"><b>isWritable</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isExecutable"><b>isExecutable</b></a> () const</li> @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ file. Because files can be changed by other users or programs, or even by other parts of the same program, there is a function that refreshes the file information: <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). If you want to switch off a TQFileInfo's caching and force it to access the file system -every time you request information from it call <a href="#setCaching">setCaching</a>(FALSE). +every time you request information from it call <a href="#setCaching">setCaching</a>(false). <p> The file's type is obtained with <a href="#isFile">isFile</a>(), <a href="#isDir">isDir</a>() and <a href="#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>(). The <a href="#readLink">readLink</a>() function provides the name of the file the symlink points to. @@ -195,26 +195,26 @@ directory. On Windows this will always begin 'D:/' where D is a drive letter, except for network shares that are not mapped to a drive letter, in which case the path will begin '//sharename/'. <p> This function returns the same as <a href="#filePath">filePath</a>(), unless <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>() -is TRUE. +is true. <p> If the TQFileInfo is empty it returns <a href="tqdir.html#currentDirPath">TQDir::currentDirPath</a>(). <p> This function can be time consuming under Unix (in the order of milliseconds). <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>() and <a href="#filePath">filePath</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="biff-example.html#x1954">biff/biff.cpp</a> and <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x820">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="baseName"></a>TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="baseName"></a>TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = false ) const </h3> Returns the base name of the file. -<p> If <em>complete</em> is FALSE (the default) the base name consists of +<p> If <em>complete</em> is false (the default) the base name consists of all characters in the file name up to (but not including) the <em>first</em> '.' character. -<p> If <em>complete</em> is TRUE the base name consists of all characters in +<p> If <em>complete</em> is true the base name consists of all characters in the file up to (but not including) the <em>last</em> '.' character. <p> The path is not included in either case. <p> Example: <pre> TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" ); <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> base = fi.<a href="#baseName">baseName</a>(); // base = "archive" - base = fi.<a href="#baseName">baseName</a>( TRUE ); // base = "archive.tar" + base = fi.<a href="#baseName">baseName</a>( true ); // base = "archive.tar" </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#fileName">fileName</a>() and <a href="#extension">extension</a>(). @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ the file up to (but not including) the <em>last</em> '.' character. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="caching"></a>TQFileInfo::caching () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if caching is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if caching is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setCaching">setCaching</a>() and <a href="#refresh">refresh</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="convertToAbs"></a>TQFileInfo::convertToAbs () @@ -238,40 +238,40 @@ Returns the date and time when the file was created. same as <a href="#lastModified">lastModified</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#lastModified">lastModified</a>() and <a href="#lastRead">lastRead</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> <a name="dir"></a>TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> <a name="dir"></a>TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = false ) const </h3> Returns the file's path as a <a href="tqdir.html">TQDir</a> object. -<p> If the TQFileInfo is relative and <em>absPath</em> is FALSE, the TQDir +<p> If the TQFileInfo is relative and <em>absPath</em> is false, the TQDir will be relative; otherwise it will be absolute. <p> <p>See also <a href="#dirPath">dirPath</a>(), <a href="#filePath">filePath</a>(), <a href="#fileName">fileName</a>(), and <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x821">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="dirPath"></a>TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="dirPath"></a>TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = false ) const </h3> Returns the file's path. -<p> If <em>absPath</em> is TRUE an absolute path is returned. +<p> If <em>absPath</em> is true an absolute path is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#dir">dir</a>(), <a href="#filePath">filePath</a>(), <a href="#fileName">fileName</a>(), and <a href="#isRelative">isRelative</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x822">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exists"></a>TQFileInfo::exists () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file exists; otherwise returns false. <p>Examples: <a href="biff-example.html#x1955">biff/biff.cpp</a>, <a href="distributor-example.html#x2661">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, and <a href="i18n-example.html#x1937">i18n/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="extension"></a>TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="extension"></a>TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = true ) const </h3> Returns the file's extension name. -<p> If <em>complete</em> is TRUE (the default), <a href="#extension">extension</a>() returns the +<p> If <em>complete</em> is true (the default), <a href="#extension">extension</a>() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the first '.' character. -<p> If <em>complete</em> is FALSE, extension() returns the string of all +<p> If <em>complete</em> is false, extension() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the last '.' character. <p> Example: <pre> TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" ); <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> ext = fi.<a href="#extension">extension</a>(); // ext = "tar.gz" - ext = fi.<a href="#extension">extension</a>( FALSE ); // ext = "gz" + ext = fi.<a href="#extension">extension</a>( false ); // ext = "gz" </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#fileName">fileName</a>() and <a href="#baseName">baseName</a>(). @@ -314,19 +314,19 @@ function always returns (uint) -2. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDir"></a>TQFileInfo::isDir () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic -link to a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic +link to a directory; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isFile">isFile</a>() and <a href="#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1676">dirview/dirview.cpp</a> and <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x825">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExecutable"></a>TQFileInfo::isExecutable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file is executable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file is executable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>(), <a href="#isWritable">isWritable</a>(), and <a href="#permission">permission</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFile"></a>TQFileInfo::isFile () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this object points to a file. Returns FALSE if the +Returns true if this object points to a file. Returns false if the object points to something which isn't a file, e.g. a directory or a symlink. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isDir">isDir</a>() and <a href="#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>(). @@ -334,34 +334,34 @@ a symlink. <p>Examples: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1677">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>, <a href="distributor-example.html#x2662">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x826">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>, and <a href="tqdir-example.html#x1824">tqdir/tqdir.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isHidden"></a>TQFileInfo::isHidden () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file is hidden; otherwise returns false. <p> On Unix-like operating systems, including Mac OS X, a file is hidden if its name begins with ".". On Windows a file is hidden if its hidden attribute is set. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadable"></a>TQFileInfo::isReadable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file is readable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file is readable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isWritable">isWritable</a>(), <a href="#isExecutable">isExecutable</a>(), and <a href="#permission">permission</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="distributor-example.html#x2663">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRelative"></a>TQFileInfo::isRelative () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file path name is relative. Returns FALSE if +Returns true if the file path name is relative. Returns false if the path is absolute (e.g. under Unix a path is absolute if it begins with a "/"). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSymLink"></a>TQFileInfo::isSymLink () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a +Returns true if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a shortcut on Windows, or an alias on Mac OS X); otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isFile">isFile</a>(), <a href="#isDir">isDir</a>(), and <a href="#readLink">readLink</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1678">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>, <a href="distributor-example.html#x2664">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>, and <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x827">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isWritable"></a>TQFileInfo::isWritable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the file is writable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the file is writable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>(), <a href="#isExecutable">isExecutable</a>(), and <a href="#permission">permission</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="distributor-example.html#x2665">distributor/distributor.ui.h</a>. @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Tests for file permissions. The <em>permissionSpec</em> argument can be several flags of type <a href="#PermissionSpec-enum">PermissionSpec</a> OR-ed together to check for permission combinations. <p> On systems where files do not have permissions this function -always returns TRUE. +always returns true. <p> Example: <pre> TQFileInfo fi( "/tmp/archive.tar.gz" ); @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ always returns TRUE. Returns the name a symlink (or shortcut on Windows) points to, or a <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if the object isn't a symbolic link. <p> This name may not represent an existing file; it is only a string. -<a href="#exists">TQFileInfo::exists</a>() returns TRUE if the symlink points to an +<a href="#exists">TQFileInfo::exists</a>() returns true if the symlink points to an existing file. <p> <p>See also <a href="#exists">exists</a>(), <a href="#isSymLink">isSymLink</a>(), <a href="#isDir">isDir</a>(), and <a href="#isFile">isFile</a>(). @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ from the file system the next time a cached property is fetched. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setCaching"></a>TQFileInfo::setCaching ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, enables caching of file information. If <em>enable</em> is FALSE caching is disabled. +If <em>enable</em> is true, enables caching of file information. If <em>enable</em> is false caching is disabled. <p> When caching is enabled, TQFileInfo reads the file information from the file system the first time it's needed, but generally not later. diff --git a/doc/html/tqfocusevent.html b/doc/html/tqfocusevent.html index 9041f5bc0..e8b18a859 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfocusevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfocusevent.html @@ -94,14 +94,14 @@ about focus. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="gotFocus"></a>TQFocusEvent::gotFocus () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget received the text input focus; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget received the text input focus; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="lostFocus"></a>TQFocusEvent::lostFocus () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfocusevent.html#Reason-enum">Reason</a> <a name="reason"></a>TQFocusEvent::reason ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqfont-h.html b/doc/html/tqfont-h.html index 577f66cec..0328383e5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfont-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfont-h.html @@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ public: // specific font #ifdef Q_QDOC TQFont( const TQString &family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, - bool italic = FALSE ); + bool italic = false ); #else TQFont( const TQString &family, int pointSize = -1, int weight = -1, - bool italic = FALSE ); + bool italic = false ); #endif // copy constructor TQFont( const TQFont & ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqfont.html b/doc/html/tqfont.html index d1344d9c0..86feca2e3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfont.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfont.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Weight-enum"><b>Weight</b></a> { Light = 25, Normal = 50, DemiBold = 63, Bold = 75, Black = 87 }</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Stretch-enum"><b>Stretch</b></a> { UltraCondensed = 50, ExtraCondensed = 62, Condensed = 75, SemiCondensed = 87, Unstretched = 100, SemiExpanded = 112, Expanded = 125, ExtraExpanded = 150, UltraExpanded = 200 }</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQFont"><b>TQFont</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQFont-2"><b>TQFont</b></a> ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQFont-2"><b>TQFont</b></a> ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQFont-3"><b>TQFont</b></a> ( const TQFont & font )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQFont"><b>~TQFont</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#family"><b>family</b></a> () const</li> @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ you want the font to have. TQt will use the font with the specified attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is actually used are retrievable from a <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a> object. If the -window system provides an exact match <a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>() returns TRUE. +window system provides an exact match <a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>() returns true. Use <a href="tqfontmetrics.html">TQFontMetrics</a> to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a string using <a href="tqfontmetrics.html#width">TQFontMetrics::width</a>(). <p> Use <a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">TQApplication::setFont</a>() to set the application's default font. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ ultralight, whilst 99 will be an extremely black. Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqapplication.html#setFont">TQApplication::setFont</a>() and <a href="tqapplication.html#font">TQApplication::font</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFont-2"></a>TQFont::TQFont ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQFont-2"></a>TQFont::TQFont ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = false ) </h3> Constructs a font object with the specified <em>family</em>, <em>pointSize</em>, <em>weight</em> and <em>italic</em> settings. <p> If <em>pointSize</em> is <= 0 it is set to 1. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Destroys the font object and frees all allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bold"></a>TQFont::bold () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if <a href="#weight">weight</a>() is a value greater than <a href="#Weight-enum">TQFont::Normal</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <a href="#weight">weight</a>() is a value greater than <a href="#Weight-enum">TQFont::Normal</a>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#weight">weight</a>(), <a href="#setBold">setBold</a>(), and <a href="tqfontinfo.html#bold">TQFontInfo::bold</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="tutorial2-09.html#x2634">chart/optionsform.cpp</a>. @@ -496,12 +496,12 @@ hint. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dirty"></a>TQFont::dirty () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font attributes have been changed and the font -has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the font attributes have been changed and the font +has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exactMatch"></a>TQFont::exactMatch () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if a window system font exactly matching the settings +Returns true if a window system font exactly matching the settings of this font is available. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ constructor or the last setFont() call. <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial2-09.html#x2635">chart/optionsform.cpp</a> and <a href="simple-font-demo-example.html#x2838">fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fixedPitch"></a>TQFont::fixedPitch () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFixedPitch">setFixedPitch</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html#fixedPitch">TQFontInfo::fixedPitch</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fromString"></a>TQFont::fromString ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & descrip ) @@ -545,14 +545,14 @@ substitution list for <em>familyName</em>. <p>Example: <a href="simple-font-demo-example.html#x2840">fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCopyOf"></a>TQFont::isCopyOf ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & f ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this font and <em>f</em> are copies of each other, i.e. +Returns true if this font and <em>f</em> are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has been modified since. This is much stricter than equality. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq">operator=</a>() and <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="italic"></a>TQFont::italic () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if italic has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if italic has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItalic">setItalic</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="tutorial2-09.html#x2636">chart/optionsform.cpp</a>. @@ -589,8 +589,8 @@ it does, preferably with a list of the fonts you have installed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQFont::operator!= ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & f ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this font is different from <em>f</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this font is different from <em>f</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Two TQFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes are different. If <a href="#rawMode">rawMode</a>() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared. @@ -602,8 +602,8 @@ Assigns <em>font</em> to this font and returns a reference to it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQFont::operator== ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & f ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this font is equal to <em>f</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if this font is equal to <em>f</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> Two TQFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are equal. If <a href="#rawMode">rawMode</a>() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared. @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ fields are compared. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="overline"></a>TQFont::overline () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if overline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if overline has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOverline">setOverline</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="pixelSize"></a>TQFont::pixelSize () const @@ -636,8 +636,8 @@ specified in pixels. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rawMode"></a>TQFont::rawMode () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRawMode">setRawMode</a>() and <a href="#rawName">rawName</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="rawName"></a>TQFont::rawName () const @@ -687,20 +687,20 @@ available a family will be set using the <a href="#fontmatching">font <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFixedPitch"></a>TQFont::setFixedPitch ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed +If <em>enable</em> is true, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed pitch off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#fixedPitch">fixedPitch</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItalic"></a>TQFont::setItalic ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set +If <em>enable</em> is true, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#italic">italic</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. <p>Examples: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x828">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-font-demo-example.html#x2842">fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp</a>, and <a href="themes-example.html#x281">themes/metal.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOverline"></a>TQFont::setOverline ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off. +If <em>enable</em> is true, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#overline">overline</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPixelSize"></a>TQFont::setPixelSize ( int pixelSize ) @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ all platforms. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRawMode"></a>TQFont::setRawMode ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode +If <em>enable</em> is true, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode off. This function only has an effect under X11. <p> If raw mode is enabled, TQt will search for an X font with a complete font name matching the family name, ignoring all other @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ values for the SETWIDTH_NAME field of the XLFD. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setStrikeOut"></a>TQFont::setStrikeOut ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout +If <em>enable</em> is true, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#strikeOut">strikeOut</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Sets the style strategy for the font to <em>s</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setUnderline"></a>TQFont::setUnderline ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline +If <em>enable</em> is true, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline off. <p> <p>See also <a href="#underline">underline</a>() and <a href="tqfontinfo.html">TQFontInfo</a>. @@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ Returns the <a href="layout.html#stretch-factor">stretch factor</a> for the font <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="strikeOut"></a>TQFont::strikeOut () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setStrikeOut">setStrikeOut</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfont.html#StyleHint-enum">StyleHint</a> <a name="styleHint"></a>TQFont::styleHint () const @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ in <a href="tqsettings.html">TQSettings</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="underline"></a>TQFont::underline () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if underline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if underline has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="weight"></a>TQFont::weight () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqfontdatabase.html b/doc/html/tqfontdatabase.html index 8f1579ed4..bd3824b73 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfontdatabase.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfontdatabase.html @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Creates a font database object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bold"></a>TQFontDatabase::bold ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is bold; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is bold; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#italic">italic</a>() and <a href="#weight">weight</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bold-2"></a>TQFontDatabase::bold ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) const @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isBitmapScalable"></a>TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style = TQString::null ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns FALSE. Scaling +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns false. Scaling a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ sizes returned by <a href="#smoothSizes">smoothSizes</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFixedPitch"></a>TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style = TQString::null ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is fixed pitch; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is fixed pitch; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFixedPitch-2"></a>TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) const </h3> @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isScalable"></a>TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style = TQString::null ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is scalable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isBitmapScalable">isBitmapScalable</a>() and <a href="#isSmoothlyScalable">isSmoothlyScalable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isScalable-2"></a>TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) const @@ -219,8 +219,8 @@ Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSmoothlyScalable"></a>TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style = TQString::null ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. If this -function returns TRUE, it's safe to scale this font to any size, +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns false. If this +function returns true, it's safe to scale this font to any size, and the result will always look attractive. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isScalable">isScalable</a>() and <a href="#isBitmapScalable">isBitmapScalable</a>(). @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ and the result will always look attractive. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="italic"></a>TQFontDatabase::italic ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is italic; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the font that has family <em>family</em> and style <em>style</em> is italic; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#weight">weight</a>() and <a href="#bold">bold</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="italic-2"></a>TQFontDatabase::italic ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & family, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & style, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ) const diff --git a/doc/html/tqfontdialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqfontdialog-h.html index 681598877..a429f02cb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfontdialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfontdialog-h.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ private: static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont *def, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); - TQFontDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQFontDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQFontDialog(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqfontdialog.html b/doc/html/tqfontdialog.html index 5f8d7a7f3..b538e3bc7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfontdialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfontdialog.html @@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font. clicks Cancel, the <em>initial</em> font is returned. <p> The dialog is called <em>name</em>, with the parent <em>parent</em>. <em>initial</em> is the initially selected font. -If the <em>ok</em> parameter is not-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to TRUE if the -user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. +If the <em>ok</em> parameter is not-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to true if the +user clicked OK, and set to false if the user clicked Cancel. <p> This static function is less flexible than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use. <p> Examples: @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned. <p> The dialog is called <em>name</em>, with parent <em>parent</em>. -If the <em>ok</em> parameter is not-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to TRUE if the -user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. +If the <em>ok</em> parameter is not-null, <em>*</em><em>ok</em> is set to true if the +user clicked OK, and false if the user clicked Cancel. <p> This static function is less functional than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use. <p> Example: diff --git a/doc/html/tqfontinfo.html b/doc/html/tqfontinfo.html index f7eb86070..a11ae5ceb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfontinfo.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfontinfo.html @@ -115,14 +115,14 @@ Destroys the font info object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bold"></a>TQFontInfo::bold () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if <a href="#weight">weight</a>() would return a value greater than <a href="tqfont.html#Weight-enum">TQFont::Normal</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <a href="#weight">weight</a>() would return a value greater than <a href="tqfont.html#Weight-enum">TQFont::Normal</a>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#weight">weight</a>() and <a href="tqfont.html#bold">TQFont::bold</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="qfd-example.html#x1982">qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exactMatch"></a>TQFontInfo::exactMatch () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the matched window system font is exactly the same -as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the matched window system font is exactly the same +as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfont.html#exactMatch">TQFont::exactMatch</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="family"></a>TQFontInfo::family () const @@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ Returns the point size of the matched window system font. <p>Examples: <a href="simple-font-demo-example.html#x2849">fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp</a> and <a href="qfd-example.html#x1985">qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rawMode"></a>TQFontInfo::rawMode () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns +false. <p> If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in TQFontInfo will return the same values set in the <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a>, regardless of the font actually used. diff --git a/doc/html/tqfontmetrics.html b/doc/html/tqfontmetrics.html index 2b43237fe..416c96385 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqfontmetrics.html +++ b/doc/html/tqfontmetrics.html @@ -262,8 +262,8 @@ base line). <p>Examples: <a href="hello-example.html#x1630">hello/hello.cpp</a> and <a href="qfd-example.html#x1986">qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inFont"></a>TQFontMetrics::inFont ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> ch ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if character <em>ch</em> is a valid character in the font; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if character <em>ch</em> is a valid character in the font; +otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="qfd-example.html#x1987">qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="leading"></a>TQFontMetrics::leading () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqframe-h.html b/doc/html/tqframe-h.html index ece1e9f56..739c605ac 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqframe-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqframe-h.html @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ public: TQRect contentsRect() const; #ifndef Q_QDOC - bool lineShapesOk() const { return TRUE; } + bool lineShapesOk() const { return true; } #endif TQSize sizeHint() const; @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ protected: void styleChange( TQStyle& ); private: - void updateFrameWidth(bool=FALSE); + void updateFrameWidth(bool=false); TQRect frect; int fstyle; short lwidth; diff --git a/doc/html/tqftp.html b/doc/html/tqftp.html index ab3899890..96b564388 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqftp.html +++ b/doc/html/tqftp.html @@ -163,14 +163,14 @@ FTP server, you would write this: <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">HostLookup</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connecting</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connected</a> ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 1, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 1, false ) <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#start">start</a>( 2 ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">LoggedIn</a> ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 2, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 2, false ) <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#start">start</a>( 3 ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 3, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 3, false ) <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#start">start</a>( 4 ) <a href="#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>( 0, 3798 ) @@ -178,14 +178,14 @@ FTP server, you would write this: <a href="#readyRead">readyRead</a>() <a href="#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>( 3798, 3798 ) <a href="#readyRead">readyRead</a>() - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 4, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 4, false ) <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#start">start</a>( 5 ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Closing</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Unconnected</a> ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 5, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 5, false ) - <a href="#done">done</a>( FALSE ) + <a href="#done">done</a>( false ) </pre> <p> The <a href="#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>() signal in the above example is useful @@ -202,12 +202,12 @@ like this: <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">HostLookup</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connecting</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connected</a> ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 1, FALSE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 1, false ) <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#start">start</a>( 2 ) - <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 2, TRUE ) + <a href="tqnetworkprotocol.html#finished">finished</a>( 2, true ) - <a href="#done">done</a>( TRUE ) + <a href="#done">done</a>( true ) </pre> <p> You can then get details about the error with the <a href="#error">error</a>() and @@ -296,11 +296,11 @@ Aborts the current command and deletes all scheduled commands. <a href="#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>() signal has not been emitted), this function sends an <tt>ABORT</tt> command to the server. When the server replies that the command is aborted, the commandFinished() signal with the -<tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>TRUE</tt> is emitted for the command. Due +<tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>true</tt> is emitted for the command. Due to timing issues, it is possible that the command had already finished before the abort request reached the server, in which case, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the <tt>error</tt> -argument set to <tt>FALSE</tt>. +argument set to <tt>false</tt>. <p> For all other commands that are affected by the <a href="#abort">abort</a>(), no signals are emitted. <p> If you don't start further FTP commands directly after the @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ signal is emitted. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Some FTP servers, for example the BSD FTP daemon (version 0.3), wrongly return a positive reply even when an abort has occurred. For these servers the commandFinished() signal has its -error flag set to <tt>FALSE</tt>, even though the command did not +error flag set to <tt>false</tt>, even though the command did not complete successfully. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clearPendingCommands">clearPendingCommands</a>(). @@ -359,8 +359,8 @@ emitted. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by -<em>id</em> has finished. <em>error</em> is TRUE if an error occurred during -the processing; otherwise <em>error</em> is FALSE. +<em>id</em> has finished. <em>error</em> is true if an error occurred during +the processing; otherwise <em>error</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#commandStarted">commandStarted</a>(), <a href="#done">done</a>(), <a href="#error">error</a>(), and <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x747">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>. @@ -431,8 +431,8 @@ bytes, since for large files these values might need to be <p> This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished; (it is emitted after the last command's <a href="#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>() signal). -<em>error</em> is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; -otherwise <em>error</em> is FALSE. +<em>error</em> is true if an error occurred during the processing; +otherwise <em>error</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>(), <a href="#error">error</a>(), and <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x753">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ otherwise <em>error</em> is FALSE. </h3> Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out what when wrong when receiving a <a href="#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>() or a <a href="#done">done</a>() -signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>TRUE</tt>. +signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>true</tt>. <p> If you start a new command, the error status is reset to <a href="#Error-enum">NoError</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="errorString"></a>TQFtp::errorString () const @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>TRUE</tt>. Returns a human-readable description of the last error that occurred. This is useful for presenting a error message to the user when receiving a <a href="#commandFinished">commandFinished</a>() or a <a href="#done">done</a>() signal with -the <tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>TRUE</tt>. +the <tt>error</tt> argument set to <tt>true</tt>. <p> The error string is often (but not always) the reply from the server, so it is not always possible to translate the string. If the message comes from TQt, the string has already passed through @@ -487,8 +487,8 @@ emitted. <p>Example: <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x755">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPendingCommands"></a>TQFtp::hasPendingCommands () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet -been executed; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet +been executed; otherwise returns false. <p> The command that is being executed is <em>not</em> considered as a scheduled command. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clearPendingCommands">clearPendingCommands</a>(), <a href="#currentId">currentId</a>(), and <a href="#currentCommand">currentCommand</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqgl-h.html b/doc/html/tqgl-h.html index 30f59e345..8b003314b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqgl-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqgl-h.html @@ -339,12 +339,12 @@ public: #ifndef Q_QDOC virtual void setContext( TQGLContext* context, const TQGLContext* shareContext = 0, - bool deleteOldContext = TRUE ); + bool deleteOldContext = true ); #endif virtual TQPixmap renderPixmap( int w = 0, int h = 0, - bool useContext = FALSE ); - virtual TQImage grabFrameBuffer( bool withAlpha = FALSE ); + bool useContext = false ); + virtual TQImage grabFrameBuffer( bool withAlpha = false ); virtual void makeOverlayCurrent(); const TQGLContext* overlayContext() const; @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ public: void setMouseTracking( bool enable ); virtual void reparent( TQWidget* parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, - bool showIt = FALSE ); + bool showIt = false ); const TQGLColormap & colormap() const; void setColormap( const TQGLColormap & map ); @@ -419,8 +419,8 @@ private: void macInternalRecreateContext( TQGLContext *ctx, const TQGLContext* = NULL, - bool update = TRUE ); - bool macInternalDoubleBuffer( bool fix = TRUE ); + bool update = true ); + bool macInternalDoubleBuffer( bool fix = true ); virtual void setRegionDirty( bool ); virtual void macWidgetChangedWindow(); #endif diff --git a/doc/html/tqglcolormap.html b/doc/html/tqglcolormap.html index 86ebe77de..69cec9786 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqglcolormap.html +++ b/doc/html/tqglcolormap.html @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Returns the index of the color that is the closest match to color <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQGLColormap::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. A +Returns true if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns false. A colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqglcolormap.html">TQGLColormap</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQGLColormap::operator= ( const <a href="tqglcolormap.html">TQGLColormap</a> & map ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqglcontext.html b/doc/html/tqglcontext.html index 11bf59087..e12430327 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqglcontext.html +++ b/doc/html/tqglcontext.html @@ -161,9 +161,9 @@ application has spcific requirements on visual selection. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="create"></a>TQGLContext::create ( const <a href="tqglcontext.html">TQGLContext</a> * shareContext = 0 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Creates the GL context. Returns TRUE if it was successful in +Creates the GL context. Returns true if it was successful in creating a valid GL rendering context on the paint device -specified in the constructor; otherwise returns FALSE (i.e. the +specified in the constructor; otherwise returns false (i.e. the context is invalid). <p> After successful creation, <a href="#format">format</a>() returns the set of features of the created GL rendering context. @@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ current. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="deviceIsPixmap"></a>TQGLContext::deviceIsPixmap () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="doneCurrent"></a>TQGLContext::doneCurrent ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -226,25 +226,25 @@ in the font <em>font</em>. The first list will start at index <em>listBase</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="initialized"></a>TQGLContext::initialized () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this context has been initialized, i.e. if +<p> Returns true if this context has been initialized, i.e. if <a href="tqglwidget.html#initializeGL">TQGLWidget::initializeGL</a>() has been performed on it; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setInitialized">setInitialized</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSharing"></a>TQGLContext::isSharing () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another context was +<p> Returns true if display list sharing with another context was requested in the <a href="#create">create</a>() call and the GL system was able to -fulfill this request; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that display +fulfill this request; otherwise returns false. Note that display list sharing might not be supported between contexts with different formats. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQGLContext::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if a GL rendering context has been successfully -created; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if a GL rendering context has been successfully +created; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="makeCurrent"></a>TQGLContext::makeCurrent ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ new format. TQGLContext *cx; // ... <a href="tqglformat.html">TQGLFormat</a> f; - f.<a href="tqglformat.html#setStereo">setStereo</a>( TRUE ); + f.<a href="tqglformat.html#setStereo">setStereo</a>( true ); cx-><a href="#setFormat">setFormat</a>( f ); if ( !cx-><a href="#create">create</a>() ) exit(); // no OpenGL support, or cannot render on the specified paintdevice @@ -304,16 +304,16 @@ new format. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setInitialized"></a>TQGLContext::setInitialized ( bool on )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> If <em>on</em> is TRUE the context has been initialized, i.e. +<p> If <em>on</em> is true the context has been initialized, i.e. <a href="#setInitialized">TQGLContext::setInitialized</a>() has been called on it. If <em>on</em> is -FALSE the context has not been initialized. +false the context has not been initialized. <p> <p>See also <a href="#initialized">initialized</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWindowCreated"></a>TQGLContext::setWindowCreated ( bool on )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> If <em>on</em> is TRUE the context has had a window created for it. If -<em>on</em> is FALSE no window has been created for the context. +<p> If <em>on</em> is true the context has had a window created for it. If +<em>on</em> is false no window has been created for the context. <p> <p>See also <a href="#windowCreated">windowCreated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="swapBuffers"></a>TQGLContext::swapBuffers () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -326,8 +326,8 @@ the context is in double buffer mode. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="windowCreated"></a>TQGLContext::windowCreated () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if a window has been created for this context; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if a window has been created for this context; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWindowCreated">setWindowCreated</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqglformat.html b/doc/html/tqglformat.html index f2c6a9c61..3e2cc1141 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqglformat.html +++ b/doc/html/tqglformat.html @@ -106,8 +106,8 @@ a rendering context. One is to create a TQGLFormat and make it the default for the entire application: <pre> TQGLFormat f; - f.<a href="#setAlpha">setAlpha</a>( TRUE ); - f.<a href="#setStereo">setStereo</a>( TRUE ); + f.<a href="#setAlpha">setAlpha</a>( true ); + f.<a href="#setStereo">setStereo</a>( true ); TQGLFormat::<a href="#setDefaultFormat">setDefaultFormat</a>( f ); </pre> @@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ default for the entire application: your TQGLWidget subclass: <pre> TQGLFormat f; - f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( FALSE ); // single buffer - f.<a href="#setDirectRendering">setDirectRendering</a>( FALSE ); // software rendering + f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( false ); // single buffer + f.<a href="#setDirectRendering">setDirectRendering</a>( false ); // software rendering MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... ); </pre> @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ your TQGLWidget subclass: requested features the system was able to provide: <pre> TQGLFormat f; - f.<a href="#setOverlay">setOverlay</a>( TRUE ); - f.<a href="#setStereo">setStereo</a>( TRUE ); + f.<a href="#setOverlay">setOverlay</a>( true ); + f.<a href="#setStereo">setStereo</a>( true ); MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... ); if ( !w->format().stereo() ) { // ok, goggles off @@ -189,15 +189,15 @@ supports overlay/underlay rendering planes. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="accum"></a>TQGLFormat::accum () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise -returns FALSE. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. +<p> Returns true if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise +returns false. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAccum">setAccum</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="alpha"></a>TQGLFormat::alpha () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE. The alpha channel is disabled by default. +<p> Returns true if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; +otherwise returns false. The alpha channel is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAlpha">setAlpha</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqglformat.html">TQGLFormat</a> <a name="defaultFormat"></a>TQGLFormat::defaultFormat ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -231,45 +231,45 @@ Returns the default TQGLFormat for overlay contexts. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="depth"></a>TQGLFormat::depth () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. The depth buffer is enabled by default. +<p> Returns true if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns +false. The depth buffer is enabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDepth">setDepth</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="directRendering"></a>TQGLFormat::directRendering () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns +false. <p> Direct rendering is enabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDirectRendering">setDirectRendering</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="doubleBuffer"></a>TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. Double buffering is enabled by default. +<p> Returns true if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns +false. Double buffering is enabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasOpenGL"></a>TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the window system has any OpenGL support; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the window system has any OpenGL support; +otherwise returns false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function must not be called until the <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> object has been created. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasOpenGLOverlays"></a>TQGLFormat::hasOpenGLOverlays ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; +otherwise returns false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function must not be called until the <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> object has been created. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasOverlay"></a>TQGLFormat::hasOverlay () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> Overlay is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOverlay">setOverlay</a>(). @@ -283,13 +283,13 @@ formats is 1, which is the first overlay plane. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rgba"></a>TQGLFormat::rgba () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if RGBA color mode is set. Returns FALSE if color +<p> Returns true if RGBA color mode is set. Returns false if color index mode is set. The default color mode is RGBA. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRgba">setRgba</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAccum"></a>TQGLFormat::setAccum ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise +If <em>enable</em> is true enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise disables the accumulation buffer. <p> The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. <p> The accumulation buffer is used to create blur effects and @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ multiple exposures. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAlpha"></a>TQGLFormat::setAlpha ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables +If <em>enable</em> is true enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables the alpha channel. <p> The alpha buffer is disabled by default. <p> The alpha channel is typically used for implementing transparency @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ buffering, your main() might contain code like this: <pre> <a href="tqapplication.html">TQApplication</a> a(argc, argv); TQGLFormat f; - f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( FALSE ); + f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( false ); TQGLFormat::<a href="#setDefaultFormat">setDefaultFormat</a>( f ); </pre> @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ format is used whenever a <a href="tqglwidget.html">TQGLWidget</a> is created wi available), use code like this: <p> <pre> TQGLFormat f = TQGLFormat::<a href="#defaultOverlayFormat">defaultOverlayFormat</a>(); - f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( TRUE ); + f.<a href="#setDoubleBuffer">setDoubleBuffer</a>( true ); TQGLFormat::<a href="#setDefaultOverlayFormat">setDefaultOverlayFormat</a>( f ); </pre> @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ specification: <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDepth"></a>TQGLFormat::setDepth ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables +If <em>enable</em> is true enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables the depth buffer. <p> The depth buffer is enabled by default. <p> The purpose of a depth buffer (or Z-buffering) is to remove hidden @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ decide whether to draw a pixel or not. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDirectRendering"></a>TQGLFormat::setDirectRendering ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables direct rendering; otherwise disables +If <em>enable</em> is true enables direct rendering; otherwise disables direct rendering. <p> Direct rendering is enabled by default. <p> Enabling this option will make OpenGL bypass the underlying window @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ supported by the system. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDoubleBuffer"></a>TQGLFormat::setDoubleBuffer ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets double buffering; otherwise sets single +If <em>enable</em> is true sets double buffering; otherwise sets single buffering. <p> Double buffering is enabled by default. <p> Double buffering is a technique where graphics are rendered on an @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Sets the format option to <em>opt</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOverlay"></a>TQGLFormat::setOverlay ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables +If <em>enable</em> is true enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables the overlay plane. <p> Enabling the overlay plane will cause <a href="tqglwidget.html">TQGLWidget</a> to create an additional context in an overlay plane. See the TQGLWidget @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ created. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRgba"></a>TQGLFormat::setRgba ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets RGBA mode. If <em>enable</em> is FALSE sets +If <em>enable</em> is true sets RGBA mode. If <em>enable</em> is false sets color index mode. <p> The default color mode is RGBA. <p> RGBA is the preferred mode for most OpenGL applications. In RGBA @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ table. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setStencil"></a>TQGLFormat::setStencil ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables the stencil buffer; otherwise +If <em>enable</em> is true enables the stencil buffer; otherwise disables the stencil buffer. <p> The stencil buffer is disabled by default. <p> The stencil buffer masks certain parts of the drawing area so that @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ masked parts are not drawn on. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setStereo"></a>TQGLFormat::setStereo ( bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables +If <em>enable</em> is true enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables stereo buffering. <p> Stereo buffering is disabled by default. <p> Stereo buffering provides extra color buffers to generate left-eye @@ -444,20 +444,20 @@ and right-eye images. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="stencil"></a>TQGLFormat::stencil () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. The stencil buffer is disabled by default. +<p> Returns true if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns +false. The stencil buffer is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setStencil">setStencil</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="stereo"></a>TQGLFormat::stereo () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. Stereo buffering is disabled by default. +<p> Returns true if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns +false. Stereo buffering is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setStereo">setStereo</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="testOption"></a>TQGLFormat::testOption ( <a href="tqgl.html#FormatOption-enum">FormatOption</a> opt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if format option <em>opt</em> is set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if format option <em>opt</em> is set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOption">setOption</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqglobal-h.html b/doc/html/tqglobal-h.html index f668b0bb7..d8eba6159 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqglobal-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqglobal-h.html @@ -586,14 +586,14 @@ typedef const char *pcchar; // Constant bool values // -#ifndef TRUE -const bool FALSE = 0; -const bool TRUE = !0; +#ifndef true +const bool false = 0; +const bool true = !0; #endif #if defined(__WATCOMC__) # if defined(Q_OS_QNX4) -const bool false = FALSE; -const bool true = TRUE; +const bool false = false; +const bool true = true; # endif #endif @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT TQtMsgHandler qInstallMsgHandler( TQtMsgHandler ); typedef TQtMsgHandler msg_handler; #endif // TQT_NO_COMPAT -TQ_EXPORT void tqSuppressObsoleteWarnings( bool = TRUE ); +TQ_EXPORT void tqSuppressObsoleteWarnings( bool = true ); TQ_EXPORT void tqObsolete( const char *obj, const char *oldfunc, const char *newfunc ); @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT const char *tqInstallPathSysconf(); # define TQ_DUMMY_COMPARISON_OPERATOR(C) \ bool operator==( const C& ) const { \ tqWarning( #C"::operator==( const "#C"& ) got called." ); \ - return FALSE; \ + return false; \ } #else # define TQ_DUMMY_COMPARISON_OPERATOR(C) diff --git a/doc/html/tqglwidget.html b/doc/html/tqglwidget.html index 3bf91aa42..bb9c797f3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqglwidget.html +++ b/doc/html/tqglwidget.html @@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapBuffers"><b>swapBuffers</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQGLFormat <a href="#format"><b>format</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>const TQGLContext * <a href="#context"><b>context</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQPixmap <a href="#renderPixmap"><b>renderPixmap</b></a> ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQImage <a href="#grabFrameBuffer"><b>grabFrameBuffer</b></a> ( bool withAlpha = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQPixmap <a href="#renderPixmap"><b>renderPixmap</b></a> ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQImage <a href="#grabFrameBuffer"><b>grabFrameBuffer</b></a> ( bool withAlpha = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#makeOverlayCurrent"><b>makeOverlayCurrent</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>const TQGLContext * <a href="#overlayContext"><b>overlayContext</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>const TQGLColormap & <a href="#colormap"><b>colormap</b></a> () const</li> @@ -260,8 +260,8 @@ Destroys the widget. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoBufferSwap"></a>TQGLWidget::autoBufferSwap () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoBufferSwap">setAutoBufferSwap</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqglcolormap.html">TQGLColormap</a> & <a name="colormap"></a>TQGLWidget::colormap () const @@ -322,8 +322,8 @@ it may be useful in multithreaded environments. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="doubleBuffer"></a>TQGLWidget::doubleBuffer () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the contained GL rendering context has double -buffering; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the contained GL rendering context has double +buffering; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqglformat.html#doubleBuffer">TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqglformat.html">TQGLFormat</a> <a name="format"></a>TQGLWidget::format () const @@ -342,9 +342,9 @@ Executes the virtual function <a href="#paintGL">paintGL</a>(). Initializes OpenGL for this widget's context. Calls the virtual function <a href="#initializeGL">initializeGL</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> <a name="grabFrameBuffer"></a>TQGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer ( bool withAlpha = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> <a name="grabFrameBuffer"></a>TQGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer ( bool withAlpha = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns an image of the frame buffer. If <em>withAlpha</em> is TRUE the +Returns an image of the frame buffer. If <em>withAlpha</em> is true the alpha channel is included. <p> Depending on your hardware, you can explicitly select which color buffer to grab with a glReadBuffer() call before calling this @@ -375,9 +375,9 @@ already been done when this function is called. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSharing"></a>TQGLWidget::isSharing () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was +<p> Returns true if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was requested in the constructor, and the GL system was able to -provide it; otherwise returns FALSE. The GL system may fail to +provide it; otherwise returns false. The GL system may fail to provide display list sharing if the two TQGLWidgets use different formats. <p> <p>See also <a href="#format">format</a>(). @@ -385,8 +385,8 @@ formats. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQGLWidget::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; -otherwise returns FALSE. A widget will be invalid if the system +<p> Returns true if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; +otherwise returns false. A widget will be invalid if the system has no <a href="tqglformat.html#hasOpenGL">OpenGL support</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="makeCurrent"></a>TQGLWidget::makeCurrent ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Calls glColor3 (in RGBA mode) or glIndex (in color-index mode) with the color <em>c</em>. Applies to the current GL context. <p> <p>See also <a href="#qglClearColor">qglClearColor</a>(), <a href="tqglcontext.html#currentContext">TQGLContext::currentContext</a>(), and <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> <a name="renderPixmap"></a>TQGLWidget::renderPixmap ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> <a name="renderPixmap"></a>TQGLWidget::renderPixmap ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Renders the current scene on a pixmap and returns the pixmap. <p> You can use this method on both visible and invisible TQGLWidgets. @@ -462,9 +462,9 @@ original GL context is restored. <p> The size of the pixmap will be <em>w</em> pixels wide and <em>h</em> pixels high unless one of these parameters is 0 (the default), in which case the pixmap will have the same size as the widget. -<p> If <em>useContext</em> is TRUE, this method will try to be more +<p> If <em>useContext</em> is true, this method will try to be more efficient by using the existing GL context to render the pixmap. -The default is FALSE. Only use TRUE if you understand the risks. +The default is false. Only use true if you understand the risks. <p> Overlays are not rendered onto the pixmap. <p> If the GL rendering context and the desktop have different bit depths, the result will most likely look surprising. @@ -531,9 +531,9 @@ already been done when this function is called. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoBufferSwap"></a>TQGLWidget::setAutoBufferSwap ( bool on )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> If <em>on</em> is TRUE automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; +<p> If <em>on</em> is true automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; otherwise it is switched off. -<p> If <em>on</em> is TRUE and the widget is using a double-buffered format, +<p> If <em>on</em> is true and the widget is using a double-buffered format, the background and foreground GL buffers will automatically be swapped after each <a href="#paintGL">paintGL</a>() call. <p> The buffer auto-swapping is on by default. diff --git a/doc/html/tqgridlayout.html b/doc/html/tqgridlayout.html index 32ee6689c..ee02bb3f4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqgridlayout.html +++ b/doc/html/tqgridlayout.html @@ -308,14 +308,14 @@ it wants to grow in both dimensions. </h3> Searches for widget <em>w</em> in this layout (not including child layouts). If <em>w</em> is found, it sets <tt><em>row</em></tt> and <tt><em>col</em></tt> to -the row and column and returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE. +the row and column and returns true; otherwise returns false. <p> Note: if a widget spans multiple rows/columns, the top-left cell is returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHeightForWidth"></a>TQGridLayout::hasHeightForWidth () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its -width; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its +width; otherwise returns false. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#hasHeightForWidth">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="heightForWidth"></a>TQGridLayout::heightForWidth ( int w ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqgridview-h.html b/doc/html/tqgridview-h.html index 4120b5bef..b3eddb8db 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqgridview-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqgridview-h.html @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ public: int rowAt( int y ) const; int columnAt( int x ) const; - void repaintCell( int row, int column, bool erase=TRUE ); + void repaintCell( int row, int column, bool erase=true ); void updateCell( int row, int column ); void ensureCellVisible( int row, int column ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqgridview.html b/doc/html/tqgridview.html index f5a88dbc9..1591ca476 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqgridview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqgridview.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ fixed-size grids. <li class=fn>TQSize <a href="#gridSize"><b>gridSize</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#rowAt"><b>rowAt</b></a> ( int y ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#columnAt"><b>columnAt</b></a> ( int x ) const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintCell"><b>repaintCell</b></a> ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintCell"><b>repaintCell</b></a> ( int row, int column, bool erase = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#updateCell"><b>updateCell</b></a> ( int row, int column )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#ensureCellVisible"><b>ensureCellVisible</b></a> ( int row, int column )</li> </ul> @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ efficiency. If you want clipping, use <p> <pre> p->setClipRect( <a href="#cellRect">cellRect</a>(), TQPainter::CoordPainter ); //... your drawing code - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); </pre> @@ -193,10 +193,10 @@ color using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> <a href="#paintEmptyArea">paintEmptyArea</a>() is invoked by <a href="tqscrollview.html#drawContents">drawContents</a>() to erase or fill unused areas. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintCell"></a>TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintCell"></a>TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = true ) </h3> Repaints cell (<em>row</em>, <em>column</em>). -<p> If <em>erase</em> is TRUE, TQt erases the area of the cell before the +<p> If <em>erase</em> is true, TQt erases the area of the cell before the <a href="#paintCell">paintCell</a>() call; otherwise no erasing takes place. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">TQWidget::repaint</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqgroupbox.html b/doc/html/tqgroupbox.html index 7fb284cdb..bc47dddab 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqgroupbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqgroupbox.html @@ -180,13 +180,13 @@ and style. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setInsideSpacing">setInsideSpacing</a>() and <a href="#orientation-prop">orientation</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCheckable"></a>TQGroupBox::isCheckable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqgroupbox.html#checkable-prop">"checkable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isChecked"></a>TQGroupBox::isChecked () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqgroupbox.html#checked-prop">"checked"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFlat"></a>TQGroupBox::isFlat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqgroupbox.html#flat-prop">"flat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQGroupBox::orientation () const </h3><p>Returns the group box's orientation. @@ -241,8 +241,8 @@ See the <a href="tqgroupbox.html#title-prop">"title"</a> property for details. </h3> <p> If the group box has a check box (see <a href="#isCheckable">isCheckable</a>()) this signal -is emitted when the check box is toggled. <em>on</em> is TRUE if the check -box is checked; otherwise it is FALSE. +is emitted when the check box is toggled. <em>on</em> is true if the check +box is checked; otherwise it is false. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>Alignment <a name="alignment-prop"></a>alignment</h3> @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ usually to the left. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAlignment">setAlignment</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#alignment">alignment</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkable-prop"></a>checkable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title. -<p>If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the +<p>If this property is true, the group box has a checkbox. If the checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's children are enabled. <p> <a href="#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>() controls whether or not the group box has a diff --git a/doc/html/tqguardedptr.html b/doc/html/tqguardedptr.html index 992cd31ae..365435620 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqguardedptr.html +++ b/doc/html/tqguardedptr.html @@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ pointed to. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQGuardedPtr::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns <tt>TRUE</tt> if the referenced object has been destroyed or if -there is no referenced object; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns <tt>true</tt> if the referenced object has been destroyed or if +there is no referenced object; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-T-*"></a>TQGuardedPtr::operator T * () const </h3> @@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ is required. </h3> <p> Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of -<a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). Returns TRUE if <em>p</em> and this guarded pointer are -not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE. +<a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). Returns true if <em>p</em> and this guarded pointer are +not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>T & <a name="operator*"></a>TQGuardedPtr::operator* () const </h3> @@ -175,9 +175,9 @@ object as <em>p</em> points to. </h3> <p> Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics. -Returns TRUE if both <em>p</em> and this guarded pointer are 0, or if +Returns true if both <em>p</em> and this guarded pointer are 0, or if both <em>p</em> and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqhbox.html b/doc/html/tqhbox.html index af2201fdd..08e45c097 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhbox.html @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ constructor. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQHBox-2"></a>TQHBox::TQHBox ( bool horizontal, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Constructs a horizontal hbox if <em>horizontal</em> is TRUE, otherwise +Constructs a horizontal hbox if <em>horizontal</em> is true, otherwise constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox). <p> This constructor is provided for the <a href="tqvbox.html">TQVBox</a> class. You should never need to use it directly. @@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ Sets the spacing between the child widgets to <em>space</em>. <p>Examples: <a href="i18n-example.html#x1924">i18n/mywidget.cpp</a>, <a href="listboxcombo-example.html#x1402">listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp</a>, <a href="tqdir-example.html#x1826">tqdir/tqdir.cpp</a>, <a href="tabdialog-example.html#x54">tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp</a>, <a href="wizard-example.html#x2">wizard/wizard.cpp</a>, and <a href="xform-example.html#x1228">xform/xform.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setStretchFactor"></a>TQHBox::setStretchFactor ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, int stretch ) </h3> -Sets the <a href="layout.html#stretch-factor">stretch factor</a> of widget <em>w</em> to <em>stretch</em>. Returns TRUE if -<em>w</em> is found. Otherwise returns FALSE. +Sets the <a href="layout.html#stretch-factor">stretch factor</a> of widget <em>w</em> to <em>stretch</em>. Returns true if +<em>w</em> is found. Otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqboxlayout.html#setStretchFactor">TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor</a>() and <a href="layout.html">Layouts</a>. <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqhboxlayout.html b/doc/html/tqhboxlayout.html index 716a5d4e8..822b5e6f2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhboxlayout.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhboxlayout.html @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The TQHBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally. <p> The simplest use of the class is like this: <pre> <a href="tqboxlayout.html">TQBoxLayout</a> * l = new TQHBoxLayout( widget ); - l-><a href="tqlayout.html#setAutoAdd">setAutoAdd</a>( TRUE ); + l-><a href="tqlayout.html#setAutoAdd">setAutoAdd</a>( true ); new TQSomeWidget( widget ); new TQSomeOtherWidget( widget ); new TQAnotherWidget( widget ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqheader-h.html b/doc/html/tqheader-h.html index 8bb022609..1924078be 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqheader-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqheader-h.html @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ public: void moveSection( int section, int toIndex ); virtual void moveCell( int, int); // obsolete, do not use - void setSortIndicator( int section, bool ascending = TRUE ); // obsolete, do not use + void setSortIndicator( int section, bool ascending = true ); // obsolete, do not use inline void setSortIndicator( int section, SortOrder order ) { setSortIndicator( section, (order == Ascending) ); } int sortIndicatorSection() const; @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ private: int findLine( int ); int handleAt( int p ); bool reverse() const; - void calculatePositions( bool onlyVisible = FALSE, int start = 0 ); - void handleColumnResize(int, int, bool, bool = TRUE ); + void calculatePositions( bool onlyVisible = false, int start = 0 ); + void handleColumnResize(int, int, bool, bool = true ); TQSize sectionSizeHint( int section, const TQFontMetrics& fm ) const; void setSectionSizeAndHeight( int section, int size ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqheader.html b/doc/html/tqheader.html index 59ff7f6e4..d7ea9920a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqheader.html +++ b/doc/html/tqheader.html @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ tables and listviews. <li class=fn>int mapToActual ( int l ) const <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#moveSection"><b>moveSection</b></a> ( int section, int toIndex )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void moveCell ( int fromIdx, int toIdx ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn>void setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>void setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = true ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setSortIndicator"><b>setSortIndicator</b></a> ( int section, SortOrder order )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#sortIndicatorSection"><b>sortIndicatorSection</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>SortOrder <a href="#sortIndicatorOrder"><b>sortIndicatorOrder</b></a> () const</li> @@ -134,13 +134,13 @@ The label and iconset are set in addLabel() and can be changed later with <a href="#setLabel">setLabel</a>(). Use <a href="#count">count</a>() to retrieve the number of sections in the header. <p> The orientation of the header is set with <a href="#setOrientation">setOrientation</a>(). If -<a href="#setStretchEnabled">setStretchEnabled</a>() is TRUE, the sections will expand to take up +<a href="#setStretchEnabled">setStretchEnabled</a>() is true, the sections will expand to take up the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The user can resize the sections manually if <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>() is -TRUE. Call <a href="#adjustHeaderSize">adjustHeaderSize</a>() to have the sections resize to +true. Call <a href="#adjustHeaderSize">adjustHeaderSize</a>() to have the sections resize to occupy the full width (or height). <p> A section can be moved with <a href="#moveSection">moveSection</a>(). If <a href="#setMovingEnabled">setMovingEnabled</a>() -is TRUE (the default)the user may drag a section from one position +is true (the default)the user may drag a section from one position to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which sections were added (with <a href="#addLabel">addLabel</a>()), may not be the same after the move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ the text. <p> Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as completely as possible. Only sections for which <a href="#isStretchEnabled">isStretchEnabled</a>() -is TRUE will be resized. +is true will be resized. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="cellAt"></a>TQHeader::cellAt ( int pos ) const </h3> @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ the index <em>i</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQHeader::clicked ( int section )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> -<p> If <a href="#isClickEnabled">isClickEnabled</a>() is TRUE, this signal is emitted when the user +<p> If <a href="#isClickEnabled">isClickEnabled</a>() is true, this signal is emitted when the user clicks section <em>section</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#pressed">pressed</a>() and <a href="#released">released</a>(). @@ -269,33 +269,33 @@ index position <em>fromIndex</em>, to index position <em>toIndex</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isClickEnabled"></a>TQHeader::isClickEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if section <em>section</em> is clickable; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if section <em>section</em> is clickable; otherwise returns +false. <p> If <em>section</em> is out of range (negative or larger than <a href="#count">count</a>() - -1): returns TRUE if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns -FALSE. +1): returns true if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setClickEnabled">setClickEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMovingEnabled"></a>TQHeader::isMovingEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqheader.html#moving-prop">"moving"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isResizeEnabled"></a>TQHeader::isResizeEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if section <em>section</em> is resizeable; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if section <em>section</em> is resizeable; otherwise +returns false. <p> If <em>section</em> is -1 then this function applies to all sections, -i.e. returns TRUE if all sections are resizeable; otherwise -returns FALSE. +i.e. returns true if all sections are resizeable; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isStretchEnabled"></a>TQHeader::isStretchEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqheader.html#stretching-prop">"stretching"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isStretchEnabled-2"></a>TQHeader::isStretchEnabled ( int section ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if section <em>section</em> will resize to take up the full -width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. If at +<p> Returns true if section <em>section</em> will resize to take up the full +width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns false. If at least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always take up the full width of the header. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setStretchEnabled">setStretchEnabled</a>(). @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Returns the width (or height) of the <em>section</em> in pixels. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setClickEnabled"></a>TQHeader::setClickEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, any clicks on section <em>section</em> will result +If <em>enable</em> is true, any clicks on section <em>section</em> will result in <a href="#clicked">clicked</a>() signals being emitted; otherwise the section will ignore clicks. <p> If <em>section</em> is -1 (the default) then the <em>enable</em> value is set @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ See the <a href="tqheader.html#offset-prop">"offset"</a> property for details. See the <a href="tqheader.html#orientation-prop">"orientation"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setResizeEnabled"></a>TQHeader::setResizeEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE the user may resize section <em>section</em>; +If <em>enable</em> is true the user may resize section <em>section</em>; otherwise the section may not be manually resized. <p> If <em>section</em> is negative (the default) then the <em>enable</em> value is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new @@ -491,9 +491,9 @@ sections that are added. Example: <pre> // Allow resizing of all current and future sections - header->setResizeEnabled(TRUE); + header->setResizeEnabled(true); // Disable resizing of section 3, (the fourth section added) - header->setResizeEnabled(FALSE, 3); + header->setResizeEnabled(false, 3); </pre> <p> If the user resizes a section, a <a href="#sizeChange">sizeChange</a>() signal is emitted. @@ -509,18 +509,18 @@ don't want any section to show a sort indicator pass a <em>section</em> number of -1. <p> <p>See also <a href="#sortIndicatorSection">sortIndicatorSection</a>() and <a href="#sortIndicatorOrder">sortIndicatorOrder</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSortIndicator-2"></a>TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSortIndicator-2"></a>TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Use the other overload instead. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setStretchEnabled"></a>TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b, int section )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, section <em>section</em> will be resized when the +If <em>b</em> is true, section <em>section</em> will be resized when the header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section <em>section</em> will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when the header is resized. -<p> If <em>section</em> is -1, and if <em>b</em> is TRUE, then all sections will +<p> If <em>section</em> is -1, and if <em>b</em> is true, then all sections will be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ Returns the section showing the sort indicator or -1 if there is no sort indicat <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSortIndicator">setSortIndicator</a>() and <a href="#sortIndicatorOrder">sortIndicatorOrder</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tracking"></a>TQHeader::tracking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the <a href="#sizeChange">sizeChange</a>() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the <a href="#sizeChange">sizeChange</a>() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqheader.html#tracking-prop">"tracking"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>int <a name="count-prop"></a>count</h3> @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ See the <a href="tqheader.html#tracking-prop">"tracking"</a> property for detail <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="moving-prop"></a>moving</h3> <p>This property holds whether the header sections can be moved. -<p>If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections. +<p>If this property is true (the default) the user can move sections. If the user moves a section the <a href="#indexChange">indexChange</a>() signal is emitted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setClickEnabled">setClickEnabled</a>() and <a href="#setResizeEnabled">setResizeEnabled</a>(). @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect. while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized), otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at the end of resizing. -<p> Tracking defaults to FALSE. +<p> Tracking defaults to false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setTracking">setTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#tracking">tracking</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqhideevent.html b/doc/html/tqhideevent.html index 07c84e5a5..9daf008e9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhideevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhideevent.html @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ The TQHideEvent class provides an event which is sent after a widget is hidden. <p> <p> This event is sent just before <a href="tqwidget.html#hide">TQWidget::hide</a>() returns, and also when a top-level window has been hidden (iconified) by the user. -<p> If <a href="tqevent.html#spontaneous">spontaneous</a>() is TRUE the event originated outside the +<p> If <a href="tqevent.html#spontaneous">spontaneous</a>() is true the event originated outside the application, i.e. the user hid the window using the window manager controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified, -<a href="tqwidget.html#isMinimized">TQWidget::isMinimized</a>() returns TRUE. +<a href="tqwidget.html#isMinimized">TQWidget::isMinimized</a>() returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqshowevent.html">TQShowEvent</a> and <a href="events.html">Event Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> diff --git a/doc/html/tqhostaddress.html b/doc/html/tqhostaddress.html index 4b5c51d5f..11b5ce69e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhostaddress.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhostaddress.html @@ -107,13 +107,13 @@ Destroys the host address object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isIPv4Address"></a>TQHostAddress::isIPv4Address () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv4 address; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the host address represents an IPv4 address; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isIPv6Address"></a>TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv6 address; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the host address represents an IPv6 address; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isIp4Addr"></a>TQHostAddress::isIp4Addr () const </h3> @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQHostAddress::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The +Returns true if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid for any particular host or interface. @@ -133,8 +133,8 @@ returns a reference to this object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQHostAddress::operator== ( const <a href="tqhostaddress.html">TQHostAddress</a> & other ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this host address is the same as <em>other</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this host address is the same as <em>other</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAddress"></a>TQHostAddress::setAddress ( TQ_UINT32 ip4Addr ) </h3> @@ -151,16 +151,16 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string -representation <em>address</em> (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns TRUE and +representation <em>address</em> (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns true and sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise -returns FALSE and leaves the address unchanged. +returns false and leaves the address unchanged. <h3 class=fn>TQ_UINT32 <a name="toIPv4Address"></a>TQHostAddress::toIPv4Address () const </h3> Returns the IPv4 address as a number. <p> For example, if the address is 127.0.0.1, the returned value is 2130706433 (i.e. 0x7f000001). -<p> This value is only valid when <a href="#isIp4Addr">isIp4Addr</a>() returns TRUE. +<p> This value is only valid when <a href="#isIp4Addr">isIp4Addr</a>() returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toString">toString</a>(). <h3 class=fn>Q_IPV6ADDR <a name="toIPv6Address"></a>TQHostAddress::toIPv6Address () const @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ consists of 16 unsigned characters. } </pre> -<p> This value is only valid when <a href="#isIPv6Address">isIPv6Address</a>() returns TRUE. +<p> This value is only valid when <a href="#isIPv6Address">isIPv6Address</a>() returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toString">toString</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toString"></a>TQHostAddress::toString () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqhttp.html b/doc/html/tqhttp.html index a6dc5072c..9b4fae625 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhttp.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhttp.html @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ can also be written as: (with small variations, depending on network traffic, etc.): <p> <pre> <a href="#requestStarted">requestStarted</a>( 1 ) - <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 1, FALSE ) + <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 1, false ) <a href="#requestStarted">requestStarted</a>( 2 ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connecting</a> ) @@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ can also be written as: <a href="#dataReadProgress">dataReadProgress</a>( 18300, 0 ) <a href="#readyRead">readyRead</a>( responseheader ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Connected</a> ) - <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 2, FALSE ) + <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 2, false ) - <a href="#done">done</a>( FALSE ) + <a href="#done">done</a>( false ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Closing</a> ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Unconnected</a> ) @@ -199,13 +199,13 @@ the <a href="#post">post</a>() request is never executed and the signals would l like this: <p> <pre> <a href="#requestStarted">requestStarted</a>( 1 ) - <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 1, FALSE ) + <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 1, false ) <a href="#requestStarted">requestStarted</a>( 2 ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">HostLookup</a> ) - <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 2, TRUE ) + <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>( 2, true ) - <a href="#done">done</a>( TRUE ) + <a href="#done">done</a>( true ) <a href="#stateChanged">stateChanged</a>( <a href="#State-enum">Unconnected</a> ) </pre> @@ -281,11 +281,11 @@ closed. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="abort"></a>TQHttp::abort ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> Aborts the current request and deletes all scheduled requests. -<p> For the current request, the <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>TRUE</tt> is emitted. For all other requests that are +<p> For the current request, the <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>true</tt> is emitted. For all other requests that are affected by the <a href="#abort">abort</a>(), no signals are emitted. <p> Since this slot also deletes the scheduled requests, there are no requests left and the <a href="#done">done</a>() signal is emitted (with the <tt>error</tt> -argument <tt>TRUE</tt>). +argument <tt>true</tt>). <p> <p>See also <a href="#clearPendingRequests">clearPendingRequests</a>(). <h3 class=fn>TQ_ULONG <a name="bytesAvailable"></a>TQHttp::bytesAvailable () const @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ there is no request being executed (i.e. they've all finished). Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If the request is one issued by <a href="#setHost">setHost</a>() or <a href="#closeConnection">closeConnection</a>(), it returns an invalid request header, i.e. -<a href="tqhttpheader.html#isValid">TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid</a>() returns FALSE. +<a href="tqhttpheader.html#isValid">TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid</a>() returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#currentId">currentId</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiodevice.html">TQIODevice</a> * <a name="currentSourceDevice"></a>TQHttp::currentSourceDevice () const @@ -386,22 +386,22 @@ bytes, since for large files these values might need to be <p> This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished; (it is emitted after the last request's <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() signal). -<em>error</em> is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; -otherwise <em>error</em> is FALSE. +<em>error</em> is true if an error occurred during the processing; +otherwise <em>error</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>(), <a href="#error">error</a>(), and <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqhttp.html#Error-enum">Error</a> <a name="error"></a>TQHttp::error () const </h3> Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out what happened when receiving a <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() or a <a href="#done">done</a>() -signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>TRUE</tt>. +signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>true</tt>. <p> If you start a new request, the error status is reset to <a href="#Error-enum">NoError</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="errorString"></a>TQHttp::errorString () const </h3> Returns a human-readable description of the last error that occurred. This is useful to present a error message to the user -when receiving a <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() or a <a href="#done">done</a>() signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>TRUE</tt>. +when receiving a <a href="#requestFinished">requestFinished</a>() or a <a href="#done">done</a>() signal with the <tt>error</tt> argument <tt>true</tt>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="get"></a>TQHttp::get ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & path, <a href="tqiodevice.html">TQIODevice</a> * to = 0 ) </h3> @@ -426,8 +426,8 @@ emitted. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPendingRequests"></a>TQHttp::hasPendingRequests () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet -been executed; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet +been executed; otherwise returns false. <p> The request that is being executed is <em>not</em> considered as a scheduled request. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clearPendingRequests">clearPendingRequests</a>(), <a href="#currentId">currentId</a>(), and <a href="#currentRequest">currentRequest</a>(). @@ -531,8 +531,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by -<em>id</em> has finished. <em>error</em> is TRUE if an error occurred during -the processing; otherwise <em>error</em> is FALSE. +<em>id</em> has finished. <em>error</em> is true if an error occurred during +the processing; otherwise <em>error</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#requestStarted">requestStarted</a>(), <a href="#done">done</a>(), <a href="#error">error</a>(), and <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="requestStarted"></a>TQHttp::requestStarted ( int id )<tt> [signal]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqhttpheader.html b/doc/html/tqhttpheader.html index c5d5c9d07..633354d3f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqhttpheader.html +++ b/doc/html/tqhttpheader.html @@ -126,24 +126,24 @@ Returns the value of the special HTTP header field <tt>content-type</tt>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasContentLength"></a>TQHttpHeader::hasContentLength () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the special HTTP -header field <tt>content-length</tt>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the header has an entry for the special HTTP +header field <tt>content-length</tt>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#contentLength">contentLength</a>() and <a href="#setContentLength">setContentLength</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasContentType"></a>TQHttpHeader::hasContentType () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP -header field <tt>content-type</tt>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP +header field <tt>content-type</tt>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#contentType">contentType</a>() and <a href="#setContentType">setContentType</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasKey"></a>TQHttpHeader::hasKey ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the HTTP header has an entry with the given <em>key</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the HTTP header has an entry with the given <em>key</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#value">value</a>(), <a href="#setValue">setValue</a>(), and <a href="#keys">keys</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQHttpHeader::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns false. <p> A TQHttpHeader is invalid if it was created by parsing a malformed string. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="keys"></a>TQHttpHeader::keys () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqicondrag.html b/doc/html/tqicondrag.html index 263e46f65..437a09de7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqicondrag.html +++ b/doc/html/tqicondrag.html @@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ the textual caption, <em>tr</em>. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x829">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDecode"></a>TQIconDrag::canDecode ( <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>e</em> can be decoded by the TQIconDrag, otherwise -return FALSE. +Returns true if <em>e</em> can be decoded by the TQIconDrag, otherwise +return false. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x830">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> <a name="encodedData"></a>TQIconDrag::encodedData ( const char * mime ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqicondragevent.html b/doc/html/tqicondragevent.html index 5520ce267..1f764c9f4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqicondragevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqicondragevent.html @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ this event is is normal to begin using drag and drop. </h3> <p> Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept parameter -flag set to FALSE. +flag set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="accept"></a>TQIconDragEvent::accept () @@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ has not handled the icon drag as a result other events can be sent. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQIconDragEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has started a drag and -drop operation; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event has started a drag and +drop operation; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#accept">accept</a>() and <a href="#ignore">ignore</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqiconfactory.html b/doc/html/tqiconfactory.html index f8bada21e..f2e8e966d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiconfactory.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiconfactory.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } The TQIconFactory class is used to create pixmaps for a <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a>. <p> By reimplementing <a href="#createPixmap">createPixmap</a>(), you can override TQIconSet's default algorithm for computing pixmaps not supplied by the user. -<p> Call <a href="#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE) if you want the factory to automatically +<p> Call <a href="#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true) if you want the factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer needed by TQIconSet. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> and <a href="advanced.html">Advanced Widgets</a>. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQIconFactory::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> * <a name="createPixmap"></a>TQIconFactory::createPixmap ( const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & iconSet, <a href="tqiconset.html#Size-enum">TQIconSet::Size</a> size, <a href="tqiconset.html#Mode-enum">TQIconSet::Mode</a> mode, <a href="tqiconset.html#State-enum">TQIconSet::State</a> state )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -92,9 +92,9 @@ Replaces the default icon factory with <em>factory</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoDelete"></a>TQIconFactory::setAutoDelete ( bool autoDelete ) </h3> -<p> If <em>autoDelete</em> is TRUE, sets the icon factory to automatically +<p> If <em>autoDelete</em> is true, sets the icon factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> and -isn't the default factory. If <em>autoDelete</em> is FALSE (the default) +isn't the default factory. If <em>autoDelete</em> is false (the default) auto-deletion is disabled. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() and <a href="#defaultFactory">defaultFactory</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqiconset.html b/doc/html/tqiconset.html index c69e4017b..71b377d15 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiconset.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiconset.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ is to supply pixmaps in both large and small sizes. size of the generated large/small icons. The default small size is 22 x 22, while the default large size is 32 x 32. These sizes only affect generated icons. -<p> The <a href="#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by +<p> The <a href="#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>() function returns true if an icon was generated by TQIconSet or by a factory; <a href="#clearGenerated">clearGenerated</a>() clears all cached pixmaps. <p> <h3> Making Classes that Use TQIconSet @@ -245,14 +245,14 @@ is used. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isGenerated"></a>TQIconSet::isGenerated ( <a href="tqiconset.html#Size-enum">Size</a> size, <a href="tqiconset.html#Mode-enum">Mode</a> mode, <a href="tqiconset.html#State-enum">State</a> state = Off ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the pixmap with size <em>size</em>, mode <em>mode</em> and +Returns true if the pixmap with size <em>size</em>, mode <em>mode</em> and state <em>state</em> is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> A pixmap obtained from a <a href="tqiconfactory.html">TQIconFactory</a> is considered non-generated. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQIconSet::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQIconSet::operator= ( const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & other ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqiconview-h.html b/doc/html/tqiconview-h.html index a773016f5..e1be4d001 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiconview-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiconview-h.html @@ -212,8 +212,8 @@ public: int height() const; TQSize size() const; TQPoint pos() const; - TQRect textRect( bool relative = TRUE ) const; - TQRect pixmapRect( bool relative = TRUE ) const; + TQRect textRect( bool relative = true ) const; + TQRect pixmapRect( bool relative = true ) const; bool contains( const TQPoint& pnt ) const; bool intersects( const TQRect& r ) const; @@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ public: #ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE virtual void setPicture( const TQPicture &icon ); #endif - virtual void setText( const TQString &text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ); - virtual void setPixmap( const TQPixmap &icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE ); + virtual void setText( const TQString &text, bool recalc, bool redraw = true ); + virtual void setPixmap( const TQPixmap &icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = true ); virtual void setKey( const TQString &k ); virtual int rtti() const; @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ public: TQIconViewItem *lastItem() const; TQIconViewItem *currentItem() const; virtual void setCurrentItem( TQIconViewItem *item ); - virtual void setSelected( TQIconViewItem *item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE ); + virtual void setSelected( TQIconViewItem *item, bool s, bool cb = false ); uint count() const; @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ public: virtual void setShowToolTips( bool b ); bool showToolTips() const; - void setSorting( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE ); + void setSorting( bool sort, bool ascending = true ); bool sorting() const; bool sortDirection() const; @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ public: TQSize minimumSizeHint() const; TQSize sizeHint() const; - virtual void sort( bool ascending = TRUE ); + virtual void sort( bool ascending = true ); virtual void setFont( const TQFont & ); virtual void setPalette( const TQPalette & ); @@ -423,8 +423,8 @@ public: bool isRenaming() const; public slots: - virtual void arrangeItemsInGrid( const TQSize &grid, bool update = TRUE ); - virtual void arrangeItemsInGrid( bool update = TRUE ); + virtual void arrangeItemsInGrid( const TQSize &grid, bool update = true ); + virtual void arrangeItemsInGrid( bool update = true ); virtual void setContentsPos( int x, int y ); virtual void updateContents(); @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ private: void drawContents( TQPainter* ); TQIconViewItem* findItemByName( TQIconViewItem *start ); void handleItemChange( TQIconViewItem *old, bool shift, - bool control, bool homeend = FALSE); + bool control, bool homeend = false); int calcGridNum( int w, int x ) const; TQIconViewItem *rowBegin( TQIconViewItem *item ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqiconview.html b/doc/html/tqiconview.html index d88419e5c..d20c38a1b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiconview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiconview.html @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQIconViewItem * <a href="#lastItem"><b>lastItem</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQIconViewItem * <a href="#currentItem"><b>currentItem</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCurrentItem"><b>setCurrentItem</b></a> ( TQIconViewItem * item )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSelected"><b>setSelected</b></a> ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSelected"><b>setSelected</b></a> ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = false )</li> <li class=fn>uint <a href="#count"><b>count</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSelectionMode"><b>setSelectionMode</b></a> ( SelectionMode m )</li> <li class=fn>SelectionMode <a href="#selectionMode"><b>selectionMode</b></a> () const</li> @@ -87,20 +87,20 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#autoArrange"><b>autoArrange</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setShowToolTips"><b>setShowToolTips</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#showToolTips"><b>showToolTips</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setSorting"><b>setSorting</b></a> ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setSorting"><b>setSorting</b></a> ( bool sort, bool ascending = true )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#sorting"><b>sorting</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#sortDirection"><b>sortDirection</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setItemsMovable"><b>setItemsMovable</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#itemsMovable"><b>itemsMovable</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setWordWrapIconText"><b>setWordWrapIconText</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#wordWrapIconText"><b>wordWrapIconText</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> ( bool ascending = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> ( bool ascending = true )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isRenaming"><b>isRenaming</b></a> () const</li> </ul> <h2>Public Slots</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid"><b>arrangeItemsInGrid</b></a> ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid-2"><b>arrangeItemsInGrid</b></a> ( bool update = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid"><b>arrangeItemsInGrid</b></a> ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid-2"><b>arrangeItemsInGrid</b></a> ( bool update = true )</li> </ul> <h2>Signals</h2> <ul> @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ For example: <p> The <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> call passes a pointer to the TQIconView we wish to populate, along with the label text and a <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a>. <p> When an item is inserted the TQIconView allocates a position for it. -Existing items are rearranged if <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() is TRUE. The +Existing items are rearranged if <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() is true. The default arrangement is <a href="#Arrangement-enum">LeftToRight</a> -- the TQIconView fills up the <em>left-most</em> column from top to bottom, then moves one column <em>right</em> and fills that from top to bottom and so on. The @@ -286,8 +286,8 @@ reimplement <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#acceptDrop">TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop< bool MyIconViewItem::acceptDrop( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> *mime ) const { if ( mime-><a href="tqmimesource.html#provides">provides</a>( "text/plain" ) ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } void MyIconViewItem::dropped( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDropEvent</a> *evt, const <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><TQIconDragItem>& ) @@ -396,21 +396,21 @@ Destroys the icon view and deletes all items. Adjusts the positions of the items to the geometry of the icon view. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="arrangeItemsInGrid"></a>TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & grid, bool update = TRUE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="arrangeItemsInGrid"></a>TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & grid, bool update = true )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> This variant uses <em>grid</em> instead of (<a href="#gridX">gridX</a>(), <a href="#gridY">gridY</a>()). If <em>grid</em> is invalid (see <a href="tqsize.html#isValid">TQSize::isValid</a>()), <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>() calculates a valid grid itself and uses that. -<p> If <em>update</em> is TRUE (the default) the viewport is repainted. +<p> If <em>update</em> is true (the default) the viewport is repainted. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x807">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.h</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="arrangeItemsInGrid-2"></a>TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = TRUE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="arrangeItemsInGrid-2"></a>TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = true )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Arranges all the items in the grid given by <a href="#gridX">gridX</a>() and <a href="#gridY">gridY</a>(). <p> Even if <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() is enabled, the items are not sorted by this function. If you want to sort or rearrange the items, use iconview->sort(iconview->sortDirection()). -<p> If <em>update</em> is TRUE (the default), the viewport is repainted as +<p> If <em>update</em> is true (the default), the viewport is repainted as well. <p> <p>See also <a href="#gridX-prop">TQIconView::gridX</a>, <a href="#gridY-prop">TQIconView::gridY</a>, and <a href="#sort">TQIconView::sort</a>(). @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ well. </h3><p>Returns the arrangement mode of the icon view. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#arrangement-prop">"arrangement"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoArrange"></a>TQIconView::autoArrange () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#autoArrange-prop">"autoArrange"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQIconView::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -602,8 +602,8 @@ mode. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRenaming"></a>TQIconView::isRenaming () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="itemRenamed"></a>TQIconView::itemRenamed ( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * item, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ See the <a href="tqiconview.html#itemTextBackground-prop">"itemTextBackground"</ </h3><p>Returns the position where the text of each item is drawn. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#itemTextPos-prop">"itemTextPos"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="itemsMovable"></a>TQIconView::itemsMovable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#itemsMovable-prop">"itemsMovable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * <a name="lastItem"></a>TQIconView::lastItem () const </h3> @@ -748,8 +748,8 @@ coordinate system (<a href="tqmouseevent.html#globalPos">TQMouseEvent::globalPos <h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQIconView::selectAll ( bool select )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be -selected if <em>select</em> is TRUE, and to be unselected if <em>select</em> -is FALSE. +selected if <em>select</em> is true, and to be unselected if <em>select</em> +is false. <p> In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes the selection status of <a href="#currentItem">currentItem</a>(). @@ -803,19 +803,19 @@ See the <a href="tqiconview.html#maxItemWidth-prop">"maxItemWidth"</a> property <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setResizeMode"></a>TQIconView::setResizeMode ( <a href="tqiconview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a> am )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets the resize mode of the icon view to <em>am</em>. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#resizeMode-prop">"resizeMode"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected"></a>TQIconView::setSelected ( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected"></a>TQIconView::setSelected ( <a href="tqiconviewitem.html">TQIconViewItem</a> * item, bool s, bool cb = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Selects or unselects <em>item</em> depending on <em>s</em>, and may also unselect other items, depending on <a href="#selectionMode">TQIconView::selectionMode</a>() and <em>cb</em>. -<p> If <em>s</em> is FALSE, <em>item</em> is unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>, <em>item</em> is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <em>item</em> is selected. If <em>cb</em> is TRUE, the selection state of the -icon view's other items is left unchanged. If <em>cb</em> is FALSE (the +<p> If <em>s</em> is false, <em>item</em> is unselected. +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a>, <em>item</em> is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected. +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>, <em>item</em> is selected. If <em>cb</em> is true, the selection state of the +icon view's other items is left unchanged. If <em>cb</em> is false (the default) all other items are unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> <em>item</em> +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> <em>item</em> is selected. -<p> Note that <em>cb</em> is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>. <em>cb</em> defaults to FALSE. +<p> Note that <em>cb</em> is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>. <em>cb</em> defaults to false. <p> All items whose selection status is changed repaint themselves. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelectionMode"></a>TQIconView::setSelectionMode ( <a href="tqiconview.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a> m )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -824,14 +824,14 @@ See the <a href="tqiconview.html#selectionMode-prop">"selectionMode"</a> propert <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setShowToolTips"></a>TQIconView::setShowToolTips ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text to <em>b</em>. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#showToolTips-prop">"showToolTips"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSorting"></a>TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSorting"></a>TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = true ) </h3> -If <em>sort</em> is TRUE, this function sets the icon view to sort items -when a new item is inserted. If <em>sort</em> is FALSE, the icon view +If <em>sort</em> is true, this function sets the icon view to sort items +when a new item is inserted. If <em>sort</em> is false, the icon view will not be sorted. -<p> Note that <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() must be TRUE for sorting to take place. -<p> If <em>ascending</em> is TRUE (the default), items are sorted in -ascending order. If <em>ascending</em> is FALSE, items are sorted in +<p> Note that <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() must be true for sorting to take place. +<p> If <em>ascending</em> is true (the default), items are sorted in +ascending order. If <em>ascending</em> is false, items are sorted in descending order. <p> <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#compare">TQIconViewItem::compare</a>() is used to compare pairs of items. The sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items' @@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ See the <a href="tqiconview.html#spacing-prop">"spacing"</a> property for detail </h3><p>Sets whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long to <em>b</em>. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop">"wordWrapIconText"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showToolTips"></a>TQIconView::showToolTips () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#showToolTips-prop">"showToolTips"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="slotUpdate"></a>TQIconView::slotUpdate ()<tt> [virtual protected slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -856,9 +856,9 @@ many items are inserted in a loop the icon view is probably redrawn only once at the end of the loop. This makes the insertions both flicker-free and faster. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sort"></a>TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sort"></a>TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If <em>ascending</em> is TRUE, the items are sorted in increasing order, +Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If <em>ascending</em> is true, the items are sorted in increasing order, otherwise they are sorted in decreasing order. <p> <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#compare">TQIconViewItem::compare</a>() is used to compare pairs of items. The sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items' @@ -867,10 +867,10 @@ text unless specifically set to something else. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#key">TQIconViewItem::key</a>(), <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#setKey">TQIconViewItem::setKey</a>(), <a href="tqiconviewitem.html#compare">TQIconViewItem::compare</a>(), <a href="#setSorting">TQIconView::setSorting</a>(), and <a href="#sortDirection-prop">TQIconView::sortDirection</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="sortDirection"></a>TQIconView::sortDirection () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#sortDirection-prop">"sortDirection"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="sorting"></a>TQIconView::sorting () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#sorting-prop">"sorting"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="spacing"></a>TQIconView::spacing () const </h3><p>Returns the space in pixels between icon view items. @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ should normally not need to call this function because an item is to delete it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wordWrapIconText"></a>TQIconView::wordWrapIconText () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop">"wordWrapIconText"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">Arrangement</a> <a name="arrangement-prop"></a>arrangement</h3> @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ See the <a href="tqiconview.html#wordWrapIconText-prop">"wordWrapIconText"</a> p <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setArrangement">setArrangement</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#arrangement">arrangement</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoArrange-prop"></a>autoArrange</h3> <p>This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of insertion, TQIconView defers all position-related work until it is shown and then calls <a href="#arrangeItemsInGrid">arrangeItemsInGrid</a>(). @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ normal icon view background is used. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setItemTextPos">setItemTextPos</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#itemTextPos">itemTextPos</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="itemsMovable-prop"></a>itemsMovable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setItemsMovable">setItemsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#itemsMovable">itemsMovable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="maxItemTextLength-prop"></a>maxItemTextLength</h3> @@ -962,20 +962,20 @@ See <a href="#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showToolTips-prop"></a>showToolTips</h3> <p>This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text. -<p>The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if -<a href="#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is TRUE, as it is by default. +<p>The default is true. Note that this has no effect if +<a href="#setWordWrapIconText">setWordWrapIconText</a>() is true, as it is by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="sortDirection-prop"></a>sortDirection</h3> <p>This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;. -<p>The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only -meaningful if both <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are TRUE. +<p>The default is true (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only +meaningful if both <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="#autoArrange">autoArrange</a>() are true. <p> To set the sort direction, use <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>() <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#sortDirection">sortDirection</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="sorting-prop"></a>sorting</h3> <p>This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion. -<p>The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion. +<p>The default is false, i.e. no sorting on insertion. <p> To set the sorting, use <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>(). <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>(). @@ -987,8 +987,8 @@ meaningful if both <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() and <a href="#autoArrange">a <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setSpacing">setSpacing</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#spacing">spacing</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wordWrapIconText-prop"></a>wordWrapIconText</h3> <p>This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long. -<p>The default is TRUE. -<p> If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is +<p>The default is true. +<p> If this property is false, icon text that is too long is truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a diff --git a/doc/html/tqiconviewitem.html b/doc/html/tqiconviewitem.html index 340f1936c..9382d0f56 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiconviewitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiconviewitem.html @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#height"><b>height</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQSize <a href="#size"><b>size</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQPoint <a href="#pos"><b>pos</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#textRect"><b>textRect</b></a> ( bool relative = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#pixmapRect"><b>pixmapRect</b></a> ( bool relative = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#textRect"><b>textRect</b></a> ( bool relative = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#pixmapRect"><b>pixmapRect</b></a> ( bool relative = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQPoint & pnt ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#intersects"><b>intersects</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#acceptDrop"><b>acceptDrop</b></a> ( const TQMimeSource * mime ) const</li> @@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setText"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & text )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPixmap"><b>setPixmap</b></a> ( const TQPixmap & icon )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPicture"><b>setPicture</b></a> ( const TQPicture & icon )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setText-2"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPixmap-2"><b>setPixmap</b></a> ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setText-2"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPixmap-2"><b>setPixmap</b></a> ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setKey"><b>setKey</b></a> ( const TQString & k )</li> <li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#rtti"><b>rtti</b></a> () const</li> </ul> @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ pointer to the icon view, a string and an icon: </pre> <p> By default the text of an icon view item may not be edited by the -user but calling <a href="#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>(TRUE) will allow the user to +user but calling <a href="#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>(true) will allow the user to perform in-place editing of the item's text. <p> When the icon view is deleted all items in it are deleted automatically. @@ -211,9 +211,9 @@ the item has been destroyed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="acceptDrop"></a>TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * mime ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if you can drop things with a <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> of <em>mime</em> -onto this item; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> The default implementation always returns FALSE. You must subclass +<p> Returns true if you can drop things with a <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> of <em>mime</em> +onto this item; otherwise returns false. +<p> The default implementation always returns false. You must subclass TQIconViewItem and reimplement <a href="#acceptDrop">acceptDrop</a>() to accept drops. <p>Examples: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x836">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a> and <a href="simple_dd-example.html#x2822">iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp</a>. @@ -245,13 +245,13 @@ reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison: <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQIconViewItem::contains ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pnt ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item contains the point <em>pnt</em> (in contents -coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item contains the point <em>pnt</em> (in contents +coordinates); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::dragEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to drag the icon view item; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the user is allowed to drag the icon view item; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDragEnabled">setDragEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="dragEntered"></a>TQIconViewItem::dragEntered ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -272,8 +272,8 @@ reimplement this function. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x838">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dropEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::dropEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to drop something onto the -item; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the user is allowed to drop something onto the +item; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDropEnabled">setDropEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="dropped"></a>TQIconViewItem::dropped ( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDropEvent</a> * e, const <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><TQIconDragItem> & lst )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -304,17 +304,17 @@ occurred. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="intersects"></a>TQIconViewItem::intersects ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item intersects the rectangle <em>r</em> (in -contents coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item intersects the rectangle <em>r</em> (in +contents coordinates); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelectable"></a>TQIconViewItem::isSelectable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item is selectable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item is selectable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelectable">setSelectable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQIconViewItem::isSelected () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x840">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. @@ -397,11 +397,11 @@ changes. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x843">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="pixmapRect"></a>TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="pixmapRect"></a>TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = true ) const </h3> Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's icon. -<p> If <em>relative</em> is TRUE, (the default), the rectangle is relative to -the origin of the item's rectangle. If <em>relative</em> is FALSE, the +<p> If <em>relative</em> is true, (the default), the rectangle is relative to +the origin of the item's rectangle. If <em>relative</em> is false, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system. @@ -437,8 +437,8 @@ user canceled, e.g. by pressing the Escape key). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x845">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="renameEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::renameEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item can be renamed by the user with in-place -renaming; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item can be renamed by the user with in-place +renaming; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRenameEnabled">setRenameEnabled</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x846">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. @@ -456,14 +456,14 @@ allow for extensions to this class. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDragEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>allow</em> is TRUE, the icon view permits the user to drag the +If <em>allow</em> is true, the icon view permits the user to drag the icon view item either to another position within the icon view or -to somewhere outside of it. If <em>allow</em> is FALSE, the item cannot +to somewhere outside of it. If <em>allow</em> is false, the item cannot be dragged. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDropEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>allow</em> is TRUE, the icon view lets the user drop something on +If <em>allow</em> is true, the icon view lets the user drop something on this icon view item. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemRect"></a>TQIconViewItem::setItemRect ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r )<tt> [protected]</tt> @@ -495,11 +495,11 @@ not be displayed properly, depending on the <a href="tqiconview.html#Arrangement documentation</a> for details. <p> <p>See also <a href="#pixmap">pixmap</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPixmap-2"></a>TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setPixmap-2"></a>TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets <em>icon</em> as the item's icon in the icon view. If <em>recalc</em> is -TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If <em>redraw</em> is TRUE +true, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If <em>redraw</em> is true (the default), the icon view is repainted. <p> <b>Note:</b> Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may not be displayed properly, depending on the <a href="tqiconview.html#Arrangement-enum">arrangement in use</a>. See the <a href="#pixmap-size-limit">main class @@ -515,16 +515,16 @@ so that they can set the calculated rectangle. <em>Any other use is discouraged. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRenameEnabled"></a>TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled ( bool allow )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>allow</em> is TRUE, the user can rename the icon view item by +If <em>allow</em> is true, the user can rename the icon view item by clicking on the text (or pressing F2) while the item is selected -(in-place renaming). If <em>allow</em> is FALSE, in-place renaming is +(in-place renaming). If <em>allow</em> is false, in-place renaming is not possible. <p>Examples: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x848">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>, <a href="iconview-example.html#x1459">iconview/main.cpp</a>, and <a href="simple_dd-example.html#x2824">iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelectable"></a>TQIconViewItem::setSelectable ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets this item to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is TRUE (the default) -or unselectable if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Sets this item to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is true (the default) +or unselectable if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> The user is unable to select a non-selectable item using either the keyboard or the mouse. (The application programmer can select an item in code regardless of this setting.) @@ -535,16 +535,16 @@ an item in code regardless of this setting.) Selects or unselects the item, depending on <em>s</em>; it may also unselect other items, depending on <a href="tqiconview.html#selectionMode">TQIconView::selectionMode</a>() and <em>cb</em>. -<p> If <em>s</em> is FALSE, the item is unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Single</tt>, the +<p> If <em>s</em> is false, the item is unselected. +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Single</tt>, the item is selected and the item previously selected is unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Extended</tt>, the -item is selected. If <em>cb</em> is TRUE, the selection state of the -other items is left unchanged. If <em>cb</em> is FALSE (the default) all +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Extended</tt>, the +item is selected. If <em>cb</em> is true, the selection state of the +other items is left unchanged. If <em>cb</em> is false (the default) all other items are unselected. -<p> If <em>s</em> is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Multi</tt>, the +<p> If <em>s</em> is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Multi</tt>, the item is selected. -<p> Note that <em>cb</em> is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Extended</tt>; cb defaults to FALSE. +<p> Note that <em>cb</em> is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is <tt>Extended</tt>; cb defaults to false. <p> All items whose selection status changes repaint themselves. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x849">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ item is selected. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> This variant is equivalent to calling the other variant with <em>cb</em> -set to FALSE. +set to false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setText"></a>TQIconViewItem::setText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -561,11 +561,11 @@ might be a no-op if you reimplement <a href="#text">text</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#text">text</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x850">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setText-2"></a>TQIconViewItem::setText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setText-2"></a>TQIconViewItem::setText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets <em>text</em> as the text of the icon view item. If <em>recalc</em> is -TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If <em>redraw</em> is TRUE +true, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If <em>redraw</em> is true (the default), the icon view is repainted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#text">text</a>(). @@ -591,12 +591,12 @@ do this, you must call <a href="#calcRect">calcRect</a>() manually each time the <p> <p>See also <a href="#setText">setText</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x851">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="textRect"></a>TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="textRect"></a>TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = true ) const </h3> Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's text. -<p> If <em>relative</em> is TRUE, (the default), the returned rectangle is +<p> If <em>relative</em> is true, (the default), the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the item's rectangle. If <em>relative</em> is -FALSE, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the +false, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x852">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqimage-h.html b/doc/html/tqimage-h.html index 942fdc3d3..861aad01b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimage-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimage-h.html @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ public: void reset(); void fill( uint pixel ); - void invertPixels( bool invertAlpha = TRUE ); + void invertPixels( bool invertAlpha = true ); TQImage convertDepth( int ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TRUECOLOR @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ public: TQImage createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags=0 ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - TQImage createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight=TRUE ) const; + TQImage createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight=true ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_MIRROR TQImage mirror() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqimage.html b/doc/html/tqimage.html index f435c83ec..cb8333ae7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimage.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimage.html @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ representation with direct access to the pixel data. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#create-2"><b>create</b></a> ( const TQSize &, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#reset"><b>reset</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#fill"><b>fill</b></a> ( uint pixel )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#invertPixels"><b>invertPixels</b></a> ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#invertPixels"><b>invertPixels</b></a> ( bool invertAlpha = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#convertDepth-2"><b>convertDepth</b></a> ( int depth ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#convertDepthWithPalette"><b>convertDepthWithPalette</b></a> ( int d, TQRgb * palette, int palette_count, int conversion_flags = 0 ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#convertDepth"><b>convertDepth</b></a> ( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const</li> @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ representation with direct access to the pixel data. <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#scaleHeight"><b>scaleHeight</b></a> ( int h ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#xForm"><b>xForm</b></a> ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#createAlphaMask"><b>createAlphaMask</b></a> ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#createHeuristicMask"><b>createHeuristicMask</b></a> ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#createHeuristicMask"><b>createHeuristicMask</b></a> ( bool clipTight = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#mirror"><b>mirror</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#mirror-2"><b>mirror</b></a> ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#swapRGB"><b>swapRGB</b></a> () const</li> @@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ Destroys the image and cleans up. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="allGray"></a>TQImage::allGray () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if all the colors in the image are shades of gray +Returns true if all the colors in the image are shades of gray (i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> This function is slow for large 32-bit images. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isGrayscale">isGrayscale</a>(). @@ -444,8 +444,8 @@ areas beyond this image pixels are filled with pixel 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="create"></a>TQImage::create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, <a href="tqimage.html#Endian-enum">Endian</a> bitOrder = IgnoreEndian ) </h3> Sets the image <em>width</em>, <em>height</em>, <em>depth</em>, its number of colors -(in <em>numColors</em>), and bit order. Returns TRUE if successful, or -FALSE if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be +(in <em>numColors</em>), and bit order. Returns true if successful, or +false if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be allocated. <p> The <em>width</em> and <em>height</em> is limited to 32767. <em>depth</em> must be 1, 8, or 32. If <em>depth</em> is 1, <em>bitOrder</em> must be set to @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ image. Returns a <a href="#isNull">null</a> image if <a href="#setAlphaBuffer">a convert to big-endianness using <a href="#convertBitOrder">convertBitOrder</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#createHeuristicMask">createHeuristicMask</a>(), <a href="#hasAlphaBuffer">hasAlphaBuffer</a>(), and <a href="#setAlphaBuffer">setAlphaBuffer</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> <a name="createHeuristicMask"></a>TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> <a name="createHeuristicMask"></a>TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = true ) const </h3> Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ case of a draw (this generally means that this function is not applicable to the image), the result is arbitrary. <p> The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can convert to big-endianness using <a href="#convertBitOrder">convertBitOrder</a>(). -<p> If <em>clipTight</em> is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the +<p> If <em>clipTight</em> is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. <p> This function disregards the <a href="#hasAlphaBuffer">alpha buffer</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#createAlphaMask">createAlphaMask</a>(). @@ -548,8 +548,8 @@ to an image. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAlphaBuffer"></a>TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAlphaBuffer">setAlphaBuffer</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="height"></a>TQImage::height () const @@ -592,10 +592,10 @@ Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image input. <p> <p>See also <a href="#outputFormats">outputFormats</a>(), <a href="#inputFormatList">inputFormatList</a>(), and <a href="tqimageio.html">TQImageIO</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="invertPixels"></a>TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="invertPixels"></a>TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = true ) </h3> Inverts all pixel values in the image. -<p> If the depth is 32: if <em>invertAlpha</em> is TRUE, the alpha bits are +<p> If the depth is 32: if <em>invertAlpha</em> is true, the alpha bits are also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged. <p> If the depth is not 32, the argument <em>invertAlpha</em> has no meaning. @@ -607,15 +607,15 @@ using color index <em>i</em> with a pixel using color index 255 minus <em>i</em> </h3> For 32-bit images, this function is equivalent to <a href="#allGray">allGray</a>(). -<p> For 8-bpp images, this function returns TRUE if <a href="#color">color</a>(i) is +<p> For 8-bpp images, this function returns true if <a href="#color">color</a>(i) is TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#allGray">allGray</a>() and <a href="#depth">depth</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQImage::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if it is a null image; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if it is a null image; otherwise returns false. <p> A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data. <p>Example: <a href="showimg-example.html#x1322">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. @@ -628,8 +628,8 @@ FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="load"></a>TQImage::load ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, const char * format = 0 ) </h3> -Loads an image from the file <em>fileName</em>. Returns TRUE if the -image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE. +Loads an image from the file <em>fileName</em>. Returns true if the +image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false. <p> If <em>format</em> is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If <em>format</em> is not specified (which is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to @@ -640,8 +640,8 @@ explains how to add extra formats. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="loadFromData"></a>TQImage::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 ) </h3> -Loads an image from the first <em>len</em> bytes of binary data in <em>buf</em>. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Loads an image from the first <em>len</em> bytes of binary data in <em>buf</em>. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise +returns false. <p> If <em>format</em> is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If <em>format</em> is not specified (which is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to @@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ image. The original TQImage is not changed. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or -the vertical direction depending on whether <em>horizontal</em> and <em>vertical</em> are set to TRUE or FALSE. The original image is not +the vertical direction depending on whether <em>horizontal</em> and <em>vertical</em> are set to true or false. The original image is not changed. <p> <p>See also <a href="#smoothScale">smoothScale</a>(). @@ -692,8 +692,8 @@ offset by when positioning relative to other images. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQImage::operator!= ( const <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> & i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this image and image <em>i</em> have different contents; -otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there +Returns true if this image and image <em>i</em> have different contents; +otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq">operator=</a>(). @@ -715,8 +715,8 @@ dereference the shared data. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQImage::operator== ( const <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> & i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this image and image <em>i</em> have the same contents; -otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there +Returns true if this image and image <em>i</em> have the same contents; +otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq">operator=</a>(). @@ -779,8 +779,8 @@ format <em>format</em> and a quality factor of <em>quality</em>. <em>quality</em must be in the range 0..100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the default) to use the default settings. -<p> Returns TRUE if the image was successfully saved; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the image was successfully saved; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#load">load</a>(), <a href="#loadFromData">loadFromData</a>(), <a href="#imageFormat">imageFormat</a>(), <a href="tqpixmap.html#save">TQPixmap::save</a>(), and <a href="tqimageio.html">TQImageIO</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="save-2"></a>TQImage::save ( <a href="tqiodevice.html">TQIODevice</a> * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ the underlying platform. Hint: use <a href="tqcolor.html#qRed">tqRed()</a>, <p>Example: <a href="desktop-example.html#x1729">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAlphaBuffer"></a>TQImage::setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables alpha buffer mode if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, otherwise disables +Enables alpha buffer mode if <em>enable</em> is true, otherwise disables it. The default setting is disabled. <p> An 8-bpp image has 8-bit pixels. A pixel is an index into the <a href="#color">color table</a>, which contains 32-bit color @@ -1033,8 +1033,8 @@ over a copy, e.g. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="valid"></a>TQImage::valid ( int x, int y ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if ( <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> ) is a valid coordinate in the image; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if ( <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> ) is a valid coordinate in the image; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#width">width</a>(), <a href="#height">height</a>(), and <a href="#pixelIndex">pixelIndex</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2934">canvas/canvas.cpp</a> and <a href="qmag-example.html#x1777">qmag/qmag.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqimagedecoder.html b/doc/html/tqimagedecoder.html index 9bd566431..4e605aae0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimagedecoder.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimagedecoder.html @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ consumer for which it decoded the image is <em>not</em> destroyed. Call this function to decode some data into image changes. The data in <em>buffer</em> will be decoded, sending change information to the <a href="tqimageconsumer.html">TQImageConsumer</a> of this TQImageDecoder until one of the change -functions of the consumer returns FALSE. The length of the data is +functions of the consumer returns false. The length of the data is given in <em>length</em>. <p> Returns the number of bytes consumed: 0 if consumption is complete, and -1 if decoding fails due to invalid data. diff --git a/doc/html/tqimagedrag.html b/doc/html/tqimagedrag.html index bd469a51e..c57588acd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimagedrag.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimagedrag.html @@ -79,15 +79,15 @@ resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDecode"></a>TQImageDrag::canDecode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the information in mime source <em>e</em> can be decoded -into an image; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the information in mime source <em>e</em> can be decoded +into an image; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#decode">decode</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="desktop-example.html#x1731">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decode"></a>TQImageDrag::decode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> & img )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source <em>e</em> -into <em>img</em>. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +into <em>img</em>. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canDecode">canDecode</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="desktop-example.html#x1732">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>. @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ into <em>img</em>. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source <em>e</em> -into pixmap <em>pm</em>. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns -FALSE. +into pixmap <em>pm</em>. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns +false. <p> This is a convenience function that converts to a <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> via a <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canDecode">canDecode</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqimageio.html b/doc/html/tqimageio.html index 8661edbdb..42d7226e9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimageio.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimageio.html @@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ compression ratio. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="read"></a>TQImageIO::read () </h3> -Reads an image into memory and returns TRUE if the image was -successfully read; otherwise returns FALSE. +Reads an image into memory and returns true if the image was +successfully read; otherwise returns false. <p> Before reading an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used. @@ -338,8 +338,8 @@ error, whereas 0 means that the IO operation was successful. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="write"></a>TQImageIO::write () </h3> -Writes an image to an IO device and returns TRUE if the image was -successfully written; otherwise returns FALSE. +Writes an image to an IO device and returns true if the image was +successfully written; otherwise returns false. <p> Before writing an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ will be used. iio.<a href="#setFileName">setFileName</a>( "vegeburger.bmp" ); iio.<a href="#setFormat">setFormat</a>( "BMP" ); if ( iio.<a href="#write">write</a>() ) - // returned TRUE if written successfully + // returned true if written successfully </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#setIODevice">setIODevice</a>(), <a href="#setFileName">setFileName</a>(), <a href="#setFormat">setFormat</a>(), <a href="#read">read</a>(), and <a href="tqpixmap.html#save">TQPixmap::save</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqimevent.html b/doc/html/tqimevent.html index 442b0c74d..e9c62c41e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqimevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqimevent.html @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ composition up to that point (which may be an empty string). <h3 class=fn><a name="TQIMEvent"></a>TQIMEvent::TQIMEvent ( <a href="tqevent.html#Type-enum">Type</a> type, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, int cursorPosition ) </h3> -<p> Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to FALSE. <em>type</em> can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent +<p> Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to false. <em>type</em> can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent or TQEvent::IMEndEvent. <em>text</em> contains the current compostion string and <em>cursorPosition</em> the current position of the cursor inside <em>text</em>. @@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ does not want the input method event. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQIMEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event processed the event; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event processed the event; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="selectionLength"></a>TQIMEvent::selectionLength () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqinputdialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqinputdialog-h.html index d1850a209..cda38068e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqinputdialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqinputdialog-h.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ private: enum Type { LineEdit, SpinBox, ComboBox, EditableComboBox }; TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, - bool modal = TRUE, Type type = LineEdit ); //### 4.0: widget flag! + bool modal = true, Type type = LineEdit ); //### 4.0: widget flag! ~TQInputDialog(); TQLineEdit *lineEdit() const; @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public: double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); static TQString getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, const TQStringList &list, - int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, + int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); private slots: diff --git a/doc/html/tqinputdialog.html b/doc/html/tqinputdialog.html index 6d1223af3..8cae46bdf 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqinputdialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqinputdialog.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getText"><b>getText</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#getInteger"><b>getInteger</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>double <a href="#getDouble"><b>getDouble</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getItem"><b>getItem</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#getItem"><b>getItem</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ bar of the dialog. <em>label</em> is the text which is shown to the user floating point number that the line edit will be set to. <em>minValue</em> and <em>maxValue</em> are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose, and <em>decimals</em> is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to TRUE if the user -pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to true if the user +pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is <em>parent</em>; the dialog is called <em>name</em>. The dialog will be modal. <p> This function returns the floating point number which has been @@ -106,8 +106,8 @@ of the dialog. <em>label</em> is the text which is shown to the user integer which the spinbox will be set to. <em>minValue</em> and <em>maxValue</em> are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose, and <em>step</em> is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null *<em>ok</em> will be set to TRUE if the user -pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null *<em>ok</em> will be set to true if the user +pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is <em>parent</em>; the dialog is called <em>name</em>. The dialog will be modal. <p> This function returns the integer which has been entered by the user. @@ -125,28 +125,28 @@ be modal. </pre> -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getItem"></a>TQInputDialog::getItem ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="getItem"></a>TQInputDialog::getItem ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & list, int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool * ok = 0, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list. <em>caption</em> is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. <em>label</em> is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). <em>list</em> is the string list which is inserted into the combobox, and <em>current</em> is the number -of the item which should be the current item. If <em>editable</em> is TRUE -the user can enter their own text; if <em>editable</em> is FALSE the user +of the item which should be the current item. If <em>editable</em> is true +the user can enter their own text; if <em>editable</em> is false the user may only select one of the existing items. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to TRUE if the user -pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to true if the user +pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is <em>parent</em>; the dialog is called <em>name</em>. The dialog will be modal. -<p> This function returns the text of the current item, or if <em>editable</em> is TRUE, the current text of the combobox. +<p> This function returns the text of the current item, or if <em>editable</em> is true, the current text of the combobox. <p> Use this static function like this: <p> <pre> <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> lst; lst << "First" << "Second" << "Third" << "Fourth" << "Fifth"; bool ok; <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> res = TQInputDialog::<a href="#getItem">getItem</a>( - "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, TRUE, &ok, + "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, true, &ok, this ); if ( ok ) { // user selected an item and pressed OK @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ Static convenience function to get a string from the user. <em>caption</em> is t dialog. <em>label</em> is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). <em>text</em> is the default text which is placed in the line edit. The <em>mode</em> is the echo mode the line edit -will use. If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to TRUE if the -user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The +will use. If <em>ok</em> is not-null <em>*</em><em>ok</em> will be set to true if the +user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is <em>parent</em>; the dialog is called <em>name</em>. The dialog will be modal. <p> This function returns the text which has been entered in the line diff --git a/doc/html/tqintcache-h.html b/doc/html/tqintcache-h.html index 7174e24c6..93ecd9ed0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqintcache-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqintcache-h.html @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ class TQIntCache public: TQIntCache( const TQIntCache<type> &c ) : TQGCache(c) {} TQIntCache( int maxCost=100, int size=17 ) - : TQGCache( maxCost, size, IntKey, FALSE, FALSE ) {} + : TQGCache( maxCost, size, IntKey, false, false ) {} ~TQIntCache() { clear(); } TQIntCache<type> &operator=( const TQIntCache<type> &c ) { return (TQIntCache<type>&)TQGCache::operator=(c); } @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ public: type *take( long k ) { return (type *)TQGCache::take_other((const char*)k);} void clear() { TQGCache::clear(); } - type *find( long k, bool ref=TRUE ) const + type *find( long k, bool ref=true ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_other( (const char*)k,ref);} type *operator[]( long k ) const { return (type *)TQGCache::find_other( (const char*)k); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqintcache.html b/doc/html/tqintcache.html index a72ef3ee4..db5b3b13d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqintcache.html +++ b/doc/html/tqintcache.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( long k )</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#take"><b>take</b></a> ( long k )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>type * <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( long k, bool ref = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>type * <a href="#operator[]"><b>operator[]</b></a> ( long k ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#statistics"><b>statistics</b></a> () const</li> </ul> @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ the cache are removed. item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item. <p> There are also methods to <a href="#remove">remove</a>() or <a href="#take">take</a>() an object from the -cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete +cache. Calling <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent). <p> When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, @@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ auto-deletion has been enabled. <p> <p>See also <a href="#totalCost">totalCost</a>(). <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqptrcollection.html#count">TQPtrCollection</a>. -<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>type * <a name="find"></a>TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = true ) const </h3> <p> Returns the item associated with <em>k</em>, or 0 if the key does not -exist in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is TRUE (the default), the item is +exist in the cache. If <em>ref</em> is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is returned. @@ -139,14 +139,14 @@ inserted most recently is returned. </h3> <p> Inserts the item <em>d</em> into the cache with key <em>k</em> and assigns it -a cost of <em>c</em> (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise -returns FALSE. +a cost of <em>c</em> (default 1). Returns true if it succeeds; otherwise +returns false. <p> The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQIntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room for this new item. <p> The parameter <em>p</em> is internal and should be left at the default value (0). -<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost <tt>,</tt> +<p> <b>Warning:</b> If this function returns false (for example, the cost <tt>,</tt> exceeds <a href="#maxCost">maxCost</a>()), you must delete <em>d</em> yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using <em>d</em> after calling this function. Any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ the cache and the pointer to become invalid. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQIntCache::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="maxCost"></a>TQIntCache::maxCost () const </h3> @@ -172,16 +172,16 @@ in the cache, and moves the item to the front of the least recently used list. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is returned. -<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, TRUE ). +<p> This is the same as <a href="#find">find</a>( k, true ). <p> <p>See also <a href="#find">find</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQIntCache::remove ( long k ) </h3> -<p> Removes the item associated with <em>k</em>, and returns TRUE if the -item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Removes the item associated with <em>k</em>, and returns true if the +item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false. <p> The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you -have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE). +have called <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true). <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is removed. <p> All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to diff --git a/doc/html/tqintcacheiterator.html b/doc/html/tqintcacheiterator.html index a56d662dd..a721d60e6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqintcacheiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqintcacheiterator.html @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ that refer an item when that item is removed. <p> TQIntCacheIterator provides an <a href="#operator++">operator++</a>(), and an <a href="#operator+-eq">operator+=</a>() to traverse the cache; <a href="#current">current</a>() and <a href="#currentKey">currentKey</a>() to access the current cache item and its key; <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>() <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(), which return -TRUE if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; -<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(), which returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and <a href="#count">count</a>(), +true if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; +<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(), which returns true if the cache is empty; and <a href="#count">count</a>(), which returns the number of items in the cache. <p> Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ independently from there on. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atFirst"></a>TQIntCacheIterator::atFirst () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the -cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the +cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toFirst">toFirst</a>() and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(). @@ -105,8 +105,8 @@ recently used list. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atLast"></a>TQIntCacheIterator::atLast () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; -otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's +<p> Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; +otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toLast">toLast</a>() and <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>(). @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ operates. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQIntCacheIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQIntCacheIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqintdict.html b/doc/html/tqintdict.html index d25f1a99f..bdc91d5ea 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqintdict.html +++ b/doc/html/tqintdict.html @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ pointers are copied (shallow copy). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQIntDict::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ item will be accessible using <a href="#operator[]">operator[]</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQIntDict::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqintdict.html">TQIntDict</a><type> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQIntDict::operator= ( const <a href="tqintdict.html">TQIntDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -208,8 +208,8 @@ reference to the stream. </h3> <p> Removes the item associated with <em>key</em> from the dictionary. -Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the <em>key</em> is in the -dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful, i.e. if the <em>key</em> is in the +dictionary; otherwise returns false. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. @@ -251,11 +251,11 @@ become invalid. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqintdictiterator.html b/doc/html/tqintdictiterator.html index 7e1430a1a..e68882758 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqintdictiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqintdictiterator.html @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ operates over. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQIntDictIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQIntDictIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqiodevice.html b/doc/html/tqiodevice.html index de139b46e..f97d6dcb5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiodevice.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiodevice.html @@ -150,14 +150,14 @@ after you ask to read it. <a href="#isSynchronous">isSynchronous</a>() and <a hr tell the user how this device operates. <p> <li> CR/LF translation. For simplicity, applications often like to see just a single CR/LF style, and TQIODevice subclasses can -provide this. <a href="#isTranslated">isTranslated</a>() returns TRUE if this object +provide this. <a href="#isTranslated">isTranslated</a>() returns true if this object translates CR/LF to just LF. (This can often be set by the application in the call to open().) <p> <li> Permissions. Some files cannot be written. For example, <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>(), <a href="#isWritable">isWritable</a>() and <a href="#isReadWrite">isReadWrite</a>() tell the application whether it can read from and write to a given device. (This can often be set by the application in the call to <a href="#open">open</a>().) -<p> <li> Finally, <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns TRUE if the device is open, i.e. +<p> <li> Finally, <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns true if the device is open, i.e. after an open() call. <p> </ul> <p> TQIODevice provides numerous pure virtual functions that you need @@ -220,15 +220,15 @@ device. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="at-2"></a>TQIODevice::at ( <a href="tqiodevice.html#Offset">Offset</a> pos )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Virtual function that sets the I/O device position to <em>pos</em>. -Returns TRUE if the position was successfully set, i.e. <em>pos</em> is -within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the position was successfully set, i.e. <em>pos</em> is +within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqsocket.html#at-2">TQSocket</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQIODevice::atEnd () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Virtual function that returns TRUE if the I/O device position is -at the end of the input; otherwise returns FALSE. +Virtual function that returns true if the I/O device position is +at the end of the input; otherwise returns false. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqfile.html#atEnd">TQFile</a> and <a href="tqsocket.html#atEnd">TQSocket</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="close"></a>TQIODevice::close ()<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -266,74 +266,74 @@ device has been reached. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAsynchronous"></a>TQIODevice::isAsynchronous () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise -returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device. +<p> Returns true if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise +returns false, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device. <p> This mode is currently not in use. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isSynchronous">isSynchronous</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isBuffered"></a>TQIODevice::isBuffered () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise -returns FALSE, i.e. the device is a raw device. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise +returns false, i.e. the device is a raw device. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRaw">isRaw</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCombinedAccess"></a>TQIODevice::isCombinedAccess () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct -and sequential) device; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct +and sequential) device; otherwise returns false. <p> This access method is currently not in use. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDirectAccess"></a>TQIODevice::isDirectAccess () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a direct access device; -otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a sequential access +<p> Returns true if the I/O device is a direct access device; +otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a sequential access device. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isSequentialAccess">isSequentialAccess</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isInactive"></a>TQIODevice::isInactive () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not -open; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not +open; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQIODevice::isOpen () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isInactive">isInactive</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x670">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRaw"></a>TQIODevice::isRaw () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns -FALSE, i.e. if the device is a buffered device. +<p> Returns true if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns +false, i.e. if the device is a buffered device. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isBuffered">isBuffered</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadWrite"></a>TQIODevice::isReadWrite () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> -mode; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> +mode; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>() and <a href="#isWritable">isWritable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadable"></a>TQIODevice::isReadable () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadOnly</a> or -<a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> mode; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadOnly</a> or +<a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> mode; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isWritable">isWritable</a>() and <a href="#isReadWrite">isReadWrite</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSequentialAccess"></a>TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the device is a sequential access device; -otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a direct access +<p> Returns true if the device is a sequential access device; +otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a direct access device. <p> Operations involving <a href="#size">size</a>() and <a href="#at">at</a>(int) are not valid on sequential devices. @@ -342,23 +342,23 @@ sequential devices. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSynchronous"></a>TQIODevice::isSynchronous () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise -returns FALSE, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise +returns false, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isAsynchronous">isAsynchronous</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTranslated"></a>TQIODevice::isTranslated () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device translates carriage-return and -linefeed characters; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device translates carriage-return and +linefeed characters; otherwise returns false. <p> A <a href="tqfile.html">TQFile</a> is translated if it is opened with the <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_Translate</a> mode flag. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isWritable"></a>TQIODevice::isWritable () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_WriteOnly</a> or -<a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> mode; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the I/O device was opened using <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_WriteOnly</a> or +<a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_ReadWrite</a> mode; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isReadable">isReadable</a>() and <a href="#isReadWrite">isReadWrite</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="mode"></a>TQIODevice::mode () const @@ -373,8 +373,8 @@ mode. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="open"></a>TQIODevice::open ( int mode )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Opens the I/O device using the specified <em>mode</em>. Returns TRUE if -the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Opens the I/O device using the specified <em>mode</em>. Returns true if +the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns false. <p> The mode parameter <em>mode</em> must be an OR'ed combination of the following flags. <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ Used by subclasses to set the device status (not state) to <em>s</em>. <p> Returns the I/O device status. <p> The I/O device status returns an error code. If <a href="#open">open</a>() returns -FALSE or <a href="#readBlock">readBlock</a>() or <a href="#writeBlock">writeBlock</a>() return -1, this function can +false or <a href="#readBlock">readBlock</a>() or <a href="#writeBlock">writeBlock</a>() return -1, this function can be called to find out the reason why the operation failed. <p> <!-- index IO_Ok --><!-- index IO_ReadError --><!-- index IO_WriteError --><!-- index IO_FatalError --><!-- index IO_OpenError --><!-- index IO_ConnectError --><!-- index IO_AbortError --><!-- index IO_TimeOutError --><!-- index IO_UnspecifiedError --> <p> The status codes are: diff --git a/doc/html/tqiodevicesource.html b/doc/html/tqiodevicesource.html index 3dd34cb07..741052dee 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqiodevicesource.html +++ b/doc/html/tqiodevicesource.html @@ -69,9 +69,9 @@ constructed. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="enableRewind"></a>TQIODeviceSource::enableRewind ( bool on )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>on</em> is set to TRUE then rewinding is enabled. +If <em>on</em> is set to true then rewinding is enabled. No special action is taken. If <em>on</em> is set to -FALSE then rewinding is disabled. +false then rewinding is disabled. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqdatasource.html#enableRewind">TQDataSource</a>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="readyToSend"></a>TQIODeviceSource::readyToSend ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqkeyevent.html b/doc/html/tqkeyevent.html index d9960e6db..58aae0b0b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqkeyevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqkeyevent.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqkeyevent-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQKeyEvent"><b>TQKeyEvent</b></a> ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQKeyEvent"><b>TQKeyEvent</b></a> ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = false, ushort count = 1 )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#key"><b>key</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#ascii"><b>ascii</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>ButtonState <a href="#state"><b>state</b></a> () const</li> @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ mouse and keyboard events for a widget. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqfocusevent.html">TQFocusEvent</a>, <a href="tqwidget.html#grabKeyboard">TQWidget::grabKeyboard</a>(), and <a href="events.html">Event Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQKeyEvent"></a>TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( <a href="tqevent.html#Type-enum">Type</a> type, int key, int ascii, int state, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQKeyEvent"></a>TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( <a href="tqevent.html#Type-enum">Type</a> type, int key, int ascii, int state, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = false, ushort count = 1 ) </h3> <p> Constructs a key event object. @@ -78,9 +78,9 @@ mouse and keyboard events for a widget. known key (e.g. it may be the result of a compose sequence or keyboard macro). <em>ascii</em> is the ASCII code of the key that was pressed or released. <em>state</em> holds the keyboard modifiers. <em>text</em> is the Unicode text that the key generated. If <em>autorep</em> is -TRUE, <a href="#isAutoRepeat">isAutoRepeat</a>() will be TRUE. <em>count</em> is the number of +true, <a href="#isAutoRepeat">isAutoRepeat</a>() will be true. <em>count</em> is the number of single keys. -<p> The accept flag is set to TRUE. +<p> The accept flag is set to true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="accept"></a>TQKeyEvent::accept () </h3> @@ -120,17 +120,17 @@ parent widget. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQKeyEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; -otherwise returns FALSE +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; +otherwise returns false <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAutoRepeat"></a>TQKeyEvent::isAutoRepeat () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and -FALSE if it comes from an initial key press. +<p> Returns true if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and +false if it comes from an initial key press. <p> Note that if the event is a multiple-key compressed event that is -partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either TRUE -or FALSE indeterminately. +partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either true +or false indeterminately. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="key"></a>TQKeyEvent::key () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqkeysequence.html b/doc/html/tqkeysequence.html index 6e899fed2..9b6a551d9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqkeysequence.html +++ b/doc/html/tqkeysequence.html @@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ The maximum is 4. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQKeySequence::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#SequenceMatch-enum">TQt::SequenceMatch</a> <a name="matches"></a>TQKeySequence::matches ( const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & seq ) const </h3> @@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ as integer. If the key sequence is empty, 0 is returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQKeySequence::operator!= ( const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & keysequence ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>keysequence</em> is not equal to this key sequence; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>keysequence</em> is not equal to this key sequence; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQKeySequence::operator= ( const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & keysequence ) </h3> @@ -171,8 +171,8 @@ object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQKeySequence::operator== ( const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> & keysequence ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>keysequence</em> is equal to this key -sequence; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>keysequence</em> is equal to this key +sequence; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="operator[]"></a>TQKeySequence::operator[] ( uint index ) const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqlabel.html b/doc/html/tqlabel.html index c61f87b90..3737f157f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlabel.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlabel.html @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ See the <a href="tqlabel.html#alignment-prop">"alignment"</a> property for detai </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if auto-resizing is enabled, or FALSE if auto-resizing +<p> Returns true if auto-resizing is enabled, or false if auto-resizing is disabled. <p> Auto-resizing is disabled by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoResize">setAutoResize</a>(). @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Draws the label contents using the painter <em>p</em>. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqframe.html#drawContents">TQFrame</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasScaledContents"></a>TQLabel::hasScaledContents () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlabel.html#scaledContents-prop">"scaledContents"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="indent"></a>TQLabel::indent () const </h3><p>Returns the label's text indent in pixels. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ See the <a href="tqlabel.html#pixmap-prop">"pixmap"</a> property for details. See the <a href="tqlabel.html#alignment-prop">"alignment"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoResize"></a>TQLabel::setAutoResize ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Enables auto-resizing if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables it if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +<p> Enables auto-resizing if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables it if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> When auto-resizing is enabled the label will resize itself to fit the contents whenever the contents change. The top-left corner is not moved. This is useful for TQLabel widgets that are not managed by @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ otherwise they are ignored. The <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">DontClip</a> f ignored. <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> applies to both rich text and plain text labels. The <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">BreakAnywhere</a> flag is not supported in TQLabel. <p> If the label has a buddy, the <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">ShowPrefix</a> flag is forced to -TRUE. +true. <p> The default alignment is <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs</tt> if the label doesn't have a buddy and <tt>AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix</tt> if the label has a buddy. If the label contains rich text, additionally <a href="tqt.html#TextFlags-enum">WordBreak</a> is turned on. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ of the widget's current <a href="tqwidget.html#font">font</a>(). <p>This property holds the label's pixmap. <p>If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap. <p> Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the -label if <a href="#autoResize">TQLabel::autoResize</a>() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator, +label if <a href="#autoResize">TQLabel::autoResize</a>() is true. The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setPixmap">setPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#pixmap">pixmap</a>(). @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ if any, is disabled. <p>This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all available space. <p>When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the pixmap to fill the available space. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#scaledContents-prop">scaledContents</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setScaledContents">setScaledContents</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#hasScaledContents">hasScaledContents</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqlayout.html b/doc/html/tqlayout.html index fee21a81c..a1f9d915d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlayout.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlayout.html @@ -192,9 +192,9 @@ larger than <em>r</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdd"></a>TQLayout::autoAdd () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this layout automatically grabs all new +<p> Returns true if this layout automatically grabs all new <a href="#mainWidget">mainWidget</a>()'s new children and adds them as defined by <a href="#addItem">addItem</a>(); -otherwise returns FALSE. This has effect only for top-level +otherwise returns false. This has effect only for top-level layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their mainWidget(). <p> <a href="#autoAdd">autoAdd</a>() is disabled by default. @@ -225,20 +225,20 @@ Invalidates cached information. Reimplementations must call this. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqgridlayout.html#invalidate">TQGridLayout</a> and <a href="tqboxlayout.html#invalidate">TQBoxLayout</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQLayout::isEmpty () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this layout is empty. The default implementation -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this layout is empty. The default implementation +returns false. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#isEmpty">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQLayout::isEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTopLevel"></a>TQLayout::isTopLevel () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a -child of another layout; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a +child of another layout; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlayoutiterator.html">TQLayoutIterator</a> <a name="iterator"></a>TQLayout::iterator ()<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ caller's responsibility to delete the item. See the <a href="tqlayout.html#resizeMode-prop">"resizeMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoAdd"></a>TQLayout::setAutoAdd ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is +If <em>b</em> is true, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is disabled. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If auto-add is enabled, you cannot set stretch factors on the child widgets until the widgets are actually inserted in @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ programs. <p>Examples: <a href="i18n-example.html#x1938">i18n/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQLayout::setEnabled ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables this layout if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, otherwise disables it. +Enables this layout if <em>enable</em> is true, otherwise disables it. <p> An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled layout acts as if it did not exist. <p> By default all layouts are enabled. @@ -359,11 +359,11 @@ See the <a href="tqlayout.html#resizeMode-prop">"resizeMode"</a> property for de See the <a href="tqlayout.html#spacing-prop">"spacing"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSupportsMargin"></a>TQLayout::setSupportsMargin ( bool b )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Sets the value returned by <a href="#supportsMargin">supportsMargin</a>(). If <em>b</em> is TRUE, +Sets the value returned by <a href="#supportsMargin">supportsMargin</a>(). If <em>b</em> is true, <a href="#margin">margin</a>() handling is implemented by the subclass. If <em>b</em> is -FALSE (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level +false (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level layouts. -<p> If <em>b</em> is TRUE, margin handling needs to be implemented in +<p> If <em>b</em> is true, margin handling needs to be implemented in <a href="#setGeometry">setGeometry</a>(), <a href="#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>(), <a href="#minimumSize">minimumSize</a>(), <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>() and <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#heightForWidth">heightForWidth</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#supportsMargin">supportsMargin</a>(). @@ -374,8 +374,8 @@ See the <a href="tqlayout.html#spacing-prop">"spacing"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="supportsMargin"></a>TQLayout::supportsMargin () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this layout supports <a href="#margin-prop">TQLayout::margin</a> on -non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this layout supports <a href="#margin-prop">TQLayout::margin</a> on +non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#margin-prop">margin</a>. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> diff --git a/doc/html/tqlayoutitem.html b/doc/html/tqlayoutitem.html index f5f9492ef..cdd2aebf1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlayoutitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlayoutitem.html @@ -109,9 +109,9 @@ Destroys the TQLayoutItem. <p>Example: <a href="customlayout-example.html#x1495">customlayout/border.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHeightForWidth"></a>TQLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its -width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default implementation returns -FALSE. +Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its +width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns +false. <p> Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. <p> <p>See also <a href="#heightForWidth">heightForWidth</a>() and <a href="tqwidget.html#heightForWidth">TQWidget::heightForWidth</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqlcdnumber-h.html b/doc/html/tqlcdnumber-h.html index 9542d83be..f386063ed 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlcdnumber-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlcdnumber-h.html @@ -146,11 +146,11 @@ private: void internalDisplay( const TQString &); void internalSetString( const TQString& s ); void drawString( const TQString& s, TQPainter &, TQBitArray * = 0, - bool = TRUE ); + bool = true ); //void drawString( const TQString &, TQPainter &, TQBitArray * = 0 ) const; void drawDigit( const TQPoint &, TQPainter &, int, char, char = ' ' ); - void drawSegment( const TQPoint &, char, TQPainter &, int, bool = FALSE ); + void drawSegment( const TQPoint &, char, TQPainter &, int, bool = false ); int ndigits; double val; diff --git a/doc/html/tqlcdnumber.html b/doc/html/tqlcdnumber.html index 84048c93e..ab3f3ecd5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlcdnumber.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlcdnumber.html @@ -160,15 +160,15 @@ Destroys the LCD number. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkOverflow"></a>TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>num</em> is too big to be displayed in its entirety; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>num</em> is too big to be displayed in its entirety; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#display">display</a>(), <a href="#numDigits-prop">numDigits</a>, and <a href="#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkOverflow-2"></a>TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>num</em> is too big to be displayed in its entirety; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>num</em> is too big to be displayed in its entirety; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#display">display</a>(), <a href="#numDigits-prop">numDigits</a>, and <a href="#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="display"></a>TQLCDNumber::display ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s )<tt> [slot]</tt> @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ equivalent. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#mode">mode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="numDigits-prop"></a>numDigits</h3> <p>This property holds the current number of digits displayed. -<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="#smallDecimalPoint-prop">TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is FALSE, the decimal point occupies +<p>Corresponds to the current number of digits. If <a href="#smallDecimalPoint-prop">TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint</a> is false, the decimal point occupies one digit position. <p> <p>See also <a href="#smallDecimalPoint-prop">smallDecimalPoint</a>. @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ one digit position. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setSegmentStyle">setSegmentStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#segmentStyle">segmentStyle</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="smallDecimalPoint-prop"></a>smallDecimalPoint</h3> <p>This property holds the style of the decimal point. -<p>If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. +<p>If true the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn -in a digit position. The default is FALSE. +in a digit position. The default is false. <p> The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal point is drawn between the digits. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mode-prop">mode</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqlibrary.html b/doc/html/tqlibrary.html index b806b76ae..22ff48695 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlibrary.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlibrary.html @@ -121,21 +121,21 @@ look for the file in the platform specific search paths. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQLibrary"></a>TQLibrary::~TQLibrary ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Deletes the TQLibrary object. -<p> The library will be unloaded if <a href="#autoUnload">autoUnload</a>() is TRUE (the +<p> The library will be unloaded if <a href="#autoUnload">autoUnload</a>() is true (the default), otherwise it stays in memory until the application exits. <p> <p>See also <a href="#unload">unload</a>() and <a href="#setAutoUnload">setAutoUnload</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoUnload"></a>TQLibrary::autoUnload () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the library will be automatically unloaded when -this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns FALSE. The -default is TRUE. +Returns true if the library will be automatically unloaded when +this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns false. The +default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoUnload">setAutoUnload</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isLoaded"></a>TQLibrary::isLoaded () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the library is loaded; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the library is loaded; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#unload">unload</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="library"></a>TQLibrary::library () const @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ symbol, e.g. a function pointer from a specific library once: <p> <pre> typedef void (*FunctionType)(); static FunctionType *ptrFunction = 0; - static bool triedResolve = FALSE; + static bool triedResolve = false; if ( !ptrFunction && !triedResolve ) ptrFunction = TQLibrary::<a href="#resolve">resolve</a>( "mylib", "mysymb" ); @@ -262,16 +262,16 @@ call the non-static version of <a href="#resolve">resolve</a>(). <p> <p>See also <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoUnload"></a>TQLibrary::setAutoUnload ( bool enabled ) </h3> -If <em>enabled</em> is TRUE (the default), the wrapper object is set to +If <em>enabled</em> is true (the default), the wrapper object is set to automatically unload the library upon destruction. If <em>enabled</em> -is FALSE, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly +is false, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly call <a href="#unload">unload</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoUnload">autoUnload</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="unload"></a>TQLibrary::unload ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Unloads the library and returns TRUE if the library could be -unloaded; otherwise returns FALSE. +Unloads the library and returns true if the library could be +unloaded; otherwise returns false. <p> This function is called by the destructor if <a href="#autoUnload">autoUnload</a>() is enabled. <p> <p>See also <a href="#resolve">resolve</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqlineedit.html b/doc/html/tqlineedit.html index ec4216229..b76101ba2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlineedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlineedit.html @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator returns <tt>Acceptable</tt>. <p> By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling -<a href="#setFrame">setFrame</a>(FALSE). +<a href="#setFrame">setFrame</a>(false). <p> The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click) that presents some of these editing options. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Clears the contents of the line edit. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearModified"></a>TQLineEdit::clearModified () </h3> -Resets the modified flag to FALSE. +Resets the modified flag to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#modified-prop">modified</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValidator"></a>TQLineEdit::clearValidator ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -289,16 +289,16 @@ ownership is transferred to the caller. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorBackward"></a>TQLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 ) </h3> -Moves the cursor back <em>steps</em> characters. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE each +Moves the cursor back <em>steps</em> characters. If <em>mark</em> is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if <em>mark</em> is -FALSE the selection is cleared. +false the selection is cleared. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorForward">cursorForward</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorForward"></a>TQLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 ) </h3> -Moves the cursor forward <em>steps</em> characters. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE +Moves the cursor forward <em>steps</em> characters. If <em>mark</em> is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if <em>mark</em> is -FALSE the selection is cleared. +false the selection is cleared. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorBackward">cursorBackward</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="cursorPosition"></a>TQLineEdit::cursorPosition () const @@ -306,13 +306,13 @@ FALSE the selection is cleared. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#cursorPosition-prop">"cursorPosition"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorWordBackward"></a>TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark ) </h3> -Moves the cursor one word backward. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the word +Moves the cursor one word backward. If <em>mark</em> is true, the word is also selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorWordForward">cursorWordForward</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorWordForward"></a>TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark ) </h3> -Moves the cursor one word forward. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the word is +Moves the cursor one word forward. If <em>mark</em> is true, the word is also selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorWordBackward">cursorWordBackward</a>(). @@ -340,38 +340,38 @@ Deselects any selected text. </h3><p>Returns the displayed text. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#displayText-prop">"displayText"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragEnabled"></a>TQLineEdit::dragEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#dragEnabled-prop">"dragEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlineedit.html#EchoMode-enum">EchoMode</a> <a name="echoMode"></a>TQLineEdit::echoMode () const </h3><p>Returns the line edit's echo mode. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#echoMode-prop">"echoMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="edited"></a>TQLineEdit::edited () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#edited-prop">"edited"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="end"></a>TQLineEdit::end ( bool mark ) </h3> Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already -there. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, text is selected towards the last +there. If <em>mark</em> is true, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved. <p> <p>See also <a href="#home">home</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="frame"></a>TQLineEdit::frame () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#frame-prop">"frame"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="getSelection"></a>TQLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. use <a href="#selectedText">selectedText</a>(), <a href="#selectionStart">selectionStart</a>() <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAcceptableInput"></a>TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#acceptableInput-prop">"acceptableInput"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasSelectedText"></a>TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if there is any text selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if there is any text selected; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">"hasSelectedText"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="home"></a>TQLineEdit::home ( bool mark ) </h3> Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is -already there. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, text is selected towards the +already there. If <em>mark</em> is true, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved. <p> <p>See also <a href="#end">end</a>(). @@ -386,16 +386,16 @@ result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line edit. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isModified"></a>TQLineEdit::isModified () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#modified-prop">"modified"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQLineEdit::isReadOnly () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#readOnly-prop">"readOnly"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRedoAvailable"></a>TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if redo is available; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#redoAvailable-prop">"redoAvailable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isUndoAvailable"></a>TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if undo is available; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlineedit.html#undoAvailable-prop">"undoAvailable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="keyPressEvent"></a>TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( <a href="tqkeyevent.html">TQKeyEvent</a> * e )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -602,8 +602,8 @@ frame. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setFrame">setFrame</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#frame">frame</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasSelectedText-prop"></a>hasSelectedText</h3> <p>This property holds whether there is any text selected. -<p>hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been -selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p>hasSelectedText() returns true if some or all of the text has been +selected by the user; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#hasSelectedText">hasSelectedText</a>(). @@ -668,16 +668,16 @@ string length. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="modified-prop"></a>modified</h3> <p>This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user. <p>The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value -of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line +of false and is changed to true whenever the user changes the line edit's contents. <p> This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() -returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the +returns false (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value. <p> Calling <a href="#clearModified">clearModified</a>() or <a href="#setText">setText</a>() resets the modified flag to -FALSE. +false. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#isModified">isModified</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readOnly-prop"></a>readOnly</h3> @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ but cannot edit it. <p>This property holds the line edit's text. <p>Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and -resets the <a href="#modified-prop">modified</a> property to FALSE. The text is not +resets the <a href="#modified-prop">modified</a> property to false. The text is not validated when inserted with <a href="#setText">setText</a>(). <p> The text is truncated to <a href="#maxLength">maxLength</a>() length. <p> <p>See also <a href="#insert">insert</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistbox-h.html b/doc/html/tqlistbox-h.html index 55bb17a5b..e0797110d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistbox-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistbox-h.html @@ -205,9 +205,9 @@ public: void viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ); #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT - bool dragSelect() const { return TRUE; } + bool dragSelect() const { return true; } void setDragSelect( bool ) {} - bool autoScroll() const { return TRUE; } + bool autoScroll() const { return true; } void setAutoScroll( bool ) {} bool autoScrollBar() const { return vScrollBarMode() == Auto; } void setAutoScrollBar( bool enable ) { setVScrollBarMode( enable ? Auto : AlwaysOff ); } @@ -217,9 +217,9 @@ public: void setAutoBottomScrollBar( bool enable ) { setHScrollBarMode( enable ? Auto : AlwaysOff ); } bool bottomScrollBar() const { return hScrollBarMode() != AlwaysOff; } void setBottomScrollBar( bool enable ) { setHScrollBarMode( enable ? AlwaysOn : AlwaysOff ); } - bool smoothScrolling() const { return FALSE; } + bool smoothScrolling() const { return false; } void setSmoothScrolling( bool ) {} - bool autoUpdate() const { return TRUE; } + bool autoUpdate() const { return true; } void setAutoUpdate( bool ) {} void setFixedVisibleLines( int lines ) { setRowMode( lines ); } int inSort( const TQListBoxItem * ); @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ public: TQListBoxItem *firstItem() const; - void sort( bool ascending = TRUE ); + void sort( bool ascending = true ); public slots: void clear(); @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ private: void drawRubber(); void doRubberSelection( const TQRect &old, const TQRect &rubber ); void handleItemChange( TQListBoxItem *old, bool shift, bool control ); - void selectRange( TQListBoxItem *from, TQListBoxItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = FALSE ); + void selectRange( TQListBoxItem *from, TQListBoxItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = false ); void emitChangedSignal( bool ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistbox.html b/doc/html/tqlistbox.html index 5868d2216..329a14dc0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistbox.html @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQListBoxItem * <a href="#itemAt"><b>itemAt</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#itemRect"><b>itemRect</b></a> ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQListBoxItem * <a href="#firstItem"><b>firstItem</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> ( bool ascending = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> ( bool ascending = true )</li> </ul> <h2>Public Slots</h2> <ul> @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ cases TQListBox will add scroll bars, as appropriate, in at least one direction. <p> If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary (the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have -the same height by calling <a href="#setVariableHeight">setVariableHeight</a>(FALSE). The same +the same height by calling <a href="#setVariableHeight">setVariableHeight</a>(false). The same applies to a column's width, see <a href="#setVariableWidth">setVariableWidth</a>(). <p> The TQListBox's items are <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> objects. TQListBox provides methods to insert new items as strings, as pixmaps, and as @@ -327,22 +327,22 @@ Destroys the list box. Deletes all list box items. </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if <a href="tqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode">hScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">Auto</a>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <a href="tqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode">hScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">Auto</a>; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoScrollBar"></a>TQListBox::autoScrollBar () const </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">Auto</a>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">Auto</a>; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bottomScrollBar"></a>TQListBox::bottomScrollBar () const </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns FALSE if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>; otherwise -returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>; otherwise +returns true. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="cellHeight"></a>TQListBox::cellHeight ( int i ) const </h3> @@ -662,21 +662,21 @@ Inverts the selection. Only works in <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> and selection mode. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMultiSelection"></a>TQListBox::isMultiSelection () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#multiSelection-prop">"multiSelection"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRubberSelecting"></a>TQListBox::isRubberSelecting () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the user is selecting items using a rubber band -rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the user is selecting items using a rubber band +rectangle; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQListBox::isSelected ( int i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected-2"></a>TQListBox::isSelected ( const <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> * i ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> * <a name="item"></a>TQListBox::item ( int index ) const </h3> @@ -704,20 +704,20 @@ or is not currently visible. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="itemVisible"></a>TQListBox::itemVisible ( int index ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item at position <em>index</em> is at least partly -visible; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item at position <em>index</em> is at least partly +visible; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="itemVisible-2"></a>TQListBox::itemVisible ( const <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> * item ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>item</em> is at least partly visible; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>item</em> is at least partly visible; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="itemYPos"></a>TQListBox::itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in <em>*yPos</em>, of the list box -item at position <em>index</em> in the list. Returns FALSE if the item is +item at position <em>index</em> in the list. Returns false if the item is outside the visible area. <h3 class=fn>long <a name="maxItemWidth"></a>TQListBox::maxItemWidth () const @@ -843,13 +843,13 @@ See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">"rowMode"</a> property for details </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns FALSE if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>; otherwise -returns TRUE. +<p> Returns false if <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode">vScrollBarMode</a>() is <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>; otherwise +returns true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQListBox::selectAll ( bool select )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> In <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> and <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a> modes, this function sets all items to -be selected if <em>select</em> is TRUE, and to be unselected if <em>select</em> is FALSE. +be selected if <em>select</em> is true, and to be unselected if <em>select</em> is false. <p> In <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> and <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a> modes, this function only changes the selection status of <a href="#currentItem">currentItem</a>(). @@ -908,14 +908,14 @@ See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#selectionMode-prop">"selectionMode"</a> property </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoScrollBar"></a>TQListBox::setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable ) </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBottomItem"></a>TQListBox::setBottomItem ( int index )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ is displayed in the bottom row of the list box. </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setHScrollBarMode">setHScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setColumnMode"></a>TQListBox::setColumnMode ( <a href="tqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">LayoutMode</a> )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -958,23 +958,23 @@ See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#rowMode-prop">"rowMode"</a> property for details </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true sets <a href="tqscrollview.html#setVScrollBarMode">setVScrollBarMode</a>() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOn</a>; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">AlwaysOff</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected"></a>TQListBox::setSelected ( <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> * item, bool select )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Selects <em>item</em> if <em>select</em> is TRUE or unselects it if <em>select</em> -is FALSE, and repaints the item appropriately. +Selects <em>item</em> if <em>select</em> is true or unselects it if <em>select</em> +is false, and repaints the item appropriately. <p> If the list box is a <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> selection list box and <em>select</em> is -TRUE, <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>() calls <a href="#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>(). +true, <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>() calls <a href="#setCurrentItem">setCurrentItem</a>(). <p> If the list box is a <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> selection list box, <em>select</em> is -FALSE, setSelected() calls <a href="#clearSelection">clearSelection</a>(). +false, setSelected() calls <a href="#clearSelection">clearSelection</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#multiSelection-prop">multiSelection</a>, <a href="#currentItem-prop">currentItem</a>, <a href="#clearSelection">clearSelection</a>(), and <a href="#currentItem-prop">currentItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected-2"></a>TQListBox::setSelected ( int index, bool select ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> If <em>select</em> is TRUE the item at position <em>index</em> is selected; +<p> If <em>select</em> is true the item at position <em>index</em> is selected; otherwise the item is deselected. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelectionMode"></a>TQListBox::setSelectionMode ( <a href="tqlistbox.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a> )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -989,9 +989,9 @@ See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop">"variableHeight"</a> proper <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setVariableWidth"></a>TQListBox::setVariableWidth ( bool )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets whether this list box has variable-width columns. See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop">"variableWidth"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sort"></a>TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sort"></a>TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = true ) </h3> -If <em>ascending</em> is TRUE sorts the items in ascending order; +If <em>ascending</em> is true sorts the items in ascending order; otherwise sorts in descending order. <p> To compare the items, the text (<a href="tqlistboxitem.html#text">TQListBoxItem::text</a>()) of the items is used. @@ -1035,7 +1035,7 @@ Returns <a href="tqscrollview.html#contentsWidth">contentsWidth</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="triggerUpdate"></a>TQListBox::triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout ) </h3> Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the -current event loop iteration. If <em>doLayout</em> is TRUE, the layout +current event loop iteration. If <em>doLayout</em> is true, the layout is also redone. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="updateItem"></a>TQListBox::updateItem ( int index )<tt> [protected]</tt> @@ -1048,10 +1048,10 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Repaints the <a href="tqlistboxitem.html">TQListBoxItem</a> <em>i</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="variableHeight"></a>TQListBox::variableHeight () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#variableHeight-prop">"variableHeight"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="variableWidth"></a>TQListBox::variableWidth () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistbox.html#variableWidth-prop">"variableWidth"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistbox.html#LayoutMode-enum">LayoutMode</a> <a name="columnMode-prop"></a>columnMode</h3> @@ -1082,10 +1082,10 @@ and the list box scrolled as necessary. <p> <p>This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode. <p>Consider using the <a href="#selectionMode-prop">TQListBox::selectionMode</a> property instead of this property. -<p> When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and -to Single selection mode if set to FALSE. -<p> When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in -Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is +<p> When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to true and +to Single selection mode if set to false. +<p> When getting this property, true is returned if the list box is in +Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and false if it is in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode. <p> <p>See also <a href="#selectionMode-prop">selectionMode</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistboxitem.html b/doc/html/tqlistboxitem.html index 94cc06b35..688c8be45 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistboxitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistboxitem.html @@ -102,20 +102,20 @@ convenience and compatibility. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqlistboxtext.html#height">TQListBoxText</a> and <a href="tqlistboxpixmap.html#height">TQListBoxPixmap</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCurrent"></a>TQListBoxItem::isCurrent () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item is the current item; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the item is the current item; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlistbox.html#currentItem-prop">TQListBox::currentItem</a>, <a href="tqlistbox.html#item">TQListBox::item</a>(), and <a href="#isSelected">isSelected</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelectable"></a>TQListBoxItem::isSelectable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item is selectable (the default); otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this item is selectable (the default); otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelectable">setSelectable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQListBoxItem::isSelected () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlistbox.html#isSelected">TQListBox::isSelected</a>() and <a href="#isCurrent">isCurrent</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="listboxcombo-example.html#x1409">listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp</a>. @@ -169,13 +169,13 @@ extensions to this class. </h3> Defines whether the list box item is responsible for drawing itself in a highlighted state when being selected. -<p> If <em>b</em> is FALSE (the default), the list box will draw some +<p> If <em>b</em> is false (the default), the list box will draw some default highlight indicator before calling <a href="#paint">paint</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#selected">selected</a>() and <a href="#paint">paint</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelectable"></a>TQListBoxItem::setSelectable ( bool b ) </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE (the default) then this item can be selected by +If <em>b</em> is true (the default) then this item can be selected by the user; otherwise this item cannot be selected by the user. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isSelectable">isSelectable</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistview-h.html b/doc/html/tqlistview-h.html index 34b20b5b1..44422bef6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistview-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistview-h.html @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ public: virtual void setRootIsDecorated( bool ); bool rootIsDecorated() const; - virtual void setSorting( int column, bool ascending = TRUE ); + virtual void setSorting( int column, bool ascending = true ); int sortColumn() const; void setSortColumn( int column ); SortOrder sortOrder() const; @@ -487,9 +487,9 @@ private: void reconfigureItems(); void widthChanged(const TQListViewItem*, int c); void handleItemChange( TQListViewItem *old, bool shift, bool control ); - void selectRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = FALSE ); + void selectRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = false ); bool selectRange( TQListViewItem *newItem, TQListViewItem *oldItem, TQListViewItem *anchorItem ); - bool clearRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool includeFirst = TRUE ); + bool clearRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool includeFirst = true ); void doAutoScroll( const TQPoint &cursorPos ); TQListViewPrivate * d; @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ private: ToggleState storedState( void *key ) const; void stateChange( ToggleState s ); void restoreState( void *key, int depth = 0 ); - void updateController( bool update = TRUE , bool store = FALSE ); + void updateController( bool update = true , bool store = false ); void updateStoredState( void *key ); void setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store ); void setCurrentState( ToggleState s ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistview.html b/doc/html/tqlistview.html index c08528004..e8587f86c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistview.html @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#itemMargin"><b>itemMargin</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setRootIsDecorated"><b>setRootIsDecorated</b></a> ( bool )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#rootIsDecorated"><b>rootIsDecorated</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSorting"><b>setSorting</b></a> ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSorting"><b>setSorting</b></a> ( int column, bool ascending = true )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#sortColumn"><b>sortColumn</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setSortColumn"><b>setSortColumn</b></a> ( int column )</li> <li class=fn>SortOrder <a href="#sortOrder"><b>sortOrder</b></a> () const</li> @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus just using column 0. <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><a href="#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>() <td valign="top">Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><a href="#setTreeStepSize">setTreeStepSize</a>() <td valign="top">Sets how many pixels an item's children are indented relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ column. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="adjustColumn"></a>TQListView::adjustColumn ( int col )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> Adjusts the column <em>col</em> to its preferred width <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="allColumnsShowFocus"></a>TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#allColumnsShowFocus-prop">"allColumnsShowFocus"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="childCount"></a>TQListView::childCount () const </h3><p>Returns the number of parentless (top-level) <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> objects in this TQListView. @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ Please don't modify the header behind the list view's back. Hides the column specified at <em>column</em>. This is a convenience function that calls <a href="#setColumnWidth">setColumnWidth</a>( <em>column</em>, 0 ). <p> Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using -the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(FALSE, +the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(false, <em>column</em>) on the list views header. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setColumnWidth">setColumnWidth</a>(). @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Inverts the selection. Only works in <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> and selection modes. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMultiSelection"></a>TQListView::isMultiSelection () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#multiSelection-prop">"multiSelection"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQListView::isOpen ( const <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * item ) const </h3> @@ -693,12 +693,12 @@ Identical to <em>item</em>->isOpen(). Provided for completeness. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRenaming"></a>TQListView::isRenaming () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQListView::isSelected ( const <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the list view item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the list view item <em>i</em> is selected; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#isSelected">TQListViewItem::isSelected</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * <a name="itemAt"></a>TQListView::itemAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & viewPos ) const @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ Ensures that the header is correctly sized and positioned when the resize event <em>e</em> occurs. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistview.html#ResizeMode-enum">ResizeMode</a> <a name="resizeMode"></a>TQListView::resizeMode () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#resizeMode-prop">"resizeMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="returnPressed"></a>TQListView::returnPressed ( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -897,11 +897,11 @@ global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click was outside the list). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rootIsDecorated"></a>TQListView::rootIsDecorated () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop">"rootIsDecorated"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQListView::selectAll ( bool select )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>select</em> is TRUE, all the items get selected; otherwise all +If <em>select</em> is true, all the items get selected; otherwise all the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Multi</a> and <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Extended</a>. In <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> and <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">NoSelection</a> mode the selection of the current item is just set to <em>select</em>. @@ -1002,8 +1002,8 @@ See the <a href="tqlistview.html#itemMargin-prop">"itemMargin"</a> property for See the <a href="tqlistview.html#multiSelection-prop">"multiSelection"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOpen"></a>TQListView::setOpen ( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * item, bool open )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets <em>item</em> to be open if <em>open</em> is TRUE and <em>item</em> is -expandable, and to be closed if <em>open</em> is FALSE. Repaints +Sets <em>item</em> to be open if <em>open</em> is true and <em>item</em> is +expandable, and to be closed if <em>open</em> is false. Repaints accordingly. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">TQListViewItem::setOpen</a>() and <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setExpandable">TQListViewItem::setExpandable</a>(). @@ -1015,10 +1015,10 @@ See the <a href="tqlistview.html#resizeMode-prop">"resizeMode"</a> property for See the <a href="tqlistview.html#rootIsDecorated-prop">"rootIsDecorated"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected"></a>TQListView::setSelected ( <a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * item, bool selected )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>selected</em> is TRUE the <em>item</em> is selected; otherwise it is +If <em>selected</em> is true the <em>item</em> is selected; otherwise it is unselected. <p> If the list view is in <a href="#SelectionMode-enum">Single</a> selection mode and <em>selected</em> is -TRUE, the currently selected item is unselected and <em>item</em> is +true, the currently selected item is unselected and <em>item</em> is made current. Unlike <a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setSelected">TQListViewItem::setSelected</a>(), this function updates the list view as necessary and emits the <a href="#selectionChanged">selectionChanged</a>() signals. @@ -1056,10 +1056,10 @@ to sort the list view. Sets the sort order for the items in the list view to <em>order</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSorting"></a>TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSorting"></a>TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the list view to be sorted by column <em>column</em> in ascending -order if <em>ascending</em> is TRUE or descending order if it is FALSE. +order if <em>ascending</em> is true or descending order if it is false. <p> If <em>column</em> is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort columns by clicking on the column headers. If <em>column</em> is larger than the number of columns the user must click on a column @@ -1069,10 +1069,10 @@ header to sort the list view. </h3><p>Sets the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#treeStepSize-prop">"treeStepSize"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showSortIndicator"></a>TQListView::showSortIndicator () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#showSortIndicator-prop">"showSortIndicator"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showToolTips"></a>TQListView::showToolTips () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqlistview.html#showToolTips-prop">"showToolTips"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="sort"></a>TQListView::sort ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -1124,10 +1124,10 @@ Updates the sizes of the viewport, header, scroll bars and so on. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="allColumnsShowFocus-prop"></a>allColumnsShowFocus</h3> <p>This property holds whether items should show <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> using all columns. -<p>If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection +<p>If this property is true all columns will show focus and selection states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus. -<p> The default is FALSE. -<p> Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable +<p> The default is false. +<p> Setting this to true if it's not necessary may cause noticeable flicker. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAllColumnsShowFocus">setAllColumnsShowFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#allColumnsShowFocus">allColumnsShowFocus</a>(). @@ -1185,7 +1185,7 @@ undefined. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rootIsDecorated-prop"></a>rootIsDecorated</h3> <p>This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items. <p>Open/close signs are small <b>+</b> or <b>-</b> symbols in windows -style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE. +style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setRootIsDecorated">setRootIsDecorated</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#rootIsDecorated">rootIsDecorated</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistview.html#SelectionMode-enum">SelectionMode</a> <a name="selectionMode-prop"></a>selectionMode</h3> @@ -1197,17 +1197,17 @@ style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setSelectionMode">setSelectionMode</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#selectionMode">selectionMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showSortIndicator-prop"></a>showSortIndicator</h3> <p>This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator. -<p>If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the +<p>If this property is true, an arrow is drawn in the header of the list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents. The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is -FALSE (don't show an indicator). +false (don't show an indicator). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqheader.html#setSortIndicator">TQHeader::setSortIndicator</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setShowSortIndicator">setShowSortIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#showSortIndicator">showSortIndicator</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showToolTips-prop"></a>showToolTips</h3> <p>This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setShowToolTips">setShowToolTips</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#showToolTips">showToolTips</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="treeStepSize-prop"></a>treeStepSize</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqlistviewitem.html b/doc/html/tqlistviewitem.html index c303700e0..ea4621cab 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqlistviewitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqlistviewitem.html @@ -201,8 +201,8 @@ view's font changes, for example. <td valign="top">Called whenever the user clicks on the item or presses Space when the item is the current item. </table></center> -<p> Some subclasses call <a href="#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>(TRUE) even when they have no -children, and populate themselves when <a href="#setup">setup</a>() or <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(TRUE) is +<p> Some subclasses call <a href="#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>(true) even when they have no +children, and populate themselves when <a href="#setup">setup</a>() or <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(true) is called. The <a href="dirview-example.html">dirview/dirview.cpp</a> example program uses this technique to start up quickly: The files and subdirectories in a directory aren't inserted into the tree until they're actually @@ -269,8 +269,8 @@ allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="acceptDrop"></a>TQListViewItem::acceptDrop ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * mime ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item can accept drops of type <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> <em>mime</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> The default implementation does nothing and returns FALSE. A +Returns true if the item can accept drops of type <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> <em>mime</em>; otherwise returns false. +<p> The default implementation does nothing and returns false. A subclass must reimplement this to accept drops. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="activate"></a>TQListViewItem::activate ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -285,8 +285,8 @@ on this item or presses Space on it. When called from a reimplementation of <a href="#activate">activate</a>(), this function gives information on how the item was activated. Otherwise the behavior is undefined. -<p> If activate() was caused by a mouse press, the function sets <em>pos</em> to where the user clicked and returns TRUE; otherwise it -returns FALSE and does not change <em>pos</em>. +<p> If activate() was caused by a mouse press, the function sets <em>pos</em> to where the user clicked and returns true; otherwise it +returns false and does not change <em>pos</em>. <p> <em>pos</em> is relative to the top-left corner of this item. <p> <b>Warning:</b> We recommend that you ignore this function; it is scheduled to become obsolete. @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Returns the depth of this item. <p>Example: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1686">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::dragEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item can be dragged; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this item can be dragged; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDragEnabled">setDragEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="dragEntered"></a>TQListViewItem::dragEntered ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ reimplement this function. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dropEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::dropEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item accepts drops; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this item accepts drops; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDropEnabled">setDropEnabled</a>() and <a href="#acceptDrop">acceptDrop</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="dropped"></a>TQListViewItem::dropped ( <a href="tqdropevent.html">TQDropEvent</a> * e )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -400,39 +400,39 @@ open children. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::isEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this item is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExpandable"></a>TQListViewItem::isExpandable () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this item is expandable even when it has no -children; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this item is expandable even when it has no +children; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQListViewItem::isOpen () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this list view item has children <em>and</em> they are -not explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this list view item has children <em>and</em> they are +not explicitly hidden; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelectable"></a>TQListViewItem::isSelectable () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the item is selectable (as it is by default); -otherwise returns FALSE +<p> Returns true if the item is selectable (as it is by default); +otherwise returns false <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelectable">setSelectable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQListViewItem::isSelected () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this item is selected; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>(), <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">TQListView::setSelected</a>(), and <a href="tqlistview.html#selectionChanged">TQListView::selectionChanged</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="listviews-example.html#x156">listviews/listviews.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVisible"></a>TQListViewItem::isVisible () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item is visible; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item is visible; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setVisible">setVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * <a name="itemAbove"></a>TQListViewItem::itemAbove () @@ -497,8 +497,8 @@ in the list view. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="multiLinesEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::multiLinesEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item can display multiple lines of text in its -columns; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item can display multiple lines of text in its +columns; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqlistviewitem.html">TQListViewItem</a> * <a name="nextSibling"></a>TQListViewItem::nextSibling () const </h3> @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ Returns the pixmap for <em>column</em>, or 0 if there is no pixmap for <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="renameEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::renameEnabled ( int col ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this item can be in-place renamed in column <em>col</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this item can be in-place renamed in column <em>col</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint"></a>TQListViewItem::repaint () const </h3> @@ -600,32 +600,32 @@ extensions to this class. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqchecklistitem.html#rtti">TQCheckListItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDragEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>allow</em> is TRUE, the list view starts a drag (see +If <em>allow</em> is true, the list view starts a drag (see <a href="tqlistview.html#dragObject">TQListView::dragObject</a>()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on this item. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDropEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>allow</em> is TRUE, the list view accepts drops onto the item; +If <em>allow</em> is true, the list view accepts drops onto the item; otherwise drops are not allowed. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::setEnabled ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE the item is enabled; otherwise it is disabled. +If <em>b</em> is true the item is enabled; otherwise it is disabled. Disabled items are drawn differently (e.g. grayed-out) and are not accessible by the user. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setExpandable"></a>TQListViewItem::setExpandable ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets this item to be expandable even if it has no children if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, and to be expandable only if it has children if <em>enable</em> is FALSE (the default). +Sets this item to be expandable even if it has no children if <em>enable</em> is true, and to be expandable only if it has children if <em>enable</em> is false (the default). <p> The dirview example uses this in the canonical fashion. It checks whether the directory is empty in <a href="#setup">setup</a>() and calls -<a href="#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>(TRUE) if not; in <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>() it reads the contents of +<a href="#setExpandable">setExpandable</a>(true) if not; in <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>() it reads the contents of the directory and inserts items accordingly. This strategy means that dirview can display the entire file system without reading very much at startup. <p> Note that root items are not expandable by the user unless -<a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">TQListView::setRootIsDecorated</a>() is set to TRUE. +<a href="tqlistview.html#setRootIsDecorated">TQListView::setRootIsDecorated</a>() is set to true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelectable">setSelectable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setHeight"></a>TQListViewItem::setHeight ( int height )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -640,16 +640,16 @@ of pixels. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMultiLinesEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::setMultiLinesEnabled ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE each of the item's columns may contain multiple +If <em>b</em> is true each of the item's columns may contain multiple lines of text; otherwise each of them may only contain a single line. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOpen"></a>TQListViewItem::setOpen ( bool o )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Opens or closes an item, i.e. shows or hides an item's children. -<p> If <em>o</em> is TRUE all child items are shown initially. The user can +<p> If <em>o</em> is true all child items are shown initially. The user can hide them by clicking the <b>-</b> icon to the left of the item. -If <em>o</em> is FALSE, the children of this item are initially hidden. +If <em>o</em> is false, the children of this item are initially hidden. The user can show them by clicking the <b>+</b> icon to the left of the item. <p> <p>See also <a href="#height">height</a>(), <a href="#totalHeight">totalHeight</a>(), and <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>(). @@ -665,13 +665,13 @@ non-negative. <p>Example: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1691">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRenameEnabled"></a>TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled ( int col, bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, this item can be in-place renamed in the column +If <em>b</em> is true, this item can be in-place renamed in the column <em>col</em> by the user; otherwise it cannot be renamed in-place. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelectable"></a>TQListViewItem::setSelectable ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets this item to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is TRUE (the -default) or not to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Sets this item to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is true (the +default) or not to be selectable if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> The user is not able to select a non-selectable item using either the keyboard or the mouse. This also applies for the application programmer (e.g. <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>() respects this value). @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ programmer (e.g. <a href="#setSelected">setSelected</a>() respects this value). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSelected"></a>TQListViewItem::setSelected ( bool s )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>s</em> is TRUE this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected. +If <em>s</em> is true this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected. <p> This function does not maintain any invariants or repaint anything -- <a href="tqlistview.html#setSelected">TQListView::setSelected</a>() does that. <p> <p>See also <a href="#height">height</a>() and <a href="#totalHeight">totalHeight</a>(). @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ text. <p>Examples: <a href="addressbook-example.html#x595">addressbook/centralwidget.cpp</a> and <a href="outliner-example.html#x1916">xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setVisible"></a>TQListViewItem::setVisible ( bool b ) </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, the item is made visible; otherwise it is hidden. +If <em>b</em> is true, the item is made visible; otherwise it is hidden. <p> If the item is not visible, <a href="#itemAbove">itemAbove</a>() and <a href="#itemBelow">itemBelow</a>() will never return this item, although you still can reach it by using e.g. <a href="tqlistviewitemiterator.html">TQListViewItemIterator</a>. @@ -722,8 +722,8 @@ configuration (sort column and direction). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="sortChildItems"></a>TQListViewItem::sortChildItems ( int column, bool ascending )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sorts this item's children using column <em>column</em>. This is done in -ascending order if <em>ascending</em> is TRUE and in descending order if -<em>ascending</em> is FALSE. +ascending order if <em>ascending</em> is true and in descending order if +<em>ascending</em> is false. <p> Asks some of the children to sort their children. (<a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> and TQListViewItem ensure that all on-screen objects are properly sorted but may avoid or defer sorting other objects in order to be diff --git a/doc/html/tqmacmime.html b/doc/html/tqmacmime.html index 38e4a7797..cc397853a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmacmime.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmacmime.html @@ -102,8 +102,8 @@ Returns a list of all currently defined TQMacMime objects of type <em>t</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canConvert"></a>TQMacMime::canConvert ( const char * mime, int flav )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the convertor can convert (both ways) between -<em>mime</em> and <em>flav</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the convertor can convert (both ways) between +<em>mime</em> and <em>flav</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> All subclasses must reimplement this pure virtual function. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><TQByteArray> <a name="convertFromMime"></a>TQMacMime::convertFromMime ( <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> data, const char * mime, int flav )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmainwindow-h.html b/doc/html/tqmainwindow-h.html index f3bfa8ae2..576b8a67a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmainwindow-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmainwindow-h.html @@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ public: bool isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, Dock dock ) const; bool isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, TQDockArea *area ) const; - virtual void addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ); + virtual void addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ); virtual void addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, const TQString &label, - Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ); + Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ); virtual void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop ); virtual void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ); virtual void removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow * ); @@ -147,23 +147,23 @@ public: TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows( Dock dock ) const; TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows() const; - void lineUpDockWindows( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ); + void lineUpDockWindows( bool keepNewLines = false ); bool isDockMenuEnabled() const; // compatibility stuff bool hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR - void addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ); + void addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ); void addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString &label, - Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ); + Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ); void moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop ); void moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ); void removeToolBar( TQDockWindow * ); bool toolBarsMovable() const; TQPtrList<TQToolBar> toolBars( Dock dock ) const; - void lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ); + void lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = false ); #endif virtual TQDockArea *dockingArea( const TQPoint &p ); @@ -216,11 +216,11 @@ protected: private slots: void slotPlaceChanged(); - void doLineUp() { lineUpDockWindows( TRUE ); } + void doLineUp() { lineUpDockWindows( true ); } private: TQMainWindowPrivate * d; - void triggerLayout( bool deleteLayout = TRUE); + void triggerLayout( bool deleteLayout = true); bool dockMainWindow( TQObject *dock ); #ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR diff --git a/doc/html/tqmainwindow.html b/doc/html/tqmainwindow.html index a24bc8e6d..932fc1d3c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmainwindow.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmainwindow.html @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ bar. <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setDockEnabled-2"><b>setDockEnabled</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isDockEnabled-3"><b>isDockEnabled</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isDockEnabled-4"><b>isDockEnabled</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addDockWindow"><b>addDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addDockWindow-2"><b>addDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addDockWindow"><b>addDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addDockWindow-2"><b>addDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#moveDockWindow"><b>moveDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#moveDockWindow-2"><b>moveDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeDockWindow"><b>removeDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )</li> @@ -65,17 +65,17 @@ bar. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#getLocation"><b>getLocation</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> <a href="#dockWindows"><b>dockWindows</b></a> ( Dock dock ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> <a href="#dockWindows-2"><b>dockWindows</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#lineUpDockWindows"><b>lineUpDockWindows</b></a> ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#lineUpDockWindows"><b>lineUpDockWindows</b></a> ( bool keepNewLines = false )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isDockMenuEnabled"><b>isDockMenuEnabled</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasDockWindow"><b>hasDockWindow</b></a> ( TQDockWindow * dw )</li> -<li class=fn>void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn>void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void removeToolBar ( TQDockWindow * ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>bool toolBarsMovable () const <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>TQPtrList<TQToolBar> <a href="#toolBars"><b>toolBars</b></a> ( Dock dock ) const</li> -<li class=fn>void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>TQDockArea * <a href="#leftDock"><b>leftDock</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQDockArea * <a href="#rightDock"><b>rightDock</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQDockArea * <a href="#topDock"><b>topDock</b></a> () const</li> @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with <a href="#lineUpDockWindows">lineUpDockWindows</a>(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from <a href="#topDock">topDock</a>(), <a href="#leftDock">leftDock</a>(), <a href="#rightDock">rightDock</a>() and <a href="#bottomDock">bottomDock</a>(). A customize menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if -<a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default. +<a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns true; it returns false by default. Reimplement isCustomizable() and <a href="#customize">customize</a>() if you want to offer this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock @@ -338,12 +338,12 @@ widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock window to only live within the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Top</a> or <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Bottom</a> dock: <p> <pre> <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a> *tb = new <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a>( this ); - <a href="#addDockWindow">addDockWindow</a>( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE ); + <a href="#addDockWindow">addDockWindow</a>( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, false ); <a href="tqmenubar.html">TQMenuBar</a> *mb = new <a href="tqmenubar.html">TQMenuBar</a>( tb ); mb-><a href="tqframe.html#setFrameStyle">setFrameStyle</a>( TQFrame::NoFrame ); tb-><a href="tqtoolbar.html#setStretchableWidget">setStretchableWidget</a>( mb ); - <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( tb, Left, FALSE ); - <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( tb, Right, FALSE ); + <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( tb, Left, false ); + <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>( tb, Right, false ); </pre> <p> An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the @@ -414,46 +414,46 @@ TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set <em>f</em> to 0. </h3> Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addDockWindow"></a>TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dockWindow, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addDockWindow"></a>TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dockWindow, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Adds <em>dockWindow</em> to the <em>edge</em> dock area. -<p> If <em>newLine</em> is FALSE (the default) then the <em>dockWindow</em> is +<p> If <em>newLine</em> is false (the default) then the <em>dockWindow</em> is added at the end of the <em>edge</em>. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a>) the end -is at the right. If <em>newLine</em> is TRUE a new line of dock windows +is at the right. If <em>newLine</em> is true a new line of dock windows is started with <em>dockWindow</em> as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window. <p> If <em>dockWindow</em> is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addDockWindow-2"></a>TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dockWindow, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addDockWindow-2"></a>TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dockWindow, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Adds <em>dockWindow</em> to the dock area with label <em>label</em>. -<p> If <em>newLine</em> is FALSE (the default) the <em>dockWindow</em> is added at +<p> If <em>newLine</em> is false (the default) the <em>dockWindow</em> is added at the end of the <em>edge</em>. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a>) the end is -at the right. If <em>newLine</em> is TRUE a new line of dock windows is +at the right. If <em>newLine</em> is true a new line of dock windows is started with <em>dockWindow</em> as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window. <p> If <em>dockWindow</em> is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolBar"></a>TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolBar"></a>TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolBar-2"></a>TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addToolBar-2"></a>TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> *, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="appropriate"></a>TQMainWindow::appropriate ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the +Returns true if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the <em>dw</em> dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item. <p> Call <a href="#setAppropriate">setAppropriate</a>() to indicate whether or not a particular dock @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if <em>dockWindows</em <em>dockWindows</em> is <a href="#DockWindows-enum">AllDockWindows</a> - the default). <p> This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the user right clicks a dock area (providing <a href="#isDockMenuEnabled">isDockMenuEnabled</a>() -returns TRUE). +returns true). <p> The menu items representing the toolbars and dock windows are checkable. The visible dock windows are checked and the hidden @@ -494,9 +494,9 @@ change its state (show or hide the dock window). <p> Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current context (see <a href="#setAppropriate">setAppropriate</a>()) are not listed in the menu. <p> The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows. -<p> If <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added +<p> If <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns true, a Customize menu item is added to the menu, which if clicked will call <a href="#customize">customize</a>(). The -isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize() +isCustomizable() function we provide returns false and customize() does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be useful. @@ -505,14 +505,14 @@ useful. This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu item on the dock window menu. <p> The customize menu item will only appear if <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() -returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default). +returns true (it returns false by default). <p> The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a means of telling the application that they wish to customize the main window, dock windows or dock areas. <p> The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return -TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want. +true, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="dockWindowPositionChanged"></a>TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dockWindow )<tt> [signal]</tt> @@ -540,18 +540,18 @@ regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is, (e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dockWindowsMovable"></a>TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#dockWindowsMovable-prop">"dockWindowsMovable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="getLocation"></a>TQMainWindow::getLocation ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const </h3> Finds the location of the dock window <em>dw</em>. <p> If the <em>dw</em> dock window is found in the main window the function -returns TRUE and populates the <em>dock</em> variable with the dw's dock +returns true and populates the <em>dock</em> variable with the dw's dock area and the <em>index</em> with the dw's position within the dock area. -It also sets <em>nl</em> to TRUE if the <em>dw</em> begins a new line -(otherwise FALSE), and <em>extraOffset</em> with the dock window's offset. +It also sets <em>nl</em> to true if the <em>dw</em> begins a new line +(otherwise false), and <em>extraOffset</em> with the dock window's offset. <p> If the <em>dw</em> dock window is not found then the function returns -FALSE and the state of <em>dock</em>, <em>index</em>, <em>nl</em> and <em>extraOffset</em> +false and the state of <em>dock</em>, <em>index</em>, <em>nl</em> and <em>extraOffset</em> is undefined. <p> If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use <a href="#operator-gt-gt">operator>></a>() and <a href="#operator-lt-lt">operator<<</a>(). @@ -559,54 +559,54 @@ is undefined. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasDockWindow"></a>TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>dw</em> is a dock window known to the main window; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>dw</em> is a dock window known to the main window; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCustomizable"></a>TQMainWindow::isCustomizable () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the +Returns true if the dock area dock window menu includes the Customize menu item (which calls <a href="#customize">customize</a>() when clicked). -Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a +Returns false by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function -and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see +and set it to return true if you wish the user to be able to see the dock window menu. <p> <p>See also <a href="#customize">customize</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockEnabled"></a>TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> dock ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the <em>dock</em> dock area is enabled, i.e. it can -accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the <em>dock</em> dock area is enabled, i.e. it can +accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockEnabled-2"></a>TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( <a href="tqdockarea.html">TQDockArea</a> * area ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if dock area <em>area</em> is enabled, i.e. it can accept -user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if dock area <em>area</em> is enabled, i.e. it can accept +user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockEnabled-3"></a>TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * tb, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> dock ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if dock area <em>dock</em> is enabled for the dock window -<em>tb</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if dock area <em>dock</em> is enabled for the dock window +<em>tb</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockEnabled-4"></a>TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw, <a href="tqdockarea.html">TQDockArea</a> * area ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if dock area <em>area</em> is enabled for the dock window -<em>dw</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if dock area <em>area</em> is enabled for the dock window +<em>dw</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDockMenuEnabled"></a>TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise +returns false. <p> The menu lists the (<a href="#appropriate">appropriate</a>()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns -TRUE. +true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDockEnabled">setDockEnabled</a>(), <a href="#lineUpDockWindows">lineUpDockWindows</a>(), <a href="#appropriate">appropriate</a>(), and <a href="#setAppropriate">setAppropriate</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdockarea.html">TQDockArea</a> * <a name="leftDock"></a>TQMainWindow::leftDock () const @@ -614,17 +614,17 @@ TRUE. Returns the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Left</a> dock area <p> <p>See also <a href="#rightDock">rightDock</a>(), <a href="#topDock">topDock</a>(), and <a href="#bottomDock">bottomDock</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="lineUpDockWindows"></a>TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="lineUpDockWindows"></a>TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = false ) </h3> This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock areas (<a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Top</a>, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Left</a>, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Right</a> and <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Bottom</a>) as compactly as possible. -<p> If <em>keepNewLines</em> is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their -original lines. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is FALSE then newlines may be +<p> If <em>keepNewLines</em> is true, all dock windows stay on their +original lines. If <em>keepNewLines</em> is false then newlines may be removed to achieve the most compact layout possible. -<p> The method only works if <a href="#dockWindowsMovable">dockWindowsMovable</a>() returns TRUE. +<p> The method only works if <a href="#dockWindowsMovable">dockWindowsMovable</a>() returns true. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="lineUpToolBars"></a>TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="lineUpToolBars"></a>TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = false ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> @@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ area. <p> Any dock windows with positions <em>index</em> or higher have their position number incremented and any of these on the same line are moved right (down for vertical dock areas) to make room. -<p> If <em>nl</em> is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line +<p> If <em>nl</em> is true, a new dock window line is created below the line in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window, with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved to this new line. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ removed from that window. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="opaqueMoving"></a>TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#opaqueMoving-prop">"opaqueMoving"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="pixmapSizeChanged"></a>TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -708,18 +708,18 @@ Returns the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Right</a> dock area <p> <p>See also <a href="#leftDock">leftDock</a>(), <a href="#topDock">topDock</a>(), and <a href="#bottomDock">bottomDock</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rightJustification"></a>TQMainWindow::rightJustification () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#rightJustification-prop">"rightJustification"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAppropriate"></a>TQMainWindow::setAppropriate ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw, bool a )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Use this function to control whether or not the <em>dw</em> dock window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window menu that lists the dock windows. -<p> If <em>a</em> is TRUE then the <em>dw</em> will appear as a menu item on the +<p> If <em>a</em> is true then the <em>dw</em> will appear as a menu item on the dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item; depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be -appropriate. If <em>a</em> is FALSE the <em>dw</em> will not appear on the +appropriate. If <em>a</em> is false the <em>dw</em> will not appear on the popup menu. <p> <p>See also <a href="#showDockMenu">showDockMenu</a>(), <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>(), and <a href="#customize">customize</a>(). @@ -732,15 +732,15 @@ bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDockEnabled"></a>TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> dock, bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE then users can dock windows in the <em>dock</em> -area. If <em>enable</em> is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the <em>dock</em> dock area. +If <em>enable</em> is true then users can dock windows in the <em>dock</em> +area. If <em>enable</em> is false users cannot dock windows in the <em>dock</em> dock area. <p> Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDockEnabled-2"></a>TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( <a href="tqdockwindow.html">TQDockWindow</a> * dw, <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Dock</a> dock, bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE then users can dock the <em>dw</em> dock window in -the <em>dock</em> area. If <em>enable</em> is FALSE users cannot dock the <em>dw</em> dock window in the <em>dock</em> area. +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true then users can dock the <em>dw</em> dock window in +the <em>dock</em> area. If <em>enable</em> is false users cannot dock the <em>dw</em> dock window in the <em>dock</em> area. <p> In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock @@ -748,13 +748,13 @@ windows. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDockMenuEnabled"></a>TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area -will pop up the dock window menu. If <em>b</em> is FALSE, right clicking +If <em>b</em> is true, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area +will pop up the dock window menu. If <em>b</em> is false, right clicking a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu. <p> The menu lists the (<a href="#appropriate">appropriate</a>()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if <a href="#isCustomizable">isCustomizable</a>() returns -TRUE. +true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#lineUpDockWindows">lineUpDockWindows</a>() and <a href="#isDockMenuEnabled">isDockMenuEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDockWindowsMovable"></a>TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -786,8 +786,8 @@ See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">"usesTextLabel"</a> prope </h3> Shows the dock menu at the position <em>globalPos</em>. The menu lists the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up, -and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown; -otherwise returns FALSE. +and possibly customized. Returns true if the menu is shown; +otherwise returns false. <p> If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can create the menu from scratch or call <a href="#createDockWindowMenu">createDockWindowMenu</a>() and modify the result. @@ -831,10 +831,10 @@ Returns the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Top</a> dock area <p> <p>See also <a href="#bottomDock">bottomDock</a>(), <a href="#leftDock">leftDock</a>(), and <a href="#rightDock">rightDock</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesBigPixmaps"></a>TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesBigPixmaps-prop">"usesBigPixmaps"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesTextLabel"></a>TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmainwindow.html#usesTextLabel-prop">"usesTextLabel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="usesTextLabelChanged"></a>TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -860,14 +860,14 @@ be used for popup menus, for example: <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dockWindowsMovable-prop"></a>dockWindowsMovable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dock windows are movable. -<p>If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock +<p>If true (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the <tt>TearOff</tt> area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the <a href="tqt.html#Dock-enum">Minimized</a> area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area. -<p> If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows. +<p> If false the user will not be able to move any dock windows. <p> By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can be changed with <a href="#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>(). @@ -876,9 +876,9 @@ be changed with <a href="#setOpaqueMoving">setOpaqueMoving</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setDockWindowsMovable">setDockWindowsMovable</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#dockWindowsMovable">dockWindowsMovable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="opaqueMoving-prop"></a>opaqueMoving</h3> <p>This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely. -<p>If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely +<p>If true the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is -being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently, +being moved. If false (the default) they are shown transparently, (i.e. as an outline rectangle). <p> <b>Warning:</b> Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ right-justify its dock windows. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setRightJustification">setRightJustification</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#rightJustification">rightJustification</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesBigPixmaps-prop"></a>usesBigPixmaps</h3> <p>This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled. -<p>If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; +<p>If false (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; otherwise big pixmaps will be used. <p> Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup, diff --git a/doc/html/tqmap-h.html b/doc/html/tqmap-h.html index 152c28adc..161cfe82c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmap-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmap-h.html @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::Iterator TQMapPrivate // Search correct position in the tree TQMapNodeBase* y = header; TQMapNodeBase* x = header->parent; - bool result = TRUE; + bool result = true; while ( x != 0 ) { result = ( k < key(x) ); y = x; @@ -759,14 +759,14 @@ public: bool isEmpty() const { return sh->node_count == 0; } - iterator insert( const Key& key, const T& value, bool overwrite = TRUE ); + iterator insert( const Key& key, const T& value, bool overwrite = true ); void remove( iterator it ) { detach(); sh->remove( it ); } void remove( const Key& k ); #if defined(TQ_FULL_TEMPLATE_INSTANTIATION) - bool operator==( const TQMap<Key,T>& ) const { return FALSE; } + bool operator==( const TQMap<Key,T>& ) const { return false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_STL - bool operator==( const std::map<Key,T>& ) const { return FALSE; } + bool operator==( const std::map<Key,T>& ) const { return false; } #endif #endif @@ -799,9 +799,9 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMap<Key,T>::insert_pair TQMap<Key,T&g detach(); size_type n = size(); iterator it = sh->insertSingle( x.first ); - bool inserted = FALSE; + bool inserted = false; if ( n < size() ) { - inserted = TRUE; + inserted = true; it.data() = x.second; } return TQPair<iterator,bool>( it, inserted ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmap.html b/doc/html/tqmap.html index 4c296c9a1..9343a813c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmap.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmap.html @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ provides a dictionary. <li class=fn>TQValueList<Key> <a href="#keys"><b>keys</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQValueList<T> <a href="#values"><b>values</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isEmpty"><b>isEmpty</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>iterator <a href="#insert"><b>insert</b></a> ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>iterator <a href="#insert"><b>insert</b></a> ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( iterator it )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#remove-2"><b>remove</b></a> ( const Key & k )</li> </ul> @@ -358,8 +358,8 @@ dereferenceable; <a href="tqsize.html#operator*-4">operator*</a>() will not retu <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQMap::contains ( const Key & k ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the map contains an item with key <em>k</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the map contains an item with key <em>k</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqmap.html#size_type">size_type</a> <a name="count"></a>TQMap::count ( const <a href="tqmap.html#key_type">key_type</a> & k ) const </h3> @@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ implemented this way. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="empty"></a>TQMap::empty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns +false. <p> This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). @@ -439,13 +439,13 @@ map. <p> Returns <a href="#end">end</a>() if no key matched. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmapconstiterator.html">TQMapConstIterator</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqmap.html#iterator">iterator</a> <a name="insert"></a>TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqmap.html#iterator">iterator</a> <a name="insert"></a>TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = true ) </h3> <p> Inserts a new item with the key, <em>key</em>, and a value of <em>value</em>. If there is already an item whose key is <em>key</em>, that item's value -is replaced with <em>value</em>, unless <em>overwrite</em> is FALSE (it is -TRUE by default). In this case an iterator to this item is +is replaced with <em>value</em>, unless <em>overwrite</em> is false (it is +true by default). In this case an iterator to this item is returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned. <p> <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpair.html">TQPair</a><iterator, bool> <a name="insert-2"></a>TQMap::insert ( const <a href="tqmap.html#value_type">value_type</a> & x ) @@ -456,16 +456,16 @@ returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned. whose <tt>first</tt> element is a key to be inserted and whose <tt>second</tt> element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair whose <tt>first</tt> element is an iterator pointing to the inserted -item and whose <tt>second</tt> element is a bool indicating TRUE if <em>x</em> -was inserted and FALSE if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was +item and whose <tt>second</tt> element is a bool indicating true if <em>x</em> +was inserted and false if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was already present. <p> <p>See also <a href="#replace">replace</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQMap::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><Key> <a name="keys"></a>TQMap::keys () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqmapconstiterator.html b/doc/html/tqmapconstiterator.html index e2d7d6c87..3180912c2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmapconstiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmapconstiterator.html @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ The type of const value. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQMapConstIterator::operator!= ( const <a href="tqmapconstiterator.html">TQMapConstIterator</a><K, T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns FALSE if -they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns false if +they point to the same item; otherwise returns true. <h3 class=fn>const T & <a name="operator*"></a>TQMapConstIterator::operator* () const </h3> @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQMapConstIterator::operator== ( const <a href="tqmapconstiterator.html">TQMapConstIterator</a><K, T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns TRUE if -they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns true if +they point to the same item; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmapiterator.html b/doc/html/tqmapiterator.html index 62daa1f75..4fec02d14 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmapiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmapiterator.html @@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ The type of value. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQMapIterator::operator!= ( const <a href="tqmapiterator.html">TQMapIterator</a><K, T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns FALSE if -they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns false if +they point to the same item; otherwise returns true. <h3 class=fn>T & <a name="operator*"></a>TQMapIterator::operator* () </h3> @@ -179,8 +179,8 @@ iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQMapIterator::operator== ( const <a href="tqmapiterator.html">TQMapIterator</a><K, T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns TRUE if -they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares the iterator to the <em>it</em> iterator and returns true if +they point to the same item; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmemarray.html b/doc/html/tqmemarray.html index 6ee45bdb2..1c597ac5b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmemarray.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmemarray.html @@ -361,8 +361,8 @@ of <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a> and <a href="tqmap.html">TQMap</a> <p> Fills the array with the value <em>v</em>. If <em>size</em> is specified as different from -1, then the array will be resized before being filled. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>size</em> is -1, or <em>size</em> is -!= -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>size</em> is -1, or <em>size</em> is +!= -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#resize">resize</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="find"></a>TQMemArray::find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const @@ -375,14 +375,14 @@ filled. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQMemArray::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the array is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() is equivalent to <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() for TQMemArray (unlike <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQMemArray::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the array is null; otherwise returns false. <p> A null array has <a href="#size">size</a>() == 0 and <a href="#data">data</a>() == 0. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="nrefs"></a>TQMemArray::nrefs () const @@ -400,8 +400,8 @@ reference count is always greater than zero. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQMemArray::operator!= ( const <a href="tqmemarray.html">TQMemArray</a><type> & a ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this array is different from <em>a</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this array is different from <em>a</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> The two arrays are compared bitwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). @@ -415,8 +415,8 @@ reference to this array. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQMemArray::operator== ( const <a href="tqmemarray.html">TQMemArray</a><type> & a ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this array is equal to <em>a</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this array is equal to <em>a</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> The two arrays are compared bitwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ passed to setRawData(). This is for consistency checking. <p> Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to <em>size</em> elements. The array becomes a null array if <em>size</em> == 0. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be +<p> Returns true if successful, or false if the memory cannot be allocated. <p> New elements are not initialized. <p> <em>optim</em> is either <tt>TQGArray::MemOptim</tt> (the default) or @@ -463,8 +463,8 @@ configuration. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to <em>size</em> elements. The array becomes a null array if <em>size</em> == 0. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; +otherwise returns false. <p> New elements are not initialized. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). @@ -521,8 +521,8 @@ comparison (memcmp()). </h3> <p> Truncates the array at position <em>pos</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; +otherwise returns false. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#resize">resize</a>(<em>pos</em>). <p> <p>See also <a href="#resize">resize</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqmenubar-h.html b/doc/html/tqmenubar-h.html index 561f053cb..1d9d0761a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmenubar-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmenubar-h.html @@ -169,10 +169,10 @@ private: bool tryMouseEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQMouseEvent * ); void tryKeyEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQKeyEvent * ); - void goodbye( bool cancelled = FALSE ); + void goodbye( bool cancelled = false ); void openActPopup(); - void setActiveItem( int index, bool show = TRUE, bool activate_first_item = TRUE ); + void setActiveItem( int index, bool show = true, bool activate_first_item = true ); void setAltMode( bool ); int calculateRects( int max_width = -1 ); @@ -210,16 +210,16 @@ private: #endif virtual void macWidgetChangedWindow(); bool syncPopups(MenuRef ret, TQPopupMenu *d); - MenuRef createMacPopup(TQPopupMenu *d, int id, bool =FALSE); + MenuRef createMacPopup(TQPopupMenu *d, int id, bool =false); bool updateMenuBar(); #if !defined(TQMAC_QMENUBAR_NO_MERGE) - uint isCommand(TQMenuItem *, bool just_check=FALSE); + uint isCommand(TQMenuItem *, bool just_check=false); #endif uint mac_eaten_menubar : 1; class MacPrivate; MacPrivate *mac_d; - static bool activate(MenuRef, short, bool highlight=FALSE, bool by_accel=FALSE); + static bool activate(MenuRef, short, bool highlight=false, bool by_accel=false); static bool activateCommand(uint cmd); static bool macUpdateMenuBar(); static bool macUpdatePopupVisible(MenuRef, bool); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmenubar.html b/doc/html/tqmenubar.html index 2f92f5c2b..56cb47d10 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmenubar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmenubar.html @@ -500,14 +500,14 @@ guidelines). See the <a href="tqmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop">"defaultUp"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE +Returns true if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; +otherwise returns false <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemVisible">setItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="menuContentsChanged"></a>TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -540,14 +540,14 @@ See the <a href="tqmenubar.html#separator-prop">"separator"</a> property for det See the <a href="tqmenubar.html#defaultUp-prop">"defaultUp"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; +If <em>enable</em> is true, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="mdi-example.html#x2033">mdi/application.cpp</a>, <a href="menu-example.html#x1873">menu/menu.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x72">progress/progress.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1331">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible ) </h3> -If <em>visible</em> is TRUE, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise +If <em>visible</em> is true, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise hides the menu item with id <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>() and <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ stack. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="defaultUp-prop"></a>defaultUp</h3> <p>This property holds the popup orientation. <p>The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the -screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up". +screen. By setting the property to true, the menu will pop "up". You might call this for menus that are <em>below</em> the document to which they refer. <p> If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is diff --git a/doc/html/tqmenudata.html b/doc/html/tqmenudata.html index e4a5cea88..de8839e84 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmenudata.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmenudata.html @@ -522,26 +522,26 @@ guidelines). <p>Examples: <a href="addressbook-example.html#x570">addressbook/mainwindow.cpp</a>, <a href="menu-example.html#x1870">menu/menu.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x69">progress/progress.cpp</a>, <a href="qwerty-example.html#x372">qwerty/qwerty.cpp</a>, <a href="scrollview-example.html#x635">scrollview/scrollview.cpp</a>, <a href="showimg-example.html#x1328">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>, and <a href="sound-example.html#x2811">sound/sound.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemActive"></a>TQMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is currently -active; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is currently +active; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemChecked"></a>TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> has been checked; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> has been checked; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2938">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x70">progress/progress.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1329">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE +Returns true if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; +otherwise returns false <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>() and <a href="#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItemVisible">setItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="itemParameter"></a>TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const @@ -641,15 +641,15 @@ Sets the <a href="tqmenudata.html#menu-identifier">menu identifier</a> of the it <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemChecked"></a>TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check ) </h3> -If <em>check</em> is TRUE, checks the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise +If <em>check</em> is true, checks the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id <em>id</em>. Calls -<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">TQPopupMenu::setCheckable</a>( TRUE ) if necessary. +<a href="tqpopupmenu.html#setCheckable">TQPopupMenu::setCheckable</a>( true ) if necessary. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isItemChecked">isItemChecked</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2939">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>, <a href="mdi-example.html#x2032">mdi/application.cpp</a>, <a href="menu-example.html#x1872">menu/menu.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x71">progress/progress.cpp</a>, <a href="scrollview-example.html#x636">scrollview/scrollview.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1330">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; +If <em>enable</em> is true, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item <em>id</em> to <em>param</em <p>Example: <a href="mdi-example.html#x2034">mdi/application.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible ) </h3> -If <em>visible</em> is TRUE, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise +If <em>visible</em> is true, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise hides the menu item with id <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>() and <a href="#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqmessagebox-h.html b/doc/html/tqmessagebox-h.html index da5b08063..8c5c71265 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmessagebox-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmessagebox-h.html @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ public: TQMessageBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQMessageBox( const TQString& caption, const TQString &text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, - TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=TRUE, + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=true, WFlags f=WStyle_DialogBorder ); ~TQMessageBox(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmessagebox.html b/doc/html/tqmessagebox.html index 77f834b7c..492a427d0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmessagebox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmessagebox.html @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <ul> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Icon-enum"><b>Icon</b></a> { NoIcon = 0, Information = 1, Warning = 2, Critical = 3, Question = 4 }</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQMessageBox"><b>TQMessageBox</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQMessageBox-2"><b>TQMessageBox</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQMessageBox-2"><b>TQMessageBox</b></a> ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = true, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQMessageBox"><b>~TQMessageBox</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#text"><b>text</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setText"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & )</li> @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ becomes modal relative to <em>parent</em>. <p> The <em>parent</em> and <em>name</em> arguments are passed to the <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> constructor. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMessageBox-2"></a>TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, <a href="tqmessagebox.html#Icon-enum">Icon</a> icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMessageBox-2"></a>TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & caption, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, <a href="tqmessagebox.html#Icon-enum">Icon</a> icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = true, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder ) </h3> Constructs a message box with a <em>caption</em>, a <em>text</em>, an <em>icon</em>, and up to three buttons. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ pressed). <p> If <em>parent</em> is 0, the message box becomes an application-global modal dialog box. If <em>parent</em> is a widget, the message box becomes modal relative to <em>parent</em>. -<p> If <em>modal</em> is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it +<p> If <em>modal</em> is true the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless. <p> The <em>parent</em>, <em>name</em>, <em>modal</em>, and <em>f</em> arguments are passed to the <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> constructor. diff --git a/doc/html/tqmetaobject-h.html b/doc/html/tqmetaobject-h.html index 50054b44d..ae2cee5a5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmetaobject-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmetaobject-h.html @@ -206,34 +206,34 @@ public: bool inherits( const char* clname ) const; - int numSlots( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numSignals( bool super = FALSE ) const; + int numSlots( bool super = false ) const; + int numSignals( bool super = false ) const; - int findSlot( const char *, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int findSignal( const char *, bool super = FALSE ) const; + int findSlot( const char *, bool super = false ) const; + int findSignal( const char *, bool super = false ) const; - const TQMetaData *slot( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQMetaData *signal( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; + const TQMetaData *slot( int index, bool super = false ) const; + const TQMetaData *signal( int index, bool super = false ) const; - TQStrList slotNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - TQStrList signalNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList slotNames( bool super = false ) const; + TQStrList signalNames( bool super = false ) const; int slotOffset() const; int signalOffset() const; int propertyOffset() const; - int numClassInfo( bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQClassInfo *classInfo( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - const char *classInfo( const char* name, bool super = FALSE ) const; + int numClassInfo( bool super = false ) const; + const TQClassInfo *classInfo( int index, bool super = false ) const; + const char *classInfo( const char* name, bool super = false ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES - const TQMetaProperty *property( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int findProperty( const char *name, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int indexOfProperty( const TQMetaProperty*, bool super = FALSE ) const; + const TQMetaProperty *property( int index, bool super = false ) const; + int findProperty( const char *name, bool super = false ) const; + int indexOfProperty( const TQMetaProperty*, bool super = false ) const; const TQMetaProperty* resolveProperty( const TQMetaProperty* ) const; int resolveProperty( int ) const; - TQStrList propertyNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numProperties( bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList propertyNames( bool super = false ) const; + int numProperties( bool super = false ) const; #endif // static wrappers around constructors, necessary to work around a @@ -255,9 +255,9 @@ public: const TQMetaEnum *const enum_data, int n_enums, bool (*tqt_static_property)(TQObject*, int, int, TQVariant*), const TQClassInfo *const class_info, int n_info ); - TQStrList enumeratorNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numEnumerators( bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQMetaEnum *enumerator( const char* name, bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList enumeratorNames( bool super = false ) const; + int numEnumerators( bool super = false ) const; + const TQMetaEnum *enumerator( const char* name, bool super = false ) const; #endif static TQMetaObject *metaObject( const char *class_name ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmetaobject.html b/doc/html/tqmetaobject.html index fe0eab0b6..cd51b5f21 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmetaobject.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmetaobject.html @@ -40,17 +40,17 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>const char * <a href="#superClassName"><b>superClassName</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQMetaObject * <a href="#superClass"><b>superClass</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#inherits"><b>inherits</b></a> ( const char * clname ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#numSlots"><b>numSlots</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#numSignals"><b>numSignals</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#slotNames"><b>slotNames</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#signalNames"><b>signalNames</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#numClassInfo"><b>numClassInfo</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>const TQClassInfo * <a href="#classInfo"><b>classInfo</b></a> ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>const char * <a href="#classInfo-2"><b>classInfo</b></a> ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>const TQMetaProperty * <a href="#property"><b>property</b></a> ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findProperty"><b>findProperty</b></a> ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#propertyNames"><b>propertyNames</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#numProperties"><b>numProperties</b></a> ( bool super = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#numSlots"><b>numSlots</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#numSignals"><b>numSignals</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#slotNames"><b>slotNames</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#signalNames"><b>signalNames</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#numClassInfo"><b>numClassInfo</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>const TQClassInfo * <a href="#classInfo"><b>classInfo</b></a> ( int index, bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>const char * <a href="#classInfo-2"><b>classInfo</b></a> ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>const TQMetaProperty * <a href="#property"><b>property</b></a> ( int index, bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findProperty"><b>findProperty</b></a> ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQStrList <a href="#propertyNames"><b>propertyNames</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#numProperties"><b>numProperties</b></a> ( bool super = false ) const</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -81,18 +81,18 @@ returned by <a href="#classInfo">classInfo</a>(). <p> <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn>const TQClassInfo * <a name="classInfo"></a>TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>const TQClassInfo * <a name="classInfo"></a>TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the class information with index <em>index</em> or 0 if no such information exists. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited class information is included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited class information is included. -<h3 class=fn>const char * <a name="classInfo-2"></a>TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>const char * <a name="classInfo-2"></a>TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns the class information with name <em>name</em> or 0 if no such information exists. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited class information is included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited class information is included. <h3 class=fn>const char * <a name="className"></a>TQMetaObject::className () const </h3> @@ -100,64 +100,64 @@ information exists. <p> Returns the class name. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqobject.html#className">TQObject::className</a>() and <a href="#superClassName">superClassName</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findProperty"></a>TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findProperty"></a>TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the index for the property with name <em>name</em> or -1 if no such property exists. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited properties are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited properties are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#property">property</a>() and <a href="#propertyNames">propertyNames</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inherits"></a>TQMetaObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this class inherits <em>clname</em> within the <a href="metaobjects.html#meta-object">meta object</a> inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this class inherits <em>clname</em> within the <a href="metaobjects.html#meta-object">meta object</a> inheritance chain; otherwise returns false. <p> (A class is considered to inherit itself.) -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numClassInfo"></a>TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numClassInfo"></a>TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the number of items of class information available for this class. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited class information is included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited class information is included. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numProperties"></a>TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numProperties"></a>TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the number of properties for this class. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited properties are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited properties are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#propertyNames">propertyNames</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numSignals"></a>TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numSignals"></a>TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the number of signals for this class. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited signals are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited signals are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#signalNames">signalNames</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numSlots"></a>TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="numSlots"></a>TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the number of slots for this class. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited slots are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited slots are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#slotNames">slotNames</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqmetaproperty.html">TQMetaProperty</a> * <a name="property"></a>TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqmetaproperty.html">TQMetaProperty</a> * <a name="property"></a>TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns the property meta data for the property at index <em>index</em> or 0 if no such property exists. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited properties are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited properties are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#propertyNames">propertyNames</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="propertyNames"></a>TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="propertyNames"></a>TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns a list with the names of all this class's properties. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited properties are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited properties are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#property">property</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="signalNames"></a>TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="signalNames"></a>TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns a list with the names of all this class's signals. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited signals are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited signals are included. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="slotNames"></a>TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> <a name="slotNames"></a>TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = false ) const </h3> Returns a list with the names of all this class's slots. -<p> If <em>super</em> is TRUE, inherited slots are included. +<p> If <em>super</em> is true, inherited slots are included. <p> <p>See also <a href="#numSlots">numSlots</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqmetaobject.html">TQMetaObject</a> * <a name="superClass"></a>TQMetaObject::superClass () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqmetaproperty.html b/doc/html/tqmetaproperty.html index c721aad88..c3f77e680 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmetaproperty.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmetaproperty.html @@ -73,8 +73,8 @@ details. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="designable"></a>TQMetaProperty::designable ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * o = 0 ) const -</h3> Returns TRUE if the property is designable for object <em>o</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3> Returns true if the property is designable for object <em>o</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> If no object <em>o</em> is given, the function returns a static approximation. @@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ enumeration type (or a set type). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnumType"></a>TQMetaProperty::isEnumType () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isSetType">isSetType</a>() and <a href="#enumKeys">enumKeys</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSetType"></a>TQMetaProperty::isSetType () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value that +<p> Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value that is used as set, i.e. if the enumeration values can be OR-ed -together; otherwise returns FALSE. A set type is implicitly also +together; otherwise returns false. A set type is implicitly also an enum type. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEnumType">isEnumType</a>() and <a href="#enumKeys">enumKeys</a>(). @@ -120,21 +120,21 @@ integer value. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="reset"></a>TQMetaProperty::reset ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * o ) const </h3> Tries to reset the property for object <em>o</em> with a reset method. -On success, returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE. +On success, returns true; otherwise returns false. <p> Reset methods are optional, usually only a few properties support them. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="scriptable"></a>TQMetaProperty::scriptable ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * o = 0 ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the property is scriptable for object <em>o</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the property is scriptable for object <em>o</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> If no object <em>o</em> is given, the function returns a static approximation. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="stored"></a>TQMetaProperty::stored ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * o = 0 ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the property shall be stored for object <em>o</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the property shall be stored for object <em>o</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> If no object <em>o</em> is given, the function returns a static approximation. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Converts the set value <em>value</em> to a list of keys. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="writable"></a>TQMetaProperty::writable () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the property is writable; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the property is writable; otherwise returns false. <p> <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmimesource.html b/doc/html/tqmimesource.html index c12c425ae..8852c660e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmimesource.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmimesource.html @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ format. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdropevent.html#format">TQDropEvent</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="provides"></a>TQMimeSource::provides ( const char * mimeType ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the object can provide the data in format <em>mimeType</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the object can provide the data in format <em>mimeType</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> If you inherit from TQMimeSource, for consistency reasons it is better to implement the more abstract canDecode() functions such as <a href="tqtextdrag.html#canDecode">TQTextDrag::canDecode</a>() and <a href="tqimagedrag.html#canDecode">TQImageDrag::canDecode</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle-h.html b/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle-h.html index 873463384..6ed6f2ce7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle-h.html @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_MOTIFPLUS TQMotifPlusStyle : public TQMotifStyle TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE); + TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight = true); virtual ~TQMotifPlusStyle(); void polish(TQPalette &pal); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle.html b/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle.html index 7052fe1ae..acf87d580 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmotifplusstyle.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqmotifplusstyle-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQMotifPlusStyle"><b>TQMotifPlusStyle</b></a> ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQMotifPlusStyle"><b>TQMotifPlusStyle</b></a> ( bool hoveringHighlight = true )</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ Unix/X11. <p>See also <a href="appearance.html">Widget Appearance and Style</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMotifPlusStyle"></a>TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMotifPlusStyle"></a>TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = true ) </h3> Constructs a TQMotifPlusStyle -<p> If <em>hoveringHighlight</em> is TRUE (the default), then the style will +<p> If <em>hoveringHighlight</em> is true (the default), then the style will not highlight push buttons, checkboxes, radiobuttons, comboboxes, scrollbars or sliders. diff --git a/doc/html/tqmotifstyle-h.html b/doc/html/tqmotifstyle-h.html index 677c28e66..bf60b1375 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmotifstyle-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmotifstyle-h.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_MOTIF TQMotifStyle : public TQCommonStyle { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMotifStyle( bool useHighlightCols=FALSE ); + TQMotifStyle( bool useHighlightCols=false ); virtual ~TQMotifStyle(); void setUseHighlightColors( bool ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmotifstyle.html b/doc/html/tqmotifstyle.html index eb3dd93f3..284a4d786 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmotifstyle.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmotifstyle.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqmotifstyle-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQMotifStyle"><b>TQMotifStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQMotifStyle"><b>TQMotifStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = false )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setUseHighlightColors"><b>setUseHighlightColors</b></a> ( bool arg )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#useHighlightColors"><b>useHighlightColors</b></a> () const</li> </ul> @@ -54,17 +54,17 @@ GUI style on UNIX platforms. <p>See also <a href="appearance.html">Widget Appearance and Style</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMotifStyle"></a>TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMotifStyle"></a>TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false ) </h3> Constructs a TQMotifStyle. -<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is FALSE (the default), the style will +<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is false (the default), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setUseHighlightColors"></a>TQMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors ( bool arg ) </h3> -If <em>arg</em> is FALSE, the style will polish the application's color +If <em>arg</em> is false, the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. <p> The effect will show up the next time an application palette is @@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ the application remains unchanged. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="useHighlightColors"></a>TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style treats the highlight colors of the +Returns true if the style treats the highlight colors of the palette in a Motif-like manner, which is a simple inversion -between the base and the text color; otherwise returns FALSE. The -default is FALSE. +between the base and the text color; otherwise returns false. The +default is false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmouseevent.html b/doc/html/tqmouseevent.html index ddaaa3b71..0690a74d7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmouseevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmouseevent.html @@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ the parent widget. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQMouseEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & <a name="pos"></a>TQMouseEvent::pos () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmovie.html b/doc/html/tqmovie.html index 7840a5377..8c67131d6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmovie.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmovie.html @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@ member is zero) that were previously connected by <a href="#connectUpdate">conne <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="finished"></a>TQMovie::finished () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the image is no longer playing: this happens when -all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the image is no longer playing: this happens when +all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="movies-example.html#x501">movies/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> & <a name="frameImage"></a>TQMovie::frameImage () const @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ generated. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQMovie::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the movie is null; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the movie is null; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqmovie.html">TQMovie</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQMovie::operator= ( const <a href="tqmovie.html">TQMovie</a> & movie ) </h3> @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Pauses the progress of the animation. <p>Example: <a href="movies-example.html#x503">movies/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="paused"></a>TQMovie::paused () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the image is paused; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the image is paused; otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="movies-example.html#x504">movies/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="pushData"></a>TQMovie::pushData ( const uchar * data, int length ) @@ -329,8 +329,8 @@ paused, it begins playing again. <p>Example: <a href="movies-example.html#x505">movies/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="running"></a>TQMovie::running () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and -not finished; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and +not finished; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBackgroundColor"></a>TQMovie::setBackgroundColor ( const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & c ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqmultilineedit-h.html b/doc/html/tqmultilineedit-h.html index 813333b12..9d5167b5e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmultilineedit-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmultilineedit-h.html @@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ public: virtual void insertLine( const TQString &s, int line = -1 ); virtual void insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col ) { - insertAt( s, line, col, FALSE ); + insertAt( s, line, col, false ); } virtual void insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col, bool mark ); virtual void removeLine( int line ); virtual void setCursorPosition( int line, int col ) { - setCursorPosition( line, col, FALSE ); + setCursorPosition( line, col, false ); } virtual void setCursorPosition( int line, int col, bool mark ); bool atBeginning() const; @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ public: void cursorWordBackward( bool mark ); // noops - bool autoUpdate() const { return TRUE; } + bool autoUpdate() const { return true; } virtual void setAutoUpdate( bool ) {} int totalWidth() const { return contentsWidth(); } @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ public: void setMaxLines( int ) {} public slots: - void deselect() { selectAll( FALSE ); } + void deselect() { selectAll( false ); } protected: TQPoint cursorPoint() const; @@ -147,15 +147,15 @@ protected: virtual void insertAndMark( const TQString&, bool mark ); virtual void newLine(); virtual void killLine(); - virtual void pageUp( bool mark=FALSE ); - virtual void pageDown( bool mark=FALSE ); - virtual void cursorLeft( bool mark=FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ); - virtual void cursorRight( bool mark=FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE ); - virtual void cursorUp( bool mark=FALSE ); - virtual void cursorDown( bool mark=FALSE ); + virtual void pageUp( bool mark=false ); + virtual void pageDown( bool mark=false ); + virtual void cursorLeft( bool mark=false, bool wrap = true ); + virtual void cursorRight( bool mark=false, bool wrap = true ); + virtual void cursorUp( bool mark=false ); + virtual void cursorDown( bool mark=false ); virtual void backspace(); - virtual void home( bool mark=FALSE ); - virtual void end( bool mark=FALSE ); + virtual void home( bool mark=false ); + virtual void end( bool mark=false ); bool getMarkedRegion( int *line1, int *col1, int *line2, int *col2 ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqmultilineedit.html b/doc/html/tqmultilineedit.html index 8505a18d3..687dc56eb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmultilineedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmultilineedit.html @@ -79,15 +79,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#insertAndMark"><b>insertAndMark</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool mark )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#newLine"><b>newLine</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#killLine"><b>killLine</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#pageUp"><b>pageUp</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#pageDown"><b>pageDown</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorLeft"><b>cursorLeft</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorRight"><b>cursorRight</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorUp"><b>cursorUp</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorDown"><b>cursorDown</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#pageUp"><b>pageUp</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#pageDown"><b>pageDown</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorLeft"><b>cursorLeft</b></a> ( bool mark = false, bool wrap = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorRight"><b>cursorRight</b></a> ( bool mark = false, bool wrap = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorUp"><b>cursorUp</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#cursorDown"><b>cursorDown</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#backspace"><b>backspace</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#home"><b>home</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#end"><b>end</b></a> ( bool mark = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#home"><b>home</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#end"><b>end</b></a> ( bool mark = false )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#getMarkedRegion"><b>getMarkedRegion</b></a> ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#lineLength"><b>lineLength</b></a> ( int row ) const</li> </ul> @@ -127,10 +127,10 @@ Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with parent <em>parent</em> called </h3><p>Returns the editor's paragraph alignment. See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop">"alignment"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atBeginning"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::atBeginning () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#atBeginning-prop">"atBeginning"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::atEnd () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the cursor is placed at the end of the text; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the cursor is placed at the end of the text; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#atEnd-prop">"atEnd"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoUpdate"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::autoUpdate () const </h3> @@ -144,14 +144,14 @@ by the user (e.g. by clicking and dragging) the cursor is put at the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is removed. <a href="tqtextedit.html#del">del</a>() -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorDown"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorDown ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorDown"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorDown ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Moves the cursor one line down. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the text +Moves the cursor one line down. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. <p>See also <a href="#cursorUp">cursorUp</a>(), <a href="#cursorLeft">cursorLeft</a>(), and <a href="#cursorRight">cursorRight</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorLeft"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> -</h3> Moves the cursor one character to the left. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorLeft"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft ( bool mark = false, bool wrap = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +</h3> Moves the cursor one character to the left. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. The <em>wrap</em> parameter is currently ignored. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorRight">cursorRight</a>(), <a href="#cursorUp">cursorUp</a>(), and <a href="#cursorDown">cursorDown</a>(). @@ -159,24 +159,24 @@ The <em>wrap</em> parameter is currently ignored. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> <a name="cursorPoint"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> Returns the top center point where the cursor is drawn. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorRight"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark = FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> -</h3> Moves the cursor one character to the right. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorRight"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorRight ( bool mark = false, bool wrap = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +</h3> Moves the cursor one character to the right. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. The <em>wrap</em> parameter is currently ignored. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorLeft">cursorLeft</a>(), <a href="#cursorUp">cursorUp</a>(), and <a href="#cursorDown">cursorDown</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorUp"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorUp ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> -</h3> Moves the cursor up one line. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the text is +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorUp"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorUp ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +</h3> Moves the cursor up one line. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorDown">cursorDown</a>(), <a href="#cursorLeft">cursorLeft</a>(), and <a href="#cursorRight">cursorRight</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorWordBackward"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark ) -</h3> Moves the cursor one word to the left. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the +</h3> Moves the cursor one word to the left. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorWordForward">cursorWordForward</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cursorWordForward"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark ) -</h3> Moves the cursor one word to the right. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the text +</h3> Moves the cursor one word to the right. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursorWordBackward">cursorWordBackward</a>(). @@ -186,39 +186,39 @@ is selected. <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="edited"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::edited () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the document has been edited by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the document has been edited by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#edited-prop">"edited"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="end"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::end ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="end"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::end ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Moves the text cursor to the right end of the line. If <em>mark</em> is -TRUE, text is selected toward the last position. If it is FALSE and the +true, text is selected toward the last position. If it is false and the cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#home">home</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="getMarkedRegion"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion ( int * line1, int * col1, int * line2, int * col2 ) const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> If there is selected text, sets <em>line1</em>, <em>col1</em>, <em>line2</em> and <em>col2</em> -to the start and end of the selected region and returns TRUE. Returns -FALSE if there is no selected text. +to the start and end of the selected region and returns true. Returns +false if there is no selected text. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasMarkedText"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there is selected text. +Returns true if there is selected text. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="home"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::home ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="home"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::home ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Moves the text cursor to the left end of the line. If <em>mark</em> is -TRUE, text is selected toward the first position. If it is FALSE and the +true, text is selected toward the first position. If it is false and the cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#end">end</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="insertAndMark"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool mark )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Inserts <em>str</em> at the current cursor position and selects the -text if <em>mark</em> is TRUE. +text if <em>mark</em> is true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="insertAt"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::insertAt ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s, int line, int col, bool mark )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Inserts string <em>s</em> at paragraph number <em>line</em>, after character number <em>col</em> in the paragraph. If <em>s</em> contains newline characters, new lines are inserted. -If <em>mark</em> is TRUE the inserted string will be selected. +If <em>mark</em> is true the inserted string will be selected. <p> The cursor position is adjusted. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="insertLine"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::insertLine ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & txt, int line = -1 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -251,14 +251,14 @@ Returns a copy of the selected text. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="numLines"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::numLines () const </h3><p>Returns the number of paragraphs in the editor. See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#numLines-prop">"numLines"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="pageDown"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::pageDown ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="pageDown"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::pageDown ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Moves the cursor one page down. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the text +Moves the cursor one page down. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="pageUp"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::pageUp ( bool mark = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="pageUp"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::pageUp ( bool mark = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Moves the cursor one page up. If <em>mark</em> is TRUE, the text +Moves the cursor one page up. If <em>mark</em> is true, the text is selected. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="removeLine"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::removeLine ( int paragraph )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ See the <a href="tqmultilineedit.html#alignment-prop">"alignment"</a> property f </h3> Sets the cursor position to character number <em>col</em> in paragraph number <em>line</em>. The parameters are adjusted to lie within the legal range. -<p> If <em>mark</em> is FALSE, the selection is cleared. otherwise it is extended. +<p> If <em>mark</em> is false, the selection is cleared. otherwise it is extended. <p> <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEdited"></a>TQMultiLineEdit::setEdited ( bool ) </h3><p>Sets whether the document has been edited by the user. diff --git a/doc/html/tqmutex-h.html b/doc/html/tqmutex-h.html index c7f3a38c7..5e17d6609 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmutex-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmutex-h.html @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQMutex friend class TQWaitConditionPrivate; public: - TQMutex(bool recursive = FALSE); + TQMutex(bool recursive = false); virtual ~TQMutex(); void lock(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqmutex.html b/doc/html/tqmutex.html index 54f7f93a5..164b7a091 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqmutex.html +++ b/doc/html/tqmutex.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqmutex-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQMutex"><b>TQMutex</b></a> ( bool recursive = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQMutex"><b>TQMutex</b></a> ( bool recursive = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQMutex"><b>~TQMutex</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#lock"><b>lock</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#unlock"><b>unlock</b></a> ()</li> @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ lock calls <a href="#unlock">unlock</a>(). A non-blocking alternative to lock() <p>See also <a href="environment.html">Environment Classes</a> and <a href="thread.html">Threading</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMutex"></a>TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQMutex"></a>TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = false ) </h3> Constructs a new mutex. The mutex is created in an unlocked state. -A recursive mutex is created if <em>recursive</em> is TRUE; a normal -mutex is created if <em>recursive</em> is FALSE (the default). With a +A recursive mutex is created if <em>recursive</em> is true; a normal +mutex is created if <em>recursive</em> is false (the default). With a recursive mutex, a thread can lock the same mutex multiple times and it will not be unlocked until a corresponding number of <a href="#unlock">unlock</a>() calls have been made. @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ then this call will <em>block</em> until that thread has unlocked it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="locked"></a>TQMutex::locked () </h3> -Returns TRUE if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise +returns false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Due to differing implementations of recursive mutexes on various platforms, calling this function from the same thread that previously locked the mutex will return undefined results. @@ -166,8 +166,8 @@ previously locked the mutex will return undefined results. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tryLock"></a>TQMutex::tryLock () </h3> Attempt to lock the mutex. If the lock was obtained, this function -returns TRUE. If another thread has locked the mutex, this -function returns FALSE, instead of waiting for the mutex to become +returns true. If another thread has locked the mutex, this +function returns false, instead of waiting for the mutex to become available, i.e. it does not block. <p> If the lock was obtained, the mutex must be unlocked with <a href="#unlock">unlock</a>() before another thread can successfully lock it. diff --git a/doc/html/tqnetworkprotocol.html b/doc/html/tqnetworkprotocol.html index 97fd87bf1..c9944dba6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqnetworkprotocol.html +++ b/doc/html/tqnetworkprotocol.html @@ -199,15 +199,15 @@ immediately. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQNetworkProtocol::autoDelete () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoDelete">TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkConnection"></a>TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection ( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> * op )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> For processing operations the network protocol base class calls this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new -network protocols. It should return TRUE if the connection is OK -(open); otherwise it should return FALSE. If the connection is not +network protocols. It should return true if the connection is OK +(open); otherwise it should return false. If the connection is not open the protocol should open it. <p> If the connection can't be opened (e.g. because you already tried but the host couldn't be found), set the state of <em>op</em> to @@ -301,8 +301,8 @@ convenient. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasOnlyLocalFileSystem"></a>TQNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the only protocol registered is for working on the -local filesystem; returns FALSE if other network protocols are +Returns true if the only protocol registered is for working on the +local filesystem; returns false if other network protocols are also registered. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="itemChanged"></a>TQNetworkProtocol::itemChanged ( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> * op )<tt> [signal]</tt> @@ -477,10 +477,10 @@ protocol, emit its corresponding signal. </h3> Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete -mechanism. If you set <em>b</em> to TRUE, the network protocol instance +mechanism. If you set <em>b</em> to true, the network protocol instance is removed after it has been inactive for <em>i</em> milliseconds (i.e. <em>i</em> milliseconds after the last operation has been processed). -If you set <em>b</em> to FALSE the auto-delete mechanism is switched +If you set <em>b</em> to false the auto-delete mechanism is switched off. <p> If you switch on auto-delete, the TQNetworkProtocol also deletes its <a href="tqurloperator.html">TQUrlOperator</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqobject-h.html b/doc/html/tqobject-h.html index 6b994e664..4a074d791 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqobject-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqobject-h.html @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ public: virtual void setName( const char *name ); bool isWidgetType() const { return isWidget; } - bool highPriority() const { return FALSE; } + bool highPriority() const { return false; } bool signalsBlocked() const { return blockSig; } void blockSignals( bool b ); @@ -134,15 +134,15 @@ public: void killTimer( int id ); void killTimers(); - TQObject *child( const char *objName, const char *inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ); //### const in 4.0 + TQObject *child( const char *objName, const char *inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true ); //### const in 4.0 const TQObjectList *children() const { return childObjects; } static const TQObjectList *objectTrees(); TQObjectList *queryList( const char *inheritsClass = 0, const char *objName = 0, - bool regexpMatch = TRUE, - bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const; + bool regexpMatch = true, + bool recursiveSearch = true ) const; virtual void insertChild( TQObject * ); virtual void removeChild( TQObject * ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqobject.html b/doc/html/tqobject.html index 85cb488d0..627bb032b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqobject.html +++ b/doc/html/tqobject.html @@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#startTimer"><b>startTimer</b></a> ( int interval )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#killTimer"><b>killTimer</b></a> ( int id )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#killTimers"><b>killTimers</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>TQObject * <a href="#child"><b>child</b></a> ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQObject * <a href="#child"><b>child</b></a> ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true )</li> <li class=fn>const TQObjectList * <a href="#children"><b>children</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQObjectList * <a href="#queryList"><b>queryList</b></a> ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQObjectList * <a href="#queryList"><b>queryList</b></a> ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = true, bool recursiveSearch = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#insertChild"><b>insertChild</b></a> ( TQObject * obj )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeChild"><b>removeChild</b></a> ( TQObject * obj )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#installEventFilter"><b>installEventFilter</b></a> ( const TQObject * filterObj )</li> @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ delivered to the object. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="blockSignals"></a>TQObject::blockSignals ( bool block ) </h3> -Blocks signals if <em>block</em> is TRUE, or unblocks signals if <em>block</em> is FALSE. +Blocks signals if <em>block</em> is true, or unblocks signals if <em>block</em> is false. <p> Emitted signals disappear into hyperspace if signals are blocked. Note that the <a href="#destroyed">destroyed</a>() signals will be emitted even if the signals for this object have been blocked. @@ -206,19 +206,19 @@ for this object have been blocked. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkConnectArgs"></a>TQObject::checkConnectArgs ( const char * signal, const <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * receiver, const char * member )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the <em>signal</em> and the <em>member</em> arguments are -compatible; otherwise returns FALSE. (The <em>receiver</em> argument is +<p> Returns true if the <em>signal</em> and the <em>member</em> arguments are +compatible; otherwise returns false. (The <em>receiver</em> argument is currently ignored.) <p> <b>Warning:</b> We recommend that you use the default implementation and do not reimplement this function. <p> -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * <a name="child"></a>TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * <a name="child"></a>TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true ) </h3> Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object, and returns a child that is called <em>objName</em> that inherits <em>inheritsClass</em>. If <em>inheritsClass</em> is 0 (the default), any class matches. -<p> If <em>recursiveSearch</em> is TRUE (the default), <a href="#child">child</a>() performs a +<p> If <em>recursiveSearch</em> is true (the default), <a href="#child">child</a>() performs a depth-first search of the object's children. <p> If there is no such object, this function returns 0. If there are more than one, the first one found is retured; if you need all of @@ -276,8 +276,8 @@ definition lacks the <a href="metaobjects.html#TQ_OBJECT">TQ_OBJECT</a> macro. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="connect"></a>TQObject::connect ( const <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * sender, const char * signal, const <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * receiver, const char * member )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Connects <em>signal</em> from the <em>sender</em> object to <em>member</em> in object -<em>receiver</em>, and returns TRUE if the connection succeeds; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<em>receiver</em>, and returns true if the connection succeeds; otherwise +returns false. <p> You must use the TQ_SIGNAL() and TQ_SLOT() macros when specifying the <em>signal</em> and the <em>member</em>, for example: <pre> @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ and the <em>member</em>, for example: <p> This example ensures that the label always displays the current scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would -not work and return FALSE: +not work and return false: <a href="#connect">TQObject::connect</a>( scroll, TQ_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)), label, TQ_SLOT(setNum(int v)) ); <p> A signal can also be connected to another signal: @@ -322,8 +322,8 @@ relates to MyWidget. can be connected to one slot. <p> If a signal is connected to several slots, the slots are activated in an arbitrary order when the signal is emitted. -<p> The function returns TRUE if it successfully connects the signal -to the slot. It will return FALSE if it cannot create the +<p> The function returns true if it successfully connects the signal +to the slot. It will return false if it cannot create the connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the existence of either <em>signal</em> or <em>member</em>, or if their signatures aren't compatible. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ information). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="event"></a>TQObject::event ( <a href="tqevent.html">TQEvent</a> * e )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This virtual function receives events to an object and should -return TRUE if the event <em>e</em> was recognized and processed. +return true if the event <em>e</em> was recognized and processed. <p> The <a href="#event">event</a>() function can be reimplemented to customize the behavior of an object. <p> <p>See also <a href="#installEventFilter">installEventFilter</a>(), <a href="#timerEvent">timerEvent</a>(), <a href="tqapplication.html#sendEvent">TQApplication::sendEvent</a>(), <a href="tqapplication.html#postEvent">TQApplication::postEvent</a>(), and <a href="tqwidget.html#event">TQWidget::event</a>(). @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Filters events if this object has been installed as an event filter for the <em>watched</em> object. <p> In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter the event <em>e</em>, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return -TRUE; otherwise return FALSE. +true; otherwise return false. <p> Example: <pre> class MyMainWindow : public <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> @@ -522,9 +522,9 @@ TRUE; otherwise return FALSE. if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) { <a href="tqkeyevent.html">TQKeyEvent</a> *k = (TQKeyEvent*)ev; <a href="tqapplication.html#qDebug">tqDebug</a>( "Ate key press %d", k-><a href="tqkeyevent.html#key">key</a>() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { // pass the event on to the parent class @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ the base class's <a href="#eventFilter">eventFilter</a>() function, since the ba might have reimplemented eventFilter() for its own internal purposes. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If you delete the receiver object in this function, be -sure to return TRUE. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the +sure to return true. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the deleted object and the program might crash. <p> <p>See also <a href="#installEventFilter">installEventFilter</a>(). @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ deleted object and the program might crash. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="highPriority"></a>TQObject::highPriority () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if +<p> Returns true if the object is a high-priority object, or false if it is a standard-priority object. <p> High-priority objects are placed first in TQObject's list of children on the assumption that they will be referenced very @@ -554,21 +554,21 @@ often. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inherits"></a>TQObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of a class that +Returns true if this object is an instance of a class that inherits <em>clname</em>, and <em>clname</em> inherits TQObject; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> A class is considered to inherit itself. <p> Example: <pre> <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a> *t = new <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a>; // TQTimer inherits TQObject - t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQTimer" ); // returns TRUE - t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQObject" ); // returns TRUE - t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQButton" ); // returns FALSE + t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQTimer" ); // returns true + t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQObject" ); // returns true + t-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQButton" ); // returns false // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl <a href="tqscrollbar.html">TQScrollBar</a> *s = new <a href="tqscrollbar.html">TQScrollBar</a>( 0 ); - s-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQWidget" ); // returns TRUE - s-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns FALSE + s-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQWidget" ); // returns true + s-><a href="#inherits">inherits</a>( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns false </pre> <p> (<a href="tqrangecontrol.html">TQRangeControl</a> is not a TQObject.) @@ -596,8 +596,8 @@ setting the parent widget in the constructor or by calling sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or forward it to this object. The event filter <em>filterObj</em> receives events via its <a href="#eventFilter">eventFilter</a>() function. The eventFilter() function -must return TRUE if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); -otherwise it must return FALSE. +must return true if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); +otherwise it must return false. <p> If multiple event filters are installed on a single object, the filter that was installed last is activated first. <p> Here's a <tt>KeyPressEater</tt> class that eats the key presses of its @@ -616,10 +616,10 @@ monitored objects: // special processing for key press <a href="tqkeyevent.html">TQKeyEvent</a> *k = (TQKeyEvent *)e; <a href="tqapplication.html#qDebug">tqDebug</a>( "Ate key press %d", k-><a href="tqkeyevent.html#key">key</a>() ); - return TRUE; // eat event + return true; // eat event } else { // standard event processing - return FALSE; + return false; } } </pre> @@ -637,19 +637,19 @@ monitored objects: <p> The <a href="tqaccel.html">TQAccel</a> class, for example, uses this technique to intercept accelerator key presses. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If you delete the receiver object in your <a href="#eventFilter">eventFilter</a>() -function, be sure to return TRUE. If you return FALSE, TQt sends +function, be sure to return true. If you return false, TQt sends the event to the deleted object and the program will crash. <p> <p>See also <a href="#removeEventFilter">removeEventFilter</a>(), <a href="#eventFilter">eventFilter</a>(), and <a href="#event">event</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isA"></a>TQObject::isA ( const char * clname ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of the class <em>clname</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this object is an instance of the class <em>clname</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> Example: <pre> <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a> *t = new <a href="tqtimer.html">TQTimer</a>; // TQTimer inherits TQObject - t-><a href="#isA">isA</a>( "TQTimer" ); // returns TRUE - t-><a href="#isA">isA</a>( "TQObject" ); // returns FALSE + t-><a href="#isA">isA</a>( "TQTimer" ); // returns true + t-><a href="#isA">isA</a>( "TQObject" ); // returns false </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#inherits">inherits</a>() and <a href="#metaObject">metaObject</a>(). @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isWidgetType"></a>TQObject::isWidgetType () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the object is a widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the object is a widget; otherwise returns false. <p> Calling this function is equivalent to calling <a href="#inherits">inherits</a>("TQWidget"), except that it is much faster. @@ -727,22 +727,22 @@ Returns the value of the object's <em>name</em> property. the <a href="#metaObject">metaObject</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#setProperty">setProperty</a>(), <a href="tqvariant.html#isValid">TQVariant::isValid</a>(), <a href="#metaObject">metaObject</a>(), <a href="tqmetaobject.html#propertyNames">TQMetaObject::propertyNames</a>(), and <a href="tqmetaobject.html#property">TQMetaObject::property</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqobjectlist.html">TQObjectList</a> * <a name="queryList"></a>TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqobjectlist.html">TQObjectList</a> * <a name="queryList"></a>TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = true, bool recursiveSearch = true ) const </h3> Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object, and returns a list of those objects that are named or that match <em>objName</em> and inherit <em>inheritsClass</em>. If <em>inheritsClass</em> is 0 (the default), all classes match. If <em>objName</em> is 0 (the default), all object names match. -<p> If <em>regexpMatch</em> is TRUE (the default), <em>objName</em> is a <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that -of a <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a>. If <em>regexpMatch</em> is FALSE, <em>objName</em> is a string +<p> If <em>regexpMatch</em> is true (the default), <em>objName</em> is a <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that +of a <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a>. If <em>regexpMatch</em> is false, <em>objName</em> is a string and object names must match it exactly. <p> Note that <em>inheritsClass</em> uses single inheritance from TQObject, the way <a href="#inherits">inherits</a>() does. According to inherits(), <a href="tqmenubar.html">TQMenuBar</a> inherits <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> but not <a href="tqmenudata.html">TQMenuData</a>. This does not quite match reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of compilers TQt supports. -<p> Finally, if <em>recursiveSearch</em> is TRUE (the default), <a href="#queryList">queryList</a>() +<p> Finally, if <em>recursiveSearch</em> is true (the default), <a href="#queryList">queryList</a>() searches <em>n</em>th-generation as well as first-generation children. <p> If all this seems a bit complex for your needs, the simpler <a href="#child">child</a>() function may be what you want. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ window: while ( (obj = it.current()) != 0 ) { // for each found object... ++it; - ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( FALSE ); + ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( false ); } delete l; // delete the list, not the objects </pre> @@ -808,8 +808,8 @@ Sets the object's name to <em>name</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="setProperty"></a>TQObject::setProperty ( const char * name, const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & value )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the value of the object's <em>name</em> property to <em>value</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns +false. <p> Information about all available properties is provided through the <a href="#metaObject">metaObject</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#property">property</a>(), <a href="#metaObject">metaObject</a>(), <a href="tqmetaobject.html#propertyNames">TQMetaObject::propertyNames</a>(), and <a href="tqmetaobject.html#property">TQMetaObject::property</a>(). @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="signalsBlocked"></a>TQObject::signalsBlocked () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if signals are blocked; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if signals are blocked; otherwise returns false. <p> Signals are not blocked by default. <p> <p>See also <a href="#blockSignals">blockSignals</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqobjectcleanuphandler.html b/doc/html/tqobjectcleanuphandler.html index 9cffb71a0..0bbb2fda8 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqobjectcleanuphandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqobjectcleanuphandler.html @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ in an application that has been allocated in a shared library. // TQLibraryInterface implementation bool FactoryComponent::init() { - return TRUE; + return true; } void FactoryComponent::cleanup() @@ -117,8 +117,8 @@ becomes empty. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in -this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return FALSE. +Returns true if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in +this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="remove"></a>TQObjectCleanupHandler::remove ( <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * object ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqpaintdevice-h.html b/doc/html/tqpaintdevice-h.html index dafd2f49e..f92441d7c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpaintdevice-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpaintdevice-h.html @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ protected: void copyX11Data( const TQPaintDevice * ); void cloneX11Data( const TQPaintDevice * ); virtual void setX11Data( const TQPaintDeviceX11Data* ); - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* getX11Data( bool def=FALSE ) const; + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* getX11Data( bool def=false ) const; #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) #if !defined( TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ ) CGContextRef ctx; @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ protected: friend class TQPaintDeviceMetrics; #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) #ifndef TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ - virtual CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=TRUE) const; + virtual CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=true) const; #endif friend TQ_EXPORT void unclippedScaledBitBlt( TQPaintDevice *, int, int, int, int, const TQPaintDevice *, int, int, int, int, TQt::RasterOp, bool, bool ); @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= TQ_EXPORT void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice *src, int sx=0, int sy=0, int sw=-1, int sh=-1, - TQt::RasterOp = TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=FALSE ); + TQt::RasterOp = TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=false ); TQ_EXPORT void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ inline bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual() TQ_EXPORT inline void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, const TQPoint &dp, const TQPaintDevice *src, const TQRect &sr =TQRect(0,0,-1,-1), - TQt::RasterOp rop=TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=FALSE ) + TQt::RasterOp rop=TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=false ) { bitBlt( dst, dp.x(), dp.y(), src, sr.x(), sr.y(), sr.width(), sr.height(), rop, ignoreMask ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqpaintdevice.html b/doc/html/tqpaintdevice.html index 206d51f92..9d9beac1d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpaintdevice.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpaintdevice.html @@ -160,17 +160,17 @@ low-level access. Using this function is not portable. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExtDev"></a>TQPaintDevice::isExtDev () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the device is an external paint device; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the device is an external paint device; otherwise +returns false. <p> External paint devices cannot be <a href="#bitBlt">bitBlt</a>()'ed from. <a href="tqpicture.html">TQPicture</a> and <a href="tqprinter.html">TQPrinter</a> are external paint devices. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="paintingActive"></a>TQPaintDevice::paintingActive () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has +<p> Returns true if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has called <a href="tqpainter.html#begin">TQPainter::begin</a>() but not yet called <a href="tqpainter.html#end">TQPainter::end</a>() for -this device; otherwise returns FALSE. +this device; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqpainter.html#isActive">TQPainter::isActive</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="x11AppCells"></a>TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -227,17 +227,17 @@ portable. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="x11AppDefaultVisual"></a>TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for the default +<p> Returns true if the Visual used is the default for the default screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only); -otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable. +otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="x11AppDefaultVisual-2"></a>TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ( int screen )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for screen +<p> Returns true if the Visual used is the default for screen <em>screen</em> of the X display global to the application (X11 only); -otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable. +otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="x11AppDepth"></a>TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth ( int screen )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ is the top-left pixel in <em>src</em> (0, 0) by default, <em>dx</em>, <em>dy</em the top-left position in <em>dst</em> and <em>sw</em>, <em>sh</em> is the size of the copied block (all of <em>src</em> by default). <p> The most common values for <em>rop</em> are CopyROP and XorROP; the <a href="tqt.html#RasterOp-enum">TQt::RasterOp</a> documentation defines all the possible values. -<p> If <em>ignoreMask</em> is FALSE (the default) and <em>src</em> is a +<p> If <em>ignoreMask</em> is false (the default) and <em>src</em> is a masked <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a>, the entire blit is masked by <em>src</em>->mask(). <p> If <em>src</em>, <em>dst</em>, <em>sw</em> or <em>sh</em> is 0, <a href="#bitBlt">bitBlt</a>() does nothing. If <em>sw</em> or <em>sh</em> is negative bitBlt() copies starting at <em>sx</em> (and diff --git a/doc/html/tqpainter-h.html b/doc/html/tqpainter-h.html index e5946ca03..badfb005f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpainter-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpainter-h.html @@ -103,12 +103,12 @@ public: enum CoordinateMode { CoordDevice, CoordPainter }; TQPainter(); - TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); - TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); + TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = false ); + TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = false ); ~TQPainter(); - bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); - bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); + bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = false ); + bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = false ); bool end(); TQPaintDevice *device() const; @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ public: void setWorldXForm( bool ); // set world xform on/off const TQWMatrix &worldMatrix() const; // get/set world xform matrix - void setWorldMatrix( const TQWMatrix &, bool combine=FALSE ); + void setWorldMatrix( const TQWMatrix &, bool combine=false ); void saveWorldMatrix(); void restoreWorldMatrix(); @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ public: int index=0, int nlines=-1 ); void drawPolyline( const TQPointArray &, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); - void drawPolygon( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=FALSE, + void drawPolygon( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=false, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); void drawConvexPolygon( const TQPointArray &, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ private: void map( int, int, int, int, int *, int *, int *, int * ) const; void mapInv( int, int, int *, int * ) const; void mapInv( int, int, int, int, int *, int *, int *, int * ) const; - void drawPolyInternal( const TQPointArray &, bool close=TRUE ); + void drawPolyInternal( const TQPointArray &, bool close=true ); void drawWinFocusRect( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool xorPaint, const TQColor &penColor ); @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ protected: uint clip_serial; // clipping serial number #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) TQt::HANDLE hd; // handle to drawable - void initPaintDevice(bool force=FALSE, TQPoint *off=NULL, TQRegion *rgn=NULL); + void initPaintDevice(bool force=false, TQPoint *off=NULL, TQRegion *rgn=NULL); friend const TQRegion &qt_mac_update_painter(TQPainter *, bool); friend class TQFontEngineMac; friend class TQMacPainter; diff --git a/doc/html/tqpainter.html b/doc/html/tqpainter.html index bf08f62b4..5c09278f4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpainter.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpainter.html @@ -39,11 +39,11 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <ul> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#CoordinateMode-enum"><b>CoordinateMode</b></a> { CoordDevice, CoordPainter }</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQPainter"><b>TQPainter</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPainter-2"><b>TQPainter</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPainter-3"><b>TQPainter</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPainter-2"><b>TQPainter</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPainter-3"><b>TQPainter</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQPainter"><b>~TQPainter</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#begin"><b>begin</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#begin-2"><b>begin</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#begin"><b>begin</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#begin-2"><b>begin</b></a> ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#end"><b>end</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQPaintDevice * <a href="#device"><b>device</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isActive"><b>isActive</b></a> () const</li> @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>void <a href="#setViewport"><b>setViewport</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setWorldXForm"><b>setWorldXForm</b></a> ( bool enable )</li> <li class=fn>const TQWMatrix & <a href="#worldMatrix"><b>worldMatrix</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setWorldMatrix"><b>setWorldMatrix</b></a> ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setWorldMatrix"><b>setWorldMatrix</b></a> ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = false )</li> <li class=fn>void saveWorldMatrix () <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void restoreWorldMatrix () <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#scale"><b>scale</b></a> ( double sx, double sy )</li> @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawChord-2"><b>drawChord</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, int a, int alen )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawLineSegments"><b>drawLineSegments</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int nlines = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawPolyline"><b>drawPolyline</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#drawPolygon"><b>drawPolygon</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#drawPolygon"><b>drawPolygon</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawConvexPolygon"><b>drawConvexPolygon</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawCubicBezier"><b>drawCubicBezier</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#drawPixmap"><b>drawPixmap</b></a> ( int x, int y, const TQPixmap & pixmap, int sx = 0, int sy = 0, int sw = -1, int sh = -1 )</li> @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ transformations, they are optimized away, gaining another little bit of speed. <p> After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. <a href="#hasClipping">hasClipping</a>() is -TRUE if TQPainter clips, and <a href="#clipRegion">clipRegion</a>() returns the clip region. +true if TQPainter clips, and <a href="#clipRegion">clipRegion</a>() returns the clip region. You can set it using either <a href="#setClipRegion">setClipRegion</a>() or <a href="#setClipRect">setClipRect</a>(). Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent, but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is @@ -341,11 +341,11 @@ Constructs a painter. to default values when <a href="#begin">begin</a>() is called. <p> <p>See also <a href="#begin">begin</a>() and <a href="#end">end</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPainter-2"></a>TQPainter::TQPainter ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPainter-2"></a>TQPainter::TQPainter ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, bool unclipped = false ) </h3> Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device <em>pd</em> immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the -painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if <em>unclipped</em> is TRUE. +painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if <em>unclipped</em> is true. <p> This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a <a href="tqwidget.html#paintEvent">paint event</a> and should be used only once. The constructor calls <a href="#begin">begin</a>() for you and the TQPainter @@ -375,11 +375,11 @@ of the painter failed you should rather use begin() and end() to paint on external devices, e.g. printers. <p> <p>See also <a href="#begin">begin</a>() and <a href="#end">end</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPainter-3"></a>TQPainter::TQPainter ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, const <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPainter-3"></a>TQPainter::TQPainter ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, const <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false ) </h3> Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device <em>pd</em> immediately, with the default arguments taken from <em>copyAttributes</em>. The painter will paint over children of the paint -device if <em>unclipped</em> is TRUE (although this is not supported on +device if <em>unclipped</em> is true (although this is not supported on all platforms). <p> <p>See also <a href="#begin">begin</a>(). @@ -399,10 +399,10 @@ Destroys the painter. <p> Returns the current background mode. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setBackgroundMode">setBackgroundMode</a>() and <a href="tqt.html#BGMode-enum">BGMode</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="begin"></a>TQPainter::begin ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="begin"></a>TQPainter::begin ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, bool unclipped = false ) </h3> -Begins painting the paint device <em>pd</em> and returns TRUE if -successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If <em>unclipped</em> is TRUE, the +Begins painting the paint device <em>pd</em> and returns true if +successful; otherwise returns false. If <em>unclipped</em> is true, the painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries, (although this is not supported by all platforms). <p> The errors that can occur are serious problems, such as these: @@ -424,13 +424,13 @@ time. <p> <p>See also <a href="#end">end</a>() and <a href="#flush">flush</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="aclock-example.html#x1183">aclock/aclock.cpp</a>, <a href="desktop-example.html#x1733">desktop/desktop.cpp</a>, <a href="drawdemo-example.html#x1067">drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp</a>, <a href="hello-example.html#x1633">hello/hello.cpp</a>, <a href="picture-example.html#x111">picture/picture.cpp</a>, <a href="tutorial1-10.html#x2348">t10/cannon.cpp</a>, and <a href="xform-example.html#x1233">xform/xform.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="begin-2"></a>TQPainter::begin ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, const <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="begin-2"></a>TQPainter::begin ( const <a href="tqpaintdevice.html">TQPaintDevice</a> * pd, const <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> This version opens the painter on a paint device <em>pd</em> and sets the initial pen, background color and font from <em>copyAttributes</em>, painting over the paint device's children when <em>unclipped</em> is -TRUE. This is equivalent to: +true. This is equivalent to: <p> <pre> TQPainter p; p.<a href="#begin">begin</a>( pd ); @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ greater, <em>npoints</em> points are drawn. values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in TQt 4. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawPolygon"></a>TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawPolygon"></a>TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> & a, bool winding = false, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 ) </h3> Draws the polygon defined by the <em>npoints</em> points in <em>a</em> starting at <em>a[index]</em>. (<em>index</em> defaults to 0.) @@ -758,8 +758,8 @@ array are used (i.e. a.size()-index line segments define the polygon). <p> The first point is always connected to the last point. <p> The polygon is filled with the current <a href="#brush">brush</a>(). If <em>winding</em> is -TRUE, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If -<em>winding</em> is FALSE, the polygon is filled using the even-odd +true, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If +<em>winding</em> is false, the polygon is filled using the even-odd (alternative) fill algorithm. <p> <b>Warning:</b> On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in @@ -1018,30 +1018,30 @@ function is not portable. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasClipping"></a>TQPainter::hasClipping () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if clipping has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if clipping has been set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setClipping">setClipping</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="themes-example.html#x217">themes/wood.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasViewXForm"></a>TQPainter::hasViewXForm () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setViewXForm">setViewXForm</a>() and <a href="#xForm">xForm</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasWorldXForm"></a>TQPainter::hasWorldXForm () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWorldXForm">setWorldXForm</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQPainter::isActive () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the painter is active painting, i.e. <a href="#begin">begin</a>() has +<p> Returns true if the painter is active painting, i.e. <a href="#begin">begin</a>() has been called and <a href="#end">end</a>() has not yet been called; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqpaintdevice.html#paintingActive">TQPaintDevice::paintingActive</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="desktop-example.html#x1739">desktop/desktop.cpp</a> and <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1002">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>. @@ -1222,7 +1222,7 @@ and <em>not</em> subject to any <a href="coordsys.html">coordinate <p>Examples: <a href="qfd-example.html#x1999">qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp</a> and <a href="themes-example.html#x220">themes/wood.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setClipping"></a>TQPainter::setClipping ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables clipping if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables clipping if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables clipping if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables clipping if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hasClipping">hasClipping</a>(), <a href="#setClipRect">setClipRect</a>(), and <a href="#setClipRegion">setClipRegion</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="themes-example.html#x221">themes/wood.cpp</a>. @@ -1282,8 +1282,8 @@ character 'x' in the font currently set on the painter. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setViewXForm"></a>TQPainter::setViewXForm ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables view transformations if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables -view transformations if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables view transformations if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables +view transformations if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hasViewXForm">hasViewXForm</a>(), <a href="#setWindow">setWindow</a>(), <a href="#setViewport">setViewport</a>(), <a href="#setWorldMatrix">setWorldMatrix</a>(), <a href="#setWorldXForm">setWorldXForm</a>(), and <a href="#xForm">xForm</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setViewport"></a>TQPainter::setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h ) @@ -1322,15 +1322,15 @@ rectangle. See the <a href="coordsys.html">Coordinate System Overview</a> for an This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets the painter's window to rectangle <em>r</em>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWorldMatrix"></a>TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & m, bool combine = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWorldMatrix"></a>TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & m, bool combine = false ) </h3> Sets the world <a href="tqwmatrix.html#TransformationMode">transformation matrix</a> to <em>m</em> and enables world transformation. -<p> If <em>combine</em> is TRUE, then <em>m</em> is combined with the current +<p> If <em>combine</em> is true, then <em>m</em> is combined with the current transformation matrix, otherwise <em>m</em> replaces the current transformation matrix. -<p> If <em>m</em> is the identity matrix and <em>combine</em> is FALSE, this -function calls <a href="#setWorldXForm">setWorldXForm</a>(FALSE). (The identity matrix is the +<p> If <em>m</em> is the identity matrix and <em>combine</em> is false, this +function calls <a href="#setWorldXForm">setWorldXForm</a>(false). (The identity matrix is the matrix where <a href="tqwmatrix.html#m11">TQWMatrix::m11</a>() and <a href="tqwmatrix.html#m22">TQWMatrix::m22</a>() are 1.0 and the rest are 0.0.) <p> World transformations are applied after the view transformations @@ -1349,7 +1349,7 @@ a TQWMatrix: { <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> m; m.<a href="tqwmatrix.html#rotate">rotate</a>( a ); - <a href="#setWorldMatrix">setWorldMatrix</a>( m, TRUE ); + <a href="#setWorldMatrix">setWorldMatrix</a>( m, true ); } </pre> @@ -1363,8 +1363,8 @@ scale(), etc., is safe. <p>Examples: <a href="drawdemo-example.html#x1078">drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp</a> and <a href="xform-example.html#x1242">xform/xform.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWorldXForm"></a>TQPainter::setWorldXForm ( bool enable ) </h3> -Enables world transformations if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or disables -world transformations if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. The world +Enables world transformations if <em>enable</em> is true, or disables +world transformations if <em>enable</em> is false. The world <a href="tqwmatrix.html#TransformationMode">transformation matrix</a> is not changed. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWorldMatrix">setWorldMatrix</a>(), <a href="#setWindow">setWindow</a>(), <a href="#setViewport">setViewport</a>(), <a href="#setViewXForm">setViewXForm</a>(), and <a href="#xForm">xForm</a>(). @@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ shaded line using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> Nothing is drawn if <em>y1</em> != <em>y2</em> and <em>x1</em> != <em>x2</em> (i.e. the line is neither horizontal nor vertical). <p> The color group argument <em>g</em> specifies the shading colors (<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#light">light</a>, <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#dark">dark</a> and <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#mid">middle</a> colors). -<p> The line appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is TRUE, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is FALSE. +<p> The line appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is true, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is false. <p> The <em>lineWidth</em> argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width. <p> The <em>midLineWidth</em> argument specifies the width of a middle line @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ widgets that follow the current GUI style. <p> Draws the shaded panel specified by (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>) using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> The color group argument <em>g</em> specifies the shading colors (<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#light">light</a>, <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#dark">dark</a> and <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#mid">middle</a> colors). -<p> The panel appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is TRUE, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is FALSE. +<p> The panel appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is true, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is false. <p> The <em>lineWidth</em> argument specifies the line width. <p> The panel's interior is filled with the <em>fill</em> brush unless <em>fill</em> is 0. <p> If you want to use a <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a> widget instead, you can make it @@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ widgets that follow the current GUI style. <p> Draws the shaded rectangle specified by (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>) using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> The color group argument <em>g</em> specifies the shading colors (<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#light">light</a>, <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#dark">dark</a> and <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#mid">middle</a> colors). -<p> The rectangle appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is TRUE, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is FALSE. +<p> The rectangle appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is true, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is false. <p> The <em>lineWidth</em> argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width. <p> The <em>midLineWidth</em> argument specifies the width of a middle line @@ -1587,7 +1587,7 @@ widgets that follow the current GUI style. <p> <tt>#include <tqdrawutil.h></tt> <p> Draws the Windows-style button specified by (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>) using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> The color group argument <em>g</em> specifies the shading colors (<a href="tqcolorgroup.html#light">light</a>, <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#dark">dark</a> and <a href="tqcolorgroup.html#mid">middle</a> colors). -<p> The button appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is TRUE, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is FALSE. +<p> The button appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is true, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is false. <p> The line width is 2 pixels. <p> The button's interior is filled with the <em>*fill</em> brush unless <em>fill</em> is 0. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function does not look at <a href="tqwidget.html#style">TQWidget::style</a>() or @@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ widgets that follow the current GUI style. <p> <tt>#include <tqdrawutil.h></tt> <p> Draws the Windows-style panel specified by (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>) using the painter <em>p</em>. <p> The color group argument <em>g</em> specifies the shading colors. -<p> The panel appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is TRUE, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is FALSE. +<p> The panel appears sunken if <em>sunken</em> is true, or raised if <em>sunken</em> is false. <p> The line width is 2 pixels. <p> The button's interior is filled with the <em>fill</em> brush unless <em>fill</em> is 0. <p> If you want to use a <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a> widget instead, you can make it diff --git a/doc/html/tqpaintevent.html b/doc/html/tqpaintevent.html index 2d8d2251f..7560055aa 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpaintevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpaintevent.html @@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqpaintevent-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent-2"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent-3"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = true )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent-2"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPaintEvent-3"><b>TQPaintEvent</b></a> ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )</li> <li class=fn>const TQRect & <a href="#rect"><b>rect</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>const TQRegion & <a href="#region"><b>region</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#erased"><b>erased</b></a> () const</li> @@ -57,39 +57,39 @@ widget is moved. provided because many widgets can't make much use of region(), and rect() can be much faster than region().boundingRect(). Painting is clipped to region() during processing of a paint event. -<p> The <a href="#erased">erased</a>() function returns TRUE if the region() has been +<p> The <a href="#erased">erased</a>() function returns true if the region() has been cleared to the widget's background (see -<a href="tqwidget.html#backgroundMode">TQWidget::backgroundMode</a>()), and FALSE if the region's contents are +<a href="tqwidget.html#backgroundMode">TQWidget::backgroundMode</a>()), and false if the region's contents are arbitrary. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a>, <a href="tqwidget.html#update">TQWidget::update</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">TQWidget::repaint</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#paintEvent">TQWidget::paintEvent</a>(), <a href="tqwidget.html#backgroundMode-prop">TQWidget::backgroundMode</a>, <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a>, and <a href="events.html">Event Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & paintRegion, bool erased = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a paint event object with the region that should be updated. The region is given by <em>paintRegion</em>. If <em>erased</em> is -TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. +true the region will be cleared before repainting. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent-2"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent-2"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & paintRect, bool erased = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that should be updated. The region is also given by <em>paintRect</em>. If <em>erased</em> is -TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. +true the region will be cleared before repainting. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent-3"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & paintRegion, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPaintEvent-3"></a>TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & paintRegion, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & paintRect, bool erased = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle <em>paintRect</em> that should be updated. The region is given by <em>paintRegion</em>. If -<em>erased</em> is TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. +<em>erased</em> is true the region will be cleared before repainting. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="erased"></a>TQPaintEvent::erased () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been -erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been +erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & <a name="rect"></a>TQPaintEvent::rect () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqpalette.html b/doc/html/tqpalette.html index 37265b295..4b11b1c02 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpalette.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpalette.html @@ -183,17 +183,17 @@ operator and offers no benefits. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCopyOf"></a>TQPalette::isCopyOf ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & p ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if this palette and <em>p</em> are copies of each other, +Returns true if this palette and <em>p</em> are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither -was subsequently modified; otherwise returns FALSE. This is much +was subsequently modified; otherwise returns false. This is much stricter than equality. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq">operator=</a>() and <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQPalette::operator!= ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & p ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE (slowly) if this palette is different from <em>p</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE (usually quickly). +<p> Returns true (slowly) if this palette is different from <em>p</em>; +otherwise returns false (usually quickly). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQPalette::operator= ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & p ) </h3> @@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ palette. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQPalette::operator== ( const <a href="tqpalette.html">TQPalette</a> & p ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to <em>p</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE (slowly). +Returns true (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to <em>p</em>; +otherwise returns false (slowly). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="serialNumber"></a>TQPalette::serialNumber () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqpen.html b/doc/html/tqpen.html index 6b1f06bd2..ff4f1064f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpen.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpen.html @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ Returns the pen's join style. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQPen::operator!= ( const <a href="tqpen.html">TQPen</a> & p ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the pen is different from <em>p</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the pen is different from <em>p</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or colors. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Assigns <em>p</em> to this pen and returns a reference to this pen. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQPen::operator== ( const <a href="tqpen.html">TQPen</a> & p ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the pen is equal to <em>p</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the pen is equal to <em>p</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqpicture.html b/doc/html/tqpicture.html index 1200582d4..8c13415aa 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpicture.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpicture.html @@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ Nothing is done if there is just a single reference. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQPicture::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="load"></a>TQPicture::load ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, const char * format = 0 ) </h3> Loads a picture from the file specified by <em>fileName</em> and returns -TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> By default, the file will be interpreted as being in the native TQPicture format. Specifying the <em>format</em> string is optional and is only needed for importing picture data stored in a different @@ -202,15 +202,15 @@ picture and returns a reference to this picture. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="play"></a>TQPicture::play ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * painter ) </h3> -Replays the picture using <em>painter</em>, and returns TRUE if -successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Replays the picture using <em>painter</em>, and returns true if +successful; otherwise returns false. <p> This function does exactly the same as <a href="tqpainter.html#drawPicture">TQPainter::drawPicture</a>() with (x, y) = (0, 0). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="save"></a>TQPicture::save ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, const char * format = 0 ) </h3> Saves a picture to the file specified by <em>fileName</em> and returns -TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> Specifying the file <em>format</em> string is optional. It's not recommended unless you intend to export the picture data for use by a third party reader. By default the data will be saved in diff --git a/doc/html/tqpixmap-h.html b/doc/html/tqpixmap-h.html index c4a7393cb..b6f8fca80 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpixmap-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpixmap-h.html @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ public: bool hasAlpha() const; bool hasAlphaChannel() const; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - TQBitmap createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const; + TQBitmap createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight = true ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_MIME static TQPixmap fromMimeSource( const TQString& abs_name ); @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public: HBITMAP multiCellBitmap() const; int multiCellOffset() const; int allocCell(); - void freeCell( bool = FALSE ); + void freeCell( bool = false ); #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) @@ -232,8 +232,8 @@ protected: #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) TQPixmap *maskpm; union { - HBITMAP hbm; // if mcp == FALSE - TQMCPI *mcpi; // if mcp == TRUE + HBITMAP hbm; // if mcp == false + TQMCPI *mcpi; // if mcp == true } hbm_or_mcpi; uchar *realAlphaBits; #ifdef Q_OS_TEMP @@ -259,10 +259,10 @@ private: TQPixmap( int w, int h, int depth, bool, Optimization ); void init( int, int, int, bool, Optimization ); void deref(); - TQPixmap copy( bool ignoreMask = FALSE ) const; + TQPixmap copy( bool ignoreMask = false ) const; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) void initAlphaPixmap( uchar *bytes, int length, struct tagBITMAPINFO *bmi ); - void convertToAlphaPixmap( bool initAlpha=TRUE ); + void convertToAlphaPixmap( bool initAlpha=true ); static void bitBltAlphaPixmap( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap *src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, bool useDstAlpha ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqpixmap.html b/doc/html/tqpixmap.html index a736ae582..ee6093303 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpixmap.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpixmap.html @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#selfMask"><b>selfMask</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasAlpha"><b>hasAlpha</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasAlphaChannel"><b>hasAlphaChannel</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQBitmap <a href="#createHeuristicMask"><b>createHeuristicMask</b></a> ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQBitmap <a href="#createHeuristicMask"><b>createHeuristicMask</b></a> ( bool clipTight = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQPixmap <a href="#xForm"><b>xForm</b></a> ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQImage <a href="#convertToImage"><b>convertToImage</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#convertFromImage-2"><b>convertFromImage</b></a> ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )</li> @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Constructs a pixmap that is a copy of <em>pixmap</em>. </h3> Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width <em>w</em> and height <em>h</em>, that is initialized with the data in <em>bits</em>. The <em>isXbitmap</em> -indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to FALSE. +indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to false. This constructor is protected and used by the <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> class. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQPixmap"></a>TQPixmap::~TQPixmap () @@ -308,13 +308,13 @@ Destroys the pixmap. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="convertFromImage"></a>TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> & img, int conversion_flags ) </h3> -Converts image <em>img</em> and sets this pixmap. Returns TRUE if -successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Converts image <em>img</em> and sets this pixmap. Returns true if +successful; otherwise returns false. <p> The <em>conversion_flags</em> argument is a bitwise-OR of the <a href="tqt.html#ImageConversionFlags-enum">TQt::ImageConversionFlags</a>. Passing 0 for <em>conversion_flags</em> sets all the default options. <p> Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a -<a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a>, <a href="#isTQBitmap">isTQBitmap</a>() returns FALSE. +<a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a>, <a href="#isTQBitmap">isTQBitmap</a>() returns false. <p> If a pixmap with depth 1 is painted with color0 and color1 and converted to an image, the pixels painted with color0 will produce pixel index 0 in the image and those painted with color1 will @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ produce pixel index 1. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Converts <em>image</em> and sets this pixmap using color mode <em>mode</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#ColorMode-enum">TQPixmap::ColorMode</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a> <a name="convertToImage"></a>TQPixmap::convertToImage () const @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ ignored. <p> <p>See also <a href="#convertFromImage">convertFromImage</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="qmag-example.html#x1783">qmag/qmag.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> <a name="createHeuristicMask"></a>TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a> <a name="createHeuristicMask"></a>TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = true ) const </h3> Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ can do things such as the following: <p> This function is slow because it involves transformation to a <a href="tqimage.html">TQImage</a>, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a>. -<p> If <em>clipTight</em> is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the +<p> If <em>clipTight</em> is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqimage.html#createHeuristicMask">TQImage::createHeuristicMask</a>(). @@ -502,15 +502,15 @@ uninitialized. <p>Example: <a href="qmag-example.html#x1784">qmag/qmag.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAlpha"></a>TQPixmap::hasAlpha () const </h3> -Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask. +Returns true this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hasAlphaChannel">hasAlphaChannel</a>() and <a href="#mask">mask</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasAlphaChannel"></a>TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it +returns false. <p> NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this -function returns FALSE. +function returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hasAlpha">hasAlpha</a>() and <a href="#mask">mask</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="height"></a>TQPixmap::height () const @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ be recognized. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQPixmap::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns false. <p> A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You cannot draw in a null pixmap or <a href="tqpaintdevice.html#bitBlt">bitBlt</a>() anything to it. <p> Resizing an existing pixmap to (0, 0) makes a pixmap into a null @@ -541,12 +541,12 @@ pixmap. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTQBitmap"></a>TQPixmap::isTQBitmap () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this is a <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this is a <a href="tqbitmap.html">TQBitmap</a>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="load"></a>TQPixmap::load ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags ) </h3> -Loads a pixmap from the file <em>fileName</em> at runtime. Returns TRUE -if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Loads a pixmap from the file <em>fileName</em> at runtime. Returns true +if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> If <em>format</em> is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If <em>format</em> is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ the file's format. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="loadFromData"></a>TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags ) </h3> Loads a pixmap from the binary data in <em>buf</em> (<em>len</em> bytes). -Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> If <em>format</em> is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If <em>format</em> is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess @@ -587,8 +587,8 @@ explains how to add extra formats. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Loads a pixmap from the binary data in <em>buf</em> (<em>len</em> bytes) using -color mode <em>mode</em>. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns -FALSE. +color mode <em>mode</em>. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns +false. <p> If <em>format</em> is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If <em>format</em> is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess @@ -663,8 +663,8 @@ Saves the pixmap to the file <em>fileName</em> using the image file format <em>format</em> and a quality factor <em>quality</em>. <em>quality</em> must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use -the default settings. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise -returns FALSE. +the default settings. Returns true if successful; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#load">load</a>(), <a href="#loadFromData">loadFromData</a>(), <a href="#imageFormat">imageFormat</a>(), <a href="tqimage.html#save">TQImage::save</a>(), and <a href="tqimageio.html">TQImageIO</a>. <p>Example: <a href="qmag-example.html#x1786">qmag/qmag.cpp</a>. @@ -686,8 +686,8 @@ TQByteArray: <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="selfMask"></a>TQPixmap::selfMask () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap -itself; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap +itself; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mask">mask</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="serialNumber"></a>TQPixmap::serialNumber () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqpixmapcache.html b/doc/html/tqpixmapcache.html index 2076161f2..057c99d32 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpixmapcache.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpixmapcache.html @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ pointer to become invalid. For this reason, we recommend you use This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the <em>key</em> in the cache. If a pixmap is found, the function sets <em>pm</em> to that pixmap and -returns TRUE; otherwise leaves <em>pm</em> alone and returns FALSE. +returns true; otherwise leaves <em>pm</em> alone and returns false. <p> Example: <pre> <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> p; @@ -154,11 +154,11 @@ deleted when more space is needed. </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Inserts the pixmap <em>pm</em> associated with <em>key</em> into the cache. -Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the pixmap is too big for the cache. +Returns true if successful, or false if the pixmap is too big for the cache. <p> <strong> Note: <em>pm</em> must be allocated on the heap (using <tt>new</tt>). -<p> If this function returns FALSE, you must delete <em>pm</em> yourself. -<p> If this function returns TRUE, do not use <em>pm</em> afterwards or +<p> If this function returns false, you must delete <em>pm</em> yourself. +<p> If this function returns true, do not use <em>pm</em> afterwards or keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache, whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to diff --git a/doc/html/tqpoint.html b/doc/html/tqpoint.html index c5b1e2cad..82b98c7e9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpoint.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpoint.html @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ be written to and read from a TQStream. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQPoint"></a>TQPoint::TQPoint () </h3> -<p> Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() returns TRUE). +<p> Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() returns true). <h3 class=fn><a name="TQPoint-2"></a>TQPoint::TQPoint ( int xpos, int ypos ) </h3> @@ -124,8 +124,8 @@ be written to and read from a TQStream. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQPoint::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="manhattanLength"></a>TQPoint::manhattanLength () const </h3> @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ integers. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>p1</em> and <em>p2</em> are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>p1</em> and <em>p2</em> are not equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> <a name="operator*"></a>operator* ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, int c ) </h3> @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ the stream. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>p1</em> and <em>p2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>p1</em> and <em>p2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="operator-gt-gt"></a>operator>> ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & s, <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqpointarray-h.html b/doc/html/tqpointarray-h.html index b1afcd24e..e4ffb4a47 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpointarray-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpointarray-h.html @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public: ~TQPointArray() {} TQPointArray( int size ) : TQMemArray<TQPoint>( size ) {} TQPointArray( const TQPointArray &a ) : TQMemArray<TQPoint>( a ) {} - TQPointArray( const TQRect &r, bool closed=FALSE ); + TQPointArray( const TQRect &r, bool closed=false ); TQPointArray( int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ); TQPointArray &operator=( const TQPointArray &a ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqpointarray.html b/doc/html/tqpointarray.html index afd3ecd46..8ca61305f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpointarray.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpointarray.html @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#~TQPointArray"><b>~TQPointArray</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQPointArray-2"><b>TQPointArray</b></a> ( int size )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQPointArray-3"><b>TQPointArray</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQPointArray-4"><b>TQPointArray</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQPointArray-4"><b>TQPointArray</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = false )</li> <li class=fn>TQPointArray & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a )</li> <li class=fn>TQPointArray <a href="#copy"><b>copy</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#translate"><b>translate</b></a> ( int dx, int dy )</li> @@ -116,13 +116,13 @@ null array if <em>size</em> == 0. <p> Constructs a <a href="shclass.html#shallow-copy">shallow copy</a> of the point array <em>a</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#copy">copy</a>() and <a href="tqmemarray.html#detach">detach</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPointArray-4"></a>TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool closed = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQPointArray-4"></a>TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool closed = false ) </h3> Constructs a point array from the rectangle <em>r</em>. -<p> If <em>closed</em> is FALSE, then the point array just contains the +<p> If <em>closed</em> is false, then the point array just contains the following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(), r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft(). -<p> If <em>closed</em> is TRUE, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft(). +<p> If <em>closed</em> is true, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft(). <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQPointArray"></a>TQPointArray::~TQPointArray () </h3> @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse Copies <em>nPoints</em> points from the variable argument list into this point array from position <em>index</em>, and resizes the point array if <tt>index+nPoints</tt> exceeds the size of the array. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be +<p> Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory). <p> The example code creates an array with three points (4,5), (6,7) and (8,9), by expanding the array from 1 to 3 points: diff --git a/doc/html/tqpopupmenu-h.html b/doc/html/tqpopupmenu-h.html index b5fd1ebd1..d622b50f2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpopupmenu-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpopupmenu-h.html @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ protected: bool focusNextPrevChild( bool next ); - int itemAtPos( const TQPoint &, bool ignoreSeparator = TRUE ) const; + int itemAtPos( const TQPoint &, bool ignoreSeparator = true ) const; private slots: void subActivated( int itemId ); @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ private: void menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu * ); void frameChanged(); - void actSig( int, bool = FALSE ); + void actSig( int, bool = false ); void hilitSig( int ); virtual void setFirstItemActive(); void hideAllPopups(); @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ private: bool tryMenuBar( TQMouseEvent * ); void byeMenuBar(); - TQSize updateSize(bool force_recalc=FALSE, bool do_resize=TRUE); + TQSize updateSize(bool force_recalc=false, bool do_resize=true); void updateRow( int row ); #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL void updateAccel( TQWidget * ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqpopupmenu.html b/doc/html/tqpopupmenu.html index d6dce3d40..64d014863 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpopupmenu.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpopupmenu.html @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ value with each item. <p> You clear a popup menu with <a href="tqmenudata.html#clear">clear</a>() and remove single items with <a href="tqmenudata.html#removeItem">removeItem</a>() or <a href="tqmenudata.html#removeItemAt">removeItemAt</a>(). <p> A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when -enabled with <a href="#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>(TRUE). You check or uncheck items with +enabled with <a href="#setCheckable">setCheckable</a>(true). You check or uncheck items with <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(). <p> Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>(). Just before a popup menu becomes visible, it @@ -291,8 +291,8 @@ Draws all menu items using painter <em>p</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawItem"></a>TQPopupMenu::drawItem ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> Draws menu item <em>mi</em> in the area <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>, using -painter <em>p</em>. The item is drawn active if <em>act</em> is TRUE or drawn -inactive if <em>act</em> is FALSE. The rightmost <em>tab_</em> pixels are used +painter <em>p</em>. The item is drawn active if <em>act</em> is true or drawn +inactive if <em>act</em> is false. The rightmost <em>tab_</em> pixels are used for accelerator text. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqstyle.html#drawControl">TQStyle::drawControl</a>(). @@ -638,25 +638,25 @@ handle is appended at the end of the list if <em>index</em> is negative. <p>Example: <a href="menu-example.html#x1879">menu/menu.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCheckable"></a>TQPopupMenu::isCheckable () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop">"checkable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemChecked"></a>TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> has been checked; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> has been checked; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">setItemChecked</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2938">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x70">progress/progress.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1329">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE +Returns true if the item with identifier <em>id</em> is enabled; +otherwise returns false <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemEnabled">setItemEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the menu item with the id <em>id</em> is visible; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemVisible">setItemVisible</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="itemHeight"></a>TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const<tt> [protected]</tt> @@ -758,15 +758,15 @@ Sets the currently active item to index <em>i</em> and repaints as necessary. See the <a href="tqpopupmenu.html#checkable-prop">"checkable"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemChecked"></a>TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check ) </h3> -If <em>check</em> is TRUE, checks the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise +If <em>check</em> is true, checks the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id <em>id</em>. Calls -<a href="#setCheckable">TQPopupMenu::setCheckable</a>( TRUE ) if necessary. +<a href="#setCheckable">TQPopupMenu::setCheckable</a>( true ) if necessary. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemChecked">isItemChecked</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="canvas-example.html#x2939">canvas/canvas.cpp</a>, <a href="mdi-example.html#x2032">mdi/application.cpp</a>, <a href="menu-example.html#x1872">menu/menu.cpp</a>, <a href="progress-example.html#x71">progress/progress.cpp</a>, <a href="scrollview-example.html#x636">scrollview/scrollview.cpp</a>, and <a href="showimg-example.html#x1330">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemEnabled"></a>TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; +If <em>enable</em> is true, enables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item <em>id</em> to <em>param</em <p>Example: <a href="mdi-example.html#x2034">mdi/application.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemVisible"></a>TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible ) </h3> -If <em>visible</em> is TRUE, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise +If <em>visible</em> is true, shows the menu item with id <em>id</em>; otherwise hides the menu item with id <em>id</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemVisible">isItemVisible</a>() and <a href="tqmenudata.html#isItemEnabled">isItemEnabled</a>(). @@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier <em>id</em> or <a <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="checkable-prop"></a>checkable</h3> <p>This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. -<p>When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. +<p>When true, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmenudata.html#setItemChecked">TQMenuData::setItemChecked</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqprinter.html b/doc/html/tqprinter.html index 4b674cdb3..2e475c864 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqprinter.html +++ b/doc/html/tqprinter.html @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ printer. printer to provide (in dpi). <li> <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The -default is FALSE, so that by default you should be able to paint -on (0,0). If TRUE the origin of the coordinate system will be in +default is false, so that by default you should be able to paint +on (0,0). If true the origin of the coordinate system will be in the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical margins. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ TQPrinter does not check that the paper size is available; it just uses this information, together with TQPrinter::Orientation and <a href="#setFullPage">TQPrinter::setFullPage</a>(), to determine the printable area (see <a href="tqpaintdevicemetrics.html">TQPaintDeviceMetrics</a>). -<p> The defined sizes (with <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(TRUE)) are: +<p> The defined sizes (with <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(true)) are: <ul> <li><tt>TQPrinter::A0</tt> - 841 x 1189 mm This value is not supported on windows. <li><tt>TQPrinter::A1</tt> - 594 x 841 mm This value is not supported on windows. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ uses this information, together with TQPrinter::Orientation and <li><tt>TQPrinter::Tabloid</tt> - 279 x 432 mm <li><tt>TQPrinter::Custom</tt> <li><tt>TQPrinter::NPageSize</tt> - (internal) -</ul><p> With <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(FALSE) (the default), the metrics will be a bit +</ul><p> With <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(false) (the default), the metrics will be a bit smaller; how much depends on the printer in use. <h3 class=fn><a name="PaperSource-enum"></a>TQPrinter::PaperSource</h3> @@ -343,14 +343,14 @@ Destroys the printer paint device and cleans up. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="abort"></a>TQPrinter::abort () </h3> -Aborts the print job. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Aborts the print job. Returns true if successful; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#aborted">aborted</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="aborted"></a>TQPrinter::aborted () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#abort">abort</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqprinter.html#ColorMode-enum">ColorMode</a> <a name="colorMode"></a>TQPrinter::colorMode () const @@ -382,16 +382,16 @@ printing accordingly. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fullPage"></a>TQPrinter::fullPage () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is -at the corner of the sheet and FALSE if it is at the edge of the +Returns true if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is +at the corner of the sheet and false if it is at the edge of the printable area. <p> See <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>() for details and caveats. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(), <a href="#PageSize-enum">PageSize</a>, and <a href="tqpaintdevicemetrics.html">TQPaintDeviceMetrics</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOptionEnabled"></a>TQPrinter::isOptionEnabled ( <a href="tqprinter.html#PrinterOption-enum">PrinterOption</a> option ) </h3> -Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier <em>option</em> is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the printer option with identifier <em>option</em> is enabled; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOptionEnabled">setOptionEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> <a name="margins"></a>TQPrinter::margins () const @@ -399,11 +399,11 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. Returns the width of the left margin and the height of the top margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge. -<p> If you have called <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ), <a href="#margins">margins</a>().width() may be +<p> If you have called <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ), <a href="#margins">margins</a>().width() may be treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can use. -<p> If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), +<p> If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), margins() is automatically subtracted from the <a href="#pageSize">pageSize</a>() by TQPrinter. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(), <a href="tqpaintdevicemetrics.html">TQPaintDeviceMetrics</a>, and <a href="#PageSize-enum">PageSize</a>. @@ -414,9 +414,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Sets <em>top</em>, <em>left</em>, <em>bottom</em> and <em>right</em> to the margins of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge. -<p> If you have called <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( TRUE ), the four values specify +<p> If you have called <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>( true ), the four values specify the smallest sane margins you can use. -<p> If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), +<p> If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), the margins are automatically subtracted from the <a href="#pageSize">pageSize</a>() by TQPrinter. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFullPage">setFullPage</a>(), <a href="tqpaintdevicemetrics.html">TQPaintDeviceMetrics</a>, and <a href="#PageSize-enum">PageSize</a>. @@ -438,8 +438,8 @@ is allowed to choose. The default value is 0. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="newPage"></a>TQPrinter::newPage () </h3> -Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns TRUE if successful; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns true if successful; +otherwise returns false. <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1149">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-application-example.html#x1567">application/application.cpp</a>, <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1005">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>, and <a href="mdi-example.html#x2050">mdi/application.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="numCopies"></a>TQPrinter::numCopies () const @@ -470,9 +470,9 @@ name. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="outputToFile"></a>TQPrinter::outputToFile () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the output should be written to a file, or FALSE +<p> Returns true if the output should be written to a file, or false if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default -setting is FALSE. +setting is false. <p> This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOutputToFile">setOutputToFile</a>() and <a href="#setOutputFileName">setOutputFileName</a>(). @@ -567,14 +567,14 @@ user can override in the print dialog when you call <a href="#setup">setup</a>() <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFullPage"></a>TQPrinter::setFullPage ( bool fp )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the -top-left corner of the paper if <em>fp</em> is TRUE, or where it thinks -the top-left corner of the printable area is if <em>fp</em> is FALSE. -<p> The default is FALSE. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and +top-left corner of the paper if <em>fp</em> is true, or where it thinks +the top-left corner of the printable area is if <em>fp</em> is false. +<p> The default is false. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and <a href="tqpaintdevicemetrics.html">TQPaintDeviceMetrics</a> will report something smaller than the size indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical printer.) -<p> If you set <em>fp</em> to TRUE, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the +<p> If you set <em>fp</em> to true, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the exact same size as indicated by <a href="#PageSize-enum">PageSize</a>, but you cannot print on all of that - you must take care of the output margins yourself. @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ number of copies. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOptionEnabled"></a>TQPrinter::setOptionEnabled ( <a href="tqprinter.html#PrinterOption-enum">PrinterOption</a> option, bool enable ) </h3> -Enables the printer option with the identifier <em>option</em> if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, and disables option <em>option</em> if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables the printer option with the identifier <em>option</em> if <em>enable</em> is true, and disables option <em>option</em> if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isOptionEnabled">isOptionEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOrientation"></a>TQPrinter::setOrientation ( <a href="tqprinter.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> orientation )<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -624,8 +624,8 @@ take effect from the next call to <a href="#newPage">newPage</a>() </h3> Sets the name of the output file to <em>fileName</em>. <p> Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file, -i.e. calls <a href="#setOutputToFile">setOutputToFile</a>(FALSE). Setting a non-empty name -enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE). +i.e. calls <a href="#setOutputToFile">setOutputToFile</a>(false). Setting a non-empty name +enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(true). <p> This function is currently only supported under X11. <p> <p>See also <a href="#outputFileName">outputFileName</a>() and <a href="#setOutputToFile">setOutputToFile</a>(). @@ -633,8 +633,8 @@ enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE). </h3> Specifies whether the output should be written to a file or sent directly to the printer. -<p> Will output to a file if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, or will output -directly to the printer if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +<p> Will output to a file if <em>enable</em> is true, or will output +directly to the printer if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X. <p> <p>See also <a href="#outputToFile">outputToFile</a>() and <a href="#setOutputFileName">setOutputFileName</a>(). @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ from wingdi.h. Opens a printer setup dialog, with parent <em>parent</em>, and asks the user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings it should have. -<p> Returns TRUE if the user pressed "OK" to print, or FALSE if the +<p> Returns true if the user pressed "OK" to print, or false if the user canceled the operation. <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1151">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-application-example.html#x1569">application/application.cpp</a>, <a href="drawdemo-example.html#x1079">drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp</a>, <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1007">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>, and <a href="mdi-example.html#x2052">mdi/application.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqprocess.html b/doc/html/tqprocess.html index dc8902bd8..145ffa7e4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqprocess.html +++ b/doc/html/tqprocess.html @@ -293,14 +293,14 @@ over a copy, e.g. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canReadLineStderr"></a>TQProcess::canReadLineStderr () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from -standard error at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from +standard error at this time; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readLineStderr">readLineStderr</a>() and <a href="#canReadLineStdout">canReadLineStdout</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canReadLineStdout"></a>TQProcess::canReadLineStdout () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from -standard output at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from +standard output at this time; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readLineStdout">readLineStdout</a>() and <a href="#canReadLineStderr">canReadLineStderr</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearArguments"></a>TQProcess::clearArguments () @@ -326,14 +326,14 @@ combination of the <a href="#Communication-enum">Communication</a> flags. Returns the exit status of the process or 0 if the process is still running. This function returns immediately and does not wait until the process is finished. -<p> If <a href="#normalExit">normalExit</a>() is FALSE (e.g. if the program was killed or +<p> If <a href="#normalExit">normalExit</a>() is false (e.g. if the program was killed or crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return value of normalExit() before relying on this value. <p> <p>See also <a href="#normalExit">normalExit</a>() and <a href="#processExited">processExited</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRunning"></a>TQProcess::isRunning () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the process is running; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the process is running; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#normalExit">normalExit</a>(), <a href="#exitStatus">exitStatus</a>(), and <a href="#processExited">processExited</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="kill"></a>TQProcess::kill () const<tt> [slot]</tt> @@ -374,8 +374,8 @@ with these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small exception to this rule under Unix: if <em>env</em> does not contain any settings for the environment variable <tt>LD_LIBRARY_PATH</tt>, then this variable is inherited from the starting process. -<p> Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns +false. <p> Note that you should not use the slots <a href="#writeToStdin">writeToStdin</a>() and <a href="#closeStdin">closeStdin</a>() on processes started with <a href="#launch">launch</a>(), since the result is not well-defined. If you need these slots, use <a href="#start">start</a>() instead. @@ -415,8 +415,8 @@ reading from standard output or standard error. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="normalExit"></a>TQProcess::normalExit () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns -FALSE. This implies that this function returns FALSE if the +Returns true if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns +false. This implies that this function returns false if the process is still running. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRunning">isRunning</a>(), <a href="#exitStatus">exitStatus</a>(), and <a href="#processExited">processExited</a>(). @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ struct, or 0 if no process is belongs to this object. </h3> Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns -<a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if <a href="#canReadLineStderr">canReadLineStderr</a>() returns FALSE. +<a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if <a href="#canReadLineStderr">canReadLineStderr</a>() returns false. <p> By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with <a href="tqtextcodec.html#setCodecForCStrings">TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings</a>(). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ other codecs, you can set a different codec with </h3> Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns -<a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if <a href="#canReadLineStdout">canReadLineStdout</a>() returns FALSE. +<a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if <a href="#canReadLineStdout">canReadLineStdout</a>() returns false. <p> By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with <a href="tqtextcodec.html#setCodecForCStrings">TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings</a>(). @@ -553,8 +553,8 @@ exception to this rule: under Unix, if <em>env</em> does not contain any settings for the environment variable <tt>LD_LIBRARY_PATH</tt>, then this variable is inherited from the starting process; under Windows the same applies for the environment variable <tt>PATH</tt>. -<p> Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns +false. <p> You can write data to the process's standard input with <a href="#writeToStdin">writeToStdin</a>(). You can close standard input with <a href="#closeStdin">closeStdin</a>() and you can terminate the process with <a href="#tryTerminate">tryTerminate</a>(), or with <a href="#kill">kill</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqprogressbar.html b/doc/html/tqprogressbar.html index 130b9e718..d33b2f120 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqprogressbar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqprogressbar.html @@ -116,13 +116,13 @@ call setProgress(50) after examining the last file. <p> <p>See also <a href="#totalSteps-prop">totalSteps</a> and <a href="#progress-prop">progress</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="centerIndicator"></a>TQProgressBar::centerIndicator () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressbar.html#centerIndicator-prop">"centerIndicator"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="indicatorFollowsStyle"></a>TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressbar.html#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">"indicatorFollowsStyle"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="percentageVisible"></a>TQProgressBar::percentageVisible () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressbar.html#percentageVisible-prop">"percentageVisible"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="progress"></a>TQProgressBar::progress () const </h3><p>Returns the current amount of progress. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ blank in the reset state. The percentage is calculated based on the <em>progress</em> and <em>totalSteps</em>. You can set the <em>indicator</em> text if you wish. <p> To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method -should return FALSE if the string is unchanged from the last call +should return false if the string is unchanged from the last call to this function. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setIndicatorFollowsStyle"></a>TQProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle ( bool ) @@ -179,18 +179,18 @@ See the <a href="tqprogressbar.html#totalSteps-prop">"totalSteps"</a> property f <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="centerIndicator-prop"></a>centerIndicator</h3> <p>This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered. <p>Changing this property sets <a href="#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle</a> -to FALSE. The default is TRUE. +to false. The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setCenterIndicator">setCenterIndicator</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#centerIndicator">centerIndicator</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="indicatorFollowsStyle-prop"></a>indicatorFollowsStyle</h3> <p>This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setIndicatorFollowsStyle">setIndicatorFollowsStyle</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#indicatorFollowsStyle">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="percentageVisible-prop"></a>percentageVisible</h3> <p>This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed. -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#centerIndicator-prop">centerIndicator</a> and <a href="#indicatorFollowsStyle-prop">indicatorFollowsStyle</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setPercentageVisible">setPercentageVisible</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#percentageVisible">percentageVisible</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqprogressdialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqprogressdialog-h.html index b95d5681a..48cb42327 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqprogressdialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqprogressdialog-h.html @@ -100,11 +100,11 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQProgressDialog : public TQDialog TQ_PROPERTY( TQString labelText READ labelText WRITE setLabelText ) public: - TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); TQProgressDialog( const TQString& labelText, const TQString &cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, - bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); + bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQProgressDialog(); void setLabel( TQLabel * ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqprogressdialog.html b/doc/html/tqprogressdialog.html index 54125a361..92e2d0390 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqprogressdialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqprogressdialog.html @@ -37,8 +37,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqprogressdialog-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQProgressDialog"><b>TQProgressDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQProgressDialog-2"><b>TQProgressDialog</b></a> ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQProgressDialog"><b>TQProgressDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQProgressDialog-2"><b>TQProgressDialog</b></a> ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQProgressDialog"><b>~TQProgressDialog</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setLabel"><b>setLabel</b></a> ( TQLabel * label )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setCancelButton"><b>setCancelButton</b></a> ( TQPushButton * cancelButton )</li> @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ operation in a loop, call <a href="#setProgress">setProgress</a>() at intervals, for cancellation with <a href="#wasCanceled">wasCanceled</a>(). For example: <pre> TQProgressDialog progress( "Copying files...", "Abort Copy", numFiles, - this, "progress", TRUE ); + this, "progress", true ); for ( int i = 0; i < numFiles; i++ ) { progress.setProgress( i ); tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#processEvents">processEvents</a>(); @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ set the texts shown. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a>, <a href="tqprogressbar.html">TQProgressBar</a>, <a href="guibooks.html#fowler">GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator</a>, and <a href="dialogs.html">Dialog Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQProgressDialog"></a>TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQProgressDialog"></a>TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a progress dialog. <p> Default settings: @@ -189,13 +189,13 @@ Constructs a progress dialog. </ul> <p> The <em>creator</em> argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The <em>name</em>, <em>modal</em>, and the widget flags, <em>f</em>, are -passed to the <a href="tqdialog.html#TQDialog">TQDialog::TQDialog</a>() constructor. If <em>modal</em> is FALSE (the +passed to the <a href="tqdialog.html#TQDialog">TQDialog::TQDialog</a>() constructor. If <em>modal</em> is false (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing -of the dialog to occur. If <em>modal</em> is TRUE, the dialog ensures that +of the dialog to occur. If <em>modal</em> is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. <p> <p>See also <a href="#labelText-prop">labelText</a>, <a href="#setLabel">setLabel</a>(), <a href="#setCancelButtonText">setCancelButtonText</a>(), <a href="#setCancelButton">setCancelButton</a>(), and <a href="#totalSteps-prop">totalSteps</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQProgressDialog-2"></a>TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & labelText, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQProgressDialog-2"></a>TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & labelText, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a progress dialog. <p> The <em>labelText</em> is text used to remind the user what is progressing. @@ -209,9 +209,9 @@ processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file. <p> The <em>creator</em> argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The <em>name</em>, <em>modal</em>, and widget flags, <em>f</em>, are passed to the -<a href="tqdialog.html#TQDialog">TQDialog::TQDialog</a>() constructor. If <em>modal</em> is FALSE (the default), +<a href="tqdialog.html#TQDialog">TQDialog::TQDialog</a>() constructor. If <em>modal</em> is false (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of -the dialog to occur. If <em>modal</em> is TRUE, the dialog ensures that +the dialog to occur. If <em>modal</em> is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. <p> <p>See also <a href="#labelText-prop">labelText</a>, <a href="#setLabel">setLabel</a>(), <a href="#setCancelButtonText">setCancelButtonText</a>(), <a href="#setCancelButton">setCancelButton</a>(), and <a href="#totalSteps-prop">totalSteps</a>. @@ -220,14 +220,14 @@ events are processed when needed. Destroys the progress dialog. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoClose"></a>TQProgressDialog::autoClose () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dialog gets hidden by <a href="#reset">reset</a>(); otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dialog gets hidden by <a href="#reset">reset</a>(); otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoClose-prop">"autoClose"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoReset"></a>TQProgressDialog::autoReset () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the progress dialog calls <a href="#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>(); otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the progress dialog calls <a href="#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>(); otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#autoReset-prop">"autoReset"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="cancel"></a>TQProgressDialog::cancel ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Resets the progress dialog. <a href="#wasCanceled">wasCanceled</a>() becomes TRUE until +Resets the progress dialog. <a href="#wasCanceled">wasCanceled</a>() becomes true until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#progress-prop">"progress"</a> property fo <h3 class=fn>void <a name="reset"></a>TQProgressDialog::reset ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> Resets the progress dialog. -The progress dialog becomes hidden if <a href="#autoClose">autoClose</a>() is TRUE. +The progress dialog becomes hidden if <a href="#autoClose">autoClose</a>() is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoClose-prop">autoClose</a> and <a href="#autoReset-prop">autoReset</a>. <p>Example: <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x769">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a>. @@ -330,21 +330,21 @@ need to call this yourself. </h3><p>Returns the total number of steps. See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#totalSteps-prop">"totalSteps"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wasCanceled"></a>TQProgressDialog::wasCanceled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#wasCanceled-prop">"wasCanceled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wasCancelled"></a>TQProgressDialog::wasCancelled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqprogressdialog.html#wasCancelled-prop">"wasCancelled"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoClose-prop"></a>autoClose</h3> <p>This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by <a href="#reset">reset</a>(). -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoReset-prop">autoReset</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoClose">setAutoClose</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoClose">autoClose</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoReset-prop"></a>autoReset</h3> <p>This property holds whether the progress dialog calls <a href="#reset">reset</a>() as soon as <a href="#progress">progress</a>() equals <a href="#totalSteps">totalSteps</a>(). -<p>The default is TRUE. +<p>The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoClose-prop">autoClose</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoReset">setAutoReset</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoReset">autoReset</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrcollection-h.html b/doc/html/tqptrcollection-h.html index dc2f3795a..3f3c622f6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrcollection-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrcollection-h.html @@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ public: typedef void *Item; // generic collection item protected: - TQPtrCollection() { del_item = FALSE; } // no deletion of objects - TQPtrCollection(const TQPtrCollection &) { del_item = FALSE; } + TQPtrCollection() { del_item = false; } // no deletion of objects + TQPtrCollection(const TQPtrCollection &) { del_item = false; } virtual ~TQPtrCollection() {} - bool del_item; // default FALSE + bool del_item; // default false virtual Item newItem( Item ); // create object virtual void deleteItem( Item ) = 0; // delete object diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrcollection.html b/doc/html/tqptrcollection.html index 9646d864a..14061b8ad 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrcollection.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrcollection.html @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ TQPtrCollection is an abstract class. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQPtrCollection-2"></a>TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection ( const <a href="tqptrcollection.html">TQPtrCollection</a> & source )<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Constructs a copy of <em>source</em> with <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() set to FALSE. The +<p> Constructs a copy of <em>source</em> with <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() set to false. The constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract class. <p> Note that if <em>source</em> has autoDelete turned on, copying it will @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ TQPtrCollection is an abstract class. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQPtrCollection::clear ()<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -149,11 +149,11 @@ that is being inserted. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrdict.html b/doc/html/tqptrdict.html index a2dbd76c4..fe5babb25 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrdict.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrdict.html @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ pointers are copied (shallow copy). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQPtrDict::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ item will be accessible using <a href="#operator[]">operator[]</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrDict::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqptrdict.html">TQPtrDict</a><type> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQPtrDict::operator= ( const <a href="tqptrdict.html">TQPtrDict</a><type> & dict ) @@ -215,8 +215,8 @@ reference to the stream. </h3> <p> Removes the item associated with <em>key</em> from the dictionary. -Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>key</em> is in the dictionary; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>key</em> is in the dictionary; +otherwise returns false. <p> If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. @@ -255,11 +255,11 @@ become invalid. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrdictiterator.html b/doc/html/tqptrdictiterator.html index 973f9baf3..89b2d844f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrdictiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrdictiterator.html @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ operates on. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrDictIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQPtrDictIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrlist-h.html b/doc/html/tqptrlist-h.html index c02564c51..4d0658770 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrlist-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrlist-h.html @@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ public: void clear() { TQGList::clear(); } void sort() { TQGList::sort(); } int find( const type *d ) { return TQGList::find((TQPtrCollection::Item)d); } - int findNext( const type *d ) { return TQGList::find((TQPtrCollection::Item)d,FALSE); } + int findNext( const type *d ) { return TQGList::find((TQPtrCollection::Item)d,false); } int findRef( const type *d ) { return TQGList::findRef((TQPtrCollection::Item)d); } - int findNextRef( const type *d ){ return TQGList::findRef((TQPtrCollection::Item)d,FALSE);} + int findNextRef( const type *d ){ return TQGList::findRef((TQPtrCollection::Item)d,false);} uint contains( const type *d ) const { return TQGList::contains((TQPtrCollection::Item)d); } uint containsRef( const type *d ) const { return TQGList::containsRef((TQPtrCollection::Item)d); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrlist.html b/doc/html/tqptrlist.html index 905bab097..e8698eb9e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrlist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrlist.html @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Example: }; TQPtrList<Employee> list; - list.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( TRUE ); // the list owns the objects + list.<a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>( true ); // the list owns the objects list.<a href="#append">append</a>( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) ); list.<a href="#append">append</a>( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) ); @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Example: using a <a href="tqptrlistiterator.html">TQPtrListIterator</a> can be more practical. Multiple list iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other and of the current list item. -<p> In the example above we make the call <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(TRUE). +<p> In the example above we make the call <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(true). Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ item, last item, or current item, whichever is closest to <em>index</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQPtrList::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -438,8 +438,8 @@ a few additional items. </h3> <p> Inserts the <em>item</em> at position <em>index</em> in the list. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>index</em> is in range; -otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to <a href="#count">count</a>() +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>index</em> is in range; +otherwise returns false. The valid range is 0 to <a href="#count">count</a>() (inclusively). The item is appended if <em>index</em> == count(). <p> The inserted item becomes the current list item. <p> <em>item</em> must not be 0. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to <a href="#count">count</a>() <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrList::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn>type * <a name="last"></a>TQPtrList::last () @@ -472,8 +472,8 @@ function call was the last item, the current item will be set to <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQPtrList::operator!= ( const <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><type> & list ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this list with <em>list</em>. Returns TRUE if the lists contain -different data; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this list with <em>list</em>. Returns true if the lists contain +different data; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><type> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQPtrList::operator= ( const <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><type> & list ) </h3> @@ -485,8 +485,8 @@ copied (shallow copy) unless <a href="tqptrcollection.html#newItem">newItem</a>( <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQPtrList::operator== ( const <a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><type> & list ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this list with <em>list</em>. Returns TRUE if the lists contain -the same data; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this list with <em>list</em>. Returns true if the lists contain +the same data; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="prepend"></a>TQPtrList::prepend ( const type * item ) </h3> @@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ the stream. </h3> <p> Removes the item at position <em>index</em> in the list. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>index</em> is in range; -otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is <tt>0..(count() - 1)</tt> +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>index</em> is in range; +otherwise returns false. The valid range is <tt>0..(count() - 1)</tt> inclusive. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item @@ -535,8 +535,8 @@ point to the new current item. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Removes the current list item. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; +otherwise returns false. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> The item after the removed item becomes the new current list item if the removed item is not the last item in the list. If the last @@ -551,8 +551,8 @@ point to the new current item. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Removes the first occurrence of <em>item</em> from the list. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>item</em> is in the list; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>item</em> is in the list; +otherwise returns false. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> The <a href="#compareItems">compareItems</a>() function is called when searching for the item in the list. If compareItems() is not reimplemented, it is more @@ -569,8 +569,8 @@ point to the new current item. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="removeFirst"></a>TQPtrList::removeFirst () </h3> -<p> Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, -i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Removes the first item from the list. Returns true if successful, +i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> The first item in the list becomes the new current list item. The current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. @@ -581,8 +581,8 @@ point to the new current item. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="removeLast"></a>TQPtrList::removeLast () </h3> -<p> Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, -i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Removes the last item from the list. Returns true if successful, +i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> The last item in the list becomes the new current list item. The current item is set to 0 if the list becomes empty. @@ -608,8 +608,8 @@ the removed item was the last item. </h3> <p> Removes the first occurrence of <em>item</em> from the list. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if <em>item</em> is in the list; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if <em>item</em> is in the list; +otherwise returns false. <p> The removed item is deleted if <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">auto-deletion</a> is enabled. <p> Equivalent to: <pre> @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ point to the new current item. </h3> <p> Replaces the item at position <em>index</em> with the new <em>item</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. <em>index</em> is in the range 0 to +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. <em>index</em> is in the range 0 to <a href="#count">count</a>()-1. <p> <p>See also <a href="#append">append</a>(), <a href="#current">current</a>(), and <a href="#insert">insert</a>(). @@ -637,11 +637,11 @@ point to the new current item. </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrlistiterator.html b/doc/html/tqptrlistiterator.html index 4118eadef..d86e17453 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrlistiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrlistiterator.html @@ -116,15 +116,15 @@ set to point on the first item in the <em>list</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atFirst"></a>TQPtrListIterator::atFirst () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the first list item; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the current iterator item is the first list item; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toFirst">toFirst</a>() and <a href="#atLast">atLast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atLast"></a>TQPtrListIterator::atLast () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the last list item; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the current iterator item is the last list item; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#toLast">toLast</a>() and <a href="#atFirst">atFirst</a>(). <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQPtrListIterator::count () const @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ item in the list, 0 is returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrListIterator::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQPtrListIterator::operator type * () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrqueue.html b/doc/html/tqptrqueue.html index 5a4dbdc4c..8c003caf6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrqueue.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrqueue.html @@ -80,33 +80,33 @@ tail of the queue with <a href="#enqueue">enqueue</a>() and retrieved from the h <h3 class=fn><a name="TQPtrQueue"></a>TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue () </h3> -<p> Creates an empty queue with <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() set to FALSE. +<p> Creates an empty queue with <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() set to false. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQPtrQueue-2"></a>TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ( const <a href="tqptrqueue.html">TQPtrQueue</a><type> & queue ) </h3> <p> Creates a queue from <em>queue</em>. <p> Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() -flag is set to FALSE. +flag is set to false. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQPtrQueue"></a>TQPtrQueue::~TQPtrQueue () </h3> <p> Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() -is TRUE. +is true. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrQueue::autoDelete () const </h3> <p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is -FALSE. +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQPtrQueue::clear () </h3> <p> Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() -is TRUE. +is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#remove">remove</a>(). <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQPtrQueue::count () const @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrQueue::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the queue is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(), <a href="#dequeue">dequeue</a>(), and <a href="#head">head</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQPtrQueue::operator type * () const @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ changed. Returns 0 if the queue is empty. queue. <p> This queue is first cleared and then each item in <em>queue</em> is enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied. -<p> <b>Warning:</b> The <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() flag is not modified. If it it TRUE for +<p> <b>Warning:</b> The <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() flag is not modified. If it it true for both <em>queue</em> and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause <em>double-deletion</em> of the items. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="read"></a>TQPtrQueue::read ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & s, <a href="tqptrcollection.html#Item">TQPtrCollection::Item</a> & item )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -176,20 +176,20 @@ reference to the stream. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="remove"></a>TQPtrQueue::remove () </h3> -<p> Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there -was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> The item is deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is TRUE. +<p> Removes the head item from the queue, and returns true if there +was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns false. +<p> The item is deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#head">head</a>(), <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(), and <a href="#dequeue">dequeue</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoDelete"></a>TQPtrQueue::setAutoDelete ( bool enable ) </h3> -<p> Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is TRUE -and not to delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +<p> Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is true +and not to delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two queues deleting the same items. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrstack.html b/doc/html/tqptrstack.html index 68659cf38..1cdfdcc2e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrstack.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrstack.html @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ without changing the stack. </h3> <p> Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrStack::autoDelete () const </h3> @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ TRUE. </h3> <p> Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is -TRUE. +true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#remove">remove</a>(). <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQPtrStack::count () const @@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ empty. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrStack::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-type-*"></a>TQPtrStack::operator type * () const </h3> @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ empty. <p> Sets the contents of this stack by making a <a href="shclass.html#shallow-copy">shallow copy</a> of another stack <em>s</em>. Elements currently in this stack will be -deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is TRUE. +deleted if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() is true. <h3 class=fn>type * <a name="pop"></a>TQPtrStack::pop () </h3> @@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ reference to the stream. </h3> <p> Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>() -is TRUE. Returns TRUE if there was an item to pop; otherwise -returns FALSE. +is true. Returns true if there was an item to pop; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clear">clear</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoDelete"></a>TQPtrStack::setAutoDelete ( bool enable ) @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ returns FALSE. <p> Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete</a>(). -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE the stack auto-deletes its contents; if <em>enable</em> is FALSE the stack does not delete its contents. +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true the stack auto-deletes its contents; if <em>enable</em> is false the stack does not delete its contents. <p> <p>See also <a href="#autoDelete">autoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>type * <a name="top"></a>TQPtrStack::top () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqptrvector.html b/doc/html/tqptrvector.html index c9bec8723..91e0bb7ff 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqptrvector.html +++ b/doc/html/tqptrvector.html @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ that position. <em>i</em> must be less than <a href="#size">size</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const </h3> -<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE. +<p> Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqptrcollection.html#setAutoDelete">setAutoDelete</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="bsearch"></a>TQPtrVector::bsearch ( const type * d ) const @@ -226,9 +226,9 @@ type*. items are removed. If <em>d</em> is 0, the vector becomes empty. <p> If <em>size</em> >= 0, the vector is first resized to <em>size</em>. By default, <em>size</em> is -1. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. <em>size</em> is the same as the +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. <em>size</em> is the same as the current size, or <em>size</em> is larger and the memory has successfully -been allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. +been allocated; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#resize">resize</a>(), <a href="#insert">insert</a>(), and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="find"></a>TQPtrVector::find ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const @@ -266,13 +266,13 @@ removed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQPtrVector::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQPtrVector::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the vector is null; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the vector is null; otherwise returns false. <p> A null vector has <a href="#size">size</a>() == 0 and <a href="#data">data</a>() == 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). @@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ copied into the vector. Only the pointers are copied (i.e. <a href="shclass.html <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQPtrVector::operator== ( const <a href="tqptrvector.html">TQPtrVector</a><type> & v ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this vector and <em>v</em> are equal; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this vector and <em>v</em> are equal; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>type * <a name="operator[]"></a>TQPtrVector::operator[] ( int i ) const </h3> @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ reference to the stream. <p> Removes the item at position <em>i</em> in the vector, if there is one. <em>i</em> must be less than <a href="#size">size</a>(). -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>i</em> is within range; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>i</em> is within range; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#take">take</a>() and <a href="#at">at</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="resize"></a>TQPtrVector::resize ( uint size ) @@ -322,19 +322,19 @@ reference to the stream. vector becomes a null vector if <em>size</em> == 0. <p> Any items at position <em>size</em> or beyond in the vector are removed. New positions are initialized to 0. -<p> Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully -allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully +allocated; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>() and <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAutoDelete"></a>TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable ) </h3> <p> Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if <em>enable</em> is -TRUE and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +true and to never delete them if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items. -<p> The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be +<p> The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items. <p> Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions diff --git a/doc/html/tqpushbutton.html b/doc/html/tqpushbutton.html index 9c0682b10..9daa2bc76 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqpushbutton.html +++ b/doc/html/tqpushbutton.html @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return key in a dialog. You can change this with <a href="#setAutoDefault">setAutoDefault</a>(). Note that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want -this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(FALSE). +this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(false). <p> Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons @@ -204,10 +204,10 @@ Destroys the push button. </h3><p>Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#accel-prop">"accel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDefault"></a>TQPushButton::autoDefault () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#autoDefault-prop">"autoDefault"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRepeat"></a>TQButton::autoRepeat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop">"autoRepeat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQButton::clicked ()<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -234,25 +234,25 @@ returns 0. </h3><p>Returns the icon set on the push button. See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#iconSet-prop">"iconSet"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDefault"></a>TQPushButton::isDefault () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#default-prop">"default"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDown"></a>TQButton::isDown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#down-prop">"down"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusiveToggle"></a>TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop">"exclusiveToggle"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFlat"></a>TQPushButton::isFlat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the border is disabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the border is disabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#flat-prop">"flat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMenuButton"></a>TQPushButton::isMenuButton () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqpushbutton.html#menuButton-prop">"menuButton"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQButton::isOn () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#on-prop">"on"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isToggleButton"></a>TQButton::isToggleButton () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">"toggleButton"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> * <a name="pixmap"></a>TQButton::pixmap () const </h3><p>Returns the pixmap shown on the button. @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="toggled"></a>TQButton::toggled ( bool on )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> -<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off. +<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off. <p> This may be the result of a user action, <a href="tqbutton.html#toggle">toggle</a>() slot activation, or because <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>() was called. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>(). @@ -362,14 +362,14 @@ property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAccel">setAccel</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#accel">accel</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoDefault-prop"></a>autoDefault</h3> <p>This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto +<p>If this property is set to true then the push button is the auto default button in a dialog. <p> In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons may have a slightly larger size hint. -<p> This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> -parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. +<p> This property's default is true for buttons that have a <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> +parent; otherwise it defaults to false. <p> See the <a href="#default-prop">default</a> property for details of how <a href="#default-prop">default</a> and auto-default interact. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoRepeat">setAutoRepeat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoRepeat">autoRepeat</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="default-prop"></a>default</h3> <p>This property holds whether the push button is the default button. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be +<p>If this property is set to true then the push button will be pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog. <p> Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if @@ -402,12 +402,12 @@ button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame <p> The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setDefault">setDefault</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isDefault">isDefault</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="flat-prop"></a>flat</h3> <p>This property holds whether the border is disabled. -<p>This property's default is FALSE. +<p>This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setFlat">setFlat</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isFlat">isFlat</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> <a name="iconSet-prop"></a>iconSet</h3> @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setIconSet">setIconSet</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#iconSet">iconSet</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="menuButton-prop"></a>menuButton</h3> <p>This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it. <p><b>This property is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push +<p> If this property is set to true, then a down arrow is drawn on the push button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the arrow. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ arrow. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="on-prop"></a>on</h3> <p>This property holds whether the push button is toggled. <p>This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The -default value is FALSE. +default value is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#on-prop">on</a>, <a href="tqbutton.html#toggle">toggle</a>(), <a href="tqbutton.html#toggled">toggled</a>(), and <a href="#toggleButton-prop">toggleButton</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqradiobutton.html b/doc/html/tqradiobutton.html index e2adad3a5..2ed4b63e1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqradiobutton.html +++ b/doc/html/tqradiobutton.html @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ constructor. </h3><p>Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#accel-prop">"accel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRepeat"></a>TQButton::autoRepeat () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#autoRepeat-prop">"autoRepeat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQButton::clicked ()<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -141,19 +141,19 @@ returns 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isChecked"></a>TQRadioButton::isChecked () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqradiobutton.html#checked-prop">"checked"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDown"></a>TQButton::isDown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#down-prop">"down"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExclusiveToggle"></a>TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#exclusiveToggle-prop">"exclusiveToggle"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOn"></a>TQButton::isOn () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#on-prop">"on"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isToggleButton"></a>TQButton::isToggleButton () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqbutton.html#toggleButton-prop">"toggleButton"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> * <a name="pixmap"></a>TQButton::pixmap () const </h3><p>Returns the pixmap shown on the button. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="toggled"></a>TQButton::toggled ( bool on )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> -<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off. +<p> This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. <em>on</em> is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off. <p> This may be the result of a user action, <a href="tqbutton.html#toggle">toggle</a>() slot activation, or because <a href="tqbutton.html#setOn">setOn</a>() was called. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbutton.html#clicked">clicked</a>(). @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default. <p>This property holds whether the radio button is checked. <p>This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they have been placed in the same <a href="tqbuttongroup.html">TQButtonGroup</a>. The default value is -FALSE (unchecked). +false (unchecked). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setChecked">setChecked</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isChecked">isChecked</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> <a name="pixmap-prop"></a>pixmap</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqrect-h.html b/doc/html/tqrect-h.html index 7ab85c2f3..ef213bd07 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqrect-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqrect-h.html @@ -158,10 +158,10 @@ public: TQRect& operator|=(const TQRect &r); TQRect& operator&=(const TQRect &r); - bool contains( const TQPoint &p, bool proper=FALSE ) const; + bool contains( const TQPoint &p, bool proper=false ) const; bool contains( int x, int y ) const; // inline methods, _don't_ merge these bool contains( int x, int y, bool proper ) const; - bool contains( const TQRect &r, bool proper=FALSE ) const; + bool contains( const TQRect &r, bool proper=false ) const; TQRect unite( const TQRect &r ) const; TQRect intersect( const TQRect &r ) const; bool intersects( const TQRect &r ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqrect.html b/doc/html/tqrect.html index 6145e1e18..f67e14723 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqrect.html +++ b/doc/html/tqrect.html @@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#operator-and"><b>operator&</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQRect & <a href="#operator|-eq"><b>operator|=</b></a> ( const TQRect & r )</li> <li class=fn>TQRect & <a href="#operator-and-eq"><b>operator&=</b></a> ( const TQRect & r )</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains-2"><b>contains</b></a> ( int x, int y ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains-3"><b>contains</b></a> ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains-4"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains-4"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#unite"><b>unite</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQRect <a href="#intersect"><b>intersect</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#intersects"><b>intersects</b></a> ( const TQRect & r ) const</li> @@ -207,34 +207,34 @@ existing coordinates of the rectangle. <p> <p>See also <a href="#moveCenter">moveCenter</a>(), <a href="#topLeft">topLeft</a>(), <a href="#bottomRight">bottomRight</a>(), <a href="#topRight">topRight</a>(), and <a href="#bottomLeft">bottomLeft</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="tooltip-example.html#x447">tooltip/tooltip.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQRect::contains ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQRect::contains ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool proper = false ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the point <em>p</em> is inside or on the edge of the -rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>proper</em> is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if <em>p</em> is +Returns true if the point <em>p</em> is inside or on the edge of the +rectangle; otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>proper</em> is true, this function returns true only if <em>p</em> is inside (not on the edge). <p>Example: <a href="tutorial1-14.html#x2426">t14/cannon.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains-2"></a>TQRect::contains ( int x, int y ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the point <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> is inside this rectangle; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the point <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> is inside this rectangle; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains-3"></a>TQRect::contains ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the point <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> is inside this rectangle; -otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>proper</em> is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if the point +<p> Returns true if the point <em>x</em>, <em>y</em> is inside this rectangle; +otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>proper</em> is true, this function returns true only if the point is entirely inside (not on the edge). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains-4"></a>TQRect::contains ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains-4"></a>TQRect::contains ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool proper = false ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the rectangle <em>r</em> is inside this rectangle; -otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>proper</em> is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if <em>r</em> is +<p> Returns true if the rectangle <em>r</em> is inside this rectangle; +otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>proper</em> is true, this function returns true only if <em>r</em> is entirely inside (not on the edge). <p> <p>See also <a href="#unite">unite</a>(), <a href="#intersect">intersect</a>(), and <a href="#intersects">intersects</a>(). @@ -260,16 +260,16 @@ Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle <em>r</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="intersects"></a>TQRect::intersects ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this rectangle intersects with rectangle <em>r</em> +Returns true if this rectangle intersects with rectangle <em>r</em> (there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles); -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#intersect">intersect</a>() and <a href="#contains">contains</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial1-11.html#x2370">t11/cannon.cpp</a>, <a href="tutorial1-12.html#x2393">t12/cannon.cpp</a>, <a href="tutorial1-13.html#x2406">t13/cannon.cpp</a>, and <a href="tutorial1-14.html#x2427">t14/cannon.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQRect::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns false. <p> An empty rectangle has a <a href="#left">left</a>() > <a href="#right">right</a>() or <a href="#top">top</a>() > <a href="#bottom">bottom</a>(). <p> An empty rectangle is not valid. <tt>isEmpty() == !isValid()</tt> <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(), <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(), and <a href="#normalize">normalize</a>(). @@ -277,8 +277,8 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQRect::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise +returns false. <p> A null rectangle has both the width and the height set to 0, that is <a href="#right">right</a>() == <a href="#left">left</a>() - 1 and <a href="#bottom">bottom</a>() == <a href="#top">top</a>() - 1. <p> Note that if right() == left() and bottom() == top(), then the @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ rectangle has width 1 and height 1. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQRect::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns false. <p> A valid rectangle has a <a href="#left">left</a>() <= <a href="#right">right</a>() and <a href="#top">top</a>() <= <a href="#bottom">bottom</a>(). <p> Note that non-trivial operations like intersections are not defined for invalid rectangles. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ left and right edges, i.e. width = right - left + 1. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>operator!= ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r1, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r2 ) </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>r1</em> and <em>r2</em> are different; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>r1</em> and <em>r2</em> are different; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="operator-lt-lt"></a>operator<< ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & s, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r ) </h3> @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ reference to the stream. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>operator== ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r1, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r2 ) </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>r1</em> and <em>r2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>r1</em> and <em>r2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="operator-gt-gt"></a>operator>> ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & s, <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqregexp-h.html b/doc/html/tqregexp-h.html index 50573dc71..2f0918ec3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqregexp-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqregexp-h.html @@ -90,8 +90,8 @@ public: enum CaretMode { CaretAtZero, CaretAtOffset, CaretWontMatch }; TQRegExp(); - TQRegExp( const TQString& pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, - bool wildcard = FALSE ); + TQRegExp( const TQString& pattern, bool caseSensitive = true, + bool wildcard = false ); TQRegExp( const TQRegExp& rx ); ~TQRegExp(); TQRegExp& operator=( const TQRegExp& rx ); @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ public: bool exactMatch( const TQString& str ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT int match( const TQString& str, int index = 0, int *len = 0, - bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const; + bool indexIsStart = true ) const; #endif #if defined(Q_QDOC) diff --git a/doc/html/tqregexp.html b/doc/html/tqregexp.html index 142fcd00d..d8f8b10f3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqregexp.html +++ b/doc/html/tqregexp.html @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <ul> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#CaretMode-enum"><b>CaretMode</b></a> { CaretAtZero, CaretAtOffset, CaretWontMatch }</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegExp"><b>TQRegExp</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQRegExp-2"><b>TQRegExp</b></a> ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQRegExp-2"><b>TQRegExp</b></a> ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = true, bool wildcard = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegExp-3"><b>TQRegExp</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQRegExp"><b>~TQRegExp</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQRegExp & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx )</li> @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#minimal"><b>minimal</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setMinimal"><b>setMinimal</b></a> ( bool minimal )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#exactMatch"><b>exactMatch</b></a> ( const TQString & str ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>int match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#search"><b>search</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int offset = 0, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#searchRev"><b>searchRev</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int offset = -1, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#matchedLength"><b>matchedLength</b></a> () const</li> @@ -488,11 +488,11 @@ but can be applied to all the quantifiers in the pattern. For example, to match the Perl regexp <b>ro+?m</b> requires: <pre> TQRegExp rx( "ro+m" ); - rx.<a href="#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>( TRUE ); + rx.<a href="#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>( true ); </pre> <p> The equivalent of Perl's <tt>/i</tt> option is -<a href="#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>(FALSE). +<a href="#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>(false). <p> Perl's <tt>/g</tt> option can be emulated using a <a href="#cap_in_a_loop">loop</a>. <p> In TQRegExp <b>.</b> matches any character, therefore all TQRegExp regexps have the equivalent of Perl's <tt>/s</tt> option. TQRegExp @@ -630,10 +630,10 @@ as an argument and split a string accordingly. <p> To imitate the matching of a shell we can use wildcard mode. <p> <pre> TQRegExp rx( "*.html" ); // invalid regexp: * doesn't quantify anything - rx.<a href="#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( TRUE ); // now it's a valid wildcard regexp - rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "index.html" ); // returns TRUE - rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "default.htm" ); // returns FALSE - rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "readme.txt" ); // returns FALSE + rx.<a href="#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>( true ); // now it's a valid wildcard regexp + rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "index.html" ); // returns true + rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "default.htm" ); // returns false + rx.<a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>( "readme.txt" ); // returns false </pre> <p> Wildcard matching can be convenient because of its simplicity, but @@ -673,11 +673,11 @@ The caret never matches. Constructs an empty regexp. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() and <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQRegExp-2"></a>TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQRegExp-2"></a>TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & pattern, bool caseSensitive = true, bool wildcard = false ) </h3> Constructs a <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> object for the given <em>pattern</em> -string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if <em>wildcard</em> is TRUE (default is FALSE). The pattern is case -sensitive, unless <em>caseSensitive</em> is FALSE. Matching is greedy +string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if <em>wildcard</em> is true (default is false). The pattern is case +sensitive, unless <em>caseSensitive</em> is false. Matching is greedy (maximal), but can be changed by calling <a href="#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPattern">setPattern</a>(), <a href="#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>(), <a href="#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>(), and <a href="#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>(). @@ -783,8 +783,8 @@ capturedTexts()[2] is the text of the second and so on <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="caseSensitive"></a>TQRegExp::caseSensitive () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns -FALSE. The default is TRUE. +Returns true if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns +false. The default is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="errorString"></a>TQRegExp::errorString () @@ -814,14 +814,14 @@ escaped with a backslash. The special characters are $, (, ), *, +, <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exactMatch"></a>TQRegExp::exactMatch ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>str</em> is matched exactly by this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. You can determine how much of +Returns true if <em>str</em> is matched exactly by this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a>; otherwise returns false. You can determine how much of the string was matched by calling <a href="#matchedLength">matchedLength</a>(). <p> For a given regexp string, R, <a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>("R") is the equivalent of <a href="#search">search</a>("^R$") since exactMatch() effectively encloses the regexp in the start of string and end of string anchors, except that it sets matchedLength() differently. <p> For example, if the regular expression is <b>blue</b>, then -exactMatch() returns TRUE only for input <tt>blue</tt>. For inputs <tt>bluebell</tt>, <tt>blutak</tt> and <tt>lightblue</tt>, exactMatch() returns FALSE +exactMatch() returns true only for input <tt>blue</tt>. For inputs <tt>bluebell</tt>, <tt>blutak</tt> and <tt>lightblue</tt>, exactMatch() returns false and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively. <p> Although const, this function sets matchedLength(), <a href="#capturedTexts">capturedTexts</a>() and <a href="#pos">pos</a>(). @@ -829,10 +829,10 @@ and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQRegExp::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns +false. <p> If you call <a href="#exactMatch">exactMatch</a>() with an empty pattern on an empty string -it will return TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE since it operates +it will return true; otherwise it returns false since it operates over the whole string. If you call <a href="#search">search</a>() with an empty pattern on <em>any</em> string it will return the start offset (0 by default) because the empty pattern matches the 'emptiness' at the start of @@ -842,8 +842,8 @@ the string. In this case the length of the match returned by <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQRegExp::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is valid; otherwise returns -FALSE. An invalid regular expression never matches. +Returns true if the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is valid; otherwise returns +false. An invalid regular expression never matches. <p> The pattern <b>[a-z</b> is an example of an invalid pattern, since it lacks a closing square bracket. <p> Note that the validity of a regexp may also depend on the setting @@ -852,13 +852,13 @@ wildcard regexp but an invalid full regexp. <p> <p>See also <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="regexptester-example.html#x2487">regexptester/regexptester.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="match"></a>TQRegExp::match ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="match"></a>TQRegExp::match ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Attempts to match in <em>str</em>, starting from position <em>index</em>. Returns the position of the match, or -1 if there was no match. <p> The length of the match is stored in <em>*len</em>, unless <em>len</em> is a null pointer. -<p> If <em>indexIsStart</em> is TRUE (the default), the position <em>index</em> in +<p> If <em>indexIsStart</em> is true (the default), the position <em>index</em> in the string will match the start of string anchor, <b>^</b>, in the regexp, if present. Otherwise, position 0 in <em>str</em> will match. <p> Use <a href="#search">search</a>() and <a href="#matchedLength">matchedLength</a>() instead of this function. @@ -874,8 +874,8 @@ no match. <p>Examples: <a href="archivesearch-example.html#x480">network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h</a> and <a href="regexptester-example.html#x2488">regexptester/regexptester.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="minimal"></a>TQRegExp::minimal () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMinimal">setMinimal</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="numCaptures"></a>TQRegExp::numCaptures () const @@ -886,8 +886,8 @@ Returns the number of captures contained in the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-e <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQRegExp::operator!= ( const <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & rx ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is not equal to <em>rx</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is not equal to <em>rx</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQRegExp::operator= ( const <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & rx ) @@ -898,8 +898,8 @@ are also copied. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQRegExp::operator== ( const <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & rx ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is equal to <em>rx</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> is equal to <em>rx</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> Two TQRegExp objects are equal if they have the same pattern strings and the same settings for case sensitivity, wildcard and minimal matching. @@ -977,14 +977,14 @@ forwards. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setCaseSensitive"></a>TQRegExp::setCaseSensitive ( bool sensitive ) </h3> Sets case sensitive matching to <em>sensitive</em>. -<p> If <em>sensitive</em> is TRUE, <b>\.txt$</b> matches <tt>readme.txt</tt> but +<p> If <em>sensitive</em> is true, <b>\.txt$</b> matches <tt>readme.txt</tt> but not <tt>README.TXT</tt>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#caseSensitive">caseSensitive</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="regexptester-example.html#x2491">regexptester/regexptester.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMinimal"></a>TQRegExp::setMinimal ( bool minimal ) </h3> -Enables or disables minimal matching. If <em>minimal</em> is FALSE, +Enables or disables minimal matching. If <em>minimal</em> is false, matching is greedy (maximal) which is the default. <p> For example, suppose we have the input string "We must be <b>bold</b>, very <b>bold</b>!" and the pattern @@ -1008,8 +1008,8 @@ wildcard and minimal matching options are not changed. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWildcard"></a>TQRegExp::setWildcard ( bool wildcard ) </h3> Sets the wildcard mode for the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a>. The default is -FALSE. -<p> Setting <em>wildcard</em> to TRUE enables simple shell-like wildcard +false. +<p> Setting <em>wildcard</em> to true enables simple shell-like wildcard matching. (See <a href="#wildcard-matching">wildcard matching (globbing)</a>.) <p> For example, <b>r*.txt</b> matches the string <tt>readme.txt</tt> in @@ -1019,8 +1019,8 @@ wildcard mode, but does not match <tt>readme</tt>. <p>Example: <a href="regexptester-example.html#x2493">regexptester/regexptester.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wildcard"></a>TQRegExp::wildcard () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. -The default is FALSE. +Returns true if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns false. +The default is false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWildcard">setWildcard</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqregexpvalidator.html b/doc/html/tqregexpvalidator.html index efca08cf8..403111513 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqregexpvalidator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqregexpvalidator.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ normally be associated with a widget as in the example above. // match most 'readme' files rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setPattern">setPattern</a>( "read\\S?me(\.(txt|asc|1st))?" ); - rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>( FALSE ); + rx.<a href="tqregexp.html#setCaseSensitive">setCaseSensitive</a>( false ); v.<a href="#setRegExp">setRegExp</a>( rx ); s = "readme"; v.<a href="#validate">validate</a>( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable s = "README.1ST"; v.<a href="#validate">validate</a>( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable diff --git a/doc/html/tqregion-h.html b/doc/html/tqregion-h.html index 2581ba6b2..1a801e0bc 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqregion-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqregion-h.html @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ public: TQRegion(); TQRegion( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType = Rectangle ); TQRegion( const TQRect &, RegionType = Rectangle ); - TQRegion( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=FALSE ); + TQRegion( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=false ); TQRegion( const TQRegion & ); TQRegion( const TQBitmap & ); ~TQRegion(); @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public: #elif defined(TQ_WS_X11) Region handle() const { if(!data->rgn) updateX11Region(); return data->rgn; } #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - RgnHandle handle(bool require_rgn=FALSE) const; + RgnHandle handle(bool require_rgn=false) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_DATASTREAM diff --git a/doc/html/tqregion.html b/doc/html/tqregion.html index b228ec3c3..f0ea4bd48 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqregion.html +++ b/doc/html/tqregion.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-2"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType t = Rectangle )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-3"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-4"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-4"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-5"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( const TQRegion & r )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQRegion-6"><b>TQRegion</b></a> ( const TQBitmap & bm )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQRegion"><b>~TQRegion</b></a> ()</li> @@ -145,10 +145,10 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> If the rectangle is invalid a null region will be created. <p> <p>See also <a href="#RegionType-enum">TQRegion::RegionType</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQRegion-4"></a>TQRegion::TQRegion ( const <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> & a, bool winding = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQRegion-4"></a>TQRegion::TQRegion ( const <a href="tqpointarray.html">TQPointArray</a> & a, bool winding = false ) </h3> Constructs a polygon region from the point array <em>a</em>. -<p> If <em>winding</em> is TRUE, the polygon region is filled using the +<p> If <em>winding</em> is true, the polygon region is filled using the winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm is used. <p> This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down @@ -178,14 +178,14 @@ gives a rectangle that is <a href="tqrect.html#isNull">TQRect::isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQRegion::contains ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the region contains the point <em>p</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the region contains the point <em>p</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains-2"></a>TQRegion::contains ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the region overlaps the rectangle <em>r</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the region overlaps the rectangle <em>r</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> <a name="eor"></a>TQRegion::eor ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & r ) const </h3> @@ -207,31 +207,31 @@ Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and <em>r</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQRegion::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the region is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. An +Returns true if the region is empty; otherwise returns false. An empty region is a region that contains no points. <p> Example: <pre> TQRegion r1( 10, 10, 20, 20 ); TQRegion r2( 40, 40, 20, 20 ); TQRegion r3; - r1.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // FALSE - r1.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // FALSE - r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // TRUE - r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE + r1.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // false + r1.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // false + r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // true + r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true r3 = r1.<a href="#intersect">intersect</a>( r2 ); // r3 = intersection of r1 and r2 - r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // FALSE - r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE + r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // false + r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true r3 = r1.<a href="#unite">unite</a>( r2 ); // r3 = union of r1 and r2 - r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // FALSE - r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // FALSE + r3.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // false + r3.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // false </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQRegion::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the region is a null region; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the region is a null region; otherwise returns +false. <p> A null region is a region that has not been initialized. A null region is always empty. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -239,8 +239,8 @@ region is always empty. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQRegion::operator!= ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & r ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the region is different from <em>r</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the region is different from <em>r</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> <a name="operator-and"></a>TQRegion::operator& ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & r ) const </h3> @@ -284,8 +284,8 @@ Assigns <em>r</em> to this region and returns a reference to the region. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQRegion::operator== ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & r ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the region is equal to <em>r</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the region is equal to <em>r</em>; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> <a name="operator^"></a>TQRegion::operator^ ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & r ) const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqscrollbar-h.html b/doc/html/tqscrollbar-h.html index 70f130a9f..2ee4e3006 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqscrollbar-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqscrollbar-h.html @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ public: virtual void setPalette( const TQPalette & ); virtual TQSize sizeHint() const; virtual void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp ); - void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ); + void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ); int minValue() const; int maxValue() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqscrollbar.html b/doc/html/tqscrollbar.html index 900c741eb..20f60b9e6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqscrollbar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqscrollbar.html @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ constructor. Destructor. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="draggingSlider"></a>TQScrollBar::draggingSlider () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqscrollbar.html#draggingSlider-prop">"draggingSlider"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="hideEvent"></a>TQScrollBar::hideEvent ( <a href="tqhideevent.html">TQHideEvent</a> * )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ mouse. sliderRect().<a href="tqwidget.html#x">x</a>() for horizontal scroll bars. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tracking"></a>TQScrollBar::tracking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqscrollbar.html#tracking-prop">"tracking"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="value"></a>TQScrollBar::value () const </h3><p>Returns the scroll bar's value. diff --git a/doc/html/tqscrollview-h.html b/doc/html/tqscrollview-h.html index e115823a2..017b4f773 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqscrollview-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqscrollview-h.html @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ public: int childX(TQWidget* child); int childY(TQWidget* child); bool childIsVisible(TQWidget* child) { return child->isVisible(); } // obsolete functions - void showChild(TQWidget* child, bool yes=TRUE) { + void showChild(TQWidget* child, bool yes=true) { if ( yes ) child->show(); else @@ -156,9 +156,9 @@ public: void updateContents( int x, int y, int w, int h ); void updateContents( const TQRect& r ); void updateContents(); - void repaintContents( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=TRUE ); - void repaintContents( const TQRect& r, bool erase=TRUE ); - void repaintContents( bool erase=TRUE ); + void repaintContents( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=true ); + void repaintContents( const TQRect& r, bool erase=true ); + void repaintContents( bool erase=true ); void contentsToViewport( int x, int y, int& vx, int& vy ) const; void viewportToContents( int vx, int vy, int& x, int& y ) const; TQPoint contentsToViewport( const TQPoint& ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqscrollview.html b/doc/html/tqscrollview.html index 75f495aa8..2ce8e1d2d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqscrollview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqscrollview.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#childX"><b>childX</b></a> ( TQWidget * child )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#childY"><b>childY</b></a> ( TQWidget * child )</li> <li class=fn>bool childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn>void showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>void showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = true ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#ScrollBarMode-enum"><b>ScrollBarMode</b></a> { Auto, AlwaysOff, AlwaysOn }</li> <li class=fn>ScrollBarMode <a href="#vScrollBarMode"><b>vScrollBarMode</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setVScrollBarMode"><b>setVScrollBarMode</b></a> ( ScrollBarMode )</li> @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>void <a href="#updateContents"><b>updateContents</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#updateContents-2"><b>updateContents</b></a> ( const TQRect & r )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#updateContents-3"><b>updateContents</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents-2"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents-3"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( bool erase = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents-2"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaintContents-3"><b>repaintContents</b></a> ( bool erase = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#contentsToViewport"><b>contentsToViewport</b></a> ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#viewportToContents"><b>viewportToContents</b></a> ( int vx, int vy, int & x, int & y ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQPoint <a href="#contentsToViewport-2"><b>contentsToViewport</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p ) const</li> @@ -230,11 +230,11 @@ when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call <a href="#resizeContents">resizeContents</a>() to set the size of the area and reimplement <a href="#drawContents">drawContents</a>() to paint the contents. You then call -<a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children +<a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(true) and add widgets, again by making them children of the <a href="#viewport">viewport</a>(), and adding them with <a href="#addChild">addChild</a>(): <pre> TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...); - sv-><a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(TRUE); + sv-><a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(true); <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>* child1 = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>("CHILD", sv-><a href="#viewport">viewport</a>()); sv-><a href="#addChild">addChild</a>(child1); <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>* child2 = new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>("CHILD", sv-><a href="#viewport">viewport</a>()); @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do. child widgets in the view. <p> Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse -tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE). -<p> To enable drag-and-drop, you would <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>(TRUE) on the +tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(true). +<p> To enable drag-and-drop, you would <a href="tqwidget.html#setAcceptDrops">setAcceptDrops</a>(true) on the TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ be deleted. Inserts the widget, <em>child</em>, into the scrolled area positioned at (<em>x</em>, <em>y</em>). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is already in the view, it is just moved. -<p> You may want to call <a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(TRUE) if you add a large number +<p> You may want to call <a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>(true) if you add a large number of widgets. <p>Example: <a href="scrollview-example.html#x645">scrollview/scrollview.cpp</a>. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ the area). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="childIsVisible"></a>TQScrollView::childIsVisible ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * child ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>child</em> is visible. This is equivalent +<p> Returns true if <em>child</em> is visible. This is equivalent to child->isVisible(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="childX"></a>TQScrollView::childX ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * child ) @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars. <p>Example: <a href="scrollview-example.html#x647">scrollview/scrollview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragAutoScroll"></a>TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqscrollview.html#dragAutoScroll-prop">"dragAutoScroll"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawContents"></a>TQScrollView::drawContents ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ drawContents() for an explanation of the parameters <em>p</em>, <em>offsetx</em> </h3> When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview, especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance -can suffer greatly. If <em>y</em> is TRUE the scrollview will use an +can suffer greatly. If <em>y</em> is true the scrollview will use an extra widget to group child widgets. <p> Note that you may only call <a href="#enableClipper">enableClipper</a>() prior to adding widgets. @@ -604,8 +604,8 @@ the object is in <em>obj</em>. See the <a href="tqscrollview.html#hScrollBarMode-prop">"hScrollBarMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasStaticBackground"></a>TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setStaticBackground">setStaticBackground</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqscrollbar.html">TQScrollBar</a> * <a name="horizontalScrollBar"></a>TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const @@ -627,11 +627,11 @@ to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isHorizontalSliderPressed"></a>TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed () </h3> -Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVerticalSliderPressed"></a>TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed () </h3> -Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="leftMargin"></a>TQScrollView::leftMargin () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -648,24 +648,24 @@ the same as <a href="#addChild">addChild</a>(). Removes the <em>child</em> widget from the scrolled area. Note that this happens automatically if the <em>child</em> is deleted. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true ) </h3> Calls <a href="tqwidget.html#repaint">repaint</a>() on a rectangle defined by <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em>, <em>h</em>, translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing -is repainted. If <em>erase</em> is TRUE the background is cleared using +is repainted. If <em>erase</em> is true the background is cleared using the background color. <p> <p>See also <a href="#updateContents">updateContents</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents-2"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool erase = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents-2"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool erase = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Repaints the contents of rectangle <em>r</em>. If <em>erase</em> is TRUE the +<p> Repaints the contents of rectangle <em>r</em>. If <em>erase</em> is true the background is cleared using the background color. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents-3"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaintContents-3"></a>TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Repaints the contents. If <em>erase</em> is TRUE the background is +<p> Repaints the contents. If <em>erase</em> is true the background is cleared using the background color. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="resizeContents"></a>TQScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -738,8 +738,8 @@ spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is See the <a href="tqscrollview.html#resizePolicy-prop">"resizePolicy"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setStaticBackground"></a>TQScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y ) </h3> -Sets the scrollview to have a static background if <em>y</em> is TRUE, -or a scrolling background if <em>y</em> is FALSE. By default, the +Sets the scrollview to have a static background if <em>y</em> is true, +or a scrolling background if <em>y</em> is false. By default, the background is scrolling. <p> Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full repaint of the visible area has to be triggered on every contents move. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ The new geometry is given by <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>w</em> and <em>h</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setVScrollBarMode"></a>TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( <a href="tqscrollview.html#ScrollBarMode-enum">ScrollBarMode</a> )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets the mode for the vertical scroll bar. See the <a href="tqscrollview.html#vScrollBarMode-prop">"vScrollBarMode"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="showChild"></a>TQScrollView::showChild ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * child, bool y = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="showChild"></a>TQScrollView::showChild ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * child, bool y = true ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Sets the visibility of <em>child</em>. Equivalent to @@ -878,10 +878,10 @@ See the <a href="tqscrollview.html#visibleWidth-prop">"visibleWidth"</a> propert <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#contentsY">contentsY</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragAutoScroll-prop"></a>dragAutoScroll</h3> <p>This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView +<p>If this property is set to true (the default), the TQScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this -works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE +works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying false disables this autoscroll feature. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Enabling this property might not be enough to effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in diff --git a/doc/html/tqsemaphore.html b/doc/html/tqsemaphore.html index e1368d500..da3a57934 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsemaphore.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsemaphore.html @@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ Returns the total number of accesses to the semaphore. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tryAccess"></a>TQSemaphore::tryAccess ( int n ) </h3> Try to get access to the semaphore. If <a href="#available">available</a>() < <em>n</em>, this -function will return FALSE immediately. If <a href="#available">available</a>() >= <em>n</em>, -this function will take <em>n</em> accesses and return TRUE. This +function will return false immediately. If <a href="#available">available</a>() >= <em>n</em>, +this function will take <em>n</em> accesses and return true. This function does <em>not</em> block. <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqserversocket.html b/doc/html/tqserversocket.html index 30c9ea8a0..03d65a24c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqserversocket.html +++ b/doc/html/tqserversocket.html @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ acceptance of new connections. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqhostaddress.html">TQHostAddress</a> <a name="address"></a>TQServerSocket::address () const </h3> Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if -this object listens on more than one address. <a href="#ok">ok</a>() must be TRUE +this object listens on more than one address. <a href="#ok">ok</a>() must be true before calling this function. <p> <p>See also <a href="#port">port</a>() and <a href="tqsocketdevice.html#address">TQSocketDevice::address</a>(). @@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ newly accepted connection. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ok"></a>TQServerSocket::ok () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>TQ_UINT16 <a name="port"></a>TQServerSocket::port () const </h3> Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor, -TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. <a href="#ok">ok</a>() must be TRUE +TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. <a href="#ok">ok</a>() must be true before calling this function. <p> <p>See also <a href="#address">address</a>() and <a href="tqsocketdevice.html#port">TQSocketDevice::port</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqsessionmanager.html b/doc/html/tqsessionmanager.html index d918c5f2f..96edc0628 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsessionmanager.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsessionmanager.html @@ -127,8 +127,8 @@ guaranteed that the session manager will allow interaction. </h3> <p> Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the -user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise -returns FALSE. +user. Returns true if interaction is permitted; otherwise +returns false. <p> The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their @@ -208,8 +208,8 @@ iterate over a copy, e.g. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isPhase2"></a>TQSessionManager::isPhase2 () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second -session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the session manager is currently performing a second +session management phase; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#requestPhase2">requestPhase2</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="release"></a>TQSessionManager::release () diff --git a/doc/html/tqsettings-h.html b/doc/html/tqsettings-h.html index 2255495a7..b8d7fd80a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsettings-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsettings-h.html @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ public: TQString readEntry( const TQString &, const TQString &def = TQString::null, bool * = 0 ); int readNumEntry( const TQString &, int def = 0, bool * = 0 ); double readDoubleEntry( const TQString &, double def = 0, bool * = 0 ); - bool readBoolEntry( const TQString &, bool def = FALSE, bool * = 0 ); + bool readBoolEntry( const TQString &, bool def = false, bool * = 0 ); //### make those non-inlined in 4.0 TQStringList readListEntry( const TQString &key, bool *ok = 0 ) const @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ public: TQSettings *that = (TQSettings*)this; return that->readDoubleEntry( key, def, ok ); } - bool readBoolEntry( const TQString &key, bool def = FALSE, bool *ok = 0 ) const + bool readBoolEntry( const TQString &key, bool def = false, bool *ok = 0 ) const { TQSettings *that = (TQSettings*)this; return that->readBoolEntry( key, def, ok ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsettings.html b/doc/html/tqsettings.html index 93c09fa88..350baa0e2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsettings.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsettings.html @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#readEntry"><b>readEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#readNumEntry"><b>readNumEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const</li> <li class=fn>double <a href="#readDoubleEntry"><b>readDoubleEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#readBoolEntry"><b>readBoolEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#readBoolEntry"><b>readBoolEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key, bool def = false, bool * ok = 0 ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#removeEntry"><b>removeEntry</b></a> ( const TQString & key )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#insertSearchPath"><b>insertSearchPath</b></a> ( System s, const TQString & path )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#removeSearchPath"><b>removeSearchPath</b></a> ( System s, const TQString & path )</li> @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ have read permission. <p> <pre> TQSettings settings; settings.<a href="#insertSearchPath">insertSearchPath</a>( TQSettings::<a href="#System-enum">Windows</a>, "/MyCompany" ); - settings.<a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", TRUE ); + settings.<a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", true ); </pre> The code above will write the subkey "Tip of the day" into the <em>first</em> of the registry folders listed below that is found and for @@ -391,12 +391,12 @@ the search path). <p> <p>Example: <a href="canvas-chart-example.html#x2890">chart/chartform.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readBoolEntry"></a>TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="readBoolEntry"></a>TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, bool def = false, bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> <p> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em>, and returns a bool, or the default value, <em>def</em>, if the entry couldn't be read. -If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE +If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readEntry">readEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ otherwise. <p> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em>, and returns a double, or the default value, <em>def</em>, if the entry couldn't be read. -If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE +If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readEntry">readEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), <a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ otherwise. <p> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em>, and returns a <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>, or the default value, <em>def</em>, if the entry couldn't be read. -If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE +If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), <a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). @@ -422,8 +422,8 @@ otherwise. </h3> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em> as a string. If <em>ok</em> is not -0, <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the key was read, otherwise <em>*ok</em> is -set to FALSE. +0, <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the key was read, otherwise <em>*ok</em> is +set to false. <p> Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g. <pre> @@ -442,8 +442,8 @@ over a copy, e.g. This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em> as a string. The <em>separator</em> -is used to create a <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> by calling <a href="tqstringlist.html#split">TQStringList::split</a>(<em>separator</em>, entry). If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE -if the key was read, otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +is used to create a <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> by calling <a href="tqstringlist.html#split">TQStringList::split</a>(<em>separator</em>, entry). If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to true +if the key was read, otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will omit empty strings from the list. Because of this, it is impossible to retrieve identical list data with this function. We @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ over a copy, e.g. <p> Reads the entry specified by <em>key</em>, and returns an integer, or the default value, <em>def</em>, if the entry couldn't be read. -If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE +If <em>ok</em> is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readEntry">readEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), <a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). @@ -545,8 +545,8 @@ will be fixed in TQt-4. </h3> Writes the boolean entry <em>value</em> into key <em>key</em>. The <em>key</em> is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by <em>value</em>. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise TRUE is returned. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise true is returned. <p> <b>Warning:</b> On certain platforms, keys are required to contain at least two components (e.g., "/foo/bar"). This limitation does not apply to TQt 4. @@ -558,8 +558,8 @@ TQt 4. This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Writes the double entry <em>value</em> into key <em>key</em>. The <em>key</em> is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by <em>value</em>. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise TRUE is returned. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="writeEntry-3"></a>TQSettings::writeEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, int value ) @@ -567,8 +567,8 @@ returned; otherwise TRUE is returned. This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Writes the integer entry <em>value</em> into key <em>key</em>. The <em>key</em> is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by <em>value</em>. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise TRUE is returned. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="writeEntry-5"></a>TQSettings::writeEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & value ) @@ -577,8 +577,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Writes the string entry <em>value</em> into key <em>key</em>. The <em>key</em> is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by <em>value</em>. If <em>value</em> is an empty string or a null string the key's value will be an empty string. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise TRUE is returned. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="writeEntry-6"></a>TQSettings::writeEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & value ) @@ -587,8 +587,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Writes the string list entry <em>value</em> into key <em>key</em>. The <em>key</em> is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by <em>value</em>. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), and <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="writeEntry-7"></a>TQSettings::writeEntry ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key, const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & value, const <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> & separator ) @@ -608,8 +608,8 @@ empty strings from the list. Because of this, it is impossible to retrieve identical list data that is stored with this function. We recommend using the <a href="#writeEntry">writeEntry</a>() and readListEntry() overloads that do not take a <em>separator</em> argument. -<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is -returned; otherwise returns TRUE. +<p> If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is +returned; otherwise returns true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#readListEntry">readListEntry</a>(), <a href="#readNumEntry">readNumEntry</a>(), <a href="#readDoubleEntry">readDoubleEntry</a>(), <a href="#readBoolEntry">readBoolEntry</a>(), <a href="#removeEntry">removeEntry</a>(), and <a href="tqstringlist.html#join">TQStringList::join</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsgistyle-h.html b/doc/html/tqsgistyle-h.html index 8ddd9beb5..f3a879fa6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsgistyle-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsgistyle-h.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_SGI TQSGIStyle: public TQMotifStyle { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSGIStyle( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ); + TQSGIStyle( bool useHighlightCols = false ); virtual ~TQSGIStyle(); #if !defined(Q_NO_USING_KEYWORD) diff --git a/doc/html/tqsgistyle.html b/doc/html/tqsgistyle.html index 0ca84774b..3f29b9fa4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsgistyle.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsgistyle.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqsgistyle-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSGIStyle"><b>TQSGIStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSGIStyle"><b>TQSGIStyle</b></a> ( bool useHighlightCols = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQSGIStyle"><b>~TQSGIStyle</b></a> ()</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ SGI/Irix Motif GUI style as closely as <a href="tqstyle.html">TQStyle</a> allows <p>See also <a href="appearance.html">Widget Appearance and Style</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSGIStyle"></a>TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSGIStyle"></a>TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false ) </h3> Constructs a TQSGIStyle. -<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is FALSE (default value), the style will +<p> If <em>useHighlightCols</em> is false (default value), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. diff --git a/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext-h.html b/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext-h.html index 0326c5161..64d1ed6a1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext-h.html @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public: TQSimpleRichText( const TQString& text, const TQFont& fnt, const TQString& context, const TQStyleSheet* sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory* factory, int pageBreak = -1, - const TQColor& linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE ); + const TQColor& linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true ); ~TQSimpleRichText(); void setWidth( int ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext.html b/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext.html index bc8ebf67c..51ad76258 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsimplerichtext.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn><a href="#TQSimpleRichText"><b>TQSimpleRichText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSimpleRichText-2"><b>TQSimpleRichText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSimpleRichText-2"><b>TQSimpleRichText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQSimpleRichText"><b>~TQSimpleRichText</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setWidth-2"><b>setWidth</b></a> ( int w )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setWidth"><b>setWidth</b></a> ( TQPainter * p, int w )</li> @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ calculate the absolute path. See <p> The <em>sheet</em> is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default style sheet will be used (see <a href="tqstylesheet.html#defaultSheet">TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet</a>()). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSimpleRichText-2"></a>TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & fnt, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & context, const <a href="tqstylesheet.html">TQStyleSheet</a> * sheet, const <a href="tqmimesourcefactory.html">TQMimeSourceFactory</a> * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSimpleRichText-2"></a>TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & fnt, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & context, const <a href="tqstylesheet.html">TQStyleSheet</a> * sheet, const <a href="tqmimesourcefactory.html">TQMimeSourceFactory</a> * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true ) </h3> Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string <em>text</em> and the font <em>fnt</em>. @@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ Returns the height of the rich text object in pixels. <p>Examples: <a href="tqaction-application-example.html#x1159">action/application.cpp</a>, <a href="simple-application-example.html#x1577">application/application.cpp</a>, <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1015">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>, and <a href="mdi-example.html#x2062">mdi/application.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inText"></a>TQSimpleRichText::inText ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>pos</em> is within a text line of the rich text -object; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>pos</em> is within a text line of the rich text +object; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDefaultFont"></a>TQSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont ( const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> & f ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsize.html b/doc/html/tqsize.html index 86cda6f68..6c4419a29 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsize.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsize.html @@ -139,20 +139,20 @@ Returns the height. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQSize::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is -less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is +less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSize::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQSize::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is -equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is +equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & <a name="operator*-eq"></a>TQSize::operator*= ( int c ) </h3> @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Returns the width. </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are different; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> <a name="operator*"></a>operator* ( const <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & s, int c ) </h3> @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ the stream. </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>s1</em> and <em>s2</em> are equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & <a name="operator-gt-gt"></a>operator>> ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & s, <a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> & sz ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsizepolicy-h.html b/doc/html/tqsizepolicy-h.html index 722332b1b..0e1cb7b5a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsizepolicy-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsizepolicy-h.html @@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ public: TQSizePolicy() : data( 0 ) { } - TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ) + TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ) : data( hor | (ver<<HSize) | (hfw ? (TQ_UINT32)(1<<2*HSize) : 0) ) { } - TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar hors, uchar vers, bool hfw = FALSE ); + TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar hors, uchar vers, bool hfw = false ); SizeType horData() const { return (SizeType)( data & HMask ); } SizeType verData() const { return (SizeType)( (data & VMask) >> HSize ); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqsizepolicy.html b/doc/html/tqsizepolicy.html index 83cd2bc4f..89ac17269 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsizepolicy.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsizepolicy.html @@ -40,8 +40,8 @@ and vertical resizing policy. <li class=fn>enum <a href="#SizeType-enum"><b>SizeType</b></a> { Fixed = 0, Minimum = MayGrow, Maximum = MayShrink, Preferred = MayGrow | MayShrink, MinimumExpanding = MayGrow | ExpMask, Expanding = MayGrow | MayShrink | ExpMask, Ignored = ExpMask }</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#ExpandData-enum"><b>ExpandData</b></a> { NoDirection = 0, Horizontally = 1, Vertically = 2, Horizontal = Horizontally, Vertical = Vertically, BothDirections = Horizontally | Vertically }</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQSizePolicy"><b>TQSizePolicy</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSizePolicy-2"><b>TQSizePolicy</b></a> ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSizePolicy-3"><b>TQSizePolicy</b></a> ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSizePolicy-2"><b>TQSizePolicy</b></a> ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSizePolicy-3"><b>TQSizePolicy</b></a> ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = false )</li> <li class=fn>SizeType <a href="#horData"><b>horData</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>SizeType <a href="#verData"><b>verData</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#mayShrinkHorizontally"><b>mayShrinkHorizontally</b></a> () const</li> @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ much space as possible. <p> Constructs a minimally initialized TQSizePolicy. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSizePolicy-2"></a>TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> ver, bool hfw = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSizePolicy-2"></a>TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> ver, bool hfw = false ) </h3> <p> <a name="interesting"></a> @@ -145,18 +145,18 @@ subclass. <p> It constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types, <em>hor</em> and <em>ver</em> respectively. These <a href="#SizeType-enum">sizing types</a> affect how the widget is treated by the <a href="tqlayout.html">layout engine</a>. -<p> If <em>hfw</em> is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent +<p> If <em>hfw</em> is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a> with line wrapping). <p> <p>See also <a href="#horData">horData</a>(), <a href="#verData">verData</a>(), and <a href="#hasHeightForWidth">hasHeightForWidth</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSizePolicy-3"></a>TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSizePolicy-3"></a>TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = false ) </h3> <p> Constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types <em>hor</em> and <em>ver</em>, and stretch factors <em>horStretch</em> and <em>verStretch</em>. -<p> If <em>hfw</em> is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the +<p> If <em>hfw</em> is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget. <p> <p>See also <a href="#horStretch">horStretch</a>() and <a href="#verStretch">verStretch</a>(). @@ -172,8 +172,8 @@ it wants to grow in both dimensions. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHeightForWidth"></a>TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its -width; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its +width; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setHeightForWidth">setHeightForWidth</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">SizeType</a> <a name="horData"></a>TQSizePolicy::horData () const @@ -191,43 +191,43 @@ width; otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mayGrowHorizontally"></a>TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its -sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget can sensibly be wider than its +sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mayGrowVertically">mayGrowVertically</a>() and <a href="#mayShrinkHorizontally">mayShrinkHorizontally</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mayGrowVertically"></a>TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its -sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget can sensibly be taller than its +sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mayGrowHorizontally">mayGrowHorizontally</a>() and <a href="#mayShrinkVertically">mayShrinkVertically</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mayShrinkHorizontally"></a>TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its -sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its +sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mayShrinkVertically">mayShrinkVertically</a>() and <a href="#mayGrowHorizontally">mayGrowHorizontally</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mayShrinkVertically"></a>TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its -sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its +sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#mayShrinkHorizontally">mayShrinkHorizontally</a>() and <a href="#mayGrowVertically">mayGrowVertically</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQSizePolicy::operator!= ( const <a href="tqsizepolicy.html">TQSizePolicy</a> & s ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this policy is different from <em>s</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this policy is different from <em>s</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator-eq-eq">operator==</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQSizePolicy::operator== ( const <a href="tqsizepolicy.html">TQSizePolicy</a> & s ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to <em>s</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this policy is equal to <em>s</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#operator!-eq">operator!=</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setHeightForWidth"></a>TQSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqslider-h.html b/doc/html/tqslider-h.html index 15ee6d70b..2bf9a9ec5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqslider-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqslider-h.html @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ public: TQRect sliderRect() const; TQSize sizeHint() const; void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp ); - void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ); + void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ); TQSizePolicy sizePolicy() const; TQSize minimumSizeHint() const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqslider.html b/doc/html/tqslider.html index d39d66836..dcf707f0f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqslider.html +++ b/doc/html/tqslider.html @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ See the <a href="tqslider.html#tickInterval-prop">"tickInterval"</a> property fo </h3><p>Returns the tickmark settings for this slider. See the <a href="tqslider.html#tickmarks-prop">"tickmarks"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tracking"></a>TQSlider::tracking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqslider.html#tracking-prop">"tracking"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="value"></a>TQSlider::value () const </h3><p>Returns the current slider value. diff --git a/doc/html/tqsocket-h.html b/doc/html/tqsocket-h.html index 6d452f4c9..138b7768c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsocket-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsocket-h.html @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ signals: void error( int ); protected slots: - virtual void sn_read( bool force=FALSE ); + virtual void sn_read( bool force=false ); virtual void sn_write(); private slots: diff --git a/doc/html/tqsocket.html b/doc/html/tqsocket.html index a981d31fe..b4e8034b0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsocket.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsocket.html @@ -186,14 +186,14 @@ device, the current read index is always zero. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="at-2"></a>TQSocket::at ( <a href="tqiodevice.html#Offset">Offset</a> index )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Moves the read index forward to <em>index</em> and returns TRUE if the -operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. Moving the +<p> Moves the read index forward to <em>index</em> and returns true if the +operation was successful; otherwise returns false. Moving the index forward means skipping incoming data. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqiodevice.html#at-2">TQIODevice</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQSocket::atEnd () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns false. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqiodevice.html#atEnd">TQIODevice</a>. <h3 class=fn>TQ_ULONG <a name="bytesAvailable"></a>TQSocket::bytesAvailable () const @@ -222,10 +222,10 @@ indicates how many buffered bytes there are left to write. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canReadLine"></a>TQSocket::canReadLine () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from -this socket at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from +this socket at this time; otherwise returns false. <p> Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this -function returns FALSE. This means that loops such as this won't +function returns false. This means that loops such as this won't work: <p> <pre> while( !socket->canReadLine() ) // WRONG @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Returns the size of the read buffer. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="readLine"></a>TQSocket::readLine ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character -(\n). Returns "" if <a href="#canReadLine">canReadLine</a>() returns FALSE. +(\n). Returns "" if <a href="#canReadLine">canReadLine</a>() returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canReadLine">canReadLine</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="clientserver-example.html#x802">network/clientserver/client/client.cpp</a>, <a href="httpd-example.html#x730">network/httpd/httpd.cpp</a>, <a href="mail-example.html#x713">network/mail/smtp.cpp</a>, and <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x686">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. @@ -468,9 +468,9 @@ Wait up to <em>msecs</em> milliseconds for more data to be available. <p> If <em>msecs</em> is -1 the call will block indefinitely. <p> Returns the number of bytes available. <p> If <em>timeout</em> is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not -return -1): this function sets <em>*timeout</em> to TRUE, if the reason +return -1): this function sets <em>*timeout</em> to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets -<em>*timeout</em> to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer +<em>*timeout</em> to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event driven applications. diff --git a/doc/html/tqsocketdevice.html b/doc/html/tqsocketdevice.html index 95cc06b50..46d9f4f22 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsocketdevice.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsocketdevice.html @@ -193,8 +193,8 @@ value is available. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="addressReusable"></a>TQSocketDevice::addressReusable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the address of this socket can be used by other -sockets at the same time, and FALSE if this socket claims +Returns true if the address of this socket can be used by other +sockets at the same time, and false if this socket claims exclusive ownership. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setAddressReusable">setAddressReusable</a>(). @@ -202,17 +202,17 @@ exclusive ownership. </h3> Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address <em>address</em> and the port number <em>port</em>. If the operation succeeds, -<a href="#bind">bind</a>() returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE without changing +<a href="#bind">bind</a>() returns true; otherwise it returns false without changing what <a href="#port">port</a>() and <a href="#address">address</a>() return. <p> bind() is used by servers for setting up incoming connections. Call bind() before <a href="#listen">listen</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="blocking"></a>TQSocketDevice::blocking () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; +otherwise returns false. <p> Note that this function does not set <a href="#error">error</a>(). -<p> <b>Warning:</b> On Windows, this function always returns TRUE since the +<p> <b>Warning:</b> On Windows, this function always returns true since the ioctlsocket() function is broken. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setBlocking">setBlocking</a>() and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). @@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ workarounds to deal with this problem. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="connect"></a>TQSocketDevice::connect ( const <a href="tqhostaddress.html">TQHostAddress</a> & addr, TQ_UINT16 port )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Connects to the IP address and port specified by <em>addr</em> and <em>port</em>. Returns TRUE if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns FALSE. -If it returns FALSE, <a href="#error">error</a>() explains why. +Connects to the IP address and port specified by <em>addr</em> and <em>port</em>. Returns true if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns false. +If it returns false, <a href="#error">error</a>() explains why. <p> Note that error() commonly returns NoError for non-blocking sockets; this just means that you can call <a href="#connect">connect</a>() again in a little while and it'll probably succeed. @@ -241,14 +241,14 @@ Returns the first error seen. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQSocketDevice::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#socket">socket</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="listen"></a>TQSocketDevice::listen ( int backlog )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have. -Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns -FALSE. A <em>backlog</em> value of 50 is quite common. +Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns +false. A <em>backlog</em> value of 50 is quite common. <p> The <a href="#listen">listen</a>() call only applies to sockets where <a href="#type">type</a>() is <a href="#Type-enum">Stream</a>, i.e. not to <a href="#Type-enum">Datagram</a> sockets. listen() must not be called before <a href="#bind">bind</a>() or after <a href="#accept">accept</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#bind">bind</a>() and <a href="#accept">accept</a>(). @@ -310,8 +310,8 @@ Returns the size of the operating system send buffer. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAddressReusable"></a>TQSocketDevice::setAddressReusable ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too -if <em>enable</em> is TRUE, and to be used exclusively by this socket if -<em>enable</em> is FALSE. +if <em>enable</em> is true, and to be used exclusively by this socket if +<em>enable</em> is false. <p> When a socket is reusable, other sockets can use the same port number (and IP address), which is generally useful. Of course other sockets cannot use the same @@ -321,8 +321,8 @@ there is no risk of confusing the two TCP connections. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBlocking"></a>TQSocketDevice::setBlocking ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Makes the socket blocking if <em>enable</em> is TRUE or nonblocking if -<em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Makes the socket blocking if <em>enable</em> is true or nonblocking if +<em>enable</em> is false. <p> Sockets are blocking by default, but we recommend using nonblocking socket operations, especially for GUI programs that need to be responsive. @@ -382,9 +382,9 @@ Wait up to <em>msecs</em> milliseconds for more data to be available. If <p> Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an error occurred. <p> If <em>timeout</em> is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not -return -1): this function sets <em>*timeout</em> to TRUE, if the reason +return -1): this function sets <em>*timeout</em> to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets -<em>*timeout</em> to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer +<em>*timeout</em> to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event driven applications. diff --git a/doc/html/tqsocketnotifier.html b/doc/html/tqsocketnotifier.html index 2db360748..b4be148d9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsocketnotifier.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsocketnotifier.html @@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ exception event). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQSocketNotifier::isEnabled () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQSocketNotifier::setEnabled ( bool enable )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Enables the notifier if <em>enable</em> is TRUE or disables it if <em>enable</em> is FALSE. +Enables the notifier if <em>enable</em> is true or disables it if <em>enable</em> is false. <p> The notifier is enabled by default. <p> If the notifier is enabled, it emits the <a href="#activated">activated</a>() signal whenever a socket event corresponding to its <a href="#type">type</a> occurs. If it is disabled, it ignores socket events diff --git a/doc/html/tqsound.html b/doc/html/tqsound.html index e876b1c52..58cf733ae 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsound.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsound.html @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Destroys the sound object. If the sound is not finished playing <a href="#stop"> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="available"></a>TQSound::available ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if sound support is available; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if sound support is available; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="fileName"></a>TQSound::fileName () const </h3> @@ -116,8 +116,8 @@ Returns the filename associated with the sound. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAvailable"></a>TQSound::isAvailable ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise -returns FALSE. An application may choose either to notify the user +Returns true if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise +returns false. An application may choose either to notify the user if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently without bothering the user. <p> If no sound is available, all TQSound operations work silently and @@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ quickly. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFinished"></a>TQSound::isFinished () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> <b>Warning:</b> On Windows this function always returns TRUE for unlooped sounds. +Returns true if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns false. +<p> <b>Warning:</b> On Windows this function always returns true for unlooped sounds. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="loops"></a>TQSound::loops () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqspaceritem.html b/doc/html/tqspaceritem.html index b8b790e85..36db4e77a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqspaceritem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqspaceritem.html @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Returns the direction in which this spacer item will expand. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#expanding">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQSpacerItem::isEmpty () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE because a spacer item never contains widgets. +Returns true because a spacer item never contains widgets. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#isEmpty">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> <a name="maximumSize"></a>TQSpacerItem::maximumSize () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqspinbox.html b/doc/html/tqspinbox.html index 8e17308be..30bba2778 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqspinbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqspinbox.html @@ -261,8 +261,8 @@ This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is available as <a href="#text">text</a>() and as <a href="#cleanText">cleanText</a>(), and this function must parse it if possible. If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if it parses the text -successfully, <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE. +successfully, <em>*ok</em> is set to true; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to +false. <p> Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function. <p> Note that TQt handles <a href="#specialValueText">specialValueText</a>() separately; this function @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ See the <a href="tqspinbox.html#specialValueText-prop">"specialValueText"</a> pr <h3 class=fn>void <a name="stepDown"></a>TQSpinBox::stepDown ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Decreases the spin box's value one <a href="#lineStep">lineStep</a>(), wrapping as -necessary if <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on +necessary if <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is true. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example. <p> <p>See also <a href="#stepUp">stepUp</a>(), <a href="tqrangecontrol.html#subtractLine">subtractLine</a>(), <a href="#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, <a href="tqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="#value-prop">value</a>, and <a href="#value-prop">value</a>. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ accelerators, for example. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="stepUp"></a>TQSpinBox::stepUp ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Increases the spin box's value by one <a href="#lineStep">lineStep</a>(), wrapping as -necessary if <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on +necessary if <a href="#wrapping">wrapping</a>() is true. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example. <p> <p>See also <a href="#stepDown">stepDown</a>(), <a href="tqrangecontrol.html#addLine">addLine</a>(), <a href="#lineStep-prop">lineStep</a>, <a href="tqrangecontrol.html#setSteps">setSteps</a>(), <a href="#value-prop">value</a>, and <a href="#value-prop">value</a>. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ the edit field of the spin box. <p> <p>See also <a href="#value-prop">value</a>, <a href="#prefix-prop">prefix</a>, <a href="#suffix-prop">suffix</a>, and <a href="#specialValueText-prop">specialValueText</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wrapping"></a>TQSpinBox::wrapping () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqspinbox.html#wrapping-prop">"wrapping"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn><a href="tqspinbox.html#ButtonSymbols-enum">ButtonSymbols</a> <a name="buttonSymbols-prop"></a>buttonSymbols</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsplitter-h.html b/doc/html/tqsplitter-h.html index 61e4ba788..3c7d4d689 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsplitter-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsplitter-h.html @@ -114,13 +114,13 @@ public: void setCollapsible( TQWidget *w, bool ); virtual void setResizeMode( TQWidget *w, ResizeMode ); - virtual void setOpaqueResize( bool = TRUE ); + virtual void setOpaqueResize( bool = true ); bool opaqueResize() const; void moveToFirst( TQWidget * ); void moveToLast( TQWidget * ); - void refresh() { recalc( TRUE ); } + void refresh() { recalc( true ); } TQSize sizeHint() const; TQSize minimumSizeHint() const; @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ private: enum { DefaultResizeMode = 3 }; void init(); - void recalc( bool update = FALSE ); + void recalc( bool update = false ); void doResize(); void storeSizes(); void getRange( int id, int *, int *, int *, int * ); @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ private: bool collapsible( TQSplitterLayoutStruct * ); void processChildEvents(); TQSplitterLayoutStruct *findWidget( TQWidget * ); - TQSplitterLayoutStruct *addWidget( TQWidget *, bool prepend = FALSE ); + TQSplitterLayoutStruct *addWidget( TQWidget *, bool prepend = false ); void recalcId(); void doMove( bool backwards, int pos, int id, int delta, bool upLeft, bool mayCollapse ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsplitter.html b/doc/html/tqsplitter.html index 10999dd8e..916239469 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsplitter.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsplitter.html @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#childrenCollapsible"><b>childrenCollapsible</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setCollapsible"><b>setCollapsible</b></a> ( TQWidget * w, bool collapse )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setResizeMode"><b>setResizeMode</b></a> ( TQWidget * w, ResizeMode mode )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setOpaqueResize"><b>setOpaqueResize</b></a> ( bool = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setOpaqueResize"><b>setOpaqueResize</b></a> ( bool = true )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#opaqueResize"><b>opaqueResize</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#moveToFirst"><b>moveToFirst</b></a> ( TQWidget * w )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#moveToLast"><b>moveToLast</b></a> ( TQWidget * w )</li> @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ and <a href="tqwidget.html#maximumSize">maximumSize</a>() of the widgets. Use <a specify that a widget should keep its size when the splitter is resized, or set the stretch component of the <a href="tqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">sizePolicy</a>. <p> Although TQSplitter normally resizes the children only at the end -of a resize operation, if you call <a href="#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>(TRUE) the +of a resize operation, if you call <a href="#setOpaqueResize">setOpaqueResize</a>(true) the widgets are resized as often as possible. <p> The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined by the initial size of each widget. You can also use <a href="#setSizes">setSizes</a>() to @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ been inserted or removed. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqobject.html#childEvent">TQObject</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="childrenCollapsible"></a>TQSplitter::childrenCollapsible () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqsplitter.html#childrenCollapsible-prop">"childrenCollapsible"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="drawSplitter"></a>TQSplitter::drawSplitter ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Moves widget <em>w</em> to the leftmost/top position. Moves widget <em>w</em> to the rightmost/bottom position. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="opaqueResize"></a>TQSplitter::opaqueResize () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop">"opaqueResize"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQSplitter::orientation () const </h3><p>Returns the orientation of the splitter. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ all the widgets in the splitter by setting the <a href="#childrenCollapsible-pro <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setHandleWidth"></a>TQSplitter::setHandleWidth ( int ) </h3><p>Sets the width of the splitter handle. See the <a href="tqsplitter.html#handleWidth-prop">"handleWidth"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOpaqueResize"></a>TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOpaqueResize"></a>TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets whether resizing is opaque. See the <a href="tqsplitter.html#opaqueResize-prop">"opaqueResize"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setOrientation"></a>TQSplitter::setOrientation ( <a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> )<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlcursor-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlcursor-h.html index 0168d1c3e..90467b939 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlcursor-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlcursor-h.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ class TQSqlCursorPrivate; class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQSqlCursor : public TQSqlRecord, public TQSqlQuery { public: - TQSqlCursor( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase* db = 0 ); + TQSqlCursor( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, TQSqlDatabase* db = 0 ); TQSqlCursor( const TQSqlCursor & other ); TQSqlCursor& operator=( const TQSqlCursor& other ); ~TQSqlCursor(); @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ public: TQVariant value( const TQString& name ) const; void setValue( int i, const TQVariant& val ); void setValue( const TQString& name, const TQVariant& val ); - virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool prime = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool prime = true ) const; virtual TQSqlIndex index( const TQStringList& fieldNames ) const; TQSqlIndex index( const TQString& fieldName ) const; TQSqlIndex index( const char* fieldName ) const; @@ -126,13 +126,13 @@ public: void setGenerated( const TQString& name, bool generated ); void setGenerated( int i, bool generated ); - virtual TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool copy = FALSE ); + virtual TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool copy = false ); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeInsert(); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeUpdate(); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeDelete(); - virtual int insert( bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int update( bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int del( bool invalidate = TRUE ); + virtual int insert( bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int update( bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int del( bool invalidate = true ); virtual void setMode( int flags ); int mode() const; @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ public: TQSqlIndex sort() const; virtual void setFilter( const TQString& filter ); TQString filter() const; - virtual void setName( const TQString& name, bool autopopulate = TRUE ); + virtual void setName( const TQString& name, bool autopopulate = true ); TQString name() const; TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = "," ) const; @@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ protected: bool exec( const TQString & sql ); virtual TQVariant calculateField( const TQString& name ); - virtual int update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int del( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ); + virtual int update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int del( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true ); virtual TQString toString( const TQString& prefix, TQSqlField* field, const TQString& fieldSep ) const; virtual TQString toString( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& fieldSep, diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlcursor.html b/doc/html/tqsqlcursor.html index f88598a43..45c6f3674 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlcursor.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlcursor.html @@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ tables and views. <p><a href="tqsqlcursor-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlCursor"><b>TQSqlCursor</b></a> ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlCursor"><b>TQSqlCursor</b></a> ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlCursor-2"><b>TQSqlCursor</b></a> ( const TQSqlCursor & other )</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlCursor & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQSqlCursor & other )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQSqlCursor"><b>~TQSqlCursor</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Mode-enum"><b>Mode</b></a> { ReadOnly = 0, Insert = 1, Update = 2, Delete = 4, Writable = 7 }</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQSqlIndex <a href="#primaryIndex"><b>primaryIndex</b></a> ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQSqlIndex <a href="#primaryIndex"><b>primaryIndex</b></a> ( bool setFromCursor = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlIndex <a href="#index"><b>index</b></a> ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlIndex <a href="#index-2"><b>index</b></a> ( const TQString & fieldName ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlIndex <a href="#index-3"><b>index</b></a> ( const char * fieldName ) const</li> @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ tables and views. <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setGenerated"><b>setGenerated</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool generated )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setGenerated-2"><b>setGenerated</b></a> ( int i, bool generated )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecord * <a href="#editBuffer"><b>editBuffer</b></a> ( bool copy = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecord * <a href="#editBuffer"><b>editBuffer</b></a> ( bool copy = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecord * <a href="#primeInsert"><b>primeInsert</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecord * <a href="#primeUpdate"><b>primeUpdate</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecord * <a href="#primeDelete"><b>primeDelete</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#insert-2"><b>insert</b></a> ( bool invalidate = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#update"><b>update</b></a> ( bool invalidate = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#del"><b>del</b></a> ( bool invalidate = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#insert-2"><b>insert</b></a> ( bool invalidate = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#update"><b>update</b></a> ( bool invalidate = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#del"><b>del</b></a> ( bool invalidate = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setMode"><b>setMode</b></a> ( int mode )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#mode"><b>mode</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCalculated"><b>setCalculated</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool calculated )</li> @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ tables and views. <li class=fn>TQSqlIndex <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setFilter"><b>setFilter</b></a> ( const TQString & filter )</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#filter"><b>filter</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setName"><b>setName</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setName"><b>setName</b></a> ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#name"><b>name</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isNull"><b>isNull</b></a> ( int i ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isNull-2"><b>isNull</b></a> ( const TQString & name ) const</li> @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ tables and views. <h2>Protected Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn>virtual TQVariant <a href="#calculateField"><b>calculateField</b></a> ( const TQString & name )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#update-2"><b>update</b></a> ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#del-2"><b>del</b></a> ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#update-2"><b>update</b></a> ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#del-2"><b>del</b></a> ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString-3"><b>toString</b></a> ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString"><b>toString</b></a> ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString-4"><b>toString</b></a> ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const</li> @@ -112,13 +112,13 @@ buffer is separate, and is used for editing existing records and inserting new records. <p> For browsing data, a cursor must first <a href="#select">select</a>() data from the database. After a successful select() the cursor is active -(<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isActive">isActive</a>() returns TRUE), but is initially not positioned on a -valid record (<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isValid">isValid</a>() returns FALSE). To position the cursor on +(<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isActive">isActive</a>() returns true), but is initially not positioned on a +valid record (<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isValid">isValid</a>() returns false). To position the cursor on a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, <a href="tqsqlquery.html#next">next</a>(), <a href="tqsqlquery.html#prev">prev</a>(), <a href="tqsqlquery.html#first">first</a>(), <a href="tqsqlquery.html#last">last</a>(), or <a href="tqsqlquery.html#seek">seek</a>(). Once positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using <a href="tqsqlquery.html#value">value</a>(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns -FALSE, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record +false, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and the values returned by value() are undefined. <p> For example: <p> @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ and the values returned by value() are undefined. view name in the database. Then, <a href="#select">select</a>() is called, which can be optionally parameterised to filter and order the records retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using <a href="tqsqlquery.html#next">next</a>(). -When next() returns FALSE, there are no more records to process, +When next() returns false, there are no more records to process, and the loop terminates. <p> For editing records (rows of data), a cursor contains a separate edit buffer which is independent of the fields used when browsing. @@ -179,10 +179,10 @@ the edit buffer. Use this pointer to populate the edit buffer with new values and then <a href="#insert">insert</a>() the record into the database. <p> After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated -(<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isValid">isValid</a>() return FALSE). The reason for this is that any changes +(<a href="tqsqlquery.html#isValid">isValid</a>() return false). The reason for this is that any changes made to the database will not be visible until <a href="#select">select</a>() is called to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing -FALSE to insert(), <a href="#update">update</a>() or del() which will prevent the cursor +false to insert(), <a href="#update">update</a>() or del() which will prevent the cursor from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when navigating the cursor until select() is called. <p> TQSqlCursor contains virtual methods which allow editing behavior @@ -219,10 +219,10 @@ database. in the database. </ul> <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlCursor"></a>TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> * db = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlCursor"></a>TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, <a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> * db = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a cursor on database <em>db</em> using table or view <em>name</em>. -<p> If <em>autopopulate</em> is TRUE (the default), the <em>name</em> of the +<p> If <em>autopopulate</em> is true (the default), the <em>name</em> of the cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the database so that field information can be automatically created. If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be @@ -262,20 +262,20 @@ invalid <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a>. <p>Examples: <a href="sql.html#x2259">sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp</a> and <a href="sql.html#x2263">sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDelete"></a>TQSqlCursor::canDelete () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canInsert"></a>TQSqlCursor::canInsert () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canUpdate"></a>TQSqlCursor::canUpdate () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQSqlCursor::clear ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Removes all fields from the cursor. Note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#clear">TQSqlRecord</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="del"></a>TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="del"></a>TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Deletes a record from the database using the cursor's primary index and the contents of the cursor edit buffer. Returns the @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ number of records which were deleted. For error information, use <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p> Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain -a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If <em>invalidate</em> is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer +a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If <em>invalidate</em> is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new <a href="#select">select</a>() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example: <p> @@ -314,21 +314,21 @@ cursor edit buffer and not on the contents of the cursor itself. <p> <p>See also <a href="#primeDelete">primeDelete</a>(), <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(), and <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="sql.html#x2205">sql/overview/delete/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="del-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::del ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="del-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::del ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter, bool invalidate = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the filter <em>filter</em>. Only records which meet the filter criteria are -deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If <em>invalidate</em> is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer +deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If <em>invalidate</em> is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new <a href="#select">select</a>() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For error information, use <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p> The <em>filter</em> is an SQL <tt>WHERE</tt> clause, e.g. <tt>id=500</tt>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>() and <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * <a name="editBuffer"></a>TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> * <a name="editBuffer"></a>TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns the current internal edit buffer. If <em>copy</em> is TRUE (the -default is FALSE), the current cursor field values are first +Returns the current internal edit buffer. If <em>copy</em> is true (the +default is false), the current cursor field values are first copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. @@ -364,14 +364,14 @@ already exists at <em>pos</em>, it is removed. Note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated. <p>Examples: <a href="sql.html#x2194">sql/overview/insert/main.cpp</a> and <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#x2446">sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="insert-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="insert-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Inserts the current contents of the cursor's edit record buffer into the database, if the cursor allows inserts. Returns the number of rows affected by the insert. For error information, use <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). -<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is TRUE (the default), the cursor will no longer +<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is true (the default), the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A new <a href="#select">select</a>() call must be made before navigating to a valid record. @@ -395,34 +395,34 @@ cursor itself. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCalculated"></a>TQSqlCursor::isCalculated ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field <em>name</em> exists and is calculated; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field <em>name</em> exists and is calculated; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSqlCursor::isNull ( int i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field <em>i</em> is NULL or if there is no field at -position <em>i</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field <em>i</em> is NULL or if there is no field at +position <em>i</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> This is the same as calling <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isNull">TQSqlRecord::isNull</a>( <em>i</em> ) <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::isNull ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the field called <em>name</em> is NULL or if there is no -field called <em>name</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the field called <em>name</em> is NULL or if there is no +field called <em>name</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> This is the same as calling <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isNull">TQSqlRecord::isNull</a>( <em>name</em> ) <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQSqlCursor::isReadOnly () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. -The default is FALSE. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using +Returns true if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns false. +The default is false. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using <a href="#insert">insert</a>(), <a href="#update">update</a>() or <a href="#del">del</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTrimmed"></a>TQSqlCursor::isTrimmed ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field <em>name</em> exists and is trimmed; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field <em>name</em> exists and is trimmed; otherwise +returns false. <p> When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTrimmed">setTrimmed</a>(). @@ -440,11 +440,11 @@ Returns the name of the cursor. </h3> Sets the cursor equal to <em>other</em>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlindex.html">TQSqlIndex</a> <a name="primaryIndex"></a>TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlindex.html">TQSqlIndex</a> <a name="primaryIndex"></a>TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If -<em>setFromCursor</em> is TRUE (the default), the index fields are +<em>setFromCursor</em> is true (the default), the index fields are populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current record. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ This function primes the edit buffer's field values for delete and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling <a href="#editBuffer">editBuffer</a>( -TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so +true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. <p> <p>See also <a href="#editBuffer">editBuffer</a>() and <a href="#del">del</a>(). @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ This function primes the edit buffer's field values for update and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling <a href="#editBuffer">editBuffer</a>( -TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so +true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. <p> <p>See also <a href="#editBuffer">editBuffer</a>() and <a href="#update">update</a>(). @@ -490,8 +490,8 @@ invalidated. </h3> Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the filter criteria <em>filter</em>. The data is returned in the order -specified by the index <em>sort</em>. Returns TRUE if the data was -successfully selected; otherwise returns FALSE. +specified by the index <em>sort</em>. Returns true if the data was +successfully selected; otherwise returns false. <p> The <em>filter</em> is a string containing a SQL <tt>WHERE</tt> clause but without the 'WHERE' keyword. The cursor is initially positioned at an invalid row after this function is called. To move to a valid @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ e.g. <tt>name='Dave'</tt> which will be processed by the DBMS. </h3> Sets the generated flag for the field <em>name</em> to <em>generated</em>. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have -<em>generated</em> set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is +<em>generated</em> set to true are included in the SQL that is generated by <a href="#insert">insert</a>(), <a href="#update">update</a>() or <a href="#del">del</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>(). @@ -629,9 +629,9 @@ cursor is <a href="#Mode-enum">TQSqlCursor::Writable</a>. </pre> -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setName"></a>TQSqlCursor::setName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setName"></a>TQSqlCursor::setName ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, bool autopopulate = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sets the name of the cursor to <em>name</em>. If <em>autopopulate</em> is TRUE +Sets the name of the cursor to <em>name</em>. If <em>autopopulate</em> is true (the default), the <em>name</em> must correspond to a valid table or view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Each field is composed of the <em>prefix</em> (e.g. table or view name), ".", the field name, the <em>fieldSep</em> and the field value. If the <em>prefix</em> is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The fields are then joined together separated by <em>sep</em>. Fields -where <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>() returns FALSE are not included. This function +where <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>() returns false are not included. This function is useful for generating SQL statements. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toString-3"></a>TQSqlCursor::toString ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & prefix, <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> * field, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & fieldSep ) const<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -692,10 +692,10 @@ name), ".", the field name, the <em>fieldSep</em> and the field value. If the <em>prefix</em> is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The field values are taken from <em>rec</em>. The fields are then joined together separated by <em>sep</em>. Fields where <a href="tqsqlrecord.html#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>() -returns FALSE are ignored. This function is useful for generating +returns false are ignored. This function is useful for generating SQL statements. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="update"></a>TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="update"></a>TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Updates the database with the current contents of the edit buffer. Returns the number of records which were updated. @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ For error information, use <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p> Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are updated. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no update is performed and 0 is returned. -<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no +<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new <a href="#select">select</a>() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example: <p> @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ records the database may be changed into an inconsistent state. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>() and <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="sql.html#x2201">sql/overview/update/main.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="update-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::update ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="update-2"></a>TQSqlCursor::update ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filter, bool invalidate = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Updates the database with the current contents of the cursor edit @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ records which were updated. For error information, use <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). <p> Only records which meet the filter criteria are updated, otherwise all records in the table are updated. -<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is TRUE (the default), the cursor can no longer +<p> If <em>invalidate</em> is true (the default), the cursor can no longer be navigated. A new <a href="#select">select</a>() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. <p> <p>See also <a href="#primeUpdate">primeUpdate</a>(), <a href="#setMode">setMode</a>(), and <a href="tqsqlquery.html#lastError">lastError</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqldatabase-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqldatabase-h.html index 1ddb5c143..16d61db87 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqldatabase-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqldatabase-h.html @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ public: static TQSqlDatabase* addDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); static TQSqlDatabase* addDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); - static TQSqlDatabase* database( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE ); + static TQSqlDatabase* database( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true ); static void removeDatabase( const TQString& connectionName ); static void removeDatabase( TQSqlDatabase* db ); static bool contains( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqldatabase.html b/doc/html/tqsqldatabase.html index 57528aec3..9c8d96172 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqldatabase.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqldatabase.html @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ connections and to provide transaction handling. <ul> <li class=fn>TQSqlDatabase * <a href="#addDatabase"><b>addDatabase</b></a> ( const TQString & type, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlDatabase * <a href="#addDatabase-2"><b>addDatabase</b></a> ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )</li> -<li class=fn>TQSqlDatabase * <a href="#database"><b>database</b></a> ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQSqlDatabase * <a href="#database"><b>database</b></a> ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#removeDatabase"><b>removeDatabase</b></a> ( const TQString & connectionName )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#removeDatabase-2"><b>removeDatabase</b></a> ( TQSqlDatabase * db )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )</li> @@ -276,8 +276,8 @@ Closes the database connection, freeing any resources acquired. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="commit"></a>TQSqlDatabase::commit () </h3> Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports -transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise -returns FALSE. +transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>() and <a href="#rollback">rollback</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="connectOptions"></a>TQSqlDatabase::connectOptions () const @@ -285,13 +285,13 @@ returns FALSE. See the <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#connectOptions-prop">"connectOptions"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQSqlDatabase::contains ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & connectionName = defaultConnection )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains <em>connectionName</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the list of database connections contains <em>connectionName</em>; otherwise returns false. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> * <a name="database"></a>TQSqlDatabase::database ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqldatabase.html">TQSqlDatabase</a> * <a name="database"></a>TQSqlDatabase::database ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Returns the database connection called <em>connectionName</em>. The database connection must have been previously added with -<a href="#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>(). If <em>open</em> is TRUE (the default) and the database +<a href="#addDatabase">addDatabase</a>(). If <em>open</em> is true (the default) and the database connection is not already open it is opened now. If no <em>connectionName</em> is specified the default connection is used. If <em>connectionName</em> does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is returned. The pointer returned is owned by TQSqlDatabase and should <em>not</em> be deleted. @@ -340,19 +340,19 @@ is not affected. See the <a href="tqsqldatabase.html#hostName-prop">"hostName"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDriverAvailable"></a>TQSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if a driver called <em>name</em> is available; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if a driver called <em>name</em> is available; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#drivers">drivers</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQSqlDatabase::isOpen () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the database connection is currently open; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the database connection is currently open; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpenError"></a>TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there was an error opening the database -connection; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be +Returns true if there was an error opening the database +connection; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the <a href="#lastError">lastError</a>() function. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlerror.html">TQSqlError</a> <a name="lastError"></a>TQSqlDatabase::lastError () const @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ database. See <a href="tqsqlerror.html">TQSqlError</a> for more information. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="open"></a>TQSqlDatabase::open () </h3> Opens the database connection using the current connection values. -Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error +Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the <a href="#lastError">lastError</a>() function. <p> <p>See also <a href="#lastError">lastError</a>(). @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ information can be retrieved using the <a href="#lastError">lastError</a>() func <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="open-2"></a>TQSqlDatabase::open ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & user, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & password ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Opens the database connection using the given <em>user</em> name and <em>password</em>. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error +<p> Opens the database connection using the given <em>user</em> name and <em>password</em>. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the <a href="#lastError">lastError</a>() function. <p> This function does not store the password it is given. Instead, the password is passed directly to the driver for opening a @@ -459,8 +459,8 @@ will occur. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rollback"></a>TQSqlDatabase::rollback () </h3> Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports -transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise -returns FALSE. +transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>(), <a href="#commit">commit</a>(), and <a href="#transaction">transaction</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setConnectOptions"></a>TQSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & options = TQString::null ) @@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ over a copy, e.g. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="transaction"></a>TQSqlDatabase::transaction () </h3> Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports -transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise -returns FALSE. +transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>(), <a href="#commit">commit</a>(), and <a href="#rollback">rollback</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="userName"></a>TQSqlDatabase::userName () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqldriver-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqldriver-h.html index 0ac5e85b2..a7d59dca3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqldriver-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqldriver-h.html @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ public: virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo( const TQString& tablename ) const; virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo( const TQSqlQuery& query ) const; virtual TQString nullText() const; - virtual TQString formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const; + virtual TQString formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings = false ) const; TQSqlError lastError() const; virtual bool hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const = 0; diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqldriver.html b/doc/html/tqsqldriver.html index 3b5103805..0797e6ac2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqldriver.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqldriver.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ SQL databases. <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecordInfo <a href="#recordInfo"><b>recordInfo</b></a> ( const TQString & tablename ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSqlRecordInfo <a href="#recordInfo-2"><b>recordInfo</b></a> ( const TQSqlQuery & query ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#nullText"><b>nullText</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#formatValue"><b>formatValue</b></a> ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#formatValue"><b>formatValue</b></a> ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlError <a href="#lastError"><b>lastError</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#hasFeature"><b>hasFeature</b></a> ( DriverFeature f ) const = 0</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#open"><b>open</b></a> ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 ) = 0</li> @@ -111,24 +111,24 @@ Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="beginTransaction"></a>TQSqlDriver::beginTransaction ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin -a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. -The default implementation returns FALSE. +a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. +The default implementation returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#commitTransaction">commitTransaction</a>() and <a href="#rollbackTransaction">rollbackTransaction</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="close"></a>TQSqlDriver::close ()<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> <p> Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in -order to close the database connection. Return TRUE on success, -FALSE on failure. +order to close the database connection. Return true on success, +false on failure. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(). <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="commitTransaction"></a>TQSqlDriver::commitTransaction ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit -a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. -The default implementation returns FALSE. +a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. +The default implementation returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#beginTransaction">beginTransaction</a>() and <a href="#rollbackTransaction">rollbackTransaction</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> <a name="createQuery"></a>TQSqlDriver::createQuery () const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ The default implementation returns FALSE. reimplement this function and return a <a href="tqsqlquery.html">TQSqlQuery</a> object appropriate for their database to the caller. <p> -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="formatValue"></a>TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="formatValue"></a>TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> * field, bool trimStrings = false ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Returns a string representation of the <em>field</em> value for the database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ according to the following rules: in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped (replaced with two single-quote characters). If <em>trimStrings</em> is -TRUE (the default is FALSE), all trailing whitespace is trimmed +true (the default is false), all trailing whitespace is trimmed from the field. <p> <li> If <em>field</em> is date/time data, the value is formatted in ISO format and enclosed in single quotation marks. If the date/time @@ -167,21 +167,21 @@ and the result returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasFeature"></a>TQSqlDriver::hasFeature ( <a href="tqsqldriver.html#DriverFeature-enum">DriverFeature</a> f ) const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the driver supports feature <em>f</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the driver supports feature <em>f</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> Note that some databases need to be <a href="#open">open</a>() before this can be determined. <p> <p>See also <a href="#DriverFeature-enum">DriverFeature</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpen"></a>TQSqlDriver::isOpen () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the database connection is open; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the database connection is open; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOpenError"></a>TQSqlDriver::isOpenError () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the there was an error opening the database -connection; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the there was an error opening the database +connection; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlerror.html">TQSqlError</a> <a name="lastError"></a>TQSqlDriver::lastError () const </h3> @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ UPDATE statements. The default implementation returns the string <p> Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in order to open a database connection on database <em>db</em>, using user name <em>user</em>, password <em>password</em>, host <em>host</em> and port <em>port</em>. -<p> The function <em>must</em> return TRUE on success and FALSE on failure. +<p> The function <em>must</em> return true on success and false on failure. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(). <p> @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ name <em>user</em>, password <em>password</em>, host <em>host</em> and port <em> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Open a database connection on database <em>db</em>, using user name <em>user</em>, password <em>password</em>, host <em>host</em>, port <em>port</em> and connection options <em>connOpts</em>. -<p> Returns TRUE on success and FALSE on failure. +<p> Returns true on success and false on failure. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOpen">setOpen</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlindex.html">TQSqlIndex</a> <a name="primaryIndex"></a>TQSqlDriver::primaryIndex ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & tableName ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -246,8 +246,8 @@ a table as parameter. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rollbackTransaction"></a>TQSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to -rollback a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise -return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE. +rollback a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise +return false. The default implementation returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#beginTransaction">beginTransaction</a>() and <a href="#commitTransaction">commitTransaction</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setLastError"></a>TQSqlDriver::setLastError ( const <a href="tqsqlerror.html">TQSqlError</a> & e )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -266,8 +266,8 @@ Protected function which sets the open state of the database to <em>o</em>. Deri </h3> Protected function which sets the open error state of the database to <em>e</em>. Derived classes can use this function to report the -status of <a href="#open">open</a>(). Note that if <em>e</em> is TRUE the open state of the -database is set to closed (i.e. <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns FALSE). +status of <a href="#open">open</a>(). Note that if <em>e</em> is true the open state of the +database is set to closed (i.e. <a href="#isOpen">isOpen</a>() returns false). <p> <p>See also <a href="#open">open</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="tables"></a>TQSqlDriver::tables ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & tableType ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlfield-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlfield-h.html index b1f0ebebe..2cf90faa1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlfield-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlfield-h.html @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public: bool isNull() const; virtual void setReadOnly( bool readOnly ); bool isReadOnly() const; - void clear( bool nullify = TRUE ); + void clear( bool nullify = true ); TQVariant::Type type() const; private: @@ -154,11 +154,11 @@ public: int prec = -1, const TQVariant& defValue = TQVariant(), int sqlType = 0, - bool generated = TRUE, - bool trim = FALSE, - bool calculated = FALSE ); + bool generated = true, + bool trim = false, + bool calculated = false ); TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other ); - TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE ); + TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = true ); virtual ~TQSqlFieldInfo(); TQSqlFieldInfo& operator=( const TQSqlFieldInfo& other ); bool operator==( const TQSqlFieldInfo& f ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlfield.html b/doc/html/tqsqlfield.html index c3cbe797f..5ba4814b0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlfield.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlfield.html @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ and views. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isNull"><b>isNull</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setReadOnly"><b>setReadOnly</b></a> ( bool readOnly )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isReadOnly"><b>isReadOnly</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ( bool nullify = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ( bool nullify = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQVariant::Type <a href="#type"><b>type</b></a> () const</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -112,23 +112,23 @@ Constructs a copy of <em>other</em>. </h3> Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = true ) </h3> Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing -happens. If <em>nullify</em> is TRUE (the default), the field is set to +happens. If <em>nullify</em> is true (the default), the field is set to NULL. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSqlField::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQSqlField::isReadOnly () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="name"></a>TQSqlField::name () const </h3> @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ Sets the field equal to <em>other</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQSqlField::operator== ( const <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> & other ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field is equal to <em>other</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. Fields are considered equal when the following field +Returns true if the field is equal to <em>other</em>; otherwise returns +false. Fields are considered equal when the following field properties are the same: <p> <ul> <li> <a href="#name">name</a>() @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ field is read-only, nothing happens. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setValue"></a>TQSqlField::setValue ( const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & value )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the value of the field to <em>value</em>. If the field is read-only -(<a href="#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>() returns TRUE), nothing happens. If the data type of +(<a href="#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>() returns true), nothing happens. If the data type of <em>value</em> differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> to an diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlfieldinfo.html b/doc/html/tqsqlfieldinfo.html index 0dfd23a7c..7b18c75f1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlfieldinfo.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlfieldinfo.html @@ -36,9 +36,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqsqlfieldinfo-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlFieldInfo"><b>TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlFieldInfo"><b>TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = true, bool trim = false, bool calculated = false )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlFieldInfo-2"><b>TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlFieldInfo-3"><b>TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQSqlFieldInfo-3"><b>TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQSqlFieldInfo"><b>~TQSqlFieldInfo</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQSqlFieldInfo & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#operator-eq-eq"><b>operator==</b></a> ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & f ) const</li> @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ using <a href="#isRequired">isRequired</a>(), <a href="#type">type</a>(), <a hre <p>See also <a href="database.html">Database Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlFieldInfo"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name = TQString::null, <a href="tqvariant.html#Type-enum">TQVariant::Type</a> typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlFieldInfo"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name = TQString::null, <a href="tqvariant.html#Type-enum">TQVariant::Type</a> typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = true, bool trim = false, bool calculated = false ) </h3> Constructs a TQSqlFieldInfo with the following parameters: <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> @@ -91,12 +91,12 @@ the table if none is specified by the user. TQVariant() if there is no default value or it cannot be determined. <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>typeID</em> <td valign="top">the internal typeID of the database system (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown. -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>generated</em> <td valign="top">TRUE indicates that this field should be +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>generated</em> <td valign="top">true indicates that this field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>. -<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>trim</em> <td valign="top">TRUE indicates that widgets should remove +<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>trim</em> <td valign="top">true indicates that widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>calculated</em> <td valign="top">TRUE indicates that the value of this +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>calculated</em> <td valign="top">true indicates that the value of this field is calculated. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#calculateField">TQSqlCursor::calculateField</a>(). @@ -106,10 +106,10 @@ modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding </h3> Constructs a copy of <em>other</em>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlFieldInfo-3"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> & other, bool generated = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQSqlFieldInfo-3"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const <a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> & other, bool generated = true ) </h3> Creates a TQSqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the -<a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> <em>other</em>. If <em>generated</em> is TRUE this field will be +<a href="tqsqlfield.html">TQSqlField</a> <em>other</em>. If <em>generated</em> is true this field will be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQSqlFieldInfo"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::~TQSqlFieldInfo ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -125,13 +125,13 @@ is not explicitly specified by the user. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isCalculated"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::isCalculated () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field is calculated; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setCalculated">setCalculated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isGenerated"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::isGenerated () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field should be included in auto-generated -SQL statments, e.g. in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field should be included in auto-generated +SQL statments, e.g. in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setGenerated">setGenerated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="isRequired"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::isRequired () const @@ -143,8 +143,8 @@ field is required or not. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTrim"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::isTrim () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if trailing whitespace should be removed from -character fields; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if trailing whitespace should be removed from +character fields; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTrim">setTrim</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="length"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::length () const @@ -166,8 +166,8 @@ Assigns <em>other</em> to this field info and returns a reference to it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::operator== ( const <a href="tqsqlfieldinfo.html">TQSqlFieldInfo</a> & f ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this fieldinfo is equal to <em>f</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if this fieldinfo is equal to <em>f</em>; otherwise returns +false. <p> Two field infos are considered equal if all their attributes match. @@ -178,20 +178,20 @@ or it cannot be determined. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setCalculated"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::setCalculated ( bool calc )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -<em>calc</em> set to TRUE indicates that this field is a calculated +<em>calc</em> set to true indicates that this field is a calculated field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a> and overriding <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#calculateField">TQSqlCursor::calculateField</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#isCalculated">isCalculated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setGenerated"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::setGenerated ( bool gen )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -<em>gen</em> set to FALSE indicates that this field should not appear +<em>gen</em> set to false indicates that this field should not appear in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>). <p> <p>See also <a href="#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTrim"></a>TQSqlFieldInfo::setTrim ( bool trim )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>trim</em> is TRUE widgets should remove trailing whitespace from +If <em>trim</em> is true widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isTrim">isTrim</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlform-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlform-h.html index 5dcff7e10..98844e5fb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlform-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlform-h.html @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ public slots: virtual void writeFields(); virtual void clear(); - virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = FALSE ); + virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = false ); protected: virtual void insert( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlform.html b/doc/html/tqsqlform.html index b929442a9..4bd813af2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlform.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlform.html @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ tied to SQL databases. <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#readFields"><b>readFields</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#writeFields"><b>writeFields</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clearValues"><b>clearValues</b></a> ( bool nullify = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clearValues"><b>clearValues</b></a> ( bool nullify = false )</li> </ul> <h2>Protected Members</h2> <ul> @@ -136,11 +136,11 @@ Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. </h3> Removes every widget, and the fields they're mapped to, from the form. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValues"></a>TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValues"></a>TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = false )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are -mapped to, in the form. If <em>nullify</em> is TRUE (the default is -FALSE), each field is also set to NULL. +mapped to, in the form. If <em>nullify</em> is true (the default is +false), each field is also set to NULL. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQSqlForm::count () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlindex-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlindex-h.html index 208e2f105..745c82b51 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlindex-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlindex-h.html @@ -114,9 +114,9 @@ public: TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = ",", - bool verbose = TRUE ) const; + bool verbose = true ) const; TQStringList toStringList( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, - bool verbose = TRUE ) const; + bool verbose = true ) const; static TQSqlIndex fromStringList( const TQStringList& l, const TQSqlCursor* cursor ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlindex.html b/doc/html/tqsqlindex.html index 7a87661ec..a887c1cb2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlindex.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlindex.html @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ field is appended with an ascending sort order. This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Appends the field <em>field</em> to the list of indexed fields. The field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless <em>desc</em> is -TRUE. +true. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="cursorName"></a>TQSqlIndex::cursorName () const </h3> @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ in the people table might be in one of these forms: "surname", <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDescending"></a>TQSqlIndex::isDescending ( int i ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if field <em>i</em> in the index is sorted in descending -order; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if field <em>i</em> in the index is sorted in descending +order; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="name"></a>TQSqlIndex::name () const </h3> @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Sets the name of the cursor that the index is associated with to <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDescending"></a>TQSqlIndex::setDescending ( int i, bool desc )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>desc</em> is TRUE, field <em>i</em> is sorted in descending order. +If <em>desc</em> is true, field <em>i</em> is sorted in descending order. Otherwise, field <em>i</em> is sorted in ascending order (the default). If the field does not exist, nothing happens. diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlquery-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlquery-h.html index 89efeac4b..520984073 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlquery-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlquery-h.html @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ public: virtual bool exec ( const TQString& query ); virtual TQVariant value( int i ) const; - virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = FALSE ); + virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = false ); virtual bool next(); virtual bool prev(); virtual bool first(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlquery.html b/doc/html/tqsqlquery.html index ca4e3314f..fee5aa3b7 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlquery.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlquery.html @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ manipulating SQL statements. <li class=fn>void <a href="#setForwardOnly"><b>setForwardOnly</b></a> ( bool forward )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#exec"><b>exec</b></a> ( const TQString & query )</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQVariant <a href="#value"><b>value</b></a> ( int i ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#seek"><b>seek</b></a> ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#seek"><b>seek</b></a> ( int i, bool relative = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#next"><b>next</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#prev"><b>prev</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#first"><b>first</b></a> ()</li> @@ -98,11 +98,11 @@ statements, e.g. <tt>CREATE TABLE</tt>. It can also be used to execute database-specific commands which are not standard SQL (e.g. <tt>SET DATESTYLE=ISO</tt> for PostgreSQL). <p> Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to -active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns TRUE); otherwise the query's state is +active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns true); otherwise the query's state is set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active query must be navigated to a valid record (so that <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() -returns TRUE) before values can be retrieved. +returns true) before values can be retrieved. <p> Navigating records is performed with the following functions: <p> <ul> <li> <a href="#next">next</a>() @@ -343,9 +343,9 @@ Returns the database driver associated with the query. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exec"></a>TQSqlQuery::exec ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & query )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Executes the SQL in <em>query</em>. Returns TRUE and sets the query +Executes the SQL in <em>query</em>. Returns true and sets the query state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns -FALSE and sets the query state to inactive. The <em>query</em> string +false and sets the query state to inactive. The <em>query</em> string must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried, for example, standard SQL. <p> After the query is executed, the query is positioned on an <em>invalid</em> record, and must be navigated to a valid record before @@ -358,8 +358,8 @@ called. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="exec-2"></a>TQSqlQuery::exec () </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns TRUE if the -query executed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns true if the +query executed successfully; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#prepare">prepare</a>(), <a href="#bindValue">bindValue</a>(), and <a href="#addBindValue">addBindValue</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="executedQuery"></a>TQSqlQuery::executedQuery () const @@ -377,51 +377,51 @@ query. Useful for debugging purposes. </h3> Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result -must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return TRUE before -calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. -Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is -set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned. +must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return true before +calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. +Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is +set to an invalid position and false is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#next">next</a>(), <a href="#prev">prev</a>(), <a href="#last">last</a>(), <a href="#seek">seek</a>(), <a href="#at">at</a>(), <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="sql.html#x2170">sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQSqlQuery::isActive () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the query is currently active; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the query is currently active; otherwise returns +false. <p>Examples: <a href="sql.html#x2158">sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2162">sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2167">sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2171">sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp</a>, and <a href="sql.html#x2175">sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isForwardOnly"></a>TQSqlQuery::isForwardOnly () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if you can only scroll <em>forward</em> through a result -set; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if you can only scroll <em>forward</em> through a result +set; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setForwardOnly">setForwardOnly</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSqlQuery::isNull ( int field ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the query is active and positioned on a valid -record and the <em>field</em> is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE. Note +Returns true if the query is active and positioned on a valid +record and the <em>field</em> is NULL; otherwise returns false. Note that for some drivers <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() will not return accurate information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(), and <a href="#value">value</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelect"></a>TQSqlQuery::isSelect () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the current query is a <tt>SELECT</tt> statement; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the current query is a <tt>SELECT</tt> statement; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQSqlQuery::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the query is currently positioned on a valid -record; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the query is currently positioned on a valid +record; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="last"></a>TQSqlQuery::last ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result -must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return TRUE before -calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. -Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is -set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned. +must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return true before +calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. +Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is +set to an invalid position and false is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#next">next</a>(), <a href="#prev">prev</a>(), <a href="#first">first</a>(), <a href="#seek">seek</a>(), <a href="#at">at</a>(), <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="sql.html#x2172">sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp</a>. @@ -441,21 +441,21 @@ if there is no current query text. </h3> Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result -must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return TRUE before -calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. +must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return true before +calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. <p> The following rules apply: <p> <ul> <li> If the result is currently located before the first record, e.g. immediately after a query is executed, an attempt is made to retrieve the first record. <p> <li> If the result is currently located after the last record, -there is no change and FALSE is returned. +there is no change and false is returned. <p> <li> If the result is located somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made to retrieve the next record. </ul> <p> If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after -the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully -retrieved, TRUE is returned. +the last record and false is returned. If the record is successfully +retrieved, true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#prev">prev</a>(), <a href="#first">first</a>(), <a href="#last">last</a>(), <a href="#seek">seek</a>(), <a href="#at">at</a>(), <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="sql.html#x2159">sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2163">sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2208">sql/overview/delete/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2183">sql/overview/order1/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2176">sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp</a>, <a href="sql.html#x2265">sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp</a>, and <a href="sql.html#x2268">sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp</a>. @@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ retrieved, TRUE is returned. Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement, or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for <tt>SELECT</tt> statements, the value is undefined; see <a href="#size">size</a>() instead. If the -query is not active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns FALSE), -1 is returned. +query is not active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns false), -1 is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>() and <a href="tqsqldriver.html#hasFeature">TQSqlDriver::hasFeature</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="sql.html#x2164">sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp</a> and <a href="sql.html#x2168">sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp</a>. @@ -485,66 +485,66 @@ query. See the <a href="#details">Description</a> for examples. </h3> Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result -must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return TRUE before -calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. +must be in an active state and <a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return true before +calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. <p> The following rules apply: <p> <ul> <li> If the result is currently located before the first record, -there is no change and FALSE is returned. +there is no change and false is returned. <p> <li> If the result is currently located after the last record, an attempt is made to retrieve the last record. <p> <li> If the result is somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made to retrieve the previous record. </ul> <p> If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned -before the first record and FALSE is returned. If the record is -successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned. +before the first record and false is returned. If the record is +successfully retrieved, true is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#next">next</a>(), <a href="#first">first</a>(), <a href="#last">last</a>(), <a href="#seek">seek</a>(), <a href="#at">at</a>(), <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqsqlresult.html">TQSqlResult</a> * <a name="result"></a>TQSqlQuery::result () const </h3> Returns the result associated with the query. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="seek"></a>TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="seek"></a>TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Retrieves the record at position (offset) <em>i</em>, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and -<a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return TRUE before calling this function. -<p> If <em>relative</em> is FALSE (the default), the following rules apply: +<a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() must return true before calling this function. +<p> If <em>relative</em> is false (the default), the following rules apply: <p> <ul> <li> If <em>i</em> is negative, the result is positioned before the -first record and FALSE is returned. +first record and false is returned. <li> Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position <em>i</em>. If the record at position <em>i</em> could not be retrieved, the -result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If -the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned. +result is positioned after the last record and false is returned. If +the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned. </ul> -<p> If <em>relative</em> is TRUE, the following rules apply: +<p> If <em>relative</em> is true, the following rules apply: <p> <ul> <li> If the result is currently positioned before the first record or on the first record, and <em>i</em> is negative, there is no -change, and FALSE is returned. +change, and false is returned. <li> If the result is currently located after the last record, and -<em>i</em> is positive, there is no change, and FALSE is returned. +<em>i</em> is positive, there is no change, and false is returned. <li> If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle, and the relative offset <em>i</em> moves the result below zero, the -result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is +result is positioned before the first record and false is returned. <li> Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record <em>i</em> records ahead of the current record (or <em>i</em> records behind the current record if <em>i</em> is negative). If the record at offset <em>i</em> could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record if <em>i</em> >= 0, (or before the first record if <em>i</em> is -negative), and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully -retrieved, TRUE is returned. +negative), and false is returned. If the record is successfully +retrieved, true is returned. </ul> <p> <p>See also <a href="#next">next</a>(), <a href="#prev">prev</a>(), <a href="#first">first</a>(), <a href="#last">last</a>(), <a href="#at">at</a>(), <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(), and <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="sql.html#x2173">sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setForwardOnly"></a>TQSqlQuery::setForwardOnly ( bool forward ) </h3> -Sets forward only mode to <em>forward</em>. If forward is TRUE only +Sets forward only mode to <em>forward</em>. If forward is true only <a href="#next">next</a>(), and <a href="#seek">seek</a>() with positive values, are allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not need to be cached. @@ -559,8 +559,8 @@ as forward. Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1 if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for -non-<tt>SELECT</tt> statements (<a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() returns FALSE), <a href="#size">size</a>() will -return -1. If the query is not active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns FALSE), +non-<tt>SELECT</tt> statements (<a href="#isSelect">isSelect</a>() returns false), <a href="#size">size</a>() will +return -1. If the query is not active (<a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns false), -1 is returned. <p> To determine the number of rows affected by a non-SELECT statement, use <a href="#numRowsAffected">numRowsAffected</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlrecord-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlrecord-h.html index b070f0a20..cc5b93ad6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlrecord-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlrecord-h.html @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ public: bool isEmpty() const; bool contains( const TQString& name ) const; virtual void clear(); - virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = FALSE ); + virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = false ); uint count() const; virtual TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = "," ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlrecord.html b/doc/html/tqsqlrecord.html index 969840d66..55e9384cf 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlrecord.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlrecord.html @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ set of database fields. <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isEmpty"><b>isEmpty</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQString & name ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clear"><b>clear</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clearValues"><b>clearValues</b></a> ( bool nullify = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#clearValues"><b>clearValues</b></a> ( bool nullify = false )</li> <li class=fn>uint <a href="#count"><b>count</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString"><b>toString</b></a> ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null, const TQString & sep = "," ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQStringList <a href="#toStringList"><b>toStringList</b></a> ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const</li> @@ -113,15 +113,15 @@ Removes all the record's fields. <p> <p>See also <a href="#clearValues">clearValues</a>(). <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqsqlcursor.html#clear">TQSqlCursor</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValues"></a>TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearValues"></a>TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Clears the value of all fields in the record. If <em>nullify</em> is -TRUE, (the default is FALSE), each field is set to NULL. +true, (the default is false), each field is set to NULL. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQSqlRecord::contains ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there is a field in the record called <em>name</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if there is a field in the record called <em>name</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="count"></a>TQSqlRecord::count () const </h3> @@ -160,33 +160,33 @@ exists at <em>pos</em>, it is removed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQSqlRecord::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if there are no fields in the record; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if there are no fields in the record; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isGenerated"></a>TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the record has a field called <em>name</em> and this -field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the record has a field called <em>name</em> and this +field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setGenerated">setGenerated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isGenerated-2"></a>TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( int i ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the record has a field at position <em>i</em> and this -field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the record has a field at position <em>i</em> and this +field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setGenerated">setGenerated</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSqlRecord::isNull ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the field called <em>name</em> is NULL or if there is no -field called <em>name</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the field called <em>name</em> is NULL or if there is no +field called <em>name</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#position">position</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull-4"></a>TQSqlRecord::isNull ( int i ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the field <em>i</em> is NULL or if there is no field at -position <em>i</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the field <em>i</em> is NULL or if there is no field at +position <em>i</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#fieldName">fieldName</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQSqlRecord::operator= ( const <a href="tqsqlrecord.html">TQSqlRecord</a> & other ) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ happens. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setGenerated"></a>TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, bool generated )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Sets the generated flag for the field called <em>name</em> to <em>generated</em>. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only -fields that have <em>generated</em> set to TRUE are included in the SQL +fields that have <em>generated</em> set to true are included in the SQL that is generated, e.g. by <a href="tqsqlcursor.html">TQSqlCursor</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>(). @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form: </h3> Returns a list of all the record's field names, each having the prefix <em>prefix</em>. -<p> Note that fields which have generated set to FALSE are <em>not</em> +<p> Note that fields which have generated set to false are <em>not</em> included. (See <a href="#isGenerated">isGenerated</a>()). If <em>prefix</em> is supplied, e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form: <p> "<em>prefix</em>.<fieldname>" diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlresult.html b/doc/html/tqsqlresult.html index 8acc186f4..3cc140ef8 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlresult.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlresult.html @@ -111,8 +111,8 @@ Returns the driver associated with the result. <p> Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index <em>i</em>. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the -index <em>i</em>, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE -to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. +index <em>i</em>, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with an appropriate value. Return true +to indicate success, or false to signify failure. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fetchFirst"></a>TQSqlResult::fetchFirst ()<tt> [pure virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the first record, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with an appropriate value. -Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. +Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fetchLast"></a>TQSqlResult::fetchLast ()<tt> [pure virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the last record, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with an appropriate value. -Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. +Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fetchNext"></a>TQSqlResult::fetchNext ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls <a href="#fetch">fetch</a>() with the next index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with an -appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to +appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fetchPrev"></a>TQSqlResult::fetchPrev ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -149,35 +149,35 @@ result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls <a href="#fetch">fetch</a>() with the previous index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call <a href="#setAt">setAt</a>() with -an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to +an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQSqlResult::isActive () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isForwardOnly"></a>TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result set; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if you can only scroll forward through a result set; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQSqlResult::isNull ( int i )<tt> [pure virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the field at position <em>i</em> is NULL; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the field at position <em>i</em> is NULL; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelect"></a>TQSqlResult::isSelect () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the current result is from a SELECT statement; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the current result is from a SELECT statement; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQSqlResult::isValid () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the result is positioned on a valid record (that +Returns true if the result is positioned on a valid record (that is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the -last record); otherwise returns FALSE. +last record); otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsqlerror.html">TQSqlError</a> <a name="lastError"></a>TQSqlResult::lastError () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -200,8 +200,8 @@ data retrieval. Derived classes must reimplement this function and apply the <em>query</em> to the database. This function is called only after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should -return TRUE if the query was successful and ready to be used, -or FALSE otherwise. +return true if the query was successful and ready to be used, +or false otherwise. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setActive"></a>TQSqlResult::setActive ( bool a )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ internal (zero-based) result index to <em>at</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setForwardOnly"></a>TQSqlResult::setForwardOnly ( bool forward )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Sets forward only mode to <em>forward</em>. If forward is TRUE only +Sets forward only mode to <em>forward</em>. If forward is true only <a href="#fetchNext">fetchNext</a>() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached. forward only mode is off by default. @@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ be <a href="#reset">reset</a>() in order to execute the query on the database. </h3> Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement. -The <em>s</em> parameter should be TRUE if the statement is a SELECT -statement, or FALSE otherwise. +The <em>s</em> parameter should be true if the statement is a SELECT +statement, or false otherwise. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="size"></a>TQSqlResult::size ()<tt> [pure virtual protected]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor-h.html b/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor-h.html index 35169fff4..426ca58e9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor-h.html @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public: bool select() { return TQSqlCursor::select(); } protected: - TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool = TRUE ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } + TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool = true ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const TQStringList& ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const TQString& ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const char* ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } @@ -110,20 +110,20 @@ protected: void clear() {} void setGenerated( const TQString&, bool ) {} void setGenerated( int, bool ) {} - TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool = FALSE ) { return 0; } + TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool = false ) { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeInsert() { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeUpdate() { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeDelete() { return 0; } - int insert( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } - int update( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } - int del( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } + int insert( bool = true ) { return 0; } + int update( bool = true ) { return 0; } + int del( bool = true ) { return 0; } void setMode( int ) {} void setSort( const TQSqlIndex& ) {} TQSqlIndex sort() const { return TQSqlIndex(); } void setFilter( const TQString& ) {} TQString filter() const { return TQString::null; } - void setName( const TQString&, bool = TRUE ) {} + void setName( const TQString&, bool = true ) {} TQString name() const { return TQString::null; } TQString toString( const TQString& = TQString::null, const TQString& = "," ) const { return TQString::null; } bool select( const TQString &, const TQSqlIndex& = TQSqlIndex() ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor.html b/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor.html index 34690d8ff..07a89ceee 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor.html +++ b/doc/html/tqsqlselectcursor.html @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ support <tt>INSERT</tt>, <tt>UPDATE</tt> or <tt>DELETE</tt> operations. ... TQSqlSelectCursor* cur = new TQSqlSelectCursor( "SELECT id, firstname, lastname FROM author" ); <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>* table = new <a href="tqdatatable.html">TQDataTable</a>( this ); - table-><a href="tqdatatable.html#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>( cur, TRUE, TRUE ); + table-><a href="tqdatatable.html#setSqlCursor">setSqlCursor</a>( cur, true, true ); table-><a href="tqdatatable.html#refresh">refresh</a>(); ... cur-><a href="tqsqlquery.html#exec">exec</a>( "SELECT * FROM books" ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqstatusbar-h.html b/doc/html/tqstatusbar-h.html index 5dd290cf7..aec06a8ff 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstatusbar-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstatusbar-h.html @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ public: TQStatusBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); virtual ~TQStatusBar(); - virtual void addWidget( TQWidget *, int stretch = 0, bool = FALSE ); + virtual void addWidget( TQWidget *, int stretch = 0, bool = false ); virtual void removeWidget( TQWidget * ); void setSizeGripEnabled(bool); diff --git a/doc/html/tqstatusbar.html b/doc/html/tqstatusbar.html index 12df8e7d8..71634519e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstatusbar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstatusbar.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ presenting status information. <ul> <li class=fn><a href="#TQStatusBar"><b>TQStatusBar</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQStatusBar"><b>~TQStatusBar</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addWidget"><b>addWidget</b></a> ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addWidget"><b>addWidget</b></a> ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeWidget"><b>removeWidget</b></a> ( TQWidget * widget )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setSizeGripEnabled"><b>setSizeGripEnabled</b></a> ( bool )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isSizeGripEnabled"><b>isSizeGripEnabled</b></a> () const</li> @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ remove widgets. </pre> <p> By default TQStatusBar provides a <a href="tqsizegrip.html">TQSizeGrip</a> in the lower-right -corner. You can disable it with <a href="#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>(FALSE); +corner. You can disable it with <a href="#setSizeGripEnabled">setSizeGripEnabled</a>(false); <p> <img src=tqstatusbar-m.png> <img src=tqstatusbar-w.png> <p> <p>See also <a href="tqtoolbar.html">TQToolBar</a>, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a>, <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>, <a href="guibooks.html#fowler">GUI Design Handbook: Status Bar</a>, <a href="application.html">Main Window and Related Classes</a>, and <a href="helpsystem.html">Help System</a>. @@ -125,15 +125,15 @@ with a size grip. Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and child widgets. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addWidget"></a>TQStatusBar::addWidget ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="addWidget"></a>TQStatusBar::addWidget ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Adds <em>widget</em> to this status bar. <em>widget</em> is reparented if it isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar. -<p> <em>widget</em> is permanently visible if <em>permanent</em> is TRUE and may -be obscured by temporary messages if <em>permanent</em> is FALSE. The -default is FALSE. -<p> If <em>permanent</em> is TRUE, <em>widget</em> is located at the far right of -the status bar. If <em>permanent</em> is FALSE (the default), <em>widget</em> +<p> <em>widget</em> is permanently visible if <em>permanent</em> is true and may +be obscured by temporary messages if <em>permanent</em> is false. The +default is false. +<p> If <em>permanent</em> is true, <em>widget</em> is located at the far right of +the status bar. If <em>permanent</em> is false (the default), <em>widget</em> is located just to the left of the first permanent widget. <p> <em>stretch</em> is used to compute a suitable size for <em>widget</em> as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default of 0 uses a minimum of @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by <a href="#message">message</ <a href="#clear">clear</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSizeGripEnabled"></a>TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the <a href="tqsizegrip.html">TQSizeGrip</a> in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the <a href="tqsizegrip.html">TQSizeGrip</a> in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqstatusbar.html#sizeGripEnabled-prop">"sizeGripEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="message"></a>TQStatusBar::message ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & message )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqstrilist.html b/doc/html/tqstrilist.html index f51c3d90b..47b08b5f5 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstrilist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstrilist.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ with case-insensitive comparison. <p><a href="tqstrilist-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQStrIList"><b>TQStrIList</b></a> ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQStrIList"><b>TQStrIList</b></a> ( bool deepCopies = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQStrIList"><b>~TQStrIList</b></a> ()</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -59,12 +59,12 @@ have to add a few extra strings to an already sorted list. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a>, <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQStrIList"></a>TQStrIList::TQStrIList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQStrIList"></a>TQStrIList::TQStrIList ( bool deepCopies = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs a list of strings. Will make deep copies of all -inserted strings if <em>deepCopies</em> is TRUE, or use shallow copies -if <em>deepCopies</em> is FALSE. +inserted strings if <em>deepCopies</em> is true, or use shallow copies +if <em>deepCopies</em> is false. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQStrIList"></a>TQStrIList::~TQStrIList () </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqstring-h.html b/doc/html/tqstring-h.html index 7ff338d13..6918e5728 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstring-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstring-h.html @@ -216,31 +216,31 @@ public: ; #endif - int find( TQChar c, int index=0, bool cs=TRUE ) const; - int find( char c, int index=0, bool cs=TRUE ) const; - int find( const TQString &str, int index=0, bool cs=TRUE ) const; + int find( TQChar c, int index=0, bool cs=true ) const; + int find( char c, int index=0, bool cs=true ) const; + int find( const TQString &str, int index=0, bool cs=true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP int find( const TQRegExp &, int index=0 ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_CAST_ASCII int find( const char* str, int index=0 ) const; #endif - int findRev( TQChar c, int index=-1, bool cs=TRUE) const; - int findRev( char c, int index=-1, bool cs=TRUE) const; - int findRev( const TQString &str, int index=-1, bool cs=TRUE) const; + int findRev( TQChar c, int index=-1, bool cs=true) const; + int findRev( char c, int index=-1, bool cs=true) const; + int findRev( const TQString &str, int index=-1, bool cs=true) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP int findRev( const TQRegExp &, int index=-1 ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_CAST_ASCII int findRev( const char* str, int index=-1 ) const; #endif - int contains( TQChar c, bool cs=TRUE ) const; - int contains( char c, bool cs=TRUE ) const + int contains( TQChar c, bool cs=true ) const; + int contains( char c, bool cs=true ) const { return contains(TQChar(c), cs); } #ifndef TQT_NO_CAST_ASCII - int contains( const char* str, bool cs=TRUE ) const; + int contains( const char* str, bool cs=true ) const; #endif - int contains( const TQString &str, bool cs=TRUE ) const; + int contains( const TQString &str, bool cs=true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP int contains( const TQRegExp & ) const; #endif @@ -266,8 +266,8 @@ public: TQString right( uint len ) const; TQString mid( uint index, uint len=0xffffffff) const; - TQString leftJustify( uint width, TQChar fill=' ', bool trunc=FALSE)const; - TQString rightJustify( uint width, TQChar fill=' ',bool trunc=FALSE)const; + TQString leftJustify( uint width, TQChar fill=' ', bool trunc=false)const; + TQString rightJustify( uint width, TQChar fill=' ',bool trunc=false)const; TQString lower() const; TQString upper() const; @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ public: #endif TQString &remove( uint index, uint len ); #if defined(Q_QDOC) - TQString &remove( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ); + TQString &remove( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ); #else // ### TQt 4.0: merge these two into one, and remove Q_QDOC hack TQString &remove( const TQString & ); @@ -326,10 +326,10 @@ public: TQString &replace( uint index, uint len, char c ) { return replace( index, len, TQChar(c) ); } #if defined(Q_QDOC) - TQString &replace( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE ); - TQString &replace( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE ); + TQString &replace( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true ); + TQString &replace( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true ); TQString &replace( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, - bool cs = TRUE ); + bool cs = true ); #else // ### TQt 4.0: merge these two into one, and remove Q_QDOC hack TQString &replace( TQChar c, const TQString & ); @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ public: // ### TQt 4.0: merge these two into one, and remove Q_QDOC hack TQString &replace( char c, const TQString & after ) - { return replace( TQChar(c), after, TRUE ); } + { return replace( TQChar(c), after, true ); } TQString &replace( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs ) { return replace( TQChar(c), after, cs ); } @@ -447,8 +447,8 @@ public: #endif #if defined(Q_QDOC) - bool startsWith( const TQString& str, bool cs = TRUE ) const; - bool endsWith( const TQString& str, bool cs = TRUE ) const; + bool startsWith( const TQString& str, bool cs = true ) const; + bool endsWith( const TQString& str, bool cs = true ) const; #else // ### TQt 4.0: merge these two into one, and remove Q_QDOC hack bool startsWith( const TQString& str ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqstring.html b/doc/html/tqstring.html index 054176257..2fe289b49 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstring.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstring.html @@ -74,20 +74,20 @@ and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array. <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#arg-e"><b>arg</b></a> ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3 ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#arg-f"><b>arg</b></a> ( const TQString & a1, const TQString & a2, const TQString & a3, const TQString & a4 ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#sprintf"><b>sprintf</b></a> ( const char * cformat, ... )</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-2"><b>find</b></a> ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-3"><b>find</b></a> ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-4"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-2"><b>find</b></a> ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-3"><b>find</b></a> ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#find-4"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#find-5"><b>find</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-2"><b>findRev</b></a> ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-3"><b>findRev</b></a> ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-4"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-2"><b>findRev</b></a> ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-3"><b>findRev</b></a> ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-4"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev-5"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#findRev"><b>findRev</b></a> ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-2"><b>contains</b></a> ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-3"><b>contains</b></a> ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-4"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains"><b>contains</b></a> ( TQChar c, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-2"><b>contains</b></a> ( char c, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-3"><b>contains</b></a> ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-4"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#contains-5"><b>contains</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#SectionFlags-enum"><b>SectionFlags</b></a> { SectionDefault = 0x00, SectionSkipEmpty = 0x01, SectionIncludeLeadingSep = 0x02, SectionIncludeTrailingSep = 0x04, SectionCaseInsensitiveSeps = 0x08 }</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#section"><b>section</b></a> ( TQChar sep, int start, int end = 0xffffffff, int flags = SectionDefault ) const</li> @@ -98,8 +98,8 @@ and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array. <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#left"><b>left</b></a> ( uint len ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#right"><b>right</b></a> ( uint len ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#mid"><b>mid</b></a> ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#leftJustify"><b>leftJustify</b></a> ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#rightJustify"><b>rightJustify</b></a> ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#leftJustify"><b>leftJustify</b></a> ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#rightJustify"><b>rightJustify</b></a> ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#lower"><b>lower</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#upper"><b>upper</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#stripWhiteSpace"><b>stripWhiteSpace</b></a> () const</li> @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array. <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#prepend-5"><b>prepend</b></a> ( const char * s )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#prepend-6"><b>prepend</b></a> ( const std::string & s )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( uint index, uint len )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove-2"><b>remove</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove-2"><b>remove</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove-3"><b>remove</b></a> ( TQChar c )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove-4"><b>remove</b></a> ( char c )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#remove-5"><b>remove</b></a> ( const char * str )</li> @@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array. <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-2"><b>replace</b></a> ( uint index, uint len, const TQChar * s, uint slen )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-3"><b>replace</b></a> ( uint index, uint len, TQChar c )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-4"><b>replace</b></a> ( uint index, uint len, char c )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-5"><b>replace</b></a> ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-6"><b>replace</b></a> ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-7"><b>replace</b></a> ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-5"><b>replace</b></a> ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-6"><b>replace</b></a> ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-7"><b>replace</b></a> ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-8"><b>replace</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )</li> <li class=fn>TQString & <a href="#replace-9"><b>replace</b></a> ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )</li> <li class=fn>short <a href="#toShort"><b>toShort</b></a> ( bool * ok = 0, int base = 10 ) const</li> @@ -187,8 +187,8 @@ and the classic C '\0'-terminated char array. <li class=fn>int <a href="#localeAwareCompare-2"><b>localeAwareCompare</b></a> ( const TQString & s ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#compose"><b>compose</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>const char * data () const <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#startsWith"><b>startsWith</b></a> ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#endsWith"><b>endsWith</b></a> ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#startsWith"><b>startsWith</b></a> ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#endsWith"><b>endsWith</b></a> ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setLength"><b>setLength</b></a> ( uint newLen )</li> <li class=fn>uint <a href="#capacity"><b>capacity</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#reserve"><b>reserve</b></a> ( uint minCapacity )</li> @@ -704,37 +704,37 @@ TQChar(0x0308) (Unicode accent diaresis), giving TQChar(0x00c4) <p> Equivalent to <a href="#at">at</a>(<em>i</em>). <p> <p>See also <a href="#ref">ref</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains"></a>TQString::contains ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains"></a>TQString::contains ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, bool cs = true ) const </h3> Returns the number of times the character <em>c</em> occurs in the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> <pre> TQString string( "Trolltech and TQt" ); - int n = string.<a href="#contains">contains</a>( 't', FALSE ); + int n = string.<a href="#contains">contains</a>( 't', false ); // n == 3 </pre> <p>Examples: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x867">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a> and <a href="mdi-example.html#x2064">mdi/application.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-2"></a>TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-2"></a>TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = true ) const </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-3"></a>TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-3"></a>TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns the number of times the string <em>str</em> occurs in the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-4"></a>TQString::contains ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="contains-4"></a>TQString::contains ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns the number of times <em>str</em> occurs in the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> This function counts overlapping strings, so in the example below, there are two instances of "ana" in "bananas". @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ string. there are four instances of "ana" or "ama". <p> <pre> TQString str = "banana and panama"; - <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE ); + <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", true, false ); int i = str.<a href="#contains">contains</a>( rxp ); // i == 4 </pre> @@ -777,16 +777,16 @@ string as a sequence of bytes. In TQt 2.x where TQString is a Unicode string, char* conversion constructs a temporary string, and hence direct character operations are meaningless. -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="endsWith"></a>TQString::endsWith ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="endsWith"></a>TQString::endsWith ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s, bool cs = true ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the string ends with <em>s</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +Returns true if the string ends with <em>s</em>; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> <pre> TQString str( "Bananas" ); - str.<a href="#endsWith">endsWith</a>( "anas" ); // returns TRUE - str.<a href="#endsWith">endsWith</a>( "pple" ); // returns FALSE + str.<a href="#endsWith">endsWith</a>( "anas" ); // returns true + str.<a href="#endsWith">endsWith</a>( "pple" ); // returns false </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#startsWith">startsWith</a>(). @@ -820,33 +820,33 @@ was found. <p> <p>See also <a href="#findRev">findRev</a>(), <a href="#replace">replace</a>(), and <a href="#contains">contains</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="mail-example.html#x715">network/mail/smtp.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-2"></a>TQString::find ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-2"></a>TQString::find ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the character <em>c</em>, starting at position <em>index</em>. If <em>index</em> is -1, the search starts at the last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so on. (See <a href="#findRev">findRev</a>() for searching backwards.) -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Returns the position of <em>c</em> or -1 if <em>c</em> could not be found. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-3"></a>TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-3"></a>TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Find character <em>c</em> starting from position <em>index</em>. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-4"></a>TQString::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="find-4"></a>TQString::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the string <em>str</em>, starting at position <em>index</em>. If <em>index</em> is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on. (See <a href="#findRev">findRev</a>() for searching backwards.) -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Returns the position of <em>str</em> or -1 if <em>str</em> could not be found. @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#findRev">findRev</a>(TQString(<em>str</em>), <em>index</em>). -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-2"></a>TQString::findRev ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-2"></a>TQString::findRev ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the character <em>c</em>, starting at @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ position <em>index</em> and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on. <p> Returns the position of <em>c</em> or -1 if <em>c</em> could not be found. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> <pre> TQString string( "bananas" ); @@ -877,16 +877,16 @@ otherwise the search is case insensitive. </pre> -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-3"></a>TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-3"></a>TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Find character <em>c</em> starting from position <em>index</em> and working backwards. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-4"></a>TQString::findRev ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="findRev-4"></a>TQString::findRev ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Finds the first occurrence of the string <em>str</em>, starting at @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ position <em>index</em> and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on. <p> Returns the position of <em>str</em> or -1 if <em>str</em> could not be found. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> <pre> TQString string("bananas"); @@ -1031,16 +1031,16 @@ then appended. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQString::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if <a href="#length">length</a>() == 0; -otherwise returns FALSE. Null strings are also empty. +<p> Returns true if the string is empty, i.e. if <a href="#length">length</a>() == 0; +otherwise returns false. Null strings are also empty. <p> <pre> TQString a( "" ); - a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE - a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // FALSE + a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true + a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // false TQString b; - b.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE - b.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // TRUE + b.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true + b.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // true </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#length">length</a>(). @@ -1049,12 +1049,12 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. Null strings are also empty. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQString::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the string is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A +<p> Returns true if the string is null; otherwise returns false. A null string is always empty. <p> <pre> TQString a; // a.<a href="#unicode">unicode</a>() == 0, a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 - a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // TRUE, because a.<a href="#unicode">unicode</a>() == 0 - a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // TRUE, because a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 + a.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(); // true, because a.<a href="#unicode">unicode</a>() == 0 + a.<a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(); // true, because a.<a href="#length">length</a>() == 0 </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() and <a href="#length">length</a>(). @@ -1087,13 +1087,13 @@ string. <p> <p>See also <a href="#right">right</a>(), <a href="#mid">mid</a>(), and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="themes-example.html#x338">themes/themes.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="leftJustify"></a>TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="leftJustify"></a>TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const </h3> Returns a string of length <em>width</em> that contains this string padded by the <em>fill</em> character. -<p> If <em>truncate</em> is FALSE and the length of the string is more than +<p> If <em>truncate</em> is false and the length of the string is more than <em>width</em>, then the returned string is a copy of the string. -<p> If <em>truncate</em> is TRUE and the length of the string is more than +<p> If <em>truncate</em> is true and the length of the string is more than <em>width</em>, then any characters in a copy of the string after length <em>width</em> are removed, and the copy is returned. <p> <pre> @@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ alternative is to call ascii() directly and construct a std::string manually. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!"></a>TQString::operator! () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this is a null string; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this is a null string; otherwise returns false. <p> <pre> TQString name = getName(); if ( !name ) @@ -1451,11 +1451,11 @@ the end of the string, the string is truncated at position <em>index</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#insert">insert</a>() and <a href="#replace">replace</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="remove-2"></a>TQString::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="remove-2"></a>TQString::remove ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Removes every occurrence of <em>str</em> in the string. Returns a reference to the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> This is the same as <a href="#replace">replace</a>(<em>str</em>, "", <em>cs</em>). @@ -1524,11 +1524,11 @@ to the string. <p> <p> This is the same as <a href="#replace">replace</a>(<em>index</em>, <em>len</em>, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a>(<em>c</em>)). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-5"></a>TQString::replace ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-5"></a>TQString::replace ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> c, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Replaces every occurrence of the character <em>c</em> in the string with <em>after</em>. Returns a reference to the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Example: <pre> @@ -1538,19 +1538,19 @@ otherwise the search is case insensitive. </pre> -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-6"></a>TQString::replace ( char c, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-6"></a>TQString::replace ( char c, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <p> Replaces every occurrence of the character <em>c</em> in the string with <em>after</em>. Returns a reference to the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-7"></a>TQString::replace ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & before, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & <a name="replace-7"></a>TQString::replace ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & before, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = true ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Replaces every occurrence of the string <em>before</em> in the string with the string <em>after</em>. Returns a reference to the string. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Example: <pre> @@ -1624,13 +1624,13 @@ string is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#left">left</a>(), <a href="#mid">mid</a>(), and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x871">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="rightJustify"></a>TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="rightJustify"></a>TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const </h3> Returns a string of length <em>width</em> that contains the <em>fill</em> character followed by the string. -<p> If <em>truncate</em> is FALSE and the length of the string is more than +<p> If <em>truncate</em> is false and the length of the string is more than <em>width</em>, then the returned string is a copy of the string. -<p> If <em>truncate</em> is TRUE and the length of the string is more than +<p> If <em>truncate</em> is true and the length of the string is more than <em>width</em>, then the resulting string is truncated at position <em>width</em>. <p> <pre> TQString string( "apple" ); @@ -1879,7 +1879,7 @@ Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and the end, and which has each sequence of internal whitespace replaced with a single space. <p> Whitespace means any character for which <a href="tqchar.html#isSpace">TQChar::isSpace</a>() returns -TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 +true. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR), and 32 (Space). <p> <pre> TQString string = " lots\t of\nwhite space "; @@ -1924,16 +1924,16 @@ array of unicode characters of type ushort (as returned by Squeezes the string's capacity to the current content. <p> <p>See also <a href="#capacity">capacity</a>() and <a href="#reserve">reserve</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="startsWith"></a>TQString::startsWith ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="startsWith"></a>TQString::startsWith ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & s, bool cs = true ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the string starts with <em>s</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; +Returns true if the string starts with <em>s</em>; otherwise returns +false. +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> <pre> TQString str( "Bananas" ); - str.<a href="#startsWith">startsWith</a>( "Ban" ); // returns TRUE - str.<a href="#startsWith">startsWith</a>( "Car" ); // returns FALSE + str.<a href="#startsWith">startsWith</a>( "Ban" ); // returns true + str.<a href="#startsWith">startsWith</a>( "Car" ); // returns false </pre> <p> <p>See also <a href="#endsWith">endsWith</a>(). @@ -1943,7 +1943,7 @@ otherwise the search is case insensitive. Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and the end. <p> Whitespace means any character for which <a href="tqchar.html#isSpace">TQChar::isSpace</a>() returns -TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 +true. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR) and 32 (Space), and may also include other Unicode characters. <p> <pre> @@ -1957,7 +1957,7 @@ also include other Unicode characters. </h3> Returns the string converted to a <tt>double</tt> value. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> <pre> TQString string( "1234.56" ); double a = string.<a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(); // a == 1234.56 @@ -2018,7 +2018,7 @@ whitespace is ignored. Returns the string converted to a <tt>float</tt> value. <p> Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). <p> <b>Warning:</b> If the string contains trailing whitespace this function @@ -2039,12 +2039,12 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> <pre> TQString str( "FF" ); bool ok; - int hex = str.<a href="#toInt">toInt</a>( &ok, 16 ); // hex == 255, ok == TRUE - int dec = str.<a href="#toInt">toInt</a>( &ok, 10 ); // dec == 0, ok == FALSE + int hex = str.<a href="#toInt">toInt</a>( &ok, 16 ); // hex == 255, ok == true + int dec = str.<a href="#toInt">toInt</a>( &ok, 10 ); // dec == 0, ok == false </pre> <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. @@ -2065,7 +2065,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2084,7 +2084,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2103,7 +2103,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2122,7 +2122,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2141,7 +2141,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2160,7 +2160,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2179,7 +2179,7 @@ be hexadecimal; </ul> <p> Returns 0 if the conversion fails. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, <em>*ok</em> is set to -FALSE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE. +false; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to true. <p> Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function. <p> For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see <a href="#toDouble">toDouble</a>(). @@ -2234,7 +2234,7 @@ Returns the string encoded in UTF-8 format. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2244,7 +2244,7 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is not equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) != 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2306,7 +2306,7 @@ character <em>c</em> and string <em>s</em>. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) < 0. @@ -2315,7 +2315,7 @@ The comparison is case sensitive. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) < 0. @@ -2329,8 +2329,8 @@ The comparison is case sensitive. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; +otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>,<em>s2</em>) <= 0. @@ -2341,8 +2341,8 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically less than or equal to <em>s2</em>; +otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) <= 0. @@ -2352,7 +2352,7 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2362,7 +2362,7 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2372,7 +2372,7 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is equal to <em>s2</em>; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) == 0. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() and <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -2381,8 +2381,8 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) > 0. @@ -2391,8 +2391,8 @@ The comparison is case sensitive. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than <em>s2</em>; otherwise +returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) > 0. @@ -2400,8 +2400,8 @@ The comparison is case sensitive. </h3> <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; +otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) >= 0. @@ -2412,8 +2412,8 @@ Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s1</em> is lexically greater than or equal to <em>s2</em>; +otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string. <p> Equivalent to <a href="#compare">compare</a>(<em>s1</em>, <em>s2</em>) >= 0. diff --git a/doc/html/tqstringlist-h.html b/doc/html/tqstringlist-h.html index c22be8510..ff6757e8e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstringlist-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstringlist-h.html @@ -108,20 +108,20 @@ public: void sort(); - static TQStringList split( const TQString &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ); - static TQStringList split( const TQChar &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ); + static TQStringList split( const TQString &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false ); + static TQStringList split( const TQChar &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false ); #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP - static TQStringList split( const TQRegExp &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE ); + static TQStringList split( const TQRegExp &sep, const TQString &str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false ); #endif TQString join( const TQString &sep ) const; - TQStringList grep( const TQString &str, bool cs = TRUE ) const; + TQStringList grep( const TQString &str, bool cs = true ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP TQStringList grep( const TQRegExp &expr ) const; #endif TQStringList& gres( const TQString &before, const TQString &after, - bool cs = TRUE ); + bool cs = true ); #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP_CAPTURE TQStringList& gres( const TQRegExp &expr, const TQString &after ); #endif diff --git a/doc/html/tqstringlist.html b/doc/html/tqstringlist.html index e82a6ca8b..136422b3a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstringlist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstringlist.html @@ -45,17 +45,17 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQStringList-5"><b>TQStringList</b></a> ( const char * i )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#sort"><b>sort</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#join"><b>join</b></a> ( const TQString & sep ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#grep"><b>grep</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#grep"><b>grep</b></a> ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#grep-2"><b>grep</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList & <a href="#gres"><b>gres</b></a> ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList & <a href="#gres"><b>gres</b></a> ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )</li> <li class=fn>TQStringList & <a href="#gres-2"><b>gres</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )</li> </ul> <h2>Static Public Members</h2> <ul> <li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#fromStrList"><b>fromStrList</b></a> ( const TQStrList & ascii )</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split-2"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split-3"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split-2"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split-3"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )</li> +<li class=fn>TQStringList <a href="#split"><b>split</b></a> ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -176,10 +176,10 @@ Longer lists are easily created as follows: </h3> Converts from an ASCII-TQStrList <em>ascii</em> to a TQStringList (Unicode). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="grep"></a>TQStringList::grep ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="grep"></a>TQStringList::grep ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool cs = true ) const </h3> Returns a list of all the strings containing the substring <em>str</em>. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise case is ignored. <p> <pre> TQStringList list; @@ -196,12 +196,12 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> Returns a list of all the strings that match the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> <em>rx</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqstring.html#find">TQString::find</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & <a name="gres"></a>TQStringList::gres ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & before, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & <a name="gres"></a>TQStringList::gres ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & before, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & after, bool cs = true ) </h3> Replaces every occurrence of the string <em>before</em> in the strings that constitute the string list with the string <em>after</em>. Returns a reference to the string list. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive. <p> Example: <pre> @@ -259,23 +259,23 @@ text to the text), or a TQMap<int,TQString> to sort the strings by some integer index, etc. <p>Example: <a href="themes-example.html#x341">themes/themes.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqregexp.html">TQRegExp</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Splits the string <em>str</em> into strings wherever the <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a> <em>sep</em> occurs, and returns the list of those strings. -<p> If <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is TRUE, a null string is inserted in +<p> If <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is true, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text. <p> For example, if you split the string "a,,b,c" on commas, <a href="#split">split</a>() returns the three-item list "a", "b", "c" if <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> -is FALSE (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c" -if <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is TRUE. +is false (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c" +if <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is true. <p> If <em>sep</em> does not match anywhere in <em>str</em>, split() returns a single element list with the element containing the single string <em>str</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#join">join</a>() and <a href="tqstring.html#section">TQString::section</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="tutorial2-03.html#x2552">chart/element.cpp</a>, <a href="dirview-example.html#x1703">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>, and <a href="httpd-example.html#x733">network/httpd/httpd.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split-2"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split-2"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> This version of the function uses a <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> as separator, rather @@ -283,12 +283,12 @@ than a <a href="tqregexp.html#regular-expression">regular expression</a>. <p> If <em>sep</em> is an empty string, the return value is a list of one-character strings: <a href="#split">split</a>( TQString( "" ), "four" ) returns the four-item list, "f", "o", "u", "r". -<p> If <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is TRUE, a null string is inserted in +<p> If <em>allowEmptyEntries</em> is true, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text. <p> <p>See also <a href="#join">join</a>() and <a href="tqstring.html#section">TQString::section</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split-3"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="split-3"></a>TQStringList::split ( const <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> & sep, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> This version of the function uses a <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> as separator, rather diff --git a/doc/html/tqstrlist-h.html b/doc/html/tqstrlist-h.html index 88618c83b..2825dfb12 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstrlist-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstrlist-h.html @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ typedef TQPtrListIterator<char> TQStrListIterator; class TQ_EXPORT TQStrList : public TQPtrList<char> { public: - TQStrList( bool deepCopies=TRUE ) { dc = deepCopies; del_item = deepCopies; } + TQStrList( bool deepCopies=true ) { dc = deepCopies; del_item = deepCopies; } TQStrList( const TQStrList & ); ~TQStrList() { clear(); } TQStrList& operator=( const TQStrList & ); @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ private: class TQ_EXPORT TQStrIList : public TQStrList // case insensitive string list { public: - TQStrIList( bool deepCopies=TRUE ) : TQStrList( deepCopies ) {} + TQStrIList( bool deepCopies=true ) : TQStrList( deepCopies ) {} ~TQStrIList() { clear(); } private: int compareItems( TQPtrCollection::Item s1, TQPtrCollection::Item s2 ) @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ inline TQStrList & TQStrList::operator=( const TQStrList &strList ) inline TQStrList::TQStrList( const TQStrList &strList ) : TQPtrList<char>( strList ) { - dc = FALSE; + dc = false; operator=( strList ); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqstrlist.html b/doc/html/tqstrlist.html index baee2fa35..9d4ca17cb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstrlist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstrlist.html @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqstrlist-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQStrList"><b>TQStrList</b></a> ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQStrList"><b>TQStrList</b></a> ( bool deepCopies = true )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQStrList-2"><b>TQStrList</b></a> ( const TQStrList & list )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQStrList"><b>~TQStrList</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQStrList & <a href="#operator-eq"><b>operator=</b></a> ( const TQStrList & list )</li> @@ -78,12 +78,12 @@ list. <p>See also <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>, <a href="text.html">Text Related Classes</a>, and <a href="tools.html">Non-GUI Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQStrList"></a>TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQStrList"></a>TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = true ) </h3> <p> Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all -inserted strings if <em>deepCopies</em> is TRUE, or use shallow copies -if <em>deepCopies</em> is FALSE. +inserted strings if <em>deepCopies</em> is true, or use shallow copies +if <em>deepCopies</em> is false. <h3 class=fn><a name="TQStrList-2"></a>TQStrList::TQStrList ( const <a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> & list ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqstyle-h.html b/doc/html/tqstyle-h.html index c9d716823..27bd6ed27 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstyle-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstyle-h.html @@ -93,26 +93,26 @@ class TQStyleOption { public: enum StyleOptionDefault { Default }; - TQStyleOption(StyleOptionDefault=Default) : def(TRUE) {} + TQStyleOption(StyleOptionDefault=Default) : def(true) {} // Note: we don't use default arguments since that is unnecessary // initialization. TQStyleOption(int in1) : - def(FALSE), i1(in1) {} + def(false), i1(in1) {} TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2) : - def(FALSE), i1(in1), i2(in2) {} + def(false), i1(in1), i2(in2) {} TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2, int in3, int in4) : - def(FALSE), i1(in1), i2(in2), i3(in3), i4(in4) {} - TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m) : def(FALSE), mi(m) {} - TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1) : def(FALSE), mi(m), i1(in1) {} - TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1, int in2) : def(FALSE), mi(m), i1(in1), i2(in2) {} - TQStyleOption(const TQColor& c) : def(FALSE), cl(&c) {} - TQStyleOption(TQTab* t) : def(FALSE), tb(t) {} - TQStyleOption(TQListViewItem* i) : def(FALSE), li(i) {} - TQStyleOption(TQCheckListItem* i) : def(FALSE), cli(i) {} - TQStyleOption(TQt::ArrowType a) : def(FALSE), i1((int)a) {} - TQStyleOption(const TQRect& r) : def(FALSE), i1(r.x()), i2(r.y()), i3(r.width()),i4(r.height()){} - TQStyleOption(TQWidget *w) : def(FALSE), p1((void*)w) {} + def(false), i1(in1), i2(in2), i3(in3), i4(in4) {} + TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m) : def(false), mi(m) {} + TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1) : def(false), mi(m), i1(in1) {} + TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1, int in2) : def(false), mi(m), i1(in1), i2(in2) {} + TQStyleOption(const TQColor& c) : def(false), cl(&c) {} + TQStyleOption(TQTab* t) : def(false), tb(t) {} + TQStyleOption(TQListViewItem* i) : def(false), li(i) {} + TQStyleOption(TQCheckListItem* i) : def(false), cli(i) {} + TQStyleOption(TQt::ArrowType a) : def(false), i1((int)a) {} + TQStyleOption(const TQRect& r) : def(false), i1(r.x()), i2(r.y()), i3(r.width()),i4(r.height()){} + TQStyleOption(TQWidget *w) : def(false), p1((void*)w) {} bool isDefault() const { return def; } diff --git a/doc/html/tqstyle.html b/doc/html/tqstyle.html index c539dfd9d..b4b11f40c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstyle.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstyle.html @@ -422,17 +422,17 @@ and/or feel hint. <li><tt>TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode</tt> - the background mode for a <a href="tqscrollbar.html">TQScrollBar</a>. Possible values are any of those in the <a href="tqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">BackgroundMode</a> enum. <li><tt>TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition</tt> - a boolean value. -If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to -jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is +If true, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to +jump to that position. If false, the middle clicking is ignored. <li><tt>TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition</tt> - a boolean value. -If TRUE, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to -jump to that position. If FALSE, the left clicking will +If true, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to +jump to that position. If false, the left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control. <li><tt>TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl</tt> - a boolean -value. If TRUE, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding +value. If true, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the -SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If FALSE, the +SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If false, the scrollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl. <li><tt>TQStyle::SH_TabBar_Alignment</tt> - the alignment for tabs in a diff --git a/doc/html/tqstyleoption.html b/doc/html/tqstyleoption.html index ec9266194..b4b53aaf8 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstyleoption.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstyleoption.html @@ -225,8 +225,8 @@ called; otherwise the return value is undefined. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDefault"></a>TQStyleOption::isDefault () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the option was constructed with the default -constructor; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the option was constructed with the default +constructor; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="lineWidth"></a>TQStyleOption::lineWidth () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqstylesheet.html b/doc/html/tqstylesheet.html index b416295b3..0071ba0f6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstylesheet.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstylesheet.html @@ -330,8 +330,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="mightBeRichText"></a>TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the string <em>text</em> is likely to be rich text; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the string <em>text</em> is likely to be rich text; +otherwise returns false. <p> This function uses a fast and therefore simple heuristic. It mainly checks whether there is something that looks like a tag before the first line break. Although the result may be correct diff --git a/doc/html/tqstylesheetitem.html b/doc/html/tqstylesheetitem.html index 814cc5bc3..18e87fa86 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqstylesheetitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqstylesheetitem.html @@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ Returns the alignment of this style. Possible values are <a href="tqt.html#Align <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="allowedInContext"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::allowedInContext ( const <a href="tqstylesheetitem.html">TQStyleSheetItem</a> * s ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this style can be nested into an element of style -<em>s</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this style can be nested into an element of style +<em>s</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#contexts">contexts</a>() and <a href="#setContexts">setContexts</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> <a name="color"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::color () const @@ -222,22 +222,22 @@ nested everywhere. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="definesFontItalic"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontItalic () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns -FALSE. A style does not define any shape until <a href="#setFontItalic">setFontItalic</a>() is +Returns true if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns +false. A style does not define any shape until <a href="#setFontItalic">setFontItalic</a>() is called. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontItalic">setFontItalic</a>() and <a href="#fontItalic">fontItalic</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="definesFontStrikeOut"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontStrikeOut () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut -property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not +Returns true if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut +property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until <a href="#setFontStrikeOut">setFontStrikeOut</a>() is called. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontStrikeOut">setFontStrikeOut</a>() and <a href="#fontStrikeOut">fontStrikeOut</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="definesFontUnderline"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontUnderline () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the underline -property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not +Returns true if the style defines a setting for the underline +property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until <a href="#setFontUnderline">setFontUnderline</a>() is called. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontUnderline">setFontUnderline</a>() and <a href="#fontUnderline">fontUnderline</a>(). @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@ valid font family or <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fontItalic"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::fontItalic () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontItalic">setFontItalic</a>() and <a href="#definesFontItalic">definesFontItalic</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="fontSize"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::fontSize () const @@ -267,14 +267,14 @@ point size or <a href="#AdditionalStyleValues-enum">TQStyleSheetItem::Undefined< <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fontStrikeOut"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::fontStrikeOut () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontStrikeOut">setFontStrikeOut</a>() and <a href="#definesFontStrikeOut">definesFontStrikeOut</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fontUnderline"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::fontUnderline () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFontUnderline">setFontUnderline</a>() and <a href="#definesFontUnderline">definesFontUnderline</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="fontWeight"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::fontWeight () const @@ -334,8 +334,8 @@ Unbounds first from previous style sheet. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="selfNesting"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::selfNesting () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelfNesting">setSelfNesting</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAlignment"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::setAlignment ( int f ) @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ DisplayBlock. Possible values are <a href="tqt.html#AlignmentFlags-enum">AlignAu <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAnchor"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::setAnchor ( bool anc ) </h3> -If <em>anc</em> is TRUE, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext +If <em>anc</em> is true, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext link); otherwise sets it to not be an anchor. Elements in this style link to other documents or anchors. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isAnchor">isAnchor</a>(). @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Sets the font family setting of the style to <em>fam</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFontItalic"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::setFontItalic ( bool italic ) </h3> -If <em>italic</em> is TRUE sets italic for the style; otherwise sets +If <em>italic</em> is true sets italic for the style; otherwise sets upright. <p> <p>See also <a href="#fontItalic">fontItalic</a>() and <a href="#definesFontItalic">definesFontItalic</a>(). @@ -388,13 +388,13 @@ Sets the font size setting of the style to <em>s</em> points. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFontStrikeOut"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::setFontStrikeOut ( bool strikeOut ) </h3> -If <em>strikeOut</em> is TRUE, sets strike out for the style; otherwise +If <em>strikeOut</em> is true, sets strike out for the style; otherwise sets no strike out. <p> <p>See also <a href="#fontStrikeOut">fontStrikeOut</a>() and <a href="#definesFontStrikeOut">definesFontStrikeOut</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFontUnderline"></a>TQStyleSheetItem::setFontUnderline ( bool underline ) </h3> -If <em>underline</em> is TRUE, sets underline for the style; otherwise +If <em>underline</em> is true, sets underline for the style; otherwise sets no underline. <p> <p>See also <a href="#fontUnderline">fontUnderline</a>() and <a href="#definesFontUnderline">definesFontUnderline</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqt.html b/doc/html/tqt.html index 1c71cbbf1..bf547a8b4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqt.html +++ b/doc/html/tqt.html @@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ string. <li><tt>TQt::RichText</tt> - The text string is interpreted as a rich text string using the current <a href="tqstylesheet.html#defaultSheet">TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet</a>(). <li><tt>TQt::AutoText</tt> - The text string is interpreted as for <a href="#TextFormat-enum">RichText</a> -if <a href="tqstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText">TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText</a>() returns TRUE, otherwise as +if <a href="tqstylesheet.html#mightBeRichText">TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText</a>() returns true, otherwise as <a href="#TextFormat-enum">PlainText</a>. <li><tt>TQt::LogText</tt> - A special, limited text format which is only used by <a href="tqtextedit.html">TQTextEdit</a> in an optimized mode. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtab.html b/doc/html/tqtab.html index 37202ec22..a933b2997 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtab.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtab.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Destroys the tab and frees up all allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQTab::isEnabled () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="rect"></a>TQTab::rect () const </h3> @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Destroys the tab and frees up all allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQTab::setEnabled ( bool enable ) </h3> -<p> If <em>enable</em> is TRUE enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it. +<p> If <em>enable</em> is true enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setIconSet"></a>TQTab::setIconSet ( const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & icon ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabbar.html b/doc/html/tqtabbar.html index 56a96218d..6711b630c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabbar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabbar.html @@ -182,8 +182,8 @@ tab. Returns the id. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTabEnabled"></a>TQTabBar::isTabEnabled ( int id ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab with id <em>id</em> exists and is enabled; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the tab with id <em>id</em> exists and is enabled; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="keyboardFocusTab"></a>TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab () const @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ iconset. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paint"></a>TQTabBar::paint ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, <a href="tqtab.html">TQTab</a> * t, bool selected ) const<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Paints the tab <em>t</em> using painter <em>p</em>. If and only if <em>selected</em> -is TRUE, <em>t</em> is drawn currently selected. +is true, <em>t</em> is drawn currently selected. <p> This virtual function may be reimplemented to change the look of TQTabBar. If you decide to reimplement it, you may also need to reimplement <a href="tqwidget.html#sizeHint">sizeHint</a>(). @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ order. The event is passed in <em>e</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paintLabel"></a>TQTabBar::paintLabel ( <a href="tqpainter.html">TQPainter</a> * p, const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & br, <a href="tqtab.html">TQTab</a> * t, bool has_focus ) const<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Paints the label of tab <em>t</em> centered in rectangle <em>br</em> using -painter <em>p</em>. A focus indication is drawn if <em>has_focus</em> is TRUE. +painter <em>p</em>. A focus indication is drawn if <em>has_focus</em> is true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="removeTab"></a>TQTabBar::removeTab ( <a href="tqtab.html">TQTab</a> * t )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -262,8 +262,8 @@ already current. See the <a href="tqtabbar.html#shape-prop">"shape"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTabEnabled"></a>TQTabBar::setTabEnabled ( int id, bool enabled )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Enables tab <em>id</em> if <em>enabled</em> is TRUE or disables it if <em>enabled</em> is FALSE. If <em>id</em> is currently selected, -<a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>(FALSE) makes another tab selected. +Enables tab <em>id</em> if <em>enabled</em> is true or disables it if <em>enabled</em> is false. If <em>id</em> is currently selected, +<a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>(false) makes another tab selected. <p> setTabEnabled() updates the display if this causes a change in <em>id</em>'s status. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqwidget.html#update">update</a>() and <a href="#isTabEnabled">isTabEnabled</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabdialog-h.html b/doc/html/tqtabdialog-h.html index 7c6e93582..06d773dc4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabdialog-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabdialog-h.html @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTabDialog : public TQDialog { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTabDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQTabDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQTabDialog(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabdialog.html b/doc/html/tqtabdialog.html index 462465e53..b01fc1ace 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabdialog.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabdialog.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqtabdialog-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQTabDialog"><b>TQTabDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQTabDialog"><b>TQTabDialog</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQTabDialog"><b>~TQTabDialog</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setFont"><b>setFont</b></a> ( const TQFont & font )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#addTab"><b>addTab</b></a> ( TQWidget * child, const TQString & label )</li> @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ than TQTabDialog provides, consider creating a <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog< <p> <p>See also <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> and <a href="dialogs.html">Dialog Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQTabDialog"></a>TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQTabDialog"></a>TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs a TQTabDialog with only an OK button. The <em>parent</em>, <em>name</em>, <em>modal</em> and <a href="tqt.html#WidgetFlags">widget flag</a>, <em>f</em>, arguments @@ -258,32 +258,32 @@ Apply or OK. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasApplyButton"></a>TQTabDialog::hasApplyButton () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setApplyButton">setApplyButton</a>(), <a href="#applyButtonPressed">applyButtonPressed</a>(), <a href="#hasCancelButton">hasCancelButton</a>(), and <a href="#hasDefaultButton">hasDefaultButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasCancelButton"></a>TQTabDialog::hasCancelButton () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setCancelButton">setCancelButton</a>(), <a href="#cancelButtonPressed">cancelButtonPressed</a>(), <a href="#hasApplyButton">hasApplyButton</a>(), and <a href="#hasDefaultButton">hasDefaultButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasDefaultButton"></a>TQTabDialog::hasDefaultButton () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDefaultButton">setDefaultButton</a>(), <a href="#defaultButtonPressed">defaultButtonPressed</a>(), <a href="#hasApplyButton">hasApplyButton</a>(), and <a href="#hasCancelButton">hasCancelButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHelpButton"></a>TQTabDialog::hasHelpButton () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setHelpButton">setHelpButton</a>(), <a href="#helpButtonPressed">helpButtonPressed</a>(), <a href="#hasApplyButton">hasApplyButton</a>(), and <a href="#hasCancelButton">hasCancelButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasOkButton"></a>TQTabDialog::hasOkButton () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setOkButton">setOkButton</a>(), <a href="#hasApplyButton">hasApplyButton</a>(), <a href="#hasCancelButton">hasCancelButton</a>(), and <a href="#hasDefaultButton">hasDefaultButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="helpButtonPressed"></a>TQTabDialog::helpButtonPressed ()<tt> [signal]</tt> @@ -329,15 +329,15 @@ position where this tab page should be inserted. <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTabEnabled"></a>TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqwidget.html#enabled-prop">TQWidget::enabled</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTabEnabled-2"></a>TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( const char * name ) const </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -<p> Returns TRUE if the page with object name <em>name</em> is enabled and -FALSE if it is disabled. +<p> Returns true if the page with object name <em>name</em> is enabled and +false if it is disabled. <p> If <em>name</em> is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, <a href="#isTabEnabled">isTabEnabled</a>() -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqwidget.html#enabled-prop">TQWidget::enabled</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="removePage"></a>TQTabDialog::removePage ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w ) @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ or the behavior is undefined. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTabEnabled"></a>TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise <em>w</em> is +If <em>enable</em> is true the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise <em>w</em> is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately. <p> <a href="tqtabwidget.html">TQTabWidget</a> uses <a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">TQWidget::setEnabled</a>() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtable-h.html b/doc/html/tqtable-h.html index 2eed3a565..22fef3bb2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtable-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtable-h.html @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ private: class TQM_EXPORT_TABLE TQComboTableItem : public TQTableItem { public: - TQComboTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQStringList &list, bool editable = FALSE ); + TQComboTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQStringList &list, bool editable = false ); ~TQComboTableItem(); virtual TQWidget *createEditor() const; virtual void setContentFromEditor( TQWidget *w ); @@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ public: void ensureCellVisible( int row, int col ); bool isSelected( int row, int col ) const; - bool isRowSelected( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const; - bool isColumnSelected( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const; + bool isRowSelected( int row, bool full = false ) const; + bool isColumnSelected( int col, bool full = false ) const; int numSelections() const; TQTableSelection selection( int num ) const; virtual int addSelection( const TQTableSelection &s ); @@ -354,8 +354,8 @@ public: bool columnMovingEnabled() const; bool rowMovingEnabled() const; - virtual void sortColumn( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, - bool wholeRows = FALSE ); + virtual void sortColumn( int col, bool ascending = true, + bool wholeRows = false ); bool sorting() const; virtual void takeItem( TQTableItem *i ); @@ -409,14 +409,14 @@ public slots: bool isColumnStretchable( int col ) const; bool isRowStretchable( int row ) const; virtual void setSorting( bool b ); - virtual void swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ); - virtual void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ); + virtual void swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false ); + virtual void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false ); virtual void swapCells( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ); virtual void setLeftMargin( int m ); virtual void setTopMargin( int m ); virtual void setCurrentCell( int row, int col ); - void clearSelection( bool repaint = TRUE ); + void clearSelection( bool repaint = true ); virtual void setColumnMovingEnabled( bool b ); virtual void setRowMovingEnabled( bool b ); @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ public slots: virtual void removeColumn( int col ); virtual void removeColumns( const TQMemArray<int> &cols ); - virtual void editCell( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE ); + virtual void editCell( int row, int col, bool replace = false ); void setRowLabels( const TQStringList &labels ); void setColumnLabels( const TQStringList &labels ); @@ -510,8 +510,8 @@ private: void updateGeometries(); void repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, TQTableSelection *newSelection, - bool updateVertical = TRUE, - bool updateHorizontal = TRUE ); + bool updateVertical = true, + bool updateHorizontal = true ); TQRect rangeGeometry( int topRow, int leftCol, int bottomRow, int rightCol, bool &optimize ); void fixRow( int &row, int y ); @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ private: void updateRowWidgets( int row ); void updateColWidgets( int col ); bool isSelected( int row, int col, bool includeCurrent ) const; - void setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensureVisible = FALSE ); + void setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensureVisible = false ); void fixCell( int &row, int &col, int key ); void delayedUpdateGeometries(); struct TableWidget diff --git a/doc/html/tqtable.html b/doc/html/tqtable.html index 093782755..b9b891b3c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtable.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtable.html @@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#currentColumn"><b>currentColumn</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#ensureCellVisible"><b>ensureCellVisible</b></a> ( int row, int col )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isSelected"><b>isSelected</b></a> ( int row, int col ) const</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#isRowSelected"><b>isRowSelected</b></a> ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>bool <a href="#isColumnSelected"><b>isColumnSelected</b></a> ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#isRowSelected"><b>isRowSelected</b></a> ( int row, bool full = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>bool <a href="#isColumnSelected"><b>isColumnSelected</b></a> ( int col, bool full = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#numSelections"><b>numSelections</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQTableSelection <a href="#selection"><b>selection</b></a> ( int num ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#addSelection"><b>addSelection</b></a> ( const TQTableSelection & s )</li> @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#showGrid"><b>showGrid</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#columnMovingEnabled"><b>columnMovingEnabled</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#rowMovingEnabled"><b>rowMovingEnabled</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sortColumn"><b>sortColumn</b></a> ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#sortColumn"><b>sortColumn</b></a> ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#sorting"><b>sorting</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#takeItem"><b>takeItem</b></a> ( TQTableItem * i )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCellWidget"><b>setCellWidget</b></a> ( int row, int col, TQWidget * e )</li> @@ -120,13 +120,13 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isColumnStretchable"><b>isColumnStretchable</b></a> ( int col ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isRowStretchable"><b>isRowStretchable</b></a> ( int row ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSorting"><b>setSorting</b></a> ( bool b )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapRows"><b>swapRows</b></a> ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapColumns"><b>swapColumns</b></a> ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapRows"><b>swapRows</b></a> ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapColumns"><b>swapColumns</b></a> ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#swapCells"><b>swapCells</b></a> ( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setLeftMargin"><b>setLeftMargin</b></a> ( int m )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setTopMargin"><b>setTopMargin</b></a> ( int m )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setCurrentCell"><b>setCurrentCell</b></a> ( int row, int col )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#clearSelection"><b>clearSelection</b></a> ( bool repaint = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#clearSelection"><b>clearSelection</b></a> ( bool repaint = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setColumnMovingEnabled"><b>setColumnMovingEnabled</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setRowMovingEnabled"><b>setRowMovingEnabled</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setReadOnly"><b>setReadOnly</b></a> ( bool b )</li> @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeRows"><b>removeRows</b></a> ( const TQMemArray<int> & rows )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeColumn"><b>removeColumn</b></a> ( int col )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeColumns"><b>removeColumns</b></a> ( const TQMemArray<int> & cols )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#editCell"><b>editCell</b></a> ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#editCell"><b>editCell</b></a> ( int row, int col, bool replace = false )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setRowLabels"><b>setRowLabels</b></a> ( const TQStringList & labels )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setColumnLabels"><b>setColumnLabels</b></a> ( const TQStringList & labels )</li> </ul> @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at 1, although row and column numbers within TQTable begin at 0.) -<p> If you want to use mouse tracking call <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( TRUE ) on +<p> If you want to use mouse tracking call <a href="tqwidget.html#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>( true ) on the <em>viewport</em>; (see <a href="tqscrollview.html#allviews">TQScrollView</a>). <p> <center><img src="tqtableitems.png" alt="Table Items"></center> <p> <a name="headers"></a> @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ difference between the section and the index fields in TQHeader. The TQTable TQHeader classes do not provide a mechanism for indexing independently of the user interface ordering. <p> The table can be sorted using <a href="#sortColumn">sortColumn</a>(). Users can sort a -column by clicking its header if <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>() is set to TRUE. Rows +column by clicking its header if <a href="#setSorting">setSorting</a>() is set to true. Rows can be swapped with <a href="#swapRows">swapRows</a>(), columns with <a href="#swapColumns">swapColumns</a>() and cells with <a href="#swapCells">swapCells</a>(). <p> For editable tables (see <a href="#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>()) you can set the read-only @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ This function is called to start in-place editing of the cell at (<a href="#createEditor">createEditor</a>() is called) and setting the cell's editor with <a href="#setCellWidget">setCellWidget</a>() to the newly created editor. (After editing is complete <a href="#endEdit">endEdit</a>() will be called to replace the cell's content -with the editor's content.) If <em>replace</em> is TRUE the editor will +with the editor's content.) If <em>replace</em> is true the editor will start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original cell content. @@ -540,9 +540,9 @@ widget is not deleted immediately; instead <a href="tqobject.html#deleteLater">T is called on the widget to avoid problems with timing issues. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cellWidget">cellWidget</a>() and <a href="#setCellWidget">setCellWidget</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearSelection"></a>TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = TRUE )<tt> [slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="clearSelection"></a>TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = true )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if <em>repaint</em> is TRUE. +Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if <em>repaint</em> is true. <p> <p>See also <a href="#removeSelection">removeSelection</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clicked"></a>TQTable::clicked ( int row, int col, int button, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & mousePos )<tt> [signal]</tt> @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ given in content coordinates. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="columnClicked"></a>TQTable::columnClicked ( int col )<tt> [virtual protected slot]</tt> </h3> This function is called when the column <em>col</em> has been clicked. -The default implementation sorts this column if <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() is TRUE. +The default implementation sorts this column if <a href="#sorting">sorting</a>() is true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="columnIndexChanged"></a>TQTable::columnIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )<tt> [virtual protected slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ to <em>toIndex</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqheader.html#indexChange">TQHeader::indexChange</a>() and <a href="#rowIndexChanged">rowIndexChanged</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="columnMovingEnabled"></a>TQTable::columnMovingEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop">"columnMovingEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="columnPos"></a>TQTable::columnPos ( int col ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -637,14 +637,14 @@ contents of the cell are disabled. </h3> This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor for the contents of the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em>. -<p> If <em>initFromCell</em> is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current +<p> If <em>initFromCell</em> is true, the editor is used to edit the current contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized -with this content). If <em>initFromCell</em> is FALSE, the content of +with this content). If <em>initFromCell</em> is false, the content of the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered into the widget created by this function. <p> The default functionality is as follows: if <em>initFromCell</em> is -TRUE or the cell has a <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> and the table item's -<a href="tqtableitem.html#isReplaceable">TQTableItem::isReplaceable</a>() is FALSE then the cell is asked to +true or the cell has a <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> and the table item's +<a href="tqtableitem.html#isReplaceable">TQTableItem::isReplaceable</a>() is false then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using <a href="tqtableitem.html#createEditor">TQTableItem::createEditor</a>()). Otherwise a <a href="tqlineedit.html">TQLineEdit</a> is used as the editor. <p> If you want to create your own editor for certain cells, implement @@ -712,13 +712,13 @@ double-clicked. The cell where the event took place is at <em>row</em>, <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="dragEnabled"></a>TQTable::dragEnabled () const<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -If this function returns TRUE, the table supports dragging. +If this function returns true, the table supports dragging. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setDragEnabled">setDragEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdragobject.html">TQDragObject</a> * <a name="dragObject"></a>TQTable::dragObject ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving -(i.e. dragging), and <a href="#dragEnabled">dragEnabled</a>() is TRUE, this function is +(i.e. dragging), and <a href="#dragEnabled">dragEnabled</a>() is true, this function is called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins immediately unless <a href="#dragObject">dragObject</a>() returns 0. <p> By default this function returns 0. You might reimplement it and @@ -740,10 +740,10 @@ wide and <em>ch</em> pixels high clipping rectangle at position <em>cx</em>, <p> This signal is emitted when a drop event occurred on the table. <p> <em>e</em> contains information about the drop. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="editCell"></a>TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="editCell"></a>TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = false )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Starts editing the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em>. -<p> If <em>replace</em> is TRUE the content of this cell will be replaced by +<p> If <em>replace</em> is true the content of this cell will be replaced by the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the cell (if any) will be modified in the editor. @@ -757,10 +757,10 @@ Returns the current edit mode <h3 class=fn>void <a name="endEdit"></a>TQTable::endEdit ( int row, int col, bool accept, bool replace )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> This function is called when in-place editing of the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em> is requested to stop. -<p> If the cell is not being edited or <em>accept</em> is FALSE the function +<p> If the cell is not being edited or <em>accept</em> is false the function returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged. -<p> If <em>accept</em> is TRUE the content of the editor must be transferred -to the relevant cell. If <em>replace</em> is TRUE the current content of +<p> If <em>accept</em> is true the content of the editor must be transferred +to the relevant cell. If <em>replace</em> is true the current content of this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this means removing the current <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> of the cell and creating a new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the @@ -826,74 +826,74 @@ function: see the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on-large-tables">notes on large ta <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isColumnHidden"></a>TQTable::isColumnHidden ( int col ) const<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if column <em>col</em> is hidden; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if column <em>col</em> is hidden; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hideColumn">hideColumn</a>() and <a href="#isRowHidden">isRowHidden</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isColumnReadOnly"></a>TQTable::isColumnReadOnly ( int col ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if column <em>col</em> is read-only; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if column <em>col</em> is read-only; otherwise returns +false. <p> Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setColumnReadOnly">setColumnReadOnly</a>() and <a href="#isRowReadOnly">isRowReadOnly</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isColumnSelected"></a>TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isColumnSelected"></a>TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = false ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if column <em>col</em> is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>full</em> is FALSE (the default), 'column is selected' means that -at least one cell in the column is selected. If <em>full</em> is TRUE, +Returns true if column <em>col</em> is selected; otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>full</em> is false (the default), 'column is selected' means that +at least one cell in the column is selected. If <em>full</em> is true, then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRowSelected">isRowSelected</a>() and <a href="#isSelected">isSelected</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isColumnStretchable"></a>TQTable::isColumnStretchable ( int col ) const<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if column <em>col</em> is stretchable; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if column <em>col</em> is stretchable; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setColumnStretchable">setColumnStretchable</a>() and <a href="#isRowStretchable">isRowStretchable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEditing"></a>TQTable::isEditing () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the <a href="#EditMode-enum">EditMode</a> is <a href="#EditMode-enum">Editing</a> or <a href="#EditMode-enum">Replacing</a>; -otherwise (i.e. the <a href="#EditMode-enum">EditMode</a> is <a href="#EditMode-enum">NotEditing</a>) returns FALSE. +Returns true if the <a href="#EditMode-enum">EditMode</a> is <a href="#EditMode-enum">Editing</a> or <a href="#EditMode-enum">Replacing</a>; +otherwise (i.e. the <a href="#EditMode-enum">EditMode</a> is <a href="#EditMode-enum">NotEditing</a>) returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#EditMode-enum">TQTable::EditMode</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQTable::isReadOnly () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the table is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the table is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtable.html#readOnly-prop">"readOnly"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRowHidden"></a>TQTable::isRowHidden ( int row ) const<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if row <em>row</em> is hidden; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if row <em>row</em> is hidden; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hideRow">hideRow</a>() and <a href="#isColumnHidden">isColumnHidden</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRowReadOnly"></a>TQTable::isRowReadOnly ( int row ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if row <em>row</em> is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if row <em>row</em> is read-only; otherwise returns false. <p> Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the cell's <a href="tqtableitem.html#EditType-enum">EditType</a>, and this setting: see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRowReadOnly">setRowReadOnly</a>() and <a href="#isColumnReadOnly">isColumnReadOnly</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRowSelected"></a>TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRowSelected"></a>TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = false ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if row <em>row</em> is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>full</em> is FALSE (the default), 'row is selected' means that at -least one cell in the row is selected. If <em>full</em> is TRUE, then 'row +Returns true if row <em>row</em> is selected; otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>full</em> is false (the default), 'row is selected' means that at +least one cell in the row is selected. If <em>full</em> is true, then 'row is selected' means every cell in the row is selected. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isColumnSelected">isColumnSelected</a>() and <a href="#isSelected">isSelected</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRowStretchable"></a>TQTable::isRowStretchable ( int row ) const<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if row <em>row</em> is stretchable; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if row <em>row</em> is stretchable; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRowStretchable">setRowStretchable</a>() and <a href="#isColumnStretchable">isColumnStretchable</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSelected"></a>TQTable::isSelected ( int row, int col ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em> is selected; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em> is selected; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isRowSelected">isRowSelected</a>() and <a href="#isColumnSelected">isColumnSelected</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a> * <a name="item"></a>TQTable::item ( int row, int col ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> @@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ See the <a href="tqtable.html#numSelections-prop">"numSelections"</a> property f Paints the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em> on the painter <em>p</em>. The painter has already been translated to the cell's origin. <em>cr</em> describes the cell coordinates in the content coordinate system. -<p> If <em>selected</em> is TRUE the cell is highlighted. +<p> If <em>selected</em> is true the cell is highlighted. <p> <em>cg</em> is the colorgroup which should be used to draw the cell content. <p> If you want to draw custom cell content, for example right-aligned @@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ maximum efficiency. If you want clipping, use code like this: <p> <pre> p->setClipRect( <a href="#cellRect">cellRect</a>(row, col), TQPainter::CoordPainter ); //... your drawing code - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); </pre> @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ or <a href="#swapColumns">swapColumns</a>(); <p> <p>See also <a href="tqheader.html#indexChange">TQHeader::indexChange</a>() and <a href="#columnIndexChanged">columnIndexChanged</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rowMovingEnabled"></a>TQTable::rowMovingEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop">"rowMovingEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="rowPos"></a>TQTable::rowPos ( int row ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -1134,7 +1134,7 @@ setCellWidget. See the <a href="tqtable.html#columnMovingEnabled-prop">"columnMovingEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setColumnReadOnly"></a>TQTable::setColumnReadOnly ( int col, bool ro )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>ro</em> is TRUE, column <em>col</em> is set to be read-only; otherwise +If <em>ro</em> is true, column <em>col</em> is set to be read-only; otherwise the column is set to be editable. <p> Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a>. <p>Example: <a href="tutorial2-08.html#x2619">chart/setdataform.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setColumnStretchable"></a>TQTable::setColumnStretchable ( int col, bool stretch )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>stretch</em> is TRUE, column <em>col</em> is set to be stretchable; +If <em>stretch</em> is true, column <em>col</em> is set to be stretchable; otherwise column <em>col</em> is set to be unstretchable. <p> If the table widget's width decreases or increases stretchable columns will grow narrower or wider to fit the space available as @@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ Moves the focus to the cell at <em>row</em>, <em>col</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDragEnabled"></a>TQTable::setDragEnabled ( bool b )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, the table starts a drag (see <a href="#dragObject">dragObject</a>()) when +If <em>b</em> is true, the table starts a drag (see <a href="#dragObject">dragObject</a>()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEditMode"></a>TQTable::setEditMode ( <a href="tqtable.html#EditMode-enum">EditMode</a> mode, int row, int col )<tt> [protected]</tt> @@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@ Resizes row <em>row</em> to be <em>h</em> pixels high. See the <a href="tqtable.html#rowMovingEnabled-prop">"rowMovingEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRowReadOnly"></a>TQTable::setRowReadOnly ( int row, bool ro )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>ro</em> is TRUE, row <em>row</em> is set to be read-only; otherwise the +If <em>ro</em> is true, row <em>row</em> is set to be read-only; otherwise the row is set to be editable. <p> Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: @@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@ see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setRowStretchable"></a>TQTable::setRowStretchable ( int row, bool stretch )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>stretch</em> is TRUE, row <em>row</em> is set to be stretchable; +If <em>stretch</em> is true, row <em>row</em> is set to be stretchable; otherwise row <em>row</em> is set to be unstretchable. <p> If the table widget's height decreases or increases stretchable rows will grow shorter or taller to fit the space available as @@ -1283,18 +1283,18 @@ Shows column <em>col</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hideColumn">hideColumn</a>() and <a href="#showRow">showRow</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="showGrid"></a>TQTable::showGrid () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtable.html#showGrid-prop">"showGrid"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="showRow"></a>TQTable::showRow ( int row )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Shows row <em>row</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hideRow">hideRow</a>() and <a href="#showColumn">showColumn</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sortColumn"></a>TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="sortColumn"></a>TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Sorts column <em>col</em>. If <em>ascending</em> is TRUE the sort is in +Sorts column <em>col</em>. If <em>ascending</em> is true the sort is in ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order. -<p> If <em>wholeRows</em> is TRUE, entire rows are sorted using <a href="#swapRows">swapRows</a>(); +<p> If <em>wholeRows</em> is true, entire rows are sorted using <a href="#swapRows">swapRows</a>(); otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using <a href="#swapCells">swapCells</a>(). <p> Note that if you are not using TQTableItems you will need to reimplement swapRows() and swapCells(). (See the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on-large-tables">notes on large tables</a>.) @@ -1303,7 +1303,7 @@ reimplement swapRows() and swapCells(). (See the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on- <p>Example: <a href="statistics-example.html#x2784">table/statistics/statistics.cpp</a>. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqdatatable.html#sortColumn">TQDataTable</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="sorting"></a>TQTable::sorting () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtable.html#sorting-prop">"sorting"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="startDrag"></a>TQTable::startDrag ()<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ swap cells, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on-large-tables">notes on large tables</a>.) <p> <p>See also <a href="#swapColumns">swapColumns</a>() and <a href="#swapRows">swapRows</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="swapColumns"></a>TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="swapColumns"></a>TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Swaps the data in <em>col1</em> with <em>col2</em>. <p> This function is used to swap the positions of two columns. It is @@ -1330,11 +1330,11 @@ called when the user changes the order of columns (see <p> If you don't use <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a>s and want your users to be able to swap columns you will need to reimplement this function. (See the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on-large-tables">notes on large tables</a>.) -<p> If <em>swapHeader</em> is TRUE, the columns' header contents is also +<p> If <em>swapHeader</em> is true, the columns' header contents is also swapped. <p> <p>See also <a href="#swapCells">swapCells</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="swapRows"></a>TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="swapRows"></a>TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> Swaps the data in <em>row1</em> and <em>row2</em>. <p> This function is used to swap the positions of two rows. It is @@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ called when the user changes the order of rows (see <p> If you don't use <a href="tqtableitem.html">TQTableItem</a>s and want your users to be able to swap rows, e.g. for sorting, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the <a href="tqtable.html#notes-on-large-tables">notes on large tables</a>.) -<p> If <em>swapHeader</em> is TRUE, the rows' header contents is also +<p> If <em>swapHeader</em> is true, the rows' header contents is also swapped. <p> This function will not update the TQTable, you will have to do this manually, e.g. by calling <a href="tqscrollview.html#updateContents">updateContents</a>(). @@ -1395,7 +1395,7 @@ Returns the table's vertical <a href="tqheader.html">TQHeader</a>. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="columnMovingEnabled-prop"></a>columnMovingEnabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user. -<p>The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding +<p>The default is false. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ see <a href="tqtableitem.html#wheneditable">TQTableItem::EditType</a>. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="rowMovingEnabled-prop"></a>rowMovingEnabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user. -<p>The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding +<p>The default is false. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by diff --git a/doc/html/tqtableitem.html b/doc/html/tqtableitem.html index b3f0a8fc0..fbe6df4e3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtableitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtableitem.html @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ accept the keyboard focus: <p> By default, table items may be replaced by new TQTableItems during the lifetime of a <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>. Therefore, if you create your own subclass of TQTableItem, and you want to ensure that -this does not happen, you must call <a href="#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>(FALSE) +this does not happen, you must call <a href="#setReplaceable">setReplaceable</a>(false) in the constructor of your subclass. <p> <center><img src="tqtableitems.png" alt="Table Items"></center> <p> <p>See also <a href="tqchecktableitem.html">TQCheckTableItem</a>, <a href="tqcombotableitem.html">TQComboTableItem</a>, and <a href="advanced.html">Advanced Widgets</a>. @@ -177,8 +177,8 @@ are created by the convenience functions <a href="tqtable.html#setText">TQTable: <ul> <li><tt>TQTableItem::Never</tt> - The cell is not editable. </ul><p> The cell is actually editable only if <a href="tqtable.html#isRowReadOnly">TQTable::isRowReadOnly</a>() is -FALSE for its row, <a href="tqtable.html#isColumnReadOnly">TQTable::isColumnReadOnly</a>() is FALSE for its -column, and <a href="tqtable.html#isReadOnly">TQTable::isReadOnly</a>() is FALSE. +false for its row, <a href="tqtable.html#isColumnReadOnly">TQTable::isColumnReadOnly</a>() is false for its +column, and <a href="tqtable.html#isReadOnly">TQTable::isReadOnly</a>() is false. <p> TQComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are restricted to choosing one of the choices in the list. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Returns the table item's edit type. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQTableItem::isEnabled () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReplaceable"></a>TQTableItem::isReplaceable () const @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ relevant item. This virtual function is used to paint the contents of an item using the painter <em>p</em> in the rectangular area <em>cr</em> using the color group <em>cg</em>. -<p> If <em>selected</em> is TRUE the cell is displayed in a way that +<p> If <em>selected</em> is true the cell is displayed in a way that indicates that it is highlighted. <p> You don't usually need to use this function but if you want to draw custom content in a cell you will need to reimplement it. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ maximum efficiency. If you want clipping, use <p> <pre> p->setClipRect( <a href="#table">table</a>()->cellRect(row, col), TQPainter::ClipPainter ); //... your drawing code - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); </pre> <p> @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ a <a href="tqlineedit.html">TQLineEdit</a> you will need to reimplement this fun <p>Example: <a href="statistics-example.html#x2787">table/statistics/statistics.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setEnabled"></a>TQTableItem::setEnabled ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, the table item is enabled; if <em>b</em> is FALSE the +If <em>b</em> is true, the table item is enabled; if <em>b</em> is false the table item is disabled. <p> A disabled item doesn't respond to user interaction. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>(). @@ -399,8 +399,8 @@ has no visible effect. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setReplaceable"></a>TQTableItem::setReplaceable ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE it is acceptable to replace the contents of the -cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If <em>b</em> is FALSE the +If <em>b</em> is true it is acceptable to replace the contents of the +cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If <em>b</em> is false the contents of the cell may not be replaced by the contents of another table item. Table items that span more than one cell may not have their contents replaced by another table item. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ contents. <p>Example: <a href="statistics-example.html#x2788">table/statistics/statistics.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWordWrap"></a>TQTableItem::setWordWrap ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple +If <em>b</em> is true, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the text will be written as a single line. <p> <p>See also <a href="#wordWrap">wordWrap</a>(), <a href="tqtable.html#adjustColumn">TQTable::adjustColumn</a>(), and <a href="tqtable.html#setColumnStretchable">TQTable::setColumnStretchable</a>(). @@ -479,8 +479,8 @@ always called so the currently display value is the one returned. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="wordWrap"></a>TQTableItem::wordWrap () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setWordWrap">setWordWrap</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtableselection.html b/doc/html/tqtableselection.html index 81229ccd3..ca15d56f3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtableselection.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtableselection.html @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ cells. <a href="#leftCol">leftCol</a>(), <a href="#rightCol">rightCol</a>(), <a href="#topRow">topRow</a>() and <a href="#bottomRow">bottomRow</a>() return the rectangle's four edges. All four are part of the selection. <p> A newly created TQTableSelection is inactive -- <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>() returns -FALSE. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it. +false. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqtable.html">TQTable</a>, <a href="tqtable.html#addSelection">TQTable::addSelection</a>(), <a href="tqtable.html#selection">TQTable::selection</a>(), <a href="tqtable.html#selectCells">TQTable::selectCells</a>(), <a href="tqtable.html#selectRow">TQTable::selectRow</a>(), <a href="tqtable.html#selectColumn">TQTable::selectColumn</a>(), and <a href="advanced.html">Advanced Widgets</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> @@ -154,13 +154,13 @@ Returns the number of columns in the selection. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQTableSelection::operator!= ( const <a href="tqtableselection.html">TQTableSelection</a> & s ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>s</em> does not include the same cells as the -selection; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>s</em> does not include the same cells as the +selection; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQTableSelection::operator== ( const <a href="tqtableselection.html">TQTableSelection</a> & s ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>s</em> includes the same cells as the selection; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>s</em> includes the same cells as the selection; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="rightCol"></a>TQTableSelection::rightCol () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabletevent.html b/doc/html/tqtabletevent.html index d84eec28e..e1c29ef42 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabletevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabletevent.html @@ -175,8 +175,8 @@ parent widget. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQTabletEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the tablet -event; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the tablet +event; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & <a name="pos"></a>TQTabletEvent::pos () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabwidget-h.html b/doc/html/tqtabwidget-h.html index 93df8da15..b57fef6c4 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabwidget-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabwidget-h.html @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ private slots: private: TQTabWidgetData *d; - void setUpLayout( bool = FALSE ); + void setUpLayout( bool = false ); friend class TQTabDialog; private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= diff --git a/doc/html/tqtabwidget.html b/doc/html/tqtabwidget.html index 27889208c..42671b6e1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtabwidget.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtabwidget.html @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ the new page, <em>tab</em> is the tab to put the <em>child</em> on and <em>index <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTabEnabled"></a>TQTabWidget::isTabEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTabEnabled">setTabEnabled</a>() and <a href="tqwidget.html#enabled-prop">TQWidget::enabled</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="label"></a>TQTabWidget::label ( int index ) const @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ the behavior is undefined. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTabEnabled"></a>TQTabWidget::setTabEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, bool enable ) </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise page <em>w</em> is +If <em>enable</em> is true, page <em>w</em> is enabled; otherwise page <em>w</em> is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately. <p> TQTabWidget uses <a href="tqwidget.html#setEnabled">TQWidget::setEnabled</a>() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextbrowser-h.html b/doc/html/tqtextbrowser-h.html index 6cf616c17..d8ced1f8a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextbrowser-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextbrowser-h.html @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ protected: private: void popupDetail( const TQString& contents, const TQPoint& pos ); - bool linksEnabled() const { return TRUE; } + bool linksEnabled() const { return true; } void emitHighlighted( const TQString &s ); void emitLinkClicked( const TQString &s ); TQTextBrowserData *d; diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextbrowser.html b/doc/html/tqtextbrowser.html index 52344ee57..f6233f353 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextbrowser.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextbrowser.html @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ is no previous document. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the availability of <a href="#backward">backward</a>() -changes. <em>available</em> is FALSE when the user is at <a href="#home">home</a>(); -otherwise it is TRUE. +changes. <em>available</em> is false when the user is at <a href="#home">home</a>(); +otherwise it is true. <p>Example: <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1020">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="forward"></a>TQTextBrowser::forward ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ next document. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the availability of <a href="#forward">forward</a>() changes. -<em>available</em> is TRUE after the user navigates <a href="#backward">backward</a>() and FALSE +<em>available</em> is true after the user navigates <a href="#backward">backward</a>() and false when the user navigates or goes forward(). <p>Example: <a href="helpviewer-example.html#x1022">helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextcodec.html b/doc/html/tqtextcodec.html index 6d9eb5afb..b1b145fce 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextcodec.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextcodec.html @@ -295,8 +295,8 @@ yourself: once created they become TQt's responsibility. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canEncode"></a>TQTextCodec::canEncode ( <a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> ch ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the Unicode character <em>ch</em> can be fully encoded -with this codec; otherwise returns FALSE. The default +Returns true if the Unicode character <em>ch</em> can be fully encoded +with this codec; otherwise returns false. The default implementation tests if the result of <a href="#toUnicode">toUnicode</a>(fromUnicode(ch)) is the original <em>ch</em>. Subclasses may be able to improve the efficiency. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextdrag.html b/doc/html/tqtextdrag.html index ce60fa880..254d119ab 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextdrag.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextdrag.html @@ -82,15 +82,15 @@ resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDecode"></a>TQTextDrag::canDecode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the information in <em>e</em> can be decoded into a -<a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the information in <em>e</em> can be decoded into a +<a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#decode">decode</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="simple_dd-example.html#x2827">iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decode"></a>TQTextDrag::decode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Attempts to decode the dropped information in <em>e</em> into <em>str</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canDecode">canDecode</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="simple_dd-example.html#x2828">iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp</a>. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Attempts to decode the dropped information in <em>e</em> into <em>str</em>. -Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If <em>subtype</em> +Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. If <em>subtype</em> is null, any text subtype is accepted; otherwise only the specified <em>subtype</em> is accepted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canDecode">canDecode</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextedit-h.html b/doc/html/tqtextedit-h.html index 4dca3d3fd..d313cc116 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextedit-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextedit-h.html @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ public: void getSelection( int *paraFrom, int *indexFrom, int *paraTo, int *indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const; - virtual bool find( const TQString &expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, + virtual bool find( const TQString &expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = true, int *para = 0, int *index = 0 ); int paragraphs() const; @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ public slots: virtual void setText( const TQString &txt, const TQString &context ); virtual void setTextFormat( TextFormat f ); - virtual void selectAll( bool select = TRUE ); + virtual void selectAll( bool select = true ); virtual void setTabStopWidth( int ts ); virtual void zoomIn( int range ); virtual void zoomIn() { zoomIn( 1 ); } @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ public slots: void insert( const TQString &text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected ); // ## virtual in 4.0 // obsolete - virtual void insert( const TQString &text, bool, bool = TRUE, bool = TRUE ); + virtual void insert( const TQString &text, bool, bool = true, bool = true ); virtual void insertAt( const TQString &text, int para, int index ); virtual void removeParagraph( int para ); @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ private: void updateCursor( const TQPoint & pos ); void handleMouseMove( const TQPoint& pos ); void drawContents( TQPainter * ); - virtual bool linksEnabled() const { return FALSE; } + virtual bool linksEnabled() const { return false; } void init(); void checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Type t ); void updateCurrentFormat(); @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ private: virtual void emitHighlighted( const TQString & ) {} virtual void emitLinkClicked( const TQString & ) {} - void readFormats( TQTextCursor &c1, TQTextCursor &c2, TQTextString &text, bool fillStyles = FALSE ); + void readFormats( TQTextCursor &c1, TQTextCursor &c2, TQTextString &text, bool fillStyles = false ); void clearUndoRedo(); void paintDocument( bool drawAll, TQPainter *p, int cx = -1, int cy = -1, int cw = -1, int ch = -1 ); void moveCursor( CursorAction action ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextedit.html b/doc/html/tqtextedit.html index ef09c0d0d..a1efa62b6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextedit.html @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#context"><b>context</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#documentTitle"><b>documentTitle</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#getSelection"><b>getSelection</b></a> ( int * paraFrom, int * indexFrom, int * paraTo, int * indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#find"><b>find</b></a> ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = true, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#paragraphs"><b>paragraphs</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#lines"><b>lines</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#linesOfParagraph"><b>linesOfParagraph</b></a> ( int para ) const</li> @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>void <a href="#setText"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & txt )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setText-2"><b>setText</b></a> ( const TQString & text, const TQString & context )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setTextFormat"><b>setTextFormat</b></a> ( TextFormat f )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#selectAll"><b>selectAll</b></a> ( bool select = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#selectAll"><b>selectAll</b></a> ( bool select = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setTabStopWidth"><b>setTabStopWidth</b></a> ( int ts )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#zoomIn"><b>zoomIn</b></a> ( int range )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#zoomIn-2"><b>zoomIn</b></a> ()</li> @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setOverwriteMode"><b>setOverwriteMode</b></a> ( bool b )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#scrollToBottom"><b>scrollToBottom</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#insert"><b>insert</b></a> ( const TQString & text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>virtual void insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = true, bool removeSelected = true ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#insertAt"><b>insertAt</b></a> ( const TQString & text, int para, int index )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#removeParagraph"><b>removeParagraph</b></a> ( int para )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#insertParagraph"><b>insertParagraph</b></a> ( const TQString & text, int para )</li> @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ insert images for example (although you can read and correctly display files that have margins set and that include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small amounts of rich text. <sup>1.</sup> -<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">Text Viewer <td valign="top">setReadOnly(TRUE) +<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">Text Viewer <td valign="top">setReadOnly(true) <td valign="top">Set text with setText() or <a href="#append">append</a>() (which has no undo history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns plain or rich text depending on the <a href="#textFormat">textFormat</a>(). This mode @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ for example: if ( file.<a href="tqfile.html#open">open</a>( <a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_WriteOnly</a> ) ) { <a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> stream( &file ); stream << textEdit->text(); - textEdit->setModified( FALSE ); + textEdit->setModified( false ); } </pre> @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ custom tag, you could do the following: <a href="tqstylesheetitem.html">TQStyleSheetItem</a> * item = new <a href="tqstylesheetitem.html">TQStyleSheetItem</a>( log-><a href="#styleSheet">styleSheet</a>(), "mytag" ); item-><a href="tqstylesheetitem.html#setColor">setColor</a>( "red" ); item-><a href="tqstylesheetitem.html#setFontWeight">setFontWeight</a>( TQFont::Bold ); - item-><a href="tqstylesheetitem.html#setFontUnderline">setFontUnderline</a>( TRUE ); + item-><a href="tqstylesheetitem.html#setFontUnderline">setFontUnderline</a>( true ); log-><a href="#append">append</a>( "This is a <mytag>custom tag</mytag>!" ); </pre> @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ and alignment at the new cursor position. <p> If the text changes, the <a href="#textChanged">textChanged</a>() signal is emitted, and if the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter, <a href="#returnPressed">returnPressed</a>() is emitted. The <a href="#isModified">isModified</a>() function will return -TRUE if the text has been modified. +true if the text has been modified. <p> TQTextEdit provides command-based undo and redo. To set the depth of the command history use <a href="#setUndoDepth">setUndoDepth</a>() which defaults to 100 steps. To undo or redo the last operation call <a href="#undo">undo</a>() or <a href="#redo">redo</a>(). @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ undo/redo history as well, use <a href="#insertParagraph">insertParagraph</a>(). See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop">"autoFormatting"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="bold"></a>TQTextEdit::bold () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the current format is bold; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the current format is bold; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setBold">setBold</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="charAt"></a>TQTextEdit::charAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos, int * para ) const @@ -747,10 +747,10 @@ Copies any selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard. <p> This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit. <p> When text is selected this signal will be emitted with <em>yes</em> set -to TRUE. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is -de-selected this signal is emitted with <em>yes</em> set to FALSE. -<p> If <em>yes</em> is TRUE then <a href="#copy">copy</a>() can be used to copy the selection to -the clipboard. If <em>yes</em> is FALSE then copy() does nothing. +to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is +de-selected this signal is emitted with <em>yes</em> set to false. +<p> If <em>yes</em> is true then <a href="#copy">copy</a>() can be used to copy the selection to +the clipboard. If <em>yes</em> is false then copy() does nothing. <p> <p>See also <a href="#selectionChanged">selectionChanged</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqpopupmenu.html">TQPopupMenu</a> * <a name="createPopupMenu"></a>TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -857,24 +857,24 @@ necessary. Returns the font family of the current format. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFamily">setFamily</a>(), <a href="#setCurrentFont">setCurrentFont</a>(), and <a href="#setPointSize">setPointSize</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="find"></a>TQTextEdit::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>bool <a name="find"></a>TQTextEdit::find ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = true, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Finds the next occurrence of the string, <em>expr</em>. Returns TRUE if -<em>expr</em> was found; otherwise returns FALSE. +Finds the next occurrence of the string, <em>expr</em>. Returns true if +<em>expr</em> was found; otherwise returns false. <p> If <em>para</em> and <em>index</em> are both 0 the search begins from the current cursor position. If <em>para</em> and <em>index</em> are both not 0, the search begins from the <em>*index</em> character position in the <em>*para</em> paragraph. -<p> If <em>cs</em> is TRUE the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is -case insensitive. If <em>wo</em> is TRUE the search looks for whole word -matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If <em>forward</em> is TRUE (the default) the search works forward from the +<p> If <em>cs</em> is true the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is +case insensitive. If <em>wo</em> is true the search looks for whole word +matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If <em>forward</em> is true (the default) the search works forward from the starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works backwards to the beginning of the text. -<p> If <em>expr</em> is found the function returns TRUE. If <em>index</em> and <em>para</em> are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first +<p> If <em>expr</em> is found the function returns true. If <em>index</em> and <em>para</em> are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first character of the match was found is put into <em>*para</em>, and the index position of that character within the paragraph is put into <em>*index</em>. -<p> If <em>expr</em> is not found the function returns FALSE. If <em>index</em> +<p> If <em>expr</em> is not found the function returns false. If <em>index</em> and <em>para</em> are not 0 and <em>expr</em> is not found, <em>*index</em> and <em>*para</em> are undefined. <p> Please note that this function will make the next occurrence of @@ -885,10 +885,10 @@ in case the document contains tables. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="focusNextPrevChild"></a>TQTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild ( bool n )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If <em>n</em> is TRUE the -tab moves the focus to the next child; if <em>n</em> is FALSE the tab -moves the focus to the previous child. Returns TRUE if the focus -was moved; otherwise returns FALSE. +Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If <em>n</em> is true the +tab moves the focus to the next child; if <em>n</em> is false the tab +moves the focus to the previous child. Returns true if the focus +was moved; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> <a name="font"></a>TQTextEdit::font () const </h3> @@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ are supported). It defaults to 0 (the default selection). <p> <p>See also <a href="#setSelection">setSelection</a>() and <a href="#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasSelectedText"></a>TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#hasSelectedText-prop">"hasSelectedText"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="heightForWidth"></a>TQTextEdit::heightForWidth ( int w ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ text (in selection 0) is removed before the text is inserted. <p> If the widget is in <a href="tqt.html#TextFormat-enum">LogText</a> mode this function will do nothing. <p> <p>See also <a href="#paste">paste</a>() and <a href="#pasteSubType">pasteSubType</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="insert-2"></a>TQTextEdit::insert ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="insert-2"></a>TQTextEdit::insert ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = true, bool removeSelected = true )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> @@ -959,28 +959,28 @@ is -1, the text is appended. Use <a href="#append">append</a>() if the append op is performance critical. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isModified"></a>TQTextEdit::isModified () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#modified-prop">"modified"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isOverwriteMode"></a>TQTextEdit::isOverwriteMode () const </h3><p>Returns the text edit's overwrite mode. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#overwriteMode-prop">"overwriteMode"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadOnly"></a>TQTextEdit::isReadOnly () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#readOnly-prop">"readOnly"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRedoAvailable"></a>TQTextEdit::isRedoAvailable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if redo is available; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isUndoAvailable"></a>TQTextEdit::isUndoAvailable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if undo is available; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isUndoRedoEnabled"></a>TQTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#undoRedoEnabled-prop">"undoRedoEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="italic"></a>TQTextEdit::italic () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the current format is italic; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the current format is italic; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setItalic">setItalic</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="keyPressEvent"></a>TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent ( <a href="tqkeyevent.html">TQKeyEvent</a> * e )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ Returns the number of lines in paragraph <em>para</em>, or -1 if there is no paragraph with index <em>para</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="linkUnderline"></a>TQTextEdit::linkUnderline () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#linkUnderline-prop">"linkUnderline"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="maxLogLines"></a>TQTextEdit::maxLogLines ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ edit. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the modification status of the -document has changed. If <em>m</em> is TRUE, the document was modified, +document has changed. If <em>m</em> is true, the document was modified, otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified. <p> <p>See also <a href="#modified-prop">modified</a>. @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ the undo/redo history, nothing happens. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If -<em>yes</em> is TRUE, then <a href="#redo">redo</a>() will work until <a href="#redoAvailable">redoAvailable</a>( FALSE ) +<em>yes</em> is true, then <a href="#redo">redo</a>() will work until <a href="#redoAvailable">redoAvailable</a>( false ) is next emitted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#redo">redo</a>() and <a href="#undoDepth-prop">undoDepth</a>. @@ -1155,10 +1155,10 @@ the HTML anchor tag, e.g. <tt><a name="target"></tt>. Scrolls to the bottom of the document and does formatting if required. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = TRUE )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="selectAll"></a>TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = true )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>select</em> is TRUE (the default), all the text is selected as -selection 0. If <em>select</em> is FALSE any selected text is +If <em>select</em> is true (the default), all the text is selected as +selection 0. If <em>select</em> is false any selected text is unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared. <p> <p>See also <a href="#selectedText-prop">selectedText</a>. @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ horizontally). See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#autoFormatting-prop">"autoFormatting"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBold"></a>TQTextEdit::setBold ( bool b )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets +If <em>b</em> is true sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets the current format to non-bold. <p> <p>See also <a href="#bold">bold</a>(). @@ -1213,7 +1213,7 @@ Sets the font family of the current format to <em>fontFamily</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItalic"></a>TQTextEdit::setItalic ( bool b )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets +If <em>b</em> is true sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets the current format to non-italic. <p> <p>See also <a href="#italic">italic</a>(). @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ edit's TQMimeSourceFactory when quering data. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#textFormat-prop">"textFormat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setUnderline"></a>TQTextEdit::setUnderline ( bool b )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE sets the current format to underline; otherwise +If <em>b</em> is true sets the current format to underline; otherwise sets the current format to non-underline. <p> <p>See also <a href="#underline">underline</a>(). @@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ Returns the <a href="tqsyntaxhighlighter.html">TQSyntaxHighlighter</a> set on th returned if no syntax highlighter is set. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tabChangesFocus"></a>TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#tabChangesFocus-prop">"tabChangesFocus"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="tabStopWidth"></a>TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth () const </h3><p>Returns the tab stop width in pixels. @@ -1399,8 +1399,8 @@ circumstances you might wish to use it. See the <a href="tqtextedit.html#textFormat-prop">"textFormat"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="underline"></a>TQTextEdit::underline () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setUnderline">setUnderline</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="undo"></a>TQTextEdit::undo ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> @@ -1414,7 +1414,7 @@ the undo/redo history, nothing happens. </h3> <p> This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If -<em>yes</em> is TRUE, then <a href="#undo">undo</a>() will work until <a href="#undoAvailable">undoAvailable</a>( FALSE ) +<em>yes</em> is true, then <a href="#undo">undo</a>() will work until <a href="#undoAvailable">undoAvailable</a>( false ) is next emitted. <p> <p>See also <a href="#undo">undo</a>() and <a href="#undoDepth-prop">undoDepth</a>. @@ -1492,8 +1492,8 @@ if present, otherwise an empty string. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#length">length</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="linkUnderline-prop"></a>linkUnderline</h3> <p>This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined. -<p>If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed -underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined. +<p>If true (the default) hypertext links will be displayed +underlined. If false links will not be displayed underlined. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setLinkUnderline">setLinkUnderline</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#linkUnderline">linkUnderline</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="modified-prop"></a>modified</h3> @@ -1502,9 +1502,9 @@ underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setModified">setModified</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isModified">isModified</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="overwriteMode-prop"></a>overwriteMode</h3> <p>This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode. -<p>If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted +<p>If false (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If -TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by +true, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor position. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush. <p>This property holds whether the text edit is read-only. <p>In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the text and select text; modifying the text is not possible. -<p> This property's default is FALSE. +<p> This property's default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isReadOnly">isReadOnly</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="selectedText-prop"></a>selectedText</h3> @@ -1532,7 +1532,7 @@ text and select text; modifying the text is not possible. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="tabChangesFocus-prop"></a>tabChangesFocus</h3> <p>This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input. <p>In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks -the focus chain. The default is FALSE. +the focus chain. The default is false. <p> <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setTabChangesFocus">setTabChangesFocus</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#tabChangesFocus">tabChangesFocus</a>(). <h3 class=fn>int <a name="tabStopWidth-prop"></a>tabStopWidth</h3> @@ -1582,7 +1582,7 @@ is 100. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="undoRedoEnabled-prop"></a>undoRedoEnabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled. <p>When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared. -<p> The default is TRUE. +<p> The default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setUndoRedoEnabled">setUndoRedoEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isUndoRedoEnabled">isUndoRedoEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtextedit.html#WordWrap-enum">WordWrap</a> <a name="wordWrap-prop"></a>wordWrap</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextstream-h.html b/doc/html/tqtextstream-h.html index 7aba868f6..aa268a7b9 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextstream-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextstream-h.html @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ inline TQIODevice *TQTextStream::device() const { return dev; } inline bool TQTextStream::atEnd() const -{ return dev ? dev->atEnd() : FALSE; } +{ return dev ? dev->atEnd() : false; } inline bool TQTextStream::eof() const { return atEnd(); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextstream.html b/doc/html/tqtextstream.html index d70087d73..241b1abb0 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextstream.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextstream.html @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ standard Unicode "byte order marked" text files; otherwise the local 8-bit encoding is used. <p> The <a href="tqiodevice.html">TQIODevice</a> is set in the constructor, or later using <a href="#setDevice">setDevice</a>(). If the end of the input is reached <a href="#atEnd">atEnd</a>() returns -TRUE. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type +true. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type using the <a href="#operator-gt-gt">operator>></a>() overloads, or read in its entirety into a single string using <a href="#read">read</a>(), or read a line at a time using <a href="#readLine">readLine</a>(). Whitespace can be skipped over using <a href="#skipWhiteSpace">skipWhiteSpace</a>(). @@ -246,9 +246,9 @@ Destroys the text stream. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="atEnd"></a>TQTextStream::atEnd () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of +<p> Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqiodevice.html#atEnd">TQIODevice::atEnd</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="addressbook-example.html#x601">addressbook/centralwidget.cpp</a>. @@ -478,21 +478,21 @@ format. This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Reads a "word" from the stream into <em>s</em> and returns a reference to the stream. -<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE. +<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> & <a name="operator-gt-gt-c"></a>TQTextStream::operator>> ( <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & str ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Reads a "word" from the stream into <em>str</em> and returns a reference to the stream. -<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE. +<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtextstream.html">TQTextStream</a> & <a name="operator-gt-gt-d"></a>TQTextStream::operator>> ( <a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> & str ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Reads a "word" from the stream into <em>str</em> and returns a reference to the stream. -<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE. +<p> A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="precision"></a>TQTextStream::precision () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtextview.html b/doc/html/tqtextview.html index 516b4892b..71c778a06 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtextview.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtextview.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer. <p> <b>This class is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> This class wraps a read-only <a href="tqtextedit.html">TQTextEdit</a>. -Use a <a href="tqtextedit.html">TQTextEdit</a> instead, and call <a href="tqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>(TRUE) +Use a <a href="tqtextedit.html">TQTextEdit</a> instead, and call <a href="tqtextedit.html#setReadOnly">setReadOnly</a>(true) to disable editing. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> diff --git a/doc/html/tqthread.html b/doc/html/tqthread.html index 8858f4aaa..e8b8a1099 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqthread.html +++ b/doc/html/tqthread.html @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ size is outside these limits. TQThread destructor. <p> Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e. -<a href="#finished">finished</a>() returns FALSE) will probably result in a program crash. +<a href="#finished">finished</a>() returns false) will probably result in a program crash. You can <a href="#wait">wait</a>() on a thread to make sure that it has finished. <h3 class=fn>TQt::HANDLE <a name="currentThread"></a>TQThread::currentThread ()<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ waiting for its termination. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="finished"></a>TQThread::finished () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the thread is finished; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the thread is finished; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="msleep"></a>TQThread::msleep ( unsigned long msecs )<tt> [static protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ will end the execution of the thread. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="running"></a>TQThread::running () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the thread is running; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the thread is running; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="sleep"></a>TQThread::sleep ( unsigned long secs )<tt> [static protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -224,11 +224,11 @@ conditions is met: <p> <ul> <li> The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished execution (i.e. when it returns from <a href="#run">run</a>()). This function -will return TRUE if the thread has finished. It also returns -TRUE if the thread has not been started yet. +will return true if the thread has finished. It also returns +true if the thread has not been started yet. <li> <em>time</em> milliseconds has elapsed. If <em>time</em> is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must -return from <a href="#run">run</a>()). This function will return FALSE if the +return from <a href="#run">run</a>()). This function will return false if the wait timed out. </ul> <p> This provides similar functionality to the POSIX <tt>pthread_join()</tt> function. diff --git a/doc/html/tqthreadstorage.html b/doc/html/tqthreadstorage.html index 3ab7fdd98..b05db3a8b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqthreadstorage.html +++ b/doc/html/tqthreadstorage.html @@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ TQThreadStorage have exited before deleting the TQThreadStorage. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasLocalData"></a>TQThreadStorage::hasLocalData () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the calling thread has non-zero data available; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the calling thread has non-zero data available; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#localData">localData</a>(). <h3 class=fn>T & <a name="localData"></a>TQThreadStorage::localData () diff --git a/doc/html/tqtime.html b/doc/html/tqtime.html index 3e1159a19..db73c3d40 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtime.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtime.html @@ -195,27 +195,27 @@ Returns the hour part (0..23) of the time. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQTime::isNull () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the time is equal to 00:00:00.000; otherwise -returns FALSE. A null time is valid. +<p> Returns true if the time is equal to 00:00:00.000; otherwise +returns false. A null time is valid. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQTime::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the time is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. The +Returns true if the time is valid; otherwise returns false. The time 23:30:55.746 is valid, whereas 24:12:30 is invalid. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid-2"></a>TQTime::isValid ( int h, int m, int s, int ms = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if the specified time is valid; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the specified time is valid; otherwise returns +false. <p> The time is valid if <em>h</em> is in the range 0..23, <em>m</em> and <em>s</em> are in the range 0..59, and <em>ms</em> is in the range 0..999. <p> Example: <pre> - TQTime::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(21, 10, 30); // returns TRUE - TQTime::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(22, 5, 62); // returns FALSE + TQTime::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(21, 10, 30); // returns true + TQTime::<a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(22, 5, 62); // returns false </pre> @@ -240,34 +240,34 @@ seconds in a day, the result is always between -86400000 and <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQTime::operator!= ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is different from <em>t</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is different from <em>t</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt"></a>TQTime::operator< ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is earlier than <em>t</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is earlier than <em>t</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt-eq"></a>TQTime::operator<= ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is earlier than or equal to <em>t</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is earlier than or equal to <em>t</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQTime::operator== ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is equal to <em>t</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is equal to <em>t</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>TQTime::operator> ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is later than <em>t</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is later than <em>t</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt-eq"></a>TQTime::operator>= ( const <a href="tqtime.html">TQTime</a> & t ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this time is later than or equal to <em>t</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this time is later than or equal to <em>t</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="restart"></a>TQTime::restart () </h3> @@ -304,8 +304,8 @@ seconds in a day, the result is always between -86400 and 86400. Sets the time to hour <em>h</em>, minute <em>m</em>, seconds <em>s</em> and milliseconds <em>ms</em>. <p> <em>h</em> must be in the range 0..23, <em>m</em> and <em>s</em> must be in the -range 0..59, and <em>ms</em> must be in the range 0..999. Returns TRUE -if the set time is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +range 0..59, and <em>ms</em> must be in the range 0..999. Returns true +if the set time is valid; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="start"></a>TQTime::start () diff --git a/doc/html/tqtimeedit.html b/doc/html/tqtimeedit.html index 3fd7f6844..7bd4a091e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtimeedit.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtimeedit.html @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ parent <em>parent</em> and called <em>name</em>. Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdvance"></a>TQTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtimeedit.html#autoAdvance-prop">"autoAdvance"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>uint <a name="display"></a>TQTimeEdit::display () const </h3><p>Returns the sections that are displayed in the time edit. @@ -209,9 +209,9 @@ See the <a href="tqtimeedit.html#time-prop">"time"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoAdvance-prop"></a>autoAdvance</h3> <p>This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section. -<p>If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance +<p>If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next time section if a user has completed a section. -The default is FALSE. +The default is false. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoAdvance">setAutoAdvance</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoAdvance">autoAdvance</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtimeedit.html#Display-enum">Display</a> <a name="display-prop"></a>display</h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtimer-h.html b/doc/html/tqtimer-h.html index b2c56b85e..110e8e9bb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtimer-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtimer-h.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public: bool isActive() const; - int start( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE ); + int start( int msec, bool sshot = false ); void changeInterval( int msec ); void stop(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqtimer.html b/doc/html/tqtimer.html index 3e1a5f786..01e88bf9e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtimer.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtimer.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQTimer"><b>TQTimer</b></a> ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQTimer"><b>~TQTimer</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#isActive"><b>isActive</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>int <a href="#start"><b>start</b></a> ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>int <a href="#start"><b>start</b></a> ( int msec, bool sshot = false )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#changeInterval"><b>changeInterval</b></a> ( int msec )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#stop"><b>stop</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>int <a href="#timerId"><b>timerId</b></a> () const</li> @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ parent object is destroyed. <pre> TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer( myObject ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( timer, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="#timeout">timeout</a>()), myObject, TQ_SLOT(timerDone()) ); - timer-><a href="#start">start</a>( 2000, TRUE ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer + timer-><a href="#start">start</a>( 2000, true ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer </pre> <p> You can also use the static <a href="#singleShot">singleShot</a>() function to create a @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ user interface: <pre> TQTimer *t = new TQTimer( myObject ); <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( t, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="#timeout">timeout</a>()), TQ_SLOT(processOneThing()) ); - t-><a href="#start">start</a>( 0, FALSE ); + t-><a href="#start">start</a>( 0, false ); </pre> <p> myObject->processOneThing() will be called repeatedly and should @@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ otherwise it will be started. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActive"></a>TQTimer::isActive () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns +false. <p>Example: <a href="tutorial1-11.html#x2376">t11/cannon.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="singleShot"></a>TQTimer::singleShot ( int msec, <a href="tqobject.html">TQObject</a> * receiver, const char * member )<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -157,11 +157,11 @@ to create a local TQTimer object. <p> The <em>receiver</em> is the receiving object and the <em>member</em> is the slot. The time interval is <em>msec</em>. -<h3 class=fn>int <a name="start"></a>TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>int <a name="start"></a>TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = false ) </h3> Starts the timer with a <em>msec</em> milliseconds timeout, and returns the ID of the timer, or zero when starting the timer failed. -<p> If <em>sshot</em> is TRUE, the timer will be activated only once; +<p> If <em>sshot</em> is true, the timer will be activated only once; otherwise it will continue until it is stopped. <p> Any pending timer will be stopped. <p> <p>See also <a href="#singleShot">singleShot</a>(), <a href="#stop">stop</a>(), <a href="#changeInterval">changeInterval</a>(), and <a href="#isActive">isActive</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqtoolbar-h.html b/doc/html/tqtoolbar-h.html index 1f9489583..3af2cd080 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtoolbar-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtoolbar-h.html @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQToolBar: public TQDockWindow public: TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, - bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0 ); + bool newLine = false, const char* name=0 ); TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow *, TQWidget *, - bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + bool newLine = false, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); TQToolBar( TQMainWindow* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQToolBar(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqtoolbar.html b/doc/html/tqtoolbar.html index de933b2da..35db81739 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtoolbar.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtoolbar.html @@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ widgets such as tool buttons. <p><a href="tqtoolbar-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn>TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQToolBar-2"><b>TQToolBar</b></a> ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0 ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQToolBar-2"><b>TQToolBar</b></a> ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQToolBar-3"><b>TQToolBar</b></a> ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#addSeparator"><b>addSeparator</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQMainWindow * <a href="#mainWindow"><b>mainWindow</b></a> () const</li> @@ -121,12 +121,12 @@ orientation correctly for you, but you can set it yourself with </blockquote><p> <p>See also <a href="tqtoolbutton.html">TQToolButton</a>, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a>, <a href="http://www.iarchitect.com/visual.htm">Parts of Isys on Visual Design</a>, <a href="guibooks.html#fowler">GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar</a>, and <a href="application.html">Main Window and Related Classes</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQToolBar"></a>TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQToolBar"></a>TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0 ) </h3> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. <p> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQToolBar-2"></a>TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> * mainWindow, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQToolBar-2"></a>TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & label, <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> * mainWindow, <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar. <p> The toolbar is called <em>name</em> and is a child of <em>parent</em> and is @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ to stretch. <p> The request to stretch might occur because <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this toolbar's <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isVerticalStretchable">isVerticalStretchable</a>() or <a href="tqdockwindow.html#isHorizontalStretchable">isHorizontalStretchable</a>() is -set to TRUE. +set to true. <p> If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable, setStretchable() is called. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqmainwindow.html#rightJustification-prop">TQMainWindow::rightJustification</a>, <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setVerticalStretchable">setVerticalStretchable</a>(), and <a href="tqdockwindow.html#setHorizontalStretchable">setHorizontalStretchable</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqtoolbox.html b/doc/html/tqtoolbox.html index 7054060fd..e08004521 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtoolbox.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtoolbox.html @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ set to <em>label</em>. Returns the new item's index. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isItemEnabled"></a>TQToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the item at position <em>index</em> is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the item at position <em>index</em> is enabled; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="item"></a>TQToolBox::item ( int index ) const </h3> @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Sets the current item to be <em>item</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemEnabled"></a>TQToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled ) </h3> -If <em>enabled</em> is TRUE then the item at position <em>index</em> is enabled; otherwise item +If <em>enabled</em> is true then the item at position <em>index</em> is enabled; otherwise item <em>index</em> is disabled. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setItemIconSet"></a>TQToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const <a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> & iconSet ) diff --git a/doc/html/tqtoolbutton.html b/doc/html/tqtoolbutton.html index 52d5e96f7..d7f2a80ac 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtoolbutton.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtoolbutton.html @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it. TQMainWindow's settings (see <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setUsesTextLabel">TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel</a>() and <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps</a>()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If -<a href="#usesBigPixmap">usesBigPixmap</a>() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32. +<a href="#usesBigPixmap">usesBigPixmap</a>() is true, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32. <p> A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser. After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ constructor. Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRaise"></a>TQToolButton::autoRaise () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#autoRaise-prop">"autoRaise"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqiconset.html">TQIconSet</a> <a name="iconSet"></a>TQToolButton::iconSet () const </h3><p>Returns the icon set providing the icon shown on the button. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ See the <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#textLabel-prop">"textLabel"</a> property for </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets the label of this button to <em>newLabel</em> and automatically -sets it as a tool tip if <em>tipToo</em> is TRUE. +sets it as a tool tip if <em>tipToo</em> is true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTextPosition"></a>TQToolButton::setTextPosition ( <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#TextPosition-enum">TextPosition</a> pos )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3><p>Sets the position of the text label of this button to <em>pos</em>. @@ -239,20 +239,20 @@ Toggles the state of this tool button. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="uses3D"></a>TQToolButton::uses3D () const<tt> [protected]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this button should be drawn using raised edges; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="tqbutton.html#drawButton">drawButton</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesBigPixmap"></a>TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#usesBigPixmap-prop">"usesBigPixmap"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesTextLabel"></a>TQToolButton::usesTextLabel () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtoolbutton.html#usesTextLabel-prop">"usesTextLabel"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoRaise-prop"></a>autoRaise</h3> <p>This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled. -<p>The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE). +<p>The default is disabled (i.e. false). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setAutoRaise">setAutoRaise</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#autoRaise">autoRaise</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#BackgroundMode-enum">BackgroundMode</a> <a name="backgroundMode-prop"></a>backgroundMode</h3> @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ pixmap. There is no default iconset. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="on-prop"></a>on</h3> <p>This property holds whether this tool button is on. <p>This property has no effect on <a href="tqbutton.html#isToggleButton">non-toggling - buttons.</a> The default is FALSE (i.e. off). + buttons.</a> The default is false (i.e. off). <p> <p>See also <a href="#toggleButton-prop">toggleButton</a> and <a href="#toggle">toggle</a>(). <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setOn">setOn</a>(). @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ default. <p>TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant signal in the <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> in which it resides. We strongly recommend that you use <a href="tqmainwindow.html#setUsesBigPixmaps">TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps</a>() instead. -<p> This property's default is TRUE. +<p> This property's default is true. <p> <b>Warning:</b> If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get the geometry right. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ the geometry right. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setUsesBigPixmap">setUsesBigPixmap</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#usesBigPixmap">usesBigPixmap</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="usesTextLabel-prop"></a>usesTextLabel</h3> <p>This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap. -<p>The default is FALSE. +<p>The default is false. <p> TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the <a href="tqmainwindow.html">TQMainWindow</a> in which is resides. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtooltip.html b/doc/html/tqtooltip.html index b847515da..145c6654e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtooltip.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtooltip.html @@ -299,8 +299,8 @@ Sets the font for all tool tips to <em>font</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setGloballyEnabled"></a>TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when -needed); if <em>enable</em> is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled +If <em>enable</em> is true sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when +needed); if <em>enable</em> is false sets all tool tips to be disabled (never shown). <p> By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects all tool tips in the entire application. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtooltipgroup.html b/doc/html/tqtooltipgroup.html index 63ddbee19..78cfef032 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtooltipgroup.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtooltipgroup.html @@ -97,10 +97,10 @@ Constructs a tool tip group called <em>name</em>, with parent <em>parent</em>. Destroys this tool tip group and all tool tips in it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="delay"></a>TQToolTipGroup::delay () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the display of the group text is delayed; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the display of the group text is delayed; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtooltipgroup.html#delay-prop">"delay"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="enabled"></a>TQToolTipGroup::enabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if tool tips in the group are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if tool tips in the group are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqtooltipgroup.html#enabled-prop">"enabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="removeTip"></a>TQToolTipGroup::removeTip ()<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> @@ -128,14 +128,14 @@ tip. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="delay-prop"></a>delay</h3> <p>This property holds whether the display of the group text is delayed. -<p>If set to TRUE (the default), the group text is displayed at the +<p>If set to true (the default), the group text is displayed at the same time as the tool tip. Otherwise, the group text is displayed immediately when the cursor enters the widget. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setDelay">setDelay</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#delay">delay</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="enabled-prop"></a>enabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether tool tips in the group are enabled. -<p>This property's default is TRUE. +<p>This property's default is true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setEnabled">setEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#enabled">enabled</a>(). <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqtranslator-h.html b/doc/html/tqtranslator-h.html index dba99aace..52b5ba293 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtranslator-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtranslator-h.html @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ public: enum Prefix { NoPrefix, Hash, HashContext, HashContextSourceText, HashContextSourceTextComment }; - void write( TQDataStream & s, bool strip = FALSE, + void write( TQDataStream & s, bool strip = false, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const; Prefix commonPrefix( const TQTranslatorMessage& ) const; diff --git a/doc/html/tqtranslator.html b/doc/html/tqtranslator.html index 1a3f06ce7..44076ed0b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtranslator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtranslator.html @@ -179,8 +179,8 @@ Empties this translator of all contents. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="contains"></a>TQTranslator::contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this message file contains a message with the key -(<em>context</em>, <em>sourceText</em>, <em>comment</em>); otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this message file contains a message with the key +(<em>context</em>, <em>sourceText</em>, <em>comment</em>); otherwise returns false. <p> This function works with stripped translator files. <p> (This is is a one-liner that calls <a href="#findMessage">findMessage</a>().) @@ -212,15 +212,15 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse <p> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQTranslator::isEmpty () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this translator is empty, otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this translator is empty, otherwise returns false. This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="load"></a>TQTranslator::load ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filename, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & directory = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & suffix = TQString::null ) </h3> Loads <em>filename</em>, which may be an absolute file name or relative to <em>directory</em>. The previous contents of this translator object -is discarded. Returns TRUE if the file is loaded successfully; -otherwise returns FALSE. +is discarded. Returns true if the file is loaded successfully; +otherwise returns false. <p> If the full file name does not exist, other file names are tried in the following order: <p> <ol type=1> @@ -252,8 +252,8 @@ readable file from this list: This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> <p> Loads the .qm file data <em>data</em> of length <em>len</em> into the -translator. Returns TRUE if the data is loaded successfully; -otherwise returns FALSE. +translator. Returns true if the data is loaded successfully; +otherwise returns false. <p> The data is not copied. The caller must be able to guarantee that <em>data</em> will not be deleted or modified. diff --git a/doc/html/tqtranslatormessage.html b/doc/html/tqtranslatormessage.html index 103ede788..315cfe7fd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqtranslatormessage.html +++ b/doc/html/tqtranslatormessage.html @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ properties. <li class=fn>void <a href="#setTranslation"><b>setTranslation</b></a> ( const TQString & translation )</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#translation"><b>translation</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>enum <a href="#Prefix-enum"><b>Prefix</b></a> { NoPrefix, Hash, HashContext, HashContextSourceText, HashContextSourceTextComment }</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#write"><b>write</b></a> ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = FALSE, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#write"><b>write</b></a> ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = false, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const</li> <li class=fn>Prefix <a href="#commonPrefix"><b>commonPrefix</b></a> ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#operator-eq-eq"><b>operator==</b></a> ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#operator!-eq"><b>operator!=</b></a> ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const</li> @@ -146,21 +146,21 @@ in future versions of TQt. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator!= ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is different from -that of <em>m</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the extended key of this object is different from +that of <em>m</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator< ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is +Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before than that of <em>m</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt-eq"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator<= ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is +<p> Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before that of <em>m</em> or if they are equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator= ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) </h3> @@ -169,21 +169,21 @@ reference to this translator message. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator== ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is equal to that of -<em>m</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the extended key of this object is equal to that of +<em>m</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator> ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is -lexicographically after that of <em>m</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the extended key of this object is +lexicographically after that of <em>m</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt-eq"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::operator>= ( const <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html">TQTranslatorMessage</a> & m ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is +<p> Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of <em>m</em> or if they are equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setTranslation"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::setTranslation ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & translation ) </h3> @@ -204,11 +204,11 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <p> Returns the translation of the source text (e.g., "&Sauvegarder"). <p> <p>See also <a href="#setTranslation">setTranslation</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="write"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::write ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & stream, bool strip = FALSE, <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html#Prefix-enum">Prefix</a> prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="write"></a>TQTranslatorMessage::write ( <a href="tqdatastream.html">TQDataStream</a> & stream, bool strip = false, <a href="tqtranslatormessage.html#Prefix-enum">Prefix</a> prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const </h3> Writes this translator message to the <em>stream</em>. If <em>strip</em> is -FALSE (the default), all the information in the message is -written. If <em>strip</em> is TRUE, only the part of the extended key +false (the default), all the information in the message is +written. If <em>strip</em> is true, only the part of the extended key specified by <em>prefix</em> is written with the translation (<a href="#Prefix-enum">HashContextSourceTextComment</a> by default). <p> <p>See also <a href="#commonPrefix">commonPrefix</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tquridrag.html b/doc/html/tquridrag.html index bab4c1fa1..03251314f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tquridrag.html +++ b/doc/html/tquridrag.html @@ -96,15 +96,15 @@ Destroys the object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canDecode"></a>TQUriDrag::canDecode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <a href="#decode">decode</a>() would be able to decode <em>e</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +Returns true if <a href="#decode">decode</a>() would be able to decode <em>e</em>; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decode"></a>TQUriDrag::decode ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqstrlist.html">TQStrList</a> & l )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Decodes URIs from <em>e</em>, placing the result in <em>l</em> (which is first cleared). -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>e</em> contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>e</em> contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise +returns false. <p>Example: <a href="dirview-example.html#x1707">dirview/dirview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decodeLocalFiles"></a>TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & l )<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ returns FALSE. Decodes URIs from the mime source event <em>e</em>, converts them to local files if they refer to local files, and places them in <em>l</em> (which is first cleared). -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>contained</em> a valid list of URIs; otherwise -returns FALSE. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files. +<p> Returns true if <em>contained</em> a valid list of URIs; otherwise +returns false. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files. <p>Example: <a href="fileiconview-example.html#x873">fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="decodeToUnicodeUris"></a>TQUriDrag::decodeToUnicodeUris ( const <a href="tqmimesource.html">TQMimeSource</a> * e, <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & l )<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ returns FALSE. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files. Decodes URIs from the mime source event <em>e</em>, converts them to Unicode URIs (only useful for displaying to humans), placing them in <em>l</em> (which is first cleared). -<p> Returns TRUE if <em>contained</em> a valid list of URIs; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if <em>contained</em> a valid list of URIs; otherwise +returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqcstring.html">TQCString</a> <a name="localFileToUri"></a>TQUriDrag::localFileToUri ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & filename )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqurl-h.html b/doc/html/tqurl-h.html index 530a121a7..4c3ce2718 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqurl-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqurl-h.html @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public: TQUrl(); TQUrl( const TQString& url ); TQUrl( const TQUrl& url ); - TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ); + TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ); virtual ~TQUrl(); TQString protocol() const; @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ public: virtual void setPort( int port ); bool hasPort() const; - TQString path( bool correct = TRUE ) const; + TQString path( bool correct = true ) const; virtual void setPath( const TQString& path ); bool hasPath() const; @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public: static void encode( TQString& url ); operator TQString() const; - virtual TQString toString( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQString toString( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const; virtual bool cdUp(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqurl.html b/doc/html/tqurl.html index 720e8f343..600fe522f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqurl.html +++ b/doc/html/tqurl.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrl"><b>TQUrl</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrl-2"><b>TQUrl</b></a> ( const TQString & url )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrl-3"><b>TQUrl</b></a> ( const TQUrl & url )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQUrl-4"><b>TQUrl</b></a> ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQUrl-4"><b>TQUrl</b></a> ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQUrl"><b>~TQUrl</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#protocol"><b>protocol</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setProtocol"><b>setProtocol</b></a> ( const TQString & protocol )</li> @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>int <a href="#port"><b>port</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPort"><b>setPort</b></a> ( int port )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasPort"><b>hasPort</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#path"><b>path</b></a> ( bool correct = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#path"><b>path</b></a> ( bool correct = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setPath"><b>setPath</b></a> ( const TQString & path )</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#hasPath"><b>hasPath</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setEncodedPathAndQuery"><b>setEncodedPathAndQuery</b></a> ( const TQString & pathAndQuery )</li> @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>bool <a href="#operator-eq-eq"><b>operator==</b></a> ( const TQUrl & url ) const</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#operator-eq-eq-2"><b>operator==</b></a> ( const TQString & url ) const</li> <li class=fn><a href="#operator-TQString"><b>operator TQString</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString"><b>toString</b></a> ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#toString"><b>toString</b></a> ( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#cdUp"><b>cdUp</b></a> ()</li> </ul> <h2>Static Public Members</h2> @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ following: <p> Use the static functions, <a href="#encode">encode</a>() and <a href="#decode">decode</a>() to encode or decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.) -The <a href="#isRelativeUrl">isRelativeUrl</a>() static function returns TRUE if the given +The <a href="#isRelativeUrl">isRelativeUrl</a>() static function returns true if the given string is a relative URL. <p> If you want to use a URL to work on a hierarchical structure (e.g. a local or remote filesystem), you might want to use the subclass @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ assumed. </h3> Copy constructor. Copies the data of <em>url</em>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQUrl-4"></a>TQUrl::TQUrl ( const <a href="tqurl.html">TQUrl</a> & url, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQUrl-4"></a>TQUrl::TQUrl ( const <a href="tqurl.html">TQUrl</a> & url, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ) </h3> Constructs an URL taking <em>url</em> as the base (context) and <em>relUrl</em> as a relative URL to <em>url</em>. If <em>relUrl</em> is not relative, @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ directory, even if the path has no slash at the end. But if you want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by the file name of <em>relUrl</em> (if it contains one), set <em>checkSlash</em> -to TRUE. +to true. <h3 class=fn><a name="~TQUrl"></a>TQUrl::~TQUrl ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -268,37 +268,37 @@ path has a slash at the end, an empty string is returned here. <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x696">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasHost"></a>TQUrl::hasHost () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setHost">setHost</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPassword"></a>TQUrl::hasPassword () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns +false. <p> <b>Warning:</b> Passwords passed in URLs are normally <em>insecure</em>; this is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPassword">setPassword</a>() and <a href="#setUser">setUser</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPath"></a>TQUrl::hasPath () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#path">path</a>() and <a href="#setPath">setPath</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasPort"></a>TQUrl::hasPort () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPort">setPort</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasRef"></a>TQUrl::hasRef () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setRef">setRef</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasUser"></a>TQUrl::hasUser () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setUser">setUser</a>() and <a href="#setPassword">setPassword</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="host"></a>TQUrl::host () const @@ -309,16 +309,16 @@ Returns the hostname of the URL. <p>Example: <a href="archivesearch-example.html#x485">network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isLocalFile"></a>TQUrl::isLocalFile () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="tqdir-example.html#x1849">tqdir/tqdir.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isRelativeUrl"></a>TQUrl::isRelativeUrl ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & url )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>url</em> is relative; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>url</em> is relative; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQUrl::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. A URL +Returns true if the URL is valid; otherwise returns false. A URL is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example. <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-TQString"></a>TQUrl::operator TQString () const @@ -339,14 +339,14 @@ assumed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQUrl::operator== ( const <a href="tqurl.html">TQUrl</a> & url ) const </h3> -Compares this URL with <em>url</em> and returns TRUE if they are equal; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Compares this URL with <em>url</em> and returns true if they are equal; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-2"></a>TQUrl::operator== ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & url ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Compares this URL with <em>url</em>. <em>url</em> is parsed first. Returns -TRUE if <em>url</em> is equal to this url; otherwise returns FALSE. +true if <em>url</em> is equal to this url; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="parse"></a>TQUrl::parse ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & url )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -359,9 +359,9 @@ Returns the password of the URL. is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setPassword">setPassword</a>() and <a href="#setUser">setUser</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="path"></a>TQUrl::path ( bool correct = TRUE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="path"></a>TQUrl::path ( bool correct = true ) const </h3> -Returns the path of the URL. If <em>correct</em> is TRUE, the path is +Returns the path of the URL. If <em>correct</em> is true, the path is cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things like "/../..", etc). Otherwise <a href="#path">path</a>() returns exactly the path that was parsed or set. @@ -452,10 +452,10 @@ Sets the reference of the URL to <em>txt</em>. <em>txt</em> must be encoded. Sets the username of the URL to <em>user</em>. <p> <p>See also <a href="#user">user</a>() and <a href="#setPassword">setPassword</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toString"></a>TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toString"></a>TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If <em>encodedPath</em> is TRUE the path in the returned string is encoded. If -<em>forcePrependProtocol</em> is TRUE and <em>encodedPath</em> looks like a +Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If <em>encodedPath</em> is true the path in the returned string is encoded. If +<em>forcePrependProtocol</em> is true and <em>encodedPath</em> looks like a local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended. <p> <p>See also <a href="#encode">encode</a>() and <a href="#decode">decode</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqurlinfo.html b/doc/html/tqurlinfo.html index d171d05fd..3f6155b55 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqurlinfo.html +++ b/doc/html/tqurlinfo.html @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Constructs an invalid TQUrlInfo object with default values. </h3> Constructs a TQUrlInfo object with information about the file <em>file</em> in the <em>path</em>. It tries to find the information about the <em>file</em> in the <a href="tqurloperator.html">TQUrlOperator</a> <em>path</em>. <p> If the information is not found, this constructor creates an -invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() returns FALSE. You should always +invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>() returns false. You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values of any getter functions. <p> If <em>file</em> is empty, it defaults to the TQUrlOperator <em>path</em>, i.e. @@ -155,13 +155,13 @@ affected. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="equal"></a>TQUrlInfo::equal ( const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i1, const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i2, int sortBy )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>i1</em> equals to <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>i1</em> equals to <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by <em>sortBy</em>. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="greaterThan"></a>TQUrlInfo::greaterThan ( const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i1, const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i2, int sortBy )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>i1</em> is greater than <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns -FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified +Returns true if <em>i1</em> is greater than <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns +false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by <em>sortBy</em>. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. @@ -172,33 +172,33 @@ Returns the group of the URL. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDir"></a>TQUrlInfo::isDir () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="ftpclient-example.html#x773">network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h</a> and <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x697">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isExecutable"></a>TQUrlInfo::isExecutable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is executable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is executable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFile"></a>TQUrlInfo::isFile () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is a file; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is a file; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isReadable"></a>TQUrlInfo::isReadable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is readable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is readable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isSymLink"></a>TQUrlInfo::isSymLink () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQUrlInfo::isValid () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns false. Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For example, a call to <a href="tqurloperator.html#info">TQUrlOperator::info</a>() might return a an invalid TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ the values. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isWritable"></a>TQUrlInfo::isWritable () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is writable; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is writable; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqdatetime.html">TQDateTime</a> <a name="lastModified"></a>TQUrlInfo::lastModified () const @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Returns the date when the URL was last read. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="lessThan"></a>TQUrlInfo::lessThan ( const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i1, const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i2, int sortBy )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if <em>i1</em> is less than <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if <em>i1</em> is less than <em>i2</em>; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by <em>sortBy</em>. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="name"></a>TQUrlInfo::name () const @@ -239,8 +239,8 @@ Assigns the values of <em>ui</em> to this TQUrlInfo object. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQUrlInfo::operator== ( const <a href="tqurlinfo.html">TQUrlInfo</a> & i ) const </h3> -Compares this TQUrlInfo with <em>i</em> and returns TRUE if they are -equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +Compares this TQUrlInfo with <em>i</em> and returns true if they are +equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="owner"></a>TQUrlInfo::owner () const </h3> @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@ to test for certain permissions. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDir"></a>TQUrlInfo::setDir ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is -FALSE then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally +If <em>b</em> is true then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is +false then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.) <p> If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ turns it into a valid one. <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x698">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFile"></a>TQUrlInfo::setFile ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>b</em> is TRUE then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is FALSE +If <em>b</em> is true then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is false then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.) @@ -315,8 +315,8 @@ turns it into a valid one. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setReadable"></a>TQUrlInfo::setReadable ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Specifies that the URL is readable if <em>b</em> is TRUE and not -readable if <em>b</em> is FALSE. +Specifies that the URL is readable if <em>b</em> is true and not +readable if <em>b</em> is false. <p> If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). @@ -331,8 +331,8 @@ turns it into a valid one. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSymLink"></a>TQUrlInfo::setSymLink ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if <em>b</em> is TRUE -and that it does not if <em>b</em> is FALSE. +Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if <em>b</em> is true +and that it does not if <em>b</em> is false. <p> If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). @@ -340,8 +340,8 @@ turns it into a valid one. <p>Example: <a href="networkprotocol-example.html#x702">network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setWritable"></a>TQUrlInfo::setWritable ( bool b )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Specifies that the URL is writable if <em>b</em> is TRUE and not -writable if <em>b</em> is FALSE. +Specifies that the URL is writable if <em>b</em> is true and not +writable if <em>b</em> is false. <p> If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isValid">isValid</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqurloperator-h.html b/doc/html/tqurloperator-h.html index f045bae18..6f2f3c36c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqurloperator-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqurloperator-h.html @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public: TQUrlOperator(); TQUrlOperator( const TQString &urL ); TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url ); - TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ); + TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ); virtual ~TQUrlOperator(); virtual void setPath( const TQString& path ); @@ -111,8 +111,8 @@ public: virtual const TQNetworkOperation *rename( const TQString &oldname, const TQString &newname ); virtual const TQNetworkOperation *get( const TQString &location = TQString::null ); virtual const TQNetworkOperation *put( const TQByteArray &data, const TQString &location = TQString::null ); - virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy( const TQString &from, const TQString &to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE ); - virtual void copy( const TQStringList &files, const TQString &dest, bool move = FALSE ); + virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy( const TQString &from, const TQString &to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true ); + virtual void copy( const TQStringList &files, const TQString &dest, bool move = false ); virtual bool isDir( bool *ok = 0 ); virtual void setNameFilter( const TQString &nameFilter ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqurloperator.html b/doc/html/tqurloperator.html index 325376da6..a9630e5ee 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqurloperator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqurloperator.html @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrlOperator"><b>TQUrlOperator</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrlOperator-2"><b>TQUrlOperator</b></a> ( const TQString & url )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#TQUrlOperator-3"><b>TQUrlOperator</b></a> ( const TQUrlOperator & url )</li> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQUrlOperator-4"><b>TQUrlOperator</b></a> ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQUrlOperator-4"><b>TQUrlOperator</b></a> ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual <a href="#~TQUrlOperator"><b>~TQUrlOperator</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQNetworkOperation * <a href="#listChildren"><b>listChildren</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQNetworkOperation * <a href="#mkdir"><b>mkdir</b></a> ( const TQString & dirname )</li> @@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual const TQNetworkOperation * <a href="#rename"><b>rename</b></a> ( const TQString & oldname, const TQString & newname )</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQNetworkOperation * <a href="#get"><b>get</b></a> ( const TQString & location = TQString::null )</li> <li class=fn>virtual const TQNetworkOperation * <a href="#put"><b>put</b></a> ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> <a href="#copy"><b>copy</b></a> ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#copy-2"><b>copy</b></a> ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> <a href="#copy"><b>copy</b></a> ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#copy-2"><b>copy</b></a> ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#isDir"><b>isDir</b></a> ( bool * ok = 0 )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setNameFilter"><b>setNameFilter</b></a> ( const TQString & nameFilter )</li> <li class=fn>TQString <a href="#nameFilter"><b>nameFilter</b></a> () const</li> @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ assumed. </h3> Constructs a copy of <em>url</em>. -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQUrlOperator-4"></a>TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const <a href="tqurloperator.html">TQUrlOperator</a> & url, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQUrlOperator-4"></a>TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const <a href="tqurloperator.html">TQUrlOperator</a> & url, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ) </h3> Constructs a TQUrlOperator. The URL on which this TQUrlOperator operates is constructed out of the arguments <em>url</em>, <em>relUrl</em> and @@ -179,11 +179,11 @@ state changes. <em>state</em> describes the new state, which is a <p> <em>data</em> is a string that describes the change of the connection. This can be used to display a message to the user. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><TQNetworkOperation> <a name="copy"></a>TQUrlOperator::copy ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & from, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqptrlist.html">TQPtrList</a><TQNetworkOperation> <a name="copy"></a>TQUrlOperator::copy ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & from, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Copies the file <em>from</em> to <em>to</em>. If <em>move</em> is TRUE, the file is +Copies the file <em>from</em> to <em>to</em>. If <em>move</em> is true, the file is moved (copied and removed). <em>from</em> must point to a file and <em>to</em> -must point to a directory (into which <em>from</em> is copied) unless <em>toPath</em> is set to FALSE. If <em>toPath</em> is set to FALSE then the <em>to</em> variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination +must point to a directory (into which <em>from</em> is copied) unless <em>toPath</em> is set to false. If <em>toPath</em> is set to false then the <em>to</em> variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination file path + file name). The copying is done using the <a href="#get">get</a>() and <a href="#put">put</a>() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of the operation, connect to the <a href="#dataTransferProgress">dataTransferProgress</a>() signal. Bear @@ -203,10 +203,10 @@ single <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a>, but rather a li the order: <a href="#get">get</a>(), <a href="#put">put</a>() and (if applicable) remove(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#get">get</a>() and <a href="#put">put</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="copy-2"></a>TQUrlOperator::copy ( const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & files, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dest, bool move = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="copy-2"></a>TQUrlOperator::copy ( const <a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> & files, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & dest, bool move = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Copies the <em>files</em> to the directory <em>dest</em>. If <em>move</em> is TRUE +<p> Copies the <em>files</em> to the directory <em>dest</em>. If <em>move</em> is true the files are moved, not copied. <em>dest</em> must point to a directory. <p> This function calls <a href="#copy">copy</a>() for each entry in <em>files</em> in turn. You @@ -320,11 +320,11 @@ finished <a href="#listChildren">listChildren</a>() operation. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDir"></a>TQUrlOperator::isDir ( bool * ok = 0 )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false. This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool -pointer as the <em>ok</em> argument, <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the result -of this function is known to be correct, and to FALSE otherwise. +pointer as the <em>ok</em> argument, <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the result +of this function is known to be correct, and to false otherwise. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="itemChanged"></a>TQUrlOperator::itemChanged ( <a href="tqnetworkoperation.html">TQNetworkOperation</a> * op )<tt> [signal]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tquuid-h.html b/doc/html/tquuid-h.html index 9abaf6975..0242b2b3e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tquuid-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tquuid-h.html @@ -155,13 +155,13 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQUuid uint i; if ( data1 != orig.data1 || data2 != orig.data2 || data3 != orig.data3 ) - return FALSE; + return false; for( i = 0; i < 8; i++ ) if ( data4[i] != orig.data4[i] ) - return FALSE; + return false; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool operator!=(const TQUuid &orig ) const @@ -197,13 +197,13 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQUuid uint i; if ( data1 != guid.Data1 || data2 != guid.Data2 || data3 != guid.Data3 ) - return FALSE; + return false; for( i = 0; i < 8; i++ ) if ( data4[i] != guid.Data4[i] ) - return FALSE; + return false; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool operator!=( const GUID &guid ) const diff --git a/doc/html/tquuid.html b/doc/html/tquuid.html index bb16e2b3d..ad2a5bfeb 100644 --- a/doc/html/tquuid.html +++ b/doc/html/tquuid.html @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ tool to generate new UUIDs, for example, uuidgen and guidgen. <p> UUIDs can be constructed from numeric values or from strings, or using the static <a href="#createUuid">createUuid</a>() function. They can be converted to a string with <a href="#toString">toString</a>(). UUIDs have a <a href="#variant">variant</a>() and a <a href="#version">version</a>(), -and null UUIDs return TRUE from <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). +and null UUIDs return true from <a href="#isNull">isNull</a>(). <hr><h2>Member Type Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn><a name="Variant-enum"></a>TQUuid::Variant</h3> @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ same or any other system, networked or not. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQUuid::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this is the null UUID -{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this is the null UUID +{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a name="operator-TQString"></a>TQUuid::operator TQString () const </h3> @@ -162,15 +162,15 @@ Returns TRUE if this is the null UUID <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQUuid::operator!= ( const <a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & other ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the <em>other</em> TQUuid are different; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this TQUuid and the <em>other</em> TQUuid are different; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-lt"></a>TQUuid::operator< ( const <a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & other ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant, +<p> Returns true if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically before the <em>other</em> TQUuid; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#variant">variant</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQUuid::operator= ( const <a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & uuid ) @@ -181,15 +181,15 @@ otherwise returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQUuid::operator== ( const <a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & other ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the <em>other</em> TQUuid are identical; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this TQUuid and the <em>other</em> TQUuid are identical; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-gt"></a>TQUuid::operator> ( const <a href="tquuid.html">TQUuid</a> & other ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant, +<p> Returns true if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically after the <em>other</em> TQUuid; -otherwise returns FALSE. +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#variant">variant</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="toString"></a>TQUuid::toString () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluelist-h.html b/doc/html/tqvaluelist-h.html index 2bfee1f14..e2bf06f13 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluelist-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluelist-h.html @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ public: bool operator== ( const std::list<T>& l ) const { if ( size() != l.size() ) - return FALSE; + return false; const_iterator it2 = begin(); #if !defined(Q_CC_MIPS) typename @@ -503,8 +503,8 @@ public: std::list<T>::const_iterator it = l.begin(); for ( ; it2 != end(); ++it2, ++it ) if ( !((*it2) == (*it)) ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } #endif bool operator== ( const TQValueList<T>& l ) const; @@ -614,13 +614,13 @@ template <class T> TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES bool TQValueList<T>::operator== ( const TQValueList<T>& l ) const { if ( size() != l.size() ) - return FALSE; + return false; const_iterator it2 = begin(); const_iterator it = l.begin(); for( ; it != l.end(); ++it, ++it2 ) if ( !( *it == *it2 ) ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } template <class T> diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluelist.html b/doc/html/tqvaluelist.html index fc3c1289d..d659bf43b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluelist.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluelist.html @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range. </h3> <p> Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last -item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined. +item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns true), the return value is undefined. <p> This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to <a href="#last">last</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#front">front</a>(). @@ -444,8 +444,8 @@ This iterator equals <a href="#constBegin">constBegin</a>() if the list is empty <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="empty"></a>TQValueList::empty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#size">size</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelist.html#iterator">iterator</a> <a name="end"></a>TQValueList::end () @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ Returns -1 if no item matched. </h3> <p> Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no -first item (i.e. <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() returns TRUE), the return value is +first item (i.e. <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>() returns true), the return value is undefined. <p> <p>See also <a href="#last">last</a>(). @@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ there is no last item. </h3> <p> Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no -first item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns TRUE), the return value is +first item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns true), the return value is undefined. <p> This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to <a href="#first">first</a>(). @@ -598,8 +598,8 @@ iterator, <em>it</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQValueList::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns +false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <p>Examples: <a href="simple-font-demo-example.html#x2856">fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp</a> and <a href="mail-example.html#x720">network/mail/smtp.cpp</a>. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ FALSE. </h3> <p> Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last -item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined. +item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns true), the return value is undefined. <h3 class=fn>const T & <a name="last-2"></a>TQValueList::last () const </h3> @@ -618,8 +618,8 @@ item (i.e. <a href="#empty">empty</a>() returns TRUE), the return value is undef </h3> <p> Compares both lists. -<p> Returns TRUE if this list and <em>l</em> are unequal; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this list and <em>l</em> are unequal; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><T> <a name="operator+"></a>TQValueList::operator+ ( const <a href="tqvaluelist.html">TQValueList</a><T> & l ) const </h3> @@ -666,15 +666,15 @@ operation. </h3> <p> Compares both lists. -<p> Returns TRUE if this list and <em>l</em> are equal; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this list and <em>l</em> are equal; otherwise returns +false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-2"></a>TQValueList::operator== ( const std::list<T> & l ) const </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if this list and <em>l</em> are equal; otherwise returns -FALSE. +<p> Returns true if this list and <em>l</em> are equal; otherwise returns +false. <p> This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers. <h3 class=fn>const T & <a name="operator[]"></a>TQValueList::operator[] ( <a href="tqvaluelist.html#size_type">size_type</a> i ) const diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluelistconstiterator.html b/doc/html/tqvaluelistconstiterator.html index d17d0f5e5..67b7bdc07 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluelistconstiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluelistconstiterator.html @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ The type of value. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQValueListConstIterator::operator!= ( const <a href="tqvaluelistconstiterator.html">TQValueListConstIterator</a><T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this iterator with <em>it</em> and returns TRUE if they point -to different items; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this iterator with <em>it</em> and returns true if they point +to different items; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>const T & <a name="operator*"></a>TQValueListConstIterator::operator* () const </h3> @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQValueListConstIterator::operator== ( const <a href="tqvaluelistconstiterator.html">TQValueListConstIterator</a><T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this iterator with <em>it</em> and returns TRUE if they point -to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this iterator with <em>it</em> and returns true if they point +to the same item; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluelistiterator.html b/doc/html/tqvaluelistiterator.html index 5b8f70efd..74e2dc6de 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluelistiterator.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluelistiterator.html @@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ The type of value, T. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQValueListIterator::operator!= ( const <a href="tqvaluelistiterator.html">TQValueListIterator</a><T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this iterator and <em>it</em> and returns TRUE if they point to -different items; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this iterator and <em>it</em> and returns true if they point to +different items; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>T & <a name="operator*"></a>TQValueListIterator::operator* () </h3> @@ -190,8 +190,8 @@ past begin() causes undefined results. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQValueListIterator::operator== ( const <a href="tqvaluelistiterator.html">TQValueListIterator</a><T> & it ) const </h3> -<p> Compares this iterator and <em>it</em> and returns TRUE if they point to -the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Compares this iterator and <em>it</em> and returns true if they point to +the same item; otherwise returns false. <!-- eof --> <hr><p> diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluevector-h.html b/doc/html/tqvaluevector-h.html index c0b8f125e..35df2d6fc 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluevector-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluevector-h.html @@ -490,12 +490,12 @@ public: // ### remove in TQt 4.0 bool operator==( const TQValueVector<T>& x ) { - return size()==x.size() ? tqEqual( constBegin(), constEnd(), x.begin()) : FALSE; + return size()==x.size() ? tqEqual( constBegin(), constEnd(), x.begin()) : false; } bool operator==( const TQValueVector<T>& x ) const { - return size()==x.size() ? tqEqual( begin(), end(), x.begin() ) : FALSE; + return size()==x.size() ? tqEqual( begin(), end(), x.begin() ) : false; } typedef T ValueType; diff --git a/doc/html/tqvaluevector.html b/doc/html/tqvaluevector.html index 29e7beb9b..8e47f7a4a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvaluevector.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvaluevector.html @@ -398,9 +398,9 @@ TQValueVector is tuned for performance, not for error checking. <p> Returns a reference to the element with index <em>i</em>. If <em>ok</em> is non-null, and the index <em>i</em> is out of range, *<em>ok</em> is set to -FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index <em>i</em> +false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index <em>i</em> is within the range of the vector, and <em>ok</em> is non-null, *<em>ok</em> -is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. +is set to true and the returned reference is well defined. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluevector.html#const_reference">const_reference</a> <a name="at-2"></a>TQValueVector::at ( <a href="tqvaluevector.html#size_type">size_type</a> i, bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> @@ -408,9 +408,9 @@ is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns a const reference to the element with index <em>i</em>. If <em>ok</em> is non-null, and the index <em>i</em> is out of range, *<em>ok</em> is set to -FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index <em>i</em> +false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index <em>i</em> is within the range of the vector, and <em>ok</em> is non-null, *<em>ok</em> -is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. +is set to true and the returned reference is well defined. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluevector.html#reference">reference</a> <a name="back"></a>TQValueVector::back () </h3> @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ vector. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="empty"></a>TQValueVector::empty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. Equivalent to <a href="#size">size</a>()==0, only faster. <p> This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to <a href="#isEmpty">isEmpty</a>(). @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ there is no first element, this function has undefined behavior. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQValueVector::isEmpty () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; returns FALSE otherwise. +<p> Returns true if the vector is empty; returns false otherwise. <p> <p>See also <a href="#count">count</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluevector.html#reference">reference</a> <a name="last"></a>TQValueVector::last () @@ -585,15 +585,15 @@ copied. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQValueVector::operator== ( const <a href="tqvaluevector.html">TQValueVector</a><T> & x ) const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each -corresponding element in <em>x</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if each element in this vector equals each +corresponding element in <em>x</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq-2"></a>TQValueVector::operator== ( const <a href="tqvaluevector.html">TQValueVector</a><T> & x ) </h3> <p> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each -corresponding element in <em>x</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if each element in this vector equals each +corresponding element in <em>x</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluevector.html#reference">reference</a> <a name="operator[]"></a>TQValueVector::operator[] ( <a href="tqvaluevector.html#size_type">size_type</a> i ) </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqvariant-h.html b/doc/html/tqvariant-h.html index acf665fa4..65c7b08e8 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvariant-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvariant-h.html @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ private: Private* d; public: - void* rawAccess( void* ptr = 0, Type typ = Invalid, bool deepCopy = FALSE ); + void* rawAccess( void* ptr = 0, Type typ = Invalid, bool deepCopy = false ); }; // down here for GCC 2.7.* compatibility diff --git a/doc/html/tqvariant.html b/doc/html/tqvariant.html index 96ec899c7..01124146b 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqvariant.html +++ b/doc/html/tqvariant.html @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ defined type with no value set. <pre> TQVariant x, y( TQString() ), z( TQString("") ); x.<a href="#asInt">asInt</a>(); - // x.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() == TRUE, y.isNull() == TRUE, z.isNull() == FALSE + // x.<a href="#isNull">isNull</a>() == true, y.isNull() == true, z.isNull() == false </pre> <p> See the <a href="collection.html">Collection Classes</a>. @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ Returns the variant's value as unsigned long long reference. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canCast"></a>TQVariant::canCast ( <a href="tqvariant.html#Type-enum">Type</a> t ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the variant's type can be cast to the requested +Returns true if the variant's type can be cast to the requested type, <em>t</em>. Such casting is done automatically when calling the <a href="#toInt">toInt</a>(), <a href="#toBool">toBool</a>(), ... or <a href="#asInt">asInt</a>(), <a href="#asBool">asBool</a>(), ... methods. <p> The following casts are done automatically: @@ -763,8 +763,8 @@ Casts the variant to the requested type. If the cast cannot be done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type <em>t</em> is TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type <em>t</em> -is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns TRUE if the current type of -the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns FALSE. +is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns true if the current type of +the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="clear"></a>TQVariant::clear () @@ -774,13 +774,13 @@ used. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isNull"></a>TQVariant::isNull () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this is a NULL variant, FALSE otherwise. +Returns true if this is a NULL variant, false otherwise. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isValid"></a>TQVariant::isValid () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the storage type of this variant is not -TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the storage type of this variant is not +TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelistconstiterator.html">TQValueListConstIterator</a><TQVariant> <a name="listBegin"></a>TQVariant::listBegin () const </h3> @@ -826,8 +826,8 @@ representation, the variant is set to <a href="#Type-enum">Invalid</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQVariant::operator!= ( const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & v ) const </h3> -Compares this TQVariant with <em>v</em> and returns TRUE if they are not -equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +Compares this TQVariant with <em>v</em> and returns true if they are not +equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & <a name="operator-eq"></a>TQVariant::operator= ( const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & variant ) </h3> @@ -838,8 +838,8 @@ performed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQVariant::operator== ( const <a href="tqvariant.html">TQVariant</a> & v ) const </h3> -Compares this TQVariant with <em>v</em> and returns TRUE if they are -equal; otherwise returns FALSE. +Compares this TQVariant with <em>v</em> and returns true if they are +equal; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvaluelistconstiterator.html">TQValueListConstIterator</a><TQString> <a name="stringListBegin"></a>TQVariant::stringListBegin () const </h3> @@ -870,11 +870,11 @@ otherwise returns a null TQBitmap. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="toBool"></a>TQVariant::toBool () const </h3> Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool; -otherWise returns FALSE. -<p> Returns TRUE if the variant has a numeric type and its value is +otherWise returns false. +<p> Returns true if the variant has a numeric type and its value is non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise -returns FALSE. +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asBool">asBool</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> <a name="toBrush"></a>TQVariant::toBrush () const @@ -935,8 +935,8 @@ TQt::ISODate format date/time. </h3> Returns the variant as a double if the variant can be cast to Double; otherwise returns 0.0. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the value could be -converted to a double; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the value could be +converted to a double; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asDouble">asDouble</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> <a name="toFont"></a>TQVariant::toFont () const @@ -961,8 +961,8 @@ otherwise returns a null image. </h3> Returns the variant as an int if the variant can be cast to Int; otherwise returns 0. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the value could be -converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the value could be +converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asInt">asInt</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqkeysequence.html">TQKeySequence</a> <a name="toKeySequence"></a>TQVariant::toKeySequence () const @@ -992,8 +992,8 @@ over a copy, e.g. </h3> Returns the variant as a long long int if the variant can be cast to LongLong; otherwise returns 0. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the value could be -converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the value could be +converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asLongLong">asLongLong</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqmap.html">TQMap</a><TQString, TQVariant> <a name="toMap"></a>TQVariant::toMap () const @@ -1104,16 +1104,16 @@ TQt::ISODate format time. </h3> Returns the variant as an unsigned int if the variant can be cast to UInt; otherwise returns 0. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the value could be -converted to an unsigned int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the value could be +converted to an unsigned int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asUInt">asUInt</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn>TQ_ULLONG <a name="toULongLong"></a>TQVariant::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const </h3> Returns the variant as as an unsigned long long int if the variant can be cast to ULongLong; otherwise returns 0. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the value could be -converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is non-null: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the value could be +converted to an int; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#asULongLong">asULongLong</a>() and <a href="#canCast">canCast</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqvariant.html#Type-enum">Type</a> <a name="type"></a>TQVariant::type () const diff --git a/doc/html/tqwaitcondition.html b/doc/html/tqwaitcondition.html index c96c2e449..f0c297cde 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwaitcondition.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwaitcondition.html @@ -140,10 +140,10 @@ Wait on the thread event object. The thread calling this will block until either of these conditions is met: <ul> <li> Another thread signals it using <a href="#wakeOne">wakeOne</a>() or <a href="#wakeAll">wakeAll</a>(). This -function will return TRUE in this case. +function will return true in this case. <li> <em>time</em> milliseconds has elapsed. If <em>time</em> is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be -signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed +signalled). This function will return false if the wait timed out. </ul> <p> <p>See also <a href="#wakeOne">wakeOne</a>() and <a href="#wakeAll">wakeAll</a>(). @@ -158,10 +158,10 @@ immediately. The <em>mutex</em> will be unlocked, and the calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met: <ul> <li> Another thread signals it using <a href="#wakeOne">wakeOne</a>() or <a href="#wakeAll">wakeAll</a>(). This -function will return TRUE in this case. +function will return true in this case. <li> <em>time</em> milliseconds has elapsed. If <em>time</em> is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be -signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed +signalled). This function will return false if the wait timed out. </ul> <p> The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This function diff --git a/doc/html/tqwhatsthis-h.html b/doc/html/tqwhatsthis-h.html index 0062558ba..78128fbee 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwhatsthis-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwhatsthis-h.html @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ public: static void add( TQWidget *, const TQString &); static void remove( TQWidget * ); - static TQString textFor( TQWidget *, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint(), bool includeParents = FALSE ); + static TQString textFor( TQWidget *, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint(), bool includeParents = false ); static TQToolButton * whatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqwhatsthis.html b/doc/html/tqwhatsthis.html index 2084c2d31..6315679af 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwhatsthis.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwhatsthis.html @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?". <li class=fn>void <a href="#setFont"><b>setFont</b></a> ( const TQFont & font )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#add"><b>add</b></a> ( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & text )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#remove"><b>remove</b></a> ( TQWidget * widget )</li> -<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#textFor"><b>textFor</b></a> ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>TQString <a href="#textFor"><b>textFor</b></a> ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = false )</li> <li class=fn>TQToolButton * <a href="#whatsThisButton"><b>whatsThisButton</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#enterWhatsThisMode"><b>enterWhatsThisMode</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>bool <a href="#inWhatsThisMode"><b>inWhatsThisMode</b></a> ()</li> @@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ not be explicitly removed. <p> This virtual function is called when the user clicks inside the "What's this?" window. <em>href</em> is the link the user clicked on, or <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if there was no link. -<p> If the function returns TRUE (the default), the "What's this?" +<p> If the function returns true (the default), the "What's this?" window is closed, otherwise it remains visible. -<p> The default implementation ignores <em>href</em> and returns TRUE. +<p> The default implementation ignores <em>href</em> and returns true. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="display"></a>TQWhatsThis::display ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> @@ -169,8 +169,8 @@ which point the left mouse button is no longer pressed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="inWhatsThisMode"></a>TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the application is in "What's this?" mode; -otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the application is in "What's this?" mode; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#enterWhatsThisMode">enterWhatsThisMode</a>() and <a href="#leaveWhatsThisMode">leaveWhatsThisMode</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="leaveWhatsThisMode"></a>TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & text = TQString::null, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w = 0 )<tt> [static]</tt> @@ -205,13 +205,13 @@ widget that this "What's this?" object documents. If there is no "What's this?" text for the position, <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> is returned. <p> The default implementation returns TQString::null. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="textFor"></a>TQWhatsThis::textFor ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )<tt> [static]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="textFor"></a>TQWhatsThis::textFor ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * w, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = false )<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Returns the what's this text for widget <em>w</em> or <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if there is no "What's this?" help for the widget. <em>pos</em> contains the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent. -<p> If <em>includeParents</em> is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into +<p> If <em>includeParents</em> is true, parent widgets are taken into consideration as well when looking for what's this help text. <p> <p>See also <a href="#add">add</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqwheelevent.html b/doc/html/tqwheelevent.html index ff5bffbeb..4603ed27c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwheelevent.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwheelevent.html @@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ the parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isAccepted"></a>TQWheelEvent::isAccepted () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqt.html#Orientation-enum">Orientation</a> <a name="orientation"></a>TQWheelEvent::orientation () const </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidget-h.html b/doc/html/tqwidget-h.html index d056fd8bb..62cb12e98 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidget-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidget-h.html @@ -372,9 +372,9 @@ public slots: void update( const TQRect& ); void repaint(); void repaint( bool erase ); - void repaint( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=TRUE ); - void repaint( const TQRect &, bool erase = TRUE ); - void repaint( const TQRegion &, bool erase = TRUE ); + void repaint( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=true ); + void repaint( const TQRect &, bool erase = true ); + void repaint( const TQRegion &, bool erase = true ); // Widget management functions @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ public: virtual TQSize minimumSizeHint() const; virtual TQSizePolicy sizePolicy() const; virtual void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy ); - void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ); + void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ); virtual int heightForWidth(int) const; TQRegion clipRegion() const; @@ -437,12 +437,12 @@ public: #endif void updateGeometry(); virtual void reparent( TQWidget *parent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, - bool showIt=FALSE ); + bool showIt=false ); void reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint &, - bool showIt=FALSE ); + bool showIt=false ); #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT void recreate( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, - bool showIt=FALSE ) { reparent(parent,f,p,showIt); } + bool showIt=false ) { reparent(parent,f,p,showIt); } #endif void erase(); @@ -479,20 +479,20 @@ public: // whats this help virtual bool customWhatsThis() const; - TQWidget * parentWidget( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const; + TQWidget * parentWidget( bool sameWindow = false ) const; WState testWState( WState s ) const; WFlags testWFlags( WFlags f ) const; static TQWidget * find( WId ); static TQWidgetMapper *wmapper(); - TQWidget *childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const; - TQWidget *childAt( const TQPoint &, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const; + TQWidget *childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const; + TQWidget *childAt( const TQPoint &, bool includeThis = false ) const; #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - TQRegion clippedRegion(bool do_children=TRUE); - uint clippedSerial(bool do_children=TRUE); + TQRegion clippedRegion(bool do_children=true); + uint clippedSerial(bool do_children=true); #ifndef TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ - CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=TRUE) const; + CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=true) const; #endif #endif @@ -563,10 +563,10 @@ protected: void resetInputContext(); - virtual void create( WId = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, - bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE ); - virtual void destroy( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, - bool destroySubWindows = TRUE ); + virtual void create( WId = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, + bool destroyOldWindow = true ); + virtual void destroy( bool destroyWindow = true, + bool destroySubWindows = true ); uint getWState() const; virtual void setWState( uint ); void clearWState( uint n ); @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ protected: TQFocusData *focusData(); virtual void setKeyCompression(bool); - virtual void setMicroFocusHint(int x, int y, int w, int h, bool text=TRUE, TQFont *f = 0); + virtual void setMicroFocusHint(int x, int y, int w, int h, bool text=true, TQFont *f = 0); #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) void dirtyClippedRegion(bool); @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ private: uint own_id : 1, macDropEnabled : 1; EventHandlerRef window_event; //mac event functions - void propagateUpdates(bool update_rgn=TRUE); + void propagateUpdates(bool update_rgn=true); void update( const TQRegion& ); //friends, way too many - fix this immediately! friend void qt_clean_root_win(); @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ inline void TQWidget::update( const TQRect &r ) { update( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() ); } inline void TQWidget::repaint() -{ repaint( TRUE ); } +{ repaint( true ); } inline void TQWidget::repaint( const TQRect &r, bool erase ) { repaint( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), erase ); } @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ inline void TQWidget::erase( const TQRect &r ) { erase( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() ); } inline bool TQWidget::close() -{ return close( FALSE ); } +{ return close( false ); } inline bool TQWidget::isVisible() const { return testWState(WState_Visible); } diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidget.html b/doc/html/tqwidget.html index 0fe84bb54..afb20de1d 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidget.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidget.html @@ -170,14 +170,14 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual TQSize <a href="#minimumSizeHint"><b>minimumSizeHint</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual TQSizePolicy <a href="#sizePolicy"><b>sizePolicy</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setSizePolicy"><b>setSizePolicy</b></a> ( TQSizePolicy )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#setSizePolicy-2"><b>setSizePolicy</b></a> ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#setSizePolicy-2"><b>setSizePolicy</b></a> ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )</li> <li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#heightForWidth"><b>heightForWidth</b></a> ( int w ) const</li> <li class=fn>TQRegion <a href="#clipRegion"><b>clipRegion</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>TQLayout * <a href="#layout"><b>layout</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#updateGeometry"><b>updateGeometry</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#reparent"><b>reparent</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#reparent-2"><b>reparent</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )</li> -<li class=fn>void recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#reparent"><b>reparent</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#reparent-2"><b>reparent</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )</li> +<li class=fn>void recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#erase-2"><b>erase</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#erase"><b>erase</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#erase-3"><b>erase</b></a> ( const TQRect & r )</li> @@ -196,10 +196,10 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setBackgroundOrigin"><b>setBackgroundOrigin</b></a> ( BackgroundOrigin )</li> <li class=fn>BackgroundOrigin <a href="#backgroundOrigin"><b>backgroundOrigin</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#customWhatsThis"><b>customWhatsThis</b></a> () const</li> -<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#parentWidget"><b>parentWidget</b></a> ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#parentWidget"><b>parentWidget</b></a> ( bool sameWindow = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>WFlags <a href="#testWFlags"><b>testWFlags</b></a> ( WFlags f ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#childAt"><b>childAt</b></a> ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const</li> -<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#childAt-2"><b>childAt</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#childAt"><b>childAt</b></a> ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const</li> +<li class=fn>TQWidget * <a href="#childAt-2"><b>childAt</b></a> ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = false ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setWindowOpacity"><b>setWindowOpacity</b></a> ( double level )</li> <li class=fn>double <a href="#windowOpacity"><b>windowOpacity</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>void setPalette ( const TQPalette & p, bool ) <em>(obsolete)</em></li> @@ -221,9 +221,9 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>void <a href="#update-3"><b>update</b></a> ( const TQRect & r )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-2"><b>repaint</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-3"><b>repaint</b></a> ( bool erase )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint"><b>repaint</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-4"><b>repaint</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-5"><b>repaint</b></a> ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint"><b>repaint</b></a> ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-4"><b>repaint</b></a> ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )</li> +<li class=fn>void <a href="#repaint-5"><b>repaint</b></a> ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = true )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#show"><b>show</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#hide"><b>hide</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#setShown"><b>setShown</b></a> ( bool show )</li> @@ -362,15 +362,15 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#windowActivationChange"><b>windowActivationChange</b></a> ( bool oldActive )</li> <li class=fn>virtual int <a href="#metric"><b>metric</b></a> ( int m ) const</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#resetInputContext"><b>resetInputContext</b></a> ()</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#create"><b>create</b></a> ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#destroy"><b>destroy</b></a> ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#create"><b>create</b></a> ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, bool destroyOldWindow = true )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#destroy"><b>destroy</b></a> ( bool destroyWindow = true, bool destroySubWindows = true )</li> <li class=fn>WFlags <a href="#getWFlags"><b>getWFlags</b></a> () const</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setWFlags"><b>setWFlags</b></a> ( WFlags f )</li> <li class=fn>void <a href="#clearWFlags"><b>clearWFlags</b></a> ( WFlags f )</li> <li class=fn>virtual bool <a href="#focusNextPrevChild"><b>focusNextPrevChild</b></a> ( bool next )</li> <li class=fn>TQFocusData * <a href="#focusData"><b>focusData</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setKeyCompression"><b>setKeyCompression</b></a> ( bool compress )</li> -<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setMicroFocusHint"><b>setMicroFocusHint</b></a> ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, TQFont * f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#setMicroFocusHint"><b>setMicroFocusHint</b></a> ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = true, TQFont * f = 0 )</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ event handlers: <p> <ul> <p> <li> <a href="#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>() - called whenever the mouse moves while a button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If -you call <a href="#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>(TRUE), you get mouse move events even +you call <a href="#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>(true), you get mouse move events even when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X connections.) (See also the <a href="dnd.html">drag and drop</a> @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Destroys the widget. exits if this widget is the main widget. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="acceptDrops"></a>TQWidget::acceptDrops () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#acceptDrops-prop">"acceptDrops"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="adjustSize"></a>TQWidget::adjustSize ()<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ union of all child widget geometries). <p>Example: <a href="xform-example.html#x1266">xform/xform.cpp</a>. <p>Reimplemented in <a href="tqmessagebox.html#adjustSize">TQMessageBox</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="autoMask"></a>TQWidget::autoMask () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#autoMask-prop">"autoMask"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqbrush.html">TQBrush</a> & <a name="backgroundBrush"></a>TQWidget::backgroundBrush () const </h3><p>Returns the widget's background brush. @@ -779,18 +779,18 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#baseSize-prop">"baseSize"</a> property for detail <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="caption"></a>TQWidget::caption () const </h3><p>Returns the window caption (title). See the <a href="tqwidget.html#caption-prop">"caption"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="childAt"></a>TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="childAt"></a>TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const </h3> Returns the visible child widget at pixel position <em>(x, y)</em> in the widget's own coordinate system. -<p> If <em>includeThis</em> is TRUE, and there is no child visible at <em>(x, y)</em>, the widget itself is returned. +<p> If <em>includeThis</em> is true, and there is no child visible at <em>(x, y)</em>, the widget itself is returned. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="childAt-2"></a>TQWidget::childAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="childAt-2"></a>TQWidget::childAt ( const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool includeThis = false ) const </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Returns the visible child widget at point <em>p</em> in the widget's own coordinate system. -<p> If <em>includeThis</em> is TRUE, and there is no child visible at <em>p</em>, +<p> If <em>includeThis</em> is true, and there is no child visible at <em>p</em>, the widget itself is returned. <p> <h3 class=fn><a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> <a name="childrenRect"></a>TQWidget::childrenRect () const @@ -832,8 +832,8 @@ general you do not need to call it. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="close"></a>TQWidget::close ()<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -<p> Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; +otherwise returns false. <p> First it sends the widget a <a href="tqcloseevent.html">TQCloseEvent</a>. The widget is <a href="#hide">hidden</a> if it <a href="tqcloseevent.html#accept">accepts</a> the close event. The default implementation of <a href="#closeEvent">TQWidget::closeEvent</a>() accepts the close event. <p> The <a href="tqapplication.html#lastWindowClosed">TQApplication::lastWindowClosed</a>() signal is emitted when the @@ -843,9 +843,9 @@ last visible top level widget is closed. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="close-2"></a>TQWidget::close ( bool alsoDelete )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -<p> Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; -otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> If <em>alsoDelete</em> is TRUE or the widget has the <a href="tqt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WDestructiveClose</a> widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The +<p> Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; +otherwise returns false. +<p> If <em>alsoDelete</em> is true or the widget has the <a href="tqt.html#WidgetFlags-enum">WDestructiveClose</a> widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the <a href="tqcloseevent.html">TQCloseEvent</a> it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget no matter if the widget is visible or not. @@ -889,26 +889,26 @@ more details. <p> <p>See also <a href="#event">event</a>() and <a href="tqcontextmenuevent.html">TQContextMenuEvent</a>. <p>Example: <a href="menu-example.html#x1881">menu/menu.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="create"></a>TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="create"></a>TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, bool destroyOldWindow = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Creates a new widget window if <em>window</em> is 0, otherwise sets the widget's window to <em>window</em>. -<p> Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if <em>initializeWindow</em> is TRUE. If <em>initializeWindow</em> is FALSE, no +<p> Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if <em>initializeWindow</em> is true. If <em>initializeWindow</em> is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if <em>window</em> is a valid window. -<p> Destroys the old window if <em>destroyOldWindow</em> is TRUE. If <em>destroyOldWindow</em> is FALSE, you are responsible for destroying the +<p> Destroys the old window if <em>destroyOldWindow</em> is true. If <em>destroyOldWindow</em> is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code). -<p> The TQWidget constructor calls <a href="#create">create</a>(0,TRUE,TRUE) to create a +<p> The TQWidget constructor calls <a href="#create">create</a>(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqcursor.html">TQCursor</a> & <a name="cursor"></a>TQWidget::cursor () const </h3><p>Returns the cursor shape for this widget. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">"cursor"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="customWhatsThis"></a>TQWidget::customWhatsThis () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#customWhatsThis-prop">"customWhatsThis"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="destroy"></a>TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="destroy"></a>TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = true, bool destroySubWindows = true )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if <em>destroyWindow</em> is TRUE. +Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if <em>destroyWindow</em> is true. <p> <a href="#destroy">destroy</a>() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing <em>destroySubWindows</em> for the <em>destroyWindow</em> parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy @@ -1034,8 +1034,8 @@ events. <a href="#event">event</a>() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to m focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to (or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls <a href="#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(). -<p> This function returns TRUE if it is able to pass the event over to -someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> This function returns true if it is able to pass the event over to +someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#closeEvent">closeEvent</a>(), <a href="#focusInEvent">focusInEvent</a>(), <a href="#focusOutEvent">focusOutEvent</a>(), <a href="#enterEvent">enterEvent</a>(), <a href="#keyPressEvent">keyPressEvent</a>(), <a href="#keyReleaseEvent">keyReleaseEvent</a>(), <a href="#leaveEvent">leaveEvent</a>(), <a href="#mouseDoubleClickEvent">mouseDoubleClickEvent</a>(), <a href="#mouseMoveEvent">mouseMoveEvent</a>(), <a href="#mousePressEvent">mousePressEvent</a>(), <a href="#mouseReleaseEvent">mouseReleaseEvent</a>(), <a href="#moveEvent">moveEvent</a>(), <a href="#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>(), <a href="#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="tqobject.html#event">TQObject::event</a>(), and <a href="tqobject.html#timerEvent">TQObject::timerEvent</a>(). <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqobject.html#event">TQObject</a>. @@ -1073,10 +1073,10 @@ the focus of the user's attention. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="focusNextPrevChild"></a>TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild ( bool next )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> Finds a new widget to give the <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a> to, as appropriate -for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns TRUE if is can find a new -widget and FALSE if it can't, -<p> If <em>next</em> is TRUE, this function searches "forwards", if <em>next</em> -is FALSE, it searches "backwards". +for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if is can find a new +widget and false if it can't, +<p> If <em>next</em> is true, this function searches "forwards", if <em>next</em> +is false, it searches "backwards". <p> Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current active link" forwards or backwards, and call @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ TQt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, TQt grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last button is released. <p> Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If -<a href="#isVisible">isVisible</a>() returns FALSE for a widget, that widget cannot call +<a href="#isVisible">isVisible</a>() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call <a href="#grabMouse">grabMouse</a>(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#releaseMouse">releaseMouse</a>(), <a href="#grabKeyboard">grabKeyboard</a>(), <a href="#releaseKeyboard">releaseKeyboard</a>(), <a href="#grabKeyboard">grabKeyboard</a>(), and <a href="#focusWidget">focusWidget</a>(). @@ -1216,13 +1216,13 @@ mouse events until <a href="#releaseMouse">releaseMouse</a>() is called(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#releaseMouse">releaseMouse</a>(), <a href="#grabKeyboard">grabKeyboard</a>(), <a href="#releaseKeyboard">releaseKeyboard</a>(), and <a href="#cursor-prop">cursor</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasFocus"></a>TQWidget::hasFocus () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#focus-prop">"focus"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasMouse"></a>TQWidget::hasMouse () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#underMouse-prop">"underMouse"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasMouseTracking"></a>TQWidget::hasMouseTracking () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#mouseTracking-prop">"mouseTracking"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="height"></a>TQWidget::height () const </h3><p>Returns the height of the widget excluding any window frame. @@ -1294,21 +1294,21 @@ details. <p> <p>See also <a href="#event">event</a>() and <a href="tqimevent.html">TQIMEvent</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActiveWindow"></a>TQWidget::isActiveWindow () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isActiveWindow-prop">"isActiveWindow"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDesktop"></a>TQWidget::isDesktop () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isDesktop-prop">"isDesktop"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isDialog"></a>TQWidget::isDialog () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isDialog-prop">"isDialog"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabled"></a>TQWidget::isEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#enabled-prop">"enabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEnabledTo"></a>TQWidget::isEnabledTo ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * ancestor ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if <em>ancestor</em> is -enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this widget would become enabled if <em>ancestor</em> is +enabled; otherwise returns false. <p> This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding <em>ancestor</em> has been explicitly disabled. <p> <a href="#isEnabledTo">isEnabledTo</a>(0) is equivalent to <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>(). @@ -1321,48 +1321,48 @@ to but excluding <em>ancestor</em> has been explicitly disabled. <p> This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to <a href="#isEnabled">isEnabled</a>() <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFocusEnabled"></a>TQWidget::isFocusEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#focusEnabled-prop">"focusEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isFullScreen"></a>TQWidget::isFullScreen () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#fullScreen-prop">"fullScreen"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isHidden"></a>TQWidget::isHidden () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#hidden-prop">"hidden"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isInputMethodEnabled"></a>TQWidget::isInputMethodEnabled () const </h3><p>Returns enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop">"inputMethodEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMaximized"></a>TQWidget::isMaximized () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#maximized-prop">"maximized"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isMinimized"></a>TQWidget::isMinimized () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#minimized-prop">"minimized"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isModal"></a>TQWidget::isModal () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isModal-prop">"isModal"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isPopup"></a>TQWidget::isPopup () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isPopup-prop">"isPopup"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isShown"></a>TQWidget::isShown () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is shown; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is shown; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#shown-prop">"shown"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isTopLevel"></a>TQWidget::isTopLevel () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#isTopLevel-prop">"isTopLevel"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isUpdatesEnabled"></a>TQWidget::isUpdatesEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if updates are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if updates are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#updatesEnabled-prop">"updatesEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVisible"></a>TQWidget::isVisible () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget is visible; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget is visible; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#visible-prop">"visible"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isVisibleTo"></a>TQWidget::isVisibleTo ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * ancestor ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if <em>ancestor</em> is -shown; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent +Returns true if this widget would become visible if <em>ancestor</em> is +shown; otherwise returns false. +<p> The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding <em>ancestor</em> has been explicitly hidden. -<p> This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by +<p> This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved. <p> <a href="#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(0) is identical to <a href="#isVisible">isVisible</a>(). @@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets. This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native Macintosh events. <p> In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the -event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this +event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function is not portable. @@ -1595,13 +1595,13 @@ already at the new position. <p> <p>See also <a href="#resizeEvent">resizeEvent</a>(), <a href="#event">event</a>(), <a href="#pos-prop">pos</a>, and <a href="tqmoveevent.html">TQMoveEvent</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownCursor"></a>TQWidget::ownCursor () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#ownCursor-prop">"ownCursor"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownFont"></a>TQWidget::ownFont () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#ownFont-prop">"ownFont"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownPalette"></a>TQWidget::ownPalette () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#ownPalette-prop">"ownPalette"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="paintEvent"></a>TQWidget::paintEvent ( <a href="tqpaintevent.html">TQPaintEvent</a> * )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> @@ -1657,11 +1657,11 @@ palette changes. <h3 class=fn>const <a href="tqcolor.html">TQColor</a> & <a name="paletteForegroundColor"></a>TQWidget::paletteForegroundColor () const </h3><p>Returns the foreground color of the widget. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#paletteForegroundColor-prop">"paletteForegroundColor"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="parentWidget"></a>TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * <a name="parentWidget"></a>TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = false ) const </h3> <p> Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any -parent widget. If <em>sameWindow</em> is TRUE and the widget is top +parent widget. If <em>sameWindow</em> is true and the widget is top level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent. <p>Example: <a href="mdi-example.html#x2081">mdi/application.cpp</a>. @@ -1692,7 +1692,7 @@ overlapping sibling widgets. <p> <p>See also <a href="#lower">lower</a>() and <a href="#stackUnder">stackUnder</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="showimg-example.html#x1352">showimg/showimg.cpp</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="recreate"></a>TQWidget::recreate ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, WFlags f, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="recreate"></a>TQWidget::recreate ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, WFlags f, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = false ) </h3> <p> <b>This function is obsolete.</b> It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. @@ -1712,11 +1712,11 @@ Releases the keyboard grab. Releases the mouse grab. <p> <p>See also <a href="#grabMouse">grabMouse</a>(), <a href="#grabKeyboard">grabKeyboard</a>(), and <a href="#releaseKeyboard">releaseKeyboard</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )<tt> [slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> Repaints the widget directly by calling <a href="#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. -<p> If <em>erase</em> is TRUE, TQt erases the area <em>(x, y, w, h)</em> before the +<p> If <em>erase</em> is true, TQt erases the area <em>(x, y, w, h)</em> before the paintEvent() call. <p> If <em>w</em> is negative, it is replaced with <tt>width() - x</tt>, and if <em>h</em> is negative, it is replaced width <tt>height() - y</tt>. @@ -1740,19 +1740,19 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> This version repaints the entire widget. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint-4"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool erase = TRUE )<tt> [slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint-4"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( const <a href="tqrect.html">TQRect</a> & r, bool erase = true )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Repaints the widget directly by calling <a href="#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. -<p> Erases the widget region <em>r</em> if <em>erase</em> is TRUE. +<p> Erases the widget region <em>r</em> if <em>erase</em> is true. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint-5"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & reg, bool erase = TRUE )<tt> [slot]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="repaint-5"></a>TQWidget::repaint ( const <a href="tqregion.html">TQRegion</a> & reg, bool erase = true )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Repaints the widget directly by calling <a href="#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. -<p> Erases the widget region <em>reg</em> if <em>erase</em> is TRUE. +<p> Erases the widget region <em>reg</em> if <em>erase</em> is true. <p> Only use repaint if your widget needs to be repainted immediately, for example when doing some animation. In all other cases, use <a href="#update">update</a>(). Calling update() many times in a row will generate a @@ -1762,12 +1762,12 @@ called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion. <p> <p>See also <a href="#update">update</a>(), <a href="#paintEvent">paintEvent</a>(), <a href="#updatesEnabled-prop">updatesEnabled</a>, and <a href="#erase">erase</a>(). -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="reparent"></a>TQWidget::reparent ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, WFlags f, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = FALSE )<tt> [virtual]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="reparent"></a>TQWidget::reparent ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, WFlags f, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = false )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new <em>parent</em>, new widget flags (<em>f</em>, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new parent (<em>p</em>). -<p> If <em>showIt</em> is TRUE, <a href="#show">show</a>() is called once the widget has been +<p> If <em>showIt</em> is true, <a href="#show">show</a>() is called once the widget has been reparented. <p> If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the @@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@ dynamically, it is far easier to use <a href="tqwidgetstack.html">TQWidgetStack< <p> <p>See also <a href="#getWFlags">getWFlags</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="toplevel-example.html#x2538">toplevel/options.ui.h</a>. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="reparent-2"></a>TQWidget::reparent ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="reparent-2"></a>TQWidget::reparent ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent, const <a href="tqpoint.html">TQPoint</a> & p, bool showIt = false ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags @@ -1916,7 +1916,7 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#caption-prop">"caption"</a> property for details. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#cursor-prop">"cursor"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setDisabled"></a>TQWidget::setDisabled ( bool disable )<tt> [slot]</tt> </h3> -Disables widget input events if <em>disable</em> is TRUE; otherwise +Disables widget input events if <em>disable</em> is true; otherwise enables input events. <p> See the <a href="#enabled-prop">enabled</a> documentation for more information. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isEnabledTo">isEnabledTo</a>(), <a href="tqkeyevent.html">TQKeyEvent</a>, <a href="tqmouseevent.html">TQMouseEvent</a>, and <a href="#enabledChange">enabledChange</a>(). @@ -2029,8 +2029,8 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#iconText-prop">"iconText"</a> property for detail See the <a href="tqwidget.html#inputMethodEnabled-prop">"inputMethodEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setKeyCompression"></a>TQWidget::setKeyCompression ( bool compress )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> -Enables key event compression, if <em>compress</em> is TRUE, and -disables it if <em>compress</em> is FALSE. +Enables key event compression, if <em>compress</em> is true, and +disables it if <em>compress</em> is false. <p> Key compression is off by default (except for <a href="tqlineedit.html">TQLineEdit</a> and <a href="tqtextedit.html">TQTextEdit</a>), so widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on @@ -2091,18 +2091,18 @@ to <em>maxh</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMaximumWidth"></a>TQWidget::setMaximumWidth ( int maxw ) </h3><p>Sets the widget's maximum width to <em>maxw</em>. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#maximumWidth-prop">"maximumWidth"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMicroFocusHint"></a>TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> * f = 0 )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setMicroFocusHint"></a>TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = true, <a href="tqfont.html">TQFont</a> * f = 0 )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> When a widget gets focus, it should call <a href="#setMicroFocusHint">setMicroFocusHint</a>() with some appropriate position and size, <em>x</em>, <em>y</em>, <em>width</em> and <em>height</em>. This has no <em>visual</em> effect, it just provides hints to any system-specific input handling tools. -<p> The <em>text</em> argument should be TRUE if this is a position for text +<p> The <em>text</em> argument should be true if this is a position for text input. <p> In the Windows version of TQt, this method sets the system caret, which is used for user Accessibility focus handling. If <em>text</em> -is TRUE, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian +is true, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian language input systems. -<p> In the X11 version of TQt, if <em>text</em> is TRUE, this method sets the +<p> In the X11 version of TQt, if <em>text</em> is true, this method sets the XIM "spot" point for complex language input handling. <p> The font <em>f</em> is a rendering hint to the currently active input method. If <em>f</em> is 0 the widget's font is used. @@ -2160,7 +2160,7 @@ increment to <em>h</em>. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSizePolicy"></a>TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html">TQSizePolicy</a> )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3><p>Sets the default layout behavior of the widget. See the <a href="tqwidget.html#sizePolicy-prop">"sizePolicy"</a> property for details. -<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSizePolicy-2"></a>TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">TQSizePolicy::SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">TQSizePolicy::SizeType</a> ver, bool hfw = FALSE ) +<h3 class=fn>void <a name="setSizePolicy-2"></a>TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">TQSizePolicy::SizeType</a> hor, <a href="tqsizepolicy.html#SizeType-enum">TQSizePolicy::SizeType</a> ver, bool hfw = false ) </h3> This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. <p> Sets the size policy of the widget to <em>hor</em>, <em>ver</em> and <em>hfw</em> @@ -2229,7 +2229,7 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#windowOpacity-prop">"windowOpacity"</a> property <p> Sets the <a href="tqt.html#WindowState">window state</a> to <em>windowState</em>. The window state is a OR'ed combination of TQt::WindowState: <a href="tqt.html#WindowState-enum">WindowMinimized</a>, <a href="tqt.html#WindowState-enum">WindowMaximized</a>, <a href="tqt.html#WindowState-enum">WindowFullScreen</a> and <a href="tqt.html#WindowState-enum">WindowActive</a>. -<p> If the window is not visible (i.e. <a href="#isVisible">isVisible</a>() returns FALSE), the +<p> If the window is not visible (i.e. <a href="#isVisible">isVisible</a>() returns false), the window state will take effect when <a href="#show">show</a>() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code: @@ -2487,7 +2487,7 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#width-prop">"width"</a> property for details. This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native Windows events. <p> In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the -event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this +event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function is not portable. @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#x-prop">"x"</a> property for details. This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native X11 events. <p> In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the -event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this +event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. <p> <b>Warning:</b> This function is not portable. @@ -2542,7 +2542,7 @@ See the <a href="tqwidget.html#y-prop">"y"</a> property for details. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="acceptDrops-prop"></a>acceptDrops</h3> <p>This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget. -<p>Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this +<p>Setting this property to true announces to the system that this widget <em>may</em> be able to accept drop events. <p> If the widget is the desktop (<a href="#isDesktop">TQWidget::isDesktop</a>()), this may fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call @@ -2555,7 +2555,7 @@ Do not modify this property in a Drag&Drop event handler. <p>This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget. <p>Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of -recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, +recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to true, <a href="#updateMask">updateMask</a>() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to <a href="#setMask">setMask</a>()) or nothing @@ -2679,7 +2679,7 @@ on top-level widgets. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setCursor">setCursor</a>(), get this property's value with <a href="#cursor">cursor</a>(), and reset this property's value with <a href="#unsetCursor">unsetCursor</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="customWhatsThis-prop"></a>customWhatsThis</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually. -<p>The default implementation of <a href="#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns FALSE, +<p>The default implementation of <a href="#customWhatsThis">customWhatsThis</a>() returns false, which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This mode. <p> The widget may leave What's This mode by calling @@ -2798,7 +2798,7 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#height">height</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hidden-prop"></a>hidden</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden. -<p>If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its +<p>If false, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="#show">show</a>(), <a href="#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="#shown-prop">shown</a>. @@ -2821,14 +2821,14 @@ text has been set, this functions returns <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null"> <p>This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget. <p>Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default. -<p> If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE. +<p> If a widget handles text input it should set this property to true. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setInputMethodEnabled">setInputMethodEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#isInputMethodEnabled">isInputMethodEnabled</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isActiveWindow-prop"></a>isActiveWindow</h3> <p>This property holds whether this widget is the active window. <p>The active window is the window that contains the widget that has <a href="focus.html#keyboard-focus">keyboard focus</a>. -<p> When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the +<p> When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the active window <em>and</em> for the popup. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setActiveWindow">setActiveWindow</a>() and <a href="tqapplication.html#activeWindow">TQApplication::activeWindow</a>(). @@ -2965,19 +2965,19 @@ events even if no buttons are pressed. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setMouseTracking">setMouseTracking</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#hasMouseTracking">hasMouseTracking</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownCursor-prop"></a>ownCursor</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. <p> <p>See also <a href="#cursor-prop">cursor</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#ownCursor">ownCursor</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownFont-prop"></a>ownFont</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own font. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's font. <p> <p>See also <a href="#font-prop">font</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#ownFont">ownFont</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ownPalette-prop"></a>ownPalette</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette. -<p>If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. +<p>If false, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. <p> <p>See also <a href="#palette-prop">palette</a>. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#ownPalette">ownPalette</a>(). @@ -3063,7 +3063,7 @@ for an overview of top-level widget geometry. <p>Get this property's value with <a href="#rect">rect</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="shown-prop"></a>shown</h3> <p>This property holds whether the widget is shown. -<p>If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its +<p>If true, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. <p> <p>See also <a href="#hide">hide</a>(), <a href="#show">show</a>(), <a href="#visible-prop">visible</a>, <a href="#isVisibleTo">isVisibleTo</a>(), and <a href="#hidden-prop">hidden</a>. @@ -3154,9 +3154,9 @@ short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during large changes. <p> Example: <pre> - <a href="#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( FALSE ); + <a href="#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( false ); bigVisualChanges(); - <a href="#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( TRUE ); + <a href="#setUpdatesEnabled">setUpdatesEnabled</a>( true ); <a href="#repaint">repaint</a>(); </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory-h.html b/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory-h.html index b6f92656a..8c35945d3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory-h.html @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ private: void loadConnections( const TQDomElement &e, TQObject *connector ); void loadTabOrder( const TQDomElement &e ); TQWidget *createWidgetInternal( const TQDomElement &e, TQWidget *parent, TQLayout* layout, const TQString &classNameArg ); - TQLayout *createLayout( TQWidget *widget, TQLayout* layout, LayoutType type, bool isTQLayoutWidget = FALSE ); + TQLayout *createLayout( TQWidget *widget, TQLayout* layout, LayoutType type, bool isTQLayoutWidget = false ); LayoutType layoutType( TQLayout *l ) const; void setProperty( TQObject* widget, const TQString &prop, TQVariant value ); void setProperty( TQObject* widget, const TQString &prop, const TQDomElement &e ); diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory.html b/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory.html index 0c08cc470..ccc8802ab 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidgetfactory.html @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ the images can be found, as <em>dir</em>. This is normally the directory called <tt>images</tt> in the project's directory. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="supportsWidget"></a>TQWidgetFactory::supportsWidget ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & widget )<tt> [static]</tt> -</h3> Returns TRUE if the widget factory can create the specified <em>widget</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3> Returns true if the widget factory can create the specified <em>widget</em>; +otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="widgets"></a>TQWidgetFactory::widgets ()<tt> [static]</tt> </h3> Returns the names of the widgets this factory can create. <!-- eof --> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidgetitem.html b/doc/html/tqwidgetitem.html index 7b39e909e..77e1e9687 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidgetitem.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidgetitem.html @@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ it doesn't want to grow at all. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#expanding">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isEmpty"></a>TQWidgetItem::isEmpty () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns -FALSE. +Returns true if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns +false. <p>Reimplemented from <a href="tqlayoutitem.html#isEmpty">TQLayoutItem</a>. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqsize.html">TQSize</a> <a name="maximumSize"></a>TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwidgetplugin.html b/doc/html/tqwidgetplugin.html index 889c2dd8d..aac26416a 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwidgetplugin.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwidgetplugin.html @@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ generated code. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isContainer"></a>TQWidgetPlugin::isContainer ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & key ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Returns TRUE if the custom widget of class <em>key</em> can contain -other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a>; otherwise returns FALSE. -<p> The default implementation returns FALSE. +Returns true if the custom widget of class <em>key</em> can contain +other widgets, e.g. like <a href="tqframe.html">TQFrame</a>; otherwise returns false. +<p> The default implementation returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqstringlist.html">TQStringList</a> <a name="keys"></a>TQWidgetPlugin::keys () const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwindowsmime.html b/doc/html/tqwindowsmime.html index 5ce52ad42..841d0a398 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwindowsmime.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwindowsmime.html @@ -109,8 +109,8 @@ Returns a list of all currently defined TQWindowsMime objects. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="canConvert"></a>TQWindowsMime::canConvert ( const char * mime, int cf )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the convertor can convert (both ways) between -<em>mime</em> and <em>cf</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the convertor can convert (both ways) between +<em>mime</em> and <em>cf</em>; otherwise returns false. <p> All subclasses must reimplement this pure virtual function. <h3 class=fn>int <a name="cf"></a>TQWindowsMime::cf ( int index )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqwizard-h.html b/doc/html/tqwizard-h.html index 829bc1191..397051a69 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwizard-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwizard-h.html @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWizard : public TQDialog TQ_PROPERTY( TQFont titleFont READ titleFont WRITE setTitleFont ) public: - TQWizard( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQWizard( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQWizard(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqwizard.html b/doc/html/tqwizard.html index b1937308b..758025965 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwizard.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwizard.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } <p><a href="tqwizard-members.html">List of all member functions.</a> <h2>Public Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn><a href="#TQWizard"><b>TQWizard</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )</li> +<li class=fn><a href="#TQWizard"><b>TQWizard</b></a> ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )</li> <li class=fn><a href="#~TQWizard"><b>~TQWizard</b></a> ()</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#addPage"><b>addPage</b></a> ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )</li> <li class=fn>virtual void <a href="#insertPage"><b>insertPage</b></a> ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index )</li> @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ complex pages. </blockquote><p> <p>See also <a href="abstractwidgets.html">Abstract Widget Classes</a>, <a href="dialogs.html">Dialog Classes</a>, and <a href="organizers.html">Organizers</a>. <hr><h2>Member Function Documentation</h2> -<h3 class=fn><a name="TQWizard"></a>TQWizard::TQWizard ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 ) +<h3 class=fn><a name="TQWizard"></a>TQWizard::TQWizard ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 ) </h3> Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The <em>parent</em>, <em>name</em>, <em>modal</em> and <em>f</em> arguments are passed to the <a href="tqdialog.html">TQDialog</a> constructor. @@ -144,10 +144,10 @@ Adds <em>page</em> to the end of the page sequence, with the title, <em>title</e <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="appropriate"></a>TQWizard::appropriate ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page ) const<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function -returns TRUE if <em>page</em> is relevant for display in the current -context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns FALSE. The +returns true if <em>page</em> is relevant for display in the current +context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns false. The default implementation returns the value set using -<a href="#setAppropriate">setAppropriate</a>(). The ultimate default is TRUE. +<a href="#setAppropriate">setAppropriate</a>(). The ultimate default is true. <p> <b>Warning:</b> The last page of the wizard will be displayed if no page is relevant in the current context. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ parameter contains the title of the selected page. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setAppropriate"></a>TQWizard::setAppropriate ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page, bool appropriate )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -If <em>appropriate</em> is TRUE then page <em>page</em> is considered relevant +If <em>appropriate</em> is true then page <em>page</em> is considered relevant in the current context and should be displayed in the page sequence; otherwise <em>page</em> should not be displayed in the page sequence. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ sequence. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setBackEnabled"></a>TQWizard::setBackEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page, bool enable )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>page</em> has a Back button; otherwise <em>page</em> has no Back button. By default all pages have this button. +If <em>enable</em> is true, page <em>page</em> has a Back button; otherwise <em>page</em> has no Back button. By default all pages have this button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFinish"></a>TQWizard::setFinish ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *, bool )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> @@ -280,17 +280,17 @@ If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>page</em> has a Back button; otherwise <em> <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setFinishEnabled"></a>TQWizard::setFinishEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page, bool enable )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>page</em> has a Finish button; otherwise +If <em>enable</em> is true, page <em>page</em> has a Finish button; otherwise <em>page</em> has no Finish button. By default <em>no</em> page has this button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setHelpEnabled"></a>TQWizard::setHelpEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page, bool enable )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>page</em> has a Help button; otherwise <em>page</em> has no Help button. By default all pages have this button. +If <em>enable</em> is true, page <em>page</em> has a Help button; otherwise <em>page</em> has no Help button. By default all pages have this button. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setNextEnabled"></a>TQWizard::setNextEnabled ( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> * page, bool enable )<tt> [virtual slot]</tt> </h3> -If <em>enable</em> is TRUE, page <em>page</em> has a Next button; otherwise +If <em>enable</em> is true, page <em>page</em> has a Next button; otherwise the Next button on <em>page</em> is disabled. By default all pages have this button. diff --git a/doc/html/tqwmatrix.html b/doc/html/tqwmatrix.html index c4f82e914..a37a2c2a3 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqwmatrix.html +++ b/doc/html/tqwmatrix.html @@ -235,20 +235,20 @@ Returns the inverted matrix. <p> If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the identity matrix is returned. <p> If <em>invertible</em> is not 0: the value of <em>*invertible</em> is set -to TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise <em>*invertible</em> is -set to FALSE. +to true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise <em>*invertible</em> is +set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#isInvertible">isInvertible</a>(). <p>Example: <a href="tutorial1-14.html#x2433">t14/cannon.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isIdentity"></a>TQWMatrix::isIdentity () const </h3> -Returns TRUE if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#reset">reset</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="isInvertible"></a>TQWMatrix::isInvertible () const </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#invert">invert</a>(). <h3 class=fn>double <a name="m11"></a>TQWMatrix::m11 () const @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ function. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator!-eq"></a>TQWMatrix::operator!= ( const <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & m ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this matrix is not equal to <em>m</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this matrix is not equal to <em>m</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & <a name="operator*-eq"></a>TQWMatrix::operator*= ( const <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & m ) </h3> @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by matrix <em>m</em>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="operator-eq-eq"></a>TQWMatrix::operator== ( const <a href="tqwmatrix.html">TQWMatrix</a> & m ) const </h3> -Returns TRUE if this matrix is equal to <em>m</em>; otherwise returns FALSE. +Returns true if this matrix is equal to <em>m</em>; otherwise returns false. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="reset"></a>TQWMatrix::reset () </h3> diff --git a/doc/html/tqworkspace-h.html b/doc/html/tqworkspace-h.html index 359e021be..0fec6f4dd 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqworkspace-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqworkspace-h.html @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ private: TQWorkspaceChild* findChild( TQWidget* w); void showMaximizeControls(); void hideMaximizeControls(); - void activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus = TRUE ); + void activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus = true ); void showWindow( TQWidget* w); void maximizeWindow( TQWidget* w); void minimizeWindow( TQWidget* w); diff --git a/doc/html/tqworkspace.html b/doc/html/tqworkspace.html index 659825efa..f0e077285 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqworkspace.html +++ b/doc/html/tqworkspace.html @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ windows: <a href="#cascade">cascade</a>() and <a href="#tile">tile</a>(). Both a connect menu entries to them. <p> If you want your users to be able to work with document windows larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled -property to TRUE. +property to true. <p> If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize, restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ window does not accept the close event. <p> <p>See also <a href="#closeActiveWindow">closeActiveWindow</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="scrollBarsEnabled"></a>TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const -</h3><p>Returns TRUE if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns FALSE. +</h3><p>Returns true if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns false. See the <a href="tqworkspace.html#scrollBarsEnabled-prop">"scrollBarsEnabled"</a> property for details. <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setScrollBarsEnabled"></a>TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable ) </h3><p>Sets whether the workspace provides scrollbars to <em>enable</em>. @@ -201,11 +201,11 @@ being the last window in the list. <hr><h2>Property Documentation</h2> <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="scrollBarsEnabled-prop"></a>scrollBarsEnabled</h3> <p>This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars. -<p>If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child +<p>If this property is set to true, it is possible to resize child windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is -set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible +set to false (the default), resizing windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted. <p>Set this property's value with <a href="#setScrollBarsEnabled">setScrollBarsEnabled</a>() and get this property's value with <a href="#scrollBarsEnabled">scrollBarsEnabled</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqxml-h.html b/doc/html/tqxml-h.html index d7b786444..6f98bcec6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxml-h.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxml-h.html @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ public: static const TQChar EndOfDocument; protected: - virtual TQString fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning = FALSE ); + virtual TQString fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning = false ); private: void init(); diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlcontenthandler.html b/doc/html/tqxmlcontenthandler.html index bbf54f193..70ff0bfec 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlcontenthandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlcontenthandler.html @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ two types you must use <a href="tqxmllexicalhandler.html#startCDATA">TQXmlLexica <p> A reader may report the character data of an element in more than one chunk; e.g. a reader might want to report "a<b" in three <a href="#characters">characters</a>() events ("a ", "<" and " b"). -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ get the error message. is called just once, and is the last handler function called. It is called after the reader has read all input or has abandoned parsing because of a fatal error. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#startDocument">startDocument</a>(). @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ get the error message. <p> The reader calls this function when it has parsed an end element tag with the qualified name <em>qName</em>, the local name <em>localName</em> and the namespace URI <em>namespaceURI</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> See also the <a href="xml.html#sax2Namespaces">namespace description</a>. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ get the error message. <p> The reader calls this function to signal the end of a prefix mapping for the prefix <em>prefix</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> See also the <a href="xml.html#sax2Namespaces">namespace description</a>. @@ -147,14 +147,14 @@ get the error message. </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string, e.g. if any -of the handler functions returns FALSE. +of the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="ignorableWhitespace"></a>TQXmlContentHandler::ignorableWhitespace ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & ch )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> <p> Some readers may use this function to report each chunk of whitespace in element content. The whitespace is reported in <em>ch</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ get the error message. <p> The reader calls this function when it has parsed a processing instruction. <p> <em>target</em> is the target name of the processing instruction and <em>data</em> is the data in the processing instruction. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ destroyed). declarations (e.g. because they are in an external DTD). If they do so they report that they skipped the entity called <em>name</em> by calling this function. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ get the error message. document. The reader calls this function just once, after the call to <a href="#setDocumentLocator">setDocumentLocator</a>(), and before any other functions in this class or in the <a href="tqxmldtdhandler.html">TQXmlDTDHandler</a> class are called. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#endDocument">endDocument</a>(). @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ endElement() call. <p> The attribute list provided only contains attributes with explicit values. The attribute list contains attributes used for namespace declaration (i.e. attributes starting with xmlns) only if the -namespace-prefix property of the reader is TRUE. +namespace-prefix property of the reader is true. <p> The argument <em>namespaceURI</em> is the namespace URI, or <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if the element has no namespace URI or if no namespace processing is done. <em>localName</em> is the local name @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ namespace processing is done. <em>localName</em> is the local name done, <em>qName</em> is the qualified name (with prefix) and <em>atts</em> are the attributes attached to the element. If there are no attributes, <em>atts</em> is an empty attributes object. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> See also the <a href="xml.html#sax2Namespaces">namespace description</a>. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ after the corresponding <a href="#endElement">endElement</a>() event, but their otherwise guaranteed. <p> The argument <em>prefix</em> is the namespace prefix being declared and the argument <em>uri</em> is the namespace URI the prefix is mapped to. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> See also the <a href="xml.html#sax2Namespaces">namespace description</a>. diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmldeclhandler.html b/doc/html/tqxmldeclhandler.html index 3b97c5184..02cf53351 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmldeclhandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmldeclhandler.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ is one of "#IMPLIED", "#REQUIRED", "#FIXED" or <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-n none of the others applies). The reader passes the attribute's default value in <em>value</em>. If no default value is specified in the XML file, <em>value</em> is TQString::null. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ get the error message. </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of -the handler functions returns FALSE. +the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="externalEntityDecl"></a>TQXmlDeclHandler::externalEntityDecl ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & publicId, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & systemId )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ entity is reported. <p> The reader passes the name of the entity in <em>name</em>, the public identifier in <em>publicId</em> and the system identifier in <em>systemId</em>. If there is no public identifier specified, it passes <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> in <em>publicId</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ get the error message. declaration. Only the effective (first) declaration is reported. <p> The reader passes the name of the entity in <em>name</em> and the value of the entity in <em>value</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmldtdhandler.html b/doc/html/tqxmldtdhandler.html index aedd1a829..5fe2064b2 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmldtdhandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmldtdhandler.html @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ and unparsed entity declarations using <a href="#notationDecl">notationDecl</a>( </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of -the handler functions returns FALSE. +the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="notationDecl"></a>TQXmlDTDHandler::notationDecl ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & publicId, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & systemId )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ declaration. <p> The argument <em>name</em> is the notation name, <em>publicId</em> is the notation's public identifier and <em>systemId</em> is the notation's system identifier. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ declaration. the entity's public identifier, <em>systemId</em> is the entity's system identifier and <em>notationName</em> is the name of the associated notation. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlentityresolver.html b/doc/html/tqxmlentityresolver.html index f8459a67c..d75ccee85 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlentityresolver.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlentityresolver.html @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ external entities, it must implement this interface, i.e. </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of -the handler functions returns FALSE. +the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="resolveEntity"></a>TQXmlEntityResolver::resolveEntity ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & publicId, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & systemId, <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html">TQXmlInputSource</a> *& ret )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ entity and <em>ret</em> is the return value of this function. If <em>ret</em> is 0 the reader should resolve the entity itself, if it is non-zero it must point to an input source which the reader uses instead. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlerrorhandler.html b/doc/html/tqxmlerrorhandler.html index 934f8d2f3..3b39724f6 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlerrorhandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlerrorhandler.html @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ section 1.2 of the XML 1.0 specification. Details of the error are stored in <em>exception</em>. <p> The reader must continue to provide normal parsing events after invoking this function. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -79,14 +79,14 @@ get the error message. </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of -the handler functions returns FALSE. +the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="fatalError"></a>TQXmlErrorHandler::fatalError ( const <a href="tqxmlparseexception.html">TQXmlParseException</a> & exception )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> <p> A reader must use this function to report a non-recoverable error. Details of the error are stored in <em>exception</em>. -<p> If this function returns TRUE the reader might try to go on +<p> If this function returns true the reader might try to go on parsing and reporting further errors; but no regular parsing events are reported. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ events are reported. <p> A reader might use this function to report a warning. Warnings are conditions that are not errors or fatal errors as defined by the XML 1.0 specification. Details of the warning are stored in <em>exception</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlinputsource.html b/doc/html/tqxmlinputsource.html index 665e55183..0e689f35c 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlinputsource.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlinputsource.html @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ TQXmlReader subclasses. </ul> <h2>Protected Members</h2> <ul> -<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#fromRawData"><b>fromRawData</b></a> ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = FALSE )</li> +<li class=fn>virtual TQString <a href="#fromRawData"><b>fromRawData</b></a> ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = false )</li> </ul> <hr><a name="details"></a><h2>Detailed Description</h2> @@ -136,15 +136,15 @@ call to <a href="#next">next</a>() (if the data had run out). <p> You don't normally need to use this function if you use next(). <p> <p>See also <a href="#data">data</a>(), <a href="#next">next</a>(), and <a href="#TQXmlInputSource">TQXmlInputSource</a>(). -<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="fromRawData"></a>TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData ( const <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> & data, bool beginning = FALSE )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> +<h3 class=fn><a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> <a name="fromRawData"></a>TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData ( const <a href="tqbytearray.html">TQByteArray</a> & data, bool beginning = false )<tt> [virtual protected]</tt> </h3> This function reads the XML file from <em>data</em> and tries to recognize the encoding. It converts the raw data <em>data</em> into a <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> and returns it. It tries its best to get the correct encoding for the XML file. -<p> If <em>beginning</em> is TRUE, this function assumes that the data +<p> If <em>beginning</em> is true, this function assumes that the data starts at the beginning of a new XML document and looks for an -encoding declaration. If <em>beginning</em> is FALSE, it converts the +encoding declaration. If <em>beginning</em> is false, it converts the raw data using the encoding determined from prior calls. <h3 class=fn><a href="tqchar.html">TQChar</a> <a name="next"></a>TQXmlInputSource::next ()<tt> [virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmllexicalhandler.html b/doc/html/tqxmllexicalhandler.html index 89f3ddb6b..1d4a405de 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmllexicalhandler.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmllexicalhandler.html @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ LexicalHandler. <p> The reader calls this function to report an XML comment anywhere in the document. It reports the text of the comment in <em>ch</em>. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ get the error message. <p> The reader calls this function to report the end of a CDATA section. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#startCDATA">startCDATA</a>() and <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#characters">TQXmlContentHandler::characters</a>(). @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ message. <p> The reader calls this function to report the end of a DTD declaration, if any. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#startDTD">startDTD</a>(). @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ called <em>name</em>. <p> For every <a href="#startEntity">startEntity</a>() call, there is a corresponding <a href="#endEntity">endEntity</a>() call. The calls to startEntity() and endEntity() are properly nested. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#startEntity">startEntity</a>(), <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#skippedEntity">TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity</a>(), and <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature</a>(). @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ get the error message. </h3> <p> The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of -the handler functions returns FALSE. +the handler functions returns false. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="startCDATA"></a>TQXmlLexicalHandler::startCDATA ()<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ the handler functions returns FALSE. section. The content of the CDATA section is reported through the <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#characters">TQXmlContentHandler::characters</a>() function. This function is intended only to report the boundary. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#endCDATA">endCDATA</a>(). @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ public identifier but no system identifier; in such cases a parse error will occur. <p> All declarations reported through <a href="tqxmldtdhandler.html">TQXmlDTDHandler</a> or <a href="tqxmldeclhandler.html">TQXmlDeclHandler</a> appear between the <a href="#startDTD">startDTD</a>() and <a href="#endDTD">endDTD</a>() calls. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#endDTD">endDTD</a>(). @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ called <em>name</em>. <p> Note that if the entity is unknown, the reader reports it through <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#skippedEntity">TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity</a>() and not through this function. -<p> If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and +<p> If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function <a href="#errorString">errorString</a>() to get the error message. <p> <p>See also <a href="#endEntity">endEntity</a>() and <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlnamespacesupport.html b/doc/html/tqxmlnamespacesupport.html index f788eef48..9abb701f1 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlnamespacesupport.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlnamespacesupport.html @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Processes a raw XML 1.0 name in the current context by removing the prefix and looking it up among the prefixes currently declared. <p> <em>qname</em> is the raw XML 1.0 name to be processed. <em>isAttribute</em> -is TRUE if the name is an attribute name. +is true if the name is an attribute name. <p> This function stores the namespace URI in <em>nsuri</em> (which will be set to <a href="tqstring.html#TQString-null">TQString::null</a> if the raw name has an undeclared prefix), and stores the local name (without prefix) in <em>localname</em> (which diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlreader.html b/doc/html/tqxmlreader.html index b6cf070fa..57107192e 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlreader.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlreader.html @@ -135,22 +135,22 @@ own subclasses with <a href="#setEntityResolver">setEntityResolver</a>(), <a hre <p> If the reader has the feature called <em>name</em>, the feature's value is returned. If no such feature exists the return value is undefined. -<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to TRUE if the reader has the -feature called <em>name</em>; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +<p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: <em>*ok</em> is set to true if the reader has the +feature called <em>name</em>; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFeature">setFeature</a>() and <a href="#hasFeature">hasFeature</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasFeature"></a>TQXmlReader::hasFeature ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns <tt>TRUE</tt> if the reader has the feature called <em>name</em>; -otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Returns <tt>true</tt> if the reader has the feature called <em>name</em>; +otherwise returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#feature">feature</a>() and <a href="#setFeature">setFeature</a>(). <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="hasProperty"></a>TQXmlReader::hasProperty ( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a> & name ) const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Returns TRUE if the reader has the property <em>name</em>; otherwise -returns FALSE. +<p> Returns true if the reader has the property <em>name</em>; otherwise +returns false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#property">property</a>() and <a href="#setProperty">setProperty</a>(). <h3 class=fn><a href="tqxmllexicalhandler.html">TQXmlLexicalHandler</a> * <a name="lexicalHandler"></a>TQXmlReader::lexicalHandler () const<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ returns FALSE. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="parse"></a>TQXmlReader::parse ( const <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html">TQXmlInputSource</a> * input )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> </h3> -<p> Reads an XML document from <em>input</em> and parses it. Returns TRUE if -the parsing was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. +<p> Reads an XML document from <em>input</em> and parses it. Returns true if +the parsing was successful; otherwise returns false. <p>Example: <a href="xml-sax-walkthrough.html#x2139">xml/tagreader/tagreader.cpp</a>. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="parse-2"></a>TQXmlReader::parse ( const <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html">TQXmlInputSource</a> & input )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ the parsing was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. <p> If the reader has the property <em>name</em>, this function returns the value of the property; otherwise the return value is undefined. <p> If <em>ok</em> is not 0: if the reader has the <em>name</em> property <em>*ok</em> -is set to TRUE; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to FALSE. +is set to true; otherwise <em>*ok</em> is set to false. <p> <p>See also <a href="#setProperty">setProperty</a>() and <a href="#hasProperty">hasProperty</a>(). <h3 class=fn>void <a name="setContentHandler"></a>TQXmlReader::setContentHandler ( <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html">TQXmlContentHandler</a> * handler )<tt> [pure virtual]</tt> diff --git a/doc/html/tqxmlsimplereader.html b/doc/html/tqxmlsimplereader.html index e67d3546b..987e1f16f 100644 --- a/doc/html/tqxmlsimplereader.html +++ b/doc/html/tqxmlsimplereader.html @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ simple XML reader (parser). Constructs a simple XML reader with the following feature settings: <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> <tr bgcolor="#a2c511"> <th valign="top">Feature <th valign="top">Setting -<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> <td valign="top">TRUE -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> <td valign="top">FALSE +<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> <td valign="top">true +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> <td valign="top">false <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData</em> -<td valign="top">TRUE -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity</em> <td valign="top">FALSE +<td valign="top">true +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity</em> <td valign="top">false </table></center> <p> More information about features can be found in the <a href="xml.html#sax2Features">TQt SAX2 overview.</a> <p> <p>See also <a href="#setFeature">setFeature</a>(). @@ -85,9 +85,9 @@ Destroys the simple XML reader. <h3 class=fn>bool <a name="parse"></a>TQXmlSimpleReader::parse ( const <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html">TQXmlInputSource</a> * input, bool incremental )<tt> [virtual]</tt> </h3> -Reads an XML document from <em>input</em> and parses it. Returns FALSE -if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns TRUE. -<p> If <em>incremental</em> is TRUE, the parser does not return FALSE when +Reads an XML document from <em>input</em> and parses it. Returns false +if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns true. +<p> If <em>incremental</em> is true, the parser does not return false when it reaches the end of the <em>input</em> without reaching the end of the XML file. Instead it stores the state of the parser so that parsing can be continued at a later stage when more data is @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ with parsing. This class stores a pointer to the input source <em>input</em> and input souce. This means that you should not delete the input source <em>input</em> until you've finished your calls to parseContinue(). If you call this function with <em>incremental</em> -TRUE whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing +true whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing session will be started and the previous session lost. -<p> If <em>incremental</em> is FALSE, this function behaves like the normal -parse function, i.e. it returns FALSE when the end of input is +<p> If <em>incremental</em> is false, this function behaves like the normal +parse function, i.e. it returns false when the end of input is reached without reaching the end of the XML file and the parsing cannot be continued. <p> <p>See also <a href="#parseContinue">parseContinue</a>() and <a href="tqsocket.html">TQSocket</a>. @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ cannot be continued. Continues incremental parsing; this function reads the input from the <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html">TQXmlInputSource</a> that was specified with the last <a href="#parse">parse</a>() command. To use this function, you <em>must</em> have called parse() -with the incremental argument set to TRUE. -<p> Returns FALSE if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns TRUE. +with the incremental argument set to true. +<p> Returns false if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns true. <p> If the input source returns an empty string for the function <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#data">TQXmlInputSource::data</a>(), then this means that the end of the XML file has been reached; this is quite important, especially if you @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ when there is more data available to parse. <p> This function assumes that the end of the XML document is reached if the <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#next">TQXmlInputSource::next</a>() function returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfDocument. If the parser has not finished -parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and FALSE +parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and false is returned. <p> <p>See also <a href="#parse">parse</a>() and <a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#next">TQXmlInputSource::next</a>(). @@ -135,21 +135,21 @@ Sets the state of the feature <em>name</em> to <em>value</em>: <center><table cellpadding="4" cellspacing="2" border="0"> <tr bgcolor="#a2c511"> <th valign="top">Feature <th valign="top">Notes <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> -<td valign="top">If this feature is TRUE, namespace processing is +<td valign="top">If this feature is true, namespace processing is performed. <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> -<td valign="top">If this feature is TRUE, the the original prefixed names +<td valign="top">If this feature is true, the the original prefixed names and attributes used for namespace declarations are reported. <tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData</em> -<td valign="top">If this feature is TRUE, CharData that only contain +<td valign="top">If this feature is true, CharData that only contain whitespace are not ignored, but are reported via <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#characters">TQXmlContentHandler::characters</a>(). <tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top"><em>http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity</em> -<td valign="top">If this feature is TRUE, the parser reports +<td valign="top">If this feature is true, the parser reports TQXmlContentHandler::startEntity() and TQXmlContentHandler::endEntity() events. So character data -might be reported in chunks. If this feature is FALSE, the +might be reported in chunks. If this feature is false, the parser does not report those events, but rather silently substitutes the entities and reports the character data in one chunk. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ one chunk. <pre> ** $Id: qt/tagreader.cpp 3.3.8 edited Jan 11 14:46 $ </pre><pre> <a name="x2125"></a> reader.<a href="#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", - TRUE ); + true ); </pre> <p> (Code taken from xml/tagreader-with-features/tagreader.cpp) <p> <p>See also <a href="tqxmlreader.html#feature">feature</a>() and <a href="tqxmlreader.html#hasFeature">hasFeature</a>(). diff --git a/doc/html/wizard-example.html b/doc/html/wizard-example.html index 1781ddeeb..3a974c30a 100644 --- a/doc/html/wizard-example.html +++ b/doc/html/wizard-example.html @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ protected slots: #include <<a href="tqapplication-h.html">tqapplication.h</a>> <a name="f182"></a>Wizard::Wizard( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name ) - : <a href="tqwizard.html">TQWizard</a>( parent, name, TRUE ) + : <a href="tqwizard.html">TQWizard</a>( parent, name, true ) { setupPage1(); setupPage2(); @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ void <a name="f183"></a>Wizard::setupPage1() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page1, "Personal Key" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setNextEnabled">setNextEnabled</a>( page1, FALSE ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page1, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setNextEnabled">setNextEnabled</a>( page1, false ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page1, false ); } void <a name="f184"></a>Wizard::setupPage2() @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ void <a name="f184"></a>Wizard::setupPage2() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page2, "Personal Data" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page2, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page2, false ); } void <a name="f185"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() @@ -264,8 +264,8 @@ void <a name="f185"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page3, "Finish" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setFinishEnabled">setFinishEnabled</a>( page3, TRUE ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page3, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setFinishEnabled">setFinishEnabled</a>( page3, true ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page3, false ); } <a name="x15"></a>void Wizard::<a href="tqwizard.html#showPage">showPage</a>( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>* page ) @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ void <a name="f185"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() dataChanged( firstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ); firstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else if ( page == page3 ) { - <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setEnabled( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setEnabled( true ); <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setFocus(); } } @@ -308,9 +308,9 @@ void <a name="f187"></a>Wizard::dataChanged( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQStr if ( !firstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() && !lastName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() && !email-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() ) - <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( true ); else - <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( false ); } </pre> diff --git a/doc/html/wizard-wizard-cpp.html b/doc/html/wizard-wizard-cpp.html index e89fdc806..edb4d3e3d 100644 --- a/doc/html/wizard-wizard-cpp.html +++ b/doc/html/wizard-wizard-cpp.html @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ body { background: #ffffff; color: black; } #include <<a href="tqapplication-h.html">tqapplication.h</a>> <a name="f3"></a>Wizard::Wizard( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a> *parent, const char *name ) - : <a href="tqwizard.html">TQWizard</a>( parent, name, TRUE ) + : <a href="tqwizard.html">TQWizard</a>( parent, name, true ) { setupPage1(); setupPage2(); @@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ void <a name="f4"></a>Wizard::setupPage1() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page1, "Personal Key" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setNextEnabled">setNextEnabled</a>( page1, FALSE ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page1, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setNextEnabled">setNextEnabled</a>( page1, false ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page1, false ); } void <a name="f5"></a>Wizard::setupPage2() @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ void <a name="f5"></a>Wizard::setupPage2() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page2, "Personal Data" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page2, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page2, false ); } void <a name="f6"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ void <a name="f6"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() <a href="tqwizard.html#addPage">addPage</a>( page3, "Finish" ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setFinishEnabled">setFinishEnabled</a>( page3, TRUE ); - <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page3, FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setFinishEnabled">setFinishEnabled</a>( page3, true ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#setHelpEnabled">setHelpEnabled</a>( page3, false ); } <a name="x15"></a>void Wizard::<a href="tqwizard.html#showPage">showPage</a>( <a href="tqwidget.html">TQWidget</a>* page ) @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ void <a name="f6"></a>Wizard::setupPage3() dataChanged( firstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>() ); firstName-><a href="tqwidget.html#setFocus">setFocus</a>(); } else if ( page == page3 ) { - <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setEnabled( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setEnabled( true ); <a href="tqwizard.html#finishButton">finishButton</a>()->setFocus(); } } @@ -254,9 +254,9 @@ void <a name="f8"></a>Wizard::dataChanged( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQStrin if ( !firstName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() && !lastName-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() && !email-><a href="tqlineedit.html#text">text</a>().isEmpty() ) - <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( TRUE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( true ); else - <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( FALSE ); + <a href="tqwizard.html#nextButton">nextButton</a>()->setEnabled( false ); } </pre><!-- eof --> <p><address><hr><div align=center> diff --git a/doc/html/xform-example.html b/doc/html/xform-example.html index f877b8346..c0bf9d896 100644 --- a/doc/html/xform-example.html +++ b/doc/html/xform-example.html @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ private: bg-><a href="tqbuttongroup.html#insert">insert</a>(rb_pic,2); rb_txt-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( <a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>("Text") ); rb_img-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( <a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>("Image") ); -<a name="x1249"></a> rb_img-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(TRUE); +<a name="x1249"></a> rb_img-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(true); rb_pic-><a href="tqbutton.html#setText">setText</a>( <a href="tqobject.html#tr">tr</a>("Picture") ); <a name="x1221"></a> <a href="tqobject.html#connect">connect</a>( bg, TQ_SIGNAL(<a href="tqbuttongroup.html#clicked">clicked</a>(int)), TQ_SLOT(changeMode(int)) ); @@ -318,13 +318,13 @@ void <a name="f403"></a>XFormControl::changeMode(int m) newMtx(); if ( mode == Text ) { <a name="x1277"></a> optionals-><a href="tqwidgetstack.html#raiseWidget">raiseWidget</a>(0); - rb_txt-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(TRUE); + rb_txt-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(true); } else { optionals-><a href="tqwidgetstack.html#raiseWidget">raiseWidget</a>(1); if ( mode == Image ) - rb_img-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(TRUE); + rb_img-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(true); else - rb_pic-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(TRUE); + rb_pic-><a href="tqradiobutton.html#setChecked">setChecked</a>(true); } <a name="x1217"></a> tqApp-><a href="tqapplication.html#flushX">flushX</a>(); } @@ -486,20 +486,20 @@ private: void <a name="f395"></a>XFormCenter::newMode( int m ) { - static bool first_i = TRUE; - static bool first_p = TRUE; + static bool first_i = true; + static bool first_p = true; if ( sx->mode() == m ) return; if ( m == Image && first_i ) { - first_i = FALSE; + first_i = false; <a href="tqpixmap.html">TQPixmap</a> pm; <a name="x1247"></a> if ( pm.<a href="tqpixmap.html#load">load</a>( "image.any" ) ) sx->setPixmap( pm ); return; } if ( m == Picture && first_p ) { - first_p = FALSE; + first_p = false; <a href="tqpicture.html">TQPicture</a> p; <a name="x1244"></a> if (p.<a href="tqpicture.html#load">load</a>( "picture.any" )) sx->setPicture( p ); diff --git a/doc/html/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.html b/doc/html/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.html index 7b8241de0..1cdf7720a 100644 --- a/doc/html/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.html +++ b/doc/html/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.html @@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ and thus influence how the XML data are read. <p> Now let's think about presenting the output: As described in the <a href="xml.html#sax2Features">TQt SAX2 documentation</a> there are three valid combinations of <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> -and <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em>: TRUE/TRUE, TRUE/FALSE and -FALSE/TRUE. To show the relevant output side by side of each other +and <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em>: true/true, true/false and +false/true. To show the relevant output side by side of each other and mark them with three labels makes up for a grid layout consisting of three columns (and thus two lines). <p> <pre> <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * nameSpace = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( container, "table_namespace" ); </pre> <p> The most natural way of presenting XML elements is in a tree. Thus we use a listview. Its name <em>nameSpace</em> indicates that this -one will be used to present the combination of <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> being TRUE and +one will be used to present the combination of <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> being true and <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> -being FALSE -- the default configuration of a <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html">TQXmlSimpleReader</a>. +being false -- the default configuration of a <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html">TQXmlSimpleReader</a>. <p> Being the first grid entry the <em>nameSpace</em> listview will appear in the upper left corner of the virtual grid. <p> <pre> StructureParser * handler = new StructureParser( nameSpace ); @@ -130,12 +130,12 @@ the upper grid row. <p> Then we ask the <em>handler</em> to present the data in the <em>namespacePrefix</em> listview. <p> <pre> <a name="x2125"></a> reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", - TRUE ); + true ); </pre> <p> Now we modify the behaviour of the <em>reader</em> and change -<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> from the default FALSE -to TRUE. The <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> feature has -still its default setting TRUE. +<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> from the default false +to true. The <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> feature has +still its default setting true. <p> <pre> source.<a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#reset">reset</a>(); </pre> <p> We have to reset the input source to make the new parsing start from the @@ -143,35 +143,35 @@ beginning of the document again. <p> <pre> reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#parse">parse</a>( source ); </pre> <p> Finally we parse the XML file a second time with the changed reader -settings (TRUE/TRUE). +settings (true/true). <p> <pre> <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> * prefix = new <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a>( container, "table_prefix"); handler->setListView( prefix ); - reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", FALSE ); + reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">setFeature</a>( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", false ); source.<a href="tqxmlinputsource.html#reset">reset</a>(); reader.<a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#parse">parse</a>( source ); </pre> <p> Next we prepare and use the upper right listview to show the reader results with the feature setting <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> -FALSE and <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> TRUE. +false and <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> true. <p> <pre> // namespace label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "Default:\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: TRUE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: FALSE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: true\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: false\n", container ); // namespace prefix label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: TRUE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: TRUE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: true\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: true\n", container ); // prefix label (void) new <a href="tqlabel.html">TQLabel</a>( "\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: FALSE\n" - "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: TRUE\n", + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: false\n" + "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes: true\n", container ); </pre> <p> The second row of the <em>container</em> grid is filled with three labels @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Its listview item is therefore a direct child of the <p> <pre> stack.push( element ); </pre> <p> Now we put the element's listview item on top of the stack. -<p> <pre> element-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( TRUE ); +<p> <pre> element-><a href="tqlistviewitem.html#setOpen">setOpen</a>( true ); </pre> <p> By default a <a href="tqlistview.html">TQListView</a> presents all of its nodes closed. The user may then click on the <em>+</em> icon to see the child @@ -348,11 +348,11 @@ Therefore we open each listview item manually. qualified name and the relevant namespace URI (or nothing). Obviously <em>attribute</em> is a child of the current <em>element</em>. -<p> <pre> return TRUE; +<p> <pre> return true; } </pre> <p> To prevent the reader from throwing an error we have to -return TRUE when we successfully dealt with an +return true when we successfully dealt with an element's start tag. <p> <pre> bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#endElement">endElement</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ element's start tag. <p> Whenever we come across an element's closing tag we have to remove its listview item from the stack as it can't have children any longer. -<p> <pre> return TRUE; +<p> <pre> return true; } </pre> <p> And so we're done. diff --git a/doc/html/xml-sax-walkthrough.html b/doc/html/xml-sax-walkthrough.html index ff2e3b224..70f0a6698 100644 --- a/doc/html/xml-sax-walkthrough.html +++ b/doc/html/xml-sax-walkthrough.html @@ -99,13 +99,13 @@ get indentation right, there is nothing special about our new <p> <pre> <a name="x2137"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#startDocument">startDocument</a>() { indent = ""; - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> <p> At the beginning of the document we simply set <em>indent</em> to an empty string because we want to print out the root element without any indentation. -Also we return TRUE so that the parser continues without +Also we return true so that the parser continues without reporting an error. <p> Because we want to be informed when the parser comes accross a start tag of an element and subsequently print it out, we @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ have to overload <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#startElement">TQXmlContentHan { printf( "%s%s\n", (const char*)indent, (const char*)qName ); indent += " "; - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> <p> This is what the implementation does: The name of the element with @@ -126,14 +126,14 @@ without an eventual prefix denoting the <a href="xml.html#namespaces">namespace. <p> If another element follows before the current element's end tag it should be indented. Therefore we add four spaces to the <em>indent</em> string. -<p> Finally we return TRUE in order to let the parser continue without +<p> Finally we return true in order to let the parser continue without errors. <p> The last functionality we need to add is the parser's behaviour when an end tag occurs. This means overloading <a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#endElement">TQXmlContentHandler::endElement</a>(). <p> <pre> <a name="x2136"></a>bool StructureParser::<a href="tqxmlcontenthandler.html#endElement">endElement</a>( const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>&, const <a href="tqstring.html">TQString</a>& ) { indent.remove( (uint)0, 4 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } </pre> <p> Obviously we then should shorten the <em>indent</em> string by the four diff --git a/doc/html/xml.html b/doc/html/xml.html index a165654b9..0ba798f0c 100644 --- a/doc/html/xml.html +++ b/doc/html/xml.html @@ -286,30 +286,30 @@ attributes starting with <em>xmlns:</em>) are reported. name="Eris Kallisti"/> </pre> -With <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> set to TRUE -the reader will report four attributes; but with the <em>namespace-prefixes</em> feature set to FALSE only three, with the <em>xmlns:fnord</em> attribute defining a namespace being "invisible" to the +With <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> set to true +the reader will report four attributes; but with the <em>namespace-prefixes</em> feature set to false only three, with the <em>xmlns:fnord</em> attribute defining a namespace being "invisible" to the reader. <p> The <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> feature is responsible -for reporting local names, namespace prefixes and URIs. With <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> set to TRUE the parser will +for reporting local names, namespace prefixes and URIs. With <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> set to true the parser will report <em>title</em> as the local name of the <em>fnord:title</em> attribute, <em>fnord</em> being the namespace prefix and <em>http://trolltech.com/fnord/</em> as the namespace URI. When <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> is -FALSE none of them are reported. +false none of them are reported. <p> In the current implementation the TQt XML classes follow the definition that the prefix <em>xmlns</em> itself isn't associated with any namespace at all (see <a href="http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/REC-xml-names-19990114/#ns-using">http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/REC-xml-names-19990114/#ns-using</a>). Therefore even with <em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> and -<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> both set to TRUE +<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> both set to true the reader won't return either a local name, a namespace prefix or a namespace URI for <em>xmlns:fnord</em>. <p> This might be changed in the future following the W3C suggestion <a href="http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns/">http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns/</a> to associate <em>xmlns</em> with the namespace <em>http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns</em>. <p> As the SAX2 standard suggests, <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html">TQXmlSimpleReader</a> defaults to having -<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> set to TRUE and -<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> set to FALSE. +<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces</em> set to true and +<em>http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes</em> set to false. When changing this behavior using <a href="tqxmlsimplereader.html#setFeature">TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature</a>() note that the combination of both features set to -FALSE is illegal. +false is illegal. <p> For a practical demonstration of how the two features affect the output of the reader run the <a href="tagreader-with-features-example.html">tagreader with features example.</a> <p> <a name="sax2NamespacesSummary"></a> @@ -322,10 +322,10 @@ output of the reader run the <a href="tagreader-with-features-example.html">tagr <th valign="top">Qualified names <th valign="top">Prefix mapping <th valign="top">xmlns attributes -<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">(TRUE, FALSE) <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes* <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">No -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">(TRUE, TRUE) <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes -<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">(FALSE, TRUE) <td valign="top">No* <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">No* <td valign="top">Yes -<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">(FALSE, FALSE) <td valign="top" colspan="4" rowspan="1"> Illegal +<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">(true, false) <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes* <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">No +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">(true, true) <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">Yes +<tr bgcolor="#f0f0f0"> <td valign="top">(false, true) <td valign="top">No* <td valign="top">Yes <td valign="top">No* <td valign="top">Yes +<tr bgcolor="#d0d0d0"> <td valign="top">(false, false) <td valign="top" colspan="4" rowspan="1"> Illegal </table></center> <p> <sup>*</sup> The behavior of these entries is not specified by SAX. <p> <a name="sax2Properties"></a> diff --git a/doc/network.doc b/doc/network.doc index 1edfa3212..7ec4f276e 100644 --- a/doc/network.doc +++ b/doc/network.doc @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ server to the local filesystem can be done with following code: \code TQUrlOperator op; - op.copy( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", FALSE ); + op.copy( "ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-2.1.0.tar.gz", "file:/tmp", false ); \endcode And that's all! Of course an implementation of the FTP protocol has to @@ -391,9 +391,9 @@ The last method you must reimplement is bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation *op ); \endcode -Here you must return TRUE, if the connection is up and okay (this means +Here you must return true, if the connection is up and okay (this means operations on the protocol can be done). If the connection is not okay, -return FALSE and start to try opening it. If you cannot open the +return false and start to try opening it. If you cannot open the connection at all (e.g. because the host is not found), emit a \c finished() signal and set an error code and the \c TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed state to the \c TQNetworkOperation pointer you get here. diff --git a/doc/object.doc b/doc/object.doc index 02261eb1d..676aa0374 100644 --- a/doc/object.doc +++ b/doc/object.doc @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ function calls are equivalent: \code // TQButton *b and TQObject *o point to the same button - b->setDown( TRUE ); - o->setProperty( "down", TRUE ); + b->setDown( true ); + o->setProperty( "down", true ); \endcode Equivalent, that is, except that the first is faster, and provides @@ -368,19 +368,19 @@ state (which may have changed since initialization). The function must return void and take no arguments. \c DESIGNABLE declares whether this property is suitable for -modification by a GUI design tool. The default is \c TRUE for -writable properties; otherwise \c FALSE. Instead of \c TRUE or \c -FALSE, you can specify a boolean member function. +modification by a GUI design tool. The default is \c true for +writable properties; otherwise \c false. Instead of \c true or \c +false, you can specify a boolean member function. \c SCRIPTABLE declares whether this property is suited for access by a -scripting engine. The default is \c TRUE. Instead of \c TRUE or \c FALSE, +scripting engine. The default is \c true. Instead of \c true or \c false, you can specify a boolean member function. \c STORED declares whether the property's value must be remembered when storing an object's state. Stored makes only sense for writable -properties. The default value is \c TRUE. Technically superfluous +properties. The default value is \c true. Technically superfluous properties (like TQPoint pos if TQRect geometry is already a property) -define this to be \c FALSE. +define this to be \c false. Connected to the property system is an additional macro, "TQ_CLASSINFO", @@ -507,12 +507,12 @@ contain: if ( ke->key() == Key_Tab ) { // special tab handling here ke->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } else if ( evt->type() >= TQEvent::User ) { TQCustomEvent *ce = (TQCustomEvent*) evt; // custom event handling here - return TRUE; + return true; } return TQWidget::event( evt ); } diff --git a/doc/porting3.doc b/doc/porting3.doc index b65cbc4f7..b4c361694 100644 --- a/doc/porting3.doc +++ b/doc/porting3.doc @@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ new code. \i TQListBoxItem::selected() const \i TQListView::removeItem( TQListViewItem *item ) \i TQListViewItem::removeItem( TQListViewItem *item ) -\i TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) -\i TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString \& label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE ) -\i TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = FALSE ) +\i TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) +\i TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString \& label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false ) +\i TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = false ) \i TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop ) \i TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 ) \i TQMainWindow::removeToolBar( TQDockWindow *) @@ -314,9 +314,9 @@ new code. \i TQMessageBox::message( const TQString \& caption, const TQString \& text, const TQString \& buttonText = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *= 0 ) \i TQMessageBox::query( const TQString \& caption, const TQString \& text, const TQString \& yesButtonText = TQString::null, const TQString \& noButtonText = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *= 0 ) \i TQMessageBox::standardIcon( Icon icon, GUIStyle style ) -\i TQRegExp::match( const TQString \& str, int index = 0, int *len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const +\i TQRegExp::match( const TQString \& str, int index = 0, int *len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const \i TQScrollView::childIsVisible( TQWidget *child ) -\i TQScrollView::showChild( TQWidget *child, bool show = TRUE ) +\i TQScrollView::showChild( TQWidget *child, bool show = true ) \i TQSimpleRichText::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQRegion \& clipRegion, const TQColorGroup \& cg, const TQBrush *paper = 0 ) const \i TQString::ascii() const \i TQString::data() const @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ new code. \i TQTabDialog::selected( const TQString \& tabLabel ) \i TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled( const char *name, bool enable ) \i TQTextStream::TQTextStream( TQString \& str, int filemode ) -\i TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString \& label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char *name = 0 ) +\i TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString \& label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char *name = 0 ) \i TQToolTip::enabled() \i TQToolTip::setEnabled( bool enable ) \i TQTranslator::find( const char *context, const char *sourceText, const char *comment = 0 ) const @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ to TQt 3.x. This compatibilty mode can be enabled by passing the TQPrinter::Compatible flag to the TQPrinter constructor. On X11, TQPrinter used to generate encapsulated postscript when -fullPage() was TRUE and only one page was printed. This does not +fullPage() was true and only one page was printed. This does not happen by default anymore, providing a more consistent printing output. \section1 TQRegExp @@ -548,11 +548,11 @@ characters, e.g. <tt>|</tt>, but it doesn't hurt.) Wildcard patterns need no conversion. Here are two examples: \code TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)" ); - wild.setWildcard( TRUE ); + wild.setWildcard( true ); \endcode \code - // TRUE as third argument means wildcard - TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)", FALSE, TRUE ); + // true as third argument means wildcard + TQRegExp wild( "(*.*)", false, true ); \endcode However, when they are used, make sure to use TQRegExp::exactMatch() rather than the obsolete TQRegExp::match(). TQRegExp::match(), like @@ -566,8 +566,8 @@ This function has been replaced by \l TQRegExp::setPattern() in TQt 2.2. Old code such as \code TQRegExp rx( "alpha" ); - rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE ); - rx.setWildcard( TRUE ); + rx.setCaseSensitive( false ); + rx.setWildcard( true ); rx = "beta"; \endcode still compiles with TQt 3, but produces a different result (the case sensitivity @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ The following function is now obsolete, as it has an unwieldy parameter list and was poorly named: \list \i bool TQRegExp::match( const TQString \& str, int index = 0, - int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const + int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const \endlist It will be removed in a future version of Qt. Its \link TQRegExp::match() documentation \endlink explains how to replace it. diff --git a/doc/session.doc b/doc/session.doc index 8837b8431..cd25e0bef 100644 --- a/doc/session.doc +++ b/doc/session.doc @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ information on saving/restoring the state of a particular Qt application.) Restoration is usually done in the application's main() -function. Check if \l TQApplication::isSessionRestored() is \c TRUE. If +function. Check if \l TQApplication::isSessionRestored() is \c true. If that's the case, use the session identifier \l TQApplication::sessionId() again to access your state data and restore the state of the application. diff --git a/doc/sql-driver.doc b/doc/sql-driver.doc index d64246d22..463c888dd 100644 --- a/doc/sql-driver.doc +++ b/doc/sql-driver.doc @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ modified servers. If you have a recent client library and connect to a transaction-enabled MySQL server, a call to the TQSqlDriver::hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) function returns -TRUE and SQL transactions can be used. +true and SQL transactions can be used. If the plugin is compiled against MySQL 4.x client libraries, transactions are enabled by default. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ query to do this internally (see $TQTDIR/examples/sql/blob). \section3 Know problems When a query is in forward only mode a call to TQSqlQuery::last() will -position the query on the last record and return TRUE, but subsequent +position the query on the last record and return true, but subsequent calls to TQSqlQuery::value() will only return NULLs. \section3 How to build the plugin on Unix/Linux @@ -710,11 +710,11 @@ public: ~QNullResult() {} protected: TQVariant data( int ) { return TQVariant(); } - bool reset ( const TQString& ) { return FALSE; } - bool fetch( int ) { return FALSE; } - bool fetchFirst() { return FALSE; } - bool fetchLast() { return FALSE; } - bool isNull( int ) { return FALSE; } + bool reset ( const TQString& ) { return false; } + bool fetch( int ) { return false; } + bool fetchFirst() { return false; } + bool fetchLast() { return false; } + bool isNull( int ) { return false; } TQSqlRecord record() { return TQSqlRecord(); } int size() { return 0; } int numRowsAffected() { return 0; } @@ -725,12 +725,12 @@ class QNullDriver : public TQSqlDriver public: QNullDriver(): TQSqlDriver() {} ~QNullDriver() {} - bool hasFeature( DriverFeature ) const { return FALSE; } + bool hasFeature( DriverFeature ) const { return false; } bool open( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, - int ) { return FALSE; } + int ) { return false; } void close() {} TQSqlQuery createQuery() const { return TQSqlQuery( new QNullResult( this ) ); } }; diff --git a/doc/sql.doc b/doc/sql.doc index 17145f87f..08317840e 100644 --- a/doc/sql.doc +++ b/doc/sql.doc @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ to setDatbaseName(). When connecting to ODBC data sources the Data Source Name (DSN) should be used in the setDatabaseName() call. Third we call open() to open the database and give us access to the -data. If this call fails it will return FALSE; error information can +data. If this call fails it will return false; error information can be obtained from \l TQSqlDatabase::lastError(). \target Connecting_to_Multiple_Databases @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ function in \c connection.h. \quotefile sql/overview/connection.cpp \skipto #include -\printuntil return TRUE +\printuntil return true \printuntil } \caption From \l sql/overview/connection.cpp @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ section and use the \l TQSqlCursor class covered in \section2 Transactions If the underlying database engine supports transactions -TQSqlDriver::hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) will return TRUE. +TQSqlDriver::hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) will return true. You can use TQSqlDatabase::transaction() to initiate a transaction, followed by the SQL commands you want to execute within the context of the transaction, and then either TQSqlDatabase::commit() or @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ section. \caption From \l sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp The above code introduces a count of how many records are successfully -inserted. Note that isActive() returns FALSE if the query, e.g. the +inserted. Note that isActive() returns false if the query, e.g. the insertion, fails. numRowsAffected() returns -1 if the number of rows cannot be determined, e.g. if the query fails. @@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ examples provides additional information. Data-Aware tables require the \c tqdatatable.h and \c tqsqlcursor.h header files. We create our application object, call createConnections() and create the cursor. We create the \l TQDataTable passing it a pointer to -the cursor, and set the autoPopulate flag to TRUE. Next we make our \l +the cursor, and set the autoPopulate flag to true. Next we make our \l TQDataTable the main widget and call refresh() to populate it with data and call show() to make it visible. @@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ We have changed the InvoiceItemCursor constructor. We now create a new TQSqlField called productname and append this to the InvoiceItemCursor's set of fields. We call setCalculated() on productname to identify it as a calculated field. The first argument -to setCalculated() is the field name, the second a bool which if TRUE +to setCalculated() is the field name, the second a bool which if true signifies that calculateField() must be called to get the field's value. diff --git a/doc/tqasciicache.doc b/doc/tqasciicache.doc index e7b7d3df8..69d15fa8f 100644 --- a/doc/tqasciicache.doc +++ b/doc/tqasciicache.doc @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling \link TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete() - setAutoDelete(TRUE)\endlink tells the cache to delete items that + setAutoDelete(true)\endlink tells the cache to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). @@ -118,10 +118,10 @@ recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted. - If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case - sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. + If \a caseSensitive is true (the default), the cache keys are case + sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in - US-ASCII. If \a copyKeys is TRUE (the default), TQAsciiCache makes + US-ASCII. If \a copyKeys is true (the default), TQAsciiCache makes a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char * pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys will never change, but very risky. @@ -187,15 +187,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCache::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCache::insert( const char *k, const type *d, int c, int p ) Inserts the item \a d into the cache using key \a k, and with an - associated cost of \a c. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully - inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example, + associated cost of \a c. Returns true if the item is successfully + inserted. Returns false if the item is not inserted, for example, if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost(). The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default value (0). - \warning If this function returns FALSE, you must delete \a d + \warning If this function returns false, you must delete \a d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \a d after calling this function, because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could @@ -218,12 +218,12 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCache::remove( const char *k ) - Removes the item with key \a k and returns TRUE if the item was - present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the item with key \a k and returns true if the item was + present in the cache; otherwise returns false. The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if you have called \link TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete() - setAutoDelete(TRUE)\endlink. + setAutoDelete(true)\endlink. If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ \fn type *TQAsciiCache::find( const char *k, bool ref ) const Returns the item with key \a k, or 0 if the key does not exist - in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item is moved + in the cache. If \a ref is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. - This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + This is the same as find( k, true ). \sa find() */ @@ -319,9 +319,9 @@ TQAsciiCacheIterator provides an operator++() and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key. It also provides atFirst() and - atLast(), which return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or + atLast(), which return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function - returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count() returns the number + returns true if the cache is empty; and count() returns the number of items in the cache. Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary @@ -365,8 +365,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise + returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -374,8 +374,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::atFirst() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the - cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -385,8 +385,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::atLast() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; - otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. diff --git a/doc/tqasciidict.doc b/doc/tqasciidict.doc index e3ae6ca00..57a7c48ac 100644 --- a/doc/tqasciidict.doc +++ b/doc/tqasciidict.doc @@ -106,13 +106,13 @@ bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance. - When \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default) TQAsciiDict treats - "abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and + When \a caseSensitive is true (the default) TQAsciiDict treats + "abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is false "abc" and "Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the 26 letters in US-ASCII. - If \a copyKeys is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys - using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the + If \a copyKeys is true (the default), the dictionary copies keys + using strcpy(); if it is false, the dictionary just copies the pointers. */ @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiDict::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; - otherwise it returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise it returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -223,8 +223,8 @@ \fn bool TQAsciiDict::remove( const char *key ) Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the - dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the + dictionary; otherwise returns false. If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. @@ -411,8 +411,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQAsciiDictIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0, - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0, + otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ diff --git a/doc/tqcache.doc b/doc/tqcache.doc index c47f30b5b..4e8a08294 100644 --- a/doc/tqcache.doc +++ b/doc/tqcache.doc @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ recently used item. There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the - cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete + cache. Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent). @@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted. - If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case - sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. + If \a caseSensitive is true (the default), the cache keys are case + sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters. */ @@ -184,15 +184,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQCache::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQCache::insert( const TQString &k, const type *d, int c, int p ) Inserts the item \a d into the cache with key \a k and associated - cost, \a c. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise - returns FALSE. + cost, \a c. Returns true if it is successfully inserted; otherwise + returns false. The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default value (0). - \warning If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g. + \warning If this function returns false (which could happen, e.g. if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete \a d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \a d after calling this function because any other insertions into the @@ -213,11 +213,11 @@ /*! \fn bool TQCache::remove( const TQString &k ) - Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns TRUE if the - item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns true if the + item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false. The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if - you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE). + you have called setAutoDelete(true). If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed. @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ \fn type *TQCache::find( const TQString &k, bool ref ) const Returns the item associated with key \a k, or 0 if the key does - not exist in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item + not exist in the cache. If \a ref is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned. - This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + This is the same as find( k, true ). \sa find() */ @@ -312,9 +312,9 @@ TQCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache. The current() and currentKey() functions are used to access the current cache item and its key. The atFirst() - and atLast() return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or + and atLast() return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function - returns TRUE if the cache is empty, and count() returns the number + returns true if the cache is empty, and count() returns the number of items in the cache. Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary @@ -358,8 +358,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQCacheIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise - it returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise + it returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -367,8 +367,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQCacheIterator::atFirst() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the - cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -378,8 +378,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQCacheIterator::atLast() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; - otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. diff --git a/doc/tqdict.doc b/doc/tqdict.doc index 0dffb2032..c42c9b05f 100644 --- a/doc/tqdict.doc +++ b/doc/tqdict.doc @@ -77,12 +77,12 @@ Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty() - returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items + returns true. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can take an item out of the dictionary with take(). - Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete + Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a dictionary tells it to delete items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete items when they are removed. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ \code TQStringList styleList = TQStyleFactory::styles(); styleList.sort(); - TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, FALSE ); + TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, false ); for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = styleList.begin(); it != styleList.end(); ++it ) { TQString styleName = *it; TQString styleAccel = styleName; @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead to faster lookup. - If \a caseSensitive is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only + If \a caseSensitive is true (the default), keys which differ only by case are considered different. */ @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ \fn TQDict::~TQDict() Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If - setAutoDelete() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that + setAutoDelete() is true, each value is deleted. All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset. \sa setAutoDelete() @@ -257,8 +257,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQDict::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -303,9 +303,9 @@ /*! \fn bool TQDict::remove( const TQString &key ) - Removes the item with \a key from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if + Removes the item with \a key from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item that was inserted will be removed. @@ -485,8 +485,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQDictIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; + otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ diff --git a/doc/tqintcache.doc b/doc/tqintcache.doc index b8d4fa206..a904e4640 100644 --- a/doc/tqintcache.doc +++ b/doc/tqintcache.doc @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ recently used item. There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the - cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete + cache. Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent). @@ -173,15 +173,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntCache::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQIntCache::insert( long k, const type *d, int c, int p ) Inserts the item \a d into the cache with key \a k and assigns it - a cost of \a c (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise - returns FALSE. + a cost of \a c (default 1). Returns true if it succeeds; otherwise + returns false. The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQIntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ The parameter \a p is internal and should be left at the default value (0). - \warning If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost \c, + \warning If this function returns false (for example, the cost \c, exceeds maxCost()), you must delete \a d yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \a d after calling this function. Any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application @@ -201,11 +201,11 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntCache::remove( long k ) - Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns TRUE if the - item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the item associated with \a k, and returns true if the + item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false. The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you - have called setAutoDelete(TRUE). + have called setAutoDelete(true). If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is removed. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ \fn type * TQIntCache::find( long k, bool ref ) const Returns the item associated with \a k, or 0 if the key does not - exist in the cache. If \a ref is TRUE (the default), the item is + exist in the cache. If \a ref is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list. If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is returned. - This is the same as find( k, TRUE ). + This is the same as find( k, true ). \sa find() */ @@ -300,8 +300,8 @@ TQIntCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key; atFirst() atLast(), which return - TRUE if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; - isEmpty(), which returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count(), + true if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; + isEmpty(), which returns true if the cache is empty; and count(), which returns the number of items in the cache. Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntCacheIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -355,8 +355,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntCacheIterator::atFirst() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the - cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the + Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the + cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. @@ -366,8 +366,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntCacheIterator::atLast() const - Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; - otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's + Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; + otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list. diff --git a/doc/tqintdict.doc b/doc/tqintdict.doc index 07f7c434c..cb3736cc3 100644 --- a/doc/tqintdict.doc +++ b/doc/tqintdict.doc @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntDict::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -207,8 +207,8 @@ \fn bool TQIntDict::remove( long key ) Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the \a key is in the - dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the \a key is in the + dictionary; otherwise returns false. If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQIntDictIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns false. \sa count() */ diff --git a/doc/tqmap.doc b/doc/tqmap.doc index 4184798eb..d575c95ec 100644 --- a/doc/tqmap.doc +++ b/doc/tqmap.doc @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMap::empty() const - Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns + false. This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to isEmpty(). @@ -487,8 +487,8 @@ whose \c first element is a key to be inserted and whose \c second element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair whose \c first element is an iterator pointing to the inserted - item and whose \c second element is a bool indicating TRUE if \a x - was inserted and FALSE if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was + item and whose \c second element is a bool indicating true if \a x + was inserted and false if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was already present. \sa replace() @@ -559,8 +559,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMap::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns + false. \sa count() */ @@ -570,8 +570,8 @@ Inserts a new item with the key, \a key, and a value of \a value. If there is already an item whose key is \a key, that item's value - is replaced with \a value, unless \a overwrite is FALSE (it is - TRUE by default). In this case an iterator to this item is + is replaced with \a value, unless \a overwrite is false (it is + true by default). In this case an iterator to this item is returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned. */ @@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMap::contains( const Key& k ) const - Returns TRUE if the map contains an item with key \a k; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the map contains an item with key \a k; otherwise + returns false. */ @@ -726,15 +726,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMapIterator::operator==( const TQMapIterator<K,T>& it ) const - Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns TRUE if - they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns true if + they point to the same item; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQMapIterator::operator!=( const TQMapIterator<K,T>& it ) const - Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns FALSE if - they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE. + Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns false if + they point to the same item; otherwise returns true. */ /*! @@ -878,15 +878,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMapConstIterator::operator==( const TQMapConstIterator<K,T>& it ) const - Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns TRUE if - they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns true if + they point to the same item; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQMapConstIterator::operator!=( const TQMapConstIterator<K,T>& it ) const - Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns FALSE if - they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE. + Compares the iterator to the \a it iterator and returns false if + they point to the same item; otherwise returns true. */ /*! diff --git a/doc/tqmemarray.doc b/doc/tqmemarray.doc index 8a62386d3..f46191705 100644 --- a/doc/tqmemarray.doc +++ b/doc/tqmemarray.doc @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMemArray::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the array is empty; otherwise returns false. isEmpty() is equivalent to isNull() for TQMemArray (unlike TQString). @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMemArray::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the array is null; otherwise returns false. A null array has size() == 0 and data() == 0. */ @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \a size elements. The array becomes a null array if \a size == 0. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be + Returns true if successful, or false if the memory cannot be allocated. New elements are not initialized. @@ -306,8 +306,8 @@ Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \a size elements. The array becomes a null array if \a size == 0. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; + otherwise returns false. New elements are not initialized. @@ -319,8 +319,8 @@ Truncates the array at position \a pos. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; + otherwise returns false. Equivalent to resize(\a pos). @@ -334,8 +334,8 @@ different from -1, then the array will be resized before being filled. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a size is -1, or \a size is - != -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a size is -1, or \a size is + != -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns false. \sa resize() */ @@ -534,8 +534,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMemArray::operator==( const TQMemArray<type> &a ) const - Returns TRUE if this array is equal to \a a; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this array is equal to \a a; otherwise returns + false. The two arrays are compared bitwise. @@ -545,8 +545,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQMemArray::operator!=( const TQMemArray<type> &a ) const - Returns TRUE if this array is different from \a a; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this array is different from \a a; otherwise + returns false. The two arrays are compared bitwise. diff --git a/doc/tqpair.doc b/doc/tqpair.doc index 467f14582..2bec4a1cf 100644 --- a/doc/tqpair.doc +++ b/doc/tqpair.doc @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ /*! \fn bool operator==( const TQPair<T1, T2>& x, const TQPair<T1, T2>& y ) - Returns TRUE if \a x is equal to \a y; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a x is equal to \a y; otherwise returns false. Two TQPairs are equal if both their \c first and \c second elements are equal. */ @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ /*! \fn bool operator<( const TQPair<T1, T2>& x, const TQPair<T1, T2>& y ) - Returns TRUE if \a x is less than \a y; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a x is less than \a y; otherwise returns false. \a x is less than \a y if x.first is less than y.first, or if x.second is less than y.second and x.first is the same as y.first. diff --git a/doc/tqptrdict.doc b/doc/tqptrdict.doc index 95883730c..e4d9b827d 100644 --- a/doc/tqptrdict.doc +++ b/doc/tqptrdict.doc @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrDict::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -212,8 +212,8 @@ \fn bool TQPtrDict::remove( void *key ) Removes the item associated with \a key from the dictionary. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a key is in the dictionary; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a key is in the dictionary; + otherwise returns false. If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed. @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrDictIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ diff --git a/doc/tqptrlist.doc b/doc/tqptrlist.doc index 6d2c2dc91..d0de7e444 100644 --- a/doc/tqptrlist.doc +++ b/doc/tqptrlist.doc @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ }; TQPtrList<Employee> list; - list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); // the list owns the objects + list.setAutoDelete( true ); // the list owns the objects list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) ); list.append( new Employee("Jane", "Williams", 80000) ); @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other and of the current list item. - In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(TRUE). + In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(true). Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there @@ -208,8 +208,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrList::operator==(const TQPtrList<type> &list ) const - Compares this list with \a list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain - the same data; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this list with \a list. Returns true if the lists contain + the same data; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -223,8 +223,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrList::operator!=(const TQPtrList<type> &list ) const - Compares this list with \a list. Returns TRUE if the lists contain - different data; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this list with \a list. Returns true if the lists contain + different data; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrList::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ Inserts the \a item at position \a index in the list. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; - otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to count() + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; + otherwise returns false. The valid range is 0 to count() (inclusively). The item is appended if \a index == count(). The inserted item becomes the current list item. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Replaces the item at position \a index with the new \a item. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. \a index is in the range 0 to + Returns true if successful, i.e. \a index is in the range 0 to count()-1. \sa append(), current(), insert() @@ -331,8 +331,8 @@ Removes the item at position \a index in the list. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; - otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is \c{0..(count() - 1)} + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a index is in range; + otherwise returns false. The valid range is \c{0..(count() - 1)} inclusive. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() @@ -355,8 +355,8 @@ Removes the current list item. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; + otherwise returns false. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. @@ -379,8 +379,8 @@ Removes the first occurrence of \a item from the list. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; + otherwise returns false. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. @@ -408,8 +408,8 @@ Removes the first occurrence of \a item from the list. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if \a item is in the list; + otherwise returns false. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. @@ -456,8 +456,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrList::removeFirst() - Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, - i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the first item from the list. Returns true if successful, + i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. @@ -474,8 +474,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrList::removeLast() - Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, - i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the last item from the list. Returns true if successful, + i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false. The removed item is deleted if \link setAutoDelete() auto-deletion\endlink is enabled. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrListIterator::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -924,8 +924,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrListIterator::atFirst() const - Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the first list item; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the current iterator item is the first list item; + otherwise returns false. \sa toFirst(), atLast() */ @@ -933,8 +933,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrListIterator::atLast() const - Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the last list item; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the current iterator item is the last list item; + otherwise returns false. \sa toLast(), atFirst() */ @@ -1086,8 +1086,8 @@ \fn TQStrList::TQStrList( bool deepCopies ) Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all - inserted strings if \a deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies - if \a deepCopies is FALSE. + inserted strings if \a deepCopies is true, or use shallow copies + if \a deepCopies is false. */ /*! @@ -1147,8 +1147,8 @@ \fn TQStrIList::TQStrIList( bool deepCopies ) Constructs a list of strings. Will make deep copies of all - inserted strings if \a deepCopies is TRUE, or use shallow copies - if \a deepCopies is FALSE. + inserted strings if \a deepCopies is true, or use shallow copies + if \a deepCopies is false. */ /*! @@ -1251,5 +1251,5 @@ \ingroup tools A TQPtrListAutoDelete is identical to a TQPtrList with - setAutoDelete(TRUE). + setAutoDelete(true). */ diff --git a/doc/tqptrqueue.doc b/doc/tqptrqueue.doc index a9e8f14a4..9bc3c1197 100644 --- a/doc/tqptrqueue.doc +++ b/doc/tqptrqueue.doc @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ /*! \fn TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue () - Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to FALSE. + Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to false. */ /*! @@ -75,14 +75,14 @@ Creates a queue from \a queue. Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete() - flag is set to FALSE. + flag is set to false. */ /*! \fn TQPtrQueue::~TQPtrQueue() Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete() - is TRUE. + is true. */ /*! @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ This queue is first cleared and then each item in \a queue is enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied. - \warning The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it TRUE for + \warning The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it true for both \a queue and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause \e double-deletion of the items. */ @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrQueue::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the queue is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() dequeue() head() */ @@ -127,10 +127,10 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrQueue::remove() - Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there - was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Removes the head item from the queue, and returns true if there + was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns false. - The item is deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE. + The item is deleted if autoDelete() is true. \sa head() isEmpty() dequeue() */ @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ \fn void TQPtrQueue::clear() Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete() - is TRUE. + is true. \sa remove() */ @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ \fn bool TQPtrQueue::autoDelete() const Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is - FALSE. + false. \sa setAutoDelete() */ @@ -191,14 +191,14 @@ /*! \fn void TQPtrQueue::setAutoDelete( bool enable ) - Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if \a enable is TRUE - and not to delete them if \a enable is FALSE. + Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if \a enable is true + and not to delete them if \a enable is false. If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items. - The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be + The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two queues deleting the same items. diff --git a/doc/tqptrstack.doc b/doc/tqptrstack.doc index f1675cdb2..c6dcf7f07 100644 --- a/doc/tqptrstack.doc +++ b/doc/tqptrstack.doc @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ \fn TQPtrStack::~TQPtrStack () Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is - TRUE. + true. */ /*! @@ -89,14 +89,14 @@ Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of another stack \a s. Elements currently in this stack will be - deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE. + deleted if autoDelete() is true. */ /*! \fn bool TQPtrStack::isEmpty () const - Returns TRUE if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! @@ -116,8 +116,8 @@ \fn bool TQPtrStack::remove () Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete() - is TRUE. Returns TRUE if there was an item to pop; otherwise - returns FALSE. + is true. Returns true if there was an item to pop; otherwise + returns false. \sa clear() */ @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ \fn void TQPtrStack::clear() Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is - TRUE. + true. \sa remove() */ @@ -177,8 +177,8 @@ Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete(). - If \a enable is TRUE the stack auto-deletes its contents; if \a - enable is FALSE the stack does not delete its contents. + If \a enable is true the stack auto-deletes its contents; if \a + enable is false the stack does not delete its contents. \sa autoDelete() */ diff --git a/doc/tqptrvector.doc b/doc/tqptrvector.doc index b6c9f2873..672b38309 100644 --- a/doc/tqptrvector.doc +++ b/doc/tqptrvector.doc @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrVector::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. \sa count() */ @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrVector::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the vector is null; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the vector is null; otherwise returns false. A null vector has size() == 0 and data() == 0. @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ Any items at position \a size or beyond in the vector are removed. New positions are initialized to 0. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully - allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully + allocated; otherwise returns false. \sa size(), isNull() */ @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Removes the item at position \a i in the vector, if there is one. \a i must be less than size(). - Returns TRUE if \a i is within range; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a i is within range; otherwise returns false. \sa take(), at() */ @@ -250,9 +250,9 @@ If \a size >= 0, the vector is first resized to \a size. By default, \a size is -1. - Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. \a size is the same as the + Returns true if successful, i.e. \a size is the same as the current size, or \a size is larger and the memory has successfully - been allocated; otherwise returns FALSE. + been allocated; otherwise returns false. \sa resize(), insert(), isEmpty() */ @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPtrVector::operator==( const TQPtrVector<type> &v ) const - Returns TRUE if this vector and \a v are equal; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this vector and \a v are equal; otherwise returns + false. */ diff --git a/doc/tqtl.doc b/doc/tqtl.doc index ed6065eac..80d6b6e2b 100644 --- a/doc/tqtl.doc +++ b/doc/tqtl.doc @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ must be valid). For example: v2[5] = 5; bool b = tqEqual( v1.begin(), v2.end(), v2.begin() ); - // b == TRUE + // b == true \endcode \target tqCopy diff --git a/doc/tqvaluelist.doc b/doc/tqvaluelist.doc index ed6c30c96..3ab4cf89b 100644 --- a/doc/tqvaluelist.doc +++ b/doc/tqvaluelist.doc @@ -308,8 +308,8 @@ Compares both lists. - Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! @@ -317,8 +317,8 @@ \overload - Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this list and \a l are equal; otherwise returns + false. This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers. */ @@ -349,8 +349,8 @@ Compares both lists. - Returns TRUE if this list and \a l are unequal; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this list and \a l are unequal; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! @@ -472,8 +472,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueList::empty() const - Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns + false. \sa size() */ @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ \fn reference TQValueList::front() Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no - first item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is + first item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined. This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ \fn reference TQValueList::back() Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last - item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined. + item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined. This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to last(). @@ -713,8 +713,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueList::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns + false. \sa count() */ @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ \fn T& TQValueList::first() Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no - first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns TRUE), the return value is + first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns true), the return value is undefined. \sa last() @@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ \fn T& TQValueList::last() Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last - item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined. + item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined. */ /*! @@ -1009,15 +1009,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueListIterator::operator==( const TQValueListIterator<T>& it ) const - Compares this iterator and \a it and returns TRUE if they point to - the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this iterator and \a it and returns true if they point to + the same item; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQValueListIterator::operator!=( const TQValueListIterator<T>& it ) const - Compares this iterator and \a it and returns TRUE if they point to - different items; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this iterator and \a it and returns true if they point to + different items; otherwise returns false. */ /***************************************************************************** @@ -1152,15 +1152,15 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueListConstIterator::operator==( const TQValueListConstIterator<T>& it ) const - Compares this iterator with \a it and returns TRUE if they point - to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this iterator with \a it and returns true if they point + to the same item; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQValueListConstIterator::operator!=( const TQValueListConstIterator<T>& it ) const - Compares this iterator with \a it and returns TRUE if they point - to different items; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this iterator with \a it and returns true if they point + to different items; otherwise returns false. */ diff --git a/doc/tqvaluevector.doc b/doc/tqvaluevector.doc index 6583cded6..0825e441e 100644 --- a/doc/tqvaluevector.doc +++ b/doc/tqvaluevector.doc @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueVector::empty() const - Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. Equivalent to size()==0, only faster. This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueVector::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; returns FALSE otherwise. + Returns true if the vector is empty; returns false otherwise. \sa count() */ @@ -493,9 +493,9 @@ Returns a reference to the element with index \a i. If \a ok is non-null, and the index \a i is out of range, *\a ok is set to - FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i + false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i is within the range of the vector, and \a ok is non-null, *\a ok - is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. + is set to true and the returned reference is well defined. */ /*! @@ -505,9 +505,9 @@ Returns a const reference to the element with index \a i. If \a ok is non-null, and the index \a i is out of range, *\a ok is set to - FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i + false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \a i is within the range of the vector, and \a ok is non-null, *\a ok - is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined. + is set to true and the returned reference is well defined. */ /*! @@ -697,8 +697,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQValueVector::operator==( const TQValueVector<T>& x ) const - Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each - corresponding element in \a x; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if each element in this vector equals each + corresponding element in \a x; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -706,8 +706,8 @@ \overload - Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each - corresponding element in \a x; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if each element in this vector equals each + corresponding element in \a x; otherwise returns false. */ diff --git a/doc/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.doc b/doc/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.doc index defb87b8f..5328a9baf 100644 --- a/doc/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.doc +++ b/doc/xml-sax-features-walkthrough.doc @@ -106,8 +106,8 @@ Now let's think about presenting the output: As described in the \link xml.html#sax2Features TQt SAX2 documentation \endlink there are three valid combinations of \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes -and \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: TRUE/TRUE, TRUE/FALSE and -FALSE/TRUE. To show the relevant output side by side of each other +and \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces: true/true, true/false and +false/true. To show the relevant output side by side of each other and mark them with three labels makes up for a grid layout consisting of three columns (and thus two lines). @@ -116,9 +116,9 @@ of three columns (and thus two lines). The most natural way of presenting XML elements is in a tree. Thus we use a listview. Its name \e nameSpace indicates that this one will be used to present the combination of \e -http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces being TRUE and +http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces being true and \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes -being FALSE -- the default configuration of a \l TQXmlSimpleReader. +being false -- the default configuration of a \l TQXmlSimpleReader. Being the first grid entry the \e nameSpace listview will appear in the upper left corner of the virtual grid. @@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ Then we ask the \e handler to present the data in the \e namespacePrefix listview. \printline namespace-prefixes -\printline TRUE +\printline true Now we modify the behaviour of the \e reader and change -\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes from the default FALSE -to TRUE. The \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces feature has -still its default setting TRUE. +\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes from the default false +to true. The \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces feature has +still its default setting true. \printline reset @@ -172,14 +172,14 @@ beginning of the document again. \printline parse Finally we parse the XML file a second time with the changed reader -settings (TRUE/TRUE). +settings (true/true). \printline prefix \printuntil parse Next we prepare and use the upper right listview to show the reader results with the feature setting \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces -FALSE and \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes TRUE. +false and \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes true. \printline namespace label \printuntil namespace prefix label @@ -370,11 +370,11 @@ Obviously \e attribute is a child of the current \e element. -\printline TRUE +\printline true \printline } To prevent the reader from throwing an error we have to -return TRUE when we successfully dealt with an +return true when we successfully dealt with an element's start tag. \printline endElement diff --git a/doc/xml-sax-walkthrough.doc b/doc/xml-sax-walkthrough.doc index fdec988b2..29e855f34 100644 --- a/doc/xml-sax-walkthrough.doc +++ b/doc/xml-sax-walkthrough.doc @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ First we overload \l TQXmlContentHandler::startDocument() with a non-empty versi At the beginning of the document we simply set \e indent to an empty string because we want to print out the root element without any indentation. -Also we return TRUE so that the parser continues without +Also we return true so that the parser continues without reporting an error. Because we want to be informed when the parser comes @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ If another element follows before the current element's end tag it should be indented. Therefore we add four spaces to the \e indent string. -Finally we return TRUE in order to let the parser continue without +Finally we return true in order to let the parser continue without errors. The last functionality we need to add is the parser's behaviour when an diff --git a/doc/xml.doc b/doc/xml.doc index fad7ad5bd..be5bacc2a 100644 --- a/doc/xml.doc +++ b/doc/xml.doc @@ -295,26 +295,26 @@ Consider the following element: fnord:title="Goddess" name="Eris Kallisti"/> \endcode -With \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes set to TRUE +With \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes set to true the reader will report four attributes; but with the \e -namespace-prefixes feature set to FALSE only three, with the \e +namespace-prefixes feature set to false only three, with the \e xmlns:fnord attribute defining a namespace being "invisible" to the reader. The \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces feature is responsible for reporting local names, namespace prefixes and URIs. With \e -http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces set to TRUE the parser will +http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces set to true the parser will report \e title as the local name of the \e fnord:title attribute, \e fnord being the namespace prefix and \e http://trolltech.com/fnord/ as the namespace URI. When \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces is -FALSE none of them are reported. +false none of them are reported. In the current implementation the TQt XML classes follow the definition that the prefix \e xmlns itself isn't associated with any namespace at all (see \link http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/REC-xml-names-19990114/#ns-using http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/REC-xml-names-19990114/#ns-using \endlink). Therefore even with \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces and -\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes both set to TRUE +\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes both set to true the reader won't return either a local name, a namespace prefix or a namespace URI for \e xmlns:fnord. @@ -324,11 +324,11 @@ to associate \e xmlns with the namespace \e http://www.w3.org/2000/xmlns. As the SAX2 standard suggests, \l TQXmlSimpleReader defaults to having -\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces set to TRUE and -\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes set to FALSE. +\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces set to true and +\e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes set to false. When changing this behavior using \l TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature() note that the combination of both features set to -FALSE is illegal. +false is illegal. For a practical demonstration of how the two features affect the output of the reader run the \link tagreader-with-features-example.html @@ -345,10 +345,10 @@ tagreader with features example. \endlink \i Qualified names \i Prefix mapping \i xmlns attributes -\row \i (TRUE, FALSE) \i Yes \i Yes* \i Yes \i No -\row \i (TRUE, TRUE) \i Yes \i Yes \i Yes \i Yes -\row \i (FALSE, TRUE) \i No* \i Yes \i No* \i Yes -\row \i (FALSE, FALSE) \i41 Illegal +\row \i (true, false) \i Yes \i Yes* \i Yes \i No +\row \i (true, true) \i Yes \i Yes \i Yes \i Yes +\row \i (false, true) \i No* \i Yes \i No* \i Yes +\row \i (false, false) \i41 Illegal \endtable <sup>*</sup> The behavior of these entries is not specified by SAX. diff --git a/examples/demo/demo.pro b/examples/demo/demo.pro index fa49ef083..6212a3922 100644 --- a/examples/demo/demo.pro +++ b/examples/demo/demo.pro @@ -98,6 +98,7 @@ table { TRANSLATIONS = translations/demo_ar.ts \ translations/demo_de.ts \ + translations/demo_es_AR.ts \ translations/demo_fr.ts \ translations/demo_he.ts diff --git a/examples/demo/translations/demo_ar.qm b/examples/demo/translations/demo_ar.qm Binary files differindex 095fc8b06..630f2ebb3 100644 --- a/examples/demo/translations/demo_ar.qm +++ b/examples/demo/translations/demo_ar.qm diff --git a/examples/demo/translations/demo_de.qm b/examples/demo/translations/demo_de.qm Binary files differindex 826dcfdbd..386e52e2b 100644 --- a/examples/demo/translations/demo_de.qm +++ b/examples/demo/translations/demo_de.qm diff --git a/examples/demo/translations/demo_es_AR.qm b/examples/demo/translations/demo_es_AR.qm Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bd22c41d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/demo/translations/demo_es_AR.qm diff --git a/examples/demo/translations/demo_he.qm b/examples/demo/translations/demo_he.qm Binary files differindex 1e85ea2d4..6957b433d 100644 --- a/examples/demo/translations/demo_he.qm +++ b/examples/demo/translations/demo_he.qm diff --git a/examples/i18n/i18n.pro b/examples/i18n/i18n.pro index fda72255e..7e6b132d4 100644 --- a/examples/i18n/i18n.pro +++ b/examples/i18n/i18n.pro @@ -15,6 +15,8 @@ TRANSLATIONS = mywidget.ts \ mywidget_de.ts \ mywidget_el.ts \ mywidget_eo.ts \ + mywidget_es.ts \ + mywidget_es_AR.ts \ mywidget_fr.ts \ mywidget_it.ts \ mywidget_jp.ts \ diff --git a/examples/i18n/mywidget_es.qm b/examples/i18n/mywidget_es.qm Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bd22c41d --- /dev/null +++ b/examples/i18n/mywidget_es.qm diff --git a/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp b/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp index 7b32564ed..597fc4cdd 100644 --- a/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp +++ b/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public: class TQCanvasViewData { public: - TQCanvasViewData() : repaint_from_moving( FALSE ) {} + TQCanvasViewData() : repaint_from_moving( false ) {} #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS TQWMatrix xform; TQWMatrix ixform; @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ void TQCanvasClusterizer::add(const TQRect& rect) cluster[cursor].width()*cluster[cursor].height(); if (cost < lowestcost) { - bool bad=FALSE; + bool bad=false; for (int c=0; c<count && !bad; c++) { bad=cluster[c].intersects(larger) && c!=cursor; } @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ void TQCanvasClusterizer::add(const TQRect& rect) int cost=larger.width()*larger.height() - cluster[cursor].width()*cluster[cursor].height(); if (cost < lowestcost) { - bool bad=FALSE; + bool bad=false; for (int c=0; c<count && !bad; c++) { bad=cluster[c].intersects(larger) && c!=cursor; } @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ void TQCanvasClusterizer::add(const TQRect& rect) - cluster[merge1].width()*cluster[merge1].height() - cluster[merge2].width()*cluster[merge2].height(); if (cost < lowestcost) { - bool bad=FALSE; + bool bad=false; for (int c=0; c<count && !bad; c++) { bad=cluster[c].intersects(larger) && c!=cursor; } @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ TQCanvasItemList TQCanvasItemList::operator+(const TQCanvasItemList &l) const class TQCanvasChunk { public: - TQCanvasChunk() : changed(TRUE) { } + TQCanvasChunk() : changed(true) { } // Other code assumes lists are not deleted. Assignment is also // done on ChunkRecs. So don't add that sort of thing here. @@ -385,18 +385,18 @@ public: void add(TQCanvasItem* item) { list.prepend(item); - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; } void remove(TQCanvasItem* item) { list.remove(item); - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; } void change() { - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; } bool hasChanged() const @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ public: bool takeChange() { bool y = changed; - changed = FALSE; + changed = false; return y; } @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ static int scm(int a, int b) Items appear on the canvas after their \link TQCanvasItem::show() show()\endlink function has been called (or \link - TQCanvasItem::setVisible() setVisible(TRUE)\endlink), and \e after + TQCanvasItem::setVisible() setVisible(true)\endlink), and \e after update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are \link TQCanvasItem::setVisible() visible\endlink, and then only if \l update() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ static int scm(int a, int b) held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas (for example TQCanvasItem::x() is greater than width()). When a canvas - item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns FALSE and the canvas + item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns false and the canvas disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any of the common operations on the canvas.) @@ -613,8 +613,8 @@ void TQCanvas::init(int w, int h, int chunksze, int mxclusters) grid = 0; htiles = 0; vtiles = 0; - dblbuf = TRUE; - debug_redraw_areas = FALSE; + dblbuf = true; + debug_redraw_areas = false; } /*! @@ -862,8 +862,8 @@ void TQCanvas::retune(int chunksze, int mxclusters) /*! \fn bool TQCanvas::onCanvas( int x, int y ) const - Returns TRUE if the pixel position (\a x, \a y) is on the canvas; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the pixel position (\a x, \a y) is on the canvas; + otherwise returns false. \sa validChunk() */ @@ -872,8 +872,8 @@ void TQCanvas::retune(int chunksze, int mxclusters) \fn bool TQCanvas::onCanvas( const TQPoint& p ) const \overload - Returns TRUE if the pixel position \a p is on the canvas; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the pixel position \a p is on the canvas; + otherwise returns false. \sa validChunk() */ @@ -881,8 +881,8 @@ void TQCanvas::retune(int chunksze, int mxclusters) /*! \fn bool TQCanvas::validChunk( int x, int y ) const - Returns TRUE if the chunk position (\a x, \a y) is on the canvas; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the chunk position (\a x, \a y) is on the canvas; + otherwise returns false. \sa onCanvas() */ @@ -891,8 +891,8 @@ void TQCanvas::retune(int chunksze, int mxclusters) \fn bool TQCanvas::validChunk( const TQPoint& p ) const \overload - Returns TRUE if the chunk position \a p is on the canvas; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the chunk position \a p is on the canvas; otherwise + returns false. \sa onCanvas() */ @@ -1116,12 +1116,12 @@ void TQCanvas::drawViewArea( TQCanvasView* view, TQPainter* p, const TQRect& vr, #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS twm.translate(-vr.x(),-vr.y()); twm.translate(-tl.x(),-tl.y()); - dbp.setWorldMatrix( wm*twm, TRUE ); + dbp.setWorldMatrix( wm*twm, true ); #else dbp.translate(-vr.x()-tl.x(),-vr.y()-tl.y()); #endif dbp.setClipRect(0,0,vr.width(), vr.height()); - drawCanvasArea(ivr,&dbp,FALSE); + drawCanvasArea(ivr,&dbp,false); dbp.end(); p->drawPixmap(vr.x(), vr.y(), offscr, 0, 0, vr.width(), vr.height()); } else { @@ -1140,7 +1140,7 @@ void TQCanvas::drawViewArea( TQCanvasView* view, TQPainter* p, const TQRect& vr, #else #endif p->setBrushOrigin(tl.x(), tl.y()); - drawCanvasArea(ivr,p,FALSE); + drawCanvasArea(ivr,p,false); } } @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ void TQCanvas::update() TQCanvasClusterizer clusterizer(d->viewList.count()); #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS TQPtrList<TQRect> doneareas; - doneareas.setAutoDelete(TRUE); + doneareas.setAutoDelete(true); #endif TQPtrListIterator<TQCanvasView> it(d->viewList); @@ -1348,7 +1348,7 @@ void TQCanvas::drawChanges(const TQRect& inarea) /*! Paints all canvas items that are in the area \a clip to \a - painter, using double-buffering if \a dbuf is TRUE. + painter, using double-buffering if \a dbuf is true. e.g. to print the canvas to a printer: \code @@ -1373,7 +1373,7 @@ void TQCanvas::drawCanvasArea(const TQRect& inarea, TQPainter* p, bool double_bu TQRect area=inarea.intersect(TQRect(0,0,width(),height())); if ( !dblbuf ) - double_buffer = FALSE; + double_buffer = false; if (!d->viewList.first() && !p) return; // Nothing to do. @@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ void TQCanvas::drawForeground(TQPainter& painter, const TQRect& clip) } /*! - If \a y is TRUE (the default) double-buffering is switched on; + If \a y is true (the default) double-buffering is switched on; otherwise double-buffering is switched off. Turning off double-buffering causes the redrawn areas to flicker a @@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ class TQCanvasItemExtra { Items appear on the canvas after their \link show() show()\endlink function has been called (or \link setVisible() - setVisible(TRUE)\endlink), and \e after update() has been called. The + setVisible(true)\endlink), and \e after update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are \link setVisible() visible\endlink, and then only if \l update() is called. If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to the constructor you'll also need @@ -2044,8 +2044,8 @@ void TQCanvasItem::move( double x, double y ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns + false. \sa setVelocity(), setAnimated() */ @@ -2055,8 +2055,8 @@ bool TQCanvasItem::animated() const } /*! - Sets the canvas item to be in motion if \a y is TRUE, or not if \a - y is FALSE. The speed and direction of the motion is set with + Sets the canvas item to be in motion if \a y is true, or not if \a + y is false. The speed and direction of the motion is set with setVelocity(), or with setXVelocity() and setYVelocity(). \sa advance(), TQCanvas::advance() @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setVelocity( double vx, double vy) { if ( ext || vx!=0.0 || vy!=0.0 ) { if ( !ani ) - setAnimated(TRUE); + setAnimated(true); extra().vx = vx; extra().vy = vy; } @@ -2159,7 +2159,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::advance(int phase) void TQCanvasItem::setCanvas(TQCanvas* c) { bool v=isVisible(); - setVisible(FALSE); + setVisible(false); if (cnv) { if (ext) cnv->removeAnimation(this); @@ -2180,21 +2180,21 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setCanvas(TQCanvas* c) Returns the canvas containing the canvas item. */ -/*! Shorthand for setVisible(TRUE). */ +/*! Shorthand for setVisible(true). */ void TQCanvasItem::show() { - setVisible(TRUE); + setVisible(true); } -/*! Shorthand for setVisible(FALSE). */ +/*! Shorthand for setVisible(false). */ void TQCanvasItem::hide() { - setVisible(FALSE); + setVisible(false); } /*! - Makes the canvas item visible if \a yes is TRUE, or invisible if - \a yes is FALSE. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is + Makes the canvas item visible if \a yes is true, or invisible if + \a yes is false. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is next called. */ void TQCanvasItem::setVisible(bool yes) @@ -2218,10 +2218,10 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setVisible(bool yes) /*! \fn bool TQCanvasItem::isVisible() const - Returns TRUE if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns + false. - Note that in this context TRUE does \e not mean that the canvas + Note that in this context true does \e not mean that the canvas item is currently in a view, merely that if a view is showing the area where the canvas item is positioned, and the item is not obscured by items with higher z values, and the view is not @@ -2239,7 +2239,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setVisible(bool yes) /*! \fn bool TQCanvasItem::isSelected() const - Returns TRUE if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -2269,7 +2269,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setSelected(bool yes) /*! \fn bool TQCanvasItem::isEnabled() const - Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -2299,7 +2299,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::setEnabled(bool yes) /*! \fn bool TQCanvasItem::isActive() const - Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -2335,7 +2335,7 @@ bool qt_testCollision(const TQCanvasSprite* s1, const TQCanvasSprite* s2) TQRect ourarea = s1area.intersect(cyourarea); if ( ourarea.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int x2=ourarea.x()-cyourarea.x(); int y2=ourarea.y()-cyourarea.y(); @@ -2375,7 +2375,7 @@ bool qt_testCollision(const TQCanvasSprite* s1, const TQCanvasSprite* s2) if (*(yl + ((x2+i) >> 3)) & (1 << ((x2+i) & 7)) && *(ml + ((x1+i) >> 3)) & (1 << ((x1+i) & 7))) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -2387,7 +2387,7 @@ bool qt_testCollision(const TQCanvasSprite* s1, const TQCanvasSprite* s2) if (*(yl + ((x2+i) >> 3)) & (1 << (7-((x2+i) & 7))) && *(ml + ((x1+i) >> 3)) & (1 << (7-((x1+i) & 7)))) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -2399,7 +2399,7 @@ bool qt_testCollision(const TQCanvasSprite* s1, const TQCanvasSprite* s2) for (int i=0; i<w; i++) { if (*(yl + ((x2+i) >> 3)) & (1 << ((x2+i) & 7))) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -2409,14 +2409,14 @@ bool qt_testCollision(const TQCanvasSprite* s1, const TQCanvasSprite* s2) for (int i=0; i<w; i++) { if (*(yl + ((x2+i) >> 3)) & (1 << (7-((x2+i) & 7)))) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } } } - return FALSE; + return false; } static bool collision_double_dispatch( const TQCanvasSprite* s1, @@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ static bool collision_double_dispatch( const TQCanvasSprite* s1, TQPointArray pa1 = p1->areaPointsAdvanced(); TQPointArray pa2 = p2 ? p2->areaPointsAdvanced() : TQPointArray(i2->boundingRectAdvanced()); - bool col= !(TQRegion(pa1) & TQRegion(pa2,TRUE)).isEmpty(); + bool col= !(TQRegion(pa1) & TQRegion(pa2,true)).isEmpty(); return col; } else { @@ -2475,9 +2475,9 @@ static bool collision_double_dispatch( const TQCanvasSprite* s1, /*! \fn bool TQCanvasItem::collidesWith( const TQCanvasItem* other ) const - Returns TRUE if the canvas item will collide with the \a other + Returns true if the canvas item will collide with the \a other item \e after they have moved by their current velocities; - otherwise returns FALSE. + otherwise returns false. \sa collisions() */ @@ -2544,8 +2544,8 @@ bool TQCanvasSprite::collidesWith( const TQCanvasItem* i ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the canvas item collides with any of the given - items; otherwise returns FALSE. The parameters, \a s, \a p, \a r, + Returns true if the canvas item collides with any of the given + items; otherwise returns false. The parameters, \a s, \a p, \a r, \a e and \a t, are all the same object, this is just a type resolution trick. */ @@ -2637,10 +2637,10 @@ bool TQCanvasText::collidesWith( const TQCanvasSprite* s, detection can be slow, this function works in either exact or inexact mode, according to the \a exact parameter. - If \a exact is TRUE, the canvas items returned have been + If \a exact is true, the canvas items returned have been accurately tested for collision with the canvas item. - If \a exact is FALSE, the canvas items returned are \e near the + If \a exact is false, the canvas items returned are \e near the canvas item. You can test the canvas items returned using collidesWith() if any are interesting collision candidates. By using this approach, you can ignore some canvas items for which @@ -2692,7 +2692,7 @@ TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions(const TQRect& r) const TQCanvasRectangle i(r,(TQCanvas*)this); i.setPen(NoPen); i.show(); // doesn't actually show, since we destroy it - TQCanvasItemList l = i.collisions(TRUE); + TQCanvasItemList l = i.collisions(true); l.sort(); return l; } @@ -2701,7 +2701,7 @@ TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions(const TQRect& r) const \overload Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks - listed in \a chunklist, excluding \a item. If \a exact is TRUE, + listed in \a chunklist, excluding \a item. If \a exact is true, only those which actually \link TQCanvasItem::collidesWith() collide with\endlink \a item are returned; otherwise canvas items are included just for being in the chunks. @@ -2744,7 +2744,7 @@ void TQCanvasItem::addToChunks() TQPointArray pa = chunks(); for (int i=0; i<(int)pa.count(); i++) canvas()->addItemToChunk(this,pa[i].x(),pa[i].y()); - val=(uint)TRUE; + val=(uint)true; } } @@ -2962,7 +2962,7 @@ TQCanvasPixmap::~TQCanvasPixmap() */ /*! - Constructs an invalid array (i.e. isValid() will return FALSE). + Constructs an invalid array (i.e. isValid() will return false). You must call readPixmaps() before being able to use this TQCanvasPixmapArray. */ @@ -2989,7 +2989,7 @@ TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray() If \a datafilenamepattern does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, the array ends up empty and - isValid() returns FALSE. + isValid() returns false. */ TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray( const TQString& datafilenamepattern, @@ -3033,7 +3033,7 @@ TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray(TQPtrList<TQPixmap> list, TQPtrList<TQP hotspots array. If no hotspots are specified, each one is set to be at position (0, 0). - If an error occurs, isValid() will return FALSE. + If an error occurs, isValid() will return false. */ TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray(TQValueList<TQPixmap> list, TQPointArray hotspots) : framecount((int)list.size()), @@ -3087,15 +3087,15 @@ void TQCanvasPixmapArray::reset() If \a filenamepattern does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, this function will return - FALSE, and isValid() will return FALSE; otherwise this function - will return TRUE. + false, and isValid() will return false; otherwise this function + will return true. \sa isValid() */ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps( const TQString& filenamepattern, int fc) { - return readPixmaps(filenamepattern,fc,FALSE); + return readPixmaps(filenamepattern,fc,false); } /*! @@ -3114,15 +3114,15 @@ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps( const TQString& filenamepattern, will fail. If the file isn't readable, contains the wrong number of images, - or there is some other error, this function will return FALSE, and + or there is some other error, this function will return false, and the array will be flagged as invalid; otherwise this function - returns TRUE. + returns true. \sa isValid() */ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readCollisionMasks(const TQString& filename) { - return readPixmaps(filename,framecount,TRUE); + return readPixmaps(filename,framecount,true); } @@ -3137,8 +3137,8 @@ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps( const TQString& datafilenamepattern, img = new TQCanvasPixmap*[framecount]; } if (!img) - return FALSE; - bool ok = TRUE; + return false; + bool ok = true; bool arg = fc > 1; if ( !arg ) framecount=1; @@ -3171,7 +3171,7 @@ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps( const TQString& datafilenamepattern, Use isValid() instead. - This returns FALSE if the array is valid, and TRUE if it is not. + This returns false if the array is valid, and true if it is not. */ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::operator!() { @@ -3179,8 +3179,8 @@ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::operator!() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::isValid() const { @@ -3622,7 +3622,7 @@ const TQWMatrix &TQCanvasView::inverseWorldMatrix() const When you use this, you should note that the performance of the TQCanvasView will decrease considerably. - Returns FALSE if \a wm is not invertable; otherwise returns TRUE. + Returns false if \a wm is not invertable; otherwise returns true. \sa worldMatrix() inverseWorldMatrix() TQWMatrix::isInvertible() */ @@ -3693,9 +3693,9 @@ void TQCanvasView::drawContents(TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch) { TQRect r(cx,cy,cw,ch); if (viewing) { - //viewing->drawViewArea(this,p,r,TRUE); + //viewing->drawViewArea(this,p,r,true); viewing->drawViewArea(this,p,r,!d->repaint_from_moving); - d->repaint_from_moving = FALSE; + d->repaint_from_moving = false; } else { p->eraseRect(r); } @@ -3825,8 +3825,8 @@ TQCanvasPolygonalItem::~TQCanvasPolygonalItem() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to - determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns FALSE if it uses + Returns true if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to + determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns false if it uses the odd-even algorithm. The default is to use the odd-even algorithm. @@ -3839,7 +3839,7 @@ bool TQCanvasPolygonalItem::winding() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, the polygonal item will use the winding + If \a enable is true, the polygonal item will use the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon; otherwise the odd-even algorithm will be used. @@ -3861,15 +3861,15 @@ void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setWinding(bool enable) */ void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::invalidate() { - val = (uint)FALSE; + val = (uint)false; removeFromChunks(); } /*! \fn TQCanvasPolygonalItem::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if the polygonal item's area information has not been - invalidated; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the polygonal item's area information has not been + invalidated; otherwise returns false. \sa invalidate() */ @@ -4266,7 +4266,7 @@ void TQCanvasPolygon::moveBy(double dx, double dy) */ TQCanvasSpline::TQCanvasSpline(TQCanvas* canvas) : TQCanvasPolygon(canvas), - cl(TRUE) + cl(true) { } @@ -4282,9 +4282,9 @@ TQCanvasSpline::~TQCanvasSpline() /*! Set the spline control points to \a ctrl. - If \a close is TRUE, then the first point in \a ctrl will be + If \a close is true, then the first point in \a ctrl will be re-used as the last point, and the number of control points must - be a multiple of 3. If \a close is FALSE, one additional control + be a multiple of 3. If \a close is false, one additional control point is required, and the number of control points must be one of (4, 7, 10, 13, ...). @@ -4316,8 +4316,8 @@ TQPointArray TQCanvasSpline::controlPoints() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the control points are a closed set; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the control points are a closed set; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQCanvasSpline::closed() const { @@ -4327,7 +4327,7 @@ bool TQCanvasSpline::closed() const void TQCanvasSpline::recalcPoly() { TQPtrList<TQPointArray> segs; - segs.setAutoDelete(TRUE); + segs.setAutoDelete(true); int n=0; for (int i=0; i<(int)bez.count()-1; i+=3) { TQPointArray ctrl(4); @@ -5310,7 +5310,7 @@ void TQCanvasSprite::setFrameAnimation(FrameAnimationType type, int step, int st anim_val = step; anim_type = type; anim_state = state; - setAnimated(TRUE); + setAnimated(true); } /*! diff --git a/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h b/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h index 8d5e0fd45..c6078b41b 100644 --- a/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h +++ b/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h @@ -290,12 +290,12 @@ public: TQCanvasItemList collisions( const TQPointArray& pa, const TQCanvasItem* item, bool exact) const; - void drawArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p, bool double_buffer=FALSE); + void drawArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p, bool double_buffer=false); // These are for TQCanvasView to call virtual void addView(TQCanvasView*); virtual void removeView(TQCanvasView*); - void drawCanvasArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p=0, bool double_buffer=TRUE); + void drawCanvasArea(const TQRect&, TQPainter* p=0, bool double_buffer=true); void drawViewArea( TQCanvasView* view, TQPainter* p, const TQRect& r, bool dbuf ); // These are for TQCanvasItem to call @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ public: TQCanvasSpline(TQCanvas* canvas); ~TQCanvasSpline(); - void setControlPoints(TQPointArray, bool closed=TRUE); + void setControlPoints(TQPointArray, bool closed=true); TQPointArray controlPoints() const; bool closed() const; diff --git a/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp index 5184973d2..09db78800 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp @@ -715,15 +715,15 @@ int TQBig5Codec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { //tqDebug("TQBig5hkscsCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint = \"%s\")", hint); int score = 0; - bool zh = FALSE; + bool zh = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh_TW", 5) == 0) { score += 16; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } else if ( tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh", 2) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "chinese", 7) == 0) { score += 2; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } const char *p; if (zh) { @@ -962,15 +962,15 @@ int TQBig5hkscsCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { //tqDebug("TQBig5hkscsCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint = \"%s\")", hint); int score = 0; - bool zh = FALSE; + bool zh = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh_HK", 5) == 0) { score += 16; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } else if ( tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh", 2) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "chinese", 7) == 0) { score += 2; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } const char *p; if (zh) { diff --git a/src/codecs/tqeucjpcodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqeucjpcodec.cpp index 6d75e2161..0bfd69a92 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqeucjpcodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqeucjpcodec.cpp @@ -301,13 +301,13 @@ const char* TQEucJpCodec::mimeName() const int TQEucJpCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { int score = 0; - bool ja = FALSE; + bool ja = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja_JP", 5) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "japan", 5) == 0) { score += 3; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } else if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja", 2) == 0) { score += 2; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } const char *p; if (ja) { diff --git a/src/codecs/tqeuckrcodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqeuckrcodec.cpp index bba2c8808..9b9192a80 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqeuckrcodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqeuckrcodec.cpp @@ -211,14 +211,14 @@ const char* TQEucKrCodec::mimeName() const int TQEucKrCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { int score = 0; - bool ko = FALSE; + bool ko = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ko_KR", 5) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "korean", 5) == 0) { score += 3; - ko = TRUE; + ko = true; } else if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ko", 2) == 0) { score += 2; - ko = TRUE; + ko = true; } const char *p; if (ko) { diff --git a/src/codecs/tqfontcncodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqfontcncodec.cpp index 36ffc4e54..58bc956b3 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqfontcncodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqfontcncodec.cpp @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ void TQFontGbkCodec::fromUnicode(const TQChar *in, unsigned short *out, int leng bool TQFontGbkCodec::canEncode( TQChar ch ) const { if (ch.unicode() >= 0x4e00 && ch.unicode() <= 0x9fa5) - return TRUE; + return true; uchar buf[4]; int len = qt_UnicodeToGbk( ch.unicode(), buf ); //tqDebug("TQFontGbkCodec::canEncode( TQChar ch = %02X%02X )", ch.row(), ch.cell()); diff --git a/src/codecs/tqgb18030codec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqgb18030codec.cpp index d2578dc8e..e1010864c 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqgb18030codec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqgb18030codec.cpp @@ -265,11 +265,11 @@ TQString TQGb18030Codec::toUnicode(const char* chars, int len) const int TQGb18030Codec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { int score = 0; - bool zh = FALSE; + bool zh = false; //tqDebug("TQGb18030Codec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint = \"%s\")", hint); if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh_CN", 5) == 0){ score += 10; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } const char *p; if ( zh ) { @@ -476,11 +476,11 @@ int TQGbkCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const #endif int score = 0; - bool zh = FALSE; + bool zh = false; //tqDebug("TQGbkCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint = \"%s\")", hint); if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh_CN", 5) == 0){ score += 10; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } const char *p; if ( zh ) { @@ -670,11 +670,11 @@ const char* TQGb2312Codec::name() const int TQGb2312Codec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { int score = 0; - bool zh = FALSE; + bool zh = false; //tqDebug("TQGb2312Codec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint = \"%s\")", hint); if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "zh_CN", 5) == 0){ score += 10; - zh = TRUE; + zh = true; } const char *p; if ( zh ) { diff --git a/src/codecs/tqhebrewcodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqhebrewcodec.cpp index 0140117b0..928dc0035 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqhebrewcodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqhebrewcodec.cpp @@ -82,51 +82,51 @@ static const uchar unicode_to_heb_05[32] = { static bool to8bit(const TQChar ch, TQCString *rstr) { - bool converted = FALSE; + bool converted = false; - if( ch.isMark() ) return TRUE; // ignore marks for conversion + if( ch.isMark() ) return true; // ignore marks for conversion if ( ch.row() ) { if ( ch.row() == 0x05 ) { if ( ch.cell() > 0x91 ) - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; // 0x0591 - 0x05cf: Hebrew punctuation... dropped if ( ch.cell() >= 0xD0 ) *rstr += (char)unicode_to_heb_05[ch.cell()- 0xD0]; } else if ( ch.row() == 0x20 ) { if ( ch.cell() == 0x3E ) { *rstr += (char)0xAF; - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; } else if ( ch.cell() == 0x17 ) { *rstr += (char)0xCF; - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; } } else { - converted = FALSE; + converted = false; } } else { if ( ch.cell() < 0x80 ) { *rstr += (char)ch.cell(); - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; } else if( ch.cell() < 0xA0 ) { *rstr += (char)unicode_to_heb_00[ch.cell() - 0x80]; - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; } } - if(converted) return TRUE; + if(converted) return true; // couldn't convert the char... lets try its decomposition TQString d = ch.decomposition(); if(d.isNull()) - return FALSE; + return false; int l = d.length(); for (int i=0; i<l; i++) { const TQChar ch = d[i]; if(to8bit(ch, rstr)) - converted = TRUE; + converted = true; } return converted; diff --git a/src/codecs/tqisciicodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqisciicodec.cpp index 75d3db3e7..08e0669d7 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqisciicodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqisciicodec.cpp @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ TQCString TQIsciiCodec::fromUnicode(const TQString& uc, int& len_in_out) const int base = codecs[idx].base; - bool halant = FALSE; + bool halant = false; for (int i =0; i < l; ++i) { int pos = data[i].unicode() - base; if (pos > 0 && pos < 0x80) { @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ TQString TQIsciiCodec::toUnicode( const char* chars, int len_in ) const int base = codecs[idx].base; - bool halant = FALSE; + bool halant = false; for (int i = 0; i < len_in; ++i) { ushort ch = (uchar) chars[i]; if (ch < 0xa0) diff --git a/src/codecs/tqjiscodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqjiscodec.cpp index beb5863c3..b3be343f2 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqjiscodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqjiscodec.cpp @@ -393,13 +393,13 @@ int TQJisCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const return 10; int score = 0; - bool ja = FALSE; + bool ja = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja_JP", 5) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "japan", 5) == 0) { score += 3; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } else if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja", 2) == 0) { score += 2; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } const char *p; if (ja) { @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ class TQJisDecoder : public TQTextDecoder { bool esc; const TQJpUnicodeConv * const conv; public: - TQJisDecoder(const TQJpUnicodeConv *c) : nbuf(0), state(Ascii), prev(Ascii), esc(FALSE), conv(c) + TQJisDecoder(const TQJpUnicodeConv *c) : nbuf(0), state(Ascii), prev(Ascii), esc(false), conv(c) { } @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ public: buf[nbuf++] = ch; } else { nbuf = 0; - esc = FALSE; + esc = false; } break; case 1: @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ public: break; } nbuf = 0; - esc = FALSE; + esc = false; } } else { if (buf[0] == '(') { @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ public: } } nbuf = 0; - esc = FALSE; + esc = false; } break; case 2: @@ -622,14 +622,14 @@ public: } } nbuf = 0; - esc = FALSE; + esc = false; break; } } else { if (ch == Esc) { // Escape sequence nbuf = 0; - esc = TRUE; + esc = true; } else if (ch == So) { // Shift out prev = state; diff --git a/src/codecs/tqsjiscodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqsjiscodec.cpp index 6262604e3..010ff9293 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqsjiscodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqsjiscodec.cpp @@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ const char* TQSjisCodec::mimeName() const int TQSjisCodec::heuristicNameMatch(const char* hint) const { int score = 0; - bool ja = FALSE; + bool ja = false; if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja_JP", 5) == 0 || tqstrnicmp(hint, "japan", 5) == 0) { score += 3; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } else if (tqstrnicmp(hint, "ja", 2) == 0) { score += 2; - ja = TRUE; + ja = true; } const char *p; if (ja) { diff --git a/src/codecs/tqtextcodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqtextcodec.cpp index 7082c43b0..01aa6e31c 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqtextcodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqtextcodec.cpp @@ -1154,8 +1154,8 @@ unsigned short TQTextCodec::characterFromUnicode(const TQString &str, int pos) c } /*! - Returns TRUE if the Unicode character \a ch can be fully encoded - with this codec; otherwise returns FALSE. The default + Returns true if the Unicode character \a ch can be fully encoded + with this codec; otherwise returns false. The default implementation tests if the result of toUnicode(fromUnicode(ch)) is the original \a ch. Subclasses may be able to improve the efficiency. @@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ bool TQTextCodec::canEncode( TQChar ch ) const bool TQTextCodec::canEncode( const TQString& s ) const { if ( s.isEmpty() ) - return TRUE; + return true; return toUnicode(fromUnicode(s)) == s; } @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ public: char line[maxlen]; char esc='\\'; char comm='%'; - bool incmap = FALSE; + bool incmap = false; while (iod->readLine(line,maxlen) > 0) { if (0==tqstrnicmp(line,"<code_set_name>",15)) n = line+15; @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ public: if (!to_unicode) { to_unicode = new ushort[256]; } - incmap = TRUE; + incmap = true; } else if (0==tqstrnicmp(line,"END CHARMAP",11)) break; else if (incmap) { @@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ bool TQSimpleTextCodec::canEncode( TQChar ch ) const unsigned short u = ch.unicode(); unsigned char* rmp = reverseMap->data(); int rmsize = (int) reverseMap->size(); - return u < 128 ? TRUE : (( u < rmsize ) ? (*(rmp+u) != 0) : FALSE ); + return u < 128 ? true : (( u < rmsize ) ? (*(rmp+u) != 0) : false ); } const char* TQSimpleTextCodec::name() const @@ -2615,7 +2615,7 @@ TQString TQLatin15Codec::toUnicode(const char* chars, int len) const } static inline unsigned char -latin15CharFromUnicode( unsigned short uc, bool replacement = TRUE ) +latin15CharFromUnicode( unsigned short uc, bool replacement = true ) { uchar c; if ( uc < 0x0100 ) { @@ -2678,7 +2678,7 @@ latin15CharFromUnicode( unsigned short uc, bool replacement = TRUE ) void TQLatin15Codec::fromUnicode( const TQChar *in, unsigned short *out, int length ) const { while ( length-- ) { - *out = latin15CharFromUnicode( in->unicode(), FALSE ); + *out = latin15CharFromUnicode( in->unicode(), false ); ++in; ++out; } @@ -2704,7 +2704,7 @@ TQCString TQLatin15Codec::fromUnicode(const TQString& uc, int& len ) const unsigned short TQLatin15Codec::characterFromUnicode(const TQString &str, int pos) const { - return latin15CharFromUnicode( str.unicode()[pos].unicode(), FALSE ); + return latin15CharFromUnicode( str.unicode()[pos].unicode(), false ); } diff --git a/src/codecs/tqtextcodecfactory.cpp b/src/codecs/tqtextcodecfactory.cpp index b3895360c..476eaec5b 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqtextcodecfactory.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqtextcodecfactory.cpp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ static void create_manager() manager = new TQPluginManager<TQTextCodecFactoryInterface>(IID_QTextCodecFactory, TQApplication::libraryPaths(), "/codecs", - FALSE); + false); TQ_CHECK_PTR( manager ); cleanup_manager.set( &manager ); } diff --git a/src/codecs/tqutfcodec.cpp b/src/codecs/tqutfcodec.cpp index eba25e505..5c3bfb26a 100644 --- a/src/codecs/tqutfcodec.cpp +++ b/src/codecs/tqutfcodec.cpp @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ class TQUtf8Decoder : public TQTextDecoder { int need; bool headerDone; public: - TQUtf8Decoder() : need(0), headerDone(FALSE) + TQUtf8Decoder() : need(0), headerDone(false) { } @@ -180,14 +180,14 @@ public: // surrogate pair *qch++ = TQChar(TQChar::highSurrogate(uc)); *qch++ = TQChar(TQChar::lowSurrogate(uc)); - headerDone = TRUE; + headerDone = true; } else if ((uc < min_uc) || (uc >= 0xd800 && uc <= 0xdfff) || (uc >= 0xfffe)) { // overlong sequence, UTF16 surrogate or BOM *qch++ = TQChar::replacement; } else { if (headerDone || TQChar(uc) != TQChar::byteOrderMark) *qch++ = uc; - headerDone = TRUE; + headerDone = true; } } } else { @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ public: } else { if ( ch < 128 ) { *qch++ = ch; - headerDone = TRUE; + headerDone = true; } else if ((ch & 0xe0) == 0xc0) { uc = ch & 0x1f; need = 1; @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ int TQUtf16Codec::heuristicContentMatch(const char* chars, int len) const class TQUtf16Encoder : public TQTextEncoder { bool headerdone; public: - TQUtf16Encoder() : headerdone(FALSE) + TQUtf16Encoder() : headerdone(false) { } @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ public: memcpy(d.data(),uc.unicode(),lenInOut); return d; } else { - headerdone = TRUE; + headerdone = true; lenInOut = (1+uc.length())*sizeof(TQChar); TQCString d(lenInOut); memcpy(d.data(),&TQChar::byteOrderMark,sizeof(TQChar)); @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ class TQUtf16Decoder : public TQTextDecoder { bool headerdone; public: - TQUtf16Decoder() : half(FALSE), swap(FALSE), headerdone(FALSE) + TQUtf16Decoder() : half(false), swap(false), headerdone(false) { } @@ -318,13 +318,13 @@ public: } else { *qch++ = ch; } - headerdone = TRUE; + headerdone = true; } else *qch++ = ch; - half = FALSE; + half = false; } else { buf = *chars++; - half = TRUE; + half = true; } } result.truncate( qch - result.unicode() ); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp index 43e77866f..a80b63bc1 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ class TQWellArray : public TQGridView TQ_PROPERTY( int selectedRow READ selectedRow ) public: - TQWellArray( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool popup = FALSE ); + TQWellArray( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool popup = false ); ~TQWellArray() {} TQString cellContent( int row, int col ) const; @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ TQWellArray::TQWellArray( TQWidget *parent, const char * name, bool popup ) selRow = -1; if ( smallStyle ) - setMouseTracking( TRUE ); + setMouseTracking( true ); } @@ -411,13 +411,13 @@ void TQWellArray::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) if( curRow > 0 ) setCurrent( curRow - 1, curCol); else if ( smallStyle ) - focusNextPrevChild( FALSE ); + focusNextPrevChild( false ); break; case Key_Down: if( curRow < numRows()-1 ) setCurrent( curRow + 1, curCol); else if ( smallStyle ) - focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + focusNextPrevChild( true ); break; case Key_Space: case Key_Return: @@ -433,17 +433,17 @@ void TQWellArray::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) //////////// TQWellArray END -static bool initrgb = FALSE; +static bool initrgb = false; static TQRgb stdrgb[6*8]; static TQRgb cusrgb[2*8]; -static bool customSet = FALSE; +static bool customSet = false; static void initRGB() { if ( initrgb ) return; - initrgb = TRUE; + initrgb = true; int i = 0; for ( int g = 0; g < 4; g++ ) for ( int r = 0; r < 4; r++ ) @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ void TQColorDialog::setCustomColor( int i, TQRgb c ) #endif return; } - customSet = TRUE; + customSet = true; cusrgb[i] = c; } @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ class TQColorWell : public TQWellArray { public: TQColorWell( TQWidget *parent, int r, int c, TQRgb *vals ) - :TQWellArray( parent, "" ), values( vals ), mousePressed( FALSE ), oldCurrent( -1, -1 ) + :TQWellArray( parent, "" ), values( vals ), mousePressed( false ), oldCurrent( -1, -1 ) { setNumRows(r), setNumCols(c); setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum) ); } protected: @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ void TQColorWell::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { oldCurrent = TQPoint( selectedRow(), selectedColumn() ); TQWellArray::mousePressEvent( e ); - mousePressed = TRUE; + mousePressed = true; pressPos = e->pos(); } @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ void TQColorWell::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) p.drawRect( 0, 0, pix.width(), pix.height() ); p.end(); drg->setPixmap( pix ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; drg->dragCopy(); } #endif @@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ void TQColorWell::dropEvent( TQDropEvent *e ) TQColor col; TQColorDrag::decode( e, col ); values[ i ] = col.rgb(); - repaintContents( FALSE ); + repaintContents( false ); e->accept(); } else { e->ignore(); @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ void TQColorWell::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( !mousePressed ) return; TQWellArray::mouseReleaseEvent( e ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } class TQColorPicker : public TQFrame @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ void TQColorLuminancePicker::setVal( int v ) return; val = TQMAX( 0, TQMIN(v,255)); delete pix; pix=0; - repaint( FALSE ); //### + repaint( false ); //### emit newHsv( hue, sat, val ); } @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ void TQColorLuminancePicker::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) TQPainter p(this); p.drawPixmap( 1, coff, *pix ); const TQColorGroup &g = colorGroup(); - qDrawShadePanel( &p, r, g, TRUE ); + qDrawShadePanel( &p, r, g, true ); p.setPen( g.foreground() ); p.setBrush( g.foreground() ); TQPointArray a; @@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ void TQColorLuminancePicker::setCol( int h, int s , int v ) hue = h; sat = s; delete pix; pix=0; - repaint( FALSE );//#### + repaint( false );//#### } TQPoint TQColorPicker::colPt() @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ void TQColorPicker::setCol( int h, int s ) r = r.unite( TQRect( colPt(), TQSize(20,20) ) ); r.moveBy( contentsRect().x()-9, contentsRect().y()-9 ); // update( r ); - repaint( r, FALSE ); + repaint( r, false ); } void TQColorPicker::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *m ) @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ public: TQString s; s.setNum(i); bool block = signalsBlocked(); - blockSignals(TRUE); + blockSignals(true); setText( s ); blockSignals(block); } @@ -974,8 +974,8 @@ public: TQColorShowLabel( TQWidget *parent ) : TQFrame( parent, "qt_colorshow_lbl" ) { setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel|TQFrame::Sunken ); setBackgroundMode( PaletteBackground ); - setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + setAcceptDrops( true ); + mousePressed = false; } void setColor( TQColor c ) { col = c; } @@ -1018,7 +1018,7 @@ void TQColorShower::showAlpha( bool b ) void TQColorShowLabel::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { - mousePressed = TRUE; + mousePressed = true; pressPos = e->pos(); } @@ -1035,7 +1035,7 @@ void TQColorShowLabel::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) p.drawRect( 0, 0, pix.width(), pix.height() ); p.end(); drg->setPixmap( pix ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; drg->dragCopy(); } #endif @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ void TQColorShowLabel::dropEvent( TQDropEvent *e ) { if ( TQColorDrag::canDecode( e ) ) { TQColorDrag::decode( e, col ); - repaint( FALSE ); + repaint( false ); emit colorDropped( col.rgb() ); e->accept(); } else { @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ void TQColorShowLabel::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * ) { if ( !mousePressed ) return; - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } TQColorShower::TQColorShower( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) @@ -1154,12 +1154,12 @@ TQColorShower::TQColorShower( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) void TQColorShower::showCurrentColor() { lab->setColor( currentColor() ); - lab->repaint(FALSE); //### + lab->repaint(false); //### } void TQColorShower::rgbEd() { - rgbOriginal = TRUE; + rgbOriginal = true; if ( alphaEd->isVisible() ) curCol = tqRgba( rEd->val(), gEd->val(), bEd->val(), currentAlpha() ); else @@ -1177,7 +1177,7 @@ void TQColorShower::rgbEd() void TQColorShower::hsvEd() { - rgbOriginal = FALSE; + rgbOriginal = false; hue = hEd->val(); sat = sEd->val(); val = vEd->val(); @@ -1194,7 +1194,7 @@ void TQColorShower::hsvEd() void TQColorShower::setRgb( TQRgb rgb ) { - rgbOriginal = TRUE; + rgbOriginal = true; curCol = rgb; rgb2hsv( currentColor(), hue, sat, val ); @@ -1212,7 +1212,7 @@ void TQColorShower::setRgb( TQRgb rgb ) void TQColorShower::setHsv( int h, int s, int v ) { - rgbOriginal = FALSE; + rgbOriginal = false; hue = h; val = v; sat = s; //Range check### curCol = TQColor( hue, sat, val, TQColor::Hsv ).rgb(); @@ -1300,11 +1300,11 @@ void TQColorDialogPrivate::newStandard( int r, int c ) TQColorDialogPrivate::TQColorDialogPrivate( TQColorDialog *dialog ) : TQObject(dialog) { - compact = FALSE; + compact = false; // small displays (e.g. PDAs cannot fit the full color dialog, // so just use the color picker. if ( tqApp->desktop()->width() < 480 || tqApp->desktop()->height() < 350 ) - compact = TRUE; + compact = true; nextCust = 0; const int lumSpace = 3; @@ -1335,7 +1335,7 @@ TQColorDialogPrivate::TQColorDialogPrivate( TQColorDialog *dialog ) : custom = new TQColorWell( dialog, 2, 8, cusrgb ); custom->setCellWidth( 28 ); custom->setCellHeight( 24 ); - custom->setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + custom->setAcceptDrops( true ); connect( custom, TQ_SIGNAL(selected(int,int)), TQ_SLOT(newCustom(int,int))); lab = new TQLabel( custom, TQColorDialog::tr( "&Custom colors") , dialog, "qt_custcolors_lbl" ); @@ -1345,7 +1345,7 @@ TQColorDialogPrivate::TQColorDialogPrivate( TQColorDialog *dialog ) : TQPushButton *custbut = new TQPushButton( TQColorDialog::tr("&Define Custom Colors >>"), dialog, "qt_def_custcolors_lbl" ); - custbut->setEnabled( FALSE ); + custbut->setEnabled( false ); leftLay->addWidget( custbut ); } else { // better color picker size for small displays @@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ TQColorDialogPrivate::TQColorDialogPrivate( TQColorDialog *dialog ) : TQPushButton *ok, *cancel; ok = new TQPushButton( TQColorDialog::tr("OK"), dialog, "qt_ok_btn" ); connect( ok, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), dialog, TQ_SLOT(accept()) ); - ok->setDefault(TRUE); + ok->setDefault(true); cancel = new TQPushButton( TQColorDialog::tr("Cancel"), dialog, "qt_cancel_btn" ); connect( cancel, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), dialog, TQ_SLOT(reject()) ); buttons->addWidget( ok ); @@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ void TQColorDialogPrivate::addCustom() { cusrgb[nextCust] = cs->currentColor(); if (custom) - custom->repaintContents( FALSE ); + custom->repaintContents( false ); nextCust = (nextCust+1) % 16; } @@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ void TQColorDialogPrivate::addCustom() /*! Constructs a default color dialog with parent \a parent and called - \a name. If \a modal is TRUE the dialog will be modal. Use + \a name. If \a modal is true the dialog will be modal. Use setColor() to set an initial value. \sa getColor() @@ -1456,7 +1456,7 @@ TQColorDialog::TQColorDialog(TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal) : TQDialog(parent, name, modal, ( WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | WStyle_Title | WStyle_DialogBorder | WStyle_SysMenu ) ) { - setSizeGripEnabled( FALSE ); + setSizeGripEnabled( false ); d = new TQColorDialogPrivate( this ); #ifndef TQT_NO_SETTINGS @@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ TQColorDialog::TQColorDialog(TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal) : TQSettings settings; settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, "/Trolltech" ); for ( int i = 0; i < 2*8; ++i ) { - bool ok = FALSE; + bool ok = false; TQRgb rgb = (TQRgb)settings.readNumEntry( "/TQt/customColors/" + TQString::number( i ), 0, &ok ); if ( ok ) cusrgb[i] = rgb; @@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *parent, #endif int allocContext = TQColor::enterAllocContext(); - TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); //modal + TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, true ); //modal #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( TQColorDialog::tr( "Select color" ) ); #endif @@ -1516,8 +1516,8 @@ TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *parent, initially set to \a initial. The dialog is a child of \a parent and called \a name. - If \a ok is non-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked - OK, and to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. + If \a ok is non-null, \e *\a ok is set to true if the user clicked + OK, and to false if the user clicked Cancel. If the user clicks Cancel, the \a initial value is returned. */ @@ -1537,7 +1537,7 @@ TQRgb TQColorDialog::getRgba( TQRgb initial, bool *ok, #endif int allocContext = TQColor::enterAllocContext(); - TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); //modal + TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, true ); //modal TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -1616,7 +1616,7 @@ void TQColorDialog::setColor( const TQColor& c ) void TQColorDialog::setSelectedAlpha( int a ) { - d->showAlpha( TRUE ); + d->showAlpha( true ); d->setCurrentAlpha( a ); } @@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ bool TQColorDialog::selectColor( const TQColor& col ) d->standard->setCurrent( i, j ); d->standard->setSelected( i, j ); d->standard->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -1660,12 +1660,12 @@ bool TQColorDialog::selectColor( const TQColor& col ) d->custom->setCurrent( i, j ); d->custom->setSelected( i, j ); d->custom->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } } } - return FALSE; + return false; } #include "tqcolordialog.moc" diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h index 580f82ca0..93b6daf19 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public: private: ~TQColorDialog(); - TQColorDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE ); + TQColorDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false ); void setColor( const TQColor& ); TQColor color() const; @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ private: void setSelectedAlpha( int ); int selectedAlpha() const; - void showCustom( bool=TRUE ); + void showCustom( bool=true ); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= TQColorDialogPrivate *d; diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp index 277a1b4ca..efeb03abc 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp @@ -99,12 +99,12 @@ and return the appropriate value. Alternatively you can connect to the done() slot, passing it \c Accepted or \c Rejected. - An alternative is to call setModal(TRUE), then show(). Unlike + An alternative is to call setModal(true), then show(). Unlike exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling - setModal(TRUE) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where + setModal(true) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g. to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and - setModal(TRUE) together you must call + setModal(true) together you must call TQApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See \l TQProgressDialog.) @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ class TQDialogPrivate : public TQt public: TQDialogPrivate() - : mainDef(0), orientation(Horizontal),extension(0), doShowExtension(FALSE) + : mainDef(0), orientation(Horizontal),extension(0), doShowExtension(false) #ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP ,resizer(0) #endif @@ -288,18 +288,18 @@ void TQDialog::setDefault( TQPushButton *pushButton ) Q_ASSERT(list); TQObjectListIt it( *list ); TQPushButton *pb; - bool hasMain = FALSE; + bool hasMain = false; while ( (pb = (TQPushButton*)it.current()) ) { ++it; if ( pb->topLevelWidget() != this ) continue; if ( pb == d->mainDef ) - hasMain = TRUE; + hasMain = true; if ( pb != pushButton ) - pb->setDefault( FALSE ); + pb->setDefault( false ); } if (!pushButton && hasMain) - d->mainDef->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->mainDef->setDefault( true ); if (!hasMain) d->mainDef = pushButton; delete list; @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ void TQDialog::hideDefault() TQPushButton *pb; while ( (pb = (TQPushButton*)it.current()) ) { ++it; - pb->setDefault( FALSE ); + pb->setDefault( false ); } delete list; #endif @@ -351,9 +351,9 @@ void TQDialog::hideSpecial() // "OK" buttons are hidden, and (Ok) shown on titlebar // "Cancel" buttons are hidden, and (X) shown on titlebar // "Help" buttons are hidden, and (?) shown on titlebar - bool showOK = FALSE, - showX = FALSE, - showQ = FALSE; + bool showOK = false, + showX = false, + showQ = false; TQObjectList *list = queryList( "TQPushButton" ); TQObjectListIt it( *list ); TQPushButton *pb; @@ -361,15 +361,15 @@ void TQDialog::hideSpecial() if ( !showOK && pb->text() == tqApp->translate( "TQMessageBox", mb_texts[TQMessageBox::Ok] ) ) { pb->hide(); - showOK = TRUE; + showOK = true; } else if ( !showX && pb->text() == tqApp->translate( "TQMessageBox", mb_texts[TQMessageBox::Cancel] ) ) { pb->hide(); - showX = TRUE; + showX = true; } else if ( !showQ && pb->text() == tqApp->tr("Help") ) { pb->hide(); - showQ = TRUE; + showQ = true; } ++it; } @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ int TQDialog::exec() show(); - in_loop = TRUE; + in_loop = true; tqApp->enter_loop(); if ( !wasShowModal ) @@ -530,14 +530,14 @@ bool TQDialog::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) void TQDialog::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e ) { #if !defined(TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS) && !defined(TQT_NO_POPUPMENU) - TQWidget* w = childAt( e->pos(), TRUE ); + TQWidget* w = childAt( e->pos(), true ); if ( !w ) return; TQString s; while ( s.isEmpty() && w ) { - s = TQWhatsThis::textFor( w, e->pos(), FALSE ); + s = TQWhatsThis::textFor( w, e->pos(), false ); if ( s.isEmpty() ) - w = w->parentWidget(TRUE); + w = w->parentWidget(true); } if ( !s.isEmpty() ) { TQPopupMenu p(0,"qt_whats_this_menu"); @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ void TQDialog::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) // call ours, since c++ blocks us from calling the one // belonging to focusWidget(). TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Backtab); - focusNextPrevChild( FALSE ); + focusNextPrevChild( false ); TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); break; case Key_Down: @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ void TQDialog::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) break; } TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Tab); - focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + focusNextPrevChild( true ); TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); break; default: @@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ void TQDialog::show() adjustSize(); if( !qt_net_supports( qt_net_wm_full_placement )) { if ( has_relpos && !did_move ) { - adjustPositionInternal( parentWidget(), TRUE ); + adjustPositionInternal( parentWidget(), true ); } else if ( !did_move ) { adjustPositionInternal( parentWidget() ); } @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ void TQDialog::show() if ( !d->mainDef && isTopLevel() ) { if ( !fw || fw->focusPolicy() == NoFocus ) { - focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + focusNextPrevChild( true ); fw = focusWidget(); } if ( fw ) { @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ void TQDialog::show() do { TQPushButton *pb = ::tqt_cast<TQPushButton*>(candidate); if ( pb && pb->autoDefault() ) { - pb->setDefault( TRUE ); + pb->setDefault( true ); break; } candidate = fd->next(); @@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ void TQDialog::hide() // Reimplemented to exit a modal when the dialog is hidden. TQWidget::hide(); if ( in_loop ) { - in_loop = FALSE; + in_loop = false; tqApp->exit_loop(); } } @@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ void TQDialog::hide() void TQDialog::move( int x, int y ) { - did_move = TRUE; + did_move = true; TQWidget::move( x, y ); } @@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ void TQDialog::move( int x, int y ) void TQDialog::move( const TQPoint &p ) { - did_move = TRUE; + did_move = true; TQWidget::move( p ); } @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@ void TQDialog::move( const TQPoint &p ) void TQDialog::resize( int w, int h ) { - did_resize = TRUE; + did_resize = true; TQWidget::resize( w, h ); } @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ void TQDialog::resize( int w, int h ) void TQDialog::resize( const TQSize &s ) { - did_resize = TRUE; + did_resize = true; TQWidget::resize( s ); } @@ -945,8 +945,8 @@ void TQDialog::resize( const TQSize &s ) void TQDialog::setGeometry( int x, int y, int w, int h ) { - did_move = TRUE; - did_resize = TRUE; + did_move = true; + did_resize = true; TQWidget::setGeometry( x, y, w, h ); } @@ -954,8 +954,8 @@ void TQDialog::setGeometry( int x, int y, int w, int h ) void TQDialog::setGeometry( const TQRect &r ) { - did_move = TRUE; - did_resize = TRUE; + did_move = true; + did_resize = true; TQWidget::setGeometry( r ); } @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ TQWidget* TQDialog::extension() const /*! - If \a showIt is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the + If \a showIt is true, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden. This slot is usually connected to the \l TQButton::toggled() signal @@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ void TQDialog::showExtension( bool showIt ) d->max = maximumSize(); #ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT if ( layout() ) - layout()->setEnabled( FALSE ); + layout()->setEnabled( false ); #endif TQSize s( d->extension->sizeHint() .expandedTo( d->extension->minimumSize() ) @@ -1068,7 +1068,7 @@ void TQDialog::showExtension( bool showIt ) resize( d->size ); #ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT if ( layout() ) - layout()->setEnabled( TRUE ); + layout()->setEnabled( true ); #endif } } @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ bool TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled() const #ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP return !!d->resizer; #else - return FALSE; + return false; #endif } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h index e1d82c179..786be4cf5 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ friend class TQPushButton; TQ_PROPERTY( bool modal READ isModal WRITE setModal ) public: - Q_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + Q_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQDialog(); @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ private: uint has_relpos : 1; uint did_resize : 1; uint in_loop: 1; - void adjustPositionInternal( TQWidget*, bool useRelPos = FALSE ); + void adjustPositionInternal( TQWidget*, bool useRelPos = false ); TQDialogPrivate* d; private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp index 12013b0f6..e8431a345 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ static void deleteStaticcTQErrorMessage() // post-routine } } -static bool metFatal = FALSE; +static bool metFatal = false; void jump( TQtMsgType t, const char * m ) { @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ TQErrorMessage::TQErrorMessage( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) errors = new TQErrorMessageTextView( this, "errors" ); grid->addWidget( errors, 0, 1 ); again = new TQCheckBox( tr( "&Show this message again" ), this, "again" ); - again->setChecked( TRUE ); + again->setChecked( true ); grid->addWidget( again, 1, 1, AlignTop + AlignAuto ); ok = new TQPushButton( tr( "&OK" ), this, "ok" ); connect( ok, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SLOT(accept()) ); @@ -244,10 +244,10 @@ bool TQErrorMessage::nextPending() pending->remove( pending->begin() ); if ( !p.isEmpty() && !doNotShow->find( p ) ) { errors->setText( p ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp index de4754ec4..36cf60691 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp @@ -473,10 +473,10 @@ static int lastWidth = 0; static int lastHeight = 0; static TQString * workingDirectory = 0; -static bool bShowHiddenFiles = FALSE; +static bool bShowHiddenFiles = false; static int sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Name; -static bool sortAscending = TRUE; -static bool detailViewMode = FALSE; +static bool sortAscending = true; +static bool detailViewMode = false; static TQCleanupHandler<TQPixmap> qfd_cleanup_pixmap; static TQCleanupHandler<TQString> qfd_cleanup_string; @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ static PtrExtractIconEx ptrExtractIconEx = 0; static void resolveLibs() { #ifndef Q_OS_TEMP - static bool triedResolve = FALSE; + static bool triedResolve = false; if ( !triedResolve ) { #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT @@ -542,10 +542,10 @@ static void resolveLibs() return; } #endif - triedResolve = TRUE; + triedResolve = true; if ( qt_winunicode ) { TQLibrary lib("shell32"); - lib.setAutoUnload( FALSE ); + lib.setAutoUnload( false ); ptrExtractIconEx = (PtrExtractIconEx) lib.resolve( "ExtractIconExW" ); } } @@ -618,9 +618,9 @@ static void makeVariables() { TQBitmap m( fifteenTransparentPixels->width(), 1 ); m.fill( TQt::color0 ); fifteenTransparentPixels->setMask( m ); - bShowHiddenFiles = FALSE; + bShowHiddenFiles = false; sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Name; - detailViewMode = FALSE; + detailViewMode = false; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( !fileIconProvider ) fileIconProvider = new TQWindowsIconProvider( tqApp ); @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ class TQRenameEdit : public TQLineEdit public: TQRenameEdit( TQWidget *parent ) - : TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_rename_edit" ), doRenameAlreadyEmitted(FALSE) + : TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_rename_edit" ), doRenameAlreadyEmitted(false) { connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL(returnPressed()), TQ_SLOT(slotReturnPressed()) ); } @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ private: void clear(); void show(); - void startRename( bool check = TRUE ); + void startRename( bool check = true ); void viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ); void viewportMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ); void viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ); @@ -720,8 +720,8 @@ public: TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *d ); void clear(); - void startRename( bool check = TRUE ); - void setSorting( int column, bool increasing = TRUE ); + void startRename( bool check = true ); + void setSorting( int column, bool increasing = true ); TQRenameEdit *lined; bool renaming; @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ TQFDProgressAnimation::TQFDProgressAnimation( TQWidget *parent ) void TQFDProgressAnimation::start() { - timer->start( 150, FALSE ); + timer->start( 150, false ); } void TQFDProgressAnimation::next() @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ private: }; TQFDProgressDialog::TQFDProgressDialog( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &fn, int steps ) - : TQDialog( parent, "", TRUE ) + : TQDialog( parent, "", true ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA setCaption( TQFileDialog::tr( "Copy or Move a File" ) ); @@ -962,15 +962,15 @@ public: struct File: public TQListViewItem { File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListViewItem * parent ) - : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( false ) { setup(); dlgp->last = this; } File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * parent ) - : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( false ) { setup(); dlgp->last = this; } File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after ) - : TQListViewItem( parent, after ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, after ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( false ) { setup(); if ( !nextSibling() ) dlgp->last = this; } ~File(); @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ public: class UrlInfoList : public TQPtrList<TQUrlInfo> { public: - UrlInfoList() { setAutoDelete( TRUE ); } + UrlInfoList() { setAutoDelete( true ); } int compareItems( TQPtrCollection::Item n1, TQPtrCollection::Item n2 ) { if ( !n1 || !n2 ) return 0; @@ -1124,7 +1124,7 @@ public: return ui.isValid(); } } - return TRUE; + return true; } #ifndef Q_NO_CURSOR @@ -1162,12 +1162,12 @@ void TQRenameEdit::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * ) if ( !doRenameAlreadyEmitted ) emit doRename(); else - doRenameAlreadyEmitted = FALSE; + doRenameAlreadyEmitted = false; } void TQRenameEdit::slotReturnPressed() { - doRenameAlreadyEmitted = TRUE; + doRenameAlreadyEmitted = true; emit doRename(); } @@ -1179,8 +1179,8 @@ void TQRenameEdit::slotReturnPressed() TQFileListBox::TQFileListBox( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) : TQListBox( parent, "filelistbox" ), filedialog( dlg ), - renaming( FALSE ), renameItem( 0 ), mousePressed( FALSE ), - firstMousePressEvent( TRUE ) + renaming( false ), renameItem( 0 ), mousePressed( false ), + firstMousePressEvent( true ) { changeDirTimer = new TQTimer( this ); TQVBox *box = new TQVBox( viewport(), "qt_vbox" ); @@ -1200,7 +1200,7 @@ TQFileListBox::TQFileListBox( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) this, TQ_SLOT( changeDirDuringDrag() ) ); connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL( contentsMoving(int,int) ), this, TQ_SLOT( contentsMoved(int,int) ) ); - viewport()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + viewport()->setAcceptDrops( true ); dragItem = 0; } @@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ void TQFileListBox::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) void TQFileListBox::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { pressPos = e->pos(); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; bool didRename = renaming; @@ -1265,12 +1265,12 @@ void TQFileListBox::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( e->button() != LeftButton ) { TQListBox::viewportMousePressEvent( e ); - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; return; } int i = currentItem(); - bool wasSelected = FALSE; + bool wasSelected = false; if ( i != -1 ) wasSelected = item( i )->isSelected(); TQListBox::mousePressEvent( e ); @@ -1281,24 +1281,24 @@ void TQFileListBox::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) || ( filedialog->mode() == TQFileDialog::Directory ) || ( filedialog->mode() == TQFileDialog::DirectoryOnly ); if ( itemAt( e->pos() ) != item( i ) ) { - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; return; } if ( !firstMousePressEvent && !didRename && i == currentItem() && currentItem() != -1 && wasSelected && TQUrlInfo( filedialog->d->url, "." ).isWritable() && item( currentItem() )->text() != ".." ) { - renameTimer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), TRUE ); + renameTimer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), true ); renameItem = item( i ); } - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; } void TQFileListBox::viewportMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { dragItem = 0; TQListBox::viewportMouseReleaseEvent( e ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } void TQFileListBox::viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ void TQFileListBox::viewportMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) this, TQ_SLOT( dragObjDestroyed() ) ); drag->drag(); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } } else #endif @@ -1462,15 +1462,15 @@ bool TQFileListBox::acceptDrop( const TQPoint &pnt, TQWidget *source ) TQListBoxItem *item = itemAt( pnt ); if ( !item || ( item && !itemRect( item ).contains( pnt ) ) ) { if ( source == viewport() && startDragDir == filedialog->dirPath() ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } TQUrlInfo fi( filedialog->d->url, item->text() ); if ( fi.isDir() && itemRect( item ).contains( pnt ) ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } void TQFileListBox::setCurrentDropItem( const TQPoint &pnt ) @@ -1516,7 +1516,7 @@ void TQFileListBox::startRename( bool check ) return; int i = currentItem(); - setSelected( i, TRUE ); + setSelected( i, true ); TQRect r = itemRect( item( i ) ); int bdr = item( i )->pixmap() ? item( i )->pixmap()->width() : 16; @@ -1530,10 +1530,10 @@ void TQFileListBox::startRename( bool check ) lined->setFocus(); lined->setText( item( i )->text() ); lined->selectAll(); - lined->setFrame( FALSE ); + lined->setFrame( false ); lined->parentWidget()->show(); viewport()->setFocusProxy( lined ); - renaming = TRUE; + renaming = true; } void TQFileListBox::clear() @@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ void TQFileListBox::cancelRename() renameItem = 0; lined->parentWidget()->hide(); viewport()->setFocusProxy( this ); - renaming = FALSE; + renaming = false; updateItem( currentItem() ); if ( lined->hasFocus() ) viewport()->setFocus(); @@ -1579,9 +1579,9 @@ void TQFileListBox::contentsMoved( int, int ) ************************************************************************/ TQFileDialogTQFileListView::TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) - : TQListView( parent, "qt_filedlg_listview" ), renaming( FALSE ), renameItem( 0 ), - filedialog( dlg ), mousePressed( FALSE ), - firstMousePressEvent( TRUE ) + : TQListView( parent, "qt_filedlg_listview" ), renaming( false ), renameItem( 0 ), + filedialog( dlg ), mousePressed( false ), + firstMousePressEvent( true ) { changeDirTimer = new TQTimer( this ); TQVBox *box = new TQVBox( viewport(), "qt_vbox" ); @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ TQFileDialogTQFileListView::TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFile this, TQ_SLOT (rename() ) ); connect( lined, TQ_SIGNAL( cancelRename() ), this, TQ_SLOT( cancelRename() ) ); - header()->setMovingEnabled( FALSE ); + header()->setMovingEnabled( false ); connect( renameTimer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQ_SLOT( doubleClickTimeout() ) ); connect( changeDirTimer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), @@ -1607,9 +1607,9 @@ TQFileDialogTQFileListView::TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFile connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL( contentsMoving(int,int) ), this, TQ_SLOT( contentsMoved(int,int) ) ); - viewport()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + viewport()->setAcceptDrops( true ); sortcolumn = 0; - ascending = TRUE; + ascending = true; dragItem = 0; } @@ -1643,7 +1643,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::setSorting( int column, bool increasing ) void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::changeSortColumn2( int column ) { int lcol = header()->mapToLogical( column ); - setSorting( lcol, sortcolumn == lcol ? !ascending : TRUE ); + setSorting( lcol, sortcolumn == lcol ? !ascending : true ); } void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) @@ -1688,7 +1688,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { pressPos = e->pos(); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; bool didRename = renaming; cancelRename(); @@ -1697,7 +1697,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( e->button() != LeftButton ) { TQListView::viewportMousePressEvent( e ); - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; return; } @@ -1711,17 +1711,17 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( itemAt( e->pos() ) != i || e->x() + contentsX() > columnWidth( 0 ) ) { - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; return; } if ( !firstMousePressEvent && !didRename && i == currentItem() && currentItem() && TQUrlInfo( filedialog->d->url, "." ).isWritable() && currentItem()->text( 0 ) != ".." ) { - renameTimer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), TRUE ); + renameTimer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), true ); renameItem = currentItem(); } - firstMousePressEvent = FALSE; + firstMousePressEvent = false; } void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) @@ -1733,7 +1733,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) { TQListView::viewportMouseReleaseEvent( e ); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; dragItem = 0; } @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::viewportMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) this, TQ_SLOT( dragObjDestroyed() ) ); drag->drag(); - mousePressed = FALSE; + mousePressed = false; } } #endif @@ -1881,15 +1881,15 @@ bool TQFileDialogTQFileListView::acceptDrop( const TQPoint &pnt, TQWidget *sourc TQListViewItem *item = itemAt( pnt ); if ( !item || ( item && !itemRect( item ).contains( pnt ) ) ) { if ( source == viewport() && startDragDir == filedialog->dirPath() ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } TQUrlInfo fi( filedialog->d->url, item->text( 0 ) ); if ( fi.isDir() && itemRect( item ).contains( pnt ) ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::setCurrentDropItem( const TQPoint &pnt ) @@ -1939,7 +1939,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::startRename( bool check ) return; TQListViewItem *i = currentItem(); - setSelected( i, TRUE ); + setSelected( i, true ); TQRect r = itemRect( i ); int bdr = i->pixmap( 0 ) ? @@ -1954,10 +1954,10 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::startRename( bool check ) lined->setFocus(); lined->setText( i->text( 0 ) ); lined->selectAll(); - lined->setFrame( FALSE ); + lined->setFrame( false ); lined->parentWidget()->show(); viewport()->setFocusProxy( lined ); - renaming = TRUE; + renaming = true; } void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::clear() @@ -1982,7 +1982,7 @@ void TQFileDialogTQFileListView::cancelRename() renameItem = 0; lined->parentWidget()->hide(); viewport()->setFocusProxy( this ); - renaming = FALSE; + renaming = false; if ( currentItem() ) currentItem()->repaint(); if ( lined->hasFocus() ) @@ -2203,7 +2203,7 @@ static TQStringList makeFiltersList( const TQString &filter ) the TQFileDialog. \code - TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", true ); fd->setMode( TQFileDialog::AnyFile ); \endcode @@ -2302,14 +2302,14 @@ static TQStringList makeFiltersList( const TQString &filter ) Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ); + fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( true ); fd->setContentsPreview( p, p ); fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents ); fd->show(); \endcode The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then - create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ), + create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( true ), this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently selected file. We then call setContentsPreview() -- note that we pass the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file @@ -2387,7 +2387,7 @@ extern const char qt_file_dialog_filter_reg_exp[] = /*! Constructs a file dialog called \a name, with the parent, \a parent. - If \a modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is + If \a modal is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. */ @@ -2399,7 +2399,7 @@ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal ) init(); d->mode = ExistingFile; d->types->insertItem( tr( "All Files (*)" ) ); - d->cursorOverride = FALSE; + d->cursorOverride = false; emit dirEntered( d->url.dirPath() ); rereadDir(); } @@ -2407,7 +2407,7 @@ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal ) /*! Constructs a file dialog called \a name with the parent, \a parent. - If \a modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is + If \a modal is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. If \a dirName is specified then it will be used as the dialog's @@ -2435,7 +2435,7 @@ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( const TQString& dirName, const TQString & filter, if ( !filter.isEmpty() ) { setFilters( filter ); if ( !dirName.isEmpty() ) { - int dotpos = dirName.find( TQChar('.'), 0, FALSE ); + int dotpos = dirName.find( TQChar('.'), 0, false ); if ( dotpos != -1 ) { for ( int b=0 ; b<d->types->count() ; b++ ) { if ( d->types->text(b).contains( dirName.right( dirName.length() - dotpos ) ) ) { @@ -2463,23 +2463,23 @@ extern int qt_ntfs_permission_lookup; void TQFileDialog::init() { - setSizeGripEnabled( TRUE ); + setSizeGripEnabled( true ); d = new TQFileDialogPrivate(); d->mode = AnyFile; d->last = 0; d->lastEFSelected = 0; d->moreFiles = 0; - d->infoPreview = FALSE; - d->contentsPreview = FALSE; - d->hadDotDot = FALSE; - d->ignoreNextKeyPress = FALSE; + d->infoPreview = false; + d->contentsPreview = false; + d->hadDotDot = false; + d->ignoreNextKeyPress = false; d->progressDia = 0; - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; - d->ignoreNextRefresh = FALSE; - d->ignoreStop = FALSE; - d->pendingItems.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + d->checkForFilter = false; + d->ignoreNextRefresh = false; + d->ignoreStop = false; + d->pendingItems.setAutoDelete( false ); d->mimeTypeTimer = new TQTimer( this ); - d->cursorOverride = FALSE; + d->cursorOverride = false; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) d->oldPermissionLookup = qt_ntfs_permission_lookup; #endif @@ -2525,7 +2525,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() files->addColumn( tr("Type") ); files->addColumn( tr("Date") ); files->addColumn( tr("Attributes") ); - files->header()->setStretchEnabled( TRUE, 0 ); + files->header()->setStretchEnabled( true, 0 ); files->setMinimumSize( 50, 25 + 2*fm.lineSpacing() ); @@ -2545,7 +2545,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() d->moreFiles = new TQFileListBox( d->stack, this ); d->moreFiles->setRowMode( TQListBox::FitToHeight ); - d->moreFiles->setVariableWidth( TRUE ); + d->moreFiles->setVariableWidth( true ); connect( d->moreFiles, TQ_SIGNAL(selected(TQListBoxItem*)), this, TQ_SLOT(selectDirectoryOrFile(TQListBoxItem*)) ); @@ -2560,14 +2560,14 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() d->moreFiles->viewport()->installEventFilter( this ); okB = new TQPushButton( tr("&OK"), this, "OK" ); //### Or "Save (see other "OK") - okB->setDefault( TRUE ); - okB->setEnabled( FALSE ); + okB->setDefault( true ); + okB->setEnabled( false ); connect( okB, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SLOT(okClicked()) ); cancelB = new TQPushButton( tr("Cancel") , this, "Cancel" ); connect( cancelB, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SLOT(cancelClicked()) ); - d->paths = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "directory history/editor" ); - d->paths->setDuplicatesEnabled( FALSE ); + d->paths = new TQComboBox( true, this, "directory history/editor" ); + d->paths->setDuplicatesEnabled( false ); d->paths->setInsertionPolicy( TQComboBox::NoInsertion ); const TQFileInfoList * rootDrives = TQDir::drives(); TQFileInfoListIterator it( *rootDrives ); @@ -2593,10 +2593,10 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() ( (TQLineEdit*)ol->first() )->installEventFilter( this ); delete ol; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; - d->types = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "file types" ); - d->types->setDuplicatesEnabled( FALSE ); - d->types->setEditable( FALSE ); + d->geometryDirty = true; + d->types = new TQComboBox( true, this, "file types" ); + d->types->setDuplicatesEnabled( false ); + d->types->setEditable( false ); connect( d->types, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(const TQString&)), this, TQ_SLOT(setFilter(const TQString&)) ); connect( d->types, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(const TQString&)), @@ -2607,7 +2607,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() d->typeL = new TQLabel( d->types, tr("File &type:"), this, "qt_filetype_lbl" ); d->goBack = new TQToolButton( this, "go back" ); - d->goBack->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->goBack->setEnabled( false ); d->goBack->setFocusPolicy( TabFocus ); connect( d->goBack, TQ_SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, TQ_SLOT( goBack() ) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP @@ -2636,7 +2636,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() d->modeButtons = new TQButtonGroup( 0, "invisible group" ); connect( d->modeButtons, TQ_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQ_SLOT(modeButtonsDestroyed()) ); - d->modeButtons->setExclusive( TRUE ); + d->modeButtons->setExclusive( true ); connect( d->modeButtons, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked(int)), d->stack, TQ_SLOT(raiseWidget(int)) ); connect( d->modeButtons, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked(int)), @@ -2648,7 +2648,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() TQToolTip::add( d->mcView, tr( "List View" ) ); #endif d->mcView->setIconSet( *multiColumnListViewIcon ); - d->mcView->setToggleButton( TRUE ); + d->mcView->setToggleButton( true ); d->stack->addWidget( d->moreFiles, d->modeButtons->insert( d->mcView ) ); d->detailView = new TQToolButton( this, "list view" ); d->detailView->setFocusPolicy( TabFocus ); @@ -2656,7 +2656,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() TQToolTip::add( d->detailView, tr( "Detail View" ) ); #endif d->detailView->setIconSet( *detailViewIcon ); - d->detailView->setToggleButton( TRUE ); + d->detailView->setToggleButton( true ); d->stack->addWidget( files, d->modeButtons->insert( d->detailView ) ); d->previewInfo = new TQToolButton( this, "preview info view" ); @@ -2665,7 +2665,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() TQToolTip::add( d->previewInfo, tr( "Preview File Info" ) ); #endif d->previewInfo->setIconSet( *previewInfoViewIcon ); - d->previewInfo->setToggleButton( TRUE ); + d->previewInfo->setToggleButton( true ); d->modeButtons->insert( d->previewInfo ); d->previewContents = new TQToolButton( this, "preview info view" ); @@ -2675,20 +2675,20 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() if ( !qstrcmp(style().className(), "TQWindowsStyle") ) #endif { - d->goBack->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->cdToParent->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->newFolder->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->mcView->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->detailView->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->previewInfo->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); - d->previewContents->setAutoRaise( TRUE ); + d->goBack->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->cdToParent->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->newFolder->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->mcView->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->detailView->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->previewInfo->setAutoRaise( true ); + d->previewContents->setAutoRaise( true ); } d->previewContents->setFocusPolicy( TabFocus ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP TQToolTip::add( d->previewContents, tr( "Preview File Contents" ) ); #endif d->previewContents->setIconSet( *previewContentsViewIcon ); - d->previewContents->setToggleButton( TRUE ); + d->previewContents->setToggleButton( true ); d->modeButtons->insert( d->previewContents ); connect( d->detailView, TQ_SIGNAL( clicked() ), @@ -2701,18 +2701,18 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() files, TQ_SLOT( cancelRename() ) ); d->stack->raiseWidget( d->moreFiles ); - d->mcView->setOn( TRUE ); + d->mcView->setOn( true ); TQHBoxLayout *lay = new TQHBoxLayout( this ); lay->setMargin( 6 ); d->leftLayout = new TQHBoxLayout( lay, 5 ); d->topLevelLayout = new TQVBoxLayout( (TQWidget*)0, 5 ); lay->addLayout( d->topLevelLayout, 1 ); - d->extraWidgetsLayouts.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - d->extraLabels.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - d->extraWidgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - d->extraButtons.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - d->toolButtons.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + d->extraWidgetsLayouts.setAutoDelete( false ); + d->extraLabels.setAutoDelete( false ); + d->extraWidgets.setAutoDelete( false ); + d->extraButtons.setAutoDelete( false ); + d->toolButtons.setAutoDelete( false ); TQHBoxLayout * h; @@ -2815,8 +2815,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() if ( detailViewMode ) { d->stack->raiseWidget( files ); - d->mcView->setOn( FALSE ); - d->detailView->setOn( TRUE ); + d->mcView->setOn( false ); + d->detailView->setOn( true ); } d->preview->hide(); @@ -2851,9 +2851,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::fileNameEditReturnPressed() if ( f.isDir() ) { setUrl( TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName(nameEdit->text() + "/" ) ) ); - d->checkForFilter = TRUE; - trySetSelection( TRUE, d->url, TRUE ); - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; + d->checkForFilter = true; + trySetSelection( true, d->url, true ); + d->checkForFilter = false; } } nameEdit->setText( TQString::null ); @@ -2913,12 +2913,12 @@ TQFileDialog::~TQFileDialog() { // since clear might call setContentsPos which would emit // a signal and thus cause a recompute of sizes... - files->blockSignals( TRUE ); - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( TRUE ); + files->blockSignals( true ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( true ); files->clear(); d->moreFiles->clear(); - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( FALSE ); - files->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( false ); + files->blockSignals( false ); #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( d->cursorOverride ) @@ -3003,7 +3003,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter( const TQString& mask ) int n; for ( n = 0; n < d->types->count(); n++ ) { - if ( d->types->text( n ).contains( mask, FALSE ) ) { + if ( d->types->text( n ).contains( mask, false ) ) { d->types->setCurrentItem( n ); TQString f = mask; TQRegExp r( TQString::fromLatin1(qt_file_dialog_filter_reg_exp) ); @@ -3098,7 +3098,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setSelection( const TQString & filename ) else d->url = TQUrlOperator( filename ); d->url.setNameFilter( nf ); - d->checkForFilter = TRUE; + d->checkForFilter = true; bool isDirOk; bool isDir = d->url.isDir( &isDirOk ); if ( !isDirOk ) @@ -3106,8 +3106,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::setSelection( const TQString & filename ) if ( !isDir ) { TQUrlOperator u( d->url ); d->url.setPath( d->url.dirPath() ); - trySetSelection( FALSE, u, TRUE ); - d->ignoreNextRefresh = TRUE; + trySetSelection( false, u, true ); + d->ignoreNextRefresh = true; nameEdit->selectAll(); rereadDir(); emit dirEntered( d->url.dirPath() ); @@ -3118,12 +3118,12 @@ void TQFileDialog::setSelection( const TQString & filename ) p += "/"; d->url.setPath( p ); } - trySetSelection( TRUE, d->url, FALSE ); + trySetSelection( true, d->url, false ); rereadDir(); emit dirEntered( d->url.dirPath() ); nameEdit->setText( TQString::fromLatin1("") ); } - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; + d->checkForFilter = false; } /*! @@ -3267,9 +3267,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::setDir( const TQDir &dir ) d->url = dir.canonicalPath(); d->url.setNameFilter( nf ); TQUrlInfo i( d->url, nameEdit->text() ); - d->checkForFilter = TRUE; - trySetSelection( i.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName(nameEdit->text() ) ), FALSE ); - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; + d->checkForFilter = true; + trySetSelection( i.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName(nameEdit->text() ) ), false ); + d->checkForFilter = false; rereadDir(); emit dirEntered( d->url.path() ); } @@ -3285,7 +3285,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setUrl( const TQUrlOperator &url ) d->oldUrl = d->url; TQString nf = d->url.nameFilter(); - TQString operatorPath = url.toString( FALSE, FALSE ); + TQString operatorPath = url.toString( false, false ); if ( TQUrl::isRelativeUrl( operatorPath ) ) { d->url = TQUrl( d->url, operatorPath ); } else { @@ -3293,21 +3293,21 @@ void TQFileDialog::setUrl( const TQUrlOperator &url ) } d->url.setNameFilter( nf ); - d->checkForFilter = TRUE; + d->checkForFilter = true; if ( !d->url.isDir() ) { TQUrlOperator u = d->url; d->url.setPath( d->url.dirPath() ); - trySetSelection( FALSE, u, FALSE ); + trySetSelection( false, u, false ); rereadDir(); emit dirEntered( d->url.dirPath() ); TQString fn = u.fileName(); nameEdit->setText( fn ); } else { - trySetSelection( TRUE, d->url, FALSE ); + trySetSelection( true, d->url, false ); rereadDir(); emit dirEntered( d->url.dirPath() ); } - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; + d->checkForFilter = false; } /*! @@ -3315,7 +3315,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setUrl( const TQUrlOperator &url ) \brief whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog - The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files. + The default is false, i.e. don't show hidden files. */ void TQFileDialog::setShowHiddenFiles( bool s ) @@ -3347,7 +3347,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::rereadDir() #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( !d->cursorOverride ) { TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor( TQt::WaitCursor ) ); - d->cursorOverride = TRUE; + d->cursorOverride = true; } #endif d->pendingItems.clear(); @@ -3357,7 +3357,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::rereadDir() #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( d->cursorOverride ) { TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor(); - d->cursorOverride = FALSE; + d->cursorOverride = false; } #endif } @@ -3406,7 +3406,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::rereadDir() */ extern bool tqt_resolve_symlinks; // defined in tqapplication.cpp -bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_use_native_dialogs = TRUE; +bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_use_native_dialogs = true; /*! This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file @@ -3445,7 +3445,7 @@ bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_use_native_dialogs = TRUE; Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. - If \a resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat + If \a resolveSymlinks is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. \sa getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), getExistingDirectory() @@ -3507,10 +3507,10 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, || tqApp->style().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetOpenFileNames(filter, startWith.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, - parent, name, caption, selectedFilter, FALSE).first()); + parent, name, caption, selectedFilter, false).first()); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofn", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofn", true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -3576,7 +3576,7 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. - If \a resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat + If \a resolveSymlinks is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. \sa getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), getExistingDirectory() @@ -3635,7 +3635,7 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( const TQString & startWith, caption, selectedFilter)); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gsfn", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gsfn", true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -3683,9 +3683,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::okClicked() if ( fn.contains("*") ) { addFilter( fn ); - nameEdit->blockSignals( TRUE ); + nameEdit->blockSignals( true ); nameEdit->setText( TQString::fromLatin1("") ); - nameEdit->blockSignals( FALSE ); + nameEdit->blockSignals( false ); return; } @@ -3714,7 +3714,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::okClicked() if ( mode() == ExistingFiles ) { if ( ! nameEdit->text().isEmpty() ) { TQStringList sf = selectedFiles(); - bool isdir = FALSE; + bool isdir = false; if ( sf.count() == 1 ) { TQUrlOperator u( d->url, sf[0] ); bool ok; @@ -3765,9 +3765,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::okClicked() } if ( f.isDir() ) { setUrl( TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName(f.name() + "/" ) ) ); - d->checkForFilter = TRUE; - trySetSelection( TRUE, d->url, TRUE ); - d->checkForFilter = FALSE; + d->checkForFilter = true; + trySetSelection( true, d->url, true ); + d->checkForFilter = false; } else { if ( !nameEdit->text().contains( "/" ) && !nameEdit->text().contains( "\\" ) @@ -3830,7 +3830,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e ) bool TQFileDialog::trySetSelection( bool isDir, const TQUrlOperator &u, bool updatelined ) { if ( !isDir && !u.path().isEmpty() && u.path().right( 1 ) == "/" ) - isDir = TRUE; + isDir = true; if ( u.fileName().contains( "*") && d->checkForFilter ) { TQString fn( u.fileName() ); if ( fn.contains( "*" ) ) { @@ -3838,7 +3838,7 @@ bool TQFileDialog::trySetSelection( bool isDir, const TQUrlOperator &u, bool upd d->currentFileName = TQString::null; d->url.setFileName( TQString::null ); nameEdit->setText( TQString::fromLatin1("") ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -3873,9 +3873,9 @@ bool TQFileDialog::trySetSelection( bool isDir, const TQUrlOperator &u, bool upd } if ( !d->currentFileName.isNull() || isDir ) { - okB->setEnabled( TRUE ); + okB->setEnabled( true ); } else if ( !isDirectoryMode( d->mode ) ) { - okB->setEnabled( FALSE ); + okB->setEnabled( false ); } if ( d->currentFileName.length() && old != d->currentFileName ) @@ -3893,7 +3893,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::updateGeometries() if ( !d || !d->geometryDirty ) return; - d->geometryDirty = FALSE; + d->geometryDirty = false; TQSize r, t; @@ -3990,19 +3990,19 @@ void TQFileDialog::updateFileNameEdit( TQListViewItem * newItem ) if ( mode() == ExistingFiles ) { detailViewSelectionChanged(); TQUrl u( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( ((TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)files->currentItem())->info.name() ) ); - TQFileInfo fi( u.toString( FALSE, FALSE ) ); + TQFileInfo fi( u.toString( false, false ) ); if ( !fi.isDir() ) - emit fileHighlighted( u.toString( FALSE, FALSE ) ); + emit fileHighlighted( u.toString( false, false ) ); } else if ( files->isSelected( newItem ) ) { TQFileDialogPrivate::File * i = (TQFileDialogPrivate::File *)newItem; if ( i && i->i && !i->i->isSelected() ) { - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( TRUE ); - d->moreFiles->setSelected( i->i, TRUE ); - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( true ); + d->moreFiles->setSelected( i->i, true ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( false ); } // Encode the filename in case it had any special characters in it TQString encFile = TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( newItem->text( 0 ) ); - trySetSelection( i->info.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, encFile ), TRUE ); + trySetSelection( i->info.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, encFile ), true ); } } @@ -4014,7 +4014,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::detailViewSelectionChanged() nameEdit->clear(); TQString str; TQListViewItem * i = files->firstChild(); - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( true ); while( i ) { if ( d->moreFiles && isVisible() ) { TQFileDialogPrivate::File *f = (TQFileDialogPrivate::File *)i; @@ -4025,10 +4025,10 @@ void TQFileDialog::detailViewSelectionChanged() str += TQString( "\"%1\" " ).arg( i->text( 0 ) ); i = i->nextSibling(); } - d->moreFiles->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->blockSignals( false ); nameEdit->setText( str ); nameEdit->setCursorPosition( str.length() ); - okB->setEnabled( TRUE ); + okB->setEnabled( true ); if ( d->preview && d->preview->isVisible() && files->currentItem() ) { TQUrl u = TQUrl( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( ((TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)files->currentItem())->info.name() ) ); updatePreviews( u ); @@ -4041,7 +4041,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::listBoxSelectionChanged() return; if ( d->ignoreNextRefresh ) { - d->ignoreNextRefresh = FALSE; + d->ignoreNextRefresh = false; return; } @@ -4050,7 +4050,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::listBoxSelectionChanged() TQListBoxItem * i = d->moreFiles->item( 0 ); TQListBoxItem * j = 0; int index = 0; - files->blockSignals( TRUE ); + files->blockSignals( true ); while( i ) { TQFileDialogPrivate::MCItem *mcitem = (TQFileDialogPrivate::MCItem *)i; if ( files && isVisible() ) { @@ -4068,7 +4068,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::listBoxSelectionChanged() if ( mcitem->isSelected() && i != d->lastEFSelected ) { TQUrl u( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( ((TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)(mcitem)->i)->info.name()) ); d->lastEFSelected = i; - emit fileHighlighted( u.toString(FALSE, FALSE) ); + emit fileHighlighted( u.toString(false, false) ); } } } @@ -4081,10 +4081,10 @@ void TQFileDialog::listBoxSelectionChanged() i = d->moreFiles->item( ++index ); } - files->blockSignals( FALSE ); + files->blockSignals( false ); nameEdit->setText( str ); nameEdit->setCursorPosition( str.length() ); - okB->setEnabled( TRUE ); + okB->setEnabled( true ); if ( d->preview && d->preview->isVisible() && j ) { TQUrl u = TQUrl( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)( (TQFileDialogPrivate::MCItem*)j )->i )->info.name() ) ); @@ -4113,7 +4113,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::fileNameEditDone() TQUrlInfo f( d->url, nameEdit->text() ); if ( mode() != TQFileDialog::ExistingFiles ) { TQUrlOperator u( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( nameEdit->text() ) ); - trySetSelection( f.isDir(), u, FALSE ); + trySetSelection( f.isDir(), u, false ); if ( d->preview && d->preview->isVisible() ) updatePreviews( u ); } @@ -4152,10 +4152,10 @@ void TQFileDialog::selectDirectoryOrFile( TQListViewItem * newItem ) setUrl( TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( i->info.name() ) + "/" ) ); if ( isDirectoryMode( mode() ) ) { TQUrlInfo f ( d->url, TQString::fromLatin1( "." ) ); - trySetSelection( f.isDir(), d->url, TRUE ); + trySetSelection( f.isDir(), d->url, true ); } } else if ( newItem->isSelectable() && - trySetSelection( i->info.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( i->info.name() ) ), TRUE ) ) { + trySetSelection( i->info.isDir(), TQUrlOperator( d->url, TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( i->info.name() ) ), true ) ) { if ( !isDirectoryMode( mode() ) ) { if ( mode() == ExistingFile ) { if ( TQFileDialogPrivate::fileExists( d->url, nameEdit->text() ) ) { @@ -4194,16 +4194,16 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, { if ( item ) { files->setCurrentItem( item ); - files->setSelected( item, TRUE ); + files->setSelected( item, true ); } PopupAction action; - popupContextMenu( item ? item->text( 0 ) : TQString::null, TRUE, action, p ); + popupContextMenu( item ? item->text( 0 ) : TQString::null, true, action, p ); if ( action == PA_Open ) selectDirectoryOrFile( item ); else if ( action == PA_Rename ) - files->startRename( FALSE ); + files->startRename( false ); else if ( action == PA_Delete ) deleteFile( item ? item->text( 0 ) : TQString::null ); else if ( action == PA_Reload ) @@ -4213,19 +4213,19 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, rereadDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortName ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Name; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortSize ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Size; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortDate ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Time; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortUnsorted ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Unsorted; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } @@ -4234,12 +4234,12 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &p, void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( TQListBoxItem *item, const TQPoint & p ) { PopupAction action; - popupContextMenu( item ? item->text() : TQString::null, FALSE, action, p ); + popupContextMenu( item ? item->text() : TQString::null, false, action, p ); if ( action == PA_Open ) selectDirectoryOrFile( item ); else if ( action == PA_Rename ) - d->moreFiles->startRename( FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->startRename( false ); else if ( action == PA_Delete ) deleteFile( item->text() ); else if ( action == PA_Reload ) @@ -4249,19 +4249,19 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( TQListBoxItem *item, const TQPoint & p ) rereadDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortName ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Name; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortSize ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Size; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortDate ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Time; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } else if ( action == PA_SortUnsorted ) { sortFilesBy = (int)TQDir::Unsorted; - sortAscending = TRUE; + sortAscending = true; resortDir(); } } @@ -4274,7 +4274,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( const TQString &filename, bool, bool glob = filename.isEmpty(); TQPopupMenu m( 0, "file dialog context menu" ); - m.setCheckable( TRUE ); + m.setCheckable( true ); if ( !glob ) { TQString okt; @@ -4295,9 +4295,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( const TQString &filename, bool, if ( filename.isEmpty() || !TQUrlInfo( d->url, filename ).isWritable() || filename == ".." ) { if ( filename.isEmpty() || !TQUrlInfo( d->url, filename ).isReadable() ) - m.setItemEnabled( ok, FALSE ); - m.setItemEnabled( rename, FALSE ); - m.setItemEnabled( del, FALSE ); + m.setItemEnabled( ok, false ); + m.setItemEnabled( rename, false ); + m.setItemEnabled( del, false ); } m.move( p ); @@ -4321,18 +4321,18 @@ void TQFileDialog::popupContextMenu( const TQString &filename, bool, m2.insertSeparator(); int sunsorted = m2.insertItem( tr( "&Unsorted" ) ); - //m2.setItemEnabled( stype, FALSE ); + //m2.setItemEnabled( stype, false ); if ( sortFilesBy == (int)TQDir::Name ) - m2.setItemChecked( sname, TRUE ); + m2.setItemChecked( sname, true ); else if ( sortFilesBy == (int)TQDir::Size ) - m2.setItemChecked( ssize, TRUE ); + m2.setItemChecked( ssize, true ); // else if ( sortFilesBy == 0x16 ) -// m2.setItemChecked( stype, TRUE ); +// m2.setItemChecked( stype, true ); else if ( sortFilesBy == (int)TQDir::Time ) - m2.setItemChecked( sdate, TRUE ); + m2.setItemChecked( sdate, true ); else if ( sortFilesBy == (int)TQDir::Unsorted ) - m2.setItemChecked( sunsorted, TRUE ); + m2.setItemChecked( sunsorted, true ); m.insertItem( tr( "Sort" ), &m2 ); @@ -4436,7 +4436,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * for ( uint i = 0; i < d->moreFiles->count(); ++i ) { if ( d->moreFiles->text( i ) == info.name() ) { d->moreFiles->setCurrentItem( i ); - d->moreFiles->startRename( FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->startRename( false ); break; } } @@ -4444,9 +4444,9 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * TQListViewItem *item = files->firstChild(); while ( item ) { if ( item->text( 0 ) == info.name() ) { - files->setSelected( item, TRUE ); + files->setSelected( item, true ); files->setCurrentItem( item ); - files->startRename( FALSE ); + files->startRename( false ); break; } item = item->nextSibling(); @@ -4465,7 +4465,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * this, "get existing directory", "Choose a directory", - TRUE ); + true ); \endcode This function creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with @@ -4479,13 +4479,13 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * Note on Windows that if \a dir is TQString::null then the dialog's working directory will be set to the user's My Documents directory. - If \a dirOnly is TRUE, then only directories will be shown in + If \a dirOnly is true, then only directories will be shown in the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown. Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. - If \a resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat + If \a resolveSymlinks is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native @@ -4544,10 +4544,10 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( const TQString & dir, if( tqt_use_native_dialogs && (tqApp->style().inherits(TQMAC_DEFAULT_STYLE) || tqApp->style().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetOpenFileNames("", initialDir, parent, name, - caption, 0, FALSE, TRUE).first()); + caption, 0, false, true).first()); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_ged", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_ged", true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -4561,7 +4561,7 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( const TQString & dir, dlg->d->types->clear(); dlg->d->types->insertItem( TQFileDialog::tr("Directories") ); - dlg->d->types->setEnabled( FALSE ); + dlg->d->types->setEnabled( false ); TQString dir_( dir ); dir_ = dir_.simplifyWhiteSpace(); @@ -4635,32 +4635,32 @@ void TQFileDialog::setMode( Mode newMode ) d->moreFiles->setSelectionMode( TQListBox::Single ); if ( sel.isNull() ) sel = TQString::fromLatin1("."); - d->types->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->types->setEnabled( false ); } else if ( newMode == ExistingFiles ) { maxnamelen = INT_MAX; files->setSelectionMode( TQListView::Extended ); d->moreFiles->setSelectionMode( TQListBox::Extended ); - d->types->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->types->setEnabled( true ); } else { files->setSelectionMode( TQListView::Single ); d->moreFiles->setSelectionMode( TQListBox::Single ); - d->types->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->types->setEnabled( true ); } nameEdit->setMaxLength(maxnamelen); rereadDir(); TQUrlInfo f( d->url, "." ); - trySetSelection( f.isDir(), d->url, FALSE ); + trySetSelection( f.isDir(), d->url, false ); } TQString okt; - bool changeFilters = FALSE; + bool changeFilters = false; if ( mode() == AnyFile ) { okt = tr("&Save"); d->fileL->setText( tr("File &name:") ); if ( d->types->count() == 1 ) { d->types->setCurrentItem( 0 ); if ( d->types->currentText() == "Directories" ) { - changeFilters = TRUE; + changeFilters = true; } } } @@ -4676,7 +4676,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setMode( Mode newMode ) if ( d->types->count() == 1 ) { d->types->setCurrentItem( 0 ); if ( d->types->currentText() == "Directories" ) { - changeFilters = TRUE; + changeFilters = true; } } } @@ -4742,15 +4742,15 @@ TQFileDialog::ViewMode TQFileDialog::viewMode() const void TQFileDialog::setViewMode( ViewMode m ) { if ( m == Detail ) { - detailViewMode = TRUE; + detailViewMode = true; d->stack->raiseWidget( files ); - d->detailView->setOn( TRUE ); - d->mcView->setOn( FALSE ); + d->detailView->setOn( true ); + d->mcView->setOn( false ); } else if ( m == List ) { - detailViewMode = FALSE; + detailViewMode = false; d->stack->raiseWidget( d->moreFiles ); - d->detailView->setOn( FALSE ); - d->mcView->setOn( TRUE ); + d->detailView->setOn( false ); + d->mcView->setOn( true ); } } @@ -4772,15 +4772,15 @@ void TQFileDialog::setViewMode( ViewMode m ) void TQFileDialog::setPreviewMode( PreviewMode m ) { if ( m == NoPreview ) { - d->previewInfo->setOn( FALSE ); - d->previewContents->setOn( FALSE ); + d->previewInfo->setOn( false ); + d->previewContents->setOn( false ); } else if ( m == Info && d->infoPreview ) { - d->previewInfo->setOn( TRUE ); - d->previewContents->setOn( FALSE ); + d->previewInfo->setOn( true ); + d->previewContents->setOn( false ); changeMode( d->modeButtons->id( d->previewInfo ) ); } else if ( m == Contents && d->contentsPreview ) { - d->previewInfo->setOn( FALSE ); - d->previewContents->setOn( TRUE ); + d->previewInfo->setOn( false ); + d->previewContents->setOn( true ); changeMode( d->modeButtons->id( d->previewContents ) ); } } @@ -4827,7 +4827,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::addWidgets( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b ) if ( !l && !w && !b ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; TQHBoxLayout *lay = new TQHBoxLayout(); d->extraWidgetsLayouts.append( lay ); @@ -4859,7 +4859,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::addWidgets( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b ) /*! Adds the tool button \a b to the row of tool buttons at the top of the file dialog. The button is appended to the right of - this row. If \a separator is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the + this row. If \a separator is true, a small space is inserted between the last button of the row and the new button \a b. \sa addWidgets(), addLeftWidget(), addRightWidget() @@ -4870,7 +4870,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::addToolButton( TQButton *b, bool separator ) if ( !b || !d->buttonLayout ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; d->toolButtons.append( b ); if ( separator ) @@ -4890,7 +4890,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::addLeftWidget( TQWidget *w ) { if ( !w ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; d->leftLayout->addWidget( w ); d->leftLayout->addSpacing( 5 ); @@ -4908,7 +4908,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::addRightWidget( TQWidget *w ) { if ( !w ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; d->rightLayout->addSpacing( 5 ); d->rightLayout->addWidget( w ); @@ -4949,7 +4949,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ke ) while ( i && nameEdit->text() != i->text( 0 ) ) i = i->nextSibling(); if ( i ) - files->setSelected( i, TRUE ); + files->setSelected( i, true ); else ke->accept(); // strangely, means to ignore that event } @@ -4961,7 +4961,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ke ) ke->ignore(); } - d->ignoreNextKeyPress = FALSE; + d->ignoreNextKeyPress = false; if ( !ke->isAccepted() ) { TQDialog::keyPressEvent( ke ); @@ -5230,7 +5230,7 @@ const TQPixmap * TQWindowsIconProvider::pixmap( const TQFileInfo &fi ) return pixmap(TQFileInfo(real)); } - TQString ext = fi.extension( FALSE ).upper(); + TQString ext = fi.extension( false ).upper(); TQString key = ext; ext.prepend( "." ); TQMap< TQString, TQPixmap >::Iterator it; @@ -5386,38 +5386,38 @@ bool TQFileDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ( (TQKeyEvent*)e )->key() == Key_F5 ) { rereadDir(); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ( (TQKeyEvent*)e )->key() == Key_F2 && ( o == files || o == files->viewport() ) ) { if ( files->isVisible() && files->currentItem() ) { if ( TQUrlInfo( d->url, "." ).isWritable() && files->currentItem()->text( 0 ) != ".." ) { files->renameItem = files->currentItem(); - files->startRename( TRUE ); + files->startRename( true ); } } ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ( (TQKeyEvent*)e )->key() == Key_F2 && ( o == d->moreFiles || o == d->moreFiles->viewport() ) ) { if ( d->moreFiles->isVisible() && d->moreFiles->currentItem() != -1 ) { if ( TQUrlInfo( d->url, "." ).isWritable() && d->moreFiles->item( d->moreFiles->currentItem() )->text() != ".." ) { d->moreFiles->renameItem = d->moreFiles->item( d->moreFiles->currentItem() ); - d->moreFiles->startRename( TRUE ); + d->moreFiles->startRename( true ); } } ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && d->moreFiles->renaming ) { d->moreFiles->lined->setFocus(); TQApplication::sendEvent( d->moreFiles->lined, e ); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && files->renaming ) { files->lined->setFocus(); TQApplication::sendEvent( files->lined, e ); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->key() == Key_Backspace && ( o == files || @@ -5426,7 +5426,7 @@ bool TQFileDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) o == d->moreFiles->viewport() ) ) { cdUpClicked(); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->key() == Key_Delete && ( o == files || @@ -5434,7 +5434,7 @@ bool TQFileDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) if ( files->currentItem() ) deleteFile( files->currentItem()->text( 0 ) ); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress && ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->key() == Key_Delete && ( o == d->moreFiles || @@ -5443,7 +5443,7 @@ bool TQFileDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) if ( c >= 0 ) deleteFile( d->moreFiles->item( c )->text() ); ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( o == files && e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut && files->currentItem() ) { } else if ( o == files && e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) { TQTimer::singleShot( 0, this, TQ_SLOT(fixupNameEdit()) ); @@ -5468,23 +5468,23 @@ bool TQFileDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e ) nt = i->text( 0 ); int cp = nameEdit->cursorPosition()+1; nameEdit->validateAndSet( nt, cp, cp, nt.length() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } } else if ( o == nameEdit && e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) { fileNameEditDone(); } else if ( d->moreFiles->renaming && o != d->moreFiles->lined && e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) { d->moreFiles->lined->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( files->renaming && o != files->lined && e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) { files->lined->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( ( o == d->moreFiles || o == d->moreFiles->viewport() ) && e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) { if ( ( o == d->moreFiles->viewport() && !d->moreFiles->viewport()->hasFocus() ) || ( o == d->moreFiles && !d->moreFiles->hasFocus() ) ) ((TQWidget*)o)->setFocus(); - return FALSE; + return false; } return TQDialog::eventFilter( o, e ); @@ -5640,7 +5640,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed() Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. - If \a resolveSymlinks is FALSE, the file dialog will treat + If \a resolveSymlinks is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories. Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should @@ -5707,7 +5707,7 @@ TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames( const TQString & filter, } #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofns", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofns", true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -5761,21 +5761,21 @@ static bool isRoot( const TQUrl &u ) #if defined(Q_OS_MAC9) TQString p = TQDir::convertSeparators(u.path()); if(p.contains(':') == 1) - return TRUE; + return true; #elif defined(Q_OS_UNIX) if ( u.path() == "/" ) - return TRUE; + return true; #elif defined(Q_OS_WIN32) TQString p = u.path(); if ( p.length() == 3 && p.right( 2 ) == ":/" ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( p[ 0 ] == '/' && p[ 1 ] == '/' ) { int slashes = p.contains( '/' ); if ( slashes <= 3 ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( slashes == 4 && p[ (int)p.length() - 1 ] == '/' ) - return TRUE; + return true; } #else #if defined(Q_CC_GNU) @@ -5784,9 +5784,9 @@ static bool isRoot( const TQUrl &u ) #endif if ( !u.isLocalFile() && u.path() == "/" ) - return TRUE; + return true; - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQFileDialog::urlStart( TQNetworkOperation *op ) @@ -5801,13 +5801,13 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlStart( TQNetworkOperation *op ) #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( !d->cursorOverride ) { TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( TQCursor( TQt::WaitCursor ) ); - d->cursorOverride = TRUE; + d->cursorOverride = true; } #endif if ( isRoot( d->url ) ) - d->cdToParent->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->cdToParent->setEnabled( false ); else - d->cdToParent->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->cdToParent->setEnabled( true ); d->mimeTypeTimer->stop(); d->sortedList.clear(); d->pendingItems.clear(); @@ -5817,15 +5817,15 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlStart( TQNetworkOperation *op ) files->clear(); files->setSorting( -1 ); - TQString s = d->url.toString( FALSE, FALSE ); - bool found = FALSE; + TQString s = d->url.toString( false, false ); + bool found = false; for ( int i = 0; i < d->paths->count(); ++i ) { #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( d->paths->text( i ).lower() == s.lower() ) { #else if ( d->paths->text( i ) == s ) { #endif - found = TRUE; + found = true; d->paths->setCurrentItem( i ); break; } @@ -5835,12 +5835,12 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlStart( TQNetworkOperation *op ) d->paths->setCurrentItem( d->paths->count() - 1 ); } d->last = 0; - d->hadDotDot = FALSE; + d->hadDotDot = false; if ( d->goBack && d->history.last() != d->url.toString() ) { d->history.append( d->url.toString() ); if ( d->history.count() > 1 ) - d->goBack->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->goBack->setEnabled( true ); } } } @@ -5854,16 +5854,16 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlFinished( TQNetworkOperation *op ) if ( op->operation() == TQNetworkProtocol::OpListChildren && d->cursorOverride ) { TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor(); - d->cursorOverride = FALSE; + d->cursorOverride = false; } #endif if ( op->state() == TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed ) { if ( d->paths->hasFocus() ) - d->ignoreNextKeyPress = TRUE; + d->ignoreNextKeyPress = true; if ( d->progressDia ) { - d->ignoreStop = TRUE; + d->ignoreStop = true; d->progressDia->close(); delete d->progressDia; d->progressDia = 0; @@ -5886,17 +5886,17 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlFinished( TQNetworkOperation *op ) } else if ( op->operation() == TQNetworkProtocol::OpListChildren && op == d->currListChildren ) { if ( !d->hadDotDot && !isRoot( d->url ) ) { - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( d->url.path().left( 2 ) == "//" ) - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; #endif if ( ok ) { TQUrlInfo ui( d->url, ".." ); ui.setName( ".." ); - ui.setDir( TRUE ); - ui.setFile( FALSE ); - ui.setSymLink( FALSE ); + ui.setDir( true ); + ui.setFile( false ); + ui.setSymLink( false ); ui.setSize( 0 ); TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> lst; lst << ui; @@ -5908,7 +5908,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::urlFinished( TQNetworkOperation *op ) } else if ( op->operation() == TQNetworkProtocol::OpPut ) { rereadDir(); if ( d->progressDia ) { - d->ignoreStop = TRUE; + d->ignoreStop = true; d->progressDia->close(); } delete d->progressDia; @@ -5937,7 +5937,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::dataTransferProgress( int bytesDone, int bytesTotal, TQNetwor if ( !d->progressDia ) { if ( bytesDone < bytesTotal) { - d->ignoreStop = FALSE; + d->ignoreStop = false; d->progressDia = new TQFDProgressDialog( this, label, bytesTotal ); connect( d->progressDia, TQ_SIGNAL( cancelled() ), this, TQ_SLOT( stopCopy() ) ); @@ -5973,7 +5973,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::insertEntry( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &lst, TQNetworkOper if ( d->mode == DirectoryOnly && !inf.isDir() ) continue; if ( inf.name() == ".." ) { - d->hadDotDot = TRUE; + d->hadDotDot = true; if ( isRoot( d->url ) ) continue; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) @@ -6018,8 +6018,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::insertEntry( const TQValueList<TQUrlInfo> &lst, TQNetworkOper if ( ( d->mode == ExistingFiles && inf.isDir() ) || ( isDirectoryMode( d->mode ) && inf.isFile() ) ) { - i->setSelectable( FALSE ); - i2->setSelectable( FALSE ); + i->setSelectable( false ); + i2->setSelectable( false ); } i->i = i2; @@ -6036,7 +6036,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::removeEntry( TQNetworkOperation *op ) TQUrlInfo *i = 0; TQListViewItemIterator it( files ); - bool ok1 = FALSE, ok2 = FALSE; + bool ok1 = false, ok2 = false; for ( i = d->sortedList.first(); it.current(); ++it, i = d->sortedList.next() ) { TQString encName = TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it.current() )->info.name() ); @@ -6044,12 +6044,12 @@ void TQFileDialog::removeEntry( TQNetworkOperation *op ) d->pendingItems.removeRef( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it.current() ); delete ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it.current() )->i; delete it.current(); - ok1 = TRUE; + ok1 = true; } if ( i && i->name() == op->arg( 0 ) ) { d->sortedList.removeRef( i ); i = d->sortedList.prev(); - ok2 = TRUE; + ok2 = true; } if ( ok1 && ok2 ) break; @@ -6063,18 +6063,18 @@ void TQFileDialog::itemChanged( TQNetworkOperation *op ) TQUrlInfo *i = 0; TQListViewItemIterator it1( files ); - bool ok1 = FALSE, ok2 = FALSE; + bool ok1 = false, ok2 = false; // first check whether the new file replaces an existing file. for ( i = d->sortedList.first(); it1.current(); ++it1, i = d->sortedList.next() ) { if ( ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it1.current() )->info.name() == op->arg( 1 ) ) { delete ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it1.current() )->i; delete it1.current(); - ok1 = TRUE; + ok1 = true; } if ( i && i->name() == op->arg( 1 ) ) { d->sortedList.removeRef( i ); i = d->sortedList.prev(); - ok2 = TRUE; + ok2 = true; } if ( ok1 && ok2 ) break; @@ -6082,16 +6082,16 @@ void TQFileDialog::itemChanged( TQNetworkOperation *op ) i = 0; TQListViewItemIterator it( files ); - ok1 = FALSE; - ok2 = FALSE; + ok1 = false; + ok2 = false; for ( i = d->sortedList.first(); it.current(); ++it, i = d->sortedList.next() ) { if ( ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it.current() )->info.name() == op->arg( 0 ) ) { ( (TQFileDialogPrivate::File*)it.current() )->info.setName( op->arg( 1 ) ); - ok1 = TRUE; + ok1 = true; } if ( i && i->name() == op->arg( 0 ) ) { i->setName( op->arg( 1 ) ); - ok2 = TRUE; + ok2 = true; } if ( ok1 && ok2 ) break; @@ -6106,7 +6106,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::itemChanged( TQNetworkOperation *op ) \brief whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file - The default is FALSE. + The default is false. */ bool TQFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled() const { @@ -6117,7 +6117,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled( bool info ) { if ( info == d->infoPreview ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; d->infoPreview = info; updateGeometries(); } @@ -6129,7 +6129,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreviewEnabled( bool info ) \brief whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file - The default is FALSE. + The default is false. \sa setContentsPreview() setInfoPreviewEnabled() */ @@ -6145,7 +6145,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled( bool contents ) { if ( contents == d->contentsPreview ) return; - d->geometryDirty = TRUE; + d->geometryDirty = true; d->contentsPreview = contents; updateGeometries(); } @@ -6185,7 +6185,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled( bool contents ) Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( TRUE ); + fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( true ); fd->setInfoPreview( p, p ); fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Info ); fd->show(); @@ -6245,7 +6245,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview( TQWidget *w, TQFilePreview *preview ) Preview* p = new Preview; TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this ); - fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ); + fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( true ); fd->setContentsPreview( p, p ); fd->setPreviewMode( TQFileDialog::Contents ); fd->show(); @@ -6300,8 +6300,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::resortDir() d->pendingItems.append( item ); if ( ( d->mode == ExistingFiles && item->info.isDir() ) || ( isDirectoryMode( d->mode ) && item->info.isFile() ) ) { - item->setSelectable( FALSE ); - item2->setSelectable( FALSE ); + item->setSelectable( false ); + item2->setSelectable( false ); } } @@ -6323,13 +6323,13 @@ void TQFileDialog::stopCopy() if ( d->ignoreStop ) return; - d->url.blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->url.blockSignals( true ); d->url.stop(); if ( d->progressDia ) { - d->ignoreStop = TRUE; + d->ignoreStop = true; TQTimer::singleShot( 100, this, TQ_SLOT( removeProgressDia() ) ); } - d->url.blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->url.blockSignals( false ); } /*! @@ -6365,30 +6365,30 @@ void TQFileDialog::doMimeTypeLookup() if ( item ) { TQFileInfo fi; if ( d->url.isLocalFile() ) { - fi.setFile( TQUrl( d->url.path(), TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( item->info.name() ) ).path( FALSE ) ); + fi.setFile( TQUrl( d->url.path(), TQFileDialogPrivate::encodeFileName( item->info.name() ) ).path( false ) ); } else fi.setFile( item->info.name() ); // ##### const TQPixmap *p = iconProvider()->pixmap( fi ); if ( p && p != item->pixmap( 0 ) && ( !item->pixmap( 0 ) || p->serialNumber() != item->pixmap( 0 )->serialNumber() ) && p != fifteenTransparentPixels ) { - item->hasMimePixmap = TRUE; + item->hasMimePixmap = true; // evil hack to avoid much too much repaints! TQGuardedPtr<TQFileDialog> that( this ); // this may be deleted by an event handler tqApp->processEvents(); if ( that.isNull() ) return; - files->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - files->viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + files->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + files->viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); if ( item != d->pendingItems.first() ) return; item->setPixmap( 0, *p ); tqApp->processEvents(); if ( that.isNull() ) return; - files->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); - files->viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + files->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); + files->viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); if ( files->isVisible() ) { TQRect ir( files->itemRect( item ) ); @@ -6407,19 +6407,19 @@ void TQFileDialog::doMimeTypeLookup() } if ( d->moreFiles->isVisible() ) { - d->moreFiles->viewport()->repaint( r, FALSE ); + d->moreFiles->viewport()->repaint( r, false ); } else { - files->viewport()->repaint( r, FALSE ); + files->viewport()->repaint( r, false ); } if ( d->pendingItems.count() ) d->mimeTypeTimer->start( 0 ); else if ( d->moreFiles->isVisible() ) - d->moreFiles->triggerUpdate( TRUE ); + d->moreFiles->triggerUpdate( true ); } /*! - If \a b is TRUE then all the files in the current directory are selected; + If \a b is true then all the files in the current directory are selected; otherwise, they are deselected. */ @@ -6437,7 +6437,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::goBack() return; d->history.remove( d->history.last() ); if ( d->history.count() < 2 ) - d->goBack->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->goBack->setEnabled( false ); setUrl( d->history.last() ); } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h index 23cd5476e..912c9a557 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h @@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFileDialog : public TQDialog public: TQFileDialog( const TQString& dirName, const TQString& filter = TQString::null, - TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); - TQFileDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = false ); + TQFileDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = false ); ~TQFileDialog(); // recommended static functions @@ -119,26 +119,26 @@ public: TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQString getSaveFileName( const TQString &initially = TQString::null, const TQString &filter = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQString getExistingDirectory( const TQString &dir = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, - bool dirOnly = TRUE, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool dirOnly = true, + bool resolveSymlinks = true); static TQStringList getOpenFileNames( const TQString &filter= TQString::null, const TQString &dir = TQString::null, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, - bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); + bool resolveSymlinks = true); // other static functions @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ protected: void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ); void addWidgets( TQLabel *, TQWidget *, TQPushButton * ); - void addToolButton( TQButton *b, bool separator = FALSE ); + void addToolButton( TQButton *b, bool separator = false ); void addLeftWidget( TQWidget *w ); void addRightWidget( TQWidget *w ); @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ private: static TQStringList macGetOpenFileNames( const TQString &, TQString*, TQWidget *, const char *, const TQString&, TQString *, - bool = TRUE, bool = FALSE ); + bool = true, bool = false ); #endif diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp index 40c9f3de5..37d9b75da 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp @@ -160,11 +160,11 @@ TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, f ) { - setSizeGripEnabled( TRUE ); + setSizeGripEnabled( true ); d = new TQFontDialogPrivate; // grid d->familyEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "font family I" ); - d->familyEdit->setReadOnly( TRUE ); + d->familyEdit->setReadOnly( true ); d->familyList = new TQListBox( this, "font family II" ); d->familyEdit->setFocusProxy( d->familyList ); @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, d->familyAccel->setIndent( 2 ); d->styleEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "font style I" ); - d->styleEdit->setReadOnly( TRUE ); + d->styleEdit->setReadOnly( true ); d->styleList = new TQListBox( this, "font style II" ); d->styleEdit->setFocusProxy( d->styleList ); @@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, // characters used depend on the charset encoding. d->sampleEdit->setText( "AaBbYyZz" ); - d->scriptCombo = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "font encoding" ); + d->scriptCombo = new TQComboBox( false, this, "font encoding" ); d->scriptAccel = new TQLabel( d->scriptCombo, tr("Scr&ipt"), this,"encoding label"); d->scriptAccel->setIndent( 2 ); d->size = 0; - d->smoothScalable = FALSE; + d->smoothScalable = false; connect( d->scriptCombo, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), TQ_SLOT(scriptHighlighted(int)) ); @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, buttonBox->addWidget( d->ok ); if ( modal ) connect( d->ok, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), TQ_SLOT(accept()) ); - d->ok->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->ok->setDefault( true ); buttonBox->addSpacing( 12 ); @@ -327,8 +327,8 @@ TQFontDialog::~TQFontDialog() The dialog is called \a name, with the parent \a parent. \a initial is the initially selected font. - If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the - user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. + If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to true if the + user clicked OK, and set to false if the user clicked Cancel. This static function is less flexible than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use. @@ -367,8 +367,8 @@ TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont &initial, clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned. The dialog is called \a name, with parent \a parent. - If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the - user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. + If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to true if the + user clicked OK, and false if the user clicked Cancel. This static function is less functional than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont *def, if ( def ) result = *def; - TQFontDialog *dlg = new TQFontDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); + TQFontDialog *dlg = new TQFontDialog( parent, name, true ); dlg->setFont( ( def ? *def : TQFont() ) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -444,12 +444,12 @@ bool TQFontDialog::eventFilter( TQObject * o , TQEvent * e ) if ( ci != d->sizeList->currentItem() && style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, this)) d->sizeEdit->selectAll(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( ( o == d->familyList || o == d->styleList ) && ( k->key() == Key_Return || k->key() == Key_Enter) ) { k->accept(); accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn && style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, this) ) { @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ void TQListBoxFontText::paint( TQPainter *painter ) void TQFontDialog::updateFamilies() { - d->familyList->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->familyList->blockSignals( true ); enum match_t { MATCH_NONE=0, MATCH_LAST_RESORT=1, MATCH_APP=2, MATCH_FALLBACK, MATCH_FAMILY=3 }; @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateFamilies() d->familyList->hasFocus() ) d->familyEdit->selectAll(); - d->familyList->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->familyList->blockSignals( false ); updateStyles(); } @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateFamilies() void TQFontDialog::updateStyles() { - d->styleList->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->styleList->blockSignals( true ); d->styleList->clear(); @@ -618,30 +618,30 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateStyles() if ( styles.isEmpty() ) { d->styleEdit->clear(); - d->smoothScalable = FALSE; + d->smoothScalable = false; } else { d->styleList->insertStringList( styles ); if ( !d->style.isEmpty() ) { - bool found = FALSE; - bool first = TRUE; + bool found = false; + bool first = true; TQString cstyle = d->style; redo: for ( int i = 0 ; i < (int)d->styleList->count() ; i++ ) { if ( cstyle == d->styleList->text(i) ) { d->styleList->setCurrentItem( i ); - found = TRUE; + found = true; break; } } if (!found && first) { if (cstyle.contains("Italic")) { cstyle.replace("Italic", "Oblique"); - first = FALSE; + first = false; goto redo; } else if (cstyle.contains("Oblique")) { cstyle.replace("Oblique", "Italic"); - first = FALSE; + first = false; goto redo; } } @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateStyles() d->smoothScalable = d->fdb.isSmoothlyScalable( d->familyList->currentText(), d->styleList->currentText() ); } - d->styleList->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->styleList->blockSignals( false ); updateSizes(); } @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateStyles() void TQFontDialog::updateSizes() { - d->sizeList->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->sizeList->blockSignals( true ); d->sizeList->clear(); @@ -678,12 +678,12 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateSizes() TQValueList<int> sizes = d->fdb.pointSizes( d->familyList->currentText(), d->styleList->currentText() ); int i = 0; - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; for( TQValueList<int>::iterator it = sizes.begin() ; it != sizes.end(); ++it ) { d->sizeList->insertItem( TQString::number( *it ) ); if ( !found && *it >= d->size ) { d->sizeList->setCurrentItem( i ); - found = TRUE; + found = true; } ++i; } @@ -692,17 +692,17 @@ void TQFontDialog::updateSizes() d->sizeList->setCurrentItem( d->sizeList->count() - 1 ); } - d->sizeEdit->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->sizeEdit->blockSignals( true ); d->sizeEdit->setText( ( d->smoothScalable ? TQString::number( d->size ) : d->sizeList->currentText() ) ); if ( style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_FontDialog_SelectAssociatedText, this) && d->sizeList->hasFocus() ) d->sizeEdit->selectAll(); - d->sizeEdit->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->sizeEdit->blockSignals( false ); } else { d->sizeEdit->clear(); } - d->sizeList->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->sizeList->blockSignals( false ); updateSample(); } @@ -792,9 +792,9 @@ void TQFontDialog::sizeChanged( const TQString &s ) if ( d->sizeList->text(i).toInt() >= d->size ) break; } - d->sizeList->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->sizeList->blockSignals( true ); d->sizeList->setCurrentItem( i ); - d->sizeList->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->sizeList->blockSignals( false ); } updateSample(); } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h index bb19b7676..178781ee7 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ private: static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont *def, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); - TQFontDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQFontDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQFontDialog(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp index a58d9a2dc..fb1d0823b 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public: Constructs the dialog. The \a label is the text which is shown to the user (it should tell the user what they are expected to enter). The \a parent is the dialog's parent widget. The widget is called \a name. If \a - modal is TRUE (the default) the dialog will be modal. The \a type + modal is true (the default) the dialog will be modal. The \a type parameter is used to specify which type of dialog to construct. \sa getText(), getInteger(), getDouble(), getItem() @@ -142,14 +142,14 @@ TQInputDialog::TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* parent, vbox->addWidget( d->stack ); d->lineEdit = new TQLineEdit( d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_le" ); d->spinBox = new TQSpinBox( d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_sb" ); - d->comboBox = new TQComboBox( FALSE, d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_cb" ); - d->editComboBox = new TQComboBox( TRUE, d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_editcb" ); + d->comboBox = new TQComboBox( false, d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_cb" ); + d->editComboBox = new TQComboBox( true, d->stack, "qt_inputdlg_editcb" ); TQHBoxLayout *hbox = new TQHBoxLayout( 6 ); vbox->addLayout( hbox, AlignRight ); d->ok = new TQPushButton( tr( "OK" ), this, "qt_ok_btn" ); - d->ok->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->ok->setDefault( true ); TQPushButton *cancel = new TQPushButton( tr( "Cancel" ), this, "qt_cancel_btn" ); TQSize bs = d->ok->sizeHint().expandedTo( cancel->sizeHint() ); @@ -273,8 +273,8 @@ TQInputDialog::~TQInputDialog() dialog. \a label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \a text is the default text which is placed in the line edit. The \a mode is the echo mode the line edit - will use. If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the - user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The + will use. If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to true if the + user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, { TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_gettext", - TRUE, LineEdit ); + true, LineEdit ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( caption ); @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, dlg->lineEdit()->setText( text ); dlg->lineEdit()->setEchoMode( mode ); - bool ok_ = FALSE; + bool ok_ = false; TQString result; ok_ = dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted; if ( ok ) @@ -332,8 +332,8 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, and \a step is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value. - If \a ok is not-null *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user - pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's + If \a ok is not-null *\a ok will be set to true if the user + pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, { TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getint", - TRUE, SpinBox ); + true, SpinBox ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( caption ); #endif @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, dlg->spinBox()->setSteps( step, 0 ); dlg->spinBox()->setValue( value ); - bool ok_ = FALSE; + bool ok_ = false; int result; ok_ = dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted; if ( ok ) @@ -389,8 +389,8 @@ int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, user may choose, and \a decimals is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have. - If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user - pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's + If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to true if the user + pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, const char *name ) { TQInputDialog dlg( label, parent, - name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getdbl", TRUE, LineEdit ); + name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getdbl", true, LineEdit ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg.setCaption( caption ); #endif @@ -438,17 +438,17 @@ double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, bar of the dialog. \a label is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \a list is the string list which is inserted into the combobox, and \a current is the number - of the item which should be the current item. If \a editable is TRUE - the user can enter their own text; if \a editable is FALSE the user + of the item which should be the current item. If \a editable is true + the user can enter their own text; if \a editable is false the user may only select one of the existing items. - If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user - pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's + If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to true if the user + pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. This function returns the text of the current item, or if \a - editable is TRUE, the current text of the combobox. + editable is true, the current text of the combobox. Use this static function like this: @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, lst << "First" << "Second" << "Third" << "Fourth" << "Fifth"; bool ok; TQString res = TQInputDialog::getItem( - "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, TRUE, &ok, + "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, true, &ok, this ); if ( ok ) { // user selected an item and pressed OK @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, int current, bool editable, bool *ok, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getitem", TRUE, editable ? EditableComboBox : ComboBox ); + TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getitem", true, editable ? EditableComboBox : ComboBox ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( caption ); #endif @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, dlg->comboBox()->setCurrentItem( current ); } - bool ok_ = FALSE; + bool ok_ = false; TQString result; ok_ = dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted; if ( ok ) @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, void TQInputDialog::textChanged( const TQString &s ) { - bool on = TRUE; + bool on = true; if ( d->lineEdit->validator() ) { TQString str = d->lineEdit->text(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h index 67434b3ae..0347efee9 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ private: enum Type { LineEdit, SpinBox, ComboBox, EditableComboBox }; TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, - bool modal = TRUE, Type type = LineEdit ); //### 4.0: widget flag! + bool modal = true, Type type = LineEdit ); //### 4.0: widget flag! ~TQInputDialog(); TQLineEdit *lineEdit() const; @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ public: double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); static TQString getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, const TQStringList &list, - int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, + int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); private slots: diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp index b90840cf7..436194325 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ const char * mb_texts[] = { */ TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQDialog( parent, name, TRUE, WStyle_Customize | WStyle_DialogBorder | WStyle_Title | WStyle_SysMenu ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, true, WStyle_Customize | WStyle_DialogBorder | WStyle_Title | WStyle_SysMenu ) { init( Ok, 0, 0 ); } @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box becomes modal relative to \a parent. - If \a modal is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it + If \a modal is true the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless. The \a parent, \a name, \a modal, and \a f arguments are passed to @@ -674,10 +674,10 @@ void TQMessageBox::init( int button0, int button1, int button2 ) tr(mb_texts[mbd->button[i]]), this, buttonName ); if ( mbd->defButton == i ) { - mbd->pb[i]->setDefault( TRUE ); + mbd->pb[i]->setDefault( true ); mbd->pb[i]->setFocus(); } - mbd->pb[i]->setAutoDefault( TRUE ); + mbd->pb[i]->setAutoDefault( true ); mbd->pb[i]->setFocusPolicy( TQWidget::StrongFocus ); connect( mbd->pb[i], TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), TQ_SLOT(buttonClicked()) ); } @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *parent, #endif TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Information, button0, button1, button2, - parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", true, WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *parent, #endif TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Question, button0, button1, button2, - parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", true, WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *parent, #endif TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Warning, button0, button1, button2, - parent, "qt_msgbox_warning", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_warning", true, WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -1271,7 +1271,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *parent, #endif TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Critical, button0, button1, button2, - parent, "qt_msgbox_critical", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_critical", true, WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ void TQMessageBox::about( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Information, Ok + Default, 0, 0, - parent, "qt_msgbox_simple_about_box", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_simple_about_box", true, WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -1359,7 +1359,7 @@ static int textBox( TQWidget *parent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, severity, b[0], b[1], b[2], - parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", true, TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); if ( button0Text.isEmpty() ) @@ -1616,9 +1616,9 @@ void TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption ) #endif mb->setButtonText( 0, tr("OK") ); if ( mb->mbd && mb->mbd->pb[0] ) { - mb->mbd->pb[0]->setAutoDefault( TRUE ); + mb->mbd->pb[0]->setAutoDefault( true ); mb->mbd->pb[0]->setFocusPolicy( TQWidget::StrongFocus ); - mb->mbd->pb[0]->setDefault( TRUE ); + mb->mbd->pb[0]->setDefault( true ); mb->mbd->pb[0]->setFocus(); } mb->exec(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h b/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h index cb0933f81..86a96fc2d 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public: TQMessageBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQMessageBox( const TQString& caption, const TQString &text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, - TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=TRUE, + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=true, WFlags f=WStyle_DialogBorder ); ~TQMessageBox(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp index 8430f2cbc..4cd57a02c 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp @@ -251,11 +251,11 @@ static int parsePrintcap( TQListView * printers, const TQString& fileName ) line_ascii[1024] = '\0'; TQString printerDesc; - bool atEnd = FALSE; + bool atEnd = false; while ( !atEnd ) { if ( printcap.atEnd() || printcap.readLine( line_ascii, 1024 ) <= 0 ) - atEnd = TRUE; + atEnd = true; TQString line = line_ascii; line = line.stripWhiteSpace(); if ( line.length() >= 1 && line[int(line.length()) - 1] == '\\' ) @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ static void parseEtcLpPrinters( TQListView * printers ) TQString remote( TQString::fromLatin1("Remote:") ); TQString contentType( TQString::fromLatin1("Content types:") ); TQString printerHost; - bool canPrintPostscript = FALSE; + bool canPrintPostscript = false; if ( configuration.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) { while ( !configuration.atEnd() && configuration.readLine( line, 1024 ) > 0 ) { @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ static void parseEtcLpPrinters( TQListView * printers ) *e = '\0'; if ( !qstrcmp( p, "postscript" ) || !qstrcmp( p, "any" ) ) - canPrintPostscript = TRUE; + canPrintPostscript = true; *e = s; if ( s == ',' ) e++; @@ -356,11 +356,11 @@ static char * parsePrintersConf( TQListView * printers, bool *found = 0 ) TQFile pc( TQString::fromLatin1("/etc/printers.conf") ); if ( !pc.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) { if ( found ) - *found = FALSE; + *found = false; return 0; } if ( found ) - *found = TRUE; + *found = true; char * line = new char[1025]; line[1024] = '\0'; @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ static char *parseNsswitchPrintersEntry( TQListView * printers, char *line ) k++ char *defaultPrinter = 0; - bool stop = FALSE; + bool stop = false; int lastStatus = NotFound; int k = 8; @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ static void parseSpoolInterface( TQListView * printers ) configFile.close(); printerType = printerType.stripWhiteSpace(); - if ( printerType.find("postscript", 0, FALSE) < 0 ) + if ( printerType.find("postscript", 0, false) < 0 ) continue; int ii = 0; @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ static void parseQconfig( TQListView * printers ) TQString line; TQString stanzaName; // either a queue or a device name - bool up = TRUE; // queue up? default TRUE, can be FALSE + bool up = true; // queue up? default true, can be false TQString remoteHost; // null if local TQString deviceName; // null if remote @@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ static void parseQconfig( TQListView * printers ) line.truncate( line.length()-1 ); if ( line.length() >= 1 && line.length() <= 20 ) stanzaName = line; - up = TRUE; + up = true; remoteHost = TQString::null; deviceName = TQString::null; } else { @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ static void qpd_cleanup_globaldialog() */ TQPrintDialog::TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *prn, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQDialog( parent, name, TRUE ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, true ) { d = new TQPrintDialogPrivate; d->numCopies = 1; @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ TQPrintDialog::TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *prn, TQWidget *parent, const char *name d->ok = new TQPushButton( this, "ok" ); d->ok->setText( tr("OK") ); - d->ok->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->ok->setDefault( true ); horiz->addWidget( d->ok ); if (! rightalign) horiz->addStretch( 1 ); @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ TQPrintDialog::TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *prn, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ms.setHeight( 460 ); resize( ms ); - setPrinter( prn, TRUE ); + setPrinter( prn, true ); d->printers->setFocus(); } @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupPrinterSettings() rb = new TQRadioButton( tr( "Print in color if available" ), g, "color" ); d->colorMode->insert( rb, TQPrinter::Color ); - rb->setChecked( TRUE ); + rb->setChecked( true ); rb = new TQRadioButton( tr("Print in grayscale"), g, "graysacle" ); @@ -1026,15 +1026,15 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupDestination() "printer" ); tll->addWidget( rb ); d->printerOrFile->insert( rb, 0 ); - rb->setChecked( TRUE ); - d->outputToFile = FALSE; + rb->setChecked( true ); + d->outputToFile = false; TQBoxLayout * horiz = new TQBoxLayout( TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight ); tll->addLayout( horiz, 3 ); horiz->addSpacing( 19 ); d->printers = new TQListView( g, "list of printers" ); - d->printers->setAllColumnsShowFocus( TRUE ); + d->printers->setAllColumnsShowFocus( true ); d->printers->addColumn( tr("Printer"), 125 ); d->printers->addColumn( tr("Host"), 125 ); d->printers->addColumn( tr("Comment"), 150 ); @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupDestination() } if ( d->printers->currentItem() ) - d->printers->setSelected( d->printers->currentItem(), TRUE ); + d->printers->setSelected( d->printers->currentItem(), true ); if ( etcLpDefault ) // Avoid purify complaint delete[] etcLpDefault; @@ -1166,16 +1166,16 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupDestination() horiz->addWidget( d->fileName, 1 ); horiz->addSpacing( 6 ); d->browse = new TQPushButton( tr("Browse..."), g, "browse files" ); - d->browse->setAutoDefault( FALSE ); + d->browse->setAutoDefault( false ); #ifdef TQT_NO_FILEDIALOG - d->browse->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->browse->setEnabled( false ); #endif connect( d->browse, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SLOT(browseClicked()) ); horiz->addWidget( d->browse ); - d->fileName->setEnabled( FALSE ); - d->browse->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->fileName->setEnabled( false ); + d->browse->setEnabled( false ); tll->activate(); @@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupOptions() g, "first page first" ); tll->addWidget( rb ); d->pageOrder->insert( rb, TQPrinter::FirstPageFirst ); - rb->setChecked( TRUE ); + rb->setChecked( true ); rb = new TQRadioButton( tr("Print last page first"), g, "last page first" ); @@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupPaper() d->pageSize = TQPrinter::A4; // page orientation - d->orientationCombo = new TQComboBox( FALSE, g ); + d->orientationCombo = new TQComboBox( false, g ); d->orientationCombo->insertItem( tr( "Portrait" ), -1 ); d->orientationCombo->insertItem( tr( "Landscape" ), -1 ); @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupPaper() this, TQ_SLOT( orientSelected(int) ) ); // paper size - d->sizeCombo = new TQComboBox( FALSE, g ); + d->sizeCombo = new TQComboBox( false, g ); int n; for( n=0; n<TQPrinter::NPageSize; n++ ) @@ -1366,8 +1366,8 @@ TQGroupBox * TQPrintDialog::setupPaper() /*! Display a dialog and allow the user to configure the TQPrinter \a - p for an optional widget \a w. Returns TRUE if the user clicks OK or - presses Enter, FALSE if the user clicks Cancel or presses Esc. + p for an optional widget \a w. Returns true if the user clicks OK or + presses Enter, false if the user clicks Cancel or presses Esc. getPrinterSetup() remembers the settings and provides the same settings the next time the dialog is shown. @@ -1381,10 +1381,10 @@ bool TQPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup( TQPrinter * p, TQWidget* w ) globalPrintDialog->setCaption( TQPrintDialog::tr( "Setup Printer" ) ); #endif tqAddPostRoutine( qpd_cleanup_globaldialog ); - globalPrintDialog->setPrinter( p, TRUE ); + globalPrintDialog->setPrinter( p, true ); globalPrintDialog->adjustSize(); } else { - globalPrintDialog->setPrinter( p, TRUE ); + globalPrintDialog->setPrinter( p, true ); } globalPrintDialog->adjustPosition( w ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -1408,9 +1408,9 @@ bool TQPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup( TQPrinter * p, TQWidget* w ) void TQPrintDialog::printerOrFileSelected( int id ) { - d->outputToFile = id ? TRUE : FALSE; + d->outputToFile = (id != 0); if ( d->outputToFile ) { - d->ok->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->ok->setEnabled( true ); fileNameEditChanged( d->fileName->text() ); if ( !d->fileName->edited() && d->fileName->text().isEmpty() ) { TQString home = TQString::fromLatin1( ::getenv( "HOME" ) ); @@ -1428,17 +1428,17 @@ void TQPrintDialog::printerOrFileSelected( int id ) d->fileName->setCursorPosition( cur.length() ); d->fileName->selectAll(); } - d->browse->setEnabled( TRUE ); - d->fileName->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->browse->setEnabled( true ); + d->fileName->setEnabled( true ); d->fileName->setFocus(); - d->printers->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->printers->setEnabled( false ); } else { d->ok->setEnabled( d->printers->childCount() != 0 ); - d->printers->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->printers->setEnabled( true ); if ( d->fileName->hasFocus() || d->browse->hasFocus() ) d->printers->setFocus(); - d->browse->setEnabled( FALSE ); - d->fileName->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->browse->setEnabled( false ); + d->fileName->setEnabled( false ); } } @@ -1490,10 +1490,10 @@ void TQPrintDialog::okClicked() d->firstPage->interpretText(); d->copies->interpretText(); if ( d->outputToFile ) { - d->printer->setOutputToFile( TRUE ); + d->printer->setOutputToFile( true ); d->printer->setOutputFileName( d->fileName->text() ); } else { - d->printer->setOutputToFile( FALSE ); + d->printer->setOutputToFile( false ); TQListViewItem * l = d->printers->currentItem(); if ( l ) d->printer->setPrinterName( l->text( 0 ) ); @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ void TQPrintDialog::okClicked() void TQPrintDialog::printRangeSelected( int id ) { - bool enable = id == 2 ? TRUE : FALSE; + bool enable = (id == 2); d->firstPage->setEnabled( enable ); d->lastPage->setEnabled( enable ); d->firstPageLabel->setEnabled( enable ); @@ -1545,8 +1545,8 @@ void TQPrintDialog::setLastPage( int lp ) /*! Sets this dialog to configure printer \a p, or no printer if \a p - is null. If \a pickUpSettings is TRUE, the dialog reads most of - its settings from \a p. If \a pickUpSettings is FALSE (the + is null. If \a pickUpSettings is true, the dialog reads most of + its settings from \a p. If \a pickUpSettings is false (the default) the dialog keeps its old settings. */ @@ -1566,8 +1566,8 @@ void TQPrintDialog::setPrinter( TQPrinter * p, bool pickUpSettings ) while ( i && i->text( 0 ) != p->printerName() ) i = i->nextSibling(); if ( i ) { - d->printers->setSelected( i, TRUE ); - d->ok->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->printers->setSelected( i, true ); + d->ok->setEnabled( true ); } else if ( d->fileName->text().isEmpty() ) { d->ok->setEnabled( d->printers->childCount() != 0 ); } @@ -1607,7 +1607,7 @@ void TQPrintDialog::setPrinter( TQPrinter * p, bool pickUpSettings ) } if( p ) { - d->printAllButton->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->printAllButton->setEnabled( true ); d->printSelectionButton ->setEnabled( d->printer->isOptionEnabled( TQPrinter::PrintSelection ) ); d->printRangeButton @@ -1616,15 +1616,15 @@ void TQPrintDialog::setPrinter( TQPrinter * p, bool pickUpSettings ) TQPrinter::PrintRange range = p->printRange(); switch ( range ) { case TQPrinter::AllPages: - d->printAllButton->setChecked(TRUE); + d->printAllButton->setChecked(true); printRangeSelected( d->printRange->id( d->printAllButton ) ); break; case TQPrinter::Selection: - d->printSelectionButton->setChecked(TRUE); + d->printSelectionButton->setChecked(true); printRangeSelected( d->printRange->id( d->printSelectionButton ) ); break; case TQPrinter::PageRange: - d->printRangeButton->setChecked(TRUE); + d->printRangeButton->setChecked(true); printRangeSelected( d->printRange->id( d->printRangeButton ) ); break; } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h index 29824416a..fa7ef36bb 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ public: static bool getPrinterSetup( TQPrinter *, TQWidget* = 0 ); static void setGlobalPrintDialog( TQPrintDialog * ); - void setPrinter( TQPrinter *, bool = FALSE ); + void setPrinter( TQPrinter *, bool = false ); TQPrinter * printer() const; void addButton( TQPushButton *but ); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp index 262dbd85b..4f4319827 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp @@ -75,8 +75,8 @@ public: label( new TQLabel(labelText,that,"label") ), cancel( 0 ), bar( new TQProgressBar(totalSteps,that,"bar") ), - shown_once( FALSE ), - cancellation_flag( FALSE ), + shown_once( false ), + cancellation_flag( false ), showTime( defaultShowTime ) { label->setAlignment(that->style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_ProgressDialog_TextLabelAlignment, that)); @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ public: for cancellation with wasCanceled(). For example: \code TQProgressDialog progress( "Copying files...", "Abort Copy", numFiles, - this, "progress", TRUE ); + this, "progress", true ); for ( int i = 0; i < numFiles; i++ ) { progress.setProgress( i ); tqApp->processEvents(); @@ -238,9 +238,9 @@ TQProgressBar *TQProgressDialog::bar() const The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \a name, \a modal, and the widget flags, \a f, are - passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is FALSE (the + passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is false (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing - of the dialog to occur. If \a modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that + of the dialog to occur. If \a modal is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. \sa setLabelText(), setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), @@ -271,9 +271,9 @@ TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog( TQWidget *creator, const char *name, The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \a name, \a modal, and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the - TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is FALSE (the default), + TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is false (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of - the dialog to occur. If \a modal is TRUE, the dialog ensures that + the dialog to occur. If \a modal is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. @@ -310,9 +310,9 @@ void TQProgressDialog::init( TQWidget *creator, int totstps) { d = new TQProgressDialogData(this, creator, lbl, totstps); - d->autoClose = TRUE; - d->autoReset = TRUE; - d->forceHide = FALSE; + d->autoClose = true; + d->autoReset = true; + d->forceHide = false; setCancelButtonText( canc ); connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL(canceled()), this, TQ_SIGNAL(cancelled()) ); connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL(canceled()), this, TQ_SLOT(cancel()) ); @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setLabel( TQLabel *label ) if ( label->parentWidget() == this ) { label->hide(); // until we resize } else { - label->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE ); + label->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), false ); } } int w = TQMAX( isVisible() ? width() : 0, sizeHint().width() ); @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setCancelButton( TQPushButton *cancelButton ) if ( cancelButton->parentWidget() == this ) { cancelButton->hide(); // until we resize } else { - cancelButton->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE ); + cancelButton->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), false ); } connect( d->cancel, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SIGNAL(canceled()) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setTotalSteps( int totalSteps ) /*! Resets the progress dialog. - The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is TRUE. + The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is true. \sa setAutoClose(), setAutoReset() */ @@ -528,23 +528,23 @@ void TQProgressDialog::reset() if ( d->autoClose || d->forceHide ) hide(); bar()->reset(); - d->cancellation_flag = FALSE; - d->shown_once = FALSE; + d->cancellation_flag = false; + d->shown_once = false; forceTimer->stop(); } /*! - Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes TRUE until + Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes true until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden. */ void TQProgressDialog::cancel() { - d->forceHide = TRUE; + d->forceHide = true; reset(); - d->forceHide = FALSE; - d->cancellation_flag = TRUE; + d->forceHide = false; + d->cancellation_flag = true; } /*! @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setProgress( int progress ) bool need_show; int elapsed = d->starttime.elapsed(); if ( elapsed >= d->showTime ) { - need_show = TRUE; + need_show = true; } else { if ( elapsed > minWaitTime ) { int estimate; @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setProgress( int progress ) estimate = elapsed * (totalSteps() - progress) / progress; need_show = estimate >= d->showTime; } else { - need_show = FALSE; + need_show = false; } } if ( need_show ) { @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::setProgress( int progress ) int h = TQMAX( isVisible() ? height() : 0, sizeHint().height() ); resize( w, h ); show(); - d->shown_once = TRUE; + d->shown_once = true; } } #ifdef TQ_WS_MACX @@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e ) \property TQProgressDialog::autoReset \brief whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps() - The default is TRUE. + The default is true. \sa setAutoClose() */ @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ bool TQProgressDialog::autoReset() const \property TQProgressDialog::autoClose \brief whether the dialog gets hidden by reset() - The default is TRUE. + The default is true. \sa setAutoReset() */ @@ -819,7 +819,7 @@ void TQProgressDialog::forceShow() return; show(); - d->shown_once = TRUE; + d->shown_once = true; } diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h index 628d6de19..6f65a7425 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h @@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQProgressDialog : public TQDialog TQ_PROPERTY( TQString labelText READ labelText WRITE setLabelText ) public: - TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); TQProgressDialog( const TQString& labelText, const TQString &cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, - bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); + bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQProgressDialog(); void setLabel( TQLabel * ); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp index b312ccc64..c0ad02698 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, d->ok = new TQPushButton( this, "ok" ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( d->ok ); d->ok->setText( tr("OK") ); - d->ok->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->ok->setDefault( true ); connect( d->ok, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SIGNAL(applyButtonPressed()) ); connect( d->ok, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), @@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ void TQTabDialog::setFont( const TQFont & font ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise + returns false. \sa setDefaultButton() defaultButtonPressed() hasApplyButton() hasCancelButton() @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ bool TQTabDialog::hasDefaultButton() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns + false. \sa setHelpButton() helpButtonPressed() hasApplyButton() hasCancelButton() @@ -284,8 +284,8 @@ bool TQTabDialog::hasHelpButton() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise + returns false. \sa setCancelButton() cancelButtonPressed() hasApplyButton() hasDefaultButton() @@ -322,8 +322,8 @@ bool TQTabDialog::hasCancelButton() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise + returns false. \sa setApplyButton() applyButtonPressed() hasCancelButton() hasDefaultButton() @@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ bool TQTabDialog::hasApplyButton() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns + false. \sa setOkButton() hasApplyButton() hasCancelButton() hasDefaultButton() @@ -543,11 +543,11 @@ void TQTabDialog::showPage( TQWidget * w ) /*! \obsolete - Returns TRUE if the page with object name \a name is enabled and - FALSE if it is disabled. + Returns true if the page with object name \a name is enabled and + false if it is disabled. If \a name is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, isTabEnabled() - returns FALSE. + returns false. \sa setTabEnabled(), TQWidget::isEnabled() */ @@ -555,9 +555,9 @@ void TQTabDialog::showPage( TQWidget * w ) bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled( const char* name ) const { if ( !name ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQObjectList * l - = ((TQTabDialog *)this)->queryList( "TQWidget", name, FALSE, TRUE ); + = ((TQTabDialog *)this)->queryList( "TQWidget", name, false, true ); if ( l && l->first() ) { TQWidget * w; while( l->current() ) { @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled( const char* name ) const } } delete l; - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled( const char* name, bool enable ) if ( !name ) return; TQObjectList * l - = ((TQTabDialog *)this)->queryList( "TQWidget", name, FALSE, TRUE ); + = ((TQTabDialog *)this)->queryList( "TQWidget", name, false, true ); if ( l && l->first() ) { TQObjectListIt it(*l); TQObject *o; @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled( const char* name, bool enable ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the page \a w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the page \a w is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa setTabEnabled(), TQWidget::isEnabled() */ @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled( TQWidget* w ) const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE the page \a w is enabled; otherwise \a w is + If \a enable is true the page \a w is enabled; otherwise \a w is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately. TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h b/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h index 61e4287c6..de6d8bc2c 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTabDialog : public TQDialog { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTabDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQTabDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQTabDialog(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp b/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp index 78b7431b2..5e2ebaff8 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp +++ b/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp @@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ public: struct Page { Page( TQWidget * widget, const TQString & title ): w( widget ), t( title ), - backEnabled( TRUE ), nextEnabled( TRUE ), finishEnabled( FALSE ), - helpEnabled( TRUE ), - appropriate( TRUE ) + backEnabled( true ), nextEnabled( true ), finishEnabled( false ), + helpEnabled( true ), + appropriate( true ) {} TQWidget * w; TQString t; @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ TQWizard::TQWizard( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, d = new TQWizardPrivate(); d->current = 0; // not quite true, but... d->ws = new TQWidgetStack( this, "qt_widgetstack" ); - d->pages.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + d->pages.setAutoDelete( true ); d->title = new TQLabel( this, "title label" ); // create in nice tab order @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ TQWizard::TQWizard( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, d->finishButton->setText( tr( "&Finish" ) ); d->helpButton->setText( tr( "&Help" ) ); - d->nextButton->setDefault( TRUE ); + d->nextButton->setDefault( true ); connect( d->backButton, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQ_SLOT(back()) ); @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ void TQWizard::addPage( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title ) int i = d->pages.count(); if( i > 0 ) - d->pages.at( i - 1 )->nextEnabled = TRUE; + d->pages.at( i - 1 )->nextEnabled = true; TQWizardPrivate::Page * p = new TQWizardPrivate::Page( page, title ); p->backEnabled = ( i > 0 ); @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ void TQWizard::insertPage( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title, int index ) index = d->pages.count(); if( index > 0 && ( index == (int)d->pages.count() ) ) - d->pages.at( index - 1 )->nextEnabled = TRUE; + d->pages.at( index - 1 )->nextEnabled = true; TQWizardPrivate::Page * p = new TQWizardPrivate::Page( page, title ); p->backEnabled = ( index > 0 ); @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ void TQWizard::showPage( TQWidget * page ) if ( p ) { int i; for( i = 0; i < (int)d->pages.count() && d->pages.at( i ) != p; i++ ); - bool notFirst( FALSE ); + bool notFirst( false ); if( i ) { i--; @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ void TQWizard::showPage( TQWidget * page ) } } setBackEnabled( notFirst ); - setNextEnabled( TRUE ); + setNextEnabled( true ); d->ws->raiseWidget( page ); d->current = p; } @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled( bool enable ) */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, page \a page has a Back button; otherwise \a + If \a enable is true, page \a page has a Back button; otherwise \a page has no Back button. By default all pages have this button. */ void TQWizard::setBackEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ void TQWizard::setBackEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, page \a page has a Next button; otherwise + If \a enable is true, page \a page has a Next button; otherwise the Next button on \a page is disabled. By default all pages have this button. */ @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ void TQWizard::setNextEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, page \a page has a Finish button; otherwise + If \a enable is true, page \a page has a Finish button; otherwise \a page has no Finish button. By default \e no page has this button. */ @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ void TQWizard::setFinishEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, page \a page has a Help button; otherwise \a + If \a enable is true, page \a page has a Help button; otherwise \a page has no Help button. By default all pages have this button. */ void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) @@ -550,10 +550,10 @@ void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) /*! Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function - returns TRUE if \a page is relevant for display in the current - context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns FALSE. The + returns true if \a page is relevant for display in the current + context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns false. The default implementation returns the value set using - setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is TRUE. + setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is true. \warning The last page of the wizard will be displayed if no page is relevant in the current context. @@ -562,12 +562,12 @@ void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled( TQWidget * page, bool enable ) bool TQWizard::appropriate( TQWidget * page ) const { TQWizardPrivate::Page * p = d->page( page ); - return p ? p->appropriate : TRUE; + return p ? p->appropriate : true; } /*! - If \a appropriate is TRUE then page \a page is considered relevant + If \a appropriate is true then page \a page is considered relevant in the current context and should be displayed in the page sequence; otherwise \a page should not be displayed in the page sequence. @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ void TQWizard::updateButtons() int i; for( i = 0; i < (int)d->pages.count() && d->pages.at( i ) != d->current; i++ ); - bool notFirst( FALSE ); + bool notFirst( false ); if( i ) { i--; while( ( i >= 0 ) && !notFirst ) { @@ -736,19 +736,19 @@ TQPushButton * TQWizard::helpButton() const void TQWizard::layOutButtonRow( TQHBoxLayout * layout ) { - bool hasHelp = FALSE; - bool hasEarlyFinish = FALSE; + bool hasHelp = false; + bool hasEarlyFinish = false; int i = d->pages.count() - 2; while ( !hasEarlyFinish && i >= 0 ) { if ( d->pages.at( i ) && d->pages.at( i )->finishEnabled ) - hasEarlyFinish = TRUE; + hasEarlyFinish = true; i--; } i = 0; while ( !hasHelp && i < (int)d->pages.count() ) { if ( d->pages.at( i ) && d->pages.at( i )->helpEnabled ) - hasHelp = TRUE; + hasHelp = true; i++; } @@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ void TQWizard::layOutButtonRow( TQHBoxLayout * layout ) h->addSpacing( 6 ); if (d->current == d->pages.at( d->pages.count()-1 )) - hasEarlyFinish = FALSE; + hasEarlyFinish = false; if ( hasEarlyFinish ) { d->nextButton->show(); diff --git a/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h b/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h index c680e2860..b9bb060f1 100644 --- a/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h +++ b/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWizard : public TQDialog TQ_PROPERTY( TQFont titleFont READ titleFont WRITE setTitleFont ) public: - TQWizard( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQWizard( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=false, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQWizard(); diff --git a/src/kernel/qdnd_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/qdnd_x11.cpp index 57bdcffd4..4f6b54ba7 100644 --- a/src/kernel/qdnd_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/qdnd_x11.cpp @@ -204,9 +204,9 @@ static Time qt_xdnd_target_current_time; // screen number containing the pointer... -1 means default static int qt_xdnd_current_screen = -1; // state of dragging... true if dragging, false if not -bool qt_xdnd_dragging = FALSE; +bool qt_xdnd_dragging = false; // need to check state of keyboard modifiers -static bool need_modifiers_check = FALSE; +static bool need_modifiers_check = false; // dict of payload data, sorted by type atom static TQIntDict<TQByteArray> * qt_xdnd_target_data = 0; @@ -219,8 +219,8 @@ extern void qt_motifdnd_enable( TQWidget *, bool ); extern TQByteArray qt_motifdnd_obtain_data( const char *format ); extern const char *qt_motifdnd_format( int n ); -bool qt_motifdnd_active = FALSE; -static bool dndCancelled = FALSE; +bool qt_motifdnd_active = false; +static bool dndCancelled = false; // Shift/Ctrl handling, and final drop status static TQDragObject::DragMode drag_mode; @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ static bool qt_xdnd_enable( TQWidget* w, bool on ) TQWidget * xdnd_widget = 0; if ( w->isDesktop() ) { if ( desktop_proxy ) // *WE* already have one. - return FALSE; + return false; // As per Xdnd4, use XdndProxy XGrabServer( w->x11Display() ); @@ -375,9 +375,9 @@ static bool qt_xdnd_enable( TQWidget* w, bool on ) XChangeProperty ( xdnd_widget->x11Display(), xdnd_widget->winId(), qt_xdnd_aware, XA_ATOM, 32, PropModeReplace, (unsigned char *)&atm, 1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { if ( w->isDesktop() ) { @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ static bool qt_xdnd_enable( TQWidget* w, bool on ) delete desktop_proxy; desktop_proxy = 0; } - return TRUE; + return true; } } @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ const char* qt_xdnd_atom_to_str( Atom a ) if ( !qt_xdnd_drag_types ) { qt_xdnd_drag_types = new TQIntDict<TQCString>( 17 ); - qt_xdnd_drag_types->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + qt_xdnd_drag_types->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQCString* result; if ( !(result=qt_xdnd_drag_types->find( a )) ) { @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ Atom* qt_xdnd_str_to_atom( const char *mimeType ) return 0; if ( !qt_xdnd_atom_numbers ) { qt_xdnd_atom_numbers = new TQDict<Atom>( 17 ); - qt_xdnd_atom_numbers->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + qt_xdnd_atom_numbers->setAutoDelete( true ); } Atom * result; @@ -492,9 +492,9 @@ static TQWidget * find_child( TQWidget * tlw, TQPoint & p ) TQWidget * w = tlw; p = w->mapFromGlobal( p ); - bool done = FALSE; + bool done = false; while ( !done ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; if ( ((TQExtraWidget*)w)->extraData() && ((TQExtraWidget*)w)->extraData()->xDndProxy != 0 ) break; // stop searching for widgets under the mouse cursor if found widget is a proxy. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ static TQWidget * find_child( TQWidget * tlw, TQPoint & p ) ((TQWidget*)o)->geometry().contains( p ) && !((TQWidget*)o)->isTopLevel()) { w = (TQWidget *)o; - done = FALSE; + done = false; p = w->mapFromParent( p ); break; } @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ static TQWidget * find_child( TQWidget * tlw, TQPoint & p ) static bool checkEmbedded(TQWidget* w, const XEvent* xe) { if (!w) - return FALSE; + return false; if (current_embedding_widget != 0 && current_embedding_widget != w) { qt_xdnd_current_target = ((TQExtraWidget*)current_embedding_widget)->extraData()->xDndProxy; @@ -549,10 +549,10 @@ static bool checkEmbedded(TQWidget* w, const XEvent* xe) XSendEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), extra->xDndProxy, False, NoEventMask, (XEvent*)xe ); qt_xdnd_current_widget = w; - return TRUE; + return true; } current_embedding_widget = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } void qt_handle_xdnd_enter( TQWidget *, const XEvent * xe, bool /*passive*/ ) @@ -560,11 +560,11 @@ void qt_handle_xdnd_enter( TQWidget *, const XEvent * xe, bool /*passive*/ ) //if ( !w->neveHadAChildWithDropEventsOn() ) //return; // haven't been set up for dnd - qt_motifdnd_active = FALSE; + qt_motifdnd_active = false; last_enter_event.xclient = xe->xclient; - qt_xdnd_target_answerwas = FALSE; + qt_xdnd_target_answerwas = false; const long *l = xe->xclient.data.l; int version = (int)(((unsigned long)(l[1])) >> 24); @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ void qt_handle_xdnd_position( TQWidget *w, const XEvent * xe, bool passive ) me.setAction(accepted_action); if ( c != qt_xdnd_current_widget ) { - qt_xdnd_target_answerwas = FALSE; + qt_xdnd_target_answerwas = false; if ( qt_xdnd_current_widget ) { TQDragLeaveEvent e; TQApplication::sendEvent( qt_xdnd_current_widget, &e ); @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ void qt_handle_xdnd_position( TQWidget *w, const XEvent * xe, bool passive ) if ( !de.isActionAccepted() ) // only as a copy (move if we del) accepted_action = TQDropEvent::Copy; else - me.acceptAction(TRUE); + me.acceptAction(true); } else { me.ignore( de.answerRect() ); } @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ void qt_xdnd_send_leave() w = 0; if ( w ) - qt_handle_xdnd_leave( w, (const XEvent *)&leave, FALSE ); + qt_handle_xdnd_leave( w, (const XEvent *)&leave, false ); else XSendEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), qt_xdnd_current_proxy_target, False, NoEventMask, (XEvent*)&leave ); @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ void qt_handle_xdnd_drop( TQWidget *, const XEvent * xe, bool passive ) if ( !de.isAccepted() ) { // Ignore a failed drag global_accepted_action = TQDropEvent::Copy; - dndCancelled = TRUE; + dndCancelled = true; } XClientMessageEvent finished; finished.type = ClientMessage; @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ void TQDragManager::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* e ) if( updateMode( (ButtonState)qt_x11_translateButtonState( mask ))) qt_xdnd_source_sameanswer = TQRect(); // force move } - need_modifiers_check = TRUE; + need_modifiers_check = true; if( qt_xdnd_source_sameanswer.isNull() ) move( TQCursor::pos() ); } @@ -968,17 +968,17 @@ bool TQDragManager::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) tqApp->removeEventFilter( this ); object = 0; dragSource = 0; - beingCancelled = FALSE; + beingCancelled = false; tqApp->exit_loop(); - return TRUE; // block the key release + return true; // block the key release } - return FALSE; + return false; } Q_ASSERT( object != 0 ); if ( !o->isWidgetType() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseMove ) { TQMouseEvent* me = (TQMouseEvent *)e; @@ -986,8 +986,8 @@ bool TQDragManager::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) updateMode(me->stateAfter()); move( me->globalPos() ); } - need_modifiers_check = FALSE; - return TRUE; + need_modifiers_check = false; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease ) { tqApp->removeEventFilter( this ); if ( willDrop ) @@ -996,21 +996,21 @@ bool TQDragManager::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) cancel(); object = 0; dragSource = 0; - beingCancelled = FALSE; + beingCancelled = false; tqApp->exit_loop(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::DragResponse ) { if ( ((TQDragResponseEvent *)e)->dragAccepted() ) { if ( !willDrop ) { - willDrop = TRUE; + willDrop = true; } } else { if ( willDrop ) { - willDrop = FALSE; + willDrop = false; } } updateCursor(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress @@ -1022,16 +1022,16 @@ bool TQDragManager::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) tqApp->removeEventFilter( this ); object = 0; dragSource = 0; - beingCancelled = FALSE; + beingCancelled = false; tqApp->exit_loop(); } else { if( updateMode(ke->stateAfter())) { qt_xdnd_source_sameanswer = TQRect(); // force move move( TQCursor::pos() ); } - need_modifiers_check = FALSE; + need_modifiers_check = false; } - return TRUE; // Eat all key events + return true; // Eat all key events } // ### We bind modality to widgets, so we have to do this @@ -1048,9 +1048,9 @@ bool TQDragManager::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) case TQEvent::Accel: case TQEvent::AccelAvailable: case TQEvent::AccelOverride: - return TRUE; + return true; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ void TQDragManager::updateCursor() } #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( c ) - tqApp->setOverrideCursor( *c, TRUE ); + tqApp->setOverrideCursor( *c, true ); #endif } @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ void TQDragManager::cancel( bool deleteSource ) killTimer( heartbeat ); heartbeat = -1; if ( object ) { - beingCancelled = TRUE; + beingCancelled = true; object = 0; } @@ -1146,7 +1146,7 @@ void TQDragManager::cancel( bool deleteSource ) #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( restoreCursor ) { TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor(); - restoreCursor = FALSE; + restoreCursor = false; } #endif @@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ void TQDragManager::cancel( bool deleteSource ) delete qt_xdnd_deco; qt_xdnd_deco = 0; - dndCancelled = TRUE; + dndCancelled = true; } static @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ void TQDragManager::move( const TQPoint & globalPos ) globalPos.y() -2 , 5, 5 ); if ( w ) { - qt_handle_xdnd_enter( w, (const XEvent *)&enter, FALSE ); + qt_handle_xdnd_enter( w, (const XEvent *)&enter, false ); } else if ( target ) { XSendEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), proxy_target, False, NoEventMask, (XEvent*)&enter ); @@ -1404,13 +1404,13 @@ void TQDragManager::move( const TQPoint & globalPos ) move.data.l[4] = qtaction_to_xdndaction( global_requested_action ); if ( w ) - qt_handle_xdnd_position( w, (const XEvent *)&move, FALSE ); + qt_handle_xdnd_position( w, (const XEvent *)&move, false ); else XSendEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), proxy_target, False, NoEventMask, (XEvent*)&move ); } else { if ( willDrop ) { - willDrop = FALSE; + willDrop = false; updateCursor(); } } @@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ void TQDragManager::drop() w = 0; if ( w ) - qt_handle_xdnd_drop( w, (const XEvent *)&drop, FALSE ); + qt_handle_xdnd_drop( w, (const XEvent *)&drop, false ); else XSendEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), qt_xdnd_current_proxy_target, False, NoEventMask, (XEvent*)&drop ); @@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@ void TQDragManager::drop() #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR if ( restoreCursor ) { TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor(); - restoreCursor = FALSE; + restoreCursor = false; } #endif } @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ bool qt_xdnd_handle_badwindow() qt_xdnd_source_object = 0; delete qt_xdnd_deco; qt_xdnd_deco = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( qt_xdnd_dragsource_xid ) { qt_xdnd_dragsource_xid = 0; @@ -1477,9 +1477,9 @@ bool qt_xdnd_handle_badwindow() TQApplication::sendEvent( qt_xdnd_current_widget, &e ); qt_xdnd_current_widget = 0; } - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1501,8 +1501,8 @@ bool qt_xdnd_handle_badwindow() /*! - Returns TRUE if this event provides format \a mimeType; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this event provides format \a mimeType; otherwise + returns false. \sa data() */ @@ -1510,17 +1510,17 @@ bool qt_xdnd_handle_badwindow() bool TQDropEvent::provides( const char *mimeType ) const { if ( qt_motifdnd_active && tqstrnicmp( mimeType, "text/", 5 ) == 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; int n=0; const char* f; do { f = format( n ); if ( !f ) - return FALSE; + return false; n++; } while( tqstricmp( mimeType, f ) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } void qt_xdnd_handle_selection_request( const XSelectionRequestEvent * req ) @@ -1608,14 +1608,14 @@ static TQByteArray qt_xdnd_obtain_data( const char *format ) if ( qt_xclb_read_property( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), tw->winId(), - qt_xdnd_selection, TRUE, - &result, 0, &type, 0, FALSE ) ) { + qt_xdnd_selection, true, + &result, 0, &type, 0, false ) ) { if ( type == qt_incr_atom ) { int nbytes = result.size() >= 4 ? *((int*)result.data()) : 0; result = qt_xclb_read_incremental_property( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), tw->winId(), qt_xdnd_selection, - nbytes, FALSE ); + nbytes, false ); } else if ( type != *a ) { // (includes None) tqDebug( "TQt clipboard: unknown atom %ld", type); } @@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ bool qt_dnd_enable( TQWidget* w, bool on ) if ( on ) { if ( ( (TQExtraWidget*)w)->topData()->dnd ) - return TRUE; // been there, done that + return true; // been there, done that ((TQExtraWidget*)w)->topData()->dnd = 1; } @@ -1734,12 +1734,12 @@ const char* TQDropEvent::format( int n ) const bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) { if ( object == o || !o || !o->parent() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( object ) { cancel(); tqApp->removeEventFilter( this ); - beingCancelled = FALSE; + beingCancelled = false; } if ( qt_xdnd_source_object ) { @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) qt_xdnd_source_object->setTarget( 0 ); qt_xdnd_deco = new TQShapedPixmapWidget(); - willDrop = FALSE; + willDrop = false; object = o; updatePixmap(); @@ -1792,16 +1792,16 @@ bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) qt_xdnd_source_sameanswer = TQRect(); move(TQCursor::pos()); heartbeat = startTimer(200); - need_modifiers_check = FALSE; + need_modifiers_check = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR tqApp->setOverrideCursor( arrowCursor ); - restoreCursor = TRUE; + restoreCursor = true; updateCursor(); #endif - dndCancelled = FALSE; - qt_xdnd_dragging = TRUE; + dndCancelled = false; + qt_xdnd_dragging = true; if (!TQWidget::mouseGrabber()) qt_xdnd_deco->grabMouse(); @@ -1817,7 +1817,7 @@ bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) killTimer( heartbeat ); heartbeat = -1; qt_xdnd_current_screen = -1; - qt_xdnd_dragging = FALSE; + qt_xdnd_dragging = false; return ((! dndCancelled) && // source del? (global_accepted_action == TQDropEvent::Copy && diff --git a/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp b/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp index cbace549d..094c21fa0 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp @@ -269,9 +269,9 @@ TQWidget * TQWidgetItem::widget() } /*! - Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its - width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default implementation returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its + width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns + false. Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ TQWidget * TQWidgetItem::widget() */ bool TQLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ TQRect TQLayout::geometry() const bool TQWidgetItem::hasHeightForWidth() const { if ( isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( wid->layout() ) return wid->layout()->hasHeightForWidth(); return wid->sizePolicy().hasHeightForWidth(); @@ -544,16 +544,16 @@ TQSize TQWidgetItem::sizeHint() const } /*! - Returns TRUE because a spacer item never contains widgets. + Returns true because a spacer item never contains widgets. */ bool TQSpacerItem::isEmpty() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQWidgetItem::isEmpty() const { @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ TQLayout::TQLayout( TQWidget *parent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name parent->name() ); parent->removeChild( this ); } else { - topLevel = TRUE; + topLevel = true; parent->installEventFilter( this ); setWidgetLayout( parent, this ); } @@ -627,14 +627,14 @@ void TQLayout::init() { insideSpacing = 0; outsideBorder = 0; - topLevel = FALSE; - enabled = TRUE; - autoNewChild = FALSE; - frozen = FALSE; - activated = FALSE; - marginImpl = FALSE; - autoMinimum = FALSE; - autoResizeMode = TRUE; + topLevel = false; + enabled = true; + autoNewChild = false; + frozen = false; + activated = false; + marginImpl = false; + autoMinimum = false; + autoResizeMode = true; extraData = 0; #ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR menubar = 0; @@ -717,8 +717,8 @@ TQLayout::TQLayout( int spacing, const char *name ) /*! \fn bool TQLayout::isTopLevel () const - Returns TRUE if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a - child of another layout; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a + child of another layout; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -784,12 +784,12 @@ TQWidget *TQLayout::mainWidget() } /*! - Returns TRUE if this layout is empty. The default implementation - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this layout is empty. The default implementation + returns false. */ bool TQLayout::isEmpty() const { - return FALSE; //### should check + return false; //### should check } /*! @@ -821,17 +821,17 @@ void TQLayout::invalidate() static bool removeWidgetRecursively( TQLayoutItem *lay, TQWidget *w ) { - bool didSomething = FALSE; + bool didSomething = false; TQLayoutIterator it = lay->iterator(); TQLayoutItem *child; while ( (child = it.current()) != 0 ) { if ( child->widget() == w ) { it.deleteCurrent(); lay->invalidate(); // maybe redundant - didSomething = TRUE; + didSomething = true; } else if ( removeWidgetRecursively(child, w) ) { lay->invalidate(); // maybe redundant - didSomething = TRUE; + didSomething = true; } else { ++it; } @@ -848,10 +848,10 @@ static bool removeWidgetRecursively( TQLayoutItem *lay, TQWidget *w ) bool TQLayout::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) { if ( !enabled ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !o->isWidgetType() ) - return FALSE; + return false; switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::Resize: @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() { invalidateRecursive( this ); if ( !topLevel ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQWidget *mw = mainWidget(); if (!mw) { @@ -1192,9 +1192,9 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() tqWarning( "TQLayout::activate: %s \"%s\" does not have a main widget", TQObject::className(), TQObject::name() ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } - activated = TRUE; + activated = true; TQSize s = mw->size(); TQSize ms; int mbh = 0; @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() // ideally only if sizeHint() or sizePolicy() has changed mw->updateGeometry(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() TQSizePolicy::SizeType sizing types\endlink affect how the widget is treated by the \link TQLayout layout engine\endlink. - If \a hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent + If \a hfw is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a TQLabel with line wrapping). @@ -1360,7 +1360,7 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() sizing types \a hor and \a ver, and stretch factors \a horStretch and \a verStretch. - If \a hfw is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the + If \a hfw is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget. \sa horStretch() verStretch() @@ -1385,8 +1385,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally() const - Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its - sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its + sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. \sa mayShrinkVertically() mayGrowHorizontally() */ @@ -1394,8 +1394,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically() const - Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its - sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its + sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. \sa mayShrinkHorizontally() mayGrowVertically() */ @@ -1403,8 +1403,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally() const - Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its - sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget can sensibly be wider than its + sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. \sa mayGrowVertically() mayShrinkHorizontally() */ @@ -1412,8 +1412,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically() const - Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its - sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget can sensibly be taller than its + sizeHint(); otherwise returns false. \sa mayGrowHorizontally() mayShrinkVertically() */ @@ -1450,8 +1450,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth() const - Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its - width; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its + width; otherwise returns false. \sa setHeightForWidth() */ @@ -1506,8 +1506,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::operator==( const TQSizePolicy &s ) const - Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to \a s; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this policy is equal to \a s; otherwise returns + false. \sa operator!=() */ @@ -1515,8 +1515,8 @@ bool TQLayout::activate() /*! \fn bool TQSizePolicy::operator!=( const TQSizePolicy &s ) const - Returns TRUE if this policy is different from \a s; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this policy is different from \a s; otherwise + returns false. \sa operator==() */ @@ -1713,24 +1713,24 @@ void TQLayout::setResizeMode( ResizeMode mode ) switch ( mode ) { case Auto: - frozen = FALSE; - autoMinimum = FALSE; - autoResizeMode = TRUE; + frozen = false; + autoMinimum = false; + autoResizeMode = true; break; case Fixed: - frozen = TRUE; - autoMinimum = FALSE; - autoResizeMode = FALSE; + frozen = true; + autoMinimum = false; + autoResizeMode = false; break; case FreeResize: - frozen = FALSE; - autoMinimum = FALSE; - autoResizeMode = FALSE; + frozen = false; + autoMinimum = false; + autoResizeMode = false; break; case Minimum: - frozen = FALSE; - autoMinimum = TRUE; - autoResizeMode = FALSE; + frozen = false; + autoMinimum = true; + autoResizeMode = false; } if ( mainWidget() && mainWidget()->isVisible() ) activate(); @@ -1745,9 +1745,9 @@ TQLayout::ResizeMode TQLayout::resizeMode() const /*! \fn bool TQLayout::autoAdd() const - Returns TRUE if this layout automatically grabs all new + Returns true if this layout automatically grabs all new mainWidget()'s new children and adds them as defined by addItem(); - otherwise returns FALSE. This has effect only for top-level + otherwise returns false. This has effect only for top-level layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their mainWidget(). @@ -1760,7 +1760,7 @@ TQLayout::ResizeMode TQLayout::resizeMode() const */ /*! - If \a b is TRUE, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is + If \a b is true, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is disabled. \warning If auto-add is enabled, you cannot set stretch factors @@ -1779,19 +1779,19 @@ void TQLayout::setAutoAdd( bool b ) /*! \fn bool TQLayout::supportsMargin() const - Returns TRUE if this layout supports \l TQLayout::margin on - non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this layout supports \l TQLayout::margin on + non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns false. \sa margin */ /*! - Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If \a b is TRUE, + Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If \a b is true, margin() handling is implemented by the subclass. If \a b is - FALSE (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level + false (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level layouts. - If \a b is TRUE, margin handling needs to be implemented in + If \a b is true, margin handling needs to be implemented in setGeometry(), maximumSize(), minimumSize(), sizeHint() and heightForWidth(). @@ -1904,7 +1904,7 @@ void TQLayout::removeItem( TQLayoutItem *item ) } /*! - Enables this layout if \a enable is TRUE, otherwise disables it. + Enables this layout if \a enable is true, otherwise disables it. An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled layout acts as if it did not exist. @@ -1919,7 +1919,7 @@ void TQLayout::setEnabled( bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa setEnabled() */ diff --git a/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp b/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp index 6569aa8dc..af5b354f5 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ struct TQAccelItem { // internal accelerator item TQAccelItem( const TQKeySequence &k, int i ) - { key=k; id=i; enabled=TRUE; signal=0; } + { key=k; id=i; enabled=true; signal=0; } ~TQAccelItem() { delete signal; } int id; TQKeySequence key; @@ -206,15 +206,15 @@ bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_tryComposeUnicode( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e){ } #ifdef TQ_WS_MAC -static bool qt_accel_no_shortcuts = TRUE; +static bool qt_accel_no_shortcuts = true; #else -static bool qt_accel_no_shortcuts = FALSE; +static bool qt_accel_no_shortcuts = false; #endif void TQ_EXPORT tqt_setAccelAutoShortcuts(bool b) { qt_accel_no_shortcuts = b; } /* \internal - Returns TRUE if the accel is in the current subwindow, else FALSE. + Returns true if the accel is in the current subwindow, else false. */ bool TQAccelManager::correctSubWindow( TQWidget* w, TQAccelPrivate* d ) { #if !defined ( Q_OS_MACX ) @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::correctSubWindow( TQWidget* w, TQAccelPrivate* d ) { #else if ( !d->watch || (!d->watch->isVisible() && !d->watch->inherits( "TQMenuBar" )) || !d->watch->isEnabled() ) #endif - return FALSE; + return false; TQWidget* tlw = w->topLevelWidget(); TQWidget* wtlw = d->watch->topLevelWidget(); @@ -233,21 +233,21 @@ bool TQAccelManager::correctSubWindow( TQWidget* w, TQAccelPrivate* d ) { return tlw->parentWidget()->topLevelWidget() == wtlw; if ( wtlw != tlw ) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif /* if we live in a MDI subwindow, ignore the event if we are not the active document window */ TQWidget* sw = d->watch; while ( sw && !sw->testWFlags( WSubWindow ) ) - sw = sw->parentWidget( TRUE ); + sw = sw->parentWidget( true ); if ( sw ) { // we are in a subwindow indeed TQWidget* fw = w; while ( fw && fw != sw ) - fw = fw->parentWidget( TRUE ); + fw = fw->parentWidget( true ); if ( fw != sw ) // focus widget not in our subwindow - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } inline int TQAccelManager::translateModifiers( ButtonState state ) @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::tryAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) e->ignore(); TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( w, e ); if ( e->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } e->t = TQEvent::Accel; e->ignore(); @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::tryComposeUnicode( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) if ( value >= 0 && value <= 9 ) { TQApplication::composedUnicode *= 10; TQApplication::composedUnicode += value; - return TRUE; + return true; } else { // Composing interrupted, dispatch! if ( TQApplication::composedUnicode ) { @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::tryComposeUnicode( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) TQApplication::sendEvent( w, &ker ); } TQApplication::composedUnicode = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } // Meta compose end, dispatch } else if ( (e->type() == TQEvent::KeyRelease) && @@ -377,10 +377,10 @@ bool TQAccelManager::tryComposeUnicode( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) TQApplication::sendEvent( w, &ker ); } TQApplication::composedUnicode = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /* @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) // Modifiers can NOT be accelerators... if ( e->key() >= Key_Shift && e->key() <= Key_Alt ) - return FALSE; + return false; SequenceMatch result = TQt::NoMatch; TQKeySequence tocheck, partial; @@ -413,11 +413,11 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) TQKeyEvent pe = *e; int n = -1; int hasShift = (e->state()&TQt::ShiftButton)?1:0; - bool identicalDisabled = FALSE; - bool matchFound = FALSE; + bool identicalDisabled = false; + bool matchFound = false; do { accel = accels.first(); - matchFound = FALSE; + matchFound = false; while ( accel ) { if ( correctSubWindow( w, accel ) ) { if ( accel->enabled ) { @@ -432,16 +432,16 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) lastaccel = accel; lastitem = item; n++; - matchFound = TRUE; + matchFound = true; if ( n > TQMAX(clash,0) ) goto doclash; } else { - identicalDisabled = TRUE; + identicalDisabled = true; } } if ( item->enabled && TQt::PartialMatch == result ) { partial = tocheck; - matchFound = TRUE; + matchFound = true; } item = accel->aitems.prev(); } @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) item = accel->aitems.last(); while( item ) { if ( TQt::Identical == match( &pe, item, tocheck ) ) - identicalDisabled = TRUE; + identicalDisabled = true; item = accel->aitems.prev(); } } @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) intermediate = TQKeySequence(); lastaccel->activate( lastitem ); e->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } doclash: // found more than one match @@ -531,15 +531,15 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) firstaccel->activateAmbiguously( firstitem ); } e->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } TQAccelPrivate::TQAccelPrivate( TQAccel* p ) : parent( p ) { TQAccelManager::self()->registerAccel( this ); - aitems.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - ignorewhatsthis = FALSE; + aitems.setAutoDelete( true ); + ignorewhatsthis = false; } TQAccelPrivate::~TQAccelPrivate() @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQAccelPrivate( this ); - d->enabled = TRUE; + d->enabled = true; d->watch = parent; #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) if ( !d->watch ) @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQAccelPrivate( this ); - d->enabled = TRUE; + d->enabled = true; d->watch = watch; #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) if ( !d->watch ) @@ -628,8 +628,8 @@ TQAccel::~TQAccel() /*! - Returns TRUE if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns + false. \sa setEnabled(), isItemEnabled() */ @@ -641,8 +641,8 @@ bool TQAccel::isEnabled() const /*! - Enables the accelerator if \a enable is TRUE, or disables it if \a - enable is FALSE. + Enables the accelerator if \a enable is true, or disables it if \a + enable is false. Individual keys can also be enabled or disabled using setItemEnabled(). To work, a key must be an enabled item in an @@ -746,8 +746,8 @@ int TQAccel::findKey( const TQKeySequence& key ) const /*! - Returns TRUE if the accelerator item with the identifier \a id is - enabled. Returns FALSE if the item is disabled or cannot be found. + Returns true if the accelerator item with the identifier \a id is + enabled. Returns false if the item is disabled or cannot be found. \sa setItemEnabled(), isEnabled() */ @@ -755,13 +755,13 @@ int TQAccel::findKey( const TQKeySequence& key ) const bool TQAccel::isItemEnabled( int id ) const { TQAccelItem *item = find_id( d->aitems, id); - return item ? item->enabled : FALSE; + return item ? item->enabled : false; } /*! Enables the accelerator item with the identifier \a id if \a - enable is TRUE, and disables item \a id if \a enable is FALSE. + enable is true, and disables item \a id if \a enable is false. To work, an item must be enabled and be in an enabled TQAccel. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ bool TQAccel::connectItem( int id, const TQObject *receiver, const char *member } return item->signal->connect( receiver, member ); } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ bool TQAccel::disconnectItem( int id, const TQObject *receiver, TQAccelItem *item = find_id( d->aitems, id); if ( item && item->signal ) return item->signal->disconnect( receiver, member ); - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQAccelPrivate::activate( TQAccelItem* item ) @@ -1085,5 +1085,5 @@ to help. Ask them for ISBN 1859121047. /*! \obsolete serves no purpose anymore */ void TQAccel::repairEventFilter() {} /*! \obsolete serves no purpose anymore */ -bool TQAccel::eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * ) { return FALSE; } +bool TQAccel::eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * ) { return false; } #endif // TQT_NO_ACCEL diff --git a/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp b/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp index 174e16633..53caf49e8 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp @@ -314,12 +314,12 @@ public slots: #include "tqaccessible.moc" static AccessibleCache *qAccessibleInterface = 0; -static bool cleanupAdded = FALSE; +static bool cleanupAdded = false; static void qAccessibleCleanup() { if ( qAccessibleInterface && qAccessibleInterface->count() && qAccessibleManager ) - qAccessibleManager->setAutoUnload( FALSE ); + qAccessibleManager->setAutoUnload( false ); delete qAccessibleInterface; qAccessibleInterface = 0; @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ TQRESULT TQAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface( TQObject *object, TQAccessibleI qAccessibleManager = new TQPluginManager<TQAccessibleFactoryInterface>( IID_QAccessibleFactory, TQApplication::libraryPaths(), "/accessible" ); if ( !cleanupAdded ) { tqAddPostRoutine( qAccessibleCleanup ); - cleanupAdded = TRUE; + cleanupAdded = true; } } @@ -405,8 +405,8 @@ TQRESULT TQAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface( TQObject *object, TQAccessibleI } /*! - Returns TRUE if an accessibility implementation has been requested, - during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if an accessibility implementation has been requested, + during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns false. Use this function to prevent potentially expensive notifications via updateAccessibility(). @@ -431,9 +431,9 @@ bool TQAccessible::isActive() /*! \fn bool TQAccessibleInterface::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if all the data necessary to use this interface + Returns true if all the data necessary to use this interface implementation is valid (e.g. all pointers are non-null), - otherwise returns FALSE. + otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -605,19 +605,19 @@ bool TQAccessible::isActive() Gives the focus to the child object specified by \a control, or to the object itself if \a control is 0. - Returns TRUE if the focus could be set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the focus could be set; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQAccessibleInterface::setSelected( int control, bool on, bool extend ) Sets the selection of the child object with ID \a control to \a - on. If \a extend is TRUE, all child elements between the focused + on. If \a extend is true, all child elements between the focused item and the specified child object have their selection set to \a on. - Returns TRUE if the selection could be set; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the selection could be set; otherwise returns + false. \sa setFocus(), clearSelection() */ @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ TQAccessibleObject::TQAccessibleObject( TQObject *object ) qAccessibleInterface = new AccessibleCache; if ( !cleanupAdded ) { tqAddPostRoutine( qAccessibleCleanup ); - cleanupAdded = TRUE; + cleanupAdded = true; } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp b/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp index c6e6510b4..97368b0c6 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp @@ -326,51 +326,51 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ); TQApplication *tqApp = 0; // global application object TQStyle *TQApplication::app_style = 0; // default application style -bool tqt_explicit_app_style = FALSE; // style explicitly set by programmer +bool tqt_explicit_app_style = false; // style explicitly set by programmer int TQApplication::app_cspec = TQApplication::NormalColor; #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE TQPalette *TQApplication::app_pal = 0; // default application palette #endif TQFont *TQApplication::app_font = 0; // default application font -bool tqt_app_has_font = FALSE; +bool tqt_app_has_font = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR TQCursor *TQApplication::app_cursor = 0; // default application cursor #endif int TQApplication::app_tracking = 0; // global mouse tracking -bool TQApplication::is_app_running = FALSE; // app starting up if FALSE -bool TQApplication::is_app_closing = FALSE; // app closing down if TRUE +bool TQApplication::is_app_running = false; // app starting up if false +bool TQApplication::is_app_closing = false; // app closing down if true int TQApplication::loop_level = 0; // event loop level TQWidget *TQApplication::main_widget = 0; // main application widget TQWidget *TQApplication::focus_widget = 0; // has keyboard input focus TQWidget *TQApplication::active_window = 0; // toplevel with keyboard focus -bool TQApplication::obey_desktop_settings = TRUE; // use winsys resources +bool TQApplication::obey_desktop_settings = true; // use winsys resources int TQApplication::cursor_flash_time = 1000; // text caret flash time int TQApplication::mouse_double_click_time = 400; // mouse dbl click limit #ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT int TQApplication::wheel_scroll_lines = 3; // number of lines to scroll #endif bool tqt_is_gui_used; -bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_resolve_symlinks = TRUE; -bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_tab_all_widgets = TRUE; +bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_resolve_symlinks = true; +bool TQ_EXPORT tqt_tab_all_widgets = true; TQRect tqt_maxWindowRect; static int drag_time = 500; static int drag_distance = 4; -static bool reverse_layout = FALSE; +static bool reverse_layout = false; TQSize TQApplication::app_strut = TQSize( 0,0 ); // no default application strut -bool TQApplication::animate_ui = TRUE; -bool TQApplication::animate_menu = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::fade_menu = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::animate_combo = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::animate_tooltip = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::fade_tooltip = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::animate_toolbox = FALSE; -bool TQApplication::widgetCount = FALSE; +bool TQApplication::animate_ui = true; +bool TQApplication::animate_menu = false; +bool TQApplication::fade_menu = false; +bool TQApplication::animate_combo = false; +bool TQApplication::animate_tooltip = false; +bool TQApplication::fade_tooltip = false; +bool TQApplication::animate_toolbox = false; +bool TQApplication::widgetCount = false; TQApplication::Type tqt_appType=TQApplication::Tty; #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPONENT TQStringList *TQApplication::app_libpaths = 0; #endif -bool TQApplication::metaComposeUnicode = FALSE; +bool TQApplication::metaComposeUnicode = false; int TQApplication::composedUnicode = 0; #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ extern bool tqt_tryComposeUnicode( TQWidget*, TQKeyEvent* ); // def in tqaccel.c #endif #if defined(QT_TABLET_SUPPORT) -bool chokeMouse = FALSE; +bool chokeMouse = false; #endif void tqt_setMaxWindowRect(const TQRect& r) @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ public: #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (with_mutex) { - m_mutex = new TQMutex(TRUE); + m_mutex = new TQMutex(true); } #endif } @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ public: static TQPostEventList* InitGlobalPostedEventsList() { static TQPostEventList _globalEventList(true); - _globalEventList.setAutoDelete(TRUE); + _globalEventList.setAutoDelete(true); return &_globalEventList; } @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ static void tqt_fix_tooltips() TQColor(96,96,96), TQt::black, TQt::black, TQt::black, TQColor(255,255,220) ); TQPalette pal( cg, cg, cg ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQTipLabel"); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQTipLabel"); } #endif @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ void TQApplication::process_cmdline( int* argcptr, char ** argv ) TQCString s; if ( arg == "-qdevel" || arg == "-qdebug") { // obsolete argument - } else if ( arg.find( "-style=", 0, FALSE ) != -1 ) { + } else if ( arg.find( "-style=", 0, false ) != -1 ) { s = arg.right( arg.length() - 7 ); } else if ( qstrcmp(arg,"-style") == 0 && i < argc-1 ) { s = argv[++i]; @@ -734,13 +734,13 @@ void TQApplication::process_cmdline( int* argcptr, char ** argv ) *session_key = session_id.mid( p +1 ); session_id = session_id.left( p ); } - is_session_restored = TRUE; + is_session_restored = true; } #endif } else if ( qstrcmp(arg, "-reverse") == 0 ) { - setReverseLayout( TRUE ); + setReverseLayout( true ); } else if ( qstrcmp(arg, "-widgetcount") == 0 ) { - widgetCount = TRUE;; + widgetCount = true;; } else { argv[j++] = argv[i]; } @@ -845,14 +845,14 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication( int &argc, char **argv ) /*! Constructs an application object with \a argc command line arguments - in \a argv. If \a GUIenabled is TRUE, a GUI application is + in \a argv. If \a GUIenabled is true, a GUI application is constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created. - Set \a GUIenabled to FALSE for programs without a graphical user + Set \a GUIenabled to false for programs without a graphical user interface that should be able to run without a window system. - On X11, the window system is initialized if \a GUIenabled is TRUE. - If \a GUIenabled is FALSE, the application does not connect to the + On X11, the window system is initialized if \a GUIenabled is true. + If \a GUIenabled is false, the application does not connect to the X-server. On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication( int &argc, char **argv ) #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 bool useGUI = getenv( "DISPLAY" ) != 0; #else - bool useGUI = TRUE; + bool useGUI = true; #endif TQApplication app(argc, argv, useGUI); @@ -889,18 +889,18 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication( int &argc, char **argv, bool GUIenabled ) /*! Constructs an application object with \a argc command line arguments - in \a argv. If \a GUIenabled is TRUE, a GUI application is + in \a argv. If \a GUIenabled is true, a GUI application is constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created. - If \a SMEnabled is TRUE, session management support is enabled (default). + If \a SMEnabled is true, session management support is enabled (default). - Set \a GUIenabled to FALSE for programs without a graphical user + Set \a GUIenabled to false for programs without a graphical user interface that should be able to run without a window system. - Set \a SMEnabled to FALSE to disable session management. + Set \a SMEnabled to false to disable session management. Session management cannot be enabled at a later time if disabled here. - On X11, the window system is initialized if \a GUIenabled is TRUE. - If \a GUIenabled is FALSE, the application does not connect to the + On X11, the window system is initialized if \a GUIenabled is true. + If \a GUIenabled is false, the application does not connect to the X-server. On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication( int &argc, char **argv, bool GUIenabled ) #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 bool useGUI = getenv( "DISPLAY" ) != 0; #else - bool useGUI = TRUE; + bool useGUI = true; #endif TQApplication app(argc, argv, useGUI); @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication( Display* dpy, HANDLE visual, HANDLE colormap ) app_argv = aargv; tqt_appType = GuiClient; - tqt_is_gui_used = TRUE; + tqt_is_gui_used = true; tqt_appType = GuiClient; init_precmdline(); // ... no command line. @@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ TQApplication::TQApplication(Display *dpy, int argc, char **argv, HANDLE visual, HANDLE colormap) { tqt_appType = GuiClient; - tqt_is_gui_used = TRUE; + tqt_is_gui_used = true; tqt_appType = GuiClient; init_precmdline(); @@ -1095,9 +1095,9 @@ bool TQApplication::isCoreThread() { void TQApplication::init_precmdline() { translators = 0; - is_app_closing = FALSE; + is_app_closing = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_SESSIONMANAGER - is_session_restored = FALSE; + is_session_restored = false; #endif #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) if ( tqApp ) @@ -1113,24 +1113,24 @@ void TQApplication::init_precmdline() void TQApplication::initialize( int argc, char **argv, bool enable_sm ) { #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - tqt_mutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); - tqt_sharedStringMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); - tqt_sharedMetaObjectMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); + tqt_mutex = new TQMutex( true ); + tqt_sharedStringMutex = new TQMutex( true ); + tqt_sharedMetaObjectMutex = new TQMutex( true ); #ifdef QT_USE_GLIBMAINLOOP - tqt_timerListMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); + tqt_timerListMutex = new TQMutex( true ); #endif // QT_USE_GLIBMAINLOOP tqt_application_thread_id = TQThread::currentThread(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT app_argc = argc; app_argv = argv; - quit_now = FALSE; + quit_now = false; quit_code = 0; TQWidget::createMapper(); // create widget mapper #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE (void) palette(); // trigger creation of application palette #endif - is_app_running = TRUE; // no longer starting up + is_app_running = true; // no longer starting up #ifndef TQT_NO_SESSIONMANAGER if (enable_sm) { @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ TQWidget *TQApplication::activePopupWidget() A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as - TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue + true. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program. Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns @@ -1220,12 +1220,12 @@ TQApplication::~TQApplication() postRList = 0; } - TQObject *tipmanager = child( "toolTipManager", "TQTipManager", FALSE ); + TQObject *tipmanager = child( "toolTipManager", "TQTipManager", false ); delete tipmanager; delete tqt_desktopWidget; tqt_desktopWidget = 0; - is_app_closing = TRUE; + is_app_closing = true; // Due to hacks to speed up TQStyle engine (see git hash 523c1fd99) TQObjects now contain a // reference to TQStyleControlElementData object which among other contain TQFont members. @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ TQApplication::~TQApplication() removePostedEvents( this ); tqApp = 0; } - is_app_running = FALSE; + is_app_running = false; if ( widgetCount ) { tqDebug( "Widgets left: %i Max widgets: %i \n", TQWidget::instanceCounter, TQWidget::maxInstances ); @@ -1311,10 +1311,10 @@ TQApplication::~TQApplication() #endif // QT_USE_GLIBMAINLOOP #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - tqt_explicit_app_style = FALSE; - tqt_app_has_font = FALSE; + tqt_explicit_app_style = false; + tqt_app_has_font = false; app_tracking = 0; - obey_desktop_settings = TRUE; + obey_desktop_settings = true; cursor_flash_time = 1000; mouse_double_click_time = 400; #ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT @@ -1322,15 +1322,15 @@ TQApplication::~TQApplication() #endif drag_time = 500; drag_distance = 4; - reverse_layout = FALSE; + reverse_layout = false; app_strut = TQSize( 0, 0 ); - animate_ui = TRUE; - animate_menu = FALSE; - fade_menu = FALSE; - animate_combo = FALSE; - animate_tooltip = FALSE; - fade_tooltip = FALSE; - widgetCount = FALSE; + animate_ui = true; + animate_menu = false; + fade_menu = false; + animate_combo = false; + animate_tooltip = false; + fade_tooltip = false; + widgetCount = false; } @@ -1499,7 +1499,7 @@ void TQApplication::setStyle( TQStyle *style ) TQStyle* old = app_style; app_style = style; #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 - tqt_explicit_app_style = TRUE; + tqt_explicit_app_style = true; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 if ( startingUp() ) { @@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ void TQApplication::setStyle( TQStyle *style ) if ( !tqt_std_pal ) tqt_create_std_palette(); TQPalette tmpPal = *tqt_std_pal; - setPalette( tmpPal, TRUE ); + setPalette( tmpPal, true ); // initialize the application with the new style app_style->polish( tqApp ); @@ -1575,7 +1575,7 @@ void TQApplication::setStyle( TQStyle *style ) TQStyle* TQApplication::setStyle( const TQString& style ) { #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 - tqt_explicit_app_style = TRUE; + tqt_explicit_app_style = true; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 if ( startingUp() ) { @@ -1747,7 +1747,7 @@ extern const char *tqAppFileName(); #ifndef TQ_WS_WIN static TQString resolveSymlinks( const TQString& path, int depth = 0 ) { - bool foundLink = FALSE; + bool foundLink = false; TQString linkTarget; TQString part = path; int slashPos = path.length(); @@ -1760,7 +1760,7 @@ static TQString resolveSymlinks( const TQString& path, int depth = 0 ) part = part.left( slashPos ); TQFileInfo fileInfo( part ); if ( fileInfo.isSymLink() ) { - foundLink = TRUE; + foundLink = true; linkTarget = fileInfo.readLink(); break; } @@ -2074,9 +2074,9 @@ TQPalette TQApplication::palette(TQStringList objectTypeList) /*! Changes the default application palette to \a palette. If \a - informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the + informWidgets is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application - setting. If \a informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly + setting. If \a informWidgets is false, the change only affects newly created widgets. If \a className is passed, the change applies only to widgets that @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ void TQApplication::setPalette( const TQPalette &palette, bool informWidgets, if ( !startingUp() ) // on startup this has been done already tqApp->style().polish( pal ); // NB: non-const reference #endif - bool all = FALSE; + bool all = false; if ( !className ) { if ( !app_pal ) { app_pal = new TQPalette( pal ); @@ -2115,7 +2115,7 @@ void TQApplication::setPalette( const TQPalette &palette, bool informWidgets, if ( !app_palettes ) { app_palettes = new TQAsciiDict<TQPalette>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( app_palettes ); - app_palettes->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + app_palettes->setAutoDelete( true ); } oldpal = app_palettes->find( className ); app_palettes->insert( className, new TQPalette( pal ) ); @@ -2165,9 +2165,9 @@ TQFont TQApplication::font( const TQWidget *w ) } /*! Changes the default application font to \a font. If \a - informWidgets is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the + informWidgets is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application - setting. If \a informWidgets is FALSE, the change only affects newly + setting. If \a informWidgets is false, the change only affects newly created widgets. If \a className is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit \a className (as reported by TQObject::inherits()). @@ -2184,9 +2184,9 @@ TQFont TQApplication::font( const TQWidget *w ) void TQApplication::setFont( const TQFont &font, bool informWidgets, const char* className ) { - bool all = FALSE; + bool all = false; if ( !className ) { - tqt_app_has_font = TRUE; + tqt_app_has_font = true; if ( !app_font ) { app_font = new TQFont( font ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( app_font ); @@ -2205,7 +2205,7 @@ void TQApplication::setFont( const TQFont &font, bool informWidgets, if (!app_fonts){ app_fonts = new TQAsciiDict<TQFont>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( app_fonts ); - app_fonts->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + app_fonts->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQFont* fnt = new TQFont(font); TQ_CHECK_PTR( fnt ); @@ -2399,7 +2399,7 @@ void TQApplication::quit() */ void TQApplication::closeAllWindows() { - bool did_close = TRUE; + bool did_close = true; TQWidget *w; while((w = activeModalWidget()) && did_close) { if(w->isHidden()) @@ -2498,13 +2498,13 @@ void TQApplication::aboutTQt() */ bool TQApplication::sendEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) { - if ( event ) event->spont = FALSE; - return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : FALSE; + if ( event ) event->spont = false; + return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : false; } bool TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) { - if ( event ) event->spont = TRUE; - return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : FALSE; + if ( event ) event->spont = true; + return tqApp ? tqApp->notify( receiver, event ) : false; } /*! @@ -2514,7 +2514,7 @@ bool TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) { For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events), the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event - (i.e., it returns FALSE). + (i.e., it returns false). There are five different ways that events can be processed; reimplementing this virtual function is just one of them. All five @@ -2550,18 +2550,18 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) { // no events are delivered after ~TQApplication() has started if ( is_app_closing ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( receiver == 0 ) { // serious error #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) tqWarning( "TQApplication::notify: Unexpected null receiver" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( receiver && (e->type() == TQEvent::Destroy) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved && receiver->postedEvents) { @@ -2584,7 +2584,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) if ( pe->event && pe->receiver == receiver && pe->event->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted && ((TQChildEvent*)pe->event)->child() == c ) { - pe->event->posted = FALSE; + pe->event->posted = false; delete pe->event; pe->event = 0; l->remove(); @@ -2595,7 +2595,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) } } - bool res = FALSE; + bool res = false; if ( !receiver->isWidgetType() ) { res = internalNotify( receiver, e ); } @@ -2637,7 +2637,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) res = internalNotify( w, e ); if ( res || key->isAccepted() ) break; - w = w->parentWidget( TRUE ); + w = w->parentWidget( true ); } } break; @@ -2664,7 +2664,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) TQMouseEvent me(mouse->type(), relpos, mouse->globalPos(), mouse->button(), mouse->state()); me.spont = mouse->spontaneous(); res = internalNotify( w, w == receiver ? mouse : &me ); - e->spont = FALSE; + e->spont = false; if (res || w->isTopLevel() || w->testWFlags(WNoMousePropagation)) break; @@ -2698,7 +2698,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) TQWheelEvent we(relpos, wheel->globalPos(), wheel->delta(), wheel->state(), wheel->orientation()); we.spont = wheel->spontaneous(); res = internalNotify( w, w == receiver ? wheel : &we ); - e->spont = FALSE; + e->spont = false; if (res || w->isTopLevel() || w->testWFlags(WNoMousePropagation)) break; @@ -2721,7 +2721,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) TQContextMenuEvent ce(context->reason(), relpos, context->globalPos(), context->state()); ce.spont = e->spontaneous(); res = internalNotify( w, w == receiver ? context : &ce ); - e->spont = FALSE; + e->spont = false; if (res || w->isTopLevel() || w->testWFlags(WNoMousePropagation)) break; @@ -2749,7 +2749,7 @@ bool TQApplication::notify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *e ) tablet->uniqueId()); te.spont = e->spontaneous(); res = internalNotify( w, w == receiver ? tablet : &te ); - e->spont = FALSE; + e->spont = false; if (res || w->isTopLevel() || w->testWFlags(WNoMousePropagation)) break; @@ -2791,10 +2791,10 @@ bool TQApplication::event( TQEvent *e ) } } if(ce->isAccepted()) - return TRUE; + return true; } else if (e->type() == TQEvent::Quit) { quit(); - return TRUE; + return true; } return TQObject::event(e); } @@ -2824,14 +2824,14 @@ bool TQApplication::internalNotify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent * e) TQObjectListIt it( *eventFilters ); TQObject *obj; while ( (obj=it.current()) != 0 ) { // send to all filters - ++it; // until one returns TRUE + ++it; // until one returns true if ( obj->eventFilter(receiver,e) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } - bool consumed = FALSE; - bool handled = FALSE; + bool consumed = false; + bool handled = false; if ( receiver->isWidgetType() ) { TQWidget *widget = (TQWidget*)receiver; @@ -2863,8 +2863,8 @@ bool TQApplication::internalNotify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent * e) if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseMove && (((TQMouseEvent*)e)->state()&TQMouseEvent::MouseButtonMask) == 0 && !widget->hasMouseTracking() ) { - handled = TRUE; - consumed = TRUE; + handled = true; + consumed = true; } else if ( !widget->isEnabled() ) { // throw away mouse events to disabled widgets switch(e->type()) { case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress: @@ -2872,35 +2872,35 @@ bool TQApplication::internalNotify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent * e) case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick: case TQEvent::MouseMove: ( (TQMouseEvent*) e)->ignore(); - handled = TRUE; - consumed = TRUE; + handled = true; + consumed = true; break; #ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP case TQEvent::DragEnter: case TQEvent::DragMove: ( (TQDragMoveEvent*) e)->ignore(); - handled = TRUE; + handled = true; break; case TQEvent::DragLeave: case TQEvent::DragResponse: - handled = TRUE; + handled = true; break; case TQEvent::Drop: ( (TQDropEvent*) e)->ignore(); - handled = TRUE; + handled = true; break; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT case TQEvent::Wheel: ( (TQWheelEvent*) e)->ignore(); - handled = TRUE; + handled = true; break; #endif case TQEvent::ContextMenu: ( (TQContextMenuEvent*) e)->ignore(); - handled = TRUE; + handled = true; break; default: break; @@ -2931,13 +2931,13 @@ bool TQApplication::internalNotify( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent * e) } #endif } - e->spont = FALSE; + e->spont = false; return consumed; } /*! - Returns TRUE if an application object has not been created yet; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if an application object has not been created yet; + otherwise returns false. \sa closingDown() */ @@ -2948,8 +2948,8 @@ bool TQApplication::startingUp() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the application objects are being destroyed; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the application objects are being destroyed; + otherwise returns false. \sa startingUp() */ @@ -3153,8 +3153,8 @@ void TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread() } /*! - This function returns TRUE if there are pending events; otherwise - returns FALSE. Pending events can be either from the window system + This function returns true if there are pending events; otherwise + returns false. Pending events can be either from the window system or posted events using TQApplication::postEvent(). */ bool TQApplication::hasPendingEvents() @@ -3506,7 +3506,7 @@ void TQApplication::postEvent( TQObject *receiver, TQEvent *event ) #endif // if no compression could be done, just append something - event->posted = TRUE; + event->posted = true; TQPostEvent * pe = new TQPostEvent( receiver, event ); l->append( pe ); GlobalPostedEvents()->append( pe ); @@ -3568,9 +3568,9 @@ void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( TQObject *receiver, int event_type ) TQMutexLocker locker( GlobalPostedEvents()->mutex() ); #endif - bool sent = TRUE; + bool sent = true; while ( sent ) { - sent = FALSE; + sent = false; if (receiver && !receiver->postedEvents) { return; @@ -3600,7 +3600,7 @@ void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( TQObject *receiver, int event_type ) ) { // first, we diddle the event so that we can deliver // it, and that noone will try to touch it later. - pe->event->posted = FALSE; + pe->event->posted = false; TQEvent * e = pe->event; TQObject * r = pe->receiver; pe->event = 0; @@ -3634,7 +3634,7 @@ void TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( TQObject *receiver, int event_type ) w->repaint( p->reg, p->erase ); } } else { - sent = TRUE; + sent = true; TQApplication::sendEvent( r, e ); } #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT @@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@ void TQApplication::removePostedEvents( TQObject *receiver, int event_type ) while( (pe=l->current()) != 0 ) { if ( !event_type || pe->event->type() == event_type ) { if ( pe->event ) { - pe->event->posted = FALSE; + pe->event->posted = false; delete pe->event; pe->event = 0; } @@ -3832,7 +3832,7 @@ void TQApplication::removePostedEvent( TQEvent * event ) pe->receiver ? pe->receiver->name() : "object" ); // note the beautiful uglehack if !pe->receiver :) #endif - event->posted = FALSE; + event->posted = false; delete pe->event; pe->event = 0; return; @@ -3961,7 +3961,7 @@ void TQApplication::setActiveWindow( TQWidget* act ) if ( w && w->focusPolicy() != TQWidget::NoFocus ) w->setFocus(); else - active_window->focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + active_window->focusNextPrevChild( true ); } TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); } @@ -3996,22 +3996,22 @@ TQ_EXPORT void tqt_dispatchEnterLeave( TQWidget* enter, TQWidget* leave ) { w = leave; do { leaveList.append( w ); - } while ( (w = w->parentWidget( TRUE ) ) ); + } while ( (w = w->parentWidget( true ) ) ); } if ( enter && !sameWindow ) { w = enter; do { enterList.prepend( w ); - } while ( (w = w->parentWidget(TRUE) ) ); + } while ( (w = w->parentWidget(true) ) ); } if ( sameWindow ) { int enterDepth = 0; int leaveDepth = 0; w = enter; - while ( ( w = w->parentWidget( TRUE ) ) ) + while ( ( w = w->parentWidget( true ) ) ) enterDepth++; w = leave; - while ( ( w = w->parentWidget( TRUE ) ) ) + while ( ( w = w->parentWidget( true ) ) ) leaveDepth++; TQWidget* wenter = enter; TQWidget* wleave = leave; @@ -4060,7 +4060,7 @@ extern TQWidget *tqt_tryModalHelperMac( TQWidget * top ); //tqapplication_mac.cp /*!\internal - Called from tqapplication_<platform>.cpp, returns TRUE + Called from tqapplication_<platform>.cpp, returns true if the widget should accept the event. */ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { @@ -4068,7 +4068,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { if ( rettop ) *rettop = top; if ( tqApp->activePopupWidget() ) - return TRUE; + return true; #ifdef TQ_WS_MACX top = tqt_tryModalHelperMac( top ); @@ -4081,12 +4081,12 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { if ( widget->testWFlags(TQt::WShowModal) ) // widget is modal modal = widget; if ( !top || modal == top ) // don't block event - return TRUE; + return true; TQWidget * p = widget->parentWidget(); // Check if the active modal widget is a parent of our widget while ( p ) { if ( p == top ) - return TRUE; + return true; p = p->parentWidget(); } @@ -4095,7 +4095,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { if ( groupLeader ) { // Does groupLeader have a child in tqt_modal_stack? - bool unrelated = TRUE; + bool unrelated = true; modal = tqt_modal_stack->first(); while (modal && unrelated) { TQWidget* p = modal->parentWidget(); @@ -4103,13 +4103,13 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { p = p->parentWidget(); } modal = tqt_modal_stack->next(); - if ( p == groupLeader ) unrelated = FALSE; + if ( p == groupLeader ) unrelated = false; } if ( unrelated ) - return TRUE; // don't block event + return true; // don't block event } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -4156,14 +4156,14 @@ TQClipboard *TQApplication::clipboard() By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings, and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off - by calling this function with \a on set to FALSE. + by calling this function with \a on set to false. This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication object, like this: \code int main( int argc, char** argv ) { - TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( FALSE ); // I know better than the user + TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( false ); // I know better than the user TQApplication myApp( argc, argv ); // Use default fonts & colors ... } @@ -4178,7 +4178,7 @@ void TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( bool on ) } /*! - Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default TRUE. + Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default true. \sa setDesktopSettingsAware() */ @@ -4200,7 +4200,7 @@ bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware() /*! \fn void TQApplication::unlock(bool wakeUpCore) - Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If \a wakeUpCore is TRUE (the default), + Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If \a wakeUpCore is true (the default), then the core application thread will be woken with TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread(). \sa lock(), locked() \link threads.html Thread Support in TQt\endlink @@ -4209,8 +4209,8 @@ bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware() /*! \fn bool TQApplication::locked() - Returns TRUE if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; + otherwise returns false. \warning Due to different implementations of recursive mutexes on the supported platforms, calling this function from the same thread @@ -4222,8 +4222,8 @@ bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware() /*! \fn bool TQApplication::tryLock() Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If - the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread - has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of + the lock was obtained, this function returns true. If another thread + has locked the mutex, this function returns false, instead of waiting for the lock to become available. The mutex must be unlocked with unlock() before another thread can @@ -4261,8 +4261,8 @@ bool TQApplication::tryLock() /*! \fn bool TQApplication::isSessionRestored() const - Returns TRUE if the application has been restored from an earlier - \link session.html session\endlink; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the application has been restored from an earlier + \link session.html session\endlink; otherwise returns false. \sa sessionId(), commitData(), saveState() */ @@ -4332,7 +4332,7 @@ void TQApplication::commitData( TQSessionManager& sm ) if ( sm.allowsInteraction() ) { TQWidgetList done; TQWidgetList *list = TQApplication::topLevelWidgets(); - bool cancelled = FALSE; + bool cancelled = false; TQWidget* w = list->first(); while ( !cancelled && w ) { if ( !w->isHidden() ) { @@ -4457,9 +4457,9 @@ int TQApplication::startDragDistance() } /*! - If \a b is TRUE, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a + If \a b is true, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as - Arabic and Hebrew. If \a b is FALSE, dialogs and widgets are laid + Arabic and Hebrew. If \a b is false, dialogs and widgets are laid out left to right. Changing this flag in runtime does not cause a relayout of already @@ -4485,8 +4485,8 @@ void TQApplication::setReverseLayout( bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a - mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and + Returns true if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a + mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns false if dialogs and widgets will be laid out left to right. \sa setReverseLayout() @@ -4602,8 +4602,8 @@ bool TQApplication::reverseLayout() \fn bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the - user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise - returns FALSE. + user. Returns true if interaction is permitted; otherwise + returns false. The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session @@ -4809,8 +4809,8 @@ void MyApplication::commitData( TQSessionManager& sm ) { /*! \fn bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2() const - Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second - session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the session manager is currently performing a second + session management phase; otherwise returns false. \sa requestPhase2() */ @@ -4910,12 +4910,12 @@ void* TQSessionManager::handle() const #if !defined(TQ_WS_WIN) bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() { - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQSessionManager::release() { @@ -4967,7 +4967,7 @@ void TQSessionManager::setManagerProperty( const TQString&, const TQStringList& bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQSessionManager::requestPhase2() diff --git a/src/kernel/tqapplication.h b/src/kernel/tqapplication.h index f8915c5b9..0d375c1ee 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqapplication.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqapplication.h @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ public: static void setColorSpec( int ); #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR static TQCursor *overrideCursor(); - static void setOverrideCursor( const TQCursor &, bool replace=FALSE ); + static void setOverrideCursor( const TQCursor &, bool replace=false ); static void restoreOverrideCursor(); #endif static bool hasGlobalMouseTracking(); @@ -119,11 +119,11 @@ public: #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE static TQPalette palette( const TQWidget* = 0 ); static TQPalette palette( TQStringList ); - static void setPalette( const TQPalette &, bool informWidgets=FALSE, + static void setPalette( const TQPalette &, bool informWidgets=false, const char* className = 0 ); #endif static TQFont font( const TQWidget* = 0 ); - static void setFont( const TQFont &, bool informWidgets=FALSE, + static void setFont( const TQFont &, bool informWidgets=false, const char* className = 0 ); static TQFontMetrics fontMetrics(); @@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ public: TQWidget *focusWidget() const; TQWidget *activeWindow() const; - static TQWidget *widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child=FALSE ); - static TQWidget *widgetAt( const TQPoint &, bool child=FALSE ); + static TQWidget *widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child=false ); + static TQWidget *widgetAt( const TQPoint &, bool child=false ); static TQEventLoop *eventLoop(); @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ public: static void setWinStyleHighlightColor( const TQColor &c ) { TQPalette p( palette() ); p.setColor( TQColorGroup::Highlight, c ); - setPalette( p, TRUE); + setPalette( p, true); } static const TQColor &winStyleHighlightColor() { return palette().active().highlight(); @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ public: static int horizontalAlignment( int align ); static bool isEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect ); - static void setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect, bool enable = TRUE ); + static void setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect, bool enable = true ); #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) virtual bool macEventFilter( EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef ); @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ public: void wakeUpCoreThread(); #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) void lock(); - void unlock(bool wakeUpCore = TRUE); + void unlock(bool wakeUpCore = true); bool locked(); bool tryLock(); #endif diff --git a/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp index fedeed789..e9877fe0c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp @@ -193,20 +193,20 @@ static const char *mwGeometry = 0; // main widget geometry static const char *mwTitle = 0; // main widget title //Ming-Che 10/10 TQ_EXPORT char *qt_ximServer = 0; // XIM Server will connect to -static bool mwIconic = FALSE; // main widget iconified +static bool mwIconic = false; // main widget iconified //Ming-Che 10/10 static Display *appDpy = 0; // X11 application display static char *appDpyName = 0; // X11 display name -static bool appForeignDpy = FALSE; // we didn't create display -static bool appSync = FALSE; // X11 synchronization +static bool appForeignDpy = false; // we didn't create display +static bool appSync = false; // X11 synchronization #if defined(QT_DEBUG) -static bool appNoGrab = FALSE; // X11 grabbing enabled -static bool appDoGrab = FALSE; // X11 grabbing override (gdb) +static bool appNoGrab = false; // X11 grabbing enabled +static bool appDoGrab = false; // X11 grabbing override (gdb) #endif static int appScreen; // X11 screen number static int appScreenCount; // X11 screen count -static bool app_save_rootinfo = FALSE; // save root info -static bool app_do_modal = FALSE; // modal mode +static bool app_save_rootinfo = false; // save root info +static bool app_do_modal = false; // modal mode static Window curWin = 0; // current window static GC* app_gc_ro = 0; // read-only GC @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Atom qt_utf8_string = 0; // detect broken window managers Atom qt_sgi_desks_manager = 0; -bool qt_broken_wm = FALSE; +bool qt_broken_wm = false; static void qt_detect_broken_window_manager(); // NET WM support @@ -320,19 +320,19 @@ static const int FocusModel_PointerRoot = 1; static int qt_focus_model = -1; #ifndef TQT_NO_XRANDR -// TRUE if TQt is compiled w/ XRandR support and XRandR exists on the connected +// true if TQt is compiled w/ XRandR support and XRandR exists on the connected // Display -bool qt_use_xrandr = FALSE; +bool qt_use_xrandr = false; static int xrandr_eventbase; #endif -// TRUE if TQt is compiled w/ XRender support and XRender exists on the connected +// true if TQt is compiled w/ XRender support and XRender exists on the connected // Display -TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_use_xrender = FALSE; +TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_use_xrender = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_XSYNC // True if SYNC extension exists on the connected display -bool qt_use_xsync = FALSE; +bool qt_use_xsync = false; static int xsync_eventbase; static int xsync_errorbase; #endif @@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ static long qt_meta_mask = 0; static long qt_mode_switch_remove_mask = 0; // flags for extensions for special Languages, currently only for RTL languages -static bool qt_use_rtl_extensions = FALSE; -TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_hebrew_keyboard_hack = FALSE; +static bool qt_use_rtl_extensions = false; +TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_hebrew_keyboard_hack = false; static Window mouseActWindow = 0; // window where mouse is static int mouseButtonPressed = 0; // last mouse button pressed @@ -357,16 +357,16 @@ static short mouseXPos, mouseYPos; // mouse pres position in act window static short mouseGlobalXPos, mouseGlobalYPos; // global mouse press position extern TQWidgetList *tqt_modal_stack; // stack of modal widgets -static bool ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = FALSE; // ignore the next mouse release +static bool ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = false; // ignore the next mouse release // event if return from a modal // widget static TQWidget *popupButtonFocus = 0; static TQWidget *popupOfPopupButtonFocus = 0; -static bool popupCloseDownMode = FALSE; +static bool popupCloseDownMode = false; static bool popupGrabOk; -static bool sm_blockUserInput = FALSE; // session management +static bool sm_blockUserInput = false; // session management int qt_xfocusout_grab_counter = 0; @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT QX11EventFilter tqt_set_x11_event_filter(QX11EventFilter filter) static bool qt_x11EventFilter( XEvent* ev ) { if ( qt_x11_event_filter && qt_x11_event_filter( ev ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; return tqApp->x11EventFilter( ev ); } @@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ bool tqt_try_modal( TQWidget *, XEvent * ); int qt_ncols_option = 216; // used in tqcolor_x11.cpp int qt_visual_option = -1; -bool qt_cmap_option = FALSE; +bool qt_cmap_option = false; TQWidget *qt_button_down = 0; // widget got last button-down extern bool tqt_tryAccelEvent( TQWidget*, TQKeyEvent* ); // def in tqaccel.cpp @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ void qt_deferred_map_take( TQWidget* w ) bool qt_deferred_map_contains( TQWidget* w ) { if (!deferred_map_list) - return FALSE; + return false; else return deferred_map_list->contains( w ); } @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ public: void setWFlags( WFlags f ) { TQWidget::setWFlags(f); } void clearWFlags( WFlags f ) { TQWidget::clearWFlags(f); } bool translateMouseEvent( const XEvent * ); - bool translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *, int& count, TQString& text, int& state, char& ascii, int &code, TQEvent::Type &type, bool willRepeat=FALSE, bool statefulTranslation=TRUE ); + bool translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *, int& count, TQString& text, int& state, char& ascii, int &code, TQEvent::Type &type, bool willRepeat=false, bool statefulTranslation=true ); bool translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *, bool grab ); bool translatePaintEvent( const XEvent * ); bool translateConfigEvent( const XEvent * ); @@ -775,15 +775,15 @@ static bool x11_badwindow; // starts to ignore bad window errors from X void qt_ignore_badwindow() { - x11_ignore_badwindow = TRUE; - x11_badwindow = FALSE; + x11_ignore_badwindow = true; + x11_badwindow = false; } // ends ignoring bad window errors and returns whether an error // had happen. bool qt_badwindow() { - x11_ignore_badwindow = FALSE; + x11_ignore_badwindow = false; return x11_badwindow; } @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ static int (*original_xio_errhandler)( Display *dpy ); static int qt_x_errhandler( Display *dpy, XErrorEvent *err ) { if ( err->error_code == BadWindow ) { - x11_badwindow = TRUE; + x11_badwindow = true; if ( err->request_code == 25 /* X_SendEvent */ && qt_xdnd_handle_badwindow() ) return 0; @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ void qt_x11_intern_atom( const char *name, Atom *result) } else { if ( !atoms_to_be_created ) { atoms_to_be_created = new TQAsciiDict<Atom>; - atoms_to_be_created->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + atoms_to_be_created->setAutoDelete( false ); } atoms_to_be_created->insert( name, result ); *result = 0; @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ static void tqt_x11_process_intern_atoms() #endif delete atoms_to_be_created; atoms_to_be_created = 0; - create_atoms_now = TRUE; + create_atoms_now = true; } } @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() unsigned long nitems, after = 1; unsigned char *data = 0; TQDateTime timestamp, settingsstamp; - bool update_timestamp = FALSE; + bool update_timestamp = false; if (XGetWindowProperty(appDpy, TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow( 0 ), qt_settings_timestamp, 0, 0, @@ -961,14 +961,14 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() TQSettings settings; settingsstamp = settings.lastModificationTime( "/qt/font" ); if (! settingsstamp.isValid()) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( appliedstamp && appliedstamp == settingsstamp.toTime_t() ) - return TRUE; + return true; appliedstamp = settingsstamp.toTime_t(); if (! timestamp.isValid() || settingsstamp > timestamp) - update_timestamp = TRUE; + update_timestamp = true; /* TQt settings. This is now they are written into the datastream. @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() } if (pal != *tqt_std_pal && pal != TQApplication::palette()) { - TQApplication::setPalette(pal, TRUE); + TQApplication::setPalette(pal, true); *tqt_std_pal = pal; } @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() font.fromString(str); if (font != TQApplication::font()) - TQApplication::setFont(font, TRUE); + TQApplication::setFont(font, true); } } @@ -1050,8 +1050,8 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() TQString stylename = settings.readEntry( "/qt/style" ); if ( !stylename.isEmpty() && !tqt_explicit_app_style ) { TQApplication::setStyle( stylename ); - // took the style from the user settings, so mark the explicit flag FALSE - tqt_explicit_app_style = FALSE; + // took the style from the user settings, so mark the explicit flag false + tqt_explicit_app_style = false; } num = @@ -1124,10 +1124,10 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/brokenWindowManager", qt_broken_wm); tqt_resolve_symlinks = - settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/resolveSymlinks", TRUE); + settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/resolveSymlinks", true); qt_use_rtl_extensions = - settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/useRtlExtensions", FALSE); + settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/useRtlExtensions", false); #ifndef TQT_NO_XIM if (qt_xim_preferred_style == 0) { @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ bool TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() stamp.buffer().size()); } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1226,13 +1226,13 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, TQCString resFont, resFG, resBG, resEF, sysFont; - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_General, FALSE); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateMenu, FALSE); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_FadeMenu, FALSE); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateCombo, FALSE ); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateTooltip, FALSE ); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_FadeTooltip, FALSE ); - TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateToolBox, FALSE ); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_General, false); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateMenu, false); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_FadeMenu, false); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateCombo, false ); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateTooltip, false ); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_FadeTooltip, false ); + TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UI_AnimateToolBox, false ); if ( TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware() && !TQApplication::x11_apply_settings() ) { int format; @@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, r = resl; while ( isspace((uchar) res[l]) ) l++; - bool mine = FALSE; + bool mine = false; if ( res[l] == '*' && (res[l+1] == 'f' || res[l+1] == 'b' || res[l+1] == 'g' || res[l+1] == 'F' || res[l+1] == 'B' || res[l+1] == 'G' || @@ -1279,20 +1279,20 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, int i = item.find( ":" ); key = item.left( i ).stripWhiteSpace().mid(1).lower(); value = item.right( item.length() - i - 1 ).stripWhiteSpace(); - mine = TRUE; + mine = true; } else if ( res[l] == appName[0] || (appClass && res[l] == appClass[0]) ) { if (res.mid(l,apnl) == apn && (res[l+apnl] == '.' || res[l+apnl] == '*')) { TQCString item = res.mid( l, r - l ).simplifyWhiteSpace(); int i = item.find( ":" ); key = item.left( i ).stripWhiteSpace().mid(apnl+1).lower(); value = item.right( item.length() - i - 1 ).stripWhiteSpace(); - mine = TRUE; + mine = true; } else if (res.mid(l,apcl) == apc && (res[l+apcl] == '.' || res[l+apcl] == '*')) { TQCString item = res.mid( l, r - l ).simplifyWhiteSpace(); int i = item.find( ":" ); key = item.left( i ).stripWhiteSpace().mid(apcl+1).lower(); value = item.right( item.length() - i - 1 ).stripWhiteSpace(); - mine = TRUE; + mine = true; } } @@ -1348,7 +1348,7 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, } if ( fnt != TQApplication::font() ) { - TQApplication::setFont( fnt, TRUE ); + TQApplication::setFont( fnt, true ); } } @@ -1374,10 +1374,10 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, int h,s,v; fg.hsv(&h,&s,&v); TQColor base = TQt::white; - bool bright_mode = FALSE; + bool bright_mode = false; if (v >= 255-50) { base = btn.dark(150); - bright_mode = TRUE; + bright_mode = true; } TQColorGroup cg( fg, btn, btn.light(), @@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ static void qt_set_x11_resources( const char* font = 0, const char* fg = 0, } TQPalette pal( cg, dcg, cg ); if ( pal != *tqt_std_pal && pal != TQApplication::palette() ) - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true ); *tqt_std_pal = pal; } @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ static void qt_detect_broken_window_manager() if (e == Success && type == XA_WINDOW && format == 32 && nitems == 1 && after == 0) { // detected SGI 4Dwm - qt_broken_wm = TRUE; + qt_broken_wm = true; } } @@ -1494,13 +1494,13 @@ void qt_get_net_supported() bool qt_net_supports(Atom atom) { if (! qt_net_supported_list) - return FALSE; + return false; - bool supported = FALSE; + bool supported = false; int i = 0; while (qt_net_supported_list[i] != 0) { if (qt_net_supported_list[i++] == atom) { - supported = TRUE; + supported = true; break; } } @@ -1688,7 +1688,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, if ( display && ((!argcptr) || (!argv)) ) { // TQt part of other application - appForeignDpy = TRUE; + appForeignDpy = true; appDpy = display; // Set application name and class @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, } #endif } else if ( arg == "-cmap" ) { // xv uses this name - qt_cmap_option = TRUE; + qt_cmap_option = true; } #if defined(QT_DEBUG) else if ( arg == "-sync" ) @@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, s += (char)c; } if ( s == "gdb" ) { - appNoGrab = TRUE; + appNoGrab = true; tqDebug( "TQt: gdb: -nograb added to command-line options.\n" "\t Use the -dograb option to enforce grabbing." ); } @@ -1839,7 +1839,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, if ( display ) { // Display connection already opened by another application - appForeignDpy = TRUE; + appForeignDpy = true; appDpy = display; } else { @@ -1854,7 +1854,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, } if ( appSync ) // if "-sync" argument - XSynchronize( appDpy, TRUE ); + XSynchronize( appDpy, true ); } } } @@ -1888,7 +1888,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, int screen; TQString serverVendor( ServerVendor( appDpy) ); if (serverVendor.contains("XFree86") && VendorRelease(appDpy) < 40300000) - tqt_hebrew_keyboard_hack = TRUE; + tqt_hebrew_keyboard_hack = true; for ( screen = 0; screen < appScreenCount; ++screen ) { TQPaintDevice::x_appdepth_arr[ screen ] = DefaultDepth(appDpy, screen); @@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, TQPaintDevice::x_appdepth_arr[ screen ] = vi->depth; TQPaintDevice::x_appcells_arr[ screen ] = vi->visual->map_entries; TQPaintDevice::x_appvisual_arr[ screen ] = vi->visual; - TQPaintDevice::x_appdefvisual_arr[ screen ] = FALSE; + TQPaintDevice::x_appdefvisual_arr[ screen ] = false; XFree(vi); } else { // couldn't get info about the visual, use the default instead @@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, if (!vis) { // use the default visual vis = DefaultVisual(appDpy, screen); - TQPaintDevice::x_appdefvisual_arr[ screen ] = TRUE; + TQPaintDevice::x_appdefvisual_arr[ screen ] = true; if ( qt_visual_option == TrueColor || TQApplication::colorSpec() == TQApplication::ManyColor ) { @@ -1954,7 +1954,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, if ( colormap && screen == appScreen ) { // use the provided colormap for the default screen only TQPaintDevice::x_appcolormap_arr[ screen ] = colormap; - TQPaintDevice::x_appdefcolormap_arr[ screen ] = FALSE; + TQPaintDevice::x_appdefcolormap_arr[ screen ] = false; } else { if ( vis->c_class == TrueColor ) { TQPaintDevice::x_appdefcolormap_arr[ screen ] = @@ -2120,7 +2120,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, Q_UNUSED( xrandr_eventbase ); if ( XRRQueryExtension( appDpy, &xrandr_eventbase, &xrandr_errorbase ) ) { // XRandR is supported - qt_use_xrandr = TRUE; + qt_use_xrandr = true; } #endif // TQT_NO_XRANDR @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, int xsync_major, xsync_minor; if ( XSyncQueryExtension( appDpy, &xsync_eventbase, &xsync_errorbase ) && XSyncInitialize( appDpy, &xsync_major, &xsync_minor ) ) { - qt_use_xsync = TRUE; + qt_use_xsync = true; } #endif @@ -2312,7 +2312,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, } dev = NULL; for ( devs = devices, i = 0; i < ndev; i++, devs++ ) { - gotEraser = FALSE; + gotEraser = false; #if defined(Q_OS_IRIX) gotStylus = ( !strncmp(devs->name, @@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@ void tqt_init_internal( int *argcptr, char **argv, } tqt_resolve_symlinks = - settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/resolveSymlinks", TRUE); + settings.readBoolEntry("/qt/resolveSymlinks", true); } } } @@ -2636,7 +2636,7 @@ void qt_save_rootinfo() // save new root info void qt_updated_rootinfo() { - app_save_rootinfo = TRUE; + app_save_rootinfo = true; } bool qt_wstate_iconified( WId winid ) @@ -2648,7 +2648,7 @@ bool qt_wstate_iconified( WId winid ) int r = XGetWindowProperty( appDpy, winid, tqt_wm_state, 0, 2, False, AnyPropertyType, &type, &format, &length, &after, &data ); - bool iconic = FALSE; + bool iconic = false; if ( r == Success && data && format == 32 ) { // TQ_UINT32 *wstate = (TQ_UINT32*)data; unsigned long *wstate = (unsigned long *) data; @@ -2694,7 +2694,7 @@ bool qt_nograb() // application no-grab option #if defined(QT_DEBUG) return appNoGrab; #else - return FALSE; + return false; #endif } @@ -2738,13 +2738,13 @@ GC tqt_xget_readonly_gc( int scrn, bool monochrome ) // get read-only GC if ( !app_gc_ro_m ) // create GC for bitmap memset( (app_gc_ro_m = new GC[appScreenCount]), 0, appScreenCount * sizeof( GC ) ); if ( !app_gc_ro_m[scrn] ) - app_gc_ro_m[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, TRUE ); + app_gc_ro_m[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, true ); gc = app_gc_ro_m[scrn]; } else { // create standard GC if ( !app_gc_ro ) memset( (app_gc_ro = new GC[appScreenCount]), 0, appScreenCount * sizeof( GC ) ); if ( !app_gc_ro[scrn] ) - app_gc_ro[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, FALSE ); + app_gc_ro[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, false ); gc = app_gc_ro[scrn]; } return gc; @@ -2762,13 +2762,13 @@ GC tqt_xget_temp_gc( int scrn, bool monochrome ) // get temporary GC if ( !app_gc_tmp_m ) // create GC for bitmap memset( (app_gc_tmp_m = new GC[appScreenCount]), 0, appScreenCount * sizeof( GC ) ); if ( !app_gc_tmp_m[scrn] ) - app_gc_tmp_m[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, TRUE ); + app_gc_tmp_m[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, true ); gc = app_gc_tmp_m[scrn]; } else { // create standard GC if ( !app_gc_tmp ) memset( (app_gc_tmp = new GC[appScreenCount]), 0, appScreenCount * sizeof( GC ) ); if ( !app_gc_tmp[scrn] ) - app_gc_tmp[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, FALSE ); + app_gc_tmp[scrn] = create_gc( scrn, false ); gc = app_gc_tmp[scrn]; } return gc; @@ -2895,9 +2895,9 @@ static TQCursorList *cursorStack = 0; corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will never be emptied. - If \a replace is TRUE, the new cursor will replace the last + If \a replace is true, the new cursor will replace the last override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If \a replace is - FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack. + false, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack. Example: \code @@ -2914,7 +2914,7 @@ void TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( const TQCursor &cursor, bool replace ) if ( !cursorStack ) { cursorStack = new TQCursorList; TQ_CHECK_PTR( cursorStack ); - cursorStack->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cursorStack->setAutoDelete( true ); } app_cursor = new TQCursor( cursor ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( app_cursor ); @@ -2970,15 +2970,15 @@ void TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor() /*! \fn bool TQApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking() - Returns TRUE if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise + returns false. \sa setGlobalMouseTracking() */ /*! - Enables global mouse tracking if \a enable is TRUE, or disables it - if \a enable is FALSE. + Enables global mouse tracking if \a enable is true, or disables it + if \a enable is false. Enabling global mouse tracking makes it possible for widget event filters or application event filters to get all mouse move events, @@ -2987,18 +2987,18 @@ void TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor() Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no - button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(TRUE). + button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(true). This function uses an internal counter. Each - setGlobalMouseTracking(TRUE) must have a corresponding - setGlobalMouseTracking(FALSE): + setGlobalMouseTracking(true) must have a corresponding + setGlobalMouseTracking(false): \code // at this point global mouse tracking is off - TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE ); - TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE ); - TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE ); + TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( true ); + TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( true ); + TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( false ); // at this point it's still on - TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE ); + TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( false ); // but now it's off \endcode @@ -3019,13 +3019,13 @@ void TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( bool enable ) while ( (w=it.current()) ) { if ( app_tracking > 0 ) { // switch on if ( !w->testWState(WState_MouseTracking) ) { - w->setMouseTracking( TRUE ); + w->setMouseTracking( true ); w->clearWState( WState_MouseTracking ); } } else { // switch off if ( !w->testWState(WState_MouseTracking) ) { w->setWState( WState_MouseTracking ); - w->setMouseTracking( FALSE ); + w->setMouseTracking( false ); } } ++it; @@ -3046,7 +3046,7 @@ Window qt_x11_findClientWindow( Window win, Atom property, bool leaf ) uchar *data; Window root, parent, target=0, *children=0; uint nchildren; - if ( XGetWindowProperty( appDpy, win, property, 0, 0, FALSE, AnyPropertyType, + if ( XGetWindowProperty( appDpy, win, property, 0, 0, false, AnyPropertyType, &type, &format, &nitems, &after, &data ) == Success ) { if ( data ) XFree( (char *)data ); @@ -3070,9 +3070,9 @@ Window qt_x11_findClientWindow( Window win, Atom property, bool leaf ) Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position \a (x, y), or 0 if there is no TQt widget there. - If \a child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position \a + If \a child is false and there is a child widget at position \a (x, y), the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \a child - is TRUE the child widget at position \a (x, y) is returned. + is true the child widget at position \a (x, y) is returned. This function is normally rather slow. @@ -3098,7 +3098,7 @@ TQWidget *TQApplication::widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child ) if ( !w ) { qt_ignore_badwindow(); - target = qt_x11_findClientWindow( target, tqt_wm_state, TRUE ); + target = qt_x11_findClientWindow( target, tqt_wm_state, true ); if (qt_badwindow() ) return 0; w = TQWidget::find( (WId)target ); @@ -3144,9 +3144,9 @@ TQWidget *TQApplication::widgetAt( int x, int y, bool child ) Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position \a pos, or 0 if there is no TQt widget there. - If \a child is FALSE and there is a child widget at position \a + If \a child is false and there is a child widget at position \a pos, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \a child - is TRUE the child widget at position \a pos is returned. + is true the child widget at position \a pos is returned. */ @@ -3338,7 +3338,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) { switch ( event->type ) { case ButtonPress: - ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = FALSE; + ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = false; tqt_x_user_time = event->xbutton.time; // fallthrough intended case ButtonRelease: @@ -3386,11 +3386,11 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) } TQETWidget *keywidget=0; - bool grabbed=FALSE; + bool grabbed=false; if ( event->type==XKeyPress || event->type==XKeyRelease ) { keywidget = (TQETWidget*)TQWidget::keyboardGrabber(); if ( keywidget ) { - grabbed = TRUE; + grabbed = true; } else { if ( focus_widget ) keywidget = (TQETWidget*)focus_widget; @@ -3419,12 +3419,12 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) // #endif if( ( event->type==XKeyPress || event->type==XKeyRelease ) && sm_blockUserInput ) // block user interaction during session management - return TRUE; + return true; // for XIM handling TQInputContext *qic = keywidget->getInputContext(); if( qic && qic->x11FilterEvent( keywidget, event ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; // filterEvent() accepts TQEvent *event rather than preexpanded key // event attribute values. This is intended to pass other IM-related @@ -3442,20 +3442,20 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) keywidget->translateKeyEventInternal( event, count, text, state, ascii, code, type, - FALSE, FALSE ); + false, false ); // both key press/release is required for some complex // input methods. don't eliminate anything. - TQKeyEvent keyevent( type, code, ascii, state, text, FALSE, count ); + TQKeyEvent keyevent( type, code, ascii, state, text, false, count ); if( qic && qic->filterEvent( &keyevent ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } else #endif // TQT_NO_IM { if ( XFilterEvent( event, None ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( qt_x11EventFilter(event) ) // send through app filter @@ -3569,7 +3569,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) if ( app_do_modal ) // modal event handling if ( !tqt_try_modal(widget, event) ) { if ( event->type == ClientMessage ) - x11ClientMessage( widget, event, TRUE ); + x11ClientMessage( widget, event, true ); return 1; } @@ -3589,7 +3589,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) case ButtonRelease: // mouse event if ( ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent ) { - ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = FALSE; + ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = false; break; } // fall through intended @@ -3610,7 +3610,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) widget->translateMouseEvent( event ); #if defined(QT_TABLET_SUPPORT) } else { - chokeMouse = FALSE; + chokeMouse = false; } #endif break; @@ -3755,7 +3755,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) widget->topData()->spont_unmapped = 1; TQHideEvent e; TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( widget, &e ); - widget->hideChildren( TRUE ); + widget->hideChildren( true ); } break; @@ -3763,7 +3763,7 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) if ( widget->isTopLevel() && widget->topData()->spont_unmapped ) { widget->topData()->spont_unmapped = 0; - widget->showChildren( TRUE ); + widget->showChildren( true ); TQShowEvent e; TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( widget, &e ); } @@ -3861,15 +3861,15 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) reimplement this function, you get direct access to all X events that the are received from the X server. - Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed. - Return FALSE for normal event dispatching. + Return true if you want to stop the event from being processed. + Return false for normal event dispatching. \sa x11ProcessEvent() */ bool TQApplication::x11EventFilter( XEvent * ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -3909,9 +3909,9 @@ void tqt_enter_modal( TQWidget *widget ) tqt_dispatchEnterLeave( 0, TQWidget::find((WId)curWin) ); tqt_modal_stack->insert( 0, widget ); - app_do_modal = TRUE; + app_do_modal = true; curWin = 0; - ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = FALSE; + ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = false; } @@ -3922,13 +3922,13 @@ void tqt_leave_modal( TQWidget *widget ) delete tqt_modal_stack; tqt_modal_stack = 0; TQPoint p( TQCursor::pos() ); - TQWidget* w = TQApplication::widgetAt( p.x(), p.y(), TRUE ); + TQWidget* w = TQApplication::widgetAt( p.x(), p.y(), true ); tqt_dispatchEnterLeave( w, TQWidget::find( curWin ) ); // send synthetic enter event curWin = w? w->winId() : 0; } } app_do_modal = tqt_modal_stack != 0; - ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = TRUE; + ignoreNextMouseReleaseEvent = true; if (widget->parentWidget()) { TQEvent e(TQEvent::WindowUnblocked); @@ -3945,16 +3945,16 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_try_modal( TQWidget *widget, XEvent *event ) case ButtonPress: case ButtonRelease: case MotionNotify: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } } if ( tqt_tryModalHelper( widget ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; - bool block_event = FALSE; + bool block_event = false; switch ( event->type ) { case ButtonPress: // disallow mouse/key events case ButtonRelease: @@ -3964,7 +3964,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_try_modal( TQWidget *widget, XEvent *event ) case EnterNotify: case LeaveNotify: case ClientMessage: - block_event = TRUE; + block_event = true; break; default: break; @@ -4000,10 +4000,10 @@ void TQApplication::openPopup( TQWidget *popup ) popupWidgets->append( popup ); // add to end of list if ( popupWidgets->count() == 1 && !qt_nograb() ){ // grab mouse/keyboard - int r = XGrabKeyboard( popup->x11Display(), popup->winId(), FALSE, + int r = XGrabKeyboard( popup->x11Display(), popup->winId(), false, GrabModeSync, GrabModeAsync, CurrentTime ); if ( (popupGrabOk = (r == GrabSuccess)) ) { - r = XGrabPointer( popup->x11Display(), popup->winId(), TRUE, + r = XGrabPointer( popup->x11Display(), popup->winId(), true, (uint)(ButtonPressMask | ButtonReleaseMask | ButtonMotionMask | EnterWindowMask | LeaveWindowMask | PointerMotionMask), @@ -4040,7 +4040,7 @@ void TQApplication::closePopup( TQWidget *popup ) popupOfPopupButtonFocus = 0; } if ( popupWidgets->count() == 0 ) { // this was the last popup - popupCloseDownMode = TRUE; // control mouse events + popupCloseDownMode = true; // control mouse events delete popupWidgets; popupWidgets = 0; if ( !qt_nograb() && popupGrabOk ) { // grabbing not disabled @@ -4077,10 +4077,10 @@ void TQApplication::closePopup( TQWidget *popup ) aw->setFocus(); TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); if ( popupWidgets->count() == 1 && !qt_nograb() ){ // grab mouse/keyboard - int r = XGrabKeyboard( aw->x11Display(), aw->winId(), FALSE, + int r = XGrabKeyboard( aw->x11Display(), aw->winId(), false, GrabModeSync, GrabModeAsync, CurrentTime ); if ( (popupGrabOk = (r == GrabSuccess)) ) { - r = XGrabPointer( aw->x11Display(), aw->winId(), TRUE, + r = XGrabPointer( aw->x11Display(), aw->winId(), true, (uint)(ButtonPressMask | ButtonReleaseMask | ButtonMotionMask | EnterWindowMask | LeaveWindowMask | PointerMotionMask), @@ -4131,7 +4131,7 @@ int qt_x11_translateButtonState( int s ) bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) { - static bool manualGrab = FALSE; + static bool manualGrab = false; TQEvent::Type type; // event parameters TQPoint pos; TQPoint globalPos; @@ -4140,14 +4140,14 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) XEvent nextEvent; if ( sm_blockUserInput ) // block user interaction during session management - return TRUE; + return true; static int x_root_save = -1, y_root_save = -1; if ( event->type == MotionNotify ) { // mouse move if (event->xmotion.root != RootWindow(appDpy, x11Screen()) && ! qt_xdnd_dragging ) - return FALSE; + return false; XMotionEvent lastMotion = event->xmotion; while( XPending( appDpy ) ) { // compres mouse moves @@ -4183,14 +4183,14 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) // throw away mouse move events that are sent multiple times to the same // position - bool throw_away = FALSE; + bool throw_away = false; if ( x_root_save == globalPos.x() && y_root_save == globalPos.y() ) - throw_away = TRUE; + throw_away = true; x_root_save = globalPos.x(); y_root_save = globalPos.y(); if ( throw_away ) - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( event->type == EnterNotify || event->type == LeaveNotify) { XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)event; //unsigned int xstate = event->xcrossing.state; @@ -4256,7 +4256,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) (btn == 6 || btn == 7) ); translateWheelEvent( globalPos.x(), globalPos.y(), delta, state, (hor)?Horizontal:Vertical ); } - return TRUE; + return true; // history navigation buttons case 8: button = HistoryBackButton; break; @@ -4269,8 +4269,8 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) if ( translateXinputEvent( &myEv ) ) { //Spontaneous event sent. Check if we need to continue. if ( chokeMouse ) { - chokeMouse = FALSE; - return FALSE; + chokeMouse = false; + return false; } } } @@ -4302,14 +4302,14 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) if ( translateXinputEvent( &myEv ) ) { //Spontaneous event sent. Check if we need to continue. if ( chokeMouse ) { - chokeMouse = FALSE; - return FALSE; + chokeMouse = false; + return false; } } } #endif if ( manualGrab ) { // release manual grab - manualGrab = FALSE; + manualGrab = false; XUngrabPointer( x11Display(), CurrentTime ); XFlush( x11Display() ); } @@ -4320,7 +4320,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) mouseActWindow = winId(); // save some event params mouseButtonState = state; if ( type == 0 ) // don't send event - return FALSE; + return false; if ( tqApp->inPopupMode() ) { // in popup mode TQWidget *popup = tqApp->activePopupWidget(); @@ -4330,7 +4330,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) else // send to last popup pos = popup->mapFromGlobal( globalPos ); } - bool releaseAfter = FALSE; + bool releaseAfter = false; TQWidget *popupChild = popup->childAt( pos ); TQWidget *popupTarget = popupChild ? popupChild : popup; @@ -4351,7 +4351,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) popupOfPopupButtonFocus = popup; break; case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease: - releaseAfter = TRUE; + releaseAfter = true; break; default: break; // nothing for mouse move @@ -4398,7 +4398,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) } else { if ( type != TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease && state != 0 && TQWidget::find((WId)mouseActWindow) ) { - manualGrab = TRUE; // need to manually grab + manualGrab = true; // need to manually grab XGrabPointer( dpy, mouseActWindow, False, (uint)(ButtonPressMask | ButtonReleaseMask | ButtonMotionMask | @@ -4419,9 +4419,9 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) } if ( popupCloseDownMode ) { - popupCloseDownMode = FALSE; + popupCloseDownMode = false; if ( testWFlags(WType_Popup) ) // ignore replayed event - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( type == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease && @@ -4441,7 +4441,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateMouseEvent( const XEvent *event ) TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( widget, &e ); } } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -4458,7 +4458,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateWheelEvent( int global_x, int global_y, int delta, int TQWheelEvent e( mapFromGlobal(TQPoint( global_x, global_y)), TQPoint(global_x, global_y), delta, state, orient ); if ( TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( this, &e ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } // send the event to the widget that has the focus or its ancestors, if different @@ -4470,9 +4470,9 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateWheelEvent( int global_x, int global_y, int delta, int TQWheelEvent e( mapFromGlobal(TQPoint( global_x, global_y)), TQPoint(global_x, global_y), delta, state, orient ); if ( TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( w, &e ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -4586,7 +4586,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateXinputEvent( const XEvent *ev ) #if defined (Q_OS_IRIX) s = XQueryDeviceState( appDpy, dev ); if ( s == NULL ) - return FALSE; + return false; iClass = s->data; for ( j = 0; j < s->num_classes; j++ ) { if ( iClass->c_class == ValuatorClass ) { @@ -4649,13 +4649,13 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateXinputEvent( const XEvent *ev ) TQTabletEvent e( t, curr, global, deviceType, pressure, xTilt, yTilt, tId ); TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( w, &e ); - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif bool TQETWidget::translatePropertyEvent(const XEvent *event) { - if (!isTopLevel()) return TRUE; + if (!isTopLevel()) return true; Atom ret; int format, e; @@ -4682,8 +4682,8 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePropertyEvent(const XEvent *event) } } } else if (event->xproperty.atom == qt_net_wm_state) { - bool max = FALSE; - bool full = FALSE; + bool max = false; + bool full = false; if (event->xproperty.state == PropertyNewValue) { // using length of 1024 should be safe for all current and @@ -4697,33 +4697,33 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePropertyEvent(const XEvent *event) unsigned long i; for (i = 0; i < nitems; i++) { if (states[i] == qt_net_wm_state_max_v || states[i] == qt_net_wm_state_max_h) - max = TRUE; + max = true; else if (states[i] == qt_net_wm_state_fullscreen) - full = TRUE; + full = true; } } } - bool send_event = FALSE; + bool send_event = false; if (qt_net_supports(qt_net_wm_state_max_v) && qt_net_supports(qt_net_wm_state_max_h)) { if (max && !isMaximized()) { setWState(WState_Maximized); - send_event = TRUE; + send_event = true; } else if (!max && isMaximized()) { clearWState(WState_Maximized); - send_event = TRUE; + send_event = true; } } if (qt_net_supports(qt_net_wm_state_fullscreen)) { if (full && !isFullScreen()) { setWState(WState_FullScreen); - send_event = TRUE; + send_event = true; } else if (!full && isFullScreen()) { clearWState(WState_FullScreen); - send_event = TRUE; + send_event = true; } } @@ -4803,7 +4803,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePropertyEvent(const XEvent *event) if (data) XFree(data); - return TRUE; + return true; } #ifndef XK_ISO_Left_Tab @@ -5244,9 +5244,9 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *event, int& count, if ( !keyDict ) { keyDict = new TQIntDict<void>( 13 ); - keyDict->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + keyDict->setAutoDelete( false ); textDict = new TQIntDict<void>( 13 ); - textDict->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + textDict->setAutoDelete( false ); tqAddPostRoutine( deleteKeyDicts ); } @@ -5277,7 +5277,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *event, int& count, int keycode = event->xkey.keycode; if ( type == TQEvent::KeyPress ) { - bool mb=FALSE; + bool mb=false; // commit string handling is done by // TQXIMInputContext::x11FilterEvent() and are passed to // widgets via TQIMEvent regardless of XIM style, so the @@ -5287,7 +5287,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *event, int& count, TQTLWExtra* xd = tlw->topData(); TQInputContext *qic = (TQInputContext *) xd->xic; if ( qic ) { - mb=TRUE; + mb=true; count = qic->lookupString(&xkeyevent, chars, &key, &status); } } @@ -5383,7 +5383,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *event, int& count, chars[0] = 0; directionKeyEvent = 0; lastWinId = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } else { directionKeyEvent = 0; lastWinId = 0; @@ -5514,7 +5514,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEventInternal( const XEvent *event, int& count, text = converted; else text = chars; - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -5537,14 +5537,14 @@ extern "C" { static Bool qt_keypress_scanner(Display *, XEvent *event, XPointer arg) { if (event->type != XKeyPress && event->type != XKeyRelease) - return FALSE; + return false; qt_auto_repeat_data *d = (qt_auto_repeat_data *) arg; if (d->error || event->xkey.window != d->window || event->xkey.keycode != d->keycode) { - d->error = TRUE; - return FALSE; + d->error = true; + return false; } if (event->type == XKeyPress) { @@ -5555,15 +5555,15 @@ static Bool qt_keypress_scanner(Display *, XEvent *event, XPointer arg) // must be XKeyRelease event if (d->release) { // found a second release - d->error = TRUE; - return FALSE; + d->error = true; + return false; } // found a single release - d->release = TRUE; + d->release = true; d->timestamp = event->xkey.time; - return FALSE; + return false; } static Bool qt_keyrelease_scanner(Display *, XEvent *event, XPointer arg) @@ -5586,15 +5586,15 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) char ascii = 0; if ( sm_blockUserInput ) // block user interaction during session management - return TRUE; + return true; Display *dpy = x11Display(); if ( !isEnabled() ) - return TRUE; + return true; TQEvent::Type type; - bool autor = FALSE; + bool autor = false; TQString text; translateKeyEventInternal( event, count, text, state, ascii, code, type, @@ -5609,18 +5609,18 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) if ( event->type == XKeyPress ) { if ( curr_autorep == event->xkey.keycode ) { - autor = TRUE; + autor = true; curr_autorep = 0; } } else { // look ahead for auto-repeat XEvent nextpress; - auto_repeat_data.release = TRUE; - auto_repeat_data.error = FALSE; + auto_repeat_data.release = true; + auto_repeat_data.error = false; if (XCheckIfEvent(dpy, &nextpress, &qt_keypress_scanner, (XPointer) &auto_repeat_data)) { - autor = TRUE; + autor = true; // Put it back... we COULD send the event now and not need // the static curr_autorep variable. @@ -5635,7 +5635,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) TQKeyEvent a( type, code, ascii, state, text, autor, TQMAX( TQMAX(count,1), int(text.length())) ); if ( tqt_tryAccelEvent( this, &a ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } long save = 0; @@ -5691,7 +5691,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) XEvent evPress; // sync the event queue, this makes key compress work better - XSync( dpy, FALSE ); + XSync( dpy, false ); for (;;) { TQString textIntern; @@ -5743,8 +5743,8 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) XEvent dummy; for (;;) { - auto_repeat_data.release = FALSE; - auto_repeat_data.error = FALSE; + auto_repeat_data.release = false; + auto_repeat_data.error = false; if (! XCheckIfEvent(dpy, &dummy, &qt_keypress_scanner, (XPointer) &auto_repeat_data)) break; @@ -5769,7 +5769,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateKeyEvent( const XEvent *event, bool grab ) TQContextMenuEvent e( TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard, TQPoint( 5, 5 ), mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 5, 5 ) ), 0 ); TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( this, &e ); if( e.isAccepted() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } TQKeyEvent e( type, code, ascii, state, text, autor, @@ -5816,7 +5816,7 @@ void qt_insert_sip( TQWidget* scrolled_widget, int dx, int dy ) { if ( !sip_list ) { sip_list = new TQPtrList<TQScrollInProgress>; - sip_list->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + sip_list->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQScrollInProgress* sip = new TQScrollInProgress( scrolled_widget, dx, dy ); @@ -5869,10 +5869,10 @@ bool translateBySips( TQWidget* that, TQRect& paintRect ) } if ( sips > 1 ) { paintRect.moveBy( dx, dy ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQETWidget::translatePaintEvent( const XEvent *event ) @@ -5901,7 +5901,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePaintEvent( const XEvent *event ) xevent.xexpose.width, xevent.xexpose.height); if ( translateBySips( this, exposure ) ) - should_clip = TRUE; + should_clip = true; paintRegion = paintRegion.unite( exposure ); } else { translateScrollDoneEvent( &xevent ); @@ -5912,7 +5912,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePaintEvent( const XEvent *event ) if ( should_clip ) { paintRegion = paintRegion.intersect( rect() ); if ( paintRegion.isEmpty() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } TQPaintEvent e( paintRegion ); @@ -5923,7 +5923,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePaintEvent( const XEvent *event ) TQApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent( this, &e ); qt_clear_paintevent_clipping(); clearWState( WState_InPaintEvent ); - return TRUE; + return true; } // @@ -5932,7 +5932,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePaintEvent( const XEvent *event ) bool TQETWidget::translateScrollDoneEvent( const XEvent *event ) { - if ( !sip_list ) return FALSE; + if ( !sip_list ) return false; long id = event->xclient.data.l[0]; @@ -5940,11 +5940,11 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateScrollDoneEvent( const XEvent *event ) for (TQScrollInProgress* sip = sip_list->first(); sip; sip=sip_list->next()) { if ( sip->id == id ) { sip_list->remove( sip_list->current() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } #if defined(Q_C_CALLBACKS) @@ -6030,7 +6030,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateConfigEvent( const XEvent *event ) TQRect cr ( geometry() ); if ( newSize != cr.size() ) { // size changed - was_resize = TRUE; + was_resize = true; TQSize oldSize = size(); cr.setSize( newSize ); crect = cr; @@ -6081,7 +6081,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateConfigEvent( const XEvent *event ) incrementSyncCounter(); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -6090,7 +6090,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translateConfigEvent( const XEvent *event ) // bool TQETWidget::translateCloseEvent( const XEvent * ) { - return close(FALSE); + return close(false); } @@ -6188,7 +6188,7 @@ int TQApplication::wheelScrollLines() } /*! - Enables the UI effect \a effect if \a enable is TRUE, otherwise + Enables the UI effect \a effect if \a enable is true, otherwise the effect will not be used. Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than @@ -6200,24 +6200,24 @@ void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable ) { switch (effect) { case UI_AnimateMenu: - if ( enable ) fade_menu = FALSE; + if ( enable ) fade_menu = false; animate_menu = enable; break; case UI_FadeMenu: if ( enable ) - animate_menu = TRUE; + animate_menu = true; fade_menu = enable; break; case UI_AnimateCombo: animate_combo = enable; break; case UI_AnimateTooltip: - if ( enable ) fade_tooltip = FALSE; + if ( enable ) fade_tooltip = false; animate_tooltip = enable; break; case UI_FadeTooltip: if ( enable ) - animate_tooltip = TRUE; + animate_tooltip = true; fade_tooltip = enable; break; case UI_AnimateToolBox: @@ -6230,10 +6230,10 @@ void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a effect is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a effect is enabled; otherwise returns false. By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call - setDesktopSettingsAware(FALSE) to prevent this. + setDesktopSettingsAware(false) to prevent this. Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth. @@ -6243,7 +6243,7 @@ void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable ) bool TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( TQt::UIEffect effect ) { if ( TQColor::numBitPlanes() < 16 || !animate_ui ) - return FALSE; + return false; switch( effect ) { case UI_AnimateMenu: @@ -6329,16 +6329,16 @@ static void sm_performSaveYourself( TQSessionManagerData* ); static void resetSmState() { -// sm_waitingForPhase2 = FALSE; ### never used?!? - sm_waitingForInteraction = FALSE; - sm_interactionActive = FALSE; +// sm_waitingForPhase2 = false; ### never used?!? + sm_waitingForInteraction = false; + sm_interactionActive = false; sm_interactStyle = SmInteractStyleNone; - sm_smActive = FALSE; - sm_blockUserInput = FALSE; - sm_isshutdown = FALSE; -// sm_shouldbefast = FALSE; ### never used?!? - sm_phase2 = FALSE; - sm_in_phase2 = FALSE; + sm_smActive = false; + sm_blockUserInput = false; + sm_isshutdown = false; +// sm_shouldbefast = false; ### never used?!? + sm_phase2 = false; + sm_in_phase2 = false; } @@ -6398,8 +6398,8 @@ static void sm_saveYourselfCallback( SmcConn smcConn, SmPointer clientData, { if (smcConn != smcConnection ) return; - sm_cancel = FALSE; - sm_smActive = TRUE; + sm_cancel = false; + sm_smActive = true; sm_isshutdown = shutdown; sm_saveType = saveType; sm_interactStyle = interactStyle; @@ -6407,9 +6407,9 @@ static void sm_saveYourselfCallback( SmcConn smcConn, SmPointer clientData, // ugly workaround for broken libSM. libSM should do that _before_ // actually invoking the callback in sm_process.c - ( (QT_smcConn*)smcConn )->save_yourself_in_progress = TRUE; + ( (QT_smcConn*)smcConn )->save_yourself_in_progress = true; if ( sm_isshutdown ) - ( (QT_smcConn*)smcConn )->shutdown_in_progress = TRUE; + ( (QT_smcConn*)smcConn )->shutdown_in_progress = true; sm_performSaveYourself( (TQSessionManagerData*) clientData ); if ( !sm_isshutdown ) // we cannot expect a confirmation message in that case @@ -6419,7 +6419,7 @@ static void sm_saveYourselfCallback( SmcConn smcConn, SmPointer clientData, static void sm_performSaveYourself( TQSessionManagerData* smd ) { if ( sm_isshutdown ) - sm_blockUserInput = TRUE; + sm_blockUserInput = true; TQSessionManager* sm = smd->sm; @@ -6462,7 +6462,7 @@ static void sm_performSaveYourself( TQSessionManagerData* smd ) if ( sm_phase2 && !sm_in_phase2 ) { SmcRequestSaveYourselfPhase2( smcConnection, sm_saveYourselfPhase2Callback, (SmPointer*) smd ); - sm_blockUserInput = FALSE; + sm_blockUserInput = false; } else { // close eventual interaction monitors and cancel the @@ -6470,12 +6470,12 @@ static void sm_performSaveYourself( TQSessionManagerData* smd ) // performing a shutdown, it does not work for checkpoints if ( sm_interactionActive ) { SmcInteractDone( smcConnection, sm_isshutdown && sm_cancel); - sm_interactionActive = FALSE; + sm_interactionActive = false; } else if ( sm_cancel && sm_isshutdown ) { if ( sm->allowsErrorInteraction() ) { SmcInteractDone( smcConnection, True ); - sm_interactionActive = FALSE; + sm_interactionActive = false; } } @@ -6532,7 +6532,7 @@ static void sm_saveYourselfPhase2Callback( SmcConn smcConn, SmPointer clientData { if (smcConn != smcConnection ) return; - sm_in_phase2 = TRUE; + sm_in_phase2 = true; sm_performSaveYourself( (TQSessionManagerData*) clientData ); } @@ -6623,10 +6623,10 @@ void* TQSessionManager::handle() const bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() { if ( sm_interactionActive ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( sm_waitingForInteraction ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( sm_interactStyle == SmInteractStyleAny ) { sm_waitingForInteraction = SmcInteractRequest( smcConnection, SmDialogNormal, @@ -6634,23 +6634,23 @@ bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction() } if ( sm_waitingForInteraction ) { tqApp->enter_loop(); - sm_waitingForInteraction = FALSE; + sm_waitingForInteraction = false; if ( sm_smActive ) { // not cancelled - sm_interactionActive = TRUE; - sm_blockUserInput = FALSE; - return TRUE; + sm_interactionActive = true; + sm_blockUserInput = false; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() { if ( sm_interactionActive ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( sm_waitingForInteraction ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( sm_interactStyle == SmInteractStyleAny || sm_interactStyle == SmInteractStyleErrors ) { sm_waitingForInteraction = SmcInteractRequest( smcConnection, SmDialogError, @@ -6658,29 +6658,29 @@ bool TQSessionManager::allowsErrorInteraction() } if ( sm_waitingForInteraction ) { tqApp->enter_loop(); - sm_waitingForInteraction = FALSE; + sm_waitingForInteraction = false; if ( sm_smActive ) { // not cancelled - sm_interactionActive = TRUE; - sm_blockUserInput = FALSE; - return TRUE; + sm_interactionActive = true; + sm_blockUserInput = false; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQSessionManager::release() { if ( sm_interactionActive ) { SmcInteractDone( smcConnection, False ); - sm_interactionActive = FALSE; + sm_interactionActive = false; if ( sm_smActive && sm_isshutdown ) - sm_blockUserInput = TRUE; + sm_blockUserInput = true; } } void TQSessionManager::cancel() { - sm_cancel = TRUE; + sm_cancel = true; } void TQSessionManager::setRestartHint( TQSessionManager::RestartHint hint) @@ -6741,7 +6741,7 @@ bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2() const void TQSessionManager::requestPhase2() { - sm_phase2 = TRUE; + sm_phase2 = true; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp b/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp index f4a144c1b..f27e59ee0 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp @@ -368,13 +368,13 @@ TQImageDecoder::~TQImageDecoder() Returns the image currently being decoded. */ -static bool plugins_loaded = FALSE; +static bool plugins_loaded = false; /*! Call this function to decode some data into image changes. The data in \a buffer will be decoded, sending change information to the TQImageConsumer of this TQImageDecoder until one of the change - functions of the consumer returns FALSE. The length of the data is + functions of the consumer returns false. The length of the data is given in \a length. Returns the number of bytes consumed: 0 if consumption is @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ int TQImageDecoder::decode(const uchar* buffer, int length) } if ( !actual_decoder && !plugins_loaded) { tqt_init_image_plugins(); - plugins_loaded = TRUE; + plugins_loaded = true; for (TQImageFormatType* f = TQImageDecoderPrivate::factories->first(); f && !actual_decoder; @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ const char* TQImageDecoder::formatName(const uchar* buffer, int length) } if ( !name && !plugins_loaded) { tqt_init_image_plugins(); - plugins_loaded = TRUE; + plugins_loaded = true; for (TQImageFormatType* f = TQImageDecoderPrivate::factories->first(); f && !name; f = TQImageDecoderPrivate::factories->next()) @@ -647,8 +647,8 @@ TQImageFormatType::~TQImageFormatType() /*! - Returns TRUE if TQt was compiled with built-in GIF reading support; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if TQt was compiled with built-in GIF reading support; + otherwise returns false. */ bool qt_builtin_gif_reader() { @@ -683,12 +683,12 @@ TQGIFFormat::TQGIFFormat() lncols = 0; gncols = 0; disposal = NoDisposal; - out_of_bounds = FALSE; - disposed = TRUE; + out_of_bounds = false; + disposed = true; frame = -1; state = Header; count = 0; - lcmap = FALSE; + lcmap = false; } /*! @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ void TQGIFFormat::disposePrevious( TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer ) } disposal = NoDisposal; // Until an extension says otherwise. - disposed = TRUE; + disposed = true; } /*! @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, // CompuServe Incorporated." #define LM(l, m) (((m)<<8)|l) - digress = FALSE; + digress = false; int initial = length; TQRgb** line = (TQRgb **)img.jumpTable(); while (!digress && length) { @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, state=Done; break; default: - digress=TRUE; + digress=true; // Unexpected Introducer - ignore block state=Error; } @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, line = (TQRgb **)img.jumpTable(); disposePrevious( img, consumer ); - disposed = FALSE; + disposed = false; left = newleft; top = newtop; @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, bitcount = 0; sp = stack; firstcode = oldcode = 0; - needfirst = FALSE; + needfirst = false; out_of_bounds = left>=swidth || y>=sheight; } break; @@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, } else { if (consumer) { consumer->frameDone(); - digress = TRUE; + digress = true; } state=Introducer; @@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, table[0][i]=table[1][i]=0; } } - needfirst=TRUE; + needfirst=true; } else if (code==end_code) { bitcount = -32768; // Left the block end arrive @@ -1063,8 +1063,8 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, if (!out_of_bounds && line && firstcode!=trans_index) line[y][x] = color(firstcode); x++; - if (x>=swidth) out_of_bounds = TRUE; - needfirst=FALSE; + if (x>=swidth) out_of_bounds = true; + needfirst=false; if (x>=left+width) { x=left; out_of_bounds = left>=swidth || y>=sheight; @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, if (!out_of_bounds && line && *sp!=trans_index) line[y][x] = color(*sp); x++; - if (x>=swidth) out_of_bounds = TRUE; + if (x>=swidth) out_of_bounds = true; if (x>=left+width) { x=left; out_of_bounds = left>=swidth || y>=sheight; @@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, if (count==expectcount) state=SkipBlockSize; break; case Done: - digress=TRUE; + digress=true; /* Netscape ignores the junk, so we do too. length++; // Unget state=Error; // More calls to this is an error @@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ void TQGIFFormat::nextY(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer) } // Consume bogus extra lines - if (y >= sheight) out_of_bounds=TRUE; //y=bottom; + if (y >= sheight) out_of_bounds=true; //y=bottom; } TQRgb TQGIFFormat::color( uchar index ) const diff --git a/src/kernel/tqasyncio.cpp b/src/kernel/tqasyncio.cpp index c8fe10ce4..aa3fff18a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqasyncio.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqasyncio.cpp @@ -173,25 +173,25 @@ void TQDataSource::maybeReady() */ /*! - This function should return TRUE if the data source can be rewound. + This function should return true if the data source can be rewound. - The default returns FALSE. + The default returns false. */ bool TQDataSource::rewindable() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - If this function is called with \a on set to TRUE, and rewindable() - is TRUE, then the data source must take measures to allow the rewind() - function to subsequently operate as described. If rewindable() is FALSE, + If this function is called with \a on set to true, and rewindable() + is true, then the data source must take measures to allow the rewind() + function to subsequently operate as described. If rewindable() is false, the function should call TQDataSource::enableRewind(), which aborts with a tqFatal() error. For example, a network connection may choose to use a disk cache of input only if rewinding is enabled before the first buffer-full of - data is discarded, returning FALSE in rewindable() if that first buffer + data is discarded, returning false in rewindable() if that first buffer is discarded. */ void TQDataSource::enableRewind( bool /* on */ ) @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ void TQDataSource::enableRewind( bool /* on */ ) /*! This function rewinds the data source. This may only be called if - enableRewind(TRUE) has been previously called. + enableRewind(true) has been previously called. */ void TQDataSource::rewind() { @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ TQIODeviceSource::TQIODeviceSource(TQIODevice* device, int buffer_size) : buf_size(buffer_size), buffer(new uchar[buf_size]), iod(device), - rew(FALSE) + rew(false) { } @@ -269,13 +269,13 @@ void TQIODeviceSource::sendTo(TQDataSink* sink, int n) */ bool TQIODeviceSource::rewindable() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! - If \a on is set to TRUE then rewinding is enabled. + If \a on is set to true then rewinding is enabled. No special action is taken. If \a on is set to - FALSE then rewinding is disabled. + false then rewinding is disabled. */ void TQIODeviceSource::enableRewind(bool on) { @@ -323,14 +323,14 @@ TQDataPump::TQDataPump(TQDataSource* data_source, TQDataSink* data_sink) : source->connect(this, TQ_SLOT(kickStart())); sink->connect(this, TQ_SLOT(kickStart())); connect(&timer, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQ_SLOT(tryToPump())); - timer.start(0, TRUE); + timer.start(0, true); } void TQDataPump::kickStart() { if (!timer.isActive()) { interval = 0; - timer.start(0, TRUE); + timer.start(0, true); } } @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ void TQDataPump::tryToPump() return; source->sendTo(sink, TQMIN(supply, demand)); - timer.start(0, TRUE); + timer.start(0, true); } #endif // TQT_NO_ASYNC_IO diff --git a/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp b/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp index c23116d0e..0417844f1 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp @@ -88,14 +88,14 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap() { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; } /*! Constructs a bitmap with width \a w and height \a h. - The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \a clear is FALSE; + The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \a clear is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \c TQt::color0). @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization ) : TQPixmap( w, h, 1, optimization ) { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; if ( clear ) fill( TQt::color0 ); } @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear, Constructs a bitmap with the size \a size. - The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \a clear is FALSE; + The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \a clear is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \c TQt::color0). @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( const TQSize &size, bool clear, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization ) : TQPixmap( size, 1, optimization ) { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; if ( clear ) fill( TQt::color0 ); } @@ -146,21 +146,21 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( const TQSize &size, bool clear, Constructs a bitmap with width \a w and height \a h and sets the contents to \a bits. - The \a isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if \a bits was generated by + The \a isXbitmap flag should be true if \a bits was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images. Example (creates an arrow bitmap): \code uchar arrow_bits[] = { 0x3f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x1f, 0x3b, 0x71, 0xe0, 0xc0 }; - TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE ); + TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, true ); \endcode */ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap ) : TQPixmap( w, h, bits, isXbitmap ) { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; } @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap ) Constructs a bitmap with the size \a size and sets the contents to \a bits. - The \a isXbitmap flag should be TRUE if \a bits was generated by + The \a isXbitmap flag should be true if \a bits was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images. */ @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap ) TQBitmap::TQBitmap( const TQSize &size, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap ) : TQPixmap( size.width(), size.height(), bits, isXbitmap ) { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; } @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ TQBitmap::TQBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap ) TQBitmap::TQBitmap( const TQString& fileName, const char *format ) : TQPixmap() // Will set bitmap to null bitmap, explicit call for clarity { - data->bitmap = TRUE; + data->bitmap = true; load( fileName, format, Mono ); } #endif @@ -241,13 +241,13 @@ TQBitmap &TQBitmap::operator=( const TQBitmap &bitmap ) TQBitmap &TQBitmap::operator=( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) { if ( pixmap.isNull() ) { // a null pixmap - TQBitmap bm( 0, 0, FALSE, pixmap.optimization() ); + TQBitmap bm( 0, 0, false, pixmap.optimization() ); TQBitmap::operator=(bm); } else if ( pixmap.depth() == 1 ) { // 1-bit pixmap if ( pixmap.isTQBitmap() ) { // another TQBitmap TQPixmap::operator=(pixmap); // shallow assignment } else { // not a TQBitmap, but 1-bit - TQBitmap bm( pixmap.size(), FALSE, pixmap.optimization() ); + TQBitmap bm( pixmap.size(), false, pixmap.optimization() ); bitBlt( &bm, 0,0, &pixmap, 0,0,pixmap.width(),pixmap.height() ); TQBitmap::operator=(bm); } @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ TQBitmap TQBitmap::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const // Here we fake the pixmap to think it's a TQBitmap. With this trick, // the TQBitmap::operator=(const TQPixmap&) will just refer the // pm.data and we do not need to perform a bitBlt. - pm.data->bitmap = TRUE; + pm.data->bitmap = true; bm = pm; return bm; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h b/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h index c74f37241..6d862bfaf 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h @@ -50,12 +50,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQBitmap : public TQPixmap { public: TQBitmap(); - TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, + TQBitmap( int w, int h, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ); - TQBitmap( const TQSize &, bool clear = FALSE, + TQBitmap( const TQSize &, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim ); - TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=FALSE ); - TQBitmap( const TQSize &, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=FALSE ); + TQBitmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=false ); + TQBitmap( const TQSize &, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap=false ); TQBitmap( const TQBitmap & ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGEIO TQBitmap( const TQString &fileName, const char *format=0 ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp b/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp index ee476a1a5..bff4c96ec 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ TQString TQClipboard::text( TQCString &subtype, Mode mode ) const TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() - returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, + returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ // ### remove 4.0 @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ TQString TQClipboard::text( Mode mode ) const This function uses the TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setText( const TQString &text, Mode mode ) This function uses the TQClipboard::setText() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ TQImage TQClipboard::image( Mode mode ) const This function uses the TQClipboard::image() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setImage( const TQImage &image, Mode mode ) This function uses the TQClipboard::setImage() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap( Mode mode ) const This function uses the TQClipboard::pixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap, Mode mode ) This function uses the TQClipboard::setPixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) This function uses the TQClipboard::data() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ TQMimeSource *TQClipboard::data() const This function uses the TQClipboard::setData() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setData( TQMimeSource *src ) This function uses the TQClipboard::clear() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). - If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is + If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard. */ // ### remove 4.0 diff --git a/src/kernel/tqclipboard_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqclipboard_x11.cpp index 685837650..3ab6ec5f0 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqclipboard_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqclipboard_x11.cpp @@ -44,13 +44,13 @@ #ifdef TQCLIPBOARD_DEBUG # define TQDEBUG tqDebug #else -# define TQDEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define TQDEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif #ifdef TQCLIPBOARD_DEBUG_VERBOSE # define VTQDEBUG tqDebug #else -# define VTQDEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define VTQDEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif #include "qplatformdefs.h" @@ -104,19 +104,19 @@ static int clipboard_timeout = 5000; // 5s timeout on clipboard operations static TQWidget * owner = 0; static TQWidget *requestor = 0; -static bool inSelectionMode_obsolete = FALSE; // ### remove 4.0 -static bool timer_event_clear = FALSE; +static bool inSelectionMode_obsolete = false; // ### remove 4.0 +static bool timer_event_clear = false; static int timer_id = 0; static int pending_timer_id = 0; -static bool pending_clipboard_changed = FALSE; -static bool pending_selection_changed = FALSE; +static bool pending_clipboard_changed = false; +static bool pending_selection_changed = false; TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_qclipboard_bailout_hack = false; // event capture mechanism for qt_xclb_wait_for_event -static bool waiting_for_data = FALSE; -static bool has_captured_event = FALSE; +static bool waiting_for_data = false; +static bool has_captured_event = false; static Window capture_event_win = None; static int capture_event_type = -1; static XEvent captured_event; @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ public: void setSource(TQMimeSource* s) { - clear(TRUE); + clear(true); src = s; } @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ public: transferred[1] = TQPixmap(); } - void clear(bool destruct=TRUE); + void clear(bool destruct=true); TQMimeSource *src; Time timestamp; @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ static TQClipboardData *clipboardData() void tqt_clipboard_cleanup_mime_source(TQMimeSource *src) { if(internalCbData && internalCbData->source() == src) - internalCbData->clear(FALSE); + internalCbData->clear(false); } static void cleanupSelectionData() @@ -391,23 +391,23 @@ void TQClipboard::clear( Mode mode ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQClipboard::supportsSelection() const -{ return TRUE; } +{ return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection - data; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection + data; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQClipboard::ownsSelection() const { return selectionData()->timestamp != CurrentTime; } /*! - Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQClipboard::ownsClipboard() const { return clipboardData()->timestamp != CurrentTime; } @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::ownsClipboard() const Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument. - Sets the clipboard selection mode. If \a enable is TRUE, then + Sets the clipboard selection mode. If \a enable is true, then subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ static int qt_xclb_event_filter(XEvent *event) if (event->xany.type == capture_event_type && event->xany.window == capture_event_win) { VTQDEBUG( "TQClipboard: event_filter(): caught event type %d", event->type ); - has_captured_event = TRUE; + has_captured_event = true; captured_event = *event; return 1; } @@ -484,8 +484,8 @@ bool qt_xclb_wait_for_event( Display *dpy, Window win, int type, XEvent *event, if ( waiting_for_data ) tqFatal( "TQClipboard: internal error, qt_xclb_wait_for_event recursed" ); - waiting_for_data = TRUE; - has_captured_event = FALSE; + waiting_for_data = true; + has_captured_event = false; capture_event_win = win; capture_event_type = type; @@ -493,9 +493,9 @@ bool qt_xclb_wait_for_event( Display *dpy, Window win, int type, XEvent *event, do { if ( XCheckTypedWindowEvent(dpy,win,type,event) ) { - waiting_for_data = FALSE; + waiting_for_data = false; tqt_set_x11_event_filter(old_event_filter); - return TRUE; + return true; } now = TQTime::currentTime(); @@ -508,30 +508,30 @@ bool qt_xclb_wait_for_event( Display *dpy, Window win, int type, XEvent *event, TQEventLoop::ExcludeTimers); if ( has_captured_event ) { - waiting_for_data = FALSE; + waiting_for_data = false; *event = captured_event; tqt_set_x11_event_filter(old_event_filter); - return TRUE; + return true; } } while ( started.msecsTo(now) < timeout ); - waiting_for_data = FALSE; + waiting_for_data = false; tqt_set_x11_event_filter(old_event_filter); - return FALSE; + return false; } - bool flushed = FALSE; + bool flushed = false; do { if ( XCheckTypedWindowEvent(dpy,win,type,event) ) - return TRUE; + return true; if( tqt_qclipboard_bailout_hack ) { XEvent dummy; selection_request_pending = false; if ( owner != NULL ) XCheckIfEvent(dpy,&dummy,check_selection_request_pending,NULL); if( selection_request_pending ) - return TRUE; + return true; } // process other clipboard events, since someone is probably requesting data from us @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ bool qt_xclb_wait_for_event( Display *dpy, Window win, int type, XEvent *event, if(!flushed) { XFlush( dpy ); - flushed = TRUE; + flushed = true; } // sleep 50ms, so we don't use up CPU cycles all the time. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ bool qt_xclb_wait_for_event( Display *dpy, Window win, int type, XEvent *event, select(0, 0, 0, 0, &usleep_tv); } while ( started.msecsTo(now) < timeout ); - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ bool qt_xclb_read_property( Display *dpy, Window win, Atom property, &length, &bytes_left, &data ); if (r != Success || (type && *type == None)) { buffer->resize( 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } XFree( (char*)data ); @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ TQByteArray qt_xclb_read_incremental_property( Display *dpy, Window win, TQByteArray buf; TQByteArray tmp_buf; - bool alloc_error = FALSE; + bool alloc_error = false; int length; int offset = 0; @@ -717,8 +717,8 @@ TQByteArray qt_xclb_read_incremental_property( Display *dpy, Window win, if ( event.xproperty.atom != property || event.xproperty.state != PropertyNewValue ) continue; - if ( qt_xclb_read_property(dpy, win, property, TRUE, &tmp_buf, - &length,0, 0, FALSE) ) { + if ( qt_xclb_read_property(dpy, win, property, true, &tmp_buf, + &length,0, 0, false) ) { if ( length == 0 ) { // no more data, we're done if ( nullterm ) { buf.resize( offset+1 ); @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ TQByteArray qt_xclb_read_incremental_property( Display *dpy, Window win, } else if ( !alloc_error ) { if ( offset+length > (int)buf.size() ) { if ( !buf.resize(offset+length+65535) ) { - alloc_error = TRUE; + alloc_error = true; length = buf.size() - offset; } } @@ -966,44 +966,44 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) TQTimerEvent *te = (TQTimerEvent *) e; if ( waiting_for_data ) // should never happen - return FALSE; + return false; if (te->timerId() == timer_id) { killTimer(timer_id); timer_id = 0; - timer_event_clear = TRUE; + timer_event_clear = true; if ( selection_watcher ) // clear selection selectionData()->clear(); if ( clipboard_watcher ) // clear clipboard clipboardData()->clear(); - timer_event_clear = FALSE; + timer_event_clear = false; - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( te->timerId() == pending_timer_id ) { // I hate klipper killTimer( pending_timer_id ); pending_timer_id = 0; if ( pending_clipboard_changed ) { - pending_clipboard_changed = FALSE; + pending_clipboard_changed = false; clipboardData()->clear(); emit dataChanged(); } if ( pending_selection_changed ) { - pending_selection_changed = FALSE; + pending_selection_changed = false; selectionData()->clear(); emit selectionChanged(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } else if (te->timerId() == incr_timer_id) { killTimer(incr_timer_id); incr_timer_id = 0; qt_xclb_incr_timeout(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { return TQObject::event( e ); } @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) Display *dpy = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(); if ( !xevent ) - return TRUE; + return true; switch ( xevent->type ) { @@ -1036,7 +1036,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) d->clear(); emit selectionChanged(); } else { - pending_selection_changed = TRUE; + pending_selection_changed = true; if ( ! pending_timer_id ) pending_timer_id = TQApplication::clipboard()->startTimer( 0 ); } @@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) d->clear(); emit dataChanged(); } else { - pending_clipboard_changed = TRUE; + pending_clipboard_changed = true; if ( ! pending_timer_id ) pending_timer_id = TQApplication::clipboard()->startTimer( 0 ); } @@ -1063,7 +1063,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_STATE tqWarning("TQClipboard: Unknown SelectionClear event received."); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -1147,13 +1147,13 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) int multi_format = 0; int nmulti = 0; int imulti = -1; - bool multi_writeback = FALSE; + bool multi_writeback = false; if ( req->target == xa_multiple ) { TQByteArray multi_data; if (req->property == None || !qt_xclb_read_property(dpy, req->requestor, req->property, - FALSE, &multi_data, 0, &multi_type, &multi_format, 0) + false, &multi_data, 0, &multi_type, &multi_format, 0) || multi_format != 32) { // MULTIPLE property not formatted correctly XSendEvent(dpy, req->requestor, False, NoEventMask, &event); @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) if (nmulti > 0) { if (ret == None) { multi[imulti].property = None; - multi_writeback = TRUE; + multi_writeback = true; } } else { event.xselection.property = ret; @@ -1241,7 +1241,7 @@ bool TQClipboard::event( TQEvent *e ) break; } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1286,7 +1286,7 @@ bool TQClipboardWatcher::empty() const #ifdef QT_CHECK_STATE if( win == requestor->winId()) { tqWarning( "TQClipboardWatcher::empty: internal error, app owns the selection" ); - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ TQByteArray TQClipboardWatcher::getDataInFormat(Atom fmtatom) const XDeleteProperty(dpy, win, qt_selection_property); XConvertSelection(dpy, atom, fmtatom, qt_selection_property, win, tqt_x_time); - XSync(dpy, FALSE); + XSync(dpy, false); VTQDEBUG("TQClipboardWatcher::getDataInFormat: waiting for SelectionNotify event"); @@ -1448,13 +1448,13 @@ TQByteArray TQClipboardWatcher::getDataInFormat(Atom fmtatom) const Atom type; XSelectInput(dpy, win, PropertyChangeMask); - if ( qt_xclb_read_property(dpy,win,qt_selection_property,TRUE, - &buf,0,&type,0,FALSE) ) { + if ( qt_xclb_read_property(dpy,win,qt_selection_property,true, + &buf,0,&type,0,false) ) { if ( type == qt_x_incr ) { int nbytes = buf.size() >= 4 ? *((int*)buf.data()) : 0; buf = qt_xclb_read_incremental_property( dpy, win, qt_selection_property, - nbytes, FALSE ); + nbytes, false ); } } @@ -1577,13 +1577,13 @@ void TQClipboard::setData( TQMimeSource* src, Mode mode ) /* Called by the main event loop in tqapplication_x11.cpp when the _QT_SELECTION_SENTINEL property has been changed (i.e. when some TQt - process has performed TQClipboard::setData(). If it returns TRUE, the + process has performed TQClipboard::setData(). If it returns true, the TQClipBoard dataChanged() signal should be emitted. */ bool qt_check_selection_sentinel() { - bool doIt = TRUE; + bool doIt = true; if ( owner ) { /* Since the X selection mechanism cannot give any signal when @@ -1610,7 +1610,7 @@ bool qt_check_selection_sentinel() if ( actualType == XA_WINDOW && actualFormat == 32 && nitems == 2 ) { Window win = owner->winId(); if ( owners[0] == win || owners[1] == win ) - doIt = FALSE; + doIt = false; } XFree( owners ); @@ -1619,10 +1619,10 @@ bool qt_check_selection_sentinel() if (doIt) { if ( waiting_for_data ) { - pending_selection_changed = TRUE; + pending_selection_changed = true; if ( ! pending_timer_id ) pending_timer_id = TQApplication::clipboard()->startTimer( 0 ); - doIt = FALSE; + doIt = false; } else { selectionData()->clear(); } @@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ bool qt_check_selection_sentinel() bool qt_check_clipboard_sentinel() { - bool doIt = TRUE; + bool doIt = true; if (owner) { Window *owners; Atom actualType; @@ -1649,7 +1649,7 @@ bool qt_check_clipboard_sentinel() if (actualType == XA_WINDOW && actualFormat == 32 && nitems == 2) { Window win = owner->winId(); if (owners[0] == win || owners[1] == win) - doIt = FALSE; + doIt = false; } XFree(owners); @@ -1658,10 +1658,10 @@ bool qt_check_clipboard_sentinel() if (doIt) { if ( waiting_for_data ) { - pending_clipboard_changed = TRUE; + pending_clipboard_changed = true; if ( ! pending_timer_id ) pending_timer_id = TQApplication::clipboard()->startTimer( 0 ); - doIt = FALSE; + doIt = false; } else { clipboardData()->clear(); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp b/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp index 142fb408a..ffb0f8fe5 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp @@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ const TQColor & TQt::darkYellow = stdcol[18]; TQColor member functions *****************************************************************************/ -bool TQColor::color_init = FALSE; // color system not initialized -bool TQColor::globals_init = FALSE; // global color not initialized +bool TQColor::color_init = false; // color system not initialized +bool TQColor::globals_init = false; // global color not initialized TQColor::ColorModel TQColor::colormodel = d32; @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ TQColor* TQColor::globalColors() void TQColor::initGlobalColors() { - globals_init = TRUE; + globals_init = true; #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 // HACK: we need a way to recognize color0 and color1 uniquely, so @@ -361,9 +361,9 @@ void TQColor::setPixel( uint pixel ) { switch ( colormodel ) { case d8: - d.d8.direct = TRUE; - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.direct = true; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pixel; break; case d32: @@ -461,8 +461,8 @@ TQColor &TQColor::operator=( const TQColor &c ) /*! \fn bool TQColor::isValid() const - Returns FALSE if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the - default constructor; otherwise returns TRUE. + Returns false if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the + default constructor; otherwise returns true. */ /*! @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ void TQColor::setNamedColor( const TQString &name ) if ( name.isEmpty() ) { d.argb = 0; if ( colormodel == d8 ) { - d.d8.invalid = TRUE; + d.d8.invalid = true; } else { d.d32.argb = Invalid; } @@ -751,9 +751,9 @@ void TQColor::setRgb( int r, int g, int b ) } d.argb = tqRgb( r, g, b ); if ( colormodel == d8 ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.direct = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = TRUE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.direct = false; + d.d8.dirty = true; } else { d.d32.pix = Dirt; } @@ -773,9 +773,9 @@ void TQColor::setRgb( TQRgb rgb ) { d.argb = rgb; if ( colormodel == d8 ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.direct = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = TRUE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.direct = false; + d.d8.dirty = true; } else { d.d32.pix = Dirt; } @@ -876,14 +876,14 @@ TQColor TQColor::dark( int factor ) const /*! \fn bool TQColor::operator==( const TQColor &c ) const - Returns TRUE if this color has the same RGB value as \a c; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this color has the same RGB value as \a c; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQColor::operator!=( const TQColor &c ) const - Returns TRUE if this color has a different RGB value from \a c; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this color has a different RGB value from \a c; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! diff --git a/src/kernel/tqcolor_p.cpp b/src/kernel/tqcolor_p.cpp index 5db0e21be..3d29be385 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqcolor_p.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqcolor_p.cpp @@ -749,9 +749,9 @@ bool qt_get_named_rgb( const char *name, TQRgb* rgb ) free(name_no_space); if ( r ) { *rgb = r->value; - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ TQStringList TQColor::colorNames() bool qt_get_named_rgb( const char *, TQRgb* ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } uint qt_get_rgb_val( const char * ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqcolor_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqcolor_x11.cpp index 77f48037a..2e289cadf 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqcolor_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqcolor_x11.cpp @@ -51,9 +51,9 @@ /***************************************************************************** The color dictionary speeds up color allocation significantly for X11. When there are no more colors, TQColor::alloc() will set the colors_avail - flag to FALSE and try to find the nearest color. + flag to false and try to find the nearest color. NOTE: From deep within the event loop, the colors_avail flag is reset to - TRUE (calls the function qt_reset_color_avail()), because some other + true (calls the function qt_reset_color_avail()), because some other application might free its colors, thereby making them available for this TQt application. *****************************************************************************/ @@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ public: TQColorScreenData() { colorDict = 0; - colors_avail = TRUE; + colors_avail = true; g_vis = 0; g_carr = 0; - g_carr_fetch = TRUE; + g_carr_fetch = true; g_cells = 0; g_our_alloc = 0; - color_reduce = FALSE; + color_reduce = false; } TQColorDict *colorDict; // dict of allocated colors @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ void qt_reset_color_avail() { int i; for ( i = 0; i < screencount; i++ ) { - screendata[i]->colors_avail = TRUE; - screendata[i]->g_carr_fetch = TRUE; // do XQueryColors if !colors_avail + screendata[i]->colors_avail = true; + screendata[i]->g_carr_fetch = true; // do XQueryColors if !colors_avail } } @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ void TQColor::initialize() if ( color_init ) // already initialized return; - color_init = TRUE; + color_init = true; Display *dpy = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(); int spec = TQApplication::colorSpec(); @@ -245,10 +245,10 @@ void TQColor::initialize() TQ_CHECK_PTR( screendata[scr]->g_carr ); memset( screendata[scr]->g_carr, 0, screendata[scr]->g_cells*sizeof(XColor) ); - screendata[scr]->g_carr_fetch = TRUE; // run XQueryColors on demand + screendata[scr]->g_carr_fetch = true; // run XQueryColors on demand screendata[scr]->g_our_alloc = new bool[screendata[scr]->g_cells]; TQ_CHECK_PTR( screendata[scr]->g_our_alloc ); - memset( screendata[scr]->g_our_alloc, FALSE, + memset( screendata[scr]->g_our_alloc, false, screendata[scr]->g_cells*sizeof(bool) ); XColor *xc = &screendata[scr]->g_carr[0]; for ( int i=0; i<screendata[scr]->g_cells; i++ ) { @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ void TQColor::initialize() TQ_CHECK_PTR( screendata[scr]->colorDict ); if ( spec == (int)TQApplication::ManyColor ) { - screendata[scr]->color_reduce = TRUE; + screendata[scr]->color_reduce = true; switch ( qt_ncols_option ) { case 216: @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ void TQColor::initialize() } #if 0 /* 0 == allocate colors on demand */ - setLazyAlloc( FALSE ); // allocate global colors + setLazyAlloc( false ); // allocate global colors ((TQColor*)(&darkGray))-> alloc(); ((TQColor*)(&gray))-> alloc(); ((TQColor*)(&lightGray))-> alloc(); @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ void TQColor::initialize() ((TQColor*)(&darkCyan))-> alloc(); ((TQColor*)(&darkMagenta))-> alloc(); ((TQColor*)(&darkYellow))-> alloc(); - setLazyAlloc( TRUE ); + setLazyAlloc( true ); #endif } @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ void TQColor::cleanup() { if ( !color_init ) return; - color_init = FALSE; + color_init = false; int scr; for ( scr = 0; scr < screencount; scr++ ) { if ( screendata[scr]->g_carr ) { @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ void TQColor::cleanup() screendata[scr]->g_our_alloc = 0; } if ( screendata[scr]->colorDict ) { - screendata[scr]->colorDict->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + screendata[scr]->colorDict->setAutoDelete( true ); screendata[scr]->colorDict->clear(); delete screendata[scr]->colorDict; screendata[scr]->colorDict = 0; @@ -421,12 +421,12 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) if ( c ) { // found color in dictionary pix = c->pix; if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; // color ok - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; // color ok + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; // use same pixel value if ( c->context != current_alloc_context ) { c->context = 0; // convert to default context - sd->g_our_alloc[pix] = TRUE; // reuse without XAllocColor + sd->g_our_alloc[pix] = true; // reuse without XAllocColor } } return pix; @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) col.green = g << 8; col.blue = b << 8; - bool try_again = FALSE; + bool try_again = false; bool try_alloc = !sd->color_reduce; int try_count = 0; @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) // This loop is run until we manage to either allocate or // find an approximate color, it stops after a few iterations. - try_again = FALSE; + try_again = false; if ( try_alloc && sd->colors_avail && XAllocColor(dpy, TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap( screen ),&col) ) { @@ -453,18 +453,18 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) pix = (uint) col.pixel; if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { d.d8.pix = pix; - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; sd->g_carr[d.d8.pix] = col; // update color array if ( current_alloc_context == 0 ) - sd->g_our_alloc[d.d8.pix] = TRUE; // reuse without XAllocColor + sd->g_our_alloc[d.d8.pix] = true; // reuse without XAllocColor } } else { // No available colors, or we did not want to allocate one int i; - sd->colors_avail = FALSE; // no more available colors + sd->colors_avail = false; // no more available colors if ( sd->g_carr_fetch ) { // refetch color array - sd->g_carr_fetch = FALSE; + sd->g_carr_fetch = false; XQueryColors( dpy, TQPaintDevice::x11AppColormap( screen ), sd->g_carr, sd->g_cells ); } @@ -488,9 +488,9 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) col.red = r << 8; col.green = g << 8; col.blue = b << 8; - try_alloc = TRUE; - try_again = TRUE; - sd->colors_avail = TRUE; + try_alloc = true; + try_again = true; + sd->colors_avail = true; continue; // Try alloc reduced color } } @@ -502,16 +502,16 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) d.argb = tqRgb(0,0,0); pix = (uint)BlackPixel( dpy, screen ); if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; } } else { // light, use white d.argb = tqRgb(0xff,0xff,0xff); pix = (uint)WhitePixel( dpy, screen ); if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; } } @@ -527,21 +527,21 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) sd->g_carr[i] = col; // update color array if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { if ( current_alloc_context == 0 ) - sd->g_our_alloc[i] = TRUE; // only in the default context + sd->g_our_alloc[i] = true; // only in the default context } } else { // Oops, it's gone again try_count++; - try_again = TRUE; - sd->colors_avail = TRUE; - sd->g_carr_fetch = TRUE; + try_again = true; + sd->colors_avail = true; + sd->g_carr_fetch = true; } } if ( !try_again ) { // got it pix = (uint)sd->g_carr[i].pixel; if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; // allocated X11 color } } @@ -556,16 +556,16 @@ uint TQColor::alloc( int screen ) d.argb = tqRgb(0,0,0); pix = (uint)BlackPixel( dpy, screen ); if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; } } else { // light, use white d.argb = tqRgb(0xff,0xff,0xff); pix = (uint)WhitePixel( dpy, screen ); if ( screen == TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen() ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = FALSE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = false; d.d8.pix = pix; } } @@ -638,8 +638,8 @@ void TQColor::setSystemNamedColor( const TQString& name ) if ( qt_get_named_rgb( name.latin1(), &rgb ) ) { setRgb( tqRed(rgb), tqGreen(rgb), tqBlue(rgb) ); if ( colormodel == d8 ) { - d.d8.invalid = FALSE; - d.d8.dirty = TRUE; + d.d8.invalid = false; + d.d8.dirty = true; d.d8.pix = 0; } else { alloc(); @@ -671,9 +671,9 @@ static int context_ptr = 0; static void init_context_stack() { - static bool did_init = FALSE; + static bool did_init = false; if ( !did_init ) { - did_init = TRUE; + did_init = true; context_stack[0] = current_alloc_context = 0; } } @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ void TQColor::destroyAllocContext( int context ) ulong pixels[256]; bool freeing[256]; - memset( freeing, FALSE, screendata[screen]->g_cells*sizeof(bool) ); + memset( freeing, false, screendata[screen]->g_cells*sizeof(bool) ); TQColorData *d; TQColorDictIt it( *screendata[screen]->colorDict ); int i = 0; @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ void TQColor::destroyAllocContext( int context ) if ( !screendata[screen]->g_our_alloc[d->pix] && !freeing[d->pix] ) { // will free this color pixels[i++] = d->pix; - freeing[d->pix] = TRUE; + freeing[d->pix] = true; } // remove from dict screendata[screen]->colorDict->remove( (long)rgbv ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp index 6a66e3cda..2ff9bad05 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ TQCursor *TQCursor::find_cur( int shape ) // find predefined cursor } -static bool initialized = FALSE; +static bool initialized = false; /*! Internal function that deinitializes the predefined cursors. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ void TQCursor::cleanup() delete cursorTable[shape].data; cursorTable[shape].data = 0; } - initialized = FALSE; + initialized = false; } @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ void TQCursor::initialize() int shape; for( shape = 0; shape <= LastCursor; shape++ ) cursorTable[shape].data = new TQCursorData( shape ); - initialized = TRUE; + initialized = true; tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdesktopwidget_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqdesktopwidget_x11.cpp index 35d021c51..ed17b48e4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdesktopwidget_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqdesktopwidget_x11.cpp @@ -50,10 +50,10 @@ extern Atom qt_net_workarea; extern bool qt_net_supports(Atom atom); // function to update the workarea of the screen -static bool qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = TRUE; +static bool qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = true; void qt_desktopwidget_update_workarea() { - qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = TRUE; + qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = true; } @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ public: }; TQDesktopWidgetPrivate::TQDesktopWidgetPrivate() - : use_xinerama(FALSE), defaultScreen(0), screenCount(1), + : use_xinerama(false), defaultScreen(0), screenCount(1), screens( 0 ), rects( 0 ), workareas( 0 ) { } @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ const TQRect& TQDesktopWidget::availableGeometry( int screen ) const // the workareas are dirty, invalidate them for ( int i = 0; i < d->screenCount; ++i ) d->workareas[i] = TQRect(); - qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = FALSE; + qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = false; } if ( screen < 0 || screen >= d->screenCount ) @@ -351,6 +351,6 @@ int TQDesktopWidget::screenNumber( const TQPoint &point ) const void TQDesktopWidget::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *event ) { d->init(); - qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = TRUE; + qt_desktopwidget_workarea_dirty = true; TQWidget::resizeEvent( event ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp b/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp index 04b9f43a1..7cb9c09aa 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp @@ -279,9 +279,9 @@ TQDragManager::TQDragManager() dropWidget = 0; if ( !qt_dnd_manager ) qt_dnd_manager = this; - beingCancelled = FALSE; - restoreCursor = FALSE; - willDrop = FALSE; + beingCancelled = false; + restoreCursor = false; + willDrop = false; } @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ TQDragObject::~TQDragObject() { #ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP if ( qt_dnd_manager && qt_dnd_manager->object == this ) - qt_dnd_manager->cancel( FALSE ); + qt_dnd_manager->cancel( false ); if ( d->pm_cursor ) { for ( int i = 0; i < qt_dnd_manager->n_cursor; i++ ) qt_dnd_manager->pm_cursor[i] = d->pm_cursor[i]; @@ -455,9 +455,9 @@ TQPixmap *TQDragObject::cursor( DragMode m ) const Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using DragDefault mode. - The function returns TRUE if the caller should delete the original + The function returns true if the caller should delete the original copy of the dragged data (but see target()); otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. If the drag contains \e references to information (e.g. file names in a TQUriDrag are references) then the return value should always @@ -535,10 +535,10 @@ void TQDragObject::dragLink() will be done during future event processing - after that time the drag object will be deleted. - Returns TRUE if the dragged data was dragged as a \e move, + Returns true if the dragged data was dragged as a \e move, indicating that the caller should remove the original source of the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. The \a mode specifies the drag mode (see \l{TQDragObject::DragMode}.) Normally one of the simpler drag(), @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ bool TQDragObject::drag( DragMode mode ) if ( qt_dnd_manager ) return qt_dnd_manager->drag( this, mode ); else - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -786,11 +786,11 @@ static TQTextCodec *codecForHTML(const TQCString &ba) mib = 106; // utf-8 } else { pos = 0; - while ((pos = ba.find("<meta http-equiv=", pos, FALSE)) != -1) { + while ((pos = ba.find("<meta http-equiv=", pos, false)) != -1) { int end = ba.find('>', pos+1); if (end == -1) break; - pos = ba.find("charset=", pos, FALSE) + (int)strlen("charset="); + pos = ba.find("charset=", pos, false) + (int)strlen("charset="); if (pos != -1 && pos < end) { int pos2 = ba.find('\"', pos+1); TQCString cs = ba.mid(pos, pos2-pos); @@ -863,8 +863,8 @@ TQByteArray TQTextDrag::encodedData(const char* mime) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the information in \a e can be decoded into a - TQString; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the information in \a e can be decoded into a + TQString; otherwise returns false. \sa decode() */ @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ bool TQTextDrag::canDecode( const TQMimeSource* e ) \overload Attempts to decode the dropped information in \a e into \a str. - Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If \a subtype + Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. If \a subtype is null, any text subtype is accepted; otherwise only the specified \a subtype is accepted. @@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ bool TQTextDrag::canDecode( const TQMimeSource* e ) bool TQTextDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQString& str, TQCString& subtype ) { if(!e) - return FALSE; + return false; // when subtype is not specified, try text/plain first, otherwise this may read // things like text/x-moz-url even though better targets are available @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ bool TQTextDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQString& str, TQCString& subtyp if ( e->cacheType == TQMimeSource::Text ) { str = *e->cache.txt.str; subtype = *e->cache.txt.subtype; - return TRUE; + return true; } const char* mime; @@ -955,18 +955,18 @@ bool TQTextDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQString& str, TQCString& subtyp m->cache.txt.str = new TQString( str ); m->cache.txt.subtype = new TQCString( subtype ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } } } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Attempts to decode the dropped information in \a e into \a str. - Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. \sa canDecode() */ @@ -1104,8 +1104,8 @@ TQByteArray TQImageDrag::encodedData(const char* fmt) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the information in mime source \a e can be decoded - into an image; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the information in mime source \a e can be decoded + into an image; otherwise returns false. \sa decode() */ @@ -1117,26 +1117,26 @@ bool TQImageDrag::canDecode( const TQMimeSource* e ) { TQCString format = fileFormats.current(); TQCString type = "image/" + format.lower(); if ( e->provides(type.data())) - return TRUE; + return true; fileFormats.next(); } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \a e - into \a img. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + into \a img. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. \sa canDecode() */ bool TQImageDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQImage& img ) { if ( !e ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( e->cacheType == TQMimeSource::Graphics ) { img = *e->cache.gfx.img; - return TRUE; + return true; } TQByteArray payload; @@ -1157,25 +1157,25 @@ bool TQImageDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQImage& img ) } if ( payload.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; img.loadFromData(payload); if ( img.isNull() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQMimeSource *m = (TQMimeSource*)e; m->clearCache(); m->cacheType = TQMimeSource::Graphics; m->cache.gfx.img = new TQImage( img ); m->cache.gfx.pix = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \overload Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \a e - into pixmap \a pm. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns - FALSE. + into pixmap \a pm. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns + false. This is a convenience function that converts to a TQPixmap via a TQImage. @@ -1185,25 +1185,25 @@ bool TQImageDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQImage& img ) bool TQImageDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQPixmap& pm ) { if ( !e ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( e->cacheType == TQMimeSource::Graphics && e->cache.gfx.pix) { pm = *e->cache.gfx.pix; - return TRUE; + return true; } TQImage img; // We avoid dither, since the image probably came from this display if ( decode( e, img ) ) { if ( !pm.convertFromImage( img, AvoidDither ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; // decode initialized the cache for us TQMimeSource *m = (TQMimeSource*)e; m->cache.gfx.pix = new TQPixmap( pm ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1363,8 +1363,8 @@ void TQUriDrag::setUris( TQStrList uris ) /*! - Returns TRUE if decode() would be able to decode \a e; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if decode() would be able to decode \a e; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQUriDrag::canDecode( const TQMimeSource* e ) { @@ -1375,15 +1375,15 @@ bool TQUriDrag::canDecode( const TQMimeSource* e ) Decodes URIs from \a e, placing the result in \a l (which is first cleared). - Returns TRUE if \a e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQUriDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStrList& l ) { TQByteArray payload = e->encodedData( "text/uri-list" ); if ( payload.size() ) { l.clear(); - l.setAutoDelete(TRUE); + l.setAutoDelete(true); uint c=0; const char* d = payload.data(); while (c < payload.size() && d[c]) { @@ -1400,9 +1400,9 @@ bool TQUriDrag::decode( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStrList& l ) (d[c]=='\n' || d[c]=='\r')) c++; } - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } static uint htod( int h ) @@ -1511,11 +1511,11 @@ TQCString TQUriDrag::localFileToUri(const TQString& filename) #ifdef TQ_WS_WIN - bool hasHost = FALSE; + bool hasHost = false; // convert form network path if (r.left(2) == "\\\\" || r.left(2) == "//") { r.remove(0, 2); - hasHost = TRUE; + hasHost = true; } // Slosh -> Slash @@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ TQString TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile(const char* uri) hostname[ 256 ] = '\0'; if ( tqstrncmp( uri+1, hostname, hostname_end - ( uri+1 )) == 0 ) { uri = hostname_end + 1; // point after the slash - local = TRUE; + local = true; } } } @@ -1644,14 +1644,14 @@ TQString TQUriDrag::uriToLocalFile(const char* uri) local files if they refer to local files, and places them in \a l (which is first cleared). - Returns TRUE if \e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise - returns FALSE. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files. + Returns true if \e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise + returns false. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files. */ bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStringList& l ) { TQStrList u; if ( !decode( e, u ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; l.clear(); for (const char* s=u.first(); s; s=u.next()) { @@ -1659,7 +1659,7 @@ bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStringList& l ) if ( !lf.isNull() ) l.append( lf ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1667,20 +1667,20 @@ bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStringList& l ) Unicode URIs (only useful for displaying to humans), placing them in \a l (which is first cleared). - Returns TRUE if \e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if \e contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQUriDrag::decodeToUnicodeUris( const TQMimeSource* e, TQStringList& l ) { TQStrList u; if ( !decode( e, u ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; l.clear(); for (const char* s=u.first(); s; s=u.next()) l.append( uriToUnicodeUri(s) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1768,8 +1768,8 @@ void TQColorDrag::setColor( const TQColor &col ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the color drag object can decode the mime source - \a e; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the color drag object can decode the mime source + \a e; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQColorDrag::canDecode( TQMimeSource *e ) @@ -1787,7 +1787,7 @@ bool TQColorDrag::decode( TQMimeSource *e, TQColor &col ) TQByteArray data = e->encodedData("application/x-color"); ushort rgba[4]; if (data.size() != sizeof(rgba)) - return FALSE; + return false; memcpy(rgba, data.data(), sizeof(rgba)); @@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ bool TQColorDrag::decode( TQMimeSource *e, TQColor &col ) b = (b >> 8) & 0xff; col.setRgb(r, g, b); - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif // TQT_NO_MIME diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdragobject.h b/src/kernel/tqdragobject.h index 568e0cbd8..a06e5ca2c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdragobject.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqdragobject.h @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ private: bool drag( TQDragObject *, TQDragObject::DragMode ); - void cancel( bool deleteSource = TRUE ); + void cancel( bool deleteSource = true ); void move( const TQPoint & ); void drop(); void updatePixmap(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp b/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp index 79aa69378..a05908895 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp @@ -60,8 +60,8 @@ TQColorGroup::light() light\endlink, \link TQColorGroup::dark() dark\endlink and \link TQColorGroup::mid() middle\endlink colors). - The line appears sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, or raised if \a - sunken is FALSE. + The line appears sunken if \a sunken is true, or raised if \a + sunken is false. The \a lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width. @@ -175,8 +175,8 @@ void qDrawShadeLine( TQPainter *p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, TQColorGroup::light() light\endlink, \link TQColorGroup::dark() dark\endlink and \link TQColorGroup::mid() middle\endlink colors). - The rectangle appears sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, or raised if \a - sunken is FALSE. + The rectangle appears sunken if \a sunken is true, or raised if \a + sunken is false. The \a lineWidth argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width. @@ -281,8 +281,8 @@ void qDrawShadeRect( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, TQColorGroup::light() light\endlink, \link TQColorGroup::dark() dark\endlink and \link TQColorGroup::mid() middle\endlink colors). - The panel appears sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, or raised if \a - sunken is FALSE. + The panel appears sunken if \a sunken is true, or raised if \a + sunken is false. The \a lineWidth argument specifies the line width. @@ -436,8 +436,8 @@ static void qDrawWinShades( TQPainter *p, TQColorGroup::light() light\endlink, \link TQColorGroup::dark() dark\endlink and \link TQColorGroup::mid() middle\endlink colors). - The button appears sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, or raised if \a - sunken is FALSE. + The button appears sunken if \a sunken is true, or raised if \a + sunken is false. The line width is 2 pixels. @@ -473,8 +473,8 @@ void qDrawWinButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, The color group argument \a g specifies the shading colors. - The panel appears sunken if \a sunken is TRUE, or raised if \a - sunken is FALSE. + The panel appears sunken if \a sunken is true, or raised if \a + sunken is false. The line width is 2 pixels. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ void qDrawItem( TQPainter *p, TQt::GUIStyle gs, bool clip = (flags & TQt::DontClip) == 0; if ( clip ) { if ( pm.width() < w && pm.height() < h ) - clip = FALSE; + clip = false; else p->setClipRect( x, y, w, h ); } @@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ void qDrawItem( TQPainter *p, TQt::GUIStyle gs, TQString k; k.sprintf( "$qt-drawitem-%x", pm.serialNumber() ); TQPixmap *mask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); - bool del=FALSE; + bool del=false; if ( !mask ) { mask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); mask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)mask) ); @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ void qDrawItem( TQPainter *p, TQt::GUIStyle gs, } p->drawPixmap( x, y, pm ); if ( clip ) - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } else if ( !text.isNull() ) { if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle && !enabled ) { p->setPen( g.light() ); @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ static void qDrawMotifArrow( TQPainter *p, TQt::ArrowType type, bool down, p->setPen( pen ); p->setBrush( brush ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS - p->setWorldMatrix( matrix, TRUE ); // set transformation matrix + p->setWorldMatrix( matrix, true ); // set transformation matrix #endif p->drawPolygon( bFill ); // fill arrow p->setBrush( TQt::NoBrush ); // don't fill diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.h b/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.h index 113d6095f..78ffc0ac8 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.h @@ -59,45 +59,45 @@ class TQPixmap; // TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeLine( TQPainter *p, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = TRUE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = true, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeLine( TQPainter *p, const TQPoint &p1, const TQPoint &p2, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = TRUE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = true, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeRect( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadeRect( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, int midLineWidth = 0, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadePanel( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawShadePanel( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, int lineWidth = 1, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinButton( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinPanel( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawWinPanel( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, - const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &, bool sunken=false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); TQ_EXPORT void qDrawPlainRect( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor &, diff --git a/src/kernel/tqdropsite.cpp b/src/kernel/tqdropsite.cpp index b544cdab3..49e328c95 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqdropsite.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqdropsite.cpp @@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ Constructs a TQDropSite to handle events for the widget \a self. Pass \c this as the \a self parameter. - This enables dropping by calling TQWidget::setAcceptDrops(TRUE). + This enables dropping by calling TQWidget::setAcceptDrops(true). */ TQDropSite::TQDropSite( TQWidget* self ) { - self->setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + self->setAcceptDrops( true ); } /*! diff --git a/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp b/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp index fc59d9164..d1cf09fe9 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ and sends the translated events to TQObjects. In general, events come from the underlying window system - (spontaneous() returns TRUE) but it is also possible to manually + (spontaneous() returns true) but it is also possible to manually send events using TQApplication::sendEvent() and - TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns FALSE). + TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns false). TQObjects receive events by having their TQObject::event() function called. The function can be reimplemented in subclasses to @@ -207,8 +207,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQEvent::spontaneous() const - Returns TRUE if the event originated outside the application, i.e. - it is a system event; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the event originated outside the application, i.e. + it is a system event; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ */ TQMouseEvent::TQMouseEvent( Type type, const TQPoint &pos, int button, int state ) - : TQEvent(type), p(pos), b(button),s((ushort)state), accpt(TRUE){ + : TQEvent(type), p(pos), b(button),s((ushort)state), accpt(true){ g = TQCursor::pos(); } @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQMouseEvent::stateAfter() const /*! \fn bool TQMouseEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQMouseEvent::stateAfter() const #ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient ) : TQEvent(Wheel), p(pos), d(delta), s((ushort)state), - accpt(TRUE), o(orient) + accpt(true), o(orient) { g = TQCursor::pos(); } @@ -636,8 +636,8 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio /*! \fn bool TQWheelEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -720,10 +720,10 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio keyboard macro). \a ascii is the ASCII code of the key that was pressed or released. \a state holds the keyboard modifiers. \a text is the Unicode text that the key generated. If \a autorep is - TRUE, isAutoRepeat() will be TRUE. \a count is the number of + true, isAutoRepeat() will be true. \a count is the number of single keys. - The accept flag is set to TRUE. + The accept flag is set to true. */ /*! @@ -804,8 +804,8 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter() const /*! \fn bool TQKeyEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; - otherwise returns FALSE + Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; + otherwise returns false */ /*! @@ -825,12 +825,12 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter() const /*! \fn bool TQKeyEvent::isAutoRepeat() const - Returns TRUE if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and - FALSE if it comes from an initial key press. + Returns true if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and + false if it comes from an initial key press. Note that if the event is a multiple-key compressed event that is - partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either TRUE - or FALSE indeterminately. + partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either true + or false indeterminately. */ /*! @@ -1251,15 +1251,15 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() /*! \fn bool TQFocusEvent::gotFocus() const - Returns TRUE if the widget received the text input focus; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget received the text input focus; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQFocusEvent::lostFocus() const - Returns TRUE if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise + returns false. */ @@ -1279,9 +1279,9 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() rect() can be much faster than region().boundingRect(). Painting is clipped to region() during processing of a paint event. - The erased() function returns TRUE if the region() has been + The erased() function returns true if the region() has been cleared to the widget's background (see - TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and FALSE if the region's contents are + TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and false if the region's contents are arbitrary. \sa TQPainter TQWidget::update() TQWidget::repaint() @@ -1289,27 +1289,27 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() */ /*! - \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, bool erased=TRUE ) + \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, bool erased=true ) Constructs a paint event object with the region that should be updated. The region is given by \a paintRegion. If \a erased is - TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. + true the region will be cleared before repainting. */ /*! - \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased=TRUE ) + \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased=true ) Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that should be updated. The region is also given by \a paintRect. If \a erased is - TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. + true the region will be cleared before repainting. */ /*! - \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased=TRUE ) + \fn TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased=true ) Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle \a paintRect that should be updated. The region is given by \a paintRegion. If - \a erased is TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting. + \a erased is true the region will be cleared before repainting. */ /*! @@ -1331,8 +1331,8 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() /*! \fn bool TQPaintEvent::erased() const - Returns TRUE if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been - erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been + erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -1448,7 +1448,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() If the last top-level window is closed, the TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted. - The isAccepted() function returns TRUE if the event's receiver has + The isAccepted() function returns true if the event's receiver has agreed to close the widget; call accept() to agree to close the widget and call ignore() if the receiver of this event does not want the widget to be closed. @@ -1462,7 +1462,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() \fn TQCloseEvent::TQCloseEvent() Constructs a close event object with the accept parameter flag set - to FALSE. + to false. \sa accept() */ @@ -1470,8 +1470,8 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() /*! \fn bool TQCloseEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the - widget; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the + widget; otherwise returns false. \sa accept(), ignore() */ @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() \fn TQIconDragEvent::TQIconDragEvent() Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept parameter - flag set to FALSE. + flag set to false. \sa accept() */ @@ -1529,8 +1529,8 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() /*! \fn bool TQIconDragEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has started a drag and - drop operation; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event has started a drag and + drop operation; otherwise returns false. \sa accept(), ignore() */ @@ -1587,7 +1587,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() \fn TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalPos, int state ) Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter - flag set to FALSE. + flag set to false. The \a reason parameter must be \c TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse or \c TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard. @@ -1602,7 +1602,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() \fn TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int state ) Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter - flag set to FALSE. + flag set to false. The \a reason parameter must be \c TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse or \c TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() */ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int state ) - : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), accpt(TRUE), consum(TRUE), + : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), accpt(true), consum(true), reas( reason ), s((ushort)state) { gp = TQCursor::pos(); @@ -1691,8 +1691,8 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s /*! \fn bool TQContextMenuEvent::isConsumed() const - Returns TRUE (which stops propagation of the event) if the - receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true (which stops propagation of the event) if the + receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns false. \sa accept(), ignore(), consume() */ @@ -1714,8 +1714,8 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s /*! \fn bool TQContextMenuEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise + returns false. \sa accept(), ignore(), consume() */ @@ -1847,7 +1847,7 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s /*! \fn TQIMEvent::TQIMEvent( Type type, const TQString &text, int cursorPosition ) - Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to FALSE. \a + Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to false. \a type can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent or TQEvent::IMEndEvent. \a text contains the current compostion string and \a cursorPosition the current position of the cursor @@ -1881,8 +1881,8 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s /*! \fn bool TQIMEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event processed the event; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event processed the event; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -1988,7 +1988,7 @@ TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent( Type t, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalP mYT( yTilt ), mType( uId.first ), mPhy( uId.second ), - mbAcc(TRUE) + mbAcc(true) {} /*! @@ -2110,8 +2110,8 @@ TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent( Type t, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalP /*! \fn bool TQTabletEvent::isAccepted() const - Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the tablet - event; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the tablet + event; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -2196,14 +2196,14 @@ TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent( Type t, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalP /*! \fn bool TQChildEvent::inserted() const - Returns TRUE if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! \fn bool TQChildEvent::removed() const - Returns TRUE if the object lost a child; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the object lost a child; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -2357,16 +2357,16 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) /*! \fn bool TQDropEvent::isAccepted () const - Returns TRUE if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise + returns false. */ /*! - \fn void TQDropEvent::accept(bool y=TRUE) + \fn void TQDropEvent::accept(bool y=true) Call this function to indicate whether the event provided data - which your widget processed. Set \a y to TRUE (the default) if - your widget could process the data, otherwise set \a y to FALSE. + which your widget processed. Set \a y to true (the default) if + your widget could process the data, otherwise set \a y to false. To get the data, use encodedData(), or preferably, the decode() methods of existing TQDragObject subclasses, such as TQTextDrag::decode(), or your own subclasses. @@ -2375,12 +2375,12 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) */ /*! - \fn void TQDropEvent::acceptAction(bool y=TRUE) + \fn void TQDropEvent::acceptAction(bool y=true) Call this to indicate that the action described by action() is - accepted (i.e. if \a y is TRUE, which is the default), not merely - the default copy action. If you call acceptAction(TRUE), there is - no need to also call accept(TRUE). + accepted (i.e. if \a y is true, which is the default), not merely + the default copy action. If you call acceptAction(true), there is + no need to also call accept(true). */ /*! @@ -2448,8 +2448,8 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) /*! \fn bool TQDropEvent::isActionAccepted () const - Returns TRUE if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; + otherwise returns false. */ @@ -2518,12 +2518,12 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) This event is sent just before TQWidget::hide() returns, and also when a top-level window has been hidden (iconified) by the user. - If spontaneous() is TRUE the event originated outside the + If spontaneous() is true the event originated outside the application, i.e. the user hid the window using the window manager controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified, - TQWidget::isMinimized() returns TRUE. + TQWidget::isMinimized() returns true. \sa TQShowEvent */ diff --git a/src/kernel/tqevent.h b/src/kernel/tqevent.h index 6011dd35e..96205c0a7 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqevent.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqevent.h @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ public: }; - TQEvent( Type type ) : t(type), posted(FALSE), spont(FALSE) {} + TQEvent( Type type ) : t(type), posted(false), spont(false) {} virtual ~TQEvent(); Type type() const { return t; } bool spontaneous() const { return spont; } @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ public: TQMouseEvent( Type type, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint&globalPos, int button, int state ) - : TQEvent(type), p(pos), g(globalPos), b((ushort)button),s((ushort)state),accpt(TRUE) {}; + : TQEvent(type), p(pos), g(globalPos), b((ushort)button),s((ushort)state),accpt(true) {}; const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } const TQPoint &globalPos() const { return g; } @@ -192,8 +192,8 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return (ButtonState) s; } ButtonState stateAfter() const; bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQPoint p; TQPoint g; @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ public: TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical ); TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint& globalPos, int delta, int state, Orientation orient = Vertical ) : TQEvent(Wheel), p(pos), g(globalPos), d(delta), s((ushort)state), - accpt(TRUE), o(orient) {} + accpt(true), o(orient) {} int delta() const { return d; } const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } const TQPoint &globalPos() const { return g; } @@ -221,8 +221,8 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return ButtonState(s); } Orientation orientation() const { return o; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQPoint p; TQPoint g; @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ public: int pressure, int xTilt, int yTilt, const TQPair<int,int> &uId ) : TQEvent( TabletMove ), mPos( pos ), mGPos( globalPos ), mDev( device ), mPress( pressure ), mXT( xTilt ), mYT( yTilt ), mType( uId.first ), - mPhy( uId.second ), mbAcc(TRUE) + mPhy( uId.second ), mbAcc(true) {} int pressure() const { return mPress; } int xTilt() const { return mXT; } @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ public: int globalY() const { return mGPos.y(); } TabletDevice device() const { return TabletDevice(mDev); } int isAccepted() const { return mbAcc; } - void accept() { mbAcc = TRUE; } - void ignore() { mbAcc = FALSE; } + void accept() { mbAcc = true; } + void ignore() { mbAcc = false; } TQPair<int,int> uniqueId() { return TQPair<int,int>( mType, mPhy); } protected: TQPoint mPos; @@ -276,12 +276,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQKeyEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQKeyEvent( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, - const TQString& text=TQString::null, bool autorep=FALSE, ushort count=1 ) + const TQString& text=TQString::null, bool autorep=false, ushort count=1 ) : TQEvent(type), txt(text), k((ushort)key), s((ushort)state), - a((uchar)ascii), accpt(TRUE), autor(autorep), c(count) + a((uchar)ascii), accpt(true), autor(autorep), c(count) { if ( key >= Key_Back && key <= Key_MediaLast ) - accpt = FALSE; + accpt = false; } int key() const { return k; } int ascii() const { return a; } @@ -291,8 +291,8 @@ public: TQString text() const { return txt; } bool isAutoRepeat() const { return autor; } int count() const { return int(c); } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: TQString txt; @@ -328,17 +328,17 @@ private: class TQ_EXPORT TQPaintEvent : public TQEvent { public: - TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion& paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion& paintRegion, bool erased = true) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRegion.boundingRect()), reg(paintRegion), erase(erased){} - TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = true ) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRect), reg(paintRect), erase(erased){} - TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = TRUE ) + TQPaintEvent( const TQRegion &paintRegion, const TQRect &paintRect, bool erased = true ) : TQEvent(Paint), rec(paintRect), reg(paintRegion), @@ -388,10 +388,10 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQCloseEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQCloseEvent() - : TQEvent(Close), accpt(FALSE) {} + : TQEvent(Close), accpt(false) {} bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: bool accpt; }; @@ -401,11 +401,11 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQIconDragEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQIconDragEvent() - : TQEvent(IconDrag), accpt(FALSE) {} + : TQEvent(IconDrag), accpt(false) {} bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept() { accpt = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } protected: bool accpt; }; @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQContextMenuEvent : public TQEvent public: enum Reason { Mouse, Keyboard, Other }; TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalPos, int state ) - : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), gp( globalPos ), accpt( TRUE ), consum( TRUE ), + : TQEvent( ContextMenu ), p( pos ), gp( globalPos ), accpt( true ), consum( true ), reas( reason ), s((ushort)state) {} TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int state ); @@ -445,9 +445,9 @@ public: ButtonState state() const { return (ButtonState) s; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt; } bool isConsumed() const { return consum; } - void consume() { accpt = FALSE; consum = TRUE; } - void accept() { accpt = TRUE; consum = TRUE; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; consum = FALSE; } + void consume() { accpt = false; consum = true; } + void accept() { accpt = true; consum = true; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; consum = false; } Reason reason() const { return Reason( reas ); } @@ -465,12 +465,12 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQIMEvent : public TQEvent { public: TQIMEvent( Type type, const TQString &text, int cursorPosition ) - : TQEvent(type), txt(text), cpos(cursorPosition), a(TRUE) {} + : TQEvent(type), txt(text), cpos(cursorPosition), a(true) {} const TQString &text() const { return txt; } int cursorPos() const { return cpos; } bool isAccepted() const { return a; } - void accept() { a = TRUE; } - void ignore() { a = FALSE; } + void accept() { a = true; } + void ignore() { a = false; } int selectionLength() const; private: @@ -516,11 +516,11 @@ public: {} const TQPoint &pos() const { return p; } bool isAccepted() const { return accpt || accptact; } - void accept(bool y=TRUE) { accpt = y; } - void ignore() { accpt = FALSE; } + void accept(bool y=true) { accpt = y; } + void ignore() { accpt = false; } bool isActionAccepted() const { return accptact; } - void acceptAction(bool y=TRUE) { accptact = y; } + void acceptAction(bool y=true) { accptact = y; } enum Action { Copy, Link, Move, Private, UserAction=100 }; void setAction( Action a ) { act = (uint)a; } Action action() const { return Action(act); } @@ -552,9 +552,9 @@ public: : TQDropEvent(pos,typ), rect( pos, TQSize( 1, 1 ) ) {} TQRect answerRect() const { return rect; } - void accept( bool y=TRUE ) { TQDropEvent::accept(y); } - void accept( const TQRect & r) { accpt = TRUE; rect = r; } - void ignore( const TQRect & r) { accpt =FALSE; rect = r; } + void accept( bool y=true ) { TQDropEvent::accept(y); } + void accept( const TQRect & r) { accpt = true; rect = r; } + void ignore( const TQRect & r) { accpt =false; rect = r; } void ignore() { TQDropEvent::ignore(); } protected: diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp b/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp index 6d6c6c5c2..9b3d3cb2b 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp @@ -176,9 +176,9 @@ int TQEventLoop::exec() // cleanup d->looplevel = 0; - d->quitnow = FALSE; - d->exitloop = FALSE; - d->shortcut = FALSE; + d->quitnow = false; + d->exitloop = false; + d->shortcut = false; // don't reset quitcode! return d->quitcode; @@ -205,9 +205,9 @@ void TQEventLoop::exit( int retcode ) if ( d->quitnow ) // preserve existing quitcode return; d->quitcode = retcode; - d->quitnow = TRUE; - d->exitloop = TRUE; - d->shortcut = TRUE; + d->quitnow = true; + d->exitloop = true; + d->shortcut = true; } @@ -220,8 +220,8 @@ int TQEventLoop::enterLoop() { // save the current exitloop state bool old_exitloop = d->exitloop; - d->exitloop = FALSE; - d->shortcut = FALSE; + d->exitloop = false; + d->shortcut = false; d->looplevel++; while ( ! d->exitloop ) { @@ -229,15 +229,15 @@ int TQEventLoop::enterLoop() } d->looplevel--; - // restore the exitloop state, but if quitnow is TRUE, we need to keep + // restore the exitloop state, but if quitnow is true, we need to keep // exitloop set so that all other event loops drop out. d->exitloop = old_exitloop || d->quitnow; d->shortcut = d->quitnow; if ( d->looplevel < 1 ) { - d->quitnow = FALSE; - d->exitloop = FALSE; - d->shortcut = FALSE; + d->quitnow = false; + d->exitloop = false; + d->shortcut = false; emit tqApp->aboutToQuit(); // send deferred deletes @@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ int TQEventLoop::enterLoop() */ void TQEventLoop::exitLoop() { - d->exitloop = TRUE; - d->shortcut = TRUE; + d->exitloop = true; + d->shortcut = true; } /*! \fn void TQEventLoop::loopLevel() const @@ -323,15 +323,15 @@ void TQEventLoop::processEvents( ProcessEventsFlags flags, int maxTime ) NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it returns after all available events are processed. - This function returns TRUE if an event was processed; otherwise it - returns FALSE. + This function returns true if an event was processed; otherwise it + returns false. \sa ProcessEvents hasPendingEvents() */ /*! \fn bool TQEventLoop::hasPendingEvents() const - Returns TRUE if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns FALSE. + Returns true if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns false. */ /*! \fn void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier( TQSocketNotifier *notifier ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_p.h b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_p.h index 395d90a85..c996b73b4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_p.h @@ -108,9 +108,9 @@ public: void reset() { looplevel = 0; quitcode = 0; - quitnow = FALSE; - exitloop = FALSE; - shortcut = FALSE; + quitnow = false; + exitloop = false; + shortcut = false; } int looplevel; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix.cpp index fc0a0b48b..00bb78ae3 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix.cpp @@ -67,14 +67,14 @@ Arguments: int timerId timer identifier Returns: - bool TRUE if successful + bool true if successful qKillTimer( obj ) Stops all timers that are sent to the specified object. Arguments: TQObject *obj object receiving timer events Returns: - bool TRUE if successful + bool true if successful *****************************************************************************/ // @@ -232,14 +232,14 @@ static void repairTimer( const timeval &time ) // repair broken timer timeval *qt_wait_timer() { static timeval tm; - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; timeval currentTime; if ( timerList && timerList->count() ) { // there are waiting timers getTime( currentTime ); if ( first ) { if ( currentTime < watchtime ) // clock was turned back repairTimer( currentTime ); - first = FALSE; + first = false; watchtime = currentTime; } TimerInfo *t = timerList->first(); // first waiting timer @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ static void initTimers() // initialize timers timerBitVec->clearBit( i ); timerList = new TimerList; TQ_CHECK_PTR( timerList ); - timerList->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + timerList->setAutoDelete( true ); gettimeofday( &watchtime, 0 ); } @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( int id ) TimerInfo *t; if ( !timerList || id <= 0 || id > (int)timerBitVec->size() || !timerBitVec->testBit( id-1 ) ) - return FALSE; // not init'd or invalid timer + return false; // not init'd or invalid timer t = timerList->first(); while ( t && t->id != id ) // find timer info in list t = timerList->next(); @@ -320,14 +320,14 @@ bool qKillTimer( int id ) return timerList->remove(); } else // id not found - return FALSE; + return false; } bool qKillTimer( TQObject *obj ) { TimerInfo *t; if ( !timerList ) // not initialized - return FALSE; + return false; t = timerList->first(); while ( t ) { // check all timers if ( t->obj == obj ) { // object found @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( TQObject *obj ) t = timerList->next(); } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /***************************************************************************** @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier( TQSocketNotifier *notifier ) // create new list, the TQSockNotType destructor will delete it for us list = new TQPtrList<TQSockNot>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( list ); - list->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + list->setAutoDelete( true ); d->sn_vec[type].list = list; } @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ int TQEventLoop::activateTimers() { if ( !timerList || !timerList->count() ) // no timers return 0; - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; timeval currentTime; int n_act = 0, maxCount = timerList->count(); TimerInfo *begin = 0; @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ int TQEventLoop::activateTimers() if ( first ) { if ( currentTime < watchtime ) // clock was turned back repairTimer( currentTime ); - first = FALSE; + first = false; watchtime = currentTime; } t = timerList->first(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix_glib.cpp b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix_glib.cpp index eec66d0af..93182ded5 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix_glib.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_unix_glib.cpp @@ -79,14 +79,14 @@ extern TQMutex *tqt_timerListMutex; Arguments: int timerId timer identifier Returns: - bool TRUE if successful + bool true if successful qKillTimer( obj ) Stops all timers that are sent to the specified object. Arguments: TQObject *obj object receiving timer events Returns: - bool TRUE if successful + bool true if successful *****************************************************************************/ // @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ timeval *qt_wait_timer() tqt_timerListMutex->lock(); #endif static timeval tm; - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; timeval currentTime; if ( timerList && timerList->count() ) { // there are waiting timers getTime( currentTime ); @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ timeval *qt_wait_timer() if ( currentTime < watchtime ) { // clock was turned back repairTimer( currentTime ); } - first = FALSE; + first = false; watchtime = currentTime; } TimerInfo *t = timerList->first(); // first waiting timer @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ static void initTimers() // initialize timers tqt_timerListMutex = new TQMutex(true); #endif TQ_CHECK_PTR( timerList ); - timerList->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + timerList->setAutoDelete( true ); gettimeofday( &watchtime, 0 ); } @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( int id ) #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) if (tqt_timerListMutex) tqt_timerListMutex->unlock(); #endif - return FALSE; // not init'd or invalid timer + return false; // not init'd or invalid timer } t = timerList->first(); while ( t && t->id != id ) { // find timer info in list @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( int id ) #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) if (tqt_timerListMutex) tqt_timerListMutex->unlock(); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( TQObject *obj ) #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) if (tqt_timerListMutex) tqt_timerListMutex->unlock(); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } t = timerList->first(); while ( t ) { // check all timers @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( TQObject *obj ) #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) if (tqt_timerListMutex) tqt_timerListMutex->unlock(); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ TQEventLoopPrivate::TQEventLoopPrivate() { x_gPollFD.revents = 0; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 gSource = nullptr; - singletoolkit = TRUE; + singletoolkit = true; ctx = nullptr; mainloop = nullptr; ctx_is_default = false; @@ -450,9 +450,9 @@ TQEventLoopPrivate::~TQEventLoopPrivate() { void TQEventLoopPrivate::reset() { looplevel = 0; quitcode = 0; - quitnow = FALSE; - exitloop = FALSE; - shortcut = FALSE; + quitnow = false; + exitloop = false; + shortcut = false; } @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier( TQSocketNotifier *notifier ) // create new list, the TQSockNotType destructor will delete it for us list = new TQPtrList<TQSockNot>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( list ); - list->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + list->setAutoDelete( true ); d->sn_list = list; } */ @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier( TQSocketNotifier *notifier ) sn->gPollFD.fd = sockfd; sn->gPollFD.events = events; sn->events = events; // save events! - sn->pending = FALSE; + sn->pending = false; list->append( sn ); @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ void TQEventLoop::setSocketNotifierPending( TQSocketNotifier *notifier ) if ( !sn->pending ) { d->sn_pending_list.insert( (rand() & 0xff) % (d->sn_pending_list.count()+1), sn ); - sn->pending = TRUE; // add it only once! + sn->pending = true; // add it only once! } } @@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ int TQEventLoop::activateTimers() #endif return 0; } - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; timeval currentTime; int n_act = 0, maxCount = timerList->count(); TimerInfo *begin = 0; @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ int TQEventLoop::activateTimers() if ( currentTime < watchtime ) { // clock was turned back repairTimer( currentTime ); } - first = FALSE; + first = false; watchtime = currentTime; } t = timerList->first(); @@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ int TQEventLoop::activateSocketNotifiers() #ifdef DEBUG_QT_GLIBMAINLOOP printf("activate sn : send event fd=%d\n", sn->gPollFD.fd ); #endif - sn->pending = FALSE; + sn->pending = false; #if defined(TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT) // Be careful...the current thread may not be the target object's thread! if ((!sn->obj) || diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11.cpp index 97fb570dd..74014ddbd 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11.cpp @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processEvents( ProcessEventsFlags flags ) // also flushes output buffer while ( XPending( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay() ) ) { if ( d->shortcut ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } XNextEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), &event ); @@ -194,25 +194,25 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processEvents( ProcessEventsFlags flags ) nevents++; if ( tqApp->x11ProcessEvent( &event ) == 1 ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } } } if ( d->shortcut ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } TQApplication::sendPostedEvents(); const uint exclude_all = ExcludeSocketNotifiers | ExcludeTimers; if ( nevents > 0 && ( flags & exclude_all ) == exclude_all && ( flags & WaitForMore ) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } // don't block if exitLoop() or exit()/quit() has been called. - bool canWait = d->exitloop || d->quitnow ? FALSE : (flags & WaitForMore); + bool canWait = d->exitloop || d->quitnow ? false : (flags & WaitForMore); // Process timers and socket notifiers - the common UNIX stuff @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processEvents( ProcessEventsFlags flags ) static const char *t[] = { "Read", "Write", "Exception" }; tqWarning("TQSocketNotifier: invalid socket %d and type '%s', disabling...", sn->fd, t[type]); - sn->obj->setEnabled(FALSE); + sn->obj->setEnabled(false); } sn = list->next(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11_glib.cpp b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11_glib.cpp index fa449ca07..d031d21ee 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11_glib.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqeventloop_x11_glib.cpp @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processX11Events() // also flushes output buffer while ( XPending( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay() ) ) { if ( d->shortcut ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } XNextEvent( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), &event ); @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processX11Events() nevents++; if ( tqApp->x11ProcessEvent( &event ) == 1 ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -371,16 +371,16 @@ bool TQEventLoop::processX11Events() } if ( d->shortcut ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } TQApplication::sendPostedEvents(); const uint exclude_all = ExcludeSocketNotifiers | ExcludeTimers; if ( nevents > 0 && ( flags & exclude_all ) == exclude_all && ( flags & WaitForMore ) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourcePrepare(GSource *gs, int * timeout) #endif // don't block if exitLoop() or exit()/quit() has been called. - bool canWait = d->exitloop || d->quitnow ? FALSE : (flags & WaitForMore); + bool canWait = d->exitloop || d->quitnow ? false : (flags & WaitForMore); // Process timers and socket notifiers - the common UNIX stuff @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourcePrepare(GSource *gs, int * timeout) #ifdef DEBUG_QT_GLIBMAINLOOP printf("inside gsourcePrepare(3a)\n"); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } // stay in poll until something happens? @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourcePrepare(GSource *gs, int * timeout) #ifdef DEBUG_QT_GLIBMAINLOOP printf("inside gsourcePrepare(3b) timeout=%d \n", *timeout); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } // else timeout >=0 @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourcePrepare(GSource *gs, int * timeout) printf("inside gsourcePrepare(3c) timeout=%d \n", *timeout); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourceCheck(GSource *gs) { while ( (sn=it.current()) ) { ++it; if ( sn->gPollFD.revents ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -513,21 +513,21 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourceCheck(GSource *gs) { printf("inside gsourceCheck(2) xfd!\n"); #endif - return TRUE; // we got events! + return true; // we got events! } if (d->threadPipe_gPollFD.revents) { #ifdef DEBUG_QT_GLIBMAINLOOP printf("inside gsourceCheck(2) threadpipe!!\n"); #endif - return TRUE; // we got events! + return true; // we got events! } if (hasPendingEvents()) { #ifdef DEBUG_QT_GLIBMAINLOOP printf("inside gsourceCheck(2) pendingEvents!\n"); #endif - return TRUE; // we got more X11 events! + return true; // we got more X11 events! } // check if we have timers to activate? @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourceCheck(GSource *gs) { printf("inside gsourceCheck(2) qtwaittimer!\n"); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } } @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourceCheck(GSource *gs) { printf("inside gsourceCheck(2) nothing to dispatch!\n"); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -639,10 +639,10 @@ bool TQEventLoop::gsourceDispatch(GSource *gs) { } if (d->singletoolkit) { - return TRUE; // Eat the event + return true; // Eat the event } else { - return FALSE; // Pass the event on to GTK + return false; // Pass the event on to GTK } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp b/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp index c8395d342..5dce75b20 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ #ifdef TQFONTCACHE_DEBUG # define FC_DEBUG tqDebug #else -# define FC_DEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define FC_DEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif @@ -93,21 +93,21 @@ bool TQFontDef::operator==( const TQFontDef &other ) const */ if (pixelSize != -1 && other.pixelSize != -1) { if (pixelSize != other.pixelSize) - return FALSE; + return false; } else if (pointSize != -1 && other.pointSize != -1) { if (pointSize != other.pointSize && (TQABS(pointSize - other.pointSize) >= 5 || tqRound(pointSize/10.) != tqRound(other.pointSize/10.))) - return FALSE; + return false; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } if (!ignorePitch && !other.ignorePitch && fixedPitch != other.fixedPitch) - return FALSE; + return false; if (stretch != 0 && other.stretch != 0 && stretch != other.stretch) - return FALSE; + return false; TQString this_family, this_foundry, other_family, other_foundry; TQFontDatabase::parseFontName(family, this_foundry, this_family); @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ bool TQFontDef::operator==( const TQFontDef &other ) const TQFontPrivate::TQFontPrivate() : engineData( 0 ), paintdevice( 0 ), - rawMode( FALSE ), underline( FALSE ), overline( FALSE ), strikeOut( FALSE ), + rawMode( false ), underline( false ), overline( false ), strikeOut( false ), mask( 0 ) { #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ TQFontEngineData::~TQFontEngineData() attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is actually used are retrievable from a TQFontInfo object. If the - window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns TRUE. + window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns true. Use TQFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a string using TQFontMetrics::width(). @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ void TQFont::setPixelSizeFloat( float pixelSize ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if italic has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if italic has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setItalic() */ @@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ bool TQFont::italic() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set + If \a enable is true, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set off. \sa italic(), TQFontInfo @@ -907,8 +907,8 @@ void TQFont::setWeight( int weight ) /*! \fn bool TQFont::bold() const - Returns TRUE if weight() is a value greater than \link Weight - TQFont::Normal \endlink; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if weight() is a value greater than \link Weight + TQFont::Normal \endlink; otherwise returns false. \sa weight(), setBold(), TQFontInfo::bold() */ @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ void TQFont::setWeight( int weight ) */ /*! - Returns TRUE if underline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if underline has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setUnderline() */ @@ -936,7 +936,7 @@ bool TQFont::underline() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline + If \a enable is true, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline off. \sa underline(), TQFontInfo @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ void TQFont::setUnderline( bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if overline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if overline has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setOverline() */ @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ bool TQFont::overline() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off. + If \a enable is true, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off. \sa overline(), TQFontInfo */ @@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ void TQFont::setOverline( bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setStrikeOut() */ @@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ bool TQFont::strikeOut() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout + If \a enable is true, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout off. \sa strikeOut(), TQFontInfo @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ void TQFont::setStrikeOut( bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setFixedPitch(), TQFontInfo::fixedPitch() */ @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ bool TQFont::fixedPitch() const } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed + If \a enable is true, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed pitch off. \sa fixedPitch(), TQFontInfo @@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ void TQFont::setFixedPitch( bool enable ) detach(); d->request.fixedPitch = enable; - d->request.ignorePitch = FALSE; + d->request.ignorePitch = false; d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::FixedPitch; } @@ -1220,7 +1220,7 @@ void TQFont::setStretch( int factor ) } /*! - If \a enable is TRUE, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode + If \a enable is true, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode off. This function only has an effect under X11. If raw mode is enabled, TQt will search for an X font with a @@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ void TQFont::setRawMode( bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if a window system font exactly matching the settings + Returns true if a window system font exactly matching the settings of this font is available. \sa TQFontInfo @@ -1263,8 +1263,8 @@ bool TQFont::exactMatch() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this font is equal to \a f; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this font is equal to \a f; otherwise returns + false. Two TQFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are equal. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family @@ -1281,8 +1281,8 @@ bool TQFont::operator==( const TQFont &f ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this font is different from \a f; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this font is different from \a f; otherwise + returns false. Two TQFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes are different. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ bool TQFont::operator!=( const TQFont &f ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this font and \a f are copies of each other, i.e. + Returns true if this font and \a f are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has been modified since. This is much stricter than equality. @@ -1308,8 +1308,8 @@ bool TQFont::isCopyOf( const TQFont & f ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise + returns false. \sa setRawMode() rawName() */ @@ -1402,9 +1402,9 @@ static void initFontSubst() if (fontSubst) return; - fontSubst = new TQFontSubst(17, FALSE); + fontSubst = new TQFontSubst(17, false); TQ_CHECK_PTR( fontSubst ); - fontSubst->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + fontSubst->setAutoDelete( true ); tqfont_cleanup_fontsubst.set(&fontSubst); for ( int i=0; initTbl[i] != 0; i += 2 ) @@ -1662,7 +1662,7 @@ bool TQFont::fromString(const TQString &descrip) descrip.isEmpty() ? "(empty)" : descrip.latin1()); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } setFamily(l[0]); @@ -1688,7 +1688,7 @@ bool TQFont::fromString(const TQString &descrip) setRawMode(l[9].toInt()); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal @@ -2137,8 +2137,8 @@ int TQFontMetrics::maxWidth() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if character \a ch is a valid character in the font; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if character \a ch is a valid character in the font; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQFontMetrics::inFont(TQChar ch) const { @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ bool TQFontMetrics::inFont(TQChar ch) const Q_ASSERT( engine != 0 ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - if ( engine->type() == TQFontEngine::Box ) return FALSE; + if ( engine->type() == TQFontEngine::Box ) return false; return engine->canRender( &ch, 1 ); } @@ -2181,7 +2181,7 @@ int TQFontMetrics::leftBearing(TQChar ch) const glyph_t glyphs[10]; int nglyphs = 9; - engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, false ); // ### can nglyphs != 1 happen at all? Not currently I think glyph_metrics_t gi = engine->boundingBox( glyphs[0] ); return gi.x; @@ -2215,7 +2215,7 @@ int TQFontMetrics::rightBearing(TQChar ch) const glyph_t glyphs[10]; int nglyphs = 9; - engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, false ); // ### can nglyphs != 1 happen at all? Not currently I think glyph_metrics_t gi = engine->boundingBox( glyphs[0] ); return gi.xoff - gi.x - gi.width; @@ -2266,7 +2266,7 @@ int TQFontMetrics::width( const TQString &str, int len ) const glyph_t glyphs[8]; advance_t advances[8]; int nglyphs = 7; - engine->stringToCMap( ch, 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( ch, 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, false ); // ### can nglyphs != 1 happen at all? Not currently I think if ( uc < TQFontEngineData::widthCacheSize && advances[0] > 0 && advances[0] < 0x100 ) @@ -2395,7 +2395,7 @@ TQRect TQFontMetrics::boundingRect( TQChar ch ) const glyph_t glyphs[10]; int nglyphs = 9; - engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, 0, &nglyphs, false ); glyph_metrics_t gi = engine->boundingBox( glyphs[0] ); return TQRect( gi.x, gi.y, gi.width, gi.height ); } @@ -2790,8 +2790,8 @@ int TQFontInfo::weight() const /*! \fn bool TQFontInfo::bold() const - Returns TRUE if weight() would return a value greater than \c - TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if weight() would return a value greater than \c + TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns false. \sa weight(), TQFont::bold() */ @@ -2856,9 +2856,9 @@ bool TQFontInfo::fixedPitch() const glyph_t g[2]; int l = 2; advance_t a[2]; - engine->stringToCMap(ch, 2, g, a, &l, FALSE); + engine->stringToCMap(ch, 2, g, a, &l, false); engine->fontDef.fixedPitch = a[0] == a[1]; - engine->fontDef.fixedPitchComputed = TRUE; + engine->fontDef.fixedPitchComputed = true; } #endif return engine->fontDef.fixedPitch; @@ -2881,8 +2881,8 @@ TQFont::StyleHint TQFontInfo::styleHint() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns + false. If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in TQFontInfo will return the same values set in the TQFont, regardless of the font @@ -2896,8 +2896,8 @@ bool TQFontInfo::rawMode() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the matched window system font is exactly the same - as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the matched window system font is exactly the same + as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns false. \sa TQFont::exactMatch() */ @@ -2936,7 +2936,7 @@ static TQSingleCleanupHandler<TQFontCache> cleanup_fontcache; TQFontCache::TQFontCache() : TQObject( tqApp, "global font cache" ), total_cost( 0 ), max_cost( min_cost ), - current_timestamp( 0 ), fast( FALSE ), timer_id( -1 ) + current_timestamp( 0 ), fast( false ), timer_id( -1 ) { Q_ASSERT( instance == 0 ); instance = this; @@ -3048,7 +3048,7 @@ void TQFontCache::increaseCost( uint cost ) if (timer_id != -1) killTimer( timer_id ); timer_id = startTimer( fast_timeout ); - fast = TRUE; + fast = true; } } } @@ -3145,7 +3145,7 @@ void TQFontCache::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * ) killTimer( timer_id ); timer_id = -1; - fast = FALSE; + fast = false; return; } @@ -3220,7 +3220,7 @@ void TQFontCache::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * ) killTimer( timer_id ); timer_id = startTimer( slow_timeout ); - fast = FALSE; + fast = false; } return; @@ -3229,7 +3229,7 @@ void TQFontCache::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * ) killTimer( timer_id ); timer_id = startTimer( fast_timeout ); - fast = TRUE; + fast = true; } max_cost = new_max_cost; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfont.h b/src/kernel/tqfont.h index 435b604df..5ac1a2d4e 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfont.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqfont.h @@ -101,10 +101,10 @@ public: // specific font #ifdef Q_QDOC TQFont( const TQString &family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, - bool italic = FALSE ); + bool italic = false ); #else TQFont( const TQString &family, int pointSize = -1, int weight = -1, - bool italic = FALSE ); + bool italic = false ); #endif // copy constructor TQFont( const TQFont & ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp index 92cd8b113..4a91f65dc 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ #define TQFONTLOADER_DEBUG #define TQFONTLOADER_DEBUG_VERBOSE -TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_has_xft = FALSE; +TQ_EXPORT bool tqt_has_xft = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE TQt::HANDLE qt_xft_handle(const TQFont &font) @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ void TQFont::initialize() #ifndef TQT_NO_CODECS #ifndef TQT_NO_BIG_CODECS - static bool codecs_once = FALSE; + static bool codecs_once = false; if ( ! codecs_once ) { (void) new TQFontJis0201Codec; (void) new TQFontJis0208Codec; @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ void TQFont::initialize() (void) new TQFontBig5Codec; (void) new TQFontBig5hkscsCodec; (void) new TQFontLaoCodec; - codecs_once = TRUE; + codecs_once = true; } #endif // TQT_NO_BIG_CODECS #endif // TQT_NO_CODECS @@ -419,8 +419,8 @@ void TQFontPrivate::load( TQFont::Script script ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the font attributes have been changed and the font - has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the font attributes have been changed and the font + has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQFont::dirty() const { @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ void TQFont::setRawName( const TQString &name ) #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE setFamily( name ); - setRawMode( TRUE ); + setRawMode( true ); } else { d->mask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; } @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ static const char * const tryFonts[] = { 0 }; -// Returns TRUE if the font exists, FALSE otherwise +// Returns true if the font exists, false otherwise static bool fontExists( const TQString &fontName ) { int count; @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ int TQFontMetrics::width( TQChar ch ) const glyph_t glyphs[8]; advance_t advances[8]; int nglyphs = 7; - engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( &ch, 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, false ); // ### can nglyphs != 1 happen at all? Not currently I think if ( uc < TQFontEngineData::widthCacheSize && advances[0] > 0 && advances[0] < 0x100 ) @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ int TQFontMetrics::charWidth( const TQString &str, int pos ) const glyph_t glyphs[8]; advance_t advances[8]; int nglyphs = 7; - engine->stringToCMap( &ch, isSurrogate ? 2 : 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( &ch, isSurrogate ? 2 : 1, glyphs, advances, &nglyphs, false ); width = advances[0]; } if ( uc < TQFontEngineData::widthCacheSize && width > 0 && width < 0x100 ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h b/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h index 6b42c6bcf..89efd70d4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h @@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ struct TQFontDef inline TQFontDef() : pointSize( -1 ), pixelSize( -1 ), styleHint( TQFont::AnyStyle ), styleStrategy( TQFont::PreferDefault ), - weight( 50 ), italic( FALSE ), fixedPitch( FALSE ), stretch( 100 ), - ignorePitch(TRUE) + weight( 50 ), italic( false ), fixedPitch( false ), stretch( 100 ), + ignorePitch(true) #ifdef TQ_WS_MAC - ,fixedPitchComputed(FALSE) + ,fixedPitchComputed(false) #endif { } @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ struct TQFontDef if ( addStyle != other.addStyle ) return addStyle < other.addStyle; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 - return FALSE; + return false; } }; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase.cpp b/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase.cpp index bda119a03..26a2c00c0 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase.cpp @@ -59,14 +59,14 @@ #ifdef TQFONTDATABASE_DEBUG # define FD_DEBUG tqDebug #else -# define FD_DEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define FD_DEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif //#define FONT_MATCH_DEBUG #ifdef FONT_MATCH_DEBUG # define FM_DEBUG tqDebug #else -# define FM_DEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define FM_DEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif #if defined(Q_CC_MSVC) && !defined(Q_CC_MSVC_NET) @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ struct TQtFontSize int count; TQtFontEncoding *encodings; TQtFontEncoding *encodingID( int id, uint xpoint = 0, uint xres = 0, - uint yres = 0, uint avgwidth = 0, bool add = FALSE); + uint yres = 0, uint avgwidth = 0, bool add = false); #endif // TQ_WS_X11 }; @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ struct TQtFontStyle { struct Key { Key( const TQString &styleString ); - Key() : italic( FALSE ), oblique( FALSE ), + Key() : italic( false ), oblique( false ), weight( TQFont::Normal ), stretch( 0 ) { } Key( const Key &o ) : italic( o.italic ), oblique( o.oblique ), weight( o.weight ), stretch( o.stretch ) { } @@ -205,8 +205,8 @@ struct TQtFontStyle }; TQtFontStyle( const Key &k ) - : key( k ), bitmapScalable( FALSE ), smoothScalable( FALSE ), - fakeOblique( FALSE ), count( 0 ), pixelSizes( 0 ) + : key( k ), bitmapScalable( false ), smoothScalable( false ), + fakeOblique( false ), count( 0 ), pixelSizes( 0 ) { #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) weightName = setwidthName = 0; @@ -235,18 +235,18 @@ struct TQtFontStyle const char *setwidthName; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 - TQtFontSize *pixelSize( unsigned short size, bool = FALSE ); + TQtFontSize *pixelSize( unsigned short size, bool = false ); }; TQtFontStyle::Key::Key( const TQString &styleString ) - : italic( FALSE ), oblique( FALSE ), weight( TQFont::Normal ), stretch( 0 ) + : italic( false ), oblique( false ), weight( TQFont::Normal ), stretch( 0 ) { weight = getFontWeight( styleString ); if ( styleString.contains( "Italic" ) ) - italic = TRUE; + italic = true; else if ( styleString.contains( "Oblique" ) ) - oblique = TRUE; + oblique = true; } TQtFontSize *TQtFontStyle::pixelSize( unsigned short size, bool add ) @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ struct TQtFontFoundry int count; TQtFontStyle **styles; - TQtFontStyle *style( const TQtFontStyle::Key &, bool = FALSE ); + TQtFontStyle *style( const TQtFontStyle::Key &, bool = false ); }; TQtFontStyle *TQtFontFoundry::style( const TQtFontStyle::Key &key, bool create ) @@ -327,17 +327,17 @@ struct TQtFontFamily TQtFontFamily(const TQString &n ) : #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 - fixedPitch( TRUE ), hasXft( FALSE ), xftScriptCheck( FALSE ), xlfdLoaded( FALSE ), synthetic(FALSE), + fixedPitch( true ), hasXft( false ), xftScriptCheck( false ), xlfdLoaded( false ), synthetic(false), #else - fixedPitch( FALSE ), + fixedPitch( false ), #endif #ifdef TQ_WS_WIN - scriptCheck( FALSE ), + scriptCheck( false ), #endif #if defined(Q_OS_MAC) - fixedPitchComputed(FALSE), + fixedPitchComputed(false), #endif - fullyLoaded( FALSE ), + fullyLoaded( false ), name( n ), count( 0 ), foundries( 0 ) { memset( scripts, 0, sizeof( scripts ) ); } @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ struct TQtFontFamily unsigned char scripts[TQFont::LastPrivateScript]; - TQtFontFoundry *foundry( const TQString &f, bool = FALSE ); + TQtFontFoundry *foundry( const TQString &f, bool = false ); }; TQtFontFoundry *TQtFontFamily::foundry( const TQString &f, bool create ) @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ public: delete families[count]; free( families ); } - TQtFontFamily *family( const TQString &f, bool = FALSE ); + TQtFontFamily *family( const TQString &f, bool = false ); int count; TQtFontFamily **families; @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ static inline bool requiresOpenType(TQFont::Script s) static inline bool canRender( TQFontEngine *fe, TQFont::Script script ) { - if ( !fe ) return FALSE; + if ( !fe ) return false; bool hasChar = true; @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ static inline bool canRender( TQFontEngine *fe, TQFont::Script script ) if (hasChar && requiresOpenType(script)) { TQOpenType *ot = fe->openType(); if (!ot || !ot->supportsScript(script)) - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ TQFontDatabase::findFont( TQFont::Script script, const TQFontPrivate *fp, if ( fp->rawMode ) { fe = loadEngine( script, fp, request, 0, 0, 0 #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 - , 0, 0, FALSE + , 0, 0, false #endif ); @@ -995,7 +995,7 @@ TQFontDatabase::findFont( TQFont::Script script, const TQFontPrivate *fp, script, scriptName( script ).latin1(), request.weight, request.italic, request.stretch, request.pixelSize, pitch ); - bool usesFontConfig = FALSE; + bool usesFontConfig = false; if (family_name.isEmpty() || family_name == "Sans Serif" || family_name == "Serif" @@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ TQFontDatabase::findFont( TQFont::Script script, const TQFontPrivate *fp, fe->fontDef.italic = best_style->key.italic || best_style->key.oblique; fe->fontDef.fixedPitch = best_family->fixedPitch; fe->fontDef.stretch = best_style->key.stretch; - fe->fontDef.ignorePitch = FALSE; + fe->fontDef.ignorePitch = false; } } @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ static TQString styleString( int weight, bool italic, bool oblique ) TQString TQFontDatabase::styleString( const TQFont &f ) { // ### fix oblique here - return ::styleString( f.weight(), f.italic(), FALSE ); + return ::styleString( f.weight(), f.italic(), false ); } @@ -1544,7 +1544,7 @@ TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles( const TQString &family ) const for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) { TQtFontStyle::Key ke( foundry->styles[k]->key ); ke.stretch = 0; - allStyles.style( ke, TRUE ); + allStyles.style( ke, true ); } } } @@ -1557,8 +1557,8 @@ TQStringList TQFontDatabase::styles( const TQString &family ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is fixed pitch; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is fixed pitch; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch(const TQString &family, @@ -1577,7 +1577,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch(const TQString &family, if (!f->fixedPitchComputed) { TQFontMetrics fm(familyName); f->fixedPitch = fm.width('i') == fm.width('m'); - f->fixedPitchComputed = TRUE; + f->fixedPitchComputed = true; } } #endif @@ -1586,8 +1586,8 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch(const TQString &family, } /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns FALSE. Scaling + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns false. Scaling a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed @@ -1598,7 +1598,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch(const TQString &family, bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable( const TQString &family, const TQString &style) const { - bool bitmapScalable = FALSE; + bool bitmapScalable = false; TQString familyName, foundryName; parseFontName( family, foundryName, familyName ); @@ -1615,7 +1615,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable( const TQString &family, for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) if ((style.isEmpty() || foundry->styles[k]->key == styleKey) && foundry->styles[k]->bitmapScalable && !foundry->styles[k]->smoothScalable) { - bitmapScalable = TRUE; + bitmapScalable = true; goto end; } } @@ -1626,9 +1626,9 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable( const TQString &family, /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. If this - function returns TRUE, it's safe to scale this font to any size, + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns false. If this + function returns true, it's safe to scale this font to any size, and the result will always look attractive. \sa isScalable(), isBitmapScalable() @@ -1636,7 +1636,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable( const TQString &family, bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable( const TQString &family, const TQString &style) const { - bool smoothScalable = FALSE; + bool smoothScalable = false; TQString familyName, foundryName; parseFontName( family, foundryName, familyName ); @@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable( const TQString &family, if ( foundryName.isEmpty() || ucstricmp( foundry->name, foundryName ) == 0 ) { for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) if ((style.isEmpty() || foundry->styles[k]->key == styleKey) && foundry->styles[k]->smoothScalable) { - smoothScalable = TRUE; + smoothScalable = true; goto end; } } @@ -1662,8 +1662,8 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable( const TQString &family, } /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is scalable; otherwise returns false. \sa isBitmapScalable(), isSmoothlyScalable() */ @@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable( const TQString &family, const TQString &style) const { if ( isSmoothlyScalable( family, style) ) - return TRUE; + return true; return isBitmapScalable( family, style); } @@ -1692,7 +1692,7 @@ TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes( const TQString &family, Q_UNUSED( style ); return standardSizes(); #else - bool smoothScalable = FALSE; + bool smoothScalable = false; TQString familyName, foundryName; parseFontName( family, foundryName, familyName ); @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::pointSizes( const TQString &family, if ( !style ) continue; if ( style->smoothScalable ) { - smoothScalable = TRUE; + smoothScalable = true; goto end; } for ( int l = 0; l < style->count; l++ ) { @@ -1761,7 +1761,7 @@ TQFont TQFontDatabase::font( const TQString &family, const TQString &style, TQtFontFoundry *foundry = f->foundries[j]; if ( foundryName.isEmpty() || ucstricmp( foundry->name, foundryName ) == 0 ) { for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) - allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, TRUE ); + allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, true ); } } @@ -1771,7 +1771,7 @@ TQFont TQFontDatabase::font( const TQString &family, const TQString &style, if ( !s ) // no styles found? return TQApplication::font(); return TQFont( family, pointSize, s->key.weight, - s->key.italic ? TRUE : s->key.oblique ? TRUE : FALSE ); + s->key.italic ? true : s->key.oblique ); } @@ -1791,7 +1791,7 @@ TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes( const TQString &family, Q_UNUSED( style ); return TQFontDatabase::standardSizes(); #else - bool smoothScalable = FALSE; + bool smoothScalable = false; TQString familyName, foundryName; parseFontName( family, foundryName, familyName ); @@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::smoothSizes( const TQString &family, if ( !style ) continue; if ( style->smoothScalable ) { - smoothScalable = TRUE; + smoothScalable = true; goto end; } for ( int l = 0; l < style->count; l++ ) { @@ -1858,8 +1858,8 @@ TQValueList<int> TQFontDatabase::standardSizes() /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is italic; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is italic; otherwise returns false. \sa weight(), bold() */ @@ -1873,13 +1873,13 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::italic( const TQString &family, TQtFontFoundry allStyles( foundryName ); TQtFontFamily *f = d->family( familyName ); - if ( !f ) return FALSE; + if ( !f ) return false; for ( int j = 0; j < f->count; j++ ) { TQtFontFoundry *foundry = f->foundries[j]; if ( foundryName.isEmpty() || ucstricmp( foundry->name, foundryName ) == 0 ) { for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) - allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, TRUE ); + allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, true ); } } @@ -1890,8 +1890,8 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::italic( const TQString &family, /*! - Returns TRUE if the font that has family \a family and style \a - style is bold; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the font that has family \a family and style \a + style is bold; otherwise returns false. \sa italic(), weight() */ @@ -1905,14 +1905,14 @@ bool TQFontDatabase::bold( const TQString &family, TQtFontFoundry allStyles( foundryName ); TQtFontFamily *f = d->family( familyName ); - if ( !f ) return FALSE; + if ( !f ) return false; for ( int j = 0; j < f->count; j++ ) { TQtFontFoundry *foundry = f->foundries[j]; if ( foundryName.isEmpty() || ucstricmp( foundry->name, foundryName ) == 0 ) { for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) - allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, TRUE ); + allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, true ); } } @@ -1946,7 +1946,7 @@ int TQFontDatabase::weight( const TQString &family, if ( foundryName.isEmpty() || ucstricmp( foundry->name, foundryName ) == 0 ) { for ( int k = 0; k < foundry->count; k++ ) - allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, TRUE ); + allStyles.style( foundry->styles[k]->key, true ); } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase_x11.cpp index ee7387387..b26842fc7 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqfontdatabase_x11.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ #ifdef TQFONTDATABASE_DEBUG # define FD_DEBUG tqDebug #else -# define FD_DEBUG if (FALSE) tqDebug +# define FD_DEBUG if (false) tqDebug #endif // TQFONTDATABASE_DEBUG // from tqfont_x11.cpp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ extern double qt_pixelSize(double pointSize, TQPaintDevice *paintdevice, int scr static inline void capitalize ( char *s ) { - bool space = TRUE; + bool space = true; while( *s ) { if ( space ) *s = toupper( *s ); @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ static bool parseXFontName( char *fontName, char **tokens ) { if ( ! fontName || fontName[0] == '0' || fontName[0] != '-' ) { tokens[0] = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } int i; @@ -557,10 +557,10 @@ static bool parseXFontName( char *fontName, char **tokens ) if ( i < NFontFields ) { for ( int j = i ; j < NFontFields; ++j ) tokens[j] = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } static inline bool isZero(char *x) @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ static inline bool isFixedPitch( char **tokens ) Fills in a font definition (TQFontDef) from an XLFD (X Logical Font Description). - Returns TRUE if the the given xlfd is valid. The fields lbearing + Returns true if the the given xlfd is valid. The fields lbearing and rbearing are not given any values. */ bool qt_fillFontDef( const TQCString &xlfd, TQFontDef *fd, int screen ) @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ bool qt_fillFontDef( const TQCString &xlfd, TQFontDef *fd, int screen ) char *tokens[NFontFields]; TQCString buffer = xlfd.copy(); if ( ! parseXFontName(buffer.data(), tokens) ) - return FALSE; + return false; capitalize(tokens[Family]); capitalize(tokens[Foundry]); @@ -638,14 +638,14 @@ bool qt_fillFontDef( const TQCString &xlfd, TQFontDef *fd, int screen ) fd->pixelSize = tqRound(qt_pixelSize(fd->pointSize / 10., 0, screen)); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* Fills in a font definition (TQFontDef) from the font properties in an XFontStruct. - Returns TRUE if the TQFontDef could be filled with properties from + Returns true if the TQFontDef could be filled with properties from the XFontStruct. The fields lbearing and rbearing are not given any values. */ @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ static bool qt_fillFontDef( XFontStruct *fs, TQFontDef *fd, int screen ) { unsigned long value; if ( fs && !XGetFontProperty( fs, XA_FONT, &value ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; char *n = XGetAtomName( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), value ); TQCString xlfd( n ); @@ -674,14 +674,14 @@ static TQtFontStyle::Key getStyle( char ** tokens ) char slant1 = tolower( (uchar) tokens[Slant][1] ); if ( slant1 == 'o' ) - key.oblique = TRUE; + key.oblique = true; else if ( slant1 == 'i' ) - key.italic = TRUE; + key.italic = true; } } else if ( slant0 == 'o' ) - key.oblique = TRUE; + key.oblique = true; else if ( slant0 == 'i' ) - key.italic = TRUE; + key.italic = true; key.weight = getFontWeight( tokens[Weight] ); @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ static TQtFontStyle::Key getStyle( char ** tokens ) extern bool tqt_has_xft; // defined in tqfont_x11.cpp -static bool xlfdsFullyLoaded = FALSE; +static bool xlfdsFullyLoaded = false; static unsigned char encodingLoaded[numEncodings]; static void loadXlfds( const char *reqFamily, int encoding_id ) @@ -748,13 +748,13 @@ static void loadXlfds( const char *reqFamily, int encoding_id ) capitalize( foundryName ); TQtFontStyle::Key styleKey = getStyle( tokens ); - bool smooth_scalable = FALSE; - bool bitmap_scalable = FALSE; + bool smooth_scalable = false; + bool bitmap_scalable = false; if ( isScalable(tokens) ) { if ( isSmoothlyScalable( tokens ) ) - smooth_scalable = TRUE; + smooth_scalable = true; else - bitmap_scalable = TRUE; + bitmap_scalable = true; } uint pixelSize = atoi( tokens[PixelSize] ); uint xpointSize = atoi( tokens[PointSize] ); @@ -773,10 +773,10 @@ static void loadXlfds( const char *reqFamily, int encoding_id ) continue; } - TQtFontFamily *family = fontFamily ? fontFamily : db->family( familyName, TRUE ); + TQtFontFamily *family = fontFamily ? fontFamily : db->family( familyName, true ); family->fontFileIndex = -1; - TQtFontFoundry *foundry = family->foundry( foundryName, TRUE ); - TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, TRUE ); + TQtFontFoundry *foundry = family->foundry( foundryName, true ); + TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, true ); delete [] style->weightName; style->weightName = tqstrdup( tokens[Weight] ); @@ -784,18 +784,18 @@ static void loadXlfds( const char *reqFamily, int encoding_id ) style->setwidthName = tqstrdup( tokens[Width] ); if ( smooth_scalable ) { - style->smoothScalable = TRUE; - style->bitmapScalable = FALSE; + style->smoothScalable = true; + style->bitmapScalable = false; pixelSize = SMOOTH_SCALABLE; } if ( !style->smoothScalable && bitmap_scalable ) - style->bitmapScalable = TRUE; + style->bitmapScalable = true; if ( !fixedPitch ) - family->fixedPitch = FALSE; + family->fixedPitch = false; - TQtFontSize *size = style->pixelSize( pixelSize, TRUE ); + TQtFontSize *size = style->pixelSize( pixelSize, true ); TQtFontEncoding *enc = - size->encodingID( encoding_id, xpointSize, xres, yres, avgwidth, TRUE ); + size->encodingID( encoding_id, xpointSize, xres, yres, avgwidth, true ); enc->pitch = *tokens[Spacing]; if ( !enc->pitch ) enc->pitch = '*'; @@ -806,14 +806,14 @@ static void loadXlfds( const char *reqFamily, int encoding_id ) family->scripts[script] |= TQtFontFamily::UnSupported_Xlfd; } if ( encoding_id == -1 ) - family->xlfdLoaded = TRUE; + family->xlfdLoaded = true; } if ( !reqFamily ) { // mark encoding as loaded if ( encoding_id == -1 ) - xlfdsFullyLoaded = TRUE; + xlfdsFullyLoaded = true; else - encodingLoaded[encoding_id] = TRUE; + encodingLoaded[encoding_id] = true; } XFreeFontNames( fontList ); @@ -847,20 +847,20 @@ static void loadXft() bool fixed; }; const XftDefaultFont defaults[] = { - { "Serif", "serif", FALSE }, - { "Sans Serif", "sans-serif", FALSE }, - { "Monospace", "monospace", TRUE }, - { 0, 0, FALSE } + { "Serif", "serif", false }, + { "Sans Serif", "sans-serif", false }, + { "Monospace", "monospace", true }, + { 0, 0, false } }; const XftDefaultFont *f = defaults; while (f->qtname) { - TQtFontFamily *family = db->family( f->qtname, TRUE ); + TQtFontFamily *family = db->family( f->qtname, true ); family->fixedPitch = f->fixed; family->rawName = f->rawname; - family->hasXft = TRUE; - family->synthetic = TRUE; + family->hasXft = true; + family->synthetic = true; TQtFontFoundry *foundry - = family->foundry( TQString::null, TRUE ); + = family->foundry( TQString::null, true ); for ( int i = 0; i < TQFont::LastPrivateScript; ++i ) { if (i == TQFont::UnknownScript) @@ -869,14 +869,14 @@ static void loadXft() } TQtFontStyle::Key styleKey; - styleKey.oblique = FALSE; + styleKey.oblique = false; for (int i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { styleKey.italic = (i%2); styleKey.weight = (i > 1) ? TQFont::Bold : TQFont::Normal; - TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, TRUE ); - style->smoothScalable = TRUE; - TQtFontSize *size = style->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, TRUE ); - TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE ); + TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, true ); + style->smoothScalable = true; + TQtFontSize *size = style->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, true ); + TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, true ); enc->pitch = (f->fixed ? 'm' : 'p'); } ++f; @@ -893,29 +893,29 @@ static void checkXftMatrix( TQtFontFamily* family ) { TQtFontSize *size = style->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE ); if ( ! size ) continue; - TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE ); + TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, true ); if ( ! enc ) continue; TQtFontStyle::Key key = style->key; // does this style have an italic equivalent? - key.italic = TRUE; + key.italic = true; TQtFontStyle *equiv = foundry->style( key ); if ( equiv ) continue; // does this style have an oblique equivalent? - key.italic = FALSE; - key.oblique = TRUE; + key.italic = false; + key.oblique = true; equiv = foundry->style( key ); if ( equiv ) continue; // let's fake one... - equiv = foundry->style( key, TRUE ); - equiv->fakeOblique = TRUE; - equiv->smoothScalable = TRUE; + equiv = foundry->style( key, true ); + equiv->fakeOblique = true; + equiv->smoothScalable = true; - TQtFontSize *equiv_size = equiv->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, TRUE ); - TQtFontEncoding *equiv_enc = equiv_size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE ); + TQtFontSize *equiv_size = equiv->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, true ); + TQtFontEncoding *equiv_enc = equiv_size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, true ); // keep the same pitch equiv_enc->pitch = enc->pitch; @@ -958,9 +958,9 @@ static bool loadXftFont( FcPattern* font ) FcPatternGetBool(font, FC_SCALABLE, 0, &scalable); foundry_value = 0; XftPatternGetString(font, FC_FOUNDRY, 0, &foundry_value); - TQtFontFamily *family = db->family( familyName, TRUE ); + TQtFontFamily *family = db->family( familyName, true ); family->rawName = rawName; - family->hasXft = TRUE; + family->hasXft = true; FcCharSet *charset = 0; FcResult res = FcPatternGetCharSet(font, FC_CHARSET, 0, &charset); @@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ static bool loadXftFont( FcPattern* font ) family->scripts[i] |= TQtFontFamily::UnSupported_Xft; } } - family->xftScriptCheck = TRUE; + family->xftScriptCheck = true; } else { // we set UnknownScript to supported for symbol fonts. It makes no sense to merge these // with other ones, as they are special in a way. @@ -1005,23 +1005,23 @@ static bool loadXftFont( FcPattern* font ) } TQtFontFoundry *foundry - = family->foundry( foundry_value ? TQString::fromUtf8(foundry_value) : TQString::null, TRUE ); - TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, TRUE ); + = family->foundry( foundry_value ? TQString::fromUtf8(foundry_value) : TQString::null, true ); + TQtFontStyle *style = foundry->style( styleKey, true ); if (spacing_value < XFT_MONO ) - family->fixedPitch = FALSE; + family->fixedPitch = false; TQtFontSize *size; if (scalable) { - style->smoothScalable = TRUE; - size = style->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, TRUE ); + style->smoothScalable = true; + size = style->pixelSize( SMOOTH_SCALABLE, true ); } else { double pixel_size = 0; XftPatternGetDouble (font, FC_PIXEL_SIZE, 0, &pixel_size); - size = style->pixelSize( (int)pixel_size, TRUE ); + size = style->pixelSize( (int)pixel_size, true ); } - TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, TRUE ); + TQtFontEncoding *enc = size->encodingID( -1, 0, 0, 0, 0, true ); enc->pitch = ( spacing_value >= XFT_CHARCELL ? 'c' : ( spacing_value >= XFT_MONO ? 'm' : 'p' ) ); @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ static void load( const TQString &family = TQString::null, int script = -1 ) } } } else { - TQtFontFamily *f = db->family( family, TRUE ); + TQtFontFamily *f = db->family( family, true ); if ( !f->fullyLoaded ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE @@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ static void load( const TQString &family = TQString::null, int script = -1 ) mfamily.replace(TQChar(' '), TQChar('-')); goto redo; } - f->fullyLoaded = TRUE; + f->fullyLoaded = true; return; } #endif // TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ static void load( const TQString &family = TQString::null, int script = -1 ) ( !f->hasXft && !(f->scripts[script] & TQtFontFamily::Supported) && !(f->scripts[script] & TQtFontFamily::UnSupported_Xlfd) ) ) { loadXlfds( family, -1 ); - f->fullyLoaded = TRUE; + f->fullyLoaded = true; } } } @@ -1531,7 +1531,7 @@ static TQFontEngine *loadFontConfigFont(const TQFontPrivate *fp, const TQFontDef key.weight = request.weight; key.stretch = request.stretch; - double scale = addPatternProps(pattern, key, FALSE, TRUE, fp, request); + double scale = addPatternProps(pattern, key, false, true, fp, request); #ifdef FONT_MATCH_DEBUG tqDebug("original pattern contains:"); FcPatternPrint(pattern); @@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ static TQFontEngine *loadFontConfigFont(const TQFontPrivate *fp, const TQFontDef XftPattern *pattern = XftPatternDuplicate(font); // add properties back in as the font selected from the list doesn't contain them. - addPatternProps(pattern, key, FALSE, TRUE, fp, request); + addPatternProps(pattern, key, false, true, fp, request); XftPattern *result = XftFontMatch( TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), fp->screen, pattern, &res ); @@ -1720,7 +1720,7 @@ static TQFontEngine *loadFontConfigFont(const TQFontPrivate *fp, const TQFontDef XftPatternGetInteger(xft->pattern(), XFT_SPACING, 0, &spacing); xft->fontDef.fixedPitch = spacing != XFT_PROPORTIONAL; - xft->fontDef.ignorePitch = FALSE; + xft->fontDef.ignorePitch = false; break; } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfontengine_p.h b/src/kernel/tqfontengine_p.h index 86fdda8f0..e7d7f2162 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfontengine_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqfontengine_p.h @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ public: void selectScript(unsigned int script, const Features *features = 0); bool shape(TQShaperItem *item, const unsigned int *properties = 0); - bool positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters = TRUE); + bool positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters = true); OTL_GlyphItem glyphs() const { return otl_buffer->in_string; } int len() const { return otl_buffer->in_length; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqfontengine_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqfontengine_x11.cpp index aa116b93d..9276a5a93 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqfontengine_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqfontengine_x11.cpp @@ -71,17 +71,17 @@ static void drawLines( TQPainter *p, TQFontEngine *fe, int baseline, int x1, int int lw = fe->lineThickness(); if ( textFlags & TQt::Underline ) { int pos = fe->underlinePosition(); - qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline+pos, w, lw, TRUE ); + qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline+pos, w, lw, true ); } if ( textFlags & TQt::Overline ) { int pos = fe->ascent()+1; if ( !pos ) pos = 1; - qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline-pos, w, lw, TRUE ); + qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline-pos, w, lw, true ); } if ( textFlags & TQt::StrikeOut ) { int pos = fe->ascent()/3; if ( !pos ) pos = 1; - qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline-pos, w, lw, TRUE ); + qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x1, baseline-pos, w, lw, true ); } } @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ static void drawScaled(int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *engine, const TQScriptI mat1.scale(scale, scale); w += h; // add some pixels to width because of italic correction - TQBitmap bm( w, h, TRUE ); // create bitmap + TQBitmap bm( w, h, true ); // create bitmap TQPainter paint; paint.begin( &bm ); // draw text in bitmap fe->draw( &paint, 0, si->ascent/scale, engine, si, textFlags ); @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ void TQFontEngineBox::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *engi int s = _size - 3; for (int k = 0; k < si->num_glyphs; k++) { if (!glyphAttributes[k].zeroWidth) - qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, xp, yp, s, s, FALSE ); + qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, xp, yp, s, s, false ); xp += _size; } } else { @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ const char *TQFontEngineBox::name() const bool TQFontEngineBox::canRender( const TQChar *, int ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } TQFontEngine::Type TQFontEngineBox::type() const @@ -474,10 +474,10 @@ TQFontEngine::Error TQFontEngineXLFD::stringToCMap( const TQChar *str, int len, } if ( _codec ) { - bool haveNbsp = FALSE; + bool haveNbsp = false; for ( int i = 0; i < len; i++ ) if ( str[i].unicode() == 0xa0 ) { - haveNbsp = TRUE; + haveNbsp = true; break; } @@ -549,10 +549,10 @@ TQFontEngine::Error TQFontEngineXLFD::stringToCMap( const TQChar *str, int len, extern "C" { #endif -static bool x_font_load_error = FALSE; +static bool x_font_load_error = false; static int x_font_errorhandler(Display *, XErrorEvent *) { - x_font_load_error = TRUE; + x_font_load_error = true; return 0; } @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ void TQFontEngineXLFD::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *eng TQt::HANDLE hd = p->device()->handle(); GC gc = p->gc; - bool transform = FALSE; + bool transform = false; int xorig = x; int yorig = y; @@ -644,10 +644,10 @@ void TQFontEngineXLFD::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *eng //tqDebug("m: %2.2f %2.2f %2.2f %2.2f, matrix=%s", p->m11(), p->m12(), p->m21(), p->m22(), matrix.data()); xlfd_transformed.replace( pos, endPos-pos, matrix ); - x_font_load_error = FALSE; + x_font_load_error = false; XErrorHandler old_handler = XSetErrorHandler( x_font_errorhandler ); font_id = XLoadFont( dpy, xlfd_transformed.data() ); - XSync( dpy, FALSE ); + XSync( dpy, false ); XSetErrorHandler( old_handler ); if ( x_font_load_error ) { //tqDebug( "couldn't load transformed font" ); @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ void TQFontEngineXLFD::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *eng _scale = tmp; return; } - transform = TRUE; + transform = true; } else if ( p->txop == TQPainter::TxTranslate ) { p->map( x, y, &x, &y ); } @@ -942,15 +942,15 @@ bool TQFontEngineXLFD::canRender( const TQChar *string, int len ) glyph_t glyphs[256]; int nglyphs = 255; glyph_t *g = glyphs; - if ( stringToCMap( string, len, g, 0, &nglyphs, FALSE ) == OutOfMemory ) { + if ( stringToCMap( string, len, g, 0, &nglyphs, false ) == OutOfMemory ) { g = (glyph_t *)malloc( nglyphs*sizeof(glyph_t) ); - stringToCMap( string, len, g, 0, &nglyphs, FALSE ); + stringToCMap( string, len, g, 0, &nglyphs, false ); } - bool allExist = TRUE; + bool allExist = true; for ( int i = 0; i < nglyphs; i++ ) { if ( !g[i] || !charStruct( _fs, g[i] ) ) { - allExist = FALSE; + allExist = false; break; } } @@ -1029,10 +1029,10 @@ void TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::findEngine( const TQChar &ch ) int i; for ( i = 0; i < mib_count; ++i ) { const int mib = qt_mib_for_xlfd_encoding( alternate_encodings[i] ); - bool skip = FALSE; + bool skip = false; for ( int e = 0; e < _count; ++e ) { if ( _engines[e]->cmap() == mib ) { - skip = TRUE; + skip = true; break; } } @@ -1080,7 +1080,7 @@ void TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::findEngine( const TQChar &ch ) chars[i] = i; chars[0x200] = 0x20ac; int glyphCount = 0x201; - engine->stringToCMap( (const TQChar *) chars, 0x201, glyphs, advances, &glyphCount, FALSE ); + engine->stringToCMap( (const TQChar *) chars, 0x201, glyphs, advances, &glyphCount, false ); // merge member data with the above for ( i = 0; i < 0x200; ++i ) { @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::stringToCMap( const TQChar *str, int len, glyph_t *glyphs } int i; - bool missing = FALSE; + bool missing = false; const TQChar *c = str+len; glyph_t *g = glyphs+len; if ( advances ) { @@ -1382,21 +1382,21 @@ const char *TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::name() const bool TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::canRender( const TQChar *string, int len ) { - bool all = TRUE; + bool all = true; int i; for ( i = 0; i < len; ++i ) { if ( string[i].unicode() >= 0x200 || glyphIndices[string[i].unicode()] == 0 ) { if (string[i].unicode() != 0x20ac || euroIndex == 0) - all = FALSE; + all = false; break; } } if ( all ) - return TRUE; + return true; - all = TRUE; + all = true; for ( i = 0; i < len; ++i ) { if ( string[i].unicode() >= 0x200 ) { if (string[i].unicode() == 0x20ac) { @@ -1407,14 +1407,14 @@ bool TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::canRender( const TQChar *string, int len ) if (euroIndex) continue; } - all = FALSE; + all = false; break; } if ( glyphIndices[string[i].unicode()] != 0 ) continue; findEngine( string[i] ); if ( glyphIndices[string[i].unicode()] == 0 ) { - all = FALSE; + all = false; break; } } @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ void TQFontEngineLatinXLFD::setScale( double scale ) chars[i] = i; int glyphCount = 0x200; _engines[0]->stringToCMap( (const TQChar *)chars, 0x200, - glyphIndices, glyphAdvances, &glyphCount, FALSE ); + glyphIndices, glyphAdvances, &glyphCount, false ); } @@ -1491,7 +1491,7 @@ TQFontEngineXft::TQFontEngineXft( XftFont *font, XftPattern *pattern, int cmap ) // if the Xft font is not antialiased, it uses bitmaps instead of // 8-bit alpha maps... adjust the cache_cost to reflect this - Bool antialiased = TRUE; + Bool antialiased = true; if ( XftPatternGetBool( pattern, XFT_ANTIALIAS, 0, &antialiased ) == XftResultMatch && ! antialiased ) { @@ -1616,12 +1616,12 @@ void TQFontEngineXft::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *engi GlyphAttributes *glyphAttributes = engine->glyphAttributes( si ); XftFont *fnt = _font; - bool transform = FALSE; + bool transform = false; if ( p->txop >= TQPainter::TxScale || p->rop != TQt::CopyROP || _scale < 0.9999 || _scale > 1.001) { bool can_scale = (_face->face_flags & FT_FACE_FLAG_SCALABLE) && p->rop == TQt::CopyROP; double size = (p->m11()*p->m22() - p->m12()*p->m21())*_scale*_scale*fontDef.pixelSize*fontDef.pixelSize; if (size > 256*256 || _scale < .9999 || _scale > 1.001) - can_scale = FALSE; + can_scale = false; if (!can_scale) { // font doesn't support transformations, need to do it by hand float tmp = _scale; @@ -1686,7 +1686,7 @@ void TQFontEngineXft::draw( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, const TQTextEngine *engi trf->next = transformed_fonts; transformed_fonts = trf; } - transform = TRUE; + transform = true; } else if ( p->txop == TQPainter::TxTranslate ) { p->map( x, y, &x, &y ); } @@ -1948,7 +1948,7 @@ int TQFontEngineXft::minRightBearing() const TQChar *ch = (TQChar *)char_table; glyph_t glyphs[char_table_entries]; int ng = char_table_entries; - stringToCMap(ch, char_table_entries, glyphs, 0, &ng, FALSE); + stringToCMap(ch, char_table_entries, glyphs, 0, &ng, false); while (--ng) { if (glyphs[ng]) { glyph_metrics_t gi = that->boundingBox( glyphs[ng] ); @@ -1980,14 +1980,14 @@ void TQFontEngineXft::setScale( double scale ) bool TQFontEngineXft::canRender( const TQChar *string, int len ) { - bool allExist = TRUE; + bool allExist = true; if (_cmap != -1) { for ( int i = 0; i < len; i++ ) { uint uc = getCodepoint(string, i, len); if (!XftCharExists(0, _font, uc) && getAdobeCharIndex(_font, _cmap, uc) == 0) { - allExist = FALSE; + allExist = false; break; } } @@ -1995,7 +1995,7 @@ bool TQFontEngineXft::canRender( const TQChar *string, int len ) for ( int i = 0; i < len; i++ ) { uint uc = getCodepoint(string, i, len); if (!XftCharExists(0, _font, uc)) { - allExist = FALSE; + allExist = false; break; } } @@ -2259,7 +2259,7 @@ bool TQOpenType::checkScript(unsigned int script) if (requirements & RequiresGsub) { if (!gsub) - return FALSE; + return false; FT_UShort script_index; FT_Error error = TT_GSUB_Select_Script(gsub, tag, &script_index); @@ -2267,13 +2267,13 @@ bool TQOpenType::checkScript(unsigned int script) #ifdef OT_DEBUG tqDebug("could not select script %d in GSub table: %d", (int)script, error); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } if (requirements & RequiresGpos) { if (!gpos) - return FALSE; + return false; FT_UShort script_index; FT_Error error = TT_GPOS_Select_Script(gpos, script, &script_index); @@ -2281,11 +2281,11 @@ bool TQOpenType::checkScript(unsigned int script) #ifdef OT_DEBUG tqDebug("could not select script in gpos table: %d", error); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -2436,8 +2436,8 @@ bool TQOpenType::positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters) face = lockFTFace(static_cast<TQFontEngineXft *>(fontEngine)->font()); #endif memset(otl_buffer->positions, 0, otl_buffer->in_length*sizeof(OTL_PositionRec)); - // #### check that passing "FALSE,FALSE" is correct - TT_GPOS_Apply_String(face, gpos, loadFlags, otl_buffer, FALSE, FALSE); + // #### check that passing "false,false" is correct + TT_GPOS_Apply_String(face, gpos, loadFlags, otl_buffer, false, false); #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 unlockFTFace(static_cast<TQFontEngineXft *>(fontEngine)->font()); #endif @@ -2446,14 +2446,14 @@ bool TQOpenType::positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters) // make sure we have enough space to write everything back if (item->num_glyphs < (int)otl_buffer->in_length) { item->num_glyphs = otl_buffer->in_length; - return FALSE; + return false; } for (unsigned int i = 0; i < otl_buffer->in_length; ++i) { item->glyphs[i] = otl_buffer->in_string[i].gindex; item->attributes[i] = tmpAttributes[otl_buffer->in_string[i].cluster]; if (i && otl_buffer->in_string[i].cluster == otl_buffer->in_string[i-1].cluster) - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; } item->num_glyphs = otl_buffer->in_length; @@ -2519,7 +2519,7 @@ bool TQOpenType::positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters) // tqDebug(" ->\tadv=%d\tpos=(%d/%d)", // glyphs[i].advance.x.toInt(), glyphs[i].offset.x.toInt(), glyphs[i].offset.y.toInt()); } - item->has_positioning = TRUE; + item->has_positioning = true; } else { qt_heuristicPosition(item); } @@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ bool TQOpenType::positionAndAdd(TQShaperItem *item, bool doLogClusters) item->offsets[i].x, item->offsets[i].y); tqDebug("-----------------------------------------"); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif diff --git a/src/kernel/tqguardedptr.cpp b/src/kernel/tqguardedptr.cpp index a08fe1aae..ab18f5ed2 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqguardedptr.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqguardedptr.cpp @@ -147,9 +147,9 @@ \fn bool TQGuardedPtr::operator==( const TQGuardedPtr<T> &p ) const Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics. - Returns TRUE if both \a p and this guarded pointer are 0, or if + Returns true if both \a p and this guarded pointer are 0, or if both \a p and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. \sa operator!=() */ @@ -158,15 +158,15 @@ \fn bool TQGuardedPtr::operator!= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T>& p ) const Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of - operator==(). Returns TRUE if \a p and this guarded pointer are - not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE. + operator==(). Returns true if \a p and this guarded pointer are + not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQGuardedPtr::isNull() const - Returns \c TRUE if the referenced object has been destroyed or if - there is no referenced object; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns \c true if the referenced object has been destroyed or if + there is no referenced object; otherwise returns false. */ /*! diff --git a/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp b/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp index 22e8a8f1d..d22116207 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ TQIconSetIcon *TQIconSetPrivate::icon( const TQIconSet *iconSet, 22 x 22, while the default large size is 32 x 32. These sizes only affect generated icons. - The isGenerated() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by + The isGenerated() function returns true if an icon was generated by TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached pixmaps. @@ -551,8 +551,8 @@ TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap( Size size, Mode mode, State state ) const icon->pixmap = new TQPixmap( d->defaultPix ); } else { /* - No icons are available for { TRUE, Normal, Off } and - { FALSE, Normal, Off }. Try the other 10 combinaisons, + No icons are available for { true, Normal, Off } and + { false, Normal, Off }. Try the other 10 combinaisons, best ones first. */ const int N = 10; @@ -561,16 +561,16 @@ TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap( Size size, Mode mode, State state ) const Mode mode; State state; } tryList[N] = { - { TRUE, Active, Off }, - { TRUE, Normal, On }, - { TRUE, Active, On }, - { FALSE, Active, Off }, - { FALSE, Normal, On }, - { FALSE, Active, On }, - { TRUE, Disabled, Off }, - { TRUE, Disabled, On }, - { FALSE, Disabled, Off }, - { FALSE, Disabled, On } + { true, Active, Off }, + { true, Normal, On }, + { true, Active, On }, + { false, Active, Off }, + { false, Normal, On }, + { false, Active, On }, + { true, Disabled, Off }, + { true, Disabled, On }, + { false, Disabled, Off }, + { false, Disabled, On } }; for ( int i = 0; i < N; i++ ) { @@ -648,16 +648,16 @@ TQPixmap TQIconSet::pixmap() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the pixmap with size \a size, mode \a mode and + Returns true if the pixmap with size \a size, mode \a mode and state \a state is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. A pixmap obtained from a TQIconFactory is considered non-generated. */ bool TQIconSet::isGenerated( Size size, Mode mode, State state ) const { if ( !d ) - return TRUE; + return true; return d->icon( this, size, mode, state )->origin == Generated; } @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ void TQIconSet::installIconFactory( TQIconFactory *factory ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQIconSet::isNull() const { @@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconSet::createDisabled( Size size, State state ) const By reimplementing createPixmap(), you can override TQIconSet's default algorithm for computing pixmaps not supplied by the user. - Call setAutoDelete(TRUE) if you want the factory to automatically + Call setAutoDelete(true) if you want the factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer needed by TQIconSet. \sa TQIconSet @@ -899,9 +899,9 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconFactory::createPixmap( const TQIconSet& /* iconSet */, /*! \fn void TQIconFactory::setAutoDelete( bool autoDelete ) - If \a autoDelete is TRUE, sets the icon factory to automatically + If \a autoDelete is true, sets the icon factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any TQIconSet and - isn't the default factory. If \a autoDelete is FALSE (the default) + isn't the default factory. If \a autoDelete is false (the default) auto-deletion is disabled. \sa autoDelete(), defaultFactory() @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconFactory::createPixmap( const TQIconSet& /* iconSet */, /*! \fn bool TQIconFactory::autoDelete() const - Returns TRUE if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa setAutoDelete() */ @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ TQIconFactory *TQIconFactory::defaultFactory() { if ( !defaultFac ) { defaultFac = new TQIconFactory; - defaultFac->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + defaultFac->setAutoDelete( true ); defaultFac->ref(); q_cleanup_icon_factory.set( &defaultFac ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp b/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp index 177c0a6af..35dabb6e7 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp @@ -486,12 +486,12 @@ TQImage::TQImage( uchar* yourdata, int w, int h, int depth, data->nbytes = bpl*h; if ( colortable || !data->ncols ) { data->ctbl = colortable; - data->ctbl_mine = FALSE; + data->ctbl_mine = false; } else { // calloc since we realloc, etc. later (ick) data->ctbl = (TQRgb*)calloc( data->ncols*sizeof(TQRgb), data->ncols ); TQ_CHECK_PTR(data->ctbl); - data->ctbl_mine = TRUE; + data->ctbl_mine = true; } uchar** jt = (uchar**)malloc(h*sizeof(uchar*)); TQ_CHECK_PTR(jt); @@ -667,14 +667,14 @@ TQImage TQImage::copy(int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags) const // alpha channel should be only copied, not used by bitBlt(), and // this is mutable, we will restore the image state before returning TQImage *that = (TQImage *) this; - that->setAlphaBuffer( FALSE ); + that->setAlphaBuffer( false ); } memcpy( image.colorTable(), colorTable(), numColors()*sizeof(TQRgb) ); bitBlt( &image, dx, dy, this, x, y, -1, -1, conversion_flags ); if ( has_alpha ) { // restore image state TQImage *that = (TQImage *) this; - that->setAlphaBuffer( TRUE ); + that->setAlphaBuffer( true ); } image.setAlphaBuffer(hasAlphaBuffer()); image.data->dpmx = dotsPerMeterX(); @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::copy(int x, int y, int w, int h, int conversion_flags) const /*! \fn bool TQImage::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if it is a null image; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if it is a null image; otherwise returns false. A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data. */ @@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ void TQImage::fill( uint pixel ) /*! Inverts all pixel values in the image. - If the depth is 32: if \a invertAlpha is TRUE, the alpha bits are + If the depth is 32: if \a invertAlpha is true, the alpha bits are also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged. If the depth is not 32, the argument \a invertAlpha has no @@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ void TQImage::setNumColors( int numColors ) if ( data->ctbl_mine ) free( data->ctbl ); else - data->ctbl_mine = TRUE; + data->ctbl_mine = true; data->ctbl = 0; } data->ncols = 0; @@ -1099,7 +1099,7 @@ void TQImage::setNumColors( int numColors ) } else { // create new color table data->ctbl = (TQRgb*)calloc( numColors*sizeof(TQRgb), 1 ); TQ_CHECK_PTR(data->ctbl); - data->ctbl_mine = TRUE; + data->ctbl_mine = true; } data->ncols = data->ctbl == 0 ? 0 : numColors; } @@ -1108,14 +1108,14 @@ void TQImage::setNumColors( int numColors ) /*! \fn bool TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer() const - Returns TRUE if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns + false. \sa setAlphaBuffer() */ /*! - Enables alpha buffer mode if \a enable is TRUE, otherwise disables + Enables alpha buffer mode if \a enable is true, otherwise disables it. The default setting is disabled. An 8-bpp image has 8-bit pixels. A pixel is an index into the @@ -1144,8 +1144,8 @@ void TQImage::setAlphaBuffer( bool enable ) /*! Sets the image \a width, \a height, \a depth, its number of colors - (in \a numColors), and bit order. Returns TRUE if successful, or - FALSE if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be + (in \a numColors), and bit order. Returns true if successful, or + false if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be allocated. The \a width and \a height is limited to 32767. \a depth must be @@ -1169,12 +1169,12 @@ bool TQImage::create( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors, { reset(); // reset old data if ( width <= 0 || height <= 0 || depth <= 0 || numColors < 0 ) - return FALSE; // invalid parameter(s) + return false; // invalid parameter(s) if ( depth == 1 && bitOrder == IgnoreEndian ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) tqWarning( "TQImage::create: Bit order is required for 1 bpp images" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( depth != 1 ) bitOrder = IgnoreEndian; @@ -1195,18 +1195,18 @@ bool TQImage::create( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors, #endif break; default: // invalid depth - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( depth == 32 ) numColors = 0; setNumColors( numColors ); if ( data->ncols != numColors ) // could not alloc color table - return FALSE; + return false; if ( INT_MAX / uint(depth) < uint(width) ) { // sanity check for potential overflow setNumColors( 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } const int bpl = ((width*depth+31)/32)*4; // bytes per scanline // #### WWA: shouldn't this be (width*depth+7)/8: @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ bool TQImage::create( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors, || bpl < 0 || INT_MAX / sizeof(uchar *) < uint(height) ) { // sanity check for potential overflow setNumColors( 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } int nbytes = bpl*height; // image size int ptbl = height*sizeof(uchar*); // pointer table size @@ -1224,7 +1224,7 @@ bool TQImage::create( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors, TQ_CHECK_PTR(p); if ( !p ) { // no memory setNumColors( 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } data->w = width; data->h = height; @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ bool TQImage::create( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors, memset( d+bpl-pad, 0, pad ); d += bpl; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1271,7 +1271,7 @@ void TQImage::reinit() data->ctbl = 0; data->bits = 0; data->bitordr = TQImage::IgnoreEndian; - data->alpha = FALSE; + data->alpha = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TEXT data->misc = 0; #endif @@ -1318,18 +1318,18 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl { TQRgb *p; uchar *b; - bool do_quant = FALSE; + bool do_quant = false; int y, x; if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 8, 256) ) - return FALSE; + return false; const int tablesize = 997; // prime TQRgbMap table[tablesize]; int pix=0; TQRgb amask = src->hasAlphaBuffer() ? 0xffffffff : 0x00ffffff; if ( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ) - dst->setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + dst->setAlphaBuffer(true); if ( palette ) { // Preload palette into table. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl } if ( (conversion_flags & TQt::DitherMode_Mask) == TQt::PreferDither ) { - do_quant = TRUE; + do_quant = true; } else { for ( y=0; y<src->height(); y++ ) { // check if <= 256 colors p = (TQRgb *)src->scanLine(y); @@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl } else { // Cannot be in table if ( pix == 256 ) { // too many colors - do_quant = TRUE; + do_quant = true; // Break right out x = 0; y = src->height(); @@ -1616,14 +1616,14 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl } - return TRUE; + return true; } static bool convert_8_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 32) ) - return FALSE; // create failed + return false; // create failed dst->setAlphaBuffer( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ); for ( int y=0; y<dst->height(); y++ ) { // for each scan line... uint *p = (uint *)dst->scanLine(y); @@ -1632,14 +1632,14 @@ static bool convert_8_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) while ( p < end ) *p++ = src->color(*b++); } - return TRUE; + return true; } static bool convert_1_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 32) ) - return FALSE; // could not create + return false; // could not create dst->setAlphaBuffer( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ); for ( int y=0; y<dst->height(); y++ ) { // for each scan line... uint *p = (uint *)dst->scanLine(y); @@ -1659,14 +1659,14 @@ static bool convert_1_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) } } } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif // TQT_NO_IMAGE_TRUECOLOR static bool convert_1_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 8, 2) ) - return FALSE; // something failed + return false; // something failed dst->setAlphaBuffer( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ); if (src->numColors() >= 2) { dst->setColor( 0, src->color(0) ); // copy color table @@ -1697,7 +1697,7 @@ static bool convert_1_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) } } } - return TRUE; + return true; } #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_DITHER_TO_1 @@ -1709,7 +1709,7 @@ static bool dither_to_1( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_flags, bool fromalpha ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 1, 2, TQImage::BigEndian) ) - return FALSE; // something failed + return false; // something failed enum { Threshold, Ordered, Diffuse } dithermode; @@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ static bool dither_to_1( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int *line2 = new int[w]; int bmwidth = (w+7)/8; if ( !(line1 && line2) ) - return FALSE; + return false; uchar *p; uchar *end; int *b1, *b2; @@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@ static bool dither_to_1( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, } } } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif @@ -2004,7 +2004,7 @@ static inline bool is16BitGray( ushort c ) static bool convert_16_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 32) ) - return FALSE; // create failed + return false; // create failed dst->setAlphaBuffer( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ); for ( int y=0; y<dst->height(); y++ ) { // for each scan line... uint *p = (uint *)dst->scanLine(y); @@ -2013,14 +2013,14 @@ static bool convert_16_to_32( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) while ( p < end ) *p++ = qt_conv16ToRgb( *s++ ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } static bool convert_32_to_16( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) { if ( !dst->create(src->width(), src->height(), 16) ) - return FALSE; // create failed + return false; // create failed dst->setAlphaBuffer( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ); for ( int y=0; y<dst->height(); y++ ) { // for each scan line... ushort *p = (ushort *)dst->scanLine(y); @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@ static bool convert_32_to_16( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst ) while ( p < end ) *p++ = qt_convRgbTo16( *s++ ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -2059,7 +2059,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::convertDepth( int depth, int conversion_flags ) const image = *this; // no conversion #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_DITHER_TO_1 else if ( (data->d == 8 || data->d == 32) && depth == 1 ) // dither - dither_to_1( this, &image, conversion_flags, FALSE ); + dither_to_1( this, &image, conversion_flags, false ); #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TRUECOLOR else if ( data->d == 32 && depth == 8 ) // 32 -> 8 @@ -2104,8 +2104,8 @@ TQImage TQImage::convertDepth( int depth ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if ( \a x, \a y ) is a valid coordinate in the image; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if ( \a x, \a y ) is a valid coordinate in the image; + otherwise returns false. \sa width() height() pixelIndex() */ @@ -2306,9 +2306,9 @@ bool isGray(TQRgb c) } /*! - Returns TRUE if all the colors in the image are shades of gray + Returns true if all the colors in the image are shades of gray (i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. This function is slow for large 32-bit images. @@ -2322,33 +2322,33 @@ bool TQImage::allGray() const TQRgb* b = (TQRgb*)bits(); while (p--) if (!isGray(*b++)) - return FALSE; + return false; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_16_BIT } else if (depth()==16) { int p = width()*height(); ushort* b = (ushort*)bits(); while (p--) if (!is16BitGray(*b++)) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif } else #endif //TQT_NO_IMAGE_TRUECOLOR { - if (!data->ctbl) return TRUE; + if (!data->ctbl) return true; for (int i=0; i<numColors(); i++) if (!isGray(data->ctbl[i])) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! For 32-bit images, this function is equivalent to allGray(). - For 8-bpp images, this function returns TRUE if color(i) is + For 8-bpp images, this function returns true if color(i) is TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. \sa allGray() depth() */ @@ -2365,11 +2365,11 @@ bool TQImage::isGrayscale() const case 8: { for (int i=0; i<numColors(); i++) if (data->ctbl[i] != tqRgb(i,i,i)) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE @@ -2428,7 +2428,7 @@ void pnmscale(const TQImage& src, TQImage& dst) tempxelrow = new TQRgb[cols]; if ( src.hasAlphaBuffer() ) { - dst.setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + dst.setAlphaBuffer(true); as = new long[cols]; for ( col = 0; col < cols; ++col ) as[col] = HALFSCALE; @@ -2982,7 +2982,6 @@ TQImage TQImage::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags ) const { if ( conversion_flags == 1 ) { - // Old code is passing "TRUE". conversion_flags = TQt::DiffuseAlphaDither; } @@ -2997,7 +2996,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags ) const } TQImage mask1; - dither_to_1( this, &mask1, conversion_flags, TRUE ); + dither_to_1( this, &mask1, conversion_flags, true ); return mask1; } #endif @@ -3015,7 +3014,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags ) const The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder(). - If \a clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the + If \a clipTight is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. This function disregards the \link hasAlphaBuffer() alpha buffer @@ -3057,10 +3056,10 @@ TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight ) const } int x,y; - bool done = FALSE; + bool done = false; uchar *ypp, *ypc, *ypn; while( !done ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; ypn = m.scanLine(0); ypc = 0; for ( y = 0; y < h; y++ ) { @@ -3078,7 +3077,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight ) const !(*(ypn + (x >> 3)) & (1 << (x & 7))) ) && ( (*(ypc + (x >> 3)) & (1 << (x & 7))) ) && ( (*p & 0x00ffffff) == background ) ) { - done = FALSE; + done = false; *(ypc + (x >> 3)) &= ~(1 << (x & 7)); } p++; @@ -3128,7 +3127,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight ) const Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or the vertical direction depending on whether \a horizontal and \a - vertical are set to TRUE or FALSE. The original image is not + vertical are set to true or false. The original image is not changed. \sa smoothScale() @@ -3231,7 +3230,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::mirror(bool horizontal, bool vertical) const TQImage TQImage::mirror() const { - return mirror(FALSE,TRUE); + return mirror(false,true); } #endif //TQT_NO_IMAGE_MIRROR @@ -3368,8 +3367,8 @@ TQStrList TQImage::outputFormats() /*! - Loads an image from the file \a fileName. Returns TRUE if the - image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE. + Loads an image from the file \a fileName. Returns true if the + image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false. If \a format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If \a format is not specified (which @@ -3393,8 +3392,8 @@ bool TQImage::load( const TQString &fileName, const char* format ) /*! Loads an image from the first \a len bytes of binary data in \a - buf. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise - returns FALSE. + buf. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise + returns false. If \a format is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If \a format is not specified (which @@ -3439,8 +3438,8 @@ bool TQImage::loadFromData( TQByteArray buf, const char *format ) compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the default) to use the default settings. - Returns TRUE if the image was successfully saved; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the image was successfully saved; otherwise + returns false. \sa load() loadFromData() imageFormat() TQPixmap::save() TQImageIO */ @@ -3448,7 +3447,7 @@ bool TQImage::loadFromData( TQByteArray buf, const char *format ) bool TQImage::save( const TQString &fileName, const char* format, int quality ) const { if ( isNull() ) - return FALSE; // nothing to save + return false; // nothing to save TQImageIO io( fileName, format ); return doImageIO( &io, quality ); } @@ -3471,7 +3470,7 @@ bool TQImage::save( const TQString &fileName, const char* format, int quality ) bool TQImage::save( TQIODevice* device, const char* format, int quality ) const { if ( isNull() ) - return FALSE; // nothing to save + return false; // nothing to save TQImageIO io( device, format ); return doImageIO( &io, quality ); } @@ -3482,7 +3481,7 @@ bool TQImage::save( TQIODevice* device, const char* format, int quality ) const bool TQImage::doImageIO( TQImageIO* io, int quality ) const { if ( !io ) - return FALSE; + return false; io->setImage( *this ); #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( quality > 100 || quality < -1 ) @@ -3822,7 +3821,7 @@ void tqt_init_image_handlers() // initialize image handlers if ( !imageHandlers ) { imageHandlers = new TQIHList; TQ_CHECK_PTR( imageHandlers ); - imageHandlers->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + imageHandlers->setAutoDelete( true ); tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGEIO_BMP TQImageIO::defineIOHandler( "BMP", "^BM", 0, @@ -4303,8 +4302,8 @@ TQStrList TQImageIO::outputFormats() /*! - Reads an image into memory and returns TRUE if the image was - successfully read; otherwise returns FALSE. + Reads an image into memory and returns true if the image was + successfully read; otherwise returns false. Before reading an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device @@ -4340,10 +4339,10 @@ bool TQImageIO::read() } else if ( !fname.isEmpty() ) { // read from file file.setName( fname ); if ( !file.open(IO_ReadOnly) ) - return FALSE; // cannot open file + return false; // cannot open file iodev = &file; } else { // no file name or io device - return FALSE; + return false; } if (frmt.isEmpty()) { // Try to guess format @@ -4353,7 +4352,7 @@ bool TQImageIO::read() file.close(); iodev = 0; } - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { image_format = frmt; @@ -4391,8 +4390,8 @@ bool TQImageIO::read() /*! - Writes an image to an IO device and returns TRUE if the image was - successfully written; otherwise returns FALSE. + Writes an image to an IO device and returns true if the image was + successfully written; otherwise returns false. Before writing an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device @@ -4409,7 +4408,7 @@ bool TQImageIO::read() iio.setFileName( "vegeburger.bmp" ); iio.setFormat( "BMP" ); if ( iio.write() ) - // returned TRUE if written successfully + // returned true if written successfully \endcode \sa setIODevice() setFileName() setFormat() read() TQPixmap::save() @@ -4418,7 +4417,7 @@ bool TQImageIO::read() bool TQImageIO::write() { if ( frmt.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQImageHandler *h = get_image_handler( frmt ); if ( !h && !plugin_manager) { tqt_init_image_plugins(); @@ -4429,7 +4428,7 @@ bool TQImageIO::write() tqWarning( "TQImageIO::write: No such image format handler: %s", format() ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } TQFile file; if ( !iodev && !fname.isEmpty() ) { @@ -4437,7 +4436,7 @@ bool TQImageIO::write() bool translate = h->text_mode==TQImageHandler::TranslateInOut; int fmode = translate ? IO_WriteOnly|IO_Translate : IO_WriteOnly; if ( !file.open(fmode) ) // couldn't create file - return FALSE; + return false; iodev = &file; } iostat = 1; @@ -4559,7 +4558,7 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) s >> bi; // read BMP info header if ( d->atEnd() ) // end of stream/file - return FALSE; + return false; #if 0 tqDebug( "offset...........%d", offset ); tqDebug( "startpos.........%d", startpos ); @@ -4587,12 +4586,12 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) if ( !(nbits == 1 || nbits == 4 || nbits == 8 || nbits == 16 || nbits == 24 || nbits == 32) || bi.biPlanes != 1 || comp > BMP_BITFIELDS ) - return FALSE; // weird BMP image + return false; // weird BMP image if ( !(comp == BMP_RGB || (nbits == 4 && comp == BMP_RLE4) || (nbits == 8 && comp == BMP_RLE8) || ((nbits == 16 || nbits == 32) && comp == BMP_BITFIELDS)) ) - return FALSE; // weird compression type + return false; // weird compression type if ((w < 0) || ((w * abs(h)) > (16384 * 16384))) - return FALSE; + return false; int ncols; int depth; @@ -4617,7 +4616,7 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) image.create( w, h, depth, ncols, nbits == 1 ? TQImage::BigEndian : TQImage::IgnoreEndian ); if ( image.isNull() ) // could not create image - return FALSE; + return false; image.setDotsPerMeterX( bi.biXPelsPerMeter ); image.setDotsPerMeterY( bi.biYPelsPerMeter ); @@ -4629,29 +4628,29 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) int rgb_len = t == BMP_OLD ? 3 : 4; for ( int i=0; i<ncols; i++ ) { if ( d->readBlock( (char *)rgb, rgb_len ) != rgb_len ) - return FALSE; + return false; image.setColor( i, tqRgb(rgb[2],rgb[1],rgb[0]) ); if ( d->atEnd() ) // truncated file - return FALSE; + return false; } } else if (comp == BMP_BITFIELDS && (nbits == 16 || nbits == 32)) { if ( (TQ_ULONG)d->readBlock( (char *)&red_mask, sizeof(red_mask) ) != sizeof(red_mask) ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( (TQ_ULONG)d->readBlock( (char *)&green_mask, sizeof(green_mask) ) != sizeof(green_mask) ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( (TQ_ULONG)d->readBlock( (char *)&blue_mask, sizeof(blue_mask) ) != sizeof(blue_mask) ) - return FALSE; + return false; red_shift = calc_shift(red_mask); if (((red_mask >> red_shift) + 1) == 0) - return FALSE; + return false; red_scale = 256 / ((red_mask >> red_shift) + 1); green_shift = calc_shift(green_mask); if (((green_mask >> green_shift) + 1) == 0) - return FALSE; + return false; green_scale = 256 / ((green_mask >> green_shift) + 1); blue_shift = calc_shift(blue_mask); if (((blue_mask >> blue_shift) + 1) == 0) - return FALSE; + return false; blue_scale = 256 / ((blue_mask >> blue_shift) + 1); } else if (comp == BMP_RGB && (nbits == 24 || nbits == 32)) { blue_mask = 0x000000ff; @@ -4662,7 +4661,7 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) red_shift = 16; blue_scale = green_scale = red_scale = 1; } else if (comp == BMP_RGB && nbits == 16) // don't support RGB values for 15/16 bpp - return FALSE; + return false; // offset can be bogus, be careful if (offset>=0 && startpos + offset > (TQ_LONG)d->at() ) @@ -4801,7 +4800,7 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) b = endp-p; if ( d->readBlock( (char *)p, b ) != b ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( (b & 1) == 1 ) d->getch(); // align on word boundary x += b; @@ -4852,7 +4851,7 @@ bool read_dib( TQDataStream& s, int offset, int startpos, TQImage& image ) delete[] buf24; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool qt_read_dib( TQDataStream& s, TQImage& image ) @@ -4938,7 +4937,7 @@ bool qt_write_dib( TQDataStream& s, TQImage image ) for ( y=image.height()-1; y>=0; y-- ) { d->writeBlock( (char*)image.scanLine(y), bpl ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } uchar *buf = new uchar[bpl_bmp]; @@ -4970,11 +4969,11 @@ bool qt_write_dib( TQDataStream& s, TQImage image ) } if ( bpl_bmp != d->writeBlock( (char*)buf, bpl_bmp ) ) { delete[] buf; - return FALSE; + return false; } } delete[] buf; - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -5581,14 +5580,14 @@ static void write_xbm_image( TQImageIO *iio ) // Skip until ", read until the next ", return the rest in *buf -// Returns FALSE on error, TRUE on success +// Returns false on error, true on success static bool read_xpm_string( TQCString &buf, TQIODevice *d, const char * const *source, int &index ) { if ( source ) { buf = source[index++]; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( buf.size() < 69 ) //# just an approximation @@ -5599,7 +5598,7 @@ static bool read_xpm_string( TQCString &buf, TQIODevice *d, int i; while ( (c=d->getch()) != EOF && c != '"' ) { } if ( c == EOF ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } i = 0; while ( (c=d->getch()) != EOF && c != '"' ) { @@ -5608,13 +5607,13 @@ static bool read_xpm_string( TQCString &buf, TQIODevice *d, buf[i++] = c; } if ( c == EOF ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( i == (int)buf.size() ) // always use a 0 terminator buf.resize( i+1 ); buf[i] = '\0'; - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -5706,7 +5705,7 @@ static void read_xpm_image_or_array( TQImageIO * iio, const char * const * sourc buf.truncate(end); buf = buf.stripWhiteSpace(); if ( buf == "none" ) { - image.setAlphaBuffer( TRUE ); + image.setAlphaBuffer( true ); int transparentColor = currentColor; if ( image.depth() == 8 ) { image.setColor( transparentColor, @@ -5955,14 +5954,14 @@ static bool haveSamePalette(const TQImage& a, const TQImage& b) { - if (a.depth() != b.depth()) return FALSE; - if (a.numColors() != b.numColors()) return FALSE; + if (a.depth() != b.depth()) return false; + if (a.numColors() != b.numColors()) return false; TQRgb* ca = a.colorTable(); TQRgb* cb = b.colorTable(); for (int i=a.numColors(); i--; ) { - if (*ca++ != *cb++) return FALSE; + if (*ca++ != *cb++) return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -6157,8 +6156,8 @@ void bitBlt( TQImage* dst, int dx, int dy, const TQImage* src, /*! - Returns TRUE if this image and image \a i have the same contents; - otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there + Returns true if this image and image \a i have the same contents; + otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly. @@ -6169,14 +6168,14 @@ bool TQImage::operator==( const TQImage & i ) const { // same object, or shared? if ( i.data == data ) - return TRUE; + return true; // obviously different stuff? if ( i.data->h != data->h || i.data->w != data->w ) - return FALSE; + return false; // not equal if one has alphabuffer and the other does not if ( i.hasAlphaBuffer() != hasAlphaBuffer() ) - return FALSE; + return false; // that was the fast bit... TQImage i1 = convertDepth( 32 ); TQImage i2 = i.convertDepth( 32 ); @@ -6193,21 +6192,21 @@ bool TQImage::operator==( const TQImage & i ) const // compare pixels of scanline individually for ( m=0; m < data->w; m++ ) if ( (i1line[m] ^ i2line[m]) & 0x00FFFFFF ) - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { // yay, we can do fast binary comparison on entire scanlines for( l=0; l < data->h; l++ ) if ( memcmp( i1.scanLine( l ), i2.scanLine( l ), 4*data->w ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if this image and image \a i have different contents; - otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there + Returns true if this image and image \a i have different contents; + otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly. diff --git a/src/kernel/tqimage.h b/src/kernel/tqimage.h index 605b3551c..41e8b717c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqimage.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqimage.h @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public: void reset(); void fill( uint pixel ); - void invertPixels( bool invertAlpha = TRUE ); + void invertPixels( bool invertAlpha = true ); TQImage convertDepth( int ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TRUECOLOR @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ public: TQImage createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags=0 ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - TQImage createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight=TRUE ) const; + TQImage createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight=true ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_MIRROR TQImage mirror() const; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqimageformatplugin.cpp b/src/kernel/tqimageformatplugin.cpp index ad9057d2c..c7da8581d 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqimageformatplugin.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqimageformatplugin.cpp @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ bool TQImageFormatPlugin::loadImage( const TQString &format, const TQString &fil Q_UNUSED( format ) Q_UNUSED( filename ) Q_UNUSED( image ) - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \internal @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ bool TQImageFormatPlugin::saveImage( const TQString &format, const TQString &fil Q_UNUSED( format ) Q_UNUSED( filename ) Q_UNUSED( image ) - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif // TQT_NO_IMAGEFORMATPLUGIN diff --git a/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp b/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp index 7f0d5501d..913b0da5f 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ class TQInputContextPrivate { public: TQInputContextPrivate() - : holderWidget( 0 ), composingWidget( 0 ), hasFocus( FALSE ), - isComposing( FALSE ) + : holderWidget( 0 ), composingWidget( 0 ), hasFocus( false ), + isComposing( false ) #if !defined(TQT_NO_IM_PREEDIT_RELOCATION) , preeditString( TQString::null ), cursorPosition( -1 ), selLength ( 0 ) @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public: } void resetComposingState() { - isComposing = FALSE; + isComposing = false; #if !defined(TQT_NO_IM_PREEDIT_RELOCATION) preeditString = TQString::null; cursorPosition = -1; @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ public: a text widget -> a non-text widget -> another text widget To enable the preedit relocation feature, the input context class - have to reimplement isPreeditRelocationEnabled() as returns TRUE. + have to reimplement isPreeditRelocationEnabled() as returns true. The implementation requires that the preedit preservation is also enabled since preedit relocation is a special case of the preedit preservation. If the preedit relocation is disabled, the input @@ -376,14 +376,14 @@ void TQInputContext::setFocusWidget( TQWidget *w ) d->composingWidget ); // invoke sendIMEventInternal() rather than sendIMEvent() to // avoid altering the composing state - if ( isPreeditRelocation == TRUE ) { + if ( isPreeditRelocation ) { // clear preedit of previously focused text // widget. preserved preedit may be exist even if - // isPreeditRelocationEnabled() == FALSE. + // isPreeditRelocationEnabled() == false. sendIMEventInternal( TQEvent::IMEnd ); } d->composingWidget = w; // changes recipient of TQIMEvent - if ( isPreeditRelocation == TRUE ) { + if ( isPreeditRelocation ) { #if !defined(TQT_NO_IM_PREEDIT_RELOCATION) if ( isPreeditRelocationEnabled() ) { // copy preedit state to the widget that gaining focus @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ void TQInputContext::setFocusWidget( TQWidget *w ) } } } - d->hasFocus = w ? TRUE : FALSE; + d->hasFocus = w; } @@ -413,14 +413,14 @@ void TQInputContext::releaseComposingWidget( TQWidget *w ) { if ( d->composingWidget == w ) { d->composingWidget = 0; - d->hasFocus = FALSE; + d->hasFocus = false; } } #endif // TQ_WS_X11 /*! \internal - This function can be reimplemented in a subclass as returning TRUE + This function can be reimplemented in a subclass as returning true if you want making your input method enable the preedit relocation. See the description for preedit relocation of TQInputContext. @@ -429,13 +429,13 @@ void TQInputContext::releaseComposingWidget( TQWidget *w ) */ bool TQInputContext::isPreeditRelocationEnabled() { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! This function indicates whether IMStart event had been sent to the text widget. It is ensured that an input context can send IMCompose - or IMEnd event safely if this function returned TRUE. + or IMEnd event safely if this function returned true. The state is automatically being tracked through sendIMEvent(). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ bool TQInputContext::isComposing() const This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to filter input events. - Return TRUE if the \a event has been consumed. Otherwise, the + Return true if the \a event has been consumed. Otherwise, the unfiltered \a event will be forwarded to widgets as ordinary way. Although the input events have accept() and ignore() methods, leave it untouched. @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ bool TQInputContext::isComposing() const bool TQInputContext::filterEvent( const TQEvent *event ) { Q_UNUSED(event); - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ void TQInputContext::sendIMEvent( TQEvent::Type type, const TQString &text, if ( type == TQEvent::IMStart ) { sendIMEventInternal( type, text, cursorPosition, selLength ); - d->isComposing = TRUE; + d->isComposing = true; } else if ( type == TQEvent::IMEnd ) { d->resetComposingState(); sendIMEventInternal( type, text, cursorPosition, selLength ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqinputcontext_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqinputcontext_x11.cpp index 70fa9f160..227a016f3 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqinputcontext_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqinputcontext_x11.cpp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ other input methods may use this to implement some special features such as distinguishing Shift_L and Shift_R. - Return TRUE if the \a event has been consumed. Otherwise, the + Return true if the \a event has been consumed. Otherwise, the unfiltered \a event will be translated into TQEvent and forwarded to filterEvent(). Filtering at both x11FilterEvent() and filterEvent() in single input method is allowed. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ bool TQInputContext::x11FilterEvent( TQWidget *keywidget, XEvent *event ) { Q_UNUSED(keywidget); Q_UNUSED(event); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif //Q_NO_IM diff --git a/src/kernel/tqinternal.cpp b/src/kernel/tqinternal.cpp index 11243d1d2..98524dfdd 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqinternal.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqinternal.cpp @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ static TQSharedDoubleBuffer* qdb_owner = 0; TQCleanupHandler<TQPixmap> qdb_pixmap_cleanup; #ifdef TQ_WS_MACX -bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::dblbufr = FALSE; +bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::dblbufr = false; #else -bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::dblbufr = TRUE; +bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::dblbufr = true; #endif @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ void TQSharedDoubleBufferCleaner::doCleanup( void ) bool TQSharedDoubleBufferCleaner::event( TQEvent *e ) { if ( e->type() != TQEvent::Timer ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTimerEvent *event = (TQTimerEvent *) e; if ( event->timerId() == timer_id ) { @@ -184,11 +184,11 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBufferCleaner::event( TQEvent *e ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_STATE else { tqWarning( "TQSharedDoubleBufferCleaner::event: invalid timer event received." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - return TRUE; + return true; } // static instance @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin( TQPainter* painter, int x, int y, int w, int h tqWarning( "TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin: Buffer is already active." "\n\tYou must end() the buffer before a second begin()" ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - return FALSE; + return false; } external_p = painter; @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin( TQPainter* painter, int x, int y, int w, int h p = external_p; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* \internal @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin( TQWidget* widget, int x, int y, int w, int h ) tqWarning( "TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin: Buffer is already active." "\n\tYou must end() the buffer before a second begin()" ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - return FALSE; + return false; } state = Active; @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::begin( TQWidget* widget, int x, int y, int w, int h ) wid->erase( rx, ry, rw, rh ); } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* \internal @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::end() tqWarning( "TQSharedDoubleBuffer::end: Buffer is not active." "\n\tYou must call begin() before calling end()." ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( ! ( state & ExternalPainter ) ) { @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::end() p = external_p = 0; pix = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } /* \internal @@ -598,13 +598,13 @@ void TQSharedDoubleBuffer::releasePixmap() /* \internal \fn bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::isDisabled() - Returns TRUE if double buffering is disabled globally, FALSE otherwise. + Returns true if double buffering is disabled globally, false otherwise. */ /* \internal \fn void TQSharedDoubleBuffer::setDisabled( bool off ) - Disables global double buffering \a off is TRUE, otherwise global + Disables global double buffering \a off is true, otherwise global double buffering is enabled. */ @@ -644,13 +644,13 @@ void TQSharedDoubleBuffer::cleanup() /* \internal \fn bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::isActive() const - Returns TRUE if double buffered painting is active, FALSE otherwise. + Returns true if double buffered painting is active, false otherwise. */ /* \internal \fn bool TQSharedDoubleBuffer::isBuffered() const - Returns TRUE if painting is double buffered, FALSE otherwise. + Returns true if painting is double buffered, false otherwise. */ @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ void TQSharedDoubleBuffer::cleanup() TQMembuf::TQMembuf() : _size(0), _index(0) { buf = new TQPtrList<TQByteArray>; - buf->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + buf->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQMembuf::~TQMembuf() @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ TQMembuf::~TQMembuf() bool TQMembuf::consumeBytes( TQ_ULONG nbytes, char *sink ) { if ( nbytes <= 0 || nbytes > _size ) - return FALSE; + return false; _size -= nbytes; for ( ;; ) { TQByteArray *a = buf->first(); @@ -706,20 +706,20 @@ bool TQMembuf::consumeBytes( TQ_ULONG nbytes, char *sink ) break; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal Scans for any occurrence of '\n' in the buffer. If \a store is not 0 the text up to the first '\n' (or terminating 0) is written to \a store, and a terminating 0 is appended to \a store - if necessary. Returns TRUE if a '\n' was found; otherwise returns - FALSE. + if necessary. Returns true if a '\n' was found; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQMembuf::scanNewline( TQByteArray *store ) { if ( _size == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; int i = 0; // index into 'store' TQByteArray *a = 0; char *p; @@ -728,13 +728,13 @@ bool TQMembuf::scanNewline( TQByteArray *store ) if ( !a ) { a = buf->first(); if ( !a || a->size() == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; p = a->data() + _index; n = a->size() - _index; } else { a = buf->next(); if ( !a || a->size() == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; p = a->data(); n = a->size(); } @@ -747,11 +747,11 @@ bool TQMembuf::scanNewline( TQByteArray *store ) switch ( *p ) { case '\0': store->resize( i ); - return FALSE; + return false; case '\n': *(store->data()+i) = '\0'; store->resize( i ); - return TRUE; + return true; } p++; } @@ -759,9 +759,9 @@ bool TQMembuf::scanNewline( TQByteArray *store ) while ( n-- > 0 ) { switch ( *p++ ) { case '\0': - return FALSE; + return false; case '\n': - return TRUE; + return true; } } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqjpegio.cpp b/src/kernel/tqjpegio.cpp index f76aad44d..ec7b892ab 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqjpegio.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqjpegio.cpp @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ boolean qt_fill_input_buffer(j_decompress_ptr cinfo) #if defined(Q_OS_UNIXWARE) return B_TRUE; #else - return TRUE; + return true; #endif } @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ void qt_skip_input_data(j_decompress_ptr cinfo, long num_bytes) while (num_bytes > (long) src->bytes_in_buffer) { num_bytes -= (long) src->bytes_in_buffer; (void) qt_fill_input_buffer(cinfo); - /* note we assume that qt_fill_input_buffer will never return FALSE, + /* note we assume that qt_fill_input_buffer will never return false, * so suspension need not be handled. */ } @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ void read_jpeg_image(TQImageIO* iio) #if defined(Q_OS_UNIXWARE) (void) jpeg_read_header(&cinfo, B_TRUE); #else - (void) jpeg_read_header(&cinfo, TRUE); + (void) jpeg_read_header(&cinfo, true); #endif (void) jpeg_start_decompress(&cinfo); @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ void read_jpeg_image(TQImageIO* iio) scaleSize( sWidth, sHeight, cinfo.output_width, cinfo.output_height, sMode ); // tqDebug( "Scaling the jpeg to %i x %i", sWidth, sHeight, sModeStr ); - bool created = FALSE; + bool created = false; if ( cinfo.output_components == 3 || cinfo.output_components == 4) { created = image.create( sWidth, sHeight, 32 ); } else if ( cinfo.output_components == 1 ) { @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ void read_jpeg_image(TQImageIO* iio) } else { - bool created = FALSE; + bool created = false; if ( cinfo.output_components == 3 || cinfo.output_components == 4) { created = image.create( cinfo.output_width, cinfo.output_height, 32 ); } else if ( cinfo.output_components == 1 ) { @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ boolean qt_empty_output_buffer(j_compress_ptr cinfo) #if defined(Q_OS_UNIXWARE) return B_TRUE; #else - return TRUE; + return true; #endif } @@ -463,12 +463,12 @@ void write_jpeg_image(TQImageIO* iio) cinfo.image_height = image.height(); TQRgb* cmap=0; - bool gray=FALSE; + bool gray=false; switch ( image.depth() ) { case 1: case 8: cmap = image.colorTable(); - gray = TRUE; + gray = true; int i; for (i=image.numColors(); gray && i--; ) { gray = gray & ( tqRed(cmap[i]) == tqGreen(cmap[i]) && @@ -503,8 +503,8 @@ void write_jpeg_image(TQImageIO* iio) jpeg_set_quality(&cinfo, quality, B_TRUE /* limit to baseline-JPEG values */); jpeg_start_compress(&cinfo, B_TRUE); #else - jpeg_set_quality(&cinfo, quality, TRUE /* limit to baseline-JPEG values */); - jpeg_start_compress(&cinfo, TRUE); + jpeg_set_quality(&cinfo, quality, true /* limit to baseline-JPEG values */); + jpeg_start_compress(&cinfo, true); #endif row_pointer[0] = new uchar[cinfo.image_width*cinfo.input_components]; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqkeysequence.cpp b/src/kernel/tqkeysequence.cpp index 659057784..007bf83be 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqkeysequence.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqkeysequence.cpp @@ -337,8 +337,8 @@ uint TQKeySequence::count() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQKeySequence::isEmpty() const { @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ int TQKeySequence::decodeString( const TQString& str ) if ( sl.contains( (*it).name ) ) { ret |= (*it).qt_key; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP - accel.remove( TQRegExp(TQRegExp::escape((*it).name), FALSE) ); + accel.remove( TQRegExp(TQRegExp::escape((*it).name), false) ); #else accel.remove( (*it).name ); #endif @@ -448,13 +448,13 @@ int TQKeySequence::decodeString( const TQString& str ) } else { // Check through translation table for the correct key name // ...or fall back on english table. - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; for ( int tran = 0; tran < 2; tran++ ) { for ( int i = 0; keyname[i].name; i++ ) { if ( tran ? accel == TQAccel::tr(keyname[i].name) : accel == keyname[i].name ) { ret |= keyname[i].key; - found = TRUE; + found = true; break; } } @@ -648,8 +648,8 @@ TQKeySequence &TQKeySequence::operator=( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) /*! - Returns TRUE if \a keysequence is equal to this key - sequence; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a keysequence is equal to this key + sequence; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -663,8 +663,8 @@ bool TQKeySequence::operator==( const TQKeySequence& keysequence ) const /*! - Returns TRUE if \a keysequence is not equal to this key sequence; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a keysequence is not equal to this key sequence; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQKeySequence::operator!= ( const TQKeySequence& keysequence ) const { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp b/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp index 814f1565b..02e35d49c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ public: inline void setReversed( bool r, bool c ) { hReversed = c; vReversed = r; } inline bool horReversed() const { return hReversed; } inline bool verReversed() const { return vReversed; } - inline void setDirty() { needRecalc = TRUE; hfw_width = -1; } + inline void setDirty() { needRecalc = true; hfw_width = -1; } inline bool isDirty() const { return needRecalc; } bool hasHeightForWidth( int space ); int heightForWidth( int, int, int ); @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ private: void addHfwData ( TQGridBox *box, int width ); void init(); TQSize findSize( TQCOORD TQLayoutStruct::*, int ) const; - void addData( TQGridBox *b, bool r = TRUE, bool c = TRUE ); + void addData( TQGridBox *b, bool r = true, bool c = true ); void setSize( int rows, int cols ); void setupLayoutData( int space ); void setupHfwLayoutData( int space ); @@ -210,11 +210,11 @@ TQGridLayoutData::TQGridLayoutData( int nRows, int nCols ) init(); if ( nRows < 0 ) { nRows = 1; - addVertical = FALSE; + addVertical = false; } if ( nCols < 0 ) { nCols = 1; - addVertical = TRUE; + addVertical = true; } setSize( nRows, nCols ); } @@ -230,15 +230,15 @@ TQGridLayoutData::~TQGridLayoutData() void TQGridLayoutData::init() { - addVertical = FALSE; + addVertical = false; setDirty(); multi = 0; rr = cc = 0; nextR = nextC = 0; hfwData = 0; - things.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - hReversed = FALSE; - vReversed = FALSE; + things.setAutoDelete( true ); + hReversed = false; + vReversed = false; } bool TQGridLayoutData::hasHeightForWidth( int spacing ) @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ bool TQGridLayoutData::findWidget( TQWidget* w, int *row, int *col ) *row = box->row; if ( col ) *col = box->col; - return TRUE; + return true; } } if ( multi ) { @@ -324,12 +324,12 @@ bool TQGridLayoutData::findWidget( TQWidget* w, int *row, int *col ) *row = box->row; if ( col ) *col = box->col; - return TRUE; + return true; } } } - return FALSE; + return false; } TQSize TQGridLayoutData::findSize( TQCOORD TQLayoutStruct::*size, int spacer ) const @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ void TQGridLayoutData::add( TQGridBox *box, int row1, int row2, int col1, TQGridMultiBox *mbox = new TQGridMultiBox( box, row2, col2 ); if ( !multi ) { multi = new TQPtrList<TQGridMultiBox>; - multi->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + multi->setAutoDelete( true ); } multi->append( mbox ); setDirty(); @@ -543,9 +543,9 @@ void TQGridLayoutData::addData( TQGridBox *box, bool r, bool c ) // Empty boxes (i.e. spacers) do not get borders. This is // hacky, but compatible. if ( c ) - colData[box->col].empty = FALSE; + colData[box->col].empty = false; if ( r ) - rowData[box->row].empty = FALSE; + rowData[box->row].empty = false; } } @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ static void distributeMultiBox( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int spacing, w += chain[i].minimumSize; wh += chain[i].sizeHint; max += chain[i].maximumSize; - chain[i].empty = FALSE; + chain[i].empty = false; if ( stretchArray[i] == 0 ) chain[i].stretch = TQMAX(chain[i].stretch,stretch); } @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ void TQGridLayoutData::setupLayoutData( int spacing ) if ( !needRecalc ) return; #endif - has_hfw = FALSE; + has_hfw = false; int i; for ( i = 0; i < rr; i++ ) @@ -650,17 +650,17 @@ void TQGridLayoutData::setupLayoutData( int spacing ) TQSize hint = box->sizeHint(); TQSize min = box->minimumSize(); if ( box->hasHeightForWidth() ) - has_hfw = TRUE; + has_hfw = true; if ( r1 == r2 ) { - addData( box, TRUE, FALSE ); + addData( box, true, false ); } else { distributeMultiBox( rowData, spacing, r1, r2, min.height(), hint.height(), rStretch, box->vStretch() ); } if ( c1 == c2 ) { - addData( box, FALSE, TRUE ); + addData( box, false, true ); } else { distributeMultiBox( colData, spacing, c1, c2, min.width(), hint.width(), @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ void TQGridLayoutData::setupLayoutData( int spacing ) for ( i = 0; i < cc; i++ ) colData[i].expansive = colData[i].expansive || colData[i].stretch > 0; - needRecalc = FALSE; + needRecalc = false; } void TQGridLayoutData::addHfwData( TQGridBox *box, int width ) @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ public: TQLayoutItem *next() { idx++; if ( !multi && idx >= (int)data->things.count() ) { - multi = TRUE; + multi = true; idx = 0; } return current(); @@ -1076,8 +1076,8 @@ TQSize TQGridLayout::maximumSize() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its - width; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its + width; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQGridLayout::hasHeightForWidth() const { @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ int TQGridLayout::minimumHeightForWidth( int w ) const /*! Searches for widget \a w in this layout (not including child layouts). If \a w is found, it sets \c \a row and \c \a col to - the row and column and returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE. + the row and column and returns true; otherwise returns false. Note: if a widget spans multiple rows/columns, the top-left cell is returned. @@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ void TQGridLayout::expand( int nRows, int nCols ) */ void TQGridLayout::init( int nRows, int nCols ) { - setSupportsMargin( TRUE ); + setSupportsMargin( true ); data = new TQGridLayoutData( nRows, nCols ); } @@ -1209,8 +1209,8 @@ void TQGridLayout::addMultiCell( TQLayoutItem *item, int fromRow, int toRow, } /* - Returns TRUE if the widget \a w can be added to the layout \a l; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget \a w can be added to the layout \a l; + otherwise returns false. */ static bool checkWidget( TQLayout *l, TQWidget *w ) { @@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ static bool checkWidget( TQLayout *l, TQWidget *w ) tqWarning( "TQLayout: Cannot add null widget to %s/%s", l->className(), l->name() ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( w->parentWidget() != l->mainWidget() && l->mainWidget() ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) @@ -1233,9 +1233,9 @@ static bool checkWidget( TQLayout *l, TQWidget *w ) " %s/%s", w->className(), w->name(), l->mainWidget()->className(), l->mainWidget()->name() ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1516,7 +1516,7 @@ TQLayoutIterator TQGridLayout::iterator() struct TQBoxLayoutItem { TQBoxLayoutItem( TQLayoutItem *it, int stretch_ = 0 ) - : item( it ), stretch( stretch_ ), magic( FALSE ) { } + : item( it ), stretch( stretch_ ), magic( false ) { } ~TQBoxLayoutItem() { delete item; } int hfw( int w ) { @@ -1556,8 +1556,8 @@ struct TQBoxLayoutItem class TQBoxLayoutData { public: - TQBoxLayoutData() : geomArray( 0 ), hfwWidth( -1 ), dirty( TRUE ) - { list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); } + TQBoxLayoutData() : geomArray( 0 ), hfwWidth( -1 ), dirty( true ) + { list.setAutoDelete( true ); } ~TQBoxLayoutData() { delete geomArray; } void setDirty() { @@ -1565,7 +1565,7 @@ public: geomArray = 0; hfwWidth = -1; hfwHeight = -1; - dirty = TRUE; + dirty = true; } TQPtrList<TQBoxLayoutItem> list; @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, Direction d, { data = new TQBoxLayoutData; dir = d; - setSupportsMargin( TRUE ); + setSupportsMargin( true ); } /*! @@ -1749,7 +1749,7 @@ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, Direction d, int spacing, { data = new TQBoxLayoutData; dir = d; - setSupportsMargin( TRUE ); + setSupportsMargin( true ); } /*! @@ -1765,7 +1765,7 @@ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( Direction d, int spacing, const char *name ) { data = new TQBoxLayoutData; dir = d; - setSupportsMargin( TRUE ); + setSupportsMargin( true ); } /*! @@ -1821,8 +1821,8 @@ TQSize TQBoxLayout::maximumSize() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQBoxLayout::hasHeightForWidth() const { @@ -2001,7 +2001,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::insertSpacing( int index, int size ) TQSizePolicy::Fixed ); TQBoxLayoutItem *it = new TQBoxLayoutItem( b ); - it->magic = TRUE; + it->magic = true; data->list.insert( index, it ); invalidate(); } @@ -2028,7 +2028,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::insertStretch( int index, int stretch ) TQSizePolicy::Expanding ); TQBoxLayoutItem *it = new TQBoxLayoutItem( b, stretch ); - it->magic = TRUE; + it->magic = true; data->list.insert( index, it ); invalidate(); } @@ -2179,7 +2179,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::addStrut( int size ) TQSizePolicy::Fixed ); TQBoxLayoutItem *it = new TQBoxLayoutItem( b ); - it->magic = TRUE; + it->magic = true; data->list.append( it ); invalidate(); } @@ -2202,8 +2202,8 @@ int TQBoxLayout::findWidget( TQWidget* w ) /*! Sets the stretch factor for widget \a w to \a stretch and returns - TRUE if \a w is found in this layout (not including child - layouts); otherwise returns FALSE. + true if \a w is found in this layout (not including child + layouts); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor( TQWidget *w, int stretch ) { @@ -2214,18 +2214,18 @@ bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor( TQWidget *w, int stretch ) if ( box->item->widget() == w ) { box->stretch = stretch; invalidate(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \overload Sets the stretch factor for the layout \a l to \a stretch and - returns TRUE if \a l is found in this layout (not including child - layouts); otherwise returns FALSE. + returns true if \a l is found in this layout (not including child + layouts); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor( TQLayout *l, int stretch ) { @@ -2236,10 +2236,10 @@ bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor( TQLayout *l, int stretch ) if ( box->item->layout() == l ) { box->stretch = stretch; invalidate(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -2306,17 +2306,17 @@ void TQBoxLayout::setupGeom() int hintw = 0; int hinth = 0; - bool horexp = FALSE; - bool verexp = FALSE; + bool horexp = false; + bool verexp = false; - data->hasHfw = FALSE; + data->hasHfw = false; delete data->geomArray; int n = data->list.count(); data->geomArray = new TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct>( n ); TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct>& a = *data->geomArray; - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; for ( int i = 0; i < n; i++ ) { TQBoxLayoutItem *box = data->list.at( i ); TQSize max = box->item->maximumSize(); @@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::setupGeom() .expandedTo( data->minSize ) .boundedTo( data->maxSize ); - data->dirty = FALSE; + data->dirty = false; } /* @@ -2403,7 +2403,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::calcHfw( int w ) } else { TQPtrListIterator<TQBoxLayoutItem> it( data->list ); TQBoxLayoutItem *box; - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; while ( (box = it.current()) != 0 ) { ++it; bool empty = box->item->isEmpty(); @@ -2444,7 +2444,7 @@ void TQBoxLayout::calcHfw( int w ) The simplest use of the class is like this: \code TQBoxLayout * l = new TQHBoxLayout( widget ); - l->setAutoAdd( TRUE ); + l->setAutoAdd( true ); new TQSomeWidget( widget ); new TQSomeOtherWidget( widget ); new TQAnotherWidget( widget ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine.cpp b/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine.cpp index 9eee672e6..131e64d4b 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine.cpp @@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun int sumStretch = 0; int spacerCount = 0; - bool wannaGrow = FALSE; // anyone who really wants to grow? - // bool canShrink = FALSE; // anyone who could be persuaded to shrink? + bool wannaGrow = false; // anyone who really wants to grow? + // bool canShrink = false; // anyone who could be persuaded to shrink? int i; for ( i = start; i < start + count; i++ ) { - chain[i].done = FALSE; + chain[i].done = false; cHint += chain[i].smartSizeHint(); cMin += chain[i].minimumSize; cMax += chain[i].maximumSize; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun if ( space < cMin + spacerCount * spacer ) { for ( i = start; i < start+count; i++ ) { chain[i].size = chain[i].minimumSize; - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; } } else if ( space < cHint + spacerCount*spacer ) { /* @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun if ( !chain[i].done && chain[i].minimumSize >= chain[i].smartSizeHint() ) { chain[i].size = chain[i].smartSizeHint(); - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; space_left -= chain[i].smartSizeHint(); // sumStretch -= chain[i].stretch; n--; @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun } bool finished = n == 0; while ( !finished ) { - finished = TRUE; + finished = true; fixed fp_over = toFixed( overdraft ); fixed fp_w = 0; @@ -135,9 +135,9 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun chain[i].size = chain[i].smartSizeHint() - w; fp_w -= toFixed( w ); // give the difference to the next if ( chain[i].size < chain[i].minimumSize ) { - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; chain[i].size = chain[i].minimumSize; - finished = FALSE; + finished = false; overdraft -= ( chain[i].smartSizeHint() - chain[i].minimumSize ); // sumStretch -= chain[i].stretch; @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun && (chain[i].maximumSize <= chain[i].smartSizeHint() || (wannaGrow && !chain[i].expansive && chain[i].stretch == 0)) ) { chain[i].size = chain[i].smartSizeHint(); - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; space_left -= chain[i].smartSizeHint(); sumStretch -= chain[i].stretch; n--; @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun if ( !chain[i].done && chain[i].size < chain[i].smartSizeHint() ) { chain[i].size = chain[i].smartSizeHint(); - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; space_left -= chain[i].smartSizeHint(); sumStretch -= chain[i].stretch; n--; @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void qGeomCalc( TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> &chain, int start, int coun if ( !chain[i].done && chain[i].size > chain[i].maximumSize ) { chain[i].size = chain[i].maximumSize; - chain[i].done = TRUE; + chain[i].done = true; space_left -= chain[i].maximumSize; sumStretch -= chain[i].stretch; n--; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h b/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h index efb1295e8..eee74de79 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h @@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ struct TQLayoutStruct stretch = stretchFactor; minimumSize = sizeHint = spacing; maximumSize = TQLAYOUTSIZE_MAX; - expansive = FALSE; - empty = TRUE; + expansive = false; + empty = true; } TQCOORD smartSizeHint() { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqlocalfs.cpp b/src/kernel/tqlocalfs.cpp index 69e2eba72..d4d14065a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqlocalfs.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqlocalfs.cpp @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ void TQLocalFs::operationListChildren( TQNetworkOperation *op ) dir = TQDir( url()->path() ); dir.setNameFilter( url()->nameFilter() ); - dir.setMatchAllDirs( TRUE ); + dir.setMatchAllDirs( true ); if ( !dir.isReadable() ) { TQString msg = tr( "Could not read directory\n%1" ).arg( url()->path() ); op->setState( StFailed ); @@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ void TQLocalFs::operationRemove( TQNetworkOperation *op ) #endif op->setState( StInProgress ); TQString name = TQUrl( op->arg( 0 ) ).path(); - bool deleted = FALSE; + bool deleted = false; dir = TQDir( url()->path() ); TQFileInfo fi( dir, name ); if ( fi.isDir() ) { if ( dir.rmdir( name ) ) - deleted = TRUE; + deleted = true; } if ( deleted || dir.remove( name ) ) { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp b/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp index 4e5686295..4464f716d 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ typedef const TQMetaData TQConstMetaData; class TQ_EXPORT TQMemberDict : public TQAsciiDict<TQConstMetaData> { public: - TQMemberDict( int size = 17, bool cs = TRUE, bool ck = TRUE ) : + TQMemberDict( int size = 17, bool cs = true, bool ck = true ) : TQAsciiDict<TQConstMetaData>(size,cs,ck) {} TQMemberDict( const TQMemberDict &dict ) : TQAsciiDict<TQConstMetaData>(dict) {} ~TQMemberDict() { clear(); } @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ TQMetaObject::~TQMetaObject() /*! Returns the number of slots for this class. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited slots are included. + If \a super is true, inherited slots are included. \sa slotNames() */ @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::numSlots( bool super ) const // number of slots /*! Returns the number of signals for this class. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited signals are included. + If \a super is true, inherited signals are included. \sa signalNames() */ @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::numSignals( bool super ) const // number of signals Returns the meta data of the slot with the name \a n or 0 if no such slot exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited slots are included. + If \a super is true, inherited slots are included. */ const TQMetaData* TQMetaObject::slot( int index, bool super ) const { @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ const TQMetaData* TQMetaObject::slot( int index, bool super ) const Returns the meta data of the signal with the name \a n or 0 if no such signal exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited signals are included. + If \a super is true, inherited signals are included. */ const TQMetaData* TQMetaObject::signal( int index, bool super ) const { @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ const TQMetaData* TQMetaObject::signal( int index, bool super ) const /*! \internal Returns the index of the signal with name \n or -1 if no such signal exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited signals are included. + If \a super is true, inherited signals are included. */ int TQMetaObject::findSignal( const char* n, bool super ) const { @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::findSignal( const char* n, bool super ) const /*! \internal Returns the index of the slot with name \n or -1 if no such slot exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited slots are included. + If \a super is true, inherited slots are included. */ int TQMetaObject::findSlot( const char* n, bool super ) const { @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ TQMemberDict *TQMetaObject::init( const TQMetaData * data, int n ) { if ( n == 0 ) // nothing, then make no dict return 0; - TQMemberDict *dict = new TQMemberDict( optDictSize(n), TRUE, FALSE ); + TQMemberDict *dict = new TQMemberDict( optDictSize(n), true, false ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dict ); while ( n-- ) { // put all members into dict dict->insert( data->name, data ); @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ TQMemberDict *TQMetaObject::init( const TQMetaData * data, int n ) Returns the number of items of class information available for this class. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited class information is included. + If \a super is true, inherited class information is included. */ int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo( bool super ) const { @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo( bool super ) const Returns the class information with index \a index or 0 if no such information exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited class information is included. + If \a super is true, inherited class information is included. */ const TQClassInfo* TQMetaObject::classInfo( int index, bool super ) const { @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ const TQClassInfo* TQMetaObject::classInfo( int index, bool super ) const Returns the class information with name \a name or 0 if no such information exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited class information is included. + If \a super is true, inherited class information is included. */ const char* TQMetaObject::classInfo( const char* name, bool super ) const { @@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ const char* TQMetaObject::classInfo( const char* name, bool super ) const /*! Returns the number of properties for this class. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited properties are included. + If \a super is true, inherited properties are included. \sa propertyNames() */ @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::numProperties( bool super ) const // number of signals Returns the property meta data for the property at index \a index or 0 if no such property exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited properties are included. + If \a super is true, inherited properties are included. \sa propertyNames() */ @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ const TQMetaProperty* TQMetaObject::property( int index, bool super ) const Returns the index for the property with name \a name or -1 if no such property exists. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited properties are included. + If \a super is true, inherited properties are included. \sa property(), propertyNames() */ @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::findProperty( const char *name, bool super ) const Returns the index for the property \a prop or -1 if the property can not be found. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited properties are included. + If \a super is true, inherited properties are included. \sa property(), propertyNames() */ @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ const TQMetaProperty* TQMetaObject::resolveProperty( const TQMetaProperty* p ) c { if ( !superclass ) return 0; - return superclass->property( superclass->findProperty( p->n, TRUE ), TRUE ); + return superclass->property( superclass->findProperty( p->n, true ), true ); } /*!\internal @@ -668,20 +668,20 @@ int TQMetaObject::resolveProperty( int index ) const if ( !superclass ) return -1; const TQMetaProperty* p = d->propData + ( index - propertyOffset() ); - return superclass->findProperty( p->n, TRUE ); + return superclass->findProperty( p->n, true ); } /*! Returns a list with the names of all this class's properties. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited properties are included. + If \a super is true, inherited properties are included. \sa property() */ TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames( bool super ) const { - TQStrList l( FALSE ); + TQStrList l( false ); if ( superclass && super ) { TQStrList sl = superclass->propertyNames( super ); @@ -700,11 +700,11 @@ TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames( bool super ) const /*! Returns a list with the names of all this class's signals. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited signals are included. + If \a super is true, inherited signals are included. */ TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames( bool super ) const { - TQStrList l( FALSE ); + TQStrList l( false ); int n = numSignals( super ); for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i ) { l.append( signal(i, super)->name ); @@ -715,13 +715,13 @@ TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames( bool super ) const /*! Returns a list with the names of all this class's slots. - If \a super is TRUE, inherited slots are included. + If \a super is true, inherited slots are included. \sa numSlots() */ TQStrList TQMetaObject::slotNames( bool super ) const { - TQStrList l( FALSE ); + TQStrList l( false ); int n = numSlots( super ); for( int i = 0; i < n; ++i ) l.append( slot( i, super)->name ); @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::numEnumerators( bool super ) const */ TQStrList TQMetaObject::enumeratorNames( bool super ) const { - TQStrList l( FALSE ); + TQStrList l( false ); if ( superclass && super ) { TQStrList sl = superclass->enumeratorNames( super ); @@ -777,8 +777,8 @@ const TQMetaEnum* TQMetaObject::enumerator( const char* name, bool super ) const /*! - Returns TRUE if this class inherits \a clname within the meta - object inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this class inherits \a clname within the meta + object inheritance chain; otherwise returns false. (A class is considered to inherit itself.) */ @@ -787,10 +787,10 @@ bool TQMetaObject::inherits( const char* clname ) const const TQMetaObject *meta = this; while ( meta ) { if ( qstrcmp(clname, meta->className()) == 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; meta = meta->superclass; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \internal */ @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ TQMetaObject *TQMetaObject::metaObject( const char *class_name ) bool TQMetaObject::hasMetaObject( const char *class_name ) { if ( !qt_metaobjects ) - return FALSE; + return false; #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT TQMutexLocker( tqt_global_mutexpool ? tqt_global_mutexpool->get( &qt_metaobjects ) : 0 ); @@ -837,9 +837,9 @@ bool TQMetaObject::tqt_static_property( TQObject* o, int id, int f, TQVariant* v return superclass->tqt_static_property( o, id, f, v ); switch ( f ) { case 3: case 4: case 5: - return TRUE; + return true; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -877,10 +877,10 @@ bool TQMetaObject::tqt_static_property( TQObject* o, int id, int f, TQVariant* v */ TQStrList TQMetaProperty::enumKeys() const { - TQStrList l( FALSE ); + TQStrList l( false ); const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); if ( !ed ) return l; if ( ed != 0 ) { @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ int TQMetaProperty::keyToValue( const char* key ) const { const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); if ( !ed ) return -1; for ( uint i = 0; i < ed->count; ++i ) { @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ const char* TQMetaProperty::valueToKey( int value ) const { const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); if ( !ed ) return 0; for ( uint i = 0; i < ed->count; ++i ) { @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ int TQMetaProperty::keysToValue( const TQStrList& keys ) const { const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); if ( !ed ) return -1; int value = 0; @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ TQStrList TQMetaProperty::valueToKeys( int value ) const TQStrList keys; const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); if ( !ed ) return keys; @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::writable() const return testFlags( Writable ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->writable() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->writable() : false; } /*!\internal @@ -1008,14 +1008,14 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stdSet() const return testFlags( StdSet ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->stdSet() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->stdSet() : false; } /*!\internal */ int TQMetaProperty::id() const { - return _id < 0 ? (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, TRUE ) : _id; + return _id < 0 ? (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, true ) : _id; } /*! \internal @@ -1032,21 +1032,21 @@ void TQMetaProperty::clear() bool TQMetaProperty::isValid() const { if ( testFlags( UnresolvedEnum ) ) { - if ( !enumData && (!meta || !(*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ) ) ) - return FALSE; + if ( !enumData && (!meta || !(*meta)->enumerator( t, true ) ) ) + return false; } if ( !testFlags( Override ) || testFlags( Readable ) ) return testFlags( Readable ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->isValid() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->isValid() : false; } bool TQMetaProperty::isSetType() const { const TQMetaEnum* ed = enumData; if ( !enumData && meta ) - ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, TRUE ); + ed = (*meta)->enumerator( t, true ); return ( ed != 0 && ed->set ); } @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType() const /*! \fn bool TQMetaProperty::writable() const - Returns TRUE if the property is writable; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the property is writable; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -1086,8 +1086,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType() const /*! \fn bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType() const - Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value; + otherwise returns false. \sa isSetType(), enumKeys() */ @@ -1095,17 +1095,17 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType() const /*! \fn bool TQMetaProperty::isSetType() const - Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value that + Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value that is used as set, i.e. if the enumeration values can be OR-ed - together; otherwise returns FALSE. A set type is implicitly also + together; otherwise returns false. A set type is implicitly also an enum type. \sa isEnumType(), enumKeys() */ -/*! Returns TRUE if the property is designable for object \a o; - otherwise returns FALSE. +/*! Returns true if the property is designable for object \a o; + otherwise returns false. If no object \a o is given, the function returns a static approximation. @@ -1113,22 +1113,22 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType() const bool TQMetaProperty::designable( TQObject* o ) const { if ( !isValid() || !writable() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( o ) { - int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, TRUE ); + int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, true ); return idx >= 0 && o->tqt_property( idx, 3, 0 ); } if ( testFlags( DesignableOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->designable() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->designable() : false; } return !testFlags( NotDesignable ); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the property is scriptable for object \a o; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the property is scriptable for object \a o; + otherwise returns false. If no object \a o is given, the function returns a static approximation. @@ -1136,20 +1136,20 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::designable( TQObject* o ) const bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable( TQObject* o ) const { if ( o ) { - int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, TRUE ); + int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, true ); return idx >= 0 && o->tqt_property( idx, 4, 0 ); } if ( testFlags( ScriptableOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->scriptable() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->scriptable() : false; } return !testFlags( NotScriptable ); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the property shall be stored for object \a o; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the property shall be stored for object \a o; + otherwise returns false. If no object \a o is given, the function returns a static approximation. @@ -1157,15 +1157,15 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable( TQObject* o ) const bool TQMetaProperty::stored( TQObject* o ) const { if ( !isValid() || !writable() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( o ) { - int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, TRUE ); + int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, true ); return idx >= 0 && o->tqt_property( idx, 5, 0 ); } if ( testFlags( StoredOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return parent ? parent->stored() : FALSE; + return parent ? parent->stored() : false; } return !testFlags( NotStored ); } @@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stored( TQObject* o ) const /*! Tries to reset the property for object \a o with a reset method. - On success, returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE. + On success, returns true; otherwise returns false. Reset methods are optional, usually only a few properties support them. @@ -1181,8 +1181,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stored( TQObject* o ) const bool TQMetaProperty::reset( TQObject* o ) const { if ( !o ) - return FALSE; - int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, TRUE ); + return false; + int idx = _id >= 0 ? _id : (*meta)->indexOfProperty( this, true ); if ( idx < 0 ) return 0; return o->tqt_property( idx, 2, 0 ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.h b/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.h index 9db397f47..4bdeedab8 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.h @@ -171,34 +171,34 @@ public: bool inherits( const char* clname ) const; - int numSlots( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numSignals( bool super = FALSE ) const; + int numSlots( bool super = false ) const; + int numSignals( bool super = false ) const; - int findSlot( const char *, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int findSignal( const char *, bool super = FALSE ) const; + int findSlot( const char *, bool super = false ) const; + int findSignal( const char *, bool super = false ) const; - const TQMetaData *slot( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQMetaData *signal( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; + const TQMetaData *slot( int index, bool super = false ) const; + const TQMetaData *signal( int index, bool super = false ) const; - TQStrList slotNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - TQStrList signalNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList slotNames( bool super = false ) const; + TQStrList signalNames( bool super = false ) const; int slotOffset() const; int signalOffset() const; int propertyOffset() const; - int numClassInfo( bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQClassInfo *classInfo( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - const char *classInfo( const char* name, bool super = FALSE ) const; + int numClassInfo( bool super = false ) const; + const TQClassInfo *classInfo( int index, bool super = false ) const; + const char *classInfo( const char* name, bool super = false ) const; #ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES - const TQMetaProperty *property( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int findProperty( const char *name, bool super = FALSE ) const; - int indexOfProperty( const TQMetaProperty*, bool super = FALSE ) const; + const TQMetaProperty *property( int index, bool super = false ) const; + int findProperty( const char *name, bool super = false ) const; + int indexOfProperty( const TQMetaProperty*, bool super = false ) const; const TQMetaProperty* resolveProperty( const TQMetaProperty* ) const; int resolveProperty( int ) const; - TQStrList propertyNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numProperties( bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList propertyNames( bool super = false ) const; + int numProperties( bool super = false ) const; #endif // static wrappers around constructors, necessary to work around a @@ -220,9 +220,9 @@ public: const TQMetaEnum *const enum_data, int n_enums, bool (*tqt_static_property)(TQObject*, int, int, TQVariant*), const TQClassInfo *const class_info, int n_info ); - TQStrList enumeratorNames( bool super = FALSE ) const; - int numEnumerators( bool super = FALSE ) const; - const TQMetaEnum *enumerator( const char* name, bool super = FALSE ) const; + TQStrList enumeratorNames( bool super = false ) const; + int numEnumerators( bool super = false ) const; + const TQMetaEnum *enumerator( const char* name, bool super = false ) const; #endif static TQMetaObject *metaObject( const char *class_name ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmime.cpp b/src/kernel/tqmime.cpp index ba12e4c8e..4468082c1 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmime.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqmime.cpp @@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ TQMimeSource::~TQMimeSource() /*! - Returns TRUE if the object can provide the data in format \a - mimeType; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the object can provide the data in format \a + mimeType; otherwise returns false. If you inherit from TQMimeSource, for consistency reasons it is better to implement the more abstract canDecode() functions such @@ -140,10 +140,10 @@ bool TQMimeSource::provides(const char* mimeType) const const char* fmt; for (int i=0; (fmt = format(i)); i++) { if ( !tqstricmp(mimeType,fmt) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ TQMimeSource* TQMimeSourceFactory::dataInternal(const TQString& abs_name, const if ( fi.isReadable() ) { // get the right mimetype - TQString e = fi.extension(FALSE); + TQString e = fi.extension(false); TQCString mimetype = "application/octet-stream"; const char* imgfmt; if ( extensions.contains(e) ) @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ const TQMimeSource* TQMimeSourceFactory::data(const TQString& abs_name) const } } - static bool looping = FALSE; + static bool looping = false; if ( !r && this == defaultFactory() ) { // we found no mime-source and we are the default factory, so // we know all the other installed mime-source factories, so @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ const TQMimeSource* TQMimeSourceFactory::data(const TQString& abs_name) const if ( !looping ) { // to avoid endless recustions, don't enter the loop below // if data() got called from within the loop below - looping = TRUE; + looping = true; TQPtrListIterator<TQMimeSourceFactory> it( d->factories ); TQMimeSourceFactory *f; while ( ( f = it.current() ) ) { @@ -398,11 +398,11 @@ const TQMimeSource* TQMimeSourceFactory::data(const TQString& abs_name) const continue; r = (TQMimeSource*)f->data( abs_name ); if ( r ) { - looping = FALSE; + looping = false; return r; } } - looping = FALSE; + looping = false; } } else if ( !r ) { // we are not the default mime-source factory, so ask the @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ TQString TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute(const TQString& abs_or_rel_name, cons return context; TQFileInfo c( context ); if (!c.isDir()) { - TQFileInfo r( c.dir(TRUE), abs_or_rel_name ); + TQFileInfo r( c.dir(true), abs_or_rel_name ); return r.absFilePath(); } else { TQDir d(context); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmngio.cpp b/src/kernel/tqmngio.cpp index 737cab55c..7b309326e 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmngio.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqmngio.cpp @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ public: // ### We should figure out how many loops an MNG has, but for now always assume infinite. if (consumer) consumer->setLooping(0); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool closestream( ) { if (consumer) consumer->end(); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool readdata( mng_ptr pBuf, mng_uint32 iBuflen, mng_uint32p pRead ) { @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public: // enough in buffer memcpy(pBuf, buffer+ubuffer, iBuflen); ubuffer += iBuflen; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( n ) { // consume buffer @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public: data += iBuflen; ndata -= iBuflen; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool errorproc( mng_int32 iErrorcode, mng_int8 /*iSeverity*/, @@ -118,18 +118,18 @@ public: (iChunkname>>8)&0xff, (iChunkname>>0)&0xff, iExtra1,iExtra2); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool processheader( mng_uint32 iWidth, mng_uint32 iHeight ) { image->create(iWidth,iHeight,32); - image->setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + image->setAlphaBuffer(true); memset(image->bits(),0,iWidth*iHeight*4); consumer->setSize(iWidth,iHeight); mng_set_canvasstyle(handle, TQImage::systemByteOrder() == TQImage::LittleEndian ? MNG_CANVAS_BGRA8 : MNG_CANVAS_ARGB8 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } mng_ptr getcanvasline( mng_uint32 iLinenr ) { @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public: consumer->changed(r); consumer->setFramePeriod(0); consumer->frameDone(); - return TRUE; + return true; } mng_uint32 gettickcount( ) { @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ public: state = Time; losingtimer.start(); losttime -= iMsecs; - return TRUE; + return true; } private: @@ -440,9 +440,9 @@ void qCleanupMngIO() void qInitMngIO() { - static bool done = FALSE; + static bool done = false; if ( !done ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; #ifndef TQT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO globalMngFormatTypeObject = new TQMNGFormatType; tqAddPostRoutine( qCleanupMngIO ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmotifdnd_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqmotifdnd_x11.cpp index e1481446f..18e69b139 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmotifdnd_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqmotifdnd_x11.cpp @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ in doc/dnd.doc, where the documentation system can see it. */ static Atom atom_message_type, atom_receiver_info, atom_src_property_type; static Atom atom_motif_window, atom_target_list ; -static bool in_drop_site = FALSE; +static bool in_drop_site = false; static Window cur_window = 0; static TQWidget *drop_widget = 0L; @@ -775,8 +775,8 @@ TQByteArray qt_motifdnd_obtain_data( const char *mimeType ) if ( qt_xclb_read_property( tqt_xdisplay(), tw->winId(), - Dnd_selection, TRUE, - &result, 0, &type, 0, TRUE ) ) { + Dnd_selection, true, + &result, 0, &type, 0, true ) ) { } } @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ void qt_motifdnd_handle_msg( TQWidget * /* w */ , const XEvent * xe, bool /* pas send a drop site enter or drop site leave or echo */ TQPoint p( dnd_data.x, dnd_data.y ); - TQWidget *c = TQApplication::widgetAt( p, TRUE ); + TQWidget *c = TQApplication::widgetAt( p, true ); if (c) p = c->mapFromGlobal(p); @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ void qt_motifdnd_handle_msg( TQWidget * /* w */ , const XEvent * xe, bool /* pas /* get the size of our drop site for later use */ cur_window = dnd_data.src_window ; - qt_motifdnd_active = TRUE; + qt_motifdnd_active = true; /* no answer needed, just read source property */ DndReadSourceProperty (event.xclient.display, diff --git a/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp b/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp index 6350f5ceb..76e676144 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp @@ -213,14 +213,14 @@ public: TQMoviePrivate::TQMoviePrivate() { - dirty_cache = FALSE; + dirty_cache = false; buffer = 0; pump = 0; source = 0; decoder = 0; display_widget=0; buf_size = 0; - init(FALSE); + init(false); } // NOTE: The ownership of the TQDataSource is transferred to the Private @@ -231,13 +231,13 @@ TQMoviePrivate::TQMoviePrivate(TQDataSource* src, TQMovie* movie, int bufsize) : frametimer = new TQTimer(this); pump = src ? new TQDataPump(src, this) : 0; TQObject::connect(frametimer, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQ_SLOT(refresh())); - dirty_cache = FALSE; + dirty_cache = false; source = src; buffer = 0; decoder = 0; speed = 100; display_widget=0; - init(TRUE); + init(true); } TQMoviePrivate::~TQMoviePrivate() @@ -258,12 +258,12 @@ bool TQMoviePrivate::isNull() const return !buf_size; } -// Initialize. Only actually allocate any space if \a fully is TRUE, +// Initialize. Only actually allocate any space if \a fully is true, // otherwise, just enough to be a valid null Private. void TQMoviePrivate::init(bool fully) { #ifdef QT_SAVE_MOVIE_HACK - save_image = TRUE; + save_image = true; image_number = 0; #endif @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::init(bool fully) source->open(IO_ReadOnly); #endif - waitingForFrameTick = FALSE; + waitingForFrameTick = false; stepping = -1; framenumber = 0; frameperiod = -1; @@ -291,9 +291,9 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::init(bool fully) changed_area.setRect(0,0,-1,-1); valid_area = changed_area; loop = -1; - movie_ended = FALSE; + movie_ended = false; error = 0; - empty = TRUE; + empty = true; } void TQMoviePrivate::flushBuffer() @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::updatePixmapFromImage(const TQPoint& off, if ( !TQPixmapCache::find( key, lines ) ) { lines.convertFromImage(img, TQt::ColorOnly); TQPixmapCache::insert( key, lines ); - dirty_cache = TRUE; + dirty_cache = true; } } else #endif @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::changed(const TQRect& rect) void TQMoviePrivate::end() { - movie_ended = TRUE; + movie_ended = true; } void TQMoviePrivate::preFrameDone() @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::preFrameDone() emit dataStatus( TQMovie::Paused ); } } else { - waitingForFrameTick = TRUE; + waitingForFrameTick = true; restartTimer(); } } @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::setLooping(int nloops) { if (loop == -1) { // Only if we don't already know how many loops! if (source && source->rewindable()) { - source->enableRewind(TRUE); + source->enableRewind(true); loop = nloops; } else { // Cannot loop from this source @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ int TQMoviePrivate::readyToReceive() void TQMoviePrivate::receive(const uchar* b, int bytecount) { - if ( bytecount ) empty = FALSE; + if ( bytecount ) empty = false; while (bytecount && !waitingForFrameTick && stepping != 0) { int used = decoder->decode(b, bytecount); @@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::eof() emit dataStatus(TQMovie::SourceEmpty); #ifdef QT_SAVE_MOVIE_HACK - save_image = FALSE; + save_image = false; #endif emit dataStatus(TQMovie::EndOfLoop); @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::eof() decoder = new TQImageDecoder(this); source->rewind(); framenumber = 0; - movie_ended = FALSE; + movie_ended = false; } else { delete decoder; decoder = 0; @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::refresh() frametimer->stop(); } - waitingForFrameTick = FALSE; + waitingForFrameTick = false; flushBuffer(); } @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ TQMovie::~TQMovie() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the movie is null; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the movie is null; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQMovie::isNull() const { @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ int TQMovie::steps() const int TQMovie::frameNumber() const { return d->framenumber; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the image is paused; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the image is paused; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQMovie::paused() const { @@ -830,8 +830,8 @@ bool TQMovie::paused() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the image is no longer playing: this happens when - all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the image is no longer playing: this happens when + all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQMovie::finished() const { @@ -839,8 +839,8 @@ bool TQMovie::finished() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and - not finished; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and + not finished; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQMovie::running() const { @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ void TQMovie::step(int steps) return; d->stepping = steps; d->frametimer->start(0); - d->waitingForFrameTick = FALSE; // Full speed ahead! + d->waitingForFrameTick = false; // Full speed ahead! } /*! @@ -903,10 +903,10 @@ void TQMovie::restart() if (d->isNull()) return; if (d->source->rewindable()) { - d->source->enableRewind(TRUE); + d->source->enableRewind(true); d->source->rewind(); int s = d->stepping; - d->init(TRUE); + d->init(true); if ( s>0 ) step(s); else if ( s==0 ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqnetworkprotocol.cpp b/src/kernel/tqnetworkprotocol.cpp index a595c2d0e..b562d7dd4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqnetworkprotocol.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqnetworkprotocol.cpp @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ public: opInProgress = 0; opStartTimer = new TQTimer( p ); removeTimer = new TQTimer( p ); - operationQueue.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - autoDelete = FALSE; + operationQueue.setAutoDelete( false ); + autoDelete = false; removeInterval = 10000; - oldOps.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + oldOps.setAutoDelete( false ); } ~TQNetworkProtocolPrivate() @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl( TQUrlOperator *u ) } - // ### if autoDelete is TRUE, we should delete the TQUrlOperator (something + // ### if autoDelete is true, we should delete the TQUrlOperator (something // like below; but that is not possible since it would delete this, too). //if ( d->autoDelete && (d->url!=u) ) { // delete d->url; // destructor deletes the network protocol @@ -506,14 +506,14 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl( TQUrlOperator *u ) } if ( !d->opInProgress && !d->operationQueue.isEmpty() ) - d->opStartTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + d->opStartTimer->start( 0, true ); } /*! For processing operations the network protocol base class calls this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new - network protocols. It should return TRUE if the connection is OK - (open); otherwise it should return FALSE. If the connection is not + network protocols. It should return true if the connection is OK + (open); otherwise it should return false. If the connection is not open the protocol should open it. If the connection can't be opened (e.g. because you already tried @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl( TQUrlOperator *u ) bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation * ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::addOperation( TQNetworkOperation *op ) #endif d->operationQueue.enqueue( op ); if ( !d->opInProgress ) - d->opStartTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + d->opStartTimer->start( 0, true ); } /*! @@ -620,21 +620,21 @@ TQNetworkProtocol *TQNetworkProtocol::getNetworkProtocol( const TQString &protoc } /*! - Returns TRUE if the only protocol registered is for working on the - local filesystem; returns FALSE if other network protocols are + Returns true if the only protocol registered is for working on the + local filesystem; returns false if other network protocols are also registered. */ bool TQNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem() { if ( !tqNetworkProtocolRegister ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQDictIterator< TQNetworkProtocolFactoryBase > it( *tqNetworkProtocolRegister ); for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) if ( it.currentKey() != "file" ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } /*! @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::processNextOperation( TQNetworkOperation *old ) if ( d->operationQueue.isEmpty() ) { d->opInProgress = 0; if ( d->autoDelete ) - d->removeTimer->start( d->removeInterval, TRUE ); + d->removeTimer->start( d->removeInterval, true ); return; } @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::processNextOperation( TQNetworkOperation *old ) if ( !checkConnection( op ) ) { if ( op->state() != TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed ) { - d->opStartTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + d->opStartTimer->start( 0, true ); } else { d->operationQueue.dequeue(); clearOperationQueue(); @@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ TQNetworkOperation *TQNetworkProtocol::operationInProgress() const void TQNetworkProtocol::clearOperationQueue() { d->operationQueue.dequeue(); - d->operationQueue.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + d->operationQueue.setAutoDelete( true ); d->operationQueue.clear(); } @@ -922,10 +922,10 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::stop() /*! Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete - mechanism. If you set \a b to TRUE, the network protocol instance + mechanism. If you set \a b to true, the network protocol instance is removed after it has been inactive for \a i milliseconds (i.e. \a i milliseconds after the last operation has been processed). - If you set \a b to FALSE the auto-delete mechanism is switched + If you set \a b to false the auto-delete mechanism is switched off. If you switch on auto-delete, the TQNetworkProtocol also deletes @@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ void TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete( bool b, int i ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete() */ diff --git a/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp b/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp index ec31f6cd6..86c76c4ee 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public: ownThread = NULL; disableThreadPostedEvents = false; #endif - setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + setAutoDelete( true ); controlElementData = NULL; controlElementDataPrivate = NULL; } @@ -234,10 +234,10 @@ void TQObject::moveToThread(TQThread *targetThread) /*! Changes the way cross thread signals are handled - If disable is FALSE, signals emitted from one thread will be + If disable is false, signals emitted from one thread will be posted to any other connected threads' event loops (default). - If disable is TRUE, calls to emit from one thread + If disable is true, calls to emit from one thread will immediately execute slots in another thread. This mode of operation is inherently unsafe and is provided solely to support thread management by a third party application. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ class TQSenderObjectList : public TQObjectList, public TQShared TQSenderObjectList::TQSenderObjectList() : currentSender( 0 ) { #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - listMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); + listMutex = new TQMutex( true ); #endif } @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ bool qKillTimer( int id ); bool qKillTimer( TQObject *obj ); static void removeObjFromList( TQObjectList *objList, const TQObject *obj, - bool single=FALSE ) + bool single=false ) { if ( !objList ) { return; @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ static void qt_spy_signal( TQObject* sender, int signal, TQUObject* o ) mo = sender->metaObject(); while ( mo ) { s.sprintf( "%s_%s", mo->className(), sigData->name ); - int slot = tqt_preliminary_signal_spy->metaObject()->findSlot( s, TRUE ); + int slot = tqt_preliminary_signal_spy->metaObject()->findSlot( s, true ); if ( slot >= 0 ) { #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT // protect access to qt_spy_signal_sender @@ -656,12 +656,12 @@ const TQObjectList TQObject::objectTreesListObject() { TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : - isSignal( FALSE ), // assume not a signal object - isWidget( FALSE ), // assume not a widget object - pendTimer( FALSE ), // no timers yet - blockSig( FALSE ), // not blocking signals - wasDeleted( FALSE ), // double-delete catcher - isTree( FALSE ), // no tree yet + isSignal( false ), // assume not a signal object + isWidget( false ), // assume not a widget object + pendTimer( false ), // no timers yet + blockSig( false ), // not blocking signals + wasDeleted( false ), // double-delete catcher + isTree( false ), // no tree yet objname( name ? tqstrdup(name) : 0 ), // set object name parentObj( 0 ), // no parent yet. It is set by insertChild() childObjects( 0 ), // no children yet @@ -677,8 +677,8 @@ TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT d->ownThread = TQThread::currentThreadObject(); - d->senderObjectListMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); - d->childObjectListMutex = new TQMutex( TRUE ); + d->senderObjectListMutex = new TQMutex( true ); + d->childObjectListMutex = new TQMutex( true ); #endif if ( !metaObj ) { // will create object dict (void) staticMetaObject(); @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) } else { insert_tree( this ); - isTree = TRUE; + isTree = true; } } @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ TQObject::~TQObject() } if ( isTree ) { remove_tree( this ); // remove from global root list - isTree = FALSE; + isTree = false; } if ( parentObj ) // remove it from parent object parentObj->removeChild( this ); @@ -831,14 +831,14 @@ TQObject::~TQObject() */ /*! - Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of the class \a clname; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this object is an instance of the class \a clname; + otherwise returns false. Example: \code TQTimer *t = new TQTimer; // TQTimer inherits TQObject - t->isA( "TQTimer" ); // returns TRUE - t->isA( "TQObject" ); // returns FALSE + t->isA( "TQTimer" ); // returns true + t->isA( "TQObject" ); // returns false \endcode \sa inherits() metaObject() @@ -850,23 +850,23 @@ bool TQObject::isA( const char *clname ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of a class that + Returns true if this object is an instance of a class that inherits \a clname, and \a clname inherits TQObject; otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. A class is considered to inherit itself. Example: \code TQTimer *t = new TQTimer; // TQTimer inherits TQObject - t->inherits( "TQTimer" ); // returns TRUE - t->inherits( "TQObject" ); // returns TRUE - t->inherits( "TQButton" ); // returns FALSE + t->inherits( "TQTimer" ); // returns true + t->inherits( "TQObject" ); // returns true + t->inherits( "TQButton" ); // returns false // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl TQScrollBar *s = new TQScrollBar( 0 ); - s->inherits( "TQWidget" ); // returns TRUE - s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns FALSE + s->inherits( "TQWidget" ); // returns true + s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns false \endcode (\l TQRangeControl is not a TQObject.) @@ -882,8 +882,8 @@ bool TQObject::inherits( const char *clname ) const /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if \a object inherits \a superClass within - the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a object inherits \a superClass within + the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns false. \sa inherits() */ @@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ const char * TQObject::name( const char * defaultName ) const inheritsClass. If \a inheritsClass is 0 (the default), any class matches. - If \a recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), child() performs a + If \a recursiveSearch is true (the default), child() performs a depth-first search of the object's children. If there is no such object, this function returns 0. If there are @@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ void destroyDeepCopiedTQUObjectArray(TQUObject* uArray) /*! \fn bool TQObject::isWidgetType() const - Returns TRUE if the object is a widget; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the object is a widget; otherwise returns false. Calling this function is equivalent to calling inherits("TQWidget"), except that it is much faster. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ void destroyDeepCopiedTQUObjectArray(TQUObject* uArray) /*! \fn bool TQObject::highPriority() const - Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if + Returns true if the object is a high-priority object, or false if it is a standard-priority object. High-priority objects are placed first in TQObject's list of @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ void destroyDeepCopiedTQUObjectArray(TQUObject* uArray) /*! This virtual function receives events to an object and should - return TRUE if the event \a e was recognized and processed. + return true if the event \a e was recognized and processed. The event() function can be reimplemented to customize the behavior of an object. @@ -1061,27 +1061,27 @@ bool TQObject::event( TQEvent *e ) } #endif if ( wasDeleted ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( eventFilters ) { // try filters if ( activate_filters(e) ) { // stopped by a filter - return TRUE; + return true; } } switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::Timer: timerEvent( (TQTimerEvent*)e ); - return TRUE; + return true; case TQEvent::ChildInserted: case TQEvent::ChildRemoved: childEvent( (TQChildEvent*)e ); - return TRUE; + return true; case TQEvent::DeferredDelete: delete this; - return TRUE; + return true; case TQEvent::MetaCall: { @@ -1154,11 +1154,11 @@ bool TQObject::event( TQEvent *e ) default: if ( e->type() >= TQEvent::User ) { customEvent( (TQCustomEvent*) e ); - return TRUE; + return true; } break; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter the event \a e, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return - TRUE; otherwise return FALSE. + true; otherwise return false. Example: \code @@ -1258,9 +1258,9 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) { TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent*)ev; tqDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { // pass the event on to the parent class @@ -1275,7 +1275,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) purposes. \warning If you delete the receiver object in this function, be - sure to return TRUE. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the + sure to return true. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the deleted object and the program might crash. \sa installEventFilter() @@ -1283,7 +1283,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) bool TQObject::eventFilter( TQObject * /* watched */, TQEvent * /* e */ ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1296,24 +1296,24 @@ bool TQObject::eventFilter( TQObject * /* watched */, TQEvent * /* e */ ) bool TQObject::activate_filters( TQEvent *e ) { if ( !eventFilters ) // no event filter - return FALSE; + return false; TQObjectListIt it( *eventFilters ); TQObject *obj = it.current(); while ( obj ) { // send to all filters - ++it; // until one returns TRUE + ++it; // until one returns true if ( obj->eventFilter(this,e) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } obj = it.current(); } - return FALSE; // don't do anything with it + return false; // don't do anything with it } /*! \fn bool TQObject::signalsBlocked() const - Returns TRUE if signals are blocked; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if signals are blocked; otherwise returns false. Signals are not blocked by default. @@ -1321,8 +1321,8 @@ bool TQObject::activate_filters( TQEvent *e ) */ /*! - Blocks signals if \a block is TRUE, or unblocks signals if \a - block is FALSE. + Blocks signals if \a block is true, or unblocks signals if \a + block is false. Emitted signals disappear into hyperspace if signals are blocked. Note that the destroyed() signals will be emitted even if the signals @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ void TQObject::blockSignals( bool block ) int TQObject::startTimer( int interval ) { - pendTimer = TRUE; // set timer flag + pendTimer = true; // set timer flag return qStartTimer( interval, (TQObject *)this ); } @@ -1443,11 +1443,11 @@ static void objSearch( TQObjectList *result, return; TQObject *obj = list->first(); while ( obj ) { - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; if ( onlyWidgets ) ok = obj->isWidgetType(); else if ( inheritsClass && !obj->inherits(inheritsClass) ) - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; if ( ok ) { if ( objName ) ok = ( qstrcmp(objName,obj->name()) == 0 ); @@ -1523,9 +1523,9 @@ const TQObjectList *TQObject::objectTrees() (the default), all classes match. If \a objName is 0 (the default), all object names match. - If \a regexpMatch is TRUE (the default), \a objName is a regular + If \a regexpMatch is true (the default), \a objName is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that - of a TQRegExp. If \a regexpMatch is FALSE, \a objName is a string + of a TQRegExp. If \a regexpMatch is false, \a objName is a string and object names must match it exactly. Note that \a inheritsClass uses single inheritance from TQObject, @@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ const TQObjectList *TQObject::objectTrees() reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of compilers TQt supports. - Finally, if \a recursiveSearch is TRUE (the default), queryList() + Finally, if \a recursiveSearch is true (the default), queryList() searches \e{n}th-generation as well as first-generation children. If all this seems a bit complex for your needs, the simpler @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ const TQObjectList *TQObject::objectTrees() while ( (obj = it.current()) != 0 ) { // for each found object... ++it; - ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( FALSE ); + ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( false ); } delete l; // delete the list, not the objects \endcode @@ -1599,9 +1599,9 @@ TQConnectionList *TQObject::receivers( const char* signal ) const if ( connections && signal ) { if ( *signal == '2' ) { // tag == 2, i.e. signal TQCString s = qt_rmWS( signal+1 ); - return receivers( metaObject()->findSignal( (const char*)s, TRUE ) ); + return receivers( metaObject()->findSignal( (const char*)s, true ) ); } else { - return receivers( metaObject()->findSignal(signal, TRUE ) ); + return receivers( metaObject()->findSignal(signal, true ) ); } } return 0; @@ -1620,11 +1620,11 @@ TQConnectionList *TQObject::receivers( int signal ) const if ( !connections ) { TQObject* that = (TQObject*) this; that->connections = new TQSignalVec( signal+1 ); - that->connections->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + that->connections->setAutoDelete( true ); } if ( !connections->at( signal ) ) { TQConnectionList* clist = new TQConnectionList; - clist->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + clist->setAutoDelete( true ); connections->insert( signal, clist ); return clist; } @@ -1655,7 +1655,7 @@ void TQObject::insertChild( TQObject *obj ) if ( obj->isTree ) { remove_tree( obj ); - obj->isTree = FALSE; + obj->isTree = false; } if ( obj->parentObj && obj->parentObj != this ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) @@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ void TQObject::removeChild( TQObject *obj ) obj->parentObj = 0; if ( !obj->wasDeleted ) { insert_tree( obj ); // it's a root object now - obj->isTree = TRUE; + obj->isTree = true; } if ( childObjects->isEmpty() ) { delete childObjects; // last child removed @@ -1729,8 +1729,8 @@ void TQObject::removeChild( TQObject *obj ) sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or forward it to this object. The event filter \a filterObj receives events via its eventFilter() function. The eventFilter() function - must return TRUE if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); - otherwise it must return FALSE. + must return true if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); + otherwise it must return false. If multiple event filters are installed on a single object, the filter that was installed last is activated first. @@ -1751,10 +1751,10 @@ void TQObject::removeChild( TQObject *obj ) // special processing for key press TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent *)e; tqDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() ); - return TRUE; // eat event + return true; // eat event } else { // standard event processing - return FALSE; + return false; } } \endcode @@ -1773,7 +1773,7 @@ void TQObject::removeChild( TQObject *obj ) accelerator key presses. \warning If you delete the receiver object in your eventFilter() - function, be sure to return TRUE. If you return FALSE, TQt sends + function, be sure to return true. If you return false, TQt sends the event to the deleted object and the program will crash. \sa removeEventFilter(), eventFilter(), event() @@ -1840,9 +1840,9 @@ static bool check_signal_macro( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, else tqWarning( "TQObject::%s: Use the TQ_SIGNAL macro to %s %s::%s", func, op, sender->className(), signal ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } static bool check_member_code( int code, const TQObject *object, @@ -1851,9 +1851,9 @@ static bool check_member_code( int code, const TQObject *object, if ( code != TQ_SLOT_CODE && code != TQ_SIGNAL_CODE ) { tqWarning( "TQObject::%s: Use the TQ_SLOT or TQ_SIGNAL macro to " "%s %s::%s", func, func, object->className(), member ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } static void err_member_notfound( int code, const TQObject *object, @@ -1899,10 +1899,10 @@ static void err_info_about_candidates( int code, const TQMetaData *rm = 0; switch ( code ) { case TQ_SLOT_CODE: - rm = mo->slot( mo->findSlot( newname, TRUE ), TRUE ); + rm = mo->slot( mo->findSlot( newname, true ), true ); break; case TQ_SIGNAL_CODE: - rm = mo->signal( mo->findSignal( newname, TRUE ), TRUE ); + rm = mo->signal( mo->findSignal( newname, true ), true ); break; } if ( rm ) { @@ -1998,21 +1998,21 @@ void TQObject::disconnectNotify( const char * ) /*! \fn bool TQObject::checkConnectArgs( const char *signal, const TQObject *receiver, const char *member ) - Returns TRUE if the \a signal and the \a member arguments are - compatible; otherwise returns FALSE. (The \a receiver argument is + Returns true if the \a signal and the \a member arguments are + compatible; otherwise returns false. (The \a receiver argument is currently ignored.) \warning We recommend that you use the default implementation and do not reimplement this function. \omit - TRUE: "signal(<anything>)", "member()" - TRUE: "signal(a,b,c)", "member(a,b,c)" - TRUE: "signal(a,b,c)", "member(a,b)", "member(a)" etc. - FALSE: "signal(const a)", "member(a)" - FALSE: "signal(a)", "member(const a)" - FALSE: "signal(a)", "member(b)" - FALSE: "signal(a)", "member(a,b)" + true: "signal(<anything>)", "member()" + true: "signal(a,b,c)", "member(a,b,c)" + true: "signal(a,b,c)", "member(a,b)", "member(a)" etc. + false: "signal(const a)", "member(a)" + false: "signal(a)", "member(const a)" + false: "signal(a)", "member(b)" + false: "signal(a)", "member(a,b)" \endomit */ @@ -2025,12 +2025,12 @@ bool TQObject::checkConnectArgs( const char *signal, while ( *s1++ != '(' ) { } // scan to first '(' while ( *s2++ != '(' ) { } if ( *s2 == ')' || qstrcmp(s1,s2) == 0 ) // member has no args or - return TRUE; // exact match + return true; // exact match int s1len = tqstrlen(s1); int s2len = tqstrlen(s2); if ( s2len < s1len && tqstrncmp(s1,s2,s2len-1)==0 && s1[s2len-1]==',' ) - return TRUE; // member has less args - return FALSE; + return true; // member has less args + return false; } /*! @@ -2060,8 +2060,8 @@ TQCString TQObject::normalizeSignalSlot( const char *signalSlot ) /*! Connects \a signal from the \a sender object to \a member in object - \a receiver, and returns TRUE if the connection succeeds; otherwise - returns FALSE. + \a receiver, and returns true if the connection succeeds; otherwise + returns false. You must use the TQ_SIGNAL() and TQ_SLOT() macros when specifying the \a signal and the \a member, for example: @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ TQCString TQObject::normalizeSignalSlot( const char *signalSlot ) This example ensures that the label always displays the current scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would - not work and return FALSE: + not work and return false: TQObject::connect( scroll, TQ_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)), label, TQ_SLOT(setNum(int v)) ); @@ -2112,8 +2112,8 @@ TQCString TQObject::normalizeSignalSlot( const char *signalSlot ) If a signal is connected to several slots, the slots are activated in an arbitrary order when the signal is emitted. - The function returns TRUE if it successfully connects the signal - to the slot. It will return FALSE if it cannot create the + The function returns true if it successfully connects the signal + to the slot. It will return false if it cannot create the connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the existence of either \a signal or \a member, or if their signatures aren't compatible. @@ -2135,23 +2135,23 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, signal ? signal+1 : "(null)", receiver ? receiver->className() : "(null)", member ? member+1 : "(null)" ); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif TQMetaObject *smeta = sender->metaObject(); #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( !check_signal_macro( sender, signal, "connect", "bind" ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif TQCString nw_signal(signal); // Assume already normalized ++signal; // skip member type code - int signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, TRUE ); + int signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, true ); if ( signal_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_signal = qt_rmWS( signal-1 ); // remove whitespace signal = nw_signal.data()+1; // skip member type code - signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, TRUE ); + signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, true ); } if ( signal_index < 0 ) { // no such signal @@ -2160,9 +2160,9 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, err_info_about_candidates( TQ_SIGNAL_CODE, smeta, signal, "connect" ); err_info_about_objects( "connect", sender, receiver ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } - const TQMetaData *sm = smeta->signal( signal_index, TRUE ); + const TQMetaData *sm = smeta->signal( signal_index, true ); signal = sm->name; // use name from meta object int membcode = member[0] - '0'; // get member code @@ -2172,7 +2172,7 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( !check_member_code( membcode, r, member, "connect" ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif member++; // skip code @@ -2181,19 +2181,19 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, int member_index = -1; switch ( membcode ) { // get receiver member case TQ_SLOT_CODE: - member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, true ); if ( member_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_member = qt_rmWS(member); // remove whitespace member = nw_member; - member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, true ); } break; case TQ_SIGNAL_CODE: - member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, true ); if ( member_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_member = qt_rmWS(member); // remove whitespace member = nw_member; - member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, true ); } break; } @@ -2203,7 +2203,7 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, err_info_about_candidates( membcode, rmeta, member, "connect" ); err_info_about_objects( "connect", sender, receiver ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( !s->checkConnectArgs(signal,receiver,member) ) { @@ -2211,11 +2211,11 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, "\n\t%s::%s --> %s::%s", s->className(), signal, r->className(), member ); - return FALSE; + return false; } else { const TQMetaData *rm = membcode == TQ_SLOT_CODE ? - rmeta->slot( member_index, TRUE ) : - rmeta->signal( member_index, TRUE ); + rmeta->slot( member_index, true ) : + rmeta->signal( member_index, true ); if ( rm ) { int si = 0; int ri = 0; @@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, "\n\t%s::%s --> %s::%s", s->className(), signal, r->className(), member ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ bool TQObject::connect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, #endif connectInternal( sender, signal_index, receiver, membcode, member_index ); s->connectNotify( nw_signal ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal */ @@ -2257,14 +2257,14 @@ void TQObject::connectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, const if ( !s->connections ) { // create connections lookup table s->connections = new TQSignalVec( signal_index+1 ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( s->connections ); - s->connections->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + s->connections->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQConnectionList *clist = s->connections->at( signal_index ); if ( !clist ) { // create receiver list clist = new TQConnectionList; TQ_CHECK_PTR( clist ); - clist->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + clist->setAutoDelete( true ); s->connections->insert( signal_index, clist ); } @@ -2273,10 +2273,10 @@ void TQObject::connectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, const switch ( membcode ) { // get receiver member case TQ_SLOT_CODE: - rm = rmeta->slot( member_index, TRUE ); + rm = rmeta->slot( member_index, true ); break; case TQ_SIGNAL_CODE: - rm = rmeta->signal( member_index, TRUE ); + rm = rmeta->signal( member_index, true ); break; } @@ -2388,11 +2388,11 @@ bool TQObject::disconnect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) if ( sender == 0 || (receiver == 0 && member != 0) ) { tqWarning( "TQObject::disconnect: Unexpected null parameter" ); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif if ( !sender->connections ) // no connected signals - return FALSE; + return false; TQObject *s = (TQObject *)sender; TQObject *r = (TQObject *)receiver; int member_index = -1; @@ -2402,26 +2402,26 @@ bool TQObject::disconnect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, membcode = member[0] - '0'; #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( !check_member_code( membcode, r, member, "disconnect" ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif ++member; TQMetaObject *rmeta = r->metaObject(); switch ( membcode ) { // get receiver member case TQ_SLOT_CODE: - member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, true ); if ( member_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_member = qt_rmWS(member); // remove whitespace member = nw_member; - member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSlot( member, true ); } break; case TQ_SIGNAL_CODE: - member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, true ); if ( member_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_member = qt_rmWS(member); // remove whitespace member = nw_member; - member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, TRUE ); + member_index = rmeta->findSignal( member, true ); } break; } @@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@ bool TQObject::disconnect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, err_info_about_candidates( membcode, rmeta, member, "connect" ); err_info_about_objects( "disconnect", sender, receiver ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -2439,35 +2439,35 @@ bool TQObject::disconnect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, if ( disconnectInternal( s, -1, r, membcode, member_index ) ) s->disconnectNotify( 0 ); else - return FALSE; + return false; } else { // specific signal #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( !check_signal_macro( s, signal, "disconnect", "unbind" ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; #endif TQCString nw_signal(signal); // Assume already normalized ++signal; // skip member type code TQMetaObject *smeta = s->metaObject(); if ( !smeta ) // no meta object - return FALSE; - int signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, TRUE ); + return false; + int signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, true ); if ( signal_index < 0 ) { // normalize and retry nw_signal = qt_rmWS( signal-1 ); // remove whitespace signal = nw_signal.data()+1; // skip member type code - signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, TRUE ); + signal_index = smeta->findSignal( signal, true ); } if ( signal_index < 0 ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) tqWarning( "TQObject::disconnect: No such signal %s::%s", s->className(), signal ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } /* compatibility and safety: If a receiver has several slots * with the same name, disconnect them all*/ - bool res = FALSE; + bool res = false; if ( membcode == TQ_SLOT_CODE && r ) { TQMetaObject * rmeta = r->metaObject(); do { @@ -2482,7 +2482,7 @@ bool TQObject::disconnect( const TQObject *sender, const char *signal, s->disconnectNotify( nw_signal ); return res; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal */ @@ -2494,9 +2494,9 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, TQObject *r = (TQObject*)receiver; if ( !s->connections ) - return FALSE; + return false; - bool success = FALSE; + bool success = false; TQConnectionList *clist; TQConnection *c; if ( signal_index == -1 ) { @@ -2514,7 +2514,7 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->unlock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - success = TRUE; + success = true; c = clist->next(); } else if ( r == c->object() && ( (member_index == -1) || @@ -2522,11 +2522,11 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->lock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, TRUE ); + removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, true ); #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->unlock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - success = TRUE; + success = true; clist->remove(); c = clist->current(); } else { @@ -2539,7 +2539,7 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, } else { clist = s->connections->at( signal_index ); if ( !clist ) - return FALSE; + return false; c = clist->first(); while ( c ) { // for all receivers... @@ -2547,11 +2547,11 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->lock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, TRUE ); + removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, true ); #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->unlock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - success = TRUE; + success = true; c = clist->next(); } else if ( r == c->object() && ( (member_index == -1) || @@ -2559,11 +2559,11 @@ bool TQObject::disconnectInternal( const TQObject *sender, int signal_index, #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->lock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, TRUE ); + removeObjFromList( c->object()->senderObjects, s, true ); #ifdef TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT if (c->object()->senderObjects) c->object()->senderObjects->listMutex->unlock(); #endif // TQT_THREAD_SUPPORT - success = TRUE; + success = true; clist->remove(); c = clist->current(); } else { @@ -2725,11 +2725,11 @@ TQMetaObject* TQObject::staticTQtMetaObject() static const TQMetaEnum enum_tbl[] = { - { "Alignment", 10, enum_0, TRUE }, - { "Orientation", 2, enum_1, FALSE }, - { "TextFormat", 4, enum_2, FALSE }, - { "BackgroundMode", 17, enum_3, FALSE }, - { "DateFormat", 3, enum_4, FALSE } + { "Alignment", 10, enum_0, true }, + { "Orientation", 2, enum_1, false }, + { "TextFormat", 4, enum_2, false }, + { "BackgroundMode", 17, enum_3, false }, + { "DateFormat", 3, enum_4, false } }; #endif @@ -3096,7 +3096,7 @@ void TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() TQConnectionList *clist; for ( uint i = 0; i < connections->size(); i++ ) { if ( ( clist = connections->at( i ) ) ) { - tqDebug( "\t%s", metaObject()->signal( i, TRUE )->name ); + tqDebug( "\t%s", metaObject()->signal( i, true )->name ); n++; TQConnection *c; TQConnectionListIt cit(*clist); @@ -3133,8 +3133,8 @@ void TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() /*! Sets the value of the object's \a name property to \a value. - Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns + false. Information about all available properties is provided through the metaObject(). @@ -3144,19 +3144,19 @@ void TQObject::dumpObjectInfo() bool TQObject::setProperty( const char *name, const TQVariant& value ) { if ( !value.isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQVariant v = value; TQMetaObject* meta = metaObject(); if ( !meta ) - return FALSE; - int id = meta->findProperty( name, TRUE ); - const TQMetaProperty* p = meta->property( id, TRUE ); + return false; + int id = meta->findProperty( name, true ); + const TQMetaProperty* p = meta->property( id, true ); if ( !p || !p->isValid() || !p->writable() ) { tqWarning( "%s::setProperty( \"%s\", value ) failed: property invalid, read-only or does not exist", className(), name ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( p->isEnumType() ) { @@ -3173,7 +3173,7 @@ bool TQObject::setProperty( const char *name, const TQVariant& value ) v = TQVariant( p->keyToValue( value.toCString().data() ) ); } } else if ( v.type() != TQVariant::Int && v.type() != TQVariant::UInt ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } return tqt_property( id, 0, &v ); } @@ -3182,7 +3182,7 @@ bool TQObject::setProperty( const char *name, const TQVariant& value ) if ( type == TQVariant::Invalid ) type = TQVariant::nameToType( p->type() ); if ( type != TQVariant::Invalid && !v.canCast( type ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return tqt_property( id, 0, &v ); } @@ -3203,8 +3203,8 @@ TQVariant TQObject::property( const char *name ) const TQMetaObject* meta = metaObject(); if ( !meta ) return v; - int id = meta->findProperty( name, TRUE ); - const TQMetaProperty* p = meta->property( id, TRUE ); + int id = meta->findProperty( name, true ); + const TQMetaProperty* p = meta->property( id, true ); if ( !p || !p->isValid() ) { tqWarning( "%s::property( \"%s\" ) failed: property invalid or does not exist", className(), name ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqobject.h b/src/kernel/tqobject.h index 05ba4dc9d..44eb188c3 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqobject.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqobject.h @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public: virtual void setName( const char *name ); bool isWidgetType() const { return isWidget; } - bool highPriority() const { return FALSE; } + bool highPriority() const { return false; } bool signalsBlocked() const { return blockSig; } void blockSignals( bool b ); @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ public: void killTimer( int id ); void killTimers(); - TQObject *child( const char *objName, const char *inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ); //### const in 4.0 + TQObject *child( const char *objName, const char *inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true ); //### const in 4.0 const TQObjectList *children() const { return childObjects; } TQObjectList childrenListObject(); const TQObjectList childrenListObject() const; @@ -117,8 +117,8 @@ public: TQObjectList *queryList( const char *inheritsClass = 0, const char *objName = 0, - bool regexpMatch = TRUE, - bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const; + bool regexpMatch = true, + bool recursiveSearch = true ) const; virtual void insertChild( TQObject * ); virtual void removeChild( TQObject * ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqobjectcleanuphandler.cpp b/src/kernel/tqobjectcleanuphandler.cpp index f06ebb7f3..452e4cad9 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqobjectcleanuphandler.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqobjectcleanuphandler.cpp @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ // TQLibraryInterface implementation bool FactoryComponent::init() { - return TRUE; + return true; } void FactoryComponent::cleanup() @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ TQObject* TQObjectCleanupHandler::add( TQObject* object ) if ( !cleanupObjects ) { cleanupObjects = new TQObjectList; - cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( true ); } connect( object, TQ_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)), this, TQ_SLOT(objectDestroyed(TQObject*)) ); cleanupObjects->insert( 0, object ); @@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ void TQObjectCleanupHandler::remove( TQObject *object ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in - this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return FALSE. + Returns true if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in + this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return false. */ bool TQObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty() const { - return cleanupObjects ? cleanupObjects->isEmpty() : TRUE; + return cleanupObjects ? cleanupObjects->isEmpty() : true; } /*! @@ -163,10 +163,10 @@ void TQObjectCleanupHandler::clear() void TQObjectCleanupHandler::objectDestroyed( TQObject*object ) { if ( cleanupObjects ) - cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( false ); remove( object ); if ( cleanupObjects ) - cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cleanupObjects->setAutoDelete( true ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqobjectdict.h b/src/kernel/tqobjectdict.h index c51123054..8a92a62b0 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqobjectdict.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqobjectdict.h @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQObjectDictionary : public TQAsciiDict<TQMetaObject> { public: - TQObjectDictionary(int size=17,bool cs=TRUE,bool ck=TRUE) + TQObjectDictionary(int size=17,bool cs=true,bool ck=true) : TQAsciiDict<TQMetaObject>(size,cs,ck) {} TQObjectDictionary( const TQObjectDictionary &dict ) : TQAsciiDict<TQMetaObject>(dict) {} diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice.h b/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice.h index a846f6911..ebb0c6a5a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice.h @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ protected: void copyX11Data( const TQPaintDevice * ); void cloneX11Data( const TQPaintDevice * ); virtual void setX11Data( const TQPaintDeviceX11Data* ); - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* getX11Data( bool def=FALSE ) const; + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* getX11Data( bool def=false ) const; #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) #if !defined( TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ ) CGContextRef ctx; @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ protected: friend class TQPaintDeviceMetrics; #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) #ifndef TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ - virtual CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=TRUE) const; + virtual CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=true) const; #endif friend TQ_EXPORT void unclippedScaledBitBlt( TQPaintDevice *, int, int, int, int, const TQPaintDevice *, int, int, int, int, TQt::RasterOp, bool, bool ); @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= TQ_EXPORT void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevice *src, int sx=0, int sy=0, int sw=-1, int sh=-1, - TQt::RasterOp = TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=FALSE ); + TQt::RasterOp = TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=false ); TQ_EXPORT void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ inline bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual() TQ_EXPORT inline void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, const TQPoint &dp, const TQPaintDevice *src, const TQRect &sr =TQRect(0,0,-1,-1), - TQt::RasterOp rop=TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=FALSE ) + TQt::RasterOp rop=TQt::CopyROP, bool ignoreMask=false ) { bitBlt( dst, dp.x(), dp.y(), src, sr.x(), sr.y(), sr.width(), sr.height(), rop, ignoreMask ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp index efeaf78fa..dd6251e2a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ void TQPaintDevice::setX11Data( const TQPaintDeviceX11Data* d ) /* \internal - If \a def is FALSE, returns a deep copy of the x11Data, or 0 if x11Data is 0. - If \a def is TRUE, makes a TQPaintDeviceX11Data struct filled with the default + If \a def is false, returns a deep copy of the x11Data, or 0 if x11Data is 0. + If \a def is true, makes a TQPaintDeviceX11Data struct filled with the default values. In either case the caller is responsible for deleting the returned @@ -259,8 +259,8 @@ TQPaintDeviceX11Data* TQPaintDevice::getX11Data( bool def ) const /*! \fn bool TQPaintDevice::isExtDev() const - Returns TRUE if the device is an external paint device; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the device is an external paint device; otherwise + returns false. External paint devices cannot be bitBlt()'ed from. TQPicture and TQPrinter are external paint devices. @@ -373,9 +373,9 @@ TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11RenderHandle() const /*! \fn bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual () - Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for the default + Returns true if the Visual used is the default for the default screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only); - otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable. + otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable. */ /*! @@ -441,9 +441,9 @@ TQt::HANDLE TQPaintDevice::x11RenderHandle() const \overload \fn bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual( int screen ) - Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for screen + Returns true if the Visual used is the default for screen \a screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only); - otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable. + otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable. */ @@ -686,9 +686,9 @@ int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY() /*! \fn bool TQPaintDevice::paintingActive() const - Returns TRUE if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has + Returns true if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has called TQPainter::begin() but not yet called TQPainter::end() for - this device; otherwise returns FALSE. + this device; otherwise returns false. \sa TQPainter::isActive() */ @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ bool TQPaintDevice::cmd( int, TQPainter *, TQPDevCmdParam * ) #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) tqWarning( "TQPaintDevice::cmd: Device has no command interface" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ int TQPaintDevice::fontInf( TQFont *, int ) const // and the pixmap size doesn't exceed 128x128. // -static bool init_mask_gc = FALSE; +static bool init_mask_gc = false; static const int max_mask_gcs = 11; // suitable for hashing struct mask_gc { @@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ static mask_gc gc_vec[max_mask_gcs]; static void cleanup_mask_gc() { Display *dpy = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(); - init_mask_gc = FALSE; + init_mask_gc = false; for ( int i=0; i<max_mask_gcs; i++ ) { if ( gc_vec[i].gc ) XFreeGC( dpy, gc_vec[i].gc ); @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ static void cleanup_mask_gc() static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap mask ) { if ( !init_mask_gc ) { // first time initialization - init_mask_gc = TRUE; + init_mask_gc = true; tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_mask_gc ); for ( int i=0; i<max_mask_gcs; i++ ) gc_vec[i].gc = 0; @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap mask ) The most common values for \a rop are CopyROP and XorROP; the \l TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values. - If \a ignoreMask is FALSE (the default) and \a src is a + If \a ignoreMask is false (the default) and \a src is a masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \a{src}->mask(). If \a src, \a dst, \a sw or \a sh is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If @@ -867,22 +867,22 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, if ( dst->paintingActive() && dst->isExtDev() ) { TQPixmap *pm; // output to picture/printer - bool tmp_pm = TRUE; + bool tmp_pm = true; if ( ts == TQInternal::Pixmap ) { pm = (TQPixmap*)src; if ( sx != 0 || sy != 0 || sw != pm->width() || sh != pm->height() || ignoreMask ) { TQPixmap *tmp = new TQPixmap( sw, sh, pm->depth() ); - bitBlt( tmp, 0, 0, pm, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( tmp, 0, 0, pm, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, true ); if ( pm->mask() && !ignoreMask ) { TQBitmap mask( sw, sh ); bitBlt( &mask, 0, 0, pm->mask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, - TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + TQt::CopyROP, true ); tmp->setMask( mask ); } pm = tmp; } else { - tmp_pm = FALSE; + tmp_pm = false; } } else if ( ts == TQInternal::Widget ) {// bitBlt to temp pixmap pm = new TQPixmap( sw, sh ); @@ -949,8 +949,8 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, bool mono_src; bool mono_dst; - bool include_inferiors = FALSE; - bool graphics_exposure = FALSE; + bool include_inferiors = false; + bool graphics_exposure = false; TQPixmap *src_pm; TQBitmap *mask; @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, mask = ignoreMask ? 0 : src_pm->data->mask; } else { src_pm = 0; - mono_src = FALSE; + mono_src = false; mask = 0; include_inferiors = ((TQWidget*)src)->testWFlags(TQt::WPaintUnclipped); graphics_exposure = td == TQInternal::Widget; @@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, mono_dst = ((TQPixmap*)dst)->depth() == 1; ((TQPixmap*)dst)->detach(); // changes shared pixmap } else { - mono_dst = FALSE; + mono_dst = false; include_inferiors = include_inferiors || ((TQWidget*)dst)->testWFlags(TQt::WPaintUnclipped); } @@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, picmask |= CPSubwindowMode; } if (graphics_exposure) { - pattr.graphics_exposures = TRUE; + pattr.graphics_exposures = true; picmask |= CPGraphicsExposure; } if (picmask) @@ -1009,7 +1009,7 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, sx, sy, sx, sy, dx, dy, sw, sh); // restore attributes pattr.subwindow_mode = ClipByChildren; - pattr.graphics_exposures = FALSE; + pattr.graphics_exposures = false; if (picmask) XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), picmask, &pattr); return; @@ -1020,11 +1020,11 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, GC gc; if ( mask && !mono_src ) { // fast masked blt - bool temp_gc = FALSE; + bool temp_gc = false; if ( mask->data->maskgc ) { gc = (GC)mask->data->maskgc; // we have a premade mask GC } else { - if ( FALSE && src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::NormalOptim ) { // #### cache disabled + if ( false && src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::NormalOptim ) { // #### cache disabled // Compete for the global cache gc = cache_mask_gc( dpy, dst->handle(), mask->data->ser_no, @@ -1039,7 +1039,7 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, if ( src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::BestOptim ) { mask->data->maskgc = gc; } else { - temp_gc = TRUE; + temp_gc = true; } } } @@ -1095,14 +1095,14 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, gcvals.ts_x_origin = dx - sx; gcvals.ts_y_origin = dy - sy; - bool clipmask = FALSE; + bool clipmask = false; if ( mask ) { if ( ((TQPixmap*)src)->data->selfmask ) { gcvals.fill_style = FillStippled; } else { XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, dx-sx, dy-sy ); - clipmask = TRUE; + clipmask = true; } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp index 7b30e0af6..156f3774a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ typedef TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix> TQWMatrixStack; After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. hasClipping() is - TRUE if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region. + true if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region. You can set it using either setClipRegion() or setClipRect(). Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent, but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ TQPainter::TQPainter() Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \a pd immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if \a - unclipped is TRUE. + unclipped is true. This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a \link TQWidget::paintEvent() paint event\endlink and should be used @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ TQPainter::TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \a pd immediately, with the default arguments taken from \a copyAttributes. The painter will paint over children of the paint - device if \a unclipped is TRUE (although this is not supported on + device if \a unclipped is true (although this is not supported on all platforms). \sa begin() @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ TQPainter::~TQPainter() This version opens the painter on a paint device \a pd and sets the initial pen, background color and font from \a copyAttributes, painting over the paint device's children when \a unclipped is - TRUE. This is equivalent to: + true. This is equivalent to: \code TQPainter p; @@ -595,15 +595,15 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, const TQWidget *copyAttributes, tqWarning( "TQPainter::begin: The widget to copy attributes from cannot " "be null" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( begin( pd, unclipped ) ) { setPen( copyAttributes->foregroundColor() ); setBackgroundColor( copyAttributes->backgroundColor() ); setFont( copyAttributes->font() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -624,9 +624,9 @@ void TQPainter::setf( uint b, bool v ) /*! \fn bool TQPainter::isActive() const - Returns TRUE if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has + Returns true if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. \sa TQPaintDevice::paintingActive() */ @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ void TQPainter::save() if ( pss == 0 ) { pss = new TQPtrStack<TQPState>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( pss ); - pss->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + pss->setAutoDelete( true ); ps_stack = pss; } TQPState *ps = new TQPState; @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ void TQPainter::restore() if ( testf(ExtDev) ) { pdev->cmd( TQPaintDevice::PdcRestore, this, 0 ); if ( pdev->devType() == TQInternal::Picture ) - block_ext = TRUE; + block_ext = true; } TQPStateStack *pss = (TQPStateStack *)ps_stack; if ( pss == 0 || pss->isEmpty() ) { @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ void TQPainter::restore() wm_stack = ps->wm_stack; #endif delete ps; - block_ext = FALSE; + block_ext = false; } typedef TQPtrDict<TQPaintDevice> TQPaintDeviceDict; @@ -1198,8 +1198,8 @@ void TQPainter::setTabArray( int *ta ) #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS /*! - Enables view transformations if \a enable is TRUE, or disables - view transformations if \a enable is FALSE. + Enables view transformations if \a enable is true, or disables + view transformations if \a enable is false. \sa hasViewXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), xForm() @@ -1225,8 +1225,8 @@ void TQPainter::setViewXForm( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQPainter::hasViewXForm() const - Returns TRUE if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns + false. \sa setViewXForm(), xForm() */ @@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ void TQPainter::setWindow( int x, int y, int w, int h ) if ( testf(VxF) ) updateXForm(); else - setViewXForm( TRUE ); + setViewXForm( true ); } /*! @@ -1328,13 +1328,13 @@ void TQPainter::setViewport( int x, int y, int w, int h ) if ( testf(VxF) ) updateXForm(); else - setViewXForm( TRUE ); + setViewXForm( true ); } /*! - Enables world transformations if \a enable is TRUE, or disables - world transformations if \a enable is FALSE. The world + Enables world transformations if \a enable is true, or disables + world transformations if \a enable is false. The world transformation matrix is not changed. \sa setWorldMatrix(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), @@ -1361,8 +1361,8 @@ void TQPainter::setWorldXForm( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQPainter::hasWorldXForm() const - Returns TRUE if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns + false. \sa setWorldXForm() */ @@ -1382,12 +1382,12 @@ const TQWMatrix &TQPainter::worldMatrix() const Sets the world transformation matrix to \a m and enables world transformation. - If \a combine is TRUE, then \a m is combined with the current + If \a combine is true, then \a m is combined with the current transformation matrix, otherwise \a m replaces the current transformation matrix. - If \a m is the identity matrix and \a combine is FALSE, this - function calls setWorldXForm(FALSE). (The identity matrix is the + If \a m is the identity matrix and \a combine is false, this + function calls setWorldXForm(false). (The identity matrix is the matrix where TQWMatrix::m11() and TQWMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the rest are 0.0.) @@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ const TQWMatrix &TQPainter::worldMatrix() const { TQWMatrix m; m.rotate( a ); - setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE ); + setWorldMatrix( m, true ); } \endcode @@ -1449,9 +1449,9 @@ void TQPainter::setWorldMatrix( const TQWMatrix &m, bool combine ) pdev->cmd( TQPaintDevice::PdcSetWMatrix, this, param ); } if ( identity && pdev->devType() != TQInternal::Picture ) - setWorldXForm( FALSE ); + setWorldXForm( false ); else if ( !testf(WxF) ) - setWorldXForm( TRUE ); + setWorldXForm( true ); else updateXForm(); } @@ -1467,7 +1467,7 @@ void TQPainter::saveWorldMatrix() if ( stack == 0 ) { stack = new TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix>; TQ_CHECK_PTR( stack ); - stack->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + stack->setAutoDelete( true ); wm_stack = stack; } @@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ void TQPainter::translate( double dx, double dy ) #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS TQWMatrix m; m.translate( dx, dy ); - setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE ); + setWorldMatrix( m, true ); #else xlatex += (int)dx; xlatey += (int)dy; @@ -1541,7 +1541,7 @@ void TQPainter::scale( double sx, double sy ) { TQWMatrix m; m.scale( sx, sy ); - setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE ); + setWorldMatrix( m, true ); } /*! @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ void TQPainter::shear( double sh, double sv ) { TQWMatrix m; m.shear( sv, sh ); - setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE ); + setWorldMatrix( m, true ); } /*! @@ -1569,7 +1569,7 @@ void TQPainter::rotate( double a ) { TQWMatrix m; m.rotate( a ); - setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE ); + setWorldMatrix( m, true ); } @@ -1589,8 +1589,8 @@ void TQPainter::resetXForm() ww = vw = pdev->metric( TQPaintDeviceMetrics::PdmWidth ); wh = vh = pdev->metric( TQPaintDeviceMetrics::PdmHeight ); wxmat = TQWMatrix(); - setWorldXForm( FALSE ); - setViewXForm( FALSE ); + setWorldXForm( false ); + setViewXForm( false ); } /*! @@ -1614,7 +1614,7 @@ void TQPainter::updateXForm() } xmat = m; - txinv = FALSE; // no inverted matrix + txinv = false; // no inverted matrix txop = TxNone; if ( m12()==0.0 && m21()==0.0 && m11() >= 0.0 && m22() >= 0.0 ) { if ( m11()==1.0 && m22()==1.0 ) { @@ -1643,9 +1643,9 @@ void TQPainter::updateXForm() void TQPainter::updateInvXForm() { #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) - Q_ASSERT( txinv == FALSE ); + Q_ASSERT( txinv == false ); #endif - txinv = TRUE; // creating inverted matrix + txinv = true; // creating inverted matrix bool invertible; TQWMatrix m; if ( testf(VxF) ) { @@ -2143,7 +2143,7 @@ void TQPainter::fillRect( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQBrush &brush ) /*! \fn bool TQPainter::hasClipping() const - Returns TRUE if clipping has been set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if clipping has been set; otherwise returns false. \sa setClipping() */ @@ -2799,13 +2799,13 @@ void qt_format_text( const TQFont& font, const TQRect &_r, // tabs by spaces TQChar *chr = (TQChar*)text.unicode(); const TQChar *end = chr + len; - bool haveLineSep = FALSE; + bool haveLineSep = false; while ( chr != end ) { if ( *chr == '\r' || ( singleline && *chr == '\n' ) ) { *chr = ' '; } else if ( *chr == '\n' ) { *chr = TQChar_linesep; - haveLineSep = TRUE; + haveLineSep = true; } else if ( *chr == '&' ) { ++maxUnderlines; } @@ -2944,8 +2944,8 @@ void qt_format_text( const TQFont& font, const TQRect &_r, } if (!(tf & TQPainter::DontPrint)) { - bool restoreClipping = FALSE; - bool painterHasClip = FALSE; + bool restoreClipping = false; + bool painterHasClip = false; TQRegion painterClipRegion; if ( !dontclip ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS @@ -2959,14 +2959,14 @@ void qt_format_text( const TQFont& font, const TQRect &_r, painterHasClip = painter->hasClipping(); painterClipRegion = painter->clipRegion(); - restoreClipping = TRUE; + restoreClipping = true; painter->setClipRegion( reg ); } else { if ( painter->hasClipping() ){ painterHasClip = painter->hasClipping(); painterClipRegion = painter->clipRegion(); - restoreClipping = TRUE; - painter->setClipping( FALSE ); + restoreClipping = true; + painter->setClipping( false ); } } @@ -3439,8 +3439,8 @@ void TQPen::setColor( const TQColor &c ) /*! \fn bool TQPen::operator!=( const TQPen &p ) const - Returns TRUE if the pen is different from \a p; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the pen is different from \a p; otherwise returns + false. Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or colors. @@ -3449,7 +3449,7 @@ void TQPen::setColor( const TQColor &c ) */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the pen is equal to \a p; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the pen is equal to \a p; otherwise returns false. Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors. @@ -3816,8 +3816,8 @@ void TQBrush::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) /*! \fn bool TQBrush::operator!=( const TQBrush &b ) const - Returns TRUE if the brush is different from \a b; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the brush is different from \a b; otherwise + returns false. Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or pixmaps. @@ -3826,8 +3826,8 @@ void TQBrush::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the brush is equal to \a b; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the brush is equal to \a b; otherwise returns + false. Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and pixmaps. diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpainter.h b/src/kernel/tqpainter.h index 29a10406d..67dae0f6f 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpainter.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqpainter.h @@ -68,12 +68,12 @@ public: enum CoordinateMode { CoordDevice, CoordPainter }; TQPainter(); - TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); - TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); + TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = false ); + TQPainter( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = false ); ~TQPainter(); - bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); - bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = FALSE ); + bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, bool unclipped = false ); + bool begin( const TQPaintDevice *, const TQWidget *, bool unclipped = false ); bool end(); TQPaintDevice *device() const; @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ public: void setWorldXForm( bool ); // set world xform on/off const TQWMatrix &worldMatrix() const; // get/set world xform matrix - void setWorldMatrix( const TQWMatrix &, bool combine=FALSE ); + void setWorldMatrix( const TQWMatrix &, bool combine=false ); void saveWorldMatrix(); void restoreWorldMatrix(); @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ public: int index=0, int nlines=-1 ); void drawPolyline( const TQPointArray &, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); - void drawPolygon( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=FALSE, + void drawPolygon( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=false, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); void drawConvexPolygon( const TQPointArray &, int index=0, int npoints=-1 ); @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ private: void map( int, int, int, int, int *, int *, int *, int * ) const; void mapInv( int, int, int *, int * ) const; void mapInv( int, int, int, int, int *, int *, int *, int * ) const; - void drawPolyInternal( const TQPointArray &, bool close=TRUE ); + void drawPolyInternal( const TQPointArray &, bool close=true ); void drawWinFocusRect( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool xorPaint, const TQColor &penColor ); @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ protected: uint clip_serial; // clipping serial number #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) TQt::HANDLE hd; // handle to drawable - void initPaintDevice(bool force=FALSE, TQPoint *off=NULL, TQRegion *rgn=NULL); + void initPaintDevice(bool force=false, TQPoint *off=NULL, TQRegion *rgn=NULL); friend const TQRegion &qt_mac_update_painter(TQPainter *, bool); friend class TQFontEngineMac; friend class TQMacPainter; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp index e477f2aaa..a25614691 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp @@ -225,14 +225,14 @@ inline double qsin( double a ) return(r); } -double qsincos( double a, bool calcCos=FALSE ) +double qsincos( double a, bool calcCos=false ) { return calcCos ? qcos(a) : qsin(a); } #else -double qsincos( double a, bool calcCos=FALSE ) +double qsincos( double a, bool calcCos=false ) { if ( calcCos ) // calculate cosine a -= Q_PI2; @@ -258,8 +258,8 @@ double qsincos( double a, bool calcCos=FALSE ) return (a-a3/6+a5/120-a7/5040+a9/362880-a11/39916800)*sign; } -inline double qsin( double a ) { return qsincos(a, FALSE); } -inline double qcos( double a ) { return qsincos(a, TRUE); } +inline double qsin( double a ) { return qsincos(a, false); } +inline double qcos( double a ) { return qsincos(a, true); } #endif @@ -282,14 +282,14 @@ struct TQGC const int gc_array_size = 256; static TQGC gc_array[gc_array_size]; // array of GCs -static bool gc_array_init = FALSE; +static bool gc_array_init = false; static void init_gc_array() { if ( !gc_array_init ) { memset( gc_array, 0, gc_array_size*sizeof(TQGC) ); - gc_array_init = TRUE; + gc_array_init = true; } } @@ -303,17 +303,17 @@ static void cleanup_gc_array( Display *dpy ) XFreeGC( dpy, p->gc ); p++; } - gc_array_init = FALSE; + gc_array_init = false; } } // #define DONT_USE_GC_ARRAY -static GC alloc_gc( Display *dpy, int scrn, Drawable hd, bool monochrome=FALSE, - bool privateGC = FALSE ) +static GC alloc_gc( Display *dpy, int scrn, Drawable hd, bool monochrome=false, + bool privateGC = false ) { #if defined(DONT_USE_GC_ARRAY) - privateGC = TRUE; // will be slower + privateGC = true; // will be slower #endif if ( privateGC ) { GC gc = XCreateGC( dpy, hd, 0, 0 ); @@ -329,11 +329,11 @@ static GC alloc_gc( Display *dpy, int scrn, Drawable hd, bool monochrome=FALSE, p->gc = XCreateGC( dpy, hd, 0, 0 ); p->scrn = scrn; XSetGraphicsExposures( dpy, p->gc, False ); - p->in_use = FALSE; + p->in_use = false; p->mono = monochrome; } if ( !p->in_use && p->mono == monochrome && p->scrn == scrn ) { - p->in_use = TRUE; // available/compatible GC + p->in_use = true; // available/compatible GC return p->gc; } p++; @@ -346,10 +346,10 @@ static GC alloc_gc( Display *dpy, int scrn, Drawable hd, bool monochrome=FALSE, return gc; } -static void free_gc( Display *dpy, GC gc, bool privateGC = FALSE ) +static void free_gc( Display *dpy, GC gc, bool privateGC = false ) { #if defined(DONT_USE_GC_ARRAY) - privateGC = TRUE; // will be slower + privateGC = true; // will be slower #endif if ( privateGC ) { Q_ASSERT( dpy != 0 ); @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ static void free_gc( Display *dpy, GC gc, bool privateGC = FALSE ) if ( gc_array_init ) { while ( i-- ) { if ( p->gc == gc ) { - p->in_use = FALSE; // set available + p->in_use = false; // set available XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, None ); // make it reusable XSetFunction( dpy, gc, GXcopy ); XSetFillStyle( dpy, gc, FillSolid ); @@ -408,14 +408,14 @@ struct TQGCC // cached GC const int gc_cache_size = 29; // multiply by 4 static TQGCC *gc_cache_buf; static TQGCC *gc_cache[4*gc_cache_size]; -static bool gc_cache_init = FALSE; +static bool gc_cache_init = false; static uint gc_cache_clip_serial = 0; static void init_gc_cache() { if ( !gc_cache_init ) { - gc_cache_init = TRUE; + gc_cache_init = true; gc_cache_clip_serial = 0; TQGCC *g = gc_cache_buf = new TQGCC[4*gc_cache_size]; memset( g, 0, 4*gc_cache_size*sizeof(TQGCC) ); @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ static void cleanup_gc_cache() } #endif delete [] gc_cache_buf; - gc_cache_init = FALSE; + gc_cache_init = false; } @@ -499,13 +499,13 @@ static bool obtain_gc( void **ref, GC *gc, uint pix, Display *dpy, int scrn, gc_cache[k-1] = g; *ref = (void *)g; *gc = g->gc; - return TRUE; + return true; } else { // all GCs in use #if defined(GC_CACHE_STAT) g_numfaults++; #endif *ref = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -527,19 +527,19 @@ static bool obtain_gc( void **ref, GC *gc, uint pix, Display *dpy, int scrn, gc_cache[k] = prev; gc_cache[k-1] = g; } - return TRUE; + return true; } else { // create new GC #if defined(GC_CACHE_STAT) g_numcreates++; #endif - g->gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, FALSE ); + g->gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, false ); g->scrn = scrn; g->pix = pix; g->count = 1; g->hits = 1; g->clip_serial = 0; *gc = g->gc; - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ void TQPainter::init() penRef = brushRef = 0; clip_serial = 0; pfont = 0; - block_ext = FALSE; + block_ext = false; } @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() (ps == NoPen || ps == SolidLine) && cpen.width() == 0 && rop == CopyROP; - bool obtained = FALSE; + bool obtained = false; bool internclipok = hasClipping(); if ( cacheIt ) { if ( gc ) { @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() obtained = obtain_gc(&penRef, &gc, cpen.color().pixel(scrn), dpy, scrn, hd, clip_serial); if ( !obtained && !penRef ) - gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, FALSE ); + gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, false ); } else { if ( gc ) { if ( penRef ) { @@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() penRef = 0; gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, testf(MonoDev) ); } else { - internclipok = TRUE; + internclipok = true; } } else { gc = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, testf(MonoDev), testf(UsePrivateCx) ); @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() */ int dot = cpen.width(); // width of a dot int fudge = 1; - bool allow_zero_lw = TRUE; + bool allow_zero_lw = true; if ( dot <= 1 ) { dot = 3; fudge = 2; @@ -753,13 +753,13 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() dashes[0] = fudge * 3 * dot; dashes[1] = fudge * dot; dash_len = 2; - allow_zero_lw = FALSE; + allow_zero_lw = false; break; case DotLine: dashes[0] = dot; dashes[1] = dot; dash_len = 2; - allow_zero_lw = FALSE; + allow_zero_lw = false; break; case DashDotLine: dashes[0] = 3 * dot; @@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() dashes[2] = dot; dashes[3] = fudge * dot; dash_len = 4; - allow_zero_lw = FALSE; + allow_zero_lw = false; break; case DashDotDotLine: dashes[0] = 3 * dot; @@ -777,14 +777,14 @@ void TQPainter::updatePen() dashes[4] = dot; dashes[5] = dot; dash_len = 6; - allow_zero_lw = FALSE; + allow_zero_lw = false; break; case FineDotLine: dot = 1; dashes[0] = dot; dashes[1] = dot; dash_len = 2; - allow_zero_lw = FALSE; + allow_zero_lw = false; } Q_ASSERT( dash_len <= (int) sizeof(dashes) ); @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ void TQPainter::updateBrush() (bs == NoBrush || bs == SolidPattern) && bro.x() == 0 && bro.y() == 0 && rop == CopyROP; - bool obtained = FALSE; + bool obtained = false; bool internclipok = hasClipping(); if ( cacheIt ) { if ( gc_brush ) { @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ void TQPainter::updateBrush() obtained = obtain_gc(&brushRef, &gc_brush, cbrush.color().pixel(scrn), dpy, scrn, hd, clip_serial); if ( !obtained && !brushRef ) - gc_brush = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, FALSE ); + gc_brush = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, false ); } else { if ( gc_brush ) { if ( brushRef ) { @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ void TQPainter::updateBrush() brushRef = 0; gc_brush = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, testf(MonoDev) ); } else { - internclipok = TRUE; + internclipok = true; } } else { gc_brush = alloc_gc( dpy, scrn, hd, testf(MonoDev), testf(UsePrivateCx)); @@ -955,9 +955,9 @@ void TQPainter::updateBrush() TQString key; key.sprintf( "$qt-brush$%d", bs ); pm = TQPixmapCache::find( key ); - bool del = FALSE; + bool del = false; if ( !pm ) { // not already in pm dict - pm = new TQBitmap( d, d, pat, TRUE ); + pm = new TQBitmap( d, d, pat, true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( pm ); del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( key, pm ); } @@ -981,8 +981,8 @@ void TQPainter::updateBrush() /*! - Begins painting the paint device \a pd and returns TRUE if - successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If \a unclipped is TRUE, the + Begins painting the paint device \a pd and returns true if + successful; otherwise returns false. If \a unclipped is true, the painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries, (although this is not supported by all platforms). @@ -1015,13 +1015,13 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) tqWarning( "TQPainter::begin: Painter is already active." "\n\tYou must end() the painter before a second begin()" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( pd == 0 ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) tqWarning( "TQPainter::begin: Paint device cannot be null" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } TQPixmap::x11SetDefaultScreen( pd->x11Screen() ); @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) "this device;\n\tAn extended paint device can only be " "painted by one TQPainter at a time." ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } bool reinit = flags != IsStartingUp; // 2nd or 3rd etc. time called @@ -1067,7 +1067,7 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) else flags = IsStartingUp; pdev = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( tabstops ) // update tabstops for device setTabStops( tabstops ); @@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) tqWarning( "TQPainter::begin: Cannot paint null pixmap" ); #endif end(); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool mono = pm->depth() == 1; // monochrome bitmap if ( mono ) { @@ -1160,7 +1160,7 @@ bool TQPainter::begin( const TQPaintDevice *pd, bool unclipped ) clip_serial = gc_cache_clip_serial++; updateBrush(); updatePen(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ bool TQPainter::end() // end painting #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) tqWarning( "TQPainter::end: Missing begin() or begin() failed" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } killPStack(); @@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ bool TQPainter::end() // end painting pdev->painters--; pdev = 0; dpy = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1451,8 +1451,8 @@ void TQPainter::setBrushOrigin( int x, int y ) /*! - Enables clipping if \a enable is TRUE, or disables clipping if \a - enable is FALSE. + Enables clipping if \a enable is true, or disables clipping if \a + enable is false. \sa hasClipping(), setClipRect(), setClipRegion() */ @@ -1543,7 +1543,7 @@ void TQPainter::setClipRegion( const TQRegion &rgn, CoordinateMode m ) return; // device cannot clip } clearf( ClipOn ); // be sure to update clip rgn - setClipping( TRUE ); + setClipping( true ); } @@ -1803,7 +1803,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawRect( int x, int y, int w, int h ) void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect( int x, int y, int w, int h ) { - drawWinFocusRect( x, y, w, h, TRUE, color0 ); + drawWinFocusRect( x, y, w, h, true, color0 ); } /*! @@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect( int x, int y, int w, int h ) void TQPainter::drawWinFocusRect( int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColor &bgColor ) { - drawWinFocusRect( x, y, w, h, FALSE, bgColor ); + drawWinFocusRect( x, y, w, h, false, bgColor ); } @@ -2119,7 +2119,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawArc( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen ) if ( txop == TxRotShear ) { // rotate/shear TQPointArray pa; pa.makeArc( x, y, w, h, a, alen, xmat ); // arc polyline - drawPolyInternal( pa, FALSE ); + drawPolyInternal( pa, false ); return; } map( x, y, w, h, &x, &y, &w, &h ); @@ -2202,7 +2202,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawPie( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen ) XFillArc( dpy, hd, gc_brush, x, y, w, h, a*4, alen*4 ); if ( nopen ) { g = gc_brush; - nopen = FALSE; + nopen = false; } } if ( !nopen ) { // draw pie outline @@ -2278,7 +2278,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawChord( int x, int y, int w, int h, int a, int alen ) XFillArc( dpy, hd, gc_brush, x, y, w, h, a*4, alen*4 ); if ( nopen ) { g = gc_brush; - nopen = FALSE; + nopen = false; } } if ( !nopen ) { // draw chord outline @@ -2419,8 +2419,8 @@ static int global_polygon_shape = Complex; The first point is always connected to the last point. The polygon is filled with the current brush(). If \a winding is - TRUE, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If - \a winding is FALSE, the polygon is filled using the even-odd + true, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If + \a winding is false, the polygon is filled using the even-odd (alternative) fill algorithm. \warning On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed @@ -2502,7 +2502,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawConvexPolygon( const TQPointArray &pa, int index, int npoints ) { global_polygon_shape = Convex; - drawPolygon(pa, FALSE, index, npoints); + drawPolygon(pa, false, index, npoints); global_polygon_shape = Complex; } @@ -2617,11 +2617,11 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, if ( sx != 0 || sy != 0 || sw != pixmap.width() || sh != pixmap.height() ) { TQPixmap tmp( sw, sh, pixmap.depth() ); - bitBlt( &tmp, 0, 0, &pixmap, sx, sy, sw, sh, CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( &tmp, 0, 0, &pixmap, sx, sy, sw, sh, CopyROP, true ); if ( pixmap.mask() ) { TQBitmap mask( sw, sh ); bitBlt( &mask, 0, 0, pixmap.mask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, - CopyROP, TRUE ); + CopyROP, true ); tmp.setMask( mask ); } drawPixmap( x, y, tmp ); @@ -2706,7 +2706,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, TQBitmap *comb = new TQBitmap( sw, sh ); comb->detach(); - GC cgc = tqt_xget_temp_gc( pixmap.x11Screen(), TRUE ); // get temporary mono GC + GC cgc = tqt_xget_temp_gc( pixmap.x11Screen(), true ); // get temporary mono GC XSetForeground( dpy, cgc, 0 ); XFillRectangle( dpy, comb->handle(), cgc, 0, 0, sw, sh ); XSetBackground( dpy, cgc, 0 ); @@ -2792,15 +2792,15 @@ static void drawTile( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, static void fillTile( TQPixmap *tile, const TQPixmap &pixmap ) { - bitBlt( tile, 0, 0, &pixmap, 0, 0, -1, -1, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( tile, 0, 0, &pixmap, 0, 0, -1, -1, TQt::CopyROP, true ); int x = pixmap.width(); while ( x < tile->width() ) { - bitBlt( tile, x,0, tile, 0,0, x,pixmap.height(), TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( tile, x,0, tile, 0,0, x,pixmap.height(), TQt::CopyROP, true ); x *= 2; } int y = pixmap.height(); while ( y < tile->height() ) { - bitBlt( tile, 0,y, tile, 0,0, tile->width(),y, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( tile, 0,y, tile, 0,0, tile->width(),y, TQt::CopyROP, true ); y *= 2; } } @@ -3001,7 +3001,7 @@ void qt_draw_background( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h ) return; } XSetForeground( p->dpy, p->gc, p->bg_col.pixel(p->scrn) ); - qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x, y, w, h, TRUE); + qt_draw_transformed_rect( p, x, y, w, h, true); XSetForeground( p->dpy, p->gc, p->cpen.color().pixel(p->scrn) ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpalette.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpalette.cpp index fad57ce13..7fc7dff8c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpalette.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpalette.cpp @@ -484,15 +484,15 @@ void TQColorGroup::setBrush( ColorRole r, const TQBrush &b ) /*! \fn bool TQColorGroup::operator!=( const TQColorGroup &g ) const - Returns TRUE if this color group is different from \a g; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this color group is different from \a g; otherwise + returns false. \sa operator!=() */ /*! - Returns TRUE if this color group is equal to \a g; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this color group is equal to \a g; otherwise + returns false. \sa operator==() */ @@ -500,11 +500,11 @@ void TQColorGroup::setBrush( ColorRole r, const TQBrush &b ) bool TQColorGroup::operator==( const TQColorGroup &g ) const { if ( d == g.d ) - return TRUE; + return true; for( int r = 0 ; r < NColorRoles ; r++ ) if ( br[r] != g.br[r] ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } @@ -883,13 +883,13 @@ void TQPalette::setInactive( const TQColorGroup &g ) /*! \fn bool TQPalette::operator!=( const TQPalette &p ) const - Returns TRUE (slowly) if this palette is different from \a p; - otherwise returns FALSE (usually quickly). + Returns true (slowly) if this palette is different from \a p; + otherwise returns false (usually quickly). */ /*! - Returns TRUE (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to \a p; - otherwise returns FALSE (slowly). + Returns true (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to \a p; + otherwise returns false (slowly). */ bool TQPalette::operator==( const TQPalette &p ) const @@ -1059,9 +1059,9 @@ TQDataStream &operator>>( TQDataStream &s, TQPalette &p ) #endif //TQT_NO_DATASTREAM /*! - Returns TRUE if this palette and \a p are copies of each other, + Returns true if this palette and \a p are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither - was subsequently modified; otherwise returns FALSE. This is much + was subsequently modified; otherwise returns false. This is much stricter than equality. \sa operator=() operator==() diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpicture.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpicture.cpp index c0fb3d008..692e9087a 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpicture.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpicture.cpp @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ TQPicture::TQPicture( int formatVersion ) if ( formatVersion > 0 && formatVersion != (int)mfhdr_maj ) { d->formatMajor = formatVersion; d->formatMinor = 0; - d->formatOk = FALSE; + d->formatOk = false; } else { d->resetFormat(); @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ TQPicture::~TQPicture() /*! \fn bool TQPicture::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ void TQPicture::setData( const char* data, uint size ) /*! Loads a picture from the file specified by \a fileName and returns - TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + true if successful; otherwise returns false. By default, the file will be interpreted as being in the native TQPicture format. Specifying the \a format string is optional and @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ bool TQPicture::load( const TQString &fileName, const char *format ) { TQFile f( fileName ); if ( !f.open(IO_ReadOnly) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return load( &f, format ); } @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ bool TQPicture::load( TQIODevice *dev, const char *format ) if ( qstrcmp( format, "svg" ) == 0 ) { TQSvgDevice svg; if ( !svg.load( dev ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQPainter p( this ); bool b = svg.play( &p ); d->brect = svg.boundingRect(); @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ bool TQPicture::load( TQIODevice *dev, const char *format ) #endif if ( format ) { tqWarning( "TQPicture::load: No such picture format: %s", format ); - return FALSE; + return false; } detach(); @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ bool TQPicture::load( TQIODevice *dev, const char *format ) /*! Saves a picture to the file specified by \a fileName and returns - TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + true if successful; otherwise returns false. Specifying the file \a format string is optional. It's not recommended unless you intend to export the picture data for @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ bool TQPicture::save( const TQString &fileName, const char *format ) tqWarning( "TQPicture::save: still being painted on. " "Call TQPainter::end() first" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_SVG @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ bool TQPicture::save( const TQString &fileName, const char *format ) TQSvgDevice svg; TQPainter p( &svg ); if ( !play( &p ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; svg.setBoundingRect( boundingRect() ); return svg.save( fileName ); } @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ bool TQPicture::save( const TQString &fileName, const char *format ) TQFile f( fileName ); if ( !f.open(IO_WriteOnly) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return save( &f, format ); } @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ bool TQPicture::save( TQIODevice *dev, const char *format ) tqWarning( "TQPicture::save: still being painted on. " "Call TQPainter::end() first" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_SVG @@ -337,18 +337,18 @@ bool TQPicture::save( TQIODevice *dev, const char *format ) TQSvgDevice svg; TQPainter p( &svg ); if ( !play( &p ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; svg.setBoundingRect( boundingRect() ); return svg.save( dev ); } #endif if ( format ) { tqWarning( "TQPicture::save: No such picture format: %s", format ); - return FALSE; + return false; } dev->writeBlock( d->pictb.buffer().data(), d->pictb.buffer().size() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -376,8 +376,8 @@ void TQPicture::setBoundingRect( const TQRect &r ) } /*! - Replays the picture using \a painter, and returns TRUE if - successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Replays the picture using \a painter, and returns true if + successful; otherwise returns false. This function does exactly the same as TQPainter::drawPicture() with (x, y) = (0, 0). @@ -386,10 +386,10 @@ void TQPicture::setBoundingRect( const TQRect &r ) bool TQPicture::play( TQPainter *painter ) { if ( d->pictb.size() == 0 ) // nothing recorded - return TRUE; + return true; if ( !d->formatOk && !d->checkFormat() ) - return FALSE; + return false; d->pictb.open( IO_ReadOnly ); // open buffer device TQDataStream s; @@ -412,10 +412,10 @@ bool TQPicture::play( TQPainter *painter ) tqWarning( "TQPicture::play: Format error" ); #endif d->pictb.close(); - return FALSE; + return false; } d->pictb.close(); - return TRUE; // no end-command + return true; // no end-command } @@ -562,11 +562,11 @@ bool TQPicture::exec( TQPainter *painter, TQDataStream &s, int nrecords ) case PdcBegin: s >> ul; // number of records if ( !exec( painter, s, ul ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case PdcEnd: if ( nrecords == 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; break; case PdcSave: painter->save(); @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ bool TQPicture::exec( TQPainter *painter, TQDataStream &s, int nrecords ) Q_ASSERT( TQ_INT32(s.device()->at() - strm_pos) == len ); #endif } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -719,8 +719,8 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::cmd( int c, TQPainter *pt, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) } trecs = 0; s << (TQ_UINT32)trecs; // total number of records - formatOk = FALSE; - return TRUE; + formatOk = false; + return true; } else if ( c == PdcEnd ) { // end; calc checksum and close trecs++; s << (TQ_UINT8)c << (TQ_UINT8)0; @@ -739,14 +739,14 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::cmd( int c, TQPainter *pt, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) TQ_UINT16 cs = (TQ_UINT16)tqChecksum( buf.data()+data_start, pos-data_start ); s << cs; // write checksum pictb.close(); - return TRUE; + return true; } trecs++; s << (TQ_UINT8)c; // write cmd to stream s << (TQ_UINT8)0; // write dummy length info int pos = (int)pictb.at(); // save position TQRect br; // bounding rect addition - bool corr = FALSE; // correction for pen width + bool corr = false; // correction for pen width switch ( c ) { case PdcDrawPoint: @@ -755,18 +755,18 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::cmd( int c, TQPainter *pt, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcSetBrushOrigin: s << *p[0].point; br = TQRect( *p[0].point, TQSize( 1, 1 ) ); - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; case PdcDrawLine: s << *p[0].point << *p[1].point; br = TQRect( *p[0].point, *p[1].point ).normalize(); - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; case PdcDrawRect: case PdcDrawEllipse: s << *p[0].rect; br = *p[0].rect; - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; case PdcDrawRoundRect: case PdcDrawArc: @@ -774,25 +774,25 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::cmd( int c, TQPainter *pt, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcDrawChord: s << *p[0].rect << (TQ_INT16)p[1].ival << (TQ_INT16)p[2].ival; br = *p[0].rect; - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; case PdcDrawLineSegments: case PdcDrawPolyline: s << *p[0].ptarr; br = p[0].ptarr->boundingRect(); - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; #ifndef TQT_NO_BEZIER case PdcDrawCubicBezier: s << *p[0].ptarr; br = p[0].ptarr->cubicBezier().boundingRect(); - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; #endif case PdcDrawPolygon: s << *p[0].ptarr << (TQ_INT8)p[1].ival; br = p[0].ptarr->boundingRect(); - corr = TRUE; + corr = true; break; case PdcDrawText2: if ( formatMajor == 1 ) { @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::cmd( int c, TQPainter *pt, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) brect |= br; // merge with existing rect } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1087,12 +1087,12 @@ TQPicture& TQPicture::operator= (const TQPicture& p) /*! \internal - Sets formatOk to FALSE and resets the format version numbers to default + Sets formatOk to false and resets the format version numbers to default */ void TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::resetFormat() { - formatOk = FALSE; + formatOk = false; formatMajor = mfhdr_maj; formatMinor = mfhdr_min; } @@ -1100,8 +1100,8 @@ void TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::resetFormat() /*! \internal - Checks data integrity and format version number. Set formatOk to TRUE - on success, to FALSE otherwise. Returns the resulting formatOk value. + Checks data integrity and format version number. Set formatOk to true + on success, to false otherwise. Returns the resulting formatOk value. */ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() @@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() // can't check anything in an empty buffer if ( pictb.size() == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; pictb.open( IO_ReadOnly ); // open buffer device TQDataStream s; @@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() tqWarning( "TQPicture::checkFormat: Incorrect header" ); #endif pictb.close(); - return FALSE; + return false; } int cs_start = sizeof(TQ_UINT32); // pos of checksum word @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() ccs, cs ); #endif pictb.close(); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQ_UINT16 major, minor; @@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() major, minor); #endif pictb.close(); - return FALSE; + return false; } s.setVersion( major != 4 ? major : 3 ); @@ -1166,14 +1166,14 @@ bool TQPicture::TQPicturePrivate::checkFormat() tqWarning( "TQPicture::checkFormat: Format error" ); #endif pictb.close(); - return FALSE; + return false; } pictb.close(); - formatOk = TRUE; // picture seems to be ok + formatOk = true; // picture seems to be ok formatMajor = major; formatMinor = minor; - return TRUE; + return true; } /***************************************************************************** diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp index c3eceba6b..db404beee 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( int w, int h, int depth, bool bitmap, TQPixmap::TQPixmap() : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); } /*! @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap() TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQImage& image ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); convertFromImage( image ); } @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQImage& image ) TQPixmap::TQPixmap( int w, int h, int depth, Optimization optimization ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( w, h, depth, FALSE, optimization ); + init( w, h, depth, false, optimization ); } /*! @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( int w, int h, int depth, Optimization optimization ) TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQSize &size, int depth, Optimization optimization ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( size.width(), size.height(), depth, FALSE, optimization ); + init( size.width(), size.height(), depth, false, optimization ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGEIO @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQString& fileName, const char *format, int conversion_flags ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); load( fileName, format, conversion_flags ); } @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQString& fileName, const char *format, TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQString& fileName, const char *format, ColorMode mode ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); load( fileName, format, mode ); } @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQString& fileName, const char *format, ColorMode mode TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const char *xpm[] ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); TQImage image( xpm ); if ( !image.isNull() ) convertFromImage( image ); @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const char *xpm[] ) TQPixmap::TQPixmap( const TQByteArray & img_data ) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); loadFromData( img_data ); } #endif //TQT_NO_IMAGEIO @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::copy( bool ignoreMask ) const #endif // TQ_WS_X11 if ( ignoreMask ) - bitBlt( &pm, 0, 0, this, 0, 0, data->w, data->h, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( &pm, 0, 0, this, 0, 0, data->w, data->h, TQt::CopyROP, true ); else copyBlt( &pm, 0, 0, this, 0, 0, data->w, data->h ); } @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ TQPixmap &TQPixmap::operator=( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) if ( pixmap.paintingActive() ) { // make a deep copy init( pixmap.width(), pixmap.height(), pixmap.depth(), pixmap.data->bitmap, pixmap.data->optim ); - data->uninit = FALSE; + data->uninit = false; if ( !isNull() ) copyBlt( this, 0, 0, &pixmap, 0, 0, pixmap.width(), pixmap.height() ); pixmap.data->deref(); @@ -508,13 +508,13 @@ TQPixmap &TQPixmap::operator=( const TQImage &image ) /*! \fn bool TQPixmap::isTQBitmap() const - Returns TRUE if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQPixmap::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns false. A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You cannot draw in a null pixmap or bitBlt() anything to it. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ void TQPixmap::resize( int w, int h ) if ( !data->uninit && !isNull() ) // has existing pixmap bitBlt( &pm, 0, 0, this, 0, 0, // copy old pixmap TQMIN(width(), w), - TQMIN(height(),h), CopyROP, TRUE ); + TQMIN(height(),h), CopyROP, true ); #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) if(data->alphapm) { data->alphapm->resize(w, h); @@ -724,16 +724,16 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) const TQPixmap *tmp = &newmask; // dec cxx bug if ( (data == tmp->data) || ( newmask.handle() && newmask.handle() == handle() ) ) { - TQPixmap m = tmp->copy( TRUE ); + TQPixmap m = tmp->copy( true ); setMask( *((TQBitmap*)&m) ); - data->selfmask = TRUE; // mask == pixmap + data->selfmask = true; // mask == pixmap return; } if ( newmask.isNull() ) { // reset the mask if (data->mask) { detach(); - data->selfmask = FALSE; + data->selfmask = false; delete data->mask; data->mask = 0; @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) } detach(); - data->selfmask = FALSE; + data->selfmask = false; if ( newmask.width() != width() || newmask.height() != height() ) { #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) delete data->mask; TQBitmap* newmaskcopy; if ( newmask.mask() ) - newmaskcopy = (TQBitmap*)new TQPixmap( tmp->copy( TRUE ) ); + newmaskcopy = (TQBitmap*)new TQPixmap( tmp->copy( true ) ); else newmaskcopy = new TQBitmap( newmask ); #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 @@ -773,8 +773,8 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) /*! \fn bool TQPixmap::selfMask() const - Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap - itself; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap + itself; otherwise returns false. \sa mask() */ @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a TQBitmap. - If \a clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the + If \a clipTight is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. \sa TQImage::createHeuristicMask() @@ -825,8 +825,8 @@ const char* TQPixmap::imageFormat( const TQString &fileName ) } /*! - Loads a pixmap from the file \a fileName at runtime. Returns TRUE - if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Loads a pixmap from the file \a fileName at runtime. Returns true + if successful; otherwise returns false. If \a format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \a format is not specified @@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::load( const TQString &fileName, const char *format, \overload Converts \a image and sets this pixmap using color mode \a mode. - Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. \sa TQPixmap::ColorMode */ @@ -902,7 +902,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &image, ColorMode mode ) if ( image.isNull() ) { // convert null image to null pixmap *this = TQPixmap(); - return TRUE; + return true; } int conversion_flags = 0; @@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &image, ColorMode mode ) #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGEIO /*! Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \a buf (\a len bytes). - Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. If \a format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \a format is not specified @@ -961,8 +961,8 @@ bool TQPixmap::loadFromData( const uchar *buf, uint len, const char *format, \overload Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \a buf (\a len bytes) using - color mode \a mode. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns - FALSE. + color mode \a mode. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns + false. If \a format is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \a format is not specified @@ -1006,8 +1006,8 @@ bool TQPixmap::loadFromData( const TQByteArray &buf, const char *format, format \a format and a quality factor \a quality. \a quality must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use - the default settings. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise - returns FALSE. + the default settings. Returns true if successful; otherwise + returns false. \sa load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQImage::save(), TQImageIO @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::loadFromData( const TQByteArray &buf, const char *format, bool TQPixmap::save( const TQString &fileName, const char *format, int quality ) const { if ( isNull() ) - return FALSE; // nothing to save + return false; // nothing to save TQImageIO io( fileName, format ); return doImageIO( &io, quality ); } @@ -1039,7 +1039,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::save( const TQString &fileName, const char *format, int quality ) bool TQPixmap::save( TQIODevice* device, const char* format, int quality ) const { if ( isNull() ) - return FALSE; // nothing to save + return false; // nothing to save TQImageIO io( device, format ); return doImageIO( &io, quality ); } @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::save( TQIODevice* device, const char* format, int quality ) const bool TQPixmap::doImageIO( TQImageIO* io, int quality ) const { if ( !io ) - return FALSE; + return false; io->setImage( convertToImage() ); #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( quality > 100 || quality < -1 ) @@ -1116,8 +1116,8 @@ static TQPixmap grabChildWidgets( TQWidget * w ) TQPaintDevice *oldRedirect = TQPainter::redirect( w ); TQPainter::redirect( w, &res ); bool dblbfr = TQSharedDoubleBuffer::isDisabled(); - TQSharedDoubleBuffer::setDisabled( TRUE ); - TQPaintEvent e( w->rect(), FALSE ); + TQSharedDoubleBuffer::setDisabled( true ); + TQPaintEvent e( w->rect(), false ); TQApplication::sendEvent( w, &e ); TQSharedDoubleBuffer::setDisabled( dblbfr ); TQPainter::redirect( w, oldRedirect ); @@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ bool qt_xForm_helper( const TQWMatrix &trueMat, int xoffset, break; default: { - return FALSE; + return false; } } } else { @@ -1502,7 +1502,7 @@ bool qt_xForm_helper( const TQWMatrix &trueMat, int xoffset, m22ydy += m22; dptr += p_inc; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IWX_MSB #undef IWX_LSB diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h b/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h index 1ab6dd0b9..0a89e98bf 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ public: bool hasAlpha() const; bool hasAlphaChannel() const; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - TQBitmap createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const; + TQBitmap createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight = true ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_MIME static TQPixmap fromMimeSource( const TQString& abs_name ); @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ public: HBITMAP multiCellBitmap() const; int multiCellOffset() const; int allocCell(); - void freeCell( bool = FALSE ); + void freeCell( bool = false ); #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) @@ -197,8 +197,8 @@ protected: #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) TQPixmap *maskpm; union { - HBITMAP hbm; // if mcp == FALSE - TQMCPI *mcpi; // if mcp == TRUE + HBITMAP hbm; // if mcp == false + TQMCPI *mcpi; // if mcp == true } hbm_or_mcpi; uchar *realAlphaBits; #ifdef Q_OS_TEMP @@ -224,10 +224,10 @@ private: TQPixmap( int w, int h, int depth, bool, Optimization ); void init( int, int, int, bool, Optimization ); void deref(); - TQPixmap copy( bool ignoreMask = FALSE ) const; + TQPixmap copy( bool ignoreMask = false ) const; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) void initAlphaPixmap( uchar *bytes, int length, struct tagBITMAPINFO *bmi ); - void convertToAlphaPixmap( bool initAlpha=TRUE ); + void convertToAlphaPixmap( bool initAlpha=true ); static void bitBltAlphaPixmap( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPixmap *src, int sx, int sy, int sw, int sh, bool useDstAlpha ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp index f2e4b0ca2..bca842fda 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ inline static void qSafeXDestroyImage( XImage *x ) #if defined(QT_MITSHM_XFORM) -static bool xshminit = FALSE; +static bool xshminit = false; static XShmSegmentInfo xshminfo; static XImage *xshmimg = 0; static Pixmap xshmpm = 0; @@ -140,14 +140,14 @@ static bool qt_create_mitshm_buffer( const TQPaintDevice* dev, int w, int h ) tqt_cleanup_mitshm(); } else { if ( !XShmQueryVersion(dpy, &major, &minor, &pixmaps_ok) ) - return FALSE; // MIT Shm not supported + return false; // MIT Shm not supported tqAddPostRoutine( tqt_cleanup_mitshm ); - xshminit = TRUE; + xshminit = true; } xshmimg = XShmCreateImage( dpy, vis, dd, ZPixmap, 0, &xshminfo, w, h ); if ( !xshmimg ) - return FALSE; + return false; bool ok; xshminfo.shmid = shmget( IPC_PRIVATE, @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ static bool qt_create_mitshm_buffer( const TQPaintDevice* dev, int w, int h ) xshminfo.shmaddr = xshmimg->data; ok = ( xshminfo.shmaddr != (char*)-1 ); } - xshminfo.readOnly = FALSE; + xshminfo.readOnly = false; if ( ok ) ok = XShmAttach( dpy, &xshminfo ); if ( !ok ) { @@ -169,13 +169,13 @@ static bool qt_create_mitshm_buffer( const TQPaintDevice* dev, int w, int h ) shmdt( xshminfo.shmaddr ); if ( xshminfo.shmid != -1 ) shmctl( xshminfo.shmid, IPC_RMID, 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( pixmaps_ok ) xshmpm = XShmCreatePixmap( dpy, DefaultRootWindow(dpy), xshmimg->data, &xshminfo, w, h, dd ); - return TRUE; + return true; } #else @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ static bool qt_create_mitshm_buffer( const TQPaintDevice* dev, int w, int h ) // // static bool qt_create_mitshm_buffer( TQPaintDevice*, int, int ) // { -// return FALSE; +// return false; // } #endif // QT_MITSHM_XFORM @@ -355,10 +355,10 @@ static void build_scale_table( uint **table, uint nBits ) return; } if (!*table) { - static bool firstTable = TRUE; + static bool firstTable = true; if ( firstTable ) { tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_scale_tables ); - firstTable = FALSE; + firstTable = false; } *table = new uint[256]; } @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ void TQPixmap::init( int w, int h, int d, bool bitmap, Optimization optim ) static int serial = 0; if ( defaultScreen >= 0 && defaultScreen != x11Screen() ) { - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); xd->x_screen = defaultScreen; xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( xd->x_screen ); xd->x_cells = TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells( xd->x_screen ); @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ void TQPixmap::init( int w, int h, int d, bool bitmap, Optimization optim ) memset( data, 0, sizeof(TQPixmapData) ); data->count = 1; - data->uninit = TRUE; + data->uninit = true; data->bitmap = bitmap; data->ser_no = ++serial; data->optim = optim; @@ -487,18 +487,18 @@ void TQPixmap::deref() /*! Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width \a w and height \a h, that is initialized with the data in \a bits. The \a isXbitmap - indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to FALSE. + indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to false. This constructor is protected and used by the TQBitmap class. */ TQPixmap::TQPixmap( int w, int h, const uchar *bits, bool isXbitmap) : TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Pixmap ) { // for bitmaps only - init( 0, 0, 0, FALSE, defOptim ); + init( 0, 0, 0, false, defOptim ); if ( w <= 0 || h <= 0 ) // create null pixmap return; - data->uninit = FALSE; + data->uninit = false; data->w = w; data->h = h; data->d = 1; @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ void TQPixmap::detach() { if ( data->count != 1 ) *this = copy(); - data->uninit = FALSE; + data->uninit = false; // reset cached data if ( data->ximage ) { @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage() const axi = XGetImage(x11Display(), alf->hd, 0, 0, w, h, AllPlanes, ZPixmap); if (axi) { - image.setAlphaBuffer( TRUE ); + image.setAlphaBuffer( true ); alpha.create(w, h, 8); // copy each scanline @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage() const qSafeXDestroyImage( axi ); } } else if (msk) { - image.setAlphaBuffer( TRUE ); + image.setAlphaBuffer( true ); alpha = msk->convertToImage(); } bool ale = alpha.bitOrder() == TQImage::LittleEndian; @@ -1070,15 +1070,15 @@ TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage() const /*! - Converts image \a img and sets this pixmap. Returns TRUE if - successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Converts image \a img and sets this pixmap. Returns true if + successful; otherwise returns false. The \a conversion_flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the \l{TQt::ImageConversionFlags}. Passing 0 for \a conversion_flags sets all the default options. Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a - TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns FALSE. + TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns false. If a pixmap with depth 1 is painted with color0 and color1 and converted to an image, the pixels painted with color0 will produce @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) #if defined(QT_CHECK_NULL) tqWarning( "TQPixmap::convertFromImage: Cannot convert a null image" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } detach(); // detach other references TQImage image = img; @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) (conversion_flags & ColorMode_Mask)==MonoOnly ); if ( w >= 32768 || h >= 32768 ) - return FALSE; + return false; // get rid of the mask delete data->mask; @@ -1125,12 +1125,12 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) d = 1; } } else { // can be both - bool conv8 = FALSE; + bool conv8 = false; if ( d > 8 && dd <= 8 ) { // convert to 8 bit if ( (conversion_flags & DitherMode_Mask) == AutoDither ) conversion_flags = (conversion_flags & ~DitherMode_Mask) | PreferDither; - conv8 = TRUE; + conv8 = true; } else if ( (conversion_flags & ColorMode_Mask) == ColorOnly ) { conv8 = d == 1; // native depth wanted } else if ( d == 1 ) { @@ -1140,7 +1140,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) conv8 = TQMIN(c0,c1) != tqRgb(0,0,0) || TQMAX(c0,c1) != tqRgb(255,255,255); } else { // eg. 1-color monochrome images (they do exist). - conv8 = TRUE; + conv8 = true; } } if ( conv8 ) { @@ -1227,7 +1227,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) m = image.createAlphaMask( conversion_flags ); setMask( m ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } Display *dpy = x11Display(); @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) newbits = (uchar *)malloc( xi->bytes_per_line*h ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( newbits ); if ( !newbits ) // no memory - return FALSE; + return false; int bppc = xi->bits_per_pixel; bool contig_bits = n_bits(red_mask) == rbits && @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) // Can do it? (Contiguous bits?) contig_bits; - static bool init=FALSE; + static bool init=false; static int D[16][16]; if ( dither_tc && !init ) { // I also contributed this code to XV - WWA. @@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) } } } - init=TRUE; + init=true; } enum { BPP8, @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) #endif TQ_CHECK_PTR( newbits ); if ( !newbits ) // no memory - return FALSE; + return false; uchar* p = newbits; memcpy( p, image.bits(), nbytes ); // copy image data into newbits @@ -1744,7 +1744,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) #endif TQ_CHECK_PTR( newerbits ); if ( !newerbits ) // no memory - return FALSE; + return false; uchar* p = newbits; for ( uint y=0; y<h; y++ ) { // OOPS: Do right byte order!! p2 = newerbits + p2inc*y; @@ -1802,11 +1802,11 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) #ifdef QT_MITSHM_CONVERSIONS if( mitshm_ximage ) - XShmPutImage( dpy, hd, tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), FALSE ), + XShmPutImage( dpy, hd, tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), false ), xi, 0, 0, 0, 0, w, h, False ); else #endif - XPutImage( dpy, hd, tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), FALSE ), + XPutImage( dpy, hd, tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), false ), xi, 0, 0, 0, 0, w, h ); data->w = w; @@ -1831,7 +1831,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) for (int i = 0, count = image.numColors(); i < count; ++i) { const int alpha = tqAlpha(rgb[i]); if (alpha != 0 && alpha != 0xff) { - alphamap = TRUE; + alphamap = true; break; } } @@ -1937,7 +1937,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) #endif qSafeXDestroyImage(axi); } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -2019,10 +2019,10 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::grabWindow( WId window, int x, int y, int w, int h ) } TQPixmap pm( w, h ); - pm.data->uninit = FALSE; + pm.data->uninit = false; pm.x11SetScreen( scr ); - GC gc = tqt_xget_temp_gc( scr, FALSE ); + GC gc = tqt_xget_temp_gc( scr, false ); XSetSubwindowMode( dpy, gc, IncludeInferiors ); XCopyArea( dpy, window, pm.handle(), gc, x, y, w, h, 0, 0 ); XSetSubwindowMode( dpy, gc, ClipByChildren ); @@ -2100,9 +2100,9 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const } #if defined(QT_MITSHM_XFORM) - static bool try_once = TRUE; + static bool try_once = true; if (try_once) { - try_once = FALSE; + try_once = false; if ( !xshminit ) qt_create_mitshm_buffer( this, 800, 600 ); } @@ -2212,9 +2212,9 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const } return pm; } else { // color pixmap - GC gc = tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), FALSE ); + GC gc = tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), false ); TQPixmap pm( w, h ); - pm.data->uninit = FALSE; + pm.data->uninit = false; pm.x11SetScreen( x11Screen() ); #if defined(QT_MITSHM_XFORM) if ( use_mitshm ) { @@ -2312,7 +2312,7 @@ void TQPixmap::x11SetScreen( int screen ) return; // nothing to do if ( isNull() ) { - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); xd->x_screen = screen; xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( screen ); xd->x_cells = TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells( screen ); @@ -2329,7 +2329,7 @@ void TQPixmap::x11SetScreen( int screen ) TQImage img = convertToImage(); resize(0,0); - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); xd->x_screen = screen; xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( screen ); xd->x_cells = TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells( screen ); @@ -2342,7 +2342,7 @@ void TQPixmap::x11SetScreen( int screen ) } /*! - Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask. + Returns true this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask. \sa hasAlphaChannel() mask() */ @@ -2352,11 +2352,11 @@ bool TQPixmap::hasAlpha() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it + returns false. NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this - function returns FALSE. + function returns false. \sa hasAlpha() mask() */ @@ -2397,7 +2397,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void copyBlt( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, } // copy pixel data - bitBlt( dst, dx, dy, src, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( dst, dx, dy, src, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, true ); // copy mask data if ( src->data->mask ) { @@ -2409,7 +2409,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void copyBlt( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, } bitBlt( dst->data->mask, dx, dy, - src->data->mask, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + src->data->mask, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, true ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE @@ -2434,7 +2434,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void copyBlt( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, return; // create an alpha pixmap for dst if it doesn't exist - bool do_init = FALSE; + bool do_init = false; if ( ! dst->data->alphapm ) { dst->data->alphapm = new TQPixmap; @@ -2450,7 +2450,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT void copyBlt( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, dst->width(), dst->height(), 8); // new alpha pixmaps should be fully opaque by default - do_init = TRUE; + do_init = true; dst->data->alphapm->rendhd = (TQt::HANDLE) XftDrawCreateAlpha( dst->x11Display(), diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpixmapcache.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpixmapcache.cpp index 369df0c08..0976554fe 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpixmapcache.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpixmapcache.cpp @@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ public: TQPMCache(): TQObject( 0, "global pixmap cache" ), TQCache<TQPixmap>( cache_limit * 1024, cache_size ), - id( 0 ), ps( 0 ), t( FALSE ) + id( 0 ), ps( 0 ), t( false ) { - setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + setAutoDelete( true ); } ~TQPMCache() {} void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * ); @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ bool TQPMCache::insert( const TQString& k, const TQPixmap *d, int c, int p ) bool r = TQCache<TQPixmap>::insert( k, d, c, p ); if ( r && !id ) { id = startTimer( 30000 ); - t = FALSE; + t = false; } return r; } @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ TQPixmap *TQPixmapCache::find( const TQString &key ) Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the \a key in the cache. If a pixmap is found, the function sets \a pm to that pixmap and - returns TRUE; otherwise leaves \a pm alone and returns FALSE. + returns true; otherwise leaves \a pm alone and returns false. Example: \code @@ -222,14 +222,14 @@ bool TQPixmapCache::find( const TQString &key, TQPixmap& pm ) /*! \obsolete Inserts the pixmap \a pm associated with \a key into the cache. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the pixmap is too big for the cache. + Returns true if successful, or false if the pixmap is too big for the cache. <strong> Note: \a pm must be allocated on the heap (using \c new). - If this function returns FALSE, you must delete \a pm yourself. + If this function returns false, you must delete \a pm yourself. - If this function returns TRUE, do not use \a pm afterwards or + If this function returns true, do not use \a pm afterwards or keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache, whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpngio.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpngio.cpp index cf4d5ca60..3bc0de639 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpngio.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpngio.cpp @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ void setup_qt( TQImage& image, png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, float sc if (!image.create(width, height, 32)) return; - image.setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + image.setAlphaBuffer(true); if (TQImage::systemByteOrder() == TQImage::BigEndian) png_set_swap_alpha(png_ptr); @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ void setup_qt( TQImage& image, png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, float sc const int g = info_ptr->trans_values.gray; #endif if (g < ncols) { - image.setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + image.setAlphaBuffer(true); image.setColor(g, image.color(g) & TQT_RGB_MASK); } } @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ void setup_qt( TQImage& image, png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, float sc return; int i = 0; if ( png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr, PNG_INFO_tRNS) ) { - image.setAlphaBuffer( TRUE ); + image.setAlphaBuffer( true ); #if PNG_LIBPNG_VER>=10500 while ( i < info_ptr_num_trans ) { @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ void setup_qt( TQImage& image, png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, float sc PNG_FILLER_BEFORE : PNG_FILLER_AFTER); // We want 4 bytes, but it isn't an alpha channel } else { - image.setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + image.setAlphaBuffer(true); } if ( TQImage::systemByteOrder() == TQImage::BigEndian ) { @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr, PNG_INFO_tRNS) while ( n-- && tqAlpha(*c++)==0xff ) ; if ( n<0 ) // LIAR! - image.setAlphaBuffer(FALSE); + image.setAlphaBuffer(false); } iio->setImage(image); @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ bool TQPNGImageWriter::writeImage(const TQImage& image, int quality_in, int off_ png_ptr = png_create_write_struct(PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING,0,0,0); if (!png_ptr) { - return FALSE; + return false; } png_set_error_fn(png_ptr, 0, 0, qt_png_warning); @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ bool TQPNGImageWriter::writeImage(const TQImage& image, int quality_in, int off_ info_ptr = png_create_info_struct(png_ptr); if (!info_ptr) { png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr, 0); - return FALSE; + return false; } #if PNG_LIBPNG_VER>=10500 @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ bool TQPNGImageWriter::writeImage(const TQImage& image, int quality_in, int off_ if (setjmp(png_ptr->jmpbuf)) { #endif /* LIBPNG 1.5 */ png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr); - return FALSE; + return false; } int quality = quality_in; @@ -673,14 +673,14 @@ bool TQPNGImageWriter::writeImage(const TQImage& image, int quality_in, int off_ #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TEXT // Write short texts early. - set_text(image,png_ptr,info_ptr,TRUE); + set_text(image,png_ptr,info_ptr,true); #endif png_write_info(png_ptr, info_ptr); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_TEXT // Write long texts later. - set_text(image,png_ptr,info_ptr,FALSE); + set_text(image,png_ptr,info_ptr,false); #endif if ( image.depth() != 1 ) @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ bool TQPNGImageWriter::writeImage(const TQImage& image, int quality_in, int off_ png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr); - return TRUE; + return true; } static @@ -816,11 +816,11 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) TQRgb** pjt = (TQRgb**)previous.jumpTable(); // Find left edge of change - done = FALSE; + done = false; for (minx = 0; minx < w && !done; minx++) { for (int ty = 0; ty < h; ty++) { if ( jt[ty][minx] != pjt[ty][minx] ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; break; } } @@ -828,11 +828,11 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) minx--; // Find right edge of change - done = FALSE; + done = false; for (maxx = w-1; maxx >= 0 && !done; maxx--) { for (int ty = 0; ty < h; ty++) { if ( jt[ty][maxx] != pjt[ty][maxx] ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; break; } } @@ -840,11 +840,11 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) maxx++; // Find top edge of change - done = FALSE; + done = false; for (miny = 0; miny < h && !done; miny++) { for (int tx = 0; tx < w; tx++) { if ( jt[miny][tx] != pjt[miny][tx] ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; break; } } @@ -852,11 +852,11 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) miny--; // Find right edge of change - done = FALSE; + done = false; for (maxy = h-1; maxy >= 0 && !done; maxy--) { for (int tx = 0; tx < w; tx++) { if ( jt[maxy][tx] != pjt[maxy][tx] ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; break; } } @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) TQImage diff(dw, dh, 32); - diff.setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); + diff.setAlphaBuffer(true); int x, y; if ( alignx < 1 ) alignx = 1; @@ -915,10 +915,10 @@ bool TQPNGImagePacker::packImage(const TQImage& img) diff = diff.convertDepth(depth,convflags); if ( !writeImage(diff, minx, miny) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } previous = image; - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1239,14 +1239,14 @@ void TQPNGFormat::end(png_structp png, png_infop info) static bool skip(png_uint_32& max, png_bytep& data) { while (*data) { - if ( !max ) return FALSE; + if ( !max ) return false; max--; data++; } - if ( !max ) return FALSE; + if ( !max ) return false; max--; data++; // skip to after NUL - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif */ @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ static TQPNGFormatType* globalPngFormatTypeObject = 0; #endif // TQT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO -static bool done = FALSE; +static bool done = false; void qCleanupPngIO() { #ifndef TQT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO @@ -1326,13 +1326,13 @@ void qCleanupPngIO() globalPngFormatTypeObject = 0; } #endif - done = FALSE; + done = false; } void qInitPngIO() { if ( !done ) { - done = TRUE; + done = true; TQImageIO::defineIOHandler( "PNG", "^.PNG\r", 0, read_png_image, write_png_image); #ifndef TQT_NO_ASYNC_IMAGE_IO diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpoint.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpoint.cpp index e9237521c..fe7ff3a22 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpoint.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpoint.cpp @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ /*! \fn TQPoint::TQPoint() - Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns TRUE). + Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns true). */ /*! @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPoint::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise + returns false. */ /*! @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ \relates TQPoint - Returns TRUE if \a p1 and \a p2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a p1 and \a p2 are equal; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ \relates TQPoint - Returns TRUE if \a p1 and \a p2 are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a p1 and \a p2 are not equal; otherwise returns false. */ /*! diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpointarray.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpointarray.cpp index 9d7bafccc..4a1e35f8c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpointarray.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpointarray.cpp @@ -123,11 +123,11 @@ const double Q_PI = 3.14159265358979323846; // pi // one more useful comment /*! Constructs a point array from the rectangle \a r. - If \a closed is FALSE, then the point array just contains the + If \a closed is false, then the point array just contains the following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(), r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft(). - If \a closed is TRUE, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft(). + If \a closed is true, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft(). */ TQPointArray::TQPointArray( const TQRect &r, bool closed ) @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ void TQPointArray::setPoint( uint index, int x, int y ) Resizes the array to \a nPoints and sets the points in the array to the values taken from \a points. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be + Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (normally due to lack of memory). The example code creates an array with two points (1,2) and (3,4): @@ -263,14 +263,14 @@ void TQPointArray::setPoint( uint index, int x, int y ) bool TQPointArray::setPoints( int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ) { if ( !resize(nPoints) ) - return FALSE; + return false; int i = 0; while ( nPoints-- ) { // make array of points setPoint( i++, *points, *(points+1) ); points++; points++; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::setPoints( int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ) Resizes the array to \a nPoints and sets the points in the array to the values taken from the variable argument list. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be + Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory). The example code creates an array with two points (1,2) and (3,4): @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::setPoints( int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... ) { va_list ap; if ( !resize(nPoints) ) - return FALSE; + return false; setPoint( 0, firstx, firsty ); // set first point int i = 1, x, y; nPoints--; @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::setPoints( int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... ) setPoint( i++, x, y ); } va_end( ap ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \overload @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::setPoints( int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... ) this point array, and resizes the point array if \c{index+nPoints} exceeds the size of the array. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be + Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory). */ @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ) { if ( index + nPoints > (int)size() ) { // extend array if ( !resize( index + nPoints ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } int i = index; while ( nPoints-- ) { // make array of points @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ) points++; points++; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ) point array from position \a index, and resizes the point array if \c{index+nPoints} exceeds the size of the array. - Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be + Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory). The example code creates an array with three points (4,5), (6,7) @@ -376,10 +376,10 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, va_list ap; if ( index + nPoints > (int)size() ) { // extend array if ( !resize(index + nPoints) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( nPoints <= 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; setPoint( index, firstx, firsty ); // set first point int i = index + 1, x, y; nPoints--; @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, setPoint( i++, x, y ); } va_end( ap ); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -418,16 +418,16 @@ bool TQPointArray::putPoints( int index, int nPoints, { if ( index + nPoints > (int)size() ) { // extend array if ( !resize(index + nPoints) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( nPoints <= 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; int n = 0; while( n < nPoints ) { setPoint( index+n, from[fromIndex+n] ); n++; } - return TRUE; + return true; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpointarray.h b/src/kernel/tqpointarray.h index 386910f15..d72d24720 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpointarray.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqpointarray.h @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public: ~TQPointArray() {} TQPointArray( int size ) : TQMemArray<TQPoint>( size ) {} TQPointArray( const TQPointArray &a ) : TQMemArray<TQPoint>( a ) {} - TQPointArray( const TQRect &r, bool closed=FALSE ); + TQPointArray( const TQRect &r, bool closed=false ); TQPointArray( int nPoints, const TQCOORD *points ); TQPointArray &operator=( const TQPointArray &a ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpolygonscanner.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpolygonscanner.cpp index 2df631730..54a075c66 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpolygonscanner.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpolygonscanner.cpp @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ miInsertEdgeInET(EdgeTable *ET, EdgeTableEntry *ETE, tmpSLLBlock = (ScanLineListBlock *)malloc(sizeof(ScanLineListBlock)); if (!tmpSLLBlock) - return FALSE; + return false; (*SLLBlock)->next = tmpSLLBlock; tmpSLLBlock->next = 0; *SLLBlock = tmpSLLBlock; @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ miInsertEdgeInET(EdgeTable *ET, EdgeTableEntry *ETE, prev->next = ETE; else pSLL->edgelist = ETE; - return TRUE; + return true; } /* @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ miCreateETandAET(int count, DDXPointPtr pts, EdgeTable *ET, int dy; - if (count < 2) return TRUE; + if (count < 2) return true; /* * initialize the Active Edge Table @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ miCreateETandAET(int count, DDXPointPtr pts, EdgeTable *ET, if (!miInsertEdgeInET(ET, pETEs, top->y, &pSLLBlock, &iSLLBlock)) { miFreeStorage(pSLLBlock->next); - return FALSE; + return false; } ET->ymax = TQMAX(ET->ymax, PrevPt->y); @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ miCreateETandAET(int count, DDXPointPtr pts, EdgeTable *ET, PrevPt = CurrPt; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* @@ -729,13 +729,13 @@ miInsertionSort(EdgeTableEntry *AET) */ void TQPolygonScanner::scan(const TQPointArray& pa, bool winding, int index, int npoints) { - scan( pa, winding, index, npoints, TRUE ); + scan( pa, winding, index, npoints, true ); } /*! \overload - If \a stitchable is FALSE, the right and bottom edges of the + If \a stitchable is false, the right and bottom edges of the polygon are included. This causes adjacent polygons to overlap. */ void TQPolygonScanner::scan(const TQPointArray& pa, bool winding, int index, int npoints, bool stitchable) @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ void TQPolygonScanner::scan(const TQPointArray& pa, bool winding, int index, int Calls processSpans() for all scanlines of the polygon defined by \a npoints starting at \a index in \a pa. - If \a winding is TRUE, the Winding algorithm rather than the + If \a winding is true, the Winding algorithm rather than the Odd-Even rule is used. The \a edges is any bitwise combination of: diff --git a/src/kernel/tqprinter.cpp b/src/kernel/tqprinter.cpp index eaaa3854f..67f11b48e 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqprinter.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqprinter.cpp @@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ printer to provide (in dpi). \i setFullPage() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The - default is FALSE, so that by default you should be able to paint - on (0,0). If TRUE the origin of the coordinate system will be in + default is false, so that by default you should be able to paint + on (0,0). If true the origin of the coordinate system will be in the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical margins. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ TQPrinter::setFullPage(), to determine the printable area (see TQPaintDeviceMetrics). - The defined sizes (with setFullPage(TRUE)) are: + The defined sizes (with setFullPage(true)) are: \value A0 841 x 1189 mm This value is not supported on windows. \value A1 594 x 841 mm This value is not supported on windows. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ \value Custom \value NPageSize (internal) - With setFullPage(FALSE) (the default), the metrics will be a bit + With setFullPage(false) (the default), the metrics will be a bit smaller; how much depends on the printer in use. */ @@ -342,9 +342,9 @@ /*! \fn bool TQPrinter::outputToFile() const - Returns TRUE if the output should be written to a file, or FALSE + Returns true if the output should be written to a file, or false if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default - setting is FALSE. + setting is false. This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X. @@ -355,8 +355,8 @@ Specifies whether the output should be written to a file or sent directly to the printer. - Will output to a file if \a enable is TRUE, or will output - directly to the printer if \a enable is FALSE. + Will output to a file if \a enable is true, or will output + directly to the printer if \a enable is false. This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X. @@ -388,8 +388,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setOutputToFile( bool enable ) Sets the name of the output file to \a fileName. Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file, - i.e. calls setOutputToFile(FALSE). Setting a non-empty name - enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE). + i.e. calls setOutputToFile(false). Setting a non-empty name + enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(true). This function is currently only supported under X11. @@ -745,8 +745,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setMinMax( int minPage, int maxPage ) \internal - Returns TRUE if the application should provide the user with the - option of choosing a collated printout; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the application should provide the user with the + option of choosing a collated printout; otherwise returns false. Collation means that each page is printed in order, i.e. print the first page, then the second page, then the third page and so on, and @@ -763,9 +763,9 @@ void TQPrinter::setMinMax( int minPage, int maxPage ) \internal - If \a enable is TRUE (the default) the user is given the choice of + If \a enable is true (the default) the user is given the choice of whether to print out multiple copies collated in the print dialog. - If \a enable is FALSE, then collateCopies() will be ignored. + If \a enable is false, then collateCopies() will be ignored. Collation means that each page is printed in order, i.e. print the first page, then the second page, then the third page and so on, and @@ -782,8 +782,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setMinMax( int minPage, int maxPage ) \internal - Returns TRUE if collation is turned on when multiple copies is selected. - Returns FALSE if it is turned off when multiple copies is selected. + Returns true if collation is turned on when multiple copies is selected. + Returns false if it is turned off when multiple copies is selected. \sa collateCopiesEnabled() setCollateCopiesEnabled() setCollateCopies() */ @@ -792,8 +792,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setMinMax( int minPage, int maxPage ) \internal Sets the default value for collation checkbox when the print dialog appears. - If \a on is TRUE, it will enable setCollateCopiesEnabled(). - The default value is FALSE. This value will be changed by what the + If \a on is true, it will enable setCollateCopiesEnabled(). + The default value is false. This value will be changed by what the user presses in the print dialog. \sa collateCopiesEnabled() setCollateCopiesEnabled() collateCopies() @@ -862,16 +862,16 @@ void TQPrinter::setPrinterSelectionOption( const TQString & option ) /*! Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the - top-left corner of the paper if \a fp is TRUE, or where it thinks - the top-left corner of the printable area is if \a fp is FALSE. + top-left corner of the paper if \a fp is true, or where it thinks + the top-left corner of the printable area is if \a fp is false. - The default is FALSE. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and + The default is false. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report something smaller than the size indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical printer.) - If you set \a fp to TRUE, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the + If you set \a fp to true, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the exact same size as indicated by \c PageSize, but you cannot print on all of that - you must take care of the output margins yourself. @@ -886,8 +886,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setFullPage( bool fp ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is - at the corner of the sheet and FALSE if it is at the edge of the + Returns true if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is + at the corner of the sheet and false if it is at the edge of the printable area. See setFullPage() for details and caveats. @@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::fullPage() const void TQPrinter::setResolution( int dpi ) { res = dpi; - res_set = TRUE; + res_set = true; } @@ -976,11 +976,11 @@ void TQPrinter::setPrintRange( PrintRange range ) if( range != AllPages ) { if( range == Selection && !isOptionEnabled( PrintSelection ) ) { - setOptionEnabled( PrintSelection, TRUE ); + setOptionEnabled( PrintSelection, true ); } else if( range == PageRange && !isOptionEnabled( PrintPageRange ) ) { - setOptionEnabled( PrintPageRange, TRUE ); + setOptionEnabled( PrintPageRange, true ); } } d->printRange = range; @@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ TQPrinter::PrintRange TQPrinter::printRange() const /*! Enables the printer option with the identifier \a option if \a - enable is TRUE, and disables option \a option if \a enable is FALSE. + enable is true, and disables option \a option if \a enable is false. \sa isOptionEnabled() */ @@ -1015,8 +1015,8 @@ void TQPrinter::setOptionEnabled( PrinterOption option, bool enable ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier \a option is enabled; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the printer option with identifier \a option is enabled; + otherwise returns false. \sa setOptionEnabled() */ diff --git a/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp index e5bacff9c..e9caedc3d 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ TQPrinter::TQPrinter( PrinterMode m ) printer_name = getenv("PRINTER"); from_pg = to_pg = min_pg = max_pg = 0; state = PST_IDLE; - output_file = FALSE; - to_edge = FALSE; + output_file = false; + to_edge = false; paper_source = OnlyOne; switch ( m ) { case ScreenResolution: @@ -137,10 +137,10 @@ TQPrinter::TQPrinter( PrinterMode m ) } d = new TQPrinterUnixPrivate; - D->marginsSpecified = FALSE; + D->marginsSpecified = false; d->printerOptions = 0; - setOptionEnabled( PrintToFile, TRUE ); - setOptionEnabled( PrintPageRange, TRUE ); + setOptionEnabled( PrintToFile, true ); + setOptionEnabled( PrintPageRange, true ); setPrintRange( AllPages ); } @@ -161,21 +161,21 @@ TQPrinter::~TQPrinter() /*! - Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns TRUE if successful; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns true if successful; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQPrinter::newPage() { if ( state == PST_ACTIVE && pdrv ) return ((TQPSPrinter*)pdrv)->cmd( TQPSPrinter::NewPage, 0, 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Aborts the print job. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Aborts the print job. Returns true if successful; otherwise + returns false. \sa aborted() */ @@ -195,8 +195,8 @@ bool TQPrinter::abort() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns + false. \sa abort() */ @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ static void deleteGlobalPrinterDefaults() user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings it should have. - Returns TRUE if the user pressed "OK" to print, or FALSE if the + Returns true if the user pressed "OK" to print, or false if the user canceled the operation. */ @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::setup( TQWidget * parent ) #ifndef TQT_NO_PRINTDIALOG bool result = TQPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup( this, parent ); #else - bool result = FALSE; + bool result = false; #endif if ( result ) { if ( !globalPrinterDefaults ) { @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) if ( pipe( fds ) != 0 ) { tqWarning( "TQPSPrinter: could not open pipe to print" ); state = PST_ERROR; - return FALSE; + return false; } // ### shouldn't we use TQProcess here???? @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // ignore it? I don't know } } else { - bool r = FALSE; + bool r = false; if ( state == PST_ACTIVE && pdrv ) { r = ((TQPSPrinter*)pdrv)->cmd( c, paint, p ); if ( c == PdcEnd ) { @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) state = PST_IDLE; return r; } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -593,12 +593,12 @@ int TQPrinter::metric( int m ) const margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge. - If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), margins().width() may be + If you have called setFullPage( true ), margins().width() may be treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can use. - If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), + If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), margins() is automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter. @@ -622,10 +622,10 @@ TQSize TQPrinter::margins() const printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge. - If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), the four values specify + If you have called setFullPage( true ), the four values specify the smallest sane margins you can use. - If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), + If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), the margins are automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter. @@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ void TQPrinter::setMargins( uint top, uint left, uint bottom, uint right ) D->leftMargin = left; D->bottomMargin = bottom; D->rightMargin = right; - D->marginsSpecified = TRUE; + D->marginsSpecified = true; } #endif diff --git a/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp b/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp index b43c12b4a..58b0bdbaf 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp @@ -225,9 +225,9 @@ \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), - wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), - readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( false ), notifyOnExit( false ), + wroteToStdinConnected( false ), + readStdoutCalled( false ), readStderrCalled( false ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) { init(); @@ -244,9 +244,9 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), - wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), - readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( false ), notifyOnExit( false ), + wroteToStdinConnected( false ), + readStdoutCalled( false ), readStderrCalled( false ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) { init(); @@ -266,9 +266,9 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQStringList& args, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), - wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), - readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( false ), notifyOnExit( false ), + wroteToStdinConnected( false ), + readStdoutCalled( false ), readStderrCalled( false ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) { init(); @@ -408,8 +408,8 @@ void TQProcess::setCommunication( int commFlags ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns - FALSE. This implies that this function returns FALSE if the + Returns true if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns + false. This implies that this function returns false if the process is still running. \sa isRunning() exitStatus() processExited() @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ bool TQProcess::normalExit() const { // isRunning() has the side effect that it determines the exit status! if ( isRunning() ) - return FALSE; + return false; else return exitNormal; } @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ bool TQProcess::normalExit() const still running. This function returns immediately and does not wait until the process is finished. - If normalExit() is FALSE (e.g. if the program was killed or + If normalExit() is false (e.g. if the program was killed or crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return value of normalExit() before relying on this value. @@ -459,9 +459,9 @@ TQByteArray TQProcess::readStdout() if ( readStdoutCalled ) { return TQByteArray(); } - readStdoutCalled = TRUE; + readStdoutCalled = true; TQMembuf *buf = membufStdout(); - readStdoutCalled = FALSE; + readStdoutCalled = false; return buf->readAll(); } @@ -481,9 +481,9 @@ TQByteArray TQProcess::readStderr() if ( readStderrCalled ) { return TQByteArray(); } - readStderrCalled = TRUE; + readStderrCalled = true; TQMembuf *buf = membufStderr(); - readStderrCalled = FALSE; + readStderrCalled = false; return buf->readAll(); } @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ TQByteArray TQProcess::readStderr() /*! Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns - TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns FALSE. + TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns false. By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ TQString TQProcess::readLineStdout() /*! Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns - TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns FALSE. + TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns false. By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with @@ -591,8 +591,8 @@ TQString TQProcess::readLineStderr() settings for the environment variable \c LD_LIBRARY_PATH, then this variable is inherited from the starting process. - Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns + false. Note that you should not use the slots writeToStdin() and closeStdin() on processes started with launch(), since the result @@ -628,10 +628,10 @@ bool TQProcess::launch( const TQByteArray& buf, TQStringList *env ) closeStdin(); emit launchFinished(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } else { emit launchFinished(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -652,10 +652,10 @@ bool TQProcess::launch( const TQString& buf, TQStringList *env ) closeStdin(); emit launchFinished(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } else { emit launchFinished(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -755,23 +755,23 @@ void TQProcess::connectNotify( const char * signal ) qstrcmp( signal, TQ_SIGNAL(readyReadStderr()) )==0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set ioRedirection to TRUE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set ioRedirection to true" ); #endif - setIoRedirection( TRUE ); + setIoRedirection( true ); return; } if ( !notifyOnExit && qstrcmp( signal, TQ_SIGNAL(processExited()) )==0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set notifyOnExit to TRUE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set notifyOnExit to true" ); #endif - setNotifyOnExit( TRUE ); + setNotifyOnExit( true ); return; } if ( !wroteToStdinConnected && qstrcmp( signal, TQ_SIGNAL(wroteToStdin()) )==0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set wroteToStdinConnected to TRUE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::connectNotify(): set wroteToStdinConnected to true" ); #endif - setWroteStdinConnected( TRUE ); + setWroteStdinConnected( true ); return; } } @@ -785,21 +785,21 @@ void TQProcess::disconnectNotify( const char * ) receivers( TQ_SIGNAL(readyReadStderr()) ) ==0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set ioRedirection to FALSE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set ioRedirection to false" ); #endif - setIoRedirection( FALSE ); + setIoRedirection( false ); } if ( notifyOnExit && receivers( TQ_SIGNAL(processExited()) ) == 0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set notifyOnExit to FALSE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set notifyOnExit to false" ); #endif - setNotifyOnExit( FALSE ); + setNotifyOnExit( false ); } if ( wroteToStdinConnected && receivers( TQ_SIGNAL(wroteToStdin()) ) == 0 ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set wroteToStdinConnected to FALSE" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::disconnectNotify(): set wroteToStdinConnected to false" ); #endif - setWroteStdinConnected( FALSE ); + setWroteStdinConnected( false ); } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqprocess_unix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqprocess_unix.cpp index 606d1fd28..e481c92c3 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqprocess_unix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqprocess_unix.cpp @@ -147,11 +147,11 @@ public: #endif if ( process ) { if ( process->d->notifierStdin ) - process->d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( FALSE ); + process->d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( false ); if ( process->d->notifierStdout ) - process->d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( FALSE ); + process->d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( false ); if ( process->d->notifierStderr ) - process->d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( FALSE ); + process->d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( false ); process->d->proc = 0; } if( socketStdin ) @@ -225,11 +225,11 @@ int qnx6SocketPairReplacement (int socketFD[2]) { int socketOptions = 1; setsockopt(tmpSocket, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, &socketOptions, sizeof(int)); - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; for (int socketIP = 2000; (socketIP < 2500) && !(found); socketIP++) { ipAddr.sin_port = htons(socketIP); if (bind(tmpSocket, (struct sockaddr *)&ipAddr, sizeof(ipAddr))) - found = TRUE; + found = true; } if (listen(tmpSocket, 5)) { BAILOUT }; @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ int qnx6SocketPairReplacement (int socketFD[2]) { TQProcessManager::TQProcessManager() : sn(0) { procList = new TQPtrList<TQProc>; - procList->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + procList->setAutoDelete( true ); // The SIGCHLD handler writes to a socket to tell the manager that // something happened. This is done to get the processing in sync with the @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ TQProcessManager::TQProcessManager() : sn(0) TQSocketNotifier::Read, this ); connect( sn, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQ_SLOT(sigchldHnd(int)) ); - sn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + sn->setEnabled( true ); } // install a SIGCHLD handler and ignore SIGPIPE @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ void TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd( int fd ) if ( sn ) { if ( !sn->isEnabled() ) return; - sn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + sn->setEnabled( false ); } char tmp; @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ void TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd( int fd ) bool removeProc; proc = procList->first(); while ( proc != 0 ) { - removeProc = FALSE; + removeProc = false; process = proc->process; if ( process != 0 ) { if ( !process->isRunning() ) { @@ -434,19 +434,19 @@ void TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd( int fd ) ::close( proc->socketStdout ); proc->socketStdout = 0; if (process->d->notifierStdout) - process->d->notifierStdout->setEnabled(FALSE); + process->d->notifierStdout->setEnabled(false); } if ( proc->socketStderr ) { ::close( proc->socketStderr ); proc->socketStderr = 0; if (process->d->notifierStderr) - process->d->notifierStderr->setEnabled(FALSE); + process->d->notifierStderr->setEnabled(false); } if ( process->notifyOnExit ) emit process->processExited(); - removeProc = TRUE; + removeProc = true; } } else { int status; @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ void TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd( int fd ) #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd() (PID: %d): process exited (TQProcess not available)", proc->pid ); #endif - removeProc = TRUE; + removeProc = true; } } if ( removeProc ) { @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ void TQProcessManager::sigchldHnd( int fd ) } } if ( sn ) - sn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + sn->setEnabled( true ); } #include "tqprocess_unix.moc" @@ -490,8 +490,8 @@ TQProcessPrivate::TQProcessPrivate() notifierStdout = 0; notifierStderr = 0; - exitValuesCalculated = FALSE; - socketReadCalled = FALSE; + exitValuesCalculated = false; + socketReadCalled = false; proc = 0; } @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ void TQProcess::init() { d = new TQProcessPrivate(); exitStat = 0; - exitNormal = FALSE; + exitNormal = false; } /* @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ void TQProcess::reset() delete d; d = new TQProcessPrivate(); exitStat = 0; - exitNormal = FALSE; + exitNormal = false; d->bufStdout.clear(); d->bufStderr.clear(); } @@ -684,8 +684,8 @@ TQProcess::~TQProcess() this variable is inherited from the starting process; under Windows the same applies for the environment variable \c PATH. - Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns + false. You can write data to the process's standard input with writeToStdin(). You can close standard input with closeStdin() and @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) #else if ( (comms & Stdin) && qnx6SocketPairReplacement(sStdin) == -1 ) { #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifndef Q_OS_QNX6 if ( (comms & Stderr) && ::socketpair( AF_UNIX, SOCK_STREAM, 0, sStderr ) == -1 ) { @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) ::close( sStdin[0] ); ::close( sStdin[1] ); } - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifndef Q_OS_QNX6 if ( (comms & Stdout) && ::socketpair( AF_UNIX, SOCK_STREAM, 0, sStdout ) == -1 ) { @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) ::close( sStderr[0] ); ::close( sStderr[1] ); } - return FALSE; + return false; } // the following pipe is only used to determine if the process could be @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) this, TQ_SLOT(socketWrite(int)) ); // setup notifiers for the sockets if ( !d->stdinBuf.isEmpty() ) { - d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( true ); } } if ( comms & Stdout ) { @@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) connect( d->notifierStdout, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQ_SLOT(socketRead(int)) ); if ( ioRedirection ) - d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( true ); } if ( comms & Stderr ) { ::close( sStderr[1] ); @@ -967,13 +967,13 @@ bool TQProcess::start( TQStringList *env ) connect( d->notifierStderr, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQ_SLOT(socketRead(int)) ); if ( ioRedirection ) - d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( true ); } // cleanup and return delete[] arglistQ; delete[] arglist; - return TRUE; + return true; error: #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ error: ::close( fd[1] ); delete[] arglistQ; delete[] arglist; - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ void TQProcess::kill() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the process is running; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the process is running; otherwise returns false. \sa normalExit() exitStatus() processExited() */ @@ -1058,12 +1058,12 @@ bool TQProcess::isRunning() const { if ( d->exitValuesCalculated ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning(): FALSE (already computed)" ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning(): false (already computed)" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->proc == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; int status; if ( ::waitpid( d->proc->pid, &status, WNOHANG ) == d->proc->pid ) { // compute the exit values @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ bool TQProcess::isRunning() const if ( exitNormal ) { that->exitStat = (char)WEXITSTATUS( status ); } - d->exitValuesCalculated = TRUE; + d->exitValuesCalculated = true; // On heavy processing, the socket notifier for the sigchild might not // have found time to fire yet. @@ -1088,19 +1088,19 @@ bool TQProcess::isRunning() const } #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning() (PID: %d): FALSE", d->proc->pid ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning() (PID: %d): false", d->proc->pid ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) - tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning() (PID: %d): TRUE", d->proc->pid ); + tqDebug( "TQProcess::isRunning() (PID: %d): true", d->proc->pid ); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from - standard output at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from + standard output at this time; otherwise returns false. \sa readLineStdout() canReadLineStderr() */ @@ -1114,8 +1114,8 @@ bool TQProcess::canReadLineStdout() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from - standard error at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from + standard error at this time; otherwise returns false. \sa readLineStderr() canReadLineStdout() */ @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ void TQProcess::writeToStdin( const TQByteArray& buf ) #endif d->stdinBuf.enqueue( new TQByteArray(buf) ); if ( d->notifierStdin != 0 ) - d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( true ); } @@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ void TQProcess::socketRead( int fd ) #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQProcess::socketRead(): stdout (%d) closed", fd ); #endif - d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( false ); delete d->notifierStdout; d->notifierStdout = 0; ::close( d->proc->socketStdout ); @@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ void TQProcess::socketRead( int fd ) #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQProcess::socketRead(): stderr (%d) closed", fd ); #endif - d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( false ); delete d->notifierStderr; d->notifierStderr = 0; ::close( d->proc->socketStderr ); @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ void TQProcess::socketRead( int fd ) } } - d->socketReadCalled = TRUE; + d->socketReadCalled = true; if ( fd == d->proc->socketStdout ) { #if defined(QT_QPROCESS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQProcess::socketRead(): %d bytes read from stdout (%d)", @@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ void TQProcess::socketRead( int fd ) #endif emit readyReadStderr(); } - d->socketReadCalled = FALSE; + d->socketReadCalled = false; } @@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ void TQProcess::socketWrite( int fd ) { while ( fd == d->proc->socketStdin && d->proc->socketStdin != 0 ) { if ( d->stdinBuf.isEmpty() ) { - d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->notifierStdin->setEnabled( false ); return; } ssize_t ret = ::write( fd, @@ -1362,14 +1362,14 @@ void TQProcess::setIoRedirection( bool value ) ioRedirection = value; if ( ioRedirection ) { if ( d->notifierStdout ) - d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( true ); if ( d->notifierStderr ) - d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( true ); } else { if ( d->notifierStdout ) - d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->notifierStdout->setEnabled( false ); if ( d->notifierStderr ) - d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->notifierStderr->setEnabled( false ); } } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp b/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp index bc283807c..4ab9404c6 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp @@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ extern bool tqt_has_xft; #endif -static bool qt_gen_epsf = FALSE; -static bool embedFonts = TRUE; +static bool qt_gen_epsf = false; +static bool embedFonts = true; TQ_EXPORT void tqt_generate_epsf( bool b ) { @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ public: void setFont( const TQFont &, int script ); void drawImage( TQPainter *, float x, float y, float w, float h, const TQImage &img, const TQImage &mask ); void initPage( TQPainter *paint ); - void flushPage( bool last = FALSE ); + void flushPage( bool last = false ); TQPrinter *printer; int pageCount; @@ -1449,12 +1449,12 @@ public: virtual unsigned short unicode_for_glyph(int glyphindex) { return glyphindex; } virtual unsigned short glyph_for_unicode(unsigned short unicode) { return unicode; } unsigned short insertIntoSubset( unsigned short unicode ); - virtual bool embedded() { return FALSE; } + virtual bool embedded() { return false; } bool operator == ( const TQPSPrinterFontPrivate &other ) { return other.psname == psname; } - inline void setSymbol() { symbol = TRUE; } + inline void setSymbol() { symbol = true; } protected: TQString psname; @@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ static void appendReplacements( TQStringList &list, const psfont * const * repla } } -static TQStringList makePSFontNameList( const TQFontEngine *fe, const TQString &psname = TQString::null, bool useNameForLookup = FALSE ) +static TQStringList makePSFontNameList( const TQFontEngine *fe, const TQString &psname = TQString::null, bool useNameForLookup = false ) { int i; int type; @@ -1643,9 +1643,9 @@ static inline float pointSize( const TQFont &f, float scale ) TQPSPrinterFontPrivate::TQPSPrinterFontPrivate() { - global_dict = FALSE; - downloaded = FALSE; - symbol = FALSE; + global_dict = false; + downloaded = false; + symbol = false; // map 0 to .notdef subset.insert( 0, 0 ); subsetCount = 1; @@ -1722,9 +1722,9 @@ static inline const char * toInt( int i ) if ( i == 0 ) { intVal[--pos] = '0'; } else { - bool neg = FALSE; + bool neg = false; if ( i < 0 ) { - neg = TRUE; + neg = true; i = -i; } while ( i ) { @@ -1800,15 +1800,15 @@ unsigned short TQPSPrinterFontPrivate::mapUnicode( unsigned short unicode ) TQMap<unsigned short, unsigned short>::iterator res; res = subset.find( unicode ); unsigned short offset = 0; - bool found = FALSE; + bool found = false; if ( res != subset.end() ) { - found = TRUE; + found = true; } else { if ( downloaded ) { res = page_subset.find( unicode ); offset = (subsetCount/256 + 1) * 256; if ( res != page_subset.end() ) - found = TRUE; + found = true; } } if ( !found ) { @@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ public: const TQString &text, TQPSPrinterPrivate *d, TQPainter *paint); // virtual ~TQPSPrinterFontTTF(); - virtual bool embedded() { return TRUE; } + virtual bool embedded() { return true; } private: TQByteArray data; TQMemArray<ushort> uni2glyph; // to speed up lookups @@ -2274,7 +2274,7 @@ static const char * const Apple_CharStrings[]={ TQPSPrinterFontTTF::TQPSPrinterFontTTF(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& d) { data = d; - defective = FALSE; + defective = false; BYTE *ptr; @@ -2303,7 +2303,7 @@ TQPSPrinterFontTTF::TQPSPrinterFontTTF(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& d) /* Load the "head" table and extract information from it. */ ptr = getTable("head"); if ( !ptr ) { - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } MfrRevision = getFixed( ptr + 4 ); /* font revision number */ @@ -2319,12 +2319,12 @@ TQPSPrinterFontTTF::TQPSPrinterFontTTF(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& d) indexToLocFormat = getSHORT( ptr + 50 ); /* size of 'loca' data */ if(indexToLocFormat != 0 && indexToLocFormat != 1) { tqWarning("TrueType font is unusable because indexToLocFormat != 0"); - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } if( getSHORT(ptr+52) != 0 ) { tqWarning("TrueType font is unusable because glyphDataFormat != 0"); - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } @@ -2339,7 +2339,7 @@ TQPSPrinterFontTTF::TQPSPrinterFontTTF(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& d) BYTE* table_ptr = getTable("name"); /* pointer to table */ if ( !table_ptr ) { - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; tqDebug("couldn't find name table" ); return; } @@ -2395,13 +2395,13 @@ TQPSPrinterFontTTF::TQPSPrinterFontTTF(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& d) tqWarning("TrueType font does not have a format 2.0 'post' table"); tqWarning("post format is %d.%d",post_format.whole,post_format.fraction); // Sivan Feb 2001: no longer defective. - // defective = TRUE; + // defective = true; } } #endif BYTE *maxp = getTable("maxp"); if ( !maxp ) { - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; tqDebug("no maxp table in font"); return; } @@ -2509,7 +2509,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::download(TQTextStream& s,bool global) if ( !global ) subsetDict = &page_subset; - downloaded = TRUE; + downloaded = true; if (defective) { s << "% Font "; @@ -2684,8 +2684,8 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::download(TQTextStream& s,bool global) bool glyphset[65536]; for(int c=0; c < 65536; c++) - glyphset[c] = FALSE; - glyphset[0] = TRUE; // always output .notdef + glyphset[c] = false; + glyphset[0] = true; // always output .notdef TQMap<unsigned short, unsigned short>::iterator it; for( it = subsetDict->begin(); it != subsetDict->end(); ++it ) { @@ -2896,7 +2896,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::uni2glyphSetup() ULONG offset = 0; int map = -1; - bool symbol = TRUE; + bool symbol = true; for (i=0; i<nmaps; i++) { USHORT platform = getUSHORT(cmap+pos); pos+=2; USHORT encoding = getUSHORT(cmap+pos); pos+=2; @@ -2904,7 +2904,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::uni2glyphSetup() //fprintf(stderr,"[%d] plat %d enc %d\n",i,platform,encoding); if (platform == 3 && encoding == 1) { map = i; - symbol = FALSE; + symbol = false; break; // unicode } if (platform == 3 && encoding == 0) { @@ -3019,7 +3019,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::sfnts_pputBYTE(BYTE n,TQTextStream& s, s << "<"; string_len = 0; line_len++; - in_string = TRUE; + in_string = true; } s << hexdigits[ n / 16 ] ; @@ -3080,7 +3080,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::sfnts_end_string(TQTextStream& s, line_len++; } - in_string=FALSE; + in_string=false; } /* @@ -3143,7 +3143,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::sfnts_glyf_table(ULONG oldoffset, */ if( length % 2 ) { tqWarning("TrueType font contains a 'glyf' table without 2 byte padding"); - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } @@ -3166,7 +3166,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::sfnts_glyf_table(ULONG oldoffset, /* Look for unexplainable descrepancies between sizes */ if( total != correct_total_length ) { tqWarning("TQPSPrinterFontTTF::sfnts_glyf_table: total != correct_total_length"); - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } } @@ -3239,7 +3239,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::download_sfnts(TQTextStream& s) s << "/sfnts[<"; - bool in_string=TRUE; + bool in_string=true; int string_len=0; int line_len=8; @@ -3295,7 +3295,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::download_sfnts(TQTextStream& s) } else { // other tables should not exceed 64K (not always true; Sivan) if( tables[x].length > 65535 ) { tqWarning("TrueType font has a table which is too long"); - defective = TRUE; + defective = true; return; } @@ -3762,7 +3762,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::subsetGlyph(int charindex,bool* glyphset) USHORT glyphIndex; charproc_data cd; - glyphset[charindex] = TRUE; + glyphset[charindex] = true; //printf("subsetting %s ==> ",glyphName(charindex).latin1()); /* Get a pointer to the data. */ @@ -3786,7 +3786,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontTTF::subsetGlyph(int charindex,bool* glyphset) glyphIndex = getUSHORT(glyph); /* read the glyphindex word */ glyph += 2; - glyphset[ glyphIndex ] = TRUE; + glyphset[ glyphIndex ] = true; subsetGlyph( glyphIndex, glyphset ); //printf("subset contains: %d %s ",glyphIndex, glyphName(glyphIndex).latin1()); @@ -4036,7 +4036,7 @@ class TQPSPrinterFontPFA public: TQPSPrinterFontPFA(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& data); virtual void download(TQTextStream& s, bool global); - virtual bool embedded() { return TRUE; } + virtual bool embedded() { return true; } private: TQByteArray data; }; @@ -4092,7 +4092,7 @@ class TQPSPrinterFontPFB public: TQPSPrinterFontPFB(const TQFontEngine *f, TQByteArray& data); virtual void download(TQTextStream& s, bool global); - virtual bool embedded() { return TRUE; } + virtual bool embedded() { return true; } private: TQByteArray data; }; @@ -4235,7 +4235,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterFontNotFound::download(TQTextStream& s, bool) s << "% No embeddable font for "; s << psname; s << " found\n"; - TQPSPrinterFontPrivate::download(s, TRUE); + TQPSPrinterFontPrivate::download(s, true); } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCODEC @@ -4855,13 +4855,13 @@ TQPSPrinterFontSimplifiedChinese::TQPSPrinterFontSimplifiedChinese(const TQFontE codec = TQTextCodec::codecForMib( 114 ); // GB18030 int type = getPsFontType( f ); TQString family = f->fontDef.family.lower(); - if( family.contains("kai",FALSE) ) { + if( family.contains("kai",false) ) { psname = KaiGBK2K[type].psname; appendReplacements( replacementList, KaiGBK2KReplacements, type ); - } else if( family.contains("fangsong",FALSE) ) { + } else if( family.contains("fangsong",false) ) { psname = FangSongGBK2K[type].psname; appendReplacements( replacementList, FangSongGBK2KReplacements, type ); - } else if( family.contains("hei",FALSE) ) { + } else if( family.contains("hei",false) ) { psname = HeiGBK2K[type].psname; appendReplacements( replacementList, HeiGBK2KReplacements, type ); } else { @@ -4916,7 +4916,7 @@ TQPSPrinterFont::TQPSPrinterFont(const TQFont &f, int script, TQPSPrinterPrivate xfontname = makePSFontName( engine ); #if defined( TQ_WS_X11 ) - bool xlfd = FALSE; + bool xlfd = false; //tqDebug("engine = %p name=%s, script=%d", engine, engine ? engine->name() : "(null)", script); #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE @@ -4944,7 +4944,7 @@ TQPSPrinterFont::TQPSPrinterFont(const TQFont &f, int script, TQPSPrinterPrivate xfontname = rawName.mid(0,index); if ( xfontname.endsWith( "*" ) ) xfontname.truncate( xfontname.length() - 1 ); - xlfd = TRUE; + xlfd = true; } } #endif // TQ_WS_X11 @@ -5139,17 +5139,17 @@ TQPSPrinterFont::TQPSPrinterFont(const TQFont &f, int script, TQPSPrinterPrivate TQPSPrinterPrivate::TQPSPrinterPrivate( TQPrinter *prt, int filedes ) - : buffer( 0 ), outDevice( 0 ), fd( filedes ), pageBuffer( 0 ), fonts(27, FALSE), fontBuffer(0), savedImage( 0 ), - dirtypen( FALSE ), dirtybrush( FALSE ), dirtyBkColor( FALSE ), bkMode( TQt::TransparentMode ), dirtyBkMode( FALSE ), + : buffer( 0 ), outDevice( 0 ), fd( filedes ), pageBuffer( 0 ), fonts(27, false), fontBuffer(0), savedImage( 0 ), + dirtypen( false ), dirtybrush( false ), dirtyBkColor( false ), bkMode( TQt::TransparentMode ), dirtyBkMode( false ), #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCODEC currentFontCodec( 0 ), #endif fm( TQFont() ), textY( 0 ) { printer = prt; - headerFontNames.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - pageFontNames.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - fonts.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + headerFontNames.setAutoDelete( true ); + pageFontNames.setAutoDelete( true ); + fonts.setAutoDelete( true ); currentFontFile = 0; scale = 1.; scriptUsed = -1; @@ -5157,18 +5157,18 @@ TQPSPrinterPrivate::TQPSPrinterPrivate( TQPrinter *prt, int filedes ) #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 // append tqsettings fontpath TQSettings settings; - embedFonts = settings.readBoolEntry( "/qt/embedFonts", TRUE ); + embedFonts = settings.readBoolEntry( "/qt/embedFonts", true ); int npaths; char** font_path; font_path = XGetFontPath( tqt_xdisplay(), &npaths); - bool xfsconfig_read = FALSE; + bool xfsconfig_read = false; for (int i=0; i<npaths; i++) { // If we're using xfs, append font paths from /etc/X11/fs/config // can't hurt, and chances are we'll get all fonts that way. if (((font_path[i])[0] != '/') && !xfsconfig_read) { // We're using xfs -> read its config - bool finished = FALSE; + bool finished = false; TQFile f("/etc/X11/fs/config"); if ( !f.exists() ) f.setName("/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fs/config"); @@ -5182,23 +5182,23 @@ TQPSPrinterPrivate::TQPSPrinterPrivate( TQPrinter *prt, int filedes ) fs=fs.stripWhiteSpace(); if (fs.left(9)=="catalogue" && fs.contains('=')) { fs=fs.mid(fs.find('=')+1).stripWhiteSpace(); - bool end = FALSE; + bool end = false; while( f.status()==IO_Ok && !end ) { if ( fs[int(fs.length())-1] == ',' ) fs = fs.left(fs.length()-1); else - end = TRUE; + end = true; if (fs[0] != '#' && !fs.contains(":unscaled")) fontpath += fs; f.readLine(fs, 1024); fs=fs.stripWhiteSpace(); } - finished = TRUE; + finished = true; } } f.close(); } - xfsconfig_read = TRUE; + xfsconfig_read = true; } else if(!strstr(font_path[i], ":unscaled")) { // Fonts paths marked :unscaled are always bitmapped fonts // -> we can as well ignore them now and save time @@ -5212,7 +5212,7 @@ TQPSPrinterPrivate::TQPSPrinterPrivate( TQPrinter *prt, int filedes ) if ( !fp.isEmpty() ) fontpath += fp; #else - embedFonts = FALSE; + embedFonts = false; #endif } @@ -5560,13 +5560,13 @@ static TQByteArray compress( const TQImage & image, bool gray ) { 4 pixels back (an overlap of 6). */ if ( start + length > index && length > 0 ) { int d = index-start; - int equal = TRUE; + int equal = true; while( equal && start + length > index && start > d && start-d >= index-tableSize ) { int i = 0; while( equal && i < d ) { if( pixel[start+i] != pixel[start+i-d] ) - equal = FALSE; + equal = false; i++; } if ( equal ) @@ -5825,7 +5825,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::drawImage( TQPainter *paint, float x, float y, float w, const char *bits; if ( !mask.isNull() ) { - out = ::compress( mask, TRUE ); + out = ::compress( mask, true ); size = (width+7)/8*height; pageStream << "/mask " << size << " string uc\n"; ps_r7( pageStream, out, out.size() ); @@ -5882,7 +5882,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::matrixSetup( TQPainter *paint ) << p.x() << ' ' << p.y() << "]ST\n"; #endif - dirtyMatrix = FALSE; + dirtyMatrix = false; } void TQPSPrinterPrivate::orientationSetup() @@ -6016,7 +6016,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::emitHeader( bool finished ) << pageCount << "\n"; TQDictIterator<TQPSPrinterFontPrivate> it(fonts); while (it.current()) { - it.current()->download(outStream,TRUE); // true means its global + it.current()->download(outStream,true); // true means its global ++it; } outStream.writeRawBytes( fontBuffer->buffer().data(), @@ -6064,8 +6064,8 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::resetDrawingTools( TQPainter *paint ) } } - dirtypen = TRUE; - dirtybrush = TRUE; + dirtypen = true; + dirtybrush = true; if ( paint->hasViewXForm() || paint->hasWorldXForm() ) matrixSetup( paint ); @@ -6104,7 +6104,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::clippingSetup( TQPainter *paint ) boundingBox = boundingBox.unite( rects[i] ); } pageStream << "CLEND\n"; // end clipping - firstClipOnPage = FALSE; + firstClipOnPage = false; } else { if ( !firstClipOnPage ) // no need to turn off if first on page setClippingOff( paint ); @@ -6115,7 +6115,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::clippingSetup( TQPainter *paint ) if ( !boundingBox.isValid() ) boundingBox.setRect( 0, 0, m.width(), m.height() ); } - dirtyClipping = FALSE; + dirtyClipping = false; } void TQPSPrinterPrivate::initPage(TQPainter *paint) @@ -6144,12 +6144,12 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::initPage(TQPainter *paint) delete savedImage; savedImage = 0; textY = 0; - dirtyClipping = TRUE; - firstClipOnPage = TRUE; + dirtyClipping = true; + firstClipOnPage = true; resetDrawingTools( paint ); - dirtyNewPage = FALSE; + dirtyNewPage = false; pageFontNumber = headerFontNumber; } @@ -6176,7 +6176,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::flushPage( bool last ) // we have already downloaded the header. Maybe we have page fonts here TQDictIterator<TQPSPrinterFontPrivate> it(fonts); while (it.current()) { - it.current()->download( outStream, FALSE ); // FALSE means its for the page only + it.current()->download( outStream, false ); // false means its for the page only ++it; } } @@ -6256,17 +6256,17 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) d->fontStream.setDevice( d->fontBuffer ); d->headerFontNumber = 0; d->pageCount = 1; // initialize state - d->dirtyMatrix = TRUE; - d->dirtyClipping = TRUE; - d->dirtyNewPage = TRUE; - d->firstClipOnPage = TRUE; + d->dirtyMatrix = true; + d->dirtyClipping = true; + d->dirtyNewPage = true; + d->firstClipOnPage = true; d->boundingBox = TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 ); d->fontsUsed = TQString::fromLatin1(""); TQPaintDeviceMetrics m( d->printer ); d->scale = 72. / ((float) m.logicalDpiY()); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( c == PdcEnd ) { // painting done @@ -6274,14 +6274,14 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // we're writing to lp/lpr through a pipe, we don't want to crash with SIGPIPE // if lp/lpr dies - ignoreSigPipe(TRUE); - d->flushPage( TRUE ); + ignoreSigPipe(true); + d->flushPage( true ); d->outStream << "%%Trailer\n"; if ( pageCountAtEnd ) d->outStream << "%%Pages: " << d->pageCount - 1 << "\n" << wrapDSC( "%%DocumentFonts: " + d->fontsUsed ); d->outStream << "%%EOF\n"; - ignoreSigPipe(FALSE); + ignoreSigPipe(false); d->outStream.unsetDevice(); if ( d->outDevice ) @@ -6295,7 +6295,7 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) if ( c >= PdcDrawFirst && c <= PdcDrawLast ) { if ( !paint ) - return FALSE; // sanity + return false; // sanity if ( d->dirtyNewPage ) d->initPage( paint ); if ( d->dirtyMatrix ) @@ -6314,7 +6314,7 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) << ' ' << color( d->cpen.color(), d->printer ) << psCap( d->cpen.capStyle() ) << psJoin( d->cpen.joinStyle() ) << "PE\n"; - d->dirtypen = FALSE; + d->dirtypen = false; } if ( d->dirtybrush ) { // we special-case for nobrush and solid white, since @@ -6327,18 +6327,18 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) else d->pageStream << (int)d->cbrush.style() << ' ' << color( d->cbrush.color(), d->printer ) << "BR\n"; - d->dirtybrush = FALSE; + d->dirtybrush = false; } if ( d->dirtyBkColor ) { d->pageStream << color( d->bkColor, d->printer ) << "BC\n"; - d->dirtyBkColor = FALSE; + d->dirtyBkColor = false; } if ( d->dirtyBkMode ) { if ( d->bkMode == TQt::TransparentMode ) d->pageStream << "/OMo false d\n"; else d->pageStream << "/OMo true d\n"; - d->dirtyBkMode = FALSE; + d->dirtyBkMode = false; } } @@ -6442,15 +6442,15 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) break; case PdcDrawText2: // we use drawTextItem instead - return TRUE; + return true; case PdcDrawText2Formatted: - return TRUE; + return true; case PdcDrawTextItem: { const TQTextItem *ti = p[1].textItem; TQScriptItem &si = ti->engine->items[ti->item]; int len = ti->engine->length( ti->item ); if ( si.isSpace || si.isObject ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( d->currentSet != d->currentUsed || d->scriptUsed != si.analysis.script || !d->currentFontFile ) { d->currentUsed = d->currentSet; @@ -6459,7 +6459,7 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) if( d->currentFontFile ) // better not crash in case somethig goes wrong. d->currentFontFile->drawText( d->pageStream, *p[0].point, ti->engine, ti->item, ti->engine->string.mid( si.position, len ), d, paint); - return FALSE; + return false; } case PdcDrawPixmap: { if ( p[1].pixmap->isNull() ) @@ -6490,7 +6490,7 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) { if ( d->bkColor != *(p[0].color) ) { d->bkColor = *(p[0].color); - d->dirtyBkColor = TRUE; + d->dirtyBkColor = true; } break; } @@ -6498,7 +6498,7 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) { if ( d->bkMode != p[0].ival ) { d->bkMode = (TQt::BGMode) p[0].ival; - d->dirtyBkMode = TRUE; + d->dirtyBkMode = true; } break; } @@ -6514,12 +6514,12 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) d->currentSet = *(p[0].font); d->fm = paint->fontMetrics(); // turn these off - they confuse the 'avoid font change' logic - d->currentSet.setUnderline( FALSE ); - d->currentSet.setStrikeOut( FALSE ); + d->currentSet.setUnderline( false ); + d->currentSet.setStrikeOut( false ); break; case PdcSetPen: if ( d->cpen != *(p[0].pen) ) { - d->dirtypen = TRUE; + d->dirtypen = true; d->cpen = *(p[0].pen); } break; @@ -6528,16 +6528,16 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) #if defined(CHECK_RANGE) tqWarning( "TQPrinter: Pixmap brush not supported" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->cbrush != *(p[0].brush) ) { - d->dirtybrush = TRUE; + d->dirtybrush = true; d->cbrush = *(p[0].brush); } break; case PdcSetTabStops: case PdcSetTabArray: - return FALSE; + return false; case PdcSetUnit: break; case PdcSetVXform: @@ -6546,29 +6546,29 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcSetWXform: case PdcSetWMatrix: case PdcRestoreWMatrix: - d->dirtyMatrix = TRUE; + d->dirtyMatrix = true; break; case PdcSetClip: - d->dirtyClipping = TRUE; + d->dirtyClipping = true; break; case PdcSetClipRegion: - d->dirtyClipping = TRUE; + d->dirtyClipping = true; break; case NewPage: // we're writing to lp/lpr through a pipe, we don't want to crash with SIGPIPE // if lp/lpr dies - ignoreSigPipe(TRUE); + ignoreSigPipe(true); d->flushPage(); - ignoreSigPipe(FALSE); + ignoreSigPipe(false); - d->dirtyNewPage = TRUE; + d->dirtyNewPage = true; break; case AbortPrinting: break; default: break; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif // TQT_NO_PRINTER diff --git a/src/kernel/tqrect.cpp b/src/kernel/tqrect.cpp index 0af8a22cb..6a03918e8 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqrect.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqrect.cpp @@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ TQRect::TQRect( const TQPoint &topLeft, const TQSize &size ) /*! \fn bool TQRect::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise + returns false. A null rectangle has both the width and the height set to 0, that is right() == left() - 1 and bottom() == top() - 1. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ TQRect::TQRect( const TQPoint &topLeft, const TQSize &size ) /*! \fn bool TQRect::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns false. An empty rectangle has a left() \> right() or top() \> bottom(). @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ TQRect::TQRect( const TQPoint &topLeft, const TQSize &size ) /*! \fn bool TQRect::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns false. A valid rectangle has a left() \<= right() and top() \<= bottom(). @@ -734,10 +734,10 @@ void TQRect::setSize( const TQSize &s ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the point \a p is inside or on the edge of the - rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the point \a p is inside or on the edge of the + rectangle; otherwise returns false. - If \a proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if \a p is + If \a proper is true, this function returns true only if \a p is inside (not on the edge). */ @@ -754,27 +754,27 @@ bool TQRect::contains( const TQPoint &p, bool proper ) const /*! \overload bool TQRect::contains( int x, int y, bool proper ) const - Returns TRUE if the point \a x, \a y is inside this rectangle; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the point \a x, \a y is inside this rectangle; + otherwise returns false. - If \a proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if the point + If \a proper is true, this function returns true only if the point is entirely inside (not on the edge). */ /*! \overload bool TQRect::contains( int x, int y ) const - Returns TRUE if the point \a x, \a y is inside this rectangle; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the point \a x, \a y is inside this rectangle; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! \overload - Returns TRUE if the rectangle \a r is inside this rectangle; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the rectangle \a r is inside this rectangle; + otherwise returns false. - If \a proper is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if \a r is + If \a proper is true, this function returns true only if \a r is entirely inside (not on the edge). \sa unite(), intersect(), intersects() @@ -873,9 +873,9 @@ TQRect TQRect::intersect( const TQRect &r ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this rectangle intersects with rectangle \a r + Returns true if this rectangle intersects with rectangle \a r (there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles); - otherwise returns FALSE. + otherwise returns false. \sa intersect(), contains() */ @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ bool TQRect::intersects( const TQRect &r ) const /*! \relates TQRect - Returns TRUE if \a r1 and \a r2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a r1 and \a r2 are equal; otherwise returns false. */ bool operator==( const TQRect &r1, const TQRect &r2 ) @@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ bool operator==( const TQRect &r1, const TQRect &r2 ) /*! \relates TQRect - Returns TRUE if \a r1 and \a r2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a r1 and \a r2 are different; otherwise returns false. */ bool operator!=( const TQRect &r1, const TQRect &r2 ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqrect.h b/src/kernel/tqrect.h index 1b66b1834..dffdc26a5 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqrect.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqrect.h @@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ public: TQRect& operator|=(const TQRect &r); TQRect& operator&=(const TQRect &r); - bool contains( const TQPoint &p, bool proper=FALSE ) const; + bool contains( const TQPoint &p, bool proper=false ) const; bool contains( int x, int y ) const; // inline methods, _don't_ merge these bool contains( int x, int y, bool proper ) const; - bool contains( const TQRect &r, bool proper=FALSE ) const; + bool contains( const TQRect &r, bool proper=false ) const; TQRect unite( const TQRect &r ) const; TQRect intersect( const TQRect &r ) const; bool intersects( const TQRect &r ) const; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqregion.h b/src/kernel/tqregion.h index e8590cbdb..ff56ad665 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqregion.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqregion.h @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public: TQRegion(); TQRegion( int x, int y, int w, int h, RegionType = Rectangle ); TQRegion( const TQRect &, RegionType = Rectangle ); - TQRegion( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=FALSE ); + TQRegion( const TQPointArray &, bool winding=false ); TQRegion( const TQRegion & ); TQRegion( const TQBitmap & ); ~TQRegion(); @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public: #elif defined(TQ_WS_X11) Region handle() const { if(!data->rgn) updateX11Region(); return data->rgn; } #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - RgnHandle handle(bool require_rgn=FALSE) const; + RgnHandle handle(bool require_rgn=false) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_DATASTREAM diff --git a/src/kernel/tqregion_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqregion_x11.cpp index a42b0f11e..4866ff539 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqregion_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqregion_x11.cpp @@ -1324,13 +1324,13 @@ static bool EqualRegion( TQRegionPrivate *r1, TQRegionPrivate *r2 ) { int i; - if( r1->numRects != r2->numRects ) return FALSE; - else if( r1->numRects == 0 ) return TRUE; + if( r1->numRects != r2->numRects ) return false; + else if( r1->numRects == 0 ) return true; else if ( r1->extents.left() != r2->extents.left() || r1->extents.right() != r2->extents.right() || r1->extents.top() != r2->extents.top() || r1->extents.bottom() != r2->extents.bottom() ) - return FALSE; + return false; else { TQRect *rr1 = r1->rects.data(); TQRect *rr2 = r2->rects.data(); @@ -1339,10 +1339,10 @@ static bool EqualRegion( TQRegionPrivate *r1, TQRegionPrivate *r2 ) rr1->right() != rr2->right() || rr1->top() != rr2->top() || rr1->bottom() != rr2->bottom() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } static bool PointInRegion( TQRegionPrivate *pRegion, int x, int y ) @@ -1350,15 +1350,15 @@ static bool PointInRegion( TQRegionPrivate *pRegion, int x, int y ) int i; if (pRegion->numRects == 0) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!pRegion->extents.contains(x, y)) - return FALSE; + return false; for (i=0; i<pRegion->numRects; i++) { if (pRegion->rects[i].contains(x, y)) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } static bool RectInRegion(TQRegionPrivate *region, @@ -1374,10 +1374,10 @@ static bool RectInRegion(TQRegionPrivate *region, if ((region->numRects == 0) || !EXTENTCHECK(®ion->extents, prect)) return(RectangleOut); - partOut = FALSE; - partIn = FALSE; + partOut = false; + partIn = false; - /* can stop when both partOut and partIn are TRUE, or we reach prect->y2 */ + /* can stop when both partOut and partIn are true, or we reach prect->y2 */ for (pbox = region->rects.data(), pboxEnd = pbox + region->numRects; pbox < pboxEnd; pbox++) @@ -1388,7 +1388,7 @@ static bool RectInRegion(TQRegionPrivate *region, if (pbox->top() > ry) { - partOut = TRUE; /* missed part of rectangle above */ + partOut = true; /* missed part of rectangle above */ if (partIn || (pbox->top() > prect->bottom())) break; ry = pbox->top(); /* x guaranteed to be == prect->x1 */ @@ -1399,14 +1399,14 @@ static bool RectInRegion(TQRegionPrivate *region, if (pbox->left() > rx) { - partOut = TRUE; /* missed part of rectangle to left */ + partOut = true; /* missed part of rectangle to left */ if (partIn) break; } if (pbox->left() <= prect->right()) { - partIn = TRUE; /* definitely overlap */ + partIn = true; /* definitely overlap */ if (partOut) break; } @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ static int PtsToRegion(int numFullPtBlocks, int iCurPtBlock, } reg->numRects = numRects; - return(TRUE); + return(true); } /* @@ -2193,7 +2193,7 @@ static TQRegionPrivate *PolygonRegion(TQPoint *Pts, int Count, int rule) EdgeTableEntry AET; /* header node for AET */ EdgeTableEntry *pETEs; /* EdgeTableEntries pool */ ScanLineListBlock SLLBlock; /* header for scanlinelist */ - int fixWAET = FALSE; + int fixWAET = false; POINTBLOCK FirstPtBlock, *curPtBlock; /* PtBlock buffers */ POINTBLOCK *tmpPtBlock; int numFullPtBlocks = 0; @@ -2325,7 +2325,7 @@ static TQRegionPrivate *PolygonRegion(TQPoint *Pts, int Count, int rule) */ if (InsertionSort(&AET) || fixWAET) { computeWAET(&AET); - fixWAET = FALSE; + fixWAET = false; } } } @@ -2434,7 +2434,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion() { if ( !empty_region ) { // avoid too many allocs tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_empty_region ); - empty_region = new TQRegion( TRUE ); + empty_region = new TQRegion( true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( empty_region ); } data = empty_region->data; @@ -2470,7 +2470,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQRect &r, RegionType t ) if ( r.isEmpty() ) { if ( !empty_region ) { // avoid too many allocs tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_empty_region ); - empty_region = new TQRegion( TRUE ); + empty_region = new TQRegion( true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( empty_region ); } data = empty_region->data; @@ -2478,7 +2478,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQRect &r, RegionType t ) } else { data = new TQRegionData; TQ_CHECK_PTR( data ); - data->is_null = FALSE; + data->is_null = false; data->rgn = 0; data->xrectangles = 0; if ( t == Rectangle ) { // rectangular region @@ -2496,7 +2496,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQRect &r, RegionType t ) /*! Constructs a polygon region from the point array \a a. - If \a winding is TRUE, the polygon region is filled using the + If \a winding is true, the polygon region is filled using the winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm is used. @@ -2509,7 +2509,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQPointArray &a, bool winding ) if (a.size() > 2) { data = new TQRegionData; TQ_CHECK_PTR( data ); - data->is_null = FALSE; + data->is_null = false; data->rgn = 0; data->xrectangles = 0; data->region = PolygonRegion( (TQPoint*)a.data(), a.size(), @@ -2517,7 +2517,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQPointArray &a, bool winding ) } else { if ( !empty_region ) { tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_empty_region ); - empty_region = new TQRegion( TRUE ); + empty_region = new TQRegion( true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( empty_region ); } data = empty_region->data; @@ -2552,7 +2552,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQBitmap & bm ) if ( bm.isNull() ) { if ( !empty_region ) { // avoid too many allocs tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_empty_region ); - empty_region = new TQRegion( TRUE ); + empty_region = new TQRegion( true ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( empty_region ); } data = empty_region->data; @@ -2560,7 +2560,7 @@ TQRegion::TQRegion( const TQBitmap & bm ) } else { data = new TQRegionData; TQ_CHECK_PTR( data ); - data->is_null = FALSE; + data->is_null = false; data->rgn = 0; data->xrectangles = 0; data->region = qt_bitmapToRegion(bm); @@ -2618,8 +2618,8 @@ TQRegion TQRegion::copy() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the region is a null region; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the region is a null region; otherwise returns + false. A null region is a region that has not been initialized. A null region is always empty. @@ -2634,7 +2634,7 @@ bool TQRegion::isNull() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the region is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. An + Returns true if the region is empty; otherwise returns false. An empty region is a region that contains no points. Example: @@ -2642,16 +2642,16 @@ bool TQRegion::isNull() const TQRegion r1( 10, 10, 20, 20 ); TQRegion r2( 40, 40, 20, 20 ); TQRegion r3; - r1.isNull(); // FALSE - r1.isEmpty(); // FALSE - r3.isNull(); // TRUE - r3.isEmpty(); // TRUE + r1.isNull(); // false + r1.isEmpty(); // false + r3.isNull(); // true + r3.isEmpty(); // true r3 = r1.intersect( r2 ); // r3 = intersection of r1 and r2 - r3.isNull(); // FALSE - r3.isEmpty(); // TRUE + r3.isNull(); // false + r3.isEmpty(); // true r3 = r1.unite( r2 ); // r3 = union of r1 and r2 - r3.isNull(); // FALSE - r3.isEmpty(); // FALSE + r3.isNull(); // false + r3.isEmpty(); // false \endcode \sa isNull() @@ -2664,8 +2664,8 @@ bool TQRegion::isEmpty() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the region contains the point \a p; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the region contains the point \a p; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQRegion::contains( const TQPoint &p ) const @@ -2676,8 +2676,8 @@ bool TQRegion::contains( const TQPoint &p ) const /*! \overload - Returns TRUE if the region overlaps the rectangle \a r; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the region overlaps the rectangle \a r; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQRegion::contains( const TQRect &r ) const @@ -2715,7 +2715,7 @@ void TQRegion::translate( int dx, int dy ) TQRegion TQRegion::unite( const TQRegion &r ) const { - TQRegion result( FALSE ); + TQRegion result( false ); UnionRegion( data->region, r.data->region, result.data->region ); return result; } @@ -2730,7 +2730,7 @@ TQRegion TQRegion::unite( const TQRegion &r ) const TQRegion TQRegion::intersect( const TQRegion &r ) const { - TQRegion result( FALSE ); + TQRegion result( false ); IntersectRegion( data->region, r.data->region, result.data->region ); return result; } @@ -2746,7 +2746,7 @@ TQRegion TQRegion::intersect( const TQRegion &r ) const TQRegion TQRegion::subtract( const TQRegion &r ) const { - TQRegion result( FALSE ); + TQRegion result( false ); SubtractRegion( data->region, r.data->region, result.data->region ); return result; } @@ -2762,7 +2762,7 @@ TQRegion TQRegion::subtract( const TQRegion &r ) const TQRegion TQRegion::eor( const TQRegion &r ) const { - TQRegion result( FALSE ); + TQRegion result( false ); XorRegion( data->region, r.data->region, result.data->region ); return result; } @@ -2806,7 +2806,7 @@ TQMemArray<TQRect> TQRegion::rects() const */ void TQRegion::setRects( const TQRect *rects, int num ) { - *this = TQRegion( FALSE ); + *this = TQRegion( false ); if ( !rects || (num == 1 && rects->isEmpty()) ) num = 0; @@ -2828,21 +2828,21 @@ void TQRegion::setRects( const TQRect *rects, int num ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the region is equal to \a r; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the region is equal to \a r; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQRegion::operator==( const TQRegion &r ) const { return data == r.data ? - TRUE : EqualRegion( data->region, r.data->region ); + true : EqualRegion( data->region, r.data->region ); } /*! \fn bool TQRegion::operator!=( const TQRegion &r ) const - Returns TRUE if the region is different from \a r; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the region is different from \a r; otherwise + returns false. */ /* diff --git a/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp b/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp index 98fbc8f53..eddb23761 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ const int border_tolerance = 2; static inline bool is_printer( TQPainter *p ) { if ( !p || !p->device() ) - return FALSE; + return false; return p->device()->devType() == TQInternal::Printer; } @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ static inline int scale( int value, TQPainter *painter ) inline bool isBreakable( TQTextString *string, int pos ) { if (string->at(pos).nobreak) - return FALSE; + return false; return (pos < string->length()-1 && string->at(pos+1).softBreak); } @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ void TQTextCommandHistory::addCommand( TQTextCommand *cmd ) { if ( current < (int)history.count() - 1 ) { TQPtrList<TQTextCommand> commands; - commands.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + commands.setAutoDelete( false ); for( int i = 0; i <= current; ++i ) { commands.insert( i, history.at( 0 ) ); @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ void TQTextCommandHistory::addCommand( TQTextCommand *cmd ) commands.append( cmd ); history.clear(); history = commands; - history.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + history.setAutoDelete( true ); } else { history.append( cmd ); } @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ TQTextCursor *TQTextDeleteCommand::unexecute( TQTextCursor *c ) cursor.setParagraph( s ); cursor.setIndex( index ); TQString str = TQTextString::toString( text ); - cursor.insert( str, TRUE, &text ); + cursor.insert( str, true, &text ); if ( c ) *c = cursor; cursor.setParagraph( s ); @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ TQTextCursor *TQTextDeleteCommand::unexecute( TQTextCursor *c ) s = cursor.paragraph(); while ( s ) { s->format(); - s->setChanged( TRUE ); + s->setChanged( true ); if ( s == c->paragraph() ) break; s = s->next(); @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ TQTextCursor *TQTextStyleCommand::unexecute( TQTextCursor *c ) TQTextCursor::TQTextCursor( TQTextDocument *d ) : idx( 0 ), tmpX( -1 ), ox( 0 ), oy( 0 ), - valid( TRUE ) + valid( true ) { para = d ? d->firstParagraph() : 0; } @@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::invalidateNested() void TQTextCursor::insert( const TQString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQTextStringChar> *formatting ) { tmpX = -1; - bool justInsert = TRUE; + bool justInsert = true; TQString s( str ); #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( checkNewLine ) { @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::insert( const TQString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQ for ( int i = 0; i < (int)s.length(); ++i ) { if ( formatting->at( i ).format() ) { formatting->at( i ).format()->addRef(); - para->string()->setFormat( idx + i, formatting->at( i ).format(), TRUE ); + para->string()->setFormat( idx + i, formatting->at( i ).format(), true ); } } } @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::insert( const TQString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQ for ( int i = 0; i < len; ++i ) { if ( formatting->at( i + lastIndex ).format() ) { formatting->at( i + lastIndex ).format()->addRef(); - para->string()->setFormat( i + idx, formatting->at( i + lastIndex ).format(), TRUE ); + para->string()->setFormat( i + idx, formatting->at( i + lastIndex ).format(), true ); } } lastIndex += len; @@ -570,15 +570,15 @@ void TQTextCursor::insert( const TQString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQ start = end; // next start is at the end of this line idx += len; // increase the index of the cursor to the end of the inserted text if ( s[end] == '\n' ) { // if at the end was a line break, break the line - splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( FALSE, TRUE ); + splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( false, true ); para->setEndState( -1 ); - para->prev()->format( -1, FALSE ); + para->prev()->format( -1, false ); lastIndex++; } } while ( end < (int)s.length() ); - para->format( -1, FALSE ); + para->format( -1, false ); int dy = para->rect().y() + para->rect().height() - y; TQTextParagraph *p = para; p->setParagId( p->prev() ? p->prev()->paragId() + 1 : 0 ); @@ -593,11 +593,11 @@ void TQTextCursor::insert( const TQString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQ } int h = para->rect().height(); - para->format( -1, TRUE ); + para->format( -1, true ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) - para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; + para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = true; fixCursorPosition(); } @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool str = s; if ( pos.y() >= r.y() && pos.y() <= r.y() + r.height() ) break; - if ( loosePlacing == TRUE && !s->next() ) { + if ( loosePlacing && !s->next() ) { #ifdef TQ_WS_MACX pos.setX( s->rect().x() + s->rect().width() ); #endif @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool } if ( !s || !str ) - return FALSE; + return false; s = str; @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool cy = s->lineY( i ); ch = s->lineHeight( i ); if ( !chr ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( pos.y() <= y + cy + ch ) break; } @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool int cw; int curpos = -1; int dist = 10000000; - bool inCustom = FALSE; + bool inCustom = false; while ( i < nextLine ) { chr = s->at(i); int cpos = x + chr->x; @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool if ( chr->isCustom() && chr->customItem()->isNested() ) { if ( pos.x() >= cpos && pos.x() <= cpos + cw && pos.y() >= y + cy && pos.y() <= y + cy + chr->height() ) { - inCustom = TRUE; + inCustom = true; curpos = i; break; } @@ -751,20 +751,20 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool cpos += cw; int d = cpos - pos.x(); bool dm = d < 0 ? !chr->rightToLeft : chr->rightToLeft; - if ( ( matchBetweenCharacters == TRUE && (TQABS( d ) < dist || (dist == d && dm == TRUE )) && para->string()->validCursorPosition( i ) ) || - ( matchBetweenCharacters == FALSE && ( d == 0 || dm == TRUE ) ) ) { + if ( ( matchBetweenCharacters && (TQABS( d ) < dist || (dist == d && dm)) && para->string()->validCursorPosition( i ) ) || + ( !matchBetweenCharacters && ( d == 0 || dm ) ) ) { dist = TQABS( d ); - if ( !link || ( pos.x() >= x + chr->x && ( loosePlacing == TRUE || pos.x() < cpos ) ) ) + if ( !link || ( pos.x() >= x + chr->x && ( loosePlacing || pos.x() < cpos ) ) ) curpos = i; } } i++; } if ( curpos == -1 ) { - if ( loosePlacing == TRUE ) + if ( loosePlacing ) curpos = s->length()-1; else - return FALSE; + return false; } setIndex( curpos ); @@ -773,26 +773,26 @@ bool TQTextCursor::place( const TQPoint &p, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool TQTextDocument *oldDoc = para->document(); gotoIntoNested( pos ); if ( oldDoc == para->document() ) - return TRUE; + return true; TQPoint p( pos.x() - offsetX(), pos.y() - offsetY() ); if ( !place( p, document()->firstParagraph(), link ) ) pop(); } #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCursor::processNesting( Operation op ) { if ( !para->document() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextDocument* doc = para->document(); push(); ox = para->at( idx )->x; int bl, y; para->lineHeightOfChar( idx, &bl, &y ); oy = y + para->rect().y(); - bool ok = FALSE; + bool ok = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM switch ( op ) { @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::processNesting( Operation op ) ok = para->at( idx )->customItem()->enter( this, doc, para, idx, ox, oy ); break; case EnterEnd: - ok = para->at( idx )->customItem()->enter( this, doc, para, idx, ox, oy, TRUE ); + ok = para->at( idx )->customItem()->enter( this, doc, para, idx, ox, oy, true ); break; case Next: ok = para->at( idx )->customItem()->next( this, doc, para, idx, ox, oy ); @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::gotoPreviousWord( bool onlySpace ) gotoPreviousLetter(); tmpX = -1; TQTextString *s = para->string(); - bool allowSame = FALSE; + bool allowSame = false; if ( idx == ((int)s->length()-1) ) return; for ( int i = idx; i >= 0; --i ) { @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::gotoPreviousWord( bool onlySpace ) return; } if ( !allowSame && !is_seperator( s->at( i ).c, onlySpace ) ) - allowSame = TRUE; + allowSame = true; } idx = 0; } @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::gotoNextWord( bool onlySpace ) { tmpX = -1; TQTextString *s = para->string(); - bool allowSame = FALSE; + bool allowSame = false; for ( int i = idx; i < (int)s->length(); ++i ) { if ( !is_seperator( s->at( i ).c, onlySpace ) ) { if ( !allowSame ) @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::gotoNextWord( bool onlySpace ) return; } if ( !allowSame && is_seperator( s->at( i ).c, onlySpace ) ) - allowSame = TRUE; + allowSame = true; } @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( bool ind, bool updateIds ) TQTextParagraph *n = para->next(); TQTextParagraph *s = para->document()->createParagraph( para->document(), para, n, updateIds ); if ( f ) - s->setFormat( 0, 1, f, TRUE ); + s->setFormat( 0, 1, f, true ); s->copyParagData( para ); if ( ind ) { int oi, ni; @@ -1185,7 +1185,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( bool ind, bool updateIds ) TQTextParagraph *p = para->prev(); TQTextParagraph *s = para->document()->createParagraph( para->document(), p, para, updateIds ); if ( f ) - s->setFormat( 0, 1, f, TRUE ); + s->setFormat( 0, 1, f, true ); s->copyParagData( para ); if ( ind ) { s->indent(); @@ -1199,10 +1199,10 @@ void TQTextCursor::splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( bool ind, bool updateIds ) TQTextParagraph *s = para->document()->createParagraph( para->document(), para, n, updateIds ); s->copyParagData( para ); s->remove( 0, 1 ); - s->append( str, TRUE ); + s->append( str, true ); for ( uint i = 0; i < str.length(); ++i ) { TQTextStringChar* tsc = para->at( idx + i ); - s->setFormat( i, 1, tsc->format(), TRUE ); + s->setFormat( i, 1, tsc->format(), true ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM if ( tsc->isCustom() ) { TQTextCustomItem * item = tsc->customItem(); @@ -1236,18 +1236,18 @@ bool TQTextCursor::remove() int next = para->string()->nextCursorPosition( idx ); para->remove( idx, next-idx ); int h = para->rect().height(); - para->format( -1, TRUE ); + para->format( -1, true ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) - para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; - return FALSE; + para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = true; + return false; } else if ( para->next() ) { para->join( para->next() ); invalidateNested(); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /* needed to implement backspace the correct way */ @@ -1268,19 +1268,19 @@ bool TQTextCursor::removePreviousChar() int h = para->rect().height(); // shouldn't be needed, just to make sure. fixCursorPosition(); - para->format( -1, TRUE ); + para->format( -1, true ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) - para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; - return FALSE; + para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = true; + return false; } else if ( para->prev() ) { para = para->prev(); para->join( para->next() ); invalidateNested(); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQTextCursor::indent() @@ -1342,18 +1342,18 @@ TQTextDocument::TQTextDocument( TQTextDocument *p ) void TQTextDocument::init() { - oTextValid = TRUE; - mightHaveCustomItems = FALSE; + oTextValid = true; + mightHaveCustomItems = false; if ( par ) par->insertChild( this ); pProcessor = 0; - useFC = TRUE; + useFC = true; pFormatter = 0; indenter = 0; fParag = 0; txtFormat = TQt::AutoText; - preferRichText = FALSE; - pages = FALSE; + preferRichText = false; + pages = false; focusIndicator.parag = 0; minw = 0; wused = 0; @@ -1367,15 +1367,15 @@ void TQTextDocument::init() #endif contxt = TQString::null; - underlLinks = par ? par->underlLinks : TRUE; + underlLinks = par ? par->underlLinks : true; backBrush = 0; buf_pixmap = 0; - nextDoubleBuffered = FALSE; + nextDoubleBuffered = false; if ( par ) withoutDoubleBuffer = par->withoutDoubleBuffer; else - withoutDoubleBuffer = FALSE; + withoutDoubleBuffer = false; lParag = fParag = createParagraph( this, 0, 0 ); @@ -1393,9 +1393,9 @@ void TQTextDocument::init() selectionColors[ Standard ] = TQApplication::palette().color( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Highlight ); - selectionText[ Standard ] = TRUE; - selectionText[ IMSelectionText ] = TRUE; - selectionText[ IMCompositionText ] = FALSE; + selectionText[ Standard ] = true; + selectionText[ IMSelectionText ] = true; + selectionText[ IMCompositionText ] = false; commandHistory = new TQTextCommandHistory( 100 ); tStopWidth = formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->width( 'x' ) * 8; } @@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::clear( bool createEmptyParag ) focusIndicator.parag = 0; selections.clear(); oText = TQString::null; - oTextValid = FALSE; + oTextValid = false; } int TQTextDocument::widthUsed() const @@ -1485,14 +1485,14 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setMinimumWidth( int needed, int used, TQTextParagraph *p ) wused = TQMAX( wused, used ); wused = TQMAX( wused, minw ); cw = TQMAX( minw, cw ); - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQTextDocument::setPlainText( const TQString &text ) { - preferRichText = FALSE; + preferRichText = false; clear(); - oTextValid = TRUE; + oTextValid = true; oText = text; int lastNl = 0; @@ -1576,33 +1576,33 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQTextDocumentTag { if ( !textEditMode && curpar && curpar->length()>1 && curpar->at( curpar->length()-2)->c == TQChar_linesep ) \ curpar->remove( curpar->length()-2, 1 ); \ curpar = createParagraph( this, curpar, curpar->next() ); styles.append( vec ); vec = 0;} \ - hasNewPar = TRUE; \ - curpar->rtext = TRUE; \ + hasNewPar = true; \ + curpar->rtext = true; \ curpar->align = curtag.alignment; \ curpar->lstyle = curtag.liststyle; \ curpar->litem = ( curtag.style->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem ); \ curpar->str->setDirection( (TQChar::Direction)curtag.direction ); \ - space = TRUE; \ + space = true; \ tabExpansionColumn = 0; \ delete vec; vec = new TQPtrVector<TQStyleSheetItem>( (uint)tags.count() + 1); \ int i = 0; \ for ( TQValueStack<TQTextDocumentTag>::Iterator it = tags.begin(); it != tags.end(); ++it ) \ vec->insert( i++, (*it).style ); \ vec->insert( i, curtag.style ); \ - }while(FALSE); + }while(false); void TQTextDocument::setRichText( const TQString &text, const TQString &context, const TQTextFormat *initialFormat ) { - preferRichText = TRUE; + preferRichText = true; if ( !context.isEmpty() ) setContext( context ); clear(); fParag = lParag = createParagraph( this ); - oTextValid = TRUE; + oTextValid = true; oText = text; setRichTextInternal( text, 0, initialFormat ); - fParag->rtext = TRUE; + fParag->rtext = true; } void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cursor, const TQTextFormat *initialFormat ) @@ -1616,10 +1616,10 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu if ( bodyText.isValid() ) initag.format.setColor( bodyText ); TQTextDocumentTag curtag = initag; - bool space = TRUE; - bool canMergeLi = FALSE; + bool space = true; + bool canMergeLi = false; - bool textEditMode = FALSE; + bool textEditMode = false; int tabExpansionColumn = 0; const TQChar* doc = text.unicode(); @@ -1631,21 +1631,21 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu TQTextParagraph* stylesPar = curpar; TQPtrVector<TQStyleSheetItem>* vec = 0; TQPtrList< TQPtrVector<TQStyleSheetItem> > styles; - styles.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + styles.setAutoDelete( true ); if ( cursor ) { cursor->splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph(); TQTextCursor tmp = *cursor; tmp.gotoPreviousLetter(); stylesPar = curpar = tmp.paragraph(); - hasNewPar = TRUE; - textEditMode = TRUE; + hasNewPar = true; + textEditMode = true; } else { NEWPAR; } - // set rtext spacing to FALSE for the initial paragraph. - curpar->rtext = FALSE; + // set rtext spacing to false for the initial paragraph. + curpar->rtext = false; TQString wellKnownTags = "br hr wsp table qt body meta title"; @@ -1654,7 +1654,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu if ( !hasPrefix( doc, length, pos+1, TQChar('/') ) ) { // open tag TQMap<TQString, TQString> attr; - bool emptyTag = FALSE; + bool emptyTag = false; TQString tagname = parseOpenTag(doc, length, pos, attr, emptyTag); if ( tagname.isEmpty() ) continue; // nothing we could do with this, probably parse error @@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu p, and we do not want new blocks inside non-empty lis. Plus we want to merge empty lis sometimes. */ if( nstyle->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem ) { - canMergeLi = TRUE; + canMergeLi = true; } else if ( nstyle->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock ) { while ( curtag.style->name() == "p" ) { if ( tags.isEmpty() ) @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu if ( curtag.style->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem ) { // we are in a li and a new block comes along if ( nstyle->name() == "ul" || nstyle->name() == "ol" ) - hasNewPar = FALSE; // we want an empty li (like most browsers) + hasNewPar = false; // we want an empty li (like most browsers) if ( !hasNewPar ) { /* do not add new blocks inside non-empty lis */ @@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu comes along, merge them */ nstyle = curtag.style; } - canMergeLi = FALSE; + canMergeLi = false; } } } @@ -1711,25 +1711,25 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM TQTextCustomItem* custom = 0; #else - bool custom = FALSE; + bool custom = false; #endif // some well-known tags, some have a nstyle, some not if ( wellKnownTags.find( tagname ) != -1 ) { if ( tagname == "br" ) { - emptyTag = space = TRUE; + emptyTag = space = true; int index = TQMAX( curpar->length(),1) - 1; TQTextFormat format = curtag.format.makeTextFormat( nstyle, attr, scaleFontsFactor ); curpar->append( TQChar_linesep ); curpar->setFormat( index, 1, &format ); hasNewPar = false; } else if ( tagname == "hr" ) { - emptyTag = space = TRUE; + emptyTag = space = true; #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM custom = sheet_->tag( tagname, attr, contxt, *factory_ , emptyTag, this ); #endif } else if ( tagname == "table" ) { - emptyTag = space = TRUE; + emptyTag = space = true; #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM TQTextFormat format = curtag.format.makeTextFormat( nstyle, attr, scaleFontsFactor ); curpar->setAlignment( curtag.alignment ); @@ -1785,7 +1785,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu // end qt- and body-tag handling } else if ( tagname == "meta" ) { if ( attr["name"] == "qrichtext" && attr["content"] == "1" ) - textEditMode = TRUE; + textEditMode = true; } else if ( tagname == "title" ) { TQString title; while ( pos < length ) { @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu anchorName = TQString::null; } registerCustomItem( custom, curpar ); - hasNewPar = FALSE; + hasNewPar = false; #endif } else if ( !emptyTag ) { /* if we do nesting, push curtag on the stack, @@ -1932,7 +1932,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu if ( attr.contains( "style" ) ) { TQString a = attr["style"]; - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; for ( int s = 0; ok && s < a.contains(';')+1; s++ ) { TQString style = a.section( ';', s, s ); if ( style.startsWith("margin-top:" ) && style.endsWith("px") ) @@ -1985,7 +1985,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu if ( needNewPar ) { if ( textEditMode && (tagname == "p" || tagname == "div" ) ) // preserve empty paragraphs - hasNewPar = FALSE; + hasNewPar = false; NEWPAR; } } @@ -2026,9 +2026,9 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu */ if ( curtag.wsm == TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNormal && s.length() > 4096 ) do { if ( doc[l] == '\n' ) { - hasNewPar = FALSE; // for a new paragraph ... + hasNewPar = false; // for a new paragraph ... NEWPAR; - hasNewPar = FALSE; // ... and make it non-reusable + hasNewPar = false; // ... and make it non-reusable c = '\n'; // make sure we break below break; } @@ -2049,17 +2049,17 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cu s += c; } if ( !s.isEmpty() && curtag.style->displayMode() != TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayNone ) { - hasNewPar = FALSE; + hasNewPar = false; int index = TQMAX( curpar->length(),1) - 1; curpar->append( s ); if (curtag.wsm != TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNormal) { TQTextString *str = curpar->string(); for (uint i = index; i < index + s.length(); ++i) - str->at(i).nobreak = TRUE; + str->at(i).nobreak = true; } TQTextFormat* f = formatCollection()->format( &curtag.format ); - curpar->setFormat( index, s.length(), f, FALSE ); // do not use collection because we have done that already + curpar->setFormat( index, s.length(), f, false ); // do not use collection because we have done that already f->ref += s.length() -1; // that what friends are for... if ( !curtag.anchorHref.isEmpty() ) { for ( int i = 0; i < int(s.length()); i++ ) @@ -2113,7 +2113,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setRichTextMarginsInternal( TQPtrList< TQPtrVector<TQStyleS int i, mar; TQStyleSheetItem* mainStyle = curStyle->size() ? (*curStyle)[curStyle->size()-1] : 0; if ( mainStyle && mainStyle->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem ) - stylesPar->setListItem( TRUE ); + stylesPar->setListItem( true ); int numLists = 0; for ( i = 0; i < (int)curStyle->size(); ++i ) { if ( (*curStyle)[ i ]->displayMode() == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::plainText() const while ( p ) { if ( !p->mightHaveCustomItems ) { const TQTextString *ts = p->string(); - s = ts->toString(); // with FALSE we don't fix spaces (nbsp) + s = ts->toString(); // with false we don't fix spaces (nbsp) } else { for ( int i = 0; i < p->length() - 1; ++i ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM @@ -2575,7 +2575,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) { TQMap<int, TQTextDocumentSelection>::Iterator it = selections.find( id ); if ( it == selections.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextDocumentSelection &sel = *it; TQTextCursor start = sel.startCursor; @@ -2584,15 +2584,15 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) if ( start == end ) { removeSelection( id ); setSelectionStart( id, cursor ); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( sel.endCursor.paragraph() == end.paragraph() ) { setSelectionEndHelper( id, sel, start, end ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - bool inSelection = FALSE; + bool inSelection = false; TQTextCursor c( this ); TQTextCursor tmp = sel.startCursor; if ( sel.swapped ) @@ -2601,32 +2601,32 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) TQTextCursor tmp2 = cursor; tmp2.restoreState(); c.setParagraph( tmp.paragraph()->paragId() < tmp2.paragraph()->paragId() ? tmp.paragraph() : tmp2.paragraph() ); - bool hadStart = FALSE; - bool hadEnd = FALSE; - bool hadStartParag = FALSE; - bool hadEndParag = FALSE; - bool hadOldStart = FALSE; - bool hadOldEnd = FALSE; - bool leftSelection = FALSE; - sel.swapped = FALSE; + bool hadStart = false; + bool hadEnd = false; + bool hadStartParag = false; + bool hadEndParag = false; + bool hadOldStart = false; + bool hadOldEnd = false; + bool leftSelection = false; + sel.swapped = false; for ( ;; ) { if ( c == start ) - hadStart = TRUE; + hadStart = true; if ( c == end ) - hadEnd = TRUE; + hadEnd = true; if ( c.paragraph() == start.paragraph() ) - hadStartParag = TRUE; + hadStartParag = true; if ( c.paragraph() == end.paragraph() ) - hadEndParag = TRUE; + hadEndParag = true; if ( c == sel.startCursor ) - hadOldStart = TRUE; + hadOldStart = true; if ( c == sel.endCursor ) - hadOldEnd = TRUE; + hadOldEnd = true; if ( !sel.swapped && ( ( hadEnd && !hadStart ) || ( hadEnd && hadStart && start.paragraph() == end.paragraph() && start.index() > end.index() ) ) ) - sel.swapped = TRUE; + sel.swapped = true; if ( ( c == end && hadStartParag ) || ( c == start && hadEndParag ) ) { @@ -2641,9 +2641,9 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) if ( inSelection && ( ( c == end && hadStart ) || ( c == start && hadEnd ) ) ) - leftSelection = TRUE; + leftSelection = true; else if ( !leftSelection && !inSelection && ( hadStart || hadEnd ) ) - inSelection = TRUE; + inSelection = true; bool noSelectionAnymore = hadOldStart && hadOldEnd && leftSelection && !inSelection && !c.paragraph()->hasSelection( id ) && c.atParagEnd(); c.paragraph()->removeSelection( id ); @@ -2664,7 +2664,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) } if ( leftSelection ) - inSelection = FALSE; + inSelection = false; if ( noSelectionAnymore ) break; @@ -2694,7 +2694,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) setSelectionEndHelper( id, sel, start, end ); - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQTextDocument::selectAll( int id ) @@ -2702,7 +2702,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::selectAll( int id ) removeSelection( id ); TQTextDocumentSelection sel; - sel.swapped = FALSE; + sel.swapped = false; TQTextCursor c( this ); c.setParagraph( fParag ); @@ -2728,7 +2728,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::selectAll( int id ) bool TQTextDocument::removeSelection( int id ) { if ( !selections.contains( id ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextDocumentSelection &sel = selections[ id ]; @@ -2748,7 +2748,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::removeSelection( int id ) p = start.paragraph(); p->removeSelection( id ); selections.remove( id ); - return TRUE; + return true; } TQString TQTextDocument::selectedText( int id, bool asRichText ) const @@ -2916,17 +2916,17 @@ void TQTextDocument::setFormat( int id, TQTextFormat *f, int flags ) c1.restoreState(); if ( c1.paragraph() == c2.paragraph() ) { - c1.paragraph()->setFormat( c1.index(), c2.index() - c1.index(), f, TRUE, flags ); + c1.paragraph()->setFormat( c1.index(), c2.index() - c1.index(), f, true, flags ); return; } - c1.paragraph()->setFormat( c1.index(), c1.paragraph()->length() - c1.index(), f, TRUE, flags ); + c1.paragraph()->setFormat( c1.index(), c1.paragraph()->length() - c1.index(), f, true, flags ); TQTextParagraph *p = c1.paragraph()->next(); while ( p && p != c2.paragraph() ) { - p->setFormat( 0, p->length(), f, TRUE, flags ); + p->setFormat( 0, p->length(), f, true, flags ); p = p->next(); } - c2.paragraph()->setFormat( 0, c2.index(), f, TRUE, flags ); + c2.paragraph()->setFormat( 0, c2.index(), f, true, flags ); } void TQTextDocument::removeSelectedText( int id, TQTextCursor *cursor ) @@ -2960,9 +2960,9 @@ void TQTextDocument::removeSelectedText( int id, TQTextCursor *cursor ) if ( c1.paragraph() == fParag && c1.index() == 0 && c2.paragraph() == lParag && c2.index() == lParag->length() - 1 ) - cursor->setValid( FALSE ); + cursor->setValid( false ); - bool didGoLeft = FALSE; + bool didGoLeft = false; if ( c1.index() == 0 && c1.paragraph() != fParag ) { cursor->gotoPreviousLetter(); didGoLeft = cursor->isValid(); @@ -3034,7 +3034,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::find( TQTextCursor& cursor, const TQString &expr, bool cs, removeSelection( Standard ); TQTextParagraph *p = 0; if ( expr.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; for (;;) { if ( p != cursor.paragraph() ) { p = cursor.paragraph(); @@ -3054,7 +3054,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::find( TQTextCursor& cursor, const TQString &expr, bool cs, setSelectionEnd( Standard, cursor ); if ( !forward ) cursor.setIndex( res ); - return TRUE; + return true; } start = res + (forward ? 1 : -1); } @@ -3069,7 +3069,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::find( TQTextCursor& cursor, const TQString &expr, bool cs, cursor.gotoPreviousLetter(); } } - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQTextDocument::setTextFormat( TQt::TextFormat f ) @@ -3088,14 +3088,14 @@ bool TQTextDocument::inSelection( int selId, const TQPoint &pos ) const { TQMap<int, TQTextDocumentSelection>::ConstIterator it = selections.find( selId ); if ( it == selections.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextDocumentSelection sel = *it; TQTextParagraph *startParag = sel.startCursor.paragraph(); TQTextParagraph *endParag = sel.endCursor.paragraph(); if ( sel.startCursor.paragraph() == sel.endCursor.paragraph() && sel.startCursor.paragraph()->selectionStart( selId ) == sel.endCursor.paragraph()->selectionEnd( selId ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( sel.endCursor.paragraph()->paragId() < sel.startCursor.paragraph()->paragId() ) { endParag = sel.startCursor.paragraph(); startParag = sel.endCursor.paragraph(); @@ -3104,14 +3104,14 @@ bool TQTextDocument::inSelection( int selId, const TQPoint &pos ) const TQTextParagraph *p = startParag; while ( p ) { if ( p->rect().contains( pos ) ) { - bool inSel = FALSE; + bool inSel = false; int selStart = p->selectionStart( selId ); int selEnd = p->selectionEnd( selId ); int y = 0; int h = 0; for ( int i = 0; i < p->length(); ++i ) { if ( i == selStart ) - inSel = TRUE; + inSel = true; if ( i == selEnd ) break; if ( p->at( i )->lineStart ) { @@ -3121,7 +3121,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::inSelection( int selId, const TQPoint &pos ) const if ( pos.y() - p->rect().y() >= y && pos.y() - p->rect().y() <= y + h ) { if ( inSel && pos.x() >= p->at( i )->x && pos.x() <= p->at( i )->x + p->at( i )->format()->width( p->at( i )->c ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -3132,7 +3132,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::inSelection( int selId, const TQPoint &pos ) const p = p->next(); } - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQTextDocument::doLayout( TQPainter *p, int w ) @@ -3199,13 +3199,13 @@ void TQTextDocument::draw( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &rect, const TQColorGroup } p->translate( 0, y ); if ( rect.isValid() ) - parag->paint( *p, cg, 0, FALSE, rect.x(), rect.y(), rect.width(), rect.height() ); + parag->paint( *p, cg, 0, false, rect.x(), rect.y(), rect.width(), rect.height() ); else - parag->paint( *p, cg, 0, FALSE ); + parag->paint( *p, cg, 0, false ); p->translate( 0, -y ); parag = parag->next(); if ( !flow()->isEmpty() ) - flow()->drawFloatingItems( p, rect.x(), rect.y(), rect.width(), rect.height(), cg, FALSE ); + flow()->drawFloatingItems( p, rect.x(), rect.y(), rect.width(), rect.height(), cg, false ); } TQTextFormat::setPainter(oldPainter); } @@ -3216,7 +3216,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::drawParagraph( TQPainter *p, TQTextParagraph *parag, int cx { TQPainter *painter = 0; if ( resetChanged ) - parag->setChanged( FALSE ); + parag->setChanged( false ); TQRect ir( parag->rect() ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM if (!parag->tableCell()) @@ -3252,7 +3252,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::drawParagraph( TQPainter *p, TQTextParagraph *parag, int cx painter->translate( -( ir.x() - parag->rect().x() ), -( ir.y() - parag->rect().y() ) ); - parag->paint( *painter, cg, drawCursor ? cursor : 0, TRUE, cx, cy, cw, ch ); + parag->paint( *painter, cg, drawCursor ? cursor : 0, true, cx, cy, cw, ch ); if ( uDoubleBuffer ) { delete painter; @@ -3262,19 +3262,19 @@ void TQTextDocument::drawParagraph( TQPainter *p, TQTextParagraph *parag, int cx painter->translate( -ir.x(), -ir.y() ); } - parag->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = FALSE; + parag->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = false; } TQTextParagraph *TQTextDocument::draw( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup &cg, bool onlyChanged, bool drawCursor, TQTextCursor *cursor, bool resetChanged ) { if ( withoutDoubleBuffer || ( par && par->withoutDoubleBuffer ) ) { - withoutDoubleBuffer = TRUE; + withoutDoubleBuffer = true; TQRect r; draw( p, r, cg ); return 0; } - withoutDoubleBuffer = FALSE; + withoutDoubleBuffer = false; if ( !firstParagraph() ) return 0; @@ -3328,7 +3328,7 @@ TQTextParagraph *TQTextDocument::draw( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int } if ( !flow()->isEmpty() ) { TQRect cr( cx, cy, cw, ch ); - flow()->drawFloatingItems( p, cr.x(), cr.y(), cr.width(), cr.height(), cg, FALSE ); + flow()->drawFloatingItems( p, cr.x(), cr.y(), cr.width(), cr.height(), cg, false ); } } @@ -3376,7 +3376,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::registerCustomItem( TQTextCustomItem *i, TQTextParagraph *p p->registerFloatingItem( i ); } if (i) i->setParagraph( p ); - p->mightHaveCustomItems = mightHaveCustomItems = TRUE; + p->mightHaveCustomItems = mightHaveCustomItems = true; } void TQTextDocument::unregisterCustomItem( TQTextCustomItem *i, TQTextParagraph *p ) @@ -3415,7 +3415,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) focusIndicator.len = 0; } } else { - focusIndicator.parag->setChanged( TRUE ); + focusIndicator.parag->setChanged( true ); } focusIndicator.href = TQString::null; focusIndicator.name = TQString::null; @@ -3426,7 +3426,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) while ( p ) { for ( int i = index; i < p->length(); ++i ) { if ( p->at( i )->isAnchor() ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; @@ -3434,7 +3434,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) focusIndicator.name = p->at( i )->anchorName(); while ( i < p->length() ) { if ( !p->at( i )->isAnchor() ) - return TRUE; + return true; focusIndicator.len++; i++; } @@ -3445,19 +3445,19 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) TQPtrList<TQTextTableCell> cells = t->tableCells(); // first try to continue TQTextTableCell *c; - bool resetCells = TRUE; + bool resetCells = true; for ( c = cells.first(); c; c = cells.next() ) { if ( c->richText()->hasFocusParagraph() ) { if ( c->richText()->focusNextPrevChild( next ) ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; focusIndicator.href = c->richText()->focusHref(); focusIndicator.name = c->richText()->focusName(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - resetCells = FALSE; + resetCells = false; c = cells.next(); break; } @@ -3468,13 +3468,13 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) c = cells.first(); for ( ; c; c = cells.next() ) { if ( c->richText()->focusNextPrevChild( next ) ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; focusIndicator.href = c->richText()->focusHref(); focusIndicator.name = c->richText()->focusName(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } } @@ -3492,7 +3492,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) while ( p ) { for ( int i = index; i >= 0; --i ) { if ( p->at( i )->isAnchor() ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; @@ -3501,7 +3501,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) while ( i >= -1 ) { if ( i < 0 || !p->at( i )->isAnchor() ) { focusIndicator.start++; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( i < 0 ) break; @@ -3516,19 +3516,19 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) TQPtrList<TQTextTableCell> cells = t->tableCells(); // first try to continue TQTextTableCell *c; - bool resetCells = TRUE; + bool resetCells = true; for ( c = cells.last(); c; c = cells.prev() ) { if ( c->richText()->hasFocusParagraph() ) { if ( c->richText()->focusNextPrevChild( next ) ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; focusIndicator.href = c->richText()->focusHref(); focusIndicator.name = c->richText()->focusName(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - resetCells = FALSE; + resetCells = false; c = cells.prev(); break; } @@ -3541,13 +3541,13 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) c = cells.last(); for ( ; c; c = cells.prev() ) { if ( c->richText()->focusNextPrevChild( next ) ) { - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); focusIndicator.parag = p; focusIndicator.start = i; focusIndicator.len = 0; focusIndicator.href = c->richText()->focusHref(); focusIndicator.name = c->richText()->focusName(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( cells.at() == 0 ) break; @@ -3564,7 +3564,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) focusIndicator.parag = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } int TQTextDocument::length() const @@ -3656,15 +3656,15 @@ int TQTextFormat::width( const TQString &str, int pos ) const TQTextString::TQTextString() { - bidiDirty = TRUE; - bidi = FALSE; - rightToLeft = FALSE; + bidiDirty = true; + bidi = false; + rightToLeft = false; dir = TQChar::DirON; } TQTextString::TQTextString( const TQTextString &s ) { - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; bidi = s.bidi; rightToLeft = s.rightToLeft; dir = s.dir; @@ -3695,14 +3695,14 @@ void TQTextString::insert( int index, const TQChar *unicode, int len, TQTextForm ch->x = 0; ch->lineStart = 0; ch->d.format = 0; - ch->nobreak = FALSE; + ch->nobreak = false; ch->type = TQTextStringChar::Regular; ch->d.format = f; ch->rightToLeft = 0; ch->c = unicode[i]; ++ch; } - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; } TQTextString::~TQTextString() @@ -3725,11 +3725,11 @@ void TQTextString::insert( int index, TQTextStringChar *c, bool doAddRefFormat ch.rightToLeft = 0; ch.d.format = 0; ch.type = TQTextStringChar::Regular; - ch.nobreak = FALSE; + ch.nobreak = false; if ( doAddRefFormat && c->format() ) c->format()->addRef(); ch.setFormat( c->format() ); - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; } int TQTextString::appendParagraphs( TQTextParagraph *start, TQTextParagraph *end ) @@ -3755,14 +3755,14 @@ int TQTextString::appendParagraphs( TQTextParagraph *start, TQTextParagraph *end d[i].lineStart = 0; d[i].rightToLeft = 0; d[i].type = TQTextStringChar::Regular; - d[i].nobreak = FALSE; + d[i].nobreak = false; d[i].d.format = src[i].format(); if (d[i].d.format) d[i].d.format->addRef(); } d[i].x = 0; d[i].lineStart = 0; - d[i].nobreak = FALSE; + d[i].nobreak = false; d[i].type = TQTextStringChar::Regular; d[i].d.format = 0; d[i].rightToLeft = 0; @@ -3770,7 +3770,7 @@ int TQTextString::appendParagraphs( TQTextParagraph *start, TQTextParagraph *end d += p->length(); } - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; return paragCount; } @@ -3796,7 +3796,7 @@ void TQTextString::truncate( int index ) } } data.truncate( index ); - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; } void TQTextString::remove( int index, int len ) @@ -3819,7 +3819,7 @@ void TQTextString::remove( int index, int len ) memmove( data.data() + index, data.data() + index + len, sizeof( TQTextStringChar ) * ( data.size() - index - len ) ); data.resize( data.size() - len, TQGArray::SpeedOptim ); - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; } void TQTextString::clear() @@ -3841,7 +3841,7 @@ void TQTextString::clear() } } data.resize( 0 ); - bidiDirty = TRUE; + bidiDirty = true; } void TQTextString::setFormat( int index, TQTextFormat *f, bool useCollection ) @@ -3855,10 +3855,10 @@ void TQTextString::setFormat( int index, TQTextFormat *f, bool useCollection ) void TQTextString::checkBidi() const { TQTextString *that = (TQTextString *)this; - that->bidiDirty = FALSE; + that->bidiDirty = false; int length = data.size(); if ( !length ) { - that->bidi = FALSE; + that->bidi = false; that->rightToLeft = dir == TQChar::DirR; return; } @@ -3877,7 +3877,7 @@ void TQTextString::checkBidi() const TQScriptItem *item = &textEngine.items[textEngine.items.size()-1]; unsigned char bidiLevel = item->analysis.bidiLevel; if ( bidiLevel ) - that->bidi = TRUE; + that->bidi = true; int pos = length-1; while ( ch >= start ) { if ( item->position > pos ) { @@ -3886,7 +3886,7 @@ void TQTextString::checkBidi() const Q_ASSERT( item < &textEngine.items[textEngine.items.size()] ); bidiLevel = item->analysis.bidiLevel; if ( bidiLevel ) - that->bidi = TRUE; + that->bidi = true; } ch->softBreak = ca->softBreak; ch->whiteSpace = ca->whiteSpace; @@ -3900,10 +3900,10 @@ void TQTextString::checkBidi() const } if ( dir == TQChar::DirR ) { - that->bidi = TRUE; - that->rightToLeft = TRUE; + that->bidi = true; + that->rightToLeft = true; } else if ( dir == TQChar::DirL ) { - that->rightToLeft = FALSE; + that->rightToLeft = false; } else { that->rightToLeft = (textEngine.direction == TQChar::DirR); } @@ -4051,9 +4051,9 @@ int TQTextString::width( int idx ) const TQTextParagraph::TQTextParagraph( TQTextDocument *d, TQTextParagraph *pr, TQTextParagraph *nx, bool updateIds ) : p( pr ), n( nx ), docOrPseudo( d ), - changed(FALSE), firstFormat(TRUE), firstPProcess(TRUE), needPreProcess(FALSE), fullWidth(TRUE), - lastInFrame(FALSE), visible(TRUE), breakable(TRUE), movedDown(FALSE), - mightHaveCustomItems(FALSE), hasdoc( d != 0 ), litem(FALSE), rtext(FALSE), + changed(false), firstFormat(true), firstPProcess(true), needPreProcess(false), fullWidth(true), + lastInFrame(false), visible(true), breakable(true), movedDown(false), + mightHaveCustomItems(false), hasdoc( d != 0 ), litem(false), rtext(false), align( 0 ), lstyle( TQStyleSheetItem::ListDisc ), invalid( 0 ), mSelections( 0 ), #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM mFloatingItems( 0 ), @@ -4184,14 +4184,14 @@ void TQTextParagraph::insert( int index, const TQChar *unicode, int len ) else str->insert( index, unicode, len, formatCollection()->defaultFormat() ); invalidate( index ); - needPreProcess = TRUE; + needPreProcess = true; } void TQTextParagraph::truncate( int index ) { str->truncate( index ); insert( length(), " " ); - needPreProcess = TRUE; + needPreProcess = true; } void TQTextParagraph::remove( int index, int len ) @@ -4208,7 +4208,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::remove( int index, int len ) #endif str->remove( index, len ); invalidate( 0 ); - needPreProcess = TRUE; + needPreProcess = true; } void TQTextParagraph::join( TQTextParagraph *s ) @@ -4225,12 +4225,12 @@ void TQTextParagraph::join( TQTextParagraph *s ) remove( length() - 1, 1 ); --start; } - append( s->str->toString(), TRUE ); + append( s->str->toString(), true ); for ( int i = 0; i < s->length(); ++i ) { if ( !hasdoc || document()->useFormatCollection() ) { s->str->at( i ).format()->addRef(); - str->setFormat( i + start, s->str->at( i ).format(), TRUE ); + str->setFormat( i + start, s->str->at( i ).format(), true ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM if ( s->str->at( i ).isCustom() ) { @@ -4258,15 +4258,15 @@ void TQTextParagraph::join( TQTextParagraph *s ) delete s; invalidate( 0 ); r.setHeight( oh ); - needPreProcess = TRUE; + needPreProcess = true; if ( n ) { TQTextParagraph *s = n; s->invalidate( 0 ); while ( s ) { s->id = s->p->id + 1; s->state = -1; - s->needPreProcess = TRUE; - s->changed = TRUE; + s->needPreProcess = true; + s->changed = true; s->invalidateStyleCache(); s = s->n; } @@ -4279,7 +4279,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::move( int &dy ) { if ( dy == 0 ) return; - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; r.moveBy( 0, dy ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM if ( mFloatingItems ) { @@ -4288,14 +4288,14 @@ void TQTextParagraph::move( int &dy ) } #endif if ( p ) - p->lastInFrame = TRUE; + p->lastInFrame = true; // do page breaks if required if ( hasdoc && document()->isPageBreakEnabled() ) { int shift; if ( ( shift = document()->formatter()->formatVertically( document(), this ) ) ) { if ( p ) - p->setChanged( TRUE ); + p->setChanged( true ); dy += shift; } } @@ -4310,17 +4310,17 @@ void TQTextParagraph::format( int start, bool doMove ) { document()->preProcessor()->process( document(), this, invalid <= 0 ? 0 : invalid ); } - needPreProcess = FALSE; + needPreProcess = false; if ( invalid == -1 ) return; r.moveTopLeft( TQPoint( documentX(), p ? p->r.y() + p->r.height() : documentY() ) ); if ( p ) - p->lastInFrame = FALSE; + p->lastInFrame = false; - movedDown = FALSE; - bool formattedAgain = FALSE; + movedDown = false; + bool formattedAgain = false; formatAgain: @@ -4384,7 +4384,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::format( int start, bool doMove ) if ( hasdoc && document()->isPageBreakEnabled() ) { int shift = document()->formatter()->formatVertically( document(), this ); if ( shift && !formattedAgain ) { - formattedAgain = TRUE; + formattedAgain = true; goto formatAgain; } } @@ -4395,20 +4395,20 @@ void TQTextParagraph::format( int start, bool doMove ) bool makeInvalid = p && p->lastInFrame; while ( s && dy ) { if ( !s->isFullWidth() ) - makeInvalid = TRUE; + makeInvalid = true; if ( makeInvalid ) s->invalidate( 0 ); s->move( dy ); if ( s->lastInFrame ) - makeInvalid = TRUE; + makeInvalid = true; s = s->n; } } - firstFormat = FALSE; - changed = TRUE; + firstFormat = false; + changed = true; invalid = -1; - //##### string()->setTextChanged( FALSE ); + //##### string()->setTextChanged( false ); } int TQTextParagraph::lineHeightOfChar( int i, int *bl, int *y ) const @@ -4532,7 +4532,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::setFormat( int index, int len, TQTextFormat *f, bool useCo for ( int i = 0; i < len; ++i ) { of = str->at( i + index ).format(); if ( !changed && ( !of || f->key() != of->key() ) ) - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; if ( invalid == -1 && ( f->font().family() != of->font().family() || f->font().pointSize() != of->font().pointSize() || @@ -4603,7 +4603,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::paint( TQPainter &painter, const TQColorGroup &cg, TQTextC // we flush at end of document bool flush = (i == length()-1); - bool ignoreSoftHyphen = FALSE; + bool ignoreSoftHyphen = false; if ( !flush ) { // we flush at end of line flush |= nextchr->lineStart; @@ -4619,9 +4619,9 @@ void TQTextParagraph::paint( TQPainter &painter, const TQColorGroup &cg, TQTextC flush |= ( chr->c == '\t' || nextchr->c == '\t' ); // we flush on soft hypens if (chr->c.unicode() == 0xad) { - flush = TRUE; + flush = true; if (!nextchr->lineStart) - ignoreSoftHyphen = TRUE; + ignoreSoftHyphen = true; } // we flush on custom items flush |= chr->isCustom(); @@ -4696,7 +4696,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::paint( TQPainter &painter, const TQColorGroup &cg, TQTextC chr, cg, chr->rightToLeft ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM else if ( chr->customItem()->placement() == TQTextCustomItem::PlaceInline ) { - bool inSelection = FALSE; + bool inSelection = false; if (drawSelections) { TQMap<int, TQTextParagraphSelection>::ConstIterator it = mSelections->find( TQTextDocument::Standard ); inSelection = (it != mSelections->end() && (*it).start <= i && (*it).end > i); @@ -4767,7 +4767,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::drawString( TQPainter &painter, const TQString &str, int s TQTextStringChar *formatChar, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool rightToLeft ) { - bool plainText = hasdoc ? document()->textFormat() == TQt::PlainText : FALSE; + bool plainText = hasdoc ? document()->textFormat() == TQt::PlainText : false; TQTextFormat* format = formatChar->format(); if ( !plainText || ( hasdoc && format->color() != document()->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->color() ) ) @@ -4781,7 +4781,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::drawString( TQPainter &painter, const TQString &str, int s painter.setPen(document()->linkColor.isValid() ? document()->linkColor : cg.link()); if ( document()->underlineLinks() ) { TQFont fn = format->font(); - fn.setUnderline( TRUE ); + fn.setUnderline( true ); painter.setFont( fn ); } } @@ -4808,7 +4808,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::drawString( TQPainter &painter, const TQString &str, int s baseLine += (vAlign == TQTextFormat::AlignSubScript) ? h/6 : -h/2; } - bool allSelected = FALSE; + bool allSelected = false; if (drawSelections) { TQMap<int, TQTextParagraphSelection>::ConstIterator it = mSelections->find( TQTextDocument::Standard ); allSelected = (it != mSelections->end() && (*it).start <= start && (*it).end >= start+len); @@ -4843,8 +4843,8 @@ void TQTextParagraph::drawString( TQPainter &painter, const TQString &str, int s selStart = TQMAX(selStart, start); int real_selEnd = TQMIN(selEnd, start+real_length); selEnd = TQMIN(selEnd, start+len); - bool extendRight = FALSE; - bool extendLeft = FALSE; + bool extendRight = false; + bool extendLeft = false; bool selWrap = (real_selEnd == length()-1 && n && n->hasSelection(it.key())); if (selWrap || this->str->at(real_selEnd).lineStart) { extendRight = (fullSelectionWidth != 0); @@ -4852,10 +4852,10 @@ void TQTextParagraph::drawString( TQPainter &painter, const TQString &str, int s tmpw += painter.fontMetrics().width(' '); } if (fullSelectionWidth && (selStart == 0 || this->str->at(selStart).lineStart)) { - extendLeft = TRUE; + extendLeft = true; } if (this->str->isRightToLeft() != rightToLeft) - extendLeft = extendRight = FALSE; + extendLeft = extendRight = false; if (this->str->isRightToLeft()) { bool tmp = extendLeft; @@ -5046,7 +5046,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::setListItem( bool li ) if ( (bool)litem == li ) return; litem = li; - changed = TRUE; + changed = true; TQTextParagraph* s = prev() ? prev() : this; while ( s ) { s->invalidate( 0 ); @@ -5278,14 +5278,14 @@ void TQTextParagraph::show() { if ( visible || !hasdoc ) return; - visible = TRUE; + visible = true; } void TQTextParagraph::hide() { if ( !visible || !hasdoc ) return; - visible = FALSE; + visible = false; } void TQTextParagraph::setDirection( TQChar::Direction d ) @@ -5320,7 +5320,7 @@ TQTextPreProcessor::TQTextPreProcessor() // ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ TQTextFormatter::TQTextFormatter() - : thisminw(0), thiswused(0), wrapEnabled( TRUE ), wrapColumn( -1 ), biw( FALSE ) + : thisminw(0), thiswused(0), wrapEnabled( true ), wrapColumn( -1 ), biw( false ) { } @@ -5506,11 +5506,11 @@ TQTextLineStart *TQTextFormatter::bidiReorderLine( TQTextParagraph * /*parag*/, if ( text->isRightToLeft() ) { xorig -= sw; lastChar->x = xorig; - ch->rightToLeft = TRUE; + ch->rightToLeft = true; } else { lastChar->x = x; x += sw; - ch->rightToLeft = FALSE; + ch->rightToLeft = false; } } @@ -5559,7 +5559,7 @@ int TQTextFormatter::formatVertically( TQTextDocument* doc, TQTextParagraph* par int delta = c->customItem()->height - h; ls->h += delta; if ( delta ) - parag->setMovedDown( TRUE ); + parag->setMovedDown( true ); } else #endif { @@ -5567,7 +5567,7 @@ int TQTextFormatter::formatVertically( TQTextDocument* doc, TQTextParagraph* par int shift = doc->flow()->adjustFlow( parag->rect().y() + ls->y, ls->w, ls->h ); ls->y += shift; if ( shift ) - parag->setMovedDown( TRUE ); + parag->setMovedDown( true ); } h = ls->y + ls->h; } @@ -5607,7 +5607,7 @@ int TQTextFormatterBreakInWords::format( TQTextDocument *doc,TQTextParagraph *pa x = doc->flow()->adjustLMargin( y + parag->rect().y(), parag->rect().height(), x, 4 ); int rm = parag->rightMargin(); int w = dw - ( doc ? doc->flow()->adjustRMargin( y + parag->rect().y(), parag->rect().height(), rm, 4 ) : 0 ); - bool fullWidth = TRUE; + bool fullWidth = true; int minw = 0; int wused = 0; bool wrapEnabled = isWrapEnabled( parag ); @@ -5723,7 +5723,7 @@ TQTextFormatterBreakWords::TQTextFormatterBreakWords() int shift = doc->flow()->adjustFlow( yflow, dw, lineStart->h ); \ lineStart->y += shift;\ y += shift;\ - }}while(FALSE) + }}while(false) int TQTextFormatterBreakWords::format( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *parag, int start, const TQMap<int, TQTextLineStart*> & ) @@ -5747,7 +5747,7 @@ int TQTextFormatterBreakWords::format( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *par int rm = parag->rightMargin(); int rdiff = doc ? doc->flow()->adjustRMargin( y + parag->rect().y(), parag->rect().height(), rm, 0 ) : 0; int w = dw - rdiff; - bool fullWidth = TRUE; + bool fullWidth = true; int marg = left + rdiff; int minw = 0; int wused = 0; @@ -5762,7 +5762,7 @@ int TQTextFormatterBreakWords::format( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *par insertLineStart( parag, 0, lineStart ); int lastBreak = -1; int tmpBaseLine = 0, tmph = 0; - bool lastWasNonInlineCustom = FALSE; + bool lastWasNonInlineCustom = false; int align = parag->alignment(); if ( align == TQt::AlignAuto && doc && doc->alignment() != TQt::AlignAuto ) @@ -6071,7 +6071,7 @@ TQTextFormatCollection::TQTextFormatCollection() TQApplication::palette().color( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Text ) ); lastFormat = cres = 0; cflags = -1; - cKey.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cKey.setAutoDelete( true ); cachedFormat = 0; } @@ -6184,7 +6184,7 @@ TQTextFormat *TQTextFormatCollection::format( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c return cachedFormat; } - TQString key = TQTextFormat::getKey( f, c, FALSE, TQTextFormat::AlignNormal ); + TQString key = TQTextFormat::getKey( f, c, false, TQTextFormat::AlignNormal ); cachedFormat = cKey.find( key ); cfont = f; ccol = c; @@ -6264,7 +6264,7 @@ void TQTextFormatCollection::updateKeys() { if ( cKey.isEmpty() ) return; - cKey.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + cKey.setAutoDelete( false ); TQTextFormat** formats = new TQTextFormat*[ cKey.count() + 1 ]; TQTextFormat **f = formats; TQDictIterator<TQTextFormat> it( cKey ); @@ -6275,7 +6275,7 @@ void TQTextFormatCollection::updateKeys() cKey.clear(); for ( f = formats; *f; f++ ) cKey.insert( (*f)->key(), *f ); - cKey.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cKey.setAutoDelete( true ); delete [] formats; } @@ -6344,7 +6344,7 @@ void TQTextFormat::setPointSize( int s ) if ( s == fn.pointSize() ) return; fn.setPointSize( s ); - usePixelSizes = FALSE; + usePixelSizes = false; update(); } @@ -6387,24 +6387,24 @@ TQString TQTextFormat::makeFormatChangeTags( TQTextFormat* defaultFormat, TQText if ( font().weight() != defaultFormat->font().weight() ) s += TQString(!!s?";":"") + "font-weight:" + TQString::number( fn.weight() * 8 ); TQString textDecoration; - bool none = FALSE; + bool none = false; if ( font().underline() != defaultFormat->font().underline() ) { if (font().underline()) textDecoration = "underline"; else - none = TRUE; + none = true; } if ( font().overline() != defaultFormat->font().overline() ) { if (font().overline()) textDecoration += " overline"; else - none = TRUE; + none = true; } if ( font().strikeOut() != defaultFormat->font().strikeOut() ) { if (font().strikeOut()) textDecoration += " line-through"; else - none = TRUE; + none = true; } if (none && textDecoration.isEmpty()) textDecoration = "none"; @@ -6455,7 +6455,7 @@ TQTextFormat TQTextFormat::makeTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style, const // the style is not an anchor and defines a color. // It might be used inside an anchor and it should // override the link color. - format.linkColor = FALSE; + format.linkColor = false; } switch ( style->verticalAlignment() ) { case TQStyleSheetItem::VAlignBaseline: @@ -6505,7 +6505,7 @@ TQTextFormat TQTextFormat::makeTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style, const TQString s = attr["color"]; if ( !s.isEmpty() ) { format.col.setNamedColor( s ); - format.linkColor = FALSE; + format.linkColor = false; } } if ( attr.contains("face") ) { @@ -6538,12 +6538,12 @@ TQTextFormat TQTextFormat::makeTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style, const } else if ( style.startsWith("font-style:" ) ) { TQString s = style.mid( 11 ).stripWhiteSpace(); if ( s == "normal" ) - format.fn.setItalic( FALSE ); + format.fn.setItalic( false ); else if ( s == "italic" || s == "oblique" ) - format.fn.setItalic( TRUE ); + format.fn.setItalic( true ); } else if ( style.startsWith("font-weight:" ) ) { TQString s = style.mid( 12 ); - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; int n = s.toInt( &ok ); if ( ok ) format.fn.setWeight( n/8 ); @@ -6568,7 +6568,7 @@ TQTextFormat TQTextFormat::makeTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style, const format.setVAlign( TQTextFormat::AlignNormal ); } else if ( style.startsWith("color:" ) ) { format.col.setNamedColor( style.mid(6) ); - format.linkColor = FALSE; + format.linkColor = false; } } } @@ -6818,7 +6818,7 @@ void TQTextHorizontalLine::draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int , int , int , i g.setColor( TQColorGroup::Dark, color ); if ( selected ) p->fillRect( r, g.highlight() ); - qDrawShadeLine( p, r.left() - 1, y + height / 2, r.right() + 1, y + height / 2, g, TRUE, height / 8 ); + qDrawShadeLine( p, r.left() - 1, y + height / 2, r.right() + 1, y + height / 2, g, true, height / 8 ); } } #endif //TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM @@ -6830,19 +6830,19 @@ void TQTextHorizontalLine::draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int , int , int , i bool TQTextDocument::hasPrefix(const TQChar* doc, int length, int pos, TQChar c) { if ( pos + 1 > length ) - return FALSE; + return false; return doc[ pos ].lower() == c.lower(); } bool TQTextDocument::hasPrefix( const TQChar* doc, int length, int pos, const TQString& s ) { if ( pos + (int) s.length() > length ) - return FALSE; + return false; for ( int i = 0; i < (int)s.length(); i++ ) { if ( doc[ pos + i ].lower() != s[ i ].lower() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM @@ -6851,9 +6851,9 @@ static bool qt_is_cell_in_use( TQPtrList<TQTextTableCell>& cells, int row, int c for ( TQTextTableCell* c = cells.first(); c; c = cells.next() ) { if ( row >= c->row() && row < c->row() + c->rowspan() && col >= c->column() && col < c->column() + c->colspan() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } TQTextCustomItem* TQTextDocument::parseTable( const TQMap<TQString, TQString> &attr, const TQTextFormat &fmt, @@ -6881,7 +6881,7 @@ TQTextCustomItem* TQTextDocument::parseTable( const TQMap<TQString, TQString> &a } } else { TQMap<TQString, TQString> attr2; - bool emptyTag = FALSE; + bool emptyTag = false; tagname = parseOpenTag( doc, length, pos, attr2, emptyTag ); if ( tagname == "tr" ) { rowbgcolor = attr2["bgcolor"]; @@ -7378,7 +7378,7 @@ TQChar TQTextDocument::parseChar(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQStyl TQString TQTextDocument::parseOpenTag(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQMap<TQString, TQString> &attr, bool& emptyTag) { - emptyTag = FALSE; + emptyTag = false; pos++; if ( hasPrefix(doc, length, pos, '!') ) { if ( hasPrefix( doc, length, pos+1, "--")) { @@ -7389,9 +7389,9 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::parseOpenTag(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, pos++; if ( hasPrefix(doc, length, pos, pref ) ) { pos += 3; - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); } - emptyTag = TRUE; + emptyTag = true; return TQString::null; } else { @@ -7400,20 +7400,20 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::parseOpenTag(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, pos++; if ( hasPrefix(doc, length, pos, '>') ) { pos++; - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); } return TQString::null; } } TQString tag = parseWord(doc, length, pos ); - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); static TQString term = TQString::fromLatin1("/>"); static TQString s_TRUE = TQString::fromLatin1("TRUE"); while (doc[pos] != '>' && ! (emptyTag = hasPrefix(doc, length, pos, term) )) { TQString key = parseWord(doc, length, pos ); - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); if ( key.isEmpty()) { // error recovery while ( pos < length && doc[pos] != '>' ) @@ -7424,12 +7424,12 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::parseOpenTag(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, if (hasPrefix(doc, length, pos, '=') ){ pos++; eatSpace(doc, length, pos); - value = parseWord(doc, length, pos, FALSE); + value = parseWord(doc, length, pos, false); } else value = s_TRUE; attr.insert(key.lower(), value ); - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); } if (emptyTag) { @@ -7447,7 +7447,7 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::parseCloseTag( const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos pos++; pos++; TQString tag = parseWord(doc, length, pos ); - eatSpace(doc, length, pos, TRUE); + eatSpace(doc, length, pos, true); eat(doc, length, pos, '>'); return tag; } @@ -7465,12 +7465,12 @@ TQTextFlow::~TQTextFlow() void TQTextFlow::clear() { #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM - leftItems.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - rightItems.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + leftItems.setAutoDelete( true ); + rightItems.setAutoDelete( true ); leftItems.clear(); rightItems.clear(); - leftItems.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - rightItems.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + leftItems.setAutoDelete( false ); + rightItems.setAutoDelete( false ); #endif } @@ -7587,7 +7587,7 @@ void TQTextCustomItem::pageBreak( int /*y*/ , TQTextFlow* /*flow*/ ) TQTextTable::TQTextTable( TQTextDocument *p, const TQMap<TQString, TQString> & attr ) : TQTextCustomItem( p ) { - cells.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + cells.setAutoDelete( false ); cellspacing = 2; if ( attr.contains("cellspacing") ) cellspacing = attr["cellspacing"].toInt(); @@ -7657,7 +7657,7 @@ TQString TQTextTable::richText() const s += ">\n"; int lastRow = -1; - bool needEnd = FALSE; + bool needEnd = false; TQPtrListIterator<TQTextTableCell> it2( cells ); while ( it2.current() ) { TQTextTableCell *cell = it2.current(); @@ -7667,7 +7667,7 @@ TQString TQTextTable::richText() const s += "</tr>\n"; s += "<tr>"; lastRow = cell->row(); - needEnd = TRUE; + needEnd = true; } s += "<td"; it = cell->attributes.begin(); @@ -7708,18 +7708,18 @@ void TQTextTable::adjustCells( int y , int shift ) { TQPtrListIterator<TQTextTableCell> it( cells ); TQTextTableCell* cell; - bool enlarge = FALSE; + bool enlarge = false; while ( ( cell = it.current() ) ) { ++it; TQRect r = cell->geometry(); if ( y <= r.top() ) { r.moveBy(0, shift ); cell->setGeometry( r ); - enlarge = TRUE; + enlarge = true; } else if ( y <= r.bottom() ) { r.rBottom() += shift; cell->setGeometry( r ); - enlarge = TRUE; + enlarge = true; } } if ( enlarge ) @@ -7781,7 +7781,7 @@ void TQTextTable::draw(TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int c p->fillRect( r.left()-s, r.top()-s, r.width()+2*s, s, cg.button() ); p->fillRect( r.left()-s, r.bottom(), r.width()+2*s, s, cg.button() ); } - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, TRUE, innerborder ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, true, innerborder ); } } } @@ -7803,7 +7803,7 @@ void TQTextTable::draw(TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int c p->fillRect( r.left(), r.top(), r.width(), s, cg.button() ); p->fillRect( r.left(), r.bottom()-s, r.width(), s, cg.button() ); } - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, FALSE, border ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, false, border ); } } @@ -7904,24 +7904,24 @@ bool TQTextTable::enterAt( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagrap } } if ( i == (int) cells.count() ) - return FALSE; // no cell found + return false; // no cell found if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) { if ( lastY != -1 ) currCell.insert( c, lastCell ); else - return FALSE; + return false; } TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.at( *currCell.find( c ) ); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; ox += cell->geometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->geometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextTable::next( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ) @@ -7938,23 +7938,23 @@ bool TQTextTable::next( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * TQTextCustomItem::next( c, doc, parag, idx, ox, oy ); TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.first(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); idx = -1; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.at( *currCell.find( c ) ); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; ox += cell->geometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->geometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextTable::prev( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ) @@ -7971,45 +7971,45 @@ bool TQTextTable::prev( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * TQTextCustomItem::prev( c, doc, parag, idx, ox, oy ); TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.first(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); idx = -1; - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.at( *currCell.find( c ) ); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->lastParagraph(); idx = parag->length() - 1; ox += cell->geometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->geometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextTable::down( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ) { if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.at( *currCell.find( c ) ); if ( cell->row_ == layout->numRows() - 1 ) { currCell.insert( c, 0 ); TQTextCustomItem::down( c, doc, parag, idx, ox, oy ); TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.first(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); idx = -1; - return TRUE; + return true; } int oldRow = cell->row_; int oldCol = cell->col_; if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int cc = *currCell.find( c ); for ( int i = cc; i < (int)cells.count(); ++i ) { cell = cells.at( i ); @@ -8020,34 +8020,34 @@ bool TQTextTable::down( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * } doc = cell->richText(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; ox += cell->geometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->geometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextTable::up( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ) { if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.at( *currCell.find( c ) ); if ( cell->row_ == 0 ) { currCell.insert( c, 0 ); TQTextCustomItem::up( c, doc, parag, idx, ox, oy ); TQTextTableCell *cell = cells.first(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; doc = cell->richText(); idx = -1; - return TRUE; + return true; } int oldRow = cell->row_; int oldCol = cell->col_; if ( currCell.find( c ) == currCell.end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int cc = *currCell.find( c ); for ( int i = cc; i >= 0; --i ) { cell = cells.at( i ); @@ -8058,12 +8058,12 @@ bool TQTextTable::up( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *&p } doc = cell->richText(); if ( !cell ) - return FALSE; + return false; parag = doc->lastParagraph(); idx = parag->length() - 1; ox += cell->geometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->geometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; - return TRUE; + return true; } TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, @@ -8127,7 +8127,7 @@ TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, } - hasFixedWidth = FALSE; + hasFixedWidth = false; if ( attr.contains("width") ) { bool b; TQString s( attr["width"] ); @@ -8135,7 +8135,7 @@ TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, if ( b ) { maxw = w; minw = maxw; - hasFixedWidth = TRUE; + hasFixedWidth = true; } else { s = s.stripWhiteSpace(); if ( s.length() > 1 && s[ (int)s.length()-1 ] == '%' ) @@ -8187,7 +8187,7 @@ TQSizePolicy::ExpandData TQTextTableCell::expanding() const bool TQTextTableCell::isEmpty() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQTextTableCell::setGeometry( const TQRect& r ) { @@ -8205,7 +8205,7 @@ TQRect TQTextTableCell::geometry() const bool TQTextTableCell::hasHeightForWidth() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } int TQTextTableCell::heightForWidth( int w ) const @@ -8270,9 +8270,9 @@ void TQTextTableCell::draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, if ( cx >= 0 && cy >= 0 ) richtext->draw( p, cx - ( x + horizontalAlignmentOffset() + geom.x() ), cy - ( y + geom.y() + verticalAlignmentOffset() ), - cw, ch, g, FALSE, FALSE, 0 ); + cw, ch, g, false, false, 0 ); else - richtext->draw( p, -1, -1, -1, -1, g, FALSE, FALSE, 0 ); + richtext->draw( p, -1, -1, -1, -1, g, false, false, 0 ); p->restore(); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp b/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp index 165d319db..13dba99c6 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp @@ -51,38 +51,38 @@ TQTextCustomItem::~TQTextCustomItem() {} void TQTextCustomItem::adjustToPainter( TQPainter* p){ if ( p ) width = 0; } TQTextCustomItem::Placement TQTextCustomItem::placement() const { return PlaceInline; } -bool TQTextCustomItem::ownLine() const { return FALSE; } +bool TQTextCustomItem::ownLine() const { return false; } void TQTextCustomItem::resize( int nwidth ){ width = nwidth; } void TQTextCustomItem::invalidate() {} -bool TQTextCustomItem::isNested() const { return FALSE; } +bool TQTextCustomItem::isNested() const { return false; } int TQTextCustomItem::minimumWidth() const { return 0; } TQString TQTextCustomItem::richText() const { return TQString::null; } bool TQTextCustomItem::enter( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument*&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int &, bool ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCustomItem::enterAt( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int &, const TQPoint & ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCustomItem::next( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int & ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCustomItem::prev( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int & ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCustomItem::down( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int & ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQTextCustomItem::up( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&, TQTextParagraph *&, int &, int &, int & ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif // TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ void TQTextFlow::setPageSize( int ps ) { pagesize = ps; } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM bool TQTextFlow::isEmpty() { return leftItems.isEmpty() && rightItems.isEmpty(); } #else -bool TQTextFlow::isEmpty() { return TRUE; } +bool TQTextFlow::isEmpty() { return true; } #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ void TQTextDocument::setSelectionStart( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) TQTextDocumentSelection sel; sel.startCursor = cursor; sel.endCursor = cursor; - sel.swapped = FALSE; + sel.swapped = false; selections[ id ] = sel; } @@ -198,33 +198,33 @@ TQTextFormat::~TQTextFormat() } TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat() - : fm( TQFontMetrics( fn ) ), linkColor( TRUE ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( tqApp->font().pointSize() ) + : fm( TQFontMetrics( fn ) ), linkColor( true ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( tqApp->font().pointSize() ) { ref = 0; - usePixelSizes = FALSE; + usePixelSizes = false; if ( stdSize == -1 ) { stdSize = tqApp->font().pixelSize(); - usePixelSizes = TRUE; + usePixelSizes = true; } - missp = FALSE; + missp = false; ha = AlignNormal; collection = 0; } TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style ) - : fm( TQFontMetrics( fn ) ), linkColor( TRUE ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( tqApp->font().pointSize() ) + : fm( TQFontMetrics( fn ) ), linkColor( true ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( tqApp->font().pointSize() ) { ref = 0; - usePixelSizes = FALSE; + usePixelSizes = false; if ( stdSize == -1 ) { stdSize = tqApp->font().pixelSize(); - usePixelSizes = TRUE; + usePixelSizes = true; } - missp = FALSE; + missp = false; ha = AlignNormal; collection = 0; fn = TQFont( style->fontFamily(), @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style ) hei = fm.lineSpacing(); asc = fm.ascent() + (fm.leading()+1)/2; dsc = fm.descent(); - missp = FALSE; + missp = false; ha = AlignNormal; memset( widths, 0, 256 ); generateKey(); @@ -248,14 +248,14 @@ TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style ) } TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatCollection *parent ) - : fn( f ), col( c ), fm( TQFontMetrics( f ) ), linkColor( TRUE ), + : fn( f ), col( c ), fm( TQFontMetrics( f ) ), linkColor( true ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( f.pointSize() ) { ref = 0; - usePixelSizes = FALSE; + usePixelSizes = false; if ( stdSize == -1 ) { stdSize = f.pixelSize(); - usePixelSizes = TRUE; + usePixelSizes = true; } collection = parent; leftBearing = fm.minLeftBearing(); @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatColle hei = fm.lineSpacing(); asc = fm.ascent() + (fm.leading()+1)/2; dsc = fm.descent(); - missp = FALSE; + missp = false; ha = AlignNormal; memset( widths, 0, 256 ); generateKey(); @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::setSelection( int id, int start, int end ) sel.start = start; sel.end = end; (*mSelections)[ id ] = sel; - setChanged( TRUE, TRUE ); + setChanged( true, true ); } void TQTextParagraph::removeSelection( int id ) @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ void TQTextParagraph::removeSelection( int id ) return; if ( mSelections ) mSelections->remove( id ); - setChanged( TRUE, TRUE ); + setChanged( true, true ); } int TQTextParagraph::selectionStart( int id ) const @@ -509,16 +509,16 @@ int TQTextParagraph::selectionEnd( int id ) const bool TQTextParagraph::hasSelection( int id ) const { - return mSelections ? mSelections->contains( id ) : FALSE; + return mSelections ? mSelections->contains( id ) : false; } bool TQTextParagraph::fullSelected( int id ) const { if ( !mSelections ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQMap<int, TQTextParagraphSelection>::ConstIterator it = mSelections->find( id ); if ( it == mSelections->end() ) - return FALSE; + return false; return ( *it ).start == 0 && ( *it ).end == str->length() - 1; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h b/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h index 11dfcc6d1..2d75c779b 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTextStringChar public: // this is never called, initialize variables in TQTextString::insert()!!! - TQTextStringChar() : nobreak(FALSE), lineStart( 0 ), type( Regular ) {d.format=0;} + TQTextStringChar() : nobreak(false), lineStart( 0 ), type( Regular ) {d.format=0;} ~TQTextStringChar(); struct CustomData @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public: void insert( int index, const TQString &s, TQTextFormat *f ); void insert( int index, const TQChar *unicode, int len, TQTextFormat *f ); - void insert( int index, TQTextStringChar *c, bool doAddRefFormat = FALSE ); + void insert( int index, TQTextStringChar *c, bool doAddRefFormat = false ); void truncate( int index ); void remove( int index, int len ); void clear(); @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ public: bool isBidi() const; bool isRightToLeft() const; TQChar::Direction direction() const; - void setDirection( TQChar::Direction d ) { dir = d; bidiDirty = TRUE; } + void setDirection( TQChar::Direction d ) { dir = d; bidiDirty = true; } TQMemArray<TQTextStringChar> rawData() const { return data.copy(); } @@ -338,13 +338,13 @@ public: void gotoEnd(); void gotoPageUp( int visibleHeight ); void gotoPageDown( int visibleHeight ); - void gotoNextWord( bool onlySpace = FALSE ); - void gotoPreviousWord( bool onlySpace = FALSE ); + void gotoNextWord( bool onlySpace = false ); + void gotoPreviousWord( bool onlySpace = false ); void gotoWordLeft(); void gotoWordRight(); void insert( const TQString &s, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQTextStringChar> *formatting = 0 ); - void splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( bool ind = TRUE, bool updateIds = TRUE ); + void splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph( bool ind = true, bool updateIds = true ); bool remove(); bool removePreviousChar(); void indent(); @@ -364,8 +364,8 @@ public: int totalOffsetX() const; // total document offset int totalOffsetY() const; // total document offset - bool place( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextParagraph *s ) { return place( pos, s, FALSE ); } - bool place( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link ) { return place( pos, s, link, TRUE, TRUE ); } + bool place( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextParagraph *s ) { return place( pos, s, false ); } + bool place( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link ) { return place( pos, s, link, true, true ); } bool place( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextParagraph *s, bool link, bool loosePlacing, bool matchBetweenCharacters ); void restoreState(); @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Q_TEMPLATE_EXTERN template class TQ_EXPORT TQPtrList<TQTextCommand>; class TQ_EXPORT TQTextCommandHistory { public: - TQTextCommandHistory( int s ) : current( -1 ), steps( s ) { history.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); } + TQTextCommandHistory( int s ) : current( -1 ), steps( s ) { history.setAutoDelete( true ); } virtual ~TQTextCommandHistory(); void clear() { history.clear(); current = -1; } @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ public: TQRect geometry() const { return TQRect( xpos, ypos, width, height ); } - virtual bool enter( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, bool atEnd = FALSE ); + virtual bool enter( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, bool atEnd = false ); virtual bool enterAt( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, const TQPoint & ); virtual bool next( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ); virtual bool prev( TQTextCursor *, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ); @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ public: void draw(TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool selected ); TQString richText() const; - bool ownLine() const { return TRUE; } + bool ownLine() const { return true; } private: int tmpheight; @@ -702,14 +702,14 @@ public: void draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool selected ); - bool noErase() const { return TRUE; } - bool ownLine() const { return TRUE; } + bool noErase() const { return true; } + bool ownLine() const { return true; } Placement placement() const { return place; } - bool isNested() const { return TRUE; } + bool isNested() const { return true; } void resize( int nwidth ); virtual void invalidate(); - virtual bool enter( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, bool atEnd = FALSE ); + virtual bool enter( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, bool atEnd = false ); virtual bool enterAt( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy, const TQPoint &pos ); virtual bool next( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ); virtual bool prev( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *¶g, int &idx, int &ox, int &oy ); @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ public: bool invertSelectionText( int id ) const; void setSelectionColor( int id, const TQColor &c ); void setInvertSelectionText( int id, bool b ); - bool hasSelection( int id, bool visible = FALSE ) const; + bool hasSelection( int id, bool visible = false ) const; void setSelectionStart( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ); bool setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ); void selectAll( int id ); @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ public: int numSelections() const { return nSelections; } void addSelection( int id ); - TQString selectedText( int id, bool asRichText = FALSE ) const; + TQString selectedText( int id, bool asRichText = false ) const; void removeSelectedText( int id, TQTextCursor *cursor ); void indentSelection( int id ); @@ -901,10 +901,10 @@ public: void drawParagraph( TQPainter *p, TQTextParagraph *parag, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, TQPixmap *&doubleBuffer, const TQColorGroup &cg, - bool drawCursor, TQTextCursor *cursor, bool resetChanged = TRUE ); + bool drawCursor, TQTextCursor *cursor, bool resetChanged = true ); TQTextParagraph *draw( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup &cg, - bool onlyChanged = FALSE, bool drawCursor = FALSE, TQTextCursor *cursor = 0, - bool resetChanged = TRUE ); + bool onlyChanged = false, bool drawCursor = false, TQTextCursor *cursor = 0, + bool resetChanged = true ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCUSTOMITEM void registerCustomItem( TQTextCustomItem *i, TQTextParagraph *p ); @@ -944,9 +944,9 @@ public: int undoDepth() const { return commandHistory->undoDepth(); } int length() const; - void clear( bool createEmptyParag = FALSE ); + void clear( bool createEmptyParag = false ); - virtual TQTextParagraph *createParagraph( TQTextDocument *d, TQTextParagraph *pr = 0, TQTextParagraph *nx = 0, bool updateIds = TRUE ); + virtual TQTextParagraph *createParagraph( TQTextDocument *d, TQTextParagraph *pr = 0, TQTextParagraph *nx = 0, bool updateIds = true ); void insertChild( TQObject *o ) { TQObject::insertChild( o ); } void removeChild( TQObject *o ) { TQObject::removeChild( o ); } void insertChild( TQTextDocument *d ) { childList.append( d ); } @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ public: TQString focusHref() const; TQString focusName() const; - void invalidateOriginalText() { oTextValid = FALSE; oText = ""; } + void invalidateOriginalText() { oTextValid = false; oText = ""; } signals: void minimumWidthChanged( int ); @@ -972,12 +972,12 @@ private: TQTextCustomItem* parseTable( const TQMap<TQString, TQString> &attr, const TQTextFormat &fmt, const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQTextParagraph *curpar ); #endif - bool eatSpace(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, bool includeNbsp = FALSE ); + bool eatSpace(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, bool includeNbsp = false ); bool eat(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQChar c); TQString parseOpenTag(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQMap<TQString, TQString> &attr, bool& emptyTag); TQString parseCloseTag( const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos ); TQChar parseHTMLSpecialChar(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos); - TQString parseWord(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, bool lower = TRUE); + TQString parseWord(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, bool lower = true); TQChar parseChar(const TQChar* doc, int length, int& pos, TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceMode wsm ); void setRichTextInternal( const TQString &text, TQTextCursor* cursor = 0, const TQTextFormat *initialFormat = 0 ); void setRichTextMarginsInternal( TQPtrList< TQPtrVector<TQStyleSheetItem> >& styles, TQTextParagraph* stylesPar ); @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTextParagraph friend class TQSyntaxHighlighter; public: - TQTextParagraph( TQTextDocument *d, TQTextParagraph *pr = 0, TQTextParagraph *nx = 0, bool updateIds = TRUE ); + TQTextParagraph( TQTextDocument *d, TQTextParagraph *pr = 0, TQTextParagraph *nx = 0, bool updateIds = true ); ~TQTextParagraph(); TQTextString *string() const; @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ public: int leftGap() const; int length() const; // maybe remove later - void setListStyle( TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle ls ) { lstyle = ls; changed = TRUE; } + void setListStyle( TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle ls ) { lstyle = ls; changed = true; } TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle listStyle() const { return (TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle)lstyle; } void setListItem( bool li ); bool isListItem() const { return litem; } @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ public: void insert( int index, const TQString &s ); void insert( int index, const TQChar *unicode, int len ); - void append( const TQString &s, bool reallyAtEnd = FALSE ); + void append( const TQString &s, bool reallyAtEnd = false ); void truncate( int index ); void remove( int index, int len ); void join( TQTextParagraph *s ); @@ -1218,11 +1218,11 @@ public: void invalidate( int chr ); void move( int &dy ); - void format( int start = -1, bool doMove = TRUE ); + void format( int start = -1, bool doMove = true ); bool isValid() const; bool hasChanged() const; - void setChanged( bool b, bool recursive = FALSE ); + void setChanged( bool b, bool recursive = false ); int lineHeightOfChar( int i, int *bl = 0, int *y = 0 ) const; TQTextStringChar *lineStartOfChar( int i, int *index = 0, int *line = 0 ) const; @@ -1257,12 +1257,12 @@ public: TQMap<int, TQTextLineStart*> &lineStartList(); - void setFormat( int index, int len, TQTextFormat *f, bool useCollection = TRUE, int flags = -1 ); + void setFormat( int index, int len, TQTextFormat *f, bool useCollection = true, int flags = -1 ); void setAlignment( int a ); int alignment() const; - void paint( TQPainter &painter, const TQColorGroup &cg, TQTextCursor *cursor = 0, bool drawSelections = FALSE, + void paint( TQPainter &painter, const TQColorGroup &cg, TQTextCursor *cursor = 0, bool drawSelections = false, int clipx = -1, int clipy = -1, int clipw = -1, int cliph = -1 ); int topMargin() const; @@ -1392,7 +1392,7 @@ public: virtual int format( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *parag, int start, const TQMap<int, TQTextLineStart*> &oldLineStarts ) = 0; virtual int formatVertically( TQTextDocument* doc, TQTextParagraph* parag ); - bool isWrapEnabled( TQTextParagraph *p ) const { if ( !wrapEnabled ) return FALSE; if ( p && !p->isBreakable() ) return FALSE; return TRUE;} + bool isWrapEnabled( TQTextParagraph *p ) const { if ( !wrapEnabled ) return false; if ( p && !p->isBreakable() ) return false; return true;} int wrapAtColumn() const { return wrapColumn;} virtual void setWrapEnabled( bool b ); virtual void setWrapAtColumn( int c ); @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ public: TQTextPreProcessor(); virtual ~TQTextPreProcessor() {} - virtual void process( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *, int, bool = TRUE ) = 0; + virtual void process( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *, int, bool = true ) = 0; virtual TQTextFormat *format( int id ) = 0; }; @@ -1931,12 +1931,12 @@ inline void TQTextParagraph::setBackgroundColor( const TQColor & c ) { delete bgcol; bgcol = new TQColor( c ); - setChanged( TRUE ); + setChanged( true ); } inline void TQTextParagraph::clearBackgroundColor() { - delete bgcol; bgcol = 0; setChanged( TRUE ); + delete bgcol; bgcol = 0; setChanged( true ); } inline void TQTextParagraph::append( const TQString &s, bool reallyAtEnd ) @@ -1959,7 +1959,7 @@ inline TQTextParagraph *TQTextParagraph::next() const inline bool TQTextParagraph::hasAnySelection() const { - return mSelections ? !selections().isEmpty() : FALSE; + return mSelections ? !selections().isEmpty() : false; } inline void TQTextParagraph::setEndState( int s ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp b/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp index 36df1fa77..963d2bb3b 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ static inline void positionCluster(TQShaperItem *item, int gfrom, int glast) } item->advances[gfrom+i] = 0; } - item->has_positioning = TRUE; + item->has_positioning = true; } @@ -306,31 +306,31 @@ static void heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(TQShaperItem *item, const TQChar *uc, in // first char in a run is never (treated as) a mark int cStart = 0; - item->attributes[0].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; + item->attributes[0].mark = false; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; item->attributes[0].combiningClass = 0; if (qIsZeroWidthChar(uc[0].unicode())) { - item->attributes[0].zeroWidth = TRUE; + item->attributes[0].zeroWidth = true; item->advances[0] = 0; - item->has_positioning = TRUE; + item->has_positioning = true; } else { - item->attributes[0].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[0].zeroWidth = false; } int lastCat = ::category(uc[0]); for (int i = 1; i < length; ++i) { int cat = ::category(uc[i]); if (qIsZeroWidthChar(uc[i].unicode())) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = TRUE; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = TRUE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = true; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = true; item->attributes[i].combiningClass = 0; cStart = i; item->advances[i] = 0; - item->has_positioning = TRUE; + item->has_positioning = true; } else if (cat != TQChar::Mark_NonSpacing) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = TRUE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = true; item->attributes[i].combiningClass = 0; cStart = i; } else { @@ -366,12 +366,12 @@ static void heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(TQShaperItem *item, const TQChar *uc, in } } - item->attributes[i].mark = TRUE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = true; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].combiningClass = cmb; logClusters[i] = cStart; item->advances[i] = 0; - item->has_positioning = TRUE; + item->has_positioning = true; } if (lastCat == TQChar::Separator_Space) @@ -395,11 +395,11 @@ static bool basic_shape(TQShaperItem *item) { if (item->font->stringToCMap(item->string->unicode()+item->from, item->length, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(item); qt_heuristicPosition(item); - return TRUE; + return true; } // -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (item->font->stringToCMap(item->string->unicode()+item->from, item->length, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(item); openType->shape(item); @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) for (i = 1; i < item->length; ++i) { ushort base = shapedChars[slen-1].unicode(); ushort shaped = 0; - bool invalid = FALSE; + bool invalid = false; if (uc[i].unicode() == Dagesh) { if (base >= 0x5d0 && base <= 0x5ea @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) } else if (base == 0xfb2a || base == 0xfb2b /* Shin with Shin or Sin dot */) { shaped = base + 2; } else { - invalid = TRUE; + invalid = true; } } else if (uc[i].unicode() == ShinDot) { if (base == 0x05e9) @@ -488,14 +488,14 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) else if (base == 0xfb49) shaped = 0xfb2c; else - invalid = TRUE; + invalid = true; } else if (uc[i].unicode() == SinDot) { if (base == 0x05e9) shaped = 0xfb2b; else if (base == 0xfb49) shaped = 0xfb2d; else - invalid = TRUE; + invalid = true; } else if (uc[i].unicode() == Patah) { if (base == 0x5d0) shaped = 0xfb2e; @@ -516,8 +516,8 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (invalid) { shapedChars[slen] = 0x25cc; - item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = TRUE; - item->attributes[slen].mark = FALSE; + item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = true; + item->attributes[slen].mark = false; item->attributes[slen].combiningClass = 0; cluster_start = slen; ++slen; @@ -531,13 +531,13 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (!shaped) { shapedChars[slen] = uc[i]; if (::category(uc[i]) != TQChar::Mark_NonSpacing) { - item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = TRUE; - item->attributes[slen].mark = FALSE; + item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = true; + item->attributes[slen].mark = false; item->attributes[slen].combiningClass = 0; cluster_start = slen; } else { - item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = FALSE; - item->attributes[slen].mark = TRUE; + item->attributes[slen].clusterStart = false; + item->attributes[slen].mark = true; item->attributes[slen].combiningClass = ::combiningClass(uc[i]); } ++slen; @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (item->font->stringToCMap(shapedChars, slen, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; for (i = 0; i < item->num_glyphs; ++i) { if (item->attributes[i].mark) item->advances[i] = 0; @@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ static bool hebrew_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (item->length > 256) ::free(shapedChars); - return TRUE; + return true; } // these groups correspond to the groups defined in the Unicode standard. @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ static void getArabicProperties(const unsigned short *chars, int len, TQArabicPr break; default: - Q_ASSERT(FALSE); + Q_ASSERT(false); } lastGroup = ArabicNone; @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ static void getArabicProperties(const unsigned short *chars, int len, TQArabicPr lastGroup = Noon; break; case ArabicGroupsEnd: - Q_ASSERT(FALSE); + Q_ASSERT(false); } lastPos = i; @@ -1451,10 +1451,10 @@ static void shapedString(const TQString *uc, int from, int len, TQChar *shapeBuf // ##### Fixme //attributes[gpos].zeroWidth = zeroWidth; if (::category(*ch) == TQChar::Mark_NonSpacing) { - attributes[gpos].mark = TRUE; + attributes[gpos].mark = true; // tqDebug("glyph %d (char %d) is mark!", gpos, i); } else { - attributes[gpos].mark = FALSE; + attributes[gpos].mark = false; clusterStart = data - shapeBuffer; } attributes[gpos].clusterStart = !attributes[gpos].mark; @@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@ static bool arabicSyriacOpenTypeShape(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, int nglyphs = item->num_glyphs; if (item->font->stringToCMap(item->string->unicode()+item->from, item->length, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(item); unsigned short *logClusters = item->log_clusters; @@ -1613,13 +1613,13 @@ static bool arabic_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (item->font->stringToCMap((TQChar *)shapedChars.data(), slen, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; for (int i = 0; i < slen; ++i) if (item->attributes[i].mark) item->advances[i] = 0; qt_heuristicPosition(item); - return TRUE; + return true; } #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqscriptengine_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqscriptengine_x11.cpp index 5d22fdf49..7d997457c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqscriptengine_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqscriptengine_x11.cpp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ static bool thaana_shape(TQShaperItem *item) openType->selectScript(TQFont::Thaana); if (item->font->stringToCMap(item->string->unicode()+item->from, item->length, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; heuristicSetGlyphAttributes(item); openType->shape(item); return openType->positionAndAdd(item); @@ -1252,7 +1252,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool if (item->num_glyphs < len+4) { item->num_glyphs = len+4; - return FALSE; + return false; } TQVarLengthArray<unsigned short> reordered(len+4); @@ -1283,7 +1283,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool if (len != 1) { unsigned short *uc = reordered.data(); - bool beginsWithRa = FALSE; + bool beginsWithRa = false; // Rule 1: find base consonant // @@ -1306,7 +1306,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool beginsWithRa = (properties & HasReph) && ((len > 2) && *uc == ra && *(uc+1) == halant); if (beginsWithRa && form(*(uc+2)) == Control) - beginsWithRa = FALSE; + beginsWithRa = false; base = (beginsWithRa ? 2 : 0); IDEBUG(" length = %d, beginsWithRa = %d, base=%d", len, beginsWithRa, base); @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool // figure out possible base glyphs memset(position.data(), 0, len); if (script == TQFont::Devanagari || script == TQFont::Gujarati) { - bool vattu = FALSE; + bool vattu = false; for (i = base; i < len; ++i) { position[i] = form(uc[i]); if (position[i] == Consonant) { @@ -1552,22 +1552,22 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool if (item->font->stringToCMap((const TQChar *)reordered.data(), len, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; IDEBUG(" base=%d, reph=%d", base, reph); IDEBUG("reordered:"); for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].justification = 0; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = false; IDEBUG(" %d: %4x", i, reordered[i]); } // now we have the syllable in the right order, and can start running it through open type. - bool control = FALSE; + bool control = false; for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) control |= (form(reordered[i]) == Control); @@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool if (script == TQFont::Devanagari || script == TQFont::Gujarati) { // vattu glyphs need this aswell - bool vattu = FALSE; + bool vattu = false; for (i = base-2; i > 1; --i) { if (form(reordered[i]) == Consonant) { vattu = (!vattu && reordered[i] == ra); @@ -1694,8 +1694,8 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool } } - if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, false)) + return false; if (control) { IDEBUG("found a control char in the syllable"); @@ -1716,9 +1716,9 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool } #endif - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; IDEBUG("<<<<<<"); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ static bool indic_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, bool */ static int indic_nextSyllableBoundary(int script, const TQString &s, int start, int end, bool *invalid) { - *invalid = FALSE; + *invalid = false; IDEBUG("indic_nextSyllableBoundary: start=%d, end=%d", start, end); const TQChar *uc = s.unicode()+start; @@ -1743,7 +1743,7 @@ static int indic_nextSyllableBoundary(int script, const TQString &s, int start, if (state != Consonant && state != IndependentVowel) { if (state != Other) - *invalid = TRUE; + *invalid = true; goto finish; } @@ -1846,7 +1846,7 @@ static bool indic_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (!indic_shape_syllable(openType, &syllable, invalid)) { IDEBUG("syllable shaping failed, syllable requests %d glyphs", syllable.num_glyphs); item->num_glyphs += syllable.num_glyphs; - return FALSE; + return false; } item->has_positioning |= syllable.has_positioning; @@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ static bool indic_shape(TQShaperItem *item) first_glyph += syllable.num_glyphs; } item->num_glyphs = first_glyph; - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1877,12 +1877,12 @@ static void indic_attributes(int script, const TQString &text, int from, int len while (i < len) { bool invalid; int boundary = indic_nextSyllableBoundary(script, text, from+i, end, &invalid) - from; - attributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + attributes[i].charStop = true; if (boundary > len-1) boundary = len; i++; while (i < boundary) { - attributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + attributes[i].charStop = false; ++uc; ++i; } @@ -1932,13 +1932,13 @@ static void thaiWordBreaks(const TQChar *string, const int len, TQCharAttributes numbreaks = th_brk(cstr.data(),break_positions, numbreaks); } - attributes[0].softBreak = TRUE; + attributes[0].softBreak = true; int i; for (i = 1; i < len; ++i) - attributes[i].softBreak = FALSE; + attributes[i].softBreak = false; for (i = 0; i < numbreaks; ++i) - attributes[break_positions[i]].softBreak = TRUE; + attributes[break_positions[i]].softBreak = true; if (break_positions != brp) delete [] break_positions; @@ -2042,7 +2042,7 @@ static bool tibetan_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo if (item->num_glyphs < item->length + 4) { item->num_glyphs = item->length + 4; - return FALSE; + return false; } int i; @@ -2058,13 +2058,13 @@ static bool tibetan_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo if (item->font->stringToCMap(str, len, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; for (i = 0; i < item->length; i++) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].justification = 0; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = false; IDEBUG(" %d: %4x", i, str[i].unicode()); } @@ -2075,13 +2075,13 @@ static bool tibetan_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo openType->selectScript(TQFont::Tibetan, tibetan_features); openType->shape(item); - if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, false)) + return false; } #endif - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; - return TRUE; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; + return true; } @@ -2097,7 +2097,7 @@ static int tibetan_nextSyllableBoundary(const TQString &s, int start, int end, b if (state != TibetanHeadConsonant) { if (state != TibetanOther) - *invalid = TRUE; + *invalid = true; goto finish; } @@ -2125,7 +2125,7 @@ static int tibetan_nextSyllableBoundary(const TQString &s, int start, int end, b } finish: - *invalid = FALSE; + *invalid = false; return start+pos; } @@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ static bool tibetan_shape(TQShaperItem *item) syllable.num_glyphs = item->num_glyphs - first_glyph; if (!tibetan_shape_syllable(openType, &syllable, invalid)) { item->num_glyphs += syllable.num_glyphs; - return FALSE; + return false; } item->has_positioning |= syllable.has_positioning; @@ -2172,7 +2172,7 @@ static bool tibetan_shape(TQShaperItem *item) first_glyph += syllable.num_glyphs; } item->num_glyphs = first_glyph; - return TRUE; + return true; } static void tibetan_attributes(int script, const TQString &text, int from, int len, TQCharAttributes *attributes) @@ -2187,12 +2187,12 @@ static void tibetan_attributes(int script, const TQString &text, int from, int l bool invalid; int boundary = tibetan_nextSyllableBoundary(text, from+i, end, &invalid) - from; - attributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + attributes[i].charStop = true; if (boundary > len-1) boundary = len; i++; while (i < boundary) { - attributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + attributes[i].charStop = false; ++uc; ++i; } @@ -2484,7 +2484,7 @@ static const signed char khmerStateTable[][CC_COUNT] = // static inline int khmer_nextSyllableBoundary(const TQString &s, int start, int end, bool *invalid) { - *invalid = FALSE; + *invalid = false; const TQChar *uc = s.unicode() + start; int state = 0; int pos = start; @@ -2710,14 +2710,14 @@ static bool khmer_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item) if (item->font->stringToCMap((const TQChar *)reordered, len, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; KHDEBUG("after shaping: len=%d", len); for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].justification = 0; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = false; KHDEBUG(" %d: %4x property=%x", i, reordered[i], properties[i]); } @@ -2745,8 +2745,8 @@ static bool khmer_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item) } openType->shape(item, where); - if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, false)) + return false; } else #endif { @@ -2754,8 +2754,8 @@ static bool khmer_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item) Q_UNUSED(openType); } - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; - return TRUE; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; + return true; } static bool khmer_shape(TQShaperItem *item) @@ -2792,7 +2792,7 @@ static bool khmer_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (!khmer_shape_syllable(openType, &syllable)) { KHDEBUG("syllable shaping failed, syllable requests %d glyphs", syllable.num_glyphs); item->num_glyphs += syllable.num_glyphs; - return FALSE; + return false; } item->has_positioning |= syllable.has_positioning; @@ -2810,7 +2810,7 @@ static bool khmer_shape(TQShaperItem *item) first_glyph += syllable.num_glyphs; } item->num_glyphs = first_glyph; - return TRUE; + return true; } static void khmer_attributes( int script, const TQString &text, int from, int len, TQCharAttributes *attributes ) @@ -2825,12 +2825,12 @@ static void khmer_attributes( int script, const TQString &text, int from, int le bool invalid; int boundary = khmer_nextSyllableBoundary( text, from+i, end, &invalid ) - from; - attributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + attributes[i].charStop = true; if ( boundary > len-1 ) boundary = len; i++; while ( i < boundary ) { - attributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + attributes[i].charStop = false; ++uc; ++i; } @@ -3008,7 +3008,7 @@ static const signed char mymrStateTable[][Mymr_CC_COUNT] = // static inline int myanmar_nextSyllableBoundary(const TQString &s, int start, int end, bool *invalid) { - *invalid = FALSE; + *invalid = false; const TQChar *uc = s.unicode() + start; int state = 0; int pos = start; @@ -3152,7 +3152,7 @@ static bool myanmar_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo ++len; } - bool lastWasVirama = FALSE; + bool lastWasVirama = false; int basePos = -1; // copy the rest of the syllable to the output, inserting the kinzi // at the correct place @@ -3217,14 +3217,14 @@ static bool myanmar_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo if (item->font->stringToCMap((const TQChar *)reordered, len, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; MMDEBUG("after shaping: len=%d", len); for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].justification = 0; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = false; MMDEBUG(" %d: %4x property=%x", i, reordered[i], properties[i]); } @@ -3252,8 +3252,8 @@ static bool myanmar_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo } openType->shape(item, where); - if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, false)) + return false; } else #endif { @@ -3261,8 +3261,8 @@ static bool myanmar_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item, boo Q_UNUSED(openType); } - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; - return TRUE; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; + return true; } static bool myanmar_shape(TQShaperItem *item) @@ -3299,7 +3299,7 @@ static bool myanmar_shape(TQShaperItem *item) if (!myanmar_shape_syllable(openType, &syllable, invalid)) { MMDEBUG("syllable shaping failed, syllable requests %d glyphs", syllable.num_glyphs); item->num_glyphs += syllable.num_glyphs; - return FALSE; + return false; } item->has_positioning |= syllable.has_positioning; @@ -3317,7 +3317,7 @@ static bool myanmar_shape(TQShaperItem *item) first_glyph += syllable.num_glyphs; } item->num_glyphs = first_glyph; - return TRUE; + return true; } static void myanmar_attributes( int script, const TQString &text, int from, int len, TQCharAttributes *attributes ) @@ -3332,14 +3332,14 @@ static void myanmar_attributes( int script, const TQString &text, int from, int bool invalid; int boundary = myanmar_nextSyllableBoundary( text, from+i, end, &invalid ) - from; - attributes[i].charStop = TRUE; - attributes[i].softBreak = TRUE; + attributes[i].charStop = true; + attributes[i].softBreak = true; if ( boundary > len-1 ) boundary = len; i++; while ( i < boundary ) { - attributes[i].charStop = FALSE; - attributes[i].softBreak = FALSE; + attributes[i].charStop = false; + attributes[i].softBreak = false; ++uc; ++i; } @@ -3501,12 +3501,12 @@ static bool hangul_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item) if (item->font->stringToCMap(ch, len, item->glyphs, item->advances, &item->num_glyphs, item->flags & TQTextEngine::RightToLeft) != TQFontEngine::NoError) - return FALSE; + return false; for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { - item->attributes[i].mark = FALSE; - item->attributes[i].clusterStart = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].mark = false; + item->attributes[i].clusterStart = false; item->attributes[i].justification = 0; - item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = FALSE; + item->attributes[i].zeroWidth = false; IDEBUG(" %d: %4x", i, ch[i].unicode()); } @@ -3519,14 +3519,14 @@ static bool hangul_shape_syllable(TQOpenType *openType, TQShaperItem *item) item->log_clusters = logClusters.data(); openType->shape(item); - if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!openType->positionAndAdd(item, false)) + return false; } #endif - item->attributes[0].clusterStart = TRUE; - return TRUE; + item->attributes[0].clusterStart = true; + return true; } static bool hangul_shape(TQShaperItem *item) @@ -3535,10 +3535,10 @@ static bool hangul_shape(TQShaperItem *item) const TQChar *uc = item->string->unicode() + item->from; - bool allPrecomposed = TRUE; + bool allPrecomposed = true; for (int i = 0; i < item->length; ++i) { if (!hangul_isPrecomposed(uc[i].unicode())) { - allPrecomposed = FALSE; + allPrecomposed = false; break; } } @@ -3573,7 +3573,7 @@ static bool hangul_shape(TQShaperItem *item) syllable.num_glyphs = item->num_glyphs - first_glyph; if (!hangul_shape_syllable(openType, &syllable)) { item->num_glyphs += syllable.num_glyphs; - return FALSE; + return false; } item->has_positioning |= syllable.has_positioning; // fix logcluster array @@ -3583,7 +3583,7 @@ static bool hangul_shape(TQShaperItem *item) first_glyph += syllable.num_glyphs; } item->num_glyphs = first_glyph; - return TRUE; + return true; } return basic_shape(item); @@ -3600,12 +3600,12 @@ static void hangul_attributes(int script, const TQString &text, int from, int le while (i < len) { int boundary = hangul_nextSyllableBoundary(text, from+i, end) - from; - attributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + attributes[i].charStop = true; if (boundary > len-1) boundary = len; i++; while (i < boundary) { - attributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + attributes[i].charStop = false; ++uc; ++i; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp index 073b61949..f8f918bb2 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ TQSignal::TQSignal( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : TQObject( parent, name ) { - isSignal = TRUE; + isSignal = true; #ifndef TQT_NO_VARIANT val = 0; #endif @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ TQSignal::~TQSignal() { } #ifndef TQT_NO_VARIANT -// Returns TRUE if it matches ".+(.*int.*" +// Returns true if it matches ".+(.*int.*" static inline bool intSignature( const char *member ) { TQCString s( member ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp index 08a7b9400..fe9b9a7a4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class TQSignalMapperData { public: TQSignalMapperData() { - dict.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + dict.setAutoDelete( true ); } TQPtrDict<TQSignalMapperRec> dict; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.cpp index c2808b1cd..b78d2ad28 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.cpp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ void TQSimpleRichTextData::adjustSize(TQPainter *p) { } } cachedWidth = doc->width(); - cachedWidthWithPainter = FALSE; + cachedWidthWithPainter = false; } /*! @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText( const TQString& text, const TQFont& fnt, { d = new TQSimpleRichTextData; d->cachedWidth = -1; - d->cachedWidthWithPainter = FALSE; + d->cachedWidthWithPainter = false; d->font = fnt; d->doc = new TQTextDocument( 0 ); d->doc->setTextFormat( TQt::RichText ); @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText( const TQString& text, const TQFont& fnt, { d = new TQSimpleRichTextData; d->cachedWidth = -1; - d->cachedWidthWithPainter = FALSE; + d->cachedWidthWithPainter = false; d->font = fnt; d->doc = new TQTextDocument( 0 ); d->doc->setTextFormat( TQt::RichText ); @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText( const TQString& text, const TQFont& fnt, d->doc->setStyleSheet( (TQStyleSheet*)sheet ); d->doc->setDefaultFormat( fnt, TQColor() ); d->doc->flow()->setPageSize( pageBreak ); - d->doc->setPageBreakEnabled( TRUE ); + d->doc->setPageBreakEnabled( true ); #ifndef TQT_NO_MIME d->doc->setMimeSourceFactory( (TQMimeSourceFactory*)factory ); #endif @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth( int w ) return; d->doc->formatter()->setAllowBreakInWords( d->doc->isPageBreakEnabled() ); d->cachedWidth = w; - d->cachedWidthWithPainter = FALSE; + d->cachedWidthWithPainter = false; d->doc->doLayout( 0, w ); } @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth( TQPainter *p, int w ) (p->device()->devType() == TQInternal::Printer)) ); p->save(); d->cachedWidth = w; - d->cachedWidthWithPainter = TRUE; + d->cachedWidthWithPainter = true; d->doc->doLayout( p, w ); p->restore(); } @@ -382,13 +382,13 @@ TQString TQSimpleRichText::anchorAt( const TQPoint& pos ) const if ( d->cachedWidth < 0 ) d->adjustSize(); TQTextCursor c( d->doc ); - c.place( pos, d->doc->firstParagraph(), TRUE ); + c.place( pos, d->doc->firstParagraph(), true ); return c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref(); } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a pos is within a text line of the rich text - object; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a pos is within a text line of the rich text + object; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSimpleRichText::inText( const TQPoint& pos ) const @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ bool TQSimpleRichText::inText( const TQPoint& pos ) const if ( d->cachedWidth < 0 ) d->adjustSize(); if ( pos.y() > d->doc->height() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextCursor c( d->doc ); c.place( pos, d->doc->firstParagraph() ); return c.totalOffsetX() + c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->x + @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ void TQSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont( const TQFont &f ) return; d->font = f; d->cachedWidth = -1; - d->cachedWidthWithPainter = FALSE; + d->cachedWidthWithPainter = false; d->doc->setDefaultFormat( f, TQColor() ); d->doc->setText( d->doc->originalText(), d->doc->context() ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.h b/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.h index 45ddd6b10..9fcae3649 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqsimplerichtext.h @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public: TQSimpleRichText( const TQString& text, const TQFont& fnt, const TQString& context, const TQStyleSheet* sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory* factory, int pageBreak = -1, - const TQColor& linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE ); + const TQColor& linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true ); ~TQSimpleRichText(); void setWidth( int ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsize.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsize.cpp index 8a302eaa6..77fb16278 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsize.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsize.cpp @@ -83,20 +83,20 @@ /*! \fn bool TQSize::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise + returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQSize::isEmpty() const - Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is - less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is + less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQSize::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is - equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is + equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ void TQSize::scale( int w, int h, ScaleMode mode ) wd = (TQCOORD)w; ht = (TQCOORD)h; } else { - bool useHeight = TRUE; + bool useHeight = true; int w0 = width(); int h0 = height(); int rw = h * w0 / h0; @@ -287,13 +287,13 @@ void TQSize::scale( const TQSize &s, ScaleMode mode ) /*! \fn bool operator==( const TQSize &s1, const TQSize &s2 ) \relates TQSize - Returns TRUE if \a s1 and \a s2 are equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a s1 and \a s2 are equal; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool operator!=( const TQSize &s1, const TQSize &s2 ) \relates TQSize - Returns TRUE if \a s1 and \a s2 are different; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a s1 and \a s2 are different; otherwise returns false. */ /*! diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp index 65b29a1c9..928c8e7dc 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ bool TQSizeGrip::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) } #endif } - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif //TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsizepolicy.h b/src/kernel/tqsizepolicy.h index 6bb8aa0cf..bab360cc4 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsizepolicy.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqsizepolicy.h @@ -72,9 +72,9 @@ public: TQSizePolicy() : data( 0 ) { } - TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ) + TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ) : data( hor | (ver<<HSize) | (hfw ? (TQ_UINT32)(1<<2*HSize) : 0) ) { } - TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar hors, uchar vers, bool hfw = FALSE ); + TQSizePolicy( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar hors, uchar vers, bool hfw = false ); SizeType horData() const { return (SizeType)( data & HMask ); } SizeType verData() const { return (SizeType)( (data & VMask) >> HSize ); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp index 3a3d32a07..e16a35a41 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *parent, #endif sockfd = socket; sntype = type; - snenabled = TRUE; + snenabled = true; TQApplication::eventLoop()->registerSocketNotifier( this ); } @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *parent, TQSocketNotifier::~TQSocketNotifier() { - setEnabled( FALSE ); + setEnabled( false ); } @@ -208,14 +208,14 @@ TQSocketNotifier::~TQSocketNotifier() /*! \fn bool TQSocketNotifier::isEnabled() const - Returns TRUE if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa setEnabled() */ /*! - Enables the notifier if \a enable is TRUE or disables it if \a - enable is FALSE. + Enables the notifier if \a enable is true or disables it if \a + enable is false. The notifier is enabled by default. @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ bool TQSocketNotifier::event( TQEvent *e ) TQObject::event( e ); // will activate filters if ( e->type() == TQEvent::SockAct ) { emit activated( sockfd ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp index c5c64300f..5e7a1c826 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ public: /*! \fn static bool TQSound::available() - Returns TRUE if sound support is available; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if sound support is available; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ TQSound::~TQSound() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns false. - \warning On Windows this function always returns TRUE for unlooped sounds. + \warning On Windows this function always returns true for unlooped sounds. */ bool TQSound::isFinished() const { @@ -257,8 +257,8 @@ void TQSound::stop() /*! - Returns TRUE if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise - returns FALSE. An application may choose either to notify the user + Returns true if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise + returns false. An application may choose either to notify the user if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently without bothering the user. diff --git a/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp index dba19b144..84999b79f 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp @@ -58,22 +58,22 @@ static AuBool eventPred(AuServer *, AuEvent *e, AuPointer p) { if (e && (e->type == AuEventTypeElementNotify)) { if (e->auelementnotify.flow == *((AuFlowID *)p)) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } class TQAuBucketNAS : public TQAuBucket { public: - TQAuBucketNAS(AuBucketID b, AuFlowID f = 0) : id(b), flow(f), stopped(TRUE), numplaying(0) { } + TQAuBucketNAS(AuBucketID b, AuFlowID f = 0) : id(b), flow(f), stopped(true), numplaying(0) { } ~TQAuBucketNAS() { if ( nas ) { - AuSync(nas, FALSE); + AuSync(nas, false); AuDestroyBucket(nas, id, NULL); AuEvent ev; - while (AuScanEvents(nas, AuEventsQueuedAfterFlush, TRUE, eventPred, &flow, &ev)) + while (AuScanEvents(nas, AuEventsQueuedAfterFlush, true, eventPred, &flow, &ev)) ; } } @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ void TQAuServerNAS::soundDestroyed(TQObject *o) if (inprogress) { TQSound *so = static_cast<TQSound *>(o); while (inprogress->remove(so)) - ; // Loop while remove returns TRUE + ; // Loop while remove returns true } } @@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ void TQAuServerNAS::setDone(TQSound* s) if (nas) { decLoop(s); if (s->loopsRemaining() && !bucket(s)->stopped) { - bucket(s)->stopped = TRUE; + bucket(s)->stopped = true; play(s); } else { if (--(bucket(s)->numplaying) == 0) - bucket(s)->stopped = TRUE; + bucket(s)->stopped = true; inprogress->remove(s); } } @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ void TQAuServerNAS::play(TQSound* s) stop(s); } - bucket(s)->stopped = FALSE; + bucket(s)->stopped = false; if ( !inprogress ) inprogress = new TQPtrDict<void>; inprogress->insert(s,(void*)this); @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ void TQAuServerNAS::play(TQSound* s) void TQAuServerNAS::stop(TQSound* s) { if (nas && !bucket(s)->stopped) { - bucket(s)->stopped = TRUE; + bucket(s)->stopped = true; AuStopFlow(nas, bucket(s)->flow, NULL); AuFlush(nas); dataReceived(); @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ public: void play(const TQString&) { } void play(TQSound*s) { while(decLoop(s) > 0) /* nothing */ ; } void stop(TQSound*) { } - bool okay() { return FALSE; } + bool okay() { return false; } }; TQAuServerNull::TQAuServerNull(TQObject* parent) : diff --git a/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp b/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp index 7b21783b0..ccf8fb66f 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public: }; TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(StyleOptionDefault) : - def(TRUE), + def(true), tb(NULL), i1(-1), i2(-1), @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(StyleOptionDefault) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(in1), i2(-1), @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(in1), i2(in2), @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2, int in3, int in4) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(in1), i2(in2), @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(int in1, int in2, int in3, int in4) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), mi(m), tb(NULL), i1(-1), @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), mi(m), tb(NULL), i1(in1), @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1, int in2) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), mi(m), tb(NULL), i1(in1), @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQMenuItem* m, int in1, int in2) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(const TQColor& c) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), cl(&c), i1(-1), @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(const TQColor& c) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQTab* t) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(t), i1(-1), i2(-1), @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQTab* t) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQListViewItem* i) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), li(i), i1(-1), @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQListViewItem* i) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQCheckListItem* i) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(-1), i2(-1), @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQCheckListItem* i) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQt::ArrowType a) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1((int)a), i2(-1), @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQt::ArrowType a) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(const TQRect& r) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(r.x()), i2(r.y()), @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(const TQRect& r) : } TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQWidget *w) : - def(FALSE), + def(false), tb(NULL), i1(-1), i2(-1), @@ -383,8 +383,8 @@ TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption(TQWidget *w) : /*! \fn bool TQStyleOption::isDefault() const - Returns TRUE if the option was constructed with the default - constructor; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the option was constructed with the default + constructor; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, bool clip = (flags & TQt::DontClip) == 0; if ( clip ) { if ( pm.width() < w && pm.height() < h ) { - clip = FALSE; + clip = false; } else { p->save(); TQRegion cr = TQRect(x, y, w, h); @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, TQString k; k.sprintf( "$qt-drawitem-%x", pm.serialNumber() ); TQPixmap *mask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); - bool del=FALSE; + bool del=false; if ( !mask ) { mask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); mask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)mask) ); @@ -1973,19 +1973,19 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, TQt::BackgroundMode BackgroundMode\endlink enum. \value SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition a boolean value. - If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to - jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is + If true, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to + jump to that position. If false, the middle clicking is ignored. \value SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition a boolean value. - If TRUE, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to - jump to that position. If FALSE, the left clicking will + If true, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to + jump to that position. If false, the left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control. \value SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl a boolean - value. If TRUE, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding + value. If true, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the - SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If FALSE, the + SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If false, the scrollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl. @@ -2402,7 +2402,7 @@ void TQStyle::setWidgetActionRequestHook( WidgetActionRequestHook hook ) { /*! \fn bool widgetActionRequestHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags elementFlags, void* source, WidgetActionRequest request ); - Handles widget action requests. Return FALSE to continue processing in base classes, TRUE to eat the request and halt processing. + Handles widget action requests. Return false to continue processing in base classes, true to eat the request and halt processing. */ bool TQStyle::widgetActionRequest( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags elementFlags, void* source, WidgetActionRequest request, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData requestData ) { bool cbret = false; @@ -2413,33 +2413,33 @@ bool TQStyle::widgetActionRequest( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, Cont if (ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQWidget")) { TQWidget* widget = reinterpret_cast<TQWidget*>(source); if (request == WAR_Repaint) { - widget->repaint(FALSE); + widget->repaint(false); } else if (request == WAR_RepaintRect) { - widget->repaint(requestData.rect, FALSE); + widget->repaint(requestData.rect, false); } else if (request == WAR_EnableMouseTracking) { - widget->setMouseTracking(TRUE); + widget->setMouseTracking(true); } else if (request == WAR_DisableMouseTracking) { - widget->setMouseTracking(FALSE); + widget->setMouseTracking(false); } else if (request == WAR_SetAutoMask) { - widget->setAutoMask(TRUE); + widget->setAutoMask(true); } else if (request == WAR_UnSetAutoMask) { - widget->setAutoMask(FALSE); + widget->setAutoMask(false); } else if (request == WAR_SetCheckable) { TQPopupMenu *pm = dynamic_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(widget); if (pm) { - pm->setCheckable(TRUE); + pm->setCheckable(true); } } else if (request == WAR_UnSetCheckable) { TQPopupMenu *pm = dynamic_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(widget); if (pm) { - pm->setCheckable(FALSE); + pm->setCheckable(false); } } else if (request == WAR_FrameSetStyle) { @@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ bool TQStyle::widgetActionRequest( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, Cont it2.toFirst(); while ( (w = (TQWidget*)it2.current()) != 0 ) { ++it2; - w->repaint(FALSE); + w->repaint(false); } delete l; } @@ -2502,13 +2502,13 @@ bool TQStyle::widgetActionRequest( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, Cont else if (request == WAR_SetDefault) { TQPushButton *button = dynamic_cast<TQPushButton*>(widget); if (button) { - button->setDefault(TRUE); + button->setDefault(true); } } else if (request == WAR_UnSetDefault) { TQPushButton *button = dynamic_cast<TQPushButton*>(widget); if (button) { - button->setDefault(FALSE); + button->setDefault(false); } } else if (request == WAR_SendPaintEvent) { @@ -2536,7 +2536,7 @@ void TQStyle::setApplicationActionRequestHook( ApplicationActionRequestHook hook /*! \fn bool applicationActionRequestHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags elementFlags, void* source, ApplicationActionRequest request ); - Handles application action requests. Return FALSE to continue processing in base classes, TRUE to eat the request and halt processing. + Handles application action requests. Return false to continue processing in base classes, true to eat the request and halt processing. */ bool TQStyle::applicationActionRequest( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags elementFlags, void* source, ApplicationActionRequest request, TQStyleApplicationActionRequestData requestData ) { bool cbret = false; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqstyle.h b/src/kernel/tqstyle.h index 01e091ff9..54ea59cbe 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqstyle.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqstyle.h @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ public: TQRect rect() const { return TQRect( i1, i2, i3, i4 ); } TQWidget* widget() const { return (TQWidget*)p1; } - TQStyleOption(TQTab* t, TQTab* h) : def(FALSE), tb(t), cli(NULL), tbh(h) {} + TQStyleOption(TQTab* t, TQTab* h) : def(false), tb(t), cli(NULL), tbh(h) {} TQTab* hoverTab() const { return tbh; } private: @@ -302,8 +302,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData { public: TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(); TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(int metric1, int metric2=0); - TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQPalette palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char* className = 0); - TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQFont font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char* className = 0); + TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQPalette palette, bool informWidgets = false, const char* className = 0); + TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQFont font, bool informWidgets = false, const char* className = 0); TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQRect rect); TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQPaintEvent* paintEvent); ~TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp b/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp index c03cc792e..afa9fa057 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::init() d->fontsizestep = 0; d->ncolumns = Undefined; d->col = TQColor(); // !isValid() - d->anchor = FALSE; + d->anchor = false; d->align = Undefined; d->valign = VAlignBaseline; d->margin[0] = Undefined; @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::init() d->margin[4] = Undefined; d->list = ListStyleUndefined; d->whitespacemode = WhiteSpaceModeUndefined; - d->selfnest = TRUE; + d->selfnest = true; d->lineSpacing = Undefined; } @@ -356,8 +356,8 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::setVerticalAlignment( VerticalAlignment valign ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns + false. \sa setFontItalic(), definesFontItalic() */ @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontItalic() const } /*! - If \a italic is TRUE sets italic for the style; otherwise sets + If \a italic is true sets italic for the style; otherwise sets upright. \sa fontItalic(), definesFontItalic() @@ -378,8 +378,8 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontItalic(bool italic) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns - FALSE. A style does not define any shape until setFontItalic() is + Returns true if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns + false. A style does not define any shape until setFontItalic() is called. \sa setFontItalic(), fontItalic() @@ -390,8 +390,8 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontItalic() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise + returns false. \sa setFontUnderline(), definesFontUnderline() */ @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontUnderline() const } /*! - If \a underline is TRUE, sets underline for the style; otherwise + If \a underline is true, sets underline for the style; otherwise sets no underline. \sa fontUnderline(), definesFontUnderline() @@ -412,8 +412,8 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontUnderline(bool underline) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the underline - property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not + Returns true if the style defines a setting for the underline + property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until setFontUnderline() is called. \sa setFontUnderline(), fontUnderline() @@ -425,8 +425,8 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontUnderline() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise + returns false. \sa setFontStrikeOut(), definesFontStrikeOut() */ @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontStrikeOut() const } /*! - If \a strikeOut is TRUE, sets strike out for the style; otherwise + If \a strikeOut is true, sets strike out for the style; otherwise sets no strike out. \sa fontStrikeOut(), definesFontStrikeOut() @@ -447,8 +447,8 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontStrikeOut(bool strikeOut) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut - property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not + Returns true if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut + property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until setFontStrikeOut() is called. \sa setFontStrikeOut(), fontStrikeOut() @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ bool TQStyleSheetItem::isAnchor() const } /*! - If \a anc is TRUE, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext + If \a anc is true, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext link); otherwise sets it to not be an anchor. Elements in this style link to other documents or anchors. @@ -781,22 +781,22 @@ void TQStyleSheetItem::setContexts( const TQString& c) } /*! - Returns TRUE if this style can be nested into an element of style - \a s; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this style can be nested into an element of style + \a s; otherwise returns false. \sa contexts(), setContexts() */ bool TQStyleSheetItem::allowedInContext( const TQStyleSheetItem* s) const { if ( d->contxt.isEmpty() ) - return TRUE; + return true; return d->contxt.find( TQChar(' ')+s->name()+TQChar(' ')) != -1; } /*! - Returns TRUE if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise + returns false. \sa setSelfNesting() */ @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ TQStyleSheet::~TQStyleSheet() */ void TQStyleSheet::init() { - styles.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + styles.setAutoDelete( true ); nullstyle = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("") ); @@ -1126,13 +1126,13 @@ void TQStyleSheet::init() style->setDisplayMode( TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("a") ); - style->setAnchor( TRUE ); + style->setAnchor( true ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("em") ); - style->setFontItalic( TRUE ); + style->setFontItalic( true ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("i") ); - style->setFontItalic( TRUE ); + style->setFontItalic( true ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("big") ); style->setLogicalFontSizeStep( 1 ); @@ -1185,7 +1185,7 @@ void TQStyleSheet::init() style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("p") ); style->setDisplayMode(TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock); style-> setMargin(TQStyleSheetItem::MarginVertical, 12); - style->setSelfNesting( FALSE ); + style->setSelfNesting( false ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("center") ); style->setDisplayMode(TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock); @@ -1213,7 +1213,7 @@ void TQStyleSheet::init() style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("li") ); style->setDisplayMode(TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem); - style->setSelfNesting( FALSE ); + style->setSelfNesting( false ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("code") ); style->setFontFamily( TQString::fromLatin1("Courier New,courier") ); @@ -1258,9 +1258,9 @@ void TQStyleSheet::init() style->setMargin(TQStyleSheetItem::MarginLeft, 30); style->setContexts(TQString::fromLatin1("dt dl") ); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("u") ); - style->setFontUnderline( TRUE); + style->setFontUnderline( true); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("s") ); - style->setFontStrikeOut( TRUE); + style->setFontStrikeOut( true); style = new TQStyleSheetItem( this, TQString::fromLatin1("nobr") ); style->setWhiteSpaceMode( TQStyleSheetItem::WhiteSpaceNoWrap ); @@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@ TQString TQStyleSheet::escape( const TQString& plain) string using the current TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet(). \value AutoText The text string is interpreted as for \c RichText - if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns TRUE, otherwise as + if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns true, otherwise as \c PlainText. \value LogText A special, limited text format which is only used @@ -1506,8 +1506,8 @@ TQString TQStyleSheet::escape( const TQString& plain) */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the string \a text is likely to be rich text; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the string \a text is likely to be rich text; + otherwise returns false. This function uses a fast and therefore simple heuristic. It mainly checks whether there is something that looks like a tag @@ -1517,18 +1517,18 @@ TQString TQStyleSheet::escape( const TQString& plain) bool TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText( const TQString& text) { if ( text.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int start = 0; while ( start < int(text.length()) && text[start].isSpace() ) ++start; if ( text.mid( start, 5 ).lower() == "<!doc" ) - return TRUE; + return true; int open = start; while ( open < int(text.length()) && text[open] != '<' && text[open] != '\n' ) { if ( text[open] == '&' && text.mid(open+1,3) == "lt;" ) - return TRUE; // support desperate attempt of user to see <...> + return true; // support desperate attempt of user to see <...> ++open; } if ( open < (int)text.length() && text[open] == '<' ) { @@ -1541,12 +1541,12 @@ bool TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText( const TQString& text) else if ( !tag.isEmpty() && text[i].isSpace() ) break; else if ( !text[i].isSpace() && (!tag.isEmpty() || text[i] != '!' ) ) - return FALSE; // that's not a tag + return false; // that's not a tag } return defaultSheet()->item( tag.lower() ) != 0; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1586,10 +1586,10 @@ void TQStyleSheet::scaleFont( TQFont& font, int logicalSize ) const if ( logicalSize > 7 ) logicalSize = 7; int baseSize = font.pointSize(); - bool pixel = FALSE; + bool pixel = false; if ( baseSize == -1 ) { baseSize = font.pixelSize(); - pixel = TRUE; + pixel = true; } int s; switch ( logicalSize ) { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtextengine.cpp b/src/kernel/tqtextengine.cpp index 067a21740..1cda53f96 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtextengine.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqtextengine.cpp @@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ struct BidiControl { }; inline BidiControl( bool rtl ) - : cCtx( 0 ), singleLine( FALSE ) { + : cCtx( 0 ), singleLine( false ) { ctx[0].level = (rtl ? 1 : 0); - ctx[0].override = FALSE; + ctx[0].override = false; } - inline void embed( int level, bool override = FALSE ) { + inline void embed( int level, bool override = false ) { if ( ctx[cCtx].level < 61 && cCtx < 61 ) { (void) ++cCtx; ctx[cCtx].level = level; @@ -215,12 +215,12 @@ static void appendItems(TQTextEngine *engine, int &start, int &stop, BidiControl if ( uc == 0xfffcU || uc == 0x2028U ) { item.analysis.bidiLevel = level % 2 ? level-1 : level; item.analysis.script = TQFont::Latin; - item.isObject = TRUE; + item.isObject = true; s = TQFont::NoScript; } else if ((uc >= 9 && uc <=13) || (category >= TQChar::Separator_Space && category <= TQChar::Separator_Paragraph)) { item.analysis.script = TQFont::Latin; - item.isSpace = TRUE; + item.isSpace = true; item.isTab = ( uc == '\t' ); item.analysis.bidiLevel = item.isTab ? control.baseLevel() : level; s = TQFont::NoScript; @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ static void appendItems(TQTextEngine *engine, int &start, int &stop, BidiControl item.position = i; items.append( item ); script = s; - item.isSpace = item.isTab = item.isObject = FALSE; + item.isSpace = item.isTab = item.isObject = false; } } ++stop; @@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ static void bidiItemize( TQTextEngine *engine, bool rightToLeft, int mode ) { BidiControl control( rightToLeft ); if ( mode & TQTextEngine::SingleLine ) - control.singleLine = TRUE; + control.singleLine = true; int sor = 0; int eor = -1; // ### should get rid of this! - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; int length = engine->string.length(); @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ static void bidiItemize( TQTextEngine *engine, bool rightToLeft, int mode ) status.last = dirCurrent; } - first = FALSE; + first = false; ++current; } @@ -807,9 +807,9 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes if (cls >= TQUnicodeTables::LineBreak_CM) cls = TQUnicodeTables::LineBreak_ID; - charAttributes[0].softBreak = FALSE; + charAttributes[0].softBreak = false; charAttributes[0].whiteSpace = (cls == TQUnicodeTables::LineBreak_SP); - charAttributes[0].charStop = TRUE; + charAttributes[0].charStop = true; bool prevIsHighSurrogate = uc[0].isHighSurrogate(); for (int i = 1; i < len; ++i) @@ -818,9 +818,9 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes if (prevIsHighSurrogate && uc[i].isLowSurrogate()) { prevIsHighSurrogate = false; - charAttributes[i].softBreak = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + charAttributes[i].softBreak = false; + charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = false; + charAttributes[i].charStop = false; continue; } prevIsHighSurrogate = uc[i].isHighSurrogate(); @@ -829,16 +829,16 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes int category = ::category(uc[i]); if (category == TQChar::Mark_NonSpacing) { - charAttributes[i].softBreak = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].charStop = FALSE; + charAttributes[i].softBreak = false; + charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = false; + charAttributes[i].charStop = false; continue; } if (ncls == TQUnicodeTables::LineBreak_SP) { - charAttributes[i].softBreak = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = TRUE; - charAttributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + charAttributes[i].softBreak = false; + charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = true; + charAttributes[i].charStop = true; cls = ncls; continue; } @@ -847,9 +847,9 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes { // two complex chars (thai or lao), thai_attributes might override, but here // we do a best guess - charAttributes[i].softBreak = TRUE; - charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + charAttributes[i].softBreak = true; + charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = false; + charAttributes[i].charStop = true; cls = ncls; continue; } @@ -868,8 +868,8 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes softBreak = (brk == Dbk); // tqDebug("char = %c %04x, cls=%d, ncls=%d, brk=%d soft=%d", uc[i].cell(), uc[i].unicode(), cls, ncls, brk, charAttributes[i].softBreak); charAttributes[i].softBreak = softBreak; - charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = FALSE; - charAttributes[i].charStop = TRUE; + charAttributes[i].whiteSpace = false; + charAttributes[i].charStop = true; cls = ncls; } } @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ static void calcLineBreaks(const TQString &str, TQCharAttributes *charAttributes TQTextEngine::TQTextEngine( const TQString &str, TQFontPrivate *f ) - : string( str ), fnt( f ), direction( TQChar::DirON ), haveCharAttributes( FALSE ), widthOnly( FALSE ) + : string( str ), fnt( f ), direction( TQChar::DirON ), haveCharAttributes( false ), widthOnly( false ) { #ifdef TQ_WS_WIN if ( !resolvedUsp10 ) @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ const TQCharAttributes *TQTextEngine::attributes() attributes( script, string, from, len, charAttributes ); } - haveCharAttributes = TRUE; + haveCharAttributes = true; return charAttributes; } @@ -1115,15 +1115,15 @@ void TQTextEngine::itemize( int mode ) direction = basicDirection( string ); bidiItemize( this, direction == TQChar::DirR, mode ); } else { - BidiControl control( FALSE ); + BidiControl control( false ); if ( mode & TQTextEngine::SingleLine ) - control.singleLine = TRUE; + control.singleLine = true; int start = 0; int stop = string.length() - 1; appendItems(this, start, stop, control, TQChar::DirL); } if ( (mode & WidthOnly) == WidthOnly ) - widthOnly = TRUE; + widthOnly = true; } glyph_metrics_t TQTextEngine::boundingBox( int from, int len ) const diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtextengine_p.h b/src/kernel/tqtextengine_p.h index d3e8ea3ee..4ba2ed942 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtextengine_p.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqtextengine_p.h @@ -197,8 +197,8 @@ class TQFontEngine; struct TQScriptItem { - inline TQScriptItem() : position( 0 ), isSpace( FALSE ), isTab( FALSE ), - isObject( FALSE ), hasPositioning( FALSE ), + inline TQScriptItem() : position( 0 ), isSpace( false ), isTab( false ), + isObject( false ), hasPositioning( false ), descent( -1 ), ascent( -1 ), width( -1 ), x( 0 ), y( 0 ), num_glyphs( 0 ), glyph_data_offset( 0 ), fontEngine( 0 ) { } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtextengine_unix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqtextengine_unix.cpp index 0de67f04a..37a786c2e 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtextengine_unix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqtextengine_unix.cpp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ void TQTextEngine::shape( int item ) const shaper_item.font = si.fontEngine; shaper_item.num_glyphs = TQMAX(int(num_glyphs - used), shaper_item.length); shaper_item.flags = si.analysis.bidiLevel % 2 ? RightToLeft : 0; - shaper_item.has_positioning = FALSE; + shaper_item.has_positioning = false; while (1) { ensureSpace(shaper_item.num_glyphs); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtextlayout.cpp b/src/kernel/tqtextlayout.cpp index 0d50e4106..5d424f423 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtextlayout.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqtextlayout.cpp @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ TQTextLayout::Result TQTextLayout::endLine( int x, int y, int alignment, if ( breakItem != i ) itemWidth = 0; if (itemAttrs->softBreak) - breakany = FALSE; + breakany = false; breakItem = i; breakPosition = pos; // tqDebug("found possible break at item %d, position %d (absolute=%d), w=%d, tmpWidth=%d, tmpItemWidth=%d", breakItem, breakPosition, d->items[breakItem].position+breakPosition, w, tmpWidth, tmpItemWidth); @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ bool TQTextLayout::validCursorPosition( int pos ) const { const TQCharAttributes *attributes = d->attributes(); if ( pos < 0 || pos > (int)d->string.length() ) - return FALSE; + return false; return attributes[pos].charStop; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqthread.cpp b/src/kernel/tqthread.cpp index 9a1d1f602..ac6aa0ecb 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqthread.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqthread.cpp @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ TQThread::TQThread( unsigned int stackSize ) Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e. - finished() returns FALSE) will probably result in a program crash. + finished() returns false) will probably result in a program crash. You can wait() on a thread to make sure that it has finished. */ TQThread::~TQThread() @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ TQThread::~TQThread() tqWarning("TQThread object destroyed while thread is still running."); #endif - d->orphan = TRUE; + d->orphan = true; return; } @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ void TQThread::terminate() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the thread is finished; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the thread is finished; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQThread::finished() const { @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ bool TQThread::finished() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the thread is running; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the thread is running; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQThread::running() const { @@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ bool TQThread::running() const /*! Changes the way cross thread signals are handled - If disable is FALSE, signals emitted from this thread will be + If disable is false, signals emitted from this thread will be posted to any other connected threads' event loops (default). - If disable is TRUE, calls to emit from this thread + If disable is true, calls to emit from this thread will immediately execute slots in another thread. This mode of operation is inherently unsafe and is provided solely to support thread management by a third party application. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ void TQThread::setThreadPostedEventsDisabled(bool disable) } /*! - Returns TRUE if thread posted events are disabled, FALSE if not + Returns true if thread posted events are disabled, false if not */ bool TQThread::threadPostedEventsDisabled() const { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqthread_unix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqthread_unix.cpp index 27b8ec7af..4f4ec8d79 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqthread_unix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqthread_unix.cpp @@ -98,10 +98,10 @@ void TQThreadInstance::init(unsigned int stackSize) stacksize = stackSize; args[0] = args[1] = 0; thread_storage = 0; - finished = FALSE; - running = FALSE; - orphan = FALSE; - disableThreadPostedEvents = FALSE; + finished = false; + running = false; + orphan = false; + disableThreadPostedEvents = false; pthread_cond_init(&thread_done, nullptr); thread_id = 0; @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ void *TQThreadInstance::start( void *_arg ) ( (TQThread *) arg[0] )->run(); - pthread_cleanup_pop( TRUE ); + pthread_cleanup_pop( true ); return 0; } @@ -154,8 +154,8 @@ void TQThreadInstance::finish( void * ) TQApplication::threadTerminationHandler((TQThread*)d->args[0]); TQMutexLocker locker( d->mutex() ); - d->running = FALSE; - d->finished = TRUE; + d->running = false; + d->finished = true; d->args[0] = d->args[1] = 0; @@ -210,9 +210,9 @@ TQt::HANDLE TQThread::currentThread() void TQThread::initialize() { if ( ! tqt_global_mutexpool ) - tqt_global_mutexpool = new TQMutexPool( TRUE, 73 ); + tqt_global_mutexpool = new TQMutexPool( true, 73 ); if ( ! qt_thread_mutexpool ) - qt_thread_mutexpool = new TQMutexPool( FALSE, 127 ); + qt_thread_mutexpool = new TQMutexPool( false, 127 ); } /*! \internal @@ -321,8 +321,8 @@ void TQThread::start(Priority priority) pthread_cond_wait(&d->thread_done, &locker.mutex()->d->handle); } - d->running = TRUE; - d->finished = FALSE; + d->running = true; + d->finished = false; int ret; pthread_attr_t attr; @@ -401,8 +401,8 @@ void TQThread::start(Priority priority) // we failed to set the stacksize, and as the documentation states, // the thread will fail to run... - d->running = FALSE; - d->finished = FALSE; + d->running = false; + d->finished = false; return; } } @@ -423,8 +423,8 @@ void TQThread::start(Priority priority) tqWarning( "TQThread::start: thread creation error: %s", strerror( ret ) ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - d->running = FALSE; - d->finished = FALSE; + d->running = false; + d->finished = false; d->args[0] = d->args[1] = 0; } } @@ -441,11 +441,11 @@ void TQThread::start() \list \i The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished execution (i.e. when it returns from \l{run()}). This function - will return TRUE if the thread has finished. It also returns - TRUE if the thread has not been started yet. + will return true if the thread has finished. It also returns + true if the thread has not been started yet. \i \a time milliseconds has elapsed. If \a time is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must - return from \l{run()}). This function will return FALSE if the + return from \l{run()}). This function will return false if the wait timed out. \endlist @@ -460,11 +460,11 @@ bool TQThread::wait( unsigned long time ) tqWarning( "TQThread::wait: thread tried to wait on itself" ); #endif // QT_CHECK_STATE - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->finished || ! d->running ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } int ret; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp b/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp index 84803f1b5..1244a4690 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ \code TQTimer *timer = new TQTimer( myObject ); connect( timer, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), myObject, TQ_SLOT(timerDone()) ); - timer->start( 2000, TRUE ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer + timer->start( 2000, true ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer \endcode You can also use the static singleShot() function to create a @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ \code TQTimer *t = new TQTimer( myObject ); connect( t, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQ_SLOT(processOneThing()) ); - t->start( 0, FALSE ); + t->start( 0, false ); \endcode myObject->processOneThing() will be called repeatedly and should @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ TQTimer::~TQTimer() /*! \fn bool TQTimer::isActive() const - Returns TRUE if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns + false. */ /*! @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ TQTimer::~TQTimer() Starts the timer with a \a msec milliseconds timeout, and returns the ID of the timer, or zero when starting the timer failed. - If \a sshot is TRUE, the timer will be activated only once; + If \a sshot is true, the timer will be activated only once; otherwise it will continue until it is stopped. Any pending timer will be stopped. @@ -216,11 +216,11 @@ void TQTimer::stop() bool TQTimer::event( TQEvent *e ) { if ( e->type() != TQEvent::Timer ) // ignore all other events - return FALSE; + return false; if ( single ) // stop single shot timer stop(); emit timeout(); // emit timeout signal - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ static TQObjectList *sst_list = 0; // list of single shot timers static void sst_cleanup() { if ( sst_list ) { - sst_list->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + sst_list->setAutoDelete( true ); delete sst_list; sst_list = 0; } @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ bool TQSingleShotTimer::event( TQEvent * ) signal.activate(); // emit the signal signal.disconnect( 0, 0 ); timerId = 0; // mark as inactive - return TRUE; + return true; } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtimer.h b/src/kernel/tqtimer.h index 40aae8724..461a2e486 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtimer.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqtimer.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public: bool isActive() const; - int start( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE ); + int start( int msec, bool sshot = false ); void changeInterval( int msec ); void stop(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp b/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp index b6a11feb3..59444c327 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp @@ -377,8 +377,8 @@ extern bool qt_detectRTLLanguage(); /*! Loads \a filename, which may be an absolute file name or relative to \a directory. The previous contents of this translator object - is discarded. Returns TRUE if the file is loaded successfully; - otherwise returns FALSE. + is discarded. Returns true if the file is loaded successfully; + otherwise returns false. If the full file name does not exist, other file names are tried in the following order: @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, if (d->oldPermissionLookup != qt_ntfs_permission_lookup) qt_ntfs_permission_lookup++; #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } fname.truncate( rightmost ); @@ -493,13 +493,13 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, f = qt_open( TQFile::encodeName(realname), O_RDONLY, 0666 ); if ( f < 0 ) { // tqDebug( "can't open %s: %s", realname.ascii(), strerror( errno ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } struct stat st; if ( fstat( f, &st ) ) { // tqDebug( "can't stat %s: %s", realname.ascii(), strerror( errno ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } char * tmp; tmp = (char*)mmap( 0, st.st_size, // any address, whole file @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, f, 0 ); // from offset 0 of f if ( !tmp || tmp == (char*)MAP_FAILED ) { // tqDebug( "can't mmap %s: %s", filename.ascii(), strerror( errno ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } ::close( f ); @@ -518,10 +518,10 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, #else TQFile f( realname ); if ( !f.exists() ) - return FALSE; + return false; d->unmapLength = f.size(); d->unmapPointer = new char[d->unmapLength]; - bool ok = FALSE; + bool ok = false; if ( f.open(IO_ReadOnly) ) { ok = d->unmapLength == (uint)f.readBlock( d->unmapPointer, d->unmapLength ); @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, if ( !ok ) { delete [] d->unmapPointer; d->unmapPointer = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -542,8 +542,8 @@ bool TQTranslator::load( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory, \fn bool TQTranslator::load( const uchar *data, int len ) Loads the .qm file data \a data of length \a len into the - translator. Returns TRUE if the data is loaded successfully; - otherwise returns FALSE. + translator. Returns true if the data is loaded successfully; + otherwise returns false. The data is not copied. The caller must be able to guarantee that \a data will not be deleted or modified. @@ -553,13 +553,13 @@ bool TQTranslator::do_load( const uchar *data, int len ) { if ( len < MagicLength || memcmp( data, magic, MagicLength ) != 0 ) { clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQByteArray array; array.setRawData( (const char *) data, len ); TQDataStream s( array, IO_ReadOnly ); - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; s.device()->at( MagicLength ); @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ bool TQTranslator::do_load( const uchar *data, int len ) s >> tag >> blockLen; while ( tag && blockLen ) { if ( (TQ_UINT32) s.device()->at() + blockLen > (TQ_UINT32) len ) { - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; break; } @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ bool TQTranslator::do_load( const uchar *data, int len ) } if ( !s.device()->at(s.device()->at() + blockLen) ) { - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; break; } tag = 0; @@ -642,9 +642,9 @@ bool TQTranslator::save( const TQString & filename, SaveMode mode ) s << tag << cas; s.writeRawBytes( d->contextArray->data(), cas ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -884,8 +884,8 @@ void TQTranslator::unsqueeze() /*! - Returns TRUE if this message file contains a message with the key - (\a context, \a sourceText, \a comment); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this message file contains a message with the key + (\a context, \a sourceText, \a comment); otherwise returns false. This function works with stripped translator files. @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ TQTranslatorMessage TQTranslator::findMessage( const char* context, } /*! - Returns TRUE if this translator is empty, otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this translator is empty, otherwise returns false. This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files. */ bool TQTranslator::isEmpty() const @@ -1342,8 +1342,8 @@ TQTranslatorMessage & TQTranslatorMessage::operator=( /*! Writes this translator message to the \a stream. If \a strip is - FALSE (the default), all the information in the message is - written. If \a strip is TRUE, only the part of the extended key + false (the default), all the information in the message is + written. If \a strip is true, only the part of the extended key specified by \a prefix is written with the translation (\c HashContextSourceTextComment by default). @@ -1359,7 +1359,7 @@ void TQTranslatorMessage::write( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip, stream.writeRawBytes( &tag, 1 ); stream << tn; - bool mustWriteHash = TRUE; + bool mustWriteHash = true; if ( !strip ) prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment; @@ -1420,8 +1420,8 @@ TQTranslatorMessage::Prefix TQTranslatorMessage::commonPrefix( /*! - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is equal to that of - \a m; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the extended key of this object is equal to that of + \a m; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator==( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const @@ -1433,15 +1433,15 @@ bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator==( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const /*! \fn bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator!=( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is different from - that of \a m; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the extended key of this object is different from + that of \a m; otherwise returns false. */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is + Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before than that of \a m; otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. */ bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator<( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const @@ -1455,24 +1455,24 @@ bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator<( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const /*! \fn bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator<=( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is + Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before that of \a m or if they are equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator>( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is - lexicographically after that of \a m; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the extended key of this object is + lexicographically after that of \a m; otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator>=( const TQTranslatorMessage& m ) const - Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is + Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of \a m or if they are equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + otherwise returns false. */ #endif // TQT_NO_TRANSLATION diff --git a/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h b/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h index 39f9faa36..634b37dd5 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ public: enum Prefix { NoPrefix, Hash, HashContext, HashContextSourceText, HashContextSourceTextComment }; - void write( TQDataStream & s, bool strip = FALSE, + void write( TQDataStream & s, bool strip = false, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const; Prefix commonPrefix( const TQTranslatorMessage& ) const; diff --git a/src/kernel/tqucomextra.cpp b/src/kernel/tqucomextra.cpp index f44355adc..b92552fd7 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqucomextra.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqucomextra.cpp @@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ bool TQUType_TQVariant::canConvertFrom( TQUObject *o, TQUType *t ) || isEqual( o->type, &static_QUType_bool ) || isEqual( o->type, &static_QUType_double ) || isEqual( o->type, &static_QUType_charstar ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; return t->canConvertTo( o, this ); } bool TQUType_TQVariant::canConvertTo( TQUObject * /*o*/, TQUType * /*t*/ ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQUType_TQVariant::convertFrom( TQUObject *o, TQUType *t ) @@ -96,12 +96,12 @@ bool TQUType_TQVariant::convertFrom( TQUObject *o, TQUType *t ) o->type->clear( o ); o->payload.ptr = var; o->type = this; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQUType_TQVariant::convertTo( TQUObject * /*o*/, TQUType * /*t*/ ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQUType_TQVariant::clear( TQUObject *o ) @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ void TQUType_varptr::set( TQUObject *o, const void* v ) bool TQUType_varptr::canConvertFrom( TQUObject *o, TQUType *t ) { if ( isEqual( t, &static_QUType_ptr ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; return t->canConvertTo( o, this ); } @@ -154,16 +154,16 @@ bool TQUType_varptr::convertFrom( TQUObject *o, TQUType *t ) return t->convertTo( o, this ); o->type = this; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQUType_varptr::convertTo( TQUObject *o, TQUType * t) { if ( isEqual( t, &static_QUType_ptr ) ) { o->type = &static_QUType_ptr; - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } int TQUType_varptr::serializeTo( TQUObject *, TQUBuffer * ) diff --git a/src/kernel/tqurl.cpp b/src/kernel/tqurl.cpp index 7d0066f0c..ae5d7c992 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqurl.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqurl.cpp @@ -63,12 +63,12 @@ public: /*! Replaces backslashes with slashes and removes multiple occurrences - of slashes or backslashes if \c allowMultiple is FALSE. + of slashes or backslashes if \c allowMultiple is false. */ -static void slashify( TQString& s, bool allowMultiple = TRUE ) +static void slashify( TQString& s, bool allowMultiple = true ) { - bool justHadSlash = FALSE; + bool justHadSlash = false; for ( int i = 0; i < (int)s.length(); i++ ) { if ( !allowMultiple && justHadSlash && ( s[ i ] == '/' || s[ i ] == '\\' ) ) { @@ -83,9 +83,9 @@ static void slashify( TQString& s, bool allowMultiple = TRUE ) s[ i ] = '/'; #endif if ( s[ i ] == '/' ) - justHadSlash = TRUE; + justHadSlash = true; else - justHadSlash = FALSE; + justHadSlash = false; } } @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ static void slashify( TQString& s, bool allowMultiple = TRUE ) Use the static functions, encode() and decode() to encode or decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.) - The isRelativeUrl() static function returns TRUE if the given + The isRelativeUrl() static function returns true if the given string is a relative URL. If you want to use a URL to work on a hierarchical structure (e.g. @@ -188,9 +188,9 @@ static void slashify( TQString& s, bool allowMultiple = TRUE ) TQUrl::TQUrl() { d = new TQUrlPrivate; - d->isValid = FALSE; + d->isValid = false; d->port = -1; - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; } /*! @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ TQUrl::TQUrl( const TQUrl& url ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a url is relative; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a url is relative; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQUrl::isRelativeUrl( const TQString &url ) @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ bool TQUrl::isRelativeUrl( const TQString &url ) want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by the file name of \a relUrl (if it contains one), set \a checkSlash - to TRUE. + to true. */ TQUrl::TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash ) @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ TQUrl::TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash ) p += "/"; p += rel; d->path = p; - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; } } } else { @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ void TQUrl::setProtocol( const TQString& protocol ) { d->protocol = protocol; if ( hasHost() ) - d->isValid = TRUE; + d->isValid = true; } /*! @@ -375,8 +375,8 @@ void TQUrl::setUser( const TQString& user ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns + false. \sa setUser() setPassword() */ @@ -415,8 +415,8 @@ void TQUrl::setPassword( const TQString& pass ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns + false. \warning Passwords passed in URLs are normally \e insecure; this is due to the mechanism, not because of TQt. @@ -450,12 +450,12 @@ void TQUrl::setHost( const TQString& host ) { d->host = host; if ( !d->protocol.isNull() && d->protocol != "file" ) - d->isValid = TRUE; + d->isValid = true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns + false. \sa setHost() */ @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ void TQUrl::setPort( int port ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns false. \sa setPort() */ @@ -508,12 +508,12 @@ void TQUrl::setPath( const TQString& path ) { d->path = path; slashify( d->path ); - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; - d->isValid = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; + d->isValid = true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns false. \sa path() setPath() */ @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ void TQUrl::setRef( const TQString& txt ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns false. \sa setRef() */ @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ bool TQUrl::hasRef() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. A URL + Returns true if the URL is valid; otherwise returns false. A URL is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example. */ @@ -602,9 +602,9 @@ void TQUrl::reset() d->path = ""; d->queryEncoded = ""; d->refEncoded = ""; - d->isValid = TRUE; + d->isValid = true; d->port = -1; - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; } /*! @@ -617,12 +617,12 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) slashify( url_ ); if ( url_.isEmpty() ) { - d->isValid = FALSE; - return FALSE; + d->isValid = false; + return false; } - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; - d->isValid = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; + d->isValid = true; TQString oldProtocol = d->protocol; d->protocol = TQString::null; @@ -664,15 +664,15 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) { 0, 0, Port, Path, 0, 0, 0, 0, } // Port }; - bool relPath = FALSE; + bool relPath = false; - relPath = FALSE; - bool forceRel = FALSE; + relPath = false; + bool forceRel = false; // If ':' is at pos 1, we have only one letter // before that separator => that's a drive letter! if ( url_.length() >= 2 && url_[1] == ':' ) - relPath = forceRel = TRUE; + relPath = forceRel = true; int hasNoHost = -1; int cs = url_.find( ":/" ); @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) } else { table[ 0 ][ 1 ] = Protocol; } - relPath = TRUE; + relPath = true; } else { // some checking table[ 0 ][ 1 ] = Protocol; @@ -799,8 +799,8 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) // error if ( i < (int)url_.length() - 1 ) { - d->isValid = FALSE; - return FALSE; + d->isValid = false; + return false; } @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) #endif decode( d->path ); - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; #if 0 tqDebug( "URL: %s", url.latin1() ); @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ bool TQUrl::parse( const TQString& url ) tqDebug( "port: %d\n\n----------------------------\n\n", d->port ); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -891,14 +891,14 @@ TQUrl& TQUrl::operator=( const TQUrl& url ) } /*! - Compares this URL with \a url and returns TRUE if they are equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this URL with \a url and returns true if they are equal; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQUrl::operator==( const TQUrl& url ) const { if ( !isValid() || !url.isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( d->protocol == url.d->protocol && d->user == url.d->user && @@ -909,16 +909,16 @@ bool TQUrl::operator==( const TQUrl& url ) const d->refEncoded == url.d->refEncoded && d->isValid == url.d->isValid && d->port == url.d->port ) - return TRUE; + return true; - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \overload Compares this URL with \a url. \a url is parsed first. Returns - TRUE if \a url is equal to this url; otherwise returns FALSE. + true if \a url is equal to this url; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQUrl::operator==( const TQString& url ) const @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ TQString TQUrl::encodedPathAndQuery() void TQUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery( const TQString& pathAndQuery ) { - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; int pos = pathAndQuery.find( '?' ); if ( pos == -1 ) { d->path = pathAndQuery; @@ -1007,13 +1007,13 @@ void TQUrl::setEncodedPathAndQuery( const TQString& pathAndQuery ) } decode( d->path ); - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; } extern bool tqt_resolve_symlinks; // defined in tqapplication.cpp /*! - Returns the path of the URL. If \a correct is TRUE, the path is + Returns the path of the URL. If \a correct is true, the path is cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things like "/../..", etc). Otherwise path() returns exactly the path that was parsed or set. @@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ TQString TQUrl::path( bool correct ) const return d->path; if ( d->cleanPathDirty ) { - bool check = TRUE; + bool check = true; if ( TQDir::isRelativePath( d->path ) ) { d->cleanPath = d->path; } else if ( isLocalFile() ) { @@ -1037,10 +1037,10 @@ TQString TQUrl::path( bool correct ) const d->cleanPath = d->path; bool share = (d->cleanPath[0] == '\\' && d->cleanPath[1] == '\\') || (d->cleanPath[0] == '/' && d->cleanPath[1] == '/'); - slashify( d->cleanPath, FALSE ); + slashify( d->cleanPath, false ); d->cleanPath = TQDir::cleanDirPath( d->cleanPath ); if ( share ) { - check = FALSE; + check = false; while (d->cleanPath.at(0) != '/' || d->cleanPath.at(1) != '/') d->cleanPath.prepend("/"); } @@ -1078,15 +1078,15 @@ TQString TQUrl::path( bool correct ) const } if ( check ) - slashify( d->cleanPath, FALSE ); - d->cleanPathDirty = FALSE; + slashify( d->cleanPath, false ); + d->cleanPathDirty = false; } return d->cleanPath; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQUrl::isLocalFile() const @@ -1140,7 +1140,7 @@ void TQUrl::addPath( const TQString& pa ) else d->path += p; } - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; } /*! @@ -1264,8 +1264,8 @@ void TQUrl::decode( TQString& url ) /*! Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If \a - encodedPath is TRUE the path in the returned string is encoded. If - \a forcePrependProtocol is TRUE and \a encodedPath looks like a + encodedPath is true the path in the returned string is encoded. If + \a forcePrependProtocol is true and \a encodedPath looks like a local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended. \sa encode() decode() @@ -1338,8 +1338,8 @@ TQUrl::operator TQString() const bool TQUrl::cdUp() { d->path += "/.."; - d->cleanPathDirty = TRUE; - return TRUE; + d->cleanPathDirty = true; + return true; } #endif // TQT_NO_URL diff --git a/src/kernel/tqurl.h b/src/kernel/tqurl.h index 741719d44..e89d91e58 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqurl.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqurl.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public: TQUrl(); TQUrl( const TQString& url ); TQUrl( const TQUrl& url ); - TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ); + TQUrl( const TQUrl& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ); virtual ~TQUrl(); TQString protocol() const; @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public: virtual void setPort( int port ); bool hasPort() const; - TQString path( bool correct = TRUE ) const; + TQString path( bool correct = true ) const; virtual void setPath( const TQString& path ); bool hasPath() const; @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public: static void encode( TQString& url ); operator TQString() const; - virtual TQString toString( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQString toString( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const; virtual bool cdUp(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqurlinfo.cpp b/src/kernel/tqurlinfo.cpp index 5f1c9e519..4beca83bf 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqurlinfo.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqurlinfo.cpp @@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ public: TQUrlInfoPrivate() : permissions(0), size(0), - isDir(FALSE), - isFile(TRUE), - isSymLink(FALSE), - isWritable(TRUE), - isReadable(TRUE), - isExecutable(FALSE) + isDir(false), + isFile(true), + isSymLink(false), + isWritable(true), + isReadable(true), + isExecutable(false) {} TQString name; @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo() file in the TQUrlOperator \a path. If the information is not found, this constructor creates an - invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns FALSE. You should always + invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns false. You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values of any getter functions. @@ -260,8 +260,8 @@ void TQUrlInfo::setName( const TQString &name ) /*! - If \a b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is - FALSE then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally + If \a b is true then the URL is set to be a directory; if \b is + false then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.) @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ void TQUrlInfo::setDir( bool b ) /*! - If \a b is TRUE then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is FALSE + If \a b is true then the URL is set to be a file; if \b is false then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.) @@ -300,8 +300,8 @@ void TQUrlInfo::setFile( bool b ) /*! - Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if \a b is TRUE - and that it does not if \a b is FALSE. + Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if \a b is true + and that it does not if \a b is false. If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. @@ -318,8 +318,8 @@ void TQUrlInfo::setSymLink( bool b ) /*! - Specifies that the URL is writable if \a b is TRUE and not - writable if \a b is FALSE. + Specifies that the URL is writable if \a b is true and not + writable if \a b is false. If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. @@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ void TQUrlInfo::setWritable( bool b ) /*! - Specifies that the URL is readable if \a b is TRUE and not - readable if \a b is FALSE. + Specifies that the URL is readable if \a b is true and not + readable if \a b is false. If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastRead() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -570,12 +570,12 @@ TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastRead() const bool TQUrlInfo::isDir() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isDir; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is a file; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is a file; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -583,12 +583,12 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::isDir() const bool TQUrlInfo::isFile() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isFile; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -596,12 +596,12 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::isFile() const bool TQUrlInfo::isSymLink() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isSymLink; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is writable; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is writable; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -609,12 +609,12 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::isSymLink() const bool TQUrlInfo::isWritable() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isWritable; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is readable; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is readable; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -622,12 +622,12 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::isWritable() const bool TQUrlInfo::isReadable() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isReadable; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is executable; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is executable; otherwise returns false. \sa isValid() */ @@ -635,13 +635,13 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::isReadable() const bool TQUrlInfo::isExecutable() const { if ( !d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->isExecutable; } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a i1 is greater than \a i2; otherwise returns - FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified + Returns true if \a i1 is greater than \a i2; otherwise returns + false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \a sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. */ @@ -657,12 +657,12 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::greaterThan( const TQUrlInfo &i1, const TQUrlInfo &i2, case TQDir::Size: return i1.size() > i2.size(); default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a i1 is less than \a i2; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a i1 is less than \a i2; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \a sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. */ @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::lessThan( const TQUrlInfo &i1, const TQUrlInfo &i2, } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a i1 equals to \a i2; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a i1 equals to \a i2; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \a sortBy. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size. */ @@ -690,13 +690,13 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::equal( const TQUrlInfo &i1, const TQUrlInfo &i2, case TQDir::Size: return i1.size() == i2.size(); default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } /*! - Compares this TQUrlInfo with \a i and returns TRUE if they are - equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this TQUrlInfo with \a i and returns true if they are + equal; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQUrlInfo::operator==( const TQUrlInfo &i ) const @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::operator==( const TQUrlInfo &i ) const if ( !d ) return i.d == 0; if ( !i.d ) - return FALSE; + return false; return ( d->name == i.d->name && d->permissions == i.d->permissions && @@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ bool TQUrlInfo::operator==( const TQUrlInfo &i ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns false. Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For example, a call to TQUrlOperator::info() might return a an invalid TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is diff --git a/src/kernel/tqurloperator.cpp b/src/kernel/tqurloperator.cpp index d8567e467..2cb656aa2 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqurloperator.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqurloperator.cpp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class TQUrlOperatorPrivate public: TQUrlOperatorPrivate() { - oldOps.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + oldOps.setAutoDelete( false ); networkProtocol = 0; nameFilter = "*"; currPut = 0; @@ -539,10 +539,10 @@ const TQNetworkOperation *TQUrlOperator::rename( const TQString &oldname, const } /*! - Copies the file \a from to \a to. If \a move is TRUE, the file is + Copies the file \a from to \a to. If \a move is true, the file is moved (copied and removed). \a from must point to a file and \a to must point to a directory (into which \a from is copied) unless \a - toPath is set to FALSE. If \a toPath is set to FALSE then the \a + toPath is set to false. If \a toPath is set to false then the \a to variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination file path + file name). The copying is done using the get() and put() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy( const TQString &from, const T #endif TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> ops; - ops.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + ops.setAutoDelete( false ); TQUrlOperator *uFrom = new TQUrlOperator( *this, from ); TQUrlOperator *uTo = new TQUrlOperator( to ); @@ -635,13 +635,13 @@ TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy( const TQString &from, const T d->getOpPutOpMap.insert( (void*)opGet, opPut ); if ( move && (gProt->supportedOperations()&TQNetworkProtocol::OpRemove) ) { - gProt->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + gProt->setAutoDelete( false ); TQNetworkOperation *opRm = new TQNetworkOperation( TQNetworkProtocol::OpRemove, frm, TQString::null, TQString::null ); ops.append( opRm ); d->getOpRemoveOpMap.insert( (void*)opGet, opRm ); } else { - gProt->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + gProt->setAutoDelete( true ); } #ifdef TQURLOPERATOR_DEBUG tqDebug( "TQUrlOperator: copy operation should start now..." ); @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy( const TQString &from, const T /*! \overload - Copies the \a files to the directory \a dest. If \a move is TRUE + Copies the \a files to the directory \a dest. If \a move is true the files are moved, not copied. \a dest must point to a directory. @@ -695,22 +695,22 @@ void TQUrlOperator::copy( const TQStringList &files, const TQString &dest, } /*! - Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false. This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool - pointer as the \a ok argument, \a *ok is set to TRUE if the result - of this function is known to be correct, and to FALSE otherwise. + pointer as the \a ok argument, \a *ok is set to true if the result + of this function is known to be correct, and to false otherwise. */ bool TQUrlOperator::isDir( bool *ok ) { if ( ok ) - *ok = TRUE; + *ok = true; if ( isLocalFile() ) { if ( TQFileInfo( path() ).isDir() ) - return TRUE; + return true; else - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->entryMap.contains( "." ) ) { @@ -718,8 +718,8 @@ bool TQUrlOperator::isDir( bool *ok ) } // #### can assume that we are a directory? if ( ok ) - *ok = FALSE; - return TRUE; + *ok = false; + return true; } /*! @@ -907,14 +907,14 @@ TQUrlInfo TQUrlOperator::info( const TQString &entry ) const // return a faked TQUrlInfo TQUrlInfo inf; inf.setName( entry ); - inf.setDir( TRUE ); - inf.setFile( FALSE ); - inf.setSymLink( FALSE ); + inf.setDir( true ); + inf.setFile( false ); + inf.setSymLink( false ); inf.setOwner( tr( "(unknown)" ) ); inf.setGroup( tr( "(unknown)" ) ); inf.setSize( 0 ); - inf.setWritable( FALSE ); - inf.setReadable( TRUE ); + inf.setWritable( false ); + inf.setReadable( true ); return inf; } return TQUrlInfo(); @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ TQUrlOperator& TQUrlOperator::operator=( const TQUrlOperator &url ) *d = *url.d; - d->oldOps.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + d->oldOps.setAutoDelete( false ); d->getOpPutOpMap = getOpPutOpMap; d->getOpPutProtMap = getOpPutProtMap; d->getOpGetProtMap = getOpGetProtMap; @@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ TQUrlOperator& TQUrlOperator::operator=( const TQString &url ) { deleteNetworkProtocol(); TQUrl::operator=( url ); - d->oldOps.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + d->oldOps.setAutoDelete( false ); getNetworkProtocol(); return *this; } @@ -1050,9 +1050,9 @@ bool TQUrlOperator::checkValid() // ###### if ( !isValid() ) { //emit error( ErrValid, tr( "The entered URL is not valid!" ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } else - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ void TQUrlOperator::continueCopy( TQNetworkOperation *op ) d->getOpPutProtMap.take( op ); d->getOpRemoveOpMap.take( op ); if ( pProt ) - pProt->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + pProt->setAutoDelete( true ); if ( put && pProt ) { if ( op->state() != TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed ) { pProt->addOperation( put ); @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ void TQUrlOperator::continueCopy( TQNetworkOperation *op ) } } if ( gProt ) { - gProt->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + gProt->setAutoDelete( true ); } if ( rm && gProt ) { if ( op->state() != TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed ) { @@ -1155,8 +1155,8 @@ void TQUrlOperator::stop() { d->getOpPutOpMap.clear(); d->getOpRemoveOpMap.clear(); - d->getOpGetProtMap.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - d->getOpPutProtMap.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + d->getOpGetProtMap.setAutoDelete( true ); + d->getOpPutProtMap.setAutoDelete( true ); TQPtrDictIterator<TQNetworkProtocol> it( d->getOpPutProtMap ); for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) it.current()->stop(); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqurloperator.h b/src/kernel/tqurloperator.h index bad14db39..0099885fb 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqurloperator.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqurloperator.h @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public: TQUrlOperator(); TQUrlOperator( const TQString &urL ); TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url ); - TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE ); + TQUrlOperator( const TQUrlOperator& url, const TQString& relUrl, bool checkSlash = false ); virtual ~TQUrlOperator(); virtual void setPath( const TQString& path ); @@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ public: virtual const TQNetworkOperation *rename( const TQString &oldname, const TQString &newname ); virtual const TQNetworkOperation *get( const TQString &location = TQString::null ); virtual const TQNetworkOperation *put( const TQByteArray &data, const TQString &location = TQString::null ); - virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy( const TQString &from, const TQString &to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE ); - virtual void copy( const TQStringList &files, const TQString &dest, bool move = FALSE ); + virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> copy( const TQString &from, const TQString &to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true ); + virtual void copy( const TQStringList &files, const TQString &dest, bool move = false ); virtual bool isDir( bool *ok = 0 ); virtual void setNameFilter( const TQString &nameFilter ); diff --git a/src/kernel/tqvariant.cpp b/src/kernel/tqvariant.cpp index 71175edac..af0e3183b 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqvariant.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqvariant.cpp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ TQVariant::Private::Private() qv_count++; #endif typ = TQVariant::Invalid; - is_null = TRUE; + is_null = true; } TQVariant::Private::Private( Private* d ) @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ void TQVariant::Private::clear() } typ = TQVariant::Invalid; - is_null = TRUE; + is_null = true; } /*! @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ void TQVariant::Private::clear() \code TQVariant x, y( TQString() ), z( TQString("") ); x.asInt(); - // x.isNull() == TRUE, y.isNull() == TRUE, z.isNull() == FALSE + // x.isNull() == true, y.isNull() == true, z.isNull() == false \endcode See the \link collection.html Collection Classes\endlink. @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQStringList& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = StringList; d->value.ptr = new TQStringList( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #endif // TQT_NO_STRINGLIST @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Map; d->value.ptr = new TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #endif /*! @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQFont& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Font; d->value.ptr = new TQFont( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQBrush& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Brush; d->value.ptr = new TQBrush( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQColor& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Color; d->value.ptr = new TQColor( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQPalette& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Palette; d->value.ptr = new TQPalette( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQColorGroup& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = ColorGroup; d->value.ptr = new TQColorGroup( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #endif //TQT_NO_PALETTE #ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQCursor& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Cursor; d->value.ptr = new TQCursor( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQKeySequence& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = KeySequence; d->value.ptr = new TQKeySequence( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #endif @@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( int val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Int; d->value.i = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( uint val ) d = new Private; d->typ = UInt; d->value.u = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( TQ_LLONG val ) d = new Private; d->typ = LongLong; d->value.ll = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( TQ_ULLONG val ) d = new Private; d->typ = ULongLong; d->value.ull = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( bool val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Bool; d->value.b = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( double val ) d = new Private; d->typ = Double; d->value.d = val; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEMPLATE_VARIANT @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( const TQValueList<TQVariant>& val ) d = new Private; d->typ = List; d->value.ptr = new TQValueList<TQVariant>( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } #endif @@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ TQVariant::TQVariant( TQSizePolicy val ) d = new Private; d->typ = SizePolicy; d->value.ptr = new TQSizePolicy( val ); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } /*! @@ -1079,7 +1079,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQString x; s >> x; d->typ = t; - d->is_null = TRUE; + d->is_null = true; } break; #ifndef TQT_NO_TEMPLATE_VARIANT @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>* x = new TQMap<TQString,TQVariant>; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case List: @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQValueList<TQVariant>* x = new TQValueList<TQVariant>; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; #endif @@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQCursor* x = new TQCursor; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; #endif } break; @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQStringList* x = new TQStringList; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; #endif // TQT_NO_STRINGLIST @@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQFont* x = new TQFont; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case Pixmap: @@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQBrush* x = new TQBrush; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case Rect: @@ -1217,7 +1217,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQColor* x = new TQColor; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE @@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQPalette* x = new TQPalette; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case ColorGroup: @@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQColorGroup* x = new TQColorGroup; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; #endif @@ -1252,7 +1252,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) int x; s >> x; d->value.i = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case UInt: @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) uint x; s >> x; d->value.u = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case LongLong: @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQ_INT8 x; s >> x; d->value.b = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case Double: @@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) double x; s >> x; d->value.d = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case SizePolicy: @@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) d->value.ptr = new TQSizePolicy( (TQSizePolicy::SizeType)h, (TQSizePolicy::SizeType)v, (bool) hfw); - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; case Date: @@ -1345,7 +1345,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQKeySequence* x = new TQKeySequence; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; #endif // TQT_NO_ACCEL @@ -1354,7 +1354,7 @@ void TQVariant::load( TQDataStream& s ) TQPen* x = new TQPen; s >> *x; d->value.ptr = x; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; } break; } @@ -1560,8 +1560,8 @@ TQDataStream& operator<< ( TQDataStream& s, const TQVariant::Type p ) /*! \fn bool TQVariant::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if the storage type of this variant is not - TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the storage type of this variant is not + TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -2162,8 +2162,8 @@ const TQPen TQVariant::toPen() const Returns the variant as an int if the variant can be cast to Int; otherwise returns 0. - If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be - converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to true if the value could be + converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa asInt(), canCast() */ @@ -2203,8 +2203,8 @@ int TQVariant::toInt( bool * ok ) const Returns the variant as an unsigned int if the variant can be cast to UInt; otherwise returns 0. - If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be - converted to an unsigned int; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to true if the value could be + converted to an unsigned int; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa asUInt(), canCast() */ @@ -2240,8 +2240,8 @@ uint TQVariant::toUInt( bool * ok ) const Returns the variant as a long long int if the variant can be cast to LongLong; otherwise returns 0. - If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be - converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to true if the value could be + converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa asLongLong(), canCast() */ @@ -2277,8 +2277,8 @@ TQ_LLONG TQVariant::toLongLong( bool * ok ) const Returns the variant as as an unsigned long long int if the variant can be cast to ULongLong; otherwise returns 0. - If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be - converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to true if the value could be + converted to an int; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa asULongLong(), canCast() */ @@ -2312,12 +2312,12 @@ TQ_ULLONG TQVariant::toULongLong( bool * ok ) const /*! Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool; - otherWise returns FALSE. + otherWise returns false. - Returns TRUE if the variant has a numeric type and its value is + Returns true if the variant has a numeric type and its value is non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. \sa asBool(), canCast() */ @@ -2344,7 +2344,7 @@ bool TQVariant::toBool() const return !(str == "0" || str == "false" || str.isEmpty() ); } default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -2352,8 +2352,8 @@ bool TQVariant::toBool() const Returns the variant as a double if the variant can be cast to Double; otherwise returns 0.0. - If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the value could be - converted to a double; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is non-null: \a *ok is set to true if the value could be + converted to a double; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa asDouble(), canCast() */ @@ -2935,7 +2935,7 @@ TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>& TQVariant::asMap() #endif /*! - Returns TRUE if the variant's type can be cast to the requested + Returns true if the variant's type can be cast to the requested type, \a t. Such casting is done automatically when calling the toInt(), toBool(), ... or asInt(), asBool(), ... methods. @@ -2966,7 +2966,7 @@ TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>& TQVariant::asMap() bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const { if ( Type( d->typ ) == t ) - return TRUE; + return true; switch ( t ) { case Bool: @@ -2988,7 +2988,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case String: case UInt: case ULongLong: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } break; @@ -3012,7 +3012,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case Time: case UInt: case ULongLong: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } break; @@ -3028,7 +3028,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case Date: case DateTime: case String: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } break; @@ -3043,7 +3043,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case ULongLong: case Double: case String: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } break; @@ -3054,7 +3054,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case ByteArray: case CString: case String: - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } break; @@ -3070,9 +3070,9 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const TQValueList<TQVariant>::ConstIterator end = listEnd(); for( ; it != end; ++it ) { if ( !(*it).canCast( String ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif case Invalid: @@ -3095,7 +3095,7 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const case Pen: break; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -3103,8 +3103,8 @@ bool TQVariant::canCast( Type t ) const done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type \a t is TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type \a t - is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns TRUE if the current type of - the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns FALSE. + is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns true if the current type of + the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns false. \sa canCast() */ @@ -3232,8 +3232,8 @@ bool TQVariant::cast( Type t ) } /*! - Compares this TQVariant with \a v and returns TRUE if they are - equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this TQVariant with \a v and returns true if they are + equal; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQVariant::operator==( const TQVariant &v ) const @@ -3273,12 +3273,12 @@ bool TQVariant::operator==( const TQVariant &v ) const } default: - Q_ASSERT(FALSE); + Q_ASSERT(false); } } if (!v.canCast(d->typ)) { - return FALSE; + return false; } switch( d->typ ) { @@ -3297,16 +3297,16 @@ bool TQVariant::operator==( const TQVariant &v ) const return v.toList() == toList(); case Map: { if ( v.toMap().count() != toMap().count() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::ConstIterator it = v.toMap().begin(); TQMap<TQString, TQVariant>::ConstIterator it2 = toMap().begin(); while ( it != v.toMap().end() ) { if ( *it != *it2 ) - return FALSE; + return false; ++it; ++it2; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif case String: @@ -3377,12 +3377,12 @@ bool TQVariant::operator==( const TQVariant &v ) const case Invalid: break; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Compares this TQVariant with \a v and returns TRUE if they are not - equal; otherwise returns FALSE. + Compares this TQVariant with \a v and returns true if they are not + equal; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQVariant::operator!=( const TQVariant &v ) const @@ -3401,7 +3401,7 @@ void* TQVariant::rawAccess( void* ptr, Type typ, bool deepCopy ) clear(); d->typ = typ; d->value.ptr = ptr; - d->is_null = FALSE; + d->is_null = false; if ( deepCopy ) { TQVariant::Private* p = new Private( d ); d->typ = Invalid; @@ -3420,7 +3420,7 @@ void* TQVariant::rawAccess( void* ptr, Type typ, bool deepCopy ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if this is a NULL variant, FALSE otherwise. + Returns true if this is a NULL variant, false otherwise. */ bool TQVariant::isNull() const { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqvariant.h b/src/kernel/tqvariant.h index 2a6eeec19..ad753a8c8 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqvariant.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqvariant.h @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ private: Private* d; public: - void* rawAccess( void* ptr = 0, Type typ = Invalid, bool deepCopy = FALSE ); + void* rawAccess( void* ptr = 0, Type typ = Invalid, bool deepCopy = false ); }; inline TQVariant::Type TQVariant::type() const diff --git a/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp b/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp index ac56e302a..a4b4ca218 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ \i mouseMoveEvent() - called whenever the mouse moves while a button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If - you call setMouseTracking(TRUE), you get mouse move events even + you call setMouseTracking(true), you get mouse move events even when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X connections.) (See also the \link dnd.html drag and drop\endlink @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ TQWidget::TQWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f, NFlags n ) fstrut_dirty = 1; - isWidget = TRUE; // is a widget + isWidget = true; // is a widget winid = 0; // default attributes widget_state = 0; widget_flags = f; @@ -904,7 +904,7 @@ TQWidget::TQWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f, NFlags n ) own_palette = 0; sizehint_forced = 0; is_closing = 0; - im_enabled = FALSE; + im_enabled = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT lay_out = 0; #endif @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ TQWidget::TQWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f, NFlags n ) crect.size()) ); if ( isTopLevel() ) { setWState( WState_ForceHide | WState_CreatedHidden ); - TQFocusData *fd = focusData( TRUE ); + TQFocusData *fd = focusData( true ); if ( fd->focusWidgets.findRef(this) < 0 ) fd->focusWidgets.append( this ); } else { @@ -961,7 +961,7 @@ TQWidget::~TQWidget() #endif // Remove myself and all children from the can-take-focus list - TQFocusData *f = focusData( FALSE ); + TQFocusData *f = focusData( false ); if ( f ) { TQPtrListIterator<TQWidget> it(f->focusWidgets); TQWidget *w; @@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ void TQWidget::destroyMapper() while ( (w=it.current()) ) { // remove parents widgets ++it; if ( !w->parentObj ) // widget is a parent - w->destroy( TRUE, TRUE ); + w->destroy( true, true ); } delete myMapper; } @@ -1075,7 +1075,7 @@ static TQWidgetList *wListInternal( TQWidgetMapper *mapper, bool onlyTopLevel ) TQWidgetList *TQWidget::wList() { - return wListInternal( mapper, FALSE ); + return wListInternal( mapper, false ); } /*! @@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ TQWidgetList *TQWidget::wList() TQWidgetList *TQWidget::tlwList() { - return wListInternal( mapper, TRUE ); + return wListInternal( mapper, true ); } @@ -1545,7 +1545,7 @@ uint TQWidget::windowState() const combination of TQt::WindowState: \c WindowMinimized, \c WindowMaximized, \c WindowFullScreen and \c WindowActive. - If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns FALSE), the + If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns false), the window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code: @@ -1659,8 +1659,8 @@ void TQWidget::showNormal() } /*! - Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if \a ancestor is - enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this widget would become enabled if \a ancestor is + enabled; otherwise returns false. This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly disabled. @@ -1731,7 +1731,7 @@ void TQWidget::setEnabled( bool enable ) ++it; if ( w->isWidgetType() && !w->testWState( WState_ForceDisabled ) ) - w->setEnabled( TRUE ); + w->setEnabled( true ); } } } @@ -1739,7 +1739,7 @@ void TQWidget::setEnabled( bool enable ) if ( !testWState(WState_Disabled) ) { if (focusWidget() == this) { bool parentIsEnabled = (!parentWidget() || parentWidget()->isEnabled()); - if (!parentIsEnabled || !focusNextPrevChild(TRUE)) + if (!parentIsEnabled || !focusNextPrevChild(true)) clearFocus(); } setWState( WState_Disabled ); @@ -1751,7 +1751,7 @@ void TQWidget::setEnabled( bool enable ) while( (w = (TQWidget *)it.current()) != 0 ) { ++it; if ( w->isWidgetType() && w->isEnabled() ) { - w->setEnabled( FALSE ); + w->setEnabled( false ); w->clearWState( WState_ForceDisabled ); } } @@ -1773,7 +1773,7 @@ void TQWidget::setEnabled( bool enable ) } /*! - Disables widget input events if \a disable is TRUE; otherwise + Disables widget input events if \a disable is true; otherwise enables input events. See the \l enabled documentation for more information. @@ -2906,7 +2906,7 @@ const TQColorGroup &TQWidget::colorGroup() const #ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE void TQWidget::setPalette( const TQPalette &palette ) { - own_palette = TRUE; + own_palette = true; if ( pal == palette ) return; TQPalette old = pal; @@ -2932,7 +2932,7 @@ void TQWidget::unsetPalette() { // reset the palette setPalette( qt_naturalWidgetPalette( this ) ); - own_palette = FALSE; + own_palette = false; } /*! @@ -2985,7 +2985,7 @@ void TQWidget::paletteChange( const TQPalette & ) */ void TQWidget::setFont( const TQFont &font ) { - own_font = TRUE; + own_font = true; if ( fnt == font && fnt.d->mask == font.d->mask ) return; TQFont old = fnt; @@ -3013,7 +3013,7 @@ void TQWidget::unsetFont() { // reset the font setFont( qt_naturalWidgetFont( this ) ); - own_font = FALSE; + own_font = false; } /*! @@ -3286,7 +3286,7 @@ void TQWidget::setFocus() return; } - TQFocusData * f = focusData( TRUE ); + TQFocusData * f = focusData( true ); if ( f->it.current() == this && tqApp->focusWidget() == this #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) && GetFocus() == winId() @@ -3409,11 +3409,11 @@ void TQWidget::clearFocus() /*! Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate - for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns TRUE if is can find a new - widget and FALSE if it can't, + for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if is can find a new + widget and false if it can't, - If \a next is TRUE, this function searches "forwards", if \a next - is FALSE, it searches "backwards". + If \a next is true, this function searches "forwards", if \a next + is false, it searches "backwards". Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current @@ -3441,7 +3441,7 @@ bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) if ( !isTopLevel() && p ) return p->focusNextPrevChild(next); - TQFocusData *f = focusData( TRUE ); + TQFocusData *f = focusData( true ); TQWidget *startingPoint = f->it.current(); TQWidget *candidate = 0; @@ -3457,10 +3457,10 @@ bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) } while( w && !(candidate && w==startingPoint) ); if ( !candidate ) - return FALSE; + return false; candidate->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -3472,7 +3472,7 @@ bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) TQWidget *TQWidget::focusWidget() const { TQWidget *that = (TQWidget *)this; // mutable - TQFocusData *f = that->focusData( FALSE ); + TQFocusData *f = that->focusData( false ); if ( f && f->focusWidgets.count() && f->it.current() == 0 ) f->it.toFirst(); return ( f && f->it.current() ) ? f->it.current() : 0; @@ -3492,14 +3492,14 @@ TQWidget *TQWidget::focusWidget() const */ TQFocusData * TQWidget::focusData() { - return focusData( TRUE ); + return focusData( true ); } /*! \internal Internal function which lets us ask for the focus data, creating - it if it doesn't exist and \a create is TRUE. + it if it doesn't exist and \a create is true. */ TQFocusData * TQWidget::focusData( bool create ) { @@ -3524,7 +3524,7 @@ TQFocusData * TQWidget::focusData( bool create ) Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default. - If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE. + If a widget handles text input it should set this property to true. */ void TQWidget::setInputMethodEnabled( bool b ) @@ -3537,8 +3537,8 @@ void TQWidget::setInputMethodEnabled( bool b ) /*! - Enables key event compression, if \a compress is TRUE, and - disables it if \a compress is FALSE. + Enables key event compression, if \a compress is true, and + disables it if \a compress is false. Key compression is off by default (except for TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key @@ -3581,7 +3581,7 @@ void TQWidget::setKeyCompression(bool compress) The active window is the window that contains the widget that has keyboard focus. - When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the + When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the active window \e and for the popup. \sa setActiveWindow(), TQApplication::activeWindow() @@ -3592,7 +3592,7 @@ bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow() const if(testWFlags(WSubWindow) && parentWidget()) tlw = parentWidget()->topLevelWidget(); if(tlw == tqApp->activeWindow() || ( isVisible() && tlw->isPopup() )) - return TRUE; + return true; #ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE const_cast<TQWidget*>(this)->createExtra(); if (!extra->m_ceData) { @@ -3606,16 +3606,16 @@ bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow() const if((tlw->isDialog() || (tlw->testWFlags(TQt::WStyle_Tool) && !tlw->isPopup())) && !tlw->testWFlags(TQt::WShowModal) && (!tlw->parentWidget() || tlw->parentWidget()->isActiveWindow())) - return TRUE; + return true; TQWidget *w = tqApp->activeWindow(); if( !testWFlags(WSubWindow) && w && w->testWFlags(WSubWindow) && w->parentWidget()->topLevelWidget() == tlw) - return TRUE; + return true; while(w && (tlw->isDialog() || tlw->testWFlags(TQt::WStyle_Tool)) && !w->testWFlags(TQt::WShowModal) && w->parentWidget()) { w = w->parentWidget()->topLevelWidget(); if( w == tlw ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } #endif @@ -3625,11 +3625,11 @@ bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow() const while ( parent ) { parent = ::GetParent( parent ); if ( parent && parent == topparent ) - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -3690,7 +3690,7 @@ void TQWidget::setTabOrder( TQWidget* first, TQWidget *second ) while ( second->focusProxy() ) second = second->focusProxy(); - TQFocusData *f = first->focusData( TRUE ); + TQFocusData *f = first->focusData( true ); bool focusThere = (f->it.current() == second ); f->focusWidgets.removeRef( second ); if ( f->focusWidgets.findRef( first ) >= 0 ) @@ -3818,7 +3818,7 @@ void TQWidget::move( int x, int y ) TQPoint oldp(pos()); internalSetGeometry( x + geometry().x() - TQWidget::x(), y + geometry().y() - TQWidget::y(), - width(), height(), TRUE ); + width(), height(), true ); if ( isVisible() && oldp != pos() ) qt_update_bg_recursive( this ); } @@ -3830,7 +3830,7 @@ void TQWidget::move( int x, int y ) */ void TQWidget::resize( int w, int h ) { - internalSetGeometry( geometry().x(), geometry().y(), w, h, FALSE ); + internalSetGeometry( geometry().x(), geometry().y(), w, h, false ); setWState( WState_Resized ); } @@ -3842,7 +3842,7 @@ void TQWidget::resize( int w, int h ) void TQWidget::setGeometry( int x, int y, int w, int h ) { TQPoint oldp( pos( )); - internalSetGeometry( x, y, w, h, TRUE ); + internalSetGeometry( x, y, w, h, true ); setWState( WState_Resized ); if ( isVisible() && oldp != pos() ) qt_update_bg_recursive( this ); @@ -3906,7 +3906,7 @@ void TQWidget::setFocusPolicy( FocusPolicy policy ) if ( focusProxy() ) focusProxy()->setFocusPolicy( policy ); if ( policy != NoFocus ) { - TQFocusData * f = focusData( TRUE ); + TQFocusData * f = focusData( true ); if ( f->focusWidgets.findRef( this ) < 0 ) f->focusWidgets.append( this ); } @@ -3927,9 +3927,9 @@ void TQWidget::setFocusPolicy( FocusPolicy policy ) Example: \code - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); bigVisualChanges(); - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); repaint(); \endcode @@ -4032,7 +4032,7 @@ void TQWidget::show() if ( !testWState(WState_Polished) ) polish(); - showChildren( FALSE ); + showChildren( false ); if ( postLayoutHint ) TQApplication::postEvent( parentWidget(), @@ -4118,10 +4118,10 @@ void TQWidget::hide() // next bit tries to move the focus if the focus widget is now // hidden. if ( tqApp && tqApp->focusWidget() == this ) - focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + focusNextPrevChild( true ); TQHideEvent hideEvent; TQApplication::sendEvent( this, &hideEvent ); - hideChildren( FALSE ); + hideChildren( false ); #if defined(QT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT) TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ObjectHide ); @@ -4286,10 +4286,10 @@ void TQWidget::polish() /*! \overload - Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; + otherwise returns false. - If \a alsoDelete is TRUE or the widget has the \c + If \a alsoDelete is true or the widget has the \c WDestructiveClose widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the \l TQCloseEvent it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget @@ -4308,18 +4308,18 @@ void TQWidget::polish() bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) { if ( is_closing ) - return TRUE; + return true; is_closing = 1; WId id = winId(); bool isMain = tqApp->mainWidget() == this; bool checkLastWindowClosed = isTopLevel() && !isPopup(); - bool deleted = FALSE; + bool deleted = false; TQCloseEvent e; TQApplication::sendEvent( this, &e ); deleted = !TQWidget::find(id); if ( !deleted && !e.isAccepted() ) { is_closing = 0; - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !deleted && !isHidden() ) hide(); @@ -4345,7 +4345,7 @@ bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) if ( isMain ) tqApp->quit(); if ( deleted ) - return TRUE; + return true; is_closing = 0; if ( alsoDelete ) delete this; @@ -4353,15 +4353,15 @@ bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) clearWFlags(WDestructiveClose); deleteLater(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \fn bool TQWidget::close() - Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; + otherwise returns false. First it sends the widget a TQCloseEvent. The widget is \link hide() hidden\endlink if it \link TQCloseEvent::accept() @@ -4407,13 +4407,13 @@ bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) /*! - Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if \a ancestor is - shown; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this widget would become visible if \a ancestor is + shown; otherwise returns false. - The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent + The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly hidden. - This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by + This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved. @@ -4448,7 +4448,7 @@ bool TQWidget::isVisibleTo(TQWidget* ancestor) const \property TQWidget::hidden \brief whether the widget is explicitly hidden - If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its + If false, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. \sa hide(), show(), isVisible(), isVisibleTo(), shown @@ -4458,7 +4458,7 @@ bool TQWidget::isVisibleTo(TQWidget* ancestor) const \property TQWidget::shown \brief whether the widget is shown - If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its + If true, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible. \sa hide(), show(), isVisible(), isVisibleTo(), hidden @@ -4616,7 +4616,7 @@ TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint() const \fn TQWidget *TQWidget::parentWidget( bool sameWindow ) const Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any - parent widget. If \a sameWindow is TRUE and the widget is top + parent widget. If \a sameWindow is true and the widget is top level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent. */ @@ -4693,8 +4693,8 @@ TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint() const (or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls keyPressEvent(). - This function returns TRUE if it is able to pass the event over to - someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns FALSE. + This function returns true if it is able to pass the event over to + someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns false. \sa closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), @@ -4706,13 +4706,13 @@ TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint() const bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) { if ( TQObject::event( e ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::MouseMove: mouseMoveEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress: @@ -4725,25 +4725,25 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) #endif mousePressEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease: mouseReleaseEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick: mouseDoubleClickEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; #ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT case TQEvent::Wheel: wheelEvent( (TQWheelEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQWheelEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; #endif case TQEvent::TabletMove: @@ -4751,25 +4751,25 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) case TQEvent::TabletRelease: tabletEvent( (TQTabletEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQTabletEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case TQEvent::Accel: ((TQKeyEvent*)e)->ignore(); - return FALSE; + return false; case TQEvent::KeyPress: { TQKeyEvent *k = (TQKeyEvent *)e; - bool res = FALSE; + bool res = false; if ( !(k->state() & ControlButton || k->state() & AltButton) ) { if ( k->key() == Key_Backtab || (k->key() == Key_Tab && (k->state() & ShiftButton)) ) { TQFocusEvent::setReason( TQFocusEvent::Backtab ); - res = focusNextPrevChild( FALSE ); + res = focusNextPrevChild( false ); TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); } else if ( k->key() == Key_Tab ) { TQFocusEvent::setReason( TQFocusEvent::Tab ); - res = focusNextPrevChild( TRUE ); + res = focusNextPrevChild( true ); TQFocusEvent::resetReason(); } if ( res ) @@ -4777,21 +4777,21 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) } keyPressEvent( k ); if ( !k->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TQEvent::KeyRelease: keyReleaseEvent( (TQKeyEvent*)e ); if ( ! ((TQKeyEvent*)e)->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case TQEvent::IMStart: { TQIMEvent *i = (TQIMEvent *) e; imStartEvent(i); if (! i->isAccepted()) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -4799,7 +4799,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) TQIMEvent *i = (TQIMEvent *) e; imComposeEvent(i); if (! i->isAccepted()) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -4807,7 +4807,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) TQIMEvent *i = (TQIMEvent *) e; imEndEvent(i); if (! i->isAccepted()) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -4847,7 +4847,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) TQCloseEvent *c = (TQCloseEvent *)e; closeEvent( c ); if ( !c->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -4855,7 +4855,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) TQContextMenuEvent *c = (TQContextMenuEvent *)e; contextMenuEvent( c ); if ( !c->isAccepted() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } break; @@ -4939,7 +4939,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) } } if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LanguageChange ) { - int index = metaObject()->findSlot( "languageChange()", TRUE ); + int index = metaObject()->findSlot( "languageChange()", true ); if ( index >= 0 ) tqt_invoke( index, 0 ); } @@ -4950,7 +4950,7 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) if ( layout() ) { layout()->activate(); } else { - TQObjectList* llist = queryList( "TQLayout", 0, TRUE, TRUE ); + TQObjectList* llist = queryList( "TQLayout", 0, true, true ); TQObjectListIt lit( *llist ); TQLayout *lay; while ( ( lay = (TQLayout*)lit.current() ) != 0 ) { @@ -4994,9 +4994,9 @@ bool TQWidget::event( TQEvent *e ) break; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -5208,7 +5208,7 @@ void TQWidget::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * ) update(); if ( testWState(WState_AutoMask) ) updateMask(); - setMicroFocusHint(width()/2, 0, 1, height(), FALSE); + setMicroFocusHint(width()/2, 0, 1, height(), false); } } @@ -5538,7 +5538,7 @@ void TQWidget::hideEvent( TQHideEvent * ) receive native X11 events. In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the - event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this + event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. @@ -5555,7 +5555,7 @@ void TQWidget::hideEvent( TQHideEvent * ) receive native Macintosh events. In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the - event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this + event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. @@ -5566,7 +5566,7 @@ void TQWidget::hideEvent( TQHideEvent * ) bool TQWidget::macEvent( MSG * ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -5577,7 +5577,7 @@ bool TQWidget::macEvent( MSG * ) receive native Windows events. In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the - event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this + event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. @@ -5587,7 +5587,7 @@ bool TQWidget::macEvent( MSG * ) */ bool TQWidget::winEvent( MSG * ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -5598,7 +5598,7 @@ bool TQWidget::winEvent( MSG * ) receive native X11 events. In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the - event being handled by TQt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this + event being handled by TQt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to TQt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget. @@ -5608,7 +5608,7 @@ bool TQWidget::winEvent( MSG * ) */ bool TQWidget::x11Event( XEvent * ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -5619,7 +5619,7 @@ bool TQWidget::x11Event( XEvent * ) Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of - recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, + recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to true, updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing @@ -5742,13 +5742,13 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::backgroundOffset() const { const TQWidget *topl = this; while(topl && !topl->isTopLevel() && !topl->testWFlags(TQt::WSubWindow)) - topl = topl->parentWidget(TRUE); + topl = topl->parentWidget(true); return mapTo((TQWidget *)topl, TQPoint(0, 0) ); } case AncestorOrigin: { const TQWidget *topl = this; - bool ancestorIsWindowOrigin = FALSE; + bool ancestorIsWindowOrigin = false; while(topl && !topl->isTopLevel() && !topl->testWFlags(TQt::WSubWindow)) { if (!ancestorIsWindowOrigin) { @@ -5756,13 +5756,13 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::backgroundOffset() const break; if (topl->backgroundOrigin() == TQWidget::ParentOrigin) { - topl = topl->parentWidget(TRUE); + topl = topl->parentWidget(true); break; } if (topl->backgroundOrigin() == TQWidget::WindowOrigin) - ancestorIsWindowOrigin = TRUE; + ancestorIsWindowOrigin = true; } - topl = topl->parentWidget(TRUE); + topl = topl->parentWidget(true); } return mapTo((TQWidget *) topl, TQPoint(0,0) ); @@ -5868,7 +5868,7 @@ int TQWidget::heightForWidth( int w ) const \property TQWidget::customWhatsThis \brief whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually - The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns FALSE, + The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns false, which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This mode. @@ -5884,14 +5884,14 @@ int TQWidget::heightForWidth( int w ) const */ bool TQWidget::customWhatsThis() const { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Returns the visible child widget at pixel position \a (x, y) in the widget's own coordinate system. - If \a includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at \a (x, + If \a includeThis is true, and there is no child visible at \a (x, y), the widget itself is returned. */ TQWidget *TQWidget::childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis ) const @@ -5905,7 +5905,7 @@ TQWidget *TQWidget::childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis ) const while( (w=(TQWidget *)it.current()) != 0 ) { --it; if ( w->isWidgetType() && !w->isTopLevel() && !w->isHidden() ) { - if ( ( t = w->childAt( x - w->x(), y - w->y(), TRUE ) ) ) + if ( ( t = w->childAt( x - w->x(), y - w->y(), true ) ) ) return t; } } @@ -5921,7 +5921,7 @@ TQWidget *TQWidget::childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis ) const Returns the visible child widget at point \a p in the widget's own coordinate system. - If \a includeThis is TRUE, and there is no child visible at \a p, + If \a includeThis is true, and there is no child visible at \a p, the widget itself is returned. */ @@ -5954,7 +5954,7 @@ void TQWidget::updateGeometry() flags (\a f, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new parent (\a p). - If \a showIt is TRUE, show() is called once the widget has been + If \a showIt is true, show() is called once the widget has been reparented. If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the @@ -6011,7 +6011,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint & p, \property TQWidget::ownCursor \brief whether the widget uses its own cursor - If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. + If false, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. \sa cursor */ @@ -6020,7 +6020,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint & p, \property TQWidget::ownFont \brief whether the widget uses its own font - If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font. + If false, the widget uses its parent widget's font. \sa font */ @@ -6029,7 +6029,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint & p, \property TQWidget::ownPalette \brief whether the widget uses its own palette - If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. + If false, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. \sa palette */ diff --git a/src/kernel/tqwidget.h b/src/kernel/tqwidget.h index cf0325f3c..ce26e00cb 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqwidget.h +++ b/src/kernel/tqwidget.h @@ -342,9 +342,9 @@ public slots: void update( const TQRect& ); void repaint(); void repaint( bool erase ); - void repaint( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=TRUE ); - void repaint( const TQRect &, bool erase = TRUE ); - void repaint( const TQRegion &, bool erase = TRUE ); + void repaint( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=true ); + void repaint( const TQRect &, bool erase = true ); + void repaint( const TQRegion &, bool erase = true ); // Widget management functions @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ public: virtual TQSize minimumSizeHint() const; virtual TQSizePolicy sizePolicy() const; virtual void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy ); - void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE ); + void setSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false ); virtual int heightForWidth(int) const; TQRegion clipRegion() const; @@ -407,12 +407,12 @@ public: #endif void updateGeometry(); virtual void reparent( TQWidget *parent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, - bool showIt=FALSE ); + bool showIt=false ); void reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint &, - bool showIt=FALSE ); + bool showIt=false ); #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT void recreate( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, - bool showIt=FALSE ) { reparent(parent,f,p,showIt); } + bool showIt=false ) { reparent(parent,f,p,showIt); } #endif void erase(); @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ public: // whats this help virtual bool customWhatsThis() const; - TQWidget * parentWidget( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const; + TQWidget * parentWidget( bool sameWindow = false ) const; WState testWState( WState s ) const; WFlags testWFlags( WFlags f ) const; NFlags testNFlags( NFlags f ) const; @@ -459,14 +459,14 @@ public: static TQWidget * find( WId ); static TQWidgetMapper *wmapper(); - TQWidget *childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const; - TQWidget *childAt( const TQPoint &, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const; + TQWidget *childAt( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const; + TQWidget *childAt( const TQPoint &, bool includeThis = false ) const; #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - TQRegion clippedRegion(bool do_children=TRUE); - uint clippedSerial(bool do_children=TRUE); + TQRegion clippedRegion(bool do_children=true); + uint clippedSerial(bool do_children=true); #ifndef TQMAC_NO_QUARTZ - CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=TRUE) const; + CGContextRef macCGContext(bool clipped=true) const; #endif #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) @@ -561,10 +561,10 @@ protected: #endif void resetInputContext(); - virtual void create( WId = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, - bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE ); - virtual void destroy( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, - bool destroySubWindows = TRUE ); + virtual void create( WId = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, + bool destroyOldWindow = true ); + virtual void destroy( bool destroyWindow = true, + bool destroySubWindows = true ); virtual void setWState( uint ); void clearWState( uint n ); virtual void setWFlags( WFlags ); @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ protected: TQFocusData *focusData(); virtual void setKeyCompression(bool); - virtual void setMicroFocusHint(int x, int y, int w, int h, bool text=TRUE, TQFont *f = 0); + virtual void setMicroFocusHint(int x, int y, int w, int h, bool text=true, TQFont *f = 0); #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) void dirtyClippedRegion(bool); @@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ private: uint own_id : 1, macDropEnabled : 1; EventHandlerRef window_event; //mac event functions - void propagateUpdates(bool update_rgn=TRUE); + void propagateUpdates(bool update_rgn=true); void update( const TQRegion& ); //friends, way too many - fix this immediately! friend void qt_clean_root_win(); @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ inline void TQWidget::update( const TQRect &r ) { update( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() ); } inline void TQWidget::repaint() -{ repaint( TRUE ); } +{ repaint( true ); } inline void TQWidget::repaint( const TQRect &r, bool erase ) { repaint( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), erase ); } @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ inline void TQWidget::erase( const TQRect &r ) { erase( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() ); } inline bool TQWidget::close() -{ return close( FALSE ); } +{ return close( false ); } inline bool TQWidget::isVisible() const { return testWState(WState_Visible); } diff --git a/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp b/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp index c8492c6e6..808d2ef4c 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp @@ -304,15 +304,15 @@ static void qt_net_change_wm_state(const TQWidget* w, bool set, Atom one, Atom t widget's window to \a window. Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if \a - initializeWindow is TRUE. If \a initializeWindow is FALSE, no + initializeWindow is true. If \a initializeWindow is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if \a window is a valid window. - Destroys the old window if \a destroyOldWindow is TRUE. If \a - destroyOldWindow is FALSE, you are responsible for destroying the + Destroys the old window if \a destroyOldWindow is true. If \a + destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code). - The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,TRUE,TRUE) to create a + The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget. */ @@ -346,13 +346,13 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) // always initialize if ( !window ) - initializeWindow = TRUE; + initializeWindow = true; if ( desktop && qt_x11_create_desktop_on_screen >= 0 && qt_x11_create_desktop_on_screen != x11Screen() ) { // desktop on a certain screen other than the default requested - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); xd->x_screen = qt_x11_create_desktop_on_screen; xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( xd->x_screen ); xd->x_cells = TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells( xd->x_screen ); @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) setX11Data( xd ); } else if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->x11Screen() != x11Screen() ) { // if we have a parent widget, move to its screen if necessary - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); xd->x_screen = parentWidget()->x11Screen(); xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( xd->x_screen ); xd->x_cells = TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells( xd->x_screen ); @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) int sh = DisplayHeight(dpy,scr); if ( desktop ) { // desktop widget - dialog = popup = FALSE; // force these flags off + dialog = popup = false; // force these flags off crect.setRect( 0, 0, sw, sh ); } else if ( topLevel ) { // calc pos/size from screen crect.setRect( sw/4, 3*sh/10, sw/2, 4*sh/10 ); @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) else setWState( WState_Visible ); - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( true ); // find which screen the window is on... xd->x_screen = TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen(); // by default, use the default :) @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) } setWState( WState_MouseTracking ); - setMouseTracking( FALSE ); // also sets event mask + setMouseTracking( false ); // also sets event mask if ( desktop ) { setWState( WState_Visible ); } else if ( topLevel ) { // set X cursor @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) /*! Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if \a - destroyWindow is TRUE. + destroyWindow is true. destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing \a destroySubWindows for the \a destroyWindow parameter. @@ -825,7 +825,7 @@ void TQWidget::destroy( bool destroyWindow, bool destroySubWindows ) if ( testWFlags(WType_Desktop) ) { if ( acceptDrops() ) - qt_dnd_enable( this, FALSE ); + qt_dnd_enable( this, false ); } else { if ( destroyWindow ) qt_XDestroyWindow( this, x11Display(), winid ); @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool s // dnd unregister (we will register again below) bool accept_drops = acceptDrops(); - setAcceptDrops( FALSE ); + setAcceptDrops( false ); // clear mouse tracking, re-enabled below bool mouse_tracking = hasMouseTracking(); @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool s oldparent->checkChildrenDnd(); if ( accept_drops ) - setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); + setAcceptDrops( true ); else { checkChildrenDnd(); topData()->dnd = 0; @@ -1099,15 +1099,15 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::mapFromGlobal( const TQPoint &pos ) const height. This has no \e visual effect, it just provides hints to any system-specific input handling tools. - The \a text argument should be TRUE if this is a position for text + The \a text argument should be true if this is a position for text input. In the Windows version of TQt, this method sets the system caret, which is used for user Accessibility focus handling. If \a text - is TRUE, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian + is true, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian language input systems. - In the X11 version of TQt, if \a text is TRUE, this method sets the + In the X11 version of TQt, if \a text is true, this method sets the input method focus point in the preedit (XIM "spot" point) for complex language input handling. @@ -1241,13 +1241,13 @@ static XTextProperty* tqstring_to_xtp( const TQString& s ) { static XTextProperty tp = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; - static bool free_prop = TRUE; // we can't free tp.value in case it references + static bool free_prop = true; // we can't free tp.value in case it references // the data of the static TQCString below. if ( tp.value ) { if ( free_prop ) XFree( tp.value ); tp.value = 0; - free_prop = TRUE; + free_prop = true; } static const TQTextCodec* mapper = TQTextCodec::codecForLocale(); @@ -1271,7 +1271,7 @@ tqstring_to_xtp( const TQString& s ) tp.encoding = XA_STRING; tp.format = 8; tp.nitems = qcs.length(); - free_prop = FALSE; + free_prop = false; } // ### If we knew WM could understand unicode, we could use @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ void TQWidget::setMouseTracking( bool enable ) button is released. Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If - isVisible() returns FALSE for a widget, that widget cannot call + isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse(). \sa releaseMouse() grabKeyboard() releaseKeyboard() grabKeyboard() @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ void TQWidget::update( int x, int y, int w, int h ) Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. - If \a erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area \a (x, y, w, h) before the + If \a erase is true, TQt erases the area \a (x, y, w, h) before the paintEvent() call. If \a w is negative, it is replaced with \c{width() - x}, and if @@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ void TQWidget::repaint( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase ) Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. - Erases the widget region \a reg if \a erase is TRUE. + Erases the widget region \a reg if \a erase is true. Only use repaint if your widget needs to be repainted immediately, for example when doing some animation. In all other cases, use @@ -1818,12 +1818,12 @@ void TQWidget::repaint( const TQRegion& reg, bool erase ) Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden. - Erases the widget region \a r if \a erase is TRUE. + Erases the widget region \a r if \a erase is true. */ void TQWidget::setWindowState(uint newstate) { - bool needShow = FALSE; + bool needShow = false; uint oldstate = windowState(); if (isTopLevel()) { TQTLWExtra *top = topData(); @@ -1920,7 +1920,7 @@ void TQWidget::setWindowState(uint newstate) } } - needShow = FALSE; + needShow = false; } } @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ void TQWidget::hideWindow() // zero the frame strut and mark it dirty top->fleft = top->fright = top->ftop = top->fbottom = 0; - fstrut_dirty = TRUE; + fstrut_dirty = true; XFlush( x11Display() ); } else { @@ -2472,7 +2472,7 @@ void TQWidget::scroll( int dx, int dy, const TQRect& r ) return; Display *dpy = x11Display(); - GC gc = tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), FALSE ); + GC gc = tqt_xget_readonly_gc( x11Screen(), false ); // Want expose events if ( w > 0 && h > 0 && !just_update ) { XSetGraphicsExposures( dpy, gc, True ); @@ -2604,8 +2604,8 @@ int TQWidget::metric( int m ) const void TQWidget::createSysExtra() { extra->xDndProxy = 0; - extra->children_use_dnd = FALSE; - extra->compress_events = TRUE; + extra->children_use_dnd = false; + extra->compress_events = true; } void TQWidget::deleteSysExtra() @@ -2646,7 +2646,7 @@ void TQWidget::checkChildrenDnd() while (widget && ! widget->isDesktop()) { // note: this isn't done for the desktop widget - bool children_use_dnd = FALSE; + bool children_use_dnd = false; children = widget->children(); if ( children ) { TQObjectListIt it(*children); @@ -2718,7 +2718,7 @@ void TQWidget::handleSyncRequest( void* ev ) \property TQWidget::acceptDrops \brief whether drop events are enabled for this widget - Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this + Setting this property to true announces to the system that this widget \e may be able to accept drop events. If the widget is the desktop (TQWidget::isDesktop()), this may @@ -2992,7 +2992,7 @@ void TQWidget::changeInputContext( const TQString& identifierName ) according to a configuration for default input method When TQT_NO_IM_EXTENSIONS is not set, input context is - generated only when isInputMethodEnabled() returns TRUE. + generated only when isInputMethodEnabled() returns true. */ void TQWidget::createInputContext() { diff --git a/src/kernel/tqwmatrix.cpp b/src/kernel/tqwmatrix.cpp index eb5ce5087..0c5fddc67 100644 --- a/src/kernel/tqwmatrix.cpp +++ b/src/kernel/tqwmatrix.cpp @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ double qsincos( double, bool calcCos ); // defined in tqpainter_x11.cpp \sa TQPainter::setWorldMatrix(), TQPixmap::xForm() */ -bool qt_old_transformations = TRUE; +bool qt_old_transformations = true; /*! \enum TQWMatrix::TransformationMode @@ -216,9 +216,9 @@ bool qt_old_transformations = TRUE; void TQWMatrix::setTransformationMode( TQWMatrix::TransformationMode m ) { if ( m == TQWMatrix::Points ) - qt_old_transformations = TRUE; + qt_old_transformations = true; else - qt_old_transformations = FALSE; + qt_old_transformations = false; } @@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ void TQWMatrix::reset() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns false. \sa reset() */ @@ -852,8 +852,8 @@ TQWMatrix &TQWMatrix::rotate( double a ) { double b = deg2rad*a; // convert to radians #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) - double sina = qsincos(b,FALSE); // fast and convenient - double cosa = qsincos(b,TRUE); + double sina = qsincos(b,false); // fast and convenient + double cosa = qsincos(b,true); #else double sina = sin(b); double cosa = cos(b); @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ TQWMatrix &TQWMatrix::rotate( double a ) /*! \fn bool TQWMatrix::isInvertible() const - Returns TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns false. \sa invert() */ @@ -889,8 +889,8 @@ TQWMatrix &TQWMatrix::rotate( double a ) returned. If \a invertible is not 0: the value of \a *invertible is set - to TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise \a *invertible is - set to FALSE. + to true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise \a *invertible is + set to false. \sa isInvertible() */ @@ -900,13 +900,13 @@ TQWMatrix TQWMatrix::invert( bool *invertible ) const double determinant = det(); if ( determinant == 0.0 ) { if ( invertible ) - *invertible = FALSE; // singular matrix + *invertible = false; // singular matrix TQWMatrix defaultMatrix; return defaultMatrix; } else { // invertible matrix if ( invertible ) - *invertible = TRUE; + *invertible = true; double dinv = 1.0/determinant; TQWMatrix imatrix( (_m22*dinv), (-_m12*dinv), (-_m21*dinv), ( _m11*dinv), @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ TQWMatrix TQWMatrix::invert( bool *invertible ) const /*! - Returns TRUE if this matrix is equal to \a m; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this matrix is equal to \a m; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQWMatrix::operator==( const TQWMatrix &m ) const @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ bool TQWMatrix::operator==( const TQWMatrix &m ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this matrix is not equal to \a m; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this matrix is not equal to \a m; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQWMatrix::operator!=( const TQWMatrix &m ) const diff --git a/src/network/tqdns.cpp b/src/network/tqdns.cpp index fa248533c..4e5038657 100644 --- a/src/network/tqdns.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqdns.cpp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ static TQ_UINT32 now() static TQPtrList<TQHostAddress> * ns = 0; static TQStrList * domains = 0; -static bool ipv6support = FALSE; +static bool ipv6support = false; #if defined(Q_MODERN_RES_API) #else @@ -135,13 +135,13 @@ static int tqdns_res_init() class TQDnsPrivate { public: - TQDnsPrivate() : queryTimer( 0 ), noNames(FALSE) + TQDnsPrivate() : queryTimer( 0 ), noNames(false) { #if defined(Q_DNS_SYNCHRONOUS) #if defined(Q_OS_UNIX) noEventLoop = tqApp==0 || tqApp->loopLevel()==0; #else - noEventLoop = FALSE; + noEventLoop = false; #endif #endif } @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ private: TQString label; TQDnsRR * rr; - TQString readString(bool multipleLabels = TRUE); + TQString readString(bool multipleLabels = true); void parseA(); void parseAaaa(); void parseMx(); @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ private: TQDnsRR::TQDnsRR( const TQString & label ) : domain( 0 ), t( TQDns::None ), - nxdomain( FALSE ), current( FALSE ), + nxdomain( false ), current( false ), expireTime( 0 ), deleteTime( 0 ), priority( 0 ), weight( 0 ), port( 0 ) { @@ -299,14 +299,14 @@ TQDnsRR::~TQDnsRR() // this one just sticks in a NXDomain TQDnsAnswer::TQDnsAnswer( TQDnsQuery * query_ ) { - ok = TRUE; + ok = true; answer = 0; size = 0; query = query_; pp = 0; rrs = new TQPtrList<TQDnsRR>; - rrs->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + rrs->setAutoDelete( false ); next = size; ttl = 0; label = TQString::null; @@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ TQDnsAnswer::TQDnsAnswer( TQDnsQuery * query_ ) newrr->t = query->t; newrr->deleteTime = query->started + 10; newrr->expireTime = query->started + 10; - newrr->nxdomain = TRUE; - newrr->current = TRUE; + newrr->nxdomain = true; + newrr->current = true; rrs->append( newrr ); } @@ -325,14 +325,14 @@ TQDnsAnswer::TQDnsAnswer( TQDnsQuery * query_ ) TQDnsAnswer::TQDnsAnswer( const TQByteArray& answer_, TQDnsQuery * query_ ) { - ok = TRUE; + ok = true; answer = (TQ_UINT8 *)(answer_.data()); size = (int)answer_.size(); query = query_; pp = 0; rrs = new TQPtrList<TQDnsRR>; - rrs->setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + rrs->setAutoDelete( false ); next = size; ttl = 0; label = TQString::null; @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ TQString TQDnsAnswer::readString(bool multipleLabels) } } not_ok: - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; return TQString::null; } @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parsePtr() void TQDnsAnswer::parseTxt() { - TQString text = readString(FALSE); + TQString text = readString(false); if ( !ok ) { #if defined(TQDNS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQDns: saw bad TXT for for %s", label.ascii() ); @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() #if defined(TQDNS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "DNS Manager: answer to wrong query type (%d)", answer[1] ); #endif - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; return; } @@ -631,8 +631,8 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() rr->t = query->t; rr->deleteTime = query->started + 60; rr->expireTime = query->started + 60; - rr->nxdomain = TRUE; - rr->current = TRUE; + rr->nxdomain = true; + rr->current = true; rrs->append( rr ); return; } @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() #if defined(TQDNS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "DNS Manager: error code %d", answer[3] & 0x0f ); #endif - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; return; } @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() answers++; rr->deleteTime = rr->expireTime; } - rr->current = TRUE; + rr->current = true; rrs->append( rr ); } } @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() // by something we care about. we want to cache such As. rrs->first(); TQDict<void> used( 17 ); - used.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + used.setAutoDelete( false ); while( (rr=rrs->current()) != 0 ) { rrs->next(); if ( rr->target.length() && rr->deleteTime > 0 && rr->current ) @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::parse() class TQDnsUgleHack: public TQDns { public: - void ugle( bool emitAnyway=FALSE ); + void ugle( bool emitAnyway=false ); }; @@ -832,7 +832,7 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::notify() return; TQPtrDict<void> notified; - notified.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + notified.setAutoDelete( false ); TQPtrDictIterator<void> it( *query->dns ); TQDns * dns; @@ -845,8 +845,8 @@ void TQDnsAnswer::notify() #if defined(TQDNS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "DNS Manager: found no answers!" ); #endif - dns->d->noNames = TRUE; - ((TQDnsUgleHack*)dns)->ugle( TRUE ); + dns->d->noNames = true; + ((TQDnsUgleHack*)dns)->ugle( true ); } else { TQStringList n = dns->qualifiedNames(); if ( query && n.contains(query->l) ) @@ -931,13 +931,13 @@ void TQDnsUgleHack::ugle( bool emitAnyway) TQDnsManager::TQDnsManager() : TQDnsSocket( tqApp, "Internal DNS manager" ), queries( TQPtrVector<TQDnsQuery>( 0 ) ), - cache( TQDict<TQDnsDomain>( 83, FALSE ) ), + cache( TQDict<TQDnsDomain>( 83, false ) ), ipv4Socket( new TQSocketDevice( TQSocketDevice::Datagram, TQSocketDevice::IPv4, 0 ) ) #if !defined (TQT_NO_IPV6) , ipv6Socket( new TQSocketDevice( TQSocketDevice::Datagram, TQSocketDevice::IPv6, 0 ) ) #endif { - cache.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + cache.setAutoDelete( true ); globalManager = this; TQTimer * sweepTimer = new TQTimer( this ); @@ -948,8 +948,8 @@ TQDnsManager::TQDnsManager() TQSocketNotifier * rn4 = new TQSocketNotifier( ipv4Socket->socket(), TQSocketNotifier::Read, this, "dns IPv4 socket watcher" ); - ipv4Socket->setAddressReusable( FALSE ); - ipv4Socket->setBlocking( FALSE ); + ipv4Socket->setAddressReusable( false ); + ipv4Socket->setBlocking( false ); connect( rn4, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), TQ_SLOT(answer()) ); #if !defined (TQT_NO_IPV6) @@ -960,9 +960,9 @@ TQDnsManager::TQDnsManager() TQSocketNotifier::Read, this, "dns IPv6 socket watcher" ); - ipv6support = TRUE; - ipv6Socket->setAddressReusable( FALSE ); - ipv6Socket->setBlocking( FALSE ); + ipv6support = true; + ipv6Socket->setAddressReusable( false ); + ipv6Socket->setBlocking( false ); connect( rn6, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), TQ_SLOT(answer()) ); } #endif @@ -994,9 +994,9 @@ TQDnsManager::TQDnsManager() delete ::ns; ::ns = ns; - ::ns->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + ::ns->setAutoDelete( true ); - TQStrList * domains = new TQStrList( TRUE ); + TQStrList * domains = new TQStrList( true ); ::domains->first(); const char * s; @@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ TQDnsManager::TQDnsManager() delete ::domains; ::domains = domains; - ::domains->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + ::domains->setAutoDelete( true ); } @@ -1025,8 +1025,8 @@ TQDnsManager::~TQDnsManager() { if ( globalManager ) globalManager = 0; - queries.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - cache.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + queries.setAutoDelete( true ); + cache.setAutoDelete( true ); delete ipv4Socket; #if !defined (TQT_NO_IPV6) delete ipv6Socket; @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ static TQ_UINT32 lastSweep = 0; void TQDnsManager::cleanCache() { - bool again = FALSE; + bool again = false; TQDictIterator<TQDnsDomain> it( cache ); TQDnsDomain * d; TQ_UINT32 thisSweep = now(); @@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ void TQDnsManager::transmitQuery( int i ) // seconds. the graph becomes steep around that point, and the // number of errors rises... so it seems good to retry at that // point. - q->start( q->step < ns->count() ? 800 : 1500, TRUE ); + q->start( q->step < ns->count() ? 800 : 1500, true ); } @@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ void TQDnsDomain::add( const TQString & label, TQDnsRR * rr ) TQDnsDomain * d = TQDnsManager::manager()->domain( label ); if ( !d->rrs ) { d->rrs = new TQPtrList<TQDnsRR>; - d->rrs->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + d->rrs->setAutoDelete( true ); } d->rrs->append( rr ); rr->domain = d; @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) TQDnsRR *rrTmp = new TQDnsRR( r->label() ); rrTmp->t = TQDns::A; rrTmp->address = TQHostAddress( 0x7f000001 ); - rrTmp->current = TRUE; + rrTmp->current = true; l->append( rrTmp ); return l; } @@ -1380,10 +1380,10 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) if ( tmp.isIPv4Address() ) { rrTmp->t = TQDns::A; rrTmp->address = tmp; - rrTmp->current = TRUE; + rrTmp->current = true; l->append( rrTmp ); } else { - rrTmp->nxdomain = TRUE; + rrTmp->nxdomain = true; } return l; } @@ -1395,10 +1395,10 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) if ( tmp.isIPv6Address() ) { rrTmp->t = TQDns::Aaaa; rrTmp->address = tmp; - rrTmp->current = TRUE; + rrTmp->current = true; l->append( rrTmp ); } else { - rrTmp->nxdomain = TRUE; + rrTmp->nxdomain = true; } return l; } @@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) int cnamecount = 0; while( it != end ) { TQString s = *it++; - nxdomain = FALSE; + nxdomain = false; #if defined(TQDNS_DEBUG) tqDebug( "looking at cache for %s (%s %d)", s.ascii(), r->label().ascii(), r->recordType() ); @@ -1425,7 +1425,7 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) if ( d->rrs ) d->rrs->first(); TQDnsRR * rr; - bool answer = FALSE; + bool answer = false; while( d->rrs && (rr=d->rrs->current()) != 0 ) { if ( rr->t == TQDns::Cname && r->recordType() != TQDns::Cname && !rr->nxdomain && cnamecount < 16 ) { @@ -1448,9 +1448,9 @@ TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * TQDnsDomain::cached( const TQDns * r ) } else { if ( rr->t == r->recordType() ) { if ( rr->nxdomain ) - nxdomain = TRUE; + nxdomain = true; else - answer = TRUE; + answer = true; l->append( rr ); if ( rr->deleteTime <= lastSweep ) { // we're returning something that'll be @@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ void TQDnsDomain::sweep( TQ_UINT32 thisSweep ) rr->expireTime, rr->deleteTime, rr->target.latin1(), rr->address.toString().latin1()); #endif - if ( rr->current == FALSE || + if ( !rr->current || rr->t == TQDns::None || rr->deleteTime <= thisSweep || rr->expireTime <= thisSweep ) @@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ TQDns::~TQDns() void TQDns::setLabel( const TQString & label ) { l = label; - d->noNames = FALSE; + d->noNames = false; // construct a list of qualified names n.clear(); @@ -1877,7 +1877,7 @@ void TQDns::setLabel( const TQHostAddress & address ) void TQDns::setRecordType( RecordType rr ) { t = rr; - d->noNames = FALSE; + d->noNames = false; setStartQueryTimer(); // start query the next time we enter event loop } @@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@ void TQDns::setStartQueryTimer() d->queryTimer = new TQTimer( this ); connect( d->queryTimer, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQ_SLOT(startQuery()) ); - d->queryTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + d->queryTimer->start( 0, true ); } } @@ -1962,11 +1962,11 @@ TQString TQDns::toInAddrArpaDomain( const TQHostAddress &address ) */ /*! - Returns TRUE if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it + Returns true if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it does not already have the necessary information); otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. - TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to FALSE. + TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to false. */ bool TQDns::isWorking() const @@ -1975,11 +1975,11 @@ bool TQDns::isWorking() const tqDebug( "TQDns::isWorking (%s, %d)", l.ascii(), t ); #endif if ( t == None ) - return FALSE; + return false; #if defined(Q_DNS_SYNCHRONOUS) if ( d->noEventLoop ) - return TRUE; + return true; #endif TQPtrList<TQDnsRR> * ll = TQDnsDomain::cached( this ); @@ -1989,17 +1989,17 @@ bool TQDns::isWorking() const queries--; } else { delete ll; - return FALSE; + return false; } ll->next(); } delete ll; if ( queries <= 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( d->noNames ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } @@ -2392,13 +2392,13 @@ void TQDns::doResInit() if ( ns ) delete ns; ns = new TQPtrList<TQHostAddress>; - ns->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - domains = new TQStrList( TRUE ); - domains->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + ns->setAutoDelete( true ); + domains = new TQStrList( true ); + domains->setAutoDelete( true ); TQString domainName, nameServer, searchList; - bool gotNetworkParams = FALSE; + bool gotNetworkParams = false; // try the API call GetNetworkParams() first and use registry lookup only // as a fallback #ifdef Q_OS_TEMP @@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@ void TQDns::doResInit() } searchList = ""; separator = ' '; - gotNetworkParams = TRUE; + gotNetworkParams = true; } delete[] finfo; } @@ -2551,9 +2551,9 @@ void TQDns::doResInit() if ( ns ) return; ns = new TQPtrList<TQHostAddress>; - ns->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - domains = new TQStrList( TRUE ); - domains->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + ns->setAutoDelete( true ); + domains = new TQStrList( true ); + domains->setAutoDelete( true ); // read resolv.conf manually. TQFile resolvConf("/etc/resolv.conf"); @@ -2659,7 +2659,7 @@ void TQDns::doResInit() TQHostAddress a; a.setAddress( ip ); if ( ( a.isIPv4Address() || a.isIPv6Address() ) && !a.isNull() ) { - bool first = TRUE; + bool first = true; line = line.mid( n+1 ); n = 0; while( n < line.length() && !line[(int)n].isSpace() ) @@ -2675,15 +2675,15 @@ void TQDns::doResInit() rr->address = a; rr->deleteTime = UINT_MAX; rr->expireTime = UINT_MAX; - rr->current = TRUE; + rr->current = true; if ( first ) { - first = FALSE; + first = false; TQDnsRR * ptr = new TQDnsRR( TQDns::toInAddrArpaDomain( a ) ); ptr->t = TQDns::Ptr; ptr->target = hostname; ptr->deleteTime = UINT_MAX; ptr->expireTime = UINT_MAX; - ptr->current = TRUE; + ptr->current = true; } } } diff --git a/src/network/tqftp.cpp b/src/network/tqftp.cpp index 8c7dbb184..93bdfc6fb 100644 --- a/src/network/tqftp.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqftp.cpp @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ private slots: private: void clearData() { - is_ba = FALSE; + is_ba = false; data.dev = 0; } @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ private: int bytesTotal; bool callWriteData; - // If is_ba is TRUE, ba is used; ba is never 0. + // If is_ba is true, ba is used; ba is never 0. // Otherwise dev is used; dev can be 0 or not. union { TQByteArray *ba; @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ public: TQFtp::Command command; TQStringList rawCmds; - // If is_ba is TRUE, ba is used; ba is never 0. + // If is_ba is true, ba is used; ba is never 0. // Otherwise dev is used; dev can be 0 or not. union { TQByteArray *ba; @@ -258,21 +258,21 @@ public: int TQFtpCommand::idCounter = 0; TQFtpCommand::TQFtpCommand( TQFtp::Command cmd, TQStringList raw ) - : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(FALSE) + : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(false) { id = ++idCounter; data.dev = 0; } TQFtpCommand::TQFtpCommand( TQFtp::Command cmd, TQStringList raw, const TQByteArray &ba ) - : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(TRUE) + : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(true) { id = ++idCounter; data.ba = new TQByteArray( ba ); } TQFtpCommand::TQFtpCommand( TQFtp::Command cmd, TQStringList raw, TQIODevice *dev ) - : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(FALSE) + : command(cmd), rawCmds(raw), is_ba(false) { id = ++idCounter; data.dev = dev; @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ TQFtpDTP::TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : TQObject( parent, name ), socket( 0, "TQFtpDTP_socket" ), pi( p ), - callWriteData( FALSE ) + callWriteData( false ) { clearData(); @@ -311,13 +311,13 @@ TQFtpDTP::TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : void TQFtpDTP::setData( TQByteArray *ba ) { - is_ba = TRUE; + is_ba = true; data.ba = ba; } void TQFtpDTP::setDevice( TQIODevice *dev ) { - is_ba = FALSE; + is_ba = false; data.dev = dev; } @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ void TQFtpDTP::writeData() socket.close(); clearData(); } else if ( data.dev ) { - callWriteData = FALSE; + callWriteData = false; const int blockSize = 16*1024; char buf[blockSize]; while ( !data.dev->atEnd() && socket.bytesToWrite()==0 ) { @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ void TQFtpDTP::writeData() socket.close(); clearData(); } else { - callWriteData = TRUE; + callWriteData = true; } } } @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ void TQFtpDTP::abortConnection() #if defined(TQFTPDTP_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQFtpDTP::abortConnection" ); #endif - callWriteData = FALSE; + callWriteData = false; clearData(); socket.clearPendingData(); @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ bool TQFtpDTP::parseDir( const TQString &buffer, const TQString &userName, TQUrl TQStringList lst = TQStringList::split( " ", buffer ); if ( lst.count() < 9 ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQString tmp; @@ -397,19 +397,19 @@ bool TQFtpDTP::parseDir( const TQString &buffer, const TQString &userName, TQUrl tmp = lst[ 0 ]; if ( tmp[ 0 ] == TQChar( 'd' ) ) { - info->setDir( TRUE ); - info->setFile( FALSE ); - info->setSymLink( FALSE ); + info->setDir( true ); + info->setFile( false ); + info->setSymLink( false ); } else if ( tmp[ 0 ] == TQChar( '-' ) ) { - info->setDir( FALSE ); - info->setFile( TRUE ); - info->setSymLink( FALSE ); + info->setDir( false ); + info->setFile( true ); + info->setSymLink( false ); } else if ( tmp[ 0 ] == TQChar( 'l' ) ) { - info->setDir( TRUE ); // #### todo - info->setFile( FALSE ); - info->setSymLink( TRUE ); + info->setDir( true ); // #### todo + info->setFile( false ); + info->setSymLink( true ); } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } static int user = 0; @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ bool TQFtpDTP::parseDir( const TQString &buffer, const TQString &userName, TQUrl n = n.stripWhiteSpace(); info->setName( n ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQFtpDTP::socketConnected() @@ -627,13 +627,13 @@ void TQFtpDTP::socketBytesWritten( int bytes ) *********************************************************************/ TQFtpPI::TQFtpPI( TQObject *parent ) : TQObject( parent ), - rawCommand(FALSE), + rawCommand(false), dtp( this ), commandSocket( 0, "TQFtpPI_socket" ), state( Begin ), abortState( None ), currentCmd( TQString::null ), - waitForDtpToConnect( FALSE ), - waitForDtpToClose( FALSE ) + waitForDtpToConnect( false ), + waitForDtpToClose( false ) { connect( &commandSocket, TQ_SIGNAL(hostFound()), TQ_SLOT(hostFound()) ); @@ -663,22 +663,22 @@ void TQFtpPI::connectToHost( const TQString &host, TQ_UINT16 port ) are all done the finished() signal is emitted. When an error occurs, the error() signal is emitted. - If there are pending commands in the queue this functions returns FALSE and - the \a cmds are not added to the queue; otherwise it returns TRUE. + If there are pending commands in the queue this functions returns false and + the \a cmds are not added to the queue; otherwise it returns true. */ bool TQFtpPI::sendCommands( const TQStringList &cmds ) { if ( !pendingCommands.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( commandSocket.state()!=TQSocket::Connected || state!=Idle ) { emit error( TQFtp::NotConnected, TQFtp::tr( "Not connected" ) ); - return TRUE; // there are no pending commands + return true; // there are no pending commands } pendingCommands = cmds; startNextCmd(); - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQFtpPI::clearPendingCommands() @@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ void TQFtpPI::readyRead() /* Process a reply from the FTP server. - Returns TRUE if the reply was processed or FALSE if the reply has to be + Returns true if the reply was processed or false if the reply has to be processed at a later point. */ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() @@ -816,8 +816,8 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() // connection is really closed to avoid short reads of the DTP if ( 100*replyCode[0]+10*replyCode[1]+replyCode[2] == 226 ) { if ( dtp.socketState() != TQSocket::Idle ) { - waitForDtpToClose = TRUE; - return FALSE; + waitForDtpToClose = true; + return false; } } @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() break; case WaitForAbortToFinish: abortState = None; - return TRUE; + return true; default: break; } @@ -840,14 +840,14 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() switch ( state ) { case Begin: if ( replyCode[0] == 1 ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } else if ( replyCode[0] == 2 ) { state = Idle; emit finished( TQFtp::tr( "Connected to host %1" ).arg( commandSocket.peerName() ) ); break; } // ### error handling - return TRUE; + return true; case Waiting: if ( replyCode[0]<0 || replyCode[0]>5 ) state = Failure; @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() break; default: // ### spontaneous message - return TRUE; + return true; } #if defined(TQFTPPI_DEBUG) // tqDebug( "TQFtpPI state: %d [processReply() intermediate]", state ); @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() int replyCodeInt = 100*replyCode[0] + 10*replyCode[1] + replyCode[2]; emit rawFtpReply( replyCodeInt, replyText ); if ( rawCommand ) { - rawCommand = FALSE; + rawCommand = false; } else if ( replyCodeInt == 227 ) { // 227 Entering Passive Mode (h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2) // rfc959 does not define this response precisely, and gives @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() TQStringList lst = addrPortPattern.capturedTexts(); TQString host = lst[1] + "." + lst[2] + "." + lst[3] + "." + lst[4]; TQ_UINT16 port = ( lst[5].toUInt() << 8 ) + lst[6].toUInt(); - waitForDtpToConnect = TRUE; + waitForDtpToConnect = true; dtp.connectToHost( host, port ); } } else if ( replyCodeInt == 230 ) { @@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::processReply() #if defined(TQFTPPI_DEBUG) // tqDebug( "TQFtpPI state: %d [processReply() end]", state ); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } #ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTCODEC @@ -938,14 +938,14 @@ TQM_EXPORT_FTP TQTextCodec *tqt_ftp_filename_codec = 0; #endif /* - Starts next pending command. Returns FALSE if there are no pending commands, - otherwise it returns TRUE. + Starts next pending command. Returns false if there are no pending commands, + otherwise it returns true. */ bool TQFtpPI::startNextCmd() { if ( waitForDtpToConnect ) // don't process any new commands until we are connected - return TRUE; + return true; #if defined(TQFTPPI_DEBUG) if ( state != Idle ) @@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::startNextCmd() if ( pendingCommands.isEmpty() ) { currentCmd = TQString::null; emit finished( replyText ); - return FALSE; + return false; } currentCmd = pendingCommands.first(); pendingCommands.pop_front(); @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ bool TQFtpPI::startNextCmd() { commandSocket.writeBlock( currentCmd.latin1(), currentCmd.length() ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQFtpPI::dtpConnectState( int s ) @@ -986,11 +986,11 @@ void TQFtpPI::dtpConnectState( int s ) else return; } - waitForDtpToClose = FALSE; + waitForDtpToClose = false; readyRead(); return; case TQFtpDTP::CsConnected: - waitForDtpToConnect = FALSE; + waitForDtpToConnect = false; startNextCmd(); return; case TQFtpDTP::CsHostNotFound: @@ -1013,11 +1013,11 @@ class TQFtpPrivate { public: TQFtpPrivate() : - close_waitForStateChange(FALSE), + close_waitForStateChange(false), state( TQFtp::Unconnected ), error( TQFtp::NoError ), - npWaitForLoginDone( FALSE ) - { pending.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); } + npWaitForLoginDone( false ) + { pending.setAutoDelete( true ); } TQFtpPI pi; TQPtrList<TQFtpCommand> pending; @@ -1039,7 +1039,7 @@ static TQFtpPrivate* d( const TQFtp* foo ) { if ( !d_ptr ) { d_ptr = new TQPtrDict<TQFtpPrivate>; - d_ptr->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + d_ptr->setAutoDelete( true ); tqAddPostRoutine( cleanup_d_ptr ); } TQFtpPrivate* ret = d_ptr->find( (void*)foo ); @@ -1158,14 +1158,14 @@ static void delete_d( const TQFtp* foo ) stateChanged( HostLookup ) stateChanged( Connecting ) stateChanged( Connected ) - finished( 1, FALSE ) + finished( 1, false ) start( 2 ) stateChanged( LoggedIn ) - finished( 2, FALSE ) + finished( 2, false ) start( 3 ) - finished( 3, FALSE ) + finished( 3, false ) start( 4 ) dataTransferProgress( 0, 3798 ) @@ -1173,14 +1173,14 @@ static void delete_d( const TQFtp* foo ) readyRead() dataTransferProgress( 3798, 3798 ) readyRead() - finished( 4, FALSE ) + finished( 4, false ) start( 5 ) stateChanged( Closing ) stateChanged( Unconnected ) - finished( 5, FALSE ) + finished( 5, false ) - done( FALSE ) + done( false ) \endcode The dataTransferProgress() signal in the above example is useful @@ -1199,12 +1199,12 @@ static void delete_d( const TQFtp* foo ) stateChanged( HostLookup ) stateChanged( Connecting ) stateChanged( Connected ) - finished( 1, FALSE ) + finished( 1, false ) start( 2 ) - finished( 2, TRUE ) + finished( 2, true ) - done( TRUE ) + done( true ) \endcode You can then get details about the error with the error() and @@ -1361,8 +1361,8 @@ void TQFtp::init() \fn void TQFtp::commandFinished( int id, bool error ) This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by - \a id has finished. \a error is TRUE if an error occurred during - the processing; otherwise \a error is FALSE. + \a id has finished. \a error is true if an error occurred during + the processing; otherwise \a error is false. \sa commandStarted() done() error() errorString() */ @@ -1372,8 +1372,8 @@ void TQFtp::init() This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished; (it is emitted after the last command's commandFinished() signal). - \a error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; - otherwise \a error is FALSE. + \a error is true if an error occurred during the processing; + otherwise \a error is false. \sa commandFinished() error() errorString() */ @@ -1797,11 +1797,11 @@ TQByteArray TQFtp::readAll() commandFinished() signal has not been emitted), this function sends an \c ABORT command to the server. When the server replies that the command is aborted, the commandFinished() signal with the - \c error argument set to \c TRUE is emitted for the command. Due + \c error argument set to \c true is emitted for the command. Due to timing issues, it is possible that the command had already finished before the abort request reached the server, in which case, the commandFinished() signal is emitted with the \c error - argument set to \c FALSE. + argument set to \c false. For all other commands that are affected by the abort(), no signals are emitted. @@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ TQByteArray TQFtp::readAll() \warning Some FTP servers, for example the BSD FTP daemon (version 0.3), wrongly return a positive reply even when an abort has occurred. For these servers the commandFinished() signal has its - error flag set to \c FALSE, even though the command did not + error flag set to \c false, even though the command did not complete successfully. \sa clearPendingCommands() @@ -1880,8 +1880,8 @@ TQIODevice* TQFtp::currentDevice() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet - been executed; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet + been executed; otherwise returns false. The command that is being executed is \e not considered as a scheduled command. @@ -1927,7 +1927,7 @@ TQFtp::State TQFtp::state() const /*! Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out what when wrong when receiving a commandFinished() or a done() - signal with the \c error argument set to \c TRUE. + signal with the \c error argument set to \c true. If you start a new command, the error status is reset to \c NoError. */ @@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ TQFtp::Error TQFtp::error() const Returns a human-readable description of the last error that occurred. This is useful for presenting a error message to the user when receiving a commandFinished() or a done() signal with - the \c error argument set to \c TRUE. + the \c error argument set to \c true. The error string is often (but not always) the reply from the server, so it is not always possible to translate the string. If @@ -2022,15 +2022,15 @@ void TQFtp::piFinished( const TQString& ) // don't get the commandFinished() signal before the stateChanged() // signal. if ( d->state != TQFtp::Unconnected ) { - d->close_waitForStateChange = TRUE; + d->close_waitForStateChange = true; return; } } - emit commandFinished( c->id, FALSE ); + emit commandFinished( c->id, false ); d->pending.removeFirst(); if ( d->pending.isEmpty() ) { - emit done( FALSE ); + emit done( false ); } else { startNextCommand(); } @@ -2085,11 +2085,11 @@ void TQFtp::piError( int errorCode, const TQString &text ) d->pi.clearPendingCommands(); clearPendingCommands(); - emit commandFinished( c->id, TRUE ); + emit commandFinished( c->id, true ); d->pending.removeFirst(); if ( d->pending.isEmpty() ) - emit done( TRUE ); + emit done( true ); else startNextCommand(); } @@ -2100,7 +2100,7 @@ void TQFtp::piConnectState( int state ) d->state = (State)state; emit stateChanged( d->state ); if ( d->close_waitForStateChange ) { - d->close_waitForStateChange = FALSE; + d->close_waitForStateChange = false; piFinished( tr( "Connection closed" ) ); } } @@ -2109,7 +2109,7 @@ void TQFtp::piFtpReply( int code, const TQString &text ) { if ( currentCommand() == RawCommand ) { TQFtpPrivate *d = ::d( this ); - d->pi.rawCommand = TRUE; + d->pi.rawCommand = true; emit rawCommandReply( code, text ); } } @@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ bool TQFtp::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation *op ) connect( this, TQ_SIGNAL(readyRead()), this, TQ_SLOT(npReadyRead()) ); - d->npWaitForLoginDone = TRUE; + d->npWaitForLoginDone = true; switch ( op->operation() ) { case OpGet: case OpPut: @@ -2225,8 +2225,8 @@ bool TQFtp::checkConnection( TQNetworkOperation *op ) } if ( state() == LoggedIn ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } /*! \reimp @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ void TQFtp::parseDir( const TQString &buffer, TQUrlInfo &info ) void TQFtp::npListInfo( const TQUrlInfo & i ) { if ( url() ) { - TQRegExp filt( url()->nameFilter(), FALSE, TRUE ); + TQRegExp filt( url()->nameFilter(), false, true ); if ( i.isDir() || filt.search( i.name() ) != -1 ) { emit newChild( i, operationInProgress() ); } @@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ void TQFtp::npDone( bool err ) { TQFtpPrivate *d = ::d( this ); - bool emitFinishedSignal = FALSE; + bool emitFinishedSignal = false; TQNetworkOperation *op = operationInProgress(); if ( op ) { if ( err ) { @@ -2292,7 +2292,7 @@ void TQFtp::npDone( bool err ) break; } } - emitFinishedSignal = TRUE; + emitFinishedSignal = true; } else if ( !d->npWaitForLoginDone ) { switch ( op->operation() ) { case OpRemove: @@ -2301,7 +2301,7 @@ void TQFtp::npDone( bool err ) case OpMkDir: { TQUrlInfo inf( op->arg( 0 ), 0, "", "", 0, TQDateTime(), - TQDateTime(), TRUE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE ); + TQDateTime(), true, false, false, true, true, true ); emit newChild( inf, op ); emit createdDirectory( inf, op ); } @@ -2313,10 +2313,10 @@ void TQFtp::npDone( bool err ) break; } op->setState( StDone ); - emitFinishedSignal = TRUE; + emitFinishedSignal = true; } } - d->npWaitForLoginDone = FALSE; + d->npWaitForLoginDone = false; if ( state() == Unconnected ) { disconnect( this, TQ_SIGNAL(listInfo(const TQUrlInfo&)), diff --git a/src/network/tqhostaddress.cpp b/src/network/tqhostaddress.cpp index 07d08c492..766ca006f 100644 --- a/src/network/tqhostaddress.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqhostaddress.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ class TQHostAddressPrivate { public: - TQHostAddressPrivate( TQ_UINT32 a_=0 ) : a(a_), isIp4(TRUE) + TQHostAddressPrivate( TQ_UINT32 a_=0 ) : a(a_), isIp4(true) { } TQHostAddressPrivate( TQ_UINT8 *a_ ); @@ -70,14 +70,14 @@ private: friend class TQHostAddress; }; -TQHostAddressPrivate::TQHostAddressPrivate(TQ_UINT8 *a_) : a(0), isIp4(FALSE) +TQHostAddressPrivate::TQHostAddressPrivate(TQ_UINT8 *a_) : a(0), isIp4(false) { for ( int i=0; i<16; i++ ) { a6.c[i] = a_[i]; } } -TQHostAddressPrivate::TQHostAddressPrivate(const Q_IPV6ADDR &a_) : a(0), isIp4(FALSE) +TQHostAddressPrivate::TQHostAddressPrivate(const Q_IPV6ADDR &a_) : a(0), isIp4(false) { a6 = a_; } @@ -212,31 +212,31 @@ void TQHostAddress::setAddress( TQ_UINT8 *ip6Addr ) #ifndef TQT_NO_STRINGLIST static bool parseIp4(const TQString& address, TQ_UINT32 *addr) { - TQStringList ipv4 = TQStringList::split(".", address, FALSE); + TQStringList ipv4 = TQStringList::split(".", address, false); if (ipv4.count() == 4) { int i = 0; - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; while(ok && i < 4) { uint byteValue = ipv4[i].toUInt(&ok); if (byteValue > 255) - ok = FALSE; + ok = false; if (ok) *addr = (*addr << 8) + byteValue; ++i; } if (ok) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \overload Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string - representation \a address (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns TRUE and + representation \a address (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns true and sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise - returns FALSE and leaves the address unchanged. + returns false and leaves the address unchanged. */ bool TQHostAddress::setAddress(const TQString& address) { @@ -246,46 +246,46 @@ bool TQHostAddress::setAddress(const TQString& address) TQ_UINT32 maybeIp4 = 0; if (parseIp4(address, &maybeIp4)) { setAddress(maybeIp4); - return TRUE; + return true; } // try ipv6 - TQStringList ipv6 = TQStringList::split(":", a, TRUE); + TQStringList ipv6 = TQStringList::split(":", a, true); int count = (int)ipv6.count(); if (count < 3) - return FALSE; // there must be at least two ":" + return false; // there must be at least two ":" if (count > 8) - return FALSE; // maximum of seven ":" exceeded + return false; // maximum of seven ":" exceeded TQ_UINT8 maybeIp6[16]; int mc = 16; int fillCount = 9 - count; for (int i=count-1; i>=0; --i) { if ( mc <= 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; if (ipv6[i].isEmpty()) { if (i==count-1) { // special case: ":" is last character if (!ipv6[i-1].isEmpty()) - return FALSE; + return false; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; } else if (i==0) { // special case: ":" is first character if (!ipv6[i+1].isEmpty()) - return FALSE; + return false; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; } else { for (int j=0; j<fillCount; ++j) { if ( mc <= 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; maybeIp6[--mc] = 0; } } } else { - bool ok = FALSE; + bool ok = false; uint byteValue = ipv6[i].toUInt(&ok, 16); if (ok && byteValue <= 0xffff) { maybeIp6[--mc] = byteValue & 0xff; @@ -294,24 +294,24 @@ bool TQHostAddress::setAddress(const TQString& address) if (i == count-1) { // parse the ipv4 part of a mixed type if (!parseIp4(ipv6[i], &maybeIp4)) - return FALSE; + return false; maybeIp6[--mc] = maybeIp4 & 0xff; maybeIp6[--mc] = (maybeIp4 >> 8) & 0xff; maybeIp6[--mc] = (maybeIp4 >> 16) & 0xff; maybeIp6[--mc] = (maybeIp4 >> 24) & 0xff; --fillCount; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } } } if (mc == 0) { setAddress(maybeIp6); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif @@ -326,8 +326,8 @@ bool TQHostAddress::isIp4Addr() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv4 address; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the host address represents an IPv4 address; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQHostAddress::isIPv4Address() const { @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ TQ_UINT32 TQHostAddress::ip4Addr() const For example, if the address is 127.0.0.1, the returned value is 2130706433 (i.e. 0x7f000001). - This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns TRUE. + This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns true. \sa toString() */ @@ -360,8 +360,8 @@ TQ_UINT32 TQHostAddress::toIPv4Address() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv6 address; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the host address represents an IPv6 address; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address() const { @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ bool TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address() const } \endcode - This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns TRUE. + This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns true. \sa toString() */ @@ -424,8 +424,8 @@ TQString TQHostAddress::toString() const /*! - Returns TRUE if this host address is the same as \a other; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this host address is the same as \a other; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQHostAddress::operator==( const TQHostAddress & other ) const { @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ bool TQHostAddress::operator==( const TQHostAddress & other ) const /*! - Returns TRUE if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The + Returns true if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid for any particular host or interface. */ @@ -445,9 +445,9 @@ bool TQHostAddress::isNull() const int i = 0; while( i < 16 ) { if ( d->a6.c[i++] != 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif //TQT_NO_NETWORK diff --git a/src/network/tqhttp.cpp b/src/network/tqhttp.cpp index 389a731c7..bea20e42b 100644 --- a/src/network/tqhttp.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqhttp.cpp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public: chunkedSize( -1 ), idleTimer( 0 ) { - pending.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + pending.setAutoDelete( true ); } TQSocket socket; @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ int TQHttpRequest::idCounter = 0; bool TQHttpRequest::hasRequestHeader() { - return FALSE; + return false; } TQHttpRequestHeader TQHttpRequest::requestHeader() @@ -148,14 +148,14 @@ public: TQHttpNormalRequest( const TQHttpRequestHeader &h, TQIODevice *d, TQIODevice *t ) : header(h), to(t) { - is_ba = FALSE; + is_ba = false; data.dev = d; } TQHttpNormalRequest( const TQHttpRequestHeader &h, TQByteArray *d, TQIODevice *t ) : header(h), to(t) { - is_ba = TRUE; + is_ba = true; data.ba = d; } @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ void TQHttpNormalRequest::start( TQHttp *http ) bool TQHttpNormalRequest::hasRequestHeader() { - return TRUE; + return true; } TQHttpRequestHeader TQHttpNormalRequest::requestHeader() @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ void TQHttpCloseRequest::start( TQHttp *http ) Constructs an empty HTTP header. */ TQHttpHeader::TQHttpHeader() - : valid( TRUE ) + : valid( true ) { } @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ TQHttpHeader::TQHttpHeader( const TQHttpHeader& header ) key, colon, space, value. */ TQHttpHeader::TQHttpHeader( const TQString& str ) - : valid( TRUE ) + : valid( true ) { parse( str ); } @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ TQHttpHeader& TQHttpHeader::operator=( const TQHttpHeader& h ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns false. A TQHttpHeader is invalid if it was created by parsing a malformed string. */ @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ bool TQHttpHeader::isValid() const the keys/values it finds. If the string is not parsed successfully the TQHttpHeader becomes \link isValid() invalid\endlink. - Returns TRUE if \a str was successfully parsed; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a str was successfully parsed; otherwise returns false. \sa toString() */ @@ -457,12 +457,12 @@ bool TQHttpHeader::parse( const TQString& str ) TQStringList lst; int pos = str.find( '\n' ); if ( pos > 0 && str.at( pos - 1 ) == '\r' ) - lst = TQStringList::split( "\r\n", str.stripWhiteSpace(), FALSE ); + lst = TQStringList::split( "\r\n", str.stripWhiteSpace(), false ); else - lst = TQStringList::split( "\n", str.stripWhiteSpace(), FALSE ); + lst = TQStringList::split( "\n", str.stripWhiteSpace(), false ); if ( lst.isEmpty() ) - return TRUE; + return true; TQStringList lines; TQStringList::Iterator it = lst.begin(); @@ -483,11 +483,11 @@ bool TQHttpHeader::parse( const TQString& str ) it = lines.begin(); for( ; it != lines.end(); ++it ) { if ( !parseLine( *it, number++ ) ) { - valid = FALSE; - return FALSE; + valid = false; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal @@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ TQStringList TQHttpHeader::keys() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the HTTP header has an entry with the given \a - key; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the HTTP header has an entry with the given \a + key; otherwise returns false. \sa value() setValue() keys() */ @@ -557,8 +557,8 @@ void TQHttpHeader::removeValue( const TQString& key ) /*! \internal Parses the single HTTP header line \a line which has the format key, colon, space, value, and adds key/value to the headers. The - linenumber is \a number. Returns TRUE if the line was successfully - parsed and the key/value added; otherwise returns FALSE. + linenumber is \a number. Returns true if the line was successfully + parsed and the key/value added; otherwise returns false. \sa parse() */ @@ -566,11 +566,11 @@ bool TQHttpHeader::parseLine( const TQString& line, int ) { int i = line.find( ":" ); if ( i == -1 ) - return FALSE; + return false; values.insert( line.left( i ).stripWhiteSpace().lower(), line.mid( i + 1 ).stripWhiteSpace() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ TQString TQHttpHeader::toString() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the special HTTP - header field \c content-length; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the header has an entry for the special HTTP + header field \c content-length; otherwise returns false. \sa contentLength() setContentLength() */ @@ -628,8 +628,8 @@ void TQHttpHeader::setContentLength( int len ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP - header field \c content-type; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP + header field \c content-type; otherwise returns false. \sa contentType() setContentType() */ @@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ void TQHttpHeader::setContentType( const TQString& type ) */ TQHttpResponseHeader::TQHttpResponseHeader() { - setValid( FALSE ); + setValid( false ); } /*! @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ TQHttpResponseHeader::TQHttpResponseHeader( const TQString& str ) */ void TQHttpResponseHeader::setStatusLine( int code, const TQString& text, int majorVer, int minorVer ) { - setValid( TRUE ); + setValid( true ); statCode = code; reasonPhr = text; majVer = majorVer; @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ bool TQHttpResponseHeader::parseLine( const TQString& line, int number ) TQString l = line.simplifyWhiteSpace(); if ( l.length() < 10 ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( l.left( 5 ) == "HTTP/" && l[5].isDigit() && l[6] == '.' && l[7].isDigit() && l[8] == ' ' && l[9].isDigit() ) { @@ -816,10 +816,10 @@ bool TQHttpResponseHeader::parseLine( const TQString& line, int number ) reasonPhr = TQString::null; } } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \reimp @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ TQString TQHttpResponseHeader::toString() const TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader() : TQHttpHeader() { - setValid( FALSE ); + setValid( false ); } /*! @@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ TQHttpRequestHeader::TQHttpRequestHeader( const TQString& str ) */ void TQHttpRequestHeader::setRequest( const TQString& method, const TQString& path, int majorVer, int minorVer ) { - setValid( TRUE ); + setValid( true ); m = method; p = path; majVer = majorVer; @@ -985,13 +985,13 @@ bool TQHttpRequestHeader::parseLine( const TQString& line, int number ) v[5].isDigit() && v[6] == '.' && v[7].isDigit() ) { majVer = v[5].latin1() - '0'; minVer = v[7].latin1() - '0'; - return TRUE; + return true; } } } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \reimp @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::toString() const \code requestStarted( 1 ) - requestFinished( 1, FALSE ) + requestFinished( 1, false ) requestStarted( 2 ) stateChanged( Connecting ) @@ -1109,9 +1109,9 @@ TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::toString() const dataReadProgress( 18300, 0 ) readyRead( responseheader ) stateChanged( Connected ) - requestFinished( 2, FALSE ) + requestFinished( 2, false ) - done( FALSE ) + done( false ) stateChanged( Closing ) stateChanged( Unconnected ) @@ -1152,13 +1152,13 @@ TQString TQHttpRequestHeader::toString() const \code requestStarted( 1 ) - requestFinished( 1, FALSE ) + requestFinished( 1, false ) requestStarted( 2 ) stateChanged( HostLookup ) - requestFinished( 2, TRUE ) + requestFinished( 2, true ) - done( TRUE ) + done( true ) stateChanged( Unconnected ) \endcode @@ -1384,8 +1384,8 @@ TQHttp::~TQHttp() \fn void TQHttp::requestFinished( int id, bool error ) This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by - \a id has finished. \a error is TRUE if an error occurred during - the processing; otherwise \a error is FALSE. + \a id has finished. \a error is true if an error occurred during + the processing; otherwise \a error is false. \sa requestStarted() done() error() errorString() */ @@ -1395,8 +1395,8 @@ TQHttp::~TQHttp() This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished; (it is emitted after the last request's requestFinished() signal). - \a error is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; - otherwise \a error is FALSE. + \a error is true if an error occurred during the processing; + otherwise \a error is false. \sa requestFinished() error() errorString() */ @@ -1405,12 +1405,12 @@ TQHttp::~TQHttp() Aborts the current request and deletes all scheduled requests. For the current request, the requestFinished() signal with the \c - error argument \c TRUE is emitted. For all other requests that are + error argument \c true is emitted. For all other requests that are affected by the abort(), no signals are emitted. Since this slot also deletes the scheduled requests, there are no requests left and the done() signal is emitted (with the \c error - argument \c TRUE). + argument \c true). \sa clearPendingRequests() */ @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ int TQHttp::currentId() const Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If the request is one issued by setHost() or closeConnection(), it returns an invalid request header, i.e. - TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns FALSE. + TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns false. \sa currentId() */ @@ -1546,8 +1546,8 @@ TQIODevice* TQHttp::currentDestinationDevice() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet - been executed; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet + been executed; otherwise returns false. The request that is being executed is \e not considered as a scheduled request. @@ -1825,10 +1825,10 @@ void TQHttp::finishedWithSuccess() if ( r == 0 ) return; - emit requestFinished( r->id, FALSE ); + emit requestFinished( r->id, false ); d->pending.removeFirst(); if ( d->pending.isEmpty() ) { - emit done( FALSE ); + emit done( false ); } else { startNextRequest(); } @@ -1842,10 +1842,10 @@ void TQHttp::finishedWithError( const TQString& detail, int errorCode ) d->error = (Error)errorCode; d->errorString = detail; - emit requestFinished( r->id, TRUE ); + emit requestFinished( r->id, true ); d->pending.clear(); - emit done( TRUE ); + emit done( true ); } void TQHttp::slotClosed() @@ -1944,19 +1944,19 @@ void TQHttp::slotReadyRead() if ( d->state != Reading ) { setState( Reading ); d->buffer = TQByteArray(); - d->readHeader = TRUE; + d->readHeader = true; d->headerStr = ""; d->bytesDone = 0; d->chunkedSize = -1; } while ( d->readHeader ) { - bool end = FALSE; + bool end = false; TQString tmp; while ( !end && d->socket.canReadLine() ) { tmp = d->socket.readLine(); if ( tmp == "\r\n" || tmp == "\n" ) - end = TRUE; + end = true; else d->headerStr += tmp; } @@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ void TQHttp::slotReadyRead() // POST method, we send both the request header and data in // one chunk. if (d->response.statusCode() != 100) { - d->readHeader = FALSE; + d->readHeader = false; if ( d->response.hasKey( "transfer-encoding" ) && d->response.value( "transfer-encoding" ).lower().contains( "chunked" ) ) d->chunkedSize = 0; @@ -1993,10 +1993,10 @@ void TQHttp::slotReadyRead() } if ( !d->readHeader ) { - bool everythingRead = FALSE; + bool everythingRead = false; if ( currentRequest().method() == "HEAD" ) { - everythingRead = TRUE; + everythingRead = true; } else { TQ_ULONG n = d->socket.bytesAvailable(); TQByteArray *arr = 0; @@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ void TQHttp::slotReadyRead() d->chunkedSize = -1; } if ( d->chunkedSize == -1 ) { - everythingRead = TRUE; + everythingRead = true; break; } @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ void TQHttp::slotReadyRead() arr->resize( read ); } if ( d->bytesDone + bytesAvailable() + n == d->response.contentLength() ) - everythingRead = TRUE; + everythingRead = true; } else if ( n > 0 ) { // workaround for VC++ bug TQByteArray temp = d->socket.readAll(); @@ -2137,7 +2137,7 @@ TQHttp::State TQHttp::state() const /*! Returns the last error that occurred. This is useful to find out what happened when receiving a requestFinished() or a done() - signal with the \c error argument \c TRUE. + signal with the \c error argument \c true. If you start a new request, the error status is reset to \c NoError. */ @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ TQHttp::Error TQHttp::error() const Returns a human-readable description of the last error that occurred. This is useful to present a error message to the user when receiving a requestFinished() or a done() signal with the \c - error argument \c TRUE. + error argument \c true. */ TQString TQHttp::errorString() const { diff --git a/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp b/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp index 456add216..d65eac0ad 100644 --- a/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQServerSocket::ok() const { @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ void TQServerSocket::init( const TQHostAddress & address, TQ_UINT16 port, int ba // same address-port is in TIME_WAIT. Under Windows this is possible anyway // -- furthermore, the meaning of reusable is different: it means that you // can use the same address-port for multiple listening sockets. - d->s->setAddressReusable( TRUE ); + d->s->setAddressReusable( true ); #endif if ( d->s->bind( address, port ) && d->s->listen( backlog ) ) @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ void TQServerSocket::incomingConnection( int ) /*! Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor, - TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be TRUE + TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be true before calling this function. \sa address() TQSocketDevice::port() @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ int TQServerSocket::socket() const /*! Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if - this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be TRUE + this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be true before calling this function. \sa port() TQSocketDevice::address() diff --git a/src/network/tqsocket.cpp b/src/network/tqsocket.cpp index 9314318d1..91d48cec2 100644 --- a/src/network/tqsocket.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqsocket.cpp @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ TQSocketPrivate::TQSocketPrivate() dns4 = 0; dns6 = 0; #endif - wba.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + wba.setAutoDelete( true ); } TQSocketPrivate::~TQSocketPrivate() @@ -208,8 +208,8 @@ void TQSocketPrivate::setSocketDevice( TQSocket *q, TQSocketDevice *device ) ( addr.isIPv4Address() ? TQSocketDevice::IPv4 : TQSocketDevice::IPv6 ), 0 ); - socket->setBlocking( FALSE ); - socket->setAddressReusable( TRUE ); + socket->setBlocking( false ); + socket->setAddressReusable( true ); } rsn = new TQSocketNotifier( socket->socket(), @@ -218,9 +218,9 @@ void TQSocketPrivate::setSocketDevice( TQSocket *q, TQSocketDevice *device ) TQSocketNotifier::Write, q, "write" ); TQObject::connect( rsn, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), q, TQ_SLOT(sn_read()) ); - rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + rsn->setEnabled( false ); TQObject::connect( wsn, TQ_SIGNAL(activated(int)), q, TQ_SLOT(sn_write()) ); - wsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + wsn->setEnabled( false ); } /*! @@ -504,14 +504,14 @@ void TQSocket::tryConnecting() // or do multiple TCP-level connects at a time, with staggered // starts to avoid bandwidth waste and cause fewer // "connect-and-abort" errors. but that later.) - bool stuck = TRUE; + bool stuck = true; while( stuck ) { - stuck = FALSE; + stuck = false; if ( d->socket && - d->socket->connect( d->addr, d->port ) == FALSE ) { + !d->socket->connect( d->addr, d->port ) ) { if ( d->socket->error() == TQSocketDevice::NoError ) { if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->wsn->setEnabled( true ); return; // not serious, try again later } @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ void TQSocket::tryConnecting() d->addr = *d->addresses.begin(); d->addresses.remove( d->addresses.begin() ); d->setSocketDevice( this, 0 ); - stuck = TRUE; + stuck = true; #if defined(TQSOCKET_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQSocket (%s)::tryConnecting: Trying IP address %s", name(), d->addr.toString().ascii() ); @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ void TQSocket::tryConnecting() // The socket write notifier will fire when the connection succeeds if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->wsn->setEnabled( true ); } #endif } @@ -656,11 +656,11 @@ bool TQSocket::open( int m ) #if defined(QT_CHECK_STATE) tqWarning( "TQSocket::open: Already open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } TQIODevice::setMode( m & IO_ReadWrite ); setState( IO_Open ); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -697,9 +697,9 @@ void TQSocket::close() if ( d->socket && d->wsize ) { // there's data to be written d->state = Closing; if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( false ); if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->wsn->setEnabled( true ); d->rba.clear(); // clear incoming data return; } @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ void TQSocket::close() bool TQSocket::consumeWriteBuf( TQ_ULONG nbytes ) { if ( nbytes <= 0 || nbytes > d->wsize ) - return FALSE; + return false; #if defined(TQSOCKET_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQSocket (%s): skipWriteBuf %d bytes", name(), (int)nbytes ); #endif @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ bool TQSocket::consumeWriteBuf( TQ_ULONG nbytes ) break; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ void TQSocket::flush() { if ( !d->socket ) return; - bool osBufferFull = FALSE; + bool osBufferFull = false; int consumed = 0; while ( !osBufferFull && d->state >= Connecting && d->wsize > 0 ) { #if defined(TQSOCKET_DEBUG) @@ -781,20 +781,20 @@ void TQSocket::flush() } nwritten = d->socket->writeBlock( out.data(), i ); if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); // the TQSocketNotifier documentation says so + d->wsn->setEnabled( false ); // the TQSocketNotifier documentation says so } else { // Big block, write it immediately i = a->size() - d->windex; nwritten = d->socket->writeBlock( a->data() + d->windex, i ); if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); // the TQSocketNotifier documentation says so + d->wsn->setEnabled( false ); // the TQSocketNotifier documentation says so } if ( nwritten > 0 ) { if ( consumeWriteBuf( nwritten ) ) consumed += nwritten; } if ( nwritten < i ) - osBufferFull = TRUE; + osBufferFull = true; } if ( consumed > 0 ) { #if defined(TQSOCKET_DEBUG) @@ -851,15 +851,15 @@ TQIODevice::Offset TQSocket::at() const /*! \overload - Moves the read index forward to \a index and returns TRUE if the - operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. Moving the + Moves the read index forward to \a index and returns true if the + operation was successful; otherwise returns false. Moving the index forward means skipping incoming data. */ bool TQSocket::at( Offset index ) { if ( index > d->rba.size() ) - return FALSE; + return false; d->rba.consumeBytes( (TQ_ULONG)index, 0 ); // throw away data 0..index-1 // After we read data from our internal buffer, if we use the // setReadBufferSize() to limit our buffer, we might now be able to @@ -869,19 +869,19 @@ bool TQSocket::at( Offset index ) // We can test for this condition by looking at the // sn_read_alreadyCalled flag. if ( d->rsn && TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.findRef(this) == -1 ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); - return TRUE; + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); + return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSocket::atEnd() const { if ( d->socket == 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; TQSocket * that = (TQSocket *)this; if ( that->d->socket->bytesAvailable() ) // a little slow, perhaps... that->sn_read(); @@ -918,9 +918,9 @@ TQ_ULONG TQSocket::bytesAvailable() const Returns the number of bytes available. If \a timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not - return -1): this function sets \a *timeout to TRUE, if the reason + return -1): this function sets \a *timeout to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets - \a *timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer + \a *timeout to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection. \warning This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ TQ_ULONG TQSocket::waitForMore( int msecs, bool *timeout ) const return 0; TQSocket * that = (TQSocket *)this; if ( that->d->socket->waitForMore( msecs, timeout ) > 0 ) - (void)that->sn_read( TRUE ); + (void)that->sn_read( true ); return that->d->rba.size(); } @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocket::readBlock( char *data, TQ_ULONG maxlen ) // We can test for this condition by looking at the // sn_read_alreadyCalled flag. if ( d->rsn && TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.findRef(this) == -1 ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); return maxlen; } @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocket::writeBlock( const char *data, TQ_ULONG len ) if ( writeNow ) flush(); else if ( d->wsn ) - d->wsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->wsn->setEnabled( true ); #if defined(TQSOCKET_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQSocket (%s): writeBlock %d bytes", name(), (int)len ); #endif @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ int TQSocket::getch() // We can test for this condition by looking at the // sn_read_alreadyCalled flag. if ( d->rsn && TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.findRef(this) == -1 ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); return c; } return -1; @@ -1130,11 +1130,11 @@ int TQSocket::ungetch( int ch ) /*! - Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from - this socket at this time; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from + this socket at this time; otherwise returns false. Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this - function returns FALSE. This means that loops such as this won't + function returns false. This means that loops such as this won't work: \code @@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ int TQSocket::ungetch( int ch ) bool TQSocket::canReadLine() const { if ( ((TQSocket*)this)->d->rba.scanNewline( 0 ) ) - return TRUE; + return true; return ( bytesAvailable() > 0 && ((TQSocket*)this)->d->rba.scanNewline( 0 ) ); } @@ -1165,7 +1165,7 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocket::readLine( char *data, TQ_ULONG maxlen ) /*! Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character - (\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns FALSE. + (\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns false. \sa canReadLine() */ @@ -1187,7 +1187,7 @@ TQString TQSocket::readLine() Internal slot for handling socket read notifications. This function has can usually only be entered once (i.e. no - recursive calls). If the argument \a force is TRUE, the function + recursive calls). If the argument \a force is true, the function is executed, but no readyRead() signals are emitted. This behaviour is useful for the waitForMore() function, so that it is possible to call waitForMore() in a slot connected to the @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ void TQSocket::sn_read( bool force ) maxToRead = d->readBufferSize - d->rba.size(); if ( maxToRead <= 0 ) { if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( false ); return; } } @@ -1261,7 +1261,7 @@ void TQSocket::sn_read( bool force ) tqWarning( "TQSocket::sn_read (%s): Close error", name() ); #endif if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( false ); emit error( ErrSocketRead ); TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.removeRef( this ); return; @@ -1309,7 +1309,7 @@ void TQSocket::sn_read( bool force ) tqWarning( "TQSocket::sn_read: Read error" ); #endif if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( false ); emit error( ErrSocketRead ); TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.removeRef( this ); return; @@ -1324,10 +1324,10 @@ void TQSocket::sn_read( bool force ) d->rba.append( a ); if ( !force ) { if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( FALSE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( false ); emit readyRead(); if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); } TQSocketPrivate::sn_read_alreadyCalled.removeRef( this ); @@ -1360,7 +1360,7 @@ void TQSocket::tryConnection() name(), peerName().ascii() ); #endif if ( d->rsn ) - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); emit connected(); } else { d->state = Idle; @@ -1393,7 +1393,7 @@ void TQSocket::setSocket( int socket ) { setSocketIntern( socket ); d->state = Connection; - d->rsn->setEnabled( TRUE ); + d->rsn->setEnabled( true ); } @@ -1416,8 +1416,8 @@ void TQSocket::setSocketIntern( int socket ) d->readBufferSize = oldBufferSize; if ( socket >= 0 ) { TQSocketDevice *sd = new TQSocketDevice( socket, TQSocketDevice::Stream ); - sd->setBlocking( FALSE ); - sd->setAddressReusable( TRUE ); + sd->setBlocking( false ); + sd->setAddressReusable( true ); d->setSocketDevice( this, sd ); } d->state = Idle; diff --git a/src/network/tqsocket.h b/src/network/tqsocket.h index 5af4a21ab..b6e050051 100644 --- a/src/network/tqsocket.h +++ b/src/network/tqsocket.h @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ signals: void error( int ); protected slots: - virtual void sn_read( bool force=FALSE ); + virtual void sn_read( bool force=false ); virtual void sn_write(); private slots: diff --git a/src/network/tqsocketdevice.cpp b/src/network/tqsocketdevice.cpp index f82d1625f..8ae73f61a 100644 --- a/src/network/tqsocketdevice.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqsocketdevice.cpp @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ TQSocketDevice::~TQSocketDevice() /*! - Returns TRUE if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns false. \sa socket() */ @@ -333,13 +333,13 @@ void TQSocketDevice::setSocket( int socket, Type type ) bool TQSocketDevice::open( int mode ) { if ( isOpen() || !isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; #if defined(TQSOCKETDEVICE_DEBUG) tqDebug( "TQSocketDevice::open: mode %x", mode ); #endif setMode( mode & IO_ReadWrite ); setState( IO_Open ); - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -381,19 +381,19 @@ TQIODevice::Offset TQSocketDevice::at() const \reimp The read/write index is meaningless for a socket, therefore this - function does nothing and returns TRUE. + function does nothing and returns true. */ bool TQSocketDevice::at( Offset ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \reimp - Returns TRUE if no data is currently available at the socket; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if no data is currently available at the socket; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSocketDevice::atEnd() const { @@ -445,8 +445,8 @@ int TQSocketDevice::ungetch( int ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the address of this socket can be used by other - sockets at the same time, and FALSE if this socket claims + Returns true if the address of this socket can be used by other + sockets at the same time, and false if this socket claims exclusive ownership. \sa setAddressReusable() @@ -459,8 +459,8 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::addressReusable() const /*! Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too - if \a enable is TRUE, and to be used exclusively by this socket if - \a enable is FALSE. + if \a enable is true, and to be used exclusively by this socket if + \a enable is false. When a socket is reusable, other sockets can use the same port number (and IP address), which is generally useful. Of course diff --git a/src/network/tqsocketdevice_unix.cpp b/src/network/tqsocketdevice_unix.cpp index 39a9560dd..eaf9e1bf3 100644 --- a/src/network/tqsocketdevice_unix.cpp +++ b/src/network/tqsocketdevice_unix.cpp @@ -232,12 +232,12 @@ void TQSocketDevice::close() /*! - Returns TRUE if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; + otherwise returns false. Note that this function does not set error(). - \warning On Windows, this function always returns TRUE since the + \warning On Windows, this function always returns true since the ioctlsocket() function is broken. \sa setBlocking(), isValid() @@ -245,15 +245,15 @@ void TQSocketDevice::close() bool TQSocketDevice::blocking() const { if ( !isValid() ) - return TRUE; + return true; int s = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL, 0); return !(s >= 0 && ((s & O_NDELAY) != 0)); } /*! - Makes the socket blocking if \a enable is TRUE or nonblocking if - \a enable is FALSE. + Makes the socket blocking if \a enable is true or nonblocking if + \a enable is false. Sockets are blocking by default, but we recommend using nonblocking socket operations, especially for GUI programs that @@ -395,8 +395,8 @@ void TQSocketDevice::setOption( Option opt, int v ) /*! Connects to the IP address and port specified by \a addr and \a - port. Returns TRUE if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns FALSE. - If it returns FALSE, error() explains why. + port. Returns true if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns false. + If it returns false, error() explains why. Note that error() commonly returns NoError for non-blocking sockets; this just means that you can call connect() again in a @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ void TQSocketDevice::setOption( Option opt, int v ) bool TQSocketDevice::connect( const TQHostAddress &addr, TQ_UINT16 port ) { if ( !isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; pa = addr; pp = port; @@ -438,20 +438,20 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::connect( const TQHostAddress &addr, TQ_UINT16 port ) aa = (struct sockaddr *)&a4; } else { e = Impossible; - return FALSE; + return false; } int r = qt_socket_connect( fd, aa, aalen ); if ( r == 0 ) { fetchConnectionParameters(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( errno == EISCONN || errno == EALREADY || errno == EINPROGRESS ) { fetchConnectionParameters(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( e != NoError || errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } switch( errno ) { case EBADF: @@ -480,14 +480,14 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::connect( const TQHostAddress &addr, TQ_UINT16 port ) e = UnknownError; break; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address \a address and the port number \a port. If the operation succeeds, - bind() returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE without changing + bind() returns true; otherwise it returns false without changing what port() and address() return. bind() is used by servers for setting up incoming connections. @@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::connect( const TQHostAddress &addr, TQ_UINT16 port ) bool TQSocketDevice::bind( const TQHostAddress &address, TQ_UINT16 port ) { if ( !isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int r; struct sockaddr_in a4; #if !defined(TQT_NO_IPV6) @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::bind( const TQHostAddress &address, TQ_UINT16 port ) r = qt_socket_bind( fd, (struct sockaddr*)&a4, sizeof(a4) ); } else { e = Impossible; - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( r < 0 ) { @@ -551,17 +551,17 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::bind( const TQHostAddress &address, TQ_UINT16 port ) e = UnknownError; break; } - return FALSE; + return false; } fetchConnectionParameters(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have. - Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns - FALSE. A \a backlog value of 50 is quite common. + Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns + false. A \a backlog value of 50 is quite common. The listen() call only applies to sockets where type() is \c Stream, i.e. not to \c Datagram sockets. listen() must not be @@ -572,12 +572,12 @@ bool TQSocketDevice::bind( const TQHostAddress &address, TQ_UINT16 port ) bool TQSocketDevice::listen( int backlog ) { if ( !isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( qt_socket_listen( fd, backlog ) >= 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( !e ) e = Impossible; - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -604,11 +604,11 @@ int TQSocketDevice::accept() do { s = qt_socket_accept( fd, (struct sockaddr*)&aa, &l ); // we'll blithely throw away the stuff accept() wrote to aa - done = TRUE; + done = true; if ( s < 0 && e == NoError ) { switch( errno ) { case EINTR: - done = FALSE; + done = false; break; #if defined(EPROTO) case EPROTO: @@ -707,9 +707,9 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::bytesAvailable() const error occurred. If \a timeout is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not - return -1): this function sets \a *timeout to TRUE, if the reason + return -1): this function sets \a *timeout to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets - \a *timeout to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer + \a *timeout to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection. \warning This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event @@ -740,9 +740,9 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::waitForMore( int msecs, bool *timeout ) const if ( timeout ) { if ( rv == 0 ) - *timeout = TRUE; + *timeout = true; else - *timeout = FALSE; + *timeout = false; } return bytesAvailable(); @@ -777,9 +777,9 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::readBlock( char *data, TQ_ULONG maxlen ) return -1; } #endif - bool done = FALSE; + bool done = false; int r = 0; - while ( done == FALSE ) { + while ( !done ) { if ( t == Datagram ) { #if !defined(TQT_NO_IPV6) struct sockaddr_storage aa; @@ -797,14 +797,14 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::readBlock( char *data, TQ_ULONG maxlen ) } else { r = ::read( fd, data, maxlen ); } - done = TRUE; + done = true; if ( r == 0 && t == Stream && maxlen > 0 ) { // connection closed close(); } else if ( r >= 0 || errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK ) { // nothing } else if ( errno == EINTR ) { - done = FALSE; + done = false; } else if ( e == NoError ) { switch( errno ) { case EIO: @@ -873,17 +873,17 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock( const char *data, TQ_ULONG len ) #endif return -1; } - bool done = FALSE; + bool done = false; int r = 0; bool timeout; while ( !done ) { r = ::write( fd, data, len ); - done = TRUE; + done = true; if ( r < 0 && e == NoError && errno != EAGAIN && errno != EWOULDBLOCK ) { switch( errno ) { case EINTR: // signal - call read() or whatever again - done = FALSE; + done = false; break; case EPIPE: case ECONNRESET: @@ -998,16 +998,16 @@ TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::writeBlock( const char * data, TQ_ULONG len, // we'd use MSG_DONTWAIT + MSG_NOSIGNAL if Stevens were right. // but apparently Stevens and most implementors disagree - bool done = FALSE; + bool done = false; int r = 0; while ( !done ) { r = ::sendto( fd, data, len, 0, aa, slen); - done = TRUE; + done = true; if ( r < 0 && e == NoError && errno != EAGAIN && errno != EWOULDBLOCK ) { switch( errno ) { case EINTR: // signal - call read() or whatever again - done = FALSE; + done = false; break; case ENOSPC: case EPIPE: diff --git a/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp b/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp index 4ec6dec30..dab303c17 100644 --- a/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ static TQCleanupHandler<TQGLFormat> qgl_cleanup_format; default for the entire application: \code TQGLFormat f; - f.setAlpha( TRUE ); - f.setStereo( TRUE ); + f.setAlpha( true ); + f.setStereo( true ); TQGLFormat::setDefaultFormat( f ); \endcode @@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ static TQCleanupHandler<TQGLFormat> qgl_cleanup_format; your TQGLWidget subclass: \code TQGLFormat f; - f.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE ); // single buffer - f.setDirectRendering( FALSE ); // software rendering + f.setDoubleBuffer( false ); // single buffer + f.setDirectRendering( false ); // software rendering MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... ); \endcode @@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ static TQCleanupHandler<TQGLFormat> qgl_cleanup_format; requested features the system was able to provide: \code TQGLFormat f; - f.setOverlay( TRUE ); - f.setStereo( TRUE ); + f.setOverlay( true ); + f.setStereo( true ); MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... ); if ( !w->format().stereo() ) { // ok, goggles off @@ -242,14 +242,14 @@ TQGLFormat::TQGLFormat( int options, int plane ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer() const - Returns TRUE if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. Double buffering is enabled by default. + Returns true if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns + false. Double buffering is enabled by default. \sa setDoubleBuffer() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE sets double buffering; otherwise sets single + If \a enable is true sets double buffering; otherwise sets single buffering. Double buffering is enabled by default. @@ -273,14 +273,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setDoubleBuffer( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::depth() const - Returns TRUE if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. The depth buffer is enabled by default. + Returns true if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns + false. The depth buffer is enabled by default. \sa setDepth() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables + If \a enable is true enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables the depth buffer. The depth buffer is enabled by default. @@ -303,14 +303,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setDepth( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::rgba() const - Returns TRUE if RGBA color mode is set. Returns FALSE if color + Returns true if RGBA color mode is set. Returns false if color index mode is set. The default color mode is RGBA. \sa setRgba() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE sets RGBA mode. If \a enable is FALSE sets + If \a enable is true sets RGBA mode. If \a enable is false sets color index mode. The default color mode is RGBA. @@ -334,14 +334,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setRgba( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::alpha() const - Returns TRUE if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; - otherwise returns FALSE. The alpha channel is disabled by default. + Returns true if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; + otherwise returns false. The alpha channel is disabled by default. \sa setAlpha() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables + If \a enable is true enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables the alpha channel. The alpha buffer is disabled by default. @@ -362,14 +362,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setAlpha( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::accum() const - Returns TRUE if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise - returns FALSE. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. + Returns true if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise + returns false. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. \sa setAccum() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise + If \a enable is true enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise disables the accumulation buffer. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default. @@ -389,14 +389,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setAccum( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::stencil() const - Returns TRUE if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. The stencil buffer is disabled by default. + Returns true if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns + false. The stencil buffer is disabled by default. \sa setStencil() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables the stencil buffer; otherwise + If \a enable is true enables the stencil buffer; otherwise disables the stencil buffer. The stencil buffer is disabled by default. @@ -416,14 +416,14 @@ void TQGLFormat::setStencil( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::stereo() const - Returns TRUE if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. Stereo buffering is disabled by default. + Returns true if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns + false. Stereo buffering is disabled by default. \sa setStereo() */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables + If \a enable is true enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables stereo buffering. Stereo buffering is disabled by default. @@ -443,8 +443,8 @@ void TQGLFormat::setStereo( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::directRendering() const - Returns TRUE if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns + false. Direct rendering is enabled by default. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ void TQGLFormat::setStereo( bool enable ) */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables direct rendering; otherwise disables + If \a enable is true enables direct rendering; otherwise disables direct rendering. Direct rendering is enabled by default. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ void TQGLFormat::setDirectRendering( bool enable ) /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::hasOverlay() const - Returns TRUE if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns false. Overlay is disabled by default. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ void TQGLFormat::setDirectRendering( bool enable ) */ /*! - If \a enable is TRUE enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables + If \a enable is true enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables the overlay plane. Enabling the overlay plane will cause TQGLWidget to create an @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ void TQGLFormat::setOption( FormatOption opt ) /*! - Returns TRUE if format option \a opt is set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if format option \a opt is set; otherwise returns false. \sa setOption() */ @@ -561,8 +561,8 @@ bool TQGLFormat::testOption( FormatOption opt ) const /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() - Returns TRUE if the window system has any OpenGL support; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the window system has any OpenGL support; + otherwise returns false. \warning This function must not be called until the TQApplication object has been created. @@ -573,8 +573,8 @@ bool TQGLFormat::testOption( FormatOption opt ) const /*! \fn bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGLOverlays() - Returns TRUE if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; + otherwise returns false. \warning This function must not be called until the TQApplication object has been created. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ TQGLFormat TQGLFormat::defaultFormat() \code TQApplication a(argc, argv); TQGLFormat f; - f.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE ); + f.setDoubleBuffer( false ); TQGLFormat::setDefaultFormat( f ); \endcode @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ TQGLFormat TQGLFormat::defaultOverlayFormat() \code TQGLFormat f = TQGLFormat::defaultOverlayFormat(); - f.setDoubleBuffer( TRUE ); + f.setDoubleBuffer( true ); TQGLFormat::setDefaultOverlayFormat( f ); \endcode @@ -700,13 +700,13 @@ void TQGLFormat::setDefaultOverlayFormat( const TQGLFormat &f ) // Make sure the user doesn't request that the overlays themselves // have overlays, since it is unlikely that the system supports // infinitely many planes... - qgl_default_overlay_format->setOverlay( FALSE ); + qgl_default_overlay_format->setOverlay( false ); } /*! - Returns TRUE if all the options of the two TQGLFormats are equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if all the options of the two TQGLFormats are equal; + otherwise returns false. */ bool operator==( const TQGLFormat& a, const TQGLFormat& b ) @@ -716,8 +716,8 @@ bool operator==( const TQGLFormat& a, const TQGLFormat& b ) /*! - Returns FALSE if all the options of the two TQGLFormats are equal; - otherwise returns TRUE. + Returns false if all the options of the two TQGLFormats are equal; + otherwise returns true. */ bool operator!=( const TQGLFormat& a, const TQGLFormat& b ) @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ TQGLContext::~TQGLContext() TQGLContext *cx; // ... TQGLFormat f; - f.setStereo( TRUE ); + f.setStereo( true ); cx->setFormat( f ); if ( !cx->create() ) exit(); // no OpenGL support, or cannot render on the specified paintdevice @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ void TQGLContext::setDevice( TQPaintDevice *pDev ) void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) { d = new Private; - d->valid = FALSE; + d->valid = false; #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) qt_resolve_gl_symbols(); gpm = 0; @@ -900,16 +900,16 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) d->oldR = TQRect(1, 1, 1, 1); #endif - d->crWin = FALSE; - d->initDone = FALSE; - d->sharing = FALSE; + d->crWin = false; + d->initDone = false; + d->sharing = false; } /*! \fn bool TQGLContext::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if a GL rendering context has been successfully - created; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if a GL rendering context has been successfully + created; otherwise returns false. */ /*! @@ -922,9 +922,9 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! \fn bool TQGLContext::isSharing() const - Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another context was + Returns true if display list sharing with another context was requested in the create() call and the GL system was able to - fulfill this request; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that display + fulfill this request; otherwise returns false. Note that display list sharing might not be supported between contexts with different formats. */ @@ -932,15 +932,15 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! \fn bool TQGLContext::deviceIsPixmap() const - Returns TRUE if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; + otherwise returns false. */ /*! \fn bool TQGLContext::windowCreated() const - Returns TRUE if a window has been created for this context; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if a window has been created for this context; + otherwise returns false. \sa setWindowCreated() */ @@ -948,8 +948,8 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! \fn void TQGLContext::setWindowCreated( bool on ) - If \a on is TRUE the context has had a window created for it. If - \a on is FALSE no window has been created for the context. + If \a on is true the context has had a window created for it. If + \a on is false no window has been created for the context. \sa windowCreated() */ @@ -967,9 +967,9 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! \fn bool TQGLContext::initialized() const - Returns TRUE if this context has been initialized, i.e. if + Returns true if this context has been initialized, i.e. if TQGLWidget::initializeGL() has been performed on it; otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. \sa setInitialized() */ @@ -977,9 +977,9 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! \fn void TQGLContext::setInitialized( bool on ) - If \a on is TRUE the context has been initialized, i.e. + If \a on is true the context has been initialized, i.e. TQGLContext::setInitialized() has been called on it. If \a on is - FALSE the context has not been initialized. + false the context has not been initialized. \sa initialized() */ @@ -1014,9 +1014,9 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) /*! - Creates the GL context. Returns TRUE if it was successful in + Creates the GL context. Returns true if it was successful in creating a valid GL rendering context on the paint device - specified in the constructor; otherwise returns FALSE (i.e. the + specified in the constructor; otherwise returns false (i.e. the context is invalid). After successful creation, format() returns the set of features of @@ -1275,7 +1275,7 @@ static TQGLWidgetPrivate * qgl_d( const TQGLWidget * w ) if ( !qgl_d_ptr ) { qgl_d_ptr = new TQPtrDict<TQGLWidgetPrivate>; qgl_cleanup_d_ptr.set( &qgl_d_ptr ); - qgl_d_ptr->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + qgl_d_ptr->setAutoDelete( true ); } TQGLWidgetPrivate * ret = qgl_d_ptr->find( (void *) w ); if ( !ret ) { @@ -1430,8 +1430,8 @@ TQGLWidget::~TQGLWidget() /*! \fn bool TQGLWidget::doubleBuffer() const - Returns TRUE if the contained GL rendering context has double - buffering; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the contained GL rendering context has double + buffering; otherwise returns false. \sa TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer() */ @@ -1439,10 +1439,10 @@ TQGLWidget::~TQGLWidget() /*! \fn void TQGLWidget::setAutoBufferSwap( bool on ) - If \a on is TRUE automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; + If \a on is true automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; otherwise it is switched off. - If \a on is TRUE and the widget is using a double-buffered format, + If \a on is true and the widget is using a double-buffered format, the background and foreground GL buffers will automatically be swapped after each paintGL() call. @@ -1454,8 +1454,8 @@ TQGLWidget::~TQGLWidget() /*! \fn bool TQGLWidget::autoBufferSwap() const - Returns TRUE if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; + otherwise returns false. \sa setAutoBufferSwap() */ @@ -1463,8 +1463,8 @@ TQGLWidget::~TQGLWidget() /*! \fn bool TQGLWidget::isValid() const - Returns TRUE if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; - otherwise returns FALSE. A widget will be invalid if the system + Returns true if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; + otherwise returns false. A widget will be invalid if the system has no \link TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() OpenGL support\endlink. */ @@ -1476,9 +1476,9 @@ bool TQGLWidget::isValid() const /*! \fn bool TQGLWidget::isSharing() const - Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was + Returns true if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was requested in the constructor, and the GL system was able to - provide it; otherwise returns FALSE. The GL system may fail to + provide it; otherwise returns false. The GL system may fail to provide display list sharing if the two TQGLWidgets use different formats. @@ -1625,8 +1625,8 @@ void TQGLWidget::setFormat( const TQGLFormat &format ) list sharing with that context, but it may fail. Use isSharing() to test. - If \a deleteOldContext is TRUE (the default), the existing context - will be deleted. You may use FALSE here if you have kept a pointer + If \a deleteOldContext is true (the default), the existing context + will be deleted. You may use false here if you have kept a pointer to the old context (as returned by context()), and want to restore that context later. @@ -1803,9 +1803,9 @@ void TQGLWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) high unless one of these parameters is 0 (the default), in which case the pixmap will have the same size as the widget. - If \a useContext is TRUE, this method will try to be more + If \a useContext is true, this method will try to be more efficient by using the existing GL context to render the pixmap. - The default is FALSE. Only use TRUE if you understand the risks. + The default is false. Only use true if you understand the risks. Overlays are not rendered onto the pixmap. @@ -1830,7 +1830,7 @@ TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap( int w, int h, bool useContext ) // make sure the pixmap uses the same visual as the widget itself if ( needConversion ) { - TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = pm.getX11Data( TRUE ); + TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = pm.getX11Data( true ); xd->x_depth = x11Depth(); xd->x_visual = (Visual *) x11Visual(); pm.setX11Data( xd ); @@ -1842,14 +1842,14 @@ TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap( int w, int h, bool useContext ) glcx->doneCurrent(); - bool success = TRUE; + bool success = true; if ( useContext && isValid() && renderCxPm( &pm ) ) return pm; TQGLFormat fmt = glcx->requestedFormat(); - fmt.setDirectRendering( FALSE ); // Direct is unlikely to work - fmt.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE ); // We don't need dbl buf + fmt.setDirectRendering( false ); // Direct is unlikely to work + fmt.setDoubleBuffer( false ); // We don't need dbl buf TQGLContext* ocx = glcx; bool wasCurrent = (TQGLContext::currentContext() == ocx ); @@ -1860,7 +1860,7 @@ TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap( int w, int h, bool useContext ) if ( glcx->isValid() ) updateGL(); else - success = FALSE; + success = false; delete glcx; glcx = ocx; @@ -1885,7 +1885,7 @@ TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap( int w, int h, bool useContext ) /*! - Returns an image of the frame buffer. If \a withAlpha is TRUE the + Returns an image of the frame buffer. If \a withAlpha is true the alpha channel is included. Depending on your hardware, you can explicitly select which color @@ -1895,7 +1895,7 @@ TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap( int w, int h, bool useContext ) TQImage TQGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer( bool withAlpha ) { #if defined( TQ_WS_MAC ) - if(dblbuf == macInternalDoubleBuffer(FALSE) && gl_pix) //why not optimize? + if(dblbuf == macInternalDoubleBuffer(false) && gl_pix) //why not optimize? return ((TQPixmap*)gl_pix)->convertToImage(); #endif makeCurrent(); @@ -1958,7 +1958,7 @@ void TQGLWidget::glInit() return; makeCurrent(); initializeGL(); - glcx->setInitialized( TRUE ); + glcx->setInitialized( true ); } diff --git a/src/opengl/tqgl.h b/src/opengl/tqgl.h index 53bdd0e5a..604dfee1d 100644 --- a/src/opengl/tqgl.h +++ b/src/opengl/tqgl.h @@ -304,12 +304,12 @@ public: #ifndef Q_QDOC virtual void setContext( TQGLContext* context, const TQGLContext* shareContext = 0, - bool deleteOldContext = TRUE ); + bool deleteOldContext = true ); #endif virtual TQPixmap renderPixmap( int w = 0, int h = 0, - bool useContext = FALSE ); - virtual TQImage grabFrameBuffer( bool withAlpha = FALSE ); + bool useContext = false ); + virtual TQImage grabFrameBuffer( bool withAlpha = false ); virtual void makeOverlayCurrent(); const TQGLContext* overlayContext() const; @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ public: void setMouseTracking( bool enable ); virtual void reparent( TQWidget* parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, - bool showIt = FALSE ); + bool showIt = false ); const TQGLColormap & colormap() const; void setColormap( const TQGLColormap & map ); @@ -384,8 +384,8 @@ private: void macInternalRecreateContext( TQGLContext *ctx, const TQGLContext* = NULL, - bool update = TRUE ); - bool macInternalDoubleBuffer( bool fix = TRUE ); + bool update = true ); + bool macInternalDoubleBuffer( bool fix = true ); virtual void setRegionDirty( bool ); virtual void macWidgetChangedWindow(); #endif diff --git a/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp b/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp index 95a92e566..4c716fac2 100644 --- a/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp @@ -124,19 +124,19 @@ _glXWaitX qt_glXWaitX; bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool fatal) { - static bool gl_syms_resolved = FALSE; + static bool gl_syms_resolved = false; if (gl_syms_resolved) - return TRUE; + return true; TQLibrary gl("GL.so.1"); - gl.setAutoUnload(FALSE); + gl.setAutoUnload(false); qt_glCallLists = (_glCallLists) gl.resolve("glCallLists"); if (!qt_glCallLists) { // if this fails the rest will surely fail if (fatal) tqFatal("Unable to resolve GL/GLX symbols - please check your GL library installation."); - return FALSE; + return false; } qt_glClearColor = (_glClearColor) gl.resolve("glClearColor"); @@ -181,8 +181,8 @@ bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool fatal) qt_glXSwapBuffers = (_glXSwapBuffers) gl.resolve("glXSwapBuffers"); qt_glXUseXFont = (_glXUseXFont) gl.resolve("glXUseXFont"); qt_glXWaitX = (_glXWaitX) gl.resolve("glXWaitX"); - gl_syms_resolved = TRUE; - return TRUE; + gl_syms_resolved = true; + return true; } #endif // QT_DLOPEN_OPENGL @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ struct CMapEntry { CMapEntry::CMapEntry() { cmap = 0; - alloc = FALSE; + alloc = false; scmap.colormap = 0; } @@ -217,18 +217,18 @@ CMapEntry::~CMapEntry() } static TQIntDict<CMapEntry> *cmap_dict = 0; -static bool mesa_gl = FALSE; +static bool mesa_gl = false; static TQIntDict< TQMap<int, TQRgb> > *qglcmap_dict = 0; static void cleanup_cmaps() { if (cmap_dict) { - cmap_dict->setAutoDelete(TRUE); + cmap_dict->setAutoDelete(true); delete cmap_dict; cmap_dict = 0; } if (qglcmap_dict) { - qglcmap_dict->setAutoDelete(TRUE); + qglcmap_dict->setAutoDelete(true); delete qglcmap_dict; qglcmap_dict = 0; } @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ static Colormap choose_cmap( Display *dpy, XVisualInfo *vi ) } if ( mesa_gl ) { // we're using MesaGL - Atom hp_cmaps = XInternAtom( dpy, "_HP_RGB_SMOOTH_MAP_LIST", TRUE ); + Atom hp_cmaps = XInternAtom( dpy, "_HP_RGB_SMOOTH_MAP_LIST", true ); if ( hp_cmaps && vi->visual->c_class == TrueColor && vi->depth == 8 ) { if ( XGetRGBColormaps(dpy,RootWindow(dpy,vi->screen),&c,&n, hp_cmaps) ) { @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ static Colormap choose_cmap( Display *dpy, XVisualInfo *vi ) #endif if ( XmuLookupStandardColormap(dpy,vi->screen,vi->visualid,vi->depth, - XA_RGB_DEFAULT_MAP,FALSE,TRUE) ) { + XA_RGB_DEFAULT_MAP,false,true) ) { if ( XGetRGBColormaps(dpy,RootWindow(dpy,vi->screen),&c,&n, XA_RGB_DEFAULT_MAP) ) { i = 0; @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ static Colormap choose_cmap( Display *dpy, XVisualInfo *vi ) if ( !x->cmap ) { // no shared cmap found x->cmap = XCreateColormap( dpy, RootWindow(dpy,vi->screen), vi->visual, AllocNone ); - x->alloc = TRUE; + x->alloc = true; // tqDebug( "Allocating cmap" ); } @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ struct TransColor }; static TQMemArray<TransColor> trans_colors; -static int trans_colors_init = FALSE; +static int trans_colors_init = false; static void find_trans_colors() @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ static void find_trans_colors() long layer; }; - trans_colors_init = TRUE; + trans_colors_init = true; Display* appDisplay = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(); @@ -397,8 +397,8 @@ static void find_trans_colors() bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() { - if (!qt_resolve_gl_symbols(FALSE)) - return FALSE; + if (!qt_resolve_gl_symbols(false)) + return false; return glXQueryExtension(tqt_xdisplay(),0,0) != 0; } @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ bool TQGLContext::chooseContext( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) Display* disp = d->paintDevice->x11Display(); vi = chooseVisual(); if ( !vi ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( deviceIsPixmap() && (((XVisualInfo*)vi)->depth != d->paintDevice->x11Depth() || @@ -436,12 +436,12 @@ bool TQGLContext::chooseContext( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) int nvis; vi = XGetVisualInfo( disp, VisualIDMask | VisualScreenMask, &appVisInfo, &nvis ); if ( !vi ) - return FALSE; + return false; int useGL; glXGetConfig( disp, (XVisualInfo*)vi, GLX_USE_GL, &useGL ); if ( !useGL ) - return FALSE; //# Chickening out already... + return false; //# Chickening out already... } int res; glXGetConfig( disp, (XVisualInfo*)vi, GLX_LEVEL, &res ); @@ -484,12 +484,12 @@ bool TQGLContext::chooseContext( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) cx = glXCreateContext( disp, (XVisualInfo *)vi, (GLXContext)shareContext->cx, direct ); if ( cx ) - d->sharing = TRUE; + d->sharing = true; } if ( !cx ) cx = glXCreateContext( disp, (XVisualInfo *)vi, None, direct ); if ( !cx ) - return FALSE; + return false; glFormat.setDirectRendering( glXIsDirect( disp, (GLXContext)cx ) ); if ( deviceIsPixmap() ) { #if defined(GLX_MESA_pixmap_colormap) && defined(TQGL_USE_MESA_EXT) @@ -501,9 +501,9 @@ bool TQGLContext::chooseContext( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) d->paintDevice->handle() ); #endif if ( !gpm ) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -525,50 +525,50 @@ void *TQGLContext::chooseVisual() //todo: if pixmap, also make sure that vi->depth == pixmap->depth void* vis = 0; int i = 0; - bool fail = FALSE; + bool fail = false; TQGLFormat fmt = format(); bool tryDouble = !fmt.doubleBuffer(); // Some GL impl's only have double - bool triedDouble = FALSE; + bool triedDouble = false; while( !fail && !( vis = tryVisual( fmt, bufDepths[i] ) ) ) { if ( !fmt.rgba() && bufDepths[i] > 1 ) { i++; continue; } if ( tryDouble ) { - fmt.setDoubleBuffer( TRUE ); - tryDouble = FALSE; - triedDouble = TRUE; + fmt.setDoubleBuffer( true ); + tryDouble = false; + triedDouble = true; continue; } else if ( triedDouble ) { - fmt.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE ); - triedDouble = FALSE; + fmt.setDoubleBuffer( false ); + triedDouble = false; } if ( fmt.stereo() ) { - fmt.setStereo( FALSE ); + fmt.setStereo( false ); continue; } if ( fmt.accum() ) { - fmt.setAccum( FALSE ); + fmt.setAccum( false ); continue; } if ( fmt.stencil() ) { - fmt.setStencil( FALSE ); + fmt.setStencil( false ); continue; } if ( fmt.alpha() ) { - fmt.setAlpha( FALSE ); + fmt.setAlpha( false ); continue; } if ( fmt.depth() ) { - fmt.setDepth( FALSE ); + fmt.setDepth( false ); continue; } if ( fmt.doubleBuffer() ) { - fmt.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE ); + fmt.setDoubleBuffer( false ); continue; } - fail = TRUE; + fail = true; } glFormat = fmt; return vis; @@ -594,8 +594,8 @@ void *TQGLContext::tryVisual( const TQGLFormat& f, int bufDepth ) spec[i++] = f.plane(); #if defined(GLX_VERSION_1_1) && defined(GLX_EXT_visual_info) - static bool useTranspExt = FALSE; - static bool useTranspExtChecked = FALSE; + static bool useTranspExt = false; + static bool useTranspExtChecked = false; if ( f.plane() && !useTranspExtChecked && d->paintDevice ) { TQCString estr( glXQueryExtensionsString( d->paintDevice->x11Display(), d->paintDevice->x11Screen() ) ); @@ -615,12 +615,12 @@ void *TQGLContext::tryVisual( const TQGLFormat& f, int bufDepth ) XVisualInfo * vinf = glXChooseVisual( d->paintDevice->x11Display(), d->paintDevice->x11Screen(), tmpSpec ); if ( !vinf ) { - useTranspExt = FALSE; + useTranspExt = false; } } } - useTranspExtChecked = TRUE; + useTranspExtChecked = true; } if ( f.plane() && useTranspExt ) { // Required to avoid non-transparent overlay visual(!) on some systems @@ -691,11 +691,11 @@ void TQGLContext::reset() XFree( vi ); vi = 0; cx = 0; - d->crWin = FALSE; - d->sharing = FALSE; - d->valid = FALSE; + d->crWin = false; + d->sharing = false; + d->valid = false; d->transpColor = TQColor(); - d->initDone = FALSE; + d->initDone = false; } @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ void TQGLContext::makeCurrent() #endif return; } - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; if ( deviceIsPixmap() ) ok = glXMakeCurrent( d->paintDevice->x11Display(), (GLXPixmap)gpm, @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ uint TQGLContext::colorIndex( const TQColor& c ) const // need to alloc color unsigned long plane_mask[2]; unsigned long color_map_entry; - if (!XAllocColorCells (TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), x->cmap, TRUE, plane_mask, 0, + if (!XAllocColorCells (TQPaintDevice::x11AppDisplay(), x->cmap, true, plane_mask, 0, &color_map_entry, 1)) return c.pixel(screen); @@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ void TQGLWidget::init( TQGLContext *context, const TQGLWidget *shareWidget ) glcx = 0; olw = 0; - autoSwap = TRUE; + autoSwap = true; if ( !context->device() ) context->setDevice( this ); @@ -1050,13 +1050,13 @@ void TQGLWidget::init( TQGLContext *context, const TQGLWidget *shareWidget ) olw = new TQGLOverlayWidget( TQGLFormat::defaultOverlayFormat(), this, olwName, shareWidget ); if ( olw->isValid() ) { - olw->setAutoBufferSwap( FALSE ); + olw->setAutoBufferSwap( false ); olw->setFocusProxy( this ); } else { delete olw; olw = 0; - glcx->glFormat.setOverlay( FALSE ); + glcx->glFormat.setOverlay( false ); } } } @@ -1067,7 +1067,7 @@ void TQGLWidget::reparent( TQWidget* parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, { if (glcx) glcx->doneCurrent(); - TQWidget::reparent( parent, f, p, FALSE ); + TQWidget::reparent( parent, f, p, false ); if ( showIt ) show(); } @@ -1138,10 +1138,10 @@ void TQGLWidget::setContext( TQGLContext *context, TQGLContext* oldcx = glcx; glcx = context; - bool createFailed = FALSE; + bool createFailed = false; if ( !glcx->isValid() ) { if ( !glcx->create( shareContext ? shareContext : oldcx ) ) - createFailed = TRUE; + createFailed = true; } if ( createFailed ) { if ( deleteOldContext ) @@ -1213,14 +1213,14 @@ void TQGLWidget::setContext( TQGLContext *context, if ( visible ) show(); XFlush( x11Display() ); - glcx->setWindowCreated( TRUE ); + glcx->setWindowCreated( true ); } bool TQGLWidget::renderCxPm( TQPixmap* pm ) { if ( ((XVisualInfo*)glcx->vi)->depth != pm->depth() ) - return FALSE; + return false; GLXPixmap glPm; #if defined(GLX_MESA_pixmap_colormap) && defined(TQGL_USE_MESA_EXT) @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ bool TQGLWidget::renderCxPm( TQPixmap* pm ) if ( !glXMakeCurrent( x11Display(), glPm, (GLXContext)glcx->cx ) ) { glXDestroyGLXPixmap( x11Display(), glPm ); - return FALSE; + return false; } glDrawBuffer( GL_FRONT ); @@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ bool TQGLWidget::renderCxPm( TQPixmap* pm ) makeCurrent(); glXDestroyGLXPixmap( x11Display(), glPm ); resizeGL( width(), height() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } const TQGLColormap & TQGLWidget::colormap() const @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ static void qStoreColors( TQWidget * tlw, Colormap cmap, */ static bool qCanAllocColors( TQWidget * w ) { - bool validVisual = FALSE; + bool validVisual = false; int numVisuals; long mask; XVisualInfo templ; @@ -1301,11 +1301,11 @@ static bool qCanAllocColors( TQWidget * w ) case StaticColor: case StaticGray: case GrayScale: - validVisual = FALSE; + validVisual = false; break; case DirectColor: case PseudoColor: - validVisual = TRUE; + validVisual = true; break; } break; @@ -1314,8 +1314,8 @@ static bool qCanAllocColors( TQWidget * w ) XFree( visuals ); if ( !validVisual ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } void TQGLWidget::setColormap( const TQGLColormap & c ) diff --git a/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h b/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h index cbcd741b9..076d83b8d 100644 --- a/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h +++ b/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ #ifdef QT_DLOPEN_OPENGL // resolve the GL symbols we use ourselves -bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool = TRUE); +bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool = true); extern "C" { // GL symbols typedef void (*_glCallLists)( GLsizei n, GLenum type, const GLvoid *lists ); @@ -192,6 +192,6 @@ extern _glXWaitX qt_glXWaitX; #define glXWaitX qt_glXWaitX #else -inline bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool = TRUE) { return TRUE; } +inline bool qt_resolve_gl_symbols(bool = true) { return true; } #endif // QT_DLOPEN_OPENGL #endif // TQGL_P_H diff --git a/src/opengl/tqglcolormap.cpp b/src/opengl/tqglcolormap.cpp index 5f1c580f1..8765a6d55 100644 --- a/src/opengl/tqglcolormap.cpp +++ b/src/opengl/tqglcolormap.cpp @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ TQColor TQGLColormap::entryColor( int idx ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. A + Returns true if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns false. A colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty. */ bool TQGLColormap::isEmpty() const diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/cache/tqsqlcachedresult.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/cache/tqsqlcachedresult.cpp index 709e61944..b22c56b28 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/cache/tqsqlcachedresult.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/cache/tqsqlcachedresult.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ public: }; TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate::TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate(): - cache(0), current(0), rowCacheEnd(0), colCount(0), forwardOnly(FALSE) + cache(0), current(0), rowCacheEnd(0), colCount(0), forwardOnly(false) { } @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ void TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate::cleanup() if (forwardOnly) delete current; current = 0; - forwardOnly = FALSE; + forwardOnly = false; colCount = 0; rowCacheEnd = 0; } @@ -108,11 +108,11 @@ TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache *TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate::next() bool TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate::seek(int i) { if (forwardOnly || i < 0) - return FALSE; + return false; if (i >= rowCacheEnd) - return FALSE; + return false; current = (*cache)[i]; - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQtSqlCachedResultPrivate::revertLast() @@ -144,40 +144,40 @@ void TQtSqlCachedResult::init(int colCount) bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetch(int i) { if ((!isActive()) || (i < 0)) - return FALSE; + return false; if (at() == i) - return TRUE; + return true; if (d->forwardOnly) { // speed hack - do not copy values if not needed if (at() > i || at() == TQSql::AfterLast) - return FALSE; + return false; while(at() < i - 1) { if (!gotoNext(0)) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt(at() + 1); } if (!gotoNext(d->current)) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt(at() + 1); - return TRUE; + return true; } if (d->seek(i)) { setAt(i); - return TRUE; + return true; } setAt(d->rowCacheEnd - 1); while (at() < i) { if (!cacheNext()) - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetchNext() { if (d->seek(at() + 1)) { setAt(at() + 1); - return TRUE; + return true; } return cacheNext(); } @@ -190,11 +190,11 @@ bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetchPrev() bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetchFirst() { if (d->forwardOnly && at() != TQSql::BeforeFirst) { - return FALSE; + return false; } if (d->seek(0)) { setAt(0); - return TRUE; + return true; } return cacheNext(); } @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetchLast() { if (at() == TQSql::AfterLast) { if (d->forwardOnly) - return FALSE; + return false; else return fetch(d->rowCacheEnd - 1); } @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ bool TQtSqlCachedResult::fetchLast() i++; /* brute force */ if (d->forwardOnly && at() == TQSql::AfterLast) { setAt(i); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { return fetch(d->rowCacheEnd - 1); } @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ TQVariant TQtSqlCachedResult::data(int i) bool TQtSqlCachedResult::isNull(int i) { if (!d->current || i >= (int)d->current->size() || i < 0) - return TRUE; + return true; return (*d->current)[i].isNull(); } @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ bool TQtSqlCachedResult::isNull(int i) void TQtSqlCachedResult::cleanup() { setAt(TQSql::BeforeFirst); - setActive(FALSE); + setActive(false); d->cleanup(); } @@ -246,10 +246,10 @@ bool TQtSqlCachedResult::cacheNext() { if (!gotoNext(d->next())) { d->revertLast(); - return FALSE; + return false; } setAt(at() + 1); - return TRUE; + return true; } int TQtSqlCachedResult::colCount() const diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp index 425d0e311..f7e29999d 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp @@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ public: static bool getIBaseError(TQString& msg, ISC_STATUS* status, long &sqlcode) { if (status[0] != 1 || status[1] <= 0) - return FALSE; + return false; sqlcode = isc_sqlcode(status); char buf[512]; isc_sql_interprete(sqlcode, buf, 512); msg = TQString::fromUtf8(buf); - return TRUE; + return true; } static void createDA(XSQLDA *&sqlda) @@ -227,10 +227,10 @@ public: TQString imsg; long sqlcode; if (!getIBaseError(imsg, status, sqlcode)) - return FALSE; + return false; q->setLastError(TQSqlError(msg, imsg, typ, (int)sqlcode)); - return TRUE; + return true; } public: @@ -252,10 +252,10 @@ public: TQString imsg; long sqlcode; if (!getIBaseError(imsg, status, sqlcode)) - return FALSE; + return false; q->setLastError(TQSqlError(msg, imsg, typ, (int)sqlcode)); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool transaction(); @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ bool TQIBaseResultPrivate::isSelect() char qType = isc_info_sql_stmt_type; isc_dsql_sql_info(status, &stmt, 1, &qType, sizeof(acBuffer), acBuffer); if (isError("Could not get query info", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; int iLength = isc_vax_integer(&acBuffer[1], 2); queryType = isc_vax_integer(&acBuffer[3], iLength); return (queryType == isc_info_sql_stmt_select); @@ -365,19 +365,19 @@ bool TQIBaseResultPrivate::isSelect() bool TQIBaseResultPrivate::transaction() { if (trans) - return TRUE; + return true; if (db->d->trans) { - localTransaction = FALSE; + localTransaction = false; trans = db->d->trans; - return TRUE; + return true; } - localTransaction = TRUE; + localTransaction = true; isc_start_transaction(status, &trans, 1, &ibase, 0, NULL); if (isError("Could not start transaction", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; - return TRUE; + return true; } // does nothing if the transaction is on the @@ -385,10 +385,10 @@ bool TQIBaseResultPrivate::transaction() bool TQIBaseResultPrivate::commit() { if (!trans) - return FALSE; + return false; // don't commit driver's transaction, the driver will do it for us if (!localTransaction) - return TRUE; + return true; isc_commit_transaction(status, &trans); trans = 0; @@ -413,33 +413,33 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::prepare(const TQString& query) { //tqDebug("prepare: %s", query.ascii()); if (!driver() || !driver()->isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; d->cleanup(); - setActive(FALSE); + setActive(false); setAt(TQSql::BeforeFirst); createDA(d->sqlda); createDA(d->inda); if (!d->transaction()) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_dsql_allocate_statement(d->status, &d->ibase, &d->stmt); if (d->isError("Could not allocate statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_dsql_prepare(d->status, &d->trans, &d->stmt, 0, query.utf8().data(), 3, d->sqlda); if (d->isError("Could not prepare statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_dsql_describe_bind(d->status, &d->stmt, 1, d->inda); if (d->isError("Could not describe input statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; if (d->inda->sqld > d->inda->sqln) { enlargeDA(d->inda, d->inda->sqld); isc_dsql_describe_bind(d->status, &d->stmt, 1, d->inda); if (d->isError("Could not describe input statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; } initDA(d->inda); if (d->sqlda->sqld > d->sqlda->sqln) { @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::prepare(const TQString& query) isc_dsql_describe(d->status, &d->stmt, 1, d->sqlda); if (d->isError("Could not describe statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; } initDA(d->sqlda); @@ -458,21 +458,21 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::prepare(const TQString& query) d->sqlda = 0; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQIBaseResult::exec() { if (!driver() || !driver()->isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError()) - return FALSE; - setActive(FALSE); + return false; + setActive(false); setAt(TQSql::BeforeFirst); if (d->inda && extension()->index.count() > 0) { TQMap<int, TQString>::ConstIterator it; if ((int)extension()->index.count() > d->inda->sqld) { tqWarning("TQIBaseResult::exec: Parameter mismatch, expected %d, got %d parameters", d->inda->sqld, extension()->index.count()); - return FALSE; + return false; } int para = 0; for (it = extension()->index.constBegin(); it != extension()->index.constEnd(); ++it, ++para) { @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::exec() memcpy(d->inda->sqlvar[para].sqldata + sizeof(short), str.data(), buflen); break; } case SQL_TEXT: { - TQCString str(val.toString().utf8().leftJustify(d->inda->sqlvar[para].sqllen, ' ', TRUE)); + TQCString str(val.toString().utf8().leftJustify(d->inda->sqlvar[para].sqllen, ' ', true)); memcpy(d->inda->sqlvar[para].sqldata, str.data(), d->inda->sqlvar[para].sqllen); break; } case SQL_BLOB: @@ -545,39 +545,39 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::exec() if (colCount()) { isc_dsql_free_statement(d->status, &d->stmt, DSQL_close); if (d->isError("Unable to close statement")) - return FALSE; + return false; cleanup(); } if (d->sqlda) init(d->sqlda->sqld); isc_dsql_execute2(d->status, &d->trans, &d->stmt, 1, d->inda, 0); if (d->isError("Unable to execute query")) - return FALSE; + return false; - setActive(TRUE); - return TRUE; + setActive(true); + return true; } bool TQIBaseResult::reset (const TQString& query) { // tqDebug("reset: %s", query.ascii()); if (!driver() || !driver()->isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; d->cleanup(); - setActive(FALSE); + setActive(false); setAt(TQSql::BeforeFirst); createDA(d->sqlda); if (!d->transaction()) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_dsql_allocate_statement(d->status, &d->ibase, &d->stmt); if (d->isError("Could not allocate statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_dsql_prepare(d->status, &d->trans, &d->stmt, 0, query.utf8().data(), 3, d->sqlda); if (d->isError("Could not prepare statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; if (d->sqlda->sqld > d->sqlda->sqln) { // need more field descriptors @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::reset (const TQString& query) isc_dsql_describe(d->status, &d->stmt, 1, d->sqlda); if (d->isError("Could not describe statement", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; } initDA(d->sqlda); @@ -604,14 +604,14 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::reset (const TQString& query) isc_dsql_execute(d->status, &d->trans, &d->stmt, 1, 0); if (d->isError("Unable to execute query")) - return FALSE; + return false; // commit non-select queries (if they are local) if (!isSelect() && !d->commit()) - return FALSE; + return false; - setActive(TRUE); - return TRUE; + setActive(true); + return true; } bool TQIBaseResult::gotoNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) @@ -621,12 +621,12 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::gotoNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) if (stat == 100) { // no more rows setAt(TQSql::AfterLast); - return FALSE; + return false; } if (d->isError("Could not fetch next item", TQSqlError::Statement)) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!row) // not interested in actual values - return TRUE; + return true; Q_ASSERT(row); Q_ASSERT((int)row->size() == d->sqlda->sqld); @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ bool TQIBaseResult::gotoNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) } } - return TRUE; + return true; } int TQIBaseResult::size() @@ -768,8 +768,8 @@ TQIBaseDriver::TQIBaseDriver(void *connection, TQObject *parent, const char *nam { d = new TQIBaseDriverPrivate(this); d->ibase = (isc_db_handle)(long int)connection; - setOpen(TRUE); - setOpenError(FALSE); + setOpen(true); + setOpenError(false); } TQIBaseDriver::~TQIBaseDriver() @@ -786,9 +786,9 @@ bool TQIBaseDriver::hasFeature(DriverFeature f) const case PositionalPlaceholders: case Unicode: case BLOB: - return TRUE; + return true; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -830,12 +830,12 @@ bool TQIBaseDriver::open(const TQString & db, ldb += db; isc_attach_database(d->status, 0, (char*)ldb.latin1(), &d->ibase, i, ba.data()); if (d->isError("Error opening database", TQSqlError::Connection)) { - setOpenError(TRUE); - return FALSE; + setOpenError(true); + return false; } - setOpen(TRUE); - return TRUE; + setOpen(true); + return true; } void TQIBaseDriver::close() @@ -843,20 +843,20 @@ void TQIBaseDriver::close() if (isOpen()) { isc_detach_database(d->status, &d->ibase); d->ibase = 0; - setOpen(FALSE); - setOpenError(FALSE); + setOpen(false); + setOpenError(false); } } bool TQIBaseDriver::ping() { if ( !isOpen() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } // FIXME // Implement ping if available - return TRUE; + return true; } TQSqlQuery TQIBaseDriver::createQuery() const @@ -867,9 +867,9 @@ TQSqlQuery TQIBaseDriver::createQuery() const bool TQIBaseDriver::beginTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; if (d->trans) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_start_transaction(d->status, &d->trans, 1, &d->ibase, 0, NULL); return !d->isError("Could not start transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction); @@ -878,9 +878,9 @@ bool TQIBaseDriver::beginTransaction() bool TQIBaseDriver::commitTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!d->trans) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_commit_transaction(d->status, &d->trans); d->trans = 0; @@ -890,9 +890,9 @@ bool TQIBaseDriver::commitTransaction() bool TQIBaseDriver::rollbackTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!d->trans) - return FALSE; + return false; isc_rollback_transaction(d->status, &d->trans); d->trans = 0; @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ TQStringList TQIBaseDriver::tables(const TQString& typeName) const typeFilter.prepend("where "); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); if (!q.exec("select rdb$relation_name from rdb$relations " + typeFilter)) return res; while(q.next()) @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ TQSqlRecord TQIBaseDriver::record(const TQString& tablename) const return rec; TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); q.exec("SELECT a.RDB$FIELD_NAME, b.RDB$FIELD_TYPE " "FROM RDB$RELATION_FIELDS a, RDB$FIELDS b " @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ TQSqlRecordInfo TQIBaseDriver::recordInfo(const TQString& tablename) const return rec; TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); q.exec("SELECT a.RDB$FIELD_NAME, b.RDB$FIELD_TYPE, b.RDB$FIELD_LENGTH, b.RDB$FIELD_SCALE, " "b.RDB$FIELD_PRECISION, a.RDB$NULL_FLAG " @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ TQSqlIndex TQIBaseDriver::primaryIndex(const TQString &table) const return index; TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); q.exec("SELECT a.RDB$INDEX_NAME, b.RDB$FIELD_NAME, d.RDB$FIELD_TYPE " "FROM RDB$RELATION_CONSTRAINTS a, RDB$INDEX_SEGMENTS b, RDB$RELATION_FIELDS c, RDB$FIELDS d " "WHERE a.RDB$CONSTRAINT_TYPE = 'PRIMARY KEY' " @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ TQString TQIBaseDriver::formatValue(const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings) c TQString::number(datetime.time().hour()) + ":" + TQString::number(datetime.time().minute()) + ":" + TQString::number(datetime.time().second()) + "." + - TQString::number(datetime.time().msec()).rightJustify(3, '0', TRUE) + "'"; + TQString::number(datetime.time().msec()).rightJustify(3, '0', true) + "'"; else return "NULL"; } @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ TQString TQIBaseDriver::formatValue(const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings) c return "'" + TQString::number(time.hour()) + ":" + TQString::number(time.minute()) + ":" + TQString::number(time.second()) + "." + - TQString::number(time.msec()).rightJustify(3, '0', TRUE) + "'"; + TQString::number(time.msec()).rightJustify(3, '0', true) + "'"; else return "NULL"; } diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp index 603a5b960..47e3c6ff0 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ TQPtrDict<TQSqlOpenExtension> *tqSqlOpenExtDict(); static int qMySqlConnectionCount = 0; -static bool qMySqlInitHandledByUser = FALSE; +static bool qMySqlInitHandledByUser = false; class TQMYSQLOpenExtension : public TQSqlOpenExtension { @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ void TQMYSQLResult::cleanup() d->result = NULL; d->row = NULL; setAt( -1 ); - setActive( FALSE ); + setActive( false ); } bool TQMYSQLResult::fetch( int i ) @@ -192,26 +192,26 @@ bool TQMYSQLResult::fetch( int i ) while ( --x && fetchNext() ); return fetchNext(); } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( at() == i ) - return TRUE; + return true; mysql_data_seek( d->result, i ); d->row = mysql_fetch_row( d->result ); if ( !d->row ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( i ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQMYSQLResult::fetchNext() { d->row = mysql_fetch_row( d->result ); if ( !d->row ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( at() + 1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQMYSQLResult::fetchLast() @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ bool TQMYSQLResult::fetchLast() } my_ulonglong numRows = mysql_num_rows( d->result ); if ( !numRows ) - return FALSE; + return false; return fetch( numRows - 1 ); } @@ -292,22 +292,22 @@ TQVariant TQMYSQLResult::data( int field ) bool TQMYSQLResult::isNull( int field ) { if ( d->row[field] == NULL ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } bool TQMYSQLResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) { if ( !driver() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !driver()-> isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError() ) - return FALSE; + return false; cleanup(); const char *encQuery = query.ascii(); if ( mysql_real_query( d->mysql, encQuery, tqstrlen(encQuery) ) ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to execute query", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( isForwardOnly() ) { if ( isActive() || isValid() ) // have to empty the results from previous query @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ bool TQMYSQLResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) } if ( !d->result && mysql_field_count( d->mysql ) > 0 ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to store result", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } int numFields = mysql_field_count( d->mysql ); setSelect( !( numFields == 0) ); @@ -332,8 +332,8 @@ bool TQMYSQLResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) d->fieldTypes[i] = qDecodeMYSQLType( field->type, field->flags ); } } - setActive( TRUE ); - return TRUE; + setActive( true ); + return true; } int TQMYSQLResult::size() @@ -403,10 +403,10 @@ TQMYSQLDriver::TQMYSQLDriver( MYSQL * con, TQObject * parent, const char * name init(); if ( con ) { d->mysql = (MYSQL *) con; - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); if (qMySqlConnectionCount == 1) - qMySqlInitHandledByUser = TRUE; + qMySqlInitHandledByUser = true; } else { qServerInit(); } @@ -441,18 +441,18 @@ bool TQMYSQLDriver::hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const #ifdef CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS if ( d->mysql ) { if ( ( d->mysql->server_capabilities & CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS ) == CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS ) - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif - return FALSE; + return false; case QuerySize: - return TRUE; + return true; case BLOB: - return TRUE; + return true; case Unicode: - return FALSE; + return false; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ bool TQMYSQLDriver::open( const TQString&, int ) { tqWarning("TQMYSQLDriver::open(): This version of open() is no longer supported." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQMYSQLDriver::open( const TQString& db, @@ -513,8 +513,8 @@ bool TQMYSQLDriver::open( const TQString& db, if (!(d->mysql = mysql_init((MYSQL*) 0))) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to connect", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); mysql_close( d->mysql ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } bool reconnect = 0; @@ -563,41 +563,41 @@ bool TQMYSQLDriver::open( const TQString& db, if ( !db.isEmpty() && mysql_select_db( d->mysql, db )) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable open database '" + db + "'", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); mysql_close( d->mysql ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } } else { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to connect", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); mysql_close( d->mysql ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); - return TRUE; + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); + return true; } void TQMYSQLDriver::close() { if ( isOpen() ) { mysql_close( d->mysql ); - setOpen( FALSE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( false ); + setOpenError( false ); } } bool TQMYSQLDriver::ping() { if ( !isOpen() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } if (mysql_ping( d->mysql )) { - return TRUE; + return true; } else { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to execute ping", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ TQStringList TQMYSQLDriver::tables( const TQString& typeName ) const MYSQL_RES* tableRes = mysql_list_tables( d->mysql, NULL ); MYSQL_ROW row; int i = 0; - while ( tableRes && TRUE ) { + while ( tableRes ) { mysql_data_seek( tableRes, i ); row = mysql_fetch_row( tableRes ); if ( !row ) @@ -749,55 +749,55 @@ MYSQL* TQMYSQLDriver::mysql() bool TQMYSQLDriver::beginTransaction() { #ifndef CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS - return FALSE; + return false; #endif if ( !isOpen() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQMYSQLDriver::beginTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( mysql_query( d->mysql, "BEGIN WORK" ) ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to begin transaction", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQMYSQLDriver::commitTransaction() { #ifndef CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS - return FALSE; + return false; #endif if ( !isOpen() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQMYSQLDriver::commitTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( mysql_query( d->mysql, "COMMIT" ) ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to commit transaction", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQMYSQLDriver::rollbackTransaction() { #ifndef CLIENT_TRANSACTIONS - return FALSE; + return false; #endif if ( !isOpen() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQMYSQLDriver::rollbackTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( mysql_query( d->mysql, "ROLLBACK" ) ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to rollback transaction", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } TQString TQMYSQLDriver::formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings ) const diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp index 3da2dd50c..bc09fb28b 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp @@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ class TQODBCPrivate { public: TQODBCPrivate() - : hEnv(0), hDbc(0), hStmt(0), useSchema(FALSE) + : hEnv(0), hDbc(0), hStmt(0), useSchema(false) { sql_char_type = sql_varchar_type = sql_longvarchar_type = TQVariant::CString; - unicode = FALSE; + unicode = false; } SQLHANDLE hEnv; @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ static TQVariant::Type qDecodeODBCType( SQLSMALLINT sqltype, const TQODBCPrivate return type; } -static TQString qGetStringData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, int colSize, bool& isNull, bool unicode = FALSE ) +static TQString qGetStringData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, int colSize, bool& isNull, bool unicode = false ) { TQString fieldVal; SQLRETURN r = SQL_ERROR; @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ static TQString qGetStringData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, int colSize, bool& } } char* buf = new char[ colSize ]; - while ( TRUE ) { + while ( true ) { r = SQLGetData( hStmt, column+1, unicode ? SQL_C_WCHAR : SQL_C_CHAR, @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ static TQString qGetStringData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, int colSize, bool& if ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) { if ( lengthIndicator == SQL_NULL_DATA || lengthIndicator == SQL_NO_TOTAL ) { fieldVal = TQString::null; - isNull = TRUE; + isNull = true; break; } // if SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO is returned, indicating that @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ static TQByteArray qGetBinaryData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, TQSQLLEN& length colSize = 65536; } char * buf = new char[ colSize ]; - while ( TRUE ) { + while ( true ) { r = SQLGetData( hStmt, column+1, SQL_C_BINARY, @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ static TQByteArray qGetBinaryData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, TQSQLLEN& length &lengthIndicator ); if ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) { if ( lengthIndicator == SQL_NULL_DATA ) { - isNull = TRUE; + isNull = true; break; } else { int rSize; @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ static TQByteArray qGetBinaryData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, TQSQLLEN& length static int qGetIntData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) { TQSQLLEN intbuf = 0; - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; TQSQLLEN lengthIndicator = 0; SQLRETURN r = SQLGetData( hStmt, column+1, @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ static int qGetIntData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) (TQSQLLEN)0, &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r != SQL_SUCCESS && r != SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) || lengthIndicator == SQL_NULL_DATA ) { - isNull = TRUE; + isNull = true; return 0; } return (int)intbuf; @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ static double qGetDoubleData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) { SQLDOUBLE dblbuf; TQSQLLEN lengthIndicator = 0; - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; SQLRETURN r = SQLGetData( hStmt, column+1, SQL_C_DOUBLE, @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ static double qGetDoubleData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) (TQSQLLEN)0, &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r != SQL_SUCCESS && r != SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) || lengthIndicator == SQL_NULL_DATA ) { - isNull = TRUE; + isNull = true; return 0.0; } @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ static double qGetDoubleData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) static SQLBIGINT qGetBigIntData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) { SQLBIGINT lngbuf = TQ_INT64_C( 0 ); - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; TQSQLLEN lengthIndicator = 0; SQLRETURN r = SQLGetData( hStmt, column+1, @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ static SQLBIGINT qGetBigIntData( SQLHANDLE hStmt, int column, bool& isNull ) (TQSQLLEN)0, &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r != SQL_SUCCESS && r != SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) || lengthIndicator == SQL_NULL_DATA ) - isNull = TRUE; + isNull = true; return lngbuf; } @@ -600,11 +600,11 @@ bool TQODBCPrivate::setConnectionOptions( const TQString& connOpts ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( TQString("TQODBCDriver::open: Unable to set connection attribute '%1'").arg( opt ), this ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } } - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQODBCPrivate::splitTableQualifier(const TQString & qualifier, TQString &catalog, @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ void TQODBCPrivate::splitTableQualifier(const TQString & qualifier, TQString &ca table = qualifier; return; } - TQStringList l = TQStringList::split( ".", qualifier, TRUE ); + TQStringList l = TQStringList::split( ".", qualifier, true ); if ( l.count() > 3 ) return; // can't possibly be a valid table qualifier int i = 0, n = l.count(); @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ TQODBCResult::~TQODBCResult() bool TQODBCResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) { - setActive( FALSE ); + setActive( false ); setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); SQLRETURN r; @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::reset: Unable to free statement handle", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } r = SQLAllocHandle( SQL_HANDLE_STMT, @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::reset: Unable to allocate statement handle", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( isForwardOnly() ) { @@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::reset: Unable to set 'SQL_CURSOR_STATIC' as statement attribute. Please check your ODBC driver configuration", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifdef UNICODE @@ -723,38 +723,38 @@ bool TQODBCResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) #endif if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS && r != SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to execute statement", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLSMALLINT count; r = SQLNumResultCols( d->hStmt, &count ); if ( count ) { - setSelect( TRUE ); + setSelect( true ); for ( int i = 0; i < count; ++i ) { d->rInf.append( qMakeFieldInfo( d, i ) ); } } else { - setSelect( FALSE ); + setSelect( false ); } - setActive( TRUE ); - return TRUE; + setActive( true ); + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::fetch(int i) { if ( isForwardOnly() && i < at() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( i == at() ) - return TRUE; + return true; fieldCache.clear(); nullCache.clear(); int actualIdx = i + 1; if ( actualIdx <= 0 ) { setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLRETURN r; if ( isForwardOnly() ) { - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; while ( ok && i > at() ) ok = fetchNext(); return ok; @@ -764,10 +764,10 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetch(int i) actualIdx ); } if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ){ - return FALSE; + return false; } setAt( i ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::fetchNext() @@ -779,15 +779,15 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetchNext() SQL_FETCH_NEXT, 0 ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( at() + 1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::fetchFirst() { if ( isForwardOnly() && at() != TQSql::BeforeFirst ) - return FALSE; + return false; SQLRETURN r; fieldCache.clear(); nullCache.clear(); @@ -798,15 +798,15 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetchFirst() SQL_FETCH_FIRST, 0 ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( 0 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::fetchPrior() { if ( isForwardOnly() ) - return FALSE; + return false; SQLRETURN r; fieldCache.clear(); nullCache.clear(); @@ -814,9 +814,9 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetchPrior() SQL_FETCH_PRIOR, 0 ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( at() - 1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::fetchLast() @@ -829,20 +829,20 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetchLast() // cannot seek to last row in forwardOnly mode, so we have to use brute force int i = at(); if ( i == TQSql::AfterLast ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( i == TQSql::BeforeFirst ) i = 0; while ( fetchNext() ) ++i; setAt( i ); - return TRUE; + return true; } r = SQLFetchScroll( d->hStmt, SQL_FETCH_LAST, 0 ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLINTEGER currRow; r = SQLGetStmtAttr( d->hStmt, @@ -851,9 +851,9 @@ bool TQODBCResult::fetchLast() SQL_IS_INTEGER, 0 ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) - return FALSE; + return false; setAt( currRow-1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } TQVariant TQODBCResult::data( int field ) @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ TQVariant TQODBCResult::data( int field ) return fieldCache[ field ]; SQLRETURN r(0); TQSQLLEN lengthIndicator = 0; - bool isNull = FALSE; + bool isNull = false; int current = fieldCache.count(); for ( ; current < (field + 1); ++current ) { const TQSqlFieldInfo info = d->rInf[ current ]; @@ -889,10 +889,10 @@ TQVariant TQODBCResult::data( int field ) &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( lengthIndicator != SQL_NULL_DATA ) ) { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQDate( dbuf.year, dbuf.month, dbuf.day ) ); - nullCache[ current ] = FALSE; + nullCache[ current ] = false; } else { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQDate() ); - nullCache[ current ] = TRUE; + nullCache[ current ] = true; } break; case TQVariant::Time: @@ -905,10 +905,10 @@ TQVariant TQODBCResult::data( int field ) &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( lengthIndicator != SQL_NULL_DATA ) ) { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQTime( tbuf.hour, tbuf.minute, tbuf.second ) ); - nullCache[ current ] = FALSE; + nullCache[ current ] = false; } else { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQTime() ); - nullCache[ current ] = TRUE; + nullCache[ current ] = true; } break; case TQVariant::DateTime: @@ -921,38 +921,38 @@ TQVariant TQODBCResult::data( int field ) &lengthIndicator ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( lengthIndicator != SQL_NULL_DATA ) ) { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQDateTime( TQDate( dtbuf.year, dtbuf.month, dtbuf.day ), TQTime( dtbuf.hour, dtbuf.minute, dtbuf.second, dtbuf.fraction / 1000000 ) ) ); - nullCache[ current ] = FALSE; + nullCache[ current ] = false; } else { fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( TQDateTime() ); - nullCache[ current ] = TRUE; + nullCache[ current ] = true; } break; case TQVariant::ByteArray: { - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; TQByteArray val = qGetBinaryData( d->hStmt, current, lengthIndicator, isNull ); fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( val ); nullCache[ current ] = isNull; break; } case TQVariant::String: - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( qGetStringData( d->hStmt, current, - info.length(), isNull, TRUE ) ); + info.length(), isNull, true ) ); nullCache[ current ] = isNull; break; case TQVariant::Double: if ( info.typeID() == SQL_DECIMAL || info.typeID() == SQL_NUMERIC ) // bind Double values as string to prevent loss of precision fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( qGetStringData( d->hStmt, current, - info.length() + 1, isNull, FALSE ) ); // length + 1 for the comma + info.length() + 1, isNull, false ) ); // length + 1 for the comma else fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( qGetDoubleData( d->hStmt, current, isNull ) ); nullCache[ current ] = isNull; break; case TQVariant::CString: default: - isNull = FALSE; + isNull = false; fieldCache[ current ] = TQVariant( qGetStringData( d->hStmt, current, - info.length(), isNull, FALSE ) ); + info.length(), isNull, false ) ); nullCache[ current ] = isNull; break; } @@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ int TQODBCResult::numRowsAffected() bool TQODBCResult::prepare( const TQString& query ) { - setActive( FALSE ); + setActive( false ); setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); SQLRETURN r; @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::prepare: Unable to close statement", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } r = SQLAllocHandle( SQL_HANDLE_STMT, @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::prepare: Unable to allocate statement handle", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( isForwardOnly() ) { @@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::prepare: Unable to set 'SQL_CURSOR_STATIC' as statement attribute. Please check your ODBC driver configuration", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifdef UNICODE @@ -1048,18 +1048,18 @@ bool TQODBCResult::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::prepare: Unable to prepare statement", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCResult::exec() { SQLRETURN r; TQPtrList<TQVirtualDestructor> tmpStorage; // holds temporary ptrs. which will be deleted on fu exit - tmpStorage.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + tmpStorage.setAutoDelete( true ); - setActive( FALSE ); + setActive( false ); setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); d->rInf.clear(); @@ -1067,12 +1067,12 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::exec: No statement handle available", d ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } else { r = SQLFreeStmt( d->hStmt, SQL_CLOSE ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { qSqlWarning( "TQODBCResult::exec: Unable to close statement handle", d ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -1232,7 +1232,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() tqWarning( "TQODBCResult::exec: unable to bind variable: %s", qODBCWarn( d ).local8Bit().data() ); #endif setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to bind variable", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -1242,19 +1242,19 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() tqWarning( "TQODBCResult::exec: Unable to execute statement: %s", qODBCWarn( d ).local8Bit().data() ); #endif setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to execute statement", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLSMALLINT count; r = SQLNumResultCols( d->hStmt, &count ); if ( count ) { - setSelect( TRUE ); + setSelect( true ); for ( int i = 0; i < count; ++i ) { d->rInf.append( qMakeFieldInfo( d, i ) ); } } else { - setSelect( FALSE ); + setSelect( false ); } - setActive( TRUE ); + setActive( true ); //get out parameters if ( extension()->index.count() > 0 ) { @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() SQLINTEGER* indPtr = qAutoDeleterData( (TQAutoDeleter<SQLINTEGER>*)tmpStorage.getFirst() ); if ( !indPtr ) - return FALSE; + return false; bool isNull = (*indPtr == SQL_NULL_DATA); tmpStorage.removeFirst(); @@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() } } - return TRUE; + return true; } //////////////////////////////////////// @@ -1337,8 +1337,8 @@ TQODBCDriver::TQODBCDriver( SQLHANDLE env, SQLHANDLE con, TQObject * parent, con d->hEnv = env; d->hDbc = con; if ( env && con ) { - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); } } @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const switch ( f ) { case Transactions: { if ( !d->hDbc ) - return FALSE; + return false; SQLUSMALLINT txn; SQLSMALLINT t; int r = SQLGetInfo( d->hDbc, @@ -1372,22 +1372,22 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const sizeof(txn), &t); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS || txn == SQL_TC_NONE ) - return FALSE; + return false; else - return TRUE; + return true; } case QuerySize: - return FALSE; + return false; case BLOB: - return TRUE; + return true; case Unicode: return d->unicode; case PreparedQueries: - return TRUE; + return true; case PositionalPlaceholders: - return TRUE; + return true; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::open( const TQString&, int ) { tqWarning("TQODBCDriver::open(): This version of open() is no longer supported." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQODBCDriver::open( const TQString & db, @@ -1418,8 +1418,8 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::open( const TQString & db, #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCDriver::open: Unable to allocate environment", d ); #endif - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } r = SQLSetEnvAttr( d->hEnv, SQL_ATTR_ODBC_VERSION, @@ -1432,12 +1432,12 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::open( const TQString & db, #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE qSqlWarning( "TQODBCDriver::open: Unable to allocate connection", d ); #endif - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } if ( !d->setConnectionOptions( connOpts ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; // Create the connection string TQString connTQStr; @@ -1465,36 +1465,36 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::open( const TQString & db, SQL_DRIVER_NOPROMPT ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS && r != SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to connect", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } if ( !d->checkDriver() ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to connect - Driver doesn't support all needed functionality", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } d->checkUnicode(); d->checkSchemaUsage(); - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); - return TRUE; + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); + return true; } void TQODBCDriver::close() { cleanup(); - setOpen( FALSE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( false ); + setOpenError( false ); } bool TQODBCDriver::ping() { // FIXME // Implement ping if supported - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQODBCDriver::cleanup() @@ -1537,14 +1537,14 @@ void TQODBCPrivate::checkUnicode() { #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( !qt_winunicode ) { - unicode = FALSE; + unicode = false; return; } #endif SQLRETURN r; SQLUINTEGER fFunc; - unicode = FALSE; + unicode = false; r = SQLGetInfo( hDbc, SQL_CONVERT_CHAR, (SQLPOINTER)&fFunc, @@ -1552,7 +1552,7 @@ void TQODBCPrivate::checkUnicode() NULL ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( fFunc & SQL_CVT_WCHAR ) ) { sql_char_type = TQVariant::String; - unicode = TRUE; + unicode = true; } r = SQLGetInfo( hDbc, @@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@ void TQODBCPrivate::checkUnicode() NULL ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( fFunc & SQL_CVT_WVARCHAR ) ) { sql_varchar_type = TQVariant::String; - unicode = TRUE; + unicode = true; } r = SQLGetInfo( hDbc, @@ -1572,7 +1572,7 @@ void TQODBCPrivate::checkUnicode() NULL ); if ( ( r == SQL_SUCCESS || r == SQL_SUCCESS_WITH_INFO ) && ( fFunc & SQL_CVT_WLONGVARCHAR ) ) { sql_longvarchar_type = TQVariant::String; - unicode = TRUE; + unicode = true; } } @@ -1604,7 +1604,7 @@ bool TQODBCPrivate::checkDriver() const #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { qSqlWarning( "TQODBCDriver::checkDriver: Cannot get list of supported functions", this ); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif if ( sup == SQL_FALSE ) { @@ -1612,7 +1612,7 @@ bool TQODBCPrivate::checkDriver() const tqWarning ( "TQODBCDriver::open: Warning - Driver doesn't support all needed functionality (%d). " "Please look at the TQt SQL Module Driver documentation for more information.", reqFunc[ i ] ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -1624,19 +1624,19 @@ bool TQODBCPrivate::checkDriver() const #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { qSqlWarning( "TQODBCDriver::checkDriver: Cannot get list of supported functions", this ); - return FALSE; + return false; } #endif if ( sup == SQL_FALSE ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQODBCDriver::checkDriver: Warning - Driver doesn't support some non-critical functions (%d)", optFunc[ i ] ); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } } #endif //ODBC_CHECK_DRIVER - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQODBCPrivate::checkSchemaUsage() @@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::beginTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning(" TQODBCDriver::beginTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLUINTEGER ac(SQL_AUTOCOMMIT_OFF); SQLRETURN r = SQLSetConnectAttr( d->hDbc, @@ -1673,9 +1673,9 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::beginTransaction() sizeof(ac) ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to disable autocommit", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQODBCDriver::commitTransaction() @@ -1684,14 +1684,14 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::commitTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning(" TQODBCDriver::commitTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLRETURN r = SQLEndTran( SQL_HANDLE_DBC, d->hDbc, SQL_COMMIT ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to commit transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } return endTrans(); } @@ -1702,14 +1702,14 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::rollbackTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning(" TQODBCDriver::rollbackTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } SQLRETURN r = SQLEndTran( SQL_HANDLE_DBC, d->hDbc, SQL_ROLLBACK ); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to rollback transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } return endTrans(); } @@ -1723,9 +1723,9 @@ bool TQODBCDriver::endTrans() sizeof(ac)); if ( r != SQL_SUCCESS ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to enable autocommit", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } TQStringList TQODBCDriver::tables( const TQString& typeName ) const @@ -1801,7 +1801,7 @@ TQSqlIndex TQODBCDriver::primaryIndex( const TQString& tablename ) const TQSqlIndex index( tablename ); if ( !isOpen() ) return index; - bool usingSpecialColumns = FALSE; + bool usingSpecialColumns = false; TQSqlRecord rec = record( tablename ); SQLHANDLE hStmt; @@ -1873,7 +1873,7 @@ TQSqlIndex TQODBCDriver::primaryIndex( const TQString& tablename ) const qSqlWarning( "TQODBCDriver::primaryIndex: Unable to execute primary key list", d ); #endif } else { - usingSpecialColumns = TRUE; + usingSpecialColumns = true; } } r = SQLFetchScroll( hStmt, @@ -2018,8 +2018,8 @@ TQString TQODBCDriver::formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, // Dateformat has to be "yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss", with leading zeroes if month or day < 10 r = "{ ts '" + TQString::number(dt.year()) + "-" + - TQString::number(dt.month()).rightJustify( 2, '0', TRUE ) + "-" + - TQString::number(dt.day()).rightJustify( 2, '0', TRUE ) + " " + + TQString::number(dt.month()).rightJustify( 2, '0', true ) + "-" + + TQString::number(dt.day()).rightJustify( 2, '0', true ) + " " + tm.toString() + "' }"; } else diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp index df79ac2fd..625177c7b 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ TQPtrDict<TQSqlOpenExtension> *tqSqlOpenExtDict(); class TQPSQLPrivate { public: - TQPSQLPrivate():connection(0), result(0), isUtf8(FALSE) {} + TQPSQLPrivate():connection(0), result(0), isUtf8(false) {} PGconn *connection; PGresult *result; bool isUtf8; @@ -231,21 +231,21 @@ void TQPSQLResult::cleanup() d->result = 0; setAt( -1 ); currentSize = 0; - setActive( FALSE ); + setActive( false ); } bool TQPSQLResult::fetch( int i ) { if ( !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( i < 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( i >= currentSize ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( at() == i ) - return TRUE; + return true; setAt( i ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQPSQLResult::fetchFirst() @@ -460,10 +460,10 @@ bool TQPSQLResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) { cleanup(); if ( !driver() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !driver()->isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError() ) - return FALSE; - setActive( FALSE ); + return false; + setActive( false ); setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); if ( d->result ) PQclear( d->result ); @@ -475,17 +475,17 @@ bool TQPSQLResult::reset ( const TQString& query ) int status = PQresultStatus( d->result ); if ( status == PGRES_COMMAND_OK || status == PGRES_TUPLES_OK ) { if ( status == PGRES_TUPLES_OK ) { - setSelect( TRUE ); + setSelect( true ); currentSize = PQntuples( d->result ); } else { - setSelect( FALSE ); + setSelect( false ); currentSize = -1; } - setActive( TRUE ); - return TRUE; + setActive( true ); + return true; } setLastError( qMakeError( "Unable to create query", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } int TQPSQLResult::size() @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ static TQPSQLDriver::Protocol getPSQLVersion( PGconn* connection ) TQString val( PQgetvalue( result, 0, 0 ) ); PQclear( result ); TQRegExp rx( "(\\d+)\\.(\\d+)" ); - rx.setMinimal ( TRUE ); // enforce non-greedy RegExp + rx.setMinimal ( true ); // enforce non-greedy RegExp if ( rx.search( val ) != -1 ) { int vMaj = rx.cap( 1 ).toInt(); int vMin = rx.cap( 2 ).toInt(); @@ -569,8 +569,8 @@ TQPSQLDriver::TQPSQLDriver( PGconn * conn, TQObject * parent, const char * name d->connection = conn; if ( conn ) { pro = getPSQLVersion( d->connection ); - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); } } @@ -607,15 +607,15 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const { switch ( f ) { case Transactions: - return TRUE; + return true; case QuerySize: - return TRUE; + return true; case BLOB: return pro >= TQPSQLDriver::Version71; case Unicode: return d->isUtf8; default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::open( const TQString&, int ) { tqWarning("TQPSQLDriver::open(): This version of open() is no longer supported." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQPSQLDriver::open( const TQString & db, @@ -657,17 +657,17 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::open( const TQString & db, d->connection = PQconnectdb( connectString.local8Bit().data() ); if ( PQstatus( d->connection ) == CONNECTION_BAD ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to connect", TQSqlError::Connection, d ) ); - setOpenError( TRUE ); - return FALSE; + setOpenError( true ); + return false; } pro = getPSQLVersion( d->connection ); d->isUtf8 = setEncodingUtf8( d->connection ); setDatestyle( d->connection ); - setOpen( TRUE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); - return TRUE; + setOpen( true ); + setOpenError( false ); + return true; } void TQPSQLDriver::close() @@ -676,15 +676,15 @@ void TQPSQLDriver::close() if (d->connection) PQfinish( d->connection ); d->connection = 0; - setOpen( FALSE ); - setOpenError( FALSE ); + setOpen( false ); + setOpenError( false ); } } bool TQPSQLDriver::ping() { if ( !isOpen() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } PGresult *res = NULL; @@ -698,10 +698,10 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::ping() PQreset( d->connection ); if ( PQstatus( d->connection ) != CONNECTION_OK ) { setLastError( qMakeError("Unable to execute ping", TQSqlError::Statement, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } TQSqlQuery TQPSQLDriver::createQuery() const @@ -715,16 +715,16 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::beginTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQPSQLDriver::beginTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } PGresult* res = PQexec( d->connection, "BEGIN" ); if ( !res || PQresultStatus( res ) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK ) { PQclear( res ); setLastError( qMakeError( "Could not begin transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } PQclear( res ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQPSQLDriver::commitTransaction() @@ -733,16 +733,16 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::commitTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQPSQLDriver::commitTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } PGresult* res = PQexec( d->connection, "COMMIT" ); if ( !res || PQresultStatus( res ) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK ) { PQclear( res ); setLastError( qMakeError( "Could not commit transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); - return FALSE; + return false; } PQclear( res ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQPSQLDriver::rollbackTransaction() @@ -751,16 +751,16 @@ bool TQPSQLDriver::rollbackTransaction() #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning( "TQPSQLDriver::rollbackTransaction: Database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } PGresult* res = PQexec( d->connection, "ROLLBACK" ); if ( !res || PQresultStatus( res ) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK ) { setLastError( qMakeError( "Could not rollback transaction", TQSqlError::Transaction, d ) ); PQclear( res ); - return FALSE; + return false; } PQclear( res ); - return TRUE; + return true; } TQStringList TQPSQLDriver::tables( const TQString& typeName ) const @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ TQStringList TQPSQLDriver::tables( const TQString& typeName ) const return tl; int type = typeName.toInt(); TQSqlQuery t = createQuery(); - t.setForwardOnly( TRUE ); + t.setForwardOnly( true ); if ( typeName.isEmpty() || ((type & (int)TQSql::Tables) == (int)TQSql::Tables) ) { @@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ TQString TQPSQLDriver::formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, r += uc; } else { r += "\\\\"; - r += TQString::number( (unsigned char) ba[ i ], 8 ).rightJustify( 3, '0', TRUE ); + r += TQString::number( (unsigned char) ba[ i ], 8 ).rightJustify( 3, '0', true ); } } r += "'"; diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp index de7fde7e2..a0e78db91 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ public: static const uint initial_cache_size = 128; TQSQLiteResultPrivate::TQSQLiteResultPrivate(TQSQLiteResult* res) : q(res), access(0), currentTail(0), - currentMachine(0), skippedStatus(FALSE), skipRow(0), utf8(FALSE) + currentMachine(0), skippedStatus(false), skipRow(0), utf8(false) { } @@ -92,11 +92,11 @@ void TQSQLiteResultPrivate::cleanup() rInf.clear(); currentTail = 0; currentMachine = 0; - skippedStatus = FALSE; + skippedStatus = false; delete skipRow; skipRow = 0; q->setAt(TQSql::BeforeFirst); - q->setActive(FALSE); + q->setActive(false); q->cleanup(); } @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ bool TQSQLiteResultPrivate::fetchNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) } if (!currentMachine) - return FALSE; + return false; // keep trying while busy, wish I could implement this better. while ((res = sqlite_step(currentMachine, &colNum, &fvals, &cnames)) == SQLITE_BUSY) { @@ -174,27 +174,27 @@ bool TQSQLiteResultPrivate::fetchNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) // must be first call. init(cnames, colNum, &row); if (!fvals) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!row) - return TRUE; + return true; for (i = 0; i < colNum; ++i) (*row)[i] = utf8 ? TQString::fromUtf8(fvals[i]) : TQString(fvals[i]); - return TRUE; + return true; case SQLITE_DONE: if (rInf.isEmpty()) // must be first call. init(cnames, colNum); q->setAt(TQSql::AfterLast); - return FALSE; + return false; case SQLITE_ERROR: case SQLITE_MISUSE: default: // something wrong, don't get col info, but still return false finalize(); // finalize to get the error message. q->setAt(TQSql::AfterLast); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return FALSE; + return false; } TQSQLiteResult::TQSQLiteResult(const TQSQLiteDriver* db) @@ -218,14 +218,14 @@ bool TQSQLiteResult::reset (const TQString& query) { // this is where we build a query. if (!driver()) - return FALSE; + return false; if (!driver()-> isOpen() || driver()->isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; d->cleanup(); // Um, ok. callback based so.... pass private static function for this. - setSelect(FALSE); + setSelect(false); char *err = 0; int res = sqlite_compile(d->access, d->utf8 ? (const char*)query.utf8().data() : query.ascii(), @@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ bool TQSQLiteResult::reset (const TQString& query) } //if (*d->currentTail != '\000' then there is more sql to eval if (!d->currentMachine) { - setActive(FALSE); - return FALSE; + setActive(false); + return false; } // we have to fetch one row to find out about // the structure of the result set @@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ bool TQSQLiteResult::reset (const TQString& query) setSelect(!d->rInf.isEmpty()); if (isSelect()) init(d->rInf.count()); - setActive(TRUE); - return TRUE; + setActive(true); + return true; } bool TQSQLiteResult::gotoNext(TQtSqlCachedResult::RowCache* row) @@ -279,8 +279,8 @@ TQSQLiteDriver::TQSQLiteDriver(sqlite *connection, TQObject *parent, const char { d = new TQSQLiteDriverPrivate(); d->access = connection; - setOpen(TRUE); - setOpenError(FALSE); + setOpen(true); + setOpenError(false); } @@ -293,14 +293,14 @@ bool TQSQLiteDriver::hasFeature(DriverFeature f) const { switch (f) { case Transactions: - return TRUE; + return true; #if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x030000) case Unicode: return d->utf8; #endif // case BLOB: default: - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ bool TQSQLiteDriver::open(const TQString & db, const TQString &, const TQString close(); if (db.isEmpty()) - return FALSE; + return false; char* err = 0; d->access = sqlite_open(TQFile::encodeName(db), 0, &err); @@ -325,12 +325,12 @@ bool TQSQLiteDriver::open(const TQString & db, const TQString &, const TQString } if (d->access) { - setOpen(TRUE); - setOpenError(FALSE); - return TRUE; + setOpen(true); + setOpenError(false); + return true; } - setOpenError(TRUE); - return FALSE; + setOpenError(true); + return false; } void TQSQLiteDriver::close() @@ -338,20 +338,20 @@ void TQSQLiteDriver::close() if (isOpen()) { sqlite_close(d->access); d->access = 0; - setOpen(FALSE); - setOpenError(FALSE); + setOpen(false); + setOpenError(false); } } bool TQSQLiteDriver::ping() { if ( !isOpen() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } // FIXME // Implement ping if available - return TRUE; + return true; } TQSqlQuery TQSQLiteDriver::createQuery() const @@ -362,49 +362,49 @@ TQSqlQuery TQSQLiteDriver::createQuery() const bool TQSQLiteDriver::beginTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; char* err; int res = sqlite_exec(d->access, "BEGIN", 0, this, &err); if (res == SQLITE_OK) - return TRUE; + return true; setLastError(TQSqlError("Unable to begin transaction", err, TQSqlError::Transaction, res)); sqlite_freemem(err); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQSQLiteDriver::commitTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; char* err; int res = sqlite_exec(d->access, "COMMIT", 0, this, &err); if (res == SQLITE_OK) - return TRUE; + return true; setLastError(TQSqlError("Unable to commit transaction", err, TQSqlError::Transaction, res)); sqlite_freemem(err); - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQSQLiteDriver::rollbackTransaction() { if (!isOpen() || isOpenError()) - return FALSE; + return false; char* err; int res = sqlite_exec(d->access, "ROLLBACK", 0, this, &err); if (res == SQLITE_OK) - return TRUE; + return true; setLastError(TQSqlError("Unable to rollback Transaction", err, TQSqlError::Transaction, res)); sqlite_freemem(err); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQStringList TQSQLiteDriver::tables(const TQString &typeName) const @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ TQStringList TQSQLiteDriver::tables(const TQString &typeName) const int type = typeName.toInt(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); #if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x030000) if ((type & (int)TQSql::Tables) && (type & (int)TQSql::Views)) q.exec("SELECT name FROM sqlite_master WHERE type='table' OR type='view'"); @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ TQSqlIndex TQSQLiteDriver::primaryIndex(const TQString &tblname) const return TQSqlIndex(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); // finrst find a UNIQUE INDEX q.exec("PRAGMA index_list('" + tblname + "');"); TQString indexname; @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ TQSqlRecordInfo TQSQLiteDriver::recordInfo(const TQString &tbl) const return TQSqlRecordInfo(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); q.exec("SELECT * FROM " + tbl + " LIMIT 1"); return recordInfo(q); } diff --git a/src/sql/drivers/sqlite3/tqsql_sqlite3.cpp b/src/sql/drivers/sqlite3/tqsql_sqlite3.cpp index f75feaa1b..a3ce63e35 100644 --- a/src/sql/drivers/sqlite3/tqsql_sqlite3.cpp +++ b/src/sql/drivers/sqlite3/tqsql_sqlite3.cpp @@ -331,12 +331,12 @@ void TQSQLite3Driver::close() bool TQSQLite3Driver::ping() { if ( !isOpen() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } // FIXME // Implement ping if available - return TRUE; + return true; } TQSqlQuery TQSQLite3Driver::createQuery() const @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ TQStringList TQSQLite3Driver::tables(const TQString &typeName) const int type = typeName.toInt(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); #if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x030200) if ((type & (int)TQSql::Tables) && (type & (int)TQSql::Views)) q.exec("SELECT name FROM sqlite_master WHERE type='table' OR type='view'"); @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ TQSqlIndex TQSQLite3Driver::primaryIndex(const TQString &tblname) const return TQSqlIndex(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); // finrst find a UNIQUE INDEX q.exec("PRAGMA index_list('" + tblname + "');"); TQString indexname; @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ TQSqlRecordInfo TQSQLite3Driver::recordInfo(const TQString &tbl) const return TQSqlRecordInfo(); TQSqlQuery q = createQuery(); - q.setForwardOnly(TRUE); + q.setForwardOnly(true); q.exec("SELECT * FROM " + tbl + " LIMIT 1"); return recordInfo(q); } diff --git a/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp b/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp index a716d8832..b1921204e 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ class TQDataBrowserPrivate { public: - TQDataBrowserPrivate() : boundaryCheck( TRUE ), readOnly( FALSE ) {} + TQDataBrowserPrivate() : boundaryCheck( true ), readOnly( false ) {} TQSqlCursorManager cur; TQSqlFormManager frm; TQDataManager dat; @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ TQString TQDataBrowser::filter() const /*! Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to \a cursor. If - \a autoDelete is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the data browser + \a autoDelete is true (the default is false), the data browser takes ownership of the \a cursor pointer, which will be deleted when the browser is destroyed, or when setSqlCursor() is called again. To activate the \a cursor use refresh(). The cursor's edit @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete ) d->cur.setCursor( cursor, autoDelete ); d->frm.setRecord( cursor->editBuffer() ); if ( cursor->isReadOnly() ) - setReadOnly( TRUE ); + setReadOnly( true ); } @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ TQSqlForm* TQDataBrowser::form() \property TQDataBrowser::readOnly \brief whether the browser is read-only - The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser + The default is false, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser is read-only, no database edits will be allowed. */ @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmEdits( bool confirm ) \property TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert \brief whether the data browser confirms insertions - If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions, + If this property is true, the browser confirms insertions, otherwise insertions happen immediately. \sa confirmCancels() confirmEdits() confirmUpdate() confirmDelete() confirmEdit() @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmInsert( bool confirm ) \property TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate \brief whether the browser confirms updates - If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise + If this property is true, the browser confirms updates, otherwise updates happen immediately. \sa confirmCancels() confirmEdits() confirmInsert() confirmDelete() confirmEdit() @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmUpdate( bool confirm ) \property TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete \brief whether the browser confirms deletions - If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions, + If this property is true, the browser confirms deletions, otherwise deletions happen immediately. \sa confirmCancels() confirmEdits() confirmUpdate() confirmInsert() confirmEdit() @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::setConfirmDelete( bool confirm ) \property TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits \brief whether the browser confirms edits - If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations + If this property is true, the browser confirms all edit operations (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by @@ -470,10 +470,10 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete() const \property TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels \brief whether the browser confirms cancel operations - If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the + If this property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels - occur immediately. The default is FALSE. + occur immediately. The default is false. \sa confirmEdits() confirmCancel() */ @@ -492,13 +492,13 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels() const \property TQDataBrowser::autoEdit \brief whether the browser automatically applies edits - The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins + The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: \list - \i the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE - \i the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE + \i the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true + \i the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is false \endlist */ @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::insert() TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) return; - bool doIns = TRUE; + bool doIns = true; TQSql::Confirm conf = TQSql::Yes; switch ( d->dat.mode() ) { case TQSql::Insert: @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::insert() case TQSql::No: break; case TQSql::Cancel: - doIns = FALSE; + doIns = false; break; } } @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::insert() case TQSql::No: break; case TQSql::Cancel: - doIns = FALSE; + doIns = false; break; } } @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::update() break; case TQSql::No: d->dat.setMode( TQSql::Update ); - cur->editBuffer( TRUE ); + cur->editBuffer( true ); readFields(); break; case TQSql::Cancel: @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::del() if ( confirmCancels() ) conf = confirmCancel( TQSql::Insert ); if ( conf == TQSql::Yes ) { - cur->editBuffer( TRUE ); /* restore from cursor */ + cur->editBuffer( true ); /* restore from cursor */ readFields(); d->dat.setMode( TQSql::Update ); } else @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::del() Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index \a i and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If \a - relative is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the cursor is moved + relative is true (the default is false), the cursor is moved relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted. @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::seek( int i, bool relative ) int b = 0; TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( preNav() ) b = cur->seek( i, relative ); postNav( b ); @@ -940,9 +940,9 @@ void TQDataBrowser::clearValues() performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the insert into the database, handleError() is called and - FALSE is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is + false is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the - cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned. + cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and true is returned. \sa cursorChanged() sqlCursor() form() handleError() */ @@ -950,11 +950,11 @@ void TQDataBrowser::clearValues() bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent() { if ( isReadOnly() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQSqlRecord* buf = d->frm.record(); TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; writeFields(); emit beforeInsert( buf ); int ar = cur->insert(); @@ -967,9 +967,9 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent() d->cur.findBuffer( cur->primaryIndex() ); updateBoundary(); cursorChanged( TQSqlCursor::Insert ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -978,9 +978,9 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent() performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the update on the database, handleError() is called and - FALSE is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is + false is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the cursorChanged() - signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned. + signal is emitted, and true is returned. \sa cursor() form() handleError() */ @@ -988,11 +988,11 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent() bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent() { if ( isReadOnly() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQSqlRecord* buf = d->frm.record(); TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; writeFields(); emit beforeUpdate( buf ); int ar = cur->update(); @@ -1004,12 +1004,12 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent() refresh(); d->cur.findBuffer( cur->primaryIndex() ); updateBoundary(); - cur->editBuffer( TRUE ); + cur->editBuffer( true ); cursorChanged( TQSqlCursor::Update ); readFields(); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -1018,10 +1018,10 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent() default form and updates the default form. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and - TRUE is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there + true is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error occurred during the deletion from the database, handleError() is - called and FALSE is returned. + called and false is returned. \sa cursor() form() handleError() */ @@ -1029,11 +1029,11 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent() bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent() { if ( isReadOnly() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQSqlRecord* buf = d->frm.record(); TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; writeFields(); int n = cur->at(); emit beforeDelete( buf ); @@ -1045,12 +1045,12 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent() if ( !cur->seek( n ) ) last(); if ( cur->isValid() ) { - cur->editBuffer( TRUE ); + cur->editBuffer( true ); readFields(); } else { clearValues(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } else { if ( !cur->isActive() ) { handleError( cur->lastError() ); @@ -1058,13 +1058,13 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent() updateBoundary(); } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the form's edit buffer differs from the current - cursor buffer; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the form's edit buffer differs from the current + cursor buffer; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDataBrowser::currentEdited() @@ -1072,15 +1072,15 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::currentEdited() TQSqlRecord* buf = d->frm.record(); TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !cur->isActive() || !cur->isValid() ) - return FALSE; + return false; writeFields(); for ( uint i = 0; i < cur->count(); ++i ) { if ( cur->value(i) != buf->value(i) ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \internal @@ -1093,10 +1093,10 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::preNav() TQSqlRecord* buf = d->frm.record(); TQSqlCursor* cur = d->cur.cursor(); if ( !buf || !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !isReadOnly() && autoEdit() && currentEdited() ) { - bool ok = TRUE; + bool ok = true; TQSql::Confirm conf = TQSql::Yes; switch ( d->dat.mode() ){ case TQSql::Insert: @@ -1111,7 +1111,7 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::preNav() d->dat.setMode( TQSql::Update ); break; case TQSql::Cancel: - return FALSE; + return false; } break; default: @@ -1124,12 +1124,12 @@ bool TQDataBrowser::preNav() case TQSql::No: break; case TQSql::Cancel: - return FALSE; + return false; } } return ok; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \internal @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ void TQDataBrowser::nav( Nav nav ) } /*! - If boundaryChecking() is TRUE, checks the boundary of the current + If boundaryChecking() is true, checks the boundary of the current default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of the cursor. */ @@ -1181,38 +1181,38 @@ void TQDataBrowser::updateBoundary() switch ( bound ) { case Unknown: case None: - emit firstRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit prevRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit nextRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit lastRecordAvailable( TRUE ); + emit firstRecordAvailable( true ); + emit prevRecordAvailable( true ); + emit nextRecordAvailable( true ); + emit lastRecordAvailable( true ); break; case BeforeBeginning: - emit firstRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit prevRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit nextRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit lastRecordAvailable( TRUE ); + emit firstRecordAvailable( false ); + emit prevRecordAvailable( false ); + emit nextRecordAvailable( true ); + emit lastRecordAvailable( true ); break; case Beginning: - emit firstRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit prevRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit nextRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit lastRecordAvailable( TRUE ); + emit firstRecordAvailable( false ); + emit prevRecordAvailable( false ); + emit nextRecordAvailable( true ); + emit lastRecordAvailable( true ); break; case End: - emit firstRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit prevRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit nextRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit lastRecordAvailable( FALSE ); + emit firstRecordAvailable( true ); + emit prevRecordAvailable( true ); + emit nextRecordAvailable( false ); + emit lastRecordAvailable( false ); break; case AfterEnd: - emit firstRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit prevRecordAvailable( TRUE ); - emit nextRecordAvailable( FALSE ); - emit lastRecordAvailable( FALSE ); + emit firstRecordAvailable( true ); + emit prevRecordAvailable( true ); + emit nextRecordAvailable( false ); + emit lastRecordAvailable( false ); break; } } diff --git a/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h b/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h index c1d715a3a..3fd8e9756 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h +++ b/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public: TQStringList sort() const; void setFilter( const TQString& filter ); TQString filter() const; - virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE ); + virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = false ); TQSqlCursor* sqlCursor() const; virtual void setForm( TQSqlForm* form ); TQSqlForm* form(); @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ public: virtual void setAutoEdit( bool autoEdit ); bool autoEdit() const; - virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = FALSE ); + virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = false ); signals: void firstRecordAvailable( bool available ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp b/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp index ac4c11267..cef756b00 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp @@ -61,9 +61,9 @@ class TQDataTablePrivate { public: TQDataTablePrivate() - : nullTxtChanged( FALSE ), - haveAllRows( FALSE ), - continuousEdit( FALSE ), + : nullTxtChanged( false ), + haveAllRows( false ), + continuousEdit( false ), editorFactory( 0 ), propertyMap( 0 ), editRow( -1 ), @@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ public: insertRowLast( -1 ), insertPreRows( -1 ), editBuffer( 0 ), - cancelMode( FALSE ), - cancelInsert( FALSE ), - cancelUpdate( FALSE ) + cancelMode( false ), + cancelInsert( false ), + cancelUpdate( false ) {} ~TQDataTablePrivate() { if ( propertyMap ) delete propertyMap; } @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ void qt_debug_buffer( const TQString& msg, TQSqlRecord* cursor ) appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled automatically (see handleError() to change this behavior). Note - that if autoEdit() is FALSE navigating to another record will + that if autoEdit() is false navigating to another record will cancel the insert or update. The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits(). @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ void qt_debug_buffer( const TQString& msg, TQSqlRecord* cursor ) expected if you are using a TQSqlSelectCursor because it uses user-defined SQL queries to obtain data. - The text used to represent NULL, TRUE and FALSE values can be + The text used to represent NULL, true and false values can be changed with setNullText(), setTrueText() and setFalseText() respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by reimplementing paintField(). @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) Constructs a data table which is a child of \a parent, called name \a name using the cursor \a cursor. - If \a autoPopulate is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are + If \a autoPopulate is true (the default is false), columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the \a cursor record. Note that \a autoPopulate only governs the creation of columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use refresh(). @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate, TQWidget * pa void TQDataTable::init() { d = new TQDataTablePrivate(); - setAutoEdit( TRUE ); + setAutoEdit( true ); setSelectionMode( SingleRow ); setFocusStyle( FollowStyle ); d->trueTxt = tr( "True" ); @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ void TQDataTable::addColumn( const TQString& fieldName, d->fldLabel += label; d->fldIcon += iconset; d->fldWidth += width; - d->fldHidden += FALSE; + d->fldHidden += false; } /*! @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ void TQDataTable::setColumn( uint col, const TQString& fieldName, d->fldLabel[col] = label; d->fldIcon[col] = iconset; d->fldWidth[col] = width; - d->fldHidden[col] = FALSE; + d->fldHidden[col] = false; } /*! @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ void TQDataTable::setConfirmDelete( bool confirm ) \property TQDataTable::confirmEdits \brief whether the data table confirms edit operations - If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all + If the confirmEdits property is true, the data table confirms all edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of edit confirmation can be achieved using \l confirmCancels, \l confirmInsert, \l confirmUpdate and \l confirmDelete. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::confirmEdits() const \property TQDataTable::confirmInsert \brief whether the data table confirms insert operations - If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be + If the confirmInsert property is true, all insertions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all insert operations occur immediately. @@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::confirmInsert() const \property TQDataTable::confirmUpdate \brief whether the data table confirms update operations - If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be + If the confirmUpdate property is true, all updates must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all update operations occur immediately. @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::confirmUpdate() const \property TQDataTable::confirmDelete \brief whether the data table confirms delete operations - If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be + If the confirmDelete property is true, all deletions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all delete operations occur immediately. @@ -593,10 +593,10 @@ bool TQDataTable::confirmDelete() const \property TQDataTable::confirmCancels \brief whether the data table confirms cancel operations - If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be + If the confirmCancel property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all - cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE. + cancels occur immediately. The default is false. \sa confirmEdits() confirmCancel() */ @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::confirmCancels() const installEditorFactory(). The editor is primed with the value of the field in \a col using a property map. The property map used is the default property map, unless a new property map was installed with - installPropertMap(). If \a initFromCell is TRUE then the editor is + installPropertMap(). If \a initFromCell is true then the editor is primed with the value in the TQDataTable cell. */ @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ TQWidget * TQDataTable::createEditor( int , int col, bool initFromCell ) const bool TQDataTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) { if ( d->cancelMode ) - return TRUE; + return true; int r = currentRow(); int c = currentColumn(); @@ -658,65 +658,65 @@ bool TQDataTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) c = d->editCol; } - d->cancelInsert = FALSE; - d->cancelUpdate = FALSE; + d->cancelInsert = false; + d->cancelUpdate = false; switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::KeyPress: { int conf = TQSql::Yes; TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e; if ( ( ke->key() == Key_Tab || ke->key() == TQt::Key_BackTab ) && ke->state() & TQt::ControlButton ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape && d->dat.mode() == TQSql::Insert ){ if ( confirmCancels() && !d->cancelMode ) { - d->cancelMode = TRUE; + d->cancelMode = true; conf = confirmCancel( TQSql::Insert ); - d->cancelMode = FALSE; + d->cancelMode = false; } if ( conf == TQSql::Yes ) { - d->cancelInsert = TRUE; + d->cancelInsert = true; } else { TQWidget *editorWidget = cellWidget( r, c ); if ( editorWidget ) { editorWidget->setActiveWindow(); editorWidget->setFocus(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } } if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape && d->dat.mode() == TQSql::Update ) { if ( confirmCancels() && !d->cancelMode ) { - d->cancelMode = TRUE; + d->cancelMode = true; conf = confirmCancel( TQSql::Update ); - d->cancelMode = FALSE; + d->cancelMode = false; } if ( conf == TQSql::Yes ){ - d->cancelUpdate = TRUE; + d->cancelUpdate = true; } else { TQWidget *editorWidget = cellWidget( r, c ); if ( editorWidget ) { editorWidget->setActiveWindow(); editorWidget->setFocus(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } } if ( ke->key() == Key_Insert && d->dat.mode() == TQSql::None ) { beginInsert(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( ke->key() == Key_Delete && d->dat.mode() == TQSql::None ) { deleteCurrent(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( d->dat.mode() != TQSql::None ) { if ( (ke->key() == Key_Tab) && (c < numCols() - 1) && (!isColumnReadOnly( c+1 ) || d->dat.mode() == TQSql::Insert) ) - d->continuousEdit = TRUE; + d->continuousEdit = true; else if ( (ke->key() == Key_BackTab) && (c > 0) && (!isColumnReadOnly( c-1 ) || d->dat.mode() == TQSql::Insert) ) - d->continuousEdit = TRUE; + d->continuousEdit = true; else - d->continuousEdit = FALSE; + d->continuousEdit = false; } TQSqlCursor * sql = sqlCursor(); if ( sql && sql->driver() && @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor(); #endif - return TRUE; + return true; } break; } @@ -747,9 +747,9 @@ bool TQDataTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) if ( !d->cancelMode && editorWidget && o == editorWidget && ( d->dat.mode() == TQSql::Insert) && !d->continuousEdit) { setCurrentCell( r, c ); - d->cancelInsert = TRUE; + d->cancelInsert = true; } - d->continuousEdit = FALSE; + d->continuousEdit = false; break; } case TQEvent::FocusIn: @@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ void TQDataTable::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent* e ) { TQTable::contentsContextMenuEvent( e ); if ( isEditing() && d->dat.mode() != TQSql::None ) - endEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, autoEdit(), FALSE ); + endEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, autoEdit(), false ); if ( !sqlCursor() ) return; if ( d->dat.mode() == TQSql::None ) { @@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ void TQDataTable::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent* e ) if ( r == id[ IdInsert ] ) beginInsert(); else if ( r == id[ IdUpdate ] ) { - if ( beginEdit( currentRow(), currentColumn(), FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( currentRow(), currentColumn(), false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, currentRow(), currentColumn() ); else endUpdate(); @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ TQWidget* TQDataTable::beginEdit ( int row, int col, bool replace ) if ( d->continuousEdit ) { // see comment in beginInsert() bool fakeReadOnly = isColumnReadOnly( col ); - setColumnReadOnly( col, FALSE ); + setColumnReadOnly( col, false ); TQWidget* w = TQTable::beginEdit( row, col, replace ); setColumnReadOnly( col, fakeReadOnly ); return w; @@ -959,9 +959,9 @@ void TQDataTable::endUpdate() bool TQDataTable::beginInsert() { if ( !sqlCursor() || isReadOnly() || !numCols() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !sqlCursor()->canInsert() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int i = 0; int row = currentRow(); @@ -992,11 +992,11 @@ bool TQDataTable::beginInsert() // into a table that has read-only columns - temporarily // switch off read-only mode for such columns bool fakeReadOnly = isColumnReadOnly( 0 ); - setColumnReadOnly( 0, FALSE ); - if ( TQTable::beginEdit( row, 0, FALSE ) ) + setColumnReadOnly( 0, false ); + if ( TQTable::beginEdit( row, 0, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, row, 0 ); setColumnReadOnly( 0, fakeReadOnly ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1032,9 +1032,9 @@ TQWidget* TQDataTable::beginUpdate ( int row, int col, bool replace ) For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing - happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is TRUE, - confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns TRUE if the - insert succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. + happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is true, + confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns true if the + insert succeeded; otherwise returns false. The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is inserted within the database otherwise the @@ -1044,14 +1044,14 @@ TQWidget* TQDataTable::beginUpdate ( int row, int col, bool replace ) bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent() { if ( d->dat.mode() != TQSql::Insert || ! numCols() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !sqlCursor()->canInsert() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQDataTable::insertCurrent: insert not allowed for %s", sqlCursor()->name().latin1() ); #endif endInsert(); - return FALSE; + return false; } int b = 0; int conf = TQSql::Yes; @@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent() refresh(); TQSqlIndex idx = sqlCursor()->primaryIndex(); findBuffer( idx, d->lastAt ); - repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); emit cursorChanged( TQSql::Insert ); } break; @@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent() endInsert(); break; case TQSql::Cancel: - if ( TQTable::beginEdit( currentRow(), currentColumn(), FALSE ) ) + if ( TQTable::beginEdit( currentRow(), currentColumn(), false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, currentRow(), currentColumn() ); break; } @@ -1107,8 +1107,8 @@ void TQDataTable::updateRow( int row ) For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmUpdate() - is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns - TRUE if the update succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE. + is true, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns + true if the update succeeded; otherwise returns false. The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is updated within the database otherwise the @@ -1118,14 +1118,14 @@ void TQDataTable::updateRow( int row ) bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() { if ( d->dat.mode() != TQSql::Update ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( sqlCursor()->primaryIndex().count() == 0 ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQDataTable::updateCurrent: no primary index for %s", sqlCursor()->name().latin1() ); #endif endUpdate(); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !sqlCursor()->canUpdate() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE @@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() sqlCursor()->name().latin1() ); #endif endUpdate(); - return FALSE; + return false; } int b = 0; int conf = TQSql::Yes; @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() endUpdate(); refresh(); setCurrentCell( d->editRow, d->editCol ); - if ( TQTable::beginEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, FALSE ) ) + if ( TQTable::beginEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, d->editRow, d->editCol ); } else { emit cursorChanged( TQSql::Update ); @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() break; case TQSql::Cancel: setCurrentCell( d->editRow, d->editCol ); - if ( TQTable::beginEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, FALSE ) ) + if ( TQTable::beginEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, d->editRow, d->editCol ); break; } @@ -1180,9 +1180,9 @@ bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, - nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is TRUE, - confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns TRUE if the - delete succeeded; otherwise FALSE. + nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is true, + confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns true if the + delete succeeded; otherwise false. The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is deleted within the database otherwise the @@ -1192,16 +1192,16 @@ bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent() bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent() { if ( !sqlCursor() || isReadOnly() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( sqlCursor()->primaryIndex().count() == 0 ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQDataTable::deleteCurrent: no primary index %s", sqlCursor()->name().latin1() ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !sqlCursor()->canDelete() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int b = 0; int conf = TQSql::Yes; @@ -1212,7 +1212,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent() // dialog that causes a repaint which the cursor to the // record it has to repaint. if ( !sqlCursor()->seek( currentRow() ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; switch ( conf ) { case TQSql::Yes:{ #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent() refresh(); emit cursorChanged( TQSql::Delete ); setCurrentCell( currentRow(), currentColumn() ); - repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); verticalHeader()->repaint(); // get rid of trailing garbage } break; @@ -1271,11 +1271,11 @@ TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmCancel( TQSql::Op m ) /*! Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string \a str starting at the current cell and working forwards (or - backwards if \a backwards is TRUE). If the string is found, the + backwards if \a backwards is true). If the string is found, the cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If \a - caseSensitive is FALSE the case of \a str will be ignored. + caseSensitive is false the case of \a str will be ignored. - The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is TRUE, + The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is true, last) cell is reached without finding \a str the search will continue until it reaches the starting cell. If \a str is not found the search will fail and the current cell will remain @@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ void TQDataTable::find( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards TQString tmp, text; uint row = currentRow(), startRow = row, col = backwards ? currentColumn() - 1 : currentColumn() + 1; - bool wrap = TRUE, found = FALSE; + bool wrap = true, found = false; if( str.isEmpty() || str.isNull() ) return; @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ void TQDataTable::find( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards if( text.contains( tmp ) ){ setCurrentCell( row, i ); col = i; - found = TRUE; + found = true; } } if( !backwards ){ @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ void TQDataTable::find( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards if( startRow != 0 ){ startRow = 0; } else { - wrap = FALSE; + wrap = false; } r->first(); row = 0; @@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ void TQDataTable::find( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards if( startRow != (uint) (numRows() - 1) ){ startRow = numRows() - 1; } else { - wrap = FALSE; + wrap = false; } r->last(); row = numRows() - 1; @@ -1373,14 +1373,14 @@ void TQDataTable::reset() verticalScrollBar()->setValue(0); setNumRows(0); - d->haveAllRows = FALSE; - d->continuousEdit = FALSE; + d->haveAllRows = false; + d->continuousEdit = false; d->dat.setMode( TQSql::None ); d->editRow = -1; d->editCol = -1; d->insertRowLast = -1; d->insertHeaderLabelLast = TQString::null; - d->cancelMode = FALSE; + d->cancelMode = false; d->lastAt = -1; d->fld.clear(); d->fldLabel.clear(); @@ -1405,8 +1405,8 @@ int TQDataTable::indexOf( uint i ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the table will automatically delete the cursor - specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the table will automatically delete the cursor + specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDataTable::autoDelete() const @@ -1416,8 +1416,8 @@ bool TQDataTable::autoDelete() const /*! Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to \a enable. If \a enable is - TRUE, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by - setSqlCursor(). If \a enable is FALSE (the default), the cursor + true, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by + setSqlCursor(). If \a enable is false (the default), the cursor will not be deleted. */ @@ -1430,13 +1430,13 @@ void TQDataTable::setAutoDelete( bool enable ) \property TQDataTable::autoEdit \brief whether the data table automatically applies edits - The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins + The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record: \list 1 - \i the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE - \i the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE + \i the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true + \i the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is false \endlist */ @@ -1461,7 +1461,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::autoEdit() const void TQDataTable::setNullText( const TQString& nullText ) { d->nullTxt = nullText; - d->nullTxtChanged = TRUE; + d->nullTxtChanged = true; } TQString TQDataTable::nullText() const @@ -1631,14 +1631,14 @@ void TQDataTable::loadNextPage() // check for empty result set if ( sqlCursor()->at() == TQSql::BeforeFirst && !sqlCursor()->next() ) { - d->haveAllRows = TRUE; + d->haveAllRows = true; return; } while ( endIdx > 0 && !sqlCursor()->seek( endIdx ) ) endIdx--; if ( endIdx != ( startIdx + pageSize + lookAhead ) ) - d->haveAllRows = TRUE; + d->haveAllRows = true; // small hack to prevent TQTable from moving the view when a row // is selected and the contents is resized SelectionMode m = selectionMode(); @@ -1665,7 +1665,7 @@ void TQDataTable::sliderReleased() } /*! - Sorts column \a col in ascending order if \a ascending is TRUE + Sorts column \a col in ascending order if \a ascending is true (the default); otherwise sorts in descending order. The \a wholeRows parameter is ignored; TQDataTable always sorts @@ -1677,7 +1677,7 @@ void TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending, { if ( sorting() ) { if ( isEditing() && d->dat.mode() != TQSql::None ) - endEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, autoEdit(), FALSE ); + endEdit( d->editRow, d->editCol, autoEdit(), false ); if ( !sqlCursor() ) return; TQSqlIndex lastSort = sqlCursor()->sort(); @@ -1699,7 +1699,7 @@ void TQDataTable::columnClicked ( int col ) if ( !sqlCursor() ) return; TQSqlIndex lastSort = sqlCursor()->sort(); - bool asc = TRUE; + bool asc = true; if ( lastSort.count() && lastSort.field( 0 )->name() == sqlCursor()->field( indexOf( col ) )->name() ) asc = lastSort.isDescending( 0 ); sortColumn( col, asc ); @@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ void TQDataTable::repaintCell( int row, int col ) TQRect cg = cellGeometry( row, col ); TQRect re( TQPoint( cg.x() - 2, cg.y() - 2 ), TQSize( cg.width() + 4, cg.height() + 4 ) ); - repaintContents( re, FALSE ); + repaintContents( re, false ); } /*! @@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ void TQDataTable::repaintCell( int row, int col ) the corresponding cursor field on the painter \a p. Depending on the table's current edit mode, paintField() is called for the appropriate cursor field. \a cr describes the cell coordinates in - the content coordinate system. If \a selected is TRUE the cell has + the content coordinate system. If \a selected is true the cell has been selected and would normally be rendered differently than an unselected cell. @@ -1833,9 +1833,9 @@ void TQDataTable::setSize( TQSqlCursor* sql ) /*! Sets \a cursor as the data source for the table. To force the display of the data from \a cursor, use refresh(). If \a - autoPopulate is TRUE, columns are automatically created based upon - the fields in the \a cursor record. If \a autoDelete is TRUE (the - default is FALSE), the table will take ownership of the \a cursor + autoPopulate is true, columns are automatically created based upon + the fields in the \a cursor record. If \a autoDelete is true (the + default is false), the table will take ownership of the \a cursor and delete it when appropriate. If the \a cursor is read-only, the table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for representing NULL values as strings. @@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@ void TQDataTable::setSize( TQSqlCursor* sql ) void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate, bool autoDelete ) { - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); d->cur.setCursor( 0 ); if ( cursor ) { d->cur.setCursor( cursor, autoDelete ); @@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate, bool aut setNumRows( 0 ); setNumCols( 0 ); } - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); } @@ -2033,7 +2033,7 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQDataTable::currentRecord() const void TQDataTable::sortAscending( int col ) { - sortColumn( col, TRUE ); + sortColumn( col, true ); } /*! @@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ void TQDataTable::sortAscending( int col ) void TQDataTable::sortDescending( int col ) { - sortColumn( col, FALSE ); + sortColumn( col, false ); } /*! @@ -2065,13 +2065,13 @@ void TQDataTable::refresh( TQDataTable::Refresh mode ) bool refreshData = ( (mode & RefreshData) == RefreshData ); bool refreshCol = ( (mode & RefreshColumns) == RefreshColumns ); if ( ( (mode & RefreshAll) == RefreshAll ) ) { - refreshData = TRUE; - refreshCol = TRUE; + refreshData = true; + refreshCol = true; } if ( !refreshCol && d->fld.count() && numCols() == 0 ) - refreshCol = TRUE; - viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - d->haveAllRows = FALSE; + refreshCol = true; + viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + d->haveAllRows = false; if ( refreshData ) { if ( !d->cur.refresh() && d->cur.cursor() ) { handleError( d->cur.cursor()->lastError() ); @@ -2113,8 +2113,8 @@ void TQDataTable::refresh( TQDataTable::Refresh mode ) } } } - viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); - viewport()->repaint( FALSE ); + viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); + viewport()->repaint( false ); horizontalHeader()->repaint(); verticalHeader()->repaint(); setSize( cur ); @@ -2151,7 +2151,7 @@ bool TQDataTable::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) { TQSqlCursor* cur = sqlCursor(); if ( !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; bool found = d->cur.findBuffer( idx, atHint ); if ( found ) setCurrentCell( cur->at(), currentColumn() ); @@ -2232,7 +2232,7 @@ void TQDataTable::drawContents( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) void TQDataTable::hideColumn( int col ) { - d->fldHidden[col] = TRUE; + d->fldHidden[col] = true; refresh( RefreshColumns ); } @@ -2242,7 +2242,7 @@ void TQDataTable::hideColumn( int col ) void TQDataTable::showColumn( int col ) { - d->fldHidden[col] = FALSE; + d->fldHidden[col] = false; refresh( RefreshColumns ); } diff --git a/src/sql/tqdatatable.h b/src/sql/tqdatatable.h index 530d30ce1..c287ec042 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqdatatable.h +++ b/src/sql/tqdatatable.h @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQDataTable : public TQTable public: TQDataTable ( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDataTable(); virtual void addColumn( const TQString& fieldName, @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public: TQStringList sort() const; virtual void setSqlCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor = 0, - bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE ); + bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false ); TQSqlCursor* sqlCursor() const; virtual void setNullText( const TQString& nullText ); @@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ public: RefreshAll = 3 }; void refresh( Refresh mode ); - void sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, - bool wholeRows = FALSE ); + void sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, + bool wholeRows = false ); TQString text ( int row, int col ) const; TQVariant value ( int row, int col ) const; TQSqlRecord* currentRecord() const; @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ public slots: void setColumnWidth( int col, int w ); void adjustColumn( int col ); void setColumnStretchable( int col, bool stretch ); - void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeaders = FALSE ); + void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeaders = false ); protected: virtual bool insertCurrent(); diff --git a/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp b/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp index 098d850c7..6c1cf4a60 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & v case TQVariant::CString: case TQVariant::Double: w = new TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_editor_double" ); - ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( FALSE ); + ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( false ); break; case TQVariant::Date: w = new TQDateEdit( parent, "qt_editor_date" ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.cpp index 55f9c9a38..5950b79e9 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.cpp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& { static TQString blank( " " ); TQString filter; - bool separator = FALSE; + bool separator = false; for ( uint j = 0; j < rec->count(); ++j ) { TQSqlField* f = rec->field( j ); if ( rec->isGenerated( j ) ) { @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& filter += sep + blank; filter += qWhereClause( prefix, f, driver ); filter += blank; - separator = TRUE; + separator = true; } } return filter; @@ -145,13 +145,13 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& For browsing data, a cursor must first select() data from the database. After a successful select() the cursor is active - (isActive() returns TRUE), but is initially not positioned on a - valid record (isValid() returns FALSE). To position the cursor on + (isActive() returns true), but is initially not positioned on a + valid record (isValid() returns false). To position the cursor on a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, next(), prev(), first(), last(), or seek(). Once positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using value(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns - FALSE, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record + false, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and the values returned by value() are undefined. For example: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& view name in the database. Then, select() is called, which can be optionally parameterised to filter and order the records retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using next(). - When next() returns FALSE, there are no more records to process, + When next() returns false, there are no more records to process, and the loop terminates. For editing records (rows of data), a cursor contains a separate @@ -209,10 +209,10 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated - (isValid() return FALSE). The reason for this is that any changes + (isValid() return false). The reason for this is that any changes made to the database will not be visible until select() is called to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing - FALSE to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor + false to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when navigating the cursor until select() is called. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ TQString qWhereClause( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& /*! Constructs a cursor on database \a db using table or view \a name. - If \a autopopulate is TRUE (the default), the \a name of the + If \a autopopulate is true (the default), the \a name of the cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the database so that field information can be automatically created. If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::filter() const } /*! - Sets the name of the cursor to \a name. If \a autopopulate is TRUE + Sets the name of the cursor to \a name. If \a autopopulate is true (the default), the \a name must correspond to a valid table or view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep ) co { TQString pflist; TQString pfix = prefix.isEmpty() ? TQString::null : prefix + "."; - bool comma = FALSE; + bool comma = false; for ( uint i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) { const TQString fname = fieldName( i ); @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep ) co if( comma ) pflist += sep + " "; pflist += pfix + fname; - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } } return pflist; @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ void TQSqlCursor::remove( int pos ) /*! Sets the generated flag for the field \a name to \a generated. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have - \a generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is + \a generated set to true are included in the SQL that is generated by insert(), update() or del(). \sa isGenerated() @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated( int i, bool generated ) /*! Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If - \a setFromCursor is TRUE (the default), the index fields are + \a setFromCursor is true (the default), the index fields are populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current record. */ @@ -618,8 +618,8 @@ TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::index( const char* fieldName ) const /*! Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the filter criteria \a filter. The data is returned in the order - specified by the index \a sort. Returns TRUE if the data was - successfully selected; otherwise returns FALSE. + specified by the index \a sort. Returns true if the data was + successfully selected; otherwise returns false. The \a filter is a string containing a SQL \c WHERE clause but without the 'WHERE' keyword. The cursor is initially positioned at @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::select( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort ) { TQString fieldList = toString( d->nm ); if ( fieldList.isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQString str= "select " + fieldList; str += " from " + d->nm; if ( !filter.isEmpty() ) { @@ -798,12 +798,12 @@ void TQSqlCursor::setCalculated( const TQString& name, bool calculated ) return; d->infoBuffer[ pos ].setCalculated( calculated ); if ( calculated ) - setGenerated( pos, FALSE ); + setGenerated( pos, false ); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field \a name exists and is calculated; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field \a name exists and is calculated; + otherwise returns false. \sa setCalculated() */ @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::isCalculated( const TQString& name ) const { int pos = position( name ); if ( pos < 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->infoBuffer[ pos ].isCalculated(); } @@ -835,8 +835,8 @@ void TQSqlCursor::setTrimmed( const TQString& name, bool trim ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field \a name exists and is trimmed; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field \a name exists and is trimmed; otherwise + returns false. When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed. @@ -848,13 +848,13 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::isTrimmed( const TQString& name ) const { int pos = position( name ); if ( pos < 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->infoBuffer[ pos ].isTrim(); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. - The default is FALSE. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using + Returns true if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns false. + The default is false. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using insert(), update() or del(). \sa setMode() @@ -866,8 +866,8 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::isReadOnly() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns + false. \sa setMode() */ @@ -879,8 +879,8 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::canInsert() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns + false. \sa setMode() */ @@ -891,8 +891,8 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::canUpdate() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns + false. \sa setMode() */ @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQString& prefix, TQSqlField* field, const ".", the field name, the \a fieldSep and the field value. If the \a prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The fields are then joined together separated by \a sep. Fields - where isGenerated() returns FALSE are not included. This function + where isGenerated() returns false are not included. This function is useful for generating SQL statements. */ @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const { static TQString blank( " " ); TQString filter; - bool separator = FALSE; + bool separator = false; for ( uint j = 0; j < count(); ++j ) { TQSqlField* f = rec->field( j ); if ( rec->isGenerated( j ) ) { @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const filter += sep + blank; filter += toString( prefix, f, fieldSep ); filter += blank; - separator = TRUE; + separator = true; } } return filter; @@ -965,7 +965,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const If the \a prefix is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The field values are taken from \a rec. The fields are then joined together separated by \a sep. Fields where isGenerated() - returns FALSE are ignored. This function is useful for generating + returns false are ignored. This function is useful for generating SQL statements. */ @@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQSqlIndex& i, TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQS const TQString& fieldSep, const TQString& sep ) const { TQString filter; - bool separator = FALSE; + bool separator = false; for( uint j = 0; j < i.count(); ++j ){ if ( rec->isGenerated( j ) ) { if( separator ) { @@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQSqlIndex& i, TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQS TQString fn = i.fieldName( j ); TQSqlField* f = rec->field( fn ); filter += toString( prefix, f, fieldSep ); - separator = TRUE; + separator = true; } } return filter; @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQSqlIndex& i, TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQS number of rows affected by the insert. For error information, use lastError(). - If \a invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor will no longer + If \a invalidate is true (the default), the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before navigating to a valid record. @@ -1020,14 +1020,14 @@ TQString TQSqlCursor::toString( const TQSqlIndex& i, TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQS int TQSqlCursor::insert( bool invalidate ) { if ( ( d->md & Insert ) != Insert || !driver() ) - return FALSE; + return false; int k = d->editBuffer.count(); if ( k == 0 ) return 0; TQString fList; TQString vList; - bool comma = FALSE; + bool comma = false; // use a prepared query if the driver supports it if ( driver()->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries ) ) { int cnt = 0; @@ -1040,9 +1040,9 @@ int TQSqlCursor::insert( bool invalidate ) vList += ","; } fList += f->name(); - vList += (oraStyle == TRUE) ? ":f" + TQString::number(cnt) : TQString("?"); + vList += oraStyle ? ":f" + TQString::number(cnt) : TQString("?"); cnt++; - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } } if ( !comma ) { @@ -1061,7 +1061,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::insert( bool invalidate ) } fList += f->name(); vList += driver()->formatValue( f ); - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } } @@ -1076,8 +1076,8 @@ int TQSqlCursor::insert( bool invalidate ) } /*! - Returns the current internal edit buffer. If \a copy is TRUE (the - default is FALSE), the current cursor field values are first + Returns the current internal edit buffer. If \a copy is true (the + default is false), the current cursor field values are first copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::editBuffer( bool copy ) returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( - TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so + true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. \sa editBuffer() update() @@ -1113,8 +1113,8 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::editBuffer( bool copy ) TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate() { // memorize the primary keys as they were before the user changed the values in editBuffer - TQSqlRecord* buf = editBuffer( TRUE ); - TQSqlIndex idx = primaryIndex( FALSE ); + TQSqlRecord* buf = editBuffer( true ); + TQSqlIndex idx = primaryIndex( false ); if ( !idx.isEmpty() ) d->editIndex = toString( idx, buf, d->nm, "=", "and" ); else @@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate() returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( - TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so + true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified. \sa editBuffer() del() @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate() TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::primeDelete() { - return editBuffer( TRUE ); + return editBuffer( true ); } /*! @@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ TQSqlRecord* TQSqlCursor::primeInsert() cursor's primary index are updated. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no update is performed and 0 is returned. - If \a invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no + If \a invalidate is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example: @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( bool invalidate ) Only records which meet the filter criteria are updated, otherwise all records in the table are updated. - If \a invalidate is TRUE (the default), the cursor can no longer + If \a invalidate is true (the default), the cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. @@ -1218,7 +1218,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( bool invalidate ) int TQSqlCursor::update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate ) { if ( ( d->md & Update ) != Update ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } int k = count(); if ( k == 0 ) { @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate ) // use a prepared query if the driver supports it if ( driver()->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries ) ) { TQString fList; - bool comma = FALSE; + bool comma = false; int cnt = 0; bool oraStyle = driver()->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::NamedPlaceholders ); for( int j = 0; j < k; ++j ) { @@ -1237,9 +1237,9 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate ) if ( comma ) { fList += ","; } - fList += f->name() + " = " + (oraStyle == TRUE ? ":f" + TQString::number(cnt) : TQString("?")); + fList += f->name() + " = " + (oraStyle ? ":f" + TQString::number(cnt) : TQString("?")); cnt++; - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } } if ( !comma ) { @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate ) Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If \a - invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer + invalidate is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example: @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate ) int TQSqlCursor::del( bool invalidate ) { - TQSqlIndex idx = primaryIndex( FALSE ); + TQSqlIndex idx = primaryIndex( false ); if ( idx.isEmpty() ) return del( qWhereClause( &d->editBuffer, d->nm, "and", driver() ), invalidate ); else @@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ int TQSqlCursor::del( bool invalidate ) Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the filter \a filter. Only records which meet the filter criteria are deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If \a - invalidate is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer + invalidate is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For error information, use lastError(). @@ -1384,8 +1384,8 @@ int TQSqlCursor::applyPrepared( const TQString& q, bool invalidate ) /*! \reimp - Executes the SQL query \a sql. Returns TRUE of the cursor is - active, otherwise returns FALSE. + Executes the SQL query \a sql. Returns true of the cursor is + active, otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlCursor::exec( const TQString & sql ) @@ -1434,10 +1434,10 @@ void TQSqlCursor::sync() d->lastAt = at(); uint i = 0; uint j = 0; - bool haveCalculatedFields = FALSE; + bool haveCalculatedFields = false; for ( ; i < count(); ++i ) { if ( !haveCalculatedFields && d->infoBuffer[i].isCalculated() ) { - haveCalculatedFields = TRUE; + haveCalculatedFields = true; } if ( TQSqlRecord::isGenerated( i ) ) { TQVariant v = TQSqlQuery::value( j ); @@ -1507,8 +1507,8 @@ void TQSqlCursor::insert( int pos, const TQSqlField& field ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field \a i is NULL or if there is no field at - position \a i; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field \a i is NULL or if there is no field at + position \a i; otherwise returns false. This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( \a i ) */ @@ -1519,8 +1519,8 @@ bool TQSqlCursor::isNull( int i ) const /*! \overload - Returns TRUE if the field called \a name is NULL or if there is no - field called \a name; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field called \a name is NULL or if there is no + field called \a name; otherwise returns false. This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( \a name ) */ diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.h b/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.h index a8530ec53..35a06daef 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlcursor.h @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ class TQSqlCursorPrivate; class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQSqlCursor : public TQSqlRecord, public TQSqlQuery { public: - TQSqlCursor( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase* db = 0 ); + TQSqlCursor( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, TQSqlDatabase* db = 0 ); TQSqlCursor( const TQSqlCursor & other ); TQSqlCursor& operator=( const TQSqlCursor& other ); ~TQSqlCursor(); @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ public: TQVariant value( const TQString& name ) const; void setValue( int i, const TQVariant& val ); void setValue( const TQString& name, const TQVariant& val ); - virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool prime = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool prime = true ) const; virtual TQSqlIndex index( const TQStringList& fieldNames ) const; TQSqlIndex index( const TQString& fieldName ) const; TQSqlIndex index( const char* fieldName ) const; @@ -92,13 +92,13 @@ public: void setGenerated( const TQString& name, bool generated ); void setGenerated( int i, bool generated ); - virtual TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool copy = FALSE ); + virtual TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool copy = false ); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeInsert(); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeUpdate(); virtual TQSqlRecord* primeDelete(); - virtual int insert( bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int update( bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int del( bool invalidate = TRUE ); + virtual int insert( bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int update( bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int del( bool invalidate = true ); virtual void setMode( int flags ); int mode() const; @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ public: TQSqlIndex sort() const; virtual void setFilter( const TQString& filter ); TQString filter() const; - virtual void setName( const TQString& name, bool autopopulate = TRUE ); + virtual void setName( const TQString& name, bool autopopulate = true ); TQString name() const; TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = "," ) const; @@ -133,8 +133,8 @@ protected: bool exec( const TQString & sql ); virtual TQVariant calculateField( const TQString& name ); - virtual int update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ); - virtual int del( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE ); + virtual int update( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true ); + virtual int del( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true ); virtual TQString toString( const TQString& prefix, TQSqlField* field, const TQString& fieldSep ) const; virtual TQString toString( TQSqlRecord* rec, const TQString& prefix, const TQString& fieldSep, diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp index f818a8f62..4734c2d09 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp @@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ public: ~TQNullResult(){} protected: TQVariant data( int ) { return TQVariant(); } - bool reset ( const TQString& sqlquery ) { TQString s(sqlquery); return FALSE; } - bool fetch( int i ) { i = i; return FALSE; } - bool fetchFirst() { return FALSE; } - bool fetchLast() { return FALSE; } - bool isNull( int ) {return FALSE; } + bool reset ( const TQString& sqlquery ) { TQString s(sqlquery); return false; } + bool fetch( int i ) { i = i; return false; } + bool fetchFirst() { return false; } + bool fetchLast() { return false; } + bool isNull( int ) {return false; } TQSqlRecord record() {return TQSqlRecord();} int size() {return 0;} int numRowsAffected() {return 0;} @@ -135,16 +135,16 @@ class TQNullDriver : public TQSqlDriver public: TQNullDriver(): TQSqlDriver(){} ~TQNullDriver(){} - bool hasFeature( DriverFeature /* f */ ) const { return FALSE; } ; + bool hasFeature( DriverFeature /* f */ ) const { return false; } ; bool open( const TQString & , const TQString & , const TQString & , const TQString &, int ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } void close() {} - bool ping() { return TRUE; } + bool ping() { return true; } TQSqlQuery createQuery() const { return TQSqlQuery( new TQNullResult(this) ); } }; @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ TQDriverDict* TQSqlDatabaseManager::driverDict() TQSqlDatabaseManager* sqlConnection = instance(); if ( !sqlConnection->drDict ) { sqlConnection->drDict = new TQDriverDict(); - sqlConnection->drDict->setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + sqlConnection->drDict->setAutoDelete( true ); } return sqlConnection->drDict; } @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ TQSqlDatabaseManager* TQSqlDatabaseManager::instance() /*! Returns the database connection called \a name. If \a open is - TRUE, the database connection is opened. If \a name does not exist + true, the database connection is opened. If \a name does not exist in the list of managed databases, 0 is returned. */ @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ TQSqlDatabase* TQSqlDatabaseManager::database( const TQString& name, bool open ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains \a name; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the list of database connections contains \a name; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlDatabaseManager::contains( const TQString& name ) @@ -265,8 +265,8 @@ bool TQSqlDatabaseManager::contains( const TQString& name ) TQSqlDatabaseManager* sqlConnection = instance(); TQSqlDatabase* db = sqlConnection->dbDict.find( name ); if ( db ) - return TRUE; - return FALSE; + return true; + return false; } @@ -308,9 +308,9 @@ TQSqlDatabase* TQSqlDatabaseManager::addDatabase( TQSqlDatabase* db, const TQStr void TQSqlDatabaseManager::removeDatabase( const TQString& name ) { TQSqlDatabaseManager* sqlConnection = instance(); - sqlConnection->dbDict.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + sqlConnection->dbDict.setAutoDelete( true ); sqlConnection->dbDict.remove( name ); - sqlConnection->dbDict.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + sqlConnection->dbDict.setAutoDelete( false ); } @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ TQSqlDatabase* TQSqlDatabase::addDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& /*! Returns the database connection called \a connectionName. The database connection must have been previously added with - addDatabase(). If \a open is TRUE (the default) and the database + addDatabase(). If \a open is true (the default) and the database connection is not already open it is opened now. If no \a connectionName is specified the default connection is used. If \a connectionName does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is @@ -565,8 +565,8 @@ void TQSqlDatabase::registerSqlDriver( const TQString& name, const TQSqlDriverCr } /*! - Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains \a - connectionName; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the list of database connections contains \a + connectionName; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlDatabase::contains( const TQString& connectionName ) @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ TQSqlQuery TQSqlDatabase::exec( const TQString & query ) const /*! Opens the database connection using the current connection values. - Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error + Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function. \sa lastError() @@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::open() \overload Opens the database connection using the given \a user name and \a - password. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error + password. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function. This function does not store the password it is given. Instead, @@ -806,8 +806,8 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::ping() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the database connection is currently open; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the database connection is currently open; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpen() const @@ -816,8 +816,8 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpen() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if there was an error opening the database - connection; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be + Returns true if there was an error opening the database + connection; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function. */ @@ -828,8 +828,8 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError() const /*! Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports - transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise - returns FALSE. + transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise + returns false. \sa TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() commit() rollback() */ @@ -837,14 +837,14 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError() const bool TQSqlDatabase::transaction() { if ( !d->driver->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->driver->beginTransaction(); } /*! Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports - transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise - returns FALSE. + transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise + returns false. \sa TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() rollback() */ @@ -852,14 +852,14 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::transaction() bool TQSqlDatabase::commit() { if ( !d->driver->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->driver->commitTransaction(); } /*! Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports - transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise - returns FALSE. + transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise + returns false. \sa TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() commit() transaction() */ @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::commit() bool TQSqlDatabase::rollback() { if ( !d->driver->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::Transactions ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->driver->rollbackTransaction(); } @@ -1229,8 +1229,8 @@ TQString TQSqlDatabase::connectOptions() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if a driver called \a name is available; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if a driver called \a name is available; otherwise + returns false. \sa drivers() */ @@ -1241,9 +1241,9 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable( const TQString& name ) TQStringList::ConstIterator it = l.begin(); for ( ;it != l.end(); ++it ) { if ( *it == name ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! \overload diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h b/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h index 84e0b1baa..1629b8ad4 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ public: static TQSqlDatabase* addDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); static TQSqlDatabase* addDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); - static TQSqlDatabase* database( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE ); + static TQSqlDatabase* database( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true ); static void removeDatabase( const TQString& connectionName ); static void removeDatabase( TQSqlDatabase* db ); static bool contains( const TQString& connectionName = defaultConnection ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp index d688b9a46..d608805cd 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver() order to open a database connection on database \a db, using user name \a user, password \a password, host \a host and port \a port. - The function \e must return TRUE on success and FALSE on failure. + The function \e must return true on success and false on failure. \sa setOpen() @@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver() \fn bool TQSqlDriver::close() Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in - order to close the database connection. Return TRUE on success, - FALSE on failure. + order to close the database connection. Return true on success, + false on failure. \sa setOpen() @@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver() //} /*! - Returns TRUE if the database connection is open; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the database connection is open; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQSqlDriver::isOpen() const @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ bool TQSqlDriver::isOpen() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the there was an error opening the database - connection; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the there was an error opening the database + connection; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlDriver::isOpenError() const @@ -178,8 +178,8 @@ bool TQSqlDriver::isOpenError() const /*! \fn bool TQSqlDriver::hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const - Returns TRUE if the driver supports feature \a f; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the driver supports feature \a f; otherwise + returns false. Note that some databases need to be open() before this can be determined. @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ void TQSqlDriver::setOpen( bool o ) /*! Protected function which sets the open error state of the database to \a e. Derived classes can use this function to report the - status of open(). Note that if \a e is TRUE the open state of the - database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns FALSE). + status of open(). Note that if \a e is true the open state of the + database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns false). \sa open(), setOpenError() */ @@ -224,41 +224,41 @@ void TQSqlDriver::setOpenError( bool e ) /*! Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin - a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. - The default implementation returns FALSE. + a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. + The default implementation returns false. \sa commitTransaction(), rollbackTransaction() */ bool TQSqlDriver::beginTransaction() { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit - a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. - The default implementation returns FALSE. + a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. + The default implementation returns false. \sa beginTransaction(), rollbackTransaction() */ bool TQSqlDriver::commitTransaction() { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to - rollback a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise - return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE. + rollback a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise + return false. The default implementation returns false. \sa beginTransaction(), commitTransaction() */ bool TQSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction() { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ TQString TQSqlDriver::nullText() const in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped (replaced with two single-quote characters). If \a trimStrings is - TRUE (the default is FALSE), all trailing whitespace is trimmed + true (the default is false), all trailing whitespace is trimmed from the field. \i If \a field is date/time data, the value is formatted in ISO @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ TQString TQSqlDriver::formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings ) c user, password \a password, host \a host, port \a port and connection options \a connOpts. - Returns TRUE on success and FALSE on failure. + Returns true on success and false on failure. \sa setOpen() */ diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h b/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h index 34309ff37..2d041d9ca 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public: virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo( const TQString& tablename ) const; virtual TQSqlRecordInfo recordInfo( const TQSqlQuery& query ) const; virtual TQString nullText() const; - virtual TQString formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const; + virtual TQString formatValue( const TQSqlField* field, bool trimStrings = false ) const; TQSqlError lastError() const; virtual bool hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const = 0; diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp index 3598a7cac..0f8d202c6 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * parent, case TQVariant::CString: case TQVariant::Double: w = new TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_editor_double" ); - ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( FALSE ); + ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( false ); break; case TQVariant::Date: w = new TQDateEdit( parent, "qt_editor_date" ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlextension_p.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlextension_p.cpp index 6ad4251c3..4c1dd252b 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlextension_p.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlextension_p.cpp @@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ TQSqlExtension::~TQSqlExtension() bool TQSqlExtension::prepare( const TQString& /*query*/ ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } bool TQSqlExtension::exec() { - return FALSE; + return false; } void TQSqlExtension::bindValue( const TQString& placeholder, const TQVariant& val, TQSql::ParameterType tp ) diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlfield.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlfield.cpp index 7a99de333..b87f0d570 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlfield.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlfield.cpp @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ */ TQSqlField::TQSqlField( const TQString& fieldName, TQVariant::Type type ) - : nm(fieldName), ro(FALSE), nul(FALSE) + : nm(fieldName), ro(false), nul(false) { d = new TQSqlFieldPrivate(); d->type = type; @@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ TQSqlField& TQSqlField::operator=( const TQSqlField& other ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field is equal to \a other; otherwise returns - FALSE. Fields are considered equal when the following field + Returns true if the field is equal to \a other; otherwise returns + false. Fields are considered equal when the following field properties are the same: \list @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ TQSqlField::~TQSqlField() /*! Sets the value of the field to \a value. If the field is read-only - (isReadOnly() returns TRUE), nothing happens. If the data type of + (isReadOnly() returns true), nothing happens. If the data type of \a value differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a TQString to an @@ -199,14 +199,14 @@ void TQSqlField::setValue( const TQVariant& value ) val = value; if ( value.isNull() ) - nul = TRUE; + nul = true; else nul = val.type() == TQVariant::Invalid; } /*! Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing - happens. If \a nullify is TRUE (the default), the field is set to + happens. If \a nullify is true (the default), the field is set to NULL. */ @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ void TQSqlField::clear( bool nullify ) v.cast( type() ); val = v; if ( nullify ) - nul = TRUE; + nul = true; } /*! @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ void TQSqlField::setName( const TQString& name ) void TQSqlField::setNull() { - clear( TRUE ); + clear( true ); } /*! @@ -277,15 +277,15 @@ void TQSqlField::setReadOnly( bool readOnly ) /*! \fn bool TQSqlField::isReadOnly() const - Returns TRUE if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns + false. */ /*! \fn bool TQSqlField::isNull() const - Returns TRUE if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns + false. */ @@ -339,12 +339,12 @@ struct TQSqlFieldInfoPrivate no default value or it cannot be determined. \row \i \a typeID \i the internal typeID of the database system (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown. - \row \i \a generated \i TRUE indicates that this field should be + \row \i \a generated \i true indicates that this field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor. - \row \i \a trim \i TRUE indicates that widgets should remove + \row \i \a trim \i true indicates that widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. - \row \i \a calculated \i TRUE indicates that the value of this + \row \i \a calculated \i true indicates that the value of this field is calculated. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField(). @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other ) /*! Creates a TQSqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the - TQSqlField \a other. If \a generated is TRUE this field will be + TQSqlField \a other. If \a generated is true this field will be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor. */ TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated ) @@ -397,8 +397,8 @@ TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated ) d->prec = -1; d->typeID = 0; d->generated = generated; - d->trim = FALSE; - d->calculated = FALSE; + d->trim = false; + d->calculated = false; } /*! @@ -420,8 +420,8 @@ TQSqlFieldInfo& TQSqlFieldInfo::operator=( const TQSqlFieldInfo& other ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if this fieldinfo is equal to \a f; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if this fieldinfo is equal to \a f; otherwise returns + false. Two field infos are considered equal if all their attributes match. @@ -506,8 +506,8 @@ int TQSqlFieldInfo::typeID() const { return d->typeID; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field should be included in auto-generated - SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field should be included in auto-generated + SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns false. \sa setGenerated() */ @@ -515,8 +515,8 @@ bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isGenerated() const { return d->generated; } /*! - Returns TRUE if trailing whitespace should be removed from - character fields; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if trailing whitespace should be removed from + character fields; otherwise returns false. \sa setTrim() */ @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isTrim() const { return d->trim; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field is calculated; otherwise returns false. \sa setCalculated() */ @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isCalculated() const { return d->calculated; } /*! - If \a trim is TRUE widgets should remove trailing whitespace from + If \a trim is true widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ void TQSqlFieldInfo::setTrim( bool trim ) { d->trim = trim; } /*! - \a gen set to FALSE indicates that this field should not appear + \a gen set to false indicates that this field should not appear in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in TQSqlCursor). \sa isGenerated() @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ void TQSqlFieldInfo::setGenerated( bool gen ) { d->generated = gen; } /*! - \a calc set to TRUE indicates that this field is a calculated + \a calc set to true indicates that this field is a calculated field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField(). diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlfield.h b/src/sql/tqsqlfield.h index 580fcd7df..898e9f498 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlfield.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlfield.h @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public: bool isNull() const; virtual void setReadOnly( bool readOnly ); bool isReadOnly() const; - void clear( bool nullify = TRUE ); + void clear( bool nullify = true ); TQVariant::Type type() const; private: @@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ public: int prec = -1, const TQVariant& defValue = TQVariant(), int sqlType = 0, - bool generated = TRUE, - bool trim = FALSE, - bool calculated = FALSE ); + bool generated = true, + bool trim = false, + bool calculated = false ); TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other ); - TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE ); + TQSqlFieldInfo( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = true ); virtual ~TQSqlFieldInfo(); TQSqlFieldInfo& operator=( const TQSqlFieldInfo& other ); bool operator==( const TQSqlFieldInfo& f ) const; diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp index c3da08e30..741df3a7a 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ class TQSqlFormPrivate { public: - TQSqlFormPrivate() : propertyMap( 0 ), buf( 0 ), dirty( FALSE ) {} + TQSqlFormPrivate() : propertyMap( 0 ), buf( 0 ), dirty( false ) {} ~TQSqlFormPrivate() { if ( propertyMap ) delete propertyMap; } TQStringList fld; TQDict<TQWidget> wgt; @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ void TQSqlForm::installPropertyMap( TQSqlPropertyMap * pmap ) void TQSqlForm::setRecord( TQSqlRecord* buf ) { - d->dirty = TRUE; + d->dirty = true; d->buf = buf; } @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ void TQSqlForm::setRecord( TQSqlRecord* buf ) void TQSqlForm::insert( TQWidget * widget, const TQString& field ) { - d->dirty = TRUE; + d->dirty = true; d->wgt.insert( field, widget ); d->fld += field; } @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ void TQSqlForm::insert( TQWidget * widget, const TQString& field ) void TQSqlForm::remove( const TQString& field ) { - d->dirty = TRUE; + d->dirty = true; if ( d->fld.find( field ) != d->fld.end() ) d->fld.remove( d->fld.find( field ) ); d->wgt.remove( field ); @@ -229,8 +229,8 @@ void TQSqlForm::remove( TQWidget * widget ) /*! Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are - mapped to, in the form. If \a nullify is TRUE (the default is - FALSE), each field is also set to NULL. + mapped to, in the form. If \a nullify is true (the default is + false), each field is also set to NULL. */ void TQSqlForm::clearValues( bool nullify ) { @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ void TQSqlForm::clearValues( bool nullify ) */ void TQSqlForm::clear() { - d->dirty = TRUE; + d->dirty = true; d->fld.clear(); clearMap(); } @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ void TQSqlForm::sync() insert( d->wgt[ d->fld[ i ] ], d->buf->field( d->fld[ i ] ) ); } } - d->dirty = FALSE; + d->dirty = false; } /*! \internal diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlform.h b/src/sql/tqsqlform.h index cdd00b7cd..35fc0228f 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlform.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlform.h @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public slots: virtual void writeFields(); virtual void clear(); - virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = FALSE ); + virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = false ); protected: virtual void insert( TQWidget * widget, TQSqlField * field ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlindex.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlindex.cpp index 0a8a8f5b5..750126a43 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlindex.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlindex.cpp @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ void TQSqlIndex::setName( const TQString& name ) void TQSqlIndex::append( const TQSqlField& field ) { - append( field, FALSE ); + append( field, false ); } /*! @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ void TQSqlIndex::append( const TQSqlField& field ) Appends the field \a field to the list of indexed fields. The field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless \a desc is - TRUE. + true. */ void TQSqlIndex::append( const TQSqlField& field, bool desc ) @@ -145,19 +145,19 @@ void TQSqlIndex::append( const TQSqlField& field, bool desc ) /*! - Returns TRUE if field \a i in the index is sorted in descending - order; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if field \a i in the index is sorted in descending + order; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlIndex::isDescending( int i ) const { if ( sorts.at( i ) != sorts.end() ) return sorts[i]; - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - If \a desc is TRUE, field \a i is sorted in descending order. + If \a desc is true, field \a i is sorted in descending order. Otherwise, field \a i is sorted in ascending order (the default). If the field does not exist, nothing happens. */ @@ -180,19 +180,19 @@ void TQSqlIndex::setDescending( int i, bool desc ) "\a{prefix}.<fieldname>" If \a sep is specified, each field is separated by \a sep. If \a - verbose is TRUE (the default), each field contains a suffix + verbose is true (the default), each field contains a suffix indicating an ASCending or DESCending sort order. */ TQString TQSqlIndex::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep, bool verbose ) const { TQString s; - bool comma = FALSE; + bool comma = false; for ( uint i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) { if( comma ) s += sep + " "; s += createField( i, prefix, verbose ); - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } return s; } @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ TQString TQSqlIndex::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep, bool "\a{prefix}.<fieldname>" - If \a verbose is TRUE (the default), each field contains a suffix + If \a verbose is true (the default), each field contains a suffix indicating an ASCending or DESCending sort order. Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ TQStringList TQSqlIndex::toStringList( const TQString& prefix, bool verbose ) co /*! \internal Creates a string representing the field number \a i using prefix \a - prefix. If \a verbose is TRUE, ASC or DESC is included in the field + prefix. If \a verbose is true, ASC or DESC is included in the field description if the field is sorted in ASCending or DESCending order. */ @@ -263,11 +263,11 @@ TQSqlIndex TQSqlIndex::fromStringList( const TQStringList& l, const TQSqlCursor* TQSqlIndex newSort; for ( uint i = 0; i < l.count(); ++i ) { TQString f = l[ i ]; - bool desc = FALSE; + bool desc = false; if ( f.mid( f.length()-3 ) == "ASC" ) f = f.mid( 0, f.length()-3 ); if ( f.mid( f.length()-4 ) == "DESC" ) { - desc = TRUE; + desc = true; f = f.mid( 0, f.length()-4 ); } int dot = f.findRev( '.' ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlindex.h b/src/sql/tqsqlindex.h index 066c693c1..cd3e7c5f3 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlindex.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlindex.h @@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ public: TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = ",", - bool verbose = TRUE ) const; + bool verbose = true ) const; TQStringList toStringList( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, - bool verbose = TRUE ) const; + bool verbose = true ) const; static TQSqlIndex fromStringList( const TQStringList& l, const TQSqlCursor* cursor ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp index 64345bde2..75f37d239 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ class TQSqlCursorManagerPrivate { public: TQSqlCursorManagerPrivate() - : cur( 0 ), autoDelete( FALSE ) + : cur( 0 ), autoDelete( false ) {} TQString ftr; @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ TQString TQSqlCursorManager::filter() const /*! \internal - Sets auto-delete to \a enable. If TRUE, the default cursor will + Sets auto-delete to \a enable. If true, the default cursor will be deleted when necessary. \sa autoDelete() @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ void TQSqlCursorManager::setAutoDelete( bool enable ) /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if auto-deletion is enabled, otherwise FALSE. + Returns true if auto-deletion is enabled, otherwise false. \sa setAutoDelete() @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::autoDelete() const /*! \internal Sets the default cursor used by the manager to \a cursor. If \a - autoDelete is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the manager takes + autoDelete is true (the default is false), the manager takes ownership of the \a cursor pointer, which will be deleted when the manager is destroyed, or when setCursor() is called again. To activate the \a cursor use refresh(). @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ TQSqlCursor* TQSqlCursorManager::cursor() const /*! \internal Refreshes the manager using the default cursor. The manager's - filter and sort are applied. Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if an + filter and sort are applied. Returns true on success, false if an error occurred or there is no current cursor. \sa setFilter() setSort() @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::refresh() { TQSqlCursor* cur = cursor(); if ( !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQString currentFilter = d->ftr; TQStringList currentSort = d->srt; TQSqlIndex newSort = TQSqlIndex::fromStringList( currentSort, cur ); @@ -249,20 +249,20 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::refresh() /* \internal - Returns TRUE if the \a buf field values that correspond to \a idx + Returns true if the \a buf field values that correspond to \a idx match the field values in \a cur that correspond to \a idx. */ static bool index_matches( const TQSqlCursor* cur, const TQSqlRecord* buf, const TQSqlIndex& idx ) { - bool indexEquals = FALSE; + bool indexEquals = false; for ( uint i = 0; i < idx.count(); ++i ) { const TQString fn( idx.field(i)->name() ); if ( cur->value( fn ) == buf->value( fn ) ) - indexEquals = TRUE; + indexEquals = true; else { - indexEquals = FALSE; + indexEquals = false; break; } } @@ -352,16 +352,16 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) #endif TQSqlCursor* cur = cursor(); if ( !cur ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !cur->isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !idx.count() ) { if ( cur->at() == TQSql::BeforeFirst ) cur->next(); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQSqlRecord* buf = cur->editBuffer(); - bool indexEquals = FALSE; + bool indexEquals = false; #ifdef QT_DEBUG_DATAMANAGER tqDebug(" Checking hint..."); #endif @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) if ( !cur->seek( mid ) ) break; if ( index_matches( cur, buf, idx ) ) { - indexEquals = TRUE; + indexEquals = true; break; } int c = compare_recs( buf, cur, cur->sort() ); @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) if ( !cur->seek( mid ) ) break; if ( index_matches( cur, buf, idx ) ) { - indexEquals = TRUE; + indexEquals = true; break; } } while ( compare_recs( buf, cur, cur->sort() ) == 0 ); @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) if ( !cur->seek( mid ) ) break; if ( index_matches( cur, buf, idx ) ) { - indexEquals = TRUE; + indexEquals = true; break; } } while ( compare_recs( buf, cur, cur->sort() ) == 0 ); @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ bool TQSqlCursorManager::findBuffer( const TQSqlIndex& idx, int atHint ) cur->seek( startIdx ); } for ( ;; ) { - indexEquals = FALSE; + indexEquals = false; indexEquals = index_matches( cur, buf, idx ); if ( indexEquals ) break; @@ -620,8 +620,8 @@ class TQDataManagerPrivate { public: TQDataManagerPrivate() - : mode( TQSql::None ), autoEd( TRUE ), confEdits( 3 ), - confCancs( FALSE ) {} + : mode( TQSql::None ), autoEd( true ), confEdits( 3 ), + confCancs( false ) {} TQSql::Op mode; bool autoEd; TQBitArray confEdits; @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ void TQDataManager::setAutoEdit( bool autoEdit ) /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if auto-edit mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if auto-edit mode is enabled; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -738,8 +738,8 @@ bool TQDataManager::autoEdit() const /*! \internal - If \a confirm is TRUE, all edit operations (inserts, updates and - deletes) will be confirmed by the user. If \a confirm is FALSE (the + If \a confirm is true, all edit operations (inserts, updates and + deletes) will be confirmed by the user. If \a confirm is false (the default), all edits are posted to the database immediately. */ @@ -750,8 +750,8 @@ void TQDataManager::setConfirmEdits( bool confirm ) /*! \internal - If \a confirm is TRUE, all inserts will be confirmed by the user. - If \a confirm is FALSE (the default), all edits are posted to the + If \a confirm is true, all inserts will be confirmed by the user. + If \a confirm is false (the default), all edits are posted to the database immediately. */ @@ -763,8 +763,8 @@ void TQDataManager::setConfirmInsert( bool confirm ) /*! \internal - If \a confirm is TRUE, all updates will be confirmed by the user. - If \a confirm is FALSE (the default), all edits are posted to the + If \a confirm is true, all updates will be confirmed by the user. + If \a confirm is false (the default), all edits are posted to the database immediately. */ @@ -776,8 +776,8 @@ void TQDataManager::setConfirmUpdate( bool confirm ) /*! \internal - If \a confirm is TRUE, all deletes will be confirmed by the user. - If \a confirm is FALSE (the default), all edits are posted to the + If \a confirm is true, all deletes will be confirmed by the user. + If \a confirm is false (the default), all edits are posted to the database immediately. */ @@ -789,8 +789,8 @@ void TQDataManager::setConfirmDelete( bool confirm ) /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if the table confirms all edit operations (inserts, - updates and deletes), otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the table confirms all edit operations (inserts, + updates and deletes), otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDataManager::confirmEdits() const @@ -800,8 +800,8 @@ bool TQDataManager::confirmEdits() const /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if the table confirms inserts, otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the table confirms inserts, otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQDataManager::confirmInsert() const @@ -811,8 +811,8 @@ bool TQDataManager::confirmInsert() const /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if the table confirms updates, otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the table confirms updates, otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQDataManager::confirmUpdate() const @@ -822,8 +822,8 @@ bool TQDataManager::confirmUpdate() const /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if the table confirms deletes, otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the table confirms deletes, otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQDataManager::confirmDelete() const @@ -833,8 +833,8 @@ bool TQDataManager::confirmDelete() const /*! \internal - If \a confirm is TRUE, all cancels will be confirmed by the user - through a message box. If \a confirm is FALSE (the default), all + If \a confirm is true, all cancels will be confirmed by the user + through a message box. If \a confirm is false (the default), all cancels occur immediately. */ @@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ void TQDataManager::setConfirmCancels( bool confirm ) /*! \internal - Returns TRUE if the table confirms cancels, otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the table confirms cancels, otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDataManager::confirmCancels() const diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h b/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h index 8b667d68e..fdad28abe 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public: TQStringList sort() const; virtual void setFilter( const TQString& filter ); TQString filter() const; - virtual void setCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE ); + virtual void setCursor( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoDelete = false ); TQSqlCursor* cursor() const; virtual void setAutoDelete( bool enable ); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlquery.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlquery.cpp index 256694eee..394532d6e 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlquery.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlquery.cpp @@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ void TQSqlResultShared::slotResultDestroyed() (e.g. \c{SET DATESTYLE=ISO} for PostgreSQL). Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to - active (isActive() returns TRUE); otherwise the query's state is + active (isActive() returns true); otherwise the query's state is set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active query must be navigated to a valid record (so that isValid() - returns TRUE) before values can be retrieved. + returns true) before values can be retrieved. Navigating records is performed with the following functions: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ void TQSqlQuery::init( const TQString& query, TQSqlDatabase* db ) d = new TQSqlResultShared( 0 ); TQSqlDatabase* database = db; if ( !database ) - database = TQSqlDatabase::database( TQSqlDatabase::defaultConnection, FALSE ); + database = TQSqlDatabase::database( TQSqlDatabase::defaultConnection, false ); if ( database ) *this = database->driver()->createQuery(); if ( !query.isNull() ) @@ -308,8 +308,8 @@ TQSqlQuery& TQSqlQuery::operator=( const TQSqlQuery& other ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the query is active and positioned on a valid - record and the \a field is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE. Note + Returns true if the query is active and positioned on a valid + record and the \a field is NULL; otherwise returns false. Note that for some drivers isNull() will not return accurate information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data. @@ -319,16 +319,16 @@ TQSqlQuery& TQSqlQuery::operator=( const TQSqlQuery& other ) bool TQSqlQuery::isNull( int field ) const { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( d->sqlResult->isActive() && d->sqlResult->isValid() ) return d->sqlResult->isNull( field ); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Executes the SQL in \a query. Returns TRUE and sets the query + Executes the SQL in \a query. Returns true and sets the query state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns - FALSE and sets the query state to inactive. The \a query string + false and sets the query state to inactive. The \a query string must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried, for example, standard SQL. @@ -345,17 +345,17 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::isNull( int field ) const bool TQSqlQuery::exec ( const TQString& query ) { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( d->sqlResult->extension() && driver()->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries ) ) d->sqlResult->extension()->clear(); - d->sqlResult->setActive( FALSE ); + d->sqlResult->setActive( false ); d->sqlResult->setLastError( TQSqlError() ); d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); if ( !driver() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::exec: no driver" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->count > 1 ) *this = driver()->createQuery(); @@ -365,13 +365,13 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::exec ( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::exec: database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( query.isNull() || query.length() == 0 ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::exec: empty query" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifdef QT_DEBUG_SQL tqDebug( "\n TQSqlQuery: " + query ); @@ -462,38 +462,38 @@ const TQSqlResult* TQSqlQuery::result() const Retrieves the record at position (offset) \a i, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and - isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function. + isSelect() must return true before calling this function. - If \a relative is FALSE (the default), the following rules apply: + If \a relative is false (the default), the following rules apply: \list \i If \a i is negative, the result is positioned before the - first record and FALSE is returned. + first record and false is returned. \i Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position \a i. If the record at position \a i could not be retrieved, the - result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If - the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned. + result is positioned after the last record and false is returned. If + the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned. \endlist - If \a relative is TRUE, the following rules apply: + If \a relative is true, the following rules apply: \list \i If the result is currently positioned before the first record or on the first record, and \a i is negative, there is no - change, and FALSE is returned. + change, and false is returned. \i If the result is currently located after the last record, and - \a i is positive, there is no change, and FALSE is returned. + \a i is positive, there is no change, and false is returned. \i If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle, and the relative offset \a i moves the result below zero, the - result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is + result is positioned before the first record and false is returned. \i Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record \a i records ahead of the current record (or \a i records behind the current record if \a i is negative). If the record at offset \a i could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record if \a i >= 0, (or before the first record if \a i is - negative), and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully - retrieved, TRUE is returned. + negative), and false is returned. If the record is successfully + retrieved, true is returned. \endlist \sa next() prev() first() last() at() isActive() isValid() @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ const TQSqlResult* TQSqlQuery::result() const bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) { if ( !isSelect() || !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; beforeSeek(); checkDetach(); int actualIdx; @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) if ( i < 0 ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } actualIdx = i; } else { @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) actualIdx = i; else { afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TQSql::AfterLast: @@ -528,14 +528,14 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) actualIdx = at() + i; } else { afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; default: if ( ( at() + i ) < 0 ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } actualIdx = at() + i; break; @@ -547,40 +547,40 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::seek: cannot seek backwards in a forward only query" ); #endif afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( actualIdx == ( at() + 1 ) && at() != TQSql::BeforeFirst ) { if ( !d->sqlResult->fetchNext() ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::AfterLast ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } afterSeek(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( actualIdx == ( at() - 1 ) ) { if ( !d->sqlResult->fetchPrev() ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } afterSeek(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( !d->sqlResult->fetch( actualIdx ) ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::AfterLast ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } afterSeek(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result - must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before - calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. + must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before + calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. The following rules apply: @@ -590,15 +590,15 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) made to retrieve the first record. \i If the result is currently located after the last record, - there is no change and FALSE is returned. + there is no change and false is returned. \i If the result is located somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made to retrieve the next record. \endlist If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after - the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully - retrieved, TRUE is returned. + the last record and false is returned. If the record is successfully + retrieved, true is returned. \sa prev() first() last() seek() at() isActive() isValid() */ @@ -606,10 +606,10 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::seek( int i, bool relative ) bool TQSqlQuery::next() { if ( !isSelect() || !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; beforeSeek(); checkDetach(); - bool b = FALSE; + bool b = false; switch ( at() ) { case TQSql::BeforeFirst: b = d->sqlResult->fetchFirst(); @@ -617,29 +617,29 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::next() return b; case TQSql::AfterLast: afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; default: if ( !d->sqlResult->fetchNext() ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::AfterLast ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } afterSeek(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } /*! Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result - must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before - calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. + must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before + calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. The following rules apply: \list \i If the result is currently located before the first record, - there is no change and FALSE is returned. + there is no change and false is returned. \i If the result is currently located after the last record, an attempt is made to retrieve the last record. @@ -649,8 +649,8 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::next() \endlist If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned - before the first record and FALSE is returned. If the record is - successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned. + before the first record and false is returned. If the record is + successfully retrieved, true is returned. \sa next() first() last() seek() at() isActive() isValid() */ @@ -658,21 +658,21 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::next() bool TQSqlQuery::prev() { if ( !isSelect() || !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( isForwardOnly() ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::seek: cannot seek backwards in a forward only query" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } beforeSeek(); checkDetach(); - bool b = FALSE; + bool b = false; switch ( at() ) { case TQSql::BeforeFirst: afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; case TQSql::AfterLast: b = d->sqlResult->fetchLast(); afterSeek(); @@ -681,20 +681,20 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::prev() if ( !d->sqlResult->fetchPrev() ) { d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); afterSeek(); - return FALSE; + return false; } afterSeek(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } /*! Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result - must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before - calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. - Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is - set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned. + must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before + calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. + Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is + set to an invalid position and false is returned. \sa next() prev() last() seek() at() isActive() isValid() */ @@ -702,16 +702,16 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::prev() bool TQSqlQuery::first() { if ( !isSelect() || !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( isForwardOnly() && at() > TQSql::BeforeFirst ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::seek: cannot seek backwards in a forward only query" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } beforeSeek(); checkDetach(); - bool b = FALSE; + bool b = false; b = d->sqlResult->fetchFirst(); afterSeek(); return b; @@ -720,10 +720,10 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::first() /*! Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result - must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before - calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. - Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is - set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned. + must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before + calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. + Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is + set to an invalid position and false is returned. \sa next() prev() first() seek() at() isActive() isValid() */ @@ -731,10 +731,10 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::first() bool TQSqlQuery::last() { if ( !isSelect() || !isActive() ) - return FALSE; + return false; beforeSeek(); checkDetach(); - bool b = FALSE; + bool b = false; b = d->sqlResult->fetchLast(); afterSeek(); return b; @@ -744,8 +744,8 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::last() Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1 if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for - non-\c SELECT statements (isSelect() returns FALSE), size() will - return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), + non-\c SELECT statements (isSelect() returns false), size() will + return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns false), -1 is returned. To determine the number of rows affected by a non-SELECT @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ int TQSqlQuery::size() const Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement, or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for \c SELECT statements, the value is undefined; see size() instead. If the - query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), -1 is returned. + query is not active (isActive() returns false), -1 is returned. \sa size() TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() */ @@ -795,56 +795,56 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlQuery::lastError() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the query is currently positioned on a valid - record; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the query is currently positioned on a valid + record; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlQuery::isValid() const { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->sqlResult->isValid(); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the query is currently active; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the query is currently active; otherwise returns + false. */ bool TQSqlQuery::isActive() const { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->sqlResult->isActive(); } /*! - Returns TRUE if the current query is a \c SELECT statement; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the current query is a \c SELECT statement; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlQuery::isSelect() const { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->sqlResult->isSelect(); } /*! - Returns TRUE if you can only scroll \e forward through a result - set; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if you can only scroll \e forward through a result + set; otherwise returns false. \sa setForwardOnly() */ bool TQSqlQuery::isForwardOnly() const { if ( !d->sqlResult ) - return FALSE; + return false; return d->sqlResult->isForwardOnly(); } /*! - Sets forward only mode to \a forward. If forward is TRUE only + Sets forward only mode to \a forward. If forward is true only next(), and seek() with positive values, are allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not need to be cached. @@ -885,9 +885,9 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::checkDetach() TQString sql = d->sqlResult->lastQuery(); *this = driver()->createQuery(); exec( sql ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } @@ -930,8 +930,8 @@ void TQSqlQuery::afterSeek() bool TQSqlQuery::prepare( const TQString& query ) { if ( !d->sqlResult || !d->sqlResult->extension() ) - return FALSE; - d->sqlResult->setActive( FALSE ); + return false; + d->sqlResult->setActive( false ); d->sqlResult->setLastError( TQSqlError() ); d->sqlResult->setAt( TQSql::BeforeFirst ); d->sqlResult->extension()->clear(); @@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::prepare: no driver" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->count > 1 ) *this = driver()->createQuery(); @@ -948,13 +948,13 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::prepare( const TQString& query ) #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::prepare: database not open" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( query.isNull() || query.length() == 0 ) { #ifdef QT_CHECK_RANGE tqWarning("TQSqlQuery::prepare: empty query" ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } #ifdef QT_DEBUG_SQL tqDebug( "\n TQSqlQuery: " + query ); @@ -997,15 +997,15 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::prepare( const TQString& query ) d->sqlResult->extension()->holders.append( Holder( rx.cap(0), i ) ); i += rx.matchedLength(); } - return TRUE; // fake prepares should always succeed + return true; // fake prepares should always succeed } } /*! \overload - Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns TRUE if the - query executed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE. + Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns true if the + query executed successfully; otherwise returns false. \sa prepare(), bindValue(), addBindValue() */ @@ -1013,7 +1013,7 @@ bool TQSqlQuery::exec() { bool ret; if ( !d->sqlResult || !d->sqlResult->extension() ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( driver()->hasFeature( TQSqlDriver::PreparedQueries ) ) { ret = d->sqlResult->extension()->exec(); } else { diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlquery.h b/src/sql/tqsqlquery.h index 5220fa27a..70c6f4b20 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlquery.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlquery.h @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ public: virtual bool exec ( const TQString& query ); virtual TQVariant value( int i ) const; - virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = FALSE ); + virtual bool seek( int i, bool relative = false ); virtual bool next(); virtual bool prev(); virtual bool first(); diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.cpp index fba3d9e63..72b8e4867 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.cpp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ class TQSqlRecordPrivate public: class info { public: - info() : nogen(FALSE){} + info() : nogen(false){} ~info() {} info( const info& other ) : field( other.field ), nogen( other.nogen ) @@ -225,9 +225,9 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::checkDetach() if ( sh->count > 1 ) { sh->deref(); sh = new TQSqlRecordShared( new TQSqlRecordPrivate( *sh->d ) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -414,8 +414,8 @@ void TQSqlRecord::clear() } /*! - Returns TRUE if there are no fields in the record; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if there are no fields in the record; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQSqlRecord::isEmpty() const @@ -425,22 +425,22 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isEmpty() const /*! - Returns TRUE if there is a field in the record called \a name; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if there is a field in the record called \a name; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlRecord::contains( const TQString& name ) const { for ( uint i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) { if ( fieldName(i).upper() == name.upper() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! Clears the value of all fields in the record. If \a nullify is - TRUE, (the default is FALSE), each field is set to NULL. + true, (the default is false), each field is set to NULL. */ void TQSqlRecord::clearValues( bool nullify ) @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ void TQSqlRecord::clearValues( bool nullify ) /*! Sets the generated flag for the field called \a name to \a generated. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only - fields that have \a generated set to TRUE are included in the SQL + fields that have \a generated set to true are included in the SQL that is generated, e.g. by TQSqlCursor. \sa isGenerated() @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isNull( int i ) if ( f ) { return f->isNull(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -509,8 +509,8 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isNull( const TQString& name ) /*! \overload - Returns TRUE if the field \a i is NULL or if there is no field at - position \a i; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field \a i is NULL or if there is no field at + position \a i; otherwise returns false. \sa fieldName() */ @@ -520,12 +520,12 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isNull( int i ) const if ( f ) { return f->isNull(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the field called \a name is NULL or if there is no - field called \a name; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field called \a name is NULL or if there is no + field called \a name; otherwise returns false. \sa position() */ @@ -560,8 +560,8 @@ void TQSqlRecord::setNull( const TQString& name ) /*! - Returns TRUE if the record has a field called \a name and this - field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the record has a field called \a name and this + field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false. \sa setGenerated() */ @@ -573,15 +573,15 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated( const TQString& name ) const /*! \overload - Returns TRUE if the record has a field at position \a i and this - field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the record has a field at position \a i and this + field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false. \sa setGenerated() */ bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated( int i ) const { if ( !field( i ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; return !sh->d->fieldInfo( i )->nogen; } @@ -601,13 +601,13 @@ bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated( int i ) const TQString TQSqlRecord::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep ) const { TQString pflist; - bool comma = FALSE; + bool comma = false; for ( uint i = 0; i < count(); ++i ){ if ( isGenerated( field(i)->name() ) ) { if( comma ) pflist += sep + " "; pflist += createField( i, prefix ); - comma = TRUE; + comma = true; } } return pflist; @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ TQString TQSqlRecord::toString( const TQString& prefix, const TQString& sep ) co Returns a list of all the record's field names, each having the prefix \a prefix. - Note that fields which have generated set to FALSE are \e not + Note that fields which have generated set to false are \e not included. (See \l{isGenerated()}). If \a prefix is supplied, e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form: diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.h b/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.h index bf0d981d8..cc77dcb78 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlrecord.h @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ public: bool isEmpty() const; bool contains( const TQString& name ) const; virtual void clear(); - virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = FALSE ); + virtual void clearValues( bool nullify = false ); uint count() const; virtual TQString toString( const TQString& prefix = TQString::null, const TQString& sep = "," ) const; diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlresult.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlresult.cpp index 05559290e..fc32b46d3 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlresult.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlresult.cpp @@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ public: db. The object is initialized to an inactive state. */ -TQSqlResult::TQSqlResult( const TQSqlDriver * db ): forwardOnly( FALSE ) +TQSqlResult::TQSqlResult( const TQSqlDriver * db ): forwardOnly( false ) { d = new TQSqlResultPrivate(); d->sqldriver = db; d->idx = TQSql::BeforeFirst; - d->isSel = FALSE; - d->active = FALSE; + d->isSel = false; + d->active = false; d->ext = new TQSqlExtension(); } @@ -127,28 +127,27 @@ int TQSqlResult::at() const /*! - Returns TRUE if the result is positioned on a valid record (that + Returns true if the result is positioned on a valid record (that is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the - last record); otherwise returns FALSE. + last record); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlResult::isValid() const { - return ( d->idx != TQSql::BeforeFirst && \ - d->idx != TQSql::AfterLast ) ? TRUE : FALSE; + return (d->idx != TQSql::BeforeFirst && d->idx != TQSql::AfterLast); } /*! \fn bool TQSqlResult::isNull( int i ) - Returns TRUE if the field at position \a i is NULL; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the field at position \a i is NULL; otherwise + returns false. */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQSqlResult::isActive() const @@ -172,8 +171,8 @@ void TQSqlResult::setAt( int at ) /*! Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement. - The \a s parameter should be TRUE if the statement is a SELECT - statement, or FALSE otherwise. + The \a s parameter should be true if the statement is a SELECT + statement, or false otherwise. */ void TQSqlResult::setSelect( bool s ) @@ -182,8 +181,8 @@ void TQSqlResult::setSelect( bool s ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the current result is from a SELECT statement; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the current result is from a SELECT statement; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlResult::isSelect() const @@ -265,8 +264,8 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError() const apply the \a query to the database. This function is called only after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should - return TRUE if the query was successful and ready to be used, - or FALSE otherwise. + return true if the query was successful and ready to be used, + or false otherwise. */ /*! @@ -275,8 +274,8 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError() const Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index \a i. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the - index \a i, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE - to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. + index \a i, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true + to indicate success, or false to signify failure. */ /*! @@ -286,7 +285,7 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError() const function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the first record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. - Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. + Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. */ /*! @@ -296,7 +295,7 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError() const function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the last record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. - Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure. + Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. */ /*! @@ -305,7 +304,7 @@ TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError() const The default implementation calls fetch() with the next index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an - appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to + appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. */ @@ -320,7 +319,7 @@ bool TQSqlResult::fetchNext() state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the previous index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with - an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to + an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure. */ @@ -330,8 +329,8 @@ bool TQSqlResult::fetchPrev() } /*! - Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result set; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if you can only scroll forward through a result set; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly() const { @@ -339,7 +338,7 @@ bool TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly() const } /*! - Sets forward only mode to \a forward. If forward is TRUE only + Sets forward only mode to \a forward. If forward is true only fetchNext() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached. forward only mode is off by default. diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.cpp b/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.cpp index 77d0548ce..57a4a43ab 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.cpp +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.cpp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ class TQSqlSelectCursorPrivate { public: - TQSqlSelectCursorPrivate() : populated( FALSE ) {} + TQSqlSelectCursorPrivate() : populated( false ) {} TQString query; bool populated : 1; }; @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ public: ... TQSqlSelectCursor* cur = new TQSqlSelectCursor( "SELECT id, firstname, lastname FROM author" ); TQDataTable* table = new TQDataTable( this ); - table->setSqlCursor( cur, TRUE, TRUE ); + table->setSqlCursor( cur, true, true ); table->refresh(); ... cur->exec( "SELECT * FROM books" ); @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ public: Constructs a read only cursor on database \a db using the query \a query. */ TQSqlSelectCursor::TQSqlSelectCursor( const TQString& query, TQSqlDatabase* db ) - : TQSqlCursor( TQString::null, FALSE, db ) + : TQSqlCursor( TQString::null, false, db ) { d = new TQSqlSelectCursorPrivate; d->query = query; @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ void TQSqlSelectCursor::populateCursor() TQSqlRecordInfo inf = driver()->recordInfo( *(TQSqlQuery*)this ); for ( TQSqlRecordInfo::const_iterator it = inf.begin(); it != inf.end(); ++it ) TQSqlCursor::append( *it ); - d->populated = TRUE; + d->populated = true; } /*! \fn TQSqlIndex TQSqlSelectCursor::primaryIndex( bool ) const diff --git a/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.h b/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.h index 13069ee6a..37a3b9190 100644 --- a/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.h +++ b/src/sql/tqsqlselectcursor.h @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public: bool select() { return TQSqlCursor::select(); } protected: - TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool = TRUE ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } + TQSqlIndex primaryIndex( bool = true ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const TQStringList& ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const TQString& ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } TQSqlIndex index( const char* ) const { return TQSqlIndex(); } @@ -76,20 +76,20 @@ protected: void clear() {} void setGenerated( const TQString&, bool ) {} void setGenerated( int, bool ) {} - TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool = FALSE ) { return 0; } + TQSqlRecord* editBuffer( bool = false ) { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeInsert() { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeUpdate() { return 0; } TQSqlRecord* primeDelete() { return 0; } - int insert( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } - int update( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } - int del( bool = TRUE ) { return 0; } + int insert( bool = true ) { return 0; } + int update( bool = true ) { return 0; } + int del( bool = true ) { return 0; } void setMode( int ) {} void setSort( const TQSqlIndex& ) {} TQSqlIndex sort() const { return TQSqlIndex(); } void setFilter( const TQString& ) {} TQString filter() const { return TQString::null; } - void setName( const TQString&, bool = TRUE ) {} + void setName( const TQString&, bool = true ) {} TQString name() const { return TQString::null; } TQString toString( const TQString& = TQString::null, const TQString& = "," ) const { return TQString::null; } bool select( const TQString &, const TQSqlIndex& = TQSqlIndex() ); diff --git a/src/styles/tqcdestyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqcdestyle.cpp index 2c3b103da..61b39ed4f 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqcdestyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqcdestyle.cpp @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ /*! Constructs a TQCDEStyle. - If \a useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), then the style will + If \a useHighlightCols is false (the default), then the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ void TQCDEStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, case CE_MenuBarItem: { if ( how & Style_Active ) // active item - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, TRUE, 1, + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); else // other item p->fillRect( r, cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ void TQCDEStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, p->setPen( pen ); p->setBrush( brush ); - p->setWorldMatrix( matrix, TRUE ); // set transformation matrix + p->setWorldMatrix( matrix, true ); // set transformation matrix p->drawPolygon( bFill ); // fill arrow p->setBrush( NoBrush ); // don't fill diff --git a/src/styles/tqcdestyle.h b/src/styles/tqcdestyle.h index 200360bd5..c31559ea7 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqcdestyle.h +++ b/src/styles/tqcdestyle.h @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_CDE TQCDEStyle : public TQMotifStyle TQ_OBJECT public: - TQCDEStyle( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ); + TQCDEStyle( bool useHighlightCols = false ); virtual ~TQCDEStyle(); int pixelMetric( PixelMetric metric, const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags elementFlags, const TQWidget *widget = 0 ) const; diff --git a/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp index a18604f48..bf1001a7d 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, break; case PE_StatusBarSection: - qDrawShadeRect( p, r, cg, TRUE, 1, 0, 0 ); + qDrawShadeRect( p, r, cg, true, 1, 0, 0 ); break; case PE_ButtonCommand: @@ -1162,14 +1162,14 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, int lw = opt.isDefault() ? pixelMetric(PM_DockWindowFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags) : opt.lineWidth(); - qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, FALSE, lw); + qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, false, lw); break; } case PE_PanelMenuBar: { int lw = opt.isDefault() ? pixelMetric(PM_MenuBarFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags) : opt.lineWidth(); - qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, FALSE, lw, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Button)); + qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, false, lw, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Button)); break; } case PE_SizeGrip: { @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, } #endif // TQT_NO_TOOLBOX case CE_ProgressBarGroove: - qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Background)); + qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Background)); break; #ifndef TQT_NO_PROGRESSBAR @@ -1726,14 +1726,14 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, pr.addCoords( 0, 1, 0, -fh-3 ); tr.addCoords( 0, pr.bottom(), 0, -3 ); pr.moveBy(shiftX, shiftY); - drawItem( p, pr, AlignCenter, cg, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, pr, AlignCenter, cg, true, &pm, TQString::null ); alignment |= AlignCenter; } else { pr.setWidth( pm.width() + 8 ); tr.addCoords( pr.right(), 0, 0, 0 ); pr.moveBy(shiftX, shiftY); - drawItem( p, pr, AlignCenter, cg, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, pr, AlignCenter, cg, true, &pm, TQString::null ); alignment |= AlignLeft | AlignVCenter; } @@ -1743,7 +1743,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, ceData.textLabel.length(), &btext); } else { rect.moveBy(shiftX, shiftY); - drawItem( p, rect, AlignCenter, cg, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, rect, AlignCenter, cg, true, &pm, TQString::null ); } } } @@ -2330,7 +2330,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, } TQRect ir; - bool down = FALSE; + bool down = false; TQPixmap pm; if ( controls & SC_TitleBarCloseButton ) { @@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if( down ) p->translate( pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, ceData, elementFlags, widget), pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftVertical, ceData, elementFlags, widget) ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, &pm, TQString::null ); p->restore(); } @@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if( down ) p->translate( pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, ceData, elementFlags, widget), pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftVertical, ceData, elementFlags, widget) ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, &pm, TQString::null ); p->restore(); } @@ -2389,7 +2389,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if( down ) p->translate( pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, ceData, elementFlags, widget), pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftVertical, ceData, elementFlags, widget) ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, &pm, TQString::null ); p->restore(); } @@ -2404,7 +2404,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if( down ) p->translate( pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, ceData, elementFlags, widget), pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftVertical, ceData, elementFlags, widget) ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, &pm, TQString::null ); p->restore(); } @@ -2419,7 +2419,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if( down ) p->translate( pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, ceData, elementFlags, widget), pixelMetric(PM_ButtonShiftVertical, ceData, elementFlags, widget) ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, &pm, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, &pm, TQString::null ); p->restore(); } } @@ -2427,7 +2427,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, if ( controls & SC_TitleBarSysMenu ) { if ( !ceData.icon.isNull() ) { ir = visualRect( querySubControlMetrics( CC_TitleBar, ceData, elementFlags, SC_TitleBarSysMenu, TQStyleOption::Default, widget ), ceData, elementFlags ); - drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, TRUE, (ceData.icon.isNull())?NULL:&ceData.icon, TQString::null ); + drawItem( p, ir, AlignCenter, ceData.colorGroup, true, (ceData.icon.isNull())?NULL:&ceData.icon, TQString::null ); } } #endif @@ -2441,7 +2441,7 @@ void TQCommonStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, PrimitiveElement pe; if ( controls & SC_SpinWidgetFrame ) - qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, TRUE ); //cstyle == Sunken ); + qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, true ); //cstyle == Sunken ); if ( controls & SC_SpinWidgetUp ) { flags = Style_Default | Style_Enabled; diff --git a/src/styles/tqcompactstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqcompactstyle.cpp index 440c379e4..83a6c8656 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqcompactstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqcompactstyle.cpp @@ -331,9 +331,9 @@ void TQCompactStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, int checkcol = styleHint(SH_MenuIndicatorColumnWidth, ceData, elementFlags, opt, NULL, NULL); if ( act && !dis ) { - qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } else { - qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); } } break; @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ void TQCompactStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, { int checkcol = styleHint(SH_MenuIndicatorColumnWidth, ceData, elementFlags, opt, NULL, NULL); - qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, FALSE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, checkcol, h, cg, false, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } break; case PE_MenuItemIndicatorCheck: diff --git a/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp index a0cd70c58..01e166a7a 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ */ TQInterlaceStyle::TQInterlaceStyle() : TQMotifStyle() { - setUseHighlightColors( TRUE ); + setUseHighlightColors( true ); } /*! \reimp @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::polish( TQApplication *app) dcg.setColor( TQColorGroup::ButtonText, low ); dcg.setColor( TQColorGroup::Text, low ); - app->setPalette( TQPalette( cg, dcg, cg ), TRUE ); + app->setPalette( TQPalette( cg, dcg, cg ), true ); } /*! @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::polish( TQApplication *app) */ void TQInterlaceStyle::unPolish( TQApplication *app) { - app->setPalette(oldPalette, TRUE); + app->setPalette(oldPalette, true); } /*! @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::polish( TQWidget* w) if ( w->inherits("TQGroupBox") || w->inherits("TQTabWidget") || w->inherits("TQPushButton") ) { - w->setAutoMask( TRUE ); + w->setAutoMask( true ); return; } if (w->inherits("TQLabel") @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::unPolish( TQWidget* w) if ( w->inherits("TQGroupBox") || w->inherits("TQTabWidget") || w->inherits("TQPushButton" ) ) { - w->setAutoMask( FALSE ); + w->setAutoMask( false ); return; } if (w->inherits("TQLabel") @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawButtonMask( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h TQBrush fill( color1 ); TQColorGroup cg; cg.setBrush( TQColorGroup::Dark, color1 ); - drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, cg, FALSE, &fill ); + drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, cg, false, &fill ); } /*! @@ -341,11 +341,11 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawPushButton( TQPushButton* btn, TQPainter *p) if ( btn->hasFocus() ) g.setBrush( TQColorGroup::Dark, black ); - drawButton( p, x1, y1, x2-x1+1, y2-y1+1, g, FALSE, &fill ); + drawButton( p, x1, y1, x2-x1+1, y2-y1+1, g, false, &fill ); if ( btn->isMenuButton() ) { int dx = (y1-y2-4)/3; - drawArrow( p, DownArrow, FALSE, + drawArrow( p, DownArrow, false, x2 - dx, dx, y1, y2 - y1, g, btn->isEnabled() ); } @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawIndicator( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, else fill = g.brush( enabled ? TQColorGroup::Base : TQColorGroup::Background ); - drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, FALSE, &fill ); + drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, false, &fill ); if ( s != TQButton::Off ) { TQPointArray a( 7*2 ); @@ -522,9 +522,9 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawComboButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h int awh, ax, ay, sh, sy, dh, ew; get_combo_parameters( buttonRect(x,y,w,h), ew, awh, ax, ay, sh, dh, sy ); - drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, FALSE, &fill ); + drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, false, &fill ); - qDrawArrow( p, DownArrow, MotifStyle, FALSE, ax, ay, awh, awh, g, TRUE ); + qDrawArrow( p, DownArrow, MotifStyle, false, ax, ay, awh, awh, g, true ); p->setPen( g.dark() ); p->drawRect( ax+1, sy+1, awh-1, sh-1 ); @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawScrollBarControls( TQPainter* p, const TQScrollBar* s } if ( controls == (AddLine | SubLine | AddPage | SubPage | Slider | First | Last ) ) - drawPanel( p, 0, 0, sb->width(), sb->height(), g, FALSE, 2, &fill ); + drawPanel( p, 0, 0, sb->width(), sb->height(), g, false, 2, &fill ); if (sliderStart > sliderMax) { // sanity check sliderStart = sliderMax; @@ -673,11 +673,11 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawScrollBarControls( TQPainter* p, const TQScrollBar* s if ( controls & AddLine ) drawArrow( p, VERTICAL ? DownArrow : RightArrow, ADD_LINE_ACTIVE, addB.x(), addB.y(), - addB.width(), addB.height(), g, TRUE ); + addB.width(), addB.height(), g, true ); if ( controls & SubLine ) drawArrow( p, VERTICAL ? UpArrow : LeftArrow, SUB_LINE_ACTIVE, subB.x(), subB.y(), - subB.width(), subB.height(), g, TRUE ); + subB.width(), subB.height(), g, true ); if ( controls & SubPage ) p->fillRect( subPageR, fill ); @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawScrollBarControls( TQPainter* p, const TQScrollBar* s if ( sliderR.isValid() ) drawButton( p, sliderR.x(), sliderR.y(), sliderR.width(), sliderR.height(), g, - FALSE, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + false, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); p->setBrushOrigin(bo); } @@ -703,13 +703,13 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawScrollBarControls( TQPainter* p, const TQScrollBar* s void TQInterlaceStyle::drawSlider ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, Orientation orient, bool, bool) { p->fillRect( x, y, w, h, g.brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) ); - drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, FALSE, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + drawButton( p, x, y, w, h, g, false, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); if ( orient == Horizontal ) { TQCOORD mid = x + w / 2; - qDrawShadeLine( p, mid, y , mid, y + h - 2, g, TRUE, 1); + qDrawShadeLine( p, mid, y , mid, y + h - 2, g, true, 1); } else { TQCOORD mid = y +h / 2; - qDrawShadeLine( p, x, mid, x + w - 2, mid, g, TRUE, 1); + qDrawShadeLine( p, x, mid, x + w - 2, mid, g, true, 1); } } @@ -723,9 +723,9 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawSliderGroove ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, in p->setPen( NoPen ); if ( o == Horizontal ) - drawButton( p, x, y+h/2-3, w, 6, g, FALSE, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); + drawButton( p, x, y+h/2-3, w, 6, g, false, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); else - drawButton( p, x+w/2-3, y, 6, h, g, FALSE, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); + drawButton( p, x+w/2-3, y, 6, h, g, false, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); } @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawSplitter( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, qDrawShadeLine( p, xPos, kPos + kSize - 1 , xPos, h, g ); drawPanel( p, xPos-sw/2+2, kPos, - kSize, kSize, g, FALSE, 2, + kSize, kSize, g, false, 2, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button )); qDrawShadeLine( p, xPos, 0, xPos, kPos, g ); } else { @@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::drawSplitter( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, qDrawShadeLine( p, 0, yPos, kPos, yPos, g ); drawPanel( p, kPos, yPos-sw/2+2, - kSize, kSize, g, FALSE, 2, + kSize, kSize, g, false, 2, &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button )); qDrawShadeLine( p, kPos + kSize -1, yPos, w, yPos, g ); diff --git a/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.h b/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.h index 8c1982712..115e0d2ec 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.h +++ b/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.h @@ -62,21 +62,21 @@ public: int defaultFrameWidth() const; TQRect pushButtonContentsRect( TQPushButton *btn ); - void drawFocusRect ( TQPainter *, const TQRect &, const TQColorGroup &, const TQColor * bg = 0, bool = FALSE ); + void drawFocusRect ( TQPainter *, const TQRect &, const TQColorGroup &, const TQColor * bg = 0, bool = false ); void drawButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); void drawButtonMask ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h ); void drawBevelButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, - const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = FALSE, + const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken = false, const TQBrush *fill = 0 ); void drawPushButton( TQPushButton* btn, TQPainter *p); TQSize indicatorSize () const; - void drawIndicator ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, int state, bool down = FALSE, bool enabled = TRUE ); + void drawIndicator ( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, int state, bool down = false, bool enabled = true ); void drawIndicatorMask( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, int ); TQSize exclusiveIndicatorSize () const; - void drawExclusiveIndicator( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool on, bool down = FALSE, bool enabled = TRUE ); + void drawExclusiveIndicator( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup & g, bool on, bool down = false, bool enabled = true ); void drawExclusiveIndicatorMask( TQPainter * p, int x, int y, int w, int h, bool ); TQRect comboButtonRect ( int x, int y, int w, int h ); void drawComboButton( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, int w, int h, const TQColorGroup &g, bool sunken, bool editable, bool enabled, const TQBrush *fb ); diff --git a/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.cpp index 6c9075495..8b13cb538 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.cpp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ struct TQMotifPlusStylePrivate { TQMotifPlusStylePrivate() - : hovering(FALSE), sliderActive(FALSE), mousePressed(FALSE), + : hovering(false), sliderActive(false), mousePressed(false), scrollbarElement(0), lastElement(0), ref(1) { ; } @@ -144,11 +144,11 @@ static void drawMotifPlusShade(TQPainter *p, /*! Constructs a TQMotifPlusStyle - If \a hoveringHighlight is TRUE (the default), then the style will + If \a hoveringHighlight is true (the default), then the style will not highlight push buttons, checkboxes, radiobuttons, comboboxes, scrollbars or sliders. */ -TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight) : TQMotifStyle(TRUE) +TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight) : TQMotifStyle(true) { if ( !singleton ) singleton = new TQMotifPlusStylePrivate; @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, case PE_PanelScrollBar: { - drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, TRUE, FALSE, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Mid)); + drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, true, false, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Mid)); break; } @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, TQRect vrect = visualRect( TQRect( x+2, y+2, checkcol, h-2 ), r ); - qDrawShadePanel( p, vrect.x(), y+2, checkcol, h-2*2, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, vrect.x(), y+2, checkcol, h-2*2, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); break; } @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, if ((elementFlags & CEF_IsDefault) || (elementFlags & CEF_AutoDefault)) { if (elementFlags & CEF_IsDefault) - drawMotifPlusShade(p, br, cg, TRUE, FALSE, + drawMotifPlusShade(p, br, cg, true, false, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Background)); br.setCoords(br.left() + dbi, @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, r -= visualRect(subRect(SR_CheckBoxIndicator, ceData, elementFlags, widget), ceData, elementFlags); p->setClipRegion(r); p->fillRect(ceData.rect, cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Midlight)); - p->setClipping(FALSE); + p->setClipping(false); } int alignment = TQApplication::reverseLayout() ? AlignRight : AlignLeft; @@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, r -= visualRect(subRect(SR_RadioButtonIndicator, ceData, elementFlags, widget), ceData, elementFlags); p->setClipRegion(r); p->fillRect(ceData.rect, cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Midlight)); - p->setClipping(FALSE); + p->setClipping(false); } int alignment = TQApplication::reverseLayout() ? AlignRight : AlignLeft; @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, TQMenuItem *mi = opt.menuItem(); if ((flags & Style_Enabled) && (flags & Style_Active)) - drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, FALSE, TRUE); + drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, false, true); else p->fillRect(r, cg.button()); @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, } if ( act && !dis ) - drawMotifPlusShade(p, TQRect(x, y, w, h), cg, FALSE, TRUE); + drawMotifPlusShade(p, TQRect(x, y, w, h), cg, false, true); else p->fillRect(x, y, w, h, cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button )); @@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, first = querySubControlMetrics(control, ceData, elementFlags, SC_ScrollBarFirst, opt, widget); last = querySubControlMetrics(control, ceData, elementFlags, SC_ScrollBarLast, opt, widget); - bool skipUpdate = FALSE; + bool skipUpdate = false; if (singleton->hovering) { if (addline.contains(singleton->mousePos)) { skipUpdate = @@ -1286,7 +1286,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, editfield.addCoords(-3, -3, 3, 3); if (elementFlags & CEF_HasFocus) editfield.addCoords(1, 1, -1, -1); - drawMotifPlusShade(p, editfield, cg, TRUE, FALSE, + drawMotifPlusShade(p, editfield, cg, true, false, ((elementFlags & CEF_IsEnabled) ? &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Base) : &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Background))); @@ -1308,12 +1308,12 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, editfield.addCoords(-3, -3, 3, 3); if (elementFlags & CEF_HasFocus) editfield.addCoords(1, 1, -1, -1); - drawMotifPlusShade(p, editfield, cg, FALSE, + drawMotifPlusShade(p, editfield, cg, false, (flags & Style_MouseOver)); } if (controls & SC_ComboBoxArrow && arrow.isValid()) - drawMotifPlusShade(p, arrow, cg, FALSE, (flags & Style_MouseOver)); + drawMotifPlusShade(p, arrow, cg, false, (flags & Style_MouseOver)); } if ((elementFlags & CEF_HasFocus) || @@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, SFlags flags = Style_Default; if (controls & SC_SpinWidgetFrame) - drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, TRUE, FALSE, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Base)); + drawMotifPlusShade(p, r, cg, true, false, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Base)); if (controls & SC_SpinWidgetUp) { flags = Style_Enabled; @@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, opt, widget); if ((controls & SC_SliderGroove) && groove.isValid()) { - drawMotifPlusShade(p, groove, cg, TRUE, FALSE, + drawMotifPlusShade(p, groove, cg, true, false, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Mid)); if ( flags & Style_HasFocus ) { @@ -1400,12 +1400,12 @@ void TQMotifPlusStyle::drawComplexControl(ComplexControl control, TQCOORD mid = handle.x() + handle.width() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, mid, handle.y() + 1, mid , handle.y() + handle.height() - 3, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } else { TQCOORD mid = handle.y() + handle.height() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, handle.x() + 1, mid, handle.x() + handle.width() - 3, mid, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } } @@ -1529,23 +1529,23 @@ bool TQMotifPlusStyle::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceDa switch(event->type()) { case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress: { - singleton->mousePressed = TRUE; + singleton->mousePressed = true; if (!ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQSlider")) break; - singleton->sliderActive = TRUE; + singleton->sliderActive = true; break; } case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease: { - singleton->mousePressed = FALSE; + singleton->mousePressed = false; if (!ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQSlider")) break; - singleton->sliderActive = FALSE; + singleton->sliderActive = false; widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, source, WAR_Repaint); break; } @@ -1578,9 +1578,9 @@ bool TQMotifPlusStyle::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceDa singleton->mousePos = ((TQMouseEvent *) event)->pos(); if (! singleton->mousePressed) { - singleton->hovering = TRUE; + singleton->hovering = true; widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, source, WAR_Repaint); - singleton->hovering = FALSE; + singleton->hovering = false; } break; diff --git a/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.h b/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.h index 3cfca0677..df2bce409 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.h +++ b/src/styles/tqmotifplusstyle.h @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_MOTIFPLUS TQMotifPlusStyle : public TQMotifStyle TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE); + TQMotifPlusStyle(bool hoveringHighlight = true); virtual ~TQMotifPlusStyle(); void polish(TQPalette &pal); diff --git a/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp index 5e71d6813..2b80b1e12 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static const int motifCheckMarkSpace = 12; /*! Constructs a TQMotifStyle. - If \a useHighlightCols is FALSE (the default), the style will + If \a useHighlightCols is false (the default), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ TQMotifStyle::~TQMotifStyle() } /*! - If \a arg is FALSE, the style will polish the application's color + If \a arg is false, the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. @@ -124,10 +124,10 @@ void TQMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors( bool arg ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the style treats the highlight colors of the + Returns true if the style treats the highlight colors of the palette in a Motif-like manner, which is a simple inversion - between the base and the text color; otherwise returns FALSE. The - default is FALSE. + between the base and the text color; otherwise returns false. The + default is false. */ bool TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors() const { @@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, qDrawShadeLine( p, 0, yPos, kPos, yPos, cg ); qDrawShadePanel( p, kPos, yPos - sw / 2 + 1, kSize, kSize, - cg, FALSE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + cg, false, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); qDrawShadeLine( p, kPos + kSize - 1, yPos, r.width(), yPos, cg ); } else { TQCOORD xPos = r.x() + r.width() / 2; @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, qDrawShadeLine( p, xPos, kPos + kSize - 1, xPos, r.height(), cg ); qDrawShadePanel( p, xPos - sw / 2 + 1, kPos, kSize, kSize, cg, - FALSE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + false, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); qDrawShadeLine( p, xPos, 0, xPos, kPos, cg ); } break; @@ -731,9 +731,9 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, p->setPen( cg.text() ); p->drawLineSegments( a ); - qDrawShadePanel( p, posX-2, posY-2, markW+4, markH+6, cg, TRUE, dfw); + qDrawShadePanel( p, posX-2, posY-2, markW+4, markH+6, cg, true, dfw); } else - qDrawShadePanel( p, posX, posY, markW, markH, cg, TRUE, dfw, + qDrawShadePanel( p, posX, posY, markW, markH, cg, true, dfw, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); break; @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, break; case PE_PanelScrollBar: - qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, TRUE, + qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, true, pixelMetric(PM_DefaultFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags), &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Mid)); break; @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, TQRect vrect = visualRect( TQRect( x+motifItemFrame, y+motifItemFrame, checkcol, h-2*motifItemFrame ), r ); int xvis = vrect.x(); - qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y+motifItemFrame, checkcol, h-2*motifItemFrame, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y+motifItemFrame, checkcol, h-2*motifItemFrame, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) ); break; } @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, x2 -= 2; y2 -= 2; } else { - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, newCg, TRUE ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, newCg, true ); } } if ( !( elementFlags & CEF_IsFlat ) || ( elementFlags & CEF_IsOn ) || ( elementFlags & CEF_IsDown ) ) { @@ -902,13 +902,13 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, int dfw = pixelMetric( PM_DefaultFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags, widget ); bool selected = flags & Style_Selected; int o = dfw > 1 ? 1 : 0; - bool lastTab = FALSE; + bool lastTab = false; TQRect r2( r ); if ( ceData.tabBarData.shape == TQTabBar::RoundedAbove ) { if ( styleHint( SH_TabBar_Alignment, ceData, elementFlags, TQStyleOption::Default, 0, widget ) == AlignRight && ceData.tabBarData.identIndexMap[t->identifier()] == ceData.tabBarData.tabCount-1 ) - lastTab = TRUE; + lastTab = true; if ( o ) { p->setPen( ceData.colorGroup.light() ); @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, } else if ( ceData.tabBarData.shape == TQTabBar::RoundedBelow ) { if ( styleHint( SH_TabBar_Alignment, ceData, elementFlags, TQStyleOption::Default, 0, widget ) == AlignLeft && ceData.tabBarData.identIndexMap[t->identifier()] == ceData.tabBarData.tabCount-1 ) - lastTab = TRUE; + lastTab = true; if ( selected ) { p->fillRect( TQRect( r2.left()+1, r2.top(), r2.width()-3, 1), ceData.palette.active().brush( TQColorGroup::Background )); @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, } case CE_ProgressBarGroove: - qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, TRUE, 2); + qDrawShadePanel(p, r, cg, true, 2); break; case CE_ProgressBarLabel: @@ -1083,10 +1083,10 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, if ( act && !dis ) { // active item frame if (pixelMetric( PM_DefaultFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags ) > 1) - qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, FALSE, pw, + qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, false, pw, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); else - qDrawShadePanel( p, x+1, y+1, w-2, h-2, cg, TRUE, 1, + qDrawShadePanel( p, x+1, y+1, w-2, h-2, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } else // incognito frame @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, case CE_MenuBarItem: { if ( flags & Style_Active ) // active item - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, FALSE, motifItemFrame, + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, false, motifItemFrame, &cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Button) ); else // other item p->fillRect( r, cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Button) ); @@ -1271,7 +1271,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, case CC_SpinWidget: { SCFlags drawSub = SC_None; if ( sub & SC_SpinWidgetFrame ) - qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, TRUE, + qDrawShadePanel( p, r, cg, true, pixelMetric( PM_DefaultFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags ) ); if ( sub & SC_SpinWidgetUp || sub & SC_SpinWidgetDown ) { @@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, opt, widget); if ((sub & SC_SliderGroove) && groove.isValid()) { - qDrawShadePanel( p, groove, cg, TRUE, 2, + qDrawShadePanel( p, groove, cg, true, 2, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) ); @@ -1311,12 +1311,12 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, TQCOORD mid = handle.x() + handle.width() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, mid, handle.y(), mid, handle.y() + handle.height() - 2, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } else { TQCOORD mid = handle.y() + handle.height() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, handle.x(), mid, handle.x() + handle.width() - 2, mid, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } } @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ void TQMotifStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, TQRect er = TQStyle::visualRect( querySubControlMetrics( CC_ComboBox, ceData, elementFlags, SC_ComboBoxEditField, cb ), ceData, elementFlags ); er.addCoords( -1, -1, 1, 1); - qDrawShadePanel( p, er, cg, TRUE, 1, + qDrawShadePanel( p, er, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button )); } } diff --git a/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.h b/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.h index e840de446..eaca499a6 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.h +++ b/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.h @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_MOTIF TQMotifStyle : public TQCommonStyle { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMotifStyle( bool useHighlightCols=FALSE ); + TQMotifStyle( bool useHighlightCols=false ); virtual ~TQMotifStyle(); void setUseHighlightColors( bool ); diff --git a/src/styles/tqplatinumstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqplatinumstyle.cpp index 4050f075e..71e9ae3ae 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqplatinumstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqplatinumstyle.cpp @@ -796,9 +796,9 @@ void TQPlatinumStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, || ( (!ceData.fgPixmap.isNull()) && (ceData.rect.width() * ceData.rect.height() < 1600 || TQABS( ceData.rect.width() - ceData.rect.height()) < 10 )) ) - useBevelButton = TRUE; + useBevelButton = true; else - useBevelButton = FALSE; + useBevelButton = false; int diw = pixelMetric( PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator, ceData, elementFlags, widget ); if ( elementFlags & CEF_IsDefault ) { @@ -1119,7 +1119,7 @@ void TQPlatinumStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, // end comboButtonRect... ir.setRect( ir.left() - 1, ir.top() - 1, ir.width() + 2, ir.height() + 2 ); - qDrawShadePanel( p, ir, cg, TRUE, 2, 0 ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, ir, cg, true, 2, 0 ); } } #endif @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ void TQPlatinumStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, p->drawLine( x1 + 1, y2 - 1, x2 -my + 2, y2 - 1 ); drawRiffles( p, handle.x(), handle.y() + 2, handle.width() - 3, - handle.height() - 4, cg, TRUE ); + handle.height() - 4, cg, true ); } else { // Horizontal TQBrush oldBrush = p->brush(); p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); @@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ void TQPlatinumStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, p->drawLine( x1 + mx - 2, y2 - 1, x1 + mx + 2, y2 - 1 ); drawRiffles( p, handle.x() + 2, handle.y(), handle.width() - 4, - handle.height() - 5, cg, FALSE ); + handle.height() - 5, cg, false ); } } diff --git a/src/styles/tqsgistyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqsgistyle.cpp index 3574dc0d0..0a78be86f 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqsgistyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqsgistyle.cpp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ public: /*! Constructs a TQSGIStyle. - If \a useHighlightCols is FALSE (default value), the style will + If \a useHighlightCols is false (default value), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ TQSGIStyle::applicationPolish( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlE pal.setColor( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::Highlight, pal.disabled().text() ); pal.setColor( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::HighlightedText, pal.disabled().base() ); } - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true ); // different basecolor and highlighting in Q(Multi)LineEdit pal.setColor( TQColorGroup::Base, TQColor(211,181,181) ); @@ -167,15 +167,15 @@ TQSGIStyle::applicationPolish( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlE pal.setColor( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::Highlight, pal.disabled().midlight() ); pal.setColor( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::HighlightedText, pal.disabled().text() ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQLineEdit" ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQTextEdit" ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQDateTimeEditBase" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQLineEdit" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQTextEdit" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQDateTimeEditBase" ); pal = TQApplication::palette(); pal.setColor( TQColorGroup::Button, pal.active().background() ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQMenuBar" ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQToolBar" ); - TQApplication::setPalette( pal, TRUE, "TQPopupMenu" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQMenuBar" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQToolBar" ); + TQApplication::setPalette( pal, true, "TQPopupMenu" ); } /*! \reimp @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::applicationUnPolish( const TQStyleControlElementData&, ControlElementFlags, void * ) { TQFont f = TQApplication::font(); - TQApplication::setFont( f, TRUE ); // get rid of the special fonts for special widget classes + TQApplication::setFont( f, true ); // get rid of the special fonts for special widget classes } /*! @@ -241,16 +241,16 @@ TQSGIStyle::polish( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags #endif } else if ( ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQComboBox") ) { TQFont f = TQApplication::font(); - f.setBold( TRUE ); - f.setItalic( TRUE ); + f.setBold( true ); + f.setItalic( true ); widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_SetFont, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(f)); #ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR } else if ( ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQMenuBar") ) { widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_FrameSetStyle, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Raised)); widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_SetBackgroundMode, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(TQWidget::PaletteBackground)); TQFont f = TQApplication::font(); - f.setBold( TRUE ); - f.setItalic( TRUE ); + f.setBold( true ); + f.setItalic( true ); widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_SetFont, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(f)); #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU @@ -258,8 +258,8 @@ TQSGIStyle::polish( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData requestData; widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_FrameSetLineWidth, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(pixelMetric( PM_DefaultFrameWidth, TQStyleControlElementData(), CEF_None ) + 1)); TQFont f = TQApplication::font(); - f.setBold( TRUE ); - f.setItalic( TRUE ); + f.setBold( true ); + f.setItalic( true ); widgetActionRequest(ceData, elementFlags, ptr, WAR_SetFont, TQStyleWidgetActionRequestData(f)); #endif } else if ( (ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQToolBar")) || (ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQToolBarSeparator")) ) { @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ static void drawSGIPrefix( TQPainter *p, int x, int y, TQString* miText ) { if ( miText && (!!(*miText)) ) { int amp = 0; - bool nextAmp = FALSE; + bool nextAmp = false; while ( ( amp = miText->find( '&', amp ) ) != -1 ) { if ( (uint)amp == miText->length()-1 ) return; @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, if ( !r.contains( d->mousePos ) ) flags &= ~Style_MouseOver; if ( r.isValid() ) - qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, FALSE, 1, hot ? &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) : &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, false, 1, hot ? &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Midlight ) : &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); break; case PE_ScrollBarSlider: @@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, r.rect(&x, &y, &w, &h); int checkcol = styleHint(SH_MenuIndicatorColumnWidth, ceData, elementFlags, opt, NULL, NULL); - drawPanel( p, x+sgiItemFrame, y+sgiItemFrame, checkcol, h-2*sgiItemFrame, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Light ) ); + drawPanel( p, x+sgiItemFrame, y+sgiItemFrame, checkcol, h-2*sgiItemFrame, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Light ) ); } break; @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, x2 -= 2; y2 -= 2; } else { - qDrawShadePanel( p, ceData.rect, cg, TRUE ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, ceData.rect, cg, true ); } } @@ -1032,10 +1032,10 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, if ( act && !dis ) { if ( pixelMetric( PM_DefaultFrameWidth, ceData, elementFlags ) > 1 ) - drawPanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, FALSE, pw, + drawPanel( p, x, y, w, h, cg, false, pw, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Light ) ); else - drawPanel( p, x+1, y+1, w-2, h-2, cg, FALSE, 1, + drawPanel( p, x+1, y+1, w-2, h-2, cg, false, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Light ) ); } else { p->fillRect( x, y, w, h, cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); @@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, if ( active ) { p->setPen( TQPen( cg.shadow(), 1) ); p->drawRect( x, y, w, h ); - qDrawShadePanel( p, TQRect(x+1,y+1,w-2,h-2), cg, FALSE, 2, + qDrawShadePanel( p, TQRect(x+1,y+1,w-2,h-2), cg, false, 2, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Light )); } else { p->fillRect( x, y, w, h, cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button )); @@ -1231,11 +1231,11 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, region = region.subtract( handle ); p->setClipRegion( region ); } else { - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } - qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastSliderRect.rect, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastSliderRect.rect, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); } - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } if (( sub & SC_SliderHandle ) && handle.isValid()) { @@ -1247,12 +1247,12 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, TQCOORD mid = handle.x() + handle.width() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, mid, handle.y(), mid, handle.y() + handle.height() - 2, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } else { TQCOORD mid = handle.y() + handle.height() / 2; qDrawShadeLine( p, handle.x(), mid, handle.x() + handle.width() - 2, mid, - cg, TRUE, 1); + cg, true, 1); } } @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, er.addCoords( -1, -1, 1, 1); qDrawShadePanel( p, TQRect( er.x()-1, er.y()-1, er.width()+2, er.height()+2 ), - cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } } #endif @@ -1353,11 +1353,11 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, region.subtract( handle ); p->setClipRegion( region ); } else { - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } - qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastScrollbarRect.rect, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastScrollbarRect.rect, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); } - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } if ( sub & SC_ScrollBarSubPage ) { TQRect er = TQStyle::visualRect( querySubControlMetrics( CC_ScrollBar, ceData, elementFlags, SC_ScrollBarSubPage, opt, widget ), ceData, elementFlags ); @@ -1381,14 +1381,14 @@ void TQSGIStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl control, region.subtract( handle ); p->setClipRegion( region ); } else { - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } - qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastScrollbarRect.rect, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, d->lastScrollbarRect.rect, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Dark ) ); } - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); } if ( sub & SC_ScrollBarSlider ) { - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); if ( subActive == SC_ScrollBarSlider ) flags |= Style_Active; diff --git a/src/styles/tqsgistyle.h b/src/styles/tqsgistyle.h index bd129ac53..0b65f3681 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqsgistyle.h +++ b/src/styles/tqsgistyle.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STYLE_SGI TQSGIStyle: public TQMotifStyle { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSGIStyle( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE ); + TQSGIStyle( bool useHighlightCols = false ); virtual ~TQSGIStyle(); #if !defined(Q_NO_USING_KEYWORD) diff --git a/src/styles/tqstylefactory.cpp b/src/styles/tqstylefactory.cpp index 05418b275..ed697dd8c 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqstylefactory.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqstylefactory.cpp @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ TQPluginManager<TQStyleFactoryInterface> *TQStyleFactoryPrivate::manager = 0; TQStyleFactoryPrivate::TQStyleFactoryPrivate() : TQObject( tqApp ) { - manager = new TQPluginManager<TQStyleFactoryInterface>( IID_QStyleFactory, TQApplication::libraryPaths(), "/styles", FALSE ); + manager = new TQPluginManager<TQStyleFactoryInterface>( IID_QStyleFactory, TQApplication::libraryPaths(), "/styles", false ); } TQStyleFactoryPrivate::~TQStyleFactoryPrivate() diff --git a/src/styles/tqstyleplugin.cpp b/src/styles/tqstyleplugin.cpp index 50e0e684d..9edadfc24 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqstyleplugin.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqstyleplugin.cpp @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ TQStyle *TQStylePluginPrivate::create( const TQString &key ) bool TQStylePluginPrivate::init() { - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQStylePluginPrivate::cleanup() diff --git a/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp b/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp index 02bd43720..38c126349 100644 --- a/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp +++ b/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ static const int windowsCheckMarkHMargin = 2; // horiz. margins of check mark static const int windowsRightBorder = 12; // right border on windows static const int windowsCheckMarkWidth = 12; // checkmarks width on windows -static bool use2000style = TRUE; +static bool use2000style = true; enum TQSliderDirection { SlUp, SlDown, SlLeft, SlRight }; @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ TQWindowsStyle::Private::Private(TQWindowsStyle *parent) bool TQWindowsStyle::Private::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData, ControlElementFlags, void* source, TQEvent *e ) { if (!(ceData.widgetObjectTypes.contains("TQWidget"))) { - return TRUE; + return true; } TQWidget *widget = reinterpret_cast<TQWidget*>(source); @@ -135,8 +135,8 @@ bool TQWindowsStyle::Private::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementDat if (menuBar && te->timerId() == menuBarTimer) { menuBar->killTimer(te->timerId()); menuBarTimer = 0; - menuBar->repaint(FALSE); - return TRUE; + menuBar->repaint(false); + return true; } } break; @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ bool TQWindowsStyle::Private::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementDat break; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ bool TQWindowsStyle::objectEventHandler( const TQStyleControlElementData &ceData if (d) { return d->objectEventHandler(ceData, elementFlags, source, e); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! \reimp */ @@ -276,13 +276,13 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, case PE_ButtonTool: { TQBrush fill; - bool stippled = FALSE; + bool stippled = false; if (! (flags & (Style_Down | Style_MouseOver)) && (flags & Style_On) && use2000style) { fill = TQBrush(cg.light(), Dense4Pattern); - stippled = TRUE; + stippled = true; } else fill = cg.brush(TQColorGroup::Button); @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, else fill = cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Background ); - qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, TRUE, &fill ); + qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, true, &fill ); if (flags & Style_NoChange ) p->setPen( cg.dark() ); @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, int xvis = vrect.x(); if ( act && !dis ) { - qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, checkcol, h, cg, TRUE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, checkcol, h, cg, true, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } else { TQBrush fill( cg.light(), Dense4Pattern ); @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, // a consistent look TQPoint origin = p->brushOrigin(); p->setBrushOrigin( xvis, y ); - qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, checkcol, h, cg, TRUE, 1, &fill ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, checkcol, h, cg, true, 1, &fill ); // restore the previous brush origin p->setBrushOrigin( origin ); } @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawPrimitive( PrimitiveElement pe, TQRect vrect = visualRect( TQRect( x, y, checkcol, h ), r ); int xvis = vrect.x(); - qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, w, h, cg, FALSE, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); + qDrawShadePanel( p, xvis, y, w, h, cg, false, 1, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); } break; @@ -705,8 +705,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawControl( ControlElement element, const TQTab * t = opt.tab(); bool selected = flags & Style_Selected; - bool lastTab = (ceData.tabBarData.identIndexMap[t->identifier()] == ceData.tabBarData.tabCount-1) ? - TRUE : FALSE; + bool lastTab = (ceData.tabBarData.identIndexMap[t->identifier()] == ceData.tabBarData.tabCount-1); TQRect r2( r ); if ( ceData.tabBarData.shape == TQTabBar::RoundedAbove ) { p->setPen( cg.midlight() ); @@ -1634,8 +1633,8 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl ctrl, TQPainter *p, if ( !verticalLine ) { // make 128*1 and 1*128 bitmaps that can be used for // drawing the right sort of lines. - verticalLine = new TQBitmap( 1, 129, TRUE ); - horizontalLine = new TQBitmap( 128, 1, TRUE ); + verticalLine = new TQBitmap( 1, 129, true ); + horizontalLine = new TQBitmap( 128, 1, true ); TQPointArray a( 64 ); TQPainter p; p.begin( verticalLine ); @@ -1705,7 +1704,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl ctrl, TQPainter *p, if ( sub & SC_ComboBoxArrow ) { SFlags flags = Style_Default; - qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, TRUE, ( elementFlags & CEF_IsEnabled ) ? + qDrawWinPanel( p, r, cg, true, ( elementFlags & CEF_IsEnabled ) ? &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Base ): &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) ); @@ -1717,7 +1716,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl ctrl, TQPainter *p, p->setBrush( cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); p->drawRect( ar ); } else - qDrawWinPanel( p, ar, cg, FALSE, + qDrawWinPanel( p, ar, cg, false, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); ar.addCoords( 2, 2, -2, -2 ); @@ -1780,12 +1779,12 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl ctrl, TQPainter *p, p->setPen( cg.shadow() ); if ( ceData.orientation == Horizontal ) { qDrawWinPanel( p, groove.x(), groove.y() + mid - 2, - groove.width(), 4, cg, TRUE ); + groove.width(), 4, cg, true ); p->drawLine( groove.x() + 1, groove.y() + mid - 1, groove.x() + groove.width() - 3, groove.y() + mid - 1 ); } else { qDrawWinPanel( p, groove.x() + mid - 2, groove.y(), - 4, groove.height(), cg, TRUE ); + 4, groove.height(), cg, true ); p->drawLine( groove.x() + mid - 1, groove.y() + 1, groove.x() + mid - 1, groove.y() + groove.height() - 3 ); @@ -1833,7 +1832,7 @@ void TQWindowsStyle::drawComplexControl( ComplexControl ctrl, TQPainter *p, } if ( (tickAbove && tickBelow) || (!tickAbove && !tickBelow) ) { - qDrawWinButton( p, TQRect(x,y,wi,he), cg, FALSE, + qDrawWinButton( p, TQRect(x,y,wi,he), cg, false, &cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) ); return; } diff --git a/src/table/tqtable.cpp b/src/table/tqtable.cpp index b990a854a..28fe17cf2 100644 --- a/src/table/tqtable.cpp +++ b/src/table/tqtable.cpp @@ -62,8 +62,8 @@ #include <stdlib.h> #include <limits.h> -static bool qt_update_cell_widget = TRUE; -static bool qt_table_clipper_enabled = TRUE; +static bool qt_update_cell_widget = true; +static bool qt_table_clipper_enabled = true; #ifndef QT_INTERNAL_TABLE TQ_EXPORT #endif @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ private: void updateSelections(); void saveStates(); void setCaching( bool b ); - void swapSections( int oldIdx, int newIdx, bool swapTable = TRUE ); + void swapSections( int oldIdx, int newIdx, bool swapTable = true ); bool doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ); void sectionLabelChanged( int section ); void resizeArrays( int n ); @@ -157,11 +157,11 @@ private: struct TQTablePrivate { - TQTablePrivate() : hasRowSpan( FALSE ), hasColSpan( FALSE ), - inMenuMode( FALSE ), redirectMouseEvent( FALSE ) + TQTablePrivate() : hasRowSpan( false ), hasColSpan( false ), + inMenuMode( false ), redirectMouseEvent( false ) { - hiddenRows.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - hiddenCols.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + hiddenRows.setAutoDelete( true ); + hiddenCols.setAutoDelete( true ); } uint hasRowSpan : 1; uint hasColSpan : 1; @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ static bool isRowSelection( TQTable::SelectionMode selMode ) rectangle's four edges. All four are part of the selection. A newly created TQTableSelection is inactive -- isActive() returns - FALSE. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it. + false. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it. \sa TQTable TQTable::addSelection() TQTable::selection() TQTable::selectCells() TQTable::selectRow() TQTable::selectColumn() @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ static bool isRowSelection( TQTable::SelectionMode selMode ) */ TQTableSelection::TQTableSelection() - : active( FALSE ), inited( FALSE ), tRow( -1 ), lCol( -1 ), + : active( false ), inited( false ), tRow( -1 ), lCol( -1 ), bRow( -1 ), rCol( -1 ), aRow( -1 ), aCol( -1 ) { } @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ TQTableSelection::TQTableSelection() */ TQTableSelection::TQTableSelection( int start_row, int start_col, int end_row, int end_col ) - : active( FALSE ), inited( FALSE ), tRow( -1 ), lCol( -1 ), + : active( false ), inited( false ), tRow( -1 ), lCol( -1 ), bRow( -1 ), rCol( -1 ), aRow( -1 ), aCol( -1 ) { init( start_row, start_col ); @@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ void TQTableSelection::init( int row, int col ) { aCol = lCol = rCol = col; aRow = tRow = bRow = row; - active = FALSE; - inited = TRUE; + active = false; + inited = true; } /*! @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ void TQTableSelection::expandTo( int row, int col ) { if ( !inited ) return; - active = TRUE; + active = true; if ( row < aRow ) { tRow = row; @@ -293,8 +293,8 @@ void TQTableSelection::expandTo( int row, int col ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a s includes the same cells as the selection; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a s includes the same cells as the selection; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQTableSelection::operator==( const TQTableSelection &s ) const @@ -307,8 +307,8 @@ bool TQTableSelection::operator==( const TQTableSelection &s ) const /*! \fn bool TQTableSelection::operator!=( const TQTableSelection &s ) const - Returns TRUE if \a s does not include the same cells as the - selection; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a s does not include the same cells as the + selection; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ int TQTableSelection::numCols() const By default, table items may be replaced by new TQTableItems during the lifetime of a TQTable. Therefore, if you create your own subclass of TQTableItem, and you want to ensure that - this does not happen, you must call setReplaceable(FALSE) + this does not happen, you must call setReplaceable(false) in the constructor of your subclass. \img tqtableitems.png Table Items @@ -533,8 +533,8 @@ int TQTableSelection::numCols() const \value Never The cell is not editable. The cell is actually editable only if TQTable::isRowReadOnly() is - FALSE for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is FALSE for its - column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is FALSE. + false for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is false for its + column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is false. TQComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are @@ -557,10 +557,10 @@ int TQTableSelection::numCols() const */ TQTableItem::TQTableItem( TQTable *table, EditType et ) - : txt(), pix(), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( FALSE ), - tcha( TRUE ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) + : txt(), pix(), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( false ), + tcha( true ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) { - enabled = TRUE; + enabled = true; } /*! @@ -576,10 +576,10 @@ TQTableItem::TQTableItem( TQTable *table, EditType et ) */ TQTableItem::TQTableItem( TQTable *table, EditType et, const TQString &text ) - : txt( text ), pix(), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( FALSE ), - tcha( TRUE ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) + : txt( text ), pix(), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( false ), + tcha( true ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) { - enabled = TRUE; + enabled = true; } /*! @@ -597,10 +597,10 @@ TQTableItem::TQTableItem( TQTable *table, EditType et, const TQString &text ) TQTableItem::TQTableItem( TQTable *table, EditType et, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &p ) - : txt( text ), pix( p ), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( FALSE ), - tcha( TRUE ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) + : txt( text ), pix( p ), t( table ), edType( et ), wordwrap( false ), + tcha( true ), rw( -1 ), cl( -1 ), rowspan( 1 ), colspan( 1 ) { - enabled = TRUE; + enabled = true; } /*! @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ void TQTableItem::setText( const TQString &str ) using the painter \a p in the rectangular area \a cr using the color group \a cg. - If \a selected is TRUE the cell is displayed in a way that + If \a selected is true the cell is displayed in a way that indicates that it is highlighted. You don't usually need to use this function but if you want to @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ void TQTableItem::setText( const TQString &str ) \code p->setClipRect( table()->cellRect(row, col), TQPainter::ClipPainter ); //... your drawing code - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); \endcode */ @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ sizeHint(). TQWidget *TQTableItem::createEditor() const { TQLineEdit *e = new TQLineEdit( table()->viewport(), "qt_tableeditor" ); - e->setFrame( FALSE ); + e->setFrame( false ); e->setText( text() ); return e; } @@ -832,7 +832,7 @@ void TQTableItem::setContentFromEditor( TQWidget *w ) int TQTableItem::alignment() const { bool num; - bool ok1 = FALSE, ok2 = FALSE; + bool ok1 = false, ok2 = false; (void)text().toInt( &ok1 ); if ( !ok1 ) (void)text().toDouble( &ok2 ); // ### should be .-aligned @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ int TQTableItem::alignment() const } /*! - If \a b is TRUE, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple + If \a b is true, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the text will be written as a single line. @@ -855,8 +855,8 @@ void TQTableItem::setWordWrap( bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise + returns false. \sa setWordWrap() */ @@ -892,8 +892,8 @@ TQTableItem::EditType TQTableItem::editType() const } /*! - If \a b is TRUE it is acceptable to replace the contents of the - cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If \a b is FALSE the + If \a b is true it is acceptable to replace the contents of the + cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If \a b is false the contents of the cell may not be replaced by the contents of another table item. Table items that span more than one cell may not have their contents replaced by another table item. @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ void TQTableItem::setReplaceable( bool b ) bool TQTableItem::isReplaceable() const { if ( rowspan > 1 || colspan > 1 ) - return FALSE; + return false; return tcha; } @@ -1025,9 +1025,9 @@ void TQTableItem::setSpan( int rs, int cs ) for ( int c = 0; c < colspan; ++c ) { if ( r == 0 && c == 0 ) continue; - qt_update_cell_widget = FALSE; + qt_update_cell_widget = false; table()->setItem( r + rw, c + cl, this ); - qt_update_cell_widget = TRUE; + qt_update_cell_widget = true; rw = rrow; cl = rcol; } @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ int TQTableItem::col() const } /*! - If \a b is TRUE, the table item is enabled; if \a b is FALSE the + If \a b is true, the table item is enabled; if \a b is false the table item is disabled. A disabled item doesn't respond to user interaction. @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ void TQTableItem::setEnabled( bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns false. \sa setEnabled() */ @@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ bool TQTableItem::isEnabled() const currentText(), and the text of a particular item can be retrieved with text(). - If isEditable() is TRUE the TQComboTableItem will permit the user + If isEditable() is true the TQComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items. @@ -1201,11 +1201,11 @@ int TQComboTableItem::fakeRef = 0; /*! Creates a combo table item for the table \a table. The combobox's list of items is passed in the \a list argument. If \a editable is - TRUE the user may type in new list items; if \a editable is FALSE + true the user may type in new list items; if \a editable is false the user may only select from the list of items provided. By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table - items since isReplaceable() returns FALSE by default. + items since isReplaceable() returns false by default. \sa TQTable::clearCell() EditType */ @@ -1213,10 +1213,10 @@ int TQComboTableItem::fakeRef = 0; TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQStringList &list, bool editable ) : TQTableItem( table, WhenCurrent, "" ), entries( list ), current( 0 ), edit( editable ) { - setReplaceable( FALSE ); + setReplaceable( false ); if ( !TQComboTableItem::fakeCombo ) { TQComboTableItem::fakeComboWidget = new TQWidget( 0, 0 ); - TQComboTableItem::fakeCombo = new TQComboBox( FALSE, TQComboTableItem::fakeComboWidget, 0 ); + TQComboTableItem::fakeCombo = new TQComboBox( false, TQComboTableItem::fakeComboWidget, 0 ); TQComboTableItem::fakeCombo->hide(); } ++TQComboTableItem::fakeRef; @@ -1403,8 +1403,8 @@ TQString TQComboTableItem::text( int i ) const } /*! - If \a b is TRUE the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user - may enter a new text item themselves. If \a b is FALSE the user may + If \a b is true the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user + may enter a new text item themselves. If \a b is false the user may may only choose one of the existing items. \sa isEditable() @@ -1416,8 +1416,8 @@ void TQComboTableItem::setEditable( bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the user can add their own list items to the - combobox's list of items; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the user can add their own list items to the + combobox's list of items; otherwise returns false. \sa setEditable() */ @@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ TQSize TQComboTableItem::sizeHint() const */ TQCheckTableItem::TQCheckTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQString &txt ) - : TQTableItem( table, WhenCurrent, txt ), checked( FALSE ) + : TQTableItem( table, WhenCurrent, txt ), checked( false ) { } @@ -1578,7 +1578,7 @@ void TQCheckTableItem::paint( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg, } /*! - If \a b is TRUE the checkbox is checked; if \a b is FALSE the + If \a b is true the checkbox is checked; if \a b is false the checkbox is unchecked. \sa isChecked() @@ -1595,8 +1595,8 @@ void TQCheckTableItem::setChecked( bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise + returns false. \sa setChecked() */ @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ TQSize TQCheckTableItem::sizeHint() const the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at 1, although row and column numbers within TQTable begin at 0.) - If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on + If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( true ) on the \e viewport; (see \link tqscrollview.html#allviews TQScrollView\endlink). @@ -1747,7 +1747,7 @@ TQSize TQCheckTableItem::sizeHint() const independently of the user interface ordering. The table can be sorted using sortColumn(). Users can sort a - column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to TRUE. Rows + column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to true. Rows can be swapped with swapRows(), columns with swapColumns() and cells with swapCells(). @@ -2027,8 +2027,8 @@ TQSize TQCheckTableItem::sizeHint() const TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) : TQScrollView( parent, name, WNoAutoErase | WStaticContents ), leftHeader( 0 ), topHeader( 0 ), - currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( TRUE ), mRows( FALSE ), mCols( FALSE ), - asc( TRUE ), doSort( TRUE ), readOnly( FALSE ) + currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( true ), mRows( false ), mCols( false ), + asc( true ), doSort( true ), readOnly( false ) { init( 0, 0 ); } @@ -2048,8 +2048,8 @@ TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) TQTable::TQTable( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) : TQScrollView( parent, name, WNoAutoErase | WStaticContents ), leftHeader( 0 ), topHeader( 0 ), - currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( TRUE ), mRows( FALSE ), mCols( FALSE ), - asc( TRUE ), doSort( TRUE ), readOnly( FALSE ) + currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( true ), mRows( false ), mCols( false ), + asc( true ), doSort( true ), readOnly( false ) { init( numRows, numCols ); } @@ -2060,25 +2060,25 @@ TQTable::TQTable( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) void TQTable::init( int rows, int cols ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP - setDragAutoScroll( FALSE ); + setDragAutoScroll( false ); #endif d = new TQTablePrivate; d->geomTimer = new TQTimer( this ); d->lastVisCol = 0; d->lastVisRow = 0; connect( d->geomTimer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQ_SLOT( updateGeometriesSlot() ) ); - shouldClearSelection = FALSE; - dEnabled = FALSE; - roRows.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - roCols.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - setSorting( FALSE ); + shouldClearSelection = false; + dEnabled = false; + roRows.setAutoDelete( true ); + roCols.setAutoDelete( true ); + setSorting( false ); - unused = TRUE; // It's unused, ain't it? :) + unused = true; // It's unused, ain't it? :) selMode = Multi; - contents.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( true ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); // Enable clipper and set background mode enableClipper( qt_table_clipper_enabled ); @@ -2089,35 +2089,35 @@ void TQTable::init( int rows, int cols ) viewport()->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase ); setBackgroundMode( PaletteBackground, PaletteBase ); setResizePolicy( Manual ); - selections.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + selections.setAutoDelete( true ); // Create headers leftHeader = new TQTableHeader( rows, this, this, "left table header" ); leftHeader->setOrientation( Vertical ); - leftHeader->setTracking( TRUE ); - leftHeader->setMovingEnabled( TRUE ); + leftHeader->setTracking( true ); + leftHeader->setMovingEnabled( true ); topHeader = new TQTableHeader( cols, this, this, "right table header" ); topHeader->setOrientation( Horizontal ); - topHeader->setTracking( TRUE ); - topHeader->setMovingEnabled( TRUE ); + topHeader->setTracking( true ); + topHeader->setMovingEnabled( true ); if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) setMargins( 0, fontMetrics().height() + 4, 30, 0 ); else setMargins( 30, fontMetrics().height() + 4, 0, 0 ); - topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); // Initialize headers int i = 0; for ( i = 0; i < numCols(); ++i ) topHeader->resizeSection( i, TQMAX( 100, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() ) ); for ( i = 0; i < numRows(); ++i ) leftHeader->resizeSection( i, TQMAX( 20, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() ) ); - topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); - leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); + leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); // Prepare for contents - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); // Connect header, table and scrollbars connect( horizontalScrollBar(), TQ_SIGNAL( valueChanged(int) ), @@ -2145,13 +2145,13 @@ void TQTable::init( int rows, int cols ) edMode = NotEditing; editRow = editCol = -1; - drawActiveSelection = TRUE; + drawActiveSelection = true; installEventFilter( this ); focusStl = SpreadSheet; - was_visible = FALSE; + was_visible = false; // initial size resize( 640, 480 ); @@ -2164,8 +2164,8 @@ void TQTable::init( int rows, int cols ) TQTable::~TQTable() { - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - contents.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + contents.setAutoDelete( true ); contents.clear(); widgets.clear(); @@ -2178,7 +2178,7 @@ void TQTable::setReadOnly( bool b ) TQTableItem *i = item(curRow, curCol); if (readOnly && isEditing()) { - endEdit(editRow, editCol, TRUE, FALSE); + endEdit(editRow, editCol, true, false); } else if (!readOnly && i && (i->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent || i->editType() == TQTableItem::Always)) { editCell(curRow, curCol); @@ -2186,7 +2186,7 @@ void TQTable::setReadOnly( bool b ) } /*! - If \a ro is TRUE, row \a row is set to be read-only; otherwise the + If \a ro is true, row \a row is set to be read-only; otherwise the row is set to be editable. Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the @@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ void TQTable::setRowReadOnly( int row, bool ro ) if (curRow == row) { TQTableItem *i = item(curRow, curCol); if (ro && isEditing()) { - endEdit(editRow, editCol, TRUE, FALSE); + endEdit(editRow, editCol, true, false); } else if (!ro && i && (i->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent || i->editType() == TQTableItem::Always)) { editCell(curRow, curCol); @@ -2215,7 +2215,7 @@ void TQTable::setRowReadOnly( int row, bool ro ) } /*! - If \a ro is TRUE, column \a col is set to be read-only; otherwise + If \a ro is true, column \a col is set to be read-only; otherwise the column is set to be editable. Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on @@ -2236,7 +2236,7 @@ void TQTable::setColumnReadOnly( int col, bool ro ) if (curCol == col) { TQTableItem *i = item(curRow, curCol); if (ro && isEditing()) { - endEdit(editRow, editCol, TRUE, FALSE); + endEdit(editRow, editCol, true, false); } else if (!ro && i && (i->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent || i->editType() == TQTableItem::Always)) { editCell(curRow, curCol); @@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ bool TQTable::isReadOnly() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if row \a row is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if row \a row is read-only; otherwise returns false. Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the cell's \link TQTableItem::EditType EditType\endlink, and this @@ -2278,8 +2278,8 @@ bool TQTable::isRowReadOnly( int row ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if column \a col is read-only; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if column \a col is read-only; otherwise returns + false. Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see \link @@ -2352,8 +2352,8 @@ TQTable::FocusStyle TQTable::focusStyle() const void TQTable::updateHeaderStates() { - horizontalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - verticalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + horizontalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + verticalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); ( (TQTableHeader*)verticalHeader() )->setSectionStateToAll( TQTableHeader::Normal ); ( (TQTableHeader*)horizontalHeader() )->setSectionStateToAll( TQTableHeader::Normal ); @@ -2376,10 +2376,10 @@ void TQTable::updateHeaderStates() } } - horizontalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); - verticalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); - horizontalHeader()->repaint( FALSE ); - verticalHeader()->repaint( FALSE ); + horizontalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); + verticalHeader()->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); + horizontalHeader()->repaint( false ); + verticalHeader()->repaint( false ); } /*! @@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@ bool TQTable::showGrid() const \property TQTable::columnMovingEnabled \brief whether columns can be moved by the user - The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding + The default is false. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. \warning If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user @@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ bool TQTable::columnMovingEnabled() const \property TQTable::rowMovingEnabled \brief whether rows can be moved by the user - The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding + The default is false. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key. \warning If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user @@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ void TQTable::resizeData( int len ) swap rows, e.g. for sorting, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the notes on large tables.) - If \a swapHeader is TRUE, the rows' header contents is also + If \a swapHeader is true, the rows' header contents is also swapped. This function will not update the TQTable, you will have to do @@ -2523,7 +2523,7 @@ void TQTable::resizeData( int len ) void TQTable::swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader ) { if ( swapHeader ) - leftHeader->swapSections( row1, row2, FALSE ); + leftHeader->swapSections( row1, row2, false ); TQPtrVector<TQTableItem> tmpContents; tmpContents.resize( numCols() ); @@ -2531,8 +2531,8 @@ void TQTable::swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader ) tmpWidgets.resize( numCols() ); int i; - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( false ); for ( i = 0; i < numCols(); ++i ) { TQTableItem *i1, *i2; i1 = item( row1, i ); @@ -2560,8 +2560,8 @@ void TQTable::swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader ) widgets.insert( indexOf( row2, i ), tmpWidgets[ i ] ); } } - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); updateRowWidgets( row1 ); updateRowWidgets( row2 ); @@ -2623,7 +2623,7 @@ void TQTable::setTopMargin( int m ) swap columns you will need to reimplement this function. (See the notes on large tables.) - If \a swapHeader is TRUE, the columns' header contents is also + If \a swapHeader is true, the columns' header contents is also swapped. \sa swapCells() @@ -2632,7 +2632,7 @@ void TQTable::setTopMargin( int m ) void TQTable::swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader ) { if ( swapHeader ) - topHeader->swapSections( col1, col2, FALSE ); + topHeader->swapSections( col1, col2, false ); TQPtrVector<TQTableItem> tmpContents; tmpContents.resize( numRows() ); @@ -2640,8 +2640,8 @@ void TQTable::swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader ) tmpWidgets.resize( numRows() ); int i; - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( false ); for ( i = 0; i < numRows(); ++i ) { TQTableItem *i1, *i2; i1 = item( i, col1 ); @@ -2669,8 +2669,8 @@ void TQTable::swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader ) widgets.insert( indexOf( i, col2 ), tmpWidgets[ i ] ); } } - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); columnWidthChanged( col1 ); columnWidthChanged( col2 ); @@ -2699,8 +2699,8 @@ void TQTable::swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader ) void TQTable::swapCells( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ) { - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( false ); TQTableItem *i1, *i2; i1 = item( row1, col1 ); i2 = item( row2, col2 ); @@ -2735,18 +2735,18 @@ void TQTable::swapCells( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ) updateRowWidgets( row2 ); updateColWidgets( col1 ); updateColWidgets( col2 ); - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); } static bool is_child_of( TQWidget *child, TQWidget *parent ) { while ( child ) { if ( child == parent ) - return TRUE; + return true; child = child->parentWidget(); } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -2778,7 +2778,7 @@ void TQTable::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) if ( collast == -1 ) collast = numCols() - 1; - bool currentInSelection = FALSE; + bool currentInSelection = false; TQPtrListIterator<TQTableSelection> it( selections ); TQTableSelection *s; @@ -2835,7 +2835,7 @@ void TQTable::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) bool selected = isSelected( r, c ); if ( focusStl != FollowStyle && selected && !currentInSelection && r == curRow && c == curCol ) - selected = FALSE; + selected = false; paintCell( p, r, c, TQRect( colp, rowp, colw, rowh ), selected ); p->translate( -colp, -rowp ); @@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ void TQTable::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch ) // Paint empty rects paintEmptyArea( p, cx, cy, cw, ch ); - drawActiveSelection = TRUE; + drawActiveSelection = true; } /*! @@ -2920,7 +2920,7 @@ void TQTable::paintCell( TQPainter* p, int row, int col, has already been translated to the cell's origin. \a cr describes the cell coordinates in the content coordinate system. - If \a selected is TRUE the cell is highlighted. + If \a selected is true the cell is highlighted. \a cg is the colorgroup which should be used to draw the cell content. @@ -2944,7 +2944,7 @@ void TQTable::paintCell( TQPainter* p, int row, int col, \code p->setClipRect( cellRect(row, col), TQPainter::CoordPainter ); //... your drawing code - p->setClipping( FALSE ); + p->setClipping( false ); \endcode */ @@ -2954,7 +2954,7 @@ void TQTable::paintCell( TQPainter *p, int row, int col, if ( focusStl == SpreadSheet && selected && row == curRow && col == curCol && ( hasFocus() || viewport()->hasFocus() ) ) - selected = FALSE; + selected = false; int w = cr.width(); int h = cr.height(); @@ -3011,10 +3011,10 @@ void TQTable::paintFocus( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &cr ) p->drawRect( focusRect.x(), focusRect.y(), focusRect.width() - 1, focusRect.height() - 1 ); p->drawRect( focusRect.x() - 1, focusRect.y() - 1, focusRect.width() + 1, focusRect.height() + 1 ); } else { - TQColor c = isSelected( curRow, curCol, FALSE ) ? + TQColor c = isSelected( curRow, curCol, false ) ? colorGroup().highlight() : colorGroup().base(); style().drawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, p, focusRect, colorGroup(), - ( isSelected( curRow, curCol, FALSE ) ? + ( isSelected( curRow, curCol, false ) ? TQStyle::Style_FocusAtBorder : TQStyle::Style_Default ), TQStyleOption(c) ); @@ -3107,7 +3107,7 @@ void TQTable::setItem( int row, int col, TQTableItem *item ) item->updateEditor( orow, ocol ); if ( row == curRow && col == curCol && item->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent ) { - if ( beginEdit( row, col, FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( row, col, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, row, col ); } } @@ -3124,9 +3124,9 @@ void TQTable::clearCell( int row, int col ) if ( (int)contents.size() != numRows() * numCols() ) resizeData( numRows() * numCols() ); clearCellWidget( row, col ); - contents.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( true ); contents.remove( indexOf( row, col ) ); - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); } /*! @@ -3219,7 +3219,7 @@ TQPixmap TQTable::pixmap( int row, int col ) const void TQTable::setCurrentCell( int row, int col ) { - setCurrentCell( row, col, TRUE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( row, col, true, true ); } // need to use a define, as leftMargin() is protected @@ -3247,7 +3247,7 @@ void TQTable::setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensu TQTableItem *itm = oldItem; if ( itm && itm->editType() != TQTableItem::Always && itm->editType() != TQTableItem::Never ) - endEdit( itm->row(), itm->col(), TRUE, FALSE ); + endEdit( itm->row(), itm->col(), true, false ); int oldRow = curRow; int oldCol = curCol; curRow = row; @@ -3263,14 +3263,14 @@ void TQTable::setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensu topHeader->setSectionState( oldCol, TQTableHeader::Normal ); else if ( isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) topHeader->setSectionState( oldCol, TQTableHeader::Selected ); - topHeader->setSectionState( curCol, isColumnSelected( curCol, TRUE ) ? + topHeader->setSectionState( curCol, isColumnSelected( curCol, true ) ? TQTableHeader::Selected : TQTableHeader::Bold ); } if ( oldRow != curRow ) { if ( !isRowSelected( oldRow ) ) leftHeader->setSectionState( oldRow, TQTableHeader::Normal ); - leftHeader->setSectionState( curRow, isRowSelected( curRow, TRUE ) ? + leftHeader->setSectionState( curRow, isRowSelected( curRow, true ) ? TQTableHeader::Selected : TQTableHeader::Bold ); } @@ -3286,7 +3286,7 @@ void TQTable::setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensu viewport()->setFocus(); if ( itm && itm->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent ) { - if ( beginEdit( itm->row(), itm->col(), FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( itm->row(), itm->col(), false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, itm->row(), itm->col() ); } else if ( itm && itm->editType() == TQTableItem::Always ) { if ( cellWidget( itm->row(), itm->col() ) ) @@ -3294,7 +3294,7 @@ void TQTable::setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensu } if ( updateSelections && isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) && - !isSelected( curRow, curCol, FALSE ) ) { + !isSelected( curRow, curCol, false ) ) { if ( selectionMode() == TQTable::SingleRow ) clearSelection(); currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); @@ -3323,15 +3323,15 @@ void TQTable::ensureCellVisible( int row, int col ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the cell at \a row, \a col is selected; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the cell at \a row, \a col is selected; otherwise + returns false. \sa isRowSelected() isColumnSelected() */ bool TQTable::isSelected( int row, int col ) const { - return isSelected( row, col, TRUE ); + return isSelected( row, col, true ); } /*! \internal */ @@ -3347,18 +3347,18 @@ bool TQTable::isSelected( int row, int col, bool includeCurrent ) const row <= s->bottomRow() && col >= s->leftCol() && col <= s->rightCol() ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( includeCurrent && row == currentRow() && col == currentColumn() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if row \a row is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if row \a row is selected; otherwise returns false. - If \a full is FALSE (the default), 'row is selected' means that at - least one cell in the row is selected. If \a full is TRUE, then 'row + If \a full is false (the default), 'row is selected' means that at + least one cell in the row is selected. If \a full is true, then 'row is selected' means every cell in the row is selected. \sa isColumnSelected() isSelected() @@ -3374,9 +3374,9 @@ bool TQTable::isRowSelected( int row, bool full ) const if ( s->isActive() && row >= s->topRow() && row <= s->bottomRow() ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( row == currentRow() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } else { TQPtrListIterator<TQTableSelection> it( selections ); @@ -3388,17 +3388,17 @@ bool TQTable::isRowSelected( int row, bool full ) const row <= s->bottomRow() && s->leftCol() == 0 && s->rightCol() == numCols() - 1 ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if column \a col is selected; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if column \a col is selected; otherwise returns false. - If \a full is FALSE (the default), 'column is selected' means that - at least one cell in the column is selected. If \a full is TRUE, + If \a full is false (the default), 'column is selected' means that + at least one cell in the column is selected. If \a full is true, then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is selected. @@ -3415,9 +3415,9 @@ bool TQTable::isColumnSelected( int col, bool full ) const if ( s->isActive() && col >= s->leftCol() && col <= s->rightCol() ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( col == currentColumn() ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } else { TQPtrListIterator<TQTableSelection> it( selections ); @@ -3429,10 +3429,10 @@ bool TQTable::isColumnSelected( int col, bool full ) const col <= s->rightCol() && s->topRow() == 0 && s->bottomRow() == numRows() - 1 ) - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -3485,7 +3485,7 @@ int TQTable::addSelection( const TQTableSelection &s ) selections.append( sel ); - repaintSelections( 0, sel, TRUE, TRUE ); + repaintSelections( 0, sel, true, true ); emit selectionChanged(); @@ -3501,17 +3501,17 @@ int TQTable::addSelection( const TQTableSelection &s ) void TQTable::removeSelection( const TQTableSelection &s ) { - selections.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + selections.setAutoDelete( false ); for ( TQTableSelection *sel = selections.first(); sel; sel = selections.next() ) { if ( s == *sel ) { selections.removeRef( sel ); - repaintSelections( sel, 0, TRUE, TRUE ); + repaintSelections( sel, 0, true, true ); if ( sel == currentSel ) currentSel = 0; delete sel; } } - selections.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + selections.setAutoDelete( true ); emit selectionChanged(); } @@ -3532,7 +3532,7 @@ void TQTable::removeSelection( int num ) if ( s == currentSel ) currentSel = 0; selections.removeRef( s ); - repaintContents( FALSE ); + repaintContents( false ); } /*! @@ -3579,7 +3579,7 @@ void TQTable::selectRow( int row ) row = TQMIN(numRows()-1, row); if ( row < 0 ) return; - bool isDataTable = FALSE; + bool isDataTable = false; #ifndef TQT_NO_SQL isDataTable = ::tqt_cast<TQDataTable*>(this) != 0; #endif @@ -3613,17 +3613,17 @@ void TQTable::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e ) void TQTable::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent* e ) { - shouldClearSelection = FALSE; + shouldClearSelection = false; if ( isEditing() ) { if ( !cellGeometry( editRow, editCol ).contains( e->pos() ) ) { - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); } else { e->ignore(); return; } } - d->redirectMouseEvent = FALSE; + d->redirectMouseEvent = false; int tmpRow = rowAt( e->pos().y() ); int tmpCol = columnAt( e->pos().x() ); @@ -3649,7 +3649,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent* e ) if ( ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) == ShiftButton ) { int oldRow = curRow; int oldCol = curCol; - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, selMode == SingleRow, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, selMode == SingleRow, true ); if ( selMode != NoSelection && selMode != SingleRow ) { if ( !currentSel ) { currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); @@ -3668,11 +3668,11 @@ void TQTable::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent* e ) emit selectionChanged(); } } else if ( ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton ) { - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); if ( selMode != NoSelection ) { - if ( selMode == Single || ( selMode == SingleRow && !isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE ) ) ) + if ( selMode == Single || ( selMode == SingleRow && !isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, false ) ) ) clearSelection(); - if ( !(selMode == SingleRow && isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE )) ) { + if ( !(selMode == SingleRow && isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, false )) ) { currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); selections.append( currentSel ); if ( !isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) { @@ -3687,7 +3687,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent* e ) } } } else { - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); TQTableItem *itm = item( tmpRow, tmpCol ); if ( itm && itm->editType() == TQTableItem::WhenCurrent ) { TQWidget *w = cellWidget( tmpRow, tmpCol ); @@ -3696,15 +3696,15 @@ void TQTable::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent* e ) e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state() ); TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( w, 0 ); TQApplication::sendEvent( w, &ev ); - d->redirectMouseEvent = TRUE; + d->redirectMouseEvent = true; } } - if ( isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE ) ) { - shouldClearSelection = TRUE; + if ( isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, false ) ) { + shouldClearSelection = true; } else { bool b = signalsBlocked(); if ( selMode != NoSelection ) - blockSignals( TRUE ); + blockSignals( true ); clearSelection(); blockSignals( b ); if ( selMode != NoSelection ) { @@ -3741,7 +3741,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( itm && !itm->isEnabled() ) return; if ( tmpRow != -1 && tmpCol != -1 ) { - if ( beginEdit( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( tmpRow, tmpCol, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, tmpRow, tmpCol ); } @@ -3783,7 +3783,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) } #endif if ( selectionMode() == MultiRow && ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton ) - shouldClearSelection = FALSE; + shouldClearSelection = false; if ( shouldClearSelection ) { clearSelection(); @@ -3796,7 +3796,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) currentSel->init( tmpRow, 0 ); emit selectionChanged(); } - shouldClearSelection = FALSE; + shouldClearSelection = false; } TQPoint pos = mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ); @@ -3804,7 +3804,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) autoScrollTimer->stop(); doAutoScroll(); if ( pos.x() < 0 || pos.x() > visibleWidth() || pos.y() < 0 || pos.y() > visibleHeight() ) - autoScrollTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + autoScrollTimer->start( 100, true ); } /*! \internal @@ -3854,7 +3854,7 @@ void TQTable::doAutoScroll() if ( currentSel && selMode != NoSelection ) { TQTableSelection oldSelection = *currentSel; - bool useOld = TRUE; + bool useOld = true; if ( selMode != SingleRow ) { if ( !isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) { currentSel->expandTo( tmpRow, tmpCol ); @@ -3864,7 +3864,7 @@ void TQTable::doAutoScroll() } else { bool currentInSelection = tmpRow == curRow && isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol ); if ( !currentInSelection ) { - useOld = FALSE; + useOld = false; clearSelection(); currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); selections.append( currentSel ); @@ -3875,16 +3875,16 @@ void TQTable::doAutoScroll() currentSel->expandTo( tmpRow, numCols() - 1 ); } } - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); repaintSelections( useOld ? &oldSelection : 0, currentSel ); if ( currentSel && oldSelection != *currentSel ) emit selectionChanged(); } else { - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); } if ( pos.x() < 0 || pos.x() > visibleWidth() || pos.y() < 0 || pos.y() > visibleHeight() ) - autoScrollTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + autoScrollTimer->start( 100, true ); } /*! \reimp @@ -3915,7 +3915,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) } emit selectionChanged(); } - shouldClearSelection = FALSE; + shouldClearSelection = false; } autoScrollTimer->stop(); @@ -3976,26 +3976,26 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e; if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape ) { if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) - endEdit( editRow, editCol, FALSE, edMode != Editing ); - return TRUE; + endEdit( editRow, editCol, false, edMode != Editing ); + return true; } if ( ( ke->state() == NoButton || ke->state() == Keypad ) && ( ke->key() == Key_Return || ke->key() == Key_Enter ) ) { if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); activateNextCell(); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( ke->key() == Key_Tab || ke->key() == Key_BackTab ) { if ( ke->state() & TQt::ControlButton ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); if ( (ke->key() == Key_Tab) && !(ke->state() & ShiftButton) ) { if ( currentColumn() >= numCols() - 1 ) - return TRUE; + return true; int cc = TQMIN( numCols() - 1, currentColumn() + 1 ); while ( cc < numCols() ) { TQTableItem *i = item( currentRow(), cc ); @@ -4006,7 +4006,7 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) setCurrentCell( currentRow(), cc ); } else { // Key_BackTab if ( currentColumn() == 0 ) - return TRUE; + return true; int cc = TQMAX( 0, currentColumn() - 1 ); while ( cc >= 0 ) { TQTableItem *i = item( currentRow(), cc ); @@ -4017,9 +4017,9 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) setCurrentCell( currentRow(), cc ); } itm = item( curRow, curCol ); - if ( beginEdit( curRow, curCol, FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( curRow, curCol, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, curRow, curCol ); - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( ( edMode == Replacing || @@ -4029,10 +4029,10 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) ke->key() == Key_Next || ke->key() == Key_End || ke->key() == Key_Left || ke->key() == Key_Right ) ) { if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) { - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); } keyPressEvent( ke ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } else { TQObjectList *l = viewport()->queryList( "TQWidget" ); @@ -4044,9 +4044,9 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) ke->key() != Key_Up && ke->key() != Key_Down && ke->key() != Key_Prior && ke->key() != Key_Next && ke->key() != Key_Home && ke->key() != Key_End ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; keyPressEvent( (TQKeyEvent*)e ); - return TRUE; + return true; } delete l; } @@ -4056,8 +4056,8 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) if ( isEditing() && editorWidget && o == editorWidget && ( (TQFocusEvent*)e )->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup ) { TQTableItem *itm = item( editRow, editCol ); if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) { - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); - return TRUE; + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); + return true; } } break; @@ -4067,7 +4067,7 @@ bool TQTable::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) TQWheelEvent* we = (TQWheelEvent*)e; scrollBy( 0, -we->delta() ); we->accept(); - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif default: @@ -4126,30 +4126,30 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) int oldRow = tmpRow; int oldCol = tmpCol; - bool navigationKey = FALSE; + bool navigationKey = false; int r; switch ( e->key() ) { case Key_Left: tmpCol = TQMAX( 0, tmpCol - 1 ); - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Right: tmpCol = TQMIN( numCols() - 1, tmpCol + 1 ); - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Up: tmpRow = TQMAX( 0, tmpRow - 1 ); - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Down: tmpRow = TQMIN( numRows() - 1, tmpRow + 1 ); - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Prior: r = TQMAX( 0, rowAt( rowPos( tmpRow ) - visibleHeight() ) ); if ( r < tmpRow || tmpRow < 0 ) tmpRow = r; - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Next: r = TQMIN( numRows() - 1, rowAt( rowPos( tmpRow ) + visibleHeight() ) ); @@ -4157,18 +4157,18 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) tmpRow = r; else tmpRow = numRows() - 1; - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_Home: tmpRow = 0; - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_End: tmpRow = numRows() - 1; - navigationKey = TRUE; + navigationKey = true; break; case Key_F2: - if ( beginEdit( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE ) ) + if ( beginEdit( tmpRow, tmpCol, false ) ) setEditMode( Editing, tmpRow, tmpCol ); break; case Key_Enter: case Key_Return: @@ -4207,7 +4207,7 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) TQTableItem *itm = item( tmpRow, tmpCol ); if ( !itm || itm->editType() == TQTableItem::OnTyping ) { TQWidget *w = beginEdit( tmpRow, tmpCol, - itm ? itm->isReplaceable() : TRUE ); + itm ? itm->isReplaceable() : true ); if ( w ) { setEditMode( ( !itm || ( itm && itm->isReplaceable() ) ? Replacing : Editing ), tmpRow, tmpCol ); @@ -4224,10 +4224,10 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) fixCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, e->key() ); if ( ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) == ShiftButton && selMode != NoSelection && selMode != SingleRow ) { - bool justCreated = FALSE; - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + bool justCreated = false; + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); if ( !currentSel ) { - justCreated = TRUE; + justCreated = true; currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); selections.append( currentSel ); if ( !isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) @@ -4243,23 +4243,23 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) repaintSelections( justCreated ? 0 : &oldSelection, currentSel ); emit selectionChanged(); } else { - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); if ( !isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) { clearSelection(); } else { - bool currentInSelection = tmpRow == oldRow && isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE ); + bool currentInSelection = tmpRow == oldRow && isSelected( tmpRow, tmpCol, false ); if ( !currentInSelection ) { - bool hasOldSel = FALSE; + bool hasOldSel = false; TQTableSelection oldSelection; if ( selectionMode() == MultiRow ) { bool b = signalsBlocked(); - blockSignals( TRUE ); + blockSignals( true ); clearSelection(); blockSignals( b ); } else { if ( currentSel ) { oldSelection = *currentSel; - hasOldSel = TRUE; + hasOldSel = true; selections.removeRef( currentSel ); leftHeader->setSectionState( oldSelection.topRow(), TQTableHeader::Normal ); } @@ -4274,7 +4274,7 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) } } } else { - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); } } @@ -4283,7 +4283,7 @@ void TQTable::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* e ) void TQTable::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent* ) { - d->inMenuMode = FALSE; + d->inMenuMode = false; TQWidget *editorWidget = cellWidget( editRow, editCol ); updateCell( curRow, curCol ); if ( style().styleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this ) ) @@ -4374,7 +4374,7 @@ void TQTable::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e ) #endif } -static bool inUpdateCell = FALSE; +static bool inUpdateCell = false; /*! Repaints the cell at \a row, \a col. @@ -4384,13 +4384,13 @@ void TQTable::updateCell( int row, int col ) { if ( inUpdateCell || row < 0 || col < 0 ) return; - inUpdateCell = TRUE; + inUpdateCell = true; TQRect cg = cellGeometry( row, col ); TQRect r( contentsToViewport( TQPoint( cg.x() - 2, cg.y() - 2 ) ), TQSize( cg.width() + 4, cg.height() + 4 ) ); if (viewport()->rect().intersects(r)) - TQApplication::postEvent( viewport(), new TQPaintEvent( r, FALSE ) ); - inUpdateCell = FALSE; + TQApplication::postEvent( viewport(), new TQPaintEvent( r, false ) ); + inUpdateCell = false; } void TQTable::repaintCell( int row, int col ) @@ -4404,7 +4404,7 @@ void TQTable::repaintCell( int row, int col ) TQRect v = viewport()->rect(); v.moveBy(contentsX(), contentsY()); if (v.intersects(r)) - repaintContents( r, FALSE ); + repaintContents( r, false ); } void TQTable::contentsToViewport2( int x, int y, int& vx, int& vy ) @@ -4450,10 +4450,10 @@ void TQTable::columnWidthChanged( int col ) resizeContents( s.width(), s.height() ); if ( contentsWidth() < w ) repaintContents( s.width(), contentsY(), - w - s.width() + 1, visibleHeight(), TRUE ); + w - s.width() + 1, visibleHeight(), true ); else repaintContents( w, contentsY(), - s.width() - w + 1, visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + s.width() - w + 1, visibleHeight(), false ); // update widgets that are affected by this change if ( widgets.size() ) { @@ -4481,10 +4481,10 @@ void TQTable::rowHeightChanged( int row ) resizeContents( s.width(), s.height() ); if ( contentsHeight() < h ) { repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsHeight(), - visibleWidth(), h - s.height() + 1, TRUE ); + visibleWidth(), h - s.height() + 1, true ); } else { repaintContents( contentsX(), h, - visibleWidth(), s.height() - h + 1, FALSE ); + visibleWidth(), s.height() - h + 1, false ); } // update widgets that are affected by this change @@ -4539,7 +4539,7 @@ void TQTable::columnIndexChanged( int, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) if ( doSort && lastSortCol == fromIndex && topHeader ) topHeader->setSortIndicator( toIndex, topHeader->sortIndicatorOrder() ); repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), - visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); } /*! @@ -4556,12 +4556,12 @@ void TQTable::columnIndexChanged( int, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) void TQTable::rowIndexChanged( int, int, int ) { repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), - visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); } /*! This function is called when the column \a col has been clicked. - The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is TRUE. + The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is true. */ void TQTable::columnClicked( int col ) @@ -4573,7 +4573,7 @@ void TQTable::columnClicked( int col ) asc = !asc; } else { lastSortCol = col; - asc = TRUE; + asc = true; } sortColumn( lastSortCol, asc ); } @@ -4597,11 +4597,11 @@ bool TQTable::sorting() const return doSort; } -static bool inUpdateGeometries = FALSE; +static bool inUpdateGeometries = false; void TQTable::delayedUpdateGeometries() { - d->geomTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + d->geomTimer->start( 0, true ); } void TQTable::updateGeometriesSlot() @@ -4618,7 +4618,7 @@ void TQTable::updateGeometries() { if ( inUpdateGeometries ) return; - inUpdateGeometries = TRUE; + inUpdateGeometries = true; TQSize ts = tableSize(); if ( topHeader->offset() && ts.width() < topHeader->offset() + topHeader->width() ) @@ -4635,7 +4635,7 @@ void TQTable::updateGeometries() verticalScrollBar()->raise(); topHeader->updateStretches(); leftHeader->updateStretches(); - inUpdateGeometries = FALSE; + inUpdateGeometries = false; } /*! @@ -4779,7 +4779,7 @@ void TQTable::saveContents( TQPtrVector<TQTableItem> &tmp, { int nCols = numCols(); if ( editRow != -1 && editCol != -1 ) - endEdit( editRow, editCol, FALSE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, false, edMode != Editing ); tmp.resize( contents.size() ); tmp2.resize( widgets.size() ); int i; @@ -4808,12 +4808,12 @@ void TQTable::updateHeaderAndResizeContents( TQTableHeader *header, header->TQHeader::resizeArrays( rowCol ); header->TQTableHeader::resizeArrays( rowCol ); int old = num; - clearSelection( FALSE ); + clearSelection( false ); int i = 0; for ( i = old; i < rowCol; ++i ) header->addLabel( TQString::null, width ); } else { - clearSelection( FALSE ); + clearSelection( false ); if ( header == leftHeader ) { while ( numRows() > rowCol ) header->removeLabel( numRows() - 1 ); @@ -4823,12 +4823,12 @@ void TQTable::updateHeaderAndResizeContents( TQTableHeader *header, } } - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); contents.clear(); - contents.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( true ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( false ); widgets.clear(); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); resizeData( numRows() * numCols() ); // keep numStretches in sync @@ -4888,10 +4888,10 @@ void TQTable::finishContentsResze( bool updateBefore ) updateGeometries(); if ( updateBefore ) repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), - visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), TRUE ); + visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), true ); else repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), - visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); if ( isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) { int r = curRow; @@ -4920,7 +4920,7 @@ void TQTable::setNumRows( int r ) saveContents( tmp, tmp2 ); bool isUpdatesEnabled = leftHeader->isUpdatesEnabled(); - leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); bool updateBefore; updateHeaderAndResizeContents( leftHeader, numRows(), r, 20, updateBefore ); @@ -4969,7 +4969,7 @@ void TQTable::setNumCols( int c ) saveContents( tmp, tmp2 ); bool isUpdatesEnabled = topHeader->isUpdatesEnabled(); - topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); bool updateBefore; updateHeaderAndResizeContents( topHeader, numCols(), c, 100, updateBefore ); @@ -5009,15 +5009,15 @@ void TQTable::setColumnLabels( const TQStringList &labels ) This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor for the contents of the cell at \a row, \a col. - If \a initFromCell is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current + If \a initFromCell is true, the editor is used to edit the current contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized - with this content). If \a initFromCell is FALSE, the content of + with this content). If \a initFromCell is false, the content of the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered into the widget created by this function. The default functionality is as follows: if \a initFromCell is - TRUE or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's - TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to + true or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's + TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is false then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using TQTableItem::createEditor()). Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor. @@ -5068,7 +5068,7 @@ TQWidget *TQTable::createEditor( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const // no contents in the cell yet, so open the default editor if ( !e ) { e = new TQLineEdit( viewport(), "qt_lineeditor" ); - ( (TQLineEdit*)e )->setFrame( FALSE ); + ( (TQLineEdit*)e )->setFrame( false ); } return e; @@ -5080,7 +5080,7 @@ TQWidget *TQTable::createEditor( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const (createEditor() is called) and setting the cell's editor with setCellWidget() to the newly created editor. (After editing is complete endEdit() will be called to replace the cell's content - with the editor's content.) If \a replace is TRUE the editor will + with the editor's content.) If \a replace is true the editor will start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original cell content. @@ -5115,11 +5115,11 @@ TQWidget *TQTable::beginEdit( int row, int col, bool replace ) This function is called when in-place editing of the cell at \a row, \a col is requested to stop. - If the cell is not being edited or \a accept is FALSE the function + If the cell is not being edited or \a accept is false the function returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged. - If \a accept is TRUE the content of the editor must be transferred - to the relevant cell. If \a replace is TRUE the current content of + If \a accept is true the content of the editor must be transferred + to the relevant cell. If \a replace is true the current content of this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this means removing the current TQTableItem of the cell and creating a new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the @@ -5208,8 +5208,8 @@ void TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor( int row, int col ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the \l EditMode is \c Editing or \c Replacing; - otherwise (i.e. the \l EditMode is \c NotEditing) returns FALSE. + Returns true if the \l EditMode is \c Editing or \c Replacing; + otherwise (i.e. the \l EditMode is \c NotEditing) returns false. \sa TQTable::EditMode */ @@ -5275,8 +5275,8 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, if ( oldSelection && !oldSelection->isActive() ) oldSelection = 0; - bool optimizeOld = FALSE; - bool optimizeNew = FALSE; + bool optimizeOld = false; + bool optimizeNew = false; TQRect old; if ( oldSelection ) @@ -5303,7 +5303,7 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, old.width() > SHRT_MAX || old.height() > SHRT_MAX || cur.width() > SHRT_MAX || cur.height() > SHRT_MAX ) { TQRect rr = cur.unite( old ); - repaintContents( rr, FALSE ); + repaintContents( rr, false ); } else { old = TQRect( contentsToViewport2( old.topLeft() ), old.size() ); cur = TQRect( contentsToViewport2( cur.topLeft() ), cur.size() ); @@ -5315,12 +5315,12 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, for ( i = 0; i < (int)r3.rects().count(); ++i ) { TQRect r( r3.rects()[ i ] ); r = TQRect( viewportToContents2( r.topLeft() ), r.size() ); - repaintContents( r, FALSE ); + repaintContents( r, false ); } for ( i = 0; i < (int)r4.rects().count(); ++i ) { TQRect r( r4.rects()[ i ] ); r = TQRect( viewportToContents2( r.topLeft() ), r.size() ); - repaintContents( r, FALSE ); + repaintContents( r, false ); } } @@ -5354,13 +5354,13 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, for ( i = left; i <= right; ++i ) { if ( !isColumnSelected( i ) ) *s = TQTableHeader::Normal; - else if ( isColumnSelected( i, TRUE ) ) + else if ( isColumnSelected( i, true ) ) *s = TQTableHeader::Selected; else *s = TQTableHeader::Bold; ++s; } - topHeader->repaint( FALSE ); + topHeader->repaint( false ); } if ( updateVertical && numRows() > 0 && top >= 0 ) { @@ -5368,13 +5368,13 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, for ( i = top; i <= bottom; ++i ) { if ( !isRowSelected( i ) ) *s = TQTableHeader::Normal; - else if ( isRowSelected( i, TRUE ) ) + else if ( isRowSelected( i, true ) ) *s = TQTableHeader::Selected; else *s = TQTableHeader::Bold; ++s; } - leftHeader->repaint( FALSE ); + leftHeader->repaint( false ); } } @@ -5396,12 +5396,12 @@ void TQTable::repaintSelections() s->rightCol(), b ) ); } - repaintContents( r, FALSE ); + repaintContents( r, false ); } /*! Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if \a - repaint is TRUE. + repaint is true. \sa removeSelection() */ @@ -5425,13 +5425,13 @@ void TQTable::clearSelection( bool repaint ) selections.clear(); if ( needRepaint && repaint ) - repaintContents( r, FALSE ); + repaintContents( r, false ); leftHeader->setSectionStateToAll( TQTableHeader::Normal ); - leftHeader->repaint( FALSE ); + leftHeader->repaint( false ); if ( !isRowSelection( selectionMode() ) ) { topHeader->setSectionStateToAll( TQTableHeader::Normal ); - topHeader->repaint( FALSE ); + topHeader->repaint( false ); } topHeader->setSectionState( curCol, TQTableHeader::Bold ); leftHeader->setSectionState( curRow, TQTableHeader::Bold ); @@ -5452,14 +5452,14 @@ TQRect TQTable::rangeGeometry( int topRow, int leftCol, int ca = columnAt( contentsX() + visibleWidth() ); if ( ca != -1 ) rightCol = TQMIN( rightCol, ca ); - optimize = TRUE; + optimize = true; TQRect rect; for ( int r = topRow; r <= bottomRow; ++r ) { for ( int c = leftCol; c <= rightCol; ++c ) { rect = rect.unite( cellGeometry( r, c ) ); TQTableItem *i = item( r, c ); if ( i && ( i->rowSpan() > 1 || i->colSpan() > 1 ) ) - optimize = FALSE; + optimize = false; } } return rect; @@ -5563,10 +5563,10 @@ static int cmpTableItems( const void *n1, const void *n2 ) #endif /*! - Sorts column \a col. If \a ascending is TRUE the sort is in + Sorts column \a col. If \a ascending is true the sort is in ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order. - If \a wholeRows is TRUE, entire rows are sorted using swapRows(); + If \a wholeRows is true, entire rows are sorted using swapRows(); otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using swapCells(). Note that if you are not using TQTableItems you will need to @@ -5600,7 +5600,7 @@ void TQTable::sortColumn( int col, bool ascending, bool wholeRows ) qsort( items, filledRows, sizeof( SortableTableItem ), cmpTableItems ); bool updatesEnabled = isUpdatesEnabled(); - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); for ( i = 0; i < numRows(); ++i ) { if ( i < filledRows ) { if ( ascending ) { @@ -5627,10 +5627,10 @@ void TQTable::sortColumn( int col, bool ascending, bool wholeRows ) if ( !wholeRows ) repaintContents( columnPos( col ), contentsY(), - columnWidth( col ), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + columnWidth( col ), visibleHeight(), false ); else repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), - visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), FALSE ); + visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), false ); delete [] items; } @@ -5647,7 +5647,7 @@ void TQTable::hideRow( int row ) return; d->hiddenRows.replace( row, new int( leftHeader->sectionSize( row ) ) ); leftHeader->resizeSection( row, 0 ); - leftHeader->setResizeEnabled( FALSE, row ); + leftHeader->setResizeEnabled( false, row ); if ( isRowStretchable(row) ) leftHeader->numStretches--; rowHeightChanged( row ); @@ -5673,7 +5673,7 @@ void TQTable::hideColumn( int col ) return; d->hiddenCols.replace( col, new int( topHeader->sectionSize( col ) ) ); topHeader->resizeSection( col, 0 ); - topHeader->setResizeEnabled( FALSE, col ); + topHeader->setResizeEnabled( false, col ); if ( isColumnStretchable(col) ) topHeader->numStretches--; columnWidthChanged( col ); @@ -5705,7 +5705,7 @@ void TQTable::showRow( int row ) } else if ( rowHeight( row ) == 0 ) { setRowHeight( row, 20 ); } - leftHeader->setResizeEnabled( TRUE, row ); + leftHeader->setResizeEnabled( true, row ); } /*! @@ -5726,12 +5726,12 @@ void TQTable::showColumn( int col ) } else if ( columnWidth( col ) == 0 ) { setColumnWidth( col, 20 ); } - topHeader->setResizeEnabled( TRUE, col ); + topHeader->setResizeEnabled( true, col ); } /*! - Returns TRUE if row \a row is hidden; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if row \a row is hidden; otherwise returns + false. \sa hideRow(), isColumnHidden() */ @@ -5741,8 +5741,8 @@ bool TQTable::isRowHidden( int row ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if column \a col is hidden; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if column \a col is hidden; otherwise returns + false. \sa hideColumn(), isRowHidden() */ @@ -5853,7 +5853,7 @@ void TQTable::adjustRow( int row ) } /*! - If \a stretch is TRUE, column \a col is set to be stretchable; + If \a stretch is true, column \a col is set to be stretchable; otherwise column \a col is set to be unstretchable. If the table widget's width decreases or increases stretchable @@ -5873,7 +5873,7 @@ void TQTable::setColumnStretchable( int col, bool stretch ) } /*! - If \a stretch is TRUE, row \a row is set to be stretchable; + If \a stretch is true, row \a row is set to be stretchable; otherwise row \a row is set to be unstretchable. If the table widget's height decreases or increases stretchable @@ -5893,8 +5893,8 @@ void TQTable::setRowStretchable( int row, bool stretch ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if column \a col is stretchable; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if column \a col is stretchable; otherwise returns + false. \sa setColumnStretchable() isRowStretchable() */ @@ -5905,8 +5905,8 @@ bool TQTable::isColumnStretchable( int col ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if row \a row is stretchable; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if row \a row is stretchable; otherwise returns + false. \sa setRowStretchable() isColumnStretchable() */ @@ -5934,7 +5934,7 @@ void TQTable::takeItem( TQTableItem *i ) if ( !i ) return; TQRect rect = cellGeometry( i->row(), i->col() ); - contents.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( false ); int bottom = i->row() + i->rowSpan(); if ( bottom > numRows() ) bottom = numRows(); @@ -5945,8 +5945,8 @@ void TQTable::takeItem( TQTableItem *i ) for ( int c = i->col(); c < right; ++c ) contents.remove( indexOf( r, c ) ); } - contents.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); - repaintContents( rect, FALSE ); + contents.setAutoDelete( true ); + repaintContents( rect, false ); int orow = i->row(); int ocol = i->col(); i->setRow( -1 ); @@ -5981,7 +5981,7 @@ void TQTable::setCellWidget( int row, int col, TQWidget *e ) TQWidget *w = cellWidget( row, col ); if ( w && row == editRow && col == editCol ) - endEdit( editRow, editCol, FALSE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, false, edMode != Editing ); e->installEventFilter( this ); clearCellWidget( row, col ); @@ -6067,9 +6067,9 @@ void TQTable::clearCellWidget( int row, int col ) w->removeEventFilter( this ); w->deleteLater(); } - widgets.setAutoDelete( FALSE ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( false ); widgets.remove( indexOf( row, col ) ); - widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); + widgets.setAutoDelete( true ); } /*! @@ -6081,7 +6081,7 @@ void TQTable::clearCellWidget( int row, int col ) */ /*! - If \a b is TRUE, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when + If \a b is true, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell. */ @@ -6091,7 +6091,7 @@ void TQTable::setDragEnabled( bool b ) } /*! - If this function returns TRUE, the table supports dragging. + If this function returns true, the table supports dragging. \sa setDragEnabled(); */ @@ -6124,9 +6124,9 @@ void TQTable::insertRows( int row, int count ) return; bool updatesEnabled = isUpdatesEnabled(); - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); bool leftHeaderUpdatesEnabled = leftHeader->isUpdatesEnabled(); - leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + leftHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); int oldLeftMargin = leftMargin(); setNumRows( numRows() + count ); @@ -6141,7 +6141,7 @@ void TQTable::insertRows( int row, int count ) int cc = TQMAX( 0, currentColumn() ); if ( curRow > row ) curRow -= count; // this is where curRow was - setCurrentCell( cr, cc, TRUE, FALSE ); // without ensureCellVisible + setCurrentCell( cr, cc, true, false ); // without ensureCellVisible // Repaint the header if ( leftHeaderUpdatesEnabled ) { @@ -6182,9 +6182,9 @@ void TQTable::insertColumns( int col, int count ) return; bool updatesEnabled = isUpdatesEnabled(); - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); bool topHeaderUpdatesEnabled = topHeader->isUpdatesEnabled(); - topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + topHeader->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); int oldTopMargin = topMargin(); setNumCols( numCols() + count ); @@ -6199,7 +6199,7 @@ void TQTable::insertColumns( int col, int count ) int cc = TQMAX( 0, currentColumn() ); if ( curCol > col ) curCol -= count; // this is where curCol was - setCurrentCell( cr, cc, TRUE, FALSE ); // without ensureCellVisible + setCurrentCell( cr, cc, true, false ); // without ensureCellVisible // Repaint the header if ( topHeaderUpdatesEnabled ) { @@ -6321,7 +6321,7 @@ void TQTable::removeColumns( const TQMemArray<int> &cols ) /*! Starts editing the cell at \a row, \a col. - If \a replace is TRUE the content of this cell will be replaced by + If \a replace is true the content of this cell will be replaced by the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the cell (if any) will be modified in the editor. @@ -6360,7 +6360,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e ) fixRow( tmpRow, e->pos().y() ); fixCol( tmpCol, e->pos().x() ); if (e->source() != (TQObject*)cellWidget( currentRow(), currentColumn() ) ) - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); e->accept(); } @@ -6379,7 +6379,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e ) fixRow( tmpRow, e->pos().y() ); fixCol( tmpCol, e->pos().x() ); if (e->source() != (TQObject*)cellWidget( currentRow(), currentColumn() ) ) - setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( tmpRow, tmpCol, false, true ); e->accept(); } @@ -6390,7 +6390,7 @@ void TQTable::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e ) void TQTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) { - setCurrentCell( oldCurrentRow, oldCurrentCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( oldCurrentRow, oldCurrentCol, false, true ); } /*! @@ -6401,13 +6401,13 @@ void TQTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * ) void TQTable::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e ) { - setCurrentCell( oldCurrentRow, oldCurrentCol, FALSE, TRUE ); + setCurrentCell( oldCurrentRow, oldCurrentCol, false, true ); emit dropped( e ); } /*! If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving - (i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is TRUE, this function is + (i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is true, this function is called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins immediately unless dragObject() returns 0. @@ -6465,7 +6465,7 @@ void TQTable::setEnabled( bool b ) if ( !b ) { // editor will lose focus, causing a crash deep in setEnabled(), // so we'll end the edit early. - endEdit( editRow, editCol, TRUE, edMode != Editing ); + endEdit( editRow, editCol, true, edMode != Editing ); } TQScrollView::setEnabled(b); } @@ -6507,16 +6507,16 @@ void TQTable::setEnabled( bool b ) TQTableHeader::TQTableHeader( int i, TQTable *t, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQHeader( i, parent, name ), mousePressed(FALSE), startPos(-1), - table( t ), caching( FALSE ), resizedSection(-1), + : TQHeader( i, parent, name ), mousePressed(false), startPos(-1), + table( t ), caching( false ), resizedSection(-1), numStretches( 0 ) { - setIsATableHeader( TRUE ); + setIsATableHeader( true ); d = 0; states.resize( i ); stretchable.resize( i ); states.fill( Normal, -1 ); - stretchable.fill( FALSE, -1 ); + stretchable.fill( false, -1 ); autoScrollTimer = new TQTimer( this ); connect( autoScrollTimer, TQ_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQ_SLOT( doAutoScroll() ) ); @@ -6563,7 +6563,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::addLabel( const TQString &s , int size ) stretchable.resize( count() ); for ( ; s < count(); ++s ) { states[ s ] = Normal; - stretchable[ s ] = FALSE; + stretchable[ s ] = false; } } } @@ -6584,7 +6584,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::resizeArrays( int n ) stretchable.resize( n ); if ( n > old ) { for ( int i = old; i < n; ++i ) { - stretchable[ i ] = FALSE; + stretchable[ i ] = false; states[ i ] = Normal; } } @@ -6621,9 +6621,9 @@ void TQTableHeader::setSectionState( int s, SectionState astate ) states.data()[ s ] = astate; if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) { if ( orientation() == Horizontal ) - repaint( sectionPos( s ) - offset(), 0, sectionSize( s ), height(), FALSE ); + repaint( sectionPos( s ) - offset(), 0, sectionSize( s ), height(), false ); else - repaint( 0, sectionPos( s ) - offset(), width(), sectionSize( s ), FALSE ); + repaint( 0, sectionPos( s ) - offset(), width(), sectionSize( s ), false ); } } @@ -6692,7 +6692,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e ) if ( !( orientation() == Horizontal && isRowSelection( table->selectionMode() ) ) && ( sectionState( i ) == Bold || sectionState( i ) == Selected ) ) { TQFont f( font() ); - f.setBold( TRUE ); + f.setBold( true ); p.setFont( f ); } paintSection( &p, i, r ); @@ -6755,14 +6755,14 @@ void TQTableHeader::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( e->button() != LeftButton ) return; TQHeader::mousePressEvent( e ); - mousePressed = TRUE; + mousePressed = true; pressPos = real_pos( e->pos(), orientation() ); if ( !table->currentSel || ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) != ShiftButton ) startPos = -1; - setCaching( TRUE ); + setCaching( true ); resizedSection = -1; #ifdef TQT_NO_CURSOR - isResizing = FALSE; + isResizing = false; #else isResizing = cursor().shape() != ArrowCursor; if ( !isResizing && sectionAt( pressPos ) != -1 ) @@ -6796,13 +6796,13 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( isRowSelection( table->selectionMode() ) ) { if ( orientation() == Horizontal ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( table->selectionMode() == TQTable::SingleRow ) { int secAt = sectionAt( p ); if ( secAt == -1 ) - return TRUE; + return true; table->setCurrentCell( secAt, table->currentColumn() ); - return TRUE; + return true; } } @@ -6814,7 +6814,7 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) table->selectionMode() == TQTable::SingleRow ) { startPos = p; bool b = table->signalsBlocked(); - table->blockSignals( TRUE ); + table->blockSignals( true ); table->clearSelection(); table->blockSignals( b ); } @@ -6825,7 +6825,7 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) TQTableSelection *oldSelection = table->currentSel; if ( orientation() == Vertical ) { - if ( !table->isRowSelected( secAt, TRUE ) ) { + if ( !table->isRowSelected( secAt, true ) ) { table->currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); table->selections.append( table->currentSel ); table->currentSel->init( secAt, 0 ); @@ -6834,7 +6834,7 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) } table->setCurrentCell( secAt, 0 ); } else { // orientation == Horizontal - if ( !table->isColumnSelected( secAt, TRUE ) ) { + if ( !table->isColumnSelected( secAt, true ) ) { table->currentSel = new TQTableSelection(); table->selections.append( table->currentSel ); table->currentSel->init( 0, secAt ); @@ -6855,7 +6855,7 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( sectionAt( p ) != -1 ) endPos = p; - return TRUE; + return true; } } @@ -6866,12 +6866,12 @@ bool TQTableHeader::doSelection( TQMouseEvent *e ) p -= offset(); if ( orientation() == Horizontal && ( p < 0 || p > width() ) ) { doAutoScroll(); - autoScrollTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + autoScrollTimer->start( 100, true ); } else if ( orientation() == Vertical && ( p < 0 || p > height() ) ) { doAutoScroll(); - autoScrollTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + autoScrollTimer->start( 100, true ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } return table->selectionMode() == TQTable::NoSelection; } @@ -6907,8 +6907,8 @@ void TQTableHeader::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) if ( e->button() != LeftButton ) return; autoScrollTimer->stop(); - mousePressed = FALSE; - setCaching( FALSE ); + mousePressed = false; + setCaching( false ); TQHeader::mouseReleaseEvent( e ); #ifndef NO_LINE_WIDGET line1->hide(); @@ -6990,7 +6990,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e ) TQHeader::resizeEvent( e ); if ( numStretches == 0 ) return; - stretchTimer->start( 0, TRUE ); + stretchTimer->start( 0, true ); } void TQTableHeader::updateStretches() @@ -7005,7 +7005,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::updateStretches() int pd = dim - ( sectionPos(count() - 1) + sectionSize(count() - 1) ); bool block = signalsBlocked(); - blockSignals( TRUE ); + blockSignals( true ); for ( i = 0; i < (int)stretchable.count(); ++i ) { if ( !stretchable[i] || ( stretchable[i] && table->d->hiddenCols[i] ) ) @@ -7023,8 +7023,8 @@ void TQTableHeader::updateStretches() resizeSection( i, TQMAX( 20, pd ) ); } blockSignals( block ); - table->repaintContents( FALSE ); - widgetStretchTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + table->repaintContents( false ); + widgetStretchTimer->start( 100, true ); } void TQTableHeader::updateWidgetStretches() @@ -7052,7 +7052,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::updateSelections() *s = Selected; ++s; } - repaint( FALSE ); + repaint( false ); if (table->currentSel) { TQTableSelection oldSelection = *table->currentSel; @@ -7090,7 +7090,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::doAutoScroll() else table->ensureVisible( table->contentsX(), endPos ); updateSelections(); - autoScrollTimer->start( 100, TRUE ); + autoScrollTimer->start( 100, true ); } void TQTableHeader::sectionWidthChanged( int col, int, int ) @@ -7250,7 +7250,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::setCaching( bool b ) } /*! - If \a b is TRUE, section \a s is stretchable; otherwise the + If \a b is true, section \a s is stretchable; otherwise the section is not stretchable. \sa isSectionStretchable() @@ -7268,8 +7268,8 @@ void TQTableHeader::setSectionStretchable( int s, bool b ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if section \a s is stretcheable; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if section \a s is stretcheable; otherwise returns + false. \sa setSectionStretchable() */ @@ -7282,7 +7282,7 @@ bool TQTableHeader::isSectionStretchable( int s ) const void TQTableHeader::swapSections( int oldIdx, int newIdx, bool swapTable ) { extern bool tqt_qheader_label_return_null_strings; // tqheader.cpp - tqt_qheader_label_return_null_strings = TRUE; + tqt_qheader_label_return_null_strings = true; TQIconSet oldIconSet, newIconSet; if ( iconSet( oldIdx ) ) @@ -7298,7 +7298,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::swapSections( int oldIdx, int newIdx, bool swapTable ) setLabel( newIdx, oldIconSet, oldLabel ); } - tqt_qheader_label_return_null_strings = FALSE; + tqt_qheader_label_return_null_strings = false; int w1 = sectionSize( oldIdx ); int w2 = sectionSize( newIdx ); @@ -7344,7 +7344,7 @@ void TQTableHeader::setLabels(const TQStringList & labels) int i = 0; bool updates = isUpdatesEnabled(); const int c = TQMIN(count(), (int)labels.count()); - setUpdatesEnabled(FALSE); + setUpdatesEnabled(false); for ( TQStringList::ConstIterator it = labels.begin(); i < c; ++i, ++it ) { if (i == c - 1) { setUpdatesEnabled(updates); diff --git a/src/table/tqtable.h b/src/table/tqtable.h index 9f2535ec7..d26c06642 100644 --- a/src/table/tqtable.h +++ b/src/table/tqtable.h @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ private: class TQM_EXPORT_TABLE TQComboTableItem : public TQTableItem { public: - TQComboTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQStringList &list, bool editable = FALSE ); + TQComboTableItem( TQTable *table, const TQStringList &list, bool editable = false ); ~TQComboTableItem(); virtual TQWidget *createEditor() const; virtual void setContentFromEditor( TQWidget *w ); @@ -302,8 +302,8 @@ public: void ensureCellVisible( int row, int col ); bool isSelected( int row, int col ) const; - bool isRowSelected( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const; - bool isColumnSelected( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const; + bool isRowSelected( int row, bool full = false ) const; + bool isColumnSelected( int col, bool full = false ) const; int numSelections() const; TQTableSelection selection( int num ) const; virtual int addSelection( const TQTableSelection &s ); @@ -320,8 +320,8 @@ public: bool columnMovingEnabled() const; bool rowMovingEnabled() const; - virtual void sortColumn( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, - bool wholeRows = FALSE ); + virtual void sortColumn( int col, bool ascending = true, + bool wholeRows = false ); bool sorting() const; virtual void takeItem( TQTableItem *i ); @@ -375,14 +375,14 @@ public slots: bool isColumnStretchable( int col ) const; bool isRowStretchable( int row ) const; virtual void setSorting( bool b ); - virtual void swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ); - virtual void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE ); + virtual void swapRows( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false ); + virtual void swapColumns( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false ); virtual void swapCells( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ); virtual void setLeftMargin( int m ); virtual void setTopMargin( int m ); virtual void setCurrentCell( int row, int col ); - void clearSelection( bool repaint = TRUE ); + void clearSelection( bool repaint = true ); virtual void setColumnMovingEnabled( bool b ); virtual void setRowMovingEnabled( bool b ); @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public slots: virtual void removeColumn( int col ); virtual void removeColumns( const TQMemArray<int> &cols ); - virtual void editCell( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE ); + virtual void editCell( int row, int col, bool replace = false ); void setRowLabels( const TQStringList &labels ); void setColumnLabels( const TQStringList &labels ); @@ -476,8 +476,8 @@ private: void updateGeometries(); void repaintSelections( TQTableSelection *oldSelection, TQTableSelection *newSelection, - bool updateVertical = TRUE, - bool updateHorizontal = TRUE ); + bool updateVertical = true, + bool updateHorizontal = true ); TQRect rangeGeometry( int topRow, int leftCol, int bottomRow, int rightCol, bool &optimize ); void fixRow( int &row, int y ); @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ private: void updateRowWidgets( int row ); void updateColWidgets( int col ); bool isSelected( int row, int col, bool includeCurrent ) const; - void setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensureVisible = FALSE ); + void setCurrentCell( int row, int col, bool updateSelections, bool ensureVisible = false ); void fixCell( int &row, int &col, int key ); void delayedUpdateGeometries(); struct TableWidget diff --git a/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp b/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp index e209240e6..c5032d1d4 100644 --- a/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp +++ b/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp @@ -4573,7 +4573,7 @@ void TQListBox::handleItemChange( TQListBoxItem *old, bool shift, bool control ) } else if ( d->selectionMode == Extended ) { if ( shift ) { selectRange( d->selectAnchor ? d->selectAnchor : old, - d->current, FALSE, TRUE, (d->selectAnchor && !control) ? TRUE : FALSE ); + d->current, FALSE, TRUE, d->selectAnchor && !control ); } else if ( !control ) { bool block = signalsBlocked(); blockSignals( TRUE ); diff --git a/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp b/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp index 6d8f3771f..6d8cc3b37 100644 --- a/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp +++ b/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp @@ -5745,7 +5745,7 @@ TQt::SortOrder TQListView::sortOrder() const */ void TQListView::setSortOrder( SortOrder order ) { - setSorting( d->sortcolumn, order == Ascending ? TRUE : FALSE ); + setSorting( d->sortcolumn, order == Ascending ); } /*! @@ -7901,7 +7901,7 @@ void TQListView::handleItemChange( TQListViewItem *old, bool shift, bool control } else if ( d->selectionMode == Extended ) { if ( shift ) { selectRange( d->selectAnchor ? d->selectAnchor : old, - d->focusItem, FALSE, TRUE, (d->selectAnchor && !control) ? TRUE : FALSE ); + d->focusItem, FALSE, TRUE, d->selectAnchor && !control ); } else if ( !control ) { bool block = signalsBlocked(); blockSignals( TRUE ); diff --git a/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp b/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp index ab0f67896..91e171f38 100644 --- a/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp +++ b/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ If you want your users to be able to work with document windows larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled - property to TRUE. + property to true. If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize, @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ menu at the far left of the menu bar. */ -static bool inCaptionChange = FALSE; +static bool inCaptionChange = false; class TQWorkspaceChild : public TQFrame { @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ public: static bool isChildOf( TQWidget * child, TQWidget * parent ) { if ( !parent || !child ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQWidget * w = child; while( w && w != parent ) w = w->parentWidget(); @@ -333,8 +333,8 @@ TQWorkspace::init() d->toolPopup->insertItem(tr("&Move"), 2); d->toolPopup->insertItem(tr("&Size"), 3); d->toolPopup->insertItem(tr("Stay on &Top"), 7); - d->toolPopup->setItemChecked( 7, TRUE ); - d->toolPopup->setCheckable( TRUE ); + d->toolPopup->setItemChecked( 7, true ); + d->toolPopup->setCheckable( true ); d->toolPopup->insertSeparator(); d->toolPopup->insertItem(TQIconSet(style().stylePixmap(TQStyle::SP_TitleBarShadeButton)), tr("Sh&ade"), 6); d->toolPopup->insertItem(TQIconSet(style().stylePixmap(TQStyle::SP_TitleBarCloseButton)), @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus ) if ( d->active && d->active->windowWidget() == w ) { if ( !isChildOf( focusWidget(), w ) ) // child window does not have focus - d->active->setActive( TRUE ); + d->active->setActive( true ); return; } @@ -520,14 +520,14 @@ void TQWorkspace::activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus ) if (c->windowWidget() == w) d->active = c; else - c->setActive( FALSE ); + c->setActive( false ); } if (!d->active) return; // Then activate the new one, so the focus is stored correctly - d->active->setActive( TRUE ); + d->active->setActive( true ); if (!d->active) return; @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::place( TQWidget* w) int x = maxRect.left(), y = maxRect.top(); TQPoint wpos(maxRect.left(), maxRect.top()); - bool firstPass = TRUE; + bool firstPass = true; do { if ( y + w->height() > maxRect.bottom() ) { @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::place( TQWidget* w) } if (firstPass) { - firstPass = FALSE; + firstPass = false; minOverlap = overlap; } else if ( overlap >= 0 && overlap < minOverlap) { minOverlap = overlap; @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::insertIcon( TQWidget* w ) return; d->icons.append( w ); if (w->parentWidget() != this ) - w->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE); + w->reparent( this, 0, TQPoint(0,0), false); TQRect cr = updateWorkspace(); int x = 0; int y = cr.height() - w->height(); @@ -989,9 +989,9 @@ void TQWorkspace::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) w->parentWidget(), TQString("TQMagicDock_") + w->name()); dw->installEventFilter(this); - dw->setResizeEnabled(TRUE); + dw->setResizeEnabled(true); dw->setCloseMode( TQDockWindow::Always ); - dw->setResizeEnabled(FALSE); + dw->setResizeEnabled(false); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dw->setCaption(o->caption()); #endif @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) dw->setSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum)); dw->setGeometry(0, 0, os.width(), os.height() + dw->sizeHint().height()); d->newdocks.prepend(dw); - ((TQDockArea*)w)->setAcceptDockWindow(dw, FALSE); + ((TQDockArea*)w)->setAcceptDockWindow(dw, false); w->show(); } } @@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) // TQObject::connect(tqApp, TQ_SIGNAL(lastWindowClosed()), tqApp, TQ_SLOT(quit())); TQDesktopWidget *dw = TQApplication::desktop(); w->setGeometry(dw->availableGeometry(dw->screenNumber(o))); - o->reparent(w, TQPoint(0, 0), TRUE); + o->reparent(w, TQPoint(0, 0), true); { TQMenuBar *mb = 0; if(::tqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(o)) @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) // a windows bug as well though. for (TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( d->windows ); it.current(); ++it ) { TQWorkspaceChild* c = it.current(); - TQApplication::postEvent(c, new TQPaintEvent(c->rect(), TRUE)); + TQApplication::postEvent(c, new TQPaintEvent(c->rect(), true)); } updateWorkspace(); @@ -1093,24 +1093,24 @@ void TQWorkspace::minimizeWindow( TQWidget* w) if ( c ) { TQWorkspace *fake = (TQWorkspace*)w; - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); - bool wasMax = FALSE; + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); + bool wasMax = false; if ( c == d->maxWindow ) { - wasMax = TRUE; + wasMax = true; d->maxWindow = 0; - inCaptionChange = TRUE; + inCaptionChange = true; #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA if ( !!d->topCaption ) topLevelWidget()->setCaption( d->topCaption ); #endif - inCaptionChange = FALSE; + inCaptionChange = false; if ( !style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, this) ) hideMaximizeControls(); for (TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( d->windows ); it.current(); ++it ) { TQWorkspaceChild* c = it.current(); if ( c->titlebar ) - c->titlebar->setMovable( TRUE ); - c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TRUE ); + c->titlebar->setMovable( true ); + c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( true ); } } @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::minimizeWindow( TQWidget* w) activateWindow(w); - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); updateWorkspace(); fake->clearWState( WState_Maximized ); @@ -1144,9 +1144,9 @@ void TQWorkspace::normalizeWindow( TQWidget* w) hideMaximizeControls(); } else { if ( w->minimumSize() != w->maximumSize() ) - c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TRUE ); + c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( true ); if ( c->titlebar ) - c->titlebar->setMovable(TRUE); + c->titlebar->setMovable(true); } fake->clearWState( WState_Minimized | WState_Maximized ); c->clearWState( WState_Minimized | WState_Maximized ); @@ -1155,10 +1155,10 @@ void TQWorkspace::normalizeWindow( TQWidget* w) c->setGeometry( d->maxRestore ); d->maxWindow = 0; #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA - inCaptionChange = TRUE; + inCaptionChange = true; if ( !!d->topCaption ) topLevelWidget()->setCaption( d->topCaption ); - inCaptionChange = FALSE; + inCaptionChange = false; #endif } else { if ( c->iconw ) @@ -1171,11 +1171,11 @@ void TQWorkspace::normalizeWindow( TQWidget* w) for (TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( d->windows ); it.current(); ++it ) { TQWorkspaceChild* c = it.current(); if ( c->titlebar ) - c->titlebar->setMovable( TRUE ); + c->titlebar->setMovable( true ); if ( c->childWidget && c->childWidget->minimumSize() != c->childWidget->maximumSize() ) - c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TRUE ); + c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( true ); } - activateWindow( w, TRUE ); + activateWindow( w, true ); updateWorkspace(); } } @@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::maximizeWindow( TQWidget* w) return; if ( c ) { - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); if (c->iconw && d->icons.contains( c->iconw->parentWidget() ) ) normalizeWindow( w ); TQWorkspace *fake = (TQWorkspace*)w; @@ -1211,18 +1211,18 @@ void TQWorkspace::maximizeWindow( TQWidget* w) if(!style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, this)) { showMaximizeControls(); } else { - c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( FALSE ); + c->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( false ); if ( c->titlebar ) - c->titlebar->setMovable( FALSE ); + c->titlebar->setMovable( false ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA - inCaptionChange = TRUE; + inCaptionChange = true; if ( !!d->topCaption ) topLevelWidget()->setCaption( tr("%1 - [%2]") .arg(d->topCaption).arg(c->caption()) ); - inCaptionChange = FALSE; + inCaptionChange = false; #endif - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); updateWorkspace(); @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) TQChildEvent *ce = (TQChildEvent*)e; if(!::tqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(ce->child())) { tqDebug("No idea what to do.."); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQDockWindow *w = (TQDockWindow*)ce->child(); if(d->newdocks.find(w) == -1 && d->dockwindows.find(w) == -1) { @@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) tc = 0; closeActiveWindow(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } default: break; @@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) break; } if ( c->isShown() ) { - activateWindow( c->windowWidget(), FALSE ); + activateWindow( c->windowWidget(), false ); break; } } @@ -1400,17 +1400,17 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) if ( style().styleHint(TQStyle::SH_Workspace_FillSpaceOnMaximize, this)) { TQWorkspaceChild *wc = (TQWorkspaceChild *)o; - wc->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TRUE ); + wc->widgetResizeHandler->setActive( true ); if ( wc->titlebar ) - wc->titlebar->setMovable( TRUE ); + wc->titlebar->setMovable( true ); } else { hideMaximizeControls(); } #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA - inCaptionChange = TRUE; + inCaptionChange = true; if ( !!d->topCaption ) topLevelWidget()->setCaption( d->topCaption ); - inCaptionChange = FALSE; + inCaptionChange = false; #endif } } @@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) break; #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA - inCaptionChange = TRUE; + inCaptionChange = true; if ( o == topLevelWidget() ) { TQWidget *tlw = (TQWidget*)o; if ( !d->maxWindow @@ -1437,7 +1437,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) if ( d->maxWindow && !!d->topCaption ) topLevelWidget()->setCaption( tr("%1 - [%2]") .arg(d->topCaption).arg(d->maxWindow->caption())); - inCaptionChange = FALSE; + inCaptionChange = false; #endif break; @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showMaximizeControls() TQWidget* w = parentWidget(); TQObjectList * l = 0; while ( !l && w ) { - l = w->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, FALSE, FALSE ); + l = w->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, false, false ); w = w->parentWidget(); if ( l && !l->count() ) { delete l; @@ -1484,7 +1484,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showMaximizeControls() if ( !l || !l->count() ) { if ( l ) delete l; - l = topLevelWidget()->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, 0, TRUE ); + l = topLevelWidget()->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, 0, true ); } if ( l && l->count() ) b = (TQMenuBar *)l->first(); @@ -1544,7 +1544,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showMaximizeControls() } if ( !d->active && d->becomeActive ) { d->active = (TQWorkspaceChild*)d->becomeActive->parentWidget(); - d->active->setActive( TRUE ); + d->active->setActive( true ); d->becomeActive = 0; emit windowActivated( d->active->windowWidget() ); } @@ -1604,12 +1604,12 @@ void TQWorkspace::hideMaximizeControls() */ void TQWorkspace::closeActiveWindow() { - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); if ( d->maxWindow && d->maxWindow->windowWidget() ) d->maxWindow->windowWidget()->close(); else if ( d->active && d->active->windowWidget() ) d->active->windowWidget()->close(); - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); updateWorkspace(); } @@ -1623,7 +1623,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::closeActiveWindow() */ void TQWorkspace::closeAllWindows() { - bool did_close = TRUE; + bool did_close = true; TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( d->windows ); TQWorkspaceChild *c = 0; while ( ( c = it.current() ) && did_close ) { @@ -1696,15 +1696,15 @@ void TQWorkspace::operationMenuAboutToShow() d->popup->setItemEnabled( 5, windowWidget->testWFlags( WStyle_Maximize ) && canResize ); if ( d->active == d->maxWindow ) { - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 2, FALSE ); - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 3, FALSE ); - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 5, FALSE ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 2, false ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 3, false ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 5, false ); } else if ( d->active->isVisible() ){ - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 1, FALSE ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 1, false ); } else { - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 2, FALSE ); - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 3, FALSE ); - d->popup->setItemEnabled( 4, FALSE ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 2, false ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 3, false ); + d->popup->setItemEnabled( 4, false ); } } @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::activateNextWindow() return; if ( !d->active ) { if ( d->focus.first() ) - activateWindow( d->focus.first()->windowWidget(), FALSE ); + activateWindow( d->focus.first()->windowWidget(), false ); return; } @@ -1789,7 +1789,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::activateNextWindow() a = a % d->focus.count(); if ( d->focus.at( a ) ) - activateWindow( d->focus.at( a )->windowWidget(), FALSE ); + activateWindow( d->focus.at( a )->windowWidget(), false ); else activateWindow(0); } @@ -1810,7 +1810,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow() return; if ( !d->active ) { if ( d->focus.last() ) - activateWindow( d->focus.first()->windowWidget(), FALSE ); + activateWindow( d->focus.first()->windowWidget(), false ); else activateWindow( 0 ); @@ -1822,7 +1822,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow() a = d->focus.count()-1; if ( d->focus.at( a ) ) - activateWindow( d->focus.at( a )->windowWidget(), FALSE ); + activateWindow( d->focus.at( a )->windowWidget(), false ); else activateWindow( 0 ); } @@ -1847,17 +1847,17 @@ void TQWorkspace::activatePrevWindow() */ void TQWorkspace::cascade() { - blockSignals(TRUE); + blockSignals(true); if ( d->maxWindow ) d->maxWindow->showNormal(); if ( d->vbar ) { - d->vbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( true ); d->vbar->setValue( 0 ); - d->vbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( false ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( true ); d->hbar->setValue( 0 ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( false ); scrollBarChanged(); } @@ -1874,12 +1874,12 @@ void TQWorkspace::cascade() int x = 0; int y = 0; - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( widgets ); while ( it.current () ) { TQWorkspaceChild *child = it.current(); ++it; - child->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + child->setUpdatesEnabled( false ); TQSize prefSize = child->windowWidget()->sizeHint().expandedTo( child->windowWidget()->minimumSizeHint() ); if ( !prefSize.isValid() ) @@ -1901,11 +1901,11 @@ void TQWorkspace::cascade() x += xoffset; y += yoffset; child->internalRaise(); - child->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + child->setUpdatesEnabled( true ); } - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); updateWorkspace(); - blockSignals(FALSE); + blockSignals(false); } /*! @@ -1915,18 +1915,18 @@ void TQWorkspace::cascade() */ void TQWorkspace::tile() { - blockSignals(TRUE); + blockSignals(true); TQWidget *oldActive = d->active ? d->active->windowWidget() : 0; if ( d->maxWindow ) d->maxWindow->showNormal(); if ( d->vbar ) { - d->vbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( true ); d->vbar->setValue( 0 ); - d->vbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( false ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( true ); d->hbar->setValue( 0 ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( false ); scrollBarChanged(); } @@ -1955,7 +1955,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::tile() int add = cols * rows - n; bool* used = new bool[ cols*rows ]; for ( int i = 0; i < rows*cols; i++ ) - used[i] = FALSE; + used[i] = false; int row = 0; int col = 0; @@ -1988,7 +1988,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::tile() } else { c->showNormal(); tqApp->sendPostedEvents( 0, TQEvent::ShowNormal ); - used[row*cols+col] = TRUE; + used[row*cols+col] = true; TQSize sz(w, h); TQSize bsize(c->baseSize()); sz = sz.expandedTo(c->windowWidget()->minimumSize()).boundedTo(c->windowWidget()->maximumSize()); @@ -1998,7 +1998,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::tile() if (sz.height() == h + bsize.height()) // no relevant constrains sz.rheight() *= 2; c->setGeometry(col*w + col*bsize.width(), row*h + row*bsize.height(), sz.width(), sz.height()); - used[(row+1)*cols+col] = TRUE; + used[(row+1)*cols+col] = true; add--; } else { c->setGeometry(col*w + col*bsize.width(), row*h + row*bsize.height(), sz.width(), sz.height()); @@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::tile() activateWindow( oldActive ); updateWorkspace(); - blockSignals(FALSE); + blockSignals(false); } TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *parent, @@ -2026,14 +2026,14 @@ TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *parent, WStyle_NoBorder ) | WStyle_Customize | WDestructiveClose | WNoMousePropagation | WSubWindow ) { statusbar = 0; - setMouseTracking( TRUE ); - act = FALSE; + setMouseTracking( true ); + act = false; iconw = 0; lastfocusw = 0; - shademode = FALSE; + shademode = false; titlebar = 0; - snappedRight = FALSE; - snappedDown = FALSE; + snappedRight = false; + snappedDown = false; if (window) { switch (window->focusPolicy()) { @@ -2137,10 +2137,10 @@ TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *parent, widgetResizeHandler->setExtraHeight( th + contentsRect().y() - frameWidth() ); if(parent->windowMode() == TQWorkspace::TopLevel && isTopLevel()) { move(0, 0); - widgetResizeHandler->setActive( FALSE ); + widgetResizeHandler->setActive( false ); } if ( childWidget->minimumSize() == childWidget->maximumSize() ) - widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TQWidgetResizeHandler::Resize, FALSE ); + widgetResizeHandler->setActive( TQWidgetResizeHandler::Resize, false ); setBaseSize( baseSize() ); } @@ -2173,7 +2173,7 @@ bool TQWorkspaceChild::event( TQEvent *e ) if(!windowWidget()->close()) { if(((TQWorkspace*) parentWidget() )->d->active == this) ((TQWorkspace*) parentWidget() )->activatePrevWindow(); - return TRUE; + return true; } } break; @@ -2210,7 +2210,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::setStatusBar( TQStatusBar *sb ) if(sb) { sb->show(); if(sb != statusbar) { - sb->reparent(this, TQPoint(0, height()), TRUE); + sb->reparent(this, TQPoint(0, height()), true); newsize = TQSize(width(), height() + sb->height()); } } @@ -2317,7 +2317,7 @@ bool TQWorkspaceChild::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) // for all widgets except the window, that's the only thing we // process, and if we have no childWidget we skip totally if ( o != childWidget || childWidget == 0 ) - return FALSE; + return false; switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::Show: @@ -2342,7 +2342,7 @@ bool TQWorkspaceChild::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) windowWidget()->resize( windowWidget()->maximumSize() ); ((TQWorkspace*)windowWidget())->clearWState(WState_Maximized); if (titlebar) - titlebar->repaint(FALSE); + titlebar->repaint(false); break; } if ( windowWidget()->testWFlags( WStyle_Maximize ) && !windowWidget()->testWFlags( WStyle_Tool ) ) @@ -2422,14 +2422,14 @@ bool TQWorkspaceChild::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e) case TQEvent::WindowDeactivate: if ( titlebar ) - titlebar->setActive( FALSE ); - repaint( FALSE ); + titlebar->setActive( false ); + repaint( false ); break; case TQEvent::WindowActivate: if ( titlebar ) titlebar->setActive( act ); - repaint( FALSE ); + repaint( false ); break; default: @@ -2480,10 +2480,10 @@ bool TQWorkspaceChild::focusNextPrevChild( bool next ) } if ( !candidate ) - return FALSE; + return false; candidate->setFocus(); - return TRUE; + return true; } void TQWorkspaceChild::childEvent( TQChildEvent* e) @@ -2562,7 +2562,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::setActive( bool b ) titlebar->setActive( act ); if ( iconw ) iconw->setActive( act ); - repaint( FALSE ); + repaint( false ); TQObjectList* ol = childWidget->queryList( "TQWidget" ); if ( act ) { @@ -2690,7 +2690,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::showShaded() fake->clearWState( WState_Minimized ); clearWState( WState_Minimized ); - shademode = FALSE; + shademode = false; resize( shadeRestore ); setMinimumSize( shadeRestoreMin ); style().polish(this); @@ -2698,7 +2698,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::showShaded() shadeRestore = size(); shadeRestoreMin = minimumSize(); setMinimumHeight(0); - shademode = TRUE; + shademode = true; TQWorkspaceChild* fake = (TQWorkspaceChild*)windowWidget(); fake->setWState( WState_Minimized ); setWState( WState_Minimized ); @@ -2758,13 +2758,13 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::setCaption( const TQString& cap ) void TQWorkspaceChild::internalRaise() { - setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( false ); if ( iconw ) iconw->parentWidget()->raise(); raise(); if ( !windowWidget() || windowWidget()->testWFlags( WStyle_StaysOnTop ) ) { - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); return; } @@ -2777,7 +2777,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::internalRaise() c->windowWidget()->testWFlags( WStyle_StaysOnTop ) ) c->raise(); } - setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE ); + setUpdatesEnabled( true ); } void TQWorkspaceChild::move( int x, int y ) @@ -2795,15 +2795,15 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::move( int x, int y ) ny = 0; if ( TQABS( x + width() - parentWidget()->width() ) < dx ) { nx = parentWidget()->width() - width(); - snappedRight = TRUE; + snappedRight = true; } else - snappedRight = FALSE; + snappedRight = false; if ( TQABS( y + height() - parentWidget()->height() ) < dy ) { ny = parentWidget()->height() - height(); - snappedDown = TRUE; + snappedDown = true; } else - snappedDown = FALSE; + snappedDown = false; } TQFrame::move( nx, ny ); } @@ -2817,11 +2817,11 @@ bool TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled() const \property TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled \brief whether the workspace provides scrollbars - If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child + If this property is set to true, it is possible to resize child windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is - set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible + set to false (the default), resizing windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted. */ void TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled( bool enable ) @@ -2875,8 +2875,8 @@ TQRect TQWorkspace::updateWorkspace() if ( !child->isHidden() ) r = r.unite( child->geometry() ); } - d->vbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( TRUE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( true ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( true ); int hsbExt = d->hbar->sizeHint().height(); int vsbExt = d->vbar->sizeHint().width(); @@ -2922,8 +2922,8 @@ TQRect TQWorkspace::updateWorkspace() d->corner->hide(); } - d->vbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); - d->hbar->blockSignals( FALSE ); + d->vbar->blockSignals( false ); + d->hbar->blockSignals( false ); cr.setRect( 0, 0, width() - vsbExt, height() - hsbExt ); } @@ -2934,14 +2934,14 @@ TQRect TQWorkspace::updateWorkspace() ++ii; int x = w->x(); int y = w->y(); - bool m = FALSE; + bool m = false; if ( x+w->width() > cr.width() ) { - m = TRUE; + m = true; x = cr.width() - w->width(); } if ( y+w->height() > cr.height() ) { y = cr.height() - w->height(); - m = TRUE; + m = true; } if ( m ) w->move( x, y ); diff --git a/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h b/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h index 71227476e..2349fe553 100644 --- a/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h +++ b/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ private: TQWorkspaceChild* findChild( TQWidget* w); void showMaximizeControls(); void hideMaximizeControls(); - void activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus = TRUE ); + void activateWindow( TQWidget* w, bool change_focus = true ); void showWindow( TQWidget* w); void maximizeWindow( TQWidget* w); void minimizeWindow( TQWidget* w); diff --git a/src/xml/tqdom.cpp b/src/xml/tqdom.cpp index 2d8e684c8..ed67c2ce2 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqdom.cpp +++ b/src/xml/tqdom.cpp @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ public: void setOwnerDocument( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc ); virtual TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate* attributes(); - virtual bool hasAttributes() { return FALSE; } + virtual bool hasAttributes() { return false; } virtual TQDomNodePrivate* insertBefore( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* refChild ); virtual TQDomNodePrivate* insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* refChild ); virtual TQDomNodePrivate* replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* oldChild ); @@ -140,31 +140,31 @@ public: TQDomNodePrivate* namedItem( const TQString& name ); - virtual TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); + virtual TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); virtual void normalize(); virtual void clear(); TQDomNodePrivate* parent() { return hasParent ? ownerNode : 0; } - void setParent( TQDomNodePrivate *p ) { ownerNode = p; hasParent = TRUE; } + void setParent( TQDomNodePrivate *p ) { ownerNode = p; hasParent = true; } void setNoParent() { ownerNode = hasParent ? (TQDomNodePrivate*)ownerDocument() : 0; - hasParent = FALSE; + hasParent = false; } // Dynamic cast - virtual bool isAttr() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isCDATASection() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isDocumentFragment() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isDocument() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isDocumentType() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isElement() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isEntityReference() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isText() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isEntity() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isNotation() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isProcessingInstruction() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isCharacterData() { return FALSE; } - virtual bool isComment() { return FALSE; } + virtual bool isAttr() { return false; } + virtual bool isCDATASection() { return false; } + virtual bool isDocumentFragment() { return false; } + virtual bool isDocument() { return false; } + virtual bool isDocumentType() { return false; } + virtual bool isElement() { return false; } + virtual bool isEntityReference() { return false; } + virtual bool isText() { return false; } + virtual bool isEntity() { return false; } + virtual bool isNotation() { return false; } + virtual bool isProcessingInstruction() { return false; } + virtual bool isCharacterData() { return false; } + virtual bool isComment() { return false; } virtual TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::BaseNode; } virtual void save( TQTextStream&, int, int ) const; @@ -230,12 +230,12 @@ public: void setReadOnly( bool r ) { readonly = r; } bool isAppendToParent() { return appendToParent; } /** - * If TRUE, then the node will redirect insert/remove calls + * If true, then the node will redirect insert/remove calls * to its parent by calling TQDomNodePrivate::appendChild or removeChild. * In addition the map wont increase or decrease the reference count * of the nodes it contains. * - * By default this value is FALSE and the map will handle reference counting + * By default this value is false and the map will handle reference counting * by itself. */ void setAppendToParent( bool b ) { appendToParent = b; } @@ -262,14 +262,14 @@ public: void init(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); TQDomNodePrivate* insertBefore( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* refChild ); TQDomNodePrivate* insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* refChild ); TQDomNodePrivate* replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* oldChild ); TQDomNodePrivate* removeChild( TQDomNodePrivate* oldChild ); TQDomNodePrivate* appendChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild ); - bool isDocumentType() { return TRUE; } + bool isDocumentType() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::DocumentTypeNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -290,8 +290,8 @@ public: ~TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isDocumentFragment() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isDocumentFragment() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::DocumentFragmentNode; } }; @@ -310,9 +310,9 @@ public: void replaceData( unsigned long offset, unsigned long count, const TQString& arg ); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - bool isCharacterData() { return TRUE; } + bool isCharacterData() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::CharacterDataNode; } - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); }; @@ -326,8 +326,8 @@ public: TQDomTextPrivate* splitText( int offset ); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isText() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isText() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::TextNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -345,8 +345,8 @@ public: // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate void setNodeValue( const TQString& v ); - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isAttr() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isAttr() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::AttributeNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -380,9 +380,9 @@ public: // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate* attributes() { return m_attr; } bool hasAttributes() { return ( m_attr->length() > 0 ); } - bool isElement() { return TRUE; } + bool isElement() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::ElementNode; } - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; // Variables @@ -398,8 +398,8 @@ public: ~TQDomCommentPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isComment() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isComment() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::CommentNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -413,8 +413,8 @@ public: ~TQDomCDATASectionPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isCDATASection() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isCDATASection() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::CDATASectionNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -429,8 +429,8 @@ public: ~TQDomNotationPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isNotation() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isNotation() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::NotationNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ public: ~TQDomEntityPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isEntity() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isEntity() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::EntityNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; @@ -467,8 +467,8 @@ public: ~TQDomEntityReferencePrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isEntityReference() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isEntityReference() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::EntityReferenceNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; }; @@ -482,8 +482,8 @@ public: ~TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate(); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isProcessingInstruction() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isProcessingInstruction() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::ProcessingInstructionNode; } void save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const; }; @@ -520,8 +520,8 @@ public: TQDomNodePrivate* importNode( const TQDomNodePrivate* importedNode, bool deep ); // Reimplemented from TQDomNodePrivate - TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ); - bool isDocument() { return TRUE; } + TQDomNodePrivate* cloneNode( bool deep = true ); + bool isDocument() { return true; } TQDomNode::NodeType nodeType() const { return TQDomNode::DocumentNode; } void clear(); void save( TQTextStream&, int, int ) const; @@ -681,8 +681,8 @@ TQDomImplementation& TQDomImplementation::operator= ( const TQDomImplementation& } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a x and this DOM implementation object were - created from the same TQDomDocument; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a x and this DOM implementation object were + created from the same TQDomDocument; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomImplementation::operator==( const TQDomImplementation& x ) const { @@ -690,8 +690,8 @@ bool TQDomImplementation::operator==( const TQDomImplementation& x ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a x and this DOM implementation object were - created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a x and this DOM implementation object were + created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomImplementation::operator!=( const TQDomImplementation& x ) const { @@ -708,8 +708,8 @@ TQDomImplementation::~TQDomImplementation() } /*! - The function returns TRUE if TQDom implements the requested \a - version of a \a feature; otherwise returns FALSE. + The function returns true if TQDom implements the requested \a + version of a \a feature; otherwise returns false. The currently supported features and their versions: \table @@ -721,11 +721,11 @@ bool TQDomImplementation::hasFeature( const TQString& feature, const TQString& v { if ( feature == "XML" ) { if ( version.isEmpty() || version == "1.0" ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } } // ### add DOM level 2 features - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -780,8 +780,8 @@ TQDomDocument TQDomImplementation::createDocument( const TQString& nsURI, const } /*! - Returns FALSE if the object was created by - TQDomDocument::implementation(); otherwise returns TRUE. + Returns false if the object was created by + TQDomDocument::implementation(); otherwise returns true. */ bool TQDomImplementation::isNull() { @@ -980,21 +980,21 @@ TQDomNodeList& TQDomNodeList::operator= ( const TQDomNodeList& n ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node list \a n and this node list are equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node list \a n and this node list are equal; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomNodeList::operator== ( const TQDomNodeList& n ) const { if ( impl == n.impl ) - return TRUE; + return true; if ( !impl || !n.impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return (*impl == *n.impl); } /*! - Returns TRUE the node list \a n and this node list are not equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true the node list \a n and this node list are not equal; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomNodeList::operator!= ( const TQDomNodeList& n ) const { @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ TQDomNodeList::~TQDomNodeList() If \a index is negative or if \a index >= length() then a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which TQDomNode::isNull() returns - TRUE). + true). \sa count() */ @@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@ uint TQDomNodeList::length() const inline void TQDomNodePrivate::setOwnerDocument( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc ) { ownerNode = doc; - hasParent = FALSE; + hasParent = false; } TQDomNodePrivate::TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate *par ) @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate::TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate next = 0; first = 0; last = 0; - createdWithDom1Interface = TRUE; + createdWithDom1Interface = true; } TQDomNodePrivate::TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n, bool deep ) @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate::TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n, bool deep ) return; for ( TQDomNodePrivate* x = n->first; x; x = x->next ) - appendChild( x->cloneNode( TRUE ) ); + appendChild( x->cloneNode( true ) ); } TQDomNodePrivate::~TQDomNodePrivate() @@ -1664,8 +1664,8 @@ TQDomNode& TQDomNode::operator= ( const TQDomNode& n ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a n and this DOM node are equal; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a n and this DOM node are equal; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQDomNode::operator== ( const TQDomNode& n ) const { @@ -1673,8 +1673,8 @@ bool TQDomNode::operator== ( const TQDomNode& n ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a n and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a n and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQDomNode::operator!= ( const TQDomNode& n ) const { @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomNode::nodeType() const /*! Returns the parent node. If this node has no parent, a null node - is returned (i.e. a node for which isNull() returns TRUE). + is returned (i.e. a node for which isNull() returns true). */ TQDomNode TQDomNode::parentNode() const { @@ -1932,9 +1932,9 @@ TQDomDocument TQDomNode::ownerDocument() const /*! Creates a deep (not shallow) copy of the TQDomNode. - If \a deep is TRUE, then the cloning is done recursively which + If \a deep is true, then the cloning is done recursively which means that all the node's children are deep copied too. If \a deep - is FALSE only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no + is false only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no child nodes. */ TQDomNode TQDomNode::cloneNode( bool deep ) const @@ -1958,9 +1958,9 @@ void TQDomNode::normalize() } /*! - Returns TRUE if the DOM implementation implements the feature \a + Returns true if the DOM implementation implements the feature \a feature and this feature is supported by this node in the version - \a version; otherwise returns FALSE. + \a version; otherwise returns false. \sa TQDomImplementation::hasFeature() */ @@ -2058,14 +2058,14 @@ TQString TQDomNode::localName() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node has attributes; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node has attributes; otherwise returns false. \sa attributes() */ bool TQDomNode::hasAttributes() const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->hasAttributes(); } @@ -2202,19 +2202,19 @@ TQDomNode TQDomNode::appendChild( const TQDomNode& newChild ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node has one or more children; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node has one or more children; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQDomNode::hasChildNodes() const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->first != 0; } /*! - Returns TRUE if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or - contents); otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or + contents); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomNode::isNull() const { @@ -2274,9 +2274,9 @@ TQTextStream& operator<<( TQTextStream& str, const TQDomNode& node ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomAttribute; you can get the TQDomAttribute with toAttribute(). @@ -2286,14 +2286,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isAttr() const { if(impl) return impl->isAttr(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns + false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCDATASection; you can get the TQDomCDATASection with toCDATASection(). @@ -2303,14 +2303,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isCDATASection() const { if(impl) return impl->isCDATASection(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns + false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentFragment; you can get the TQDomDocumentFragment with toDocumentFragment(). @@ -2320,13 +2320,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isDocumentFragment() const { if(impl) return impl->isDocumentFragment(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a document; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a document; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocument; you can get the TQDomDocument with toDocument(). \sa toDocument() @@ -2335,14 +2335,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isDocument() const { if(impl) return impl->isDocument(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a document type; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a document type; otherwise returns + false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentType; you can get the TQDomDocumentType with toDocumentType(). @@ -2352,13 +2352,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isDocumentType() const { if(impl) return impl->isDocumentType(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is an element; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is an element; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomElement; you can get the TQDomElement with toElement(). \sa toElement() @@ -2367,14 +2367,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isElement() const { if(impl) return impl->isElement(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns - FALSE. + Returns true if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns + false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntityReference; you can get the TQDomEntityReference with toEntityReference(). @@ -2384,13 +2384,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isEntityReference() const { if(impl) return impl->isEntityReference(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a text node; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a text node; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomText; you can get the TQDomText with toText(). \sa toText() @@ -2399,13 +2399,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isText() const { if(impl) return impl->isText(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is an entity; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is an entity; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntity; you can get the TQDomEntity with toEntity(). \sa toEntity() @@ -2414,13 +2414,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isEntity() const { if(impl) return impl->isEntity(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a notation; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a notation; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomNotation; you can get the TQDomNotation with toNotation(). \sa toNotation() @@ -2429,14 +2429,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isNotation() const { if(impl) return impl->isNotation(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise + returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomProcessingInstruction; you can get the TQProcessingInstruction with toProcessingInstruction(). @@ -2446,14 +2446,14 @@ bool TQDomNode::isProcessingInstruction() const { if(impl) return impl->isProcessingInstruction(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a character data node; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a character data node; otherwise + returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCharacterData; you can get the TQDomCharacterData with toCharacterData(). @@ -2463,13 +2463,13 @@ bool TQDomNode::isCharacterData() const { if(impl) return impl->isCharacterData(); - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! - Returns TRUE if the node is a comment; otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if the node is a comment; otherwise returns false. - If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object + If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomComment; you can get the TQDomComment with toComment(). \sa toComment() @@ -2478,7 +2478,7 @@ bool TQDomNode::isComment() const { if(impl) return impl->isComment(); - return FALSE; + return false; } #undef IMPL @@ -2491,9 +2491,9 @@ bool TQDomNode::isComment() const TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n ) { - readonly = FALSE; + readonly = false; parent = n; - appendToParent = FALSE; + appendToParent = false; } TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::~TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate() @@ -2720,8 +2720,8 @@ TQDomNamedNodeMap& TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator= ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap& n ) } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a n and this named node map are equal; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a n and this named node map are equal; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator== ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap& n ) const { @@ -2729,8 +2729,8 @@ bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator== ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap& n ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE if \a n and this named node map are not equal; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if \a n and this named node map are not equal; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator!= ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap& n ) const { @@ -2883,13 +2883,13 @@ uint TQDomNamedNodeMap::length() const */ /*! - Returns TRUE if the map contains a node called \a name; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the map contains a node called \a name; otherwise + returns false. */ bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::contains( const TQString& name ) const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->contains( name ); } @@ -2939,8 +2939,8 @@ void TQDomDocumentTypePrivate::init() systemId = TQString::null; internalSubset = TQString::null; - entities->setAppendToParent( TRUE ); - notations->setAppendToParent( TRUE ); + entities->setAppendToParent( true ); + notations->setAppendToParent( true ); } TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomDocumentTypePrivate::cloneNode( bool deep) @@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomDocumentType::nodeType() const */ bool TQDomDocumentType::isDocumentType() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -3340,7 +3340,7 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomDocumentFragment::nodeType() const */ bool TQDomDocumentFragment::isDocumentFragment() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -3579,11 +3579,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomCharacterData::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomCharacterData::isCharacterData() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -3598,7 +3598,7 @@ TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* p : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = name_; - m_specified = FALSE; + m_specified = false; } TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* p, const TQString& nsURI, const TQString& qName ) @@ -3606,8 +3606,8 @@ TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* p { qt_split_namespace( prefix, name, qName, !nsURI.isNull() ); namespaceURI = nsURI; - createdWithDom1Interface = FALSE; - m_specified = FALSE; + createdWithDom1Interface = false; + m_specified = false; } TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomAttrPrivate* n, bool deep ) @@ -3754,7 +3754,7 @@ void TQDomAttrPrivate::save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const TQDomAttr can return the name() and value() of an attribute. An attribute's value is set with setValue(). If specified() returns - TRUE the value was either set in the document or set with + true the value was either set in the document or set with setValue(); otherwise the value hasn't been set. The node this attribute is attached to (if any) is returned by ownerElement(). @@ -3820,16 +3820,16 @@ TQString TQDomAttr::name() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if the attribute has either been expicitly specified + Returns true if the attribute has either been expicitly specified in the XML document or was set by the user with setValue(). - Returns FALSE if the value hasn't been specified or set. + Returns false if the value hasn't been specified or set. \sa setValue() */ bool TQDomAttr::specified() const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->specified(); } @@ -3868,7 +3868,7 @@ void TQDomAttr::setValue( const TQString& v ) if ( !impl ) return; impl->setNodeValue( v ); - IMPL->m_specified = TRUE; + IMPL->m_specified = true; } /*! @@ -3880,11 +3880,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomAttr::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomAttr::isAttr() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -3909,7 +3909,7 @@ TQDomElementPrivate::TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePriv { qt_split_namespace( prefix, name, qName, !nsURI.isNull() ); namespaceURI = nsURI; - createdWithDom1Interface = FALSE; + createdWithDom1Interface = false; m_attr = new TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate( this ); } @@ -3972,7 +3972,7 @@ void TQDomElementPrivate::setAttribute( const TQString& aname, const TQString& n void TQDomElementPrivate::setAttributeNS( const TQString& nsURI, const TQString& qName, const TQString& newValue ) { TQString prefix, localName; - qt_split_namespace( prefix, localName, qName, TRUE ); + qt_split_namespace( prefix, localName, qName, true ); TQDomNodePrivate* n = m_attr->namedItemNS( nsURI, localName ); if ( !n ) { n = new TQDomAttrPrivate( ownerDocument(), this, nsURI, qName ); @@ -4406,11 +4406,11 @@ TQDomNodeList TQDomElement::elementsByTagName( const TQString& tagname ) const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomElement::isElement() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -4426,13 +4426,13 @@ TQDomNamedNodeMap TQDomElement::attributes() const } /*! - Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute called \a name; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if this element has an attribute called \a name; + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQDomElement::hasAttribute( const TQString& name ) const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->hasAttribute( name ); } @@ -4585,14 +4585,14 @@ TQDomNodeList TQDomElement::elementsByTagNameNS( const TQString& nsURI, const TQ } /*! - Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute with the local name + Returns true if this element has an attribute with the local name \a localName and the namespace URI \a nsURI; otherwise returns - FALSE. + false. */ bool TQDomElement::hasAttributeNS( const TQString& nsURI, const TQString& localName ) const { if ( !impl ) - return FALSE; + return false; return IMPL->hasAttributeNS( nsURI, localName ); } @@ -4769,11 +4769,11 @@ TQDomText TQDomText::splitText( int offset ) } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomText::isText() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -4898,11 +4898,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomComment::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomComment::isComment() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5034,11 +5034,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomCDATASection::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomCDATASection::isCDATASection() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5204,11 +5204,11 @@ TQString TQDomNotation::systemId() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomNotation::isNotation() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5435,11 +5435,11 @@ TQString TQDomEntity::notationName() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomEntity::isEntity() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5579,11 +5579,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomEntityReference::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomEntityReference::isEntityReference() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5749,11 +5749,11 @@ void TQDomProcessingInstruction::setData( const TQString& d ) } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomProcessingInstruction::isProcessingInstruction() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } #undef IMPL @@ -5828,14 +5828,14 @@ bool TQDomDocumentPrivate::setContent( TQXmlInputSource *source, bool namespaceP { TQXmlSimpleReader reader; if ( namespaceProcessing ) { - reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", TRUE ); - reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", FALSE ); + reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", true ); + reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", false ); } else { - reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", FALSE ); - reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", TRUE ); + reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces", false ); + reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes", true ); } - reader.setFeature( "http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData", FALSE ); - reader.setUndefEntityInAttrHack( TRUE ); + reader.setFeature( "http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData", false ); + reader.setUndefEntityInAttrHack( true ); return setContent( source, &reader, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); } @@ -5863,10 +5863,10 @@ bool TQDomDocumentPrivate::setContent( TQXmlInputSource *source, TQXmlReader *re *errorLine = hnd.errorLine; if ( errorColumn ) *errorColumn = hnd.errorColumn; - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomDocumentPrivate::cloneNode( bool deep) @@ -5961,7 +5961,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomDocumentPrivate::importNode( const TQDomNodePrivate* impo TQDomNodePrivate *node = 0; switch ( importedNode->nodeType() ) { case TQDomNode::AttributeNode: - node = new TQDomAttrPrivate( (TQDomAttrPrivate*)importedNode, TRUE ); + node = new TQDomAttrPrivate( (TQDomAttrPrivate*)importedNode, true ); break; case TQDomNode::DocumentFragmentNode: node = new TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( (TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate*)importedNode, deep ); @@ -5973,7 +5973,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomDocumentPrivate::importNode( const TQDomNodePrivate* impo node = new TQDomEntityPrivate( (TQDomEntityPrivate*)importedNode, deep ); break; case TQDomNode::EntityReferenceNode: - node = new TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( (TQDomEntityReferencePrivate*)importedNode, FALSE ); + node = new TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( (TQDomEntityReferencePrivate*)importedNode, false ); break; case TQDomNode::NotationNode: node = new TQDomNotationPrivate( (TQDomNotationPrivate*)importedNode, deep ); @@ -6004,7 +6004,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomDocumentPrivate::importNode( const TQDomNodePrivate* impo void TQDomDocumentPrivate::save( TQTextStream& s, int, int indent ) const { - bool doc = FALSE; + bool doc = false; TQDomNodePrivate* n = first; if ( n && n->isProcessingInstruction() && n->nodeName()=="xml" ) { @@ -6028,7 +6028,7 @@ void TQDomDocumentPrivate::save( TQTextStream& s, int, int indent ) const if ( !doc && !(n->isProcessingInstruction()&&n->nodeName()=="xml") ) { // save doctype after XML declaration type->save( s, 0, indent ); - doc = TRUE; + doc = true; } n->save( s, 0, indent ); n = n->next; @@ -6242,23 +6242,23 @@ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQString& text, bool namespaceProcessing, detect the encoding of the document as required by the XML specification. - If \a namespaceProcessing is TRUE, the parser recognizes + If \a namespaceProcessing is true, the parser recognizes namespaces in the XML file and sets the prefix name, local name and namespace URI to appropriate values. If \a namespaceProcessing - is FALSE, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads + is false, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads the XML file. - If a parse error occurs, the function returns FALSE; otherwise it - returns TRUE. If a parse error occurs and \a errorMsg, \a + If a parse error occurs, the function returns false; otherwise it + returns true. If a parse error occurs and \a errorMsg, \a errorLine and \a errorColumn are not 0, the error message is placed in \a *errorMsg, the line number \a *errorLine and the column number in \a *errorColumn. - If \a namespaceProcessing is TRUE, the function TQDomNode::prefix() + If \a namespaceProcessing is true, the function TQDomNode::prefix() returns a string for all elements and attributes. It returns an empty string if the element or attribute has no prefix. - If \a namespaceProcessing is FALSE, the functions + If \a namespaceProcessing is false, the functions TQDomNode::prefix(), TQDomNode::localName() and TQDomNode::namespaceURI() return TQString::null. @@ -6311,7 +6311,7 @@ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( TQIODevice* dev, bool namespaceProcessing, TQStr */ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQString& text, TQString *errorMsg, int *errorLine, int *errorColumn ) { - return setContent( text, FALSE, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); + return setContent( text, false, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); } /*! @@ -6324,7 +6324,7 @@ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQString& text, TQString *errorMsg, int *e */ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQByteArray& buffer, TQString *errorMsg, int *errorLine, int *errorColumn ) { - return setContent( buffer, FALSE, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); + return setContent( buffer, false, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); } /*! @@ -6339,7 +6339,7 @@ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQByteArray& buffer, TQString *errorMsg, i */ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQCString& buffer, TQString *errorMsg, int *errorLine, int *errorColumn ) { - return setContent( buffer, FALSE, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); + return setContent( buffer, false, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); } /*! @@ -6351,7 +6351,7 @@ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( const TQCString& buffer, TQString *errorMsg, int */ bool TQDomDocument::setContent( TQIODevice* dev, TQString *errorMsg, int *errorLine, int *errorColumn ) { - return setContent( dev, FALSE, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); + return setContent( dev, false, errorMsg, errorLine, errorColumn ); } /*! @@ -6602,8 +6602,8 @@ TQDomNodeList TQDomDocument::elementsByTagName( const TQString& tagname ) const import TQDomDocument and TQDomDocumentType nodes. In those cases this function returns a \link TQDomNode::isNull() null node\endlink. - If \a deep is TRUE, this function imports not only the node \a - importedNode but its whole subtree; if it is FALSE, only the \a + If \a deep is true, this function imports not only the node \a + importedNode but its whole subtree; if it is false, only the \a importedNode is imported. The argument \a deep has no effect on TQDomAttr and TQDomEntityReference nodes, since the descendents of TQDomAttr nodes are always imported and those of @@ -6615,21 +6615,21 @@ TQDomNodeList TQDomDocument::elementsByTagName( const TQString& tagname ) const \header \i Node Type \i Behaviour \row \i TQDomAttr \i The owner element is set to 0 and the specified flag is - set to TRUE in the generated attribute. The whole subtree + set to true in the generated attribute. The whole subtree of \a importedNode is always imported for attribute nodes: \a deep has no effect. \row \i TQDomDocument \i Document nodes cannot be imported. \row \i TQDomDocumentFragment - \i If \a deep is TRUE, this function imports the whole + \i If \a deep is true, this function imports the whole document fragment; otherwise it only generates an empty document fragment. \row \i TQDomDocumentType \i Document type nodes cannot be imported. \row \i TQDomElement - \i Attributes for which TQDomAttr::specified() is TRUE are + \i Attributes for which TQDomAttr::specified() is true are also imported, other attributes are not imported. If \a - deep is TRUE, this function also imports the subtree of \a + deep is true, this function also imports the subtree of \a importedNode; otherwise it imports only the element node (and some attributes, see above). \row \i TQDomEntity @@ -6733,11 +6733,11 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomDocument::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns TRUE. + Returns true. */ bool TQDomDocument::isDocument() const { - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -6940,7 +6940,7 @@ TQDomHandler::TQDomHandler( TQDomDocumentPrivate* adoc, bool namespaceProcessing { doc = adoc; node = doc; - cdata = FALSE; + cdata = false; nsProcessing = namespaceProcessing; } @@ -6952,8 +6952,8 @@ bool TQDomHandler::endDocument() { // ### is this really necessary? (rms) if ( node != doc ) - return FALSE; - return TRUE; + return false; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::startDTD( const TQString& name, const TQString& publicId, const TQString& systemId ) @@ -6961,7 +6961,7 @@ bool TQDomHandler::startDTD( const TQString& name, const TQString& publicId, con doc->doctype()->name = name; doc->doctype()->publicId = publicId; doc->doctype()->systemId = systemId; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::startElement( const TQString& nsURI, const TQString&, const TQString& qName, const TQXmlAttributes& atts ) @@ -6986,23 +6986,23 @@ bool TQDomHandler::startElement( const TQString& nsURI, const TQString&, const T } } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::endElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { if ( node == doc ) - return FALSE; + return false; node = node->parent(); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::characters( const TQString& ch ) { // No text as child of some document if ( node == doc ) - return FALSE; + return false; if ( cdata ) { node->appendChild( doc->createCDATASection( ch ) ); @@ -7016,19 +7016,19 @@ bool TQDomHandler::characters( const TQString& ch ) node->appendChild( doc->createTextNode( ch ) ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::processingInstruction( const TQString& target, const TQString& data ) { node->appendChild( doc->createProcessingInstruction( target, data ) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::skippedEntity( const TQString& name ) { node->appendChild( doc->createEntityReference( name ) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::fatalError( const TQXmlParseException& exception ) @@ -7041,32 +7041,32 @@ bool TQDomHandler::fatalError( const TQXmlParseException& exception ) bool TQDomHandler::startCDATA() { - cdata = TRUE; - return TRUE; + cdata = true; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::endCDATA() { - cdata = FALSE; - return TRUE; + cdata = false; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::startEntity( const TQString &name ) { entityName = name; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::endEntity( const TQString & ) { entityName = TQString::null; - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::comment( const TQString& ch ) { node->appendChild( doc->createComment( ch ) ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::unparsedEntityDecl( const TQString &name, const TQString &publicId, const TQString &systemId, const TQString ¬ationName ) @@ -7074,7 +7074,7 @@ bool TQDomHandler::unparsedEntityDecl( const TQString &name, const TQString &pub TQDomEntityPrivate* e = new TQDomEntityPrivate( doc, 0, name, publicId, systemId, notationName ); doc->doctype()->appendChild( e ); - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQDomHandler::externalEntityDecl( const TQString &name, const TQString &publicId, const TQString &systemId ) @@ -7086,7 +7086,7 @@ bool TQDomHandler::notationDecl( const TQString & name, const TQString & publicI { TQDomNotationPrivate* n = new TQDomNotationPrivate( doc, 0, name, publicId, systemId ); doc->doctype()->appendChild( n ); - return TRUE; + return true; } #endif //TQT_NO_DOM diff --git a/src/xml/tqdom.h b/src/xml/tqdom.h index 2bc76eb99..865da3ad3 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqdom.h +++ b/src/xml/tqdom.h @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ public: virtual TQDomNode removeChild( const TQDomNode& oldChild ); virtual TQDomNode appendChild( const TQDomNode& newChild ); virtual bool hasChildNodes() const; - virtual TQDomNode cloneNode( bool deep = TRUE ) const; + virtual TQDomNode cloneNode( bool deep = true ) const; virtual void normalize(); virtual bool isSupported( const TQString& feature, const TQString& version ) const; diff --git a/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp b/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp index 1b92d8d6e..51c48179c 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp +++ b/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ TQSvgDevice::TQSvgDevice() { d = new TQSvgDevicePrivate; d->currentClip = 0; - d->justRestored = FALSE; + d->justRestored = false; } /*! @@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ TQSvgDevice::~TQSvgDevice() } /*! - Loads and parses a SVG from \a dev into the device. Returns TRUE + Loads and parses a SVG from \a dev into the device. Returns true on success (i.e. loaded and parsed without error); otherwise - returns FALSE. + returns false. */ bool TQSvgDevice::load( TQIODevice *dev ) @@ -171,8 +171,8 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::load( TQIODevice *dev ) } /*! - Renders (replays) the SVG on the \a painter and returns TRUE if - successful (i.e. it is a valid SVG); otherwise returns FALSE. + Renders (replays) the SVG on the \a painter and returns true if + successful (i.e. it is a valid SVG); otherwise returns false. */ bool TQSvgDevice::play( TQPainter *painter ) @@ -181,25 +181,25 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( TQPainter *painter ) #if defined(QT_CHECK_RANGE) Q_ASSERT( painter ); #endif - return FALSE; + return false; } pt = painter; pt->setPen( TQt::NoPen ); // SVG default pen and brush pt->setBrush( TQt::black ); if ( doc.isNull() ) { tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::play: No SVG data set." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } TQDomNode svg = doc.namedItem( "svg" ); if ( svg.isNull() || !svg.isElement() ) { tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::play: Couldn't find any svg element." ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // force transform to be activated in case our sequences // are replayed later with a transformed painter - painter->setWorldXForm( TRUE ); + painter->setWorldXForm( true ); TQDomNamedNodeMap attr = svg.attributes(); int x = lenToInt( attr, "x" ); @@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( TQPainter *painter ) ? attr.namedItem( "width" ).nodeValue() : TQString( "100%" ); TQString hstr = attr.contains( "height" ) ? attr.namedItem( "height" ).nodeValue() : TQString( "100%" ); - double width = parseLen( wstr, 0, TRUE ); - double height = parseLen( hstr, 0, FALSE ); + double width = parseLen( wstr, 0, true ); + double height = parseLen( hstr, 0, false ); // SVG doesn't respect x and y. But we want a proper bounding rect. brect.setWidth( int(width) - x ); brect.setHeight( int(height) - y ); @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( TQPainter *painter ) "\\s*(\\S+)\\s*,?\\s*(\\S+)\\s*") ); if ( re.search( attr.namedItem( "viewBox" ).nodeValue() ) < 0 ) { tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::play: Invalid viewBox attribute."); - return FALSE; + return false; } else { double x = re.cap( 1 ).toDouble(); double y = re.cap( 2 ).toDouble(); @@ -230,9 +230,9 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( TQPainter *painter ) double h = re.cap( 4 ).toDouble(); if ( w < 0 || h < 0 ) { tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::play: Invalid viewBox dimension."); - return FALSE; + return false; } else if ( w == 0 || h == 0 ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } painter->scale( width/w, height/h ); painter->translate( -x, -y ); @@ -335,12 +335,12 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::save( const TQString &fileName ) TQFile f( fileName ); if ( !f.open ( IO_WriteOnly ) ) - return FALSE; + return false; TQTextStream s( &f ); s.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeUTF8 ); s << doc; - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::save( TQIODevice *dev ) s.setEncoding( TQTextStream::UnicodeUTF8 ); s << doc; - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -447,10 +447,10 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) current = doc.documentElement(); d->images.clear(); d->pixmaps.clear(); - dirtyTransform = dirtyStyle = FALSE; // ### - return TRUE; + dirtyTransform = dirtyStyle = false; // ### + return true; } else if ( c == PdcEnd ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } TQDomElement e; @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcRestore: current = current.parentNode(); dirtyTransform = !pt->worldMatrix().isIdentity(); - d->justRestored = TRUE; + d->justRestored = true; // ### reset dirty flags break; case PdcSetBkColor: @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcSetFont: case PdcSetPen: case PdcSetBrush: - dirtyStyle = TRUE; + dirtyStyle = true; break; case PdcSetTabStops: // ### @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) case PdcSetWMatrix: case PdcSaveWMatrix: case PdcRestoreWMatrix: - dirtyTransform = TRUE; + dirtyTransform = true; break; case PdcSetClip: // ### @@ -692,13 +692,13 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // the viewer as part of the tree structure. It doesn't hurt to write the region // out, but it doubles the number of clipregions defined in the final svg. if (d->justRestored) { - d->justRestored = FALSE; - return TRUE; + d->justRestored = false; + return true; } TQMemArray<TQRect> rects = p[0].rgn->rects(); if (rects.count() == 0) - return TRUE; + return true; d->currentClip++; e = doc.createElement( "clipPath" ); e.setAttribute( "id", TQString("clip%1").arg(d->currentClip) ); @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::cmd ( int c, TQPainter *painter, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) appendChild( e, c ); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ void TQSvgDevice::appendChild( TQDomElement &e, int c ) // same as above but not for <g> tags applyTransform( &e ); if ( c == PdcSave ) - dirtyTransform = FALSE; + dirtyTransform = false; } } } @@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( const TQDomNode &node ) restoreAttributes(); - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ double TQSvgDevice::parseLen( const TQString &str, bool *ok, bool horiz ) const if ( reg.search( str ) == -1 ) { tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::parseLen: couldn't parse %s ", str.latin1() ); if ( ok ) - *ok = FALSE; + *ok = false; return 0.0; } @@ -1146,7 +1146,7 @@ double TQSvgDevice::parseLen( const TQString &str, bool *ok, bool horiz ) const tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::parseLen: Unknown unit %s", u.latin1() ); } if ( ok ) - *ok = TRUE; + *ok = true; return dbl; } @@ -1237,9 +1237,9 @@ void TQSvgDevice::setStyleProperty( const TQString &prop, const TQString &val, font->setFamily( val ); } else if ( prop == "font-style" ) { if ( val == "normal" ) - font->setItalic( FALSE ); + font->setItalic( false ); else if ( val == "italic" ) - font->setItalic( TRUE ); + font->setItalic( true ); else tqWarning( "TQSvgDevice::setStyleProperty: unhandled " "font-style: %s", val.latin1() ); @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ void TQSvgDevice::setTransform( const TQString &tr ) m[ i ] = plist[ i ].toDouble(); TQWMatrix wm( m[ 0 ], m[ 1 ], m[ 2 ], m[ 3 ], m[ 4 ], m[ 5 ] ); - pt->setWorldMatrix( wm, TRUE ); + pt->setWorldMatrix( wm, true ); } else if ( command == "skewX" ) { pt->shear( 0.0, tan( plist[0].toDouble() * deg2rad ) ); } else if ( command == "skewY" ) { @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ void TQSvgDevice::drawPath( const TQString &data ) int pcount = 0; // current point array index uint idx = 0; // current data position int mode = 0, lastMode = 0; // parser state - bool relative = FALSE; // e.g. 'h' vs. 'H' + bool relative = false; // e.g. 'h' vs. 'H' TQString commands( "MZLHVCSTQTA" ); // recognized commands int cmdArgs[] = { 2, 0, 2, 1, 1, 6, 4, 4, 2, 7 }; // no of arguments TQRegExp reg( TQString::fromLatin1("\\s*,?\\s*([+-]?\\d*\\.?\\d*)") ); // floating point @@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ void TQSvgDevice::drawPath( const TQString &data ) path.setPoint( pcount++, int(x0), int(y0) ); TQPen pen = pt->pen(); pt->setPen( TQt::NoPen ); - pt->drawPolygon( path, FALSE, 0, pcount ); + pt->drawPolygon( path, false, 0, pcount ); pt->setPen( pen ); } // draw each subpath stroke seperately diff --git a/src/xml/tqsvgdevice_p.h b/src/xml/tqsvgdevice_p.h index ffdec75fd..84d9cf214 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqsvgdevice_p.h +++ b/src/xml/tqsvgdevice_p.h @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ private: void saveAttributes(); void restoreAttributes(); TQColor parseColor( const TQString &col ); - double parseLen( const TQString &str, bool *ok=0, bool horiz=TRUE ) const; + double parseLen( const TQString &str, bool *ok=0, bool horiz=true ) const; int lenToInt( const TQDomNamedNodeMap &map, const TQString &attr, int def=0 ) const; double lenToDouble( const TQDomNamedNodeMap &map, const TQString &attr, diff --git a/src/xml/tqxml.cpp b/src/xml/tqxml.cpp index d6fe43026..591890976 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqxml.cpp +++ b/src/xml/tqxml.cpp @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ static const signed char charLookupTable[256]={ /* This function strips the TextDecl [77] ("<?xml ...?>") from the string \a str. The stripped version is stored in \a str. If this function finds an - invalid TextDecl, it returns FALSE, otherwise TRUE. + invalid TextDecl, it returns false, otherwise true. This function is used for external entities since those can include an TextDecl that must be stripped before inserting the entity. @@ -192,10 +192,10 @@ static bool stripTextDecl( TQString& str ) )); TQString strTmp = str.replace( textDecl, "" ); if ( strTmp.length() != str.length() ) - return FALSE; // external entity has wrong TextDecl + return false; // external entity has wrong TextDecl str = strTmp; } - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ void TQXmlNamespaceSupport::splitName( const TQString& qname, declared. \a qname is the raw XML 1.0 name to be processed. \a isAttribute - is TRUE if the name is an attribute name. + is true if the name is an attribute name. This function stores the namespace URI in \a nsuri (which will be set to TQString::null if the raw name has an undeclared prefix), @@ -1021,14 +1021,14 @@ TQChar TQXmlInputSource::next() { if ( pos >= length ) { if ( nextReturnedEndOfData ) { - nextReturnedEndOfData = FALSE; + nextReturnedEndOfData = false; fetchData(); if ( pos >= length ) { return EndOfDocument; } return next(); } - nextReturnedEndOfData = TRUE; + nextReturnedEndOfData = true; return EndOfData; } return unicode[pos++]; @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ TQChar TQXmlInputSource::next() */ void TQXmlInputSource::reset() { - nextReturnedEndOfData = FALSE; + nextReturnedEndOfData = false; pos = 0; } @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ void TQXmlInputSource::setData( const TQString& dat ) unicode = str.unicode(); pos = 0; length = str.length(); - nextReturnedEndOfData = FALSE; + nextReturnedEndOfData = false; } /*! @@ -1133,9 +1133,9 @@ void TQXmlInputSource::fetchData() TQString and returns it. It tries its best to get the correct encoding for the XML file. - If \a beginning is TRUE, this function assumes that the data + If \a beginning is true, this function assumes that the data starts at the beginning of a new XML document and looks for an - encoding declaration. If \a beginning is FALSE, it converts the + encoding declaration. If \a beginning is false, it converts the raw data using the encoding determined from prior calls. */ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning ) @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning to setDocumentLocator(), and before any other functions in this class or in the TQXmlDTDHandler class are called. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1289,7 +1289,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning is called after the reader has read all input or has abandoned parsing because of a fatal error. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The argument \a prefix is the namespace prefix being declared and the argument \a uri is the namespace URI the prefix is mapped to. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1329,7 +1329,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader calls this function to signal the end of a prefix mapping for the prefix \a prefix. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The attribute list provided only contains attributes with explicit values. The attribute list contains attributes used for namespace declaration (i.e. attributes starting with xmlns) only if the - namespace-prefix property of the reader is TRUE. + namespace-prefix property of the reader is true. The argument \a namespaceURI is the namespace URI, or TQString::null if the element has no namespace URI or if no @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning the attributes attached to the element. If there are no attributes, \a atts is an empty attributes object. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning tag with the qualified name \a qName, the local name \a localName and the namespace URI \a namespaceURI. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning one chunk; e.g. a reader might want to report "a\<b" in three characters() events ("a ", "\<" and " b"). - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning Some readers may use this function to report each chunk of whitespace in element content. The whitespace is reported in \a ch. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1430,7 +1430,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \a target is the target name of the processing instruction and \a data is the data in the processing instruction. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning do so they report that they skipped the entity called \a name by calling this function. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1452,7 +1452,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlContentHandler::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string, e.g. if any - of the handler functions returns FALSE. + of the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning XML 1.0 specification. Details of the warning are stored in \a exception. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1506,7 +1506,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader must continue to provide normal parsing events after invoking this function. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1517,7 +1517,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning A reader must use this function to report a non-recoverable error. Details of the error are stored in \a exception. - If this function returns TRUE the reader might try to go on + If this function returns true the reader might try to go on parsing and reporting further errors; but no regular parsing events are reported. */ @@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlErrorHandler::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of - the handler functions returns FALSE. + the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning notation's public identifier and \a systemId is the notation's system identifier. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning identifier and \a notationName is the name of the associated notation. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1592,7 +1592,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlDTDHandler::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of - the handler functions returns FALSE. + the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1638,7 +1638,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning non-zero it must point to an input source which the reader uses instead. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlEntityResolver::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of - the handler functions returns FALSE. + the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning All declarations reported through TQXmlDTDHandler or TQXmlDeclHandler appear between the startDTD() and endDTD() calls. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1713,7 +1713,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader calls this function to report the end of a DTD declaration, if any. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1730,7 +1730,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity() and not through this function. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1747,7 +1747,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning call. The calls to startEntity() and endEntity() are properly nested. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning TQXmlContentHandler::characters() function. This function is intended only to report the boundary. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1775,7 +1775,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader calls this function to report the end of a CDATA section. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. @@ -1788,7 +1788,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader calls this function to report an XML comment anywhere in the document. It reports the text of the comment in \a ch. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlLexicalHandler::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of - the handler functions returns FALSE. + the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning default value in \a value. If no default value is specified in the XML file, \a value is TQString::null. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1857,7 +1857,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning The reader passes the name of the entity in \a name and the value of the entity in \a value. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1874,7 +1874,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning systemId. If there is no public identifier specified, it passes TQString::null in \a publicId. - If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and + If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message. */ @@ -1883,7 +1883,7 @@ TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning \fn TQString TQXmlDeclHandler::errorString() The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of - the handler functions returns FALSE. + the handler functions returns false. */ @@ -1938,7 +1938,7 @@ void TQXmlDefaultHandler::setDocumentLocator( TQXmlLocator* ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startDocument() { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1948,7 +1948,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startDocument() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endDocument() { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1958,7 +1958,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endDocument() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startPrefixMapping( const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1968,7 +1968,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startPrefixMapping( const TQString&, const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endPrefixMapping( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1979,7 +1979,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endPrefixMapping( const TQString& ) bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQXmlAttributes& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -1990,7 +1990,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::characters( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2010,7 +2010,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::characters( const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::ignorableWhitespace( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2021,7 +2021,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::ignorableWhitespace( const TQString& ) bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::processingInstruction( const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::processingInstruction( const TQString&, */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::skippedEntity( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2041,7 +2041,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::skippedEntity( const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::warning( const TQXmlParseException& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2051,7 +2051,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::warning( const TQXmlParseException& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::error( const TQXmlParseException& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2061,7 +2061,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::error( const TQXmlParseException& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::fatalError( const TQXmlParseException& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2072,7 +2072,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::fatalError( const TQXmlParseException& ) bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::notationDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2083,7 +2083,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::notationDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::unparsedEntityDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2096,7 +2096,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::resolveEntity( const TQString&, const TQString&, TQXmlInputSource*& ret ) { ret = 0; - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2116,7 +2116,7 @@ TQString TQXmlDefaultHandler::errorString() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startDTD( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2126,7 +2126,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startDTD( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQSt */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endDTD() { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2136,7 +2136,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endDTD() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startEntity( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2146,7 +2146,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startEntity( const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endEntity( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endEntity( const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startCDATA() { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::startCDATA() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endCDATA() { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2176,7 +2176,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::endCDATA() */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::comment( const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2186,7 +2186,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::comment( const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::attributeDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2196,7 +2196,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::attributeDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, const */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::internalEntityDecl( const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } /*! @@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::internalEntityDecl( const TQString&, const TQString& ) */ bool TQXmlDefaultHandler::externalEntityDecl( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } @@ -2223,7 +2223,7 @@ private: inline TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate() { parseStack = 0; - undefEntityInAttrHack = FALSE; + undefEntityInAttrHack = false; } inline ~TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate() @@ -2403,8 +2403,8 @@ private: is returned. If no such feature exists the return value is undefined. - If \a ok is not 0: \a *ok is set to TRUE if the reader has the - feature called \a name; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + If \a ok is not 0: \a *ok is set to true if the reader has the + feature called \a name; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa setFeature() hasFeature() */ @@ -2421,8 +2421,8 @@ private: /*! \fn bool TQXmlReader::hasFeature( const TQString& name ) const - Returns \c TRUE if the reader has the feature called \a name; - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns \c true if the reader has the feature called \a name; + otherwise returns false. \sa feature() setFeature() */ @@ -2434,7 +2434,7 @@ private: value of the property; otherwise the return value is undefined. If \a ok is not 0: if the reader has the \a name property \a *ok - is set to TRUE; otherwise \a *ok is set to FALSE. + is set to true; otherwise \a *ok is set to false. \sa setProperty() hasProperty() */ @@ -2451,8 +2451,8 @@ private: /*! \fn bool TQXmlReader::hasProperty( const TQString& name ) const - Returns TRUE if the reader has the property \a name; otherwise - returns FALSE. + Returns true if the reader has the property \a name; otherwise + returns false. \sa property() setProperty() */ @@ -2563,8 +2563,8 @@ private: /*! \fn bool TQXmlReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource* input ) - Reads an XML document from \a input and parses it. Returns TRUE if - the parsing was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. + Reads an XML document from \a input and parses it. Returns true if + the parsing was successful; otherwise returns false. */ @@ -2668,11 +2668,11 @@ inline void TQXmlSimpleReader::refClear() Constructs a simple XML reader with the following feature settings: \table \header \i Feature \i Setting - \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces \i TRUE - \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes \i FALSE + \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces \i true + \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes \i false \row \i \e http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData - \i TRUE - \row \i \e http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity \i FALSE + \i true + \row \i \e http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity \i false \endtable More information about features can be found in the \link @@ -2694,10 +2694,10 @@ TQXmlSimpleReader::TQXmlSimpleReader() declHnd = 0; // default feature settings - d->useNamespaces = TRUE; - d->useNamespacePrefixes = FALSE; - d->reportWhitespaceCharData = TRUE; - d->reportEntities = FALSE; + d->useNamespaces = true; + d->useNamespacePrefixes = false; + d->reportWhitespaceCharData = true; + d->reportEntities = false; } /*! @@ -2715,7 +2715,7 @@ TQXmlSimpleReader::~TQXmlSimpleReader() bool TQXmlSimpleReader::feature( const TQString& name, bool *ok ) const { if ( ok != 0 ) - *ok = TRUE; + *ok = true; if ( name == "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces" ) { return d->useNamespaces; } else if ( name == "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes" ) { @@ -2727,9 +2727,9 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::feature( const TQString& name, bool *ok ) const } else { tqWarning( "Unknown feature %s", name.latin1() ); if ( ok != 0 ) - *ok = FALSE; + *ok = false; } - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -2741,21 +2741,21 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::feature( const TQString& name, bool *ok ) const \table \header \i Feature \i Notes \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces - \i If this feature is TRUE, namespace processing is + \i If this feature is true, namespace processing is performed. \row \i \e http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes - \i If this feature is TRUE, the the original prefixed names + \i If this feature is true, the the original prefixed names and attributes used for namespace declarations are reported. \row \i \e http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData - \i If this feature is TRUE, CharData that only contain + \i If this feature is true, CharData that only contain whitespace are not ignored, but are reported via TQXmlContentHandler::characters(). \row \i \e http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity - \i If this feature is TRUE, the parser reports + \i If this feature is true, the parser reports TQXmlContentHandler::startEntity() and TQXmlContentHandler::endEntity() events. So character data - might be reported in chunks. If this feature is FALSE, the + might be reported in chunks. If this feature is false, the parser does not report those events, but rather silently substitutes the entities and reports the character data in one chunk. @@ -2766,7 +2766,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::feature( const TQString& name, bool *ok ) const \printline reader \skipto setFeature \printline setFeature - \printline TRUE + \printline true (Code taken from xml/tagreader-with-features/tagreader.cpp) @@ -2795,9 +2795,9 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::hasFeature( const TQString& name ) const || name == "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes" || name == "http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData" || name == "http://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity" ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } else { - return FALSE; + return false; } } @@ -2806,7 +2806,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::hasFeature( const TQString& name ) const void* TQXmlSimpleReader::property( const TQString&, bool *ok ) const { if ( ok != 0 ) - *ok = FALSE; + *ok = false; return 0; } @@ -2821,7 +2821,7 @@ void TQXmlSimpleReader::setProperty( const TQString&, void* ) */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::hasProperty( const TQString& ) const { - return FALSE; + return false; } /*! @@ -2903,7 +2903,7 @@ TQXmlDeclHandler* TQXmlSimpleReader::declHandler() const */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource& input ) { - return parse( &input, FALSE ); + return parse( &input, false ); } /*! @@ -2911,14 +2911,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource& input ) */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource* input ) { - return parse( input, FALSE ); + return parse( input, false ); } /*! - Reads an XML document from \a input and parses it. Returns FALSE - if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns TRUE. + Reads an XML document from \a input and parses it. Returns false + if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns true. - If \a incremental is TRUE, the parser does not return FALSE when + If \a incremental is true, the parser does not return false when it reaches the end of the \a input without reaching the end of the XML file. Instead it stores the state of the parser so that parsing can be continued at a later stage when more data is @@ -2928,11 +2928,11 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource* input ) input souce. This means that you should not delete the input source \a input until you've finished your calls to parseContinue(). If you call this function with \a incremental - TRUE whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing + true whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing session will be started and the previous session lost. - If \a incremental is FALSE, this function behaves like the normal - parse function, i.e. it returns FALSE when the end of input is + If \a incremental is false, this function behaves like the normal + parse function, i.e. it returns false when the end of input is reached without reaching the end of the XML file and the parsing cannot be continued. @@ -2953,7 +2953,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource *input, bool incremental ) if ( !contentHnd->startDocument() ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); d->tags.clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } return parseBeginOrContinue( 0, incremental ); @@ -2963,9 +2963,9 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource *input, bool incremental ) Continues incremental parsing; this function reads the input from the TQXmlInputSource that was specified with the last parse() command. To use this function, you \e must have called parse() - with the incremental argument set to TRUE. + with the incremental argument set to true. - Returns FALSE if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns TRUE. + Returns false if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns true. If the input source returns an empty string for the function TQXmlInputSource::data(), then this means that the end of the XML @@ -2980,7 +2980,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource *input, bool incremental ) This function assumes that the end of the XML document is reached if the TQXmlInputSource::next() function returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfDocument. If the parser has not finished - parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and FALSE + parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and false is returned. \sa parse() TQXmlInputSource::next() @@ -2988,10 +2988,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse( const TQXmlInputSource *input, bool incremental ) bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContinue() { if ( d->parseStack == 0 || d->parseStack->isEmpty() ) - return FALSE; + return false; initData(); int state = d->parseStack->pop().state; - return parseBeginOrContinue( state, TRUE ); + return parseBeginOrContinue( state, true ); } /* @@ -3005,10 +3005,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseBeginOrContinue( int state, bool incremental ) if ( !parseProlog() ) { if ( incremental && d->error.isNull() ) { pushParseState( 0, 0 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { d->tags.clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = 1; @@ -3017,10 +3017,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseBeginOrContinue( int state, bool incremental ) if ( !parseElement() ) { if ( incremental && d->error.isNull() ) { pushParseState( 0, 1 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { d->tags.clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = 2; @@ -3030,23 +3030,23 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseBeginOrContinue( int state, bool incremental ) if ( !parseMisc() ) { if ( incremental && d->error.isNull() ) { pushParseState( 0, 2 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { d->tags.clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } if ( !atEndOrig && incremental ) { // we parsed something at all, so be prepared to come back later pushParseState( 0, 2 ); - return TRUE; + return true; } // is stack empty? if ( !d->tags.isEmpty() && !d->error.isNull() ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDEOF ); d->tags.clear(); - return FALSE; + return false; } // call the handler if ( contentHnd ) { @@ -3054,17 +3054,17 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseBeginOrContinue( int state, bool incremental ) d->parseStack = 0; if ( !contentHnd->endDocument() ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } // // The following private parse functions have another semantics for the return -// value: They return TRUE iff parsing has finished successfully (i.e. the end -// of the XML file must be reached!). If one of these functions return FALSE, -// there is only an error when d->error.isNULL() is also FALSE. +// value: They return true iff parsing has finished successfully (i.e. the end +// of the XML file must be reached!). If one of these functions return false, +// there is only an error when d->error.isNULL() is also false. // /* @@ -3100,7 +3100,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseBeginOrContinue( int state, bool incremental ) (6) (6a) if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } (6b) if (determineNameChar(c) != NotName) { ... @@ -3176,8 +3176,8 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() signed char input; if ( d->parseStack==0 || d->parseStack->isEmpty() ) { - d->xmldecl_possible = TRUE; - d->doctype_read = FALSE; + d->xmldecl_possible = true; + d->doctype_read = false; state = Init; } else { state = d->parseStack->pop().state; @@ -3194,7 +3194,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3204,16 +3204,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() case DocType: if ( d->doctype_read ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_MORETHANONEDOCTYPE ); - return FALSE; + return false; } else { - d->doctype_read = FALSE; + d->doctype_read = false; } break; case Comment: if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->comment( string() ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = CommentR; @@ -3237,29 +3237,29 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() } if ( !contentHnd->processingInstruction( "xml", value ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { if ( !contentHnd->processingInstruction( name(), string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } // XML declaration only on first position possible - d->xmldecl_possible = FALSE; + d->xmldecl_possible = false; state = PInstrR; break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGELEMENT ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -3281,10 +3281,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() switch ( state ) { case EatWS: // XML declaration only on first position possible - d->xmldecl_possible = FALSE; + d->xmldecl_possible = false; if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Lt: @@ -3292,20 +3292,20 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() break; case Em: // XML declaration only on first position possible - d->xmldecl_possible = FALSE; + d->xmldecl_possible = false; next(); break; case DocType: if ( !parseDoctype() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Comment: case CommentR: if ( !parseComment() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PInstr: @@ -3313,7 +3313,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog() d->parsePI_xmldecl = d->xmldecl_possible; if ( !parsePI() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseProlog, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; } @@ -3382,7 +3382,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3399,23 +3399,23 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() break; case ETagBegin2: if ( !processElementETagBegin2() ) - return FALSE; + return false; break; case Attrib: if ( !processElementAttribute() ) - return FALSE; + return false; state = AttribPro; break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGELEMENT ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if (fastDetermineNameChar(c) == NameBeginning) { @@ -3433,10 +3433,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() switch ( state ) { case ReadName: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: @@ -3444,7 +3444,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() case Ws3: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case STagEnd: @@ -3453,15 +3453,15 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() const TQString &tagsTop = d->tags.top(); if ( d->useNamespaces ) { TQString uri, lname; - d->namespaceSupport.processName(tagsTop, FALSE, uri, lname); + d->namespaceSupport.processName(tagsTop, false, uri, lname); if (!contentHnd->startElement(uri, lname, tagsTop, d->attList)) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { if (!contentHnd->startElement(TQString::null, TQString::null, tagsTop, d->attList)) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3470,7 +3470,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() case STagEnd2: if ( !parseContent() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ETagBegin: @@ -3478,19 +3478,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() break; case ETagBegin2: // get the name of the tag - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EmptyTag: if ( d->tags.isEmpty() ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_TAGMISMATCH ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !processElementEmptyTag() ) - return FALSE; + return false; next(); break; case Attrib: @@ -3498,7 +3498,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() // get name and value of attribute if ( !parseAttribute() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -3509,7 +3509,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElement() } /* Helper to break down the size of the code in the case statement. - Return FALSE on error, otherwise TRUE. + Return false on error, otherwise true. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementEmptyTag() { @@ -3518,15 +3518,15 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementEmptyTag() if ( contentHnd ) { if ( d->useNamespaces ) { // report startElement first... - d->namespaceSupport.processName( d->tags.top(), FALSE, uri, lname ); + d->namespaceSupport.processName( d->tags.top(), false, uri, lname ); if ( !contentHnd->startElement( uri, lname, d->tags.top(), d->attList ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // ... followed by endElement... if ( !contentHnd->endElement( uri, lname, d->tags.pop() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // ... followed by endPrefixMapping TQStringList prefixesBefore, prefixesAfter; @@ -3540,7 +3540,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementEmptyTag() if ( prefixesAfter.contains(*it) == 0 ) { if ( !contentHnd->endPrefixMapping( *it ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3548,23 +3548,23 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementEmptyTag() // report startElement first... if ( !contentHnd->startElement( TQString::null, TQString::null, d->tags.top(), d->attList ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // ... followed by endElement if ( !contentHnd->endElement( TQString::null, TQString::null, d->tags.pop() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } else { d->tags.pop_back(); d->namespaceSupport.popContext(); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* Helper to break down the size of the code in the case statement. - Return FALSE on error, otherwise TRUE. + Return false on error, otherwise true. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementETagBegin2() { @@ -3573,17 +3573,17 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementETagBegin2() // pop the stack and compare it with the name if ( d->tags.pop() != name ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_TAGMISMATCH ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // call the handler if ( contentHnd ) { TQString uri, lname; if (d->useNamespaces) - d->namespaceSupport.processName(name, FALSE, uri, lname); + d->namespaceSupport.processName(name, false, uri, lname); if (!contentHnd->endElement(uri, lname, name)) { reportParseError(contentHnd->errorString()); - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( d->useNamespaces ) { @@ -3600,18 +3600,18 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementETagBegin2() if (!it.key().isEmpty() && !prefixesAfter.contains(it.key())) { if (!contentHnd->endPrefixMapping(it.key())) { reportParseError(contentHnd->errorString()); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } } } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* Helper to break down the size of the code in the case statement. - Return FALSE on error, otherwise TRUE. + Return false on error, otherwise true. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementAttribute() { @@ -3636,19 +3636,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processElementAttribute() if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->startPrefixMapping( lname, string ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } else { // no namespace delcaration - d->namespaceSupport.processName( name, TRUE, uri, lname ); + d->namespaceSupport.processName( name, true, uri, lname ); d->attList.append( name, uri, lname, string ); } } else { // no namespace support d->attList.append( name, TQString::null, TQString::null, string ); } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* @@ -3729,7 +3729,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() signed char input; if ( d->parseStack==0 || d->parseStack->isEmpty() ) { - d->contentCharDataRead = FALSE; + d->contentCharDataRead = false; state = Init; } else { state = d->parseStack->pop().state; @@ -3746,7 +3746,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3761,7 +3761,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->processingInstruction(name(),string()) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = PInstrR; @@ -3770,7 +3770,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->comment( string() ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = ComR; @@ -3790,19 +3790,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->startCDATA() ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->characters( string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->endCDATA() ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } else if (c.unicode() == ']') { @@ -3822,24 +3822,24 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( d->reportWhitespaceCharData || !string().simplifyWhiteSpace().isEmpty() ) { if ( !contentHnd->characters( string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } } // Done - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGCONTENT ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // get input (use lookup-table instead of nested ifs for performance // reasons) if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.row() ) { input = InpUnknown; @@ -3856,26 +3856,26 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() case ChD: // on first call: clear string if ( !d->contentCharDataRead ) { - d->contentCharDataRead = TRUE; + d->contentCharDataRead = true; stringClear(); } stringAddC(); if ( d->reportEntities ) { if ( !reportEndEntities() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } next(); break; case ChD1: // on first call: clear string if ( !d->contentCharDataRead ) { - d->contentCharDataRead = TRUE; + d->contentCharDataRead = true; stringClear(); } stringAddC(); if ( d->reportEntities ) { if ( !reportEndEntities() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } next(); break; @@ -3883,7 +3883,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() stringAddC(); if ( d->reportEntities ) { if ( !reportEndEntities() ) - return FALSE; + return false; } next(); break; @@ -3894,7 +3894,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() d->parseReference_context = InContent; if ( !parseReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { if ( d->reportEntities ) { @@ -3903,7 +3903,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( d->reportWhitespaceCharData || !string().simplifyWhiteSpace().isEmpty() ) { if ( !contentHnd->characters( string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3912,7 +3912,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() d->parseReference_context = InContent; if ( !parseReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } break; @@ -3923,26 +3923,26 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() if ( d->reportWhitespaceCharData || !string().simplifyWhiteSpace().isEmpty() ) { if ( !contentHnd->characters( string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } } - d->contentCharDataRead = FALSE; + d->contentCharDataRead = false; next(); break; case PInstr: case PInstrR: - d->parsePI_xmldecl = FALSE; + d->parsePI_xmldecl = false; if ( !parsePI() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Elem: if ( !parseElement() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Em: @@ -3952,14 +3952,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent() case ComR: if ( !parseComment() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CDS: d->parseString_s = "[CDATA["; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContent, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CDS1: @@ -3985,7 +3985,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::reportEndEntities() if ( d->reportWhitespaceCharData || !string().simplifyWhiteSpace().isEmpty() ) { if ( !contentHnd->characters( string() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -3993,14 +3993,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::reportEndEntities() if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->endEntity(d->xmlRefName.top()) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } d->xmlRef.pop_back(); d->xmlRefName.pop_back(); count--; } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* @@ -4047,7 +4047,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4055,32 +4055,32 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case eatWS: - return TRUE; + return true; case PInstr: if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->processingInstruction(name(),string()) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; case Comment2: if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->comment( string() ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -4099,17 +4099,17 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc() case eatWS: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Lt: next(); break; case PInstr: - d->parsePI_xmldecl = FALSE; + d->parsePI_xmldecl = false; if ( !parsePI() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Comment: @@ -4118,7 +4118,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc() case Comment2: if ( !parseComment() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; } @@ -4128,7 +4128,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMisc() /* Parse a processing instruction [16]. - If xmldec is TRUE, it tries to parse a PI or a XML declaration [23]. + If xmldec is true, it tries to parse a PI or a XML declaration [23]. Precondition: the beginning '<' of the PI is already read and the head stand on the '?' of '<?'. @@ -4201,7 +4201,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4216,7 +4216,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() state = XMLDecl; } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_INVALIDNAMEFORPI ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { state = PInstr; @@ -4227,7 +4227,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() // get version (syntax like an attribute) if ( name() != "version" ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_VERSIONEXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } d->xmlVersion = string(); break; @@ -4240,19 +4240,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() d->standalone = TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::No; } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_WRONGVALUEFORSDECL ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else if ( name() == "encoding" ) { d->encoding = string(); } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_EDECLORSDDECLEXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case SD: if ( name() != "standalone" ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_SDDECLEXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( string()=="yes" ) { d->standalone = TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::Yes; @@ -4260,7 +4260,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() d->standalone = TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::No; } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_WRONGVALUEFORSDECL ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Qm: @@ -4269,16 +4269,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() stringAddC( '?' ); break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -4298,10 +4298,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() next(); break; case Name: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: @@ -4311,19 +4311,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() case Ws5: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Version: if ( !parseAttribute() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EorSD: if ( !parseAttribute() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case SD: @@ -4331,11 +4331,11 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI() if ( d->standalone != TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::Unknown ) { // already parsed the standalone declaration reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !parseAttribute() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePI, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ADone: @@ -4411,7 +4411,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() signed char input; if ( d->parseStack==0 || d->parseStack->isEmpty() ) { - d->startDTDwasReported = FALSE; + d->startDTDwasReported = false; d->systemId = TQString::null; d->publicId = TQString::null; state = Init; @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4442,25 +4442,25 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() break; case MP: if ( !d->startDTDwasReported && lexicalHnd ) { - d->startDTDwasReported = TRUE; + d->startDTDwasReported = true; if ( !lexicalHnd->startDTD( d->doctype, d->publicId, d->systemId ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = MPR; break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGDOCTYPE ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -4488,7 +4488,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() d->parseString_s = "DOCTYPE"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: @@ -4497,66 +4497,66 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() case Ws4: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Doctype2: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Sys: - d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = FALSE; + d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = false; if ( !parseExternalID() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case MP: case MPR: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PER: d->parsePEReference_context = InDTD; if ( !parsePEReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Mup: if (dtdRecursionLimit > 0U && d->parameterEntities.size() > dtdRecursionLimit) { reportParseError(TQString::fromLatin1( "DTD parsing exceeded recursion limit of %1.").arg(dtdRecursionLimit)); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( !parseMarkupdecl() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case MPE: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !d->startDTDwasReported ) { - d->startDTDwasReported = TRUE; + d->startDTDwasReported = true; if ( !lexicalHnd->startDTD( d->doctype, d->publicId, d->systemId ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( !lexicalHnd->endDTD() ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } next(); @@ -4568,7 +4568,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseDoctype() /* Parse a ExternalID [75]. - If allowPublicID is TRUE parse ExternalID [75] or PublicID [83]. + If allowPublicID is true parse ExternalID [75] or PublicID [83]. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() { @@ -4587,7 +4587,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() const signed char PubDQ2 = 12; // parse PubidLiteral with " const signed char PubE = 13; // finished parsing the PubidLiteral const signed char PubWS2 = 14; // parse the whitespace after the PubidLiteral - const signed char PDone = 15; // done if allowPublicID is TRUE + const signed char PDone = 15; // done if allowPublicID is true const signed char Done = 16; const signed char InpSQ = 0; // ' @@ -4637,7 +4637,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4647,22 +4647,22 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() case PDone: if ( d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID ) { d->publicId = string(); - return TRUE; + return true; } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -4684,13 +4684,13 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() d->parseString_s = "SYSTEM"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case SysWS: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case SysSQ: @@ -4707,13 +4707,13 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() d->parseString_s = "PUBLIC"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PubWS: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PubSQ: @@ -4733,7 +4733,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID() d->publicId = string(); if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseExternalID, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -4798,7 +4798,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4809,37 +4809,37 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl() if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->processingInstruction(name(),string()) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; case Dash: if ( lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->comment( string() ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; case CA: - return TRUE; + return true; case CEL: - return TRUE; + return true; case CEN: - return TRUE; + return true; case CN: - return TRUE; + return true; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.unicode() == '<' ) { input = InpLt; @@ -4873,40 +4873,40 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl() next(); break; case Qm: - d->parsePI_xmldecl = FALSE; + d->parsePI_xmldecl = false; if ( !parsePI() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Dash: if ( !parseComment() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CA: if ( !parseAttlistDecl() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CEL: if ( !parseElementDecl() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CEN: if ( !parseEntityDecl() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CN: if ( !parseNotationDecl() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseMarkupdecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; } @@ -4955,7 +4955,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -4964,13 +4964,13 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference() switch ( state ) { case Name: { - bool skipIt = TRUE; + bool skipIt = true; TQString xmlRefString; TQMap<TQString,TQString>::Iterator it; it = d->parameterEntities.find( ref() ); if ( it != d->parameterEntities.end() ) { - skipIt = FALSE; + skipIt = false; xmlRefString = it.data(); } else if ( entityRes ) { TQMap<TQString,TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::ExternParameterEntity>::Iterator it2; @@ -4980,16 +4980,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference() if ( !entityRes->resolveEntity( it2.data().publicId, it2.data().systemId, ret ) ) { delete ret; reportParseError( entityRes->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( ret ) { xmlRefString = ret->data(); delete ret; if ( !stripTextDecl( xmlRefString ) ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORINTEXTDECL ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - skipIt = FALSE; + skipIt = false; } } } @@ -4998,34 +4998,34 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference() if ( contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->skippedEntity( TQString("%") + ref() ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } else { if ( d->parsePEReference_context == InEntityValue ) { // Included in literal - if ( !insertXmlRef( xmlRefString, ref(), TRUE ) ) - return FALSE; + if ( !insertXmlRef( xmlRefString, ref(), true ) ) + return false; } else if ( d->parsePEReference_context == InDTD ) { // Included as PE - if ( !insertXmlRef( TQString(" ")+xmlRefString+TQString(" "), ref(), FALSE ) ) - return FALSE; + if ( !insertXmlRef( TQString(" ")+xmlRefString+TQString(" "), ref(), false ) ) + return false; } } } state = NameR; break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.unicode() == ';' ) { input = InpSemi; @@ -5042,10 +5042,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference() break; case Name: case NameR: - d->parseName_useRef = TRUE; + d->parseName_useRef = true; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parsePEReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -5127,7 +5127,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -5141,16 +5141,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() d->attDeclAName = name(); break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -5176,7 +5176,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() d->parseString_s = "ATTLIST"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws: @@ -5185,27 +5185,27 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() case Ws3: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Name: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Attdef: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Atttype: if ( !parseAttType() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DDecH: @@ -5215,27 +5215,27 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() d->parseString_s = "REQUIRED"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DefImp: d->parseString_s = "IMPLIED"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DefFix: d->parseString_s = "FIXED"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Attval: if ( !parseAttValue() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws4: @@ -5243,12 +5243,12 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl() // ### not all values are computed yet... if ( !declHnd->attributeDecl( d->attDeclEName, d->attDeclAName, "", "", "" ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttlistDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -5342,7 +5342,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -5350,18 +5350,18 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case ADone: - return TRUE; + return true; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -5399,21 +5399,21 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() d->parseString_s = "CDATA"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TTI: d->parseString_s = "ID"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TTI2: d->parseString_s = "REF"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TTI3: @@ -5423,7 +5423,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() d->parseString_s = "ENTIT"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TTEY: @@ -5433,7 +5433,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() d->parseString_s = "IES"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case N: @@ -5443,7 +5443,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() d->parseString_s = "MTOKEN"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case TTNM2: @@ -5453,50 +5453,50 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType() d->parseString_s = "OTATION"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case NO2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case NO3: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case NOName: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case NO4: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EN: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ENNmt: if ( !parseNmtoken() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EN2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttType, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ADone: @@ -5562,7 +5562,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -5570,16 +5570,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.unicode() == '"' ) { input = InpDq; @@ -5605,7 +5605,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue() d->parseReference_context = InAttributeValue; if ( !parseReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DqC: @@ -5703,7 +5703,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -5711,15 +5711,15 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -5755,59 +5755,59 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() d->parseString_s = "LEMENT"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Nam: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Empty: d->parseString_s = "EMPTY"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Any: d->parseString_s = "ANY"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Cont: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Mix: d->parseString_s = "#PCDATA"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Mix2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Mix3: @@ -5816,20 +5816,20 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() case MixN1: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case MixN2: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case MixN3: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case MixN4: @@ -5838,7 +5838,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() case Cp: if ( !parseChoiceSeq() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Cp2: @@ -5847,7 +5847,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl() case WsD: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseElementDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -5911,7 +5911,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -5923,22 +5923,22 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl() if ( dtdHnd ) { if ( !dtdHnd->notationDecl( name(), d->publicId, d->systemId ) ) { reportParseError( dtdHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } state = ExtIDR; break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -5956,40 +5956,40 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl() d->parseString_s = "NOTATION"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Nam: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ExtID: case ExtIDR: - d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = TRUE; + d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = true; if ( !parseExternalID() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws3: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNotationDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -6054,7 +6054,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6062,16 +6062,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -6098,32 +6098,32 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq() case Ws1: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case CorS: if ( !parseChoiceSeq() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws2: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case More: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Name: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseChoiceSeq, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -6179,10 +6179,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::isExpandedEntityValueTooLarge(TQString *errorMessage) *errorMessage = TQString::fromLatin1("The XML entity \"%1\" expands to a string that is too large to process (%2 characters > %3)."); *errorMessage = (*errorMessage).arg(entity).arg(expandedSizes[entity]).arg(entityCharacterLimit); } - return TRUE; + return true; } } - return FALSE; + return false; } /* @@ -6270,7 +6270,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6282,14 +6282,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() TQString errorMessage; if (isExpandedEntityValueTooLarge(&errorMessage)) { reportParseError(errorMessage); - return FALSE; + return false; } d->entities.insert( name(), string() ); if ( declHnd ) { if ( !declHnd->internalEntityDecl( name(), string() ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6301,7 +6301,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() if ( dtdHnd ) { if ( !dtdHnd->unparsedEntityDecl( name(), d->publicId, d->systemId, ref() ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6313,7 +6313,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() if ( declHnd ) { if ( !declHnd->internalEntityDecl( TQString("%")+name(), string() ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6325,7 +6325,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() if ( declHnd ) { if ( !declHnd->externalEntityDecl( TQString("%")+name(), d->publicId, d->systemId ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6337,22 +6337,22 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() if ( declHnd ) { if ( !declHnd->externalEntityDecl( name(), d->publicId, d->systemId ) ) { reportParseError( declHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } - return TRUE; + return true; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( is_S(c) ) { input = InpWs; @@ -6374,67 +6374,67 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() d->parseString_s = "NTITY"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws1: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Name: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws2: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EValue: case EValueR: if ( !parseEntityValue() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case ExtID: - d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = FALSE; + d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = false; if ( !parseExternalID() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws3: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ndata: d->parseString_s = "NDATA"; if ( !parseString() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws4: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case NNam: case NNamR: - d->parseName_useRef = TRUE; + d->parseName_useRef = true; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PEDec: @@ -6443,41 +6443,41 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl() case Ws6: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PENam: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws7: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PEVal: case PEValR: if ( !parseEntityValue() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case PEEID: case PEEIDR: - d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = FALSE; + d->parseExternalID_allowPublicID = false; if ( !parseExternalID() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case WsE: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityDecl, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case EDDone: @@ -6544,7 +6544,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6552,16 +6552,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.unicode() == '"' ) { input = InpDq; @@ -6592,7 +6592,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue() d->parsePEReference_context = InEntityValue; if ( !parsePEReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DqRef: @@ -6600,7 +6600,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue() d->parseReference_context = InEntityValue; if ( !parseReference() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseEntityValue, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Done: @@ -6662,7 +6662,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseComment() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseComment, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6678,16 +6678,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseComment() stringAddC( '-' ); break; case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGCOMMENT ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseComment, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.unicode() == '-' ) { input = InpDash; @@ -6773,7 +6773,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6782,16 +6782,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute() switch ( state ) { case Quotes: // Done - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( determineNameChar(c) == NameBeginning ) { input = InpNameBe; @@ -6808,28 +6808,28 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute() switch ( state ) { case PName: - d->parseName_useRef = FALSE; + d->parseName_useRef = false; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Ws: if ( !eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Eq: if ( !next_eat_ws() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case Quotes: if ( !parseAttValue() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; } @@ -6837,7 +6837,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseAttribute() } /* - Parse a Name [5] and store the name in name or ref (if useRef is TRUE). + Parse a Name [5] and store the name in name or ref (if useRef is true). */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseName() { @@ -6879,7 +6879,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseName() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseName, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6887,16 +6887,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseName() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseName, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } // we can safely do the (int) cast thanks to the Q_ASSERTs earlier in this function @@ -6964,7 +6964,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -6972,16 +6972,16 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case Done: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_LETTEREXPECTED ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if (determineNameChar(c) == NotName) { input = InpUnknown; @@ -7007,11 +7007,11 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseNmtoken() /* Parse a Reference [67]. - parseReference_charDataRead is set to TRUE if the reference must not be + parseReference_charDataRead is set to true if the reference must not be parsed. The character(s) which the reference mapped to are appended to string. The head stands on the first character after the reference. - parseReference_charDataRead is set to FALSE if the reference must be parsed. + parseReference_charDataRead is set to false if the reference must be parsed. The charachter(s) which the reference mapped to are inserted at the reference position. The head stands on the first character of the replacement). */ @@ -7055,7 +7055,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() signed char input; if ( d->parseStack==0 || d->parseStack->isEmpty() ) { - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; state = Init; } else { state = d->parseStack->pop().state; @@ -7072,7 +7072,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } @@ -7080,20 +7080,20 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() for (;;) { switch ( state ) { case DoneD: - return TRUE; + return true; case DoneH: - return TRUE; + return true; case DoneN: - return TRUE; + return true; case -1: // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGREFERENCE ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c.row() ) { input = InpUnknown; @@ -7137,10 +7137,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() break; case Name: // read the name into the ref - d->parseName_useRef = TRUE; + d->parseName_useRef = true; if ( !parseName() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } break; case DoneD: @@ -7149,9 +7149,9 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() stringAddC( TQChar(tmp) ); } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGREFERENCE ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; next(); break; case DoneH: @@ -7160,14 +7160,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseReference() stringAddC( TQChar(tmp) ); } else { reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORPARSINGREFERENCE ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; next(); break; case DoneN: if ( !processReference() ) - return FALSE; + return false; next(); break; } @@ -7202,7 +7202,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() // Included or Included in literal stringAddC( '&' ); } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else if ( reference == "lt" ) { if ( d->parseReference_context == InEntityValue ) { // Bypassed @@ -7211,7 +7211,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() // Included or Included in literal stringAddC( '<' ); } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else if ( reference == "gt" ) { if ( d->parseReference_context == InEntityValue ) { // Bypassed @@ -7220,7 +7220,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() // Included or Included in literal stringAddC( '>' ); } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else if ( reference == "apos" ) { if ( d->parseReference_context == InEntityValue ) { // Bypassed @@ -7229,7 +7229,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() // Included or Included in literal stringAddC( '\'' ); } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else if ( reference == "quot" ) { if ( d->parseReference_context == InEntityValue ) { // Bypassed @@ -7238,7 +7238,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() // Included or Included in literal stringAddC( '"' ); } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else { TQMap<TQString,TQString>::Iterator it; it = d->entities.find( reference ); @@ -7247,15 +7247,15 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() switch ( d->parseReference_context ) { case InContent: // Included - if ( !insertXmlRef( it.data(), reference, FALSE ) ) - return FALSE; - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + if ( !insertXmlRef( it.data(), reference, false ) ) + return false; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; break; case InAttributeValue: // Included in literal - if ( !insertXmlRef( it.data(), reference, TRUE ) ) - return FALSE; - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + if ( !insertXmlRef( it.data(), reference, true ) ) + return false; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; break; case InEntityValue: { @@ -7265,14 +7265,14 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() stringAddC( reference[i] ); } stringAddC( ';'); - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } break; case InDTD: // Forbidden - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; reportParseError( XMLERR_INTERNALGENERALENTITYINDTD ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { TQMap<TQString,TQXmlSimpleReaderPrivate::ExternEntity>::Iterator itExtern; @@ -7287,13 +7287,13 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() stringAddC( reference[i] ); } stringAddC( ';'); - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } else { if ( contentHnd && !(d->parseReference_context == InAttributeValue && d->undefEntityInAttrHack)) { if ( !contentHnd->skippedEntity( reference ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; // error + return false; // error } } } @@ -7303,39 +7303,39 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() case InContent: { // Included if validating - bool skipIt = TRUE; + bool skipIt = true; if ( entityRes ) { TQXmlInputSource *ret = 0; if ( !entityRes->resolveEntity( itExtern.data().publicId, itExtern.data().systemId, ret ) ) { delete ret; reportParseError( entityRes->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( ret ) { TQString xmlRefString = ret->data(); delete ret; if ( !stripTextDecl( xmlRefString ) ) { reportParseError( XMLERR_ERRORINTEXTDECL ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - if ( !insertXmlRef( xmlRefString, reference, FALSE ) ) - return FALSE; - skipIt = FALSE; + if ( !insertXmlRef( xmlRefString, reference, false ) ) + return false; + skipIt = false; } } if ( skipIt && contentHnd ) { if ( !contentHnd->skippedEntity( reference ) ) { reportParseError( contentHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; // error + return false; // error } } - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; } break; case InAttributeValue: // Forbidden - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; reportParseError( XMLERR_EXTERNALGENERALENTITYINAV ); - return FALSE; + return false; case InEntityValue: { // Bypassed @@ -7344,26 +7344,26 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::processReference() stringAddC( reference[i] ); } stringAddC( ';'); - d->parseReference_charDataRead = TRUE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = true; } break; case InDTD: // Forbidden - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; reportParseError( XMLERR_EXTERNALGENERALENTITYINDTD ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } else { // "Unparsed" // ### notify for "Occurs as Attribute Value" missing (but this is no refence, anyway) // Forbidden - d->parseReference_charDataRead = FALSE; + d->parseReference_charDataRead = false; reportParseError( XMLERR_UNPARSEDENTITYREFERENCE ); - return FALSE; // error + return false; // error } } } - return TRUE; // no error + return true; // no error } @@ -7399,19 +7399,19 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseString() } if ( !(this->*function)() ) { parseFailed( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseString, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } } for (;;) { if ( state == d->Done ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } if ( atEnd() ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::parseString, state ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( c == d->parseString_s[(int)state] ) { input = InpCharExpected; @@ -7423,7 +7423,7 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseString() } else { // Error reportParseError( XMLERR_UNEXPECTEDCHARACTER ); - return FALSE; + return false; } next(); @@ -7433,10 +7433,10 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseString() /* This private function inserts and reports an entity substitution. The substituted string is \a data and the name of the entity reference is \a - name. If \a inLiteral is TRUE, the entity is IncludedInLiteral (i.e., " and ' + name. If \a inLiteral is true, the entity is IncludedInLiteral (i.e., " and ' must be quoted. Otherwise they are not quoted. - This function returns FALSE on error. + This function returns false on error. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::insertXmlRef( const TQString &data, const TQString &name, bool inLiteral ) { @@ -7451,15 +7451,15 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::insertXmlRef( const TQString &data, const TQString &name if ( d->xmlRefName.count() > n+1 ) { // recursive entities reportParseError( XMLERR_RECURSIVEENTITIES ); - return FALSE; + return false; } if ( d->reportEntities && lexicalHnd ) { if ( !lexicalHnd->startEntity( name ) ) { reportParseError( lexicalHnd->errorString() ); - return FALSE; + return false; } } - return TRUE; + return true; } /* @@ -7503,24 +7503,24 @@ void TQXmlSimpleReader::next() This function does not move the cursor if the actual cursor position is a non-whitespace charcter. - Returns FALSE when you use incremental parsing and this function reaches EOF + Returns false when you use incremental parsing and this function reaches EOF with reading only whitespace characters. In this case it also poplulates the parseStack with useful information. In all other cases, this function returns - TRUE. + true. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::eat_ws() { while ( !atEnd() ) { if ( !is_S(c) ) { - return TRUE; + return true; } next(); } if ( d->parseStack != 0 ) { unexpectedEof( &TQXmlSimpleReader::eat_ws, 0 ); - return FALSE; + return false; } - return TRUE; + return true; } bool TQXmlSimpleReader::next_eat_ws() @@ -7567,8 +7567,8 @@ void TQXmlSimpleReader::initData() } /* - Returns TRUE if a entity with the name \a e exists, - otherwise returns FALSE. + Returns true if a entity with the name \a e exists, + otherwise returns false. */ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::entityExist( const TQString& e ) const { @@ -7576,9 +7576,9 @@ bool TQXmlSimpleReader::entityExist( const TQString& e ) const d->externParameterEntities.find(e) == d->externParameterEntities.end() && d->externEntities.find(e) == d->externEntities.end() && d->entities.find(e) == d->entities.end() ) { - return FALSE; + return false; } else { - return TRUE; + return true; } } @@ -7614,7 +7614,7 @@ void TQXmlSimpleReader::unexpectedEof( ParseFunction where, int state ) } /* - This private function is called when a parse...() function returned FALSE. It + This private function is called when a parse...() function returned false. It determines if there was an error or if incremental parsing simply went out of data and does the right thing for the case. \a where is a pointer to the function where the error occurred and \a state is the parsing state in this diff --git a/src/xml/tqxml.h b/src/xml/tqxml.h index a7fb1d3c1..0dae44a8f 100644 --- a/src/xml/tqxml.h +++ b/src/xml/tqxml.h @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ public: static const TQChar EndOfDocument; protected: - virtual TQString fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning = FALSE ); + virtual TQString fromRawData( const TQByteArray &data, bool beginning = false ); private: void init(); diff --git a/tools/assistant/assistant_es_AR.ts b/tools/assistant/assistant_es_AR.ts index dc4058756..03d340465 100644 --- a/tools/assistant/assistant_es_AR.ts +++ b/tools/assistant/assistant_es_AR.ts @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ Asegurate de que el ejecutable exista y esté en la ruta especificada.</translat </message> <message> <source>Zoom out on the document, i.e. decrease the font size.</source> - <translation>Quitar el Zoom del documento, es decir, disminuir el tamaño de la fuente.</translation> + <translation>Sacar el Zoom del documento, es decir, disminuir el tamaño de la fuente.</translation> </message> <message> <source>Ctrl+-</source> diff --git a/tools/designer/designer/designer_es_AR.ts b/tools/designer/designer/designer_es_AR.ts index 27af76554..356802656 100644 --- a/tools/designer/designer/designer_es_AR.ts +++ b/tools/designer/designer/designer_es_AR.ts @@ -933,15 +933,15 @@ así que no podés renombrarlo con ese nombre.</translation> </message> <message> <source>Add/Remove slots of '%1'</source> - <translation>Agregar/Quitar slots de “%1”</translation> + <translation>Agregar/Sacar slots de “%1”</translation> </message> <message> <source>Remove slot</source> - <translation>Quitar slot</translation> + <translation>Sacar slot</translation> </message> <message> <source>Remove slots</source> - <translation>Quitar slots</translation> + <translation>Sacar slots</translation> </message> <message> <source>Add slot</source> @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Remove these slots?</source> </message> <message> <source>Remove connection</source> - <translation>Quitar conexión</translation> + <translation>Sacar conexión</translation> </message> <message> <source>Add connection</source> diff --git a/tools/designer/designer/designer_ru.ts b/tools/designer/designer/designer_ru.ts index ea7935485..da45182e8 100644 --- a/tools/designer/designer/designer_ru.ts +++ b/tools/designer/designer/designer_ru.ts @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <name>ActionEditorBase</name> <message encoding="UTF-8"> <source>Edit Actions</source> - <translation>Действие "Изменить"</translation> + <translation>Редактировать действия</translation> </message> <message encoding="UTF-8"> <source>Create new Action</source> diff --git a/translations/qt_es_AR.qm b/translations/qt_es_AR.qm Binary files differindex 28fc75444..3fc50950d 100644 --- a/translations/qt_es_AR.qm +++ b/translations/qt_es_AR.qm diff --git a/translations/qt_ru.qm b/translations/qt_ru.qm Binary files differindex 8e05421df..3f172d3b8 100644 --- a/translations/qt_ru.qm +++ b/translations/qt_ru.qm diff --git a/translations/qt_sv.qm b/translations/qt_sv.qm Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 000000000..1cc468857 --- /dev/null +++ b/translations/qt_sv.qm diff --git a/translations/qt_zh-cn.qm b/translations/qt_zh-cn.qm Binary files differindex afb8302cb..b9e24ca3d 100644 --- a/translations/qt_zh-cn.qm +++ b/translations/qt_zh-cn.qm diff --git a/translations/qt_zh-cn.ts b/translations/qt_zh-cn.ts index 16d255e5a..603187ff9 100644 --- a/translations/qt_zh-cn.ts +++ b/translations/qt_zh-cn.ts @@ -1,4 +1,6 @@ -<!DOCTYPE TS><TS> +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!DOCTYPE TS> +<TS> <context> <name>TQAccel</name> <message> @@ -291,7 +293,7 @@ </message> <message> <source>Executable '%1' requires TQt %2, found TQt %3.</source> - <translation>可执行文件"%1"需要 TQt %2 建立 TQt %3。</translation> + <translation>可执行文件"%1"需要 TQt %2 建立 TQt %3。</translation> </message> <message> <source>Incompatible TQt Library Error</source> @@ -337,7 +339,8 @@ </message> <message> <source>A&lpha channel:</source> - <translation>阿尔法通道(&L)：</translation> </message> + <translation>阿尔法通道(&L)：</translation> + </message> <message> <source>&Basic colors</source> <translation>基本颜色(&B)</translation> @@ -1263,7 +1266,7 @@ to </message> <message> <source><h3>About Qt</h3><p>This program uses TQt version %1.</p><p>Qt is a C++ toolkit for multiplatform GUI &amp; application development.</p><p>Qt provides single-source portability across MS&nbsp;Windows, Mac&nbsp;OS&nbsp;X, Linux, and all major commercial Unix variants.</p><p>See <tt>https://trinitydesktop.org/docs/qt3/</tt> for more information.</p></source> - <translation><h3>关于 Qt</h3><p>本程序使用 TQt V%1。</p><p>Qt 是一个用于多平台 GUI 应用程序开发的 C++ 工具包。</p><p>Qt 提供了跨 MS Windows、 Mac OS X、Linux 和所有主要商用 Unix 版本的单源可移植性。</p><p>欲了解更多信息，请参阅 <tt>https://trinitydesktop.org/docs/qt3/</tt>。</p></translation> + <translation><h3>关于 Qt</h3><p>本程序使用了 TQt V%1 开发！</p><p>Qt 是一个适用于多平台的 GUI 应用程序开发的 C++ 工具包。</p><p>Qt 提供了跨 MS Windows、 Mac OS X、Linux 和所有主要商用 Unix 版本的单源可移植性。</p><p>欲了解更多信息，请参阅 <tt>https://trinitydesktop.org/docs/qt3/</tt>。</p></translation> </message> </context> <context> @@ -1697,35 +1700,35 @@ to <name>TQUrlOperator</name> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' is not supported</source> - <translation>不支持协议"%1"。</translation> + <translation>不支持协议"%1"。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support listing directories</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持列出目录。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持列出目录。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support creating new directories</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持创建新目录。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持创建新目录。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support removing files or directories</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持创建新目录。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持创建新目录。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support renaming files or directories</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持重命名文件或目录。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持重命名文件或目录。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support getting files</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持获取文件。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持获取文件。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support putting files</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持放置文件。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持放置文件。</translation> </message> <message> <source>The protocol `%1' does not support copying or moving files or directories</source> - <translation>协议"%1"不支持复制或移动文件或目录。</translation> + <translation>协议"%1"不支持复制或移动文件或目录。</translation> </message> <message> <source>(unknown)</source> @@ -1948,5 +1951,3 @@ to </message> </context> </TS> - - |